MI CROWAVE MAGNETRONS

. ... . . .
.,
,., - ,/,
, ,
<:d
h
+
. .
MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
RADI ATI ON LABORATORY SERI ES
Board of Edi tors
LouI s N. RI DI i XOUR, Editor-in-Chief
GEORGE B. COLLIXS, Deputy Editor-in-Chief
BBI TTO~ CHANCE, S. A. GOUDSMI T, R. G. HERB, HUBERT M. J.WIES, JULIAN K. KNIPP,
J.4MI i s L. LAWSON, LI MJNB. LI NFORD, C.lROL G. MONTGOMERY, C. NEWTON, ALBERT
M. STONE, LouIs A. TURNER, GEORGE E. V.\ LLI;Y, JR., HERBERT H. WHEATOS
1. RAILiR SYSTEM E~cl~]sl;R1~oRidenour
2. RADAR AIDS TO N.ivl&imoN-HalZ
3. RADAR 13EACONS-l?Obe?tS
4. LoRAxPierce, McKenzie, and Woodward
5. PULSE GEN):RATORSGkJSOe and Lebacqz
6. MICROWAVE MAGNETRONSCOZknS
7. KLYSTRONS AND MICROWAVE TR1om-Han~itton, Kntpp, and Kuper
8. PRINCIPLES OF MICROWAVE CIRculrMon@omerv, Dic!ie, and PurceU
9. MICROWAVE TR.iNSMISSION CIRculTsRagan
10. WAVEGUIDE HANDROOK-}fa7CUV~~Z
11. TECHXIQUE OF h~lCROWAVE MEASURENIENTSMOntgO??LerY
12. MICROWAVE ANTENN.i THEORY AND I) EsIGN-i3i2ver
13. PROPAGATION OF SHORT R.i DI OWAvEsKerr
14. MICROWAVE DUPLEXERSi%LUll~n and Montgomery
15. CRYSTAL RECTIFIERSTOrreY and Whatmer
16. MICROWAVE MIxERsPound
17. COMPONENTS HANDBOOK~kZLLkbU?Vt
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23,
24.
25.
26.
27.
28,
VACUUM TUBE AJIPLIFIERSValleY and Wallman
W.\VEFORXSChance, Hughes, MacNichol, Sayre, and Wtlliams
ELECTRONIC TIMIS ME.\ SURENfENTSGhanCe, Hulsazer, MacNichol,
and Williams
ELECTRONIC iNSTRUMENTSGreenWOOd, Hotdam, and MacRae
CATHODE RAY TUBE DISPLAYSSOller, Starr, and Valley
MICROWAVE RECEIVERSVan Voorhis
THRESHOLD SIQNALSLaWSOn and Uhlenbeck
THEORY OF sERvo>lEcHAN1sM-JanLes, Nichols, and Phillips
RADAR SCANNERS AND EADOMESCad~, Karetitz, and Turner
COMPUTING MECHANISMS AND LINKAQESSVObOdU
lNDExHenney
MICROWAVEMAGNETRONS
Edited by
GEORGE B. COLLI NS
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS
UNIVERSITY OF ROCHESTER
OFFICE OF SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
NATIONAL DEFENSE RESEARCH COMMITTEE
FIRST EDITIon r
NEW YORK. TORONTO LONDON
MCGRA TV-HI LL BOOK CO J I PANY, I NC.
1948
MICROWAVE MAGNETRONS
COPI-RIGHT,, ]94S, BY THE
31CGRAW-HILL BOOK C;OMPAYY, lYC.
PRINTED IX-THE U>ITED STATES OF .UUERIC.*
.4[1 Tighl.s resewed. This book, or
parl.s thereof, mav not be ?f>j3TOd11Cd
in an?) .form u:ilhollt per771ission of
the p~[blzshers,
m
wEd
THE MAPLE PREsS COMPAKY, YORK, PA
MICROWA VE MAGNETRONS
EDITORIAL STAFF
GEORGE B. COLLINS
A. FINEMAN
JOYCE KI NNEY
CONTRIBUTING AUTHORS
J. G. BUCK
A. M. CLOOSTON
G. B. COLLI NS
J. R. FELDMEI ER
M. A. HERLI N
N. M. KROLL
S. MI LLMAN
F. F. RI -EKE
A. G. SMITH
w. ~. SMITE
L. R, WALKER
Foreword
T
HE tremendous research and de~~l opment effor t thfi t went i nto the
devel opment of radar and rel ated techni ques duri ng Worl d l Var I I
resul ted not onl y i n hl mdreds of radar sets for mi l i tary (and some for
possi bl e peaceti me) use but al so i n a great body of i nformati on and new
techni ques i n the el ectroni cs and hi gh-frequency fi el ds. Because thi s
basi c materi al may be of great val ue to sci ence and engi neeri ng, i t seemed
most i mportant to publ i sh i t as soon as securi ty permi tted.
The Radi ati on Laboratory of MI T, whi ch oper ated under the super-
vi si on of the Nati onl l Defense Research Commi ttee, under took the great
task of prepari ng these vol umes. The wor k descri bed herei n, however , i s
the col l ecti ve resul t of wor k done at many l aboratori es, Army, Na\y,
uni versi ty, and i ndustri al , both i n thi s country and i n Engl and, Canada,
and other Domi ni ons.
The Radi ati on Laboratory, once i ts proposal s wer e approved an{!
fi nances provi ded by the Offi ce of Sci enti fi c Research and Devel opment,
chose Loui s N. Ri denour as Edi tor-i n-Chi ef to l ead and di rect the enti re
pr oject. An edi tori al staff was then sel ected of those best qual i fi ed for
thi s type of task. Fi nal l y the authors for the vari ous vol umes or chaptew
or secti ons wer e chosen from among those exper ts who \ver e i nti matel y
fami l i ar wi th the vari ous fi el ds, and who wer e abl e and ]vi l l i ng to wri t,
the summari es of them. Thi s enti re staff agr eed to remai n at wor k al
MI T far si x mcmths or mor e after the wor k of the Radi ati on Laboratory
was compl ete. These vol umes stand as a monument to i bi s group.
These vol umes ser ve as a memori al to the unnamed hundreds and
thousands of other sci enti sts, engi neers, and others who actual l y carri ed
on the research, devel opment, and engi neeri ng wor k the resul ts of whi ch
are herei n descri bed. Ther e wer e so many i nvol ved i n thi s \vor k and they
wor ked so cl osel y together even though often i n wi del y separated l abora-
tori es that i t i s i mpossi bl e to name or even to know those who contri buted
to a parti cul ar i dea or devel opment. Onl y certai n ones who wr ote r epor ::
or arti cl es have even been menti oned. But to al l those who contri buted.
i n any way to thi s great cooper ati ve devel opment enterpri se, both i n thi s
%count r y and i n I ?ngl aml , these vol umes are dedi cated.
@
L. A. DUBRI DGE.
- Gi
$
v\\\
Preface
T
HE pul sed 10-cm magnetron, per fected by the Bri ti sh i n 1940, const i -
tuted the starti ng poi nt for the devel opment of mi crowave radar.
From that ti me unti l the end of the war the magnetron pr oved to be one
of the most i mportant components i n radar systems. As a consequence
of thi s, the armed servi ces, both i n thi s country and i n Engl and, i nsti -
gated extensi ve programs of research and devel opment to pr oduce new
types and i mprove the characteri sti cs of exi sti ng ones. The program
soon became a major one for the el ectroni c i ndustry. At the Radi ati on
Laboratory al one, over for ty hi ghl y trai ned physi ci sts and engi neers spent
mor e than four years studyi ng magnetron performance and produci ng
new desi gns. Comparabl e effor t was expended by the many other
i ndustri al and research l aboratori es. The resul t was over twenty di s-
ti nct types of magnetrons, produci ng power s i n the tens to thousands of
ki l owatts at frequenci es that wer e l argel y unexpl ored befor e 1940. What
i s mor e i mportant, thi s program l ed to a better understandi ng of the
pri nci pl es of magnetron operati on and to an i ncreased appreci ati on of
the i mportance of the fi el d of el ectroni cs at hi gh frequenci es.
Duri ng the war ver y l i ttl e attenti on coul d be gi ven to eval uati ng,
correl ati ng, and r ecor di ng these new devel opments, and what r epor ts
wer e \vri tten are di sconnected and i ncompl ete. Actual l y, much of the
i nformati on exi sted onl y i n the mi nds of the i nvesti gators and i n thei r
personal notebooks. l he purpose of thi s book i s to present i n a usabl e
form thi s l arge amount of theoreti cal and practi cal knowl edge.
Condi ti ons surroundi ng the preparati on of the vol ume pr oduced
speci al probl ems. The ti me avai l abl e was short, consi deri ng the amount
and compl exi ty of the materi al , and a di vi si on of l abor among many
authors was necessary. l hi s permi tted the sel ecti on of authors best
qual i fi ed to present di fferent subjects but resul ted i n a not too consi stent
styl e and l evel of presentati on. Furthermore, i t was appreci ated that
al though mi crowave magnetrons wer e devel oped for use i n radar systems,
thei r i mportance to sci ence and engi neeri ng was much broader; thus the
materi al for the book was eval uutmf l argel y i n terms of i ts possi bl e future
useful ness, and the uncertai nty of thi s resul ted i n a tendency to i ncl ude
i x
x
PREFACE
too much rather than too l i ttl e. Mor e seri ous ar etheer r or s that may
not have been el i mi nated because of i nsuffi ci ent ti me for adequate r evi ew.
The book contai ns a l arge fracti on of what was known, as of January
1946, about the theor y, desi gn, and operati on of magnetrons i n the
frequency range 1000 to 25,000 Me/see and the many modi fi cati ons that
extend the useful ness of these tubes.
Ther e i s i n thi s book, because of
i ts radar background, a strong emphasi s on magnetrons i ntended for
pul sed operati on, but the treatment i s extended to c-w appl i cati ons
whenever possi bl e.
The scope i s di ctated by the pri mary premi se that al l i nformati on
necessary to make a magnetron be i ncl uded. As a resul t, the character
of the chapters ranges from a detai l ed theor y of the vari ous aspects of
magnetron operati on to the detai l s of constructi on of producti on magne-
trons. An i ntroductory chapter revi ews the earl y wor k on magnetrons,
i ncl udi ng the fi rst 10-cm tube of the Bri ti sh, and presents the basi c
pri nci pl es of magnetron operati on i n or der to ori ent the r eader unfami l i ar
wi th the subject.
Except for thi s i ntroducti on, the materi al i s arranged so that theor y
pr ecedes practi cal consi derati ons. A fi nal chapter gi ves operati ng data
and i mportant di mensi ons for a vari ety of magnetrons.
Al though the authors of thi s vol ume wer e nearl y al l members of the
hI I T Radi ati on Laboratory or Col umbi a Radi ati on Laboratory, a great
deal of the materi al i ncl uded ori gi nated i n the i ndustri al concerns of thi s
country and Engl and. Refer ences to contri buti ons by other l aboratori es
i s gi ven whenever possi bl e, but the fr ee exchange of i nformati on exi sti ng
duri ng the war makes the ori gi ns of many of the i deas uncertai n. I n
parti cul ar, the contri buti ons of the Bol l Tel ephone Laboratori es and the
Raytheon Manufacturi ng Company have been extensi ve and i n many
cases undi sti ngui shabl e from those of the MI T and Col umbi a groups.
The i mportant contri buti ons of these and the many other i nsti tuti ons are
acknowl edged.
The earl y wor k of the Bri ti sh deser ves speci al recogni ti on. Al l too
few r efer ences to i t are found i n thi s vol ume, because soon after the
ori gi nal desi gn was di vul ged to l aboratori es i n thi s country, the devel op-
ment her e pr oceeded al ong rather i ndependent l i nes. The Bri ti sh magne-
tron, however , was the key to the producti on of hi gh-power mi crowaves.
A di scussi on of thi s tube and i ts i mportant features i s found i n Chap. 1,
based on materi al ki ndl y furni shed by Professor J. T. Randal l and
Dr. H. A. H. Boot who, mor e than any others, wer e responsi bl e for i ts
i nventi on.
Acknowl edgments are due to the many who r evi ewed chapters of the
book. I n parti cul ar, menti on shoul d be made of Dr. Lewi Tonks of the
General El ectri c Company, Drs. W. B. Hebenstri et and H. D. Hagstrum
PREFACE xi
of the Bel l Tel ephone Laboratori es, Drs. A. Nordsi eck and A. V. Hol l en-
ber g of Col umbi a Uni versi ty, Dr. Ll oyd P. Smi th of Cornel l Uni versi ty,
and .Mi ss Hel en Wi eman for her assi stance i n prepari ng the manuscri pt
for publ i cati on.
I n concl usi on, the edi tor wi shes to emphasi ze that a book of thi s
magni tude coul d not have been \vri tten wi thout the whol ehearted
cooperati on of al l the authors, many of whom wor ked on the manuscri pt
l ong after l eavi ng the Radi ati on Laboratory.
GEORGE 13. COI jLI NS.
(?AMBRII)GE, hfASS.,
July, 1946.
Contents
]K)Rk;~OR~ BY ],. A. ]) U13RI I WE. vii
1ltl;FA(;l,;........,. . . ..ix
CHAIJ. 1. l N~l WDU(~~I OI i 1
1.1,
1.2.
1.3.
14.
1.5.
1,6.
1,7.
1.8.
1+).
1.10.
1.11.
Fkl y Types of hfagnctrons.
The Bri ti sh (avi ty Magnetro]l
Descri pti on of a Nl i crrrwavc Nl agl l t,trol l
The l kwonant Systcrn
The Cathorl r......
The Space (;hargr.
D-c Vrrl tagc hfagncti c-fi rl d I tdati onshi p
Component }I odcs.
Efhci cncy and Frrqut,ncy Stabi l i ty.
Per for mar r cc (;hti rts and Ri eke Di agrau)s
Pul sed hfagnetrons
PART I . RESONANT SYSTEMS
CHAP. 2. THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM
2.1. The hfagnetron Cavi ty as a Ci rcui t Probl em
2.2. Equi val ent Network for the Si de Resonators
2.3. Equi val ent Network for the I nteracti on Space.
2.4. Spectrum Predi cted by tbe Equi val ent Network.
2.5. Admi ttance of Si de Resonators by Fi el d Theory.
2.6. Admi ttance of the I nteracti on Space by Fi el d Theory
2.7. The Spectrum Predi cted by Fi el d Theory,
2.8. End-space Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9. The I nteracti on Fi el d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10. Appl i cati ons and Li mi tati ons . . .
2.11. The Computati on of Admi ttances
CHAP. 3. THE RI SI NG-SUN SYSTEM.
3.1. The Spectrum . . . . . . . .
3.2. The I nteracti on Fi el d.
3.3. The Effect of the Mode Spectrum and Fi el d Characteri sti cs on
~-mode Operati on . . . . . . . . .
3.4. The Effects of Vari ous Parameters on the Mode Spectrum and the
I nteracti on Fi el d of a Ri ci ng-sun Magnetron !
,,.
Xl l l
49
49
52
52
54
56
63
66
69
74
76
77
83
83
92
98
101
xi v
CON TEN TS
3,5. Closed-end Rising-sun S@cms . . . . . . . . . 110
36. The Unloaded Qand #C/~. . . . . . . . . . . . .113
CHAP. 4. THE STRAPPED SYSTEhf . . . . . . . . . . 118
4.1. I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 118
4.2. Anal ysi s of Strapped Systems . . . . . . . . . . 121
43. Ri ngs ofi Xetworks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
SYMM~TRI CAL SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 131
4.4. Fi xed-frequency Systems . 131
45. Effects of Vari ous Parameters OI Lt!l v 3!w1c, Spcctrul l l 135
AsYL1l l RrRI CAL SYSTTSMS . 140
46. Pattern Di storti on and hIodc-s[wctru],i lf[(xts (auscd by I ,oadi rl g 141
4.7. f3ffccts of Strap Breaks. 147
4.8. Effects Caused by Vari ous Types of Tuni ng. 157
CHAP. 5. OUTPUT CI I i CUI TS, . . . . . . . . . . . .. 167
51. I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. 167
52. The 4-termi nal Transducer 171
5.3. The Q-ci rcl e al l d the Ri cl w Di agram 178
5.4. General (~onsi dcrati ons Concerni ng the Output (i rcui t l mbl cm 187
5.5. Coaxi al -output Ci rcui ts 191
5.6. Wavegui de-output Ci rcui ts . 194
PART I I . ANTAI ,YSI S OF 01ERATI ON
CHAP. 6. THE I NTERACTI ON ON THE ELE(TROXS AN-D THE ELEC-
TROMAGNETI C FI ELD. . 207
6.1, I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. 207
62, The Assumpti ons Underl yi ng the Anal ysi s . 209
6.3. The Fi el d Equati ons. . . . . . . . . . . ,., ..217
64. The Equati ons of Lfoti on. . . 222
65. Condi ti ons Under Whi ch Rel ati vi sti c I Mects Lfay Pm El i mi natc,d 228
6.6. The Nonrel ati vi sti c Equati ons. . 231
67, Symmetri cal States. .243
6.8. The Bunemann Smal l -ampl i tude ThcOry 253
64). Anal ysi s by the Lfethod of SeH-consi stent Fi el ds. 265
6.10. Qual i tati ve Di scussi on of the I nteracti on 274
611. Departures fr om the Rotati ng-wave Hypothesi s, 282
CHAP. 7. TI -I E SPACl ; CI I ARGE .4S A CI R(tJI T EI ,K31ENT 288
7.1.
72.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.
7.6.
77.
I 1l tro{l ~l c,ti on .,...,, . . . . .. 288
The El ecti -on Streal n as a [i rcui t El emrnt . 2!)1
Anal ysi s of t,hc Resonant System , 297
I nteracti ons Between Space Charge and Resonator, 305
The Descri pti on of hl agnetron Performance. 316
The hfi smatched Transmi ssi on Li ne as a Resonant Load 320
Experi mental Data on the Space-charge Properti es. 329
CONTENTS xv
CHAP. 8. TRAIW31~~T JlE1L4V10R . . . . . . 339
81. Steady-state Properties of the Modes. . . . . . . . 33!)
82. Steady-state Properties of the Pulser, . . . . 343
83. Typcsof hlode Changes. . . 345
84. Survey of the Process of hfode S.el ecti on . . . . 348
85. TheAfodeSki p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
841. ThehI ode Shi ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
8,7. I nstabi l i ty of the Power Suppl y: Mode Jumps . 355
88. Outl i ne of a Theory of Starti ng 357
89 Observati ons and Di scussi on of Starti ng 367
810, Ohscr\ati ons on R-f Bui l dup . . . 372
811 Effect of Desi gn and Operati on on Sturti ng . . . 37(;
8.12. ]ntcracti ons Between Jl odm . , . . . . 380
c[l\P.! l.NoIsi3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...388
91. I ntroducti on. ,.. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...388
9.2. Pre-osci l l ati on Noi se . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . 38!)
93. Si gnal -to-noi se Rati n. . . . . . . . , . . . . . . 394
9.40ri gi ns OfNoi sc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..3!)5
PART I I I . DESI GN
c}!.,p, 10. PRI NCI PLES OF Dl ?SI CX , . . . . 401
10,1. The Pri mary Desi gn Parameters. . . . . 40]
10,2, The 31ethod of Nlagnetrorr Desi gn,
403
10,3. Condi ti ons I mposed on the I tesonant System 406
104. Condi ti ons I mposed on the Cathode 411
105. Condi ti ons I mposed on the hl agneti c (i rcl l i t . 414
106. TbeScal i ngLaws. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 414
10.7. Reduced Operati ng Data on Vari ous Types of \l ~gm.trous 41{)
108, Determi nati on of the secondary Desi gn Parameters 435
10.9.compari son of tbe Reduced Performance ( harts. 441
1010. The Uni versal Performance (hart . 448
10,11, The General Desi gn Formul as. . 454
1012, Numeri cal Exampl e. . 4.58
~H.\P. 11. THE RESOX.4NT SYSTEX1. . . . . 460
11.1. Factors I nfl uenci ng (%oi ct= of Rwwmant Systpm . . . . 4(XI
,STRAPPEDRESONANT .SYSTEMS . . . . . 461
11.2. Wavel ength and Chmocteri sti c Admi tt:mcr. , . . . . 461
11.3. Unl oaded Q........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...466
11.4. hl ode Separati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...468
RISINC+UN RESONANT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . 470
11.5. Limitations on Secondary Desi gn Parameters . 472
11.6. Desi rabl e 3[ode Spectrum 474
117. Compari son Between @sn-reeanator and Cl osed-end Systems. 477
11.8. Rati o of Resonator Depths 478
11.9. Wavel ength Cal cul ati ons for the ~-mode 47!4
xvi CONTENTS
OUTPUT, . ., .,.,,..,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
11.10. General Properties of Coaxial and Waveguide Gutputs. 481
11.11 .~axial output s..,.,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
11.12. Ckaxial-to-waveguide Transitions 485
11.13 .Waveguide Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...486
11.14. Waveguide Transformers 491
11.15. Examples of Waveguide Output. . . . 497
11.16. End-space Geometry. . . . . 498
CHAP. 12. THE CATHODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...503
EMISSION PHENOMENA or MAGNETRON CATHonEs . 503
12.1. Characteristics of Cathodes under Pulsed Conditions. 503
12.2. Alkaline-earth Oxide CathodesTest Methods 505
12.3. Alkaline-earth Oxi de CathodesI ,i fe Tests and Sparki ng Phe-
nomena . . . . . . . . . . ,,, ..,..508
12.4. Thori um Oxi de Cathodes. . . . 515
12.5. Secondary El ectron-emi ssi on Properti es of Magnetron Cathodes 517
HEAT BAHNCEI N THE CATHODE. . . . . . . . . . ,. 519
12.6. Thermal Behavi or of a Pul sed Cathode. 520
12.7. Measurements of Back-bombardment Power 525
12.8. Thermal Consi derati ons i n Cathode Desi gn 528
ESTABLISHMENT OF AN AXI AL BOUNnARY TO THE SP.ACE CHARGE 537
12.9. Cathode End Shi el ds., ,537
CHAP. 13. THE MAGNETI C CI RCUI T 54o
13.1. Desi gn of Permanent Magnets. 540
13.2. Magnet Chargi ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
13.3. Magneti c Stabi l i zati on . . . MO
13.4. Fi el d Uni formi ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,552
13.5. Testi ng and Measurements . 553
PART I V. TUNI NG AND STABI I ,I ZATI ON
CHAP. 14. MECHANICAL TUNING. . 561
14.1. General Consi derati ons. 561
I NDUCTNE AND CAPACI TNE TUNI NG . 564
14.2. Symmetri c I nducti ve Tuni ng: Sprocket Tuni ng 565
14.3. Symmetri c Capaci ti ve Tuni ng: The Cooki e Cutter. . 57o
14.4. . Other Symmetri c I nducti ve and Capaci ti ve Methods of Tuni ng 572
14.5. Unsymmetri c I nducti ve Tuni ng 575
COUPLEn-CIRCUIT TUNING. . , . 576
14.6. General Theory...,.. ., ..,,....,.....576
14.7. Double-output Tuning . . 576
14.8. Symmetric Double-output Tuning. . 582
14.9. Cavity Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...583
14.10. Single-stub Tuning. . . 589
fY3hTE.VT,~ xvi i
CHAP. 15. I H,JI XTRONI C TUNI NG . . 592
ELECTRON-BEAM TUNI NG . . . . . 592
15.1. General Consi derati ons. 592
15.2. Fundamental Equati ons of Beam Tuni ng. 594
153. The Pri nci pl es of El ectron-beam Tuni ng i n a Magneti c Fi el d 599
15,4. The Engi neeri ng Equati ons of I Oectron-beam Tuni ng 604
15.5. Scal i ng . . . . . . . . . ...610
15.6. I nternal vs. External Cavi ty Tuni ng. . . 611
NIAGNETHON DIODE TUNING. 615
15.7. Fundamental Pri nci pl es 615
15.8. Smal l -si gnal Theory : 616
15.9. Experi mental Data on I ,arge-si grral Condi ti ons .,, 619
15.10 . Other Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...621
CHAP. 16. STAB~LI ZATI ON OF FREQI JENCI -. 622
16.1. I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...622
16.2. The I deal Stabi l i zer . . . .. 624
16.3. Coupl i ng hl ethods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...626
16.4. hl eans of Dampi ng the Extraneous hfodes 633
16.5. The Desi gn of Stabi l i zi ng Ci rcui ts 639
PART V. PRACTI CE
(% AP.17, CONSTRUCTI ON . . . .649
17,1. Fabri cati on of Ar r ode Bl ocks 649
17.2. Brazi ng and Sol deri ng 662
17.3. Sel ected Br azi r r g Probl ems 670
17.4. Chemi cal Processes 674
17.5. Mrtal -t&gl aaa 8eal s. .676
17.6. Cathode and Heater Constructi on 685
17.7. Tube Evacuati on and Processi ng 693
17.8. Exami nati on of Metal s. 694
CHAP. 18. hI E.4SUREi l l ENTS. . 698
N[EASUREMENTS OF THE RESONANT SYTSEM 698
18.1. Test Equi pment Components 698
18.2. Cavi ty-wavel ength Measurements 702
18.3. Measurement of Standi ng }Yaves 705
18-4. Fi el d-pattern Measurements 710
18.5. hl essurementof Q. . . 713
18.6. The Stabi l i zati on Factor 723
18.7. hi agnetrcm-mode I denti fi cati on . 726
18.8. Cathode-l ead Load..... . . . . . . . . . . . . ...728
18.9. Tube-model Techni ques. .729
OPERATING hfEASUREMENTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 730
18.10. hfeawri ng Techni ques 732
18.11 . Operati ng Techni que.. .735
...
x Ji l l (O.YTI?.VT,?
rH.\P. 19. TYPIC.kL LIAGNETROXS . . 739
19.1. The LCW Lband Cw hI agnetron. 74o
19.2. The C1116B S-band C-w Magnetron. -. 744
19.3. 2J3&2J39 Low-vol tage S-band l l agnetrons 747
19.4, TYPe 2J22-2J34 l o-cm Pul sed ~I agnetrons . 751
195. 4J70-4J77 Hi gh-power S-band Tunabl e I [ag]l rtrons 756
19.6. The HP1OV Hi gh-power S-band hI agnetron. 760
19.7. The B\150 Ver y Low Power .X-band l l agnetron. 764
19.8. 2J41 Low-po\ver Stabi l i zed X-band l I ngnetrou 766
19.9, The 2J42 I mw-vol tage X-band Jl agnetron 770
19.1O. The 725A i l I agnetron
774
1{).11. The 2J51 Xl agnetron, .
778
1!).12. 4J50 (4J52, 4578) Hi gh-po\vcr 3-cm XI agnctron 780
19.13. The AX9 Ri si ng-sun JI agnctron. 784
1914, The 3J31 and 3J21 Ri si ng-sun l I agnctrons 786
19.15. 22-cavi ty Ri si ng-sun I I agnetron . 7!)0
1916. The Cl osed-end 38-ca\,i ty Ri si ng-sun Xl agnrtron. 791
]{).17. The XCR Hi gh-po\vcr 2.Gcm (-;v X1:i gnetron, 795
TNr)Ex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...797
CHAPTER 1
I NTRODUCTI ON
GEORGE B. COLLI NS
A magnetron i s a di ode, usual l y cyl i ndri cal , wi th a magneti c fi el d
paral l el to i ts axi s. I nmodern usage, ho~vever , thewor d i mpl i es a di ode
that, wi th the ai d of a magneti c fi el d, produces short el ectromagneti c
waves, and i t i s wi th thi s meani ng that the term i s used i n thi s vol ume.
Those magnetrons whi ch pr oduce radi ati on wi thi n the wavel ength range
1 to 30 cm are her e defi ned as mi crowave magnetrons. Thi s cl ass of
tubes i s someti mes cal l ed cavi ty magnetrons from the fact that, i n the
usual desi gn, the resonant ci rcui t i s a number of cl osel y coupl ed cavi ti es
contai ned wi thi n the evacuated porti on of the tube.
101. Earl y Types of Magnetrons.kf i cr owave magnetrons and the
theor y of thei r operati on have thei r ori gi n i n contri buti ons made by a
great many i nvesti gators extendi ng back at l east to 1921. A r evi ew of
thi s devel opment wi l l be gi ven her e \vi th the purpose of poi nti ng out the
si gni fi cant steps that have l ed to the present hi ghl y effi ci ent sources of
mi crowaves. Edi tori al pol i cy precl udes the assi gnment of credi t for
ori gi nati on of i deas or i nventi ons, and thi s questi on wi l l be purposel y
avoi ded as far as possi bl e.
Nonoscillating Diodes with Magnetic Fields .The basi s for much of
the theor y of magnetron operati on was l ai d by Hul l l who i nvesti gated
the behavi or of el ectrons i n a cyl i ndri cal di ode i n the pr esence of a mag-
neti c fi el d paral l el to i ts axi s. Such a di ode i s shown i n Fi g. 1.l a. A
cyl i ndri cal anode surrounds a central l y pl aced cathode whi ch i s heated
to provi de a sour ce of el ectrons. A nearl y uni form magneti c fi el d paral l el
to the axi s of the tube i s pr oduced by a sol enoi d or external magnet not
shown i n the di agram. I n the crossed el ectri c and magneti c fi el ds whi ch
exi st between the cathode and anode an el ectr on that i s emi tted by
the cath;de moves under the i nfl uence of a for ce Fe = Ee and a for ce
F~ = e/c(; X ~) (see Fi g. 1.2), wher e E is the el ectri c fi el d, B the
magneti c fi el d, c the vel oci ty of l i ght, v the vel oci ty of the el ectron, and
e i s i ts charge. The sol uti on of the resul ti ng equati ons of moti on, whi ch
negl ect space-charge effects, shows that the path of the el ectr on i s a
quasi -cycl oi dal orbi t wi th a frequency gi ven approxi matel y by
(1)
1A. W. Hul l , Phgs. Re~.,18, 31 (1921).
1
(a)
I NTRODUCTI ON
(c)
[SEC. 1]
n
(b)
FI WI .I .Earl y types of magnetrons:(a) Hul l ori gi naldi ode; (b) split anode; (c) spl i t
anodewi thi nternalresonator;(d)i mprovedspl i tanode; (e)four-segment anode.
9CC.11]
EARLY TYPES OF MAGNETRONS 3
When thi s orbi t touches the anode, a condi ti on of cutoff i s sai d to
exi st, and Eq. (2) hol ds
$=a[l -kYY
(2)
wher e V is the potenti al di fference between the anode and the cathode
and r. and r, are thei r radi i . The rel ati on
i s an i mportant one from the standpoi nt
of magnetron operati on. I t i mpl i es that
for V/ B2 l ess than the ri ght si de of Eq.
(2), no cur r ent fl ows and, as V/ B i s
i ncreaeed through the cutofi condi ti on, a
rapi d i ncrease i n cur r ent takes pl ace. For
obscure reasons the reducti on of cur r ent at
cutoff, whi ch i s obser ved experi mental l y, i s
not so abrupt as the theor y outl i ned above
woul d i ndi cate.
Cyclotron Frequenqi Oscillations.-The
type of di ode shown i n Fi g. 10l a can be made
to osci l l ate at ver y hi gh frequenci es i f the
FI G. 1.2.Forces on an
el ectr onmovi ngi n a di odewi th
a magneti cfi el d paral l el to i ts
axi s.
cathode and anode are made part of a resonant ci rcui t wi th reasonabl y
hi gh i mpedance and l ow l osses. Condi ti ons for osci l l ati on are that V/B
must be adjusted cl ose to the cutoff condi ti on gi ven by Eq. (2) and that
the frequency of the resonant cur r ent be cl ose to the transi t frequency of
+
FI G.1.3.Trajectori es of el ectrons:
(1)phasewi thr espectto ther-f fi el di s
unfavorabl efor the supportof osci l -
l ati ons;(2) favorabl e.
the el ectrons. An expl anati on of these
osci l l ati ons i s gi ven i n terms of Fi g. 13.
The dashed ci rcl e represents the path of
an el ectr on i n the i nteracti on space and
modi fi es the trajectori es of such an el ec-
tron. Cur ve (1) represents the trajec-
tor y of an el e~tron emi tted at an i nstant
when the r-f fi el d i s i n the same di rec-
ti on as the d-c fi el d. Thus the effecti ve
V acti ng on the el ectr on i s i ncreased,
and from Eq. (2) i t i s seen that thi s
i ncreases the cutoff radi us wi th the
resul t that the el ectr on stri kes the
anode.
Cur ve (2) i s for an el ectr on emi tted one-hal f peri od l ater when the
r-f fi el ds are opposed to the d-c fi el d. The el ectr on now mi sses the anode
and returns toward the cathode. Si nce the frequency of rotati on as
gi ven by (1) i s made cl ose to the r-f frequency, el ectr on (1) wi l l return
toward the cathode al so r etar ded by the r-f fi el d. Thi s el ectr on thus
4 I NTRODUCTI O>V [SEC. 1.1
contri butes ener gy to the r-f osci l l ati on, and the process wi l l conti nue as
l ong as the phase rel ati onshi ps wi th the r-f fi el d persi st or unti l the
el ectr on i s r emoved by some process. As these phase rel ati onshi ps
cannot be mai ntai ned i ndefi ni tel y, provi si ons are usual l y made for r emov-
i ng the el ectrons befor e they fal l out of phase. One method i s to ti l t
the magneti c fi el d sl i ghtl y ]vi th r espect to the axi s of the tube. Thi s
causes the el ectrons to spi ral out of the end of the anode befor e too many
revol uti ons occur .
A characteri sti c of thi s type of magnetron, whi ch i s i mportant to
the operati on of many magnetrons, i s the qui ck removal from the r-f
fi el d of the el ectrons whose phase i s unfavorabl e to the support of osci l l a-
ti ons and the retenti on i n the r-f fi el d of the favorabl e ones.
Spl i t-anode magnetrons such as shown i n Fi g. 1l b wi l l al so osci l l ate
when the frequency of the resonant ci rcui t (now connected to the two
segments) i s cl ose to the transi t frequency of the el ectrons and the anode
vol tage adjusted cl ose to cutoff condi ti ons. ho sati sfactory anal ysi s
has been made that gi ves the tr ajector y of the el ectrons i n thi s case, but
i t i s probabl e that the unfavorabl e and favorabl e el ectrons are segr egated
by processes si mi l ar to that i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 1.3.
ho l arge number of cycl otr on-type magnetrons have been made,
but they have been used effecti vel y as experi mental sources of radi o
frequency.23 At 50-cm wavel ength output power s of 100 watts have
been obtai ned; at 10-cm wavel ength about 1 watt; and detectabl e
radi ati on has been pr oduced at 0.6 cm. The effi ci ency of the spl i t-
anode tubes i s around 10 per cent for moderatel y l ong wavel engths as
compared wi th 1 per cent for the di ode vari ety.
The shortcomi ngs of thi s cl ass of magnetron are l ow effi ci ency, l ow
power , and general l y errati c behavi or, but extr emel y hi gh frequenci es
can be gener ated by these osci l l ators.
Negative Resistance or Habann Type.I f the magneti c fi el d of a spl i t-
anode magnetron i s greatl y i ncreased over what i s requi red for the
cycl otr on-type osci l l ati ons, a new type can occur whi ch has been cal l ed
negati ve-resi stance or Habann-type osci l l ati ons. The frequency i s
determi ned al most whol l y by the resonant ci rcui t, and the magneti c
fi el d i s not cri ti cal as i s the case wi th cycl otr on osci l l ati ons. These
osci l l ators have been i nvesti gated by Ki l gore4 who obser ved i n a mag-
netr on contai ni ng gas at l ow pressure, l umi nous paths correspondi ng to
el ectr on trajectori es of the form shown i n Fi g. 1.4.
The form of the r-f fi el d i s shown, and thi s combi ned wi th the d-c
1A. Zarek, Cos.Pro. Pest Math. a FTYS. J Prague,53, 578 (1924).
2H. Yagi , l %oc. I RE, 16, 715 (1926).
3C. E. Cl eeton and N. H. Wi l l i ams,Phys. Ren., 60, 1091 (1936).
4G. R. Ki l gore,Proc. I RE, 24, 1140(1!)36).
SEC.1.1] EARLY TYPES OF MAGNETRONS 5
fi el d and the hi gh magneti c fi el d causes the el ectrons to spi ral out to
the anode segment that i s at the l owest (most negati ve) potenti al .
The magnetron thus has the characteri sti cs of a negati ve resi stance neces-
sary to pr oduce osci l l ati ons. I t i s obser ved that the effi ci ency of thi s
type of osci l l ati on i s enhanced i f the el ectr on moves out to the anode
maki ng tenor mor e spi ral s. The frequency of thespi ral i ng i sdekmni ned
by Eq. (l ), and thus magneti c fi el d strengths are needed that are ten
ti mes those requi red to pr oduce the same frequency by cycl otr on-type
osci l l ati ons. Provi dhg suffi ci entl y hi gh magneti c fi el ds to sati sfy thi s
requi rement for ver y hi gh frequenci es i s one of the pri nci pal objecti ons
to thi s type of osci l l ati on as a practi -
cal sour ce of mi crowaves.
+150
An i mportant modi fi cati on i n
the desi gn of spl i t-anode magne-
trons was made when the resonant
ci rcui t was pl aced enti rel y wi thi n
the vacuum system. Thi s step
was the resul t of efforts to i ncrease , I ,
both the frequency and power out-
put. Fi gure 1.l c shows such a
desi gn. Thi s type of tube has pr o-
duced power outputs of 100 to 400
watts at 50 cm and 80 watts at 20
cm.
Traveling-wave Oscillations. +50
El ectron path
Thi s thi rd type of osci l l ati on al so FI G.1.4.Trajectori es of an el ectr oni n
occurs i n spl i t-anode magnetrons
a spl i t-anodemagnetronwhen used as a
Habann-typeosci l l ator.
and i s rel ated to the negati ve resi st-
ance type. The two di ffer onl y i n the rati o of the angul ar frequency of the
travel i ng wave to the cycl otr on frequency. I n the negati ve-resi stance
magnetron the magneti c fi el d i s so hi gh that on the cycl otr on ti me scal e
the travel i ng wave remai ns nearl y stati onary. Ther e i s no sharp di vi di ng
l i ne between the two. For the same frequenci es the magneti c fi el d
requi red i s much l ower than that needed to pr oduce negati ve-resi stance
osci l l ati ons; and al though the magneti c fi el d may be cl ose to the val ue
necessary to pr oduce cycl otr on-type osci l l ati on, i ts val ue i s not cri ti cal
and the anode potenti al i s l ower, so that osci l l ati ons occur bel ow cutoff
condi ti ons.
Travel i ng-wave osci l l ati ons have al so been obser ved i n four-segment
and even ei ght-segment magnetrons. Fi gure 1. l d i l l ustrates a four-
segment magnetron and shows i n parti cul ar the manner i n whi ch the
al ternate segments are connected together wi thi n the vacuum envel ope.
1K. Posthumus,Wi rel essEng., 12, 126 (1935).
6 I NTRODUCTI ON [SEC. 1.1
A parti cul arl y i mportant feature of thi s desi gn i s that for a gi ven B and
T. the four-segment magnetron can be made to osci l l ate at twi ce the
frequency of a two-segment one. Posthumus devel oped a theor y for
osci l l ati on of thi s type, whi ch al though space-charge effects are negl ected,
gi ves a reasonabl e expl anati on of the obser ved characteri sti cs. Thi s
expl anati on can be made conveni entl y i n terms of the four-segment tube.
Fi gure 1.5 shows i n an approxi mate manner the el ectri c fi el d di stri buti on.
These fi el ds vary wi th ti me i n a si nusoi dal manner and may be consi dered
as standi ng waves resul ti ng from two sets of travel i ng waves rotati ng i n
opposi te di recti ons around the anode. For osci l l ati ons to occur the
angul ar vel oci ty of the el ectrons
must approxi mate that of one of the
rotati ng waves so that the el ectrons
retai n for an appreci abl e l ength of
x
....--..*. . .. -~..
ti me thei r phase rel ati onshi p wi th
the r-f fi el d. Posthumus showed
that thi s condi ti on exi sts when
47mVa
f== (3)
a
when j i s the frequency, V. and T.
the anode potenti al and radi us, B
the magneti c fi el d, and n the number
FI O.1.5.El ectri cfi el ds i n a four-segment
of pai rs of segments.
magnetron.
The theor y al so shows-that el ec-
trons whi ch are r etar ded by the r-f fi el d and thus contri bute ener gy to i t
spi ral outward and eventual l y stri ke the anode.
Equati on (3) i s consi stent wi th the characteri sti cs of these osci l l ati ons
as obser ved by Posthumus. The upper-frequency l i mi t for a gi ven tube
i s i nversel y proporti onal to B, and for n = 2 thi s l i mi ti ng frequency i s
twi ce that for n = 1.
The theor y i s al so consi stent wi th such facts,
now wel l known, that the anode vol tage i s proporti onal to the square
of r. and that for osci l l ati ons to occur the rati o V/ B must remai n constant.
Of the thr ee types of osci l l ati onscycl otron frequency, negati ve
resi stance, and travel i ng wav~the l ast has pr oved the most effecti ve
i n magnetrons that are used as practi cal sources of mi crowaves. Some
advantages of the travel i ng-wave type of osci l l ati ons are good effi ci enci es
at hi gh frequenci es, moderate magneti c fi el d requi rements, and stabi l i ty
of operati on over a wi de range of i nput and output condi ti ons.
For frequenci es bel ow 1000 Me/see i t i s conveni ent to have the r eso-
nant ci rcui t external to the vacuum system, as the el ements are rather
bul ky and because external ci rcui ts can be tuned mor e readi l y. Thi s
1I bid.
SEC. 1.1] EARLY TYPES OF MAGNETRONS 7
ci rcumstance has l ed to the devel opment of spl i t-anode magnetrons i n
the 100 to 1000 Me/see regi on that has cul mi nated i n the desi gn showh
i n Fi g. 1-M. An i mportant feature of these tubes i s the l arge-di ameter
conductors connecti ng the two secti ons of the anode to the external
ci rcui t. Thi s reduces l osses i n the resonant ci rcui t and i ncreases the
anode di ssi pati on. Power outputs of 150 watts at frequenci es between
15 and 1200 Me/see can be obtai ned rel i abl y from thi s tube and si mi l ar
ones. 1
FI Q.l .&-Earl y formof i nternrdresonatormagnetr on.
I n a search for magnetron sources of hi gher frequenci es and hi gher
power s certai n modi fi cati ons me suggested by the performance of the
desi gns shown i n Fi g. 1.1. I n parti cul ar the combi nati on of the i nternal
resonant ci rcui t Fi g. 1*1c wi th the mul ti segment feature of Fi g. 1.l e
seems desi rabl e, as the i nternal resonant ci rcui t i s capabl e of handl i ng
hi gh power s at hi gh frequenci es and the mul ti segment structure reduces
the anode vol tage and magneti c fi el d. Fi gure 1.6 shows an arrangement
of i nternal ci rcui ts that was i nvesti gated by Al eksereff and Mal earoff.z
1Thi s l i ne of magnetronwas devel opedby the General Fl ectri c Co.
~N. T. Al eksereffrmdD, I I }.Mal earoff,Jour. Tech. Phys. USSR, 10, 1297 (1940).
Republ i shedPro.. I RE, 32, 136 (1944).
8 I NTROT)UCTI OI Y [SEC. 1.2
Si mi l ar arrangements have been suggested by many others.123 Her e
the resonator system i s made up of a number of i nternal resonators
arranged around the axi s of the cathode so that the capaci ti ve porti on
of each resonator opens out i nto the cathode-anode space. The mag-
netr on shown i n Fi g. 1.6 was tri ed \vi th anode bl ocks havi ng up to
ei ght resonators and wi th vari ous anode si zes. Po~vers of a few hundred
watts at $crn wavel ength arc r epor ted wi th effi ci enci es as hi gh as 20
per cent, andafeww attswereproducedat 2.5-cmat ver y l ow effi ci ency.
The power output was l i mi ted by overheati ng of the cathode whi ch
presumabl y resul ted from back
bombardment by el ectrons that
r ecei ved ener gy from the r-f fi el d.
1.2. The Bri ti sh Cavi ty Mag-
netron.The warti me need of
radar for a transmi tti ng tube capa-
bl e of ver y hi gh pul sed-power out-
puts at wavel engths of 10 cm or
l ess l cd Dri ti sh i nvesti gators4 to
attempt l ate i n 1939 the devel op-
ment of a magnetron wi th these
characteri sti cs. The y i nvented
and per fected a travel i ng-wave
type magnetron wi th i nternal
resonators that when pul sed pr o-
duced mi crowave radi ati on wi th
peak power s several or der s of mag-
ni tude gr eater than had been obtai ned befor e by any means. The fact
that thi s magnetron was oper ated under pul sed i nput condi ti ons i s par-
ti cul arl y si gni fi cant. Duty rati os [(pul se durati on)/ (i nterval between
pul ses) + (pul se durati on)] of about 0.001 wer e used so that heati ng of the
cathode and anode was greatl y r educed over that for c-w operati on.
Speci fi cal l y, wi th a duty rati o of 0.001, pul se power s one thousand ti mes
the maxi mum c-w i nputs are possi bl e wi thout produci ng overheati ng.
After a comparati vel y short peri od of devel opment 10-cm magnetrons
wer e made that oper ated effi ci entl y wi th peak power i nputs of several
hundred ki l owatts and outputs i n excess of 100 kw. Fi gure 1.7 shows the
1A. I ,. Samuel ,[J.S. Patent 2063341,1936.
ZBri ti sh Patent 509104,Oct. 7, 1938.
3Rei chspatent663259,.4ug. 3, 1938.
t Professor J. T, Randal and Dr. H. A. H. Boot, Uni versi ty of Bi rmi ngham,
Bi rmi ngham,I tngl and. The wor k of thesei nvesti gators\vasgreatl y ai ded as a resuk
of cooperati on~vi thThe C,cncralI l l ectri c (ompany, Ltd., Wembl ey, Engl and,whi ch
made many contri buti ons essenti alto the success of tbe producti on versi on of these
earl y magnetrons.
SEC. 12]
THE BRI TI SH CAVI TY MAGNE1RON 9
fi rst anode constructed by these i nvesti gators, and Fi g. 18 the fi rst ex-
peri mental magnetron. Thi s tube had an output of 400 watts c-w at a
wavel ength of 9.8 cm. Fi gure 1.9 shows the constructi on of thi s mag-
netr on as i t was pr oduced for use i n mi crowave radars.
FI G. 1.8.Fi rst Bri ti sh 10-cm magnetron.
The effecti veness of thi s magnetron i s due especi al l y to thr ee i mpor-
tant features of desi gn:
1. A l arge-di ameter oxi de-coated cathode was used. The l arge
di ameter contri butes appreci abl y to stabl e operati on and provi des
a l arge emi tti ng area. ,
Under pul sed condi ti ons the
oxi de coati ng was found to
provi de peak emi ssi on cur-
rents of 10 to 20 amp/cmz.
Thi s surpri si ng performance
=
:~$=%
,%~..
of oxi de coati ngsthe pul se
emi ssi on i s ten ti mes the d-c 7):
val uei s l argel y responsi bl e
FI G. 14-Producti on versi on of Bri ti sh
for the magnetrons abi l i ty
10-cmmagnetron.
to accept hi gh pul se-power i nputs. I nstabi l i ti es such as sparki ng
mi ght have been expected, as the magnetron oper ated wi th a pl ate
10 I N TROD UC71ON [SEC. 13
vol tage of 10 kv, a fi gure consi derabl y above the val ue consi dered
safe for the use of oxi de cathodes under normal condi ti ons. Fortu-
natel y under pul sed condi ti ons l i ttl e troubl e was exper i enced.
2. The anode bl ock i s part of the vacuum envel ope. Al l the mag-
netrons shown i n Fi gs. 1.1 and 1.6 have anode bl ocks suspended
i nsi de vacuum, and l arge anode di ssi pati on i s di ffi cul t to obtai n;
wi th the anode bl ock a part of the vacuum envel ope, a l ow-
i mpedance thermal path from i nteri or to exter i or exi sts, and heat
di ssi pati on of several hundred watts of average power can be
accompl i shed wi th ai r cool i ng al one.
3. The separate resonators are coupl ed by conducti ng el ements or
straps. 1 Wi thout these the magnetrons several resonant fr e-
quenci es are so cl ose together that unstabl e operati on resul ts.
Wi th straps the effi ci ency i s rai sed and stabl e operati on may be
obtai ned over a wi de range of powers.
Other features and certai n opti mum di mensi ons, whi ch i n al l con-
tri bute si gni fi cantl y to the operati on of thi s magnetron, ~ver ei ncorporated
as a resul t of experi ment. Good exampl es of such features are the output
constructi on and the cri ti cal cathode di ameter and coupl i ng l oop si ze.
Thi s earl y wor k al so contri buted greatl y to the understandi ng of
magnetron operati on. The r ol e of the el ectrons that return to the
cathode i n produci ng secondari es from the cathode was appreci ated,
and, i n fact, magnetrons wi th secondary emi tti ng cathodes and no pri -
mary emi ssi on wer e oper ated by Boot and Randal l . I n addi ti on, a ver y
useful techni que for i nvesti gati ng the resonant modes of magnetrons by
the use of si gnal generators (Chap. 18) was devel oped.
I n spi te of the spectacul ar performance of thi s earl y pul sed mi crowave
magnetron i ts characteri sti cs wer e not enti rel y sati sfactory. I ts per -
formance was errati c, wi th r egar d both to the operati on of i ndi vi dual
tubes under varyi ng condi ti ons and to the operati on of di fferent but
presumabl y i denti cal tubes under the same condi ti ons. I n addi ti on,
any modi fi cati on of the ori gi nal desi gn al most i nvari abl y resul ted i n
unsati sfactory performance. For exampl e, attempts at desi gni ng tubes
to oper ate at wavel engths shor ter than 10 cm or at l ol ver anode vol tages
wer e not at fi rst successful . The cause of most of these di ffi cul ti es }vas
the l ack of a compl ete understandi ng of the pr@ci pl es of operati on of the
magnetron.
1.3. Descri pti on of a Mi crowave Magnetron.The cl ass of magnetron
\vi th ]vhi ch thi s book i s concer ned i s di sti ngui shed by a resonant system
I The addi ti on of straps to the resonant system of the magnetron was made
by J. Sayers, of Bi rmi ngham Uni versi ty, about a year after the ori gi nal magnetron
\vas perfected.
SEC. 13] DESCRI PTI ON OF A MI CROI VAVE MAGNETRON
l!
wi thi n the tube envel ope; thi s system i s composed of a number of coupl ed
resonators surroundi ng a rel ati vel y l arge cyl i ndri cal cathode. An
exampl e that wi l l be used as a basi s for di scussi on i s shown i n Fi gs.
1c1Oand 1.11.
These magnetrons are sel f-exci ted osci l l ators, the purpose of whi ch i s
to conver t the d-c i nput power i nto r-f output power . Thi s conversi on
takes pl ace i n the i nteracti on space I whi ch i s between the cyl i ndri cal
cathode C and the anode block A. A constant and nearl y uni form magneti c
fi el d i s mai ntai ned i n thi s i nteracti on space i n a di recti on paral l el to the
axi s of the tube. I n operati on, the cathode i s mai ntai ned at a negati ve
potenti al , whi l e the anode bl ock i s usual l y at ground potenti al . The
!
~-.
4
. . .- --xi i
FI G. 1. 10.Cutaway of typi cal mi crowave magnetron showi ng constructi on.
anode bl ock i s pi er ced i n a di recti on paral l el to the axi s by a number of
resonators R whi ch open i nto the i nteracti on space so that the anode
surface consi sts of al ternate segments and gaps. The ends of the
resonati ng cavi ti es open i nto chambers that are cal l ed end spaces
through whi ch the l i nes of fl ux extendi ng from one resonator to the next
pass. The coupl i ng between the resonators i s i ncreased by conduc~
i ng bam cal l ed straps S whi ch connect al ternate segments. Power i a
extr acted from one resonator, one method bei ng a coupl i ng loop L whi ch
forms a part of the output circuit. The combi nati on of resonant cavi ti es,
end spaces, straps, and output ci rcui t i s cal l ed the resonant system.
I n thi s desi gn, the cathode C i s oxi de-coated and heated i ndi rectl y by
an i nternal heati ng coi l of tungsten or mol ybdenum. I t i s attached
mechani cal l y to two cathode stems supported by gl ass to provi de anode
to-cathode i nsul ati on. Coaxi al l i ne chokes K are frequentl y pl aced on
these stems to pr event the escape of any stray radi ati on that may be
12 I NTRODUCTI ON [SEC. 1.3
pi cked up by the cathode structure. At each end of the cathode ther e
i s an end shi ekf H whose purpose i s to pr event el ectrons from l eavi ng
the cathode structure i n a di recti on paral l el to the axi s of the magnetron.
These end shi el ds must be kept at a temperature too l ow to cause the
emi ssi on of el ectrons.
R c

m c
L
H s
--
FI O.1.1 I .--Cross-secti onal vi ews of typi cal magnetronshown i n Fi g. 1.10.
The radi al di mensi ons of the i nteracti on space depend upon the wave-
l ength and vol tage at whi ch the magnetron i s to oper ate and for any gi ven
type are proporti onal to the wavel ength and to the square r oot of the anode
vol tage. For effi ci ent operati on, the rati o of cathode di ameter to anode
di ameter must remai n wi thh narrow l i mi ts set by the number of resona-
tors. I n a 12-resonator magnetron, thi s rati o i s about ~ the anode;
for fewer osci l l ators, i t i s somewhat smal l er, and for mor e than 12 osci l -
l ators, somewhat l arger.
A magneti c fi el d paral l el to the axi s of the cathode i s requi red; i t i s
SEC. 1.4]
THE RESONANT SYSTEM 13
often pr oduced by an el ectromagnet or permanent magnet wi th pol e
faces external to the magnetron.
Fi gure 1.12a shows a typi cal permanent
magnet and magnetron wi th radi al cathode supports.
Another type of
magnetron constructi on, favored for the hi gher-frequency magnetrons
wher e magnet wei ght i s of i mportance, i s shown i n Fi g. 1. 12b. Thk
magnetron-magnet combi nati on i s frequentl y cal l ed a packaged
magnetron. The cathode i s usual l y supported axi al l y through i ron
,..
J
J
-. . .. .. ... _.. ... ..
Fm. 1.12.Two types of magnetron constructi on: (a) radi al cathode supports wi th separate
magnet; (b) axi al cathode support wi th attached magnet.
pol e pi eces whi ch extend qui te cl ose to the anode and thus r educe the
magneti c fi el d gap. Si nce the wei ght of a magnet that wi l l pr oduce a
gi ven magneti c fi el d strength over a gi ven i ron-secti onal area i ncreases
ver y rapi dl y wi th the l ength of the gap, consi derabl e magnet wei ght
can be saved i n thi s manner. I t i s customary to suppl y thi s type of
magnetron permanentl y attached to i ts magnet. The savi ng of si ze
and wei ght resul ti ng from thi s axi al constructi on may be consi derabl e.
1.4. The Resonant System.The combi nati on of the anode bl ock,
output ci rcui t, end spaces, and other parts that contri bute to the r-f
14 I NTRODUCTI ON [SEC. 1.4
properti es of the tube i s defi ned as the resonant system. I t i s a most
i mportant part of the magnetron, for i t determi nes the frequency and
al so pl ays a most i mportant r ol e i n the el ectroni c processes. Thi s
i ntegrati on of the enti re osci l l ati ng system i nto one tube compl i cates
the probl ems of desi gn and l i mi ts the versati l i ty of si ngl e magnetrons as
compared wi th l ow-frequency osci l l ators wher e the osci l l ator tube i s
di sti nct from the associ ated resonant ci rcui ts.
The functi on of the resonant system i s to present to the space charge
an r-f fi el d of the desi red frequency and wi th the pr oper confi gurati on and
magni tude to effect an effi ci ent generati on of radi o frequency and further
to transmi t thi s power to an external l oad. The resonant system accom-
pl i shes thi s by stori ng a quanti ty of the ener gy to pr oduce the r-f fi el ds,
at the same ti me rel easi ng a porti on to the external l oad.
A speci fi c exampl e wi l l ser ve to fi x the or der of magni tude of the
quanti ti es i nvol ved i n thi s process.
For a pul se-power i nput of 100 kw,
the 2J32 (see Fi g. 1.11) del i vers about 40 kw to i ts l oad, or about
1.3 X 10s joul e per cycl e, as the frequency i s 3000 Me/see. Under
these condi ti ons, about 102 joul e i s stor ed i n the resonant system, and
thi s ener gy resul ts i n an r-f vol tage at the anode surface of about 10 kv.
About 55 per cent (or 45 kw) of the i nput power i s l ost because of heati ng ~
of the anode by the el ectrons, and 5 per cent (5 kw) i s l ost because of
heati ng of the anode by the ci rcul ati ng r-f currents.
A good resonant system shoul d have characteri sti cs that make the
operati on of the magnetron as stabl e as possi bl e. Thi s i ncl udes stabi l i ty
agai nst smal l changes i n frequency and stabi l i ty agai nst di screte fr e-
quency jumps and consti tutes one of the major probl ems of magnetron
desi gn.
The enti re resonant system presents a probl em too compl i cated for
qual i tati ve anal ysi s, and i t i s usual l y assumed that onl y the anode bl ock
and output ci rcui t affect the operati on of the magnetron. Al though
thi s assumpti on i s not al ways justi fi ed, as other parts of the magnetron
may, i ndeed, affect i ts operati on, i t has usual l y been possi bl e to i sol ate
thei r effects and consi der them as speci al probl ems. The di scussi on
her e of the resonant system as wel l as the mor e detai l ed treatments i n
Chaps. 2, 3, and 4 fol l ow thi s pr ocedur e.
The so-cal l ed hol e-and-sl ot anode bl ock, shown i n Fi g. (1-10 and Fi g.
1-11), wi l l be used as a speci fi c magnetron about whi ch the fol l owi ng
di scussi on wi l l be center ed. When operati ng i n the desi red manner,
osci l l ati ons resul t i n a di sposi ti on of charge and el ectri c fi el d, as i s i l l us-
trated i n Fi g. 1.13. Fi gure 1.13a i l l ustrates such a di sposi ti on at an
i nstant when the concentrati on of charge on the ends of the anode seg-
ments i s at maxi mum. One-quarter of a peri od l ater the el ectri c fi el d
and charges have di sappeared and currents are fl owi ng around the i nsi de
S
E
C
.
1
4
]
T
t
l
l
i
l
L
Y
S
O
N
A
N
T
S
Y
S
T
,
Y
M
1
5
2
.
-
5

16 I I V71{()[)[(: YI ()l V [si n-. 14

of the cavi ti es, produci ng u magneti c fi el d al ong the hol e porti on of the
cavi ti es. Fi gure 113b depi cts the currents anti I i cl ds at thi s i nstant;
Fi g. 1.13c shojvs the di sposi ti on of charges ti nd el ectri c fi el ds another
quarter peri od l ater.
~=1
n =2
n=3
%.4
FI G. 1. 14.Fi el d and charge di stri buti ons for the four pri nci paf modes of an ei ght-osci l l ator
magnetron.
Osci l l ati ons of thi s character are cal l ed r-mode osci l l ati ons from the
fact that the phase di fference between adjacent resonators i s m. Other
modes are possi bl e, however , and each i s characteri zed by varyi ng phaae
di fferences among the ei ght coupl ed resonators that compri se thi s
SEC. 1.4] THE RESONANT SYSTEM 17
parti cul ar resonant system. The number of possi bl e modes i s r educed
by the fact that the resonator system i s a cl osed one and the total phase
shi ft around the resonator system must be a mul ti pl e n of 27r, wher e n
i s cal l ed the mode number. For an ei ght-resonator magnetron, the
i mportant modes are n = 1, 2, 3, 4. I n general n = 1, 2, 3, . . . , N/2
wher e N i s the number of resonators. The phase di fferences between the
resonators i n the exampl e chosen for n = 1, 2, 3, 4 are r/4, rr/2, 3r/4, and
m. The ,charge and el ectri c fi el d di stri buti on for these modes i s i l l ustrated
i n Fi g. 1.14. I n pri nci pl e, one woul d al so expect modes correspondi ng
to n > N/2 i n whi ch the phase di fference between resonators i s some
mul ti pl e of m correspondi ng to harmoni cs of the i ndi vi dual resonators.
These modes apparentl y are uni mportant to the operati on of magnetrons
and have onl y rarel y been observed. Fi gure 3.7c shows the charge
di stri buti on for thi s harmoni c type of osci l l ati on.
A mor e seri ous compl i cati on ari ses from the twofol d degener acy of
some of the N/2-modes di scussed above. The ampl i tudes of osci l l ati on
of the separate resonator segments may be consi dered as poi nts on a
cl osed standi ng-wave pattern contai ni ng a number of wavel engths equal
to the mode number. The degener ate forms of each mode cor r espond
to a rotati on of thi s standi ng wave so that the posi ti ons of the nodes and
onti nodes are i nterchanged. Fi gure 1.15 shows vi ews of a magnetron
i n a pl ane paral l el to the cathode and at the same ti me opened out so
that the anode faces l i e i n a pl ane. The cl osed l i nes surroundi ng the
segments r epr esent the magneti c fl ux, and the numbers on the faces of
the segments i ndi cate the maxi mum charge. The smoothed-out di s-
tri buti on of charge around the anode i s shown bel ow each. Ei ght such
vi ews are shown representi ng the four pri nci pal resonances or modes,
each wi th thei r two degener ate forms. One of the degener ate forms of
the (n = 4)-mode corresponds to a condi ti on of zer o charge on ever y
segment and thus does not exi st.
Thi s nondegenerate characteri sti c
of the (n = N/2)-mode i s an i mportant feature of r r -mode operati on.
I f al l the resonators are i denti cal , the frequenci es of these degener ate
modes are i denti cal . I n actual magnetrons, asymmetri es usual l y exi st
and the degener ate forms have sl i ghtl y di fferent frequenci es. As a
general rul e, then, i t may be stated that the number of modes encoun-
ter ed i s equal to N 1. The questi on of the frequenci es of these
(N I )-modes can best be di scussed by consi deri ng fi rst an unstrapped
anode bl ock such as i s shown i n Fi g. 113.
Each of these resonant cavi ti es i s si mi l ar to a si mpl e osci l l ati ng
ci rcui t consi sti ng of a l umped L and C. Al though the i nductance and
capaci tance of a magnetron cavi ty i s not stri ctl y l umped, the i nductance
of the osci l l ator resi des mai nl y i n the ci rcul ar hol e, and the capaci tance
mai nl y between the paral l el pl ane surfaces of the sl ot. Si nce the fr e-
18
I NTRODUCTI ON [SEC. 14
quency i s a functi on of the product LC, i t i s possi bl e to r epr esent one
resonant cavi ty by a conventi onal paral l el resonant ci rcui t whose fr e-
quency i s gi ven by f = (1/27r) (1/ VLC). Consi deri ng the frequency of
EIEIEIElMilFIEi
AL+++p&+un=4.++&+j++
FI G. 1. 15.Vi ew fr om the cathode of an opened-out magnetron showi ng the mag-
neti c fi el ds and charge di stri buti on for the four pri nci pal modes each wi th i ts two degenerate
forms.
the resonant system as a whol e, i t shoul d be noted that the arrangement
of these cavi ti es i s such that for the desi red or x-mode of operati on,
thei r i ndi vi dual Cs and Ls are al l connected i n paral l el . Thus
the effecti ve capaci tance for the whol e magnetron osci l l ator i s NC and the
SEC.1.4] THE RESONANT SYSTEM 1!?
effecti ve i nductance is L/ N, wher e N i s the number of resonatora. The
frequency of the magnetron i s thus nearl y that of an i ndi vi dual resonator.
The frequenci es of the vari ous modes wi l l , i n general , di ffer. Thi s
maybe seen byreferri ng to Fi g. l 14 and observi ng that the di stri buti on
of charge for the vari ous modes i s not the same and thus the effecti ve
capaci tance for the vari ous modes wi l l be di fferent. The same coul d
be sai d wi th r egar d to the currents and effecti ve i nductances, so that
di fferent frequenci es are to be expected. Unfortunatel y, the di fference
i n frequenci es of the modes, or mode separati on as i t i s cal l ed, i s not so
great as i s desi rabl e. A separati on of 5 to 20 per cent between the
desi red mode and the nearest one to i t
i s needed.
Fi gure 1.16 shows the effect of
strappi ng on the wavel engths of the
modes of an ei ght-osci l l ator 10-cm mag-
netron. Wavel engths for an un-
strapped tube are shown, and i t i s seen
that the r or (n = 4)-mode has a
separati on of l ess than 2 per cent from
the (n = 3)-mode. The frequenci es
of these modes depend upon the hei ght
of the end spaces, but for practi cal
structures they are al ways qui te cl ose
together . As a further compl i cati on,
FI G, 1.16.Effect of strappi ng on
the mode separati on of an ei ght-osci l -
I ator magnetron.
ea~h of these modes, except the r-mode, i s a cl ose doubl et. Chapter 2
deal s wi th the probl em of the unstrapped resonant system i n detai l .
The effect of addi ng straps to an unstrapped resonant system i s to
i ncrease the separati on of the m or (n = N/2)-mode from i ts nearest
nei ghbor, usual l y the (N/2 I )-mode. I n Fi g. 1.16, the mode spectrum
of a si ngl e-ri nged strapped magnetron i s shown. The mmode separati on
i s now seen to be over 10 per cent. Even gr eater mode separati on i s
possi bl e i f l arger or mor e straps are i ntroduced. Several forms of
strappi ng are shown i n Fi g. 4.1.
The expl anati on of the effect of strappi ng can be made i n several
ways. The si mpl est i s to concei ve of the strap as mai ntai ni ng m-mode
osci l l ati ons by tyi ng together poi nts that for thi s type of osci l l ati on
remai n at the same potenti al . A mor e sophi sti cated expl anati on ari ses
from a consi derati on of the effecti ve capaci tance and i nductance of the
straps for the vari ous modes. For mmode operati on the concentrati on
of charge on the strap i s a maxi mum and the effecti ve capaci tance of the
strap i s rel ati vel y l arge. For any other mode the potenti al di fference
between adjacent segments wi l l be l ess, resul ti ng i n l ess charge on the
strap and thus decreasi ng the effecti ve capaci tance that i t contri butes to
20
1.VI WL)UCZI ON
[SEC.14
the resonant system. Al so, for other modes, currents ti l l fl ow al ong the
enti re strap, decreasi ng the effecti ve i nductance of the resonant cavi ty.
Thus the straps present both a r educed capaci tance and a r educed i nduct-
ance for al l non--modes, and the frequency of these modes i s i ncreased
wi th r espect to the r-mode. A detai l ed quanti tati ve anal ysi s of strapped
resonant systems i s gi ven i n Chap. 4.
Certai n types of magnetrons, par-
ti cul arl y l ow-frequency and l ow-power ones, have a good mode separati on
even wi thout straps. I n these cases strappi ng does not i mprove thei r
performance, but i n general the i ncrease i n stabi l i ty and effi ci ency resul ti ng
from strappi ng i s so great that straps are consi dered essenti al . The addl -
~ Wavegui deoutpul
i ron
pol e
pece
- output
transformer
FI G. 1.1 7.Cross-sccti 0rLal vi ews of ri si ng-sun magnetron.
ti on of straps to the ori gi nal Bri ti sh magnetron resul ted i n a major i mprove-
ment i n performance. A great deal of the errati c changi ng of the mode of
osci l l ati on characteri sti c of the unstrapped tube was el i mi nated; the
effi ci ency was i mproved; and operati on at hi gher-power l evel s was possi -
bl e. For exampl e, the earl y Bri ti sh unstrapped magnetrons oper ated
ver y unstabl y, had effi ci enci es rangi ng from 15 per cent to 40 per cent, and
wer e pr one to errati c mode shi fti ng, whi l e the strapped vari ety showed
effi ci enci es consi stentl y above 35 per cent and, over a consi derabl e
range of i nput condi ti ons, rarel y shi fted modes.
At hi gh frequenci es (above 10,000 Me/see), straps become qui te
smal l and mechani cal l y di ffi cul t to i ncorporate i nto the magnetrons.
I n addi ti on, thei r smal l spaci ng resul ts i n l arge copper l osses and thus
l ower magnetron effi ci enci es.
Adequate mode separati on i n these hi gh-
SEC. 1.4] THE RESO.\ A.\ T SYSTE.lf 21
frequency tubes i s sti l l essenti al . The ri si ng-sun magnetron i s a most
successful anode-bl ock desi gn for produci ng good mode separati on at
hi gh frequenci es that does not possess the di sadvantages of strappi ng.
Exampl es of thi s desi gn are shown i n Fi g. 1.17. The essenti al features
of the ri si ng-sun desi gn are the al ternatel y l arge and smal l resonators.
When osci l l ati ng i n the desi red mode the charge on the segment ends i s
al ternati ng pl us and mi nus, as shown i n Fi g. 3.7a, and the frequency i s
i ntermedi ate between that of a l arge and a smal l resonant cavi ty. The
r-f vol tage across the l arge cavi ti e~ i s l arger than that across the smal l
cavi ti es, and as a resul t the r-f fi el ds extendi ng i nto the
i nteracti on space from the segments are not uni form, as
shown i n Fi g. 1.13, but al ternate between some l arge and
smal l val ues. Fortunatel y thi s i nteracti on-space fi el d
appears to be nearl y as effi ci ent as a uni form one. The
pecul i ar mode spectrum of a typi cal ri si ng-sun anode
bl ock i s shown i n Fi g. 1.18. As an exampl e an 18-
resonator magnetron i s chosen because one of the mai n
advantages of the ri si ng-sun desi gn i s i ts effecti veness
when a l arge number of cavi ti es i s needed.
The di fference between the mode spectrum of a
strapped resonant system and a ri si ng-sun system i s
conspi cuous. The desi rabl e operati ng mode i n both
cases i s the N/2- or r-mode, but i n the strapped system
ther-mode i s the l ongest wavel ength, whi l e i n the ri si ng-
sun system the r-mode l i es between groups of modes at
a l onger and shor ter wavel ength. Opti mum separati on
between the r-mode and the l ong and short wave-l ength
nei ghbors, whi ch i n general shoul d not be the maxi mum
possi bl e, i s obtai ned by adjusti ng the rati o of the fr e-
quenci es of the l arge and smal l cavi ti es or by other
means such as cl osi ng off the ends of the anode bl ock (Fi g. 11.12).
The expl anati on of thi s mode spectrum i s gi ven i n Chap. 3 i n terms
of an equi val ent ci rcui t and al so by fi el d theor y methods. Thi s mode
spectrum can be vi sual i zed by consi deri ng the ri si ng-sun anode bl ock as
consi sti ng of two resonant systems, one compri si ng the smal l cavi ti es
and the other the l arge cavi ti es. Each of these systems by i tsel f woul d
have the type of mode spectrum of an unstrapped anode bl ock wi th N/2
resonators. Some coupl i ng exi sts, however , between the correspondi ng
modes of these two systems, and the resul ti ng frequenci es di ffer from those
of the i sol ated systems by an amount that depends on the degr ee of
coupl i ng. I n Fi g. 1.18 the modes numbered 1 to 4 cor r espond to the
fi rst four modes of the ni ne l arge resonators, and the modes numbered
8 to 5 cor r espond to the fi rst four modes of the ni ne l arge resonators.
I
2.CQ 1
1.50 2
A7r
:
-xi i
n
100
F
9 (r)
8
i
5
0.50
F I G . l .18.
Wavel ength di stri -
buti on 0[ the ni ne
pri nci pal modes of
aI I l S-Osci l l ator ri s-
i ng-sun magnetron
hav,ng a rati o of
cavi ty depth r, =
1.9.
22
I NTRODUCTI ON
[SEC. 1.4
Weak coupl i ng exi sts between 8 and 1, 2 and 7, etc., and thei r frequenci es
are thus onl y sl i ghtl y al tered.
The coupl i ni between the r-m-odes of
the two systems i s strong, however ,
FI G. 1.19.Cukrents i n osci l l ators of
ri si ng-sun magnetron showi ng ori gi n of
ci rcul ati ng cur r ent.
and they combi ne to pr oduce the
operati ng or (n = 9)-mode i nter-
medi ate between the two sets of
modes and an (n = O)-mode whose
frequency i s zer o.
Associ ated wi th the r-mode of
a ri si ng-sun resonant system ther e
i s a net r-f cur r ent ci rcul ati ng
around the enti re anode \vi th the
same frequency as the r-mode.
The sour ce of thi s net ci rcul ati ng
cur r ent mav be seen i n Fi rz. 1.19.
The r-f currents i n the l arge cavi ti es exceed those i n the smal l ones as i s
shown by the l ength of the arrows i n each cavi ty; as the l arge cavi ty cur-
rents are al ways i n the same di recti on around the anode, a net ci rcul at-
i n~ cur r ent resul ts. The di recti on of thi s at the moment chosen i s shown
b; a dotted arrow.
Thi s ci rcul ati ng cur r ent can
r educe the effi ci ency of the mag-
netr on i f the magneti c fi el d i s such
that the cycl otr on frequency of
the el ectrons, as gi ven by Eq. (1),
i s cl ose to that of the magnetron.
Fi nal l y men t i o n shoul d be
made her e of some of the vari ous
forms of resonant systems that
have been i nvesti gated. By far
the most usual and successful type
i s that exempl i fi ed by the ori gi nal
Bri ti sh desi gn (see Fi g. 1.11), and
the r e 1a t e d ri si ng-sun desi gn.
Another type that has been the
subject of consi derabl e experi -
mentati on but i s not general l y
used i s shown i n Fi g. 1.20. The
essenti al di sti ncti on between thi s
and the mor e usual cavi ty type i s
that r-f currents fl ow axi al l y al ong
FI G. 1.20, Magnetmr, anode bl ock havi ng
l arge axi al r -f currents.
the segments i nstead of the predomi nantl y radi al currents of the conven-
ti onal cavi ty type. Many vari ati ons of thi s basi c desi gn have been tri ed,
but r ne has been found to possess any advantage over the cavi ty type.
SEC. 1.5] THE CATHODE 23
Other forms of resonant systems have been i nvesti gated, but i n most
cases they wer e found unsati sfactory. Exampl es of such attempts are a
l i near resonator system and the so-cal l ed i nsi de out magnetron i n
whi ch the cathode surrounds the anode bl ock. I n both these desi gns,
osci l l ati ons i n the desi red mode wer e not observed. The performance
of al l these vari ous types of resonant systems has been poor i n compari son
wi th the cavi ty type. That thi s i s due to some basi c reason seems
unl i kel y; i t i s mor e l i kel y a consequence of the fact that the desi gns have
not r ecei ved the attenti on gi ven to the cavi ty type. I n any event, no
further menti on wi l l be made of them.
1.5. The Cathode.The cathode pl ays a much mor e i mportant r ol e
i n the operati on of magnetrons than does the cathode of any other
form of tube. I n addi ti on to bei ng a sour ce of el ectrons, a magnetron
cathode must di ssi pate the rel ati vel y l arge amount of heat resul ti ng
from back-bombardi ng el ectrons. By means of so-cal l ed end shi el ds
i t must pr event the axi al escape of el ectrons from the i nteracti on space,
and these end shi el ds shoul d not emi t el ectrons. The cathode i s al so
part of the resonant system, as r-f currents are i nduced on i ts surface.
As a resul t of back bombardment, wi de changes i n the cathode tem-
perature occur between starti ng and operati ons condi ti ons whi ch com-
pl i cate the probl em of emi ssi on. I n pul sed tubes not onl y do these
changes i n temperature occur , but extr emel y hi gh peak currents are
extr acted from the cathode. Current densi ti es of from 10 to 100 amp
per cm are obtai ned from oxi de cathodes, dependi ng on the pul se l ength
and other condi ti ons.
The si ze of the cathode must be hel d wi thi n cl ose l i mi ts so that
el ectrons are rel eased to the space charge at a poi nt wher e the r-f fi el d
condi ti ons are pr oper for the effi ci ent functi oni ng of the space charge.
Too smal l a radi us resul ts i n mode i nstabi l i ti es; too l arge a radi us resul ts
i n i neffi ci ent operati on. The opti mum si ze i n most cases i s such that
r,/r. equal s or sl i ghtl y exceeds (N 4)/ (N + 4), wher e r. and r~ are
the cathode and anode radi i and N i s the number of resonators. The
end shi el ds may be smal l i f they are l ocated wi thi n the anode bl ock and
must i ncrease i n si ze as the di stance above the anode i s i ncreased. No
defi ni te speci fi cati ons me possi bl e, as the curvature of the magneti c fi el d
at the ends of the anode al so contri butes to preventi ng the escape of the
el ectrons.
I t i s not surpri si ng i n vi ew of these mani fol d requi rements that the
cathode consti tutes a major sour ce of troubl e and i n nearl y al l cases i s
the si ngl e el ement that determi nes the l i fe of the magnetron.
Oxi de cathodes i n one form or another have been used i n nearl y al l
pul sed and many c-w magnetrons. They are used i n pul sed magnetrons
because of thei r abi l i ty to emi t ver y l arge currents under pul sed operati on.
24 I NTRODUCTI ON I SEC. 16
They are used i n l ow-power c-w magnetrons because oxi de cathodes are
mor e effi ci ent emi tters and do not i nvol ve l arge heater currents that
i nteract wi th the fi xed magneti c fi el d. The usual emi ssi on troubl es are
encountered, parti cul arl y i n ver y hi gh or ver y l ow power magnetrons
wher e the back-bombardi ng el ectrons are not i n the ener gy range for
effi ci ent producti on of secondary el ectrons.
I n pul sed magnetrons sparki ng (the generati on of bursts of gas)
i s a seri ous probl em. The cathode i s probabl y not whol l y responsi bl e
for thi s phenomenon, but l ocal vapori zati on of the oxi de coati ng i s
observed, accompani ed by the ejecti on of smal l pi eces of the coati ng.
The cathode i s thus presumed to be a major sour ce of troubl e. The
frequency and severi ty of the sparki ng i s i ncreased at hi gh vol tages and
hi gh-current densi ti es, but extr emel y l ow cur r ent densi ti es must be used
to r educe the sparki ng rate essenti al l y to zer o. The emi ssi on and
sparki ng of oxi de cathodes i s consi dered i n detai l i n Part I of Chap. I Z,
together wi th an account of some prel i mi nary i nvesti gati ons on thori a
cathodes. Part I I of Chap. 12 deal s wi th the probl ems of cathode
desi gn.
1.6. The Space Charge.An el ectr on i n the i nteracti on space of a
magnetron i s acted on by a constant magneti c fi el d paral l el to the axi s
of the cathode, a constant radi al el ectri c fi el d resul ti ng from the appl i ed
d-c potenti al , and the varyi ng el ectri c fi el d extendi ng i nto the i nteracti on
space frmn charges concentrated near the ends of the anode-bl ock
segments. Under these condi ti ons the el ectr on i s part of a space charge
wi th extr eme vari ati ons i n densi ty, and the resul ti ng probl em i s one of
consi derabl e compl exi ty whi ch i s understood onl y i n a qual i tati ve way.
No anal yti cal expressi ons rel ati ng such quanti ti es as current, d-c vol tage,
r-f vol tage, and magneti c fi el d have been obtai ned. The qual i tati ve
theor y i s presented her e i n outl i ne. A mor e comprehensi ve r evi ew of
the whol e probl em of magnetron el ectroni cs i s found i n Chap. 6.
Consi der the si mpl e case of a si ngl e el ectr on i n the i nteracti on space
of a magnetron i n the absence of any perturbi ng r-f fi el ds. I n crossed
magneti c and el ectri c fi el ds, ther e i s a for ce eE due to the el ectri c fi el d
and another, (e/c)v X B, due to the magneti c fi el d, wher e E and B are
the el ectri c and magneti c fi el d strengths, e and v are the charge and
vel oci ty of the el ectron, and c i s the vel oci ty of l i ght. The resul ti ng
moti on shown i n Fi g. 1.21 i s approxi matel y r epr esented by superposi ng
a sl ow rotati on around the cathode at nearl y constant radi us RO (the RO
rotati on) and a faster ci rcul ar moti on wi th a smal l er radi us TO(the
TOrotati on). The resul tant of these two moti ons corresponds roughl y
to the moti on of a poi nt on the ci rcumference of a wheel as i t rol l s around
a ci rcl e somewhat smal l er than the cathode i n such a way that i ts center
moves i n a ci rcl e of radi us Ro. The speed of the sl ow RO rotati on i s gi ven
I
Sw. 16] TI I E SPACE CI I ARQE
25
approxi matel y by the rati o E/ B.
The fast TOrotati on corresponds to
the cycl otr on frequency and i s thus determi ned by B al one; i ts angul ar
vel oci ty i s uO= rB/ nl.
Al though the ti ngul ar vel oci ty of thi s TOrota-
ti on i s consttmt, the mugni tude of r Odepends on the i ni ti al ki neti c ener gy
of the el ectr on rmd nmy vary for
di ti erent el ectrons. The m u xi -
mum di stance that any el ectr on
can pr ocer xi to\vurd the r mode
(R, + r-O)i n the absence of r-f
osci l l ati ons i s I i xwf by the rati o
ki B und for good opemti ng con-
di ti ons i s made to be abml t htdf of
the way from cathode to anode.
Thi s descri pti on of the putt] of
a si ngl e el ectr on i s cxrmt onl y for
the case of smal l TOnnd has l i ttl e
si gni fi cance when normal spacc-
charge condi ti ons es i s t. I t i s
gi ven, as i t assi sts i n understand-
i ng the i nteracti on of the el ectrons
wi th the al ternati ng el ectri c fi el ds.
FI O. 1.21.Path fol l owed by n si ngl e el ectron
i n a nonmw.i l l uti l )g mnguetron.
I n an osci l l ati ng magnetron, these el ectrons pass through the r-f
fi el ds, shown i n Fi g. 1.13, and a change i n thei r vel oci ty resul ts. A
somewhat surpri si ng fact i s that those el ectrons whi ch are speeded up
have thei r curvature i ncreased and return to the cathode whi l e those
whi ch are sl owed down have thei r curvature
#E
r educed and move out toward the anode.
J-
U>
To make thi s appear reasonabl e, consi der
Bev ~
the si tuati on shown i n Fi g. 1.22. An el ectr on
T
Ee moves through crossed, uni form el ectri c and
F
U>F
magneti c fi el ds wi th a vel oci ty u that i s normal
to E and B. The for ce equati on under these
u=?
condi ti ons i s
Bev
U<%
~va
=eE+j
c R
(4)
.P
-u
e
Fm. 1,22.Paths of el ec-
wher e R i s the radi us of the orbi t of the el ec-
trons i n cromed el ectri c and
trons (R is posi ti ve for orbi ts curvi ng down).
magneti c fi el ds.
Where the path of the el ectrons i s a strai ght l i ne,
the condi ti on i s obtai ned by l etti ng R = co. Equati on (4) then reduces to
Ec
v=.
B
(5)
I nspecti on of Eq. (4) al so shows that for v < Et/ B the el ectromagneti c
26 I NTRODtrCTI ON [%-, 16
for ce wi l l be r educed and the el ectrons wi l l be defl ected i n the di recti on
of the el ectri c for ce. For v > Et/ B, the defl ecti on wi l l be i n the di recti on
of the magneti c for ce. The defl ecti on that an el ectr on suffers i n thi s
exampl e when speeded up or sl owed down thus corresponds to what
happens i n a magnetron, and i t i s si gni fi cant that the operati ng condi ti ons
are ones for whi ch v N Et/ B.
The separati on of the fast and sl ow el ectrons for an actual magnetron
i s shown i n Fi g, 1.23. Consi der an el ectr on at poi nt A at the i nstant
for whi ch the fi el ds are as shown. The r-f fi el d at thi s poi nt tends to
FI G. 1.23,Paths fol l owed hy el ertmns I n osci l l ati ng magnetron.
speed up the el ectron. As i t speeds l l pj the curvature of i ts path i s
i ncreased, and i t wi l l move al ong a path correspondi ng to the sol i d l i ne and
stri ke the cathode wi th appreci abl e ener gy.
Thi s el ectr on i s thus
r emoved from the space charge and pl ays no further r ol e i n the process
except perhaps to pr oduce a few secondary el ectrons from the cathode.
An el ectr on at poi nt 1?, however , i s i n a decel erati ng r-f el ectri c fi el d. As
a resul t of the reducti on i n i ts vel oci ty, the curvature i s reduced. I f
the frequency of osci l l ati on i s appropri ate, thi s el ectr on wi l l al ways be i n a
decel erati ng fi el d as i t passes befor e sl l ccessi ~e anode segments. The
r-f phase shown i n Fi g, 1.23 i s cor r ect onl y when el ectrons .4 and B are at
the poi nts i ndi cated. The resul t i s that the el ectr on event~l al l y stri kes
SI X. 16] THE SPACE CHARGE 27
the anode fol l owi ng a path of the type shown. Because of retardati on by
the r-f fi el d, thi s el ectr on gi ves up to the r-f fi el d a l arge part of the ener gy
gai ned i n i ts fal l through the d-c fi el d to the anode.
Si nce the el ectr on moves from the cathode to the anode i n a ver y
smal l number of osci l l ati ons, the condi ti on that the el ectr on keep step
wi th the vari ati ons of r-f osci l l ati ons, i n i ts cour se around the cathode,
need not be exactl y sati sfi ed. El ectrons, once i n step wi th the r-f fi el d,
remai n i n thi s state l ong enough to get to the anode even i f thei r angul ar
vel oci ty i s not exactl y cor r ect. Thi s expl ai ns why the operati ng condi -
ti ons of magnetrons are not ver y cri ti cal wi th r espect to the magneti c
fi el d, i nput vol tage, or other quanti ti es that mi ght affect the vel oci ty
of the el ectrons.
Appreci abl e ener gy i s associ ated wi th the TOrotati on. Thi s moti on
takes pl ace, however , i n a substanti al l y constant r-f fi el d, si nce the RO
rotati on keeps the el ectr on i n step wi th the vari ati ons of the r-f fi el d.
As a resul t, the r-f fi el d has l i ttl e effect on the ener gy associ ated wi th
the TOrotati on duri ng the l ast part of the tr ajector y.
Thi s qual i tati ve pi cture shows how those el ectrons whose i ni ti al
phase rel ati onshi p i s such that they absorb ener gy from the r-f fi el d
are el i mi nated at once from the space charge. Thi s i s the resul t of the
fact that such el ectrons stri ke the cathode i n the cour se of the fi rst r~
peri od. On the other hand, el ectrons that l eave the cathode at such a
ti me and pl ace that they transfer ener gy to the r-f fi el d conti nue around
the cathode i n a cycl oi dal path whi ch expands toward the anode, trans-
ferri ng to the r-f fi el d the ener gy that they gai n from the d-c fi el d.
I n addi ti on to descri bi ng the paths taken by i ndi vi dual el ectrons i n
the i nteracti on space, i t i s hel pful to consi der the behavi or of the space
charge as a whol e. I n the absence of r-f fi el ds, the space charge forms a
rotati ng cyl i ndri cal sheath around the cathode. L-ri der the i nfl uence
of the r-f fi el ds, fol l owi ng the reasoni ng above, the el ectrons i n thi s
space charge that are i n an accel erati ng r-f fi el d travel back toward
the cathode, whi l e those i n a decel erati ng r-f fi el d travel tol ~ard the anode.
As a resul t the rotati ng cyl i ndri cal sheath i s di storted (for an ei ghti
osci l l ator magnetron) i nto a smal l er cyl i nder wi th four spokel i ke ri dges
runni ng paral l el to i ts axi s. The confi gurati on taken by the space
charge i s shown i n Fi g. 1.24. Thi s space-charge confi gurati on rotates
wi th an angul ar vel oci ty that keeps i t i n step wi th the al ternati ng r-f
charges on the anode segments, and the ends of these spokes may be
thought of as brushi ng by the ends of the anode segments and thus
transferri ng charge from the cathode to the anode.
These spokes of space charge are rather narrow and have fai rl y sharp
boundari es. Thi s i s a consequence of the focusi ng acti on of the r-f fi el ds,
the nature of whi ch may be seen by consi deri ng Fi g. 1.25. Her e one of
I .VTROD1CT1O,V [SEC.16
FI G. 125.-Di agram showi n~ focusi ng w-ti on of r -i fi el ds on space charge
the space-charge spokes i s shown i n pr oper rel ati on to the r-f fi el ds extend-
i ng i n from the anode scgmcmts, and dashed l i nes show the di recti on of
the d-c el ectri c fi el d. Any el ectr on that, dl l e to an excess i n angul ar
vel oci ty, pr ecedes thi s rotati ng spoke \vo~l l d be at a poi nt such as a.
Her e the radi al component of the r-f fi el d and the d-c fi el d arei n opposi -
ti on, and from the rel ati on u = Et/ B i ts vel oci ty wi l l be reduced, even-
SEC. 1.7] D-C VOLTAGE MAGNETI C-FI ELD RELA TKONSHI P
29
tual l y returni ng i t to the space-charge spoke. The conver se i s tr ue for
an el ectr on that l ags correspondi ng to poi nt b.
When the space-charge
spoke i s opposi te a segment, the di recti on of the r-f fi el d i s such that thi s
focusi ng acti on woul d not take pl ace, but at thi s moment the i ntensi ty
of the fi el ds i s zer o, and the net effect of the fi el ds on the rotati ng space
charge i s to pr oduce the focusi ng acti on menti oned.
The r-f cur r ent set up i n the osci l l ators i s pri nci pal l y a di spl ace-
ment cur r ent pr oduced by thi s rotati ng space charge. As the spokes
of space charge pass i n front of an anode segment, a posi ti ve charge i s
i nduced on i ts surface.
Hal f a peri od l ater, thi s posi ti ve charge has
fl owed around the back of the two adjacent osci l l ators to the t}vo adjacent
anode segments, and the spoke of the space charge has r otated to a
posi ti on i n front of the next anode segment.
I n addi ti on to these di spl acement currents, conducti on currents are
pr oduced bythefl o\v ofel ectrons from space charge to the anode. These
el ectrons, however , arri ve at the anode at such a ti me as to consti tute a
conducti on cur r ent 90 out of phase wi th the r-f vol tage and thus do not
contri bute ener gy to the osci l l ati ons.
1.7. D-c Vol tage Magneti c-fi el d Rel ati onshi p.The concepts di s-
cussed i n Sees. 1.4 and 1.61eadto a si mpl e expressi on rel ati ng the operat-
i ng vol tage V, the magneti c fi el d B, the wavel ength, and the anode and
cathode radi i , respecti vel y raand r,. Agai n as an exampl e the magnetron
shown i n Fi g. 1.10 i s chosen. For effi ci ent operati on of the magnetron
V and 1? must be such that the angul ar vel oci ty of the el ectr on keeps
pace wi th the changes i n phase of the resonators. Thus an el ectr on
must move from a poi nt opposi te any segment to a poi nt opposi te the
next i n one-hal f a peri od. Assumi ng that the el ectr on i s i ntermedi ate
bet\veen the cathode and anode thi s di stance i s
-( )
Zr r. + l -c
N2
wher e N i s the number of resonators. The vel oci ty must then be
wher e j i s the frequency of the magnetron. I ntroduci ng the mode
number
N
~=
2
and Ao=;
*, = Tc(r. + r.)
ni O
(6)
30
I N TROD UCTI O.V
[sm. 17
From Eq. (5) the vel oci ty of the el ectr on i s gi ven by o = Ec/ 13; and i f
one makes the si mpl i fyi ng assumpti on that the fi el d E i s gi ven by the
rel ati on E = V/ (r~ r.),
v.
v=B(T. 7-.)
Equati ng (6) and (7) gi ves
v = ;0 (r-: ?-:)B.
(7)
(8)
I f thi s probl em i s sol ved ri gorousl y, Eq. (8) becomes
(
v = & (?-: ?-:) B q-: r:
)
(9)
whi ch i s of the same form as Eq. (3), Sec. 11, devel oped by Posth{l mus.
Equati on (9) reduces to
-@%)
v vol ts= 3W
nO
(l o)
Thi s vol tage (whi ch i s a l i near functi on of B) i s known as the Hartree
vol tage after Hartree 1 who cl e~el oped thi s theor y. Thi s vol tage i s that
at whi ch osci l l ati ons shoul d start provi ded at the same ti me that B i s
suffi ci entl y l arge so that the undi storted space charge does not extend
to the anode.
Fi gure 1.26, whi ch i s known as a Hartree di agram, expl ai ns the
si tuati on. Thi s i s a pl ot of Eq. (10) together wi th that of the Hul l
cutoff parabol a gi ven by Eq. (2). Thi s di agram i s based on the mag-
netr on showm i n Fi g. 110. To the l eft of the cutoff parabol a no osci l -
l ati ons occur as ordi nary anode cur r ent i s dra!vn. To the ri ght of thi s
parabol a no cur r ent fl ows unl ess osci l l ati ons exi st to di stort the space
charge unti l i t touches the anode.
Thi s di storti on i s dcpcndcmt on the
exi stence of the pr oper el ectr on vel oci ti es just di scussed, and ther efor e
cur r ent fl ows onl y when V and B cor r espond to a poi nt near one of the
strai ght l i nes representi ng the di fferent val ues of n.
Aote that as n
decreases, the el ectr on must travel a gr eater di stance around the cathode
i n one peri od and thus a l arger E/ B i s requi red. Thi s i s evi dent from
the (n = 3)- and (n = 2)-l i nes whose posi ti on was cal cul ated assumi ng
the same wavel engths as the (TZ= 4)-mode. Consi derabl e departure
from these l i nes i s obser ved experi mental l y as a resul t of drawi ng l arge
currents. The dotted l i nes above and paral l el to the (n = 4)-l i ne show
the or der of magni tude of thi s effect for di fferent currents.
I mportant rel ati onshi ps among X, V, B, and TCcan be obtai ned from
the formul a for the cutoff parabol a Eq. (3) and the Hartree resonance
formul a Eq. (10). Assumi ng a constant rati o rJ ra, consi der the effect
1Hartree,CVD Repor t.
i ?Ec. 1.7] D-C VOLTAGE MAGNETI C-FI ELD RELATI ONSHI P
60
50
40 -
.?
.E
8 30
~
20
10
0
FTQ. 1.27.Anarrayof anodebl ocksof di fferentwavel engthandpoweroutput. ToP
r ow:l o-cm, pul sepower2500to 0.1 kw; second row: 3,2 cm, pul se power 600 to 0.025 kw;
ti ngl e bl ock and i nsert 1.25 cm, 80 kw.
32
I NTRODUCTI ON [SEC. 1.8
of keepi ng B and A fi xed and varyi ng r..
I n Eq. (9), Di sproporti onal
to r:, so that operati ng condi ti ons remai n unchanged i f the operati ng
vol tage i s i ncreased proporti onal to the square of the anode radi us.
Thi s rel ati onshi p i si l l ustrated i n Fi g. 1.27. Theupper rowareal l l o-cm
anode bl ocks whi ch have operati ng vol tages of 50, 25, 15, 5, and 1 kv,
respecti vel y. The reducti on i n anode di arnete rwi thvol tag ei sevi dent,
al though the number of resonators i s not the same for al l of these bl ocks
and some al l owance must be made on thi s account.
The second r o\v
shows a cor r espondhg seri es of 3.2-cm anode bl ocks whose operati ons
vol tages are 30, 20, 5, and 2.5 kv.
I t may be seen from the same equati ons that i f V i s kept constant,
TOmust vary roughl y as AOand B as l /AO i n or der to pr eser ve equi val ent
operati ng condi ti ons. A si mpl i fi ed pr oof of these rel ati onshi ps i s possi bl e,
negl ecti ng the fi nal term i n Eq. (10) whi ch, i n general , i s smal l compared
wi th B the product (r: r:)B - X. Si nce ra/r. i s assumed constant,
r~B N 1 and from Eq. (3) Sec. 1
TOB = const.
Combi ni ng the two proporti onal i ti es gi ves the stati c proporti onal i ti es
T.-i
and
Two major di ffi cul ti es i n maki ng ver y short wavel ength magnetrons
are i nherent i n these expressi ons: The cathode and anode become exces-
si vel y smal l , and the requi rements for magneti c fi el ds excessi vel y hi gh.
1.8. Component Modes.I n Sec. 14 the modes of the resonant
system are di scussed; and i f l ongi tudi nal osci l l ati ons are excl uded, the
number of these modes i s stated to be N 1, each of whi ch i s charac-
teri zed by a certai n fi el d di stri buti on and frequency. The most effi -
ci ent process i s based on the equal i ty of the angul ar vel oci ti es of the
rotati ng space charge and rotati ng r-f fi el ds. Another possi bi l i ty i s
the exci tati on of a mode by the i nteracti on of the space charge wi th
one of the components of the r-f fi el d rotati ng l ess rapi dl y than the
fundamental .
These components of the fundamental mode patterns are associ ated
wi th the fact that the vari ati on i n i ntensi ty of the r-f fi el d around the
anode i s not si nusoi dal . The nonsi nusoi dal spati al vari ati on can be
r epr esented by a sum of Fouri er terms, each of whi ch corresponds to a
cl osed rotati ng wave contai ni ng a number of cycl es, or compl ete peri ods,
di fferent from the fundamental and rotati ng wi th a di fferent vel oci ty.
SEC. 1.8] COMPONENT MODI M
33
These components are l i mi ted, accordi ng to Hartree,l to those whi ch
contai n a number of compl ete peri ods around the ci rcumference, gi ven
by the rel ati onshi p
y=n+mN, (11)
wher e m i s a whol e number, n the mode number of the fundamental ,
and N the number of resonators.
The angul ar vel oci ty of these compo-
nents i s gi ven by
(12)
wher e j i s the frequency. Equati on (11) appl i es onl y to the case of the
symmetri c anode bl ock, whether i t i s strapped or not.
These components have a physi cal si gni fi cance. I f the el ectrons
formi ng the undi storted space charge have angul ar vel oci ti es cl ose to
that of one of these components, the effect of the r-f fi el d wi l l be cumul a-
ti ve and the space charge wi l l be di storted i nto the form shown i n Fi g.
1.24, but wi th a number of spokes equal to ~. The fi el d of the compo-
nents (or fundamental ) that have a di fferent angul ar vel oci ty wi l l not
remai n i n phase wi th the el ectrons, and i ts effect wi l l average out after
a few cycl es.
Tabl e 11 shows the val ues of 7 for the i mportant components of the
four modes of an ei ght-resonator magnetron. Negati ve val ues of ~ mean
that the component i s rotati ng i n a di recti on opposi te to the fundamental
and val ues of ~ for m = O cor r espond to the fundamental fi el d pattern
of the modes.
TABLE 1,1.VALUES OF T (NUDER OF CYCLES) FOE CERTAI N COMPONENTS OF THE
FOURPRI NCI PAL MODESOFANEI GHT-RESONATOE MAGNETRON
m
o
1
+1
2
+2
. . .
n
1 2
1
1 2
7 6
+8 +10 +9
15 14
+17 +18
,..
I
. . . . . . . .
I
3
3
5
+11 +10
13
+19
. . . . . ,.
4
4
-4
+12 +11
12
+20
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Si nce for ever y val ue of n ther e i s a fundamental rotati ng i n both
di recti ons, produci ng the fami l i ar standi ng-wave pattern, ther~ are two
I Hartree, CVD Report.
34
I NTRODUCTI ON [SEC. 18
compl ete sets of components each rotati ng i n opposi te di recti ons.
Thi s
i s i mpl i ed by the f si gn i n Eq. (12).
Al though the number of components i s i nfi ni te, onl y val ues of y
for + m up to 2 are gi ven, si nce Kl gher val ues are of no practi cal i mpor-
tance.
Actual l y, mode exci tati on i n the case of symmetri c resonant
systems has been obser ved onl y for the (m = 1)-component.
The
uni mportance of hi gher m val ues i s probabl y due to the fact that they
are necessari l y associ ated wi th l arge val ues of \-y\and that the fai l i ng
off i n i ntensi ty of these components i s proporti onal to (r/r~)~. Mor eover
l arge -y val ues gi ve ri se to val ues for the YA product consi derabl y I argei
than that of the r-mode and requi re di fferent operati ng condi ti ons.
The nomencl ature -y/n/N has been adopted to desi gnate fi rst the y
component responsi bl e for the exci tati on of the mode number n i n a
magnetron havi ng N osci l l ators.
Thus the mmode i n an ei ght-osci l l ator
magnetron, when exci ted through i ts fundamental , i s r epr esented by the
symbol 4/4/8, and the (n = 3)-mode when exci ted by i ts fundamental by
3/3/8. I f the (n = 3)-mode i s exci ted through the (y = 5)-compo-
nent, i t i s desi gnated by 5/3/8. The 3/3/8 and 3/5/8 modes have
i denti cal frequenci es and r-f characteri sti cs.
I n unstrapped magnetrons and l ess frequentl y i n strapped magnetrons
component exci tati on of unwanted modes i s a sour ce of consi derabl e
troubl e. Di ffi cul ti es are most l i kel y to ari se when the product 7X for
the r-mode and an unwanted mode are nearl y equal , as under these
condi ti ons both have the same angul ar vel oci ty and may be exci ted by
the same rotati ng space charge.
The 2J32 (Fi g. 1.10) i s a good exampl e.
Thi s tube has a tendency to osci l l ate duri ng occasi onal pul ses i n the 5/3/8
mode. I t i s si gni fi cant, however , that i ncreased strappi ng of thi s tube,
whi ch decreases the wavel ength of the (n = 3)-resonance wi th r espect
to the (n = 4)-resonance, resul ted i n mode changi ng by maki ng the
yAs for the two modes mor e nearl y equal . Thi s probl em i s consi dered
i n detai l i n Chap. 8.
I n ri si ng-sun magnetrons an extensi on of these pri nci pl es must be
made due to the two sets of resonators. The mode spectrum (Fi g.
1.18) shows that the coupl i ng between these two sets of resonators i s
smal l except for the mmode and (i n consi deri ng the i nteracti on of the
fi el d components of the modes wi th the space charge) that the modes
associ ated wi th l arge and smal l sets can practi cal l y be tr eated separatel y
as though each consi sted of a resonant system consi sti ng of N/2 osci l l a-
tors. Equati on (1) then becomes
(13)
When appl yi ng thi s rel ati onshi p to the l ong- and short-wavel ength
SEC. 1.9] EFFI CI ENCY AATD FREQUENCY STABI LI TY 35
gr oup shown i n Fi g. 1.18, the resonances marked n = 8, 7, 6, 5, 4 shoul d
be assi gned the val ues n = 1, 2, 3, 4, respecti vel y. Tabl e 1.2 gi ves
the val ues of -y for si gni fi cant ms for a typi cal ri si ng-sun magnetron
shown i n Fi g. 1017 havi ng 18 osci l l ators. Both l ong- and short-wave-
TABLE1.2.VALUESOF~ mto~ m. 3 FOR RI SI NG-SUN MAGNETRON mm N = 18
m
o
1
+1
2
+2
. . .
. . .
1
1
8
10
17
+19
.
...
n or n
2
2
7
11
16
+20
.,.
3
3
6
12
15
+21
. . . .
,..
4
4
5
13
14
+22
. . . .
. . . .
l ength resonances are obser ved to compete wi th (n = 9)- or r-mode
operati on.
Exci tati on of the l ong-wavel ength resonances occurs through the
(m = 1)-component, as these gi ve -y val ues such that the ~1s may be
cl ose to the val ue of 7X for the m-mode (the ks are l arger, and the ~
smal l er). From Tabl e 1.2 i t i s seen that components for val ues of m
other than m = 1 need not be consi dered, as the yk product wi l l not
be cl ose to the 7X for the r-mode for the l onger-wavel ength set.
Exci tati on of the short-wavel ength resonances can, on y~ product
consi derati on, occur through the (m = + I )-component. Her e the 7X
product may approxi mate that of the r-mode, si nce the Xs are shor ter
and the ys l arger than the r-mode val ues. Actual l y onl y the components
of (n = 1)-mode have ever been obser ved to i nter fer e wi th mmode
operati on.
The theoreti cal basi s for these resul ts i s found i n Sec. 3.2, and i ts
appl i cati on to practi cal magnetron desi gn i s consi dered i n Sec. 11.6.
1.9. Effi ci ency and Frequency Stabi l i ty.-The uses to whi ch a magne-
tr on i s put are usual l y such that i t i s desi rabl e to attai n both hi gh effi -
ci ency and hi gh-frequency stabi l i ty agai nst changes i n l oad and changes
i n i nput condi ti ons. These objecti ves are not consi stent, and most
magnetrons r epr esent a compromi se between effi ci ency and stabi l i ty
that depends on the parti cul ar appl i cati on. The probl em i s a most
i mportant one i n magnetron desi gn.
For any gi ven frequency, a vari ety of osci l l ator confi gurati ons i s
possi bl e correspondi ng to di fferent osci l l ator i mpedances of L/ C rati os,
and the effi ci ency and frequency stabi l i ty desi red determi ne the pr oper
36 I NTRODUCTI ON [SEC. 1.9
osci l l ator i mpedance to use. Fi gure 128showst hreeformsof osci l l ators
arranged i n or der of i ncreasi ng i mpedance.1
The effi ci ency q \vi th whi ch a magnetron conver ts the i nput power
i nto r-f power at the output (cathode power i s excl uded) i s gi ven by
~ = (power i nputl osses)/power i nput.
The l osses ari se from the
(a) (b) (c)
FI Q.1.2 S.Three common type.qof magnetro,, cavi ti es: (a) sl ot; (h)hol e and sl ot; (c) vane.
bombardment of the anode by the el ectrons and from the ci rcul ati ng r-f
currents produci ng 12R l osses i n the copper and other materi al s. To
di sti ngui sh these two sources of ener gy l oss i t i s customary to express the
over-al l effi ci ency q of a magnetron as the product of the el ectroni c
. .
effi ci ency q, and cmcul t effi ci ency q, or q = q.q.. The el ectroni c effi ci ency
i s defi ned as the fracti on of the
10
i nput power that i s conver ted i nto
0.8
r-f power wi thi n the anode bl ock,
and the ci rcui t effi ci ency i s the
~ 0.6
\
fracti on of thi s r-f power whi ch i s
.3
.Y
s 0.4
transmi tted to the l oad. The prob-
l em of hi gh effi ci ency may then
0.2 be restated as one of maki ng the
o
7
product ~,q. a maxi mum.
o PI 2 3
Both ~. and ~, are affected by
Y, i n arbi traryuni ts
FI G.
the i mpedance of the osci l l ators,
1.29,Effi ci enci es as a functi on of
osci l l ator i mpedance y..
but i n di fferent ways. The ci rcui t
effi ci ency q, i s hi ghest i n hi gh-i m-
pedance osci l l ators such as shown i n Fi g. 1.28c, si nce the ci rcul ati ng cur-
rents are l ess. I n Chap. 4 i t i s seen that the el ectroni c effi ci ency q. depends
on the r-f vol tage across the osci l l ator gaps i n such away that maxi mum q.
occurs at a l o~ver r-f vol tage than can usual l y be obtai ned i n actual
operati on, and the probl em of i ncreasi ng q. i s ther efor e one of reduci ng
the r-f vol tage for a gi ven power output. The r-f vol tage can be r educed
ei ther by decreasi ng the osci l l ator i mpedance (decreasi ng L/C) or by
coupl i ng the system strongl y to the l oad so as to r educe the amount
I I t shoul d be remarkedthat the straps of a magnetron al so affect the osci l l ator
i mpedance,but for the sakeof brevi ty they are not consi deredher e.
SEC. 110] PERFORI J I ANCE CHARTS AND RI EKE DI AGRAMS
37
of stor ed ener gy. The most effi ci ent osci l l ator confi gurati on i s that
compromi se between a hi gh-i mped.mce osci l l ator gi vi ng hi gh q. and a l ow-
i mpedance oscdl ator gi vi ng hi gh q. whi ch gi ves a maxi mum q,q,. I n
Fi g. 1.29 two curves show the manner i n whi ch q, and T. vary wi th
osci l l ator i mpedance. A thi rd cur ve shows how q vari es, and the opti -
mum i mpedance i s i ndi cated by P.
I ncreasi ng the l oadi ng of the magnetron general l y i ncreases i ts
effi ci ency. Onl y rarel y can the l oadi ng be made so heavy that a decr ease
i n effi ci ency resul ts because the r-f vol tage i s r educed bel ow the opti mum
val ue. I t i s usual l y necessary to pl ace a l ower l i mi t on the frequency
stabi l i ty, and thi s requi rement al ters both the l oadi ng and resonator
i mpedance val ues correspondi ng to maxi mum effi ci ency. Heavy
l oadi ng means cl oser coupl i ng between l oad and magnetron, and thi s
makes the magnetron mor e sensi ti ve to l oad changes; i n other words,
i t reduces the frequency stabi l i ty. A hi gh-i mpedance osci l l ator al so
has l ess stabi l i ty agai nst l oad changes than a l ow-i mpedance one. The
determi nati on of the osci l l ator i mpedance and l oadi ng to sati sfy gi ~.en
requi rements for frequency stabi l i ty and provi de maxi mum effi ci ency
i s gi ven i n Chap. 10.
I n addi ti on to provi di ng resonators wi th the pr oper frequency and
i mpedance, the anode bl ock shoul d provi de sui tabl e mode separati on,
reasonabl y uni form r-f vol tages across the di fferent gaps, and adequate
thermal conducti on away from the anode surface and have a confi gurati on
that i t i s possi bl e to construct.
Further i nterpretati on of the Hartree di agram i s made i n the fol l owi ng
secti on i n connecti on wi th a di scussi on of performance charts.
101O. Performance Charts and Ri eke Di agrams.-For the i nterpreta-
ti on of mi crowave magnetron performance i t i s necessary to make
observati ons that are not usual l y made at l ower frequenci es wi th con-
venti onal types of tubes. The reasons for thi s are that at the frequenci es
consi dered the concept of l umped ci rcui t constants breaks down and al so
because the magnetron i s i nseparabl e from i ts osci l l ati ng ci rcui ts. As a
resul t of exper i ence, parti cul arl y wi th pul sed magnetrons, i t has been
found conveni ent to present operati onal data by means of two charts
dkcussed her e.
Four parameters determi ne the operati on of a magnetron: two asso-
ci ated wi th the i nput ci rcui t and two wi th the output ci rcui t. A typi cal
set i s the magneti c fi el d B, cur r ent I , the conductance G, and susceptance
I f associ ated wi th the r-f l oad on the magnetron. The obser ved quanti -
ti es are thr ee i n number, usual l y power P, wavel ength A, and vol tage V.
The probl em of presenti ng these obser ved quanti ti es i n terms of the four
parameters i s greatl y si mpl i fi ed by the fact that the i nput and output
parameters oper ate nearl y i ndependentl y of each other . Thus, i t i s
38
I .YTRODL:ClI ON [SEC. 110
possi bl e tokeep Gand B (the l oad) fi xed andstudy the effect of Hand Z
onP, A, and V ~~i th the assurance that the nature of the resul ts wi l l not
be greatl y al tered by changes i nG and B. Con~ersel y, H and 1 (the
i nput) may be fi xed, and the effect of G and B on P, h, and V observed.
The performance chart shows the rel ati onshi p among H, Z, V, P,
and Afor constant l oad, and the {Ri eke di agram shows the rel ati onshi ps
among G, B, P, h, and V for constant I .
Performance Charts .-Fi gure 1.30 i s a performance chart for a typi cal
pul sed magnetron (4J31) wi th a frequency of about 2800 31c/sec.
30
kw
I 000
25
2
800
~
$
g
700
~20
g
:
500
Qg
z
15
300
200
10
,
\
A 600
/.J%-lw400
i
~. -
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 SO
Cur r enti n amperes
FI G. 1.30.Typi cal performance chart of a n,:i g,,etro,, (4J31).
I t has been customary to pl ot V i n ki l ovo[ts :dung the ordi nate aI l d
cur r ent 1 i n amperes al ong the absci ssa. On such a graph the l i nes of
constant H appear as mor e or l ess paral l el l i nes \vhi ch sl ope upl ~avd to
the ri ght. l hus (refrrri ng to Fi g. 1.30) i f the magnetron i s oper ated at a
constant magneti c fi el d, S:LY2100 gauss, the rel ati ons of vol tage and cur-
r ent are gi ven by poi nts on the H = 2100 gauss l i ne (at 20 kv, the cur r ent
drawn wi l l be 48 amp).
On the same chart are pl otted the l i nes of constant power output.
These are the sol i d l i nes the form of ~vhi ch suggests hyperbol as; they
SEC. 1.10] PERFORMANCE CHARTS AND RI EKE DI AGRAMS
39
show the pul se r-f power that i s obtai ned under varyi ng i nput condi ti ons.
Thus at 20 kv and 48 amp, the power output i s 470 kw. Thi s same
power can al so be obtai ned at 25 kv and 30 amp wi th a magneti c fi el d a
l i ttl e l ess than 2700 gauss. Curves of constant effi ci ency, obtai ned
di rectl y from the above data, are added. These are the dotted l i nes
l oopi ng up and to the ri ght on the di agram.
I t i s possi bl e to add to thi s chart l i nes of constant frequency, so that
the vari ati on of frequency wi th i nput parameters may be studi ed. Thi s
i nformat i on i s useful i n establ i shi ng l i mi ts on the vari ati on of cur r ent
duri ng a pul se. The dashed l i nes are contours of constant frequency.
I n thi s case, they are nearl y paral l el to the l i nes of constant magneti c
fi el d, an i deal condi ti on, si nce changes i n cur r ent pr oduce no change i n
freql l ency.
y% ;0%
t
/
/
~.
/
~/
/ /
30%
g
~ ,0 /.. ~ ~
~
F1~.1.31.I dcal i zed performance cl mrt.
Many of the features of a performance chart can be i nterpreted i n
terms of the qual i tati ve el ectroni c theor y (Sec. 1.7) and i n terms of a
Hartree di agram such as shown i n Fi g. 1.26. I f the effi ci ency of a
magnetron wer e i ndependent of V and Z, the contours woul d be hyper-
bol as asymptoti c to the V and 1 axi s. I nspecti on of Fi g. 10.16 shows
that to a fi rst approxi mati on thi s i s the case. But i t i s the departure
from thi s condi ti on whi ch i s of i nterest and must be expl ai ned i n terms
of the vari ati on i n the effi ci ency M reveal ed by the performance chart.
A si mpl i fi ed and somewhat i deal i zed performance chart i s shown i n
Fi g. 1.31 whi ch shows onl y contours of constant magneti c fi el d and
constant effi ci ency for a typi cal strapped magnetron.
Performance
charts for ri si ng-sun magnetrons di tfer i n havi ng a di sti nct dr op i n
effi ci ency at magneti c fi el ds whi ch by Eq. (1) resl l l t i n a cycl otr on fr e-
quency cl ose to the operati ng frequency.
Thi s characteri sti c of ri si ng-
sun magnetrons i s di scussed i n detai l i n Chap. 3.
l erformance charts for di fferent types of strapped magnetrons show
consi derabl e di vergence, and Fi g. 1.31 has been i deal i zed to show onl y
those features ~vhi ch are common to most performance charts.
40
1.
2.
3.
I N TRODl:CTI OT [SEC. 110
Except for ver y l ow currents, i ncreasi ng the cur r ent I whi l e
keepi ng B constant resul ts i n a decr ease i n effi ci ency. I n Fi g.
1.26 thi s corresponds to movi ng up from the n = 4 Hartree l i ne
toward cutoff.
Decreasi ng the magneti c fi el d at constant cur r ent resul ts i n a
decr ease i n effi ci ency. I n Fi g. 1.26 thi s corresponds to movi ng
al ong the n = 4 Hartree l i ne toward cutoff. From thi s i t i s
cl ear that on the Hartree di agram el ectroni c effi ci ency i s i ncreased
i f V and 1? cor r espond to poi nts that are both near the Hartree
l i ne and far from cutoff. Al l magnetrons, the operati on of whi cki
appears normal , support thi s concl usi on. Accordi ngl y, magnetrons
are desi gned to oper ate at rel ati vel y hi gh magneti c fi el ds whi ch
cor r espond to poi nts far from cutoff.
A dr op i n effi ci ency at ver y smal l currents whi ch i s i ndi cated b~ a
curvi ~g up of the-l i ne of constant effi ci enci es at the extr eme i eft
of Fi g. 1.31.
Thi s i s probabl y due to unproducti ve l eakage cur r ent
from the cathode. Thi s fal l i ng off i n effi ci ency i s usual l y accom-
pani ed by a droopi ng of the l i nes of constant B as shown i n Fi g.
1.31.
These are the thr ee most general features shown by performance
charts. An i nspecti on of those gi ven i n Chap. 19 wi l l reveal manY
unusual confi gurati ons whi ch are not capabl e of expl anati on.
Rieke Di agram.The performance of a magnetron i n terms of i ts
output parameters, or r-f l oadi ng, i s conveni entl y presented on a Ri eke
di agram. I t woul d appear useful to express the r-f l oadi ng i n terms cf
the resi stance and reactance presented to the magnetron at the output
l oop. Si nce these quanti ti es are di ffi cul t to determi ne experi mental l y,
the Ri eke di agram i s i n terms of quanti ti es that can be obtai ned wi th ease
experi mental l y. At mi crowave frequenci es, i t i s customary to determi ne
the constants of a l oad by observi ng the phase and magni tude of the
standi ng waves set up by i t, and the Rl eke di agram i s desi gned to use
these experi mental data di rectl y. The desi red range of r-f l oadi ng i s
obtai ned by adjusti ng a tuner unti l the desi red phase and standi ng-wave
rati o i s i ndi cated by a sl i di ng pi ckup pr obe such as shown i n Fi g. 18.4.
The standi ng-wave rati o i s transformed i nto a refl ecti on coeffi ci ent K by
the rel ati on K = (1 P)/(1 + P) and K and 0 used as coordi nates of a
pol ar di agram.
Thi s i s known as the Smi th chart, and the Ri eke
di agram i s obtai ned by measuri ng the power output, frequency, and
vol tage at constant H and V for enough poi nts on thi s chart to construct
contours for these quanti ti es. Such a di agram i s shown i n Fi g. 1.32.
I nspecti on of the Rl eke di agrams gi ven i n Chap. 19 wi l l show consi derabl e
I P. H. Smi th, Electronics, 12, 29 (1939).
SEC.1. l o] I EI I 11oR,UA .I (!ft: C11.4RTS A Nl) RI 1{KI { 1)1Af7RAMS
41
vari ati on i n thei r form; but as i n the case of performance charts, certai n
features are exhi bi ted by al l of them.
Referri ng agai n to Fi g. 132, i t i s seen that the power contours
approxi mate one set of ci rcl es tangent at one poi nt on the (K = 1)-ci rcl e,
and i t i s si gni fi cant that on a Smi th chart the contours of constant l oad
conductance are, i ndeed, such ci rcl es.
The frequency contours are seen
to approxi mate secti ons of a second set of ci rcl es whi ch are ever ywher e
perpendi cul ar to the fi rst set and arc tangent at the same poi nt. Agai n
o
$
0
Magnetic field
5500gauss
0.250
Frequencyof OMccontour =9375 Mc6ec
FI G. 1.32.Typi cal Ri eke di agram (725).
i t i s si gni fi cant that on a Smi th chart the contours of constant susceptance
cor r espond to thi s second set of ci rcl es.
The comprehensi ve treatment of the Ri eke di agram i s found i n
Sec. 7.5.
Kl eke di agrams provi de i nformati on of consi derabl e i mportance to
magnetron desi gners and users. They are usual l y furni shed as operati ng
data, together wi th performance charts, by magnetron manufacturers
for ever y type of tube.
As an exampl e of thei r useful ness consi der the effect of a mi smatch
i n the magnetrons output. Assume that a refl ecti on coeffi ci ent of
0.4 (p = 2.3) exi sts, and suppose further that the phaae of thi s mi amateh
42 I NTRODUCTI O.V [SEC. 111
at the magnetron i s such that the vol tage mi ni mum corresponds to poi nt
A (Fi g. 1.32). The resul t wi l l be a po\ver output for the speci fi ed i nput
condi ti ons of about 50 kw. I f the phase of the refl ecti on i s changed,
say by i ncreasi ng the l i ne l ength between the magnetron and the mi s-
match unti l poi nt B i s reached, the power output fal l s to 33 kw. The
effi ci ency of the magnetron at poi nt A is thus 50 per cent gr eater , but
operati on at thi s l oadi ng may be unsati sfactory for reasons of stabi l i ty.
As representati ve of a general cl ass of l oad i nstabi l i ty, consi der the
effect of a change i n phase angl e about the l oadi ng A of + 7.5 (arro\vs)
that mi ght resul t from the turni ng of an i mperfect r otar y joi nt. The
power output wi l l be essenti al l y unal tered, but a maxi mum change i n
frequency of 10 Me/see occurs. At poi nt B, however , correspondi ng to
l i ght l oadi ng, a phase shi ft of + 7.5 resul ts i n onl y a 3-Me/see frequency
shi ft. I n radar systems or i n other appl i cati ons wher e frequency stabi l i ty
i s requi red under condi ti ons of changi ng l oad, a compromi se must be
made between effi ci ency and frequency stabi l i ty on the basi s of Ri eke
di agrams. Magnetrons are usual l y desi gned wi th an output coupl i ng
such that the center of the Ri eke di agram, whi ch corresponds to a
matched l oad, represents a reasonabl e compromi se between effi ci e~.cy
and frequency stabi l i ty.
I t i s possi bl e to adjust the l oadi ng on the magnetron to any reasonabl e
val ue by the sui tabl e use of r-f transformers i n the output l i ne. As an
exampl e, sLl ppose that i t i s desi rabl e to oper ate the magnetron r epr e-
sented by Fi g. 132 at a poi nt of hi gh effi ci ency and l ow-f rc(l uency
stabi l i ty correspondi ng to poi nt A.
Thi s can be accompl i shed hy i ntro-
duci ng a transformer that sets up a 2 to 1 I -SI VR and maki ng i ts di stance
from the magnetron such that the phase of thi s l SI VR corresponds to
poi nt A. By movi ng thi s transformer al ong the l i ne i n ei ther di recti on
one-quarter ]~avel ength, operati on correspondi ng to poi nt B can be
obtai ned.
1011. Pul sed Magnetrons.The most outstandi ng characteri sti c of
mi crowayc magnetrons i s thei r extr emel y hi gh pul se-pmrcr output \vhi ch
i s over one thousand ti mes the best c-w output at the same frequency.
These hi gh po~ver s are due mai nl y to thr ee factors.
1. The el ectroni cs of the magnetron are such that hi gh effi ci enci es
persi st at ver y hi gh l evel s of po~ver .
2. The oxi de cathode under pul sed condi ti ons vi el ds currents one
hundred ti mes that obtai ned under d-c condi ti ons.
3. The pr ocedur e of pul si ng at ver y smal l duty rati os has l argel y
el i mi nated the probl em of anode di ssi pati on.
Because of these factors and i ntensi ve devel opment as a resul t of the
war effor t magnetrons wi th frequenci es up to 25,000 Me/see and pul se-
power outputs from 0.02 to 2500 kw are avai l abl e.
sm. 1.11] PULSED MAGNETRONS 43
These hi gh-pul sed power s together wi th the di scovery of hi gh-pul sed
emi ssi on from oxi de cathodes are exampl es of the many advances that
have resul ted from the i ntroducti on of pul sed techni ques. From the
standpoi nt of magnetron operati on, however , pul si ng al so i ntroduces
certai n probl ems. The most seri ous one i s the bui l dup of osci l l ati ons
from noi se to ful l power that must occur rel i abl y for ever y pul se i n a ti me
that may be as short as 10s sec. Fai l ure of the bui l dup to occur resul ts
i n mi sfi ri ng or mode changi ng, a phenomenon exhi bi ted by essenti al l y
al l magnetrons under certai n condi ti ons.
The expl anati on of mode changi ng i s extr emel y i nvol ved, as the
bui l dup of osci l l ati ons i n a desi red mode depends on a l arge number of
factors, many of whi ch are i nterrel ated. The mor e i mportant factors are
1. Rate of ri se of vol tage pul se.
2. Rate of bui l dup of osci l l ati ons i n desi red mode and undesi red
modes whi ch i nvol ves the l oadl ng of the vari ous modes and the
noi se l evel from whi ch they start.
3. Vol tage and cur r ent range over whi ch osci l l ati ons i n the desi red
mode and undesi red modes may persi st.
4. I mpedance of the pul ser.
As an exampl e of the i nterrel ati on of these factors consi der a parti cul ar
ki nd of mi sfi ri ng that resul ts when the pul se vol tage reaches and exceeds
the l i mi ts wi thi n whi ch osci l l ati ons can start befor e osci l l ati ons can
bui l d up. Mi sfi ri ng or mode changi ng wi l l then be mor e l i kel y to occur
when the rate of ri se of the pul se i s fast, when the vol tage range over
whi ch osci l l ati ons can occur i s smal l , and when the i mpedance of the
pul ser i s hi gh, si nce a hi gh-i mpedance pul ser means a hi gher no-l oad
vol tage for a gi ven operati ng cur r ent and vol tage. Thi s exampl e i s a
si mpl e one, and i n practi ce the sol uti on of a parti cul ar probl em of mi s-
fi ri ng or mode changi ng wi l l i nvol ve the transi ent characteri sti cs of the
pul ser as wel l as the transi ent characteri sti cs of the magnetron and the
reacti ons of the pul ser and magnetron on each other . The theor y of
transi ent behavi or i s gi ven i n Chap. 8, but the probl em i s such a compl i -
cated one that i t can someti mes be used onl y as a gui de to the experi -
mental el i mi nati on of troubl e.
The demands of mi crowave radar resul ted i n a rather extensi ve
devel opment of magnetrons the frequenci es of whi ch are concentrated
mor e or l ess i nto four bands. Fi gure 133 shows on a Logari thmi c chart
the frequency and peak power of magnetrons that have been pr oduced
i n appreci abl e numbers and thus consti tute wel l -tested desi gns. Produc-
ti on magnetrons are i denti fi ed by thei r RMA type numbers, and experi -
mental ones by the desi gnati on assi gned to them i n the l aboratory wher e
they -wer e devel oped.
u
1.vl A01)1(Yi f)\ [SK(. 111
10,000
7500
5000
2500
1 MO
750
500
250
100
75
50
25
10.0
;:;
2.5
w
0.50
0.25
0.100
0.075
0.050
0.025
0.010
1000 3000 5000 10,000 30,000
Frequency i n mck.ec
- - Tunabl e tubes
Spot frequency tubes cover i ng the range
()
Conti nuous wave operati ng
FI G.1.33.Di agramshowi ngpower and frequencydi stri buti onsof representati ve mi cr
wavemagnetronsdevel opedup to 1946.
SEC. 111] P(.LL5A1) ,lI AG,VETRO,VS 45
From thi s chart i t i s seen that the maxi mum pul se power i ncreases
wi th the ~vavel ength. 1 I f thi s po\ver i s l i mi ted by ei ther cathode emi ssi on
or vol tage breakdown wi thi n the tube, the maxi mum pul sed pojver woul d
vary as AZfor comparabl e desi gns.
A summary of the mor e i mportant characteri sti cs of pul sed mag-
netrons i n several wavel ength bands i s gi ven i n Tabl e 1.3. These data
r efer to magnetrons i n producti on and do not r epr esent the l i mi ts reached
TABLE 1.3.SUMMARY OF CHARACTERI STI CS OF REPEI ESENTATI VE XI AGNETRONS I N
CERTAI N }VAVELENGTH BANDS (1945)
wave- Avcr agc Pul s(! I nput 131axi rnurn
l ength I Power RXI A
I nput
power po~vcr i mpcd-
band,
pul se
l evel
Vol tage,
type output, output, ante, l ength,
cm k\v
kv
\vatts ohms 5ec

30 4J21 800 Soo 25,0 500 6.0

10
{
l I i gh 4J3!I 600 1000 3J3. O 400 2.5
Low 2.J39 100 10 5.0 1000 2.0
3.2
{
Hi gh 4J50 500 250 20.0 700 5.0
Low 2J41 3 1000 2.5 1500 0.5
1.25 3J21 50 50 15.0 1000 0.5
i n experi mental tubes. The fi gures for maxi mum pul se l ength shoul d
not be taken too l i teral l y, as the i nput po]ver affects the maxi mum pul se
l ength at \vhi ch stabl e operati on can be obtai ned.
10,000 100
E
$ 1000
~
<
~
; 100
A=10 cm
$
s
/
.
f 10
/
/ v
[
20
/ T
/ /
/
<=1.25 cm
o
0
1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945
Year AD. YearAD,
(a)
(b)
l1~, 1.34,Maxi mum pul sed-pti wer output and effi ci ency for magnetrons cl evel ~pecl
Upto 1946.
Detai l ed i nformati on on the constructi on and operati on of most of
these tubes i s gi ven i n Chap. 19.
1An excepti on to thi s are the magnetrons i n the 1000- to 1500-I Wc/sec range
\vhosepul se power i s not so hi gh as mi ght be expected, Thi s si tuati on resul tsfrom
a l ack of need for ver y hi gh power s i n thi s wavel engthrange.
46 I N1I K)D(J(!710N [sm. 111
Thi s i nformati on refl ects the status of pul sed magnetrons onl y up to
the year 1946, and i t i s i ntcrwki ng to spccul atc on future trends. l i gui -e
1.34a shows the hi ghest pul sed powwr obtai ned from experi mental
magnctrcms at thr ee wavel engths bands for the years 1940 to 1945, and
Fi g. 1.34b shows the effi ci ency of these tuhcs duri ng the same peri od.
From Fi g. 1.34a i t must be concl uded tl wt thi s desi gn of hi gh-frequency
gener ator has not been ful l y expl oi ted as far as maxi mum power output
i s concer ned, si nce the curves show that the power obtai ncxf i s rml ghl y
proporti onal to the i ntcgratwf cl fort put i nto devel opment. The I cvel i ng
off of the l o-cm cur ve rcsl l l ts from a cessati on of wor k i n thi s band, \vhi l c
the i ncrease i n the 3.2- and 1.20-cm curves rcfl cchs conti nuwf effor t by
the Col urnbi ti l Tni vcrsi ty Rti di ati on I ,al wratory.
l ~i g~l rc 1.346 i ncfi catcs
that the cfl i ci cncy of mti gnctrons us they arc now dcsi gncxf i s reti chi ng a
l i mi t, as the curves for ti l l thr ee bands ]mve I cvcl cd oI Y.
PART I
RESONANT SYSTEMS
The descri pti on of a mi crowave magnetron gi ven i n Chap. 1 has shown
that the devi ce may be natural l y anal yzed i nto thr ee parts whi ch di ffer
i n functi on. These are the el ectr on stream, the resonant system, and
the output ci rcui t. The el ectr on stream, fl owi ng i n crossed magneti c
and el ectri c fi el ds, i nteracts wi th that part of the fi el d of the resonators
whi ch penetrates the i nteracti on space i n such a way that ener gy i s
conti nual l y abstracted from the el ectrons to appear as el ectromagneti c
ener gy i n the resonant system. The pri nci pal functi on of the resonant
system i s to ser ve as a frequency-determi ni ng el ement. I t accompl i shes
thi s by stori ng the ener gy r ecei ved from the el ectrons over a l arge
number of cycl es. I t may be thought of as a fi l ter ci rcui t wi th a narrow
pass band whi ch al l ows onl y the frequency component i n the el ectr on
stream that i s of i nterest to be transmi tted. Fi nal l y the output ci rcui t
consti tutes a coupl i ng path betl veen the el ectr on stream and an external
l oad. The properti es of thi s transmi ssi on path are so arranged that the
r-f vol tages ~vhi ch the el ectr on stream encounters are sui tabl e for effi ci ent
power transfer.
The purpose of the four fol l owi ng chapters i s to di scuss some of the
fundamental el ectromagneti c properti es of the resonant system and of
the output ci rcui t. The si mpl est feature common to al l resonant systems
used i n mul ti segment magnetrons i s that they shoul d be capabl e of bei ng
fed from a seri es of sl ots i n a cyl i ndri cal anode, paral l el to the axi s of the
cyl i nder. Systems ti l l i ng thi s requi rement may be devi sed i n great
vari ety; i n practi ce, thr ee such schemes have been used al most excl u-
si vel y. These are the unstrapped system, the strapped system, and the
al ternati ng unstrapped, or ri si ng-sun, system, i n or der of hi stori cal
devel opment.
The unstrapped system consi sts of a seri es of i denti cal resonators
between whi ch the onl y coupl i ng i s that provi ded by the el ectromagneti c
fi el ds i n the i nteracti on space and i n the end spaces. The al ternati ng
unstrapped system al so uti l i zes these coupl i ng paths, but al ternate
resonatom are of two di fferent ki nds.
The strapped resonator system,
on the other hand, has a system of i denti cal resonators, but a speci al
coupl i ng l i nk i s provi ded between each pai r of nei ghbori ng resonators.
The fol l owi ng di scussi on wi l l deal excl usi vel y wi th these thr ee types of
47
48 RESONANT SYSTEMS
resonant systems. I n the practi cal desi gn of magnetrons the unstrapped
system has been superseded by the other types, al though i t was hi s-
tori cal l y the fi rst to be used. I t may, however , be di scussed theoreti cal l y
rather compl etel y, and i n the anal ysi s a number of concepts are brought
out that are essenti al to the understandi ng of the ri si ng-sun and strapped
systems. I t i s possi bl e to di scuss unstrapped systems fai rl y ri gorousl y by
el ectromagneti c fi el d theor y, but the gr eater compl exi ty of strapped
structures requi res the use of a mor e i ntui ti ve approach by the use of
equi val ent ci rcui ts.
The type of i nformati on sought i n each case i s essenti al l y the same.
The fi el ds i n the i nteracti ons space, the mode spectrum of the resonant
system, and i ts dependence upon the di mensi onal parameters are found,
and a number of ci rcui t constants of i nterest i n the el ectron-fi el d i nter-
acti on or i n the osci l l ator-l oad coupl i ng are deri ved for the thr ee cases.
The di scussi on does not take up speci fi c probl ems i n the desi gn of r eso-
nator systems, a topi c that i s extensi vel y di scussed i n Chaps. 10 and 11;
i nstead, attenti on i s concentrated on features of the thr ee systems that
are of i mportance i n over-al l desi gn.
I n the chapter devoted to the output ci rcui t, the l atter i s consi dered
pri mari l y as a transducer the functi on of whi ch i s to conver t the i mped-
ance of an external l oad to such a l evel wi thi n the magnetron that the
el ectr on stream encounters r-f vol tages such that i t del i vers power
effi ci entl y. An account of transducer theor y adequate for the needs
of the probl em i s gi ven, and vari ous cl asses of output ci rcui t are consi dered
i n some detai l .
CHAPTER 2
THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM
]]Y N. I (I tOI ,L
The unstrapped resonant system shown i n Fi g. 2 l a was one of the
fi rst systems devel oped for mi crotvave mul ti resonator magnetrons.
Fi gures 21 b and c show vari ati ons of thi s eml y desi gn. These anode
bl ocks consi st of an anode di vi ded i nto n number of equal segments con-
nected by i denti cal resonators. These resormtors are r efer r ed to as si de
resonators or si de cavi ti es. Vari ous sh[~pcs of si de cavi ti es are
possi bl e; those shown i n Fi g. 2.1 arc the ones most commonl y used.
Al though the unstrapped resommt system i s now al most obsol ete, a
(a)
(b) (c)
FI G.2.1.Exampl es of unstrapped resonant systems: (a) wi th hol e-and-dot-type si de
resonators; (b) wi th dot-type si de resonators; (c) wi th vane-type si de resonators.
careful di scussi on of i t i s wor th whi l e for two reasons. (1) Many concepts
that are used i n the di scussi on of the mor e compl i cated systems are
based on those devel oped for thi s system. (2) The probl ems that ari se
i n the anal ysi s of resonant systems and the possi bl e methods for sol vi ng
them are seen i n thei r si mpl est form i n the study of the unstrapped
system.
2.1. The Magnetron Cavi tg as a Ci rcui t Probl em.-The i nteri or of
the magnetron (anode bl ock, i nteracti on space, and end spaces) can be
thought of as consti tuti ng a cavi ty resonator of compl i cated geometr y.
U i s a wel l -known fact that such a resonator has an i nfi ni te number of
resonant frequenci es and a parti cul ar fi el d di stri buti on associ ated wi th
each one. The ri gorous method of sol vi ng these probl ems i s to fi nd
a sol uti on of Maxwel l s equati ons that behaves pr oper l y at the boundari es.
However , because such a sol uti on can ordi nari l y be found for onl y the
49
50
THE lJ NSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 21
si mpl est geometri es, i t wi l l be necessary to empl oy ci rcui t anal ogi es and
approxi mate methods that use si mpl i fi ed geometr y and si mpl i fi ed bound-
-
F1o. 2.2.Typi cal ori entati onof el ectri c
and mngneti c fi el ds i n the si de resonator of a
mngnetron. Sol i d l i nes i ndi cate el ectri c
fi el d; dotted l ,nes i ndi cate m~gneti c fi el d.
ary condi ti ons.
The probl em wi l l be si mpl i fi ed
by maki ng certai n restri cti ve
assumpti ons concerni ng the di s-
tri buti ons of charge, current, and
fi el d. Consequentl y the sol uti on
wi l l contai n onl y those modes
whi ch approxi matel y sati sfy the
assumed condi ti ons and wi l l not
contai n the compl ete set of r eso-
nances. I n addi ti on, of course,
these assumpti ons i ntroduce some
er r or i n the resonances found.
The most i nteresti ng modes are
those wi th whi ch the el ectrons can
coupl e, accordi ng to the scheme
descri bed i n Chap. 1. They r e-
qui re strong el ectri c fi el d l i nes
goi ng from anode segment to anode
segment wi th l i ttl e axi al vari ati on
of fi el d. Thus, the i ni ti al assumpti ons are that the el ectri c fi el d be trans-
ver se and that ther e be no axi al vari ati on of fi el d. I t then fol l ows, as
shonm i n Sec. 2.5, that the magneti c fi el d i s axi al and has no axi al vari a-

ti on (see Fi g. 2.2).
On the basi s of the precedi ng assump
ti ons the equi val ent ci rcui t representa-
ti on shown i n Fi g. 23 i s possi bl e. The
ci rcui t el ements representi ng the si de
resonators are l abel ed Y,; .1 i s a sym-
metri c netmor k ~~i th Ar pai rs of termi nal s
and represents the i nteracti on space.
Such a representati on requi res that an
i mpedance or admi ttance at the vari ous
termi nal s be defi ned. Fi gure 2.2 sho~vs
the si tuati on at a si de resonator. The
vol tage at the termi nal s can be defi ned
as
/
B E . ds; e~-i dentl y the vol tage so
A
(2)
m
&
r-
7
(q)
FI G. 2.3.Ci rcui t representati on of
the unstrapped resonant system.
defi ned wi l l be dependent upon the path (assumed to be i n a pl ane
perpendi cul ar to the axi s) of i ntegrati on. Thi s ambi gui ty, however ,
wi l l be of no si gni fi cance i f the path used for the computati on of the
SEC. 2.1] THE MAGNETRON CAVI TY AS A CI RCUI T PROBLEM
51
admi ttance of a si de resonator coi nci des wi th that used for the computa-
ti on of the admi ttance of the i nteracti on space. 1 The vol tage so obtai ned
has no axi al vari ati on. I nasmuch as the magneti c fi el d i s axi al , the
cur r ent i s enti rel y transverse and i s gi ven by the magneti c fi el d at the
termi nal s A and B mul ti pl i ed by the l ength of the anode h. Usi ng
cur r ent I and vol tage V as defi ned above one mi ght take for the admi t-
tance Y = Z/ V.
Ther e are, however , other possi bi l i ti es. One can wri te
wher e P* i s the compl ex conjugate of the compl ex power (defi ned as
+VI *).2 The compl ex power can al so be wri tten i n terms of the Poynti ng
vector
P=;
/
EXH*. nda,
s
whi ch suggests for the admi ttance
h
/
E* XH. nds
Y= A
1/
) (1)
ABE. ds2
wher e the path of i ntegrati on i s the same for the two i ntegral s. The
expressi on, *JE X H* n da, depends upon the surface over whi ch the
i ntegrati on i s per for med and wi l l , i n general , cl i ffer from ~VI *. Conse-
quentl y, the two expressi ons for admi ttance wi l l di ffer; and for reasons
to be gi ven i n Sec. 2.5, the l atter expressi on i s the one that wi l l be used.
Because end-space effects are smal l i n many appl i cati ons, they have
been compl etel y i gnored i n the suggested equi val ent ci rcui t. Ther e
are, however , certai n appl i cati ons for whi ch end-space effects are
i mportant. These wi l l be di scussed i n Sec. 2.8.
The probl em has now been r educed to the i nvesti gati on of the ci rcui t
properti es of the si de cavi ti es and of the i nteracti on space. Mor e speci fi -
cal l y, i t i s necessary to cal cul ate the admi ttance of the si de resonators
as a functi on of frequency. I t i s al so necessary to cal cul ate the admi t-
tance of the i nteracti on space at any pai r of termi nal s as a functi on of
frequency, wi th pr oper restri cti ons on the admi ttances seen at the other
(N 1) pai rs of termi nal s.
Two di fferent approaches wi l l be used. The fi rst consi sts of r epr esent-
i ng each ci rcui t el ement by a l umped-constant networ k. The magni tude
1I n or der to obtai n manageabl eexpressi onsone often fi nds i t necessaryto hs.ve
the paths coi nci de onl y approxi matel y.
2V and I are the peak rather than the rms val ues of vol tage and current.
52 THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 2.2
of the constants of the networ k must ordi nari l y be determi ned experi -
mental l y. The choi ce of networ k i s at best an i ntel l i gent esti mate so
that the over-al l resul ts are ordi nari l y onl y semi quanti tati ve. Thi s
method, however , has the advantage of si mpl i ci ty and serves to i ntroduce
some i mportant concepts. The second approach i nvol ves the cal cul a-
ti on of the di stri buti on of el ectri c and magneti c fi el d from whi ch the
admi ttance can be cal cul ated. The mai n advantages are (1) mor e
accurate resul ts, wi th no need for guessi ng networ ks or for experi mental
eval uati on of parameters, (2) the fact that the fi el d di stri buti on i s part
of the resul t.
2.2. Equi val ent Networ k for the Si de Resonators.-A si mpl e paral l el -
resonant ci rcui t (Fi g. 2.4) wi l l ser ve as an equi val ent networ k for the si de
resonators. The admi ttance i s gi ven by the wel l -known formul a
real
FI G, 2.4.Equi val ent net-
work for a si de resonator of an
unstrapped resonant system.
~[coC (1/LoL)]. The val ues for the i nduct-
ance and capaci tance can be chosen to gi ve
the cor r ect val ue for the resonant frequency
00 = l /~C and the cor r ect admi ttance at
one other frequency. I f the range i s
l i mi ted, the i ntermedi ate val ues ~vi l l be
fai rl y accurate. I t i s to be noted that ther e
i s no resi stance i n the ci rcui t.
I n al l fr e-
quency and fi el d cal cul ati ons resi sti ve l osses
wi l l be negl ected on the assumpti on that the
wal l s are of per fectl y conducti ng materi al . Actual l y, the conducti vi ty
of materi al s used i s so hi gh as to make er r or s resul ti ng from thi s assump-
ti on negl i gi bl e i n compari son wi th others al ready i ntroduced.
2.3. Equi val ent Networ k for the I nteracti on Space.The i nteracti on
space i s r epr esented by the networ k i n Fi g. 25. Thi s networ k takes i nto
account capaci tance between the anode segments and the cathode. I t
i gnores al l i nducti ve effects and capaci ti ve effects among anode segments.
I t shoul d be most nearl y cor r ect when the anode ci rcumference i s smal l
compared wi th the wavel ength and the di stance between cathode and
anode i s smal l compared wi th the wi dth of the anode segments. (These
condi ti ons are rarel y met by magnetrons.) I t woul d be possi bl e, but
l engthy, to compute the admi ttance at a set of termi nal s assumi ng the
admi ttances ~[ti C (l \uL)] across the other (N I )-pai rs.
The
probl em can, however , be si mpl i fi ed consi derabl y by maki ng use of
the symmetry present. Because al l the si de resonators are i denti cal , the
admi ttance l ooki ng i nto any one of them i s the same. At resonance the
admi ttance at the vari ous termi nal s of the i nteracti on space matches
the resonator admi ttances; thus, at resonance, al l of these admi ttances
must be the same. I t can al so be assumed that the vol tage and cur r ent
di stri buti on i n one secti on di ffers from that i n the adj scent secti on onl y
SEC. 2.3] EQUI VALENT NETWORK 53
by a phase di fference that i s constant from secti on tosecti on. Wi th
the above i nformati on i t i s a si mpl e matter to compute the admi ttance.
F1o.25.- -Equi val ent network for the i nteracti on apace of an unstrapped resonant system.
The admi ttance l ooki ng i nto the networ k (see Fi g. 2.6) i s gi ven by
l q/vq. From Ki rchhoffs l aws
I ql = i , i ql ,
1, = i,+l ig,
~AB _ 1,,-,,
Jcoc
v,. = ~+cl
and
Vq = VAB VCD.
Thus
~= I q-l I q _ 2i, (i,-, + i,+J .
9
jwc jti
From the assumpti on that correspondi ng currents i n adjacent secti ons
dMer onl y by a constant phase factor i t fol l ows that
1I t can be pr oved from the symmetry that the exi stenceof any resonancefor
\vhi chthe above i s not tr ue i mpl i es the exi stenceof a partner resonancehavi ng the
mmcresonantfrequency and a di stri buti onof ampl i tude as assumed.
Thi s means,
of course,that a degr ncr acy of at l east the second or der must exi st.
1
54 THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 2.4
and the admi ttance Y i s gi ven by
Y=:=
juc
2(1 Cos 7)
Evi dentl y the admi ttance of the networ k depends upon the phase f
angl e~. So fari nthi schapter thi s
quanti ty has not been restri cted.
Because each secti on must be i n ~
&A~%1)andN,=2.n:hereni san~
phase wi th i tsel f @~ must equal 1
posi ti ve or negati ve i nteger or zer o.
Thus,
B D
Y. =
juc
FI O.2.6.A si ngl e secti on of the equi val ent
( )
~ ~_cos~?
I
network for the i nteracti on space,
N
2.4. Spectrum Predi cted by the Equi val ent Networ k. -Resonance
occurs when the admi ttance l ooki ng out from the si de resonators equal s
the admi ttance l ooki ng i nto the i nteracti on space, that i s, when
-+-*) ==2(:+
N
By setti ng cw = l /~LC and c/C = p i t i s found that
or
G) 2
A di fferent resonant frequency i s found for each val ue of n i n the
range O to N/2 [or (N 1)/2 i f N i s odd], after whi ch the val ues begi n
to repeat. That i s, repl aci ng n by n + m. (wher e m i s an i nteger)
or by n l eaves u unchanged. A qual i tati ve di agram for the spectrum
i s gi ven i n Fi g. 2,7.
Each resonance, together wi th i ts associ ated fi el ds (or vol tages and
currents), i s cal l ed a mode of osci l l ati on or , mor e si mpl y, a mode.
SEC.2.4] SPECTRUM PREDI CTED BY EQUI VALENT NET WORK 55
The number n i s cal l ed the mode number. I f ther e are several
l i nearl y i ndependent sets of fi el d (or vol tage) di stri buti ons wi th the same
resonant frequency, the mode i s sai d to be degener ate, the or der of
the degener ency bei ng the same as the number of l i nearl y i ndependent
di stri buti ons.
Al l of the modes have a second-or der degener acy excepti ng those for
whi ch n = O or n = N/2. I n other words, the same frequency i s
obtai ned by repl aci ng n by n, but a l i nearl y i ndependent set of ampl i -
tude coeffi ci ents e2i mql N(q i s the secti on number) i s obtai ned by repl ac-
i ng n by n, except for n = O and n = N/2. I
Mode number n Mode number m
(d
(b)
FI G.2.7.Thespectrumpredi ctedby Eq. (2) wi thp = 1 for an ei gh&resonator unstrapped
system.
The l i mi tati ons of thi s equi val ent ci rcui t wi l l become apparent after
the admi ttances have been mor e cor r ectl y cal cul ated. I t suffi ces her e
to note that the ci rcui t gi ves a good qual i tati ve pi cture of the or der and
separati on of the l ongest-wavel ength gr oup of magnetron modes. I n
or der to appl y the theor y quanti tati vel y i t i s, of course, necessary to
eval uate experi mental l y the parameters p and w The over-al l quanti ta-
ti ve agreement depends upon the parti cul ar way i n whi ch these param-
eter s are eval uated. The previ ous di scussi on associ ates u, wi th the
si de resonators al one and suggests that thi s parameter may be eval uated
by means of an experi ment i nvol vi ng onl y the si de resonators. For
exampl e, one mi ght measure the resonant frequency of the cavi ty formed
by pl aci ng two si de resonators faci ng each other . A val ue of p can then
be chosen to gi ve the cor r ect resonant frequency for one of the modes.
Under these condi ti ons the predi cted spectrum wi l l di ffer consi derabl y
from the obser ved one. On the other hand, i f one chooses p and wo
to gi ve the cor r ect val ues for the (n = 1)- and the N/2-modes, the
1Whi l e repl aci ng n by n + mN l eaves the frequency unchanged, i t al so l eaves
the ampl i tudecoeffi ci entseZrj~@ unchanged. The addi ti on of mN correspondsto an
i ncrease i n the phase di fferencebetween vol tages and currents at adjacent secti ons
by 2zm, whi ch, of course,has no physi cal si gni fi cance.
56 THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 25
frequenci es of the i ntermedi ate modes may be gi ~-en wi th reasonabl e
accuracy.1
2.5. Admi ttance of Si de Resonators by Fi el d Theory.Consi der the
si de resonator shown i n Fi g. 2.8, whi ch has an arbi trary cross secti on
and an arbi trary boundary (dotted l i ne) across whi ch the admi ttance i s to
be measured. A di stri buti on of the tangenti al el ectri c fi el d (E,) varyi ng
si nusoi dal l y i n ti me wi th arbi trary frequency u i s assumed al ong thi s
boundary. Because the tangenti al el ectri c fi el d i s zer o al ong the metal
wal l s, i t i s possi bl e i n pri nci pl e to appl y Max-
0
wel l s equati ons and compute the el ectri c fi el d
throughout the bounded regi on. A further
A
appl i cati on of Maxwel l s equati ons yi el ds the
B magneti c fi el d throughout the bounded regi on,
/ and the admi ttance ca,, th~ be computed usi ng
the formul a [from Eq. (l )]
F1~. 2.8.A si de r eso-
nator of arbi trary cross
secti on.
~ = l[J E:Hzds
I fh,ds]
wher e the i ntegral s are eval uated al ong the dotted boundary. Evi dentl y
the val ue computed for the admi ttance depends upon two arbi trary
choi ces: the choi ce of the boundarv across whi ch the admi ttance i s
measured and the di stri buti on of tangenti al el ectri c fi el d assumed al ong
thi s boundary. The choi ce of the boundary has no parti cul ar si gni fi cance
as l ong as the boundari es chosen for two adjoi ni ng el ements (for exampl e-
at the juncti on between the i nteracti on space and a si de resonator)
coi nci de. On the other hand, the val ues found for the resonant fr e-
quenci es wi l l to some extent depend upon the assumed el ectri c fi el d.
Cl earl y, the pr oper di stri buti on to use i s that whi ch actual l y obtai ns at
resonance; but because thi s di stri buti on i s ordi nari l y not known, i t i s
necessary to assume some arbi trary one. Equati on (1) i s used rather
than I / V for the admi ttance because i t can be shown2 that resonant
frequenci es computed on the basi s of thi s expressi on are consi derabl y l ess
sensi ti ve to the assumed fi el d di stri buti on than are those computed on
the basi s of I / V. I n the wor k that fol l ows, the boundary wi l l al ways
1Thi s l atter pr ocedur ecan be justi fi ed by i mprovi ng the equi val ent networ k for
the i nteracti on space. That i s, one can take i nto account the capaci tancebetween
adjscent anode segments by i ntroduci ng a capaci tance. c, between each pai r of
termi nal sof the networ ki n Fi g. 2.5. I n thi s caseEq. (2) sti l l hol ds wi th u, now gi ven
by 1/<L(c + c) and Pby ~) and thus uo depends upon the i nteracti onspaceas
wel l as the si de resonators.
ZN. Krol l and W. Lamb, The Resonant Modes of the Ri si ng Sun and Other
Unstrapped Magnetron Anode Bl ocks, Appendi x 1, J . oj Applied Phystcs, 19,
183, (1948).
SEC. 2.5] ADMI TTANCES BY FI ELD THEORY
57
be chosen so that ther e i s ei ther exact or ver y near coi nci dence of bound-
ari es when two el ements are joi ned.
The tangenti al el ectri c fi el d al ong
the boundary wi l l al ways be assumed constant.
The Rectangular-slot Side Resonator. Di fferentl y shaped si de r eso-
nators must be consi dered separatel y. The rectangul ar sl ot shown i n
Fi g. 2.9i sconsi dered fi rst because i ti sthe si mpl est. Maxwel l s equati ons
for fr ee space are
I .
u
curl E+~=O, (3)
,
curl H ~~ = O, (4)
di v D=O (D = c,E), (5)
I
x
and
~d/
/
di v B=O (B = p&f). (6) z
The ti me vari ati on of al l fi el d cor n- F I Q. 2.9 .Rectangul ar-sl ot si de
ponents i s gi ven by ejutbecause for an
resonator.
i mpedance cal cul ati on one i s concer ned onl y wi th fi el ds harmoni c i n ti me.
The oper ator d/dt i s then repl aced by ju.
I t has al ready been assumed that E. = O (E is transverse) and that E
has no axi al vari ati on. I t fol l ows di rectl y from Eq. (3) that H i s axi al
and has no axi al vari ati on. That i s,
H, = HJ x,y)ej~, Hz = O, and H. = O. (7)
From Eq. (4) i t fol l ows that
J
Po

e~dHz
E= = jTz,
and
(8)
(9)
wher e <pO/cO = i mpedance of fr ee space = 376.6 ohms and
By combi ni ng Eqs. (3) and (4) i t can be shown that H,, E,, and EU ,must
sati sfy the fami l i ar wave equati on
V2F +- k2F = O. (l o)
A di stri buti on of E sati sfyi ng the fol l owi ng condi ti ons must be found:
(1) I ts components E. and EWmust sati sfy Eq. (10); (2) EM = Oat z = Z,
and E, = O at y = + d/ 2, (3) EU must have the constant val ue E at
x = O; and (4) al l fi el ds must be conti nuous.
The rectangul ar-sl ot
58 THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM
[SEC. 2.5
resonator can be thought of as a paral l el -pl ate transmi ssi on l i ne or wave-
gui de wi th pl anes l ocated at y = +d/2and short-ci rcui ted wi th a pl ane
atz = 1. Assumi ngd < A/2 (asi t al ways i s) the compl ete fundamental
set of fi el ds for a paral l el pl ane wavegui de (omi tti ng the ti me factor
eI wt)i s gi ven by
and
wher e
and by
and
()
27rp
Fkz COS
~ Y ~%kz,
()
_ ~psin 27rp
d
~ik.z
~Y ,
jk
-()
~os 27rp
J
Po
~Y ehk=,

to
(11)
,= . J@yG2
(p = anyposi ti ve i nteger)
EjO)= ~j~eilkz,
E:O) = (),
.1 . . /
(12)
Any fi el d confi gurati on i n a paral l el -pl ate secti on, subject to the
condi ti on of no axi al vari ati on, must consi st of a l i near combi nati on of
the above fi el ds. 1 Any fi el d so formed sati sfi es the boundary condi ti on
E=[z, ~ (d/ 2)] = O. Appl i cati on of the condi ti on that E, be constant
at x = O restri cts the sol uti on to a combi nati on of the zer o-or der fi el ds
[E~Oand H~O)]. The requi rements remai ni ng are that Ej) = O at z = 1
and Ej) = E at z = O. Constants a and ~ must be chosen such that
(E,)=-l = j% (ae~ Be-) = O (13)
and
(Ev)z=o = jk(a 9) = E.
(14)
Thus,
e-i kl
()
E
_
and
a = ejkl e~l
~k ;
()
~ = e-,k,e: e,k, $ 7
whi ch gi ve
1See, for exampl e, R. I . Sarbacherand W. A. Edson, Hyper and Ultra-high Fre-
quency Engineering, Wi l ey, New York, 1943, pp. 11%132.
SEC. 25]
and thus
ADMI TTANCES BY FI ELD THEORY
jE cos k(l z)
H,=
J
P
si n kl

e
59
(16)
I t i s now possi bl e to compute the admi ttance from
I I
dEU dy 2
-
2
to be eval uated at z = O.
Because E. and H, are both i ndependent of y, the i ntegrati ons are tri vi al
and
jh
Y=
J
cot kl,
#o
d
~o
(17)
whi ch i s the wel l -known form for the admi ttance of a short-ci rcui ted
transmi ssi on l i ne of l ength 1 and surge admi ttance
h
d GO
The Cylindrical Side Resonator.I n sol vi ng for the admi ttance of
the cyl i ndri cal resonator shown i n Fi g. 2.10, the cyl i ndri cal coordi nates
P, d, and 2 are preferabl e. Assumi ng
as befor e that E. = O and that E has
no axi al vari ati on, i t fol l ows from Max-
wel l s equati ons that
H. = H.(p, @)e@,
(18)
HO= H6 =0,
J
j ~ ~Hz
EP= (19)
kp ~
and
J

j ~ ~Hz
E6=r~.
(20)
FI G.2.10.Cyl i ndri cal resonator
The fundamental set of sol uti ons for the wave equati on i n cyl i ndri cal
coordi nates are the functi ons
.J P(kP)eiP+
and
NP(kp)@,
60 THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 25
wher e p i s zer o or any posi ti ve or negati ve i nteger and J P and NP are
the wel l -known Bessel and Neumann functi ons. 1 The functi ons J . are
regul ar at p = O, whereas the functi ons NP become i nfi ni te at the ori gi n.
For thi s probl em onl y the functi ons J , need to be consi dered, si nce the
sol uti on must be regul ar at the ori gi n.
Taki ng
H:P~ = J p(kp)e?m%
(21)
i t fol l ows from Eqs. (19) and (20) that
J_
P:
E$P)=
J p(kp)eP~,
kp
(22)
and
J-
E%) = ~ & J ~(kp)e*.
(23)
A l i near combi nati on of these functi ons i s requi red such that E+ = O at
.o=awhenti ~@S(2~ $)and E@=theconstant E atp=a
when # < @ < +. Such a combi nati on can be found by maki ng a
Fouri er expansi on for E+ i n terms of the functi ons E$). Thus
p=.
wher e the constants CP are to be determi ned.
(24)
(25)
The constants CP ~vi l l bc gi ven by
1See, for exampl e, J
l -ork, 1941, pp. 351360.
-(----)
_ E+ si n p+

for p # O,
P$
&

for p = 0.
r
A, Stratton, El ecb_omagneti c Theory, 3I cC raw-Hi l l , New
SEC.25] ADMI TTANCES BY FI ELD THEORY 61
Thus
and
E+(p,+) = :4
z #(Y) e,
p=m p
-2 %$(Y)+,
~,(P)d) = ;j~
p=m
z() = -w 2 %??)
,,= m
Because J , = ( l) PJ -,, the above relations can be rewritten as
p(pJo) m+%)w+w2)
~=1
and
{[
~o E+ J o(l-p)
ll,(p, I #I )= j ~ ~ m
+2: (%?McosPd
~=1
For n cal cul ati on of admi ttance,
and & (CI ,O)over the same range.
E+(a, @) = E
:I nd
The admi ttance l ookki g i n across the bound~ry i ndi cated i n Fi g. 2-10
i s gi ven by
}1
J
:$ C@(a, f$)Hz(a, 0) d+
y=-
[~~~ aE@(a,@) d~]
whi ch yi el ds
+j$%[%$ +2(%%%(*)1
1 =
~=1
[2#aE]
(28)
62
THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM
[SEC. 25
Al though the admi ttance functi on l ooks compl i cated, i t i s not di ffi cul t
to compute for l ow frequenci es.1
Li ke al l admi ttances i n l ossl ess systems,
thi s admi ttance has a sl ope that i s al wam posi ti ve (negl ecti ng the factor
FI G. 2.1l . Annul rm-sertor resonator.
.-
j); and l i ke that of the rectangul ar
resonator, i t has an i nfi ni te set of
resonances whi ch are al ternatel y seri es
and paral l el . The seri es resonances
occur at the r oots of ,l ~(ka), and a par-
~l l el resonance occurs between each
pai r of seri es resonances.
The Annular-sector Resonator.
One of the most common resonator
shapes i s the annul ar-sector resonator
shown i n Fi g. 2 11, whi ch i s often
r efer r ed to as the ( vane type resonator. Appl i cati on of -he methods
used i n the precedi ng paragraphs l eads to the fol l owi ng expressi on for
the admi ttance.~
J
to h [.JO(ka)][i Vl (kb)l [J1(kb)l [NO(ka)l -
(29)
y = j 10 Fa l J, (ka)l [N,(kb)l l Jl (k~)l [Nl (ka)l
Thi s functi on behaves ver y much l i ke the other admi tt -. ;ce functi ons.
I n fact } approaches [ j ~m) (h/ +a) cot A-(6 a)] as k becomes l arge.
(a) {01
I
F]a. 2.12. .\rbi trnry tcr,,,i nnti ons: (a) for n rectangul ar-sl ot resonator; (b) for an annul ar-
scctor resonator.
Transjormalion Formulas. Because many si de resonatow are of
composi te shape, for exampl e, a rectangul ar sl ot or annul ar sector termi -
nated by a hol e, transformati on formul as gi vi ng th- admi ttance at the
front of the resonator i n terms of the admi ttance at the back are useful .
For the rectangul ar sl ot (Fi g. 2.12a)
Y,
J
_ si n kl + Cos kl
Y=$j ~
(jtt / d) - ;
}-,
(30)
0 Cos N si n N
(jh/ d) ~co/ vo
13.WS%C. 2.11.
t I n practi ce the center of curvatureof the r ear surface often coi nci des wi ththe
center of the magnetron rather than wi th the center of curvature of the annul ar
sector . The er r or i n Y, ho\vever ,i s negl i gi bl ei f one takes for b tbe di mensi oni ndi -
cated i n Fi g. 2.11.
SEC. 2.6] ADMI TTANCE BY FI ELD THEORY 63
for the annul ar sector (Fi g. 212b)
Y=
J ,(ka)
J ,(ka)

J ,(kb) Y, j <w) (h/ ~b)J o(kb)

N,(kb) Y, j V- (h/ 4b)No(kb)
J ,(kb) Y,
j - (h/W) Jo(kb)
N,(kb) Y, j v(co/M) (h/W) No(kb)
N,(ka)
.
Nl(ka)
(31)
Al though these formul as al l ow for a change i n hei ght at the juncti on,
they are consi derabl y l ess dependabl e when such a change occurs.
206. Admi ttance of the I nteracti on Space by Fi el d Theor y .The
admi ttance of the i nteracti on space (Fi g. 2.13) i s eval uated by appl yi ng
the methods used for the ci rcul ar res-
onator combi ned wi th those used for
handl i ng the l umped-constant equi va-
l ent of the i nteracti on space. Agai n i t
i s conveni ent to us~ cyl i ndri cal coor di -
nates. I n the fol l owi ng deri vati ons
0)
N = he number of anode-bl ock seg-
ments, r. = the anode radi us, r c = the
cathode radi us, and 20 = the angl e
.
subtended by the space bet~veen the
>... -#,w.l wl
segments of the anode bl ock. I t wi l l
be assumed that E+ across each gap i s
FI G.2.13.Thei nteracti onspaceof an
unstrappedreeonantsystem.
constant and further that the fi el d at
any gap di ffers from the fi el d at an adjacent gap onl y by a constant phase
factor. At the cathode and at the anode segments E+ must, of course, be
zer o. Expl i ci tl y, the boundary condi ti ons for Et are as fol l ows:
and
for al l other val ues of $. I n Eqs. (32), q i s the gap number and has the
val ues Oto N 1, and n i s an i nteger.
As i n the sol uti on of the ci rcul ar
resonator, the sol uti on for the i nteracti on space i s compounded out of
the functi ons
~,(kp)e~y~ and N,(kp)ei y+.
I n thi s probl em i t i s necessary to use both functi ons to ensure E$ = O
at p = r.. I t i s evi dent that the fol l owi ng set sati sfi es thi s condi ti on.
64
THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTI ZJ f [SEC. 2.6
)
Ny(kp) eJY@>
})
(33
A l i near combi nati on of the functi ons E$)(P, @) that l vi l l sati sfy the
condi ti ons stated at P = r= can be found, as they wxx-efor the ci rcul ar
resonator, by maki ng a Fouri er expansi on,
Thus
.
m
E+=j : C,Z~(kP)ei7+. (34)
~=.
The constants C, are determi ned by
wher e
j(~) c EeJ(2.W.V)Q
O(?-O) <<(7+)
and j(~) = O, for al l other yal ucs of $.
Then
wher e m i s any i nteger
.
0 other~vi se.
Thus the fi el ds are gi ven by
SEC. 2.6]
ADMI TTANCE BY FI ELD THEORY
65
E,(p,@) = E~
2 (%%$%+
m=.
E,(p, @) = jE #
2 (Y)%%+,
m..
and
z(p)) = -2T 2 (Y)*
m=.
The admi ttance l ooki ng i n across the boundary i ndi cated i n Fi g. 2 13
at the qth openi ng i s gi ven by
I
(zT*/v)+L?
11 T.E~(r., @) H.(r., +) dr$
Y = *&;;+,
u 1
29
rc.%(ra, 4) do
(27Tq/ v) o
whi ch yi el ds
.=+$ 2(YEW 37)
m..
when v = n + mi V.
I t i s evi dent that as a resul t of the assumpti on concerni ng E+ at the
anode radi us, the admi ttance l ooki ng i n at each gap i s the same.
Thi s i s
a condi ti on whi ch i s obvi ousl y necessary for resonance.
The functi ons
Z, (A-r.)
Z~(krJ
wi l l henceforth be desi gnated by the symbol
2
~ (kra). The dependence
of the admi ttance on both frequency and n i s contai ned i n these func-
ti ons. As i n the sol uti on for the equi val ent ci rcui t, onl y val ues of n from
Oto N/2 or to (N 1)/2 need to be consi dered because the functi ons are
not changed when n i s repl aced by n or by n + mN.
The l ow-frequency behavi or of the admi ttances Y. as predi cted by
the fi el d theor y (Fi g. 2.14) i s qual i tati vel y si mi l ar to that predi cted from
the l umped-ci rcui t networ k.
As the frequency approaches zer o, the
val ues of Y. for n # O approach zer o wi th fi ni te posi ti ve sl ope i n ei ther
case. Furthermore thi s sl ope decreases as n i ncreases. On the other
hand, the rati o of these sl opes for di fferent n as predi cted by the fi el d
66 THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM
[SEC. 2.7
theor y i s qui te di fferent from that predi cted by the l umped-ci rcui t
networ k. For n = O the behavi or i n the two cases i s al so somewhat
si mi l ar, because YOi s i nfi ni te accordi ng to the l umped-ci rcui t networ k,
FI G.2.14.Thequal i tati vebehavi orof the admi ttancefuncti onsfor an i nteracti on
wi th N = S [seeEq. (37)].
space
whereas the fi el d theor y predi cts that i t wi l l approach mi nus i nfi ni ty
as the frequency approaches zer o.
I n addi ti on the fi el d theor y predi cts
an i nfi ni te set of al ternatel y seri es and paral l el resonances (i ndi cated by
the i nfi ni ti es and zer os of the admi ttance functi ons) for each of the
admi ttances, whi ch have been omi tted by the l umped-ci rcui t networ k.
FI G, 2.15.Graphi cal representati on of the resonance equati on Y. = Y,. The fi rst
asymptote cor r espond to the fi rst seri es resonance of Y~; the second to the fi rst seri es r eso-
nance of Y,.
2.7. The Spectrum Predi cted by Fi el d Theory.-As i n Sec. 2.4 the
spectrum i s found by setti ng the admi ttance l ooki ng out from a si de
resonator (the negati ve of the admi ttance l ooki ng i n) equal to the
SEC. 2,7] THE SPECTRUM PREDI CTED BY FI ELD THEORY
67
admi ttance l ooki ng i nto the i nteracti on space. That i s, Y. + Y, = O
at resonance, wher e Y, i s the admi ttance of a si de resonator.
Si nce both
functi ons i nvol ve the frequency i n a compl i cated way, i t i s best to sol ve
the probl em graphi cal l y by pl otti ng
both admi ttances as a functi on of k
as shown i n Fi g. 2 15. The r eso-
nances are those val ues of k at whi ch
i ntersecti on occurs. A typi cal spec-
trum as predi cted by the theor y ap-
pears i n Fi g. 2.16. A compari son
wi th the spectrum of the equi val ent
ci rcui t shows a qual i tati ve si mi l ari ty
for the resonances wi th wavel engths
l onger than that of the fi rst paral l el
resonance of the si de resonators. As
are those of the equi val ent ci rcui t,
each resonance predi cted by fi el d
theor y i s a doubl et (degener acy of
or der 2) except those for whi ch n = O
or N/2 (these are nondegenerate).
Thi s resul t fol l ows from the fact that
1.5A0
2
34
A
==A. ------ ----- --- -
s (
: ,~,
ho
00
1 2 3 4
Mode number n
FI G. 2. 16.Typi cal spectrum pr e-
di cted for an ei ght-resonator resori ant
system, Onl y the l arger wavel ength
groups are shown. The L(P1 are the
paral l el resonances ( S. = O) of the si de
resonators, A.(p) bei ng the p + 1 pwal l el
resonance.
al though the same wavel ength i s obtai ned for n as for n (except i n the
case of n = O and n = N/2), the el ectromagneti c fi el d i s di fferent and
the two fi el ds are l i nearl y i ndependent.
The equi val ent-ci rcui t theor y
FI G.2.17.Cross secti on of an l S-resonator
unstrapped resonant system.
has mi ssed al l of the resonances that
occur at frequenci es hi gher than
that of the fi rst paral l el resonance of
the si de resonators. The equi v-
al ent-ci rcui t representati on i s con-
si derabl y i mproved i n thi s r espect i f
the si de resonators are r epr esented
by short-ci rcui ted transmi ssi on
l i nes i nstead of by si mpl e l umped
LC-ci rcui ts.
I nasmuch as ther e are an i nfi ni te
number of resonances associ ated
wi th each val ue of n, n i s i nade-
quate for desi gnati ng a parti cul ar
mode. Henceforth n wi l l be used
to desi gnate a pri nci pal resonance,
that i s, a resonance of the fi rst gr oup or the l owest-frequency r oot of the
resonance equati on. Resonances of the pth hi gher-order gr oup [that i s,
members of the (p + I )-group or the (p + 1)-root of the frequency equa-
ti on] wi l l be desi gnated by n~.
68 TI I E C,VSTRAPPllD RESONAi%TT SYSTEi\ f [SEC. 27
The most i mportant features of the spectrum can be best descri bml
i n terms of a speci fi c exampl e. The I fI -resonator anode shown i n
Fi g. 2.17 wi l l be used. Onl y rel ati ve di mensi ons are si gni fi cant, and
accordi ngl y al l di mensi ons arc gi ven as fracti ons of the 9-mode ~\-a~-e-
l ength. The di mensi ons and the wavc]engths of the members of the
fi rst gr oup are gi ven i n Tabl e 2.1. The most si gni fi cant feature of thi s
TABLE 21. -TI I E FI RST GROT-POF RESONANCES OFAN UNSTRAPPED
RESONANT SYSTEM
A,,
n
T,
1 1.840
2 1.226
3 1.104
4 1.055
5 1.030
6 1.016
7 1.007
8 1.003
9 1.000
*Di mensi on. (see Fi g.2.17):
d
G
= 0.170 (d - d, = d,) :; = O325
d.
Z
= 0.595 0 = 0.068 radian
spectrum from the poi nt of vi ew of magnetron operati on i s the bunchi ng
together of the resonances for l arge n. Furthermore, as N i ncreases,
the separati on between the (N/2)-mode and i ts nei ghbori ng modes
decreases rapi dl y. 1 By a pr oper vari ati on of parameters the separati on
of these modes can be somewhat i ncreased. I n general , the separati on
between modes i s i ncreased by i ncreasi ng the cathode di ameter, i ncreasi ng
the anode di ameter, and i ncreasi ng the wi dth of the resonator openi ngs
as compared wi th the wi dth of the anode segments. The separati on
i s al so i ncreased by usi ng a resonator shape that yi el ds a sl ow vari ati on
of admi ttance wi th frequency.2 Ther e are, however , practi cal l i mi tati ons
that pr event any of these factors from bei ng suffi ci entl y al tered to obtai n
a wel l -separated 9-mode.
The hi gher groups of resonances are si mi l ar i n character to the fi rst
group, except, of course, that the frequenci es are much hi gher. Ordi -
nari l y, the hi gher groups of resonances are of l i ttl e i nterest i n magnetron
operati on and, ther efor e, are not usual l y studi ed i n detai l . Attempts
1The separati onbetweenthe (N/2)-mode and the
(; - 1)-mdevareppi -
matel y as (l /Nz) (r./NX).
zI t i s i nteresti ngto obser vethat al l of thesevari ati onscan be i nterpretedphysi -
cal l y as meansof i ncreasi ngthe rati o of the capaci tancebetweenthe cathode and the
anode segmentsto the capaci tanceof the resonator. I n the equi val ent-ci rcui ttheor y
thi g parameteral one determi nesthe mode separati on.
SEC. 28] END-SPACE EFFECTS 69
have been made, however , to oper ate magnetrons i n the (n = O)-mode
of the second group. Thi s mode has the advantage of bei ng wel l sepa-
rated from other modes and of bei ng nondegenerate.
2.8. End-space Effects.-Up to thi s poi nt the probl em of the end
spaces has been compl etel y i gnored.
I n or der to di scuss thei r effects,
i t i s necessary to abandon the ci rcui t anal ogi es of the precedi ng secti ons
and reconsi der the probl em from the poi nt of vi ew of fi el d theor y.
The si mpl est ki nd of end-space probl em, and one that ~ti fi be sol ved
exactl y, i s that of the cl osed-end anode bl ock i l l ustrated i n Fi g. z. 18.
By consi deri ng the enti re anode
bl ock as a secti on of )vavegui de of
unusual cross secti on, the probl em c
can be r educed to that of a secti on
of wavegui de \vi th shorti ng pl ates
at both ends. From thi s poi nt of
vi e\v the magnetron modes pr e-
vi ousl y di scussed are transverse
el ectri c or TE-mocfes because the
el ectri c fi el d has no axi al com-
ponent. The resonances of the
cavi ty \ri l l occur \vhen the gui de i s
an i ntegral number of hal f wave-
l engths l ong, the wavel ength bei ng
measured al ong the gui de; that i s,
the resonance occurs \vhen h,n =
2h/p, \vher ep i s an i nteger gr eater
than or equal to 1. The gui de FI G. 21S.-Cutawa~ vi ew of
\vavel ength AU. depends on the
resonantsystem.
frequency and the mode accordi ng to the ~vcl l -known formul a
End date
cl osed-end
(38)
wher e x.. i s the cutoff ~vavcl ength for the mode i n questi on.
Thus the
probl em of fi ndi ng the resonant frequenci es has been r educed to the
probl em of fi ndi ng the cutoff wavel engths for the anode bl ock consi dered
as a secti on of ~vavegui de, I t \ri l l be sho\vn that the resonances found
i n the precedi ng secti on cor r espond to these cutoff ~vavel engths.
The c{{toff \vavel cngths of a TE-mode i n a wavegui de are determi ned
by the condi ti on that the equati on
()
2T 2
vH, + ~ HZ=O
c
(39)
T
70 THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 28
I
have aconti nuous aol uti on wi th conti nuous fi rst deri vati ves and that i t
sati sfy the boundary condi ti on that the normal deri vati ve of H., dH./ dn,
be zer o at the boundary. Thi s condi ti on i s equi val ent to the requi re-
ment that the tangenti al el ectri c fi el d be zer o at the boundari es. The
fi el ds and thei r associ ated wavel engths found i n the precedi ng secti on
sati sfy the di fferenti al Eq. (39) and the above boundary condi ti on.
Furthermore, the fi el ds are conti nuous except perhaps at a juncti on ~
between regi ons of di fferent geometr y.
The si tuati on at a juncti on must be consi dered i n detai l . I t si mpl i fi es
matters to consi der the speci fi c case of the juncti on between a rectangul ar
si de resonator and the i nteracti on space shown i n Fi g. 2.19. The fi el ds
i n the two regi ons have been expressed i n two di fferent coordi nate
systems. I t i s assumed that the arc of the ci rcl e p = T. and the strai ght
FI G.2.19.Juncti onof a si de r~sonator wi th the i nteracti on space.
l i ne z = O coi nci de across the resonator openi ng. As a corol l ary i t
fol l ows that the y di recti on coi nci des wi th the @ dkecti on and the z
di recti on wi th the p di recti on. I f the vol tage i s consi dered to be con-
ti nuous at the juncti on, i t fol l ows that E+ i s equal to EY at the juncti on
because both are constant across the resonator openi ng, and the vol tage
i s gi ven by the el ectri c fi el ds E+ or Eti ti mes the openi ng wi dth. I n
Sec. 2.7 i t was asserted that resonance occurs when the admi ttances at a
juncti on match. Thus taki ng the vol tage as conti nuous al so ensures
that the quanti ty J E~H. dy is conti nuous at the juncti on. Because
E: i s constant, JH. dy and, ther efor e, average val ues of the magneti c
fi el ds match at the juncti on. The magneti c fi el d as gi ven by the si de-
resonator functi on i s constant al ong the juncti on, whereas that gi ven
by the i nteracti on-space functi on H.(a, O) i s not. Ther efor e, the mag-
neti c fi el d cannot be conti nuous at the juncti on. I f, however , the gap
i s narrow, H.(a, O) wi l l vary onl y a smal l amount and the di sconti nui ty y
i n the magneti c fi el d wi l l be smal l because the average val ues match.
The el ectri c-fi el d component that i s normal to the boundary, E, or E.,
i s al so di sconti nuous across the juncti on boundary, for E. i s zer o whi l e
E, i s not. However , E, i s smal l except ver y near the edges, wher e i t
becomes i nfi ni te. Ther efor e the fi el ds are approxi matel y conti nuous
for a narrow openi ng.
I The di sconti nui ty, of course, i s due to the fact that the tangenti al el ectri cfi el d
has heen assumed to be constant al ong the juncti on boundary. Had the cor r ect
SEC.2.8] END-SPACE EFFECTS 71
Thus, the resonant wavel engths computed i n Sec. 2.7 shoul d cor -
respond cl osel y to the requi red cutoff wavel engths, and from them the
resonances of the cl osed-end anode can be computed. The experi -
mental agreement i s good; even wi th NO = 0.5 and 27rra/h = 1.5 the
resul ts are dependabl e wi thi n approxi matel y 1 per cent.
The accuracy of the admi ttance matchi ng method used i n thi s
chapter can be i mproved by fi ndi ng a better approxi mati on for the
tangenti al el ectri c fi el d at the boundi ng surfaces. One can set up an
i ntegral equati on for thi s fi el d, and i t shoul d be possi bl e to fi nd approxi -
mate sol uti ons. Such methods have been ver y useful i n the treatment
of probl ems i nvol vi ng wavegui de juncti ons and obstacl es i n wavegui des. 1
No attempt has yet been made, however , to appl y these methods to the
magnetron probl em. As a matter of fact, the er r or i nvol ved i n the treat-
ment (or nontreatment) of the end spaces i s such as to make mor e accurate
val ues of the cutoff wavel engths of l i ttl e use for most purposes.
Ther e are other methods, based on fi el d theor y al one, for computi ng
the cutoff wavel engths. One of these i s the rel axati on method,fi
whi ch i s essenti al l y a method of successi ve approxi mati ons. Whi l e
i n pri nci pl e one can achi eve any desi red degr ee of accuracy usi ng thi s
method, one fi nds i n practi ce that a consi derabl y l onger computati on
ti me i s requi red to achi eve accuracy comparabl e to that achi eved by
the method outl i ned her e, parti cul arl y when a l arge number of modes
i s i nvol ved. On the other hand the method of thi s chapter i s l i mi ted to
cases i n whi ch the resonant system can be spl i t i nto regi ons of si mpl e
geometr y, for whi ch anal yti c sol uti ons are possi bl e. For resonant
systems i nvol vi ng mor e compl i cated resonator shapes or resonant systems
i n whi ch, for exampl e, the anode segments are not al l equi di stant from
the center of the magnetron, the rel axati on method i s ver y useful .
The probl em di scussed above i s i deal i zed; any magnetron must have
i ts cathode i nsul ated from i ts anode. However , an anode bl ock wi th
cl osed-end resonators that has an open i nteracti on space approxi mates
cl osel y the anode bl ock just di scussed. Al l wavel engths, however , are
somewhat hi gher than computed; for the l arge n-modes the change i s
about 1 to 2 per cent, but the (n = 1)-mode may be affected a great
deal as much as 25 per cent or more. I t must al so be remembered that
the cathode i s not usual l y a si mpl e cyl i nder as assumed but may have
end shi el ds or other i rregul ari ti es. Thi s effect i s usual l y smal l and can
be accuratel y esti mated after some exper i ence.
di stri buti on,whi ch i s unknown,been chosen for thi s fi el d component, i t woul d have
been possi bl e to fi nd a frequency val ue for whi ch al l of the components woul d be
conti nuous.
1See Vol . 10 of the Radi ati on Laboratory Seri es.
ZD. N. de G. Al l en, L. Fox, H. }I otz, and R. V. Southwel l ,Phil. Tram. Roy. Sot.,
Seri esC4, I , 85 (1942); H. Ashcroft and C. Hurst, CVD Repor t WR-1558.
72 THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 28
The usual end-space probl em i s much mor e compl i cated than the
one just di scussed. Most magnetrons wi th symmetri c unstrapped
resonant systems have an open-end anode bl ock wi th an empty regi on
on ei ther end. I n previ ous secti ons i t was assumed that end condi ti ons
wer e such that ther e was no axi al vari ati on of the fi el ds i n the si de
resonators or the i nteracti on space. For many open-end anode bl ocks
thi s i s a fai rl y good approxi mati on; when anodes are l onger than 0.4x
and have end-spaces deeper than O.2A, the modes for whi ch n i s gr eater
than 1 agr ee wi thi n 2 or 3 per cent wi th the computed val ues. The
experi mental val ues are l ower than the computed val ues. The (n = I )-
mode i s often depressed by mor e than 10 per cent. The general character
of the spectrum and the rel ati ve separati ons, except for the (n = 1)-mode,
are accuratel y gi ven.
I n the case of magnetrons operati ng at wavel engths gr eater than
10 cm, both the anode-bl ock hei ght and end-space hei ght are usual l y
smal l compared wi th the wavel ength. (The anode hei ght i s usual l y
l ess than ~k~, and the end-space hei ght l ess than ~x~.) Under these
z F
condi ti ons the obser ved spectrum i s qui te di fferent from that computed
i n the precedi ng secti ons. One fi nds the or der of modes r ever sed; that
i s, the wavel engths i ncrease rather than decr ease as the mode number
i ncreases. 1
The most extensi ve di scussi on of thi s effect appears i n a r epor t by J. C.
Sl ater,z whi ch contai ns pl ots of the obser ved dependence of wavel ength
upon the hei ghts of the bl ock and the end spaces for an ei ght-resonator
hol e-and-sl ot anode bl ock. One fi nds that the end-space hei ght bel ow
whi ch the or der of modes i s r ever sed decreases as the anode hei ght i s
i ncreased. From the poi nt of vi ew of appl i cati on i t i s si gni fi cant to note
()
N
that the separati on between the (N/2)- and ~ 1 -modes i s smal l
regardl ess of the or der .
I t i s evi dent that an adequate theoreti cal treatment of the end spaces
appl i cabl e to short end spaces and smal l anode hei ght woul d be desi rabl e.
Fl ux pl otti ng methods$ have been devel oped whi ch permi t an accurate
1A good qual i tati ve pi cture of the phenomenacan be obtai ned by assumi ngthe
capaci tances c i n Fi g. 2.5 shunted by i nductances 1 and by assumi nga parti cul ar
dependenceof c/C and L/l upon the hei ght of the bl ock and tbe end spaces. The
requi red dependenceupon the hei ght of the bl ock i s, however , qui te di fferentfrom
what one woul d expect physi cal l y, For further detai l s see J. W. Dungey and
R. Latham, The Frequenci esof the Resonant hfodes of hfagnetrons, CVD Repor t
WR-1223, J uly 14, 1944.
zJ. C. Sl ater, Resonant hl odes of the Magnetron, RL Repor t No. 43-9,
Aug. 31, 1942,pp. 1.5-20.
8P. D. Crout, The Determi nati onof Fi el ds Sati sfyi ngI ,aphwes, Poi ssons, and
I
i
I
I
SEC. 28] END-sPACE EFFECTS 73
treatment of the end spaces. Cal cul ati ons have been carri ed through
for an unstrapped anode bl ock wi th end spaces andanode hei ght such
that the modes occur i n r ever se or der , and ver y good agreement wi th
experi ment has been obtai ned. I n addi ti on, both the previ ousl y men-
ti oned rel axati on method and the admi ttance matchi ng method used i n
thi s chapter mi ght i n pri nci pl e be extended to i ncl ude the end spaces.
The computati ons, however , become ver y l abori ous, and no such cal cu-
l ati ons have been carri ed through wi th sati sfactory accuracy.
1
- + c
L
-+C
+C L
(g)
FI G. 2.20,-(u) Longi tudi nal cr oss secti on of a magnetron anode bl ock showi ng the
charge di stri buti on and the di recti on of the i mpendi ng cur r ent fl ow for a typi cal end-space
resonance; (b) equi val ent ci rcui t for the end-space resonance.
As poi nted out i n Sec. 2.1, the assumpti ons made pr event the resul tant
spectrum from bei ng compl ete. Ther e are an i nfi ni ty of resonances that
do not even approxi matel y sati sfy the assumed condi ti ons. Ordi nari l y
these are short-wavel ength resonances that do not i nter fer e wi th opera-
ti on and are rarel y observed. Ther e are, however , two types of reson-
ances that may be troubl esome. The fi rst gr oup i s usual l y r efer r ed to
as the n resonances. These are si mi l ar i n character to the ordi nary
magnetron resonances, except that ther e i s axi al vari ati on of the fi el ds.
I n fact, these resonances are characteri zed by an el ectri c-fi el d node at
the medi an pl ane. The wavel engths of these resonances are of the same
Associ atedEquati ons by Fl ux Pl otti ng, RL Repor t A-o. 1047,Jan. 23, 1946.
P. D. Crout, i A Fl ux Pl otti ng hl ethod for Obtai ni ng Fi el ds Sati sfyi ng hl ax-
wel l s Equati ons,wi th Appl i cati onsto the Magnetron, RL Repor t No. 1048,Jan. 16,
1946.
F. E. Bothwel land P. D, Crol l t, .k I l cthod for Cal cul ati ngMagnetronResonant
Frequenci esand hl odes) RI , Repor t No. 1039,Feb. 8, 1946.
74
THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 2.9
or der of magni tude as the fi rst gr oup of ordi nary resonances onl y when
the anode i s abnormal l y l ong. The second gr oup i s r efer r ed to as end-
space resonances.
These are characteri zed by strong fi el ds i n the end
spaces and are most l i kel y to be seen when the vol ume of the end spaces
i s l arge. I The fi el d di stri buti on, together wi th an approxi mate equi va-
l ent ci rcui t of a typi cal end-space resonance, i s shown i n Fi g. 220.
2.9. The I nteracti on Fi el d.The equati ons for the fi el ds i n the i nter-
acti on space have been deri ved i n Sec. 26. These are
.
N8E
m
()
si n TO Z~(/rp)
-rL9 ZJ (krJ
~i 7+,
z=-42%2(%9%3
m..
I
The speci al case n = N/2 (wherei n N must be an even number) wi l l
be di scussed fi rst. For thi s case the fi el ds r educe to
, =%KM% ) $R- =(m+oN 40)
m-O
and
z=-J:2F2 (%%wos
m=o
These fi el ds r epr esent standi ng \vaves rather than rotati ng waves, a
consequence of the fact that the (n = N/2)-mode i s non degener ate.
Furthermore, ther e i s a 90 phase di fference between the el ectri c and
magneti c fi el ds, as ther e al ways i s i n a standi ng-wave resonance. A
qual i tati ve pi cture of the el ectri c fi el d di stri buti on i s shown i n Fi g. 2.21.
At the el ectr on vel oci ti es i n the magnetron (usual l y l ess than one-
tenth the vel oci ty of l i ght) the for ce due to the osci l l ati ng magneti c
fi el d i s much l ess than that due to the el ectri c fi el d. Ther efor e a detai l ed
di scussi on of the magneti c fi el d i s unnecessary. I t i s evi dent that the
1Certai n of the end-spaceresonancescan al sobe r egar dedas n resonances.
SEC. 2.9] THE I NTERACTI ON FI ELD 75
el ectri c fi el d consi sts of a sum of harmoni c components the rel ati ve
ampl i tudes of whi ch depend upon p through the functi ons.
ZJ (kp)
Z~(kr=)
for E+
and
~ z, (A-p)
kp Z~(krJ
for E,.
For kra <<-y these functi ons can be approxi mated by
and
respecti vel y. These functi ons (except E, for T = 1) aI l decr ease as p
approaches r,, and the rate of decr ease i ncreases rapi dl y wi th T. Thus,
as p approaches rc, the l ower -or der
components become mor e promi -
nent. The extent of the effect
depends upon r./ ra, becomi ng l ess
pronounced as rC/ ra approaches
one. However , at the val ues of
rJra ordi nari l y used, the l owest
component of the N/2-mode i s the
predomi nant one at the cathode,
and the angul ar dependence near
the cathode i s gi ven ver y nearl y
FI G. 2.21.Di stri buti on of el ectri c fi el d i n
by cos (N/2) I & I n a di scussi on of
thei nteracti onspacefor ther-mode.
the i nteracti on between the fi el d and the el ectrons (see Chap. 6), the
anal ysi s of the fi el d i nto harmoni c components i s ver y useful because i t i s
usual l y possi bl e to i gnore al l but one of the components.
()
The (n = 0)-modes share wi th the n = ~ -modes the pr oper ty of
nondegeneracy.
The Degenerate Modes.-Al l other modes of the unstrapped resonant
system have a degener acy of the second or der ; that i s, ther e i s al ways
a pai r of l i nearl y i ndependent fi el ds havi ng the same resonant frequency.
T
76 THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC.210
I n one of these the fundamental component [(m = O)-component]
rotates cl ockwi se, whereas i n the other i t rotates countercl ockwi se. 1
The harmoni c components al l appear as waves that r otate at di fferent
angul ar vel oci ti es; that i s, the vel oci ty of rotati on i s proporti onal to
I /-y, and thus waves of negati ve -y r otate i n a di recti on opposi te to those
of posi ti ve y. I t i s wor th noti ng that the harmoni c of the l owest y
(excl udi ng the fundamental ), gi ven by m = 1, rotates i n a di recti on
opposi te to that of the fundamental . The remarks that wer e made
concerni ng the comparati ve rates of decr ease of the harmoni cs wi th p
for the nondegenerate modes appl y her e al so. Ordi nari l y, however , the
vari ous harmoni cs are not i ntegral mul ti pl es of the fundamental .
Degener acy l eads to certai n practi cal di ffi cul ti es i n magnetron
desi gn. I t i s never possi bl e to make a magnetron per fectl y symmetri c.
The l ack of symmetry tends to spl i t the degener ate modes i nto two
nondegenerate modes wi th sl i ghtl y di fferi ng resonant frequenci es.
Ordi nari l y, both components are exci ted, but the rel ati ve degr ee of
exci tati on depends upon the nature of the spl i tti ng and can be expected
to vary consi derabl y from tube to tube.
Thi s spl i tti ng l eads to a certai n
l ack of uni formi ty i n tubes operati ng i n degener ate modes.
201O. Appl i cati ons and Lkni tati ons.-I t i s evi dent from the precedi ng
di scussi on that the unstrapped system has several resonant modes
wi th whi ch the el ectrons can coupl e (i n the manner descri bed i n Chap. 1).
The same i s tr ue of the other systems to be descri bed l ater. Whether
or not a magnetron can oper ate i n a speci fi c mode over a wi de range of
vol tages, currents, and magneti c fi el ds i s determi ned for the most part
by the wavel ength and the fi el d confi gurati on of al l the other modes
rel ati ve to that speci fi c one.z The symmetri c unstrapped resonant
system i s sati sfactory onl y for l ow val ues of N, because i ts modes cr owd
together for hi gh val ues of n and N. I t wi l l be seen l ater that thi s effect
restri cts thei r appl i cati on to comparati vel y l ong wavel engths.
The devel opment of the unstrapped resonant system was abandoned
when the strapped and ri si ng-sun systems wer e di scovered. Conse-
quentl y, no extended attempt has been made to desi gn the best possi bl e
unstrapped magnetron or to fi nd what i s the l argest possi bl e N that can
be used. . The l argest N that has been used wi th ful l successa i s 6. Thi s
] Ther e i s a certai n degr eeof arbi trari nesswi th r egar d to whi ch pai r of fi el ds i s
taken as fundamental . Thus i t i s possi bl e to form other l i nearl y i ndependentpai rs
by taki ng l i near combi nati onsof the pai r chosen above.
ZThe vari ous factors that affect mode sel ecti onare di scussedi n Chap. 8.
~I t i s possi bl eto i ncreasethe separati onbetween the m-modeand the
()
N
7
l -
mode by bri ngi ng a ri ng ver y cl ose to the ends of the anode segments. Successful
experi mentalmagnetronswi th N = 8 have been constructedby maki ng use of such
a ri ng.
SEC.2.11] THE COMPUTATI ON OF ADMI TTANCES 77
()
N
si x-resonator magnet r on 1 osci l l ates i n the mmode n =
2
i n the 700-
Mc/sec band at an effi ci ency of 35 to 40 per cen~. Thus, at a pul se
cur r ent of 10 amp and 12,500 vol ts, the tube wi l l pr oduce 50-kw pul se
power .
Another exampl e of a mmode unstrapped magnetron i s the ori gi nal
Bri ti sh 10-cm tube. I t has ei ght resonators, and the separati on between
the r-mode and the 3-mode i s onl y 1 per cent. The maxi mum effi ci ency
vari es from 20 to 30 per cent so that at a pul se i nput of 15 amp and 12,000
#a##m##ba=
HEH#t##
3,0
bla=4.0 bl a=3.5 bla=3,0
bla=2.5
2,5
2.0
.7.
:- 1.5
<
1,0
0.5
0
0 0,5 1.0 1,5 2.0
45MHMuHba=
FI G.2.22. F(ka, b/ a) i n radi anspl otted as a functi on of ka for b,/ aequal to 1.15 to 4.0.
vol ts an output of 15 kw mi ght be obtai ned. At currents bel ow 10 amp
the tube osci l l ates i n the 3-mode, and i n general performance i s errati c
from tube to tube.
I n both of the magnetrons descri bed above, the anode l ength and
end spaces are so short that the modes appear i n r ever se or der (Sec.
28)-the r-mode i s the l ongest-wavel ength mode.
2,11. The Computati on of Admi ttances.I n the vari ous admi ttance
formul as deri ved i n previ ous secti ons, the dependence of admi ttance
upon frequency and certai n of the geometr i c parameters i s contai ned i n
some rather compl i cated expressi ons i nvol vi ng Bessel and Neuman
I The 700 A (B, C, D) series.
78 THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 211
functi ons. Tabl es, pl ots, and approxi mati on formul as that are useful
for the computati on of these admi ttances appear bel ow.
The Annular Sector Resonator.The admi ttance of uhe annul ar
sector shown i n Fi g. 2.11 i s gi ven by
J
60 h JO(ka)Nl(kb) JI(kb)iVO(ka)e
~=j
kO#aJ1(ka)N1(kb) J1(l fb)Nl (ka)
The functi ons
()
b .J ,(ka)N,(kb) .J ,(kb)NO(ka)
F a; = cOt-Jl (ka)I Vl (kb) Jl (l rb)Nl (ka)
are pl otted i n Fi gs. 2.22 and 2.23 as a functi on of ka for vari ous val ues
~?oo
*%p ,$ ,>a ,pQ ,ya ,y?
3.0
2.5
2.0
.7.
:1.5
k
1.0
0.5
0 0.1 02 0.3 0.4 a5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Fm. 2.23.F(ka, b/ a) in radi.mapl otti as a functi onof ka for bla equal tQ 4 to 10.
of b/ a. The functi on F(ka, b/a), rather than cot F,h=been pl otted i n
or der to faci l i tate i nterpol ati on between the gi ven val ues of b/ a. The
successi on of pol es i n cot F woul d make i nterpol ati on between curves
ver y di ffi cul t.
The Cylindrical Resonator.-The admi ttance of the cyl i ndri cal
resonator shown i n Fi g. 2 10 i s gi ven by
SEC. 211] THE COMPUTATI ON OF ADMI TTANCES 79
For ka <<1 (whi ch i t usual l y i s) one can take
J P(ka) ka (ka)a
J ~(ka) = ~ + p(p + 1)
(p # o),
yi el di ng
(ka) = -#+[*+2(w)2i 1a+ (ka)3[:
~=1
whi ch gi ves the frequency dependence comparati vel y si mpl y. The
seri es
conver ges rather sl owl y for smal l val ues of ~. One can sho~v, ho!vever ,
that
2( )
3 si np~z l __
_1n2++~+ W
P+ 52
36 me+
p-l
whi ch conver ges qui te rapi dl y for smal l val ues of ~ (i ncl udi ng the usual
range of val ues for ~). The seri es
2( )
si n pi 2 1
P+ P(P + 1)
p-l
conver ges qui te rapi dl y. Furthermore, one can usual l y omi t the terms
i n (ka)3.
For l arger val ues of ka one can cor r ect the above formul a by usi ng
the exact val ues for [J p(ka)]/ [J ~(ka)] for the l ow val ues of p and the
seri es approxi mati ons for the l arger val ues (l arger val ues means those
for whi ch A-a<<p).
kr.
0, 00
0.04
0. 08
0.12
0.16
0.20
0.24
0.28
0.32
0.36
0,40
0.44
0.48
0.52
0.56
0,60
0.64
0.68
0,72
0.76
0.80
0.84
0.88
0.92
0,06
1.00
n-O
49;899
24.9799
16.6367
12.4599
9.9500
8.27304
7,07265
6.16968
5.46506
4,89034
4.43457
- 4,04550
3,71467
3.42957
3.18103
- 2.96220
2.76780
2.59376
2.43684
2,20444
- 2.16449
2.04527
- 1.935355
1.83355
1.73889
n-l
O.00000
0.04002
0.08013
0.12043
0.16103
0.20202
0.24352
0.28562
0.32844
0.37212
0.41678
0.46257
0.50964
0.55816
0.60833
0.66034
0.71444
0.77088
0.82996
0.89202
0.95745
1.02668
1.10023
1.17870
1.26281
1.35339
TABLE 2 2 . -VALUES OF [J.(kr. )]/[Jl(kr.)1
n=2
o.m
0.02000
0. 0M02
0.06007
0.08017
0.10033
0.12058
0.14092
0.16138
0.18197
0.20271
0.22362
0.2-4472
0.26603
0.28756
0.30935
0.33141
0.35377
0.37644
0.39946
0.42286
0.44666
0.47089
0.49559
0.52079
D.54652
~=3
o.m
0.01333
0.02667
0.04002
0.05339
0.06678
0.08019
0.09364
0 10712
0.12065
0.13423
0.14786
0.16156
0.17532
0.18915
0.20306
0.21706
0.23115
0.24533
0.25963
0.27403
0.28856
0.30322
0.31800
0.33293
0.34802
n=4
o. 00ooo
0. o1ooo
0.02000
0.03001
0.04003
0.05005
0.06003
0.07014
0.08021
0.09029
0.10040
0.11054
0.12070
0.13089
0,14111
0.15137
0.16166
0.17200
0.18237
0.19280
0.20327
0 21379
0.22437
0 23501
0.24570
0.25647
n=5
o.m
0.00800
0.01600
0.02401
0.03201
0.04027
0.04805
0.05607
0.06411
0.07216
0.08021
0.08829
0.09637
0.10447
0.11259
0.12073
0.12888
0.13706
0.14526
0.15348
0.16173
0.17001
0.17831
0.18665
0. 19!501
0.20341
~=f5
o. 00ooo
0.00666
0.01333
0.02000
0.02667
0.03335
0.04003
0.04670
0,05340
0.06009
0.06679
0.07350
0.08022
0.08694
0.09368
0,10043
0.10718
0.11396
0.12075
0,12754
0.13436
0.14119
0.14803
0.15460
0.16178
0.16868
~=7
o.m
0.00571
0.01142
0.01714
0,02286
0,02858
0.03430
0.04302
0.04575
0.05148
0.05722
0.0629>
0.06870
0.07446
0.08022
0.08593
0,09176
0.09753
0,10333
0.10912
0.11494
0.12075
0.12658
0.13242
0.13827
0.14414
~=g
o.m
0.00500
0.o1ooo
0.01500
0.02000
0.02501
0.03001
0.03502
0.04003
0.04504
0.05006
0.05507
0.06010
0.06512
0.07015
0.07519
0.08023
0.08527
0.09033
0.09538
0.10045
0.10552
0.11059
0.11568
0.12077
0.12588

n=g
o.m
0.00444
0.00889
0.01333
0.01778
0.02223
0.02668
0.03113
0,03558
O.m
0.04449
0.04894
0.05339
0.05787
0,06234
0.06681
0,07128
0,07575
0,08023
008472
0.08920
0.09370
0.09820
0.10271
0.10722
0.11173
co
o
k,.

1.04
1.08
1,12
1.16
1.20
1.24
1.28
1.32
1.36
1.40
1,44
1.48
1.52
1.56
1.60
1.64
1.68
1.72
1.76
1.80
1.84
1.88
1.92
1.96
2.00
~=f)
1.65051
1.56769
1,48983
1.41638
1.34687
1.28092
1.21814
1,15824
1.10093
1.04596
0.99311
0.94217
0.89296
0.84532
o. 7W1O
0.75415
071034
0.66757
0.62571
0.58465
0.54431
0.50459
0.46539
0.42662
0.38821
~=1
1.45144
1.55820
1.67512
1.80405
1.94727
2.10764
2.28889
2.49585
2.73495
3.01501
3.34828
3.75249
4 25414
4.89489
5,74391
6.92565
8.68769
11.6048
17.3841
34.3675
1199.48
36 5922
18.0348
11.9643
8.9453
72=2
0.57283
0.59977
0.62737
0.65568
0.68476
0.71466
0.74545
0.77720
0.80997
0.84383
0.87892
0.91531
0.95306
0.99236
1.03330
1.07602
1.12072
1.16748
1.21670
1.26842
1.32294
1.38057
1.44175
1.50674
1 57590
n=3
0.36326
0.37868
0.39427
0,41006
0.42604
0.44223
0.45864
0.47530
0.49217
0.50933
0.52676
0.54445
0.56245
0.58078
0.59944
0.61845
0 63783
0.65761
0.67778
0.69838
0.71946
0.74101
0.76306
0.78566
0.80878
~=4
0.26729
0.27819
0.28916
0.30021
0.31134
0.32256
0.33387
0.34526
0.35676
0.36835
0.38005
0.39186
0.40379
0.41583
0.42800
0.44030
0 45273
0.46530
0.47802
0.49089
0.50392
0.51711
0 53047
0.54402
0.55775
7J=5
0.21184
0.22031
0.22882
0 23737
0.24595
0.25458
0.26326
0.27198
0.28075
0.28957
0.29844
0.30737
0.31635
0.32539
0.33449
0.34366
0.35289
0.36218
0.37155
0.38098
0.39049
0.40008
0.40975
0.41950
0.42933
.
~=(j
0.17560
0.18255
0.18951
0.19650
0.20351
0.21054
0.21761
0..22470
0.23181
0.23896
0.24613
0.25333
0.26057
0.26785
0.27514
0.28249
0.28987
0.29727
0 30473
0.31222
0.31975
0.32733
0.33495
0.34261
0.35032
n=7
0.15001
0.15590
0.16181
0.16772
0.17366
0.17961
0.18557
0.19156
0.19755
0.20358
0.20961
0.21566
0.22174
0.22783
0.23396
0.24009
0.24625
0.25244
0.25864
0.26488
0.27113
0.27741
0.28373
0.29006
0.29644
n=g
0.13099
0.13611
0.14123
0.14637
0.15152
0.15668
0.16185
0.16703
0.17222
0.17743
0.18265
0.18788
0.19312
0.19838
0,20365
0.20893
0.21423
0.21955
0.22487
0.23023
0.23559
0.24097
0.24637
0.25179
0.25722
~=g
0.11626
0.12078
0.12532
0.12986
0.13441
0.13897
0.14353
0.14811
0 15269
0.15728
0.16187
0.16648
0.17110
0.17572
0 18036
0.18500
0.18966
0.19433
0.19900
0.20369
0.20839
0.21311
0.21783
0.22257
0.22732
,.,,,, ,,, .,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,, ,,, ,,,,,,,,, ,., ,,,,,,,,, ,,, ,,,
82 THE UNSTRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEhf [SEC. 211
The I nteraction ~pace.The admi ttance i s gi ven by
wher e ~ = n + mN. For kra <<-y one can use
Z~(krJ
m = K (1 + .171) +
(kr.)
%2(171 + 1)
wher e u = r./ ra.
Si nce l i r. i s not al ways l ess than n, one uses for K(O,ka)
( )
K(O,krJ = ~e
kra x (*) n
2 Zn(kra)
Z~(kr.)
m..
wher e the symbol Z i ndi cates omi ssi on of the term for whi ch m = O.
For u = O, [Zn(kra)]/[Z~(kra)] = [J ~(kra)]/ [J . (krJ ]. Val ues for these,
functi ons for n = Othrough 9 appear i n Tabl e 22. For val ues of n 2 2,
the approxi mati on Z./Z~ = (.Jm/.T~)(1 + u) i s often sati sfactory.
CHAPTER 3
THE RI SI NG-SUN SYSTEM
BY N. KROLL
The di scussi on of the unstrapped system has shown that a desi rabl e
resonant system woul d be one i n whi ch the N/2-mode i s wel l separated
from the nei ghbori ng modes and, further,
remai ns wel l separated for val ues of N sub-
stanti al l y l arger than those usabl e i n un-
strapped systems. Two systems are
commonl y used to accompl i sh thi s objecti ve.
One i s the ri si ng-sun system i n whi ch al ter-
nate resonators are al i ke but adj scent
resonators are not al i ke; the other i s the
strapped system, 1 di scussed i n Chap. 4.
Two exampl es of the ri si ng-sun structure are
shown i n Fi g. 3.1. The desi gn of Fi g. 3.l a
i s obvi ousl y suggesti ve of the rather pi ctur-
esque term by whi ch thi s type of magnetron
i s known.
3.1. The Spectrum.The el ectromag-
neti c-fi el d probl em for the ri si ng-sun system
can be r educed to a ci rcui t probl em by pr e-
ci sel y the same means that wer e used for the
unstrapped system (Sec. 2 1). That i s, the
magnetron can be r epr esented by the ci rcui t
i n Fi g. 3.2, wher e the i nteracti on space i s
r epr esented by a networ k of N pai rs of ter -
mi nal s and the resonators by admi ttances
havi ng a si ngl e pai r of termi nal s. The
assumpti ons l eadi ng to thi s representati on
are the same as those di scussed i n Sec. 2.1
(a)
(b)
FI G. 3.1.Two exampl es of
ri si ng-sun resonant systems: (a)
vane type; (b) vane type wi th
modi fi ed l arge resonators.
and l ead to the same restri cti ons upon the sol uti ons.
I n or der to fi nd the resonant frequenci es, i t wi l l be necessary, as
before, to i nvesti gate the ci rcui t properti es of the vari ous el ements.
1Arrangementsof unl i ke resonatorsdi fferi ngfrom that of the ri si ng-sunsystem
have been gi ven some theoreti cal consi derati on, hone of these has appearedto be
promi si ng,and none seems to offer any advantagesover the ri si ng-sunstructure.
83
84 THE RI SI NG-SUN SYSTEM [SEC.31
These properti es have al ready been ful l y i nvesti gated for the resonators
and can be summari zed by the functi ons Y,, and Y,,. These functi ons
are the admi ttances of the even- and odd-numbered resonators r espec-
ti vel y (numbered as i n Fi g. 3.2) and are functi ons of the frequency.
Formul as for computi ng these admi ttances for di fferent resonator shapes
are deri ved i n Sec. 2.5.
On the other hand, the properti es of the i nteracti on space wer e not
i nvesti gated ful l y enough to deal wi th the probl em of thi s chapter. I n
Chap. ~, admi t~ances ~or the unstrapped ~ystem wer e comp~ted wi th
the restri cti on that the el ectri c fi el d di ffered from gap to gap by onl y a
constant phase factor; thi s resul ted i n the condi ti on of equal admi ttances
seen at any gap. Thi s restri cti on i s cl earl y i nval i d for the ri si ng-sun
Y,
1)
Y, K.,
-1)
(o)
FI G.32. -Ci rcui t representati on of the ri si ng-sun system.
system, i nasmuch as the admi ttances seen at adjacent gaps must, i n
general , be di fferent. For the ri si ng-sun system one assumes, as before,
that the tangenti al el ectri c fi el d al ong the dotted boundari es (Fi g. 2.13)
i s constant at each gap. Furthermore, one assumes that the fi el d vari es
from even-numbered gap to even-numbered gap as e(2Xjl N)aand from
odd-numbered gap to odd-numbered gap al so as et2T~njNJ g, wi th no restri c-
ti on pl aced upon the rati o of the fi el d at an even-numbered gap to that
at an odd-numbered gap. 1 Thus the el ectri c fi el d at even-numbered
gaps can be r epr esented by EfeJ e(2rjmNJ , and at odd-numbered gaps by
E(o)e[a*,~tN),,wher e the rati o E(j/ E(OJ is arbi trary and may be compl ex.
The requi red admi ttances can be readi l y computed by an appl i cati on
of the pri nci pl e of superposi ti on to previ ousl y obtai ned resul ts. The fi el d
di stri buti on descri bed i n the above paragraph can be obtai ned by super-
posi ng two symmetri c di stri buti ons for whi ch the tangenti al el ectri c fi el d
] As i n Chap. 2, q i s the gap number and has val ues of Oto N 1, and n i s an
i nteger.
SEC. 3.1] THE SPECTRUM 85
,[,.(.-y)/~l g ~especti vel ~.
at the qth gap i s gi ven by Ee~@-/.VJQ and Ee
The el ectromagneti c fi el ds associ ated wi th these di stri buti ons have been
computed i n Sec. 26 [Eq. (2.36)]. A superposi ti on of these fi el ds gi ves
, j[,x(n-~)/N]Q ,Vhi ch i s equal
ri se to the di stri buti on Ee;t2/,~Jq + E e
to [E + ( l )qE]e2TqfV. I t i s evi dent that the fi el d vari es pr oper !j
from even-numbered gap to even-numbered gap and from odd-numbered
gap to odd-numbered gap. Thus E(<) = E + E and E() = E E; and
i nasmuch as E/ E is arbi trary, so i s E()/ EtOJ .
The magneti c fi el d at the vari ous gaps wi l l be gi ven by
Hz(ra, O) = H(r., o) + H(r., 1#1),
wher e H (T., 1#1) is the magneti c-fi el d di stri buti on associ ated wi th
Ee(l n/N)q, and H (ra, +) is that associ ated wi th Ee
[*mj(.-~)/ N]~
Accordi ng to the treatment fol l owi ng Eq. (2.36), Sec. 2.6, the admi t-
tance seen at the qth gap i s gi ven by
(1)
since E+ = (E + ( 1) !Et)e(2.i./ .v) Q
over the range of i ntegrati on.
(a N)
Accordi ng to Eq. 2.36, H(ra, +) = H r @ %* e(2~lNl qand
hst aking* (-b l)reducesO
Theadmi ttances Y. computed i n Sec. 2.6 can be wri tten as
(3)
86 THE RI SI NG-SUN SYSTEM [SEC. 31
Si mi l arl y,
/
~, H(ra, ~)d$
(;..) = (.-~) = 4i -:82 E
(4) ,
Thus the expressi on for Y(<J reduces to
Y(.) =
+ (J-) (q ,Ven]
l +R
(5a)
and
y(.) =
-(~-n) (q odd),
l fi -
(5b)
wher e R = E/ E. Ther efor e the admi ttances depend upon R as wel l :
as upon the frequency.
For resonance to occur i t i s necessary that the admi ttances match at
both odd- and even-resonator openi ngs. Thi s condi ti on yi el ds
Ry(#-) +y =()
l+R
n-(W+;=:
1R
,2 ,
(6a)
(6b)
whi ch on el i mi nati ng R yi el d, after some mani pul ati on,
[ 1[
+y) +y,, n+(H
2
+ Y,,
1
[ 1
- G-)2

2-
(7)
The resonant frequency havi ng been computed, R can be found from
Y. + Y,, . Y.+1r, _
R=
G-) + (;-) + 2
(
(8)
As i n the case of the unstrapped system, the resonance equati on
depends upon n. For the unstrapped system i t was necessary to con-
si der onl y the val ues Oto N/2 for n, as repl aci ng n by n or by (n + mN)
wher e m i s any i nteger, l eft the resonance equati on unchanged. For
the ri si ng-sun system, however , the val ues O to N/4 [or (N 2)/4,
()
N
whi chever i s an i nteger] are suffi ci ent, as repl aci ng n by ~ n , as
wel l as by (n + mN) or n, l eaves the resonance eql l ati on unchanged.
SEC. 3.1] THE SPECTRUM 87
Each equati on hasani nfi ni te number of roots, al though onl y the l ower -
frequency r oots are of practi cal i nterest (ordhari l y onl y the fi rst twoar e
of i nterest). Whi l e i t woul d be si mpl est to use a mode-numberi ng
system anal ogous to that used for the unstrapped system, i .e., nP for
the (p + I )-root of the frequency equati on determi ned by n, thi s i s not
the system i n common use. I t has become customary to r egar d any
magnetron resonant system havi ng si de resonators as a modi fi cati on of the
unstrapped system. That i s, one consi ders the system as havi ng been
pr oduced by a conti nuous perturbati on of the unstrapped system. As
the unstrapped system i s modi fi ed, the resonant frequenci es and thei r
associ ated fi el d di stri buti ons wi l l al so be modi fi ed and wi l l change
conti nuousl y i f the perturbati on i s effected conti nuousl y. Thi s i mpl i es
that the modes of one system joi n conti nuousl y to the modes of the
other and thus that ther e i s a l -to-l cor r espondence between the modes
of one system and the modes of the other . From thk poi nt of vi ew i t i s
conveni ent to gi ve correspondi ng modes the same number.
~Tnfor_
tunatel y the cor r espondence i s not uni que (that i s, i t depends upon the
i ntermedi ate steps of the perturbati on), so that i t i s necessary to speci fy
the way i n whi ch the perturbati on i s performed. For the ri si ng-sun
system one consi ders the perturbati on as havi ng been made by a con-
ti nuous al terati on of the si de resonators, other di mensi ons bei ng hel d
fi xed. I n al l practi cal cases thi s l eads to the mode number n for the
()
fi rst r oot of Eq. (7) and the mode number ~ n for the second r oot.
()
N
The hi gher r oots al ways cor r espond to the hi gher-order n- or ~ n -
modes, wi th the parti cul ar cor r espondence dependi ng upon the speci fi c
case.
Equati on (7) contai ns the unstrapped system as a speci al case.
For, setti ng Y,, = V,, = Y, gi ves
[ 1[ 1
n+y(;-)+y_ - Y(H2
2
r
2
whi ch yi el ds the two equati ons
Y,+ Yn=o and
+ (;-)= 0
(9)
These are, of course, the previ ousl y deri ved equati ons for the n- and
()
N

2
n -modes of the unstrapped system.
Al though Eq. (7) appears to be compl i cated, i t i s subject to a si mpl e
physi cal i nterpretati on. I n or der to i l l ustrate thi s i nterpretati on the
88
TI I E RI SI NG-SUN SYSTEM [SEC.31
fol l owi ng speci fi c exampl e wi l l be used. An 18-resonator anode bl ock
si mi l ar to that shown i n Fi g. 2.17 wi l l be used; i n thi s al l di mensi ons
are hel d fi xed except the l engths of al ternate resonators d~, ~vhi ch are
al l owed to i ncrease. I n Fi g. 3.3 the
35
3.0
2.5
~
A.0
2.0
1.5
1
1 1.5 2.0 2,5
~
d,
FI G. 3.3.Mode spectrum of a ri si ng-sun
system as a functi on of the rati o of l arge
resonator depth d, to smal l resonator depth
d, hel d fi xed. X., i s the r-mode wavel ength
for d,/ d, = 1. Di mensi ons: d,/ Ar, = 0.172;
da/ATO = 0.524; d, = O; 6 = 0.060 radi ans.
resul tant resonant frequenci es of
the modes 1 to 9 are pl otted as a
functi on of the rati o of l arge to
smal l resonator depths (rl = d2/ d,).
Fol l o\\-i ng the mode-numberi ng
conventi on di scussed above, the
9-mode i s found as the second r oot
of Eq. (7) \vi thn = O(the fi rst r oot
i s the tri ~i al o = O); the 1- and 8-
modes are found as the fi rst and
second r oots of 13q. (7) \\i thn = 1;
and so forth for the other modes.
I t i s evi dent that for suffi ci entl y
l arge val ues of r,, the (n = N/2)-
mode or the 9-mode becomes wel l
separated from i ts nei ghbors, a r e-
qui rement for operati on i n thi s
mode. Furthermore, the other
modes appear to break i nto tl vo
di sti nct groups, each of \\hi cl l
bears a suggesti ve resembl ance to
the fi rst gr oup of modes of an
unstrapped system ha~i ng ni ne
resonators. Tabl e 3.1 shoi vs the
modes of the ri si ng-sun system for
d,/ d, = 2.1 compared wi th the modes of an unstrapped system havi ng the
same di mensi ons as the ri si ng-sun system except that i n Case I the smal l
TABLE3.1.1THERESONA~CES OFAN18-RESOi %ArOR l {l sI ~c;-su~ SYSTEM(MJ1,ARED
WI THTHOSEOFTwo Al ~E-RESO~ATOR U~S,Ui AM,ELI SYWWMS
Case I (MC I I
A~/A,= 0.987 A;/A, = 1.0!)6
A;/A, = 0.9975 Ay/x7 = 1,015
A;/k, = o 9994 l j/A, = 1.0034
A:/x, = 0.9997 Aj/A, = 1.0006
x;,/A, = 0.8816
resonators have been fi l l ed wi th metal l eavi ng ni ne l arge resonators and
i n Case I I the l arge resonators have been fi l l ed wi th metal l eavi ng the
1The val ues of X. are the resonances of the ri si ng-san system of Fi g. 3.3 at
dJ dl = 2,1. The x: are the resonancesof the ni ne-resonatorunstrappedsystem
formed by fi l l i ng the smal l rcsmmtors\v]thmetal ; the A: are those of the ni ne-reso-
nator symmetri csystcm formed by fi l l i ng the l arge resonatorswi th metal .
SEC.3.1] THE ASPECTRUM 89
ni ne smal l resonators. These resul ts suggest that a ri si ng-sun system of
N resonators can r ei nter pr eted astwosymmetri c N/2 resonator systems
coupl ed together . A careful exami nati on of Eq. (7)wi l l cor r obor ate thi s
i nterpretati on.
Consi der fi rst the expressi on [Y. + Y ~
(z_n)l /2
Substi tuti ng the
expressi on i n Eq. 2.37 yi el ds
+(w _
2
-~~:g~gk~;)j (10,
m..
wher e ~ = n + m(N/2).
Thi s expressi on, however , corresponds preci sel y to Y. for an i nteracti on
space havi ng preci sel y the same di mensi ons but N/2 openi ngs i nstead
of N openi ngs. Then
+ (:-) + y =,
2
r,
i s the equati on for the resonant frequenci es of an unstrapped system
formed by the N/2 resonators correspondi ng to one set of si de resonators
wi th the other set of si de resonators fi l l ed wi th metal . A si mi l ar state-
ment appl i es to the equati on
Thus the resonance equati on for the ri si ng-sun anode bl ock,
[ 1[
n+(H +y +(;-)+ y
H 1
- :(:-)2
2
n
2
r, =
(11)
can be i nterpreted as a coupl i ng equati on for the correspondi ng modes
of the two unstrapped systems wi th the term [(Y. Y~ )/2] 2 deter -
2n
mi ni ng the strength of coupl i ng. When thi s term i s smal l , the coupl i ng
i s weak and the resonances of the two systems are shi fted onl y a ver y
smal l amount. Except for the case n = O, [(Y. Y~ ~)/2] i s qui te

2
()
N
smal l and becomes smal l er as n and ~ n become mor e nearl y equal .
I n the extr eme case of n = N/4, the ~oupl i ng term i s i denti cal l y zer o and
the resonance associ ated wi th one set of resonators i s compl etel y i nde-
pendent of the di mensi ons of the other set. (1-di nari l y (except for
90
THE RI SI NG-SUN SYSTEM
[SEC.31
n = O), the coupl i ng i s qui te weak,l al though ther e i s an i mportant
excepti on when the resonant frequenci es of the two systems occur cl ose
together . Then both bracketed terms are smal l over the same fr e-
quency range, and the coupl i ng term becomes i rnwrtant. Thi s i nter-
pretati on of the ri si ng-sun resonances wi l l be further supported i n
Sec. 3.2, wher e the fi el d di stri buti on wi l l be exami ned.
Fi gure 33 shows the spectrum over the range of rati os i n general
use; the two groups shown cor r espond to the fi rst gr oup of resonances
for both the l arge- and smal l -resonator systems. I n the case showm,
4 5 6
d,
=
dl 1
FI G. 3,4.Mode spectrum, for l arge val ue. of r,, of the ri si ng-sun system of Fi g. 33.
The two groups shown cumespond to the fi l st KrOUPof the sl nal l -rcso!mtor system m!d ti l e
second group of the l arge-resonator system.
the fi rst gr oup of resonances of the smal l er-resonator unstrapped system
happens to occur at a much hi gher wavel ength range than that of the
second gr oup of resonances for the l arger-resonator unstrapped system
(not shown i n the fi gure). For ver y l arge rati os thi s i s no l onger the case.
Fi gure 34 shows the approxi mate behavi ur of the modes of the secund
gr oup of the l arge-resonator system i n rel ati on to the fi rst grml p of the
smal l -resonator system, for YI gr eater than 3.
Al though the precedi ng di sc[l ssi on \vas to a l arge extent i n r efer ence
to an N = 18 resonant system, the di scussi on can easi l y be general i zed.
Thus, for a ri si ng-sun system wi th N resonators and a rati o of resonator
depths that i s not too cl ose to 1, the resonances of the fi rst gr oup of the
spectrum can be di vi ded i nto thr ee subgroups. Ther e i s the set of modes
numbered 1, 2, . . . , (N 2)/4 (or N/A). These cor r espond cl osel y to
I Thi s remark appl i es mai nl y to the case of smal l i f./h.. As thi s quanti ty i s
i ncreased,the coupl i ngbecomes str onger for n # Oajl d somcwrhatweaker for 71 = 0,
For val uesof d./ Xr usedi n practi cethe coupl i ngi s Jl w:Lysweakfor n z 2 but may be
qui te strongfor n = 1.
SEC.3.1] TI I E SPECTR U31 91
thel ,2, ..., (N 2)/4 (or .V/4) of the unstrapped system of N/2
resonators formed by fi l l i ng the smal l resonators \~i th metal . Thi s set
i s frequentl y r efer r ed to as the upper m~dti pl ct. Seconcl , ther e i s the
set of modes (the l ower mul ti pl et) numbered (N + 2)/4 or /1/4, . ,
(N/2) 1. For moderate rati os of resonator si zes, these cor r espond
cl osel y to the (N 2)/4, (or N/4), . 2, 1, modes of the unstrapped
system of N/2 resonators formed by fi l l i ng the l arge resonators \vi th
()
metal . [Note that the or der i s r ever sed. Thus the ~~ 1 -mode
of the ri si ng-sun system corresponds to the l -mode of the unstrapped
system.] For ver y l arge rati os these modes cor r espond cl osel y to the
(%[or(w ~ )
21, 1~, modes of the l arge-resonator system
(that i s, the second gr oup of resonances). l hi s l ast cor r espondence
occurs ~vhen the second gr oup of
resonances of the l arge-resonator
system happens to occur at a l onger
wavel ength than the fi rst gr oup of
resonances for the smal l -resonator
system. Thi rd, ther e i s the m or
N/2-mode, whi ch occurs between
the two subgroups menti oned
above. The mmode corresponds
roughl y to the Ol -mode of the l arge-
resonator system, but i ts wave-
l ength i s as dependent upon the
smal l -resonator di mensi ons as i t
i s upon the l .arge-resonator
di mensi ons. 1
As i n the treatment of theun-
strapped system, the precedi ng
theor y has enti rel y negl ected the
end spaces. The effects of the end
spaces are somewhat si mi l ar for the
two cases, i n that al l wavel engths
16
/
2 3
1.4
/
\
\

~
~ 12
AO
9 (u-mti e)
87 ~ ~
1,0
\
~
\
\
\ \
0.8
~
0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20
0.25
Endspacehei ght
ho
FI G. 3.5.Typi cal exampl e of the effect
of erl d-space hei ght on the mode spectrum of
a ri si ng-sun tube. A, i s the i ni ti al val ue
of the r-mode wavel ength, Di mensi ons:
rf#,o = 0.27; hji~ = 0.31; TI = 1.75.
turn out to be l ower than the computed val ues. On the other hand, the
general character of the spectrum and or der of the modes remai n the same.
The reversal of or der , menti oned f or the unstrapped system, has never been
obser ved i n ri si ng-sun systems, al though one mi ght expect i t to occur
I The O,-mode r efer r ed to above shoul d not be confused wi th the O,-mode i n
Fi g. 34, whi ch i s the O,-modefor the ri si ng-sunsystem. The l atter correspondsto
the O,-modeof the smal l -resonatorsystemfor smal l rati os and to the O,-modeof the
l arge-resonatorsystemfor l argerati os.
92 THE RI ,SI .VG-S( I N .?YSTAM [Sm. 32
for ver y short anodes wi th ver y short end spaces. The magni tude of
the end-space effect depends upon the di mensi ons of the end space and
the rel ati ve si zes of the si de resonators. Experi mental l y i t has been
found thatthemmodcmavbe depressed from 2t08per cent; thel o\rer-
}vavel ength mocl cs of the l ong-\vavel ength gr oup are rarel y depressed as
much as 5 per cent, \vhi l e the hi ghest-\ravel ength mode, the l -mode,
may be depressed mor e than 20 per cent. The mode just bel ow the
(- )
.!
r-mode, the
2
1 -mode, i s depressed about the same amount as the
~-mode, al though the separati on bet\veen the two i s usual l y changed
some\vh:~t. The other modes bcl o~v the r-mode ~vavel cngth arc dcprcsscd
about 2 pcr cent. Fi gure 3.5 sho\vs a typi cal exampl e of the effect of
end-space hei ght on the mode spectrum.
3.2. The I nteracti on Fi el d.The tangenti al el ectri c fi el d at each gap
\vasfound i n the l ast secti on to be gi ven by
Thi s di stri buti on \V:Mfound by superposi ng the el ectromagneti c fi el ds
associated ,vi ~h ~~[2(~-~)Ql l ~ and the fi el ds associ ated ,Irith
The vari ous fi el d components i n the i nteracti on space can then be found
by si mpl y superposi ng the fi el ds associ ated wi th the above di stri buti ons.
Thus
$ N:{ 2 [t%)~i l :+
m..
()
si n ~o Z;f (kp) ,7,+
I I
+ R Tto ~~krc)
1
(12a)
~P~ { 2 N%M%l
Ep=~NeE
m=.
SEC. 3.2]
THE I N TERACTI OiV FI ELD 93
I t i s now possi bl e to see whi ch modes are degener ate and whi ch are
not. Substi tuti on of n does not change the resonant frequenci es of
the modes. However , except for n = O or n = N/4, i t does l ead to a
fi el d di stri buti on that i s l i nearl y i ndependent of the +n fi el d. These
modes then have a second-or der degeneracy. When n = O, no si gn
change i s possi bl e (n = +n), so that the ~-mode i s nondegenerate.
To consi der the case n = N/4, i t i s necessary to know the val ue of R.
I t can be shown that for the (n = N/4)-resonance associ ated wi th the
even-numbered resonators R = 1, and for the N/4-resonance associ ated
wi t h the odd-numbered resonators R = 1. I n ei ther case, repl aci ng n
by n does not l ead to a l i nearl y i ndependent fi el d so that modes wi th
n = N/4 are al so nondegenerate.
Thi s i s readi l y understandabl e i f one
observes what happens as the even- and odd-numbered resonators
become al i ke. I t i s evi dent that the two r oots of Eq. (7) for n = N/4
are equal i f Y,, = Y,,. I t i s al so evi dent that both r oots must be cal l ed
()
N/4-modes because ~ n i s al so equal to N/4. Thi s corresponds
to the fact that the N/4-mode has a second-or der degener acy i n an
unstrapped system. When the unstrapped system i s perturbed i nto the
ri si ng-sun system, thi s N/4 doubl et spl i ts, ~vi th one resonance fol l owi ng
the odci -numbered resonator system and the other fol l owi ng the even-
numbered resonator system.
Thus, a ri si ng-sun system i n whi ch N/-l
i s an i nteger has two N/4-resonances.
These two nondegenerate modes
can be thought of as mmodes for the two unstrapped N./2-resonator
systems.
I t i s apparent from the above expressi ons that a mor e detai l ed study
of the fi el ds requi rrs further kno\vl cdge of R. I t wi l l be of i nterest
study some l i mi ti ng cases fi rst.
Case 1.Y,, = Y,, = 1,. I I ere I l q. (7) can be factor ed yi el di ng
Y,+ Yn=o,
whi ch gi ves the n-modp frcql l enci m, and
1, + Y(;_n) = o,
()
T
whi ch gi ves the ~-
N -mo{l c frequenci es, Recal l se
~ = _ __YL + Y.
+ (:-?
to
i t i s cl ear that R = O for an n-mode, and the fi el ds are i denti cal wi th
i 1)c1g7)y)y (n ~)
tl oesnot I WWl to l i nmrl y i u~l oprndcntfi el ds. [Note
that I t }I WOI I I I ,. i ,l vf,rtl (l ,vl ~etlI I Ii s 1,~1,1 (l I hI .8).1
94
THE RI SI NG-SUN SYSTEM [SEC. 3.2
those previ ousl y computed for an unstrapped system wi th N resonators
osci l l ati ng i n the n-mode. The rati o of the vol tage across an odd-
numbered gap to that across the adjacent even-numbered gap i n the
cl ockwi se di recti on i s [(1 R)/(l + R)]ez~FM. Thus i f R = O, the rati o
i s eZ*I WN,~~,hi chi s appropri ate to the n-mode of an unstrapped system
rotati ng countercl ockwi se.
()
N
For the ~ n -mode R= CO. I n or der to have fi ni te fi el ds one
must take R V fi ni te and equal to V wi th V = O. Then the fi el ds are
()
N
i denti cal wi th those previ ousl y computed for the
3
n -mode.
For the vol tage rati o her e i s
(1 R)
(-:)
(1 + R)eZw3m[~= e2Ti l N= e2.1,~
()
N
whi ch i s appropri ate to the ~ n -mode of an unstrapped system
rotati ng cl ockwi se.
Thus i t can be seen that for R ver y near zer o the vol tages across odd
and even gaps are approxi matel y equal i n magni tude. The fi el ds are
l i ke those of a symmetri c system wi th N resonators osci l l ati ng i n the
()
N
n-mode, wi th a smal l amount of
T
n -mode mi xed i n. For R
ver y l arge, the vol tages across odd and even gaps are al so approxi matel y
equal i n magni tude. I n thi s case the fi el ds are l i ke those of an unstrapped
()
N
system wi th N resonators osci l l ati ng i n the ~ n -mode wi th a smal l
amount of n-mode mi xed i n.
Case 2.Y,, A us Thi s i s the case for ~vhi ch the odd-numbered
resonators are repl aced by metal and the system reduces to an unstrapped
system wi th N/2-resonators. The resonance equati on becomes
Y. + YN
J+ Y,, =O
2
2
and
}7. + YN
Y,, + Y.
Y. z -n
R=
Y,, +Yjv
=1.
Y. + Y~
n
2
YN
2n
2n
2
Then [(1 R)/ (l + R)]e2ii~ = O, whi ch i s to be expected because the
odd-numbered gaps are no l onger present. The fi el ds are those previ ousl y
1Her e V = 2v.6E, and V = 2r.L9E; thus V/ l = E/ E = R.
SEC.32] TI I E I ,YTERACTI ON FI ELD 95
compl l ted for the n-mode of an unstrapped system wi th N/2-resonators.
For exampl e, ~$ can be \~ri ttcn as
m
(13)
wher e 7 = n + m.V/2.
Thus i f R i s near 1, the fi el d i s ver y much l i ke that of an unstrapped
system ~vi th ,Y/2-resonators. Nw vol tage across odd-numbered gaps
i s ver y smal l compared \vi th that across even-n~unbered gaps.
As a rul e
thi s means that the odd-numbered
I t can be sho\vn si mi l arl y that
R approaches 1 as 1,, becomes
ver y l arge. I n thi s case the vol tage
across even-nurnbcrcd gaps i s
smal l compared \ri th that across
odd-numbered gaps, and agai n the
fi el d i s si mi l ar to that of an un-
strapped system ~ri th .V~2-reso-
nators osci l l ati ng i n the n-mode. 1
I t i s evi dent that a good pi rtl me
of the modi fi cati on of the i nterac-
ti on fi el d may be obtai ned by
studyi ng the vari ati on of R as the
shape of the odd or even set of
resonators i s changed. The bc-
ha~i or of R for the T-mode,
al though not typi cal of the l cmal
behavi or of R, i s of fundamental
resonators arc ver y weakl y exci ted.
06
. - . . --
05 -
1
~+2~
04
/ -_
:0.3
/ y
0.2
0.1
0
1 15 20 2.5 3.0
%_r
z-
1:1~, 3.6, l /RT as a functi on of r, for the
aaodc of l ~i g. 3.3.
i mportance i n magnetron operati on and v-i l l be di scussed fi rst.
For a
speci fi c exampl e consi der the anode Mock used i n Fi g. 33 for \vhi ch
l /R~ i s pl otted as ~ f~l ncti on of d,~d, i n Fi g, 3.(;. .1s ]voul d be expected
from the precedi ng di scussi on I /l I m i s zer o for d,/dl = 1. I t i s appar-
ent that as d?/dl becomes l arge,
I /R. approaches asymptoti cal l y a val ue
that i s l ess than 1. I n fact, i t can readi l y be sho~~n that l /Rr i s al ways
l ess than 1/[1 + (2.4,/.4.)] w-her e A, i s the total area of the smal l r eso-
nators and .4, i s the area of the i nteracti on space; thi s i s the val ue whi ch
I /R. approaches i n Fi g. 36. I n terms of vol tages, thi s means that for
d,/ d, = 1, the vol tage across odd and even resonators i s ecl ual . As
1The expressi ons for the fi el d components obtai ned by setti ng R = 1 are
formal l y di fferentfrom those previ ousl y deri ved because of an effecti ve shi ft of the
pol ar axi s through an angl e 27r/N. That i s, si nce the mwn-numberedresonatorsare
effecti vel yabsent, the pol ar axi s goes between two resonatorsi nsteadof through the
r enter of a resonator.
96
THE RI SI NG-S UN SYSTEM
[SEC. 32
d2/ dl i ncreases, the vol tage across the l arge resonators becomes l arger
than that across the smal l resonators, wi th the rati o approachi ng
.4,/( .4, + A J as d,/ dl becomes l arge. The fact that the vol tages across
the odd and m-en resonators are unequal i mpl i es that ther e i s a net
vol tage around the anode ci rcumference, a fact that i s evi dent from an
exami nati on of .V$, for
and i t i s thus cl ear that for l /Rr > 0, Ed has a component that i s i nde-
pendent of O. Thus ra
/
2 E$d~ is not zer o. A better understandi ng
o
of the ori gi n of thi s vol tage can be had from an exami nati on of- ------ L,l l e cnal -gt!
(a) (b)
(c)
FI G. 3.7.Qual i $ati ve di stri buti on of magneti c fi el d and r ur r ent wi th i mpendi ng charge
di stri buti on for (a) the T-rI I Ode of an .T-resonator ri si ng-sun %y%tern; (b) che ~-l r ~nde Of an
h-resonator unstrapped s~stem; WI (I (c) the O,-mode of an N12-resonator un~trapped
system. .Vagneti c I l nes i nto paper G G G ; magneti c l i ne!+out fr o!n pal m G 0 0.
and cur r ent di stri buti on. Fi gure 3.7a shows the di stri buti on of charge,
current, and magneti c fi el d i n a ri si ng-sun anode bl ock. Whereas the
vol tages at odd- and even-resonator openi ngs are opposi te i n di recti on,
the magneti c fi el ds are i n the same di recti on. Thi s woul d i ndi cate that
the magneti c fi el d i n the i nteracti on space i s uni di recti onal or that ther e
i s a net magneti c fl ux l i nki ng the anode ci rcumference. Thi s fl ux can
be thought of as i nduci ng the net vol tage around the anode ci rcumference.
I t i s al so apparent that the cur r ent across the anode segments i s uni -
di recti onal . Fi gure 3.7b and c shows the charge and cur r ent di stri buti on
for the ~-mode i n an N-resonator unstrapped system and the O,-mode
i n an (N/2)-resonator unstrapped system.
The i r-mode of the ri si ng-sun
SEC. 32]
THE I N TERAC1710N FI ELD 97
system evi dentl y bears a certai n resembl ance to each and maybe r egar ded
as a perturbati on of ei ther.
As a measure of the di storti on of the r-mode fi el d i n the ri si ng-sun
system, i t i s customary to use the rati o of the (~ = O) component to the
(-y = i V/2)-component of E@. Thi s rati o i s gi ven by
zj(kp)z;,2(h-a) : e
R(p) =
(15)
2Z~(krJ Z.,2(kP)R. si n ~ 0
For ri si ng-sun magnetrons i n common use, thi s quanti ty i s i n the nei gh-
bor hood of 0.1 at p = r.. However , the N/2-component fal l s off much
mor e rapi dl y than the zer o com-
ponent as p approaches r~, and i t
1.0
i s possi bl e for R to exceed 1 i n the
./-
/
vi ci ni ty of the cathode.
.75-
The behavi or of R for modes
other than the mmode i s qui te -1:
/ -n,
di fferent from that for the mmode. 8.50
/
As a speci fi c exampl e, consi der the ?
(n = 2)-mode and the (n = 7)-or .25
/
()
N
~
2 -mode for the anode bl ock
o
used i n Fi g, 3.3. I n Fi g. 3.8, R2
1 1.5 20 2.5 3.0
dz
and l /R, are pl otted as functi ons
di
of d,/ dl. Al though these quanti - kI G.3.8,-2?, and I /R, as functi ons of
d:/ d, for the ri si ng-sun system used i n
ti es have the expected val ue of ~i .i g~,~,
zer o for dZ/ dl = 1,they approach
the val ue 1 qui te rapi dl y, so that even for the rather moderate rati os used
i n practi ce the vol tage across one set of resonators i s smal l compared
wi th that across the other set. I n the case of the 2-mode the l arge
resonators are the strongl y exci ted ones, ~\-bi l efor the 7-mode i t i s the
smal l ones that are strongl y exci ted.
R, di ffers from R, i n that i t does not approach 1 asymptoti cal l y.
I n fact, when the rati o d,/ d, becomes so l arge that the l o\r er -gr oup
resonances become associ ated wi th the l arge resonators, R, changes
rapi dl y from 1 and begi ns to approach 1 asymptoti cal l y, ~~hi rh cor r e-
sponds to the fact that the l arge resonators have come to be the strongl y
exci ted set. Thi s behavi or of R i s typi cal of al l modes except r-modes;
that i s, for the upper gr oup R behaves l i ke Rz, and for the l o\ver grol l p R
behaves l i ke 1<7. Tabl e 32 sho\vs the val ues of R. and al so the rati o
I V~l /1 V~l of the magni tudes of vol tages across the l arge and smal l
resonators for d2/dl = 2.1.
98 THE RI SI NG-SUN SYSTEM [SEC. 33
Further support for the i nterpretati on of the ri si ng-sun structure as
two unstrapped systems coupl ed together i s gi ven by the fi el d di stri bu-
ti ons. The coupl i ng i s qui te ~veak for al l the non-r-modes except for
the
()
N
()
N
5
1 -mode and becomes i ncreasi ngl y weak as n or ~ n
approaches N/4. For the val ues of dz/ dl used i n practi ce and for the
()
N
modes 1 through
12
2 , an account of the spectrum and fi el ds suffi -
ci entl y accurate for many purposes can easi l y be obtai ned by i gnori ng the
TABLE3.2. V.kLUE OF R. AND ALSO THE RAr r I o [ V~~/ ITsI OF THE 31AGNI TUDESOF
THE VOLTAGES ACROSS THE L.I RGK AN-DSMALL l tEWN.I TORS FOR dz/d, = 2.1
set of resonators that
unstrapped system of
n
1
2
3
4
9
8
7
6
5
Rn
0.807
_o,908
(),955
_o,986
2.290
2.680
1.370
1.140
1.050
~Ll
Ivsl
9.34
19.2
43,5
114.
2.55
0.457
0.157
0.067
0.024
are ~\-eal dy exci ted and usi ng the formul as for an
N/2-resonators. At the val ue of d?/ dl and al l /i =
()
ordi nari l y used, the # 1 -mode retai ns a l arge measure of i ts ~ 1
character. The comparati ve exci tati on of the tw-o sets of si de resonators
i s of the same or der as that for the r-mode.
3-3. The Effect of the Mode Spectrum and Fi el d Characteri sti cs on
n-mode Operati on. The -y = O Field ~omponcrLt.The i nteracti on fi el d
of the r-mode i n a ri si ng-sun system di ffers from that of the ~-mode i n an
unstrapped system (see Chap. 2) or a strapped system (see Chap. 4)
i n that the ~-component of the el ectri c fi el d has a -y = Ofi el d component.
A detai l ed account of the effect of thi s component upon magnetron
operati on woul d requi re a di scussi on of magnetron el ectroni cs, a
porti on of magnetron theor y that i s ver y compl i cated and at present i s
i ncompl ete. I t wi l l thus be possi bl e to di scuss the effects i n a qual i tati ve
way onl y.
The most i mportant effect of the zer o component consi sts of a r eso-
nance phenomenon that occurs when MI l i es bet\veen 12,000 and 13,000
gauss cm or 0.012 and 0.013 ~veber per meter. From both theor y and
SEC. 33] TI I E EFFECT OF THE ,lfODE SPECTRUM 99
experi ment i t woul d be expected that the el ectroni c effi ci ency at constant
cur r ent woul d be a monotoni c i ncreasi ng functi on of the magneti c fi el d;
but i n a ri si ng-sun magnetron i n the vi ci ni ty of AB = 12,000 gauss cm,
ther e i s a pronounced effi ci ency di p as shown i n Fi g. 39. Both the depth
and breadth of thi s di p i ncrease \vi th i ncreasi ng amounts of zer o compo-
nent. Thi s effect i s ver y i mportant for magnetrons desi gned to oper ate
bel ow thi s di p (whi ch at present i ncl udes al l magnetrons for wave-
l engths l ess than 1.5 cm) because the amount of zer o component deter -
mi nes the maxi mum effi ci ency obtai nabl e for these magnetrons.
The
onl y magnetrons that have been
successful l y oper ated wel l above
the di p have had onl y a smal l
I
amount of zer o component present
(al though enough to pr oduce a
pronounced di p). The zer o com-
ponent seemed to have ver y l i ttl e
effect on the hi gh-fi el d operati on of
these magnetrons, the el ectroni c
efi ci ency bei ng ful l y as hi gh as
\voul d be expected by compari son
wi th strapped tubes.
Thi s effect of the zer o com-
ponent has been expl ai ned i n onl y
the most qual i tati ve manner.
Ordi nari l y, the zer o component
o~
0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 x 104
ABGauss -cm
FI G. 3.9.Approxi mate observed vari a-
ti on of el ectroni c effi ci ency q, wi th XB.
a pure ~-r node fi el d (R(r a) = O);
a mmode fi $l d contami nated wi th the
zer o component (R(ra) = .1).
i nteracts wi th the el ectrons at random, so that ther e i s no net exchange of
ener gy between thi s component and the el ectrons. The el ectrons i n a
magnetron move i n quasi -cycl oi dal orbi ts; at M? = 12,000 gauss cm, the
transi t ti me for each cycl oi dal arch i s equal to the peri od of fi el d osci l l ati on,
and i t appears that under these condi ti ons the effect of the zer o component
i s cumul ati ve rather than random. The l oss of effi ci ency coul d be ac-
counted for by ei ther the transfer of ener gy from the zer o component to the
el ectrons or perhaps by the l ess effi ci ent coupl i ng wi th the mcomponent
because of the di storti on of the orbi ts.
Ther e i s another way i n whi ch the zer o mode can i nter fer e wi th the
el ectr on coupl i ng. I t was shown i n the previ ous secti on, that pr oceedi ng
from anode to cathode, the N/2- or mcomponent of Ed fal l s off much
mor e rapi dl y than the zer o component. Thus i t i s possi bl e for the zer o
component to exceed the N/2-component near the cathode even though
1El ectroni ceffi ci encyi s the power del i veredi nto the el ectromagneti cfi el d di vi ded
by the d-c power del i veredto the magnetron. I t di ffersfrom the over-al l effi ci ency
i n that i t negl ectsl osses due to the r-f currentsi n the magnetronresonantsystem.
100 THE RI SI NG-SUN SYSTEM [SEC. 3,3
the N/2-component i s much l arger at the anode. Thi s means that at any
i nstant the fi el d near the cathode i s uni di recti onal . Such a phenomenon
can i nter fer e seri ousl y wi th pr oper bunchi ng of the el ectrons, and a l oss
of effi ci ency or a fai l ure to oper ate i n the r-mode may resul t. Thi s
effect may be most pronounced at hi gh fi el ds, because then the el ectrons
are i ni ti al l y confi ned to regi ons near the cathode.
I t shoul d be menti oned that i n spi te of these di ffi cul ti es, the amount of
zer o component i s not a ver y cri ti cal parameter for operati on bel ow the
effi ci ency di p, because the maxi mum effi ci ency obtai nabl e fal l s off rather
sl owl y as the zer o to r-component rati o ~ i ncreases. No studi es have
been made of the effect of l arge amounts of the zer o component for
operati on above the effi ci ency di p.
Mode Competi ti on.The r-mode operati on of ri si ng-sun magnetrons
i s subject to i nter fer ence from certai n of the other modes. The experi -
mental resul ts i ndi cate that the i nterferi ng mode i s al ways ei ther a
()
N
member of the l ong-wavel ength gr oup or the ~ 1 -model and,
further, that i t i s possi bl e to cor r el ate the obser ved mode competi ti on
wi th the di stri buti on of modes. The resul ts of thi s correl ati on can be
summari zed as fol l ows.
()
N
I nter fer ence from the ~ 1 -mode occl l rs whrm wavel ength
(-- )
N
separati on between the r-mode and the
2
1 -mode i s too smal l .
Just what consti tutes ( too smal l cannot bc stated preci sel y because
many factors besi des the wavel ength separati on enter i nto mode competi -
ti on. I t has al ways been possi bl e, ho\vever , to el i mi nate i nter fer ence
from the
()
N
Zi
1 -mode by a propm i ncrease i n A./k .v
(z-) s a
general rul e kT/A ~ 105 may be consi dered a safe val ue.
(T-L) -
I nter fer ence from members of the l ong-wavel ength gr oup occurs when
the rati o of thei r wavel engths to A. becomes too l arge; the maxi m{l m
al l owabl e rati o decreases as N i ncrrases.
.4gai n i t i s not, possi bl e to gi ve
preci se val ues, but the requi rement that ~~ <
m
~/(~ - ~)i sanexampl e
of one rul e that has pr oved useful .
A mor e compl ete di scussi on and a
physi cal i nterpretati on of these resul ts appear i n (nap. 11.
I t i s apparent, then, that ther e arc thr ee m:~jor factors \vhi ch gover n the
~-mode operati on of a ri si ng-s{m system.
Tl mse arc (I ) ~ the rati o of the
LI nter fer encei s al so ol m?rvmlfrom i nonmagnetron
mml rs, wl ch .ZSen(l -space
rt+onan cm.
SEC. 3.4] THE EFFECTS OF VARI OUS PARAMETERS 101
zer o to the N/2-component i n the r-mode fi el d, (2) the rati o k./A ~
(2-)
(3) the rati o of the upper-mul ti pl et wavel engths to the mmode n-ave-
I ength. The system shoul d be desi gned wi th ~ as smal l as possi bl e,
ith%-) Ufficientyarge
and wi th the rati o of the upper
mul ti pl et wavel engths to the m-
mode wavel ength not too l arge.
The next secti on \vi l l di scuss the
effect of the vari ous parameters
of the resonant system on these
thr ee factors.
3.4. The Effects of Vari ous
Parameters on the Mode Spec-
trum and the I nteracti on Fi el d of a
Ri si ng-sun Magnetron.-Al most
al l of the experi mental and de-
vel opmental wor k on the ri si ng-sun
system has been done wi th the
vane-type anode bl ock i l l ustrated
i n Fi g. 3.l a. I n these anode
bl ocks, the si de resonators consi st
of annul ar sectors whose si des are
formed by radi al rectangul ar
vanes. The set of desi gn param-
eter s that has become associ ated
wi th thi s desi gn i s (1) the rati o of
the l arge-resonator depth to the
smal l -resonator depth (dz/dl = T1),
(2) the rati o of the anode di am-
eter to the mmode wavel ength
(d~/L), (3) the rati o of cathode
di ameter to anode di ameter
(de/da = u), (4) the number of
resonators (N), (5) the rati o of
vane thi ckness to gap wi dth
[:=,2=(;- 1)].
225
/
/
\2
2.00
/
Y
1.75
{
4
1.50
+.
/
1.25>
/
v I rg (~-+) I I
1.0)
E
8
0.75
7
5
6
0.50
1.00 1.25 1.50 1,75 2.00
A
(a)
d
FI G. 3.10.The effect of the rati o of
resonatordepthson the mode spectrum and
the i nteracti on fi el d of a ri si ng-sun mag-
netron. The di mensi ons are i dent,cal wi th
those gi ven i n Tabl e 21. (a) Mode spec.
trum as a functi on dz/ d. Both d, and d~ are
vari ed to mai ntai n Xr constant. d i s the
resonator depth for d, = d,. (b) Val ues of
l /rI requi red to mai ntai n kr vonstant,
pl otted as a functi on of dz/ d. (c) ~(r .) the
rat]o of the zer o component to the N/2-tom.
ponent of E+ at p =ra, pl otted as a functi on
of d,/ d. (For part. (b) and (c) seepage102.)
Al though some of these parameters appl y to other types of anode bl ocks,
the fol l owi ng di scussi on wi l l r efer excl usi vel y to vane-type desi gns. The
effects of these or correspondi ng parameters wi th r espect to other type
anodes can be deduced from a di scussi on to fol l ow on the effect of vari a-
ti on of the si de-resonator shape.
d~~
E.G. & G. LIBRARY ~OJ <; -:. ~... .
LAS VEGAS BRANCH
,.,.
102 THE RI SI NG-SUN SYSTEM [SEC, 34
The Ratio of Resonator Depths. Figures 3.3 and 3.6 wer e used to
i l l ustrate the effect of r, on the mode spectrum and on the i nteracti on fi el d
of the r-mode, but the process i s actual l y mor e compl i cated. Al though
al l di mensi ons of the anode bl ock other than resonator di mensi ons \ver e
hel d fi xed, the r-mode \vavel ength changed, so that rel ati \e to ~. these
di mensi ons wer e not fi xed (e.g., dJ L changed). I n or der to exami ne
the effect of TI al one, i t i s ther efor e necessary to change the l arge- and
smal l -resonator depths si mul taneousl y, i n such a manner that the r-mode
wavel ength i s mai ntai ned constant, \\-bi l eal l other anode bl ock di mensi ons
are kept fi xed. (Thi s i s the sort of change i n rl that woul d probabl y
06 -
05 -
I
0.4-
&
/
l .%0.3
/
0.2
/
0.1-
1.50
1.75 2,0
d,
7-
(,}
FI G.310.-Uor descri pti ve l egend see page 101.
be made i n practi ce.) The effect of such a change i n r, i s shown i n
Fi g. 3.10a wher e the mode spectrum i s pl otted as a functi on of d,/ d,
d bei ng the resonator depth when d, = d,. Fi gure 3. 10b shows the
val ue of l /rl requi red to keep kmconstant as a functi on of dJ d. The
other di mensi ons of the anode bl ock, al l of whi ch are hel d fi xed, are gi ven
i n Tabl e 2.1. l he effect of rl upon the i nteracti on fi el d of the r-mode
i s shown i n Fi g. 3. 10c, ~vher e ~ (ra), the rati o of zer o to N/2-component
of Eb at p = ra, is pl otted as a functi on of dJ d.
I t i s evi dent from Fi g. 3 10a that a certai n mi ni mum val ue of rl
must be passed befor e the r- and 8-mode begi n to separate and further
that the amount of separati on \\-hi chcan be obtai ned bet~~een these two
modes i s not unl i mi ted, The bend i n the curves of the short-wavel ength
modes \vhi ch occurs as TI becomes l arge i s due to the fact that these modes
have ceased to be associ ated ~vi th the smal l resonators and have come to
cor r espond to the second gr oup of resonances associ ated wi th the l arge
SEC. 3.4] THE EFFECTS OF VARI OUS PA RAMETEI tS
103
2.00
1.75
1.5C
1,25
?
1,0(
0.7[
0.5(
1
2
3
\
I I
1 1.5 2.0 2.5
FI Q. 31 I ,The effect of the rati o of resonator depths on the mode spectrum and the
i nteracti on fi el d of a ri si ng-sun magnetron.
Di mensi ons are the same as those for Fi g. 3,10
except that d~/ A= has been r educed fr om 0.325 to 0.217.
(a) Mode spectrum as a functi on
d,/ d. Both d, and d, are vari edto mai ntai nM constant. d i fi the resOnatOr depth fOr
d, =d,. (Q Val ues of I /r, requi red to mai ntai n A. constant, pl otted as a functi on of
dJ d. (c) R(r~), the rati o of the zer o component to the N/2-cOmpOnent of .% at P = T.,
pl otted as a functi on of d,/ d. (For parts (b) and (c) seepage104.)
104 THE RI SI NG-S UN SYSTEM [SEC. 3.4
resonatora. The fact that the 8-mode does not r ever se i s fortui tous; i t i s
due to the parti cul ar val ues chosen for the other anode bl ock di mensi ons.
An i ncrease i n r] not onl y i ncreases the separati on between the mmode
()
N
and the
3
1 -mode but al so i ncreases the separati on bet\veen the
r-mode and the l ong-wavel ength gr oup and i ncreases the quanti ty ~ (T.).
The l atter two effects are undesi rabl e, so i t i s best to have rl just l arge
()
N
enough to gi ve suffi ci ent separati on of the m-mode and the
T
l -
mode, Just what val ue of r] shoul d be used depends upon the val ues
I
l \l l I 0.2~
2ESEKI 01H4-t
1.0 1.5
2,0 2,5
30 o~
dz
1.0 1.5
T
lb)
$
(c)
Fm. 3.1 l .For descri pti ve l egend see page 103.
,0
of the other parameters, namel y, d~/ k~, U, N, and rz.
The speci fi c
numeri cal val ues for some desi gns that have been found sati sfactory are
l i sted i n Chap. 11.
The Ratio oj Anode-block Diameter to ~-mode Wavelength.-The effect
of the parameter da/ A~can best be studi ed by compari ng the curves of
Fi g. 3.10a, b, and c wi th a si mi l ar set of curves i n Fi g. 3.1 l a, b, and c
computed for a di fferent val ue of d./ Xm.
The di mensi ons for thi s l atter
set are al so those gi ven i n Tabl e 2.1 wi th the excepti on that d& has
been r educed from 0.325 to 0.217.
Compari ng the t\vo spectra for the
same val ue of r,, whi l e restri cti ng ~1 to smal l val ues, one fi nds that the
separati on between the m and 8-modes i s smal l er and that R(ra) i s l arger
for the bl ock of l arger da/km. Fi gure 3.12a shows a di rect compari son of
~(r~) pl otted as a functi on of ~m/kEfor the two val ues of d@~, and
Fi g. 3. 12b shows A@. as a functi on of Ar/xS for the two cases. The
effect of a further i ncrease i n d@. i s si mi l ar; that i s, for equal val ues
f A(:-)
~(ra) i ncreases whi l e xi /h~ does not change si gni fi cantl y.
SEC. 3.4] THE EFFECTS OF VARI OUS PARAMETERS 105
I nasmuch as the effects of i ncreasi ng d~/ X. are undesi rabl e, i t i s best
to have da/ Ar as smal l as i s consi stent wi th other desi gn consi derati ons.
On the other hand, sati sfactory operati on i s possi bl e over a wi de range
of val ues of ~(ra), so that a correspondi ngl y wi de range of val ues i s avai l -
abl e for do/ &.
The Ratio oj Cathode Diameter to Anode Diameter.-The general
effect of a on the spectrum i s gi ven i n Tabl e 3.3 whi ch l i sts the computed
wavel engths of the modes of an 18-resonator system wi th the cathode
0.3
0.2
-0
&
I Q
0.1
0
1.8
1.6
I
*b
AA
1.4
1.2
1
1 1.1 1.2 1.3
~
A*
(b)
Fro. 3,12.Thc cFfcct of d./A~ on the i ntm:ncti on fi el d and the n)ocfc spectrum of the
ri si ng-sun ssstc!ns of l :i gs. 310 o!I <I :1 I I . (a) !<(r . ), the r:l ti o of the zer o conl i >oncnt to the
Ni 2-r0,n[>One,, t of hh at D = r.
I jl ottcd :ts x fur !cti o{i of A~/As for two val ues of d. 1A.. (b)
.
The quanti ty A,I AT i s pl otted us a fu!i c.ti ~l L A,/Ah for two VLJI UCS of d./A,,
present and \vi th the cathode r emoved.
I t i s seen that i n thi s parti cul ar
case an i ncrease i n u reduces the ~-mode \\ti vel ength but i ncreases the
\vavel engths of al l of the other modes.
The di recti on of the \vavel ength shi ft i s determi ned by the si gn of
/
,: [Po~~:(~c!0) d;(~c, $)l &$,
(16)
an i ncrease i n u decreasi ng or i ncreasi ng t,tl e \vavcl ength as the i ntegral
i s posi ti ve or negati ve. For the \:di l cs of T, and a used i n practi ce, an
i ncrease i n u i ncreases the \vavel engt,hs of zl l modes i n the upper rnul ti pl et
and decreases the r-mode \vavel ength, \vhi l ethe wavel engths of the l o\ver-
mul ti pl et modes arc rti i sed or l ower ed as the cathode ci rcumference i s
106 THE Rl ksI .v6-Lsl I i *Sl tT7l ?.1[ [SEC. 34
()
N
l ess or gr eater than 2 n A.. The rul e for the l o\vcr mul ti pl et i s
approxi mate and hol ds onl y when the contri buti on of the hi gher-order
fi el d components to the i ntegral (16) i s negl i gi bl e as compared \vi th the
()
N
n fi el d components.
2
The reversal i n the di recti on of the
wavel ength shi ft actual l y occurs at a somewhat l arger val ue of the cathode
()
N
ci rcumference than
2
n An.
TABLE 33.-THE ];FFKtT OF THI ; I %ESENCE OF ,rH!;
~A1HOl )~; ON THE ti I >E,,l I tUM
n
1
2
3
4
9
8
7
6
5
h,
i
(cathode prc.cnt)
1.944
1.456
1.381
1.360
1,000
0.920
0.800
0.766
0.754
A:,
A.
(cathode r cI I I ovr d)
1.603
1.420
1.375
1.357
I
1.030
I
0.853
0,786
0.761
0.752
I Ji nl el l si ons
d.
AT
-=0.307
d,
d,
= 1.780
d*
i =
=0.226
0 = 0.068 radi an
d,
= 0,59 for A,,
d.
d.
d.
= 0 for A:
As i ndi cated i n Tabl e 33, the effect of the cathode becomes i ncreas-
i ngl y l ess for the l ower-\vavel ength modes of both the l ong- and short-
wavel ength groups. I n fact, for most purposes the effect of u can be
()
N
negl ected for al l modes except the l -mode, the -2 1 -mode, and the
r-mode. Al though the separati on between the r-mode and the l ong-
wavel ength modes i ncreases somewhat when u i ncreases, the most si gni fi -
cant effect upon the spectrum i s the l oss of separati on between the r-mode
()
N
and -
2
1 -mode.
\ ,
The zer o-component contami nati on of the r-mode, ~ (r.), decreases
wi th i ncreasi ng u. For the magnetron i n Tabl e 33, ~(ra) decreases from
0.161 to 0.106 when the cathode i s i ntroduced. Ther e i s an even gr eater
. decr ease i n ~(p) as p approaches r, because the di screpancy i n rate of
1l %i s i s al ways the case except when r, or u i s near]y equal to 1.
SEC.3.4] THE EFFECTS OF I ARI O[7S PARAMETERS 107
decr ease between the zer o and N/2-components i s l ess effecti ve for a
l arger cathode. When the l oss i n mode separati on i s smal l , thi s effect
may compensate for the l oss i n mode separati on as far as mode competi -
ti on i s concer ned.
Actual l y the above consi derati ons have ver y l i ttl e effect upon the
choi ce of u. The si ze of the cathode has a ver y strong effect on the
rel ati ve strength of the vari o(l s fi el d components near the cathode
because the hi gher n-modes and hi gher ~ Fouri er-components fal l off
much mor e rapi dl y, mo~i ng i n from the anode, than those of l ower n
or ~. The character of fi el ds near the cathode i s ver y i mportant i n
determi ni ng the amount of ener gy l ost i n the i ni ti al bunchi ng process
and i n determi ni ng the mode i n ~vhi ch the magnetron wi l l start. I n
general , a reducti on i n cathode si ze i ncreases the effi ci ency but al so
may l ead to mode-competi ti on di ffi cul ti es (see Chap. 8). Ordi nari l y
the smal l est cathode di ameter that gi ves stabl e m-mode operati on i s used.
I t has been found experi mental l y that the best val l l e for u depends
al most enti rel y upon Nand\,ery l i ttl e upon other parameters (Chap. 11).
Evi dentl y the effects of varyi ng u are l argel y dependent upon magnetron
el ectroni cs.
The Number oj Resonators.-1f N is i ncreased wi th fi xed d,, d,,
d., r,, and u, the wavel engths of al l of the ori gi nal modes are vi rtual l y
unchanged, but addi ti onal modes are added to the l o\\er-wavel ength
end of both groups of resonances.
Thus an i ncrease i n N i n i tsel f has
no parti cul ar effect upon the si gni fi cant characteri sti cs of the resonant
system. Di ffi cul ti es wi th l arge N systems are due mai nl y to the fact
that the maxi mum al l o\vabl e rati o of the wavel engths of the upper
mul ti pl et modes to L decreases as N i ncreases (see Chap. 11).
The Ratio oj Anode-segment Width to Gap Width, rt.An i ncrease
i n ra, wi th dli dz, dti, and a fi xed, i ncreases the wavel engths of al l of the
modes, The comparati ve rates of i ncrease for the vari ous modes are
such that the members of the upper-wavel ength gr oup move cl oser
together , as do the members of the l ower-wavel ength group, whi l e
()
N
the r-mode moves away from the ~
1 -mode and toward the upper-
wavel ength group. Furthermore, ~ (ra) i ~creases.
A perti nent factor i n magnetron desi gn i s the modi fi cati on of the
spectrum as 7-2i s changed, wi th dl and dz adjusted to keep the r-mode
()
N
and 1 -mode fi xed. I n thi s case, the upper-wavel ength gr oup
2
descends wh;l e ~ (ra) i ncreases.
Thus an i ncrease of T* mi ght avoi d
di ffi cul ty wi th the l ong-wavel ength modes, but the i ncrease i n ~(r~) woul d
cause some l oss i n effi ci ency. No attempt has ever been made to avoi d
l ong-wavel ength mode competi ti on di ffi cul ti es i n thi s way, because the
108 THE RI SI AG-.Y 1N SY8TEJ f [sm. 34
range over whi ch r z can be vari ed i s l i mi ted by mechani cal consi derati ons
(see Chap. 11). Furthermore, i t has al \vays been possi bl e to sol ve the
probl em of l ong-wavel ength mode competi ti on by cl osi ng the ends, as
expl ai ned i n Sec. 3.5.
Variation of Resonator N~ape.-Whi l e the vane-type resonator i s
most commonl y used, other types havi ng di fferent shapes may have
mechani cal or el ectri cal advantages. One exampl e i s the hol e-and-vane
combi nati on i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 3. l b. I nasmuch as al l of the anode-bl ock
parameters have been di scussed for vane-type resonators, i t i s conveni ent
to consi der other resonator shapes as modi fi cati ons of the vane-type
and to defi ne the vane equi val ent of a resonator and an equi val ent
rati o of resonator depth. The vane equi val ent of a resonator i s defi ned
as an annul ar sector resonator composed of vanes whose thi ckness i s
equal to the wi dth of the anode segments and whose depth i s such that
i ts admi ttance at the r-mode wavel ength i s equal to that of the resonator
i n questi on. The admi ttance of a resonator and that of i ts vane equi va-
l ent wi l l , i n general , be di fferent for wavel engths other than the r-mode
wavel ength. The equi val ent rati o r- i s defi ned si mpl y as the rati o of
the depths of the vane equi val ents correspondi ng to the l arge and smal l
resonators; i t thus repl aces the parameter rl defi ned for vane-type
resonators. Two ri si ng-sun systems that are i denti cal except for r eso-
nator shape and have the same r-mode ~vavel ength and the same val ue
for r.. wi l l have i denti cal m-mode i nteracti on fi el ds; that i s, ~ i s the same
for both.
I nasmuch as the admi ttances of correspondi ng resonators are the same
at the mmode wavel engths, they wi l l be nearl y the same for wavel engths
near that of the i -mode. Thus the modes ~vi th wavel engths near that
of the r-mode wi l l have nearl y the same wavel ength i n the two anode
()
N
bl ocks, and ordi nari l y the m- and ~ 1 -mode separati ons wi l l be
nearl y the same. On the other hand, at wavel engths far from that of
the r-mode, the admi ttance of correspondi ng resonators may be qui te
di fferent, and the posi ti on of the l ong-wavel ength gr oup and the l o\ver-
wavel ength members of the short-wavel ength gr oup may be consi derabl y
di fferent for the two structures.
Asi de from mechani cal advantages, ther e are often el ectri cal advan-
tages to be gai ned by a wi se choi ce of resonator shape. Two advantages
rel ate to the ci rcui t properti es of anode bl ocks, the unl oaded Q and the
equi val ent capaci ty, di scussed i n Sec. 3.6. A thi rd advantage l i es i n
the possi bi l i ty of depressi ng the wavel engths of the l ong-wavel ength
group. As an exampl e of the l atter, consi der the anode-bl ock secti on
i n Fi g. 3.13 whi ch has the di mensi ons gi ven i n Tabl e 2.1 except for the
resonators and whi ch has an r.q equal to 2.71. Tabl e 3.4 l i sts the resul t-
SEC. 34]
TI I E EFFECTS OF VARI OUS PARAMETERS 109
ant \vavel engths of the spectrum i n compari son wi th those of an equi va-
l ent vane-type anode bl ock whi ch
has an r, of 2.71. I t i s evi dent
that the l ong wavel engths have
been consi derabl y depressed at a
smal l cost i n separati on between
the m and 8-modes. Al though a
si mi l ar spectrum coul d be achi eved
\ri th vane-type resonators havi ng
a l arger val ue of T2, the zer o con-
tami nati on of the r-mode \voul d be
\~orse. I n general , 1a r g e mode
separati on i s obtai ned by usi ng
resonators w h os e admi ttances
change sl o\vl y wi th frequency, and
smal l mode separati on by usi ng
resonators w hose admi ttances
change rapi dl y wi th frequency.
I n the parti cul ar case gi ven i n
1abl e 3.4, the spread of the l ower -
}ravel ength resonances and the
contracti on of the hi gher-wave-
l ength resonances i s due to the fact
that the t\vo groups of resonators
FI G.3,13.Ri si ng-sunsystemwi th modi fi ed
resonatorshapes.
wer e desi gned on thi s basi s.
TABLE3,4.THESPFXTBUMOFTHESYSTEMn FI G.313 COMPARED WI THTHATOF
I TS I ;QVWALENT VAXE-TYPESYSTEM
A, are the resonancesof the vane-type system; ~~Ofthe mOchfi edsystem
A. A:
n
z T*
1 2.183 1.604
2 1,697 1,279
3 1.621 1.241
4 1.602 1.231
9 1.000 I .000
8 0.828 0.864
7 0.616 0.607
6 0.570 0.544
5 0.555 0,525
I n the devel opment of magnetrons consi derabl e attenti on was gi ven
to the possi bi l i ty of modi fyi ng the symmetry of a resonant system i n a
110 THE RI SI NG-SUN SYSTEM [SEC,35
manner that woul d l eave the mmode practi cal l y unchanged but woul d
have a marked effect on some of the other modes. The use of strap breaks
i n the strapped system (see Sees. 4.1 and 4.7) i s the major exampl e of
such a modi fi cati on. A somewhat anal ogous scheme for the ri si ng-sun
system woul d consi st of repl aci ng certai n of the resonators (l arge or
smal l ) by resonators of a di fferent shape but of the same vane equi val ent
as the other correspondi ng resonators. I nasmuch as the admi ttances
of al l of the l arge resonators (and those of al l of the smal l resonators)
appear to be al i ke at the mmode wavel ength, nei ther the resonant \vave-
I ength nor the i nteracti on fi el d of the r-mode i s affected. On the other
hand, for the non-r-modes, and parti cul arl y for those ~vi th resonant
wavel engths far from that of the mmode, the vari ous resonators no
l onger appear to be al i ke. Consequentl yj for these modes the ~~ave-
l engths wi l l be shi fted, the doubl ets spl i t (i .e., the degener ate modes spl i t
i nto two nondegenerate modes), the l oadi ng through the output modi fi ed,
and the i nteracti on fi el d di storted. One mi ght expect, then, that by a
pr oper modi fi cati on of resonators, i nter fer ence from unwanted modes
coul d be avoi ded. Nei ther thi s scheme nor the one descri bed i n the
precedi ng paragraph has yet been tested on ri si ng-sun magnetrons.
3,5. Cl osed-end Ri si ng-sun Systems.I n the precedi ng secti ons i t
has been stated that one seri ous l i mi tati on of the ri si ng-sun system i s
the competi ti on whi ch ari ses between the r-mode and the l ong-wavel ength
modes i n systems of l arge N and l arge rl . The di ffi cul ty i s due to
excessi ve separati on bet\veen the mmode and the l ong-wavel ength
modes, and so a means of reduci ng thi s separati on i s requi red. The
cl osi ng of the ends of the resonators has been showm to be effecti ve i n
thi s r espect (see Fi g. 11.9b).
I t i s a si mpl e matter to compute the spectrum and i nteracti on fi el ds
for a ri si ng-sun system wi th total l y cl osed ends. Si mi l ar to the treat-
ment of the unstrapped system (Sec. 2.8), the anode bl ock and cathode
can be r egar ded as a secti on of ~vavegui de. Then the resonant wave-
l engths computed for the open-ended system become the cutoff wave-
l engths of the correspondi ng TE-modes of thi s \vavegui de. The gui de
wavel engths for the vari ous modes can be computed from these cutoff
wavel engths, and the resonant wavel engths of the fi rst gr oup of modes
can be found from the condi ti on that k~n = 2h, wher e h i s the anode
hei ght. Expl i ci tl y, the resonant \vavel engths are gi ven by
wher e A.. i s the wavel ength of the rzth mode i n
(17)
the open-ended system.
SEC. 35] CLOSED-END RI SI NG-SUN SYSTEMS 111
Fi gure 3 14 shows the spectrum as a functi on of d,/ d wi th rl vari ed to
keep the r-mode wavel ength fi xed. I n thi s exampl e the val ues for
cZa/k~,u, r,, and N are the same as those i n Tabl e 2 1. The behavi ors
of l /rl and R (r.) as functi ons of dZ/ d are the same as those shown i n
Fi g. 311b and c.
I n Fi g. 315a and b the most si gni fi cant features of thi s cl osed-end
system are compared wi th those for an open-end system havi ng the same
val ue of da/ hr. I t can be seen
that for the same val ues of L/As,
~(r-a) i s somewhat smal l er for the
cl osed-ends ystem, whi l e the rati os
of the upper mul ti pl et wavel engths
to k= (A4/k. i s typi cal ) are con-
si derabl y smal l er for the cl osed-
end system. Thi s l atter effect i s,
of course, due to the fact that al l
of the cl osed-end wavel engths must
be l ess than 2h. Thus, by maki ng
2h/ hr smal l enough (note that
2h/x7 i s al ways gr eater than 1) i t
shoul d al \vays be possi bl e to have
the upper gr oup near enough to the
r-mode to permi t r-mode opera-
ti on. Ther e are, however , objec-
ti ons to maki ng systems for whi ch
2h/ Xmis ver y cl ose to 1 because as
2h/hm approaches 1, the separa-
()
ti on between the T- and ~ 1 -
mode fal l s off to zero.1 Further-
more, for val ues of 2h/& near 1 i t
i s necessary that h.,j~. be ver y
l arge, whi ch means that the physi -
cal di mensi ons of the system must
be l arge.
1,3
1 -
12-
1.1
1
~
k.
0.9
0,7-
5
0.8
w\
r h
0.61&+_&_.9
I :l G. 3.14.Thc sI ,cctr Ufn Of a CI OSCd-CUd
] i hi ng-sun mag!l ct! on as a functi on of dz[d,
wi th r, vari ed w that AT i s kept cw])stant.
d i s the resonator depth ford, =d,. Dirr,cn-
bi ons: d/k. = 0.249; hl~~ = 0.6S0; the rest
fr om Tabl e 2.1.
Ti e el ectromagneti c fi el ds for the cl osed-end system are si mi l ar to
those of the open-end system except for the axi al vari ati on. That i s,
E and H, are unchanged as functi ons of p and ~, but both are mul ti pl i ed
by si n i rz/h (z = O and z = h cor r espond to the two ends of the system).
H, and He are no l onger zer o but are gi ven by
1Ther e i s an opti mum hei ght that gi ves the maxi mum separati on betwsen th~
()
.V
r- and
5
1 -modes for speci fi cval ues of dJ k*, a, ,V, TZ,and ~(ra).
112 THE RI SI NG-SUN S YSTL.it [SE(. 35
The computed frequenci es for a cl osed-end magnetron usual l y agr ee
wi thi n 1 per cent wi th the obser ved frequenci es. Of course, no operati ng
magnetron has i ts ends total l y cl osed because the cathode ml l st bc
i nsul ated from the anode. Thus i n practi ce total l y cl osed means
that the resonators are total l y cover ed b~l t that the i nteracti on space
remai ns uncover ed. Under these
16~
I I I 1
10
condi ti ons, the ~~~vcl cngths - arc
0,20
0.15
/
/
0.10
/
/
0.05
0
1 1.05 1.10 L15 1.20
(a) (/,)
I :I G. 3.15.(a) A compari son of tl l c scl ]:l rntl ol l t>ctwccn, l I LCl ]l ]l ,c,-w:l vrl rrl ~tl l gI I Juj,x
a!l rl the ~-n)ode for r l oscd-cnd :L!l d oI >eI I -cI I d rl ~i ng+ul , sy.tcl !i . l ! :, vcl cI \Ktl Lk, I >t>l ,i r:i l
of the hchavi or of the uprwr-wavel cugth gr ou[).
(b) .~ v,,,,,,,:,~i a<,,, ,,i tl ,cz(,r,>-,c,r,]l ,[,l ,efl t
coutarl !i natl on of the r-mode i ntcracti un fi el d fur cl mcd-cnd and uI ,e!t-c I )d FI >NI I K-SUI ,
systems.
al \rays hi gher than they woul d be i f the ends \r cr c enti rel y cl osed.
For the ~-mode the i ncrcti se i s about 1 pcr cent. ~~hcn d,.j~, i s smal l ,
the effect on al l modes except the l -mock i s from 1 to 2 pcr cent. The
l -mode may be i ncreased 20 per cent or more, but ordi mtri l y thi s i s of
no parti cul ar si gni fi cance for magnetron operati on. }Vhcn daj~. i s
()
.\
l arge, the -2 1 -mode i s al so rather strongl y affected (i ncreases
as great as 5 per cent have been observed), and consequentl y the separa-
()
N
ti on between the T- and the ~ 1 -mode may become consi derabl y
l ess than the computed val ue.
I n many cases, i t i s unnecessary to I o\ver the l ong-\vavcl ength gr oup
as much as resul ts from ful l y cl osi ng the ends; the l ong-\ravcl cngth modes
SEC. 36] THE UNLOADED Q AND v@ 113
can be l ower ed toa l esser extent by cl osi ng onl y the outer porti on of the
resonators. Such systems are cal l ed parti al l y cl osed-end systems.
Semi empi ri cal methods for computi ng resonances, based on computed
frequenci es, have been ~vor ked out for nearl y cl osed bl ocks (see Chap.
11). Detai l ed i nformati on on the wavel ength of non-r-modes i s not
avai l abl e. For systems that are l ess than hal f cl osed, an esti mate of
the v!avel ength can be made to wi thi n 5 or 10 per cent by treati ng
the resonators as compound resonators. That i s, the admi ttance of the
cl osed porti on i s computed and then consi dered as the termi nati ng
admi ttance for the open porti on (see Sec. 2.5). When the bl ock i s
nearl y open, thi s method shoul d be mor e accurate than i ndi cated
above,
3.6. The Unl oaded Q and @L.I n addi ti on to the resonant fr e-
quency, ther e are two other ci rcui t parameters that are of i mportance i n
magnetron desi gn; these are the unl oaded Q(QU) and the characteri sti c
admi ttance ~C/ L.
Her etofor e i t has been assumed that the magnetron resonant system
i s l ossl ess. Actual l y, however , some power i s del i vered to a l oad, and
some ener gy i s conver ted i nto heat by currents fl o}vi ng i n the metal
wal l s. The unl oaded Q i s essenti al l y a measure of the power di ssi pated
i n the metal and i s defi ned by
G
Q,, = 2r
total stor ed ener gy
ener gy per cycl e di ssi pated-i n metal
I n a si mi l ar way one can defi ne an external Q whi ch takes i nto account
onl y the ener gy del i vered to the output and the total or l oaded Q whi ch
takes i nto account both ki nds of ener gy l oss. These l ast t\vo quanti ti es
wi l l be di scussed i n connecti on ~vi th the output ci rcui t i n Chap. 5. The
total stor ed ener gy i s gi ven by PO/ 2 / v IHI 2do, wher e 1111i s the ampl i tude
of the magneti c fi el d. The average-rate of power di ssi pati on i s gi ven by
1/2.6 ~~ I HI 2 ds [wher e 6 = (m~p.)-~~i s the ski n depth, f i s the frequency,
~ i s th_epermeabi l i ty of the \ral l s, and x i s the conducti vi ty of the wal l s],
Ther e then fol l o\vs the wel l -kno\vn formul a
(19)
I nasmuch as 11 i s kno\vn throughout the magnetron cavi ty, Qu can
be cal cul ated di rectl y. I n pm-formi ng the cal cul ati on i t i s hel pful to
consi der the resonators and i nteracti on space separatel y and to compute
equi val ent i nductances and resi stfi nccs for the vari ous el ements.
Con-
si der the ci rcui t i n Fi g. 3.16 wi th an al ternati ng vol tage of frequency
114 THE RI SI NG-SUN SYSTEM [SEC.36
j = CJ / 27rand ampl i tude V across the termi nal s. The maxi mum ener gy
stor ed i n the magneti c fi el d i s ~Li ~ or ~L(V2/cozL2), wher e iL is the maxi -
mum cur r ent through the i nductance. Thus, one can wri te
wher e l ?~ i s the maxi mum ener gy stor ed i n the magneti c fi el d. Al so, the
I
FI Q. 3.16. Paral l el -resormnt ri rcui t
for the computati on of equi val ent i nduct.
antes and re~i stanr es.
power F di ssi pated i n the resi stanm
i s +V2/ R, so th~t onc can Jvri te
~ = JrZ/2P. These rel xti ons for L
and R can be used to defi ne an equi va-
l ent i nductance and an eql l i val ent
resi stance for the el ements of the
resonant systcm.
The equi val ent i nductance of a
resonator i s defi ned s i m p 1y as
L = V2/2W2.E*, wher e 17 i s the am-
pl i tude of the vol tage across the
resonator openi ng. The ener gy st&-ed i n the magneti c- fi el d can be
computed from Em = po/2
fv l H12dv. Usi ng thi s formul a, the i nduct-
ance for vari ous resonator shapes can be computed. 1
sl ot (Fi g. 2.9)
L(7s%30
(notati on as
For the rectangul ar
i n Sec. 2.5). (20)
For the annul ar sector (Fi g. 2,1 1)
~ = 2+F0
{
4
hk 7r2k2a2[Jl (ka)Nl ( kb) .Jl (kb)Nl (ka)]
[ H
JO(A-a)i V1(kb) NO(ka)J ,(kb) z _ ~ . ~21)

~a)Nl(kb) R,(ka)J ,(kb)

The previ ous formul as are for open-end resonators, For cl osed-end
resonators the vol tage vari es axi al l y so that i t i s necessary to speci fy
the posi ti on at whi ch the vol tage i s measured. Taki ng V as the maxi -
mum vol tage ampl i tude, that i s, the vol tage ampl i tude at a medi an
pl ane, yi el ds for the rectangul ar sl ot
1The i nductancedefi ned as above means no mor e than i s stated i n the defi ni ti on.
Because of the di stri buti on of parameters i n the usual resonators, the equi val ent
i nductancevari es wi th frequency.
However ,for resonatorssuch as the hol e-and-sl ot,
i n whi ch the i nductanceand capaci tanceare mor e or l ess l umped, the vari ati on of the
i nductancewi th frequency i s smal l .
SEC.3.6] TI I E UNLOADED Q /l ND 4C/ L
L=
41d sinz k.1
(2[ ~k?(--~
Po,
115
(22)
wher e
,=2~
c
~. = open-end \vavcl cngth,
A,
~=2~
A
A = cl osed-end wavel ength,
and for the annul ar sector ,
The equi val ent resi stance for the resonators i s defi ned i n an anal ogous
manner as R = V2/2P. The rate of po\ver di ssi pati on can be readi l y
computed by use of the ski n-depth theorem. The average po\ver
di ssi pated i s gi ven by P = l/213K
j~ 1~1d~. Thus, the resi stance i s
gi ven by
(24)
from whi ch R can be computed for the
the rectangul ar sl ot,
R=; ~
~hd+~i~~k%
vari ous resonator shapes. For
for open ends, and (25)
J-
R=2~
d si n k,l
~7;
[
hll+
(
r2(2d h) + si n 2kJ ~ _ rz(h + 2d)
3k2
2k.1
h3,2
)10
+ $ d
for cl osed ends. (26)
The i nductance and resi stance of the i nteracti on space wi l l be defi ned
for the mmode onl y. For the non-r-modes ver y l i ttl e magneti c ener gy
i s stor ed i n the i nteracti on space and onl y a smal l fracti on of the l osses
occur on the cathode or anode surfaces. Furthermore, accurate i nforma-
ti on concerni ng ei ther the Q or the <C/ L of the non-mmodes i s usual l y
not desi red, so the i nteracti on space can be i gnored i n computi ng these
116 THE RI SI NG-SUN SYSTEM [SEC.36
quanti ti es. I n the case of the mmode, onl y the zer o component of the
fi el d makes a si gni fi cant contri buti on to the magneti c ener gy. The
i nductance i s defi ned as befor e by L = V2/ 2u2E~. I n thi s case the
vol tage V i s taken as the l i ne i ntegral of E+ around the anode ci rcum-
fer ence or 27rE0(r.J wher e EO(T,J i s the zer o component of E$(ra,o).
Then
L = 4ry>
[[ --- 1
J ,(kr.)N,(kr.) No(kr.)J ,(kr.) z + ~
hk2
J ,(kra)N,(kr.) Nl(kra)J ,(kr.)
4

1
(27)
~2kz~a[J l(kra).Vl(kr,) Nl(krJ J l(krC)~
for open-end systems, and
~ ~ .@.
{[--- 1
J O(k.r.)N, (k.r.) N,(/ i.rJ J , (k.r.) 2 + ~
hk,
J ,(k.ra)N,(k.r.) N,(k.ra)J ,(k.r.)
2=2
[
J o(k,rJ N, (k.r,) N~(k,rJ J l(k.i-.)

hzkzk.ra J ,(k.rJ Nl(k.r.) N,(k.rJ J ,(k,r.)

1
4

I
(28)
r2k~ra2[J l(k.r~).Vl(k.r.) N1(k.rJ J l(k.r.)]
for cl osed-end systems. Whi l e the i nteracti on space remai ns open even
for cl osed-end systems, the fact that the \vavel ength i s hardl y affected
i ndi cates that the fi el d di stri buti on i s si mi l ar to that whi ch woul d be
present i f the ends wer e cl osed.
[J ,(kr,J N,(kr.) N,(krJ J ,(kr,)]
&a& ( )
(29)
+ 1 ~e [J o(kra).V~(kr.) J l(kr,)N,(kra)]
for open-end systems. The quanti ti es K and p are the conducti vi ty
and permeabi l i ty of the cathode surface.
I t i s a si mpl e matter to compute QU i n terms of the ml l l i val cnt i nduct-
ance and resi stance previ ousl y defi ned. The total stor ed ener gy i s gi \en
by
(30)
wher e the subscri pts rl , TZ,and c r cl cr to the ttvo resonator types and the
i nteracti on space respecti vel y. ~hc ener gy di ssi pated per cycl e i s gi ven
by
yi el di ng
(31)
SEC. 3.6]
117
(32)
wher e (1 R)/(l + R) i s the rati o V,,/ V,,.
Computed val ues of Q. are usual l y consi derabl y hi gher than meas-
ured val ues, prol -abl y because the condi ti ons at the metal are not as
assumed. That i s, wi th the ver y smal l ski n depths associ ated wi th
mi crowave frequenci es, smal l surface i rregul ari ti es and surface contami -
nati on have a l arge effect on the l osses. The formul a remai ns ver y
useful , however , as a means of compari ng the unl oaded Qs of di fferent
anode-bl ock desi gns and i n parti cul ar as a means of compari ng di fferent
resonator shapes.
The characteri sti c acl ni ttance of the resonant system -L rel ates
the power output of the magnetron to the r-f vol tage between anode
segments. I ts i mportance wi l l become apparent i n Chap. 7. Referri ng
to Fi g. 3.16 20(stored energy)/V2 at the resonant frequency of the ci rcui t
i s gi ven by ~C/ L. By anal ogy one defi nes ~C/ L for the magnetron
cavi ty as 2u(stored ener gy)/ V. As i s al ways the case i n defi ni ng
admi ttances and al l i ed quanti ti es for resonant cavi ti es, i t i s necessary
to speci fy the path over whi ch the vol tage i s to be measured. For
the r-mode of the ri si ng-sun system thi s vol tage i s taken to be the average
of the vol tage ampl i tudes at the l arge and smal l resonator openi ngs; that
i s, (1V(J ] + I V{) 1)/ 2. At resonance the total stor ed ener gy i s equal to
the maxi mum ener gy stor ed i n the magneti c fi el ds so that <C/L can
be found i n terms of the previ ousl y defi ned i nductance. The stor ed
ener gy E i s gi ven by
I n the desi gn of a resonant system i t i s ordi nari l y desi rabl e to have
both Q. and ~C/ L l arge and the shapes of the resonators are the mai n
factors i n determi ni ng these quanti ti es. Ordi nari l y resonator shapes
l eadi ng to l arge Q. l ead to smal l val ues of ~ and conversel y, so
that ther e i s some confl i ct between these parameter. Resonators wi th a
l arge vol ume-to-surface rati o usual l y (but not al ways) l ead to hi gher
val ues of Q.. Nar r ow or hi gh capaci tance resonators usual l y favor hi gh
WL. I t shoul d be obser ved that -L i s di rectl y proporti onal to
the bl ock hei ght h whi l e Q. i s i ndependent of the hei ght, so ther e i s at
l east one means of i ncreasi ng ~C/ L wi thout sacri fi ci ng Q..
CHAPTER 4
THE STRAPPED SYSTEM
BY L. R. WALKEK
4.1. I ntroducti on.-The fi rst mul ti segment l o-cm magnetrons de-
vel oped by the Bri ti sh wer e of the symmetri c unstrapped type,
descri bed i n Chap. 2. These earl y tubes oper ated at effi ci enci es of
from~O to 35 per cent, but thei r output power was sever el y l i mi ted by a
change i n the mode of osci l l ati on as the cur r ent was i ncreased. Assumi ng
cor r ectl y that the r-mode woul d be the most effi ci ent mode, Randal l
and Sayers at Bi rmi ngham used i n 1941 what they r efer r ed to as
mode-l ocki ng straps. These wer e a seri es of wi r e bri dges whi ch wer e
attached to the hi gh-vol tage ends of the resonators i n such a manner that
they connected pai rs of al ternate segments and passed di rectl y over the
i nterveni ng segments. Because the pai red segments woul d be at the
same potenti al i n the ~-mode but i n no other mode, i t was thought that
the u-mode woul d be but l i ttl e di sturbed, whereas other modes woul d be
damped because of heavy currents fl owi ng i n the straps. The devi ce
was unexpectedl y successful . The mode change was defer r ed to currents
about thr ee or four ti mes as great as those obser ved befor e strappi ng, and
the operati ng effi ci ency was i ncreased to about 50 per cent. The pr esence
of the l atter effect i ndi cated that strappi ng, whi l e undoubtedl y benefi ci al ,
hardl y oper ated i n the manner that had been anti ci pated.
An understandi ng of the functi on of strappi ng wai ted upon extensi ve
measurements of mode spectra and r-f fi el d patterns and upon a better
i nsi ght i nto the rel ati on between the el ectroni c gener ator and the r eso-
nator system. As a resul t of these studi es and of exper i ence wi th
operati ng tubes that expl oi ted the practi cal meri ts of strappi ng, the
strapped-resonator system underwent consi derabl e evol uti on wi th
i ncreasi ng emphasi s upon the strap i tsel f as a ci rcui t el ement. Fi gure
4.1 shows several stages i n thk process,
I n thi s chapter the term strap r efer s to a ci rcul ar (or, rarel y,
pol ygonal ) conductor connected to al ternate segments of the magnetron.
Consi derati ons of ci r6ui t requi rements and of the method of fabri cati on
determi ne the exact form. Frequentl y, the strap i s made i n the form
of a fl at stri p bent i nto a ci rcl e wi th a seri es of feet for connecti on; i t
may, however , be a wi r e or a fl at annul us. The strap may be con-
ti nuous al l around or br oken at one poi nt above a segment to whi ch
118
SEU.4.1] I NTRODUCTI ON 119
i t i s not brazed. General l y, the strap i s r ecessed or shi el ded by
bei ng set i nto an annul ar gr oove whi ch i s cut i nto the segments and i s
concentri c wi th the i nteracti on space. Ther e may be one ri ng at each
end of the tube (si ngl e ri ng) or two concentri c ri ngs at each end (doubl e
ri ng). I n the doubl e-ri ng desi gn, the correspondi ng i nner or outer
straps at the two ends of the tube are staggered azi muthal l y by one seg-
ment, so that an i rdvi dual segment i s connected to onl y one of them.
I n the same manner, i nner and outer ri ngs at each end are staggered.
FI G. 4.1.Fourstages i n the devel opmentof strappedmagnetrons.
These rel ati onshi ps are i ndi cated i n the schemati c drawi ng of Fi g. 42.
The expressi on strap secti on
i s used to r efer to the part of the strap
system between the mi dpl anes of nei ghbori ng segments.
The terms
wei ght of strappi ng, heavy, and l i ght strappi ng are i n use to
i ndi cate roughl y the domi nance of the strappi ng i n the resonant system.
Thus, Fi g. 4 1 shows a steady progress i n ti me toward heavi er strappi ng.
The two functi ons of the straps i n a strapped-resonator system are
(1) to establ i sh a wi de separati on i n wavel ength between the r-mode and
al l other modes and (2) to affect the characteri sti c admi ttance of the
resonant system. One of the most noti ceabl e features of strappi ng,
120 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC.4.1
marked at i ts fi rst i ntroduc<l on, i s that i t i ncreases the mode separati on
of the system by consi derabl y i ncreasi ng the wavel ength of the r-mode
whi l e affecti ng the other modes to a l esser degr ee. Roughl y, thi s effect
may be thought of as ari si ng i n the fol l owi ng manner.
I n the x-mode,
the mi dpl ane of each segment i s a vol tage l oop, and cur r ent fl ows i nto
the straps that are i n paral l el wi th the capaci tance of the unstrapped
resonator. The strap capaci tance thus adds to the unstrapped-resonator
capaci tance, i ncreasi ng the wavel ength of the system. For the other
modes, the i ndi vi dual strap capaci tances are not al l i n phase wi th one
another and do not contri bute so much to the tube capaci tance.
FI G. 4.2.Doubl e-ri ng strappi ng.
I t i s not yet compl etel y cl ear to what extent the mode stabi l i ty and
hi gh effi ci ency depend upon a l arge separati on between the r-mode and
i ts nearest mode. I t i s reasonabl e to suppose, however , that for good
mmode operati on, undi storted r-f fi el d patterns i n the i nteracti on space
are necessary. I f the fracti onal mode separati on i s approxi matel y
equal to the reci procal of the l oaded Q of the desi red mode, ther e wi l l
be percepti bl e exci tati on of the next mode wi th consequent pattern
di storti on. Thi s i mpl i es that a mi ni mum mode separati on of a few per
cent i s essenti al . The earl y unstrapped tubes (N = 8) had an (n = 4)-
to-(n = 3) separati on of about 1 per cent, and both fi el ds wer e sever el y
di storted under operati ng ci rcumstances. The l i ght strappi ng i ni ti al l y
used i ncreased the separati on to about 7 per cent wi th a consi derabl e
gai n i n effi ci ency. The wei ght of strappi ng pl ai nl y provi des a means for
varyi ng the r-mode separati on over a consi derabl e range. When the
SEC. 4.2] ANALYSI S OF STRAPPED ASYSTEMS 121
tube i s tunabl e, ther e appears the further compl i cati on of mai ntai ni ng
the desi red features of the mode spectrum over the whol e tuni ng range.
Refer ence to Chap. 7 wi l l i ndi cate the great i mportance of the charac-
teri sti c admi ttance Y. for the operati ng behavi or of the tube; Y. i s
defi ned as ~[u(~Y/13u)]r-o, Y bei ng the total admi ttance of the
resonant system measured at a sl ot. Because the product of pul l i ng
fi gure and external Q (see Chap. 5) i s constant at any wavel ength, the
practi cal l i mi tati ons on the pul l i ng fi gure mean that the l oadi ng cannot
exceed a deti l te val ue. A rel ati on exi sts, however , between the el ec-
troni c conductance G. and the l oaded Q. and Y., gi ven by
Q.Ge = Y..
The el ectroni c effi ci ency i s a functi on of G., apparentl y i ncreasi ng
monotoni cal l y wi th G. up to a rather fl at maxi mum (see Chap. 10).
Thus, wi th l i mi ted l oadi ng, or Q. gr eater than some fi xed val ue, the val ue
of G. can be brought up to the l evel requi red for hi gh effi ci ency onl y by
maki ng Yc l arge enough. Because Y, i s roughl y equal to uOC, wher e C
i s the capaci tance of the resonant system, Y. i ncreases as strap capaci -
tance i s added (for the ~-mode). The wei ght of strappi ng provi des a
fl exi bl e means, ther efor e, of adjusti ng the characteri sti c admi ttance to a
preassi gned val ue.
The fol l owi ng secti ons wi l l di scuss the mode spectra of strapped
systems and thei r dependence upon vari ous parameters, the effect of
l oadi ng on the spectrum and on the r-f pattern, the asymmetri es and
mode shi fts i ntroduced by breaki ng the straps and the effect of tuni ng
the system upon several of these properti es.
4.2. Anal ysi s of Strapped Systems.As shown i n Chaps. 2 and 3, the
rel ati ve si mpl i ci ty of the geometri cal structure of unstrapped magnetrons
permi ts consi derabl e progress i n thei r anal ysi s by fi el d theor y. The
addi ti on of a strapped system, however , makes an exact cal cul ati on of
the fi el ds prohi bi ti vel y di ffi cul t. Fortunatel y, i n al l practi cal cases,
sati sfactory worki ng sol uti ons can be obtai ned usi ng equi val ent ci rcui ts.
I n Chap. 2, wher e sui tabl y equi val ent ci rcui ts wer e used for the
unstrapped system, i t was shown that thi s arti fi ce i s possi bl e when
the hi gher modes of an i ndi vi dual resonator are short i n wavel ength
compared wi th any wavel ength of i nterest. The strap secti ons may be
si mi l arl y repl aced by si mpl e equi val ent ci rcui ts, essenti al l y because thei r
di mensi ons are short compared wi th a wavel ength over the range of
i nterest. The l ength of a strap i s al ways i ts greatest di mensi on, and the
condi ti on that i t be short compared wi th the wavel ength h i s that
2n-r.
~<1,
122 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC.42
wher e r, i s an effecti ve radi us of the strap system.l The condi ti on has
been easi l y sati sfi ed i n al l magnetrons bui l t to date, and the strap system,
havi ng no resonances i tsel f, except at frequenci es far hi gher than that of
the system as a whol e, may then be r epr esented by any conveni ent ci rcui t
havi ng the appropri ate l ow-frequency behavi or.
I t i s i mportant to state cl earl y the purposes and the l i mi tati ons of
the equi val ent-ci rcui t approach (see al so Sec. 71). Thi s method sets
up a model of the resonant system that si mul ates i ts behavi or over an
appropri ate frequency band and that correl ates the i nformati on about t,he
/
FI G.4.3.Locati on of the termi nal s
of the network used to represent the
unstrapped resonator.
system, permi tti ng predi cti ons to be
made about the effects of vari ous
parameters. I t i s not, however , a
method for cal cul ati ng the system con-
stants ab initio. Thus, the pr ocedur e
al ways consi sts i n usi ng some experi -
mental l y measured quanti ti es ei ther to
deduce others that mi ght be measured
or to cal cul ate the effect of changes i n
the system. The equi val ent-ci rcui t
model i s changed from one case to
another and i s kept as si mpl e as i s con-
si stent wi th the i ncl usi on of al l the
factors consi dered rel evant to a speci fi c
case.
The equi val ent ci rcui ts for the basi c el ements of the strapped system
may be consi dered her e. The smal l mode separati on of unstrapped
systems suggests that the coupl i ng between osci l l ators i s not strong.
I n the anal ysi s of strapped systems, then, the coupl i ng through the
i nteracti on space and through the end spaces wi l l be i gnored. Thi s i s
justi fi abl e for the modes of hi ghest n, because i t has been obser ved that
the hei ght of the end spaces and the pr esence or absence of a cathode make
l i ttl e di fference to the wavel ength of these modes i n strapped tubes.
An unl oaded strapped system may then be consi dered as consi sti ng of a
ri ng of N si mi l ar resonators that are coupl ed at thei r ends by the strapped
system. The unstrapped resonator wi l l be r epr esented by a 4-termi nal
networ k wi th termi nal s A, B, and A, 1? l ocated as shown i n Fi g. 4.3.
Furthermore, thi s 4-termi nal networ k may be supposed to consi st of
a l ength h of wavegui de havi ng a cutoff wavel ength A,Oand charac-
teri sti c i mpedance K, O/Vl X2/k~0. The cross secti on of thi s gui de i s
I Thi s i nequal i ty {sl i ghtl ychangedby the substi tuti onof the anoderadi usT.for r,)
occurs al soi n the theor y of the spacechargei n Chap. 6, where i t i s gi ven as a condi ti on
for the negl ect of the effect of r -f magneti c fi el ds on the el ectrods and of rel ati vi sti c
efi ects.
SEC. 4.3] RI NGS OF NETWORKS
123
ACDBEFG. The l ength h can be i denti fi ed wi th the l ength of the anode;
and to a good degr ee of approxi mati on, ho can be i denti fi ed wi th the
mmode wavel ength of the unstrapped system.
The term K,, i s rel ated
to the characteri sti c admi ttance of the unstrapped system i n the r-mode
and may be cal cul ated. A strap secti on maybe si mi l arl y r epr esented by
a 4-termi nal networ k, consi sti ng of a l ength s of paral l el -pl ate gui de of
i mpedance K,. The l ength s i s general l y found to cor r espond to a strap
radi us somewher e wi thi n the strap system. No attempt i s made to
di sti ngui sh between the i nner and outer straps i n doubl e-strapped
tubes,
Ther e i s a measure of arbi trari ness i n the manner i n whi ch the con-
necti on of the strap and the resonant systems may be r epr esented. For
(a)
Fm. 4.4.(a) A 4-termi nal
strappedtube; (b) a 4-termi nal
si ngl e-strapped tube.
(b)
network representati on for a si ngl e secti on of a doubl +
network representati on of two nei ghbori ng secti ons of a
doubl e-ri ng strappi ng each secti on of the whol e system has a l eft- and
ri ght-hand symmetry (hori zontal ); thus i t seems reasonabl e to pl ace
hal f the l ength of each strap on ei ther si de of the unstrapped resonator
as shown i n the ci rcui t of Fi g. 4.4a. When ther e i s onl y a si ngl e strap
at each end, the ci rcui t of Fi g. 4.4b is suggested. I f addi ti onal forms of
coupl i ng have to be consi dered, they coul d be i ncl uded by addi ti onal
4-termi nal l i nkages at the ends of the unstrapped resonator (end-space
coupl i ng) or at the mi dpl ane of the unstrapped resonator (i nteracti on-
space coupl i ng). I n ever y case the ci rcui t for the whol e tube i s found
by joi ni ng these networks. I n general , ther e wi l l be 2P 4-termi nal
coupl i ng l i nks wi th P networ ks on each si de. Al though the appl i cati ons
gi ven i n thi s chapter wi l l i nvol ve onl y cases wher e P = 1 or 2, the general
theor y wi l l be wor ked out for arbi trary P.
403. Ri ngs of Networ ks.-Befor e devel opi ng the somewhat abstract
anal ysi s of the general case, a few facts may be recal l ed about the speci al
case of chai ns of i denti cal 4-termi nal networks, whi ch mi ght, for exampl e,
124
THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC.43
be fi l ter secti ons. Supposi ng the networ ks to be symmetri cal and l ossl ess,
the rel ati ons between the vol tages VI and Vz and the correspondi ng
mesh currents I I and I t at the two ends of any gi ven networ k are
11 = jY,,vl + jY12v,,
12 = jY12vl jY11v2j
or
v2=;2vlj!#l,
12=@ -y J v1-
By wri ti ng Yl ,/Yl t = cos o and l /Yl , =
real or purel y i magi nary, one has i n matri x notati on
The i mpedance ZO i s the i terati ve i mpedance of the secti on because i f
VI = ZOI I , then Vz = Z012. The angl e @ i s known as the transfer angl e;
for i f VI = jZJ , tan ~, then V2 = jZOI , tan (I L + O). Wi th r espect
to appropri ate termi nati ons, ther efor e, the networ k acts as a secti on of
transmi ssi on l i ne of characteri sti c i mpedance Zo and el ectri cal l ength ~.
The quanti ti es ZOand @ are, of course, functi ons of the frequency.
I f one now takes N i denti cal secti ons i n a chai n and forms a ri ng by
joi ni ng the correspondi ng termi nal s, ther e must be si mi l ar vol tages and
currents at the two ends of the ri ng. Thus,
or
and
wher e V,V+I and I .~+l are the vol tage and cur r ent at the end of the Nth
secti on. But thi s i mpl i es that
Det (MA 1) = 0,
wher e I i s the uni t matri x. However , because
M>,s=
[
cos N~ jZO si n N~
3% si n N@
)
cos Nd
[
=et (Cos Nf#l ) 1
)
jZO si n N@ = ~
jYO si n NO (COSN+) 1
l cos N+=O
N+ = 2s7r,
SEC.4.3] RI NGS OF NETWORKS 125
wher e s = O, 1 . . 0 N/2 (assumi ng N i s even) and
Thus, a ri ng of N 4-termi nal networ ks wi l l support a harmoni c osci l l ati on
onl y for those frequenci es whi ch make & equal to one of the val ues
2sH/N. These are the frequenci es of the normal modes of the system.
The modes wi l l be wi del y spaced i f @ changes rapi dl y wi th frequency.
As an exampl e, suppose that each secti on consi sts of a shunt resonant
ci rcui t of i nductance L and capaci tance C wi th a mutual coupl i ng M
mxz
c c c c
(a) (b)
FI G. 4.5.(cz) Schemati c ci rcui t of a chai n of 4-termi nal networks; (b) equi val ent ci rcui t
of Fi g. 4,5a.
between each nei ghbori ng pai r of i nductances (see Fi g. 4.5a and i ts
equi val ent ci rcui t Fi g. 4.5b). The matri x for thi s ci rcui t i s
[4W+l (L-2M14 !
[- 1[
1 L l + LM2~
J Wc
ja(L 2M)
.
1
l ~
1
juM
1
U2MC J TM
1
Thus,
L2M LM 1
cos#=l + M &c=T
U2MC
()
2M COS2 : L=a&
and
1
;2
(L- 2Mc0s2$ (&J
Thence i f ~, = 2s7/N, the resonant frequenci es are
1
( )
_=c ~_2Mco#+.
JJ
G
2
The mode spectra i n thi s and other cases are easi l y exami ned by pl otti ng
cos ~ as a functi on of u, or A, as i n Fi g. 46; the mode frequenci es are then
126
THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC. 4.3
found by l ocati ng the i ntersecti ons of thi s cur ve wi th the l i nes
cos @ = cos 2.m/N. I t wi l l be noted that i n thi s si mpl e exampl e the
networ k acts as a bandpass fi l ter cutti ng off at o = l /~C and
~ = l /~C(L ZM) and that the resonant frequenci es l i e wi thi n the
pass band. As M i ncreases, the separati on of the modes and the wi dth
of the pass band both i ncrease.
I n taki ng up the mor e general case, i n whi ch the number of 4-termi nal
connecti ons at each si de of a uni t networ k i s unrestri cted, methods si mi l ar
-2.0
Y I I
1,6
I
4 + . 3.Q
L= 22
1.2 +
I
\l
0.8
\ .
\
* 0.4
\ \
3
0
\ 2
-0.4
\ \
-0.8
\
-1.2
\
O 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
ho
FI G. 4.6.COS + as a functi on of
h/Ao for a chai n of shunt-resonant
ci rcui ts wi th mutual coupl i ng. Val ues
of cos 0> 1cor r espond to +.i magi nary.
A, i s 2. CVZZ.
vol tages and currents at the
to those of the precedi ng paragraph wi l l
be used. Certai n restri cti ons due to
symmetry wi l l be put on the i ndi vi dual
networ ks and, hence, on thei r i mpedance
matri ces. The condi ti on that the N
networ ks be joi ned i n a ri ng i s then ap-
pl i ed, and thi s i s found to yi el d a
determi nantal equati on for the possi bl e
frequenci es. A few addi ti onal theorems
are pr oved concerni ng the matri ces of
certai n other stmctures, consi derati on of
whi ch ari ses i n cases wher e asymmetri es
are i ntroduced i nto the ri ng.
As each coupl i ng i s a 4-termi nal net-
wor k, the anal ysi s can be made i n terms
of the vol tages and mesh currents at the
pai rs of termi nal s correspondi ng to each
l i nk. The reci proci ty theor em wi l l hol d
for these vol tages and currents. Let the
pai rs of termi nal s on the l eft be v =
(v,, i,, o , VP) and i = (11~12, . , l P) and those on the ri ght be
U=(U1, U2, , Up) and j = (Jl , J 2, . 0 , J .), wher e V, i , u, and j
are tr eated as vector s subject to matri x mul ti pl i cati on.
Let
i ==Yl v + Y2u,
j = Y3V + Y4U,
wher e the Y terms are square admi ttance
theor em then gi ves
Y, = Y,
(l a)
(l b)
matri ces. The reci proci ty
(2)
(the mi nus si gn i s a consequence of the use of cycl i c currents i n the
4-termi nal l i nks), and al so that Y 1 and Y4 are symmetri c matri ces.
Thus,
i = Yl v + Y2U,
(3a)
j = Yzv + Y4U.
(3b)
SEC. 43] RI NGS OF NETWORKS 127
Consi der the case i n whi ch the secti ons have hori zontal symmetry.
Thi s i mpl i es that, si mul taneousl y,
[:) T[!l and[4 TM
(4)
but by substi tuti ng from Eq. (3),
H [
v Y~Y,
)[)
yTl ~

i YI YyY4 + Y, YI Y~ j
(5)
and
[1[
u Y;l Y,
)( 1
_yTl v
j =
Y, + Y4Y#Y1 Y,Y;l i ;
(6)
hence,
Y, = Yl . (7)
I f ther e are N si mi l ar networks, the condi ti on i mposed by the ri ng con-
necti on i s
(8)
wher e v and i r efer to the termi nal s of any secti on. Thi s i mpl i es that
Det (1 TN) = O
(9)
wher e I i s the uni t matri x. Or, factori ng the determi nant, that
Det (LI -T)=o, (l o)
wher e A: = 1. Rewri ti ng Eq. (3), taki ng Eq. (7) i nto account, gi ves
i = YI V + Y2U
(ha)
and
j = Yl v Y2U. (l l b)
Now, i f Eq. (10) i s true,
[:1 Tti:l w
(12)
I I
Um
wher e i s a characteri sti c vector for Eq. (10). Substi tuti ng i n
jm
Eq. (11)
Lj. = Yl hum + Y2um,
j. = Y2kum Yl um,
or
(k;Y2 + 2&Y, + Y2)U. = o.
Thus
(
Det ,A; +l
)
~ + YyY, = o,
(13)
(14)
128 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC. 43
provi ded Det Yz # O, wher e I i s the uni t matri x. I f L i s wri tten as
L = ei ~-, whereNY~ = 2rm, Eq. (14) takes the fi nal form
Det( Yyl Yl 1 cos$~) =0. (15)
Referri ng to Eq. (5) i t i s to be noted that Y;Y, i s, i h an obvi ous
notati on, the v-u matri x of a uni t secti on.
The determi nantal Eq.
(15) now determi nes the possi bl e resonances of the structure. Ther e
wi l l be, i n general , p r oots or p-resonant frequenci es for each val ue of m.
The i nteger m wi l l be used to descri be the mode. I t i s rel ated to the
fami l i ar mode number n by the rel ati on m = (N/2) n. The notati on
ml , m%,.., mp may be used to denote the p modes for each m val ue.
Si nce the frequenci es depend upon cos $~ onl y, two val ues of $~ l ead-
i ng to the same val ue of cos t~ have the same frequency. Thus i f
$.=2T$~or m=
N m, m and m l ead to the same frequency.
Ther e are evi dentl y N val ues of m; two of these, namel y, m = O and
m = N/2, l ead to a nondegenerate frequency; the other (N 2)-val ues
of m occur i n pai rs of the form (m, N m) l eadi ng to degener ate fr e-
()
N
quenci es. Ther e are thus p ~ + 1 separate frequenci es i f the p
di fferent frequenci es for a fi xed m are not degener ate.
I t i s possi bl e to wri te the secti on matri x T i n a form that wi l l be found
useful l ater. Suppose that angl es o,, @JZ,. . . , & are found such that
Cos +1, Cos #z, . . . , cos @p are the l atent r oots of Eq. (15), and l et
the di agonal i zed form of YI I Y1 be denoted by Cl . Then matri ces
D,, and D,, may be found such that
wher e S1 i s al so d~agonal and has the di agonal el ements si n 01, si ti 42,
. . . . si n @P. Between D,l and D,* the rel ati on
S, D,,Y, + D,, = O
(17)
hol ds. I t i s easy to see that for r i denti cal secti ons one has
~ = D-I T@ = DI
[1
c, s,
s, c,
(18)
wher e C, and S, are agai n di agonal wi th el ements cos rol l , cos r~z, - ,
cos MI . and si n r+l , si n rdz, . . . , si n r.$p, respecti vel y. I t may be
noted that i f
u =jDT/D2zi , (19a)
then
V = j~:D2J (19b)
SEC. 4.3] RI NGS OF NETWORKS 129
From Eqs. (18) and (19) i t i s seen that the set of angl es &, 42, . . . , +,
forms a general i zati on of the usual transfer constant and jDT/ DjZ i s an
extensi on of the usual i terati ve i mpedance; for i f the networ k be termi -
nated on the ri ght wi th a networ k whose I mpedance matri x i s jDT11D22)
the i mpedance matri x at the l eft-hand termi nal s i s agai n jDy/ DZ2.
I t may be obser ved that a chai n of networ ks wi th 4-termi nal con-
necti ons i s a structure whi ch exKl bi ts a seri es of vel oci ti es of propagati on
at any gi ven frequency. Wi th each angl e +, ther e may be associ ated
a vel oci ty of phase propagati on 2or4,/u at a frequency u; and further-
more, for each @,, ther e wi l l be an i ndi vi dual cos ~. vs. u (or X) curve,
l eadi ng to a set of resonant frequenci es.
I n the event that the cel l possesses end-for-end or verti cal symmetry
some further properti es of the matri x may be deduced. I f the vari ous
vol tage and cur r ent vector s be wri tten
= [::1 i= Kietc
v her e the subscri pts 1 and 2 r efer to the two ends of the tube, then
verti cal symmetry means that the same rel ati ons hol d between V, i , u,
and j as between Av, Ai , Au, and Aj, wher e A i s a matri x that transforms
the subscri pts, or
Appl yi ng thi s condi ti on
and
[1
A=ol
I o
to Eq. (11) i t i s found that
AY,A = YI
whi ch means that Y1 and Yz are of the form
The matri ces D,, and D*Znow have the form
11)D22= [: -1
(20)
(21)
A further proposi ti on on unsymmetri cal matri ces whi ch i s made use
of i n Sec. 4.7 wi l l now be devel oped. Suppose that Y1 and Y2 are the
mar,ri ces of networ ks whi ch are mi rror i mages (l eft and ri ght hand) of
each other . Thi s i s i mpl i ed i f
H ll
(22(Z)
130
and
ori f B=
and
THE STRAPPED SYSTEM
[-) (-T
I o
0
1
the: MY2B [0
B = YZBY, or
Yrl = B-I Y,B = BY,B.
NTOWconsi der a case i n I vhi ch
() H
Y,YZ ~ = ~ or
y+] Y2B [J
[SEC. 43
(22b)
(22.,
(23a)
then
[By, -Y2B) [~] co;
and i f
()
y=Al l A,,
2
A,, A,,
;
thi s l eads to
[
1[1
O 2A,, V =0
2A*1 O i
Thus
Det (A,,) = O and v=O or l ~et (A,,) = O
and i = O. (23b)
A si mi l ar set of equati ons hol ds for Y1.
The si ngl e-strapped structure does not come \\-i thi nthe scope of the
general anal ysi s of thi s secti on becal l sc i f the si ngl e secti ons are tr eated
as 8-termi nal net~vorks, they have no hori zontal symmetry and nei ghbor-
i ng secti ons are mi rror i mages rather than i denti cal .
The symmetry
of the secti on i s such that i t i s unchanged unfl er a si mul taneol l s exchange
of ends and of l eft and ri ght, and i f thi s i s taken i nto accol mt, i t i s not
di ffi cul t to sho\v that the U-Vmatri x for tl vo nei ghbori ng secti ons i s
Q = 2APAP 1,
\\her eA has i ts previ ous si gni fi cance an{l P i s the U-V matri x for one
secti on. By substi tuti ng i n 13q. (15), one has
net (APAP
I t i s probabl y si mpl er, ho~vever , to
4-termi nal networ k.
cos~ +m) = o. (24)
treat the si ngl e-strapped case as a
SEC. 4.4] FI XED-FREQUENCY SYSTEMS
131
SYMMETRI CAL SYSTEMS
4.4. Freed-frequency Systems.I n the most common case, that of
doubl e strappi ng, the ci rcui t for a si ngl e secti on i ndi cated i n Fi g. 4.4a
may be di ssected i nto thr ee 8-termi nal secti ons as i n Fi g. 4.7. The
over-al l matri x T i s of the form
T = T,T,T, (25)
wher e T, i s the matri x of a hal f secti on of strap and T, i s the resonator
matri x. The term T, may be wri tten by i nspecti on as
[
Cos 9, 0 jK. si n 0. 0
T, =
o Cos 0. 0 jKb si n e,
1
(26)
jM, si n 0, 0 Cos es o
0 jM, si n 0, 0 Cos 0,
wher e 20. = 27rs/h, the el ectri cal l ength of the strap, and M, = l /K,.
The matri x for the center secti on may be deri ved by supposi ng that the
resonator i s a symmetri cal 4-ter-
mi nal networ k wi th a matri x
[1
a b
c a
and that a bc = Z; the mesh
equati ons can be wri tten and sol ved,
yi el di ng for the center matri x T,
II
1 000
0 100
a 1
.
b
1
_
b
~::(27)
For the case consi dered, a = cos &
FI Q.4,7.A si ngl e secti on of a doubl e-
and b = jK, si n o,, wher e 9, i s the
strapped tube represented as three S-termi -
nal networks.
el ectri cal l ength of the resonator and
K, = l /M, i s i ts characteri sti c i mpedance. Thus
I
1 000
T, =
o 100
jM, ctn 0,
1
jM, csc 8, 1 0
jM, csc 0, jM. ctn & O 1
(28)
Formi ng the product TaT.T8 and cal cul ati ng onl y the U-V part, the
l atter i s found to be
132 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM
[SEC. 4.4
[
cos 20. + ~K.M, si n 20, ctn e, 4K8M, si n 20. csc 6,
)
(29)
~K8M, si n 20. csc 07 cos 213.+ ~KaM, si n 2$8 ctn O,
The determi nantal Eq. (15) now l eads to
(COS20, + ~K,M, si n 20. ctn 8, cos VLJ2 = (~K,M, si n 20, csc t),), (3o)
whi ch factors i nto the two equati ons
cos $~ = cos 20, + ~ K.M. si n 28. tan $ (31a)
and
1
cos V- = cos 213.+ ~ K,M, si n 20, ctn $ (31b)
For future r efer ence the matri x D whi ch di agonal i zes T accordi ng to
Eq. (16) may be wri tten her e. I f
(
D,, = :
then
D** = jK, tan e.
1
)
1
(32a)
(32b)
Consi derati on of Eq. (12) and Fi g. 44a shows that for the r-mode,
wher e Lhe vol tage across the sl ots changes by 180 between each nei gh-
bori ng pai r, & = O or m = O. I n thi s case, Eq. (32) becomes
$tan O.+ M,tan~=O (33a)
*
and
~tan O, M,ctn$=O. (33b)
a
The i nterpretati on of these equati ons shows that i n the fi rst case the two
hal f-strap secti ons, open-ci rcui ted at the mi dpl ane of the segments, are
resonati ng i n paral l el agai nst hal f the unstrapped resonator, open-ci r-
cui ted at the medi an pl ane, and i n the second case, agai nst hal f the
resonator short-ci rcui ted at the medi an pl ane. These may be r efer r ed
to as symmetri c and anti symmetri c modes and desi gnated as the
(m = 0,)- and (m = O,)-modes, respecti vel y. A si mi l ar pai r of modes
exi sts for any other val ue of m, and the symbol s ml and ma wi l l be used
to r efer to them.
Returni ng to Eqs. (31) the fol l owi ng substi tuti ons may be made:
SEC. 4.4]
FI XED-FREQUENCY SYSTEMS
133
Forthemodes ofgreatest i nterest, A > X,,, wi ththe resul t thathyperbol i c
functi ons repl ace the tri gonometri c ones pertai ni ng to the resonator.
Eqqati ons (31) then become
The nature of the mode spectrum and the effect of vari ous parameters
upon i t may now be studi ed by pl otti ng the ri ght-hand si des of Eqs. (34)
as functi ons of X. Fi gure 4.8
shows the two expressi ons, whi ch
may be cal l ed cos @l and cos @z, as
functi ons of A\A,,, for four val ues
of J = K8/2Zr0; namel y, k = 0.8,
0.4, 0.2, and the l i mi ti ng case
,4 = O. The term k measures the
wei ght of strappi ng, and i t de-
creases as the strappi ng i s made
heavi er. Representati ve val ues
for 2Ts/& and ~h/ & are chosen;
these are 0,55 and 0.80.
Over the i nteresti ng range of
X/&O, cos 01 and cos & are mono-
toni c i ncreasi ng functi ons of thi s
quanti ty; for suffi ci entl y smal l
val ues of X/k,O, however , the tan-
gent and cotangent functi ons wi l l
gi ve ri se to a seri es of branches, but
thi s regi on i s general l y not rel e-
vant. At such val ues of A/&,
short waves are propagati ng up
and down the resonator gi vi ng a
seri es of modes. For the sym-
metri c modes (COS @l ), al l the
curves pass through the poi nt
1.2
1.1
0.6
0.5
FI G. 4S.-The dependence of cos q$, and
cos @ on A/)., o for vari ous val ues of k i n a
doubl e-strapped tube [see Eqs. (34)]. The
sol i d l i nes are cos .$, (symmetri c modes) ; the
broken l i nes am cos 01 (anti symmetri c
modes). Val ues of cos @ > 1 cor r espond to
@ i magi nary. For k = O the two sets of
modes coi nci de.
(x/X,, = 1, cos @l = cos 27rsi &), and they l i e above the l i mi ti ng (k = O)-
cur ve for A,, < A and bel ow i t for & > A. As k i s decreased, the (cos 01)-
curves approach the l i mi ti ng curve.
The (COS@a)-curves, on the other
hand, l i e far to the l eft for l arge k and move steadi l y to the ri ght, tendi ng
eventual l y to the l i mi ti ng curve.
Four hori zontal l i nes are drawn on Fi g.
4.8 correspondi ng to cos @l and cos Oz equal to cos 0, cos 22*, cos 30,
134 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC. 4.4
and cos 45. The i ntersecti ons of these l i nes wi th the (COS@l )- and (COS
&)-curves gi ve the wavel engths of modes for whi ch i ~ = 0, 22&, 30, and
45. These represent, for exampl e, the (m = O)-, (m = l )-, and (m = 2)-
modes for N = 16 (~ = 0, 22*, and 45); the (m = O)- and (m = 1)-modes
for N = 12 (0 and 30); and the (m = O)- and (m = 1)-modes for N = 8
(0 and 450).
I t i s cl ear from the form of the curves that for ei ther the symmetri c
or anti symmetri c set, the modes have the opposi te or der i n wavel ength
from that i n number. Al so, as the wei ght of strappi ng i ncreases (k ~ O),
the i ntersecti ons move to the ri ght for the anti symmetri c modes; i .e.,
1.6
\
1.4
I
# I
1
I
\ @=l )l
~ 1.21
\ 1
-
F -
\.
1.0*
+~30-
1, \\
-. +. 22y:
0.8
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0,8 l ,o
k
FI G. 4.9.The dependence of A/h,, on k
for vari ous val ues of ~, and & i n a doubl e-
strapped tube. The sol i d l i nes are the
symmetri c modes; the broken l i nes are the
anti symmetri c modes.
the wavel ength i ncreases. For
the symmetri c modes the i ntersec-
ti ons move to the ri ght i f cos
4~ > cos 27rs/A,, and to the l eft i f
21rs
Cos #l m< Cos ~.
r O
Thus, whether or not the wave-
l ength of a mode i s i ncreased or
decreased by strappi ng depends
upon the mode number, the strap
l ength, and the resonator wave-
l ength. Fi gure 4.9, deri ved from
Fi g. 4.8, shows the wavel ength of
the modes as a functi on of k. For
a gi ven mode the i ntersecti ons
tend, as k -+ O, toward the poi nts
cos h = cos 2zs/A or , because
I P~= 2rm/N, toward k = Ns/m. Thus, the T-mode wavel ength becomes
i ndefi ni tel y l ong, whi l e al l the others tend to a fi ni te l i mi t, dependent onl y
upon the strap l ength, the mode number, and the number of osci l l ators.
The l i mi ti ng wavel engths, i n fact, cor r espond to l /m ti mes the strap
ci rcumference.
I n practi ce, i t i s of i nterest to exami ne the mode spectrum as a
functi on of wei ght of strappi ng, subject to the condi ti on that the r-mode
wavel ength remai n fi xed. I t i s thus necessary to adjust the unstrapped
wavel ength & i n each case. Fi gure 4.10 shows cos O, and cos OZ as
functi ons of A/&, wher e & i s the wavel ength of the r-mode, for k = 0.8,
0.4, 0.2, and O. The strap l ength and tube hei ght used cor r espond
to those of Fi g. 4.8 wi th k = 0.4; that i s, the r-mode wavel ength of
the (k = 0.4)-case of Fi g. 4.8 i s used as the fi xed mmode wavel ength of
Fi g. 4.10. Fi gure 4.11 deri ved from Fi g. 4.10 shows the vari ati on of the
wavel engths of some of the modes as a functi on of k. The l i mi ti ng
SEC. 4.5] EFFECTS OF VARI OUS PARAMETERS 135
wavel engths i n thi s case may be found by l etti ng k d O wi th & ti ed i n
Eq. (34;). The equati on then
becomes
27rs
Cos @l = Cos @z = Cos
A
I t i s seen that i n thi s case al so, the
symmetri c and anti symmetri c
modes eventual l y tend for ver y
heavy strappi ng to coi nci de i n pai rs
of the same m-number and that
al l the modes now tend to a fi ni te
wavel ength.
4.6. Effects of Vari ous Param-
eter s on the Mode Spectrum.
The general behavi or of the modes
i s mor e easi l y exami ned i f approxi -
mate forms are used for Eqs. (34a)
and (35). Thus, i f 2ms/k i s suffi -
ci entl y smal l to i gnore terms of
hi gher than the second or der i n
21rs/h, the si nes and cosi nes i n Eq.
(35) may be expanded to gi ve
1.0
r
k=0,S/
k=:0.4;
0.9
s
Pw?%f+
VA=
FI Q. 4. 10.The dependence of cos @I and
cos @Z on A/A~ for vari ous val ues of k i n 8
doubl e-strapped tube. The sol i d l i nes are
cos .$1 (symmetri c modes); tbe broken l i nes
are cm qh (anti symmetri c modes). For
k = Othe two sets. of modes coi nci de.
k
Fm. 4.11.The dependenceof X/Xmon k
for vari ousval uesof @, and O*i n a doubl e-
strappedtube. The sol i d l i nes are cos #L
(symmetri cmodes); the broken l i nes are
cos .$z (anti symmetri c modes).
for the mth mode, wher e
(36U)
(36b)
+. =
2irm/ N. Wi th the same condi ti on
upon 2ms/h and the addi ti onal
requi rement that
may be repl aced by
--J-
mh AZ
A A;.
1
(a condi ti on that requi res ei ther a ver y short tube or l i ght strappi ng)
Eq. (34a) for the symmetri c modes beconms
136 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM
[SEC. 4.5
with
and Eq. (34b) becomes
~2~2
= k.s
~ + sinz ~
(37)
(38)
(39)
The cl ose resembl ance i n form between Eqs. (36) and (37) i s l argel y
fortui tous; Eq. (36) i s val i d for k smal l ; Eqs. (37) to (39) for k l arge.
Taken together they reveal the mai n features of the spectrum. Equa-
ti on (38), whi ch hol ds when the vari ati on of the fi el ds al ong the strap
secti ons and al ong the resonator can be i gnored, may be wri tten as
(40)
wher e C, = 2s/uK., and C, = h/ wZ,, are the strap capaci tance and
resonator capaci tance, respecti vel y. Thi s shows that i n the mmode
strap capaci tance i s in paral l el wi th the resonator capaci tance.
The effect of the number of osci l l ators on the mode spectrum may
now be consi dered. From Eq. (37) i t fol l ows that i f two systems are
bui l t wi th the same rati o of strap l ength to r-mode wavel ength, the
rel ati ve mode separati ons wi l l be the same for l i ght strappi ng i f
For modes wi th smal l m, ~m/N i s smal l and k i s assumed l arge; thus one
can wri te
for modes of the same m number. Thus, the wei ght of strappi ng requi red
to pr oduce a gi ven mode separati on vari es as N2 for rel ati vel y l i ght
strappi ng. Agai n, accordi ng to Eq. (36), the l i mi ti ng mode separati on
vari es as
K%(W
when ~m/ N is suffi ci entl y smal l . NOWNs i s equal to 2m-,, or ver y nearl y
SEC. 4.5] EFFECTS OF VARI OUS PARAMETERS 137
2i fra. The mode separati on i s, thus, proporti onal to (mA,/2n-r~)2 and
depends essenti al l y upon the si ze of the tube i n terms of i ts operati ng
wavel ength. Both Eqs. (36) and (37) i ndi cate that the mode separati on
vari es wi th 1/s2 for a gi ven number of osci l l ators, i ndi cati ng the practi cal
i mportance of keepi ng the straps short. The effecti ve l ength of the straps
depends somewhat upon the shape of the resonator because i t affects
the di stri buti on of vol tage at the pl aces wher e the straps are connected.
An i l l ustrati on of thi s effect i s gi ven bel ow.
The remai ni ng vari abl e whose effect i s to be consi dered i s the l ength h.
Because Eqs. (34a) and (34b) di ffer onl y i n that one contai ns a hyperbol i c
tangent, the other a hyperbol i c cotangent, the ml - and mz-modes must
approach each other when the argument of these functi ons becomes l arge.
The condi ti on for thi s i s that
F
rh ~
x A:.
1 >1, say.
Thi s may come about through heavy strappi ng (k,, <<A) or for l ong tubes
(h l arge). As h i s i ncreased, the anti symmetri c modes ver y rapi dl y
i ncrease i n wavel ength, fi nal l y reachi ng a state i n whi ch the (mz = O)-
mode i s near er to the (ml = O)-mode than i s the (ml = 1). Si nce most
output ci rcui ts do not coupl e out the
anti symmetri c modes, thi s r epr e-
sents an undesi rabl e condi ti on. As
a sol uti on for the di ffi cul ty center -
strappi ng has been used. Essen-
ti al l y thi s means bui l di ng a doubl e-
t- +-
l ength tube by putti ng end-to-end
two compl etel y strapped systems
each of si ngl e l ength. The mode
spectrum of the whol e system i s
then cl ose to that of i ts co-mponent
hal ves.
Some actual appl i cati ons of the I
formul as of thi s secti on wi l l gi ve an
(a) (b)
i ndi cati on of thei r rel i abi l i ty (see l ~I G. 4.12,Two types of strappi ng used on
Fi g. 4.12). I n a scal ed-up model
16-osci l l atormagnetrons,
(Fi g. 4.12a) of a 16-resonator hol e-and-sl ot 3-cm magnetron (4J50) the
measured wavel engths of the (ml = O)-, (ml = l )-, and (ml = 2)-modes
and the unstrapped wavel ength are 12.400, 10.152, 7.570, and 9.47 cm,
respecti vel y. Any thr ee of these may be used to cal cul ate k and 2T~
from Eq. (34a). Wi th k = 0.46 and 27rs = 4.58 cm, the cal cul ated
wavel engths are 12.35, 10.17, and 7.52 cm. The effecti ve strap radi us
i s 1.86 cm compared wi th the actual strap radi i of 1.85 and 2.04 cm.
k, tentati vel y esti mated from the tube geometr y, agrees wel l wi th the
138
THE STRAPPED SYSTEM
[sEd. 4.5
above val ue. I n a second 16-cavi ty tube (Fi g. 412b) roughl y twi ce the
l ength of the above, the fi rst two modes (ml = O) and (ml = 1) wer e
measured to be 10.53 and 8.45 cm, and the unstrapped wavel ength 6.78
cm. Wi th a val ue of 4.41 cm for 2ms and 0.204 for k deri ved from
these measurements and Eq. (34a), the anti symmetri c modes (mz = O)
and (mz = 1) wer e found to be 9.51 and 7.59 cm. The messured wave-
l engths wer e 9.36 and 7.45 cm. I n thi s case the effecti ve strap radi us i s
about 17 per cent gr eater than the actual mean strap radi us.
Presumabl y
the l ower effecti veness of the strap i n Fi g. 4 12b i s due to the fact that
the outer strap overhangs the hol e and i nteracts wi th the fl ux through i t
and al so to the shortness of the resonator, whi ch puts the outer strap at a
rel ati vel y l ow vol tage poi nt. Further evi dence on thi s poi nt i s obtai ned
from two 16-resonator vane-type magnetrons that had i denti cal strappi ng
but di fferent vane depths. The wavel engths of the (m, = O)- and
(ml = 1)-modes wer e, for the fi rst, 11.701 and 8.879 cm and, for the
second, 9.545 and 7.852 cm. The unstrapped wavel engths can be
cal cul ated wi th some accuracy for vane tubes (see Sec. 112) and wer e
computed to be 7.36 and 5.48 cm.
Wi th thi s i nformati on, 2m becomes
4.22 cm for the fi rst tube and 4.37 cm for the second. Thus, the mechan-
i cal l y i denti cal straps are el ectri cal l y about 4 per cent shor ter for the
system wi th l ong resonators. The correspondi ng val ues of k are 0.263
and 0.230; the rati o of these i s 1.14, whereas the cal cul ated rati o of the
resonator capaci ti es i s 1.19.
For si ngl e-strapped systems the separate secti ons may be tr eated as
4-termi nal networks.
By eval uati ng the si ngl e term of the (u-v) -matri x
and usi ng Eq. (15), the secul ar equati on i s found to be
wher e the constants have the same si gni fi cance as before, except s,
whi ch i s the sum of the effecti ve strap l engths at the two ends of the
tube (per secti on).
Fi gure 4.13 shows cos @ as a functi on of ~/h,, for val ues of k = 0.8,
0.4, and 0.2 for a si ngl e-strapped tube si mi l ar to Fi g. 4.8 on doubl e
strappi ng, i n whi ch 2ms/& = 0.55 and ~h/ & = 0.80. The behavi or
of the mode spectrum under an i ncreasi ng wei ght of strappi ng i s con-
si derabl y di fferent i n thi s case. The wavel ength of al l modes (i n the
range consi dered) i ncreases wi th heavi er strappi ng, and the mode or der
i s the normal one for strapped tubes. However , the mode separati on
i s onl y ver y sl owl y i ncreased by i ncreasi ng the wei ght of strappi ng, si nce
SEC. 4.5] EFFECTS OF VARI OUS PARAMETERS 139
the sl ope of the curves of the cos @ vs. ~fh,, changes qui te sl owl y wi th
decreasi ng k. Compari ng the curves of Fi g. 413 wi th those of Fi g. 48,
i t i s apparent that the mode separati on for heavy si ngl e strappi ng i s far
l ess than for doubl e strappi ng of the same i mpedance. The di fference
persi sts even when the two cases are compared on the fi asi s of equal total
strap capaci ty.
The reason for the ver y di fferent behavi or of si ngl e-strapped tubes
may be found i n the fact that the coupl i ng path between osci l l ators now
i ncl udes the osci l l ators themsel ves.
Thus, i f the resonant wavel ength
be i ncreased beyond the un-
strapped wavel ength by addi ng
straps, the coupl i ng path of the
resonator i s now beyond cutoff.
Wi th suffi ci entl y heavy strappi ng
the coupl i ng through the resona-
tor becomes rel ati vel y weak, and
mode separati on i s di ffi cul t to
achi eve. Actual l y, for suffi ci entl y
heavy strappi ng the model of Fi g.
4.7 wi l l break down because the
i mpedance of the coupl i ng path
through the end cavi ti es over un-
strapped segments wi l l become
comparabl e to that through the
resonator. I t may be noted that
the symmetry of the si ngl e-
strapped tube i s such that two sets,
of symmetri c and of anti symmet-
ri c modes, do not exi st. Thus,
l ong anodes l ead to di ffi cul ti es be-
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
*
%
v 0,8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6
FI Q. 4.13.Thedependenceof cos ~ m
Al b, for vari ous val ues of k in a si ngl e-
strapped tube. Val ues of cos 0> 1 cor r e-
spond to .#i magi nary.
cause of poor mode separati on between (m = O, 1, 2), etc., rather than
between (m = 01) and (m = 02).
Evi dence for the cor r ectness of thi s pi cture of the mode spectrum
may be found i n the data on the HP1OV, a hi gh-power l o-cm magnetron
for whi ch ~h/ &, = 1.48, 2us/A,0 = 0.84, and N = 10. The rati o of
r-mode wavel ength to unstrapped wavel ength i s 1.245, but the mode
separati on between (m = O) and (m = 1) i s onl y 5 per cent.
The di scussi on of the mode spectrum of a strapped system has shown
that the di stri buti on of the modes i n frequency depends upon the nature
of the vari ati on of the transfer angl es & wi th frequency. The strapped
system waa di scovered somewhat acci dental l y; and, so far, no resonant
system has been devel oped syntheti cal ~j i n tbe sense that the wor d
140 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC.45
i s used i n fi l ter desi gn. I t seems probabl e that al ternati ves to the
strapped or ri si ng-sun systems wi th sati sfactory mode spectra mi ght be
found by del i beratel y synthesi zi ng a networ k wi th desi red transfer
characteri sti cs, that i s, wi th the requi red vari ati on of the transfer angl es
wi th frequency.
I t has been stressed that the equi val ent l umped-ci rcui t treatment of
strapped resonant systems i s not pri mari l y a method for maki ng wave-
l ength cal cul ati ons but i s rather a model that correl ates obser ved data.
I t i s possi bl e, however , to esti mate wavel engths reasonabl y wel l by cal cu-
l ati ng h,,, Z,,, s, and K, and by maki ng use of these val ues i n the mode-
spectrum formul a. Methods of cal cul ati ng A.,, Z,,, S, and K. are
descri bed at some l ength i n Chap. 11 on the desi gn of resonant systems.
A val ue of ~,, can usual l y be esti mated for any resonator shape to about
3 to 4 per cent and Z,, wi th perhaps hal f of thi s accuracy;s, the equi val ent
strap l ength, i s the most di ffi cul t quanti ty to determi ne wi th certai nty.
As has al ready been poi nted out, i t wi l l depend upon the l ocati on of the
straps wi th r espect to the resonator and upon the shape of the l atter.
Er r or s i n i ts determi nati on wi l l not seri ousl y affect the cal cul ati on of the
~-mode wavel ength, but they wi l l cause consi derabl e uncertai nty i n the
val ue of the mode separati on, because thi s quanti ty i s so strongl y depend-
ent upon the effecti ve strap l ength.
ASYMMETRI CAL SYSTEMS
The di scussi on of the strapped anode bl ock has so far deal t wi th
si tuati ons i n whi ch al l the resonators wer e i denti cal . Thr ee departures
from thi s condi ti on are i mportant. The fi rst i s the case i n whi ch power
i s coupl ed out from a si ngl e cavi ty. Her e i t i s of i nterest to know how
the wavel engths are affected and to what extent the fi el d patterns i n
the i nteracti on space are di storted. Experi mental l y, thi s di storti on can
be pr oduced by heavy l oadi ng, and a correl ati on wi th l ower ed operati ng
effi ci ency has been noted. The second case i s the pr esence of strap
breaks. I n some tubes mode transi ti on under certai n condi ti ons of
operati on can be pr evented by breaki ng the straps at some poi nt over a
segment; i n general , the effecti veness of thi s pr ocedur e depends upon the
ori entati on of the breaks wi th r espect to the output. Strap breaks gi ve
vari ed effects: they cause a shi ft i n the frequency of the modes for
m # O, thereby affecti ng mode sel ecti on (see Chap. 8); they may i nfl u-
ence the coupl i ng to the output of the modes; fi nal l y, they cause di s-
torti on of the fi el d patterns fnr m # O, thereby maki ng power transfer
to those modes i neffi ci ent. The fi nd case occurs i n consi derati on of
tuni ng schemes i n whi ch the frequency of the resonator system i s vari ed
by i ntroduci ng reactance i nto a si ngl e cavi ty. Thi s probl em i s an
extensi on of that of l oadi ng; the questrnns of pattern di storti on and
SEC.46]
EFFECTS OF LOADI NG 141
vari ati on of mode separati on are i mportant. I n pri nci pl e, most of these
questi ons can be answered; the compl exi ty of some of the resul ts may
suggest r ecour se to a model , however .
4.6. Pattern Di storti on and Mode-spectrum Effects Caused by
Loadi ng.-Pattern di storti on due to l oadi ng or tuni ng may be ade-
quatel y treated. Because most si ngl e-cavi ty tuners and output ci rcui ts
do not coupl e the anti symmetri c modes, the 8-termi nal networ k used
so far may be repl aced by the 4-termi nal one, whi ch i s obtai ned by
consi deri ng onl y the upper or l ower hal f of the tube open-ci rcui ted at the
medi an pl ane. The resonator system wi l l then be r epr esented by a ri ng
of 4-termi nal networks, one of whi ch i s shown i n Fi g. 4.14a. The matri x
for one secti on i s then
I 1[
10 cos 20, jKa si n 20.
1[ 1
10
j&l
jM8 si n 20,
jYre. ~ , (42)
2
Cos 208
2
wher e Y,., = M, tan 0,/2 and al l of the other symbol s have thei r earl i er
si gni fi cance. Thus,
K.
cos d = cos 20. ~ Y,., si n 2e8, (43)
and
Z si n 4 = K. si n 20..
(44)
The cos 4 i s i denti cal wi th the functi on cos ~, used before. I f one
osci l l ator i s l oaded and the l oad i s consi dered to be transformed to the
upper (or l ower ) end of the osci l l ator sl ot, the ri ng of 4-termi nal el ements
i e changed by the addi ti on of a shunt el ement, jYl ~, say, and appears
as i n Fi g. 4. 14b. The condi ti on for peri odi ci ty i s now
(45)
Usi ng the known expressi on for ~ the determi nantal equati on i s now
cos N@ 1 jZ si n N~
= O (46a)
jY si n NO + i Yi ~ cos N@ cos NO 1 ZYti si n N@
or
(
Nc# N+ 1
)
i v+
si n si n- -z Ywcos =0,
2 22 2
whi ch l eads to
s. N~_o
2
for @ = O,
(46b)
(47a)
THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC. 46 142
otherwi se,
These equati ons show that except for the i r-mode each of the modes of
the symmetri cal tube i s degener ate and consi sts of a doubl et, one compo-
nent of whi ch wi l l coupl e the output and one whi ch wi l l not. The
(m = O)- or (O = O)-mode i s nondegenerate because, as can be seen
from Eq. (44), Z si n @ remai ns fi ni te and, ther efor e, so does Z si n N4/2
0
0
j Yre~
K,, s
j Yre~
T -2-
0
I _
1
0
(a)
FI G. 4. 14.(I z) The 4-termi nal net wurk ~or one secti on of the resonant system; (b) addi ti on
of a l oad to the ri ng of 4-termi ne.l networks.
i n Eq. (46). The degener acy of the modes was al so apparent from the
fact that the terms of the form e+~- that appeared i n factori ng TN I
[Eq. (9)], coal esced i nto cos #~ i n the determi nantal equati on when
m # O. Equati on (47b) and the equati ons that defi ne coa ~ and Z
determi ne the frequency shi ft. The vari ati on of l oadi ng among the
di fferent modes may be exami ned i f Eqs. (44) and (47b) are combi ned
to gi ve Y., the admi ttance l ooki ng i nto the tube at a sl ot,
sin ~ tanNg
Y,d = y. = +2 K, si n 28:
(48)
or , as i t may be wri tten by usi ng Eq. (43),
For the ~-mode the bracketed term vani shes, and Y., the characteri sti c
SEC. 46] EFFECTS OF LOADI NG
143
admi ttance, i s
() (
Y.=; ka; .; h;ztp
)
+ Y,., .
8
For m # O, the unbracketed term vani shes, and
from Eq. (43). Ther efor e,
1
K, si n e. cos e.
(
y+%
8
H
and
Si nce we have consi dered onl y one-hal f of the tube, these val ues Y. may
be doubl ed to obtai n the val ues for the whol e tube.
For smal l val ues of 0,, X(8/8k) l og si n 20. = 1, whi ch si mpl i fi es
the second term. The characteri sti c admi ttance for the u-mode i s N
ti mes that of a si ngl e secti on open-ci rcui ted at the mi dpl anes of the
segments. For the other modes, essenti al l y because of the fact that they
have an uncoupl ed component, onl y N/2 ti mes the characteri sti c admi ti
tance of the i ndi vi dual resonator appears, together wi th N ti mes the
actual admi ttance of the i ndi vi dual osci l l ator. I t must be kept i n mi nd
that the val ues of Y. found above are not actual l y those whi ch enter i nto
measurements of Q-val ues, because the admi ttance used her e appears
at the top or bottom of a dot. The i ndi vi dual osci l l ator contai ni ng the
144
THE STRAPPED SYSTEM I SEC.4.6
output ci rcui t acts as a transformer between the sl ot and the pl ace at
whi ch the output ci rcui t i s supposed to begi n. The effect of thi s trans-
for mer i sdi scussed i n Chap. 5.
The amount of pattern di storti on caused by l oadi ng or tuni ng may
be anal yzed i n terms of the fi el d patterns of the undi sturbed modes.
Suppose that the actual vol tages and currents across the resonators are
Vo, vi ,..., V(~l ) and l O, 11, . . . ,l (-l ). Letthe ampl i tude of the
mth mode be CZm, wher e, i f travel i ng waves are used, m has the val ues
o, +1, +2, . . ,+ (N/ 2 - 1), N/2. Then the vol tage V, on the rth
resonator sati sfi es
v, =
z
amei*m.
(49)
m
Mul ti pl yi ng Eq. (49) by e-i $- and summi ng over r, one has, because
N(~m $.) = 2~(m n),
N1
(50)
I f a quanti ty b~ is defi ned such that
(53)
The resul t of subtracti ng Eq. (52) from Eq. (51) and usi ng Eq. (53) i s
- d T) k)H+,yll :1 (3 M)
or , by equati ng terms,
SEC.46]
EFFECTS OF LOADI NG
145
El i mi nati ng b~, amsati sfi es the equati on
1 v, .
am(cofj *m cos ~) = ~ ZYI A ~ sl n f$;
or , usi ng Eq. (47b)
N@
si n @ tan ~
am =
N(cos @ Cos *m)
(55)
The term ao gi ves di rectl y the ampl i tude of the (m = O)-mode; 2a* gi ves
the ampl i tudes of the remai ni ng standi ng-wave patterns. I t i s to be
1.0
0.9
f
~ =r), ~=6
0.8
/
\ /
0.7
s 0.6
e
g
~ 0.5
:
0.4 -
0,3
/
0.2
/
0,1
0
0.87 0.89 0.91 0.93 0.95 0.97 0.99 1.01 1.03 1.05
Cos +
I , !
6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5-
Wavel engthA i n cm
FI G.415.-The ampl i tudesof vari ous modes as functi onsof X. Val ues of cos d > 1
cor r espond to 4 i magi nary.
noted that ami s expressed enti rel y i n terms of the angl e o whi ch i s pr e-
sumabl y al ready known as a functi on of A. As an exampl e, Fi g. 4 15
shows the rel ati ve i ntensi ti es of the modes i n a 12-resonator magnetron
as a functi on of @ and wavel ength. I f thi s magnetron wer e tuned by
146 THE STR.APPED SYSTEM
jsF,c. 46
i ntroduci ng reactance i nto one cavi ty, Fi g. 4.15 shcmx the rcl ati ~e
i ntensi ti es of the component modes \vhen the s,ystem I Ms any of i ts
resonances at ~andk. ~t~rc(l nv(rl i ~rl (ethec{l l anti ty a,,, [(~n~,,)]hts
been pl otted. I C(l l l ati (m (55) i s, of co(l rsc, al so val i d ff~r ttl c case of
resi sti ve l oadi ng when @ i s compl ex, btl t l i g. 415 appl i (s to p~l rel y
reacti ve l oadi ng (cm ~ real ). I t i s of some i nterest to note th~t \~i th
substanti al mode separati on, di storti on sets i n above and I X1OJVthe
mmode at about the same rate.
I n the si mpl e case of l oadi ng, the perturbati ons are rrl ati ~cl y smal l .
l or the r r -mode when YW i s suffl ri cutl y smal l for terms i n the rxp:m-
si ons of cm @ and si n @ hi gher than ~z to I mnegkwtcd, I t(I s. (43), (.11),
and (47b) gi ve
I V K,si n2f9,;
~2 = _ Yl <t.c(
(!56)
Eq, (5.5) under si mi l ar ci rcumstances l xw)mcs
9
2a,,L = --$: -- ,
2 si n ~~
and usi ng the val ue of @z,
~a = &,,~,_si n 2/38
2N si nz ~
Forl arge Nand short straps thi s becomes
(57)
Thi s i sa resul t whi ch mi ght have been expected. I t shows that di stor-
ti on wi l i be sever e when the effecti ve strap ci rcumference SN i s l arge
rel ati ve to Am. I t al so shows that when the coupl ed admi ttance i s
comparabl e to the strap admi ttance, ther e wi l l be di storti on and, fi nal l y,
that the other modes are exci tedi n amounts varyi ng as l /mZ. Because
the tangenti al component of el ectri c fi el d for the mth mode fal l s off
roughl y as (r/r.)[~z2)fl , the pattern may become badl y di storted at the
anode because of a smal l amount of hi gh-m component.
A further sour ce of pattern di storti on i s the l ongi tudi nal vari ati on i n
fi el d strength that ari ses from the i nfl uence of the straps at the ends. I n
the symmetri c modes the fi el ds have an axi al vari ati on of the form
cosh 27rz/k #(h2/x~O) 1, measuri ng z from the medi an pl ane; i n the
anti symmetri c modes, a hyperbol i c si ne i s i nvol ved. Thi s vari ati on i s
consi derabl e i n heavi l y strapped tubes; thus i n the l ong tube descri bed
at the end of Sec. 4.5 the fi el ds at the end are twi ce as great as those at the
SEC. 4.71 EFFECTS OF STRAP BREAKS 147
center ; i n the l i ghter strapped and shor ter tube, al so r efer r ed to i n Sec.
4.5, the di fference i n fi el ds i s about 15 per cent. Thi s sour ce of pattern
di storti on may be r emoved by center-strappi ng.
4.7. Effects of Strap Breaks.-I n doubl e-strapped tubes the two
straps at one end of the tube are customari l y br oken and each break i s
made over a segment; the straps at the other end of the tube are con-
ti nuous ri ngs. Ther e wi l l then bean odd number of secti ons between the
breaks. The breaks may be r epr esented i n the equi val ent ci rcui t by a
seri es reactance i ntroduced at the di sconti nui ti es of the strap system as
shown i n Fi g. 4.16. The same arrangement of the secti ons that was used
i n the l oadi ng anal ysi s i s used her e, namel y, two coupl i ng secti ons i n the
FI Q. 4.16.Equi val ent ci rcui t of two nei ghbori ng secti ons i n a strapped tube; one secti on
contai ns a strap break. The appropri ate matri x i s i ndi cated for each part.
center and hal f the resonator secti on at each end. The matri x for a
break secti on wi l l be
[1
l ojxo
0100
[1
1 jQ
TB=OOI O=OI
(58)
0001
I f ther e wer e strap breaks at both tube ends on the same segments, then
Q woul d be gi ven by
[)
Q=:;.
(59)
Referri ng to Fi g. 4.16, l et the matri ces for the normal l y l eft- and ri ght-
hand secti ons be L and R respecti vel y. Then
T = D-TOD = LR. See Eq. (16).
148
THE s7R,4PPED SYSTEM [SEC. 47
One may wri te
L = D-T,~zDF (60a)
and
R = F-l D-TOJf D. (Oob) ,
Then
~ = RL = F-D-T,DF. (61) ~
Thus, ~ i s the new secti on matri x and may be put i nto the same quasi - ~
di agonal form T, as T, ~vhi l e DF has repl aced D. I f the t\vo di agonal ~
submatri ces of DF are (DF) 11and (DF) 22,these may be found and are
I
and
[1
~sc&l CscAl
(DF),, = jK, si n d,
2 2
Csc * _csc&
(63)
2 2
Starti ng now from a poi nt hal fway bet\veen the strap breaks, supposed
(2p + I ) secti ons apart, wher e p i s an i nteger, and usi ng ~ for the
temporary symbol of the matri x of a secti on contai ni ng a break, the ~
peri odi c condi ti on may be expressed as
!
The two matri ces i n brackets i n Eq. (64) cor r espond to secti ons that arc :
mi rror i mages, and they sati sfy an equati on such that the theor em pr oved
i n Eq. (23b) may be appl i ed to ei ther of them. The fi rst of the matri ces
j
may be wri tten as
Fl DlTo(.,r/2JP->j DTBD ITO(II+X DF ; I
and putti ng
H
v:
[1
= F-I D-I To(N/2)-P->2 DTBD-l To(P+)fi )DF 0 ,
i ! l o
(66)
then, accordi ng to Eq. (23b)
./
10=i O=O, (67a) ~
or
v~=vo=o. (676)
1
SEC. 4.7] EFFECTS OF STRAP BREAKS 149
Now
TED-l= [D: d[:! [D~ 4 =[:D1QDO 8)
and usi ng the i orms for Dl l and DZZgi ven i n Eq. (32), the resul t i s
(69)
N
tan fi ~an&2
, X ctn 08 2 2
jDl l QD>; = ~
tan &l tan @
( 2 2
for breaks at onl y one end and
[1
tan *
X ctn 9, 2
0
jDl l QD;; = ~
~ tan@
(70)
*
2
for breaks at both ends. The condi ti ons (67a) and (67b) l ead then to
[ sN/2 + j s ( N/z) - A>i ( DI I QDI J) s ( p+M) ] ( DF) , l vo = O (71)
or
[SN,Z+ jCcN/,)-.-L, (D1l QD)C(,+~+J]( DF),,i oi o = O
P
(72)
Usi ng Eqs. (69) and (67) and the fact that the determi nants of the
matri ces between bars i n Eqs. (71) and (72) must vani sh, the fol l owi ng
equati ons may be found:
2K,
[ (#-p-i)@,]
- si n ~~- si n ~ + si n ~ sm
X ctn O
[Sin(p+wan$+siny :[in(: -p-i ) ,]
i
[Si n(p+i )+,l taf l $=o (73U)
2K, Nd, N4,
si n - si n
X rtn 0, 2
[ (~-p-i )l
~ + si n ~~2 cos
[cos(p+i )~l tn$ +si ny::[s(:- p-i ) $21
[cos(~+i )@@* 0 73)
for breaks at onl y one end. 13ecause X>> K, tan O,for al l normal strap
.
breaks, the fi rst term may be negl ected and
150 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC. 47
i nY[si n(J-p-l l s i n(+$l l n$
I i n(~-p-i )~,l [i n(p+ i )~,l n$=oa
+si n ~
and
nYI sG-p-i )l l [ cos(p+*),l an*
+n9[c@ -p-i ) @,l [(p+*)@,l n* 0 74)
For breaks at both ends ther e are four equati ons obtai ned by equati ng
each of the bracketed terms to zer o. The appearance of four equati ons
i n thi s case i s a consequence of the fact that ther e sti l l i s end-for-end
symmetry and a compl ete separati on i nto symmetri c and anti symmetri c
modes. When the break i s at onl y one end, the two sets of modes are
mi xed and the onl y symmetry i s that about the pl ane around whi ch
the breaks are symmetri c. Thus, the modes for whi ch i O= O have a
vol tage l oop i n thi s pl ane, and those for whi ch VO= O have a vol tage
node. The mmode i s not affected by the strap breaks unl ess so much
of the strap i s r emoved that the capaci tance of nei ghbori ng strap sec-
ti ons i s affected.
The wavel engths of the (ml = O)- and (ml = I )-modes of the HK7
magnetron have been measured wi th unbroken straps and wi th strap
breaks at one end, 30 and 90 apart (p = O, 1). For thi s tube N = 12.
From the unstrapped, the (ml = O) and (ml = I )-wavel engths i n the
unbroken case the val ues of k and .s have been cal cul ated and used wi th
the ai d of Eqs. (74) to eval uate the fi rst thr ee wavel engths i n the br oken
TABLE4.1.THE EFFECTOF STRAPBREAKSON THEWAVELENGTH OF SEVERAL
MODESOFTHEHK7 MAGNETRON
Strap condi ti on
I
No. of m, Exper . i ,
P
mode cm
Unbroken. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,.
{
o 10.645
1 8.081
I
o 0 10.645
0 1 8,400
0
~?,
8.900
1 0 10.645
Br oken at one end,....,.....,.. 1 1 9.165
1
~(,
8.663
2 0
2 1 ::::::
2
~,,
Cal c. A,
cm
10.645
8.075
10,645
8.687
8.783
10.645
9.086
8,483
9:248
8.190
SEC. 4. 7] EFFECTS OF STRAP BREAKS 151
strap cases for p = O, 1, and 2. The agreement wi th experi ment may
be seen from Tabl e 41.
The 1 modes are those havi ng a vol tage l oop mi dway between the strap
,
breaks; the 1 modes, those havi ng a vol tage node. The experi mental
wavel engths are pr oper l y assi gned accordi ng to pattern measurements.
I t may be seen that the or der of the 1 and 1 modes depends upon the
separati on of the breaks; the or der cannot be predi cted wi thout an
exami nati on of a speci fi c case.
Some i nformati on on doubl e breaks at each end i s avai l abl e from the
(N = 16)-model 4J50 gi ven i n Sec. 4.5. Tabl e 4.2 shows the agreement
between measured and cal cul ated val ues.
TABLE4.2.THE EFFECTOF STRAPBREAKSON THE WAVELENGTH OF SEVERAL
MODESOF A (N = 16) MAGNETRON, THE4J50
I
Strap condi ti on
P
I
Unbroken. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
r
Br okenat both ends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
No. of m, Exper . A, Cal c. A,
mode cm cm
(
o 12.400 12,35
1 10.152 10.17
2 7.570 7.52
{
o 12,4fM 12.35
1 11,660 11.57
2 9.970 9.99
,
The pattern di storti on caused by strap breaks may be cal cul ated by a
modi fi cati on of the methods used earl i er i n thi s secti on. Si nce both
symmetri c And anti symmetri c modes are exci ted, ther e wi l l be two
ampl i tudes, a~, and a~,, correspondi ng to these for each mode number m.
I n terms of these, the vol tages V(?+ and V(~,~), say, at the two ends for
the mth mode are gi ven by
Vc~,~) = a~l + a~,
(75a)
t
and
V(m,,) = a~, am,; (75b)
or i f
H
am
[11
V(mA)
am=al and V(m) = v(~~)
%
()
1
v(m) = ; _l
am = Wa.. (75C)
As before, i f V, be the vol tages at the two ends of the Tth osci l l ator,
Vr =w
z
el ,+ma~
m
152 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM
[sm. 4.7
and
w&=;
2
~-i ti .vr.
r
I f b- now be i ntroduced as a si mi l ar general i zati on of the b~ used befor e
[see Eq. (51)];
w[::) = Z-(:I
(76)
r
Then, for the case i n hand,
and
[1
T@3F ::
[)
= F-l D-I TO>*D(T, 1)D-I T,-(Pw DF !: . (78b)
Now,
( 1
D(T, I )D- = ~ ~DQD~ ,
wi th the resul t that
and
()
D(T, l )D-TO*(fi ~)DF ~
= [jDnQD;;(T S(,+M)(DF)I I VO
+ C{p+}fi )(DF),,i J]. (79)
Now, i f Eqs. (71) and (72) are wri tten out at l ength, i t i s easi l y veri fi ed
that ei ther
SEC.4. 71 EFFECTS OF ,7TRAP BREAKS
iO=()
(jD,,QDFJ)S,p+}j) (DF),,V, =
Vo=o
(jD11QDz])ctp+j,j(DF)22io =
153
[1
1
=E (80a)
[1
= E. (80b)
Thus, the ri ght-hand si de of Eq. (77) may be wri tten
e
jx2 F-, ~-ITo!fi
{
[ ~I(zJ +)!)h + #,I+hwr.] E
o
}
v.
= [e]T2j si n (p + ~)~n,] FI DI TOH
[1
E
o
i f i O= O, or
e
j$:F,Dl~olj
(
[e-(P+~$- +e(p+?~-] E
o
}
_jkm
.
e ~ 2 cos (p + ~)~m FI D I TOH
[1
: (81)
i f vO= 0.
. .
Equati on (77) thus becomes
wher e the al ternati ve ~ si n and cos forms cor r espond to the cases for
i ~ = O and VO= O respecti vel y. Mul ti pl yi ng both si des by
gi ves
F-D-1[(2c0s~m) 2 [s :O)I DFW[::I
*
= [2:::n (p++) *ml F-D-l (J;To--%TO [:) 83)
but
154 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC, 47
Accordi ng toEq. (62), however ,
ther efor e,
(85)
and fi nal l y,
and
1 1
2 ~06ql
2
0
(DF),,W = S~C 9,
0 2COS;
Substi tuti ng i nEq. (84) then,
Nsec 0,
( ~ Cos#m-.os:) [Os: co.;] [:::)
Cos 1,. Cos @l
si n~ 1, si n~[0s~co6~](l )(86)
jcos P+j +m.
( )
si n p+; ~fi si n$cosl l ~
~, - ~ ccs
N(cos y, Cos @l )
(87a)
_( )
~ #m
sm p+; i msu2-
Cos e=
a
j Cos
m,=-
,V(cos 4., Cos @,)
(87b)
The rel ati ve l oadi ng of the modes when strap breaks are present can
al so be cal cul ated. I t wi l l be suffi ci ent her e to outl i ne the method of
anal ysi s and to quote the fi nal resul ts. Suppose agai n that the strap
breaks are (2p + 1) secti ons apart and that between the output osci l -
l ator and one strap break ther e are q osci l l ators; between the output
osci l l ator and the other break ther e are r secti ons i n the opposi te di recti on.
The rel ati on N = 2p + q + r + 4 hol ds. The probl em i s most easi l y
handl ed by usi ng the T matri ces rather than the ~. I f the matri x for a
l oaded osci l l ator i s wri tten D-l (TO + T.) D, the condi ti on of peri odi ci ty
gi ves
-lT(TO+Tti)mTBT:+lTBD k)=(i
(88a)
SEC.47] EFFECTS OF STRAP BREAKS 155
By rewri ti ng thi s equati on as
T&~~D-T,DT#(To + TJTI D-l T,DTJ+J*JD
[!1 = D (1] 88)
and agai n as
TO(.+}4)D1T~DTO(Nt21P!A[l + TO(,rl Ji ZTUTO(rQl JZ]
O(N2)--51TBDTO(fi )$)D)D [1) = D [:1 88)
the probl em assumes a mor e symmetri cal form.
I f i t be assumed that the coupl i ng does not l i nk the anti symmetri c
modes and that the l oad admi ttance i s shunted across the output r eso-
nator i n the medi an pl ane, the form of Tu may be cal cul ated. I t i s
!1
~~tan*l ~
1 9, 2
T. =
~jy secz ~
00 00
~ _ K,Y
~, jK. sin 208
~tn &l ~
~ (89)
~ tan ~
2
10
00 00
The probl em i s consi derabl y si mpl i fi ed i f the second and thi rd r ows and
col umns of al l the matri ces are both i nterchanged. Thi s bri ngs the To
matri ces to the form
I
Cos 41 si n 41 0 0
T] =
si n @l cos @l o 0
1
[1
I o . (9(3)
o
.
0 Cos +2 si n 1#12 O T02
o 0 si n q$z cos 42
The l oad matri x T. takes the form
T: = YK, si n 28,
wher e
~ tangl o (J
2
Ctn &l
2
100
0 000
0 000
[1
L, O
00 91)
The break matri x Dl T~D becomes
156 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC. 4.7
[!
tan * ~ tan * ~
2 2
(D-l TnD)* = % 0 0
00
tan fi o _tan* ~
(92)
#
2 2
00 00
The form of the l oad matri x shows that i t does not coupl e the m2 set
of modes; the strap-break matri x, on the other hand, has off-di agonal
terms l eadi ng to a mi xi ng of the ml - and ma-modes.
The fi nal resul t for the perturbati on of the modes when X ~ cc i s
contai ned i n the equati on
~,zz + 2jYK, si n 8,
si n 61
[X,,co(w)-xl si ni t+)+l l =o=o 93)
wher e
41 ( 1$,cos(~-p-i )+,an%
~l =si n~cOS p+~
( l )@l cO($-p-i )+an$J
+si n N~cOs p+~
z2=
si n~si n(p+~]bzsi n(~ -p-$) +atan$
+i n?~n(p+k)si n( :-p-i )an+)
~=cos?cos(p+i ),os( ~-p-i )b,tan$
+ co ~
cos(p+:)+l cos(: -p-l ) ~l a+)
and
yz = Cos
~si n(p+i ),si n(~ -p-i ) ,tan$
+ Cos N+
i n(p+k)si nG-p-k)+ l tan$
I t may be noted that thi s i s the equati on whi ch woul d determi ne the
mode spectmm i n a si ngl e-cavi ty, tunabl e tube wi th strap breaks.
The l oadi ng can now be found by formi ng a Yi du from Eq. (93) and
putti ng Y = O. The resul t i s
SEC.4.8] EFFECTS CA USED BY VA RI OI I S TYPES OF TUNI NG 157
aY 1
[
i n+, cos(:-p-k)~,
z= jK, si n 0,
si n
y 41
1
:(cn@l [an(p+i ) $l +an&p-i )l
+cn$[tan(p+:) @+n(:-p-:)@,l } a)
or
r
al 1
[
i n$si n($-p-k)+
aw = jKa si n 0,
co
+q &
1
:l cn@l [cn(p+i ) @+cn(~-p-i )l l
+n@,[cn(p+i )@,+ n(:-p-:)@,l l 94)
The vari ati on i n the l oadi ng of the two sets of modes as the output
r
posi ti on i s changed i s descri bed by the terms l /[si n2(r q/ 2)@,] and
l /[cos2(r q/2)@l l and i s readi l y cal cul ated, si nce +1 i s known. I t wi l l
be noted that the l oadi ng for each mode i s the sum of terms pertai ni ng
to the symmetri c and to the anti symmetri c components.
4.8. Effects Caused by Vari ous Types of Tuni ng.-The properti es of
tunabl e tubes dkcussed i n thi s secti on are those di rectl y connected wi th
the resonant system. The general pri nci pl es and methods of mechani cal
and el ectroni c tuni ng are gi ven i n Chaps. 14 and 15.
Single-caoity Tuner.I n si ngl e-cavi ty tuni ng a vari abl e reacti ve
el ement i s connected i nto a si ngl e resonator secti on, thereby changi ng
the frequent y of the whol e system.
The reactance i s general l y i ntroduced
i n such a manner that the anti symmetri c modes are not coupl ed, and
they are, ther efor e, untuned.
Si mi l arl y, the tuni ng el ement wi l l not
affect those components of the doubl et modes (m # O) whi ch do not
coupl e wi th the perturbed cavi ty. The addi ti on of strap breaks, how-
ever , wi l l cause al l modes to be coupl ed to some extent. For si mpl i ci ty,
thi s di scussi on wi l l be l i mi ted to the case wi thout strap breaks. The
equati ons determi ni ng the new frequenci es have been gi ven i n Sec. 46.
They are
K.YW
COS+=COS 20*-7 si n 20,,
(43)
Z si n # = K, si n 28.,
(44)
THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC. 48
158
and
tan~+; zYtme. = o. (47b)
Combi ni ng the l ast two equati ons gi ves
The tuner reactance transformed to the end
r epr esented, as before, by Yt.m.,. Cos 1#1i s al ready known as a func-
ti on of h, so that the ri ght-hand si de of Eq. (95) may be pl otted as a
F(k). (95)
of the resonator sl ots i s
2
1
0
z
~1
2
3
6.0 7.0 8.o 9.0
10.0
A i n cm
Fh4.17.-si ngk+.avi tyt uni ngcurvea[seeEq. (96)1.
functi on of~. Fi gure 4.17shows the for r nof thl sfuncti on i naparti cul ar
case. Because si n 21#1,and cos + are wel l -behaved functi ons of h i n
the range consi dered, the functi on al ways consi sts of a seri es of branches
runni ng between the pol es of tan N@/2 or I #J= [%(m + &)]/N. The
dependence of Y~_ upon k cannot be speci fi ed, of course, unti f the form
of the tuni ng reactance i s known. I n general , Y,- wi l l be an
i ncreasi ng functi on of h wi th no pol es i n the tuni ng range. The i ntm-
secti ona of
- Yti a and F(A) now gi ve the new frequenci es.
As the cur ve
for Yti a moves up and down because of the vari ati on i n the tuni ng
reactsnce, i t can be seen that al l the modes that are coupl ed change
wavel ength i n the same sense. No matter how much susceptance i s
coupl ed i n, the mth mode, ori gi nal l y at d = 2mr/N, cannot move beyond
[(Zm + 1)~]/N. Ther e i s, ther efor e, no crossi ng of the modes. The mai n
SEC. 4.8] EFFECTS CA USED BY VARI OUS TYPES OF TUNI NG 159
di ffi cul ti es i n the si ngl e-cavi ty tuni ng schemes ari se from the pattern
di storti on i n the r-mode. Equati on (55) showed that the pattern di s-
torti on i n a tube wi th a gi ven number of osci l l ators i s a functi on of @ onl y.
Di storti on, then, i s mi ni mi zed by maki ng the change i n @ over the tuni ng
range as smal l as possi bl e; thi s, i t may be recal l ed, i s the condi ti on for
l arge mode separati on.
The l oadi ng of a si ngl e-cavi ty tunabl e tube can be tr eated as befor e
by consi deri ng the i nserti on of a shunt el ement jYI ..,i i nto the output
osci l l ator. I f the number of osci l l ators between the tuner and the output
i s (p 1), the peri odi ci ty condi ti on i s
(m: :ITN-E :ITP(V1 =(t]
Thi s i s found to l ead to
(96)
(97)
Thus, the characteri sti c admi ttance, Y, = ~A(13Y,~/c3x),
The val ue of Y. thus vari es wi th the rel ati ve posi ti on of the tuner and
output as secz [(N/2) p]+. The vari ati on over the tuni ng range does
not l end i tsel f to expressi on i n a si mpl er form. I t shoul d be noted that
f,
i f the Y. defi ned her e wer e used to cal cul ate Q val ues, the resi sti ve l oads
woul d al so have to be transformed to the top of the resonator sl ots.
To avoi d the pattern di storti on ari si ng from tuni ng a si ngl e cavi ty,
a number of schemes have been devi sed that act mor e or l ess sym-
metri cal l y on al l the cavi ti es.
Multicavity Strap Tuner.I n thi s form of tuni ng a gr ooved ri ng,
mounted at one end of the tube and havi ng i ts axi s coi nci di ng wi th
that of the tube, i s moved up and down wi th r espect to the strap system.
The gr ooves are arranged so that the tuner can appreci abl y penetrate
the strap system wi thout di rectl y contacti ng i t (see Fi g. 4.18). The
other end of the tube i s strapped conventi onal l y. For the fol l owi ng
mathemati cal treatment, i t i s supposed that ther e are no strap breaks,
160 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC. 4.8
al though, i n practi ce, they woul d be used. The model wed di ffers from
that of theordl nary doubl e-strapped tube onl y i n that thestrap i mped-
ances are taken to be di fferent and wri tten K,l and K,2, wher e one
i mpedance i s fi xed and the other vari abl e. The effecti ve strap l engths
Gr oovedrmg
4
///////
b
E
Anodebl ock
Straps
Fm. 4.1 8.Cross secti on of strap tuner.
are assumed equal . The strap or coupl i ng matri x i s then
The (u-v) -matri x i s now found to be
(99)
I
K,lM, K,,
Cos 2+, + ~ ctn 9, si n 2be

~ M, csc 0, si n 21#I a
1
1
~ M. csc 0, si n 24,
K,,M.
Cos 24, + ~ ctn 0, si n 20,
(loo)
and the secul ar equati on
(
K,lM,
Cos 24. + ~
)(
ctn 0, si n 2& cos ~~ Cos 24.
K,zM,
+~
ctnorsin2@-cOs em)= $1Kwcscersin2J 10)
I f K.,/2Z,0 = k, and K.2/2Z,0 = k, (usi ng the same symbol s as before),
d [
2na ~ _ ~ si n 2~s kl + kz Ctnh &h X2 ~
Cos +, = Cos
A:,
d

,;( )
k,+ks
2
CschG+Ji ?+;GYl 102)
Ther e are, as before, two sets of modes correspondi ng to the ambi val ent
si gn; when kl = kt, they r educe to the earl i er m and m sets of modes.
I f the tube i s short or the strappi ng l i ght, i f, i n fact,
()
kl+ k,
r
>> si nh h ~ 1,
kl k~ -r k:,
(103)
SEC.48] EFFECTS LA USED BY VARI OUS TYPES OF TUNI NG 161
the second term under the radi cal i s negl i gi bl e. The tube then behaves
as a symmetri cal tube wi th k = kl + kz.
The behavi or of the modes
wi l l then be as i ndi cated i n Fi g. 49. At the opposi te extr eme, wi th a
ver y heavi l y strapped or ver y l ong tube,
and
The term i n brackets of Eq, (102) then becomes l rl or kz; the two ends
of the tube are effecti vel y out of touch wi th each other , and the spectrum
consi sts of the untuned modes as-
soci ated wi th one end and the
tuned modes of the other end.
Multicavity Segment Tuner.
I t i s al so possi bl e to tune by strap-
pi ng the tube at onl y one end and
then movi ng a fl at ri ng up and
down above the unstrapped ends
of the segments. Thi s arrange-
ment, shown i n Fi g. 4.19a, i ntro-
duces a new form of coupl i ng. As
r epr esented i n Fi g. 4.19b, i t may
be seen that the ri ng coupl i ng i s
effected by the capaci tances of the
segments to the ri ng and that the
fi ni te l ength of the ri ng secti on
i ntroduces some seri es i nductance.
(a)
L
FrFrilc
lb)
Fm. 4.19.(a) Schemati c vi ew of seg.
ment tuner showi ng the tuni ng pl ate P over
the anode bl ock A; (b) equi val ent ci rcui t
of segment tuner.
I t i s assumed that the ri ng and the
segments form a transmi ssi on l i ne of i mpedance KL. For si mpl i ci ty
the l ength of one secti on i s assumed to be equal to the strap l ength.
Thi s i s not unreasonabl e, because the ri ng and the strap system are
usual l y the same si ze. The arrangement of the secti ons then assumes the
form sho\vn i n Fi g. 4.20 i n whi ch the resonator i s i n seri es \vi th the cou-
pl i ng net\vor k at the unstrapped, tuned end and i s i n shunt \ri th the
straps at the strapped end. The matri x for the resonator secti on now
has a ne\v form. I f the +terrni nal net~vor k representi ng the resonator
has the matri x
[ ))
a b
c a
sol uti on of the networ k equati ons gi ves
162 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM
for the matri x of the center secti on. I n thi s case
I
1 00 0
T,=. =
sec 0, 1 o jK, tan tJ,
jI l l , tan 0, 0 1
1
sec 0,
o 00 1
[SEC.48
(104)
(105)
The coupl i ng matri x i s exactl y l i ke that for the strap-tunabl e tube wi th
FI Q. 420.- -A 4-termi nal network representati on of one secti on
magnetron,
of a segment-tuned
i mpedances K, and K,. The (u-v) -matri x for the whol e secti on i s now
The determi nantal equati on [Eq. (15)] gi ves
(COS~~ cos 24, + +K,flf, si n 24, tan 0.) (COS~. + cos 24,
K,M,
*M,K, si n 24. tan 0,) + ~ si nz 2& sec2 d, = O. (107a)
Usi ng the notati on k.
= K,/ 2Z,, and k, = K,/ 2Z,, and substi tuti ng the
usual val ues for M,, o., and +,, Eq. (107a) may be put i n the form
SEC.44!] EFFECTS CA USED BY VARI OUS TYPES OF TUNI NG
163
(107b)
The behavi or of thi s expressi on may be cl ari fi ed i n the fol l owi ng way:
consi der the case k, = @ when the tube i s unstrapped. Then the term
i n brackets i s uni ty; and for tubes that are not excessi vel y l ong and that
have short straps,
A=%- 1)(0s.+0s%9
(108)
The curves of l /4k, agai nst ~ are thus ver y nearl y strai ght l i nes through
(X~O,O), and thei r sl opes vary as cos ~~ + cos 27rs/x,,. Furthermore, for
k ver y l arge the bracketed term tends to a constant val ue, and the val ues
of l /4k~ become asymptoti c to
()
h 1,
1 (0s *m + 1).
i q
The wavel ength Am of the modes vari es, then, as l /cos (#J2). The
i r-mode has the smal l est wavel ength, and the wavel engths ascend i n
or der of m. Thus, i n the segment-tuned system the ri ng coupl i ng i s
domi nant and the mode or der i s that of an unstrapped system (see Chap.
2). Thi s resul t i s not surpri si ng, because the end-space and i nteracti on-
space coupl i ng i n the unstrapped system are weak forms of the same type
of coupl i ng that i s provi ded by the ri ng. Returni ng to Eq. (107 b), ti l e
denomi nator of the bracketed term does not vary much for val ues of x
between X,Oand 2A,0, say, and the expressi on
i s usual l y not zer o i n that regi on. Thus, the behavi or of l /4k, for k,
164 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC. 4.8
ver y l arge i s determi ned by the remai ni ng factors or
1
(
%s
d ~anh?fi i n%?
~z
sin 2~s
COS $. COS + k,
A q
A
(109)
The term i n parentheses i n Eq. (109) i s of the form of the functi on
cos~~ cos o for a strapped tube of l ength 2h, the resonances bei ng
determi ned bythepoi nts forwhi ch the functi on equal s zer o. Thus for
8.0 8.0-
ml =l
ml =O
7,0
ml =l m,=O
-?n2=l
7.0
. mz=l
m2=0
m2=o
6.0
ml =2
6.0
,
m1=2
5.0
/j!f ~JE
5.0
~- 4,(J
5-4,0
-3.0
3.0
2.0 ml =3 2.0
m1=3
1.0
K,=O.65 10
K, =1.5
0.4 06 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.02.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1,2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2
A/Ar o AWL.
80 ~
Fm. 4.21.V.dues
A2/At,.
of l /k~pl ottedagai nstA2/A%for the casesk,
= m, 1.5,and 0.65.
I
I
k, = w,theor der of themodes i sthatof a strapped tube. I n thi s type
of tuner then, as kt i s made suffi ci entl y smal l , the modes wi l l cross over
compl etel y and shi ft from the strapped or der to the unstrapped or der . I
A Bel l Tel ephone Laboratori es 30-cm magnetron uses thi s form of
tuni ng. For thi s tube the val ues of 2rS/A,0 and %h/b@ are 0.473 and
1.71. Fi gure 4.21 shows l /k, pl otted agai nst Xz/k~, for the cases k. = co,
1.5, and 0.65. The i nversi on of mode or der and consequent crossi ng i s
I
pl ai nl y i n evi dence. I t i s possi bl e to compare the above anal ysi s di rectl y
I
SEC.4.8] EFFECTS CA USED BY VARI OUS TYPES OF TUNI NG 165
withexperi ment, usi ng the physi cal strap l ength for s, the wavel ength
of the u-mode wi th the tuner retracted, and the sl ope of one of the
unstrapped tuni ng curves i u or der to cal cul ate the tube constants.
F@re 4.22a and b shows the obser ved and cal cul ated tuni ng curves for
the unstrapped tube and for the normal tube. The agreement i s good
except for the (m = 3)-mode, whi ch l i es at the bor der of the theor y.
Experi mental l y, (m = l )-, (m = 2)-, and (m = 3)-doubl ets are resol ved
by vari ous asymmetri es such as the cathode l eads and the notches cut i n
32
30
28
22
20t?z?
1[
1 1 I
.8
O24681OI 2
I / kt
(d
30
28
26
24
E
22
.E
4
20
18
16
14
0246S 10 12 14
l jkt
(b)
Fm. 4.22.Cal mdated and observed tuni ng cur ves for an unstrapped, experi mental
30-cm magnetron. The sol i d l i nes i ndi cate cal cul ated val ues; the broken l i nes, observed
val ues. (a) The sl ope of the (m = O)-cur ve i s fi tted r,othe experi mental val ue at I / k, = 0;
(b) (m =O)-cur ve i s fi tted at l/ kt = O. (Courte.su of W. B. Heberutred, Bell Telephone
Labortiories.)
the tuner to cl ear them. These detai l s wer e not i ncl uded i n the theo-
reti cal anal ysi s gi ven her e.
Multicavity I nductance Tuner.A thi rd symmetri cal tuni ng scheme
i s the i nductance tuner whi ch was devel oped by Col umbi a Radi ati on
Laboratory for use i n 3-cm tubes, because the use of strap and segment
tuners was al most prohi bi ted by dl fi cul ti es wi th hi gh vol tages and smal l
cl earances. I n the i nductance tuner a seri es of pi ns i s mounted at ri ght
angl es to a movabl e pl ate, the up-and-down moti on of whi ch causes each
of the pi ns to penetrate (wi thout contact) i nto the hol es of a hol e-and-sl ot
resonant system. The 2J51 tube to whi ch thi s method has been appl i ed
i s a doubl e-ri ng strapped tube, and the representati ve networ k of Fi g.
4.23 may be used to anal yze i ts behavi or. The effect of the pi ns has
been r epr esented by a di vi si on of the ori gi nal unstrapped resonator i nto
two l engths of l i ne 1 and h 1 havi ng i mpedances K, and K,. The
166 THE STRAPPED SYSTEM [SEC. 4.8
el ectri cal l engths wi l l be cal l ed 01 and oZ. The matri x of the resonator
secti on i s now
[
cos 81 jKt si n O,
H
cos 82 jK, si n th
1
(l l Oa)
jMt si n 01 Cos 81 jM, si n 82 cos 02
or
[
cos 01 cos t?z KtiM, si n 01si n (h jK, cos 01 si n L%+ jKt si n 91cos Oz
jMk si n 01cos Oz + jM, cos 81 si n 62 cos 61cos 92 K,Mt si n el si n 92
)
()
ab
.
. (l l Ob)
cd
Pr oceedi ng as befor e to eval uate the (u-v) -matri x for the secti on, thi s
FI G.4.23.A 4-tarmi nalnetwor krepresentati onof one secti on of an i nductance tuner.
matri x i s now found to be
[
l d 1 K,
cos 24, + K, si n 21#1,
2b
si n 24,
2b
1 K, l a
1
(111)
2b
si n 2@a cos 2@a + K, si n 21#1,
2b
Wri ti ng the determi nantal equati on and rearrangi ng i t gi ves
jK,
cos ~m = cos 2f#Ja si n 2fp8
[
a+dfti(a-d)z+l
2 2b
1
The mode spectrum when the tuner i s r etr acted i s that of a strapped
tube wi th resonator i mpedance K,; when the tuner i s i nserted to the ful l
l ength of the anode the spectrum i s that of a strapped tube wi th resonator
i mpedance Kt. The mode or der wi l l be the same at both extremi ti es and
ther e wi l l thus be no mode crossi ng. The spectrum i s transformed con-
ti nuousl y as the tuner moves through the anode.
CHAPTER 5
OUTPUT CI RCUI TS
BY L. R. WALKER
6.1. I ntroducti on.-The precedi ng chapters have tr eated the resonant
system of the magnetron i n detai l . I t has been made cl ear that the
el ectr on stream i nteracts wi th the fi el d of the resonant system and feeds
power i nto i t. Thk power i s then uti l i zed i n two ways. One part, whi ch
i s di ssi pated i n the form of copper l osses, serves to mai ntai n hi gh fi el ds
m the resonant system. As a consequence the resonant system stores
consi derabl e ener gy and acts as the mai n frequency-determi ni ng el ement
i n the magnetron. The resi dual power i s fed to an external l oad, and
the ci rcui t coupl i ng thi s power to the external l oad i s r efer r ed to as
the output ci rcui t. Such a ci rcui t may be consi dered as a 4-termi nal
transducer whi ch transforms the l oad i mpedance to a new l evel wi thi n the
tube. Broadl y, the study of thi s transducer and i ts rel ati onshi p to the
resonant system forms the subject of thi s chapter.
I t i s cl ear that i n mi crowave systems, i n whi ch the di mensi ons of the
el ements are comparabl e to a wavel ength, the physi cal separati on of the
resonant system and the output ci rcui t must be arbi trary. Ther e i s a
si mi l ar di ffi cul ty i n di sti ngui shi ng between them on the basi s of el ectri cal
functi on. I n an i deal si tuati on the output ci rcui t woul d stor e an amount
of ener gy negl i gi bl e i n compari son wi th that i n the resonant system, and
i t woul d then be per fectl y justi fi abl e to consi der the output ci rcui t as
frequency-i nsensi ti ve i n the nei ghborhood of any resonant frequency of
the system. Magnetrons that have been devel oped thus far fal l i nto
two cl asses: (1) those wi th unstabi l i zed outputs, i n whi ch the condi ti ons
of the i deal case are approxi matel y met, and (2) those wi th stabi l i zed
outputs, i n whi ch the output ci rcui t i s del i beratel y desi gned to stor e
ener gy and may, i ndeed, stor e mor e ener gy than the resonant system.
The stabi l i zed output i s di scussed extensi vel y i n Chap. 16 and wi l l not
be tr eated her e. I n unstabi l i zed outputs, the degr ee of departure from
i deal frequency-i nsensi ti vi ty vari es greatl y between vari ous types of
output ci rcui ts, but, i n general , the output ci rcui t stores l ess than about
25 per cent of the ener gy stor ed i n the resonant system. I t wi l l thus be
sati sfactory to consi der the properti es of i deal frequency-i nsensi ti ve
output ci rcui ts as a gui de to the behavi or of real output ci rcui ts.
Any
speci fi c case may then be exami ned for departure from i deal behavi or.
167
168
OUTPUT CI RCUI TS [SEC.5.1
l %. 5.1.Center-l 00pcoupl i ng.
FI Q.5.2.Hal o-l oop coupl i ng.
I n practi ce a number of consi derati ons i mpose restri cti ons upon the
output ci rcui t. The wavel ength and power l evel of the tube determi ne
whether the external l i ne wi l l be wavegui de or coaxi al l i ne. Construc-
ti onal detai l s of the anode bl ock, such as i ts strappi ng and the geometr y
SEC.6.1]
of the resonators,
I N TROI XJ CTI ON 169
i nfl uence the form of coupl i ng used between the
resonant system and the output l i ne.
I t i s a~o cl ear that the output
FI ~. 5.3.Segment-fed coupl i ng.
ci rcui t must contai n a vacuum seal and that, because some of the output
wi l l be ai r-fi l l ed, i t must be desi gned to avoi d hi gh-vol tage breakdown.
Structural l y: the mai n cl assi fi ~a-
ti on of output ci rcui ts i s that i nto
coaxi al and wavegui de types. The
coaxi al -output ci rcui t consi sts of a
l ength of coaxi al l i ne that vari es i n
cross secti on, ei ther through tapers
or at di sconti nui ti es, and i n whi ch
the central conductor i s fed from the
tube i n a vari ety of ways. For ex-
ampl e, i n l oop-coupl i ng, the end of
the central conductor i s bent i nto a
l oop and attached to some poi nt on
the outer conductor. The l oop i s
then pl aced wher e i t wi l l i ntercept
the magneti c fl ux i n one osci l l ator.
Such l oops have been i ntroduced
i nto the resonator i n the medi an
pl ane (center l oop) as i n Fi g. 5.1 or
have been pl aced i mmedi atel y above
the end of one resonator (hal o 100D)
FI G. 5.4.Strap-fed coupl i ng.
as i n Fi g. 5.2. I n unstrapped tubes the center conductor has been run i n
above a segment and then attached to a poi nt on one of the end faces of thi s
170 OUTPUT CI RCUI TS [SEC.5.1
segment (segment-fed coupl i ng); i n thi s case, the center conductor
may be consi dered to i ntercept fl ux passi ng between nei ghbori ng osci l -
l ators or to be fed by the vol tage al ong the segment (see Fi g. 5.3). [n a
somewhat si mi l ar type of feed appl i cabl e to strapped tubes, the whol e
coaxi al l i ne runs above a segment, and the i nner conductor then attaches
di rectl y to a fl oati ng strap secti on (strap-fed coupl i ng) as i n Fi g. 5.4.
At the l oad si de, the coaxi al l i ne output may feed ei ther an external
coaxi al l i ne or a wave gui de. I f the external l i ne i s coaxi al , the connecti on
may be di rectl y mechani cal or by means of choke joi nts. I n the l atter,
Fm. 5,5.Wavegui de output.
the out put ci rcui t must i ncl ude a sati sfactory juncti on from coaxi al
l i ne to wavegui de l i ne. The vacuum seal i s general l y i ncorporated i n the
coaxi al l i ne or i n the wavegui de feed, and the gl ass serves as a support for
the i nner conductor.
Wavegui de outputs consi st of wavegui de l i nes of vari abl e cross
secti on, whi ch are fed ei ther by openi ng di rectl y i nto the back of one
resonator or by communi cati ng wi th i t by means of an i ri s. The cross
secti on of the output i s general l y modi fi ed unti l i t i s equal to that of the
external wavegui de, and the vacuum seal then consi sts of an i ri s wi ndow
pl aced between choke joi nts i n thi s gui de (see Fi g. 5.5).
SEC.5.2] THE 4-TERMI NAL TRANSDUCER 171
I n thk chapter the di scussi on i s confi ned mai nl y to an exposi ti on of
the r ol e pl ayed by the output ci rcui t i n tube operati on and of the con-
cepts i n terms of whi ch i ts behavi or i s anal yzed. The probl ems ari si ng
i n the desi gn of output ci rcui ts for speci fi c purposes are tr eated exten-
si vel y i n Chap. 11. I n general , the i nteresti ng properti es of an output
ci rcui t cannot be accuratel y predi cted by di rect cal cul ati on, but some
types of wavegui de outputs, because of thei r geometri cal si mpl i ci ty,
form an excepti on to thi s rul e, and an outl i ne of the methods avai l abl e
i s gi ven for thi s case. Many of the topi cs di scussed are parti cul ar
appl i cati ons of mor e general materi al devel oped i n other books, but
the treatment i n thi s chapter i s adapted to the speci al needs of the
magnetron probl em.
5s2. The 4-termi nal Transducer.I n Chap. 4, i t i s shown (expl i ci tl y
for strapped magnetrons, but the argument i s easi l y extended to cover
other cases) that provi ded the tube i s osci l l ati ng i n the r-mode, the
admi ttance of the resonator system measured at the juncti on of the
resonator and the i nteracti on space i s the sum of the admi ttances of
the N i ndi vi dual resonators. The l atter admi ttances are al so measured at
the sl ot openi ngs, and the pl anes bi secti ng each segment are assumed
to be open-ci rcui ted. I n thk case, the resonator system, as far as i ts
total admi ttance at any resonator openi ng i s concer ned, may evi dentl y
be repl aced by N ci rcui ts i n paral l el , each havi ng the characteri sti cs of an
i ndi vi dual , i sol ated resonator.
Because such a representati on i s val i d
i n the vi ci ni ty of the i r-mode onl y, the i ndi vi dual resonators must be
tr eated as si ngl e shunt-resonant ci rcui ts descri bed compl etel y by a
characteri sti c admi ttance Y, and a resonant frequency M. The admi t-
tance of a si ngl e resonator i s then jY,(u/uO uo/u). For the mmode,
provi ded that the l oadi ng i s not heavy enough to cause pattern di storti on
and a resul tant vari ati on among the sl ot vol tages, the el ectroni c l oadi ng
wi l l be the same at each resonator. The total el ectroni c admi ttance wi l l
thus be N ti mes that of an i ndi vi dual resonator. I f the mode i s other
than a u-mode, an equi val ent ci rcui t admi ttance for the tube at any sl ot
openi ng may sti l l be defi ned, but i t i s no l onger the sum of the i ndi vi dual
val ues (see Chap. 4), and the vari ati on among the sl ot vol tages makes
di ffi cul t the defi ni ti on of an equi val ent el ectroni c admi ttance (see Chap.
7). For si mpl i ci ty, i t wi l l be assumed i n the fol l owi ng secti ons that a
r-mode i s bei ng consi dered; the modi fi cati ons necessary for other modes
wi l l be the repl acement of NY, by the appropri ate equi val ent charac-
teri sti c admi ttance of the resonator system.
For the purposes of output-ci rcui t anal ysi s i t wi l l be conveni ent to
make use of thi s representati on of the resonator system and, si mul -
taneousl y, to transform the l oad ati l ttance to the openi ng of the r eso-
nator i nto whi ch i t i s coupl ed. The ati l ttanoe of the coupl ed osci l l ator
172 OUTPUT CI RC{J I TS [SEC.5.2
and i ts l oad are cal cul ated, and then the l oad admi ttance i s found by
subtracti ng the admi ttance of an unperturbed osci l l ator.
Thus the
output ci rcui t consi dered as a transmi ssi on path extends from the openi ng
of the coupl ed resonator to some pl ane i n the external l i ne whi ch i s
drawn to i ncl ude al l the di sconti nui ti es of the output ci rcui t; the stor ed
ener gy of the output ci rcui t, however , does not i ncl ude that of the coupl ed
resonator. As an exampl e, i f a wavegui de output coupl es di rectl y i nto
the back of a resonator, the l oad i mpedance Z a~ the juncti on i s effec-
ti vel y i n seri es wi th jwL, the i nductance of the resonator, and appears
at the sl ot as an admi ttance 1/(j~L + Z). By restori ng to the resonant
system the unperturbed admi ttance l /.juL, the l oad admi ttance becomes
Z/ jtiL(juL + Z); thi s cl earl y i nvol ves the properti es of the resonator.
I t i s now necessary to devel op some properti es of 4-termi nal trans-
ducers that wi l l be useful i n anal yzi ng output systems. One representa-
ti on of a transducer i s parti cul arl y hel pful wi th the model bei ng used.
For any 4-termi nal networ k
V2 = Z2212 + Z2J1
and
}
(1)
VI = Z2J2 + Z1l I 1,
wher e Vg, 12 and VI , I I are the vol tages and currents on the ri ght- and
l eft-hand si des of the transducer respecti vel y. Thus, i f one wri tes
+
V2 = Z,I , and 1, = 71VI
wher e the ar r ow notati on i s used to denote the di recti on i n whi ch one
i s l ooki ng, ther e fol l ows
.Z12 = Z2212 + Z21YI V1
and
V1 = Z2112 + Z1l YI V1.
El i mi nati ng V, and 12,
(Z2 %)(1 + +
ZI I Y1) = Z;I Y1,
or , because Y1 = Yl ,
(2)
1I n the fol l owi ng secti ons the subscri pt 1 wi l l be used tQdi sti ngui shquanti ti es
measuredon the l eft-hand si de of a transducer,and i t wi l l further be aezumedthat
thi s i s the gener ator si de. Si mi l arl y, the eubscnpt 2 wi l l di sti ngui shquanti ti es on
the ri ght-handsi de, or l oad si de, of the transducer.
,
SEC. 5.2] THE 4-TERMI NAL 1RANSDUCER 173
whi ch may be wri tten
52= Z2++
n
Y, + Y1
(3)
wher e Zz, Yl , and n are i ndependent of Zz and Yl and characteri ze com-
pl etel y the transformer properti es of the networ k. Because
32 = Z2 and YI = Yl ,
nz
Y,= Y,+~ (4)
Z2 + Z2
the transducer may be r epr esented by the networ k of Fi g. 56 wher e
Zz, Yl , and n are compl ex; for l ossl ess networ ks Z2 and Y1 wi l l be i magi -
nary and n real ; for networ ks that
are sl i ghtl y l ossy, the real parts of
Zz and YI and the compl ex part of
n wi l l be smal l . The thr ee quanti -
ti es are, i n general , functi ons of fr e-
quency; the assumpti on of the
i deal output i s that they are
frequency-i ndependent.
FI G. 5.6.Schemati c representati on of a
4-terrni nal transducer.
i t i s al so u~eful to have a representati on that puts i n evi dence the
rel ati on between the refl ecti on coeffi ci ents measured i n transmi ssi on l i nes
of characteri sti c i mpedances K1 and K2 attached to the l eft- and ri ght-
hand si des of the transducer (see Fi g. 57). Such a representati on forms
the basi s for most measurements on mi crowave transducer properti es.
By empl oyi ng the usual defi ni ti on of vol tage refl ecti on coeffi ci ent one
may wri te
.
+
I +qz
Z,=K2~
l q2
and
. +
wher e ql and q~are the refl ecti on coeffi ci ents l ooki ng to the ri ght al ong
each l i ne. Substi tuti ng i n Eq. (2) and usi ng ~~ = ~2, one obtai ns,
after di vi si on by KI Kz,
+
( )(
l +ql _g
)
=+* +~=o.
(5)
1;, l q,
K,K,
174 OUTPUT CI RCUI TS
Equati on (5) i mpl i es a rel ati on of the type
.++ +
1 + Cl ql + C,qz + dqlq2 =
I f we now wri te
@* @,
0.
C2 = 2,
b
~l=_L,
d = e+-,
b
as i s al ways permi ssi bl e, Eq. (6) becomes
b + eqz
ql = ~al
+
[SEC.5,2
(6)
(7)
1 + beaq~
Thi s representati on i s of parti cul ar val ue when the transformer i s l ossl ess.
I n thi s case, Zl l , 221, and Z*Z are al l
m
Fm- &7.-Schemati c representati onof a
4-termi naltransduceri n terms of refl ecti on
coeffi ci ents.
i magi nary, and an exami nati on of
Eqs. (5) and (6) shows that W, CM
are now i magi nary and b i s real .
Thi s resul t mi ght have been ob-
tai ned i n another way. Equati on
(5) i ndi cates that the rel ati on b-
tween ql and qz i s a bi l i near one.
Because I ql < 1 for a passi ve l oad
and I ql = 1 for a purel y reacti ve
l oad, a l ossl ess transducer must transform the ci rcl e Iql = 1 i nto i tsel f and
the i nteri or I ql <1 al so i nto i tsel f. Bi l i near transformati ons wi th thi s
pr oper ty are known to be of the forml
(8)
1 + @q2eYQ,
wher e 11, ~z, and j3 are real .
Because of the frequent necessi ty for transformi ng through a gi ven
transducer i n ei ther di recti on i t i s useful to have the l eft-to-ri ght anal ogue
of Eq. (8). Usi ng the system of notati on shown i n Fi g. 57, one wri tes
by anal ogy wi th Eq. (8)
Usi ng the rel ati on that i s i nherent i n the defi ni ti on of q
(9)
I A strai ghtforwardaccount of the bi l i near or Mobi us transformati on,whi ch k
the si mpl estof al l oonfor mr dtransformati ons,i s given in C. Carath60dory,ConfomnaJ
Reprewntatri m, Cambri dge,I xmdon, 1932. Si nce al f i mpedanceand refl ecti on trans-
formati ons bel ong to thi s cl aas, a knowl edge of i ts pr oper ti edi s ver y i l l umi nati ng.
Equati on (8) i s deri ved from bi d., p. 17, by mul ti pl yi nghI s equati on by ei @I -UJand
wri ti ngZo- - s-%
THE 4-TERMI NAL TRANSDUCER 175
I
SEC. 52]
one may show
-+.
qq = 1, (l o)
P = &
(ha)
.+
Cw+al=r, (l l b)
++
CO+az=m. (l l C)
Because ~ = ~, the pri me may be dropped. Equati ons (8) and (9),
of course, embody the same physi cal properti es. I t shoul d be noti ced
that j3, al , and m are dependent upon K1 and Ka as wel l as the i nternal
properti es of the transducer. .4 physi cal real i zati on of Eq. (8) or (9)
may be found by wri ti ng i t as thr ee equati ons. Thus,
d = @T2,
-+
(12a)
and
~=B+2 or
()
1+/3 l +q; l + q;_ _
+
l f?
(12b)
1 + i %;
I qj l ~
and
+.
ql z q~e><.
(12C)
The transformati on embodi ed i n Eq. (12a) i s that due to an el ectri cal
l ength az of l i ne of characteri sti c i mpedance K2. Equati on (12b) r epr e-
Sik
FI G.5.8.Equi val entci rcui tof a 4-termi naltransducer.
sents passage through an i deal transformer, as may be seen by i ntro-
duci ng Z; and Z;, the i mpedances correspondi ng to & and q,.
Then,
from Eq. (12b)
(12d)
The turns rati o of the i deal transformer i s [A(KJ KJ ]X. Fi nal I y Eq.
(Mc) i ndi cates a further passage down a l i ne of characteri sti c i mpedance
K, and el ectri cal l ength ;l . Thus, the ci rcui t of Fi g. 5.8 represents
the whol e transducer connected to l i nes of i mpedance K, and KZ.
The geometri cal si gni fi cance of Eq. (8) i s shown i n Fi g. 59, whi ch
176 OUTPUT CI RCUI TS [SEC. 52
represents the moti on of two gi ven poi nts i n the qz-pl ane under the thr ee
stages of the transformati on. The fi rst and l ast transformati ons cor -
respond to rotati on through angl es m and al respecti vel y. The
passage through an i deal transformer i s a transformati on that l eaves
(a)
(b)
(cl
((a
FI G. 5.9.Anal ys;s of the acti on of a general 4-termi nal refl ecti on-coeffi ci ent transducer
i nto three el ementary operati ons. Transformati ons (a) to (b) and (c) to (d) cor r espond
++
to rotati on through angl e~ at and a, respecti vel y. The transformati on(b)to (c) may be
ter meda compressi onandr efer sto the transformati onthroughthe i deal transformer.
Arg[(l + ~~)/(1 ~~)] = Arg[(l + ~2)/(1 ~)] accordi ng to Eq. (12b).
But Arg[(l + ~)/(1 ~)] = constant i s the equati on of a ci rcl e through
the poi nts +1 and 1; such ci rcl es are thus transformed i nto them-
sel ves. Poi nts l yi ng on a common ci rcl e orthogonal to those whi ch pass
through +1 and 1 sti l l l i e on such a ci rcl e after transformati on, si nce
the transformati on i s conformal . Thk type of transformati on may be
r efer r ed to as a compressi on. I t i s i mportant to note that i t i s onl y at
SEC.5.2] THE 4-TERMI NAL TRANSDUCER 177
thi s stage that the si ze of fi gures and the magni tude of refl ecti on coeffi -
ci ents are changed. The parameter A = (1 + ~)/(1 ~), whi ch may
be cal l ed the pri nci pal transformer constant, mai nl y determi nes the
properti es of the transducer. One may note that ql (0) = @-ul and
q2(0) = &a~ are the refl ecti on coeffi ci ents l ookl ng i nto each si de of the
transducer when the r emote si de i s matched. Si nce these poi nts must
fal l wi thi n I ql = 1, then O S 6 S 1 and 1 S A.
The transducer constants coul d cl earl y be found by measuri ng ;,(O)
and qz(0), but i t i s often di ffi cul t to match each of the l i nes, and another
method i s preferabl e. Suppose that qz i s set up by a reacti ve l oad; then
qj i s of the form q~ = e~$,, wher e @Z i s real . Si nce the transducer i s
l ossl ess, one must have ql = e% Putti ng these val ues i n Eq. (8) and
reduci ng one fi nds
. +
(13)
practi cal l y, ~1 (or @z) maybe found as a functi on of @z (or 01) by movi ng
a shorti ng pl unger al ong one l i ne and measuri ng the posi ti on of the asso-
ci ated short ci rcui t i n the other l i ne. I f O, (or @ be pl otted agai nst
@z (or 6), an S-shaped cur ve symmetri cal about the l i ne
@l +al =dJz+a,
i s obtai ned, repeati ng i tsel f as both 01 and 42 i ncrease
5.10). From Eq. (13) one has
by 2T (see Fi g.
see* 01 + ~1 do,
_= Asec292+a2
2 d~z 2
or
A sec2 ?2.+3
&h =
2
-~=A
A(A2 1)
d~~
(14)
1 + AZtan2 &+&z
2
A+ cotz e
From Eq. (14) i t fol l ows that d@,/ d& s A, the equal i ty occurri ng at
*
02 + az = 0, + a, = 0. Si mi l arl y, dO,/ d@, S A, and equal i ty occurs
+
at +2 + az = & + al = r. Thus, the transducer parameters may be
found from the maxi mum sl ope of a O, vs. ~, or & vs. O, pl ot and the
l ocati on of the poi nt at whi ch the maxi mum sl ope occurs.
178 OUTPUT CI RCUI TS [SEC.5.3
6.3. The Q-ci rcl e and the Ri eke Di agram.Thi s secti on wi l l be con-
cer ned wi th the behavi or of a resonant system that i s connected to an
external l oad by means of an i deal frequent y-i nsensi ti ve output ci rcui t.
The resul ts that are deri ved may be appl i ed to real output ci rcui ts
provi ded the assumpti on of frequency-i nsensi ti vi ty i s not seri ousl y
vi ol ated. I t wi l l not be assumed that the output ci rcui t i s l ossl ess.
Maki ng use of the representati on i n
!
/
whi ch the resonant system and l oad are
q shunted across a resonator openi ng
and al so of the representati on of the
output transducer shown i n Fi g. 5.6,
one has the over-al l transducer of Fi g.
%-=,
. +
5.11, wher e the Y1 and 22 retai n thei r
previ ous meani ng. As a consequence
-=1, of the physi cal overl appi ng of the
resonant system and the output ci rcui t,
-%
m-=2
~-
i t i s not possi bl e, i n the absence of
FI G. 5.10.Repreaentati ve S-cur ve
i ndependent measurements of l ead
for the computati onof the tr medueer
l oss made on the i sol abl e part of the
parameters.
output ci rcui t, to separate the so-
cal l ed tube and l ead l osses.
Thus, the model uses a l ossl ess shunt
ci rcui t for the resonant system and i ncorporates the l osses of the l atter
wi th those of the shunt el ement Y1 of the output ci rcui t.
m:=
B
D
FI G.6.1I .Representati onof remnantsystem and output ci rcui t.
I t wi l l be supposed that the l oad i mpedance 22 and i ts refl ecti on
coeffi ci ent qz are set Up i n a l i ne of characteri sti c i mpedance K. A rel a-
ti on wi l l fi rst be deri ved between Y1(0), the admi ttance l ooki ng i nto the
resonant system i n the di recti on of power fl ow, when the external l i ne
i s matched, and q., the refl ecti on coeffi ci ent l ookhg from the termi nal s
CD of the transducer i nto the col d tube whi ch contai ns no el ectrons.
Wri ti ng jYo = jNY,(u/uo - wo/u) for the admi ttance of the resonant
system, one has
7,(0) = jYo + Y, + *,
(15)
f!EC. 5.3] THE Q-CI RCLE AND THE RI EKE DI AGRAM
179
and
+
~.=K~= 22 + jyo~; ~1
(16)
l q.
El i mi nati ng the frequency-dependent term jYo + Y, between Eqs. (15)
and (16) gi ves
l +%-Z,++
K~
n
l q.
n
Yl (o) ~~
g_l + n2/ K
K
;,(0)
;=2
n2/ (Zz + K)
~+ 1+.
n2/ K
Y,(o) n/(z2 + m
()
z, + n
(
2,K
_ Xl (0)+R1

Z,+K
)

() ( )
2+1 71(0)+; l Z*K ,
Z,+K
Z, K 2Kn2 1
+ (.Z2 + K) 7,(0)
2, +K
Y,(o)
wher e
Z, K
iO=Z, +K
and
A=(z%)
But, i f the transformer be frequency i nsensi ti ve,
(17)
(18a)
(Mb)
YI (0) is of the form
~,(0) = G. + jBL + j2NY, $ wher e au = (u - uO) <<COO. (19)
Thus, YI (0) i s r epr esented i n the compl ex pl ane by a strai ght l i ne of
the form G. + jB(u). I t wi l l be supposed that the assumpti ons of
1I t may be noted that the frequency shi ft due to the l oad i s gi ven by
()
(h). = - & .,.
r
180 OUTPUT CI RCUI TS [Smc. 53
frequency-i nsensi ti vi ty and fr eedom from extra modes i n the resonant
system hol d good over a frequency range suffi ci ent to make B(u) >> GL.
Substanti al l y then, B(u) runs from ~ to +@. Then [~1(0)11 i s a
+
ci rcl e of center l /2GL and radi us l/2GL; and from Eq. (17), q, i s r epr e-
sented by a ci rcl e of center ~0 + (A /2GL) and radi us 1Al/2GL. I t has
been pr oved, ther efor e, that the l ocus of i nput refl ecti on coeffi ci ents for
the col d tube, as a functi on of frequency, i s a ci rcl e. Thi s i s known
as the Q-ci rcl e.
From the defi ni ti on of l oaded Q as Q. one has
QL = ~
(20)
Thus,
~1(0) = GL + jBL + jNY, ~
or
(
26W
=GL l +j&+jQL~
)
(
= G. 1 + jQ~ ~. [b (h),,]
I
(21)
(22)
A
= tan Ar g ~, (23)
qgo
maki ng use of Eq. (17). Consi deri ng Fi g. 512 whi ch shows a possi bl e
Q-ci rcl e and a seri es of obser ved poi nts ~~(u~), ~,(u,), etc., i t i s pl ai n that
Ar g A/ (~ ~o) i s the angl e between the l i ne joi ni ng qo to a poi nt q on
the ci rcl e and the di ameter of the Q-ci rcl e passi ng through qo. Thus, i f
any l i ne pp i s drawn normal to the di ameter, the di ameter and the l i ne
++
through q and qo wi l l i ntercept a segment on pp proporti onal to tan
Ar g A/ (~ ;O). From Eq. (23) the l ength of thi s segment vari es l i nearl y
wi th 6U and, hence, wi th u. I n practi ce, then, i f the refl ecti on coeffi ci ent
has been measured at a seri es of frequenci es and a Q-ci rcl e drawn through
the poi nts, the di ameter through ~0 may be drawn and the seri es of the
segments on a normal to the di ameter measured as above. I f the seg-
ment l ength i s then pl otted agai nst frequency, the sl ope of the resul tant
strai ght l i ne l eads, usi ng Eq. (23), to a val ue for QL. Stri ctl y speaki ng,
1
SEC. 5.3] THE Q-CI RCLE AND THE RI EKE DI AGRAM 181
the val ue of uo i s not observed, but i t i s usual l y sati sfactory to use a val ue
of u i n the nei ghborhood of that for whi ch Iql i s a mi ni mum.
As has
been emphasi zed, thi s method of determi ni ng Q. is i deal i zed, presupposi ng
frequency i nsensi ti vi ty of the output ci rcui t and the absence of secondary
resonances i n the resonant system. I t wi l l be possi bl e to l ocate qo, the
off-resonance poi nt, wi th a suffi ci ent degr ee of accuracy provi ded that
the assumed i deal condi ti ons hol d over a frequency range suffi ci ent to
make 6W (h). >> (ti o/2Q~). Provi ded that gO has been l ocated
cor r ectl y, the method i s useful be-
cause i t uti l i zes al l the poi nts
measured and, by means of the
l i neari ty of t h e i ntercept-fre-
quency pl ot, tests thei r i nternal
consi stencey.
Once the Q-ci rcl e has been de-
termi ned, i t maybe used to deduce
a number of properti es of the whol e
system. The ci rcui t effi ci ency at
match, defi ned as the rati o of
power del i vered to the l oad to that
fed i nto the system at the resonator
FI G.5.12.The Q-ci rcl e,
openi ngs, may be shown to be gi ven by the radi us of the Q-ci rcl e. Thus
i n Fi g. 5.11, i f VI is the vol tage across Al l and 12 the cur r ent through CD,
then
(24)
But the i nput power i s GL\ VI\ 2, and the power to the l oad, KI I ,{, so
that the ci rcui t effi ci ency at match or v.(O) i s
(25)
I t i s customary to defi ne a quanti ty Q,, the external Q, whi ch i s 2T
ti mes the rati o of the ener gy stor ed i n the system to the ener gy di ssi pated
i n the external l oad per cycl e. I n accor d wi th thi s defi ni ti on, at match,
QE . $k#,
(26)
wher e Q.(0) has been wri tten rather than QL to i ndi cate a val ue measured
at match. I t i s, of course, possi bl e to defi ne QL val ues for any val ue of
qL, the l oad refl ecti on coeffi ci ent.
Provi ded that the system has not
182
OUTPUT CI RCUI TS
[SEC. 5.9
been pul l ed by the l oad from i ts unperturbed frequency, one has
&(;L) GL
_ G.(O).
m
GL(;L)
tlL(~.)
Si mi l arl y
(27)
+ A
The behavi or of ~L(qL) and ~.(q.) as functi ons of q are di scussed bel ow.
The pul l i ng fi gure of the operati ng magnetron may be defi ned as the
.
maxi mum change i n frequent y F (q@) of the system when qL i s vari ed
.+
over au phases wi th 19.1 = qr. Si nce the pul l i ng fi gure wi l l depend upon
the susceptance of the el ectr on stream, i t i s necessary to make a si rnpl i f y-
i ng assumpti on about the behavi or of the l atter i n or der to deduce the
pul l i ng fi gure from the Q-ci rcl e. Suppose that the el ectr on admi ttance i s
Y, = G. + jB., the l oad refl ecti on coeffi ci ent i s ;L, and the l oad i mped-
ance consequentl y i S K[(l + qL)/(1 q.)]; then
0= Ge+jB, +i 2NK~O+YI +
n
+
(28)
l +q.
z2+K~
lq.
Maki ng the substi tuti ons
Z,=K~P
~2=(a+mA= z~~ ,
lqo
2K
(1 ;0)
Eq. (28) becomes
A+
0= G.+jBe+ j2NY,:O+Y, +~
lqL,
(29)
1 qol ;.;O
Usi ng the symbol D to denote the vari ati on i n a quanti ty as the phase of
u. i s vari ed, one has
O = D(G, + jBe) + j2NYr
+D(@)+D(fill::i) 30)
The assumpti on to be made about the el ectr on admi ttance i s that, for
smal l changes, DAD = tan a = a constant. Mul ti pl yi ng Eq.
SEC. 5.3] THE Q-CI RCLE AND THE RI EKE DI AGRAM
183
(30) by e-a gi ves
-+ ~()e-i+
o = (G,)
Cos a
or
=~cos-+m(i% 31)
Thus,
(32)
i nverse of a ci rcl e of
.
I
fo sec a
-m(z@)
expressi on i s A ei/ 2GL ti mes the The bracketed
i
center go and radi us l /l q~l = l /qP. Consi deri ng the i nversi on of the
two poi nts on a di ameter of thi s ci rcl e whi ch passes through the ori gi n,
whi ch two poi nts, thus, sti l l l i e at the extremi ti es of a di ameter after
i nversi on, the new di ameter of the i nverted ci rcl e i s seen to be
I
1 1
2G? = 9P .

+
q; 1;01 q + 1701 G 1;01 1 Ji ol
Thus,
m(sfi )=H~02=12~~~ 33)
and
~(q,) = j07.(o) f+ec CI
2qp
Q,
1 9:LOI
= fO sec a q,
Qz+
(34)
1 q:lqol
The val ue of F(qp) is seen to be determi ned from the Q-ci rcl e save for
the term sec a, whi ch i s of el ectroni c ori gi n. The expressi on found by
1
setti ng a = O i s known as the col d pul l i ng fi gure and represents the
184 OUTPUT CI RCUI TS [SEC.5.3
effect of the osci l l ati ng and output ci rcui ts upon the total pul l i ng fi gure.
The pul l i ng fi gure ordi nari l y used to descri be magnetron performance
epeci fi es a val ue of q, of 0.2.
The unl oaded Q, Q has not been menti oned thus far. I n normal
usage, thi s i s a l oose term i ntended to descri be the tube l osses.
Because
of the di ffi cul ty of separati ng the tube and l ead l osses ther e i s some
ambi gui ty i n defi ni ng the unl oaded Q. I f the l ead and tube l osses are
gr ouped together , then, wi th an obvi ous notati on
G. = G. + Gu,
(35)
Al ternati vel y, the l ead l osses may be separated as far as possi bl e by
defi ni ng QU as 27r ti mes the rati o of stor ed ener gy to the ener gy l oss per
cycl e i n the tube and l ead when the l atter i s mi ni mi zed wi th r espect to
vari ati ons i n the external l oad. The resul t deri ved i n thi s way i s
(36)
+ +
wher e (qOA) i s the scal ar product of qOand A. The expressi on may be
eval uated from the Q-ci rcl e i f necessary.
The Rieke Di agram.I t has been expl ai ned i n Chap. 1 that the Ri eke
di agram shows the power del i vered to the l oad and the frequency of
the system as functi ons of the l oad refl ecti on coeffi ci ent qL. The com-
pl ete theor y of the di agram i s gi ven i n Chap. 7. I t i s necessary her e to
di scuss onl y the rel ati ons between the Ri eke di agram and the Q-ci rcl e.
Accordi ng to Eq. (29),
A
G. j~. = ~,(;L) = j2NY, : + Y, + ~ 1 +q: (29)
lqOlqLqO
I n Chap. 7 i t i s shown that the el ectroni c effi ci ency i s a functi on of Ge
onl y, provi ded that the patterns are not di storted by l oadi ng. Thi s
bei ng the case, the contours of constant el ectroni c effi ci ency, of constant
power transfer by the el ectrons, of constant G. = Re[~,(~L)], and of
cOnStant QL(q~) = NY,/GL(qL) are i denti cal . I n the Y-pl ane, these
contours are strai ght l i nes of the form Re (Y) + jB = G + jB, wher e B
i s vari abl e. These l i nes must transform i nto ci rcl es i n the qL pl ane;
and si nce each l i ne contai ns the poi nt at i nfi ni ty, al l the ci rcl es must
I
I
SEC.5. 3] THE Q-CI RCLE AND THE RI EKE DI AGRAM 185
contai n the transform of thi s poi nt. From Eq. (29) the requi red trand-
form i s ~L = l /~. Now, i n determi ni ng the Q-ci rcl e, ;I = ~1 = O,
and thus G = O for the Q-ci rcl e.
But si nce &= 1, the ci rcl e i n the
q-pl ane, correspondi ng to the Q-ci rcl e i n the q-pl ane, i s the i nverse of
the former. Thus, the i nverse of the Q-ci rcl e i s one of the contours
of constant Q~; namel y, Q~ = O. The whol e fami l y of contours of
constant Q~ i s evi dentl y a fami l y of noni ntersecti ng ci rcl es passi ng
through l /o and tangent at that poi nt to the i nverse of the Q-ci rcl e.
Fi gure 5.13 shows the di sposi ti on of these ci rcl es.
Wi thout i nformati on from operati ng tubes about the vari ati on of
B, wi th G., one cannot deduce the frequency contours. The assumpti on
used i n deduci ng the pul l i ng fi gure cannot be used because i t i s tr ue onl y
for smal l vari ati ons of G.. I f i t wer e uni versal l y val i d, the frequency
.
contours woul d be a set of ci rcl es al so passi ng through l /qO, i ntersecti ng
the Q. set at a fi xed angl e 7r/2 a.
I n or der to deduce el ectroni c effi ci ency as a functi on of l oad from the
Rl eke di agram, i t i s necessary to fi nd out how the ci rcui t effi ci ency vari es.
Suppose that the l oad refl ecti on coeffi ci ent i s ~; thi s may be thought of
as pr oduced by a l ossl ess transducer, and the pr esence of the l atter wi l l
++
not affect the ci rcui t effi ci ency. I f q~ = lq~[e~, such a transducer i s
r epr esented from Eq. (8) by
;, = e,, l a +;2
.+
(37)
1 + kL192
or , from Eqs. (9) and (11),
- GLI _ : \ F. I - - ;.1.
q2=@e+ +-
(38)
1 ]q~le~oql
I q.1 + + 1 lqLle7@q1
The radi us of the Q-ci rcl e measured on the l oad si de of the transducer
gi ves the new ci rcui t effi ci ency, m (~.); but thi s Q-ci rcl e i s the transform
of the normal Q-ci rcl e by Eq. (38). I f the Q-ci rcl e i s wri tten i n the form,
TO + m (0) ei$, the di ameter of the correspondi ng q2 ci rcl e i s
%(qL) =
~c(o)(l I;LI)
11 ~OljLle;12 77c(C))2~L]
(39)
.
and thi s equati on shows the vari ati on of ci rcui t effi ci ency wi th q~. The
contours of constant q,(q~) may be found by wri ti ng Eq. (39) i n the form
186 OUTPUT CI RC1 lI TS [SEC. 53
[ 1 [1
7C(0)
* + r: q.(o) 1;.1 2ro Cos Ol ;l + 1 ~
~c(qL) qc(qL)
= %@, e) = 0. (40)
I t i s al ways possi bl e to fi nd thr ee real quanti ti es ql, q2, and k wher e ql
and q2 are i ndependent of q.(q~) such that
Ij.ei tdz ~z{~.d q212 = *(FLI, @ = 0.
(41)
Equati on (41) i s the equati on of a set of coaxal ci rcl es havi ng the poi nts
ql and qz, l yi ng on the common di ameter of the Q- and uni t-ci rcl es, as
FI G,5. 13.Ckmtours of constant l oaded Q
and constant ci rcui t efi ci enry. Sol i d l i nes
represent QL and broken l i nes represent q..
l i mi t poi nts. The set may be de-
termi ned i n practi ce by i denti fy-
i ng two of i ts members, namel y,
the uni t ci rcl e and the i nverse of
the Q-ci rcl e. The for mer cor r e-
sponds to qC= O (a reacti ve l oad),
and the l atter to qc = @ (for i n
thi s case G, = Oand power i s bei ng
fed i nto the system). I n Fi g. 5.13
some members of the coaxal set
are shown to i ndi cate thei r rel ati on
wi th the Q-ci rcl e and constant Q
contours. The pr esence of l ead
l oss causes the sets of constant q.
and constant QL ci rcl es to have
di fferent c o m m o n di ameters.
Thus, \vhen ther e i s l ead l oss, the
contours of constant over-al l effi ci ency and the contours of constant l oad
power i n the Ri eke di agram wi l l not be ci rcl es nor \vi l l they l i e symmetri -
cal l y about a common axi s. I t can al so be seen that the contours of con-
.+
Stant QE(qL) = QL(qL)/qC(qL) wi l l not have a si mpl e form.
Fi nal l y, i t i s of some practi cal i nterest to deduce from a gi ven Ri eke
di agram the effect of i nserti ng a l ossl ess ransducer bet\veen the tube and
the l oad. The probl em i s to fi nd the contour i n the refl ecti on pl ane i nto
whi ch the transducer conver ts the pul l i ng ci rcl e lqLl = gp and from the
gi ven Ri eke di agram to fi nd the frequency range spanned by the contour.
I f the transducer i s speci fi ed by the fact that i t transforms ql = O i nto
4+
qz = q,., the equati ons of the transformed ci rcl e are qui te i nvol ved.
However , i f onl y an esti mate of the new pul l i ng fi gure i s requi red, the
probl em i s si mpl er. For si nce any transformati on has been shown to
SEC. 54] THE OUTPUT CI RCUI T PROBLEM 187
change the si ze of fi gures onl y i n the compressi on stage, the si ze
I
of the pul l i ng fi gure can be al tered onl y at thi s stage. But the compres-
si on transforms al l ci rcl es through +1 and 1 i nto themsel ves, so that
I
i f two ci rcl es are drawn through +1 and -1 to touch the pul l i ng ci rcl e
161= ~,, the transform of thi s ci rcl e wi l l sti l l touch the pai r of ci rcl es
after compressi on. Thus, the si ze of the new pul l i ng ci rcl e i s fi xed as a
functi on of i ts radi al posi ti on (see Fi g. 5.14). To a fi rst approxi mati on,
i t may be assumed that the trans-
form of the center of the ori gi nal
\
.
pul l i ng ci rcl e (q = O) i s the center
t .4 / \
of the new pul l i ng ci rcl e (~ = ~.)
+
and, si nce qL is known, the si ze of the
new pul l i ng ci rcl e i s known.
5.4. General Consi derati ons Con- -1-+1
cerni ng the Output Ci rcui t Prob-
l em.I n the l ast two secti ons the
chi ef concepts used i n descri bi ng
output ci rcui t behavi or have been
i ntroduced, and the performance of
Fx~. 6.14.Transformati onof the Pul l i ng
ci rcl e.
t
a resonator system connected to a
I
l oad has been i nterpreted usi ng the devi ce of an i deal output ci rcui t. I t
has been shown that most of the quanti ti es i nvol ved i n the rel ati ons
I
between tube and l oad may be deduced from the Q-ci rcl e and the Ri eke
di agram. The quanti ty Y, whi ch i s needed for a compl ete anal ysi s may
be ei ther cal cul ated or obtai ned from Q measurements together wi th i nde-
pendent experi ments on the output ci rcui t. Thus, i t i s-possi bl e i n some
cases to measure di rectl y the i mpedance l evel at the juncti on between out-
put ci rcui t and resonant system. As has been al ready i ndi cated, the
S-cur ve techni que (see Fi g. 5.10) i s of great val ue i n these measurements
on i sol ated output ci rcui ts.
,
I t i s now desi rabl e to di scuss i n a general way the functi ons of the
output ci rcui t i n practi ce. The rel ati onshi ps among l oaded Q, QL, the
]
pul l i ng fi gure F(q,), the equi val ent admi ttance of the resonant system
NY,, and the el ectroni c effi ci ency ~,, whi ch are menti oned i n Chap. 7,
form the foundati on for determi ni ng output ci rcui t requi rements. One
has the rel ati ons
QL=N& (42a)
fO sec a 2qp
l(qp) = ~ + (421))
,.
9WOI
Q. = Qm;(0),
(42c)
188 OUTPUT CI RCUI TS [SEC. 54
together wi th the empi ri cal i nformati on that el ectroni c effi ci ency i s
al most i nvari abl y an i ncreasi ng functi on of ~L. I n al most any use of the
magnetron, a defi ni te degr ee of frequency stabi l i ty i s desi red i n the tube
i tsel f. Thi s means that an upper l i mi t i s pet upon the pul l i ng fi gure. A
compromi se must al ways be effected between thi s requi rement whi ch,
from Eqs. (42a) to (42c), sets an upper bound upon GL for a gi ven tube
and that whi ch demands a hi gh el ectroni c effi ci ency or a hi gh GL. To
some extent thi s di l emma may be resol ved by redesi gni ng the resonant
system to i ncrease Y,, whi ch permi ts GL to ri se, whi l e QL remai ns con-
stant and QE and F(gP) al so remai n approxi matel y constant. However ,
thi s sol uti on eventual l y breaks down because the addi ti onal capaci tance
i ntroduced to i ncrease Y, l owers the ci rcui t effi ci ency, and a poi nt may
be reached at whi ch the over-al l effi ci ency q,q. starts to decrease. I t i s
cl ear al so that the prescri bed pul l i ng fi gure wi l l be affected by the operat-
i ng wavel ength. A constant pul l i ng fi gure at al l wavel engths woul d
i mpl y a QE proporti onal to frequency and thus a much smal l er GL at
short wavel engths. The val ues of pul l i ng fi gures that have been accepted
as sui tabl e compromi ses i n unstabi l i zed tubes are 10 Me/see at 3000
Mc/secj 15 N$c/sec at 10,000 Me/see, and 30 Me/see at 30,000 Me/see.
These fi gures cor r espond to QE val ues of about 125, 280, and 420 and,
usi ng typi cal val ues of q.(0), to QL val ues of 110, 200, and 300.
I n di fferent resonator systems, the admi ttance constant NY, mi ght
be expected to vary consi derabl y, si nce i t i s gi ven by NY, = N(hyO + Y,),
wher e h i s the anode hei ght, yo i s the admi ttance of the unstrapped
resonator per uni t l ength, and Y. i s the strap admi ttance constant. The
val ue of yOi s a functi on onl y of the shape oi the osci l l ators. I n practi ce
the factors compensate to some extent. Rough ranges for the val ues of
NY, taken from Tabl e 10.2 (NY, = Y.) are 0.04 to 0.20 mho at 3000
Me/see, 0.15 to 0.60 mho at 10,000 Me/see, and about 0.3 mho at 30,000
Me/see. Usi ng Eq. (42a), the resi stance that must be shunted across
the resonator openi ng to gi ve the normal QL val ues i s found to be 500
to 2500 ohms at 10 cm, 300 to 1300 ohms at 3 cm, and about 1000 ohms at
1.25 cm. I t i s pl ai n that for the types of magnetron whi ch have been
desi gned thus far, thi s resi stance fal l s general l y wi thi n a range of 300 to
3000 ohms. I t fol l ows that the pri nci pal probl em of output desi gn i s to
suppl y thi s resi stance by sui tabl y connecti ng the resonant system to a
matched l oad l i ne whose i mpedance i n the case of coaxi al l i ne i s of the
or der of 50 to 100 ohms and 200 to 400 ohms for wavegui de. The
i mpedance K wi l l be used for wavegui des, defi ned such that the power
fl owi ng i n a matched l i ne wi l l be gi ven by V*/ K, wher e V i s the l i ne
vol tage.
The output ci rcui t not onl y shoul d pr oduce the desi red resi stance at
the assi gned frequency but shoul d do thk wi thout si mul taneousl y
I
SEC.54] THE OUTPUT CI RCUI T PROBLEM 189
coupl i ng i n excessi ve reactance.
The pri nci pal hazard attached to
coupl i ng i n l arge amounts of reactance l i es i n the possi bi l i ty of pattern
deformati on. The suscepti bi l i ty of a strapped system to pattern di s-
torti on has been di scussed i n Chap. 4, wher e i t i s poi nted out that to a
fi rst approxi mati on di storti on i s pr oduced to the same extent by ei ther
reacti ve or resi sti ve l oadi ng. A cri teri on for pattern di storti on i s gi ven
by Eq. (57) of Chap. 4, i n whi ch i t i s shown that the ampl i tude am of the
rnth mode exci ted when a r-mode i s l oaded i s gi ven by
(43)
wher e s i s the strap l ength, X. the mmode wavel ength, Ka the strap
i mpedance, and Yl ~ the l oad admi ttance at the sl ots. The symbol
m i s equal to (N/2) n, wher e 2n i s the number of nodes i n the r-f pattern
around the i nteracti on space. Equati on (43) may be used to esti mate
the permi ssi bl e val ue of Y,A. I t wi l l be noted that the l atter depends
upon the strength of coupl i ng between osci l l ators and not uni quel y
upon Q.. I n most strapped systems i t appears that di storti on does not
become seri ous unti l Q. i s perhaps about 30. The normal operati ng
Q. wi l l be many ti mes gr eater than thi s, and i t i s thus cl ear that the
coupl ed reactance may be at l east as l arge as the coupl ed resi stance
wi thout causi ng di ffi cul ty.
I t has al ready been emphasi zed that usual l y output ci rcui ts whi ch are
not del i beratel y stabi l i zed stor e a rel ati vel y smal l amount of ener gy
compared wi th that i n the resonant system and that consequentl y they
may be consi dered as frequency-i nsensi ti ve over a frequency range of a
few ti mes M/QL, wher e cooi s the resonant frequency. I t i s general l y
consi dered desi rabl e, even i n fi xed-frequency magnetrons, that the output
ci rcui t shoul d exhi bi t consi derabl e frequency i nsensi ti vi ty over a band of
perhaps 20 to 30 per cent above the ~-mode frequency. I n thi s connec-
ti on frequency i nsensi ti vi ty i mpl i es si mpl y that the transformer properti es
of the output ci rcui t shoul d be sl owl y varyi ng functi ons of frequency.
Thk requi rement of broadbandedness guarantees that the mode i mmedi -
atel y bel ow the ~-mode i n wavel ength wi l l be l oaded to an extent comp-
arabl e to the ~-mode, and i t i s an i nsurance agai nst the possi bi l i ty of an
undesi red mode bei ng favored i n the starti ng process because i ts r-f
ampl i tude exceeds that of the ~-mode. I n tunabl e magnetrons, the
broadbandi ng of output ci rcui ts consti tutes a speci al probl em. I n
thi s i nstance the objecti ve i s usual l y to obtai n a nearl y constant pul l i ng
fi gure across the tuni ng band. From Eqs. (42a) to (42c) i t i s seen that
thi s wi l l , i n general , requi re GL to vary across the band whi ch may perhaps
have a wi dth of 20 per cent. The requi red vari ati on of GL wi l l be of the
same or der . The probl em thus reduces to the empi ri cal one of arrangi ng
.
190
OUTPUT CI RCUI TS [SEC. 5.4
matters so the sl ow change of the output ci rcui t transformer constants
shal l be i n the ri ght sense to keep GL at an appropri ate val ue.
I n thi s
task the use of measurements on the i sol abl e part of the output ci rcui ts
i s i ndi cated.
One rel ati on between the output system and resonator system whi ch
has been menti oned i n Chap. 4 may be bri efl y r efer r ed to her e. As the
previ ous paragraph has i ndi cated, i t i s of some i mportance to coupl e out
al l those modes whi ch the el ectrons are l i kel y to exci te. For thi s reason,
devi ces such as strap breaks have been i ntroduced for the purpose of
di storti ng the r-f patterns i n such a way as to cause both components of
an otherwi se degener ate mode to coupl e to the output resonator. Ther e
i s thus a probl em, not speci fi cal l y an output ci rcui t probl em, concer ned
wi th the rel ati ve di sposi ti on of di sconti nui ti es (strap breaks or tuners)
and the output ci rcui t.
The fundamental probl em of coupl i ng the l oad l i ne i nto the resonant
system may be sol ved i n an i ndefi ni te number of ways. A useful di s-
ti ncti on i s that between hi gh- and l ow-l evel i mpedance ci rcui ts. I n
the for mer the desi red hi gh i mpedance i s i ntroduced by the al most di rect
shunti ng of the l oad l i ne across the openi ng of a resonator. Thi s type of
coupl i ng i s achi eved i n the strap-fed coupl i ng shown i n Fi g. 5.4,
i n whi ch the i nner conductor of the coaxi al l i ne i s ti ed di rectl y to the
fl oati ng secti on of one strap. Thus, except for a sl i ght transformer effect
due to the l i ne l ength of the strap, the coaxi al l i ne i s shunted across the
resonator openi ng. I n a hi gh-l evel output ci rcui t the i mpedance trans-
formati on i s coni i ned to the external l i ne and may be rel ati vel y smal l .
I n general , the transformati on requi red wi l l be to a hi gher-i mpedance
l evel . At the opposi te extr eme l i e the vari ous types of l ow-i mpedance
l evel ci rcui ts whi ch i ncl ude most of the fami l i ar desi gns. I n such cases
the external part of the output ci rcui t i s i ntroduced i n seri es wi th an
osci l l ator at a hi gh cur r ent poi nt. I f the output i mpedance at thi s
poi nt be Z and the resonator i nductance L, theshunt i mpedance added
by the output at the sl ot i s roughl y @L/Z (for UOL>> Z). Thus, the
resonator acts as a transformer to rai se the l ow i mpedance Z to the
requi si te hi gh l evel . The i mpedance Z may be i ntroduced i n a number
of waya. I n a wavegui de output i t may be a di rect seri es el ement i f the
output communi cates wi th the resonator by means of a sl ot i n the back
of the resonator. I n a coaxi al l i me the i mpedance Z may appear as a
resul t of the mutual coupl i ng between a si ngl e resonator and a l oop
connected to the output ci rcui t. For these l ow-l evel output ci rcui ts
the external part of the ci rcui t must effect a substanti al i mpedance
transformati on downwards. For, as has been shown, @2z/Z runs from
300 to 3000 ohms, whi l e WL i s of the or der of tens of ohms; thus Z must
be of the or der of 1 ohm. Between these extr eme types of output ci rcui t
i
SEC.55] COAXI AL-OUTPUT CI RCUI T 191
i t i s possi bl e to i magi ne i ntermedi ate forms whi ch have been l i ttl e
expl ored. The output i mpedance of such forms i s i ntroduced as a
seri es or as a shunt el ement at a posi ti on of i ntermedi ate vol tage and
cur r ent i n the resonator.
5.5. Coaxi al -output Ci rcui t.-The purpose of thi s secti on and of
Sec. 5.6 i s to di scuss some parti cul ar forms of output ci rcui ts i n a general
way. No attempt i s made to gi ve desi gn formul as except i n the case
of one type of si mpl e wavegui de output. Methods of anal ysi s for other
types of ci rcui ts are i ndi cated.
Center- and Halo-loop Ci rcui ts.I n these ci rcui ts, a l oop i ntercepti ng
the magneti c fl ux of one osci l l ator (see Fi gs. 5.1 and 5.2) feeds a coaxi al
l i ne. The coaxi al l i ne contai ns a gl ass vacuum seal whi ch al so supports
the i nner conductor. To mi ni mi ze breakdown across the gl ass, the gl ass
usual l y takes the form of a l ength
of tubi ng seal ed to the i nner con-
ductor at one end and to the outer
conductor at the other . The cross
secti on of the l i ne wi l l usual l y have
di sconti nui ti es at the seal , si nce
the gl ass i s butted agai nst ei ther a
copper feather edge or a thi n-wal l ed
Kovar cyl i nder. Ther e i s thus
formed a secti on of l i ne parti al l y
FI Q.5.15.Exampl eof coaxi al output used
fi l l ed wi th coaxi al di el ectri c. Con-
as an antennafeedfor a wavegui de.
necti on to the external l i ne i s made ei ther di rectl y by mechani cal contact
and choke joi nts as i n Fi g. 5.1 or as an antenna feed for wavegui de as i n
Fi g. 5.15. The ci rcui t of Fi g. 5.16 represents the el ectri c behavi or.
As has been al ready menti oned, thi s type of output ci rcui t produces
a l ow seri es i mpedance at CD i n seri es wi th UOL,the i nductance of one hol e.
The mai n part of the transformati on i s effected by the l oop. The
external transformer EFGH whi ch contai ns the gl ass, seal s, beads,
choke joi nts, or coaxi al -wavegui de juncti ons performs a rel ati vel y smal l
transformati on. Thi s condi ti on i s desi rabl e because the standi ng wave
i n the rel ati vel y i rregul ar, ai r-fi l l ed l i ne i s thus kept at a mi ni mum. I t i s
rarel y possi bl e to cal cul ate the i mpedance transformati ons i n such a
l i ne wi th confi dence, but they are easi l y found by measurements ei ther
on output ci rcui ts from whi ch the tube and l oop have been r emoved or
on smal l er secti ons of the output ci rcui t. By empi ri cal means or by
cal cul ati ons on the regul ar porti ons of the ci rcui t, the requi red properti es
may be obtai ned by a process of cor r ecti on. Usual l y an effor t i s made
to keep the pri nci pal transformer constant at al l secti ons aa wel l as the
over-al l constant cl ose to uni ty; thi s gi ves a secti on wi th l ow-ener gy
storage ever ywher e and hence a l ow-frequency sensi ti vi ty.
192
OUTPUT CI RCUI TS [SEC. 5.5
To a rough approxi mati on the l oop and the hol e act as the pri mary
and secondary of a transformer, but the representati on i s not parti cul arl y
val uabl e, si nce the esti mati on of the turns rati o i s far from si mpl e. Thi s
ari ses from the di ffi cul ty of cal cul ati ng the effecti ve l oop area. A cr ude
approxi mati on uses the mean di ameter of the l oop to gi ve the area, and
thi s may be used to obtai n a rough i dea of the transformati on properti es
of the l oop i f the coupl ed i mpedance i s cal cul ated from U~M2/ R, wher e M
i s the esti mated mutual i nductance of the l oop and hol e and R is the sum
of the l oop reactance and the i mpedance seen at .4B. The transformer
constant i s cl earl y ver y dependent on the si ze of the l oop and, i n hal o
l oops, al so upon the hei ght of the l oop above the anode bl ock, si nce the
fi el ds fal l off rapi dl y i n the end space.
Experi mental l y i t appears that
the l oop acts as a rather frequency-i nsensi ti ve transformer.
I n or der to avoi d coupl i ng-i n much reactance, i t i s desi rabl e to
arrange the properti es of the external transformer so that the l oop
reactance i s effecti vel y cancel ed by a resi dual reactance at AB. The
A
L
c E G
1
LooP External
NG
{N.I )L trans. trans.
K
for mer for mer
o
1:
B D F
H
Fm. 5.16.Schemati cnetwor kof a l oop-aoupl edoutput.
l oop reactance may be consi derabl e. I t i s Accurate, i n fai r measure, to
fi nd the l oop reactance for hal o l oops by assumi ng that the l oop and i ts
i mage i n the anode bl ock form a transmi ssi on l i ne of l ength equal to the
devel oped l ength of the l oop. Thi s l ength may approach a quarter
wavel ength for hal o l ooPs, l eadi ng to l arge reactance at AB. The
esti mati on of reacti ve effects for center l oops i s di ffi cul t. However , i f
the l oop transformer CDEF i s r epr esented by a networ k of the type of
Fi g. 5.6, the seri es el ement 2s maybe found by transformi ng the off-reso-
nance poi nt of the Q-ci rcl e taken on the compI ete tube, back through the
transformer EFGH. Presumabl y 22 represents mai nl y the l oop react-
ance, and thi s may be bal anced out by redwi gni ng EFGH to pr oduce the
conjugate reactance at EF.
The shunt el ement Y1 of the transducer
can be found onl y by measuri ng the resonant frequency of the sygtem
wi th the output (i ncl udi ng l oop) r emoved and thus determi ni ng the
pul l i ng due to YI di rectl y. 1
I For an exhausti vedi ecuesi onof a broadbandedhal doop output havi ng a wave-
~de juncti on, see J. C. Sl ater, Properti es of the Coaxi al -wavegni deJuncti oni n the I
725A and 2J51Oatput, BTL Tmh. Memorandum No. MM-44-18&4, Nov. 20, 1944;
H. D. Hsgstti m, On the Output Ci rcui tof the L51 (Tunabl eX-band Magnetron),
I
BTL Tech. Memorandum No. MM-44-140-55, Sept. 12, 1044.
I
SEC.55] COAXI AL-OUTPUT CI RCUI T 193
An effect that may be i mportant i n hal o l oops i s that ari si ng from
the el ectrostati c coupl i ng of the l oop to the nei ghbori ng strap. The
ori entati on of the l oop determi nes whether thi s coupl i ng ai ds or opposes
the magneti c coupl i ng because the di recti on of cur r ent i n the l oop ;
r ever sed by rotati ng the l oop through 180, whereas the el ectrostati c
coupl i ng remai ns unaffected.
Strap-fed Coupl i ng Ci rcui ts .Thi s type of output ci rcui t, i n whi ch an
external coaxi al l i ne i s connected across the anode bl ock and the center
of a fl oati ng strap, may be r epr esented schemati cal l y by the ci rcui t of
Fi g. 5.17. The resonant system has
been r epr esented by a chai n of N -~
4-termi nal networ ks each consi sti ng
of two strap secti ons and a resonator
such as was used i n Chap. 4.
(Because the strap-fed coupl i ng has
l ongi tudi nal asymmetry, the l ength
of the resonators actual l y has some
G
effect. Thk,, h owe v e r, wi l l be
i gnored. ) Suppose the i mpedance C
I
of the output ci rcui t l ooki ng out
D
K
from CD to be Z. Thi s may be
I
2
transformed to a shunt el ement at
/
External
H
All provi ded that the strap l ength
Transformer
i s suffi ci entl y smal l for the squares A
and hi gher power s of 27rs/x7, wher e
s i s the strap l ength, to be negl ected.
To the same approxi mati on Z i s not
al tered i n thi s transformati on. I t --~----& --
has been shown experi mental l y that
FI G. 5.1 7.Schemati c network of a strap-
ther e i s al most no resi dual reactance
fed output.
added i n maki ng the juncti on between the strap and the coaxi al l i ne;
hence Z wi l l be the i mpedance at the start of the coaxi al l i ne. I t has
been remarked i n the earl i er di scussi on that Z wi l l be a hi gh i mpedance
(300 to 3000 ohms, for exampl e) and the functi on of the external trans-
for mer wi l l be i n al l probabi l i ty, wi th standard l oad l i nes, to transform the
i mpedance l evel up somewhat. I t i s cl earl y possi bl e to achi eve a ver y
heavy l oadi ng wi th thi s ci rcui t by maki ng Z smal l , and i t has thus found
mor e extensi ve appl i cati on as a means of i ntroduci ng reactance for tuni ng
purposes. Tuni ng curves obtai ned by movi ng a shorti ng pl unger i n a uni -
form coaxi al l i ne connected di rectl y to the strap have i ndi cated that the
ci rcui t of Fi g. 5.17 gi ves excel l ent qual i tati ve agreement wi th the measure-
ments. I n one case, usi ng a l i ne of characteri sti c i mpedance of 63 ohms,
the predi cted and obser ved Q. val ues wer e 10.9 and 11.2, respecti vel y. I n
194 OUTPUT CI I WI J I TS [Sm. 56
another case, \vi th a l i ne of characteri sti c i mpedance of 40.7 ohms, the
predi cted and obser ved Q,, val ues \vcr e7.1 and 7.6. The end effect at the
juncti on was confi rmed to be negl i gi bl e. Thi s type of output ci rcui t i s
most val uabl e i n l ong-~~avel ength magnetrons ~vher e the end spaces and
straps are l arge enough to faci l i tate constructi on.
Segwwnt-jcd Coupling.-Thc center conductor may be brought over a
segment for some di stance and then bent do~vn and conncctcd to i t
(see Fi g. 5.4). The anal ysi s ~voul d fol l ow the same l i nes as that for the
center and hal o l oops, but i t i s some\vhat mor e di ffi cul t to esti mate the
parameters of the l oop transformer a pri ori , for one has an i nti mate
mi xture of el ectrostati c and magneti c coupl i ng.
5.6. Wavegui de-output Ci rcui ts.Al l ~va\cgui de outputs used up to
the present ti me have coupl ed i nto the resonant system at the poi nt of
hi ghest current. As a consequence, they must pu.went at thi s poi nt a
l o~v i mpedance (perhaps a fc\v ohms or a fracti on of an ohm) \vhi ch i s
transformed by the coupl ed resonator to a hi gh l evel at the sl ot openi ng.
Ther e are two pri nci pal means of devel opi ng the l o~v i mpedance i n seri es
wi th the resonator. I n one, the wavegui de l i ne opens di rectl y i nto
the back of one resonator and the i mpedance i s transformed down from
that of the external l i ne by sui tabl e changes i n the cross secti on of the
wavegui de. I n the other , the ~vavegui de communi cates wi th the r eso-
nator by means of a nonresonant i ri s, whi ch shunts part of the hi gh gui de
i mpedance. I t i s, of course, possi bl e
=
to combi ne the t~vo arrangements.
I t may be noted that si nce the anode
hei ght and pol e pi ece separati on of
most tubes i s consi derabl y l ess than
B
D
a hal f wavel ength and, hence, l ess
FI G. 51S.-Schemati c network of an
than the cutoff di mensi on of rectan-
i ri s-cauul edoutput.
gul ar gui de, some arti fi ce i s al most
al ways necessary to effect a coupl i ng between the short bl ock and the
wi de gui de.
I ris Coupl i ng. I ri s coupl i ng has not been extensi vel y used because
i t has the i nherent di sadvantage of pul l i ng the tube frequency. The
ci rcui t may be rather crudel y r epr esented by the arrangement shown i n
Fi g. 5.18 i n whi ch the i ri s i s r epr esented si mpl y as a shunt susceptance
jB1. I t i s l i kel y that thi s i s an oversi mpl i fi cati on for an i ri s that i s
si tuated essenti al y between l i nes of unequal characteri sti c i mpedance.
I t wi l l usual l y be the case that u&>> Il /B,l and B,>> G, wher e G i s the
l oad admi ttance i n shunt wi th the i ri s. I f thi s i s so, the combi nati on of
i ri s and l oad gi ves an i mpedance i n seri es wi th cd of val ue
(jB, 1+ G)
-(h)+(;)
SI I c.5. 6] WAVEt?UI DE-OUTPUT CI RCUI TS 195
Then, the addi ti onal shunt admi ttance at AB is
Usi ng the expressi ons al ready deri ved for Q. and for the frequency shi ft
bu, one fi nds
au 1 BI
. ~.
=2Qx u
(44)
~o
Si nce B, has been supposed substanti al l y gr eater than G, the frequency
shi ft may easi l y be excessi ve. I t i s possi bl e to compensate for thi s
coupl ed reactance i n vari ous ways. The coupl ed resonator may be made
wi th a somewhat di fferent i nductance from the others, i n such a way that
the added reactance i s bal anced. Al so by combi ni ng the i ri s coupl i ng
wi th sui tabl e external transformers or wi th another i ri s from whi ch the
ori gi nal i ri s i s separated by a cavi ty, the frequency shi ft may be el i mi -
nated. These methods are of frequent appl i cati on i n stabi l i zed output
ci rcui ts and are di scussed i n Chaps. 11 and 16.
Directly Coupled Waveguide Circuits.The most common method
of coupl i ng a wavegui de to the resonant system i s to al l ow i t to open
di rectl y i nto the l atter and to use external transformers to obtai n the
cor r ect i mpedance. The two most fami l i ar ways of effecti ng the trans-
formati on are by the use of a quarter-wavel ength secti on of l ow-i mped-
ance gui de or through tapered secti ons. The l atter suppl i es a per fectl y
adequate means of arri vi ng at a broadbanded transformer but i s fr e-
quentl y mechani cal l y di ffi cul t. The tapered secti on i s desi gned to have
i ts characteri sti c i mpedance change conti nuousl y and sl owl y (i n terms
of wavel engths) from the hi gh l evel of the external gui de to the requi red
l ow l evel . Usi ng wel l -known formul as for opti mum frequency i nsensi -
ti vi ty i n the taper excel l ent matches may be obtai ned. The process,
however , entai l s the constructi on of a gui de the cross secti on of whi ch i s
varyi ng i n a rather i nvol ved way and, i n addi ti on, shoul d be rather l ong
for good resul ts. 1
The si mpl est transformer that can be used i s a quarter-wavel ength
l i ne the characteri sti c i mpedance of whi ch l i es between that of the external
gui de and the desi red seri es i mpedance at the resonator. The trans-
formi ng l i ne may take a vari ety of forms, the choi ce bei ng pri nci pal l y
di ctated by mechani cal and di mensi onal consi derati ons. I n most cases
i t must be a so-cal l ed l umped l i ne or one i n whi ch the capaci ti ve and
i nducti ve parts of the gui de are segr egated to some extent. Such l i nes
possess the pr oper ty that thei r cutofi wavel ength exceeds consi derabl y
1SeeL. Tonks, GE Repor t No. 197, Mar. 23, 1943.
196 OUTPUT CI RCUI TS [SEC. 5. 6
thei r l ong di mensi on, thus permi tti ng access to a short tube. Another
method of produci ng a hi gh cutoff wavel ength i n a smal l space i s to use a
di dectri c-fi l l ed gui de. Thi s techni que has not been extensi vel y used,
but quartz-fi l ed tapers have been uti l i zed i n one type of magnetron.
When a gui de of i ntermedi ate cross secti on i s used, ther e wi l l be trans-
for mer effects at the i nterfaces between thi s gui de and the external l i ne
and between the gui de and the tube. General l y, then, Fi g. 519 wi l l be
needed to r epr esent the whol e output ci rcui t. I t wi l l be supposed
that the efl ect of any di sconti nui ti es (i ri s wi ndow) beyond the trans-
for mer are negl ected and the external l i ne termi nated.
Suppose that the transformer constants of the thr ee secti ons (pPCG
. + +
ceedi ng from l oad to gener ator ) are a2z, Bz, al z; 0, 0, +; and C-WI , 191,al l
.
respecti vel y. They mi ght al so be wri tten a.z2,I %, 0; 0, 0, cm + r CX21;
A E G
Juncti on
Juncti on
trans-
K1 &
trens.
for mer
4 former
~
B D F T K
FI m 5. 19a.Equi val ent ci rcui t for quarter-wavel ength coupl i ng.
:~
FI O. 6.19b.Reduced equi val ent ci rcui t for quarter-wavel ength coupl i ng
+
and O, 61, 0, wher e al l i s i gnored, si nce i t i s i ndi sti ngui shabl e from the
extem~l l i ne. Measurements on several such transformers have i ndi cated
that azz and& & are ver y smal l ; thi s i s equi val ent to the statement
that the end effects of the quarter-wavel ength secti on are smal l . Thi s
observati on has been made on output ci rcui ts i n whi ch the transformer
cross secti on was such that the el ectri c fi el ds wer e l argel y confi ned to a
regi on wi th a smal l di mensi on paral l el to the E-vector .
Ther e was thus
l i ttl e i nterpenetr -ti on of the transformer and tube or external gui de
ti ei ds, wi th a consequent smal l end cor r ecti on. Thusj i gnori ng ~22,
.+
~12 CX21, the transformer becomes si mpl y O, P2131, m Or, i n Other words, a
quarter-wavel ength transformer whose apparent characteri sti c i mpedance
i s not that of the physi cal gui de KI but Kz, for exampl e. The output
ci rcui t i s thus modi fi ed as shown i n Fi g. 5 19b.
I
I
I
I
SEC. 5. 6] WA VEGUI DE-O UTPUT CI RCUI TS 197
Let the l oad i mpedance be Ko, the equi val ent characteri sti c i mpedance
of the i ntermedi ate gui de Kl , the operati ng wavel ength X, the i nter-
medi ate gui de wavel ength & and i ts cutoff wavel ength h.n. Further
suppose, now, that k i s unrestri cted, so that the i ntermedi ate gui de i s not
necessari l y exactl y a quarter wavel ength l ong. Suppose that i ts el ec-
tri cal l ength i s @ = 2ul /Xa, wher e 1 i s i ts physi cal l ength. One has
Z, K, = ~j~K, Kl
Z, + K, K, + K,
(45)
wher e Z1 i s the i mpedance seen at CD. For @ =- r, 21 = Ki/ Ko.
Di fferenti ati ng l ogari thmi cal l y and setti ng k = ho, the wavel ength at
whi ch 1 = ku/ 4,
wher e the rel ati on dho/ h~ = dk/ k3 has been used. Transformi ng the
output i mpedance at the back of the resonator Zl to the resonator open-
i ng, one has for the addi ti onal admi ttance at the sl ot,
Y, = G. + jB. = Y~Zl ,
when Y, << 1/2,. Expl i ci tl y
(47)
eiyz@M2xoRo
or si nce KO >> 21,

~y-&Y(2)7
(48)
wher e C@ i s the departure of the frequency from the resonant frequency
of the transformer. Usi ng the rel ati on Q. = lVY,/ G., one has
(49)
Thi s may be combi ned wi th the earl i er expressi on 6u./uo = B./ 2NY,
for the frequency shi ft due to reacti ve l oadi ng to fi nd the resonant
frequency of the system when the transformer i s not exactl y a. quarter
wavel ength l ong. I t i s i mportant to note that up to changes of the fi rst
or der i n frequency, the resi sti ve part of ZI i s constant.
The changes i n
seri es reactance wi l l pr oduce some effect on G. by varyi ng the total
reactance i n seri es wi th Re(Zl ).
I t i s i nstructi ve to cal cul ate the stor ed
198
OUTPUT CI RCUI TS [SEC. 5. 6
ener gy i n t he output ci rcui t. I f, as has been taci tl y assumed above, the
juncti on transformers are frequency i nsensi ti ve, the ener gy storage i n
the output may be compared wi th that of the resonant system by eval uat-
i ng the rati o [uO(M?./i l WO)]/N Y, = r. Usi ng Eq. (49), ther e fol l ows
T=WWY
(50)
For a typi cal exampl e wi th Q, = 400, K, = 400, Y, = 0.025 mho,
N = 10, &/kI = 1.25, Eq. (50) gi ves r = 0.12. Equati on (50) may
easi l y be conver ted to other forms that put the dependence on other vari -
abl es i n evi dence. The ener gy storage i n thi s type of output ci rcui t may
be rel ati vel y hi gh as Eq. (50) i ndi cates.
The l i nes used for the quarter-wavel ength secti on are general l y
l umped, and some cross secti ons that have been used are shown i n
M
/ /
/ /
Fi g. 520. I n al l
@ m, j//#
z
FI G. 5.20.Exampl e of l umped gui des.
cases the gui de i s essenti al l y di vi ded i nto two regi ons,
-,
one of whi ch i s capaci ti ve ~~i th hi gh el ectri c fi el ds i n a narrow crossbar
and the other i nducti ve wi th hi gh currents fl owi ng i n a mor e or l ess
cyl i ndri cal secti on. The cutoff wavel ength of such a gui de may pl ai nl y
be hi gher than that of a rectangul ar one of the same wi dth, si nce the
capaci tance has been i ncreased i n the center and the i nductance at the
outsi de. The probl em of cal cul ati ng the cutoff i n these secti ons i s
exactl y anal ogous to that ari si ng i n cal cul ati ng resonant frequenci es of
unstrapped osci l l ators.
Thus, i n or der to fi nd the fundamental trans-
ver se el ectri c mode, one needs a sol uti on of
V2T + xzT = O wi th aF~= O (51)
on the wal l s of the gui de, 1 wher e a/a~ denotes normal di fferenti ati on
and x = 27r/A. The fi el ds are then gi ven by E= = a T/ dy, E, = dT/ c?x,
and H. = (x/ jcpo) T. Since the gap i n the crossbar i s usual l y smal l
compared wi th the l ength of the l atter, i t i s possi bl e to put E. = O and
to suppose E, i ndependent of y i n the capaci ti ve part (see Fi g. 521).
I f the di mensi ons of the cyl i nder are smal l compared wi th h/2w, one
may sol ve Lapl aces equati on rather than Eq. (51) i n thi s regi on and
match the sol uti ons at the juncti on by equati ng T and dT/ &t ther e.
I See S. A. Schel kunoff,El ectromagneti c Waves,Van hostrmd, Fl ew York, 1943,
p. 380.
SEC. 5. 6]
WA VEGUI DE-OUTPUT CI RCUI TS
199
Cal l i ng T, the sol uti on of Lapl aces equati on i n the cyl i nder wi th
aTO/an = O, except at the juncti on, wher e aTJan = 1, one may obtai n
the equati on for xo = h/Ao, wher e ~0 i s the cutoff wavel ength
Atari Xd=~+xO
/
TodS. (52)
I n Eq. (52), A is the area of the cyl i nder, 1 the l ength and d the wi dth
of the crossbar, and the i ntegrati on i s carri ed over the cyl i nder. I f
Xol i s smal l , thi s gives
whi ch i s the resul t obtai ned by l umpi ng the capaci tance
compl etel y and taki ng account of an end cor r ecti on
m: k
l-.,(Z --l
FI G.5.21.H-secti on gui de.
the l ength of the condenser. The cal cul ati on of TO
(53)
and i nductance
J TodS/ A to
i s not di ffi cul t
for si mpl e geometri cal shapes of the cyl i nder. For H-secti ons as shown
i n Fi g. 5.21, X~ may be found from
[
11
tan X.1 = xH@
1( -l O@l 54)
h X~S2~XS
provi ded that 2m/ h > 1.
The i mpedance of the l umped gui de on the P V basi s maybe found
from the rel ati on
()
dT
~ = 2c.)pd % Z.O
r
()
(55)
aT
ax .=O

For H-secti ons thi s becomes

d
K=
377 i
()(
2
)
(56a)
~ _ si n z~H1
l &
2xi fl
+ 2d ;S::;Xl
200
or
OUTPUT CI RCUI TS
;SEC. 5.6
The juncti on between the l umped gui de and rectangul ar gui de presents
a probl em that may be handl ed i n a sati sfactory manner provi ded the
sl ot of the crossbar i s narrow. The fi el dw i n the two gui des may each
be expanded i n terms of the appropri ate normal modes. The tangenti al
fi el d i n the rectangul ar gui de i s then put equal to that i n the l umped
gui de across the openi ng of the l atter aod zer o el sewher e i n the same
pl ane. The tangenti al magneti c fi el ds me equated across the openi ng.
Usi ng these rel ati ons and the orthogonal i ty of the wave functi ons i n
each gui de, a seri es of l i near equati ons i n the mode ampl i tudes may be
obtai ned. So far the treatment i s exact. One now negl ects al l but the
pri nci pal modes or , i n other words, supposes that ther e i s no shunt
reactance at the juncti on. Carryi ng out thi s pr ocedur e, the pri nci pal
transformer constant A for the juncti on i s found to be
J
1 A2/A;
A=
1
1 A*/x;
[JJ(l L &)d&l
(57)
wher e AH and & are the cutoff wavel engths i n the H-secti on and the
rectangul ar gui de and FOHand EORare the vector tangential electric fields
i n the fundamental modes, whi l e the i ntegral i s carri ed over the common
i nterface. ~OH and ~OR are normalized so that
H
(a. .%f)dls. =
H
(L . L.)ds, = 1. (58)
For H-to-rectangul ar juncti ons,
X2 )4
p
l i i
A=
abl
~:
I
m
lE
si n 2XR1
l
G 2d COS2 x.d
2X Hl lshx~
[
,9 (59)
x~ cos X.Y1cos XR(l + s) Cos xR1 Cos XH(Z + s)
_
sm SXH x; xi 1
wher e XH = %/~H and XR = z~/~R.
When al l H-secti on di mensi ons are
smal l compared wi th AH and AR, this may be written as
SEC. 5.6]
WA VEGUI DE-OUTPtJ !l CI RCUI TS 201
f
1
(60)
Equati on (59) gi ves excel l ent agreement wi th experi ment when the
assumpti ons of the anal ysi s are ful fi l l ed. The transformer constants
wer e measured for an H-secti on juncti on at several wavel engths from
7.5 to 13.5 cm. The end cor r ecti ons wer e found to be enti rel y negl i gi bl e,
whi l e the val ues of
/.
1;
A
~:
whi ch shoul d, accordi ng to Eq. (59), be frequency i ndependent, wer e
found to be as i ndi cated i n Tabl e 5.1. The di mensi ons i n thi s case wer e
such that the sl ot wi dth was smal l compared wi th the gui de wi dth. I t
shoul d be noted that the transformer effect at the juncti on i s such as to
rai se the i mpedance l evel even above that of the rectangul ar gui de.
Usi ng thi s val ue of A one may now cal cul ate E./ H, at the center of the
crossbar at the juncti on wi th the tube and obtai n
TABLE5,1.TRANSFORMER CONSTANTS OF AN H-SECTI ONJUNCTI ON
Di meri si onsof H-secti on: d = 0.191 cm; 1 = 0.952 cm; s = 0.495 cm; h = 1.95cm
Di mensi onsof rectangul argui de: b = 3.81 cm; a = 8.58 cm
h,, cm
7.16
8.46
9.51
10.58
11.51
12.57
36.3
34,6
39.9
32.6
36.0
36.7
AVG36. O f 2.2*
+
CR,degr ees
+10.0
+4.3
3.6
0.7
1.4
+5.0
+
ai+, degr ees
+9,5
+5.0
+2,2
2.2
3.0
6.5
(;. . &)dsH], (61)
202 OUTPUT CI RCUI TS [SEC.54
wher e TO= 377 ohms. To a fi rst approxi mati on the coupl ed resi stance
wi l l be
~=~ E.
21 z=
(62)
si nce i t may be assumed that the magneti c fi el d i n the cyl i nders i s ver y
l oosel y coupl ed to the resonant system. For EC-secti ons the resul t
becomes
()
~z w
4d2 . lG
R=Gb
1~
A;
.(
XH
)
COSi xE COS(1 + t?)xR COS lxR COS (z + S)xH 2
-
sm sxK
x; x:
si n 21XH 2d COS2lxH
377 ohms.
-----+
1 21XH lshx~
(63)
Usi ng the approxi mati on of Eq. (60) one has
Thi s equati on i ndi cates the cri ti cal dependence of the coupl i ng upon the
wi dth of the crossbar d. I n strapped magnetrons the fi el ds i n the
resonant system vary al ong the l ength of the anode as cosh ax, wher e x
i s agai n measured from the medi an pl ane (see Chap. 4), whi l e the fi el ds
i n the crossbar vary as cos zx.v. Thi s fact wi l l affect the coupl i ng at
the juncti on wi th the resonant system, and ther e w1l l be some trans-
for mer effect. Thi s may be taken i nto account by mul ti pl yi ng R by
+.
another factor [f~ (Eo~ . Eo,r~)]Z, wher e Eo,,., is the normal i zed resonator
fi el d across the juncti on. Thi s factor may be eval uated for an H-secti on
and i s
(/
2
2
~1cosh aX COSxxx dx
)
(
)/
1
si n 21XH 2d COS2lxH
coshz aZ dx
(65)
+
1 1 21XH lshx~
o
The magni tude of thi s cor r ecti on wi l l be smal l unl ess the tube i s heavi l y
strapped. The formul as of Eqs. (63) and (64) appear to gi ve ver y cl ose
agreement wi th experi mental resul ts. For exampl e, when appl i ed to
the case of the 4J50, a 16 hol e-and-sl ot 3-cm magnetron havi ng a quarter-
wavel ength H-secti on transformer of thi s type, a col d pul l i ng fi gure
SEC.5.6] WA VEGUI DE-OUTPUT CI RCUI TS 203
of 9.3 Mc i s cal cul ated. Thi s compares favorabl y wi th the experi mental
val ues whi ch are di stri buted cl ose to 10 Mc.
One sees that contrary to the assumpti on of an earl i er paragraph,
ther e i s some frequency dependence of the transformer effect at the
[ 1
1 (A2/A&) %
juncti on Ven by the em 1 (h/A~)
Thi s may be mi ni i i zed
by maki ng k. = AE.
I ris Wi ndows.The vacuum seal i n wavegui de-output ci rcui ts i s
usual l y an i ri s wi ndow. Thi s consi sts of a di sk of l ow-l oss di el ectri c,
FI G. 5.22.
+0.5 -
+0.4
+0.3
/
0
al
:
s= + 0.2
~
/
+0.1
0
~
%
c
EO
E
z
-0.1
/
0
-0.2 -
/?
-0.3
3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5
Wavel en~i ncm
Vari ati on of shunt susceptance wi th thi ckness of
wi ndow.
usual l y gl ass, seal ed across a metal i ri s openi ng. By a sui tabl e choi ce
of the gl ass thi ckness and i ri s di ameter i t i s possi bl e to obtai n a wi ndow
that, when pl aced between ci rcul ar choke joi nts, produces a sati sfactory
match over a rel ati vel y broad band. Si nce the wi ndow i s pl aced between
gui des of si mi l ar characteri sti c i mpedance, i t behaves l i i e a pure shunt
susceptance. Fi gure 5.22 shows the vari ati on of thi s shunt susceptance
vs. wavel ength for a parti cul ar wi ndow. The apparent external Q of
the wi ndow l oaded by the matched l i ne i s 2.6. Thus ther e i s l i ttl e ener gy
stor ed i n the wi ndow i tsel f. By pl aci ng the wi ndow at a sui tabl e di stance
from the juncti on wi th the i ntermedi ate gui de, the vari ati ons i n the
resi sti ve component of the reactance at the tube may be mi ni mi zed.
PART I I
ANALYSI S OF OPERATI ON
THE I NTEI UCTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS AND
:)
THE ELECTROMAGNETI C FI ELD
()
BY L. R. WALKER
6.1. I ntroducti on.The central probl em of the present chapter i s to ( ~
exami ne the i nteracti on of the el ectr on stream wi th the el ectromagneti c
fi el d of the resonator system i n the annul ar regi on bounded by anode d: ~
T
cathode. At present the desi gn of a magnetron of gi ven characteri st s,
such as wavel ength, magneti c fi el d, operati ng vol tage, power output, apd ~
pul l i ng fi gure, i s i n pri nci pl e a strai ghtforward matter, the di ffi cul ti es ,
ari si ng i n practi ce bei ng l argel y those of real i zi ng the desi gn mechani cal ,
t
J
I n vi ew of thi s fact i t i s surpri si ng to fi nd that our understandi ng of t e ~
i nteracti on processes i s l argel y of a qual i tati ve nature. That successf~l
desi gn shoul d be possi bl e may be ascri bed to thr ee facts: (1) A formul a
;
i s at hand that has a sound theoreti cal basi s and ful l support fro!u ~
experi ment for esti mati ng the vol tage at whi ch a magnetron of gi v&~ ~-
dmensi ons wi l l oper ate when a defi ni te magneti c fi el d i s appl i ed. (2)
The behavi or of the el ectr on cl oud maybe shown to depend upon a smal l
number of parameters deri ved from the tube di mensi ons and the operati ng
vari abl es (see Chap. 7). Thus, i t i s possi bl e to say that any two mag-
netrons whi ch may be run under condi ti ons that make the val ues of these
parameters the same wi l l oper ate wi th equal effi ci ency. One magnetron
desi gn may, i n thi s way, be deri ved from another that i s known to be
sati sfactory. (3) Fi nal l y, exper i ence has shown that the effi ci ency of
magnetrons i s remarkabl y i nsensi ti ve to l arge changes i n magneti c fi el d
and d-c cur r ent and, to a somewhat l esser extent, to changes i n l oad.
A performance chart for a 3-cm magnetron i s shown i n Fi g. 6.1, whi ch
may be r egar ded as typi cal of present desi gn. Fi gure 6.2 shows the
effect of l oad upon the effi ci ency of the same tube. I n thi s fi gure the
el ectroni c effi ci ency has been pl otted as a functi on of the el ectroni c (or
l oad) conductance. As a resul t of thi s broad range of sati sfactory
operati onal condi ti ons i t i s evi dentl y possi bl e to al l ow consi derabl e
l eeway i n the choi ce of desi gn parameters and sti l l be confi dent that a
good magnetron wi l l be obtai ned. Presumabl y, i t i s a consequence of
thk happy si tuati on that i t has not been thought essenti al duri ng the
warti me devel opment of magnetrons to attack thoroughl y the probl em
of understandi ng the processes wher eby the el ectrons transfer ener gy
to the osci l l ati n~ fi el d.
I
207
208
lNTERACTiON OF THE EL.?X1RONS [SEC. 61
22
I I I l NJ I
50 kw 1?0
24
250
300 kw O,,a
200 \
/
\ .
---
\
\ .
0.670
4
\
0.634
20
/
I
x
/
\ .
/
\
I
\
/ o>85
18
H. ,,
\
\
\
~
/ <
\
.S 16
\ .
\
- .
3
/ -
/ <
\
\
=
~oi :,x: .0445
> 14
\
\
2

\
--- ,
12
/ ~
\
10
.0
---
. .-
./-
N
/. 2*. /
./ -
.
8
/ .
. --
./ -
/ - ./ --
/ -
0.270
___
6 ,
0
4
8 12 16 20 24 28 32
D-ccur r enti n amp
Fm. 6.1.D-c vol tage vs. d-c cur r ent for typi cal 3-cm magnetron (N = 16) wi th
magneti c l i el di n weherB/sq meter, -. ---power output i n kw, nnd efi ci ency
i n per cent,
z 70
g
~60
; 50
~40
$30
%
,s 20
s
~ 10
i zo
O 0.1 0.2 03 04 05 06 0.7 08 0.9 10
El ectroni cconductance (- G4) i n arbi traryuni ts
Fm. 6.2.Mectroni c effi ci ency as a functi on of el ectroni c conductance for a typi cal 3-cm
magnetron (N = 16).
&9C.6.2] THE ASS UMPTI OiV,~ lJ NDERLYI NG THE AN AI . YSI S 209
Ther e i s l i ttl e doubt that an acceptabl e qual i tati ve descri pti on of the
process may be gi ven, and the pi cture that thi s offers has been adequatel y
veri fi ed i n those few i nstances for whi ch numeri cal cal cul ati ons have been
undertaken. Quanti tati vel y and anal yti cal l y, however , the progress
toward a sol uti on has been meager. The steady-state probl em may be
formul ated i n the fol l owi ng way. From a gi ven appl i ed d-c vol tage
and r-f vol tage at the anode and a uni form magneti c fi el d i n an i nteracti on
space of known di mensi ons, cal cul ate the d-c and r-f currents that wi l l
fl ow to the anode. Then from these data, the i nput d-c power and the
output r-f power may be cal cul ated and, consequentl y, the effi ci ency.
Knowi ng the i n-phase and out-of-phase components of the r-f cur r ent
and the r-f vol tage, the admi ttance of the el ectr on stream i s cal cul abl e,
and thi s wi l l be the negati ve of the l oad admi ttance measured at sui tabl y
defi ned termi nal s on the anode surface. Thi s probl em has not been
sol ved anal yti cal l y under any set of operati ng condi ti ons, even i n an
approxi mate fashi on. Numeri cal sol uti ons have been obtai ned for a
few i sol ated cases but never for a range of val ues of the operati ng param-
eter s i n the same tube.
Turni ng from the steady-state probl em to that of the i ni ti ati on of
osci l l ati ons, an equal l y unsati sfactory condi ti on i s reveal ed. No ri gorous
cri teri on has been establ i shed that wi l l determi ne whether or not, under
gi ven condi ti ons of magneti c fi el d, vol tage, and. l oad, osci l l ati ons wi l l
bui l d up from noi se l evel . Si mi l arl y, ther e i s no theor y of starti ng ti me,
whi ch woul d requi re a sol uti on of the probl em wi th a constantl y i ncreasi ng
d-c vol tage. 1
Al though the i nconcl usi ve status of many of these probl ems may be
attri buted to the fact that emphasi s has been l ai d on empi ri cal devel op-
ment, they neverthel ess present formi dabl e anal yti cal di ffi cul ti es. I n
the a. .ount of the theor y gi ven i n thi s chapter an attempt i s made to
formul ate the probl em i n a strai ghtforward way and thus to show wher e
the di ffi cul ti es ari se that pr event a compl ete sol uti on. An outl i ne of
vari ous attempts to sol ve the mai n probl em and certai n si mpl i fi ed versi ons
of i t are gi ven.
6.2. The Assumpti ons Underl yi ng the Anal ysi s.-Any di scussi on of
the i nteracti on probl em must begi rt by maki ng a number of assumpti ons,
whi ch are of varyi ng degr ees of pl ausi bi l i ty. The mor e fami l i ar of these
wi l l be di scussed befor e setti ng up the equaki nns of moti on and the fi el d
equati ons. The justi fi cati on and si gni fi cance of some statements made
her e may not, however , appear unti l l ater. Refer ence to FM. 63 wi l l
i ndi cate the regi on i n whi ch the fl ow of etectr ons i s to be i nvesti gated.
The cyl i ndri cal cathode of radi us r. i s hel d at aero potenti al ; the concentri c
I See, however , Chaps. 8 and 9 of thi e vol ume for pn empi ri cal approach to the
amdyei eof transi entbehavi or.
210 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC. 62
anode of radi us ra has appl i ed to i t a d-c potenti al VO. I n the annul ar
regi on bounded by anode and cathode ther e exi st r-f fi el ds that form part
of the total fi el d of the resonant system and that must, ther efor e, sati sfy
certai n boundary condi ti ons at the anode. The appl i ed magneti c fi el d
i s supposed ever ywher e to be constant i n magni tude and to be paral l el
to the axi s of the cyl i nders, whi ch axi s i s al so taken as the z-axi s of a
system of pol ar coordi nates.
Fm. 6.3.I nteracti onapaceandrel atedcoordi natesystemfor (N = 8) magnetron.
The fi rst assumpti on i s that the whol e probl em may be r educed to a
two-di mensi onal one. I n real magnetrons thi s can be a good approxi ma-
ti on or dy for regi ons near to the medi an pl ane of the tube, si nce ther e wi l l
be appreci abl e end effects at the extremi ti es of the i nteracti on space.
Her e ther e wi l l be, because of the di sconti nui ty i n the cross secti on of
the anode bl ock and the possi bl e pr esence of straps and of hats on the
cathode, a consi derabl e modi fi cati on of the tangenti al fi el d, and further-
mor e z-components of the d-c and r-f el ectri c fi el ds wi l l appear. I n vi ew
of the extr eme compl exi ty of the fi el d patterns i n thi s regi on, however ,
i t i s desi rabl e to i gnore these end effects. Experi mental l y, no speci fi c
effects have been found that i ndi cate cri ti cal condi ti ons i n the end regi ons,
and i t i s roughl y tr ue that a magnetron of doubl e l ength behaves l i ke
one of si ngl e l ength operati ng at hal f the cur r ent and power l evel i f the
effects of l ength i n mode spectrum are compensated for. Thus, i t i s
probabl y justi fi abl e at present to treat the magnetron as part of an i nfi ni te
cyl i ndri cal structure i n whi ch al l the el ectri c fi el ds are tangenti al and
SEC. 6.2] THE ASSUMPTI ONS UNDERLYI NG THE ANALYSI S 211
i ndependent of the z coordi nate and i n whi ch the magneti c fi el ds are
purel y axi al . Si mi l arl y i t wi l l be supposed that the moti on of the
el ectrons i s whol l y i n the (r-@) -pl ane. Si nce the thermal vel oci ty of emi s-
si on i n the z di recti on i s smal l , thi s i s a reasonabl e assumpti on i n the
absence of axi al el ectri c fi el ds. I t may be noted that the functi on
of cathode hats, whether el ectri c or magneti c, i s to cause a del i berate
di storti on of the el ectri c or magneti c fi el ds at the ends of the i nteracti on
space, thus tendi ng to keep el ectrons wi thi n the i nteracti on space despi te
the effects of space-charge repul si on i n an axi al di recti on.
I t i s customary to assume that rel ati vi sti c cor r ecti ons and other
effects that depend upon the fi ni te vel oci ty of propagati on of l i ght may
be i gnored. These i ncl ude the rel ati vi sti c vari ati on of mass wi th vel oci ty,
the i nfl uence of the r-f magneti c fi el d on the el ectr on moti on, the change
i n d-c magneti c fi el d pr oduced by the ci rcul ati ng currents, and the use
of the wave equati on rather than Lapl aces equati on. The condi ti ons
under whi ch i t i s val i d to make these approxi mati ons are di scussed at
some l ength i n the succeedi ng secti on. I t wi l l be found that some of the
si mpl er consequences of the equati ons of moti on may be pr eser ved i n
rel ati vi sti c form.
Condi ti ons of space-charge l i mi tati on are general l y supposed to
prevai l at the cathode, and, i n consequence, the potenti al s and radi al
components of al l fi el ds are supposed to vani sh ther e. I t i s i mpossi bl e
to test the accuracy of thi s hypothesi s, for ther e i s no si mpl e state of the
space charge i n a magneti c fi el d the theor y of whi ch has been suffi ci entl y
wor ked out to provi de an experi mental test. At present one can merel y
assume the condi ti on tr ue unti l i t i s demonstrated that i t l eads to fal se
resul ts. I t i s tr ue that the cur r ent densi ti es drawn i n magnetrons fr e-
quentl y exceed substanti al l y those whi ch can be drawn from i denti cal
cathodes i n pul sed di odes under veri fi abl y space-charge-l i mi ted condi -
ti ons. However , the exi stence of excess cathode heati ng duri ng mag-
netr on operati on i ndi cates the pr esence of back bombardment by
el ectrons, and the known secondary-emi tti ng properti es of oxi de cathodes
suggest that secondary emi ssi on i s probabl y suffi ci ent to yi el d the
requi red cur r ent densi ti es (see Chap. 12). The possi bi l i ty of secondary
emi ssi on from contami nated anode surfaces i s a further compl i cati on
whi ch i s i gnored.
Associ ated cl osel y yi th the assumpti on of space-charge l i mi tati on i s
the hypothesi s of a zer o vel oci ty of emi ssi on of the el ectrons from the
cathode. Pl ai nl y, the el ectrons have actual l y a thermal vel oci ty di s-
tri buti on at the cathode, but i t seems reasonabl e to suppose, si nce the
mean thermal ener gy i s so smal l compared wi th the energi es acqui red
by the el ectrons i n movi ng through the fi el d, that the effect of the di s-
tri buti on i s negl &bl e i n an opsrati ng magnetron. I t wi l l appear that
212 I N TERAC~I ON Oh THE ELECTRONS [SEC.6.2
ther e are certai n oversi mpl i fi ed condi ti ons havi ng cri ti cal sol uti ons that
mi ght be affected by an ener gy di stri buti on at the cathode, but these are
far from si mul ati ng the condi ti ons i n a real tube. The experi mental
observati on that, for many tubes, operati on i s i ndependent of cathode
temperature over a wi de range may confi rm the assumpti on that the
i ni ti al vel oci ty di stri buti on of the el ectrons i s not si gni fi cant.
A most i mportant si mpl i fi cati on i n the probl em i s effected by a further
set of assumpti ons concerni ng the nature of the fi el d wi th whi ch the
el ectrons i nteract. These si mpl i fi cati ons may be combi ned i nto the
defi ni ti on of an anode vol tage of the form ~, + V, cos (no a,t),
wher e n i s the mode number and cooi s 21r ti mes the frequency of the
resonant system. The pri nci pal poi nt her e i s that the r-f vol tage i s
r epr esented by a travel i ng wave. Thi s assumpti on wi l l be di scussed
mor e ful l y i n Sec. 6.3, but the argument may be summari zed her e. The
el ectromagneti c fi el d i n the i nteracti on space may al ways be expanded
i n a seri es of Fouri er components, each of whi ch represents a travel i ng
or rotati ng wave i n the i nteracti on space.
For a parti cl e movi ng so
that i ts angul ar vel oci ty i s cl ose to that of the sl owest of these waves, the
other components (at l east for the condi ti on of mmode operati on)
r epr esent a hi gh- frequency perturbati on the effect of whi ch can be
i gnored i n general . A mor e compl i cated si tuati on ari ses, however ,
for modes other than the r-mode. I t wi l l be shown that for a si ngl e
rotati ng component i t i s al ways possi bl e to defi ne a vol tage or potenti al
i n whi ch the el ectrons move. The form used above for the anode vol tage
al so assumes that the anode surface i s a zer o i mpedance sheet at the
harmoni c frequenci es 2u0, 3b0, etc., so that the harmoni c components of
cur r ent i nduce no correspondi ng vol tage components on the anode.
The steady-state probl em may now be formul ated agai n for the sake
of cl ari ty. I n the annul ar regi on between two coaxi al cyl i nders ther e
exi sts a constant, uni form magneti c fi el d B. paral l el to the axi s of the
cyl i nders. The i nner cyl i nder of radi us r. i s hel d at zer o potenti al , and
the radi al fi el ds at i ts surface al so vani sh; el ectrons are emi tted from thk
surface wi th zer o vel oci ty, and thei r z-component of vel oci ty remai ns
aero. The el ectromagneti c fi el ds are transverse el ectri c, and a potenti al
Vo + v, Cos (n@ - Mt) exi sts at the surface of the outer cyl i nder of
radi us ra. I t i s desi red to cal cul ate the radi al cur r ent densi ty J , at the
anode i n the form of a Fouri er seri es
J , = J ,,o + J ,,l cos (nd uot) + J,,-, si n (n@ ud)
+ J,,, cos 2(7u$ uot) + J .,.-, si n 2(n@ ud) + hi gher terms.
Then the d-c power i nput i s 2n-r,J J ,,oVO or ZOVO,and the r-f power output
1S. A. Sohel kunoff,El ectrornqneti cWaves,Van Nostrand,New York, 1943,p. 154.
SEC. &2.
THE ASSUMPTI ONS UNDERLYI NG THE ANALYSI S 213
30
28 . ,
26
/
/
/ 1
Threshol d vol tage
24
22
20
18
~
.E 16-
%
B
~
14
2
12
35770
10
8
2570
6
4
2
00 0.1
o.?
0.3 0.4 05 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Magneti c fi el dB (i nwebersl sqmeter )
FI G.6.4.D-c vol tage vs. magneti cfi el d for typi cal 3-cm magnetron (N = 16) wi th
cur r ent i n amp, effi ci ency i n per cent,
214 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS
[SEC. 6.2
i s x-c&J ,,lVl or ~I I V1. The admi ttance of the el ectr on stream i s
The sal i ent features of magnetron operati on maybe poi nted out agai n
by an exami nati on of Fi gs. 6.1, 6.4, 6.5, and 6.6 whi ch show the perform-
ance of strapped magnetrons i n the al ternati ve forms of Vo vs. 10 and V.
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
z 14
c
~13
9
~ 12
J 11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
01234567891011 121314151617181920
D+currant i namp
FI G.6.5.D-cvol tage vs. d-c cur r ent for typi cal 9-cm strapped magnetron (N = S)
wi th magneti c fi el d i n webers/sq meter, ----- power output i n kw, - effi ci ency
i n per cent.
vs. B. pl ots. Si mi l arl y Fi g. 67 shows the performance of a ri si ng-sun
magnetron on a VO vs. 10 pl ot. Features that are typi cal of the normal
performance of strapped magnetrons are the l i neari ty of the operati ng
l i nes i n the V. vs. 10 di agram and the l i neari ty of the constant-current
l i nes i n the B, vs. VO di agram, the general tendency of effi ci ency to
i ncrease monotoni cal l y wi th magneti c fi el d at fi xed current, and the
fal l i ng of the effi ci ency at ver y l ow and at hi gh currents. The fal l i n
I
I
SEC. 02] THE ASSUMPTI ONS UNDERLYI NG THE AI vALYSI S
215
effi ci ency at l ow currents vari es rather markedl y among dMerent types
of tube. Tt i s general l y bel i eved to be due to l eakage current, a compr e-
hensi ve term used to r efer to el ectrons that reach the anode by means
other than a di rect i nteracti on wi th the r-f fi el d. The ri si ng-sun magne-
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
3
: 16
M
$
>14
2
12
I I I I I I I I II
-7/0 ,
K@
10I
I I I I I I I A .r ,r Z1
,/
K I
..- I I /1 ,,
I I I I WI Tf M
,
8
[ I
,,
6
4
2
ooAu_&L
I
! 1 A ! 1 ! I I 1 1 I , , , t ,
J
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Magneti c fi el dB(i nwebers/sq. meter )
Fm. 6.6.D-c vol tage vs. magneti c fi el d for typi cal 9-cm magnetron (N = 8) wi th
cur r ent i n amp, - e5ti ency i n per cent.
tr on i s further compl i cated by havi ng a regi on of magneti c fi el d i n whi ch
the effi ci ency temporari l y fal l s off (see Chap. 3).
Fi gure 6.8 shows a seri es of operati ng l i nes on a (Va,l O)-pl ot for vari ous
val ues of the l oad conductance GL = G~. The operati ng l i nes are
now seen to be i n general somewhat cur ved and to move toward hi gher
vol tages as GL i s i ncreased.
These data are deri ved from a 10-cm
216 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS
[Sac. 62
magnetron, butthebehavi or i sgeneral l y obser ved foral l typee. Fi nal l y
Fi g. 69 shows the vari ati ons of 11 and l _L a.a functi ons of Voand V1.
Exhausti ve data of thi s nature have rarel y been taken, but general
exper i ence confi rms the mai n features of Fi g. 6.9.
35.(
30.C
25.0
z
=
&
$
g
20.0
15.0
Q:
10.0!
.-
\
\
\
H+ 7
,,
Y/ f .
..
. . .
K ba.----,
\ -1 1
-..
A
u
15 30 45 60 75 90
D-ccurrent i namp
~l G.6.7.D-cvol tage vs. d-c cur r ent for a typi cal 3-cm ri si ng-sun magnetron wi th
magneti c fi el d i n gauss, ----- power output i n kw, efficiency i n per cent.
Al l these curves l end support to the observati on that the effi ci ency
of operati on of the magnetron i s a sl owl y varyi ng functi on of vol tage,
current, magneti c fi el d, and l oad. I t i s al so i ndi cated experi mental l y
1The data from whi ch thi s pl ot was obtai ned me gi ven in the l ast secti on of
Chap. 7.
SEC. 6.3] THE FI ELD EQUATI ONS 217
that the properti es of the space-charge cl oud are si ngul arl y frequency
i ndependent and certai nl y negl i gi bl y so compared wi th the resonant
system.
Dc cur r ent i n amp
FI G.6,8.Operati ng l i nes for vari ous val ues of el ectroni c conductance and r -f vol tage
at a fi xed magneti c fi el d. 10-cm magnetron, 1371 gauss, N = 8 wi th el ectroni c
conductance i n mhos, ----- peak r -f vol tage i n kv. (Val ues i n parentheses are r educed
val ues.) Reduced l i near cur r ent densi ti es are gi ven by 1/36.
6.3. The Fi el d Equati ons.The Fouri er anal ysi s of the r-f fi el ds
exi sti ng i n the i nteracti on space was shown i n Chap. 2 to l ead to an
i ndefi ni te number of components, the dependence of whi ch upon ti me
218 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC.5,8
and angl e was gover med by a term of the form exp j(cmt + ?x$), wher e
p=*[m-N(+i )l =*[--N
Her e N i s the number of segments; 1 an arbi trary i nteger, posi ti ve or
negati ve; m the mode number i n the sense of Chap, 4; and n the usual
mode number = (N/2) m. Waves for whi ch p i s negati ve travel
/./u
15.05kv_
14.40
13.75
(d<)
3.85
13s0
12.45
A
13.5
11,80/
11.15
10.50
5 10 15 20 25
I .,, totalout.of.phmecur r ent i namp
)
FI Q.6.9.I n-phase and out-of-phase r -f cur r ent ampl i tudes as a functi on of d-c and r -f
vol tagee. Reduced l i near cur r ent densi ti es are gi ven by 1/36.
countercl ockwi se or i n the same sense as an el ectr on i n a posi ti ve mag-
neti c fi el d. I n the r-mode the sl owest wave travel i ng i n the same sense
as the el ectrons has p = N/2(rn = 0, 1 = O). For an el ectr on at rest
wi th r espect to such a wave or travel i ng so that on the average i t i s at
rest wi th r espect to i t, another component, p say, wi l l appear to move
wi th an angul ar vel oci ty M( 1/p + 2/ N) and thus produces a perturba-
ti on whose frequency i s puo(l/p + 2/ N) or
++?01
= Uo[l + (21 + l )].
1The appearanceof thi s parti cul ar set of components i s al ways to be expectedi f
the fi el ds sati sfy the rel ati on, VI O + (2m/ N)] = e~flN V(+), regardl ess of the for m of
+. +-
V(@). For, i f V(~) = ~ a~ej~, then V[.$ + (z7r/N)] = ~ a~ei@+it2~~/NJ and
. .
one must have 2nu/N = (2mx/N) + 2~ or m = n pN, wher e p is arbi trary but
i ntegral .
i
6EC.63] THE FI ELD EQUATI ONS
219
Thus, the perturbati ons pr oduced by the othor components have the
frequenci es + 2u0, + 4w0, k 6w0, etc.
The si tuati on i s somewhat mor e
compl i cated for the other modes. For the mth mode, the two sl owest
components i n the countercl ockwi se di recti on have p = [(N/2) f m],
and the frequenci es of the perturbati ons due to other components are found
[
N(Z + 1)
1[
N(l + 1)
1
0be Ven by(N/ 2) + m 0 and 2 (N/ 2)+ m 0 n he case cOrre-
[ 1[ 1
Pending ohe+ ign and (N/& m 0 and 2 + (N/~ m w
for the case of the si gn. For the case m = 1, whi ch i s usual l y of most
i nterest when m # O, ther e are al ways l ow-frequency perturbati ons; the
`owestfrequenci esare[ (N/;+ l l uOi n`hefi r`tcase"nd[ (N;;- I l @o
i n the second. I t fol l ows that i n r-mode operati on the perturbati ons,
pr oduced by other components upon an el ectr on that moves sl owl y on
the average wi th r espect to the sl owest countercl ockwi se component, are
al l of hi gh frequency, whereas for other modes thi s i s certai nl y not the
case. I t appears, then, to be pl ausi bl e, at l east as an i ni ti al assumpti on,
to i gnore al l the fi el d components save the sl owest countercl ockwi se one
when the tube i s runni ng i n the r-mode. To justi fy the assumpti on
compl etel y i t woul d be necessary to show that i n the fi el d of such a si ngl e
component el ectrons actual l y move so that they have on the average onl y
a smal l angul ar momentum wi th r espect to the wave and furthermore
that the hi gh-frequency waves do i ndeed have no secul ar effect. I t wi l l
be found that thi s justi fi cati on can be carri ed through i n part and al so
that ther e are certai n consequences of the rotati ng-wave hypothesi s
whi ch are adequatel y confi rmed by experi ment.
I t i s, i n fact, found that
even i n cases of operati on i n modes for whi ch m # O, a si ngl e component
determi nes certai n features of the operati on. The above consi derati ons
appl y to strapped magnetrons wi thout reservati on, but i n the ri si ng-sun
desi gn ther e i s al ways present, even i n the r-mode, a component for whi ch
p = O (see Chap. 3). The effects of thi s component have to be gi ven
speci al consi derati on (see Sec. 6. 11).
A consi derabl e si mpl i fi cati on i s i ntroduced i nto the probl em i f onl y
one component of the total fi el d need be consi dered. For then i n a system
of axes that rotates wi th the angul ar vel oci ty of thi s wave, al l el ectr o-
magneti c fi el ds are i ndependent of ti me. I n addi ti on, the el ectr on di s-
tri buti on i n vel oci ty and posi ti on wi l l be a stati onary one. Thus, i f
the el ectromagneti c fi el ds i n the i nteracti on space are descri bed by a
scal ar potenti al A Oand a vector potenti al A = A,, A+, A., these are func-
ti ons of the vari abl es r, @ d, z, wher e u i s the angul ar vel oci ty of the
rotati ng wave. one may wri te ~ = @ at. As has been i ndi cated
220 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS
[SEC. 6.3
i n the previ ous secti on i t wi l l be assumed that the fi el ds are transverse
el ectri c. and i ndependent of a. The potenti al s are thus functi ons of r
and #al one.
I n wri ti ng down the fi el d equati ons and the equati ons of moti on, the
rel ati vi sti c form wi l l be used for the l atter and no terms dr opped from
the former. I n thi s way, the approxi mati ons that i nvol ve the vel oci ty
of l i ght may be made consi stentl y. The MKS system of uni ts wi l l be
adhered to throughout.
The fi el d vector s E and B. whi ch wi l l be supposed to contai n the
appl i ed fi el ds are connected wi th the potenti al s through the equati ons
dA
E=grad AOx
(1)
and
B. = curl , A.
(2)
The potenti al s themsel ves sati sfy
a2Ao p
V2A0 I WO ap EO
. .
wi th p posi ti ve for an el ectr on cl oud and
dl v grad A pOCO ~ = ~oJ,
(3)
(4)
wher e p~ = 1.257 X 108 henry/meter, co = 8.854 X 1012 farad/meter,
and p and J are the charge and cur r ent densi ti es at any poi nt. The
subskhary rel ati on hol ds
di v A + POCO ~ = 0. (5)
Equati ons (1) to (5) may now be wri tten out i n the (r-~) -system. I t
shoul d be noted that
from the defi ni ti on of $ and from the fact that 8/& = O. Equati ons
(1) and (2) gi ve
(6)
Equati ons (3) and (5) gi ve
(8)
@)
SEC.6.3] THE FI ELD EQUATI ONS 221
and
(l o)
Equati on (4) requi res a mor e extended treatment. One has the rel ati ons
A. + jAv = e-~~(A, + jA$) and J= + jl v = e-y~(J, + jJ4).
Thus, Eq. (4) may be wri tten i n an obvi ous notati on
(
V;,$ _
)
wo ~ [e-i* (A, + jAJl = poe-WJ, + jJJ
(11)
or
yi el di ng the pai r of equati ons
and
Equati ons (9), (10), (14a), and (14b) may be combi ned to gi ve the two
equati ons that i mpl y the equati on of conti nui ty, namel y,
+(:-*@)%] 15)
the stream functi on for el ectr on
The bracketed functi on i s essenti al l y
fl ow i n the rotati ng system.
I t i s to be noted that i n wri ti ug down Eqs. (3) and (4), whi ch i mpl y
that the fi el ds are deri vabl e from a conti nuous di stri buti on of charge
and current, a further assumpti on i s bei ng made whi ch requi res justi fi ca-
ti on. Stri ctl y speakng the charge di stri buti on i s not conti nuous, and
222 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC.6.4
the expressi on p shoul d be repl aced by a summati on over the i ndi vi dual
el ect rons. I n usi ng the expressi on for the average charge densi ty to
cal cul ate the fi el d, one i s i gnori ng the effects of what i s usual l y r efer r ed
to as el ectroni nteracti on, namel y, the process wher eby two el ectrons
exchange ener gy di rectl y as a resul t of a cl ose encounter rather than
through thei r average effect on the fi el d. Some i dea of the magni tude
of thi s effect maybe obtai ned i n the fol l owi ng way. Consi der avol ume
V contai ni ng nV el ectrons di stri buted at random. Then the for ce at
any poi nt fl uctuates stati sti cal l y about a mean val ue. The anal ogous
probl em of the gravi tati onal fi el d of a di stri buti on of stars has been
consi dered by Chandrasekhar, and i t i s found that the natural measure
of the for ce fl uctuati ons i s
(16)
i n the notati on of the present probl em (p/ e = n). Assumi ng an emi ssi on
of 50 amp/sq cm and a radi al vel oci ty of c/10 one fi nds for F the val ue
104 vol ts/meter or 0.1 kv/cm. Thi s i s ver y smal l compared wi th the
fi el d strengths normal l y exi sti ng i n the magnetron (20 to 50 kv/cm).
The pr ocem of el ectr on i nteracti on, however , must be expected to pl ay
some r ol e i n the nei ghborhood of the cathode wher e el ectr on densi ti es
are hi ghest and the fi el ds weakest.
6.4. The Equati ons of Moti on.The equati ons of moti on may be
deri ved i n numerous ways. I t i s conveni ent her e to make use of the
Lagrangi an functi on. 2 Two theorems concerni ng the Lagrangi an
equati ons of moti on wi l l be found useful i n thi s connecti on. Suppose
that L(xl, x2, . . . W; il, x2, . . . X.; t) i s the Lagrangi an functi on of a
parti cl e, i nvol vi ng the ti me expl i ci tl y, but that by means of a change of
,
vari abl es. l =zl + at, zj=z~, . . . . . . x: = z., the ti me dependence
may be el i mi nated. One haa
d
= z
1S. Chandrasekhar,Stochasti c Probl emsi n Physi cs and Astronomy, Rev.Mod.
Phyu., 15, 1 (1943).
z A ver y l uci d account of Lagrangi anand Hami l toni an equati ons for hi gh+peed
(rel ati vi sti c)parti cl es i s gi ven by MacCOl l ,Bell System Tech. .Tour,, 29, 153 (1943).
?
I
I
{
SEC. 6.4] THE EQUATI ONS OF MOTI ON 223
Thus, the Lagrangi an equati ons of moti on
()
d dL _ 8L
a~z
q=l ,2, . ..n
(17a)
become
(-) -
d dL _ aL
~ ax; ax:
(17b)
wher e
L(x;, z;, ; i ;, 2;, . . ; t) = L(x1, x2,; *I, XZ, o 0 ; t). (18)
The Eqs. (17a) and (17b) for a Lagrangi an that does not i nvol ve the ti me
di rectl y are known to possess the i ntegral
(19)
Thus, an i ntegral may be found for the equati ons of moti on al though
the fi el ds i n the ori gi nal coordi nates are ti me varyi ng.
Now consi der H and L as functi ons of the coordi nates x,, and denote
deri vati ves wi th r espect to the coordi nates by d/dz4. Then
aH
+H%+MZ+ZXX3
.-$
~
and usi ng the equati ons of moti on (17b) wher e s = 1, 2, . , n
E+zx&(%)-5t$)l =0
i f al l the parti cl es have the same ener gy constant. Then i n 3 di mensi ons,
i f one wri tes $ = pa, one hsa curl ~ = i ~, Wi th ~i ndependent of posi ti on
a
and ti me.
The Lagrangi an functi on for an el ectr on i n a transverse el ectri c fi el d
i s i n the rel ati vi sti c case, wi th e a posi ti ve quanti ty,
Si nce i t has been supposed that the transformati on @ = ~ + d wi l l
el i mi nate the ti me dependence of the potenti al s, the l emmas of the
I Where the same equati on i s gi ven i n rel ati vi sti cand nonrel ati vi sti cforms, the
same number wi l l be used wi th the afl i x R or N to di sti ngui shthe casea.
224 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS
[SEC.64
precedi ng paragraph maybe used. C)nehas
[
1
?2 + P(I J + W)2 M
L = mot 1 ~z
+ e[AO
T/i, @ + a)Ad],
(22R)
and the equati ons of moti on are
and
[
aAo
a(rA+)
.
F
1
i.!l&(#+@)TJ
(24R)
wher e
/y =
t + T(* + GJ )2.
c
Or, al ternati vel y,
[
d m,r(# + u)
Z (1 j3)*$
1
~A
=edt[ o
The i ntegral H may be formed:
[
H=mds l
1
t + r2(ql + w)2 H
@
aA
1
_+!g_Lx,
(25R)
[
8(rA$) 8A,
1
wrA.J +ei ~.
a+
(26R)

e[A O iA, r(~ + ~)A~]

e(AO O,A$). (27R)
I f the conventi on i s i ntroduced that A 0, A+, and A, shal l al l vani sh at
the cathode and the assumpti on of vani shi ng vel oci ti es at the cathode
i n the stati onary coordi nate system be recal l ed, one has
Si nce His i ndependent of the el ectr on consi dered, the second l e~a (m)
hol ds wi th A = O, and one has
I
SEC. 64]
THE EQUATIONS OF MOTI OI V
225
Thi s equati on may be wri tten as a pai r of equati ons
and (27 R) becomes
I n the nonrel ati vi sti c case a si mi l ar set of equati ons i s found. The
Lagrangi an i s now
L = 0 r + 7-(J + ti )z] + e[Ao iA. r(i + ~)A4], (zl~)
~[
and the equati ons of moti on are
I n thi s case the equati ons may be further modi fi ed to read
These equati ons have a si mpl e i nterpretati on. They are the equati ons
of moti on of a parti cl e movi ng i n a scal ar potenti al
. .
and i n a magneti c fi el d
2m~
~ (rA+) a$ ~
The term (m,/2e)c@r i s rel ated to the centri fugal for ce, and the term
2m~/e to the Cori ol i s for ce, appropri ate to the rotati ng axes. Such a
formul ati on of the equati ons was not possi bl e i n the rel ati vi sti c case.
226
I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS
The i ntegral H i s now
H = ~[?+r(J +@) l -e[AO tA, r(~+@)-4t]
+ rm[t + T21J(J+ 0)1 etA,
mo ~ z.
= y (F2+ ~$) e(Ao noAd) ~~~ ,
and wi th the usual condi ti ons at r = r,, one has H = O.
and
e~o+%=Ao[(eAr+ %Y+(eA$+:%Yl
I t wi l l be noted that Ecw. (32R) and (32N) are essenti al l y the
[SEC. 6.4
(27N)
(29N)
(30N)
(31N)
(32N)
Hami l -
ton-Jacobi equati ons of the system, si nce a W/ W = w (8 W/ t3#).
W i s thus the acti on functi on of the system.1 The i ntroducti on of the
acti on functi on i n the magnetron probl em does not appear to be so
frui tful as one mi ght expect. The reason for thi s l i es i n one of the most
compl i cated characteri sti cs of the el ectr on moti on, namel y, that the
moti on i s essenti al l y of a mul ti pl e-stream type. Through any poi nt
i n the i nteracti on space, transformed i nto the rotati ng system, ther e wi l l
pass a number of el ectr on orbi ts. Thi s fact hardl y requi res pr oof, but
i t has been establ i shed empi ri cal l y by computati on of orbi ts. I t fol l ows
as a consequence that the el ectr on vel oci ty i s a mul ti pl e val ued functi on
of posi ti on and thus that W has si mi l ar properti es. W, then, i s a functi on
havi ng many branches, and these branches wi l l meet al ong branch
curves whi ch wi l l be the envel ope of a seri es of el ectr on trajectori es.
The character of these branch curves has been di scussed by Cherry,2
who has gi ven expressi ons for the potenti al and vel oci ti es i n the nei ghbor-
hood of such curves.
The mul ti pl e-stream pr oper ty of the el ectr on fl ow gi ves ri se to sever e
anal yti cal di ffi cul ti es i n handl i ng the fi el d equati ons, for i t i s necessary
to wri te an equati on of conti nui ty for each stream, wher e a stream i s
1The functi on W has been uwd by Gabor, Fr oc.I RE, S3, 792 (1945), in probl ems
of el ectr ondynami cs.
z Cherry, General Theor y of Magnetron, Cmmci l for Sci enti fi cand I ndustri al
Research, Sydney, Repor t No. MUM-1, 1943, has di eoucsedthe formul ati on of the
m~etron equati ons h tema of ~.
SEC. 6.4] THE EQUATI ONS OF MOTI ON 22?
defi ned as a set of el ectr on orbi ts l eavi ng one branch cur ve and termi nat-
i ng on another. Wi th each stream ther e i s associ ated a charge densi ty,
and i t i s the sum of these charge densi ti es and the sum of the currents
that must be substi tuted i n Eqs. (9), (14a), and (14 b). So far ther e does
not seem to have been devel oped any anal yti cal method that wi l l effec-
ti vel y handl e al l the streams together and automati cal l y per for m the
requi red summati ons. I t i s al ways necessary to handl e the i ndi vi dual
streams separatel y and fi t them together at the branch curves.
Ther e are two i mportant equati ons that may be deduced from the
i ntegral s (27R) and (27N). Thus, i f a parti cl e i s to r~ach a gi ven poi nt
i n the i nteracti on space at al l , one must have F and ~ both real at that
poi nt. Putti ng ? = O i n Eq. (28R) and wri ti ng v + u = & one has
mo(cz 7%4) = ~
mocz + e(iio Wfl+) =
d
C4-2C+T+U =i~i)
,
(42+%) ( %) 0
& .- 2C27+J4+ c
For the real i ty of ~ one must have
(42+%3 (4-$) c
or
(33R)
The nonrel ati vi sti c anal ogue i s easi l y deduced from (27N) or from (33R)
by supposi ng TU<<c and i s
mor2u2
e(AO n.A$) s ~. (33N)
Equati ons (33N) and (33R) pl ay a ver y i mportant r ol e i n the anal ysi s
of magnetron behavi or, si nce they yi el d an i nequal i ty that the fi el ds
must sati sfy i n or der that el ectrons shal l reach a preassi gned poi nt i n the
i nteracti on space. They wi l l be di scussed further at a l ater poi nt i n thi s
secti on.
Another pai r of si gni fi cant formul as i s obtai ned by rewri ti ng (27N)
and (27R) i n terms of the stati onary coordi nates. I n thi s way one fi nds
@ =$=+) -(A - A*)
(34R)
228
I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC. 6.5
and
O = ;(t}T~2)
From (34R)
eAO -- m&2
(
<~ 1 ~2
)
l =
e(AO rcoA@) m0r2&o. (34iV)
mouT21#l
W7
+ eorA, = u a;, (35R)
and from (34N)
mO .2
j~. (35A9 eAO (r + ?2~2) = m072fju + e6m.44 = u
2
The expressi on on the l eft of Eq. (35N) i s the di fference between the
potenti al ener gy of an el ectr on i n the scal ar fi el d and the ki neti c ener gy
of the el ectron; i t ther efor e represents the ener gy l oss of the el ectr on to
the osci l l ati ng fi el d.
6.6. Condi ti ons under Whi ch Rel ati vi sti c Effects May Be El i mi nated.
Befor e di scussi ng mor e ful l y the equati ons of moti on i t i s essenti al to
fi nd out under what condi ti ons the rel ati vi sti c and propagati on effects
can be el i mi nated. The fi el d equati ons, Eqs. (9), (10), (14a), and (14b),
and the equati ons of moti on (25 R) and (26R) descri be exactl y the condi -
ti ons i n the i nteracti on space.
When one pr oceeds frc)m the rel ati vi sti c
Lagrangi an to the nonrel ati vi sti c form, the pr ocedur e i s equi val ent to
i gnori ng al l terms i n the rel ati vi sti c expressi on of hi gher power s i n v/c
than the second, wher e v i s the el ectr on vel oci ty. I t i s i mportant then
to i gnore al l terms of the same or der occurri ng i n the fi el d equati ons.
To be abl e to r ecogni ze such terms i t i s useful to i ntroduce a set of
characteri sti c vari abl es for l ength, ti me, scal ar and vector potenti al s,
and charge densi ty that wi l l be appropri ate to the rel ati vi sti c regi me.
~us, for a characteri sti c l ength one uses TO = c/u = rAO/%, si nce the
quanti ty PNOW2= CJ2/C2i s the onl y parameter occurri ng i n the fi el d
equati ons. For a characteri sti c ti me, h = l /u i s chosen; and for the
scal ar and vector potenti al s, the natural uni ts are m0c2/e and m~~e.
The characteri sti c charge densi ty i s e/mow*cO. Wri ti ng
Eqs. (9), (10), (14a), and (14b) become
&lC. 6.5] ELI MI NATI ON OF RELATI VI STI C EFFECTS
229
wher e the bar denotes cl i fferenti ati on wi th r espect to t*.
Si mi l arl y
the i ntegral s of the equati on of moti on are
I + A:r*A:=
1 T*(? + 1)
~1 T*2 r*2(l J + 1)2
(40)
and
I n or der to exami ne the condi ti ons under whi ch the above equati ons
may be si mpl i fi ed, one cal cul ates A+ for the appl i ed magneti c fi el d B, i n
the absence of an el ectr on stream. Si nce Be = (1/~) (a/ ar)(rA~), if
Ah = O at r = r., then
Bo
rA+ = (rz rz}
2
c,>
(42)
or , i n r educed vari abl es,
eBo (r*2 Y) = + (r E?9,
r*A~ =
2m.@
(43)
wher e
2mw
-y =-.
eBO
The unperturbed magni tude of T*AZ evi dentl y depends upon two
i ndependent quanti ti es: r * = 2i rr/nhO, whi ch measures the si ze of i nter-
acti on space i n terms of n~o, and 7, whi ch i s the rati o of the Larmor
frequency of the el ectr on precessi on i n a magneti c fi el d BO to the angul ar
vel oci ty of the rotati ng wave. Suppose that r z <<1, then the cond~ti on
[Eq. (33 R)] that an el ectr on shal l be abl e to reach a poi nt i n the i nter-
acti on space becomes
wher e (r*fl $) i s the contri buti on to r*A~ comi ng from the r-f fi el ds and
from the ci rcul ati ng currents. I t wi l l now be assumed that A ~, r*A$,
23fl
I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC, 65
and A: are al l smal l compared wi th uni ty. Thi s i sequi val ent to sayi ng
that al l vol tages are smal l compared wi th moc2/e = 506 kv; thi s i s tr ue
for al l ma@etrons that have been bui l t up to the present. For the
i nequal i ty to be sati sfi ed, i t i s to be noted that a l ower l i mi t i s set upon
the val ue of y i n a tube of gi ven di mensi ons (fi xed r: and r%). Usi ng
Eq. (28 R), l i mi ts maybe set upon the val ues of ?* and T*(* + 1); thus,
(45a)
and
wher e
B=l +.4~-r*A$.
Thus l ?*\ and rl ? + 1! are of the or der of (-4% ~*A?)%. From Eq.
(36), p* k of the or der of A,; and negl ecti ng squares of r, At sati sfi es
Poi ssons equati on. The ri ght-hand si des of Eqs. (38) and (39) are of
or der r*A~~ and A~(Aj~ T*), and these equati ons may be wri tten
a
([
1 aA*
~ ;* (r*A$)
1) (
= T*
~7a*
)
!w+I !2&
+ terms of the or der of (r*A$~), (46a)
and
a
-( [ -+@*A~l +[%-%1
1 aA*
tw* 7 at
+ terms of the or der of (A~~ r*A~). (46b)
The ri ght-hand si des of these equati ons are smal l compared wi th the
l eft, and thus
g:
aq
$ (r*A$) = r ti mes a constant (46C)
whi ch for the parti cul ar boundary condi ti ons = Bo. Equati on (37)
l eads, negl ecti ng r*2A Oi n compari son wi th r*A4, to
(46d)
Combi ni ng, the part of A ~ dependi ng upon the r-f fi el ds and ci rcul ati ng
cur r ent and A? sati sfy
(47a)
and
(47b)
SEC. 6.6] THE NONRELA TI VI STI C EQI J A TI ONS
231
wher e
( --)
l a ~*aT

r * &* dr*
++2$ $=0.
I t may be noted that
(47C)
(47d)
Summi ng up the resul ts of thi s secti on, i t appems that for the negl ect
of rel ati vi sti c effects and of propagati on effects to be permi ssi bl e i t i s
necessary to have ?* smal l and al so ~ suffi ci ent y smal l so that A ~ i s
smal l compared wi th uni t y, whi l e r*A ~must al so be smal l compared wi th
uni ty. Physi cal l y, the di mensi ons of the tube must be smal l i n uni ts of
nx/27r, and al l vol tages must be smal l when measured i n a uni t of 500 kv.
Under these ci rcumstances the scal ar potenti al A o sati sfi es Poi ssons
equati on, whi l e the potenti al s A, and Ab are deri ved from a quanti ty T
sati sfyi ng Lapl aces equati on. Furthermore, the term enteri ng the
equati ons of moti on of the form [8(rA$) / dr dA,/ d+] i s i n a nonrel a-
ti vi sti c approxi mati on equal to BO, the appl i ed magneti c fi el d; fo. i f the
second i ntegral [Eq. (29 R)] of the moti on i s wri tten i n r educed uni ts,
&%J-%&J=*-a* 48)
and the ri ght-hand si de i s r *BO pl us smal l terms.
6.6. The Nonrel ati vi sti c Equati ons.-The equati ons of moti on i n the
normal , nonrel ati vi sti c case may now be put i nto a mor e conveni ent
form. Substi tuti ng the expressi on ~BO(r r~/ r) for the part of the
vector potenti al A+ due to the appl i ed magneti c fi el d and droppi ng the
term A,, whi ch contri butes onl y to the r-f magneti c fi el d just shown to be
negl i gi bl e, Eqs. (33) and (34) become, wri ti ng fi o for the r-f tangenti al
component of vector potenti al ,
[
m,f = mo~ + e$ A, ur~,
[
$ [morq] = e ~ A, wr&
or
OBO ~ _ 7n022
-T(r r~)+~wr
1
- & (Bo - 2~W), (49a)
uBo
~ (r
7%) -1- ~ w2rz
1
+er (Bo -*) 4)
232 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS
[SEC. 6.6
~(nw~) =e~+eriB,, (50b)
wher e
and
2mti
B1=B, .
e
(51b)
The associ ated fi el d equati ons wi l l r educe to two by vi rtue of the negl ect
of A, and the other smal l terms. Si nce, i n the equati ons of moti on,
A Oand & appear onl y i n the combi nati on A O ur~$, i t i s useful to wri te
down the equati on that thi s new vari abl e sati sfi es, and thi s i s pl ai nl y
The two equati ons i nvol vi ng the currents are no l onger of i nterest i n so far
ae they affect the potenti al s, but the equati on of conti nui ty that they
i mpl y remai ns, and one has
: (pti) + ; (p?+) = o, (53)
wher e pr oper l y ther e i s one such equati on for each stream, and p i n
Eq. (52) i s summed over al l streams.
Equati ons (49a) (49 b), (52), and (52) may be taken as the funda-
mental equati ons of the magnetron probl em. I t i s conveni ent at thi s
poi nt to i ntroduce a new system of r educed or di mensi onl ess vari abl es
sui tabl e for the nonrel ati vi sti c probl em, by choosi ng an appropri ate
charactc.1i sti c l ength, ti me, vol tage, and so forth. The choi ce of such
uni ts i s l argel y arbi trary. Ther e are, for exampl e, two natural fr e-
quenci es appeari ng: (1) the angul ar vel oci ty of the el ectromagneti c
fi el ds u/2T = uJ27rn and (2) the frequency of precessi on of an el ectr on
i n a ccnstant magneti c fi el d Bo, namel y, (1/>) (eBO/2m), i n the absence
of el ectri c fi el ds. Ei ther one of these frequenci es mi ght be used to deter -
mi ne a characteri sti c ti me. The uni t of l ength mi ght be chosen to be
one of the radi al di mensi ons of the tube T. or T. or mi ght agai n be asso-
ci ated wi th the free-space wavel ength as was natural i n studyi ng propaga-
ti on effects. Si mi l arl y, vari ous uni t vol tages suggest themsel ves because
any sui tabl y defi ned ener gy or amount of wor k associ ated wi th an ~
el ectr on when di vi ded by e gi ves a possi bl e vol tage. Thus, one coul d !
use the ki neti c ener gy of an el ectr on at rest i n the movi ng system at some ~
appropri ate radi us; the ki neti c ener gy of an el ectr on movi ng around
a ci rcl e of gi ven radi us i n a constant magneti c fi el d B,; the wor k done
i n movi ng an el ectr on at rest i n the movi ng system agai nst magneti c
for ces over a defi ni te di stance, and so on.
SEC.6.61
THE NONRELA TI VISTIC EQ UA TIOiVS 233
The system of characteri sti c quanti ti es that wi l l be used her e i s as
fol l ows: For l ength, the cathode radi us i s used, r.; for ti me, the reci procal
of 2r ti mes the Larmor frequency, or 2m/eBo (thi s has the advantage
of enabl i ng one to pass readi l y to the case wher e ther e i s no travel i ng
wave); for a uni t vol tage, &Bor~ wi l l be used. The l atter i s the wor k
done agai nst the magneti c fi el d 33oi n movi ng uni t charge at rest i n the
rotati ng system from r = O to r = r.. I t woul d be mor e natural , no
doubt, to use &B. (r: #) as a uni t, si nce thi s woul d me~~re the wor k
done between cathode and anode, but thi s choi ce l eads to cl umsy expr es-
si ons i n the r educed equati ons.
Thus, one wri tes
as before. Then the equati ons (49a) and (49b) become
wher e the bar denotes di fferenti ati on wi th r espect to r and
~E=aOsd# (s2l)+~s2.
The fi el d equati ons [Eqs. (52) and (53)] become
and
(54a)
(54b)
(55)
(56)
(57)
For future r efer ence, the form assumed by Eqs. (54a), (54b), (56), and
(57) for the case of a l i near magnetron wi l l be wri tten down her e. I t
wi l l be assumed that n and TCtend to i nfi ni ty together i n such a way that
rJn = XO/ 2m, wher e XOwi l l be the wavel ength of the travel i ng wave
i n the l i near tube. Measuri ng y outward from the cathode and z paral l el
to the cathode, then
and
234
I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC. 66
Equati ons (54a) and (54b) become
(58Q)
(58b)
wher e
2mOu n
6=~==
mouo
eB 27r ueB
and
VEp=$(aoiiz)-2{+$ (59)
Equati ons (56) and (57) take the form
and
(60)
(61)
The formul ati on of the magnetron probl em i s now compl eted by
speci fyi ng the boundary condi ti ons for the fi el ds and vel oci ti es.
Si nce
the el ectrons are supposed to l eave the cathode at rest i n the stati onary
system, one has
S= (),
(62a)
4=7
ats=l , (62b)
and
~=t),
(63a)
~=~
at(=O (636)
i n the l i near system. At the cathode (s = 1 or { = 0) the potcnti ds
ao and Si i + (or ti .) vani sh; and i f ther e i s to be space-charge l i mi tati on,
so must the radi al fi el d E, (or EM). Si nce
E, = $ a
+Um
= $ (AO WA+) w-B
: (4, GJfl,),

=0
then
(64a)
SEC. 6. 6] THE NONRELA TI VI STI C EQUATI ONS 235
or
$(aO6z)=0 at(=o. (64b)
The boundary condi ti ons at the anode are set on the potenti al s and are
assumed to be
ao = Ao, (65a)
s% = Al cosn~ at s = s. = rJrC, (65b)
or
a= = A 1 cos 2irE at ( = ~. = y.~~o. (65c)
Al l potenti al s must be peri odi c then i n #/n or ~/2Tr. I t wi l l be r ecogni zed
that i n the precedi ng paragraphs, the asserti on made i n the fi rst secti on
that a potenti al coul d be defi ned on the anode whose val ue was sai d to be
V, + VI cos (n@ c@) has been justi fi ed. For the combi nati on of
potenti al s a. s& or ao if, is the onl y one enteri ng the nonrel ati vi sti c
I
ecmati ons of moti on. I t shoul d be noted from Eq. (7) that thi s potenti al
I
i s-JrE$ d~ or the tangenti al i ntegral of the tangenti al el ectri c-fi el d.
I
The sol uti on of the probl em woul d consi st of a determi nati on of the
el ectr on vel oci ti es, the charge densi ty, and the potenti al at any poi nt
1
of the i nteracti on space. From these the radi al cur r ent densi ty p? coul d
be found i n the form
p+ = J , = J ,,o + ~,,1 cos n+ + ~,,I si n n+ + . . (66)
wher e
/
z=
I ,
/
2*
2~rJ ,,, = 7rr3r,l =
1,
pTf d+ = ~
o
pr? cos rqbd$ = ~
o
h
Or, i f 2meuB{r~m/ 4rn is i ntroduced as a characteri sti c cur r ent densi ty per
uni t l ength, wi th the defi ni ti on, i = ps~,
/
2X
\
2*
%i,,o = o I @ d+, Tl,,l = @i COS@ d+,
o
/
2r
7
rl ,, I = psS si n n#d~, etc.
o
wher e 1,,0, . . . are r educed l i near cur r ent densi ti es per uni t l ength.
The d-c power i nput i s 27rT,JJ,,OVO= (~h/4m)ecoB8fc0( ~,,d o), and
the r-f power output i s TTAJ,,lVI = (rh/8m)eti2B$~tO(;,,lA J. The
admi ttance of the el ectr on stream per uni t l ength i s
~mr Jr,, + jJr,-,
.
eBO
t, 1 + jir, 1
a
v, r%%
= G~ + jB~ = W.
Sk
236 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS
@m. 0.6
Under equi l i bri um condi ti ons, G.+ jl l ~ = Yl ~. I n pri nci pl e, then,
the potenti al s determi ne the currents, and, i n turn, the l oad maybe found.
Practi cal l y, one sets the l oad, and the potenti al s and currents adjust
themsel ves to sui tabl e val ues for produci ng the cor r ect admi ttance of
the el ectr on stream.
One may summari ze the anal ysi s by putti ng the resul t i n functi onal
form. Thus,
Ud = V(7, s., aO, %, n)
(67)
and
i,,. = ir,O(-y, sa, ao, if+, n); (68)
~ i s a parameter i n the equati ons of moti on; sO gover ns the range of
i ntegrati on; ao and & appear i n the boundary condi ti ons; and n i n a condi -
ti on of penodi ci ty. The nonrel ati vi sti c Eqs. (54a), (54b), (56), and (57)
and thei r sol uti on i n the form of Eqs. (67) and (68) provi de the basi s for
the process of scal i ng magnetrons. Thus, i f the l i near di mensi ons of a
magnetron are changed by a factor a, the operati ng wavel ength changed
by a factor a, and the magneti c fi el d al tered by a factor I /a, i t i s cl ear
that the vari abl es 7, so, a,, and 54,1 do not al ter provi ded that the d-c
and a-c vol tages are unchanged. I t fol l ows from Eqs. (67) and (68)
that ya and i,,o do not change. I f the hei ght h is al so scal ed by the factor
a, the characteri sti c admi ttances and currents for the tube wi l l be
unchanged, and thus the total cur r ent and admi ttance remai n the same.
Thus, two magnetrons rel ated i n thi s way wi l l oper ate at the same d-c
vol tage and cur r ent wi th i denti cal power output and l oadi ng (provi ded,
one must add, that the ci rcui t effi ci enci es are the same).
Si mi l arl y i f the wavel ength and magneti c fi el d are l eft unchanged but
the radi al di mensi ons of the i nteracti on space are mul ti pl i ed by a factor
p, the val ues of S. and ~ are unal tered. Now, an i ncrease of a factor Pz i n
the d-c and r-f vol tages l eaves ao and sa@unchanged. One has, agai n, no
change i n i ,,o and ya. The characteri sti c admi ttance for the whol e tube
,i s l eft the same, whi l e the characteri sti c cur r ent i s i ncreased by j3*.
Thus the l oadi ng i s unchanged, whi l e the total cur r ent i ncreases by ~z.
The power l evel i ncreases by B4. A scal i ng process of thi s nature i s
r efer r ed to usual l y as vol tage scal i ng.
The process of scal i ng i s extensi vel y used i n practi ce to desi gn new
magnetrons, and the systemati c of the method are descri bed ful l y i n
Chap. 10. The predi cti on of si mi l ar operati on when the vari abl es
~, s., n, ao, and s~* are unchanged has been thoroughl y confi rmed by
experi mental resul ts. The fi rst scal i ng process wi l l retai n i ts val i di ty
i n the rel ati vi sti c range, si nce ther e wi l l be no change i n the addi ti onal
parameter r = 2rr/nA whi ch appears i n that case. However , vol tage
scal i ng wi l l not be appl i cabl e because of the uncompensated change i n r.
I
SEC. 6. 6] THE NONRELA TI VI STI C EQUATI ONS 237
Attempts have been made to r educe the number of parameters upon
whi ch tube performance depends by i ntroduci ng vari ous combi nati ons of
y, s., and n i nto the defi ni ti ons of the characteri sti c vari abl es, thus
obtai ni ng new r educed vari abl es. I t i s hoped that i n such vari abl es a
fewer number than fi ve may suffi ce to descri be the behavi or. One such a
set i s due to Sl aterl and has been extensi vel y used by Cl ogston i n Chap.
10. I n thi s case a characteri sti c magneti c fi el d gi ven by BO(l &/r~)
i s used. The quanti ty i s cl osel y rel ated to the vector potenti al of the
magneti c fi el d. The characteri sti c vol tage i s I /e ti mes the ki neti c ener gy
of an el ectr on movi ng around the cathode surface at rest i n the rotati ng
svstem. The characteri sti c cur r ent i s chosen to be the cur r ent fl owi rw
at cutoff i n the magnetron acti ng as a di ode when a certai n speci al vol tage
i s appl i ed to the anode. z I t i s not cl ear that thi s cur r ent has any i nti mate
connecti on wi th the currents fl owi ng i n an operati ng magnetron, si nce
the mechani sm wher eby el ectrons reach the anode i n the operati ng
magnetron i s qui te di fferent from that i nvol ved i n the magnetron wi thout
tangenti al fi el ds. The characteri sti c vol tages and currents may be used
to defi ne a characteri sti c admi ttance. I n terms of these vari abl es,
r educed performance charts may be pl otted for tubes wi th vari ous val ues
of n; and i f the vari abl es had been expedi ti ousl y chosen, one mi ght hope
to fi nd no dependence upon n. As poi nted out i n Chap. 10, thi s hope
i s not ful fi l l ed.
Analytical Deductions jrom the Equati ons of Moti on.-Returni ng
now to the di scussi on of the equati ons of moti on one may note that the
expressi ons (27N) and (29N) now take the form
*(3 + s?) = 7P, (69)
and
: (sJ) # = 2(1 7)s.
(70)
The condi ti on that an el ectr on be abl e to reach a poi nt i n the i nteracti on
space i s si mpl y that VE > 0 or ao s& > (1, 7/2)sz 1. Thi s
appears qui te cl earl y as a consequence of the fact that the moti on now
takes pl ace i n a conservati ve potenti al fi el d. So far as i t has been possi bl e
to check thi s i nequal i ty experi mental l y i t appears to be uni versal l y
confi rmed. I n or der to make the compari son i t i s necessary to know the
r-f vol tages wi thi n the tube, and thi s ~nformati on i s gener~l l y not avai l -
abl e. I f the data shown i n Sec. 7.7 are exami ned, i t wi l l be found that
under al l ci rcumstances the sum of the d-c vol tage and the r-f vol tage
I J. C. Sl ater, Theor y of Magnetron Operati on, RL Repor t No. 42-28.
ZThi s vol tage i s the threshol dvol tage defi ed i n the next secti on. As Eq. (75)
wi fl show, ther e i s only one magneti cfi el d at whi ch threshol dand cutQffvol tage can
be equal .
238 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC.6.6
exceeds (~c/rA)&[(l - l /s~)Bo (ma/e)] whi ch i s the form taken by
the i nequaMy when wri tten i n ordi nary vari abl es, The i nequal i ty
provi des i nformati on about the d-c vol tage onl y when the r-f vol tage i s
taken to be vani shi ngl y smal l . Under such ci rcumstances one has
a~ > (1 - 7/2)s2 1 (71a)
or at the anode
[( )
0.0107
1
V&9.42 X106~ 1; B,-~.
a
(71b)
The vol tage defi ned by the equal i ty si gn i n Eqs. (71a) and (7 l b) i s known
as the threshol d vol tage. I ts si gni fi cance for the operati on of magnetrons
was fi rst poi nted out by Hartree;1 essenti al l y the same form had been
found by Posthumusz for the case of vani shi ngl y smal l cathode radks.
I t may be thought of as the mi ni mum d-c vol tage that wi l l permi t
el ectrons to reach a poi nt i n the i nteracti on space as the r-f vol tage i s
made vani shi ngl y smal l . I t ther efor e pl ays a r ol e for the mul ti segment
(or tangenti al resonance) type of magnetron anal ogous to that of the
Hul l or cutoff vol tage i n a magnetron wi th cyl i ndri cal symmetry. The
rel ati on between the two formul as may be seen i f Eq. (54b) i s i ntegrated
i n the form
-1+ =+(-+/%)
(72)
and the resul t substi tuted i n Eq. (69)
[
32 + (1 -y)s +
:(-+ /%T)r
= 2v(ao - s%) 7(2 T)S2 + 27,
2+(S-:)+%[(-): I I * *+$( J%))
= 27(UO Sii+). (73)
Then i n the absence of tangenti al fi el ds (a VX/t?$ = O) the condi ti on,
sati sfi ed by (ao - sd~) i s si mpl y
()
2
~(aosi i t)a~ s~ . (74)
Thi s i s the cl assi cal Hul l formul a gi vi ng the maxi mum radi us that an
el ectr on can attai n i n a constant magneti c fi el d under a gi ven vol tage.
Usi ng an obvi ous notati on one has
1D. R. Wrtree, CVD Repor t No. 1536, Msg. 17.
z K. Posthumus,?Vi rel eua Eng. and Ezp. Wi rel ess,12, 126 (1935).
SEC. 6. 6] THE NONRELA TI VI STI C EQUATI ONS 239
:(s-:)-(-$s2+
[ 1
2
=; (71)s++
The threshol d vol tage thus l i es bel ow the Hul l vol tage save at the poi nt
(~ 1)s = 1/s or ~ = 1 1/s; at thi s poi nt the curves of threshol d
and Hul l vol tage as functi ons of ~ have a poi nt of common tangeri cy.
I t i s found experi mental l y that i f the threshol d vol tage gi ven by Eq.
(71b) be pl otted agai nst B,, the strai ght l i ne resul ti ng i s general l y ver y
nearl y paral l el to the constant-current l i nes i n the Vo, Bo representati on
of magnetron performance. Dependi ng upon the val ue of gd, the thresh-
ol d, or Hartree l i ne as i t i s frequentl y known, l i es above or bel ow the
Vo, BO l i ne for extrapol ated zer o current, by di fferent amounts. Stri ctl y
speaki ng i t shoul d coi nci de wi th the zer o-cur r ent l i ne, and the data ahown
i n Sec. 7.7 i ndi cate that at ver y l ow currents the constant Bo l i nes i n a
normal Vo, 10 performance chart must be curved. Thi s regi on of ver y
l ow r-f vol tage i s al most unobservabl e experi mental l y because of the
pr esence of l eakage currents. Somewhat fortui tousl y, for most mag-
netrons operati ng wi th thei r normal l oads and at normal currents, the
constant-current l i nes i n the BO, Vo pl ane l i e qui te cl ose to the Hartree
l i ne. The agreement i s usual l y good to about one ki l ovol t. Thi s fact
has been of outstandi ng val ue i n the desi gn of magnetrons, si nce i t
permi ts the operati ng vol tage at a gi ven fi el d to be esti mated wi th
suffi ci ent accuracy i n advance. At the same ti me the good agreement
between the operati ng vol tage and the threshol d vol tage over a ver y wi de
range of magneti c fi el ds provi des a confi rmati on of the supposi ti on that
the el ectrons i nteract wi th onl y one rotati ng component of the total
fi el d.
Accordi ng to Eq. (35N) the ener gy that an el ectr on contri butes to
the osci l l ati ng fi el d measured by the di fference between i ts potenti al
ener gy i n the scal ar fi el d A Oand i ts ki neti c ener gy i s
= ew& + eo ~ (r2 r:) mof2co(J + u). (6.35N)
Wri ti ng
240
then
I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC.66
&=s~(l 7?)l +sti +
/
~(ao siid) ~T
=Sii+-y
a+
and the e5ci ency of an i ndi vi dual el ectr on q i s gi ven by
The effi ci ency for vani shl ngl y smal l r-f vol tage and a d-c vol tage
to the threshol d vol tage may be wri tten down di rectl y; then
$= OandsZ4 =0, one fi nds
s2(l -y)-l =l _ 1
q=
()
2
&l _; _l
()
;1+1
(76a)
(76b)
(77)
equal
si nce
(78)
E5ci enci es cal cul ated from thi s expressi on are substanti al l y hi gher
than those obser ved i n practi ce (for exampl e, for the 3-cm strapped
magnetron whose performance chart appears i n Fi g. 61, the cal cul ated
effi ci enci es are gr eater by a factor of 1.2to 1.5). Thi s mi ght have been
expected from thehl ghl y i deal i zed condi ti ons under whi ch Eq. (78) was
deri ved. At the same ti me, the unavoi dabl e pr esence of l eakage cur r ent
i n operati ng tubes l owers the effi ci ency i n the ver y regi on of l ow r-f
ampl i tudes. Equati on (78) i ndi cates an i denti cal effi ci ency per el ectr on
()
for magnetrons havi ng the same val ue of ~ 1 ~z . Thi s wi l l no
a
l onger be tr ue i f the accurate expressi on for ener gy l oss i s used, but i t
corresponds roughl y to a fact of exper i ence, namel y, that a l ower ~
(hi gher magneti c fi el d) i s needed for the same effi ci ency when s. i s
decreased. As a rough worki ng rul e the connecti on between ~ and S.
()
may be assumed, i ndeed, to be 1 :7 = constant X 7 for the same
a
effi ci ency.
The actual over-al l e5ci ency of the magnetron wi l l be gi ven by
wher e the i ntegral s are the sum of two i ntegral s over anode and cathode
I
!
!
I
I
SEC. 6.6] THE NONRELA TIVISTIC EQUATIONS 241
separatel y. Equati on (79) may be wri tten as
the fi rst term of whi ch i s the expressi on i n Eq. (78), i f a, is the threshol d
vol tage.
The behavi or of the ener gy l oss functi on [Eq. (76)] i s i ndi cated by
Fi gs. 6.10 and 6.11 whi ch show the ener gy l oss as a functi on of magneti c
fi el d at fi xed l oad for a 3-cm strapped magnetron and as a functi on of
23
22
21
20
19
j :
~ 16
~
s 15
2
14
13
12
11
10
9
O-ccur r enti namperea
FI G. 6.10.Averagb energy l oss per el ectron i n ki l ovol ts at constant l oad for a typi cal
3-cm strapped magnetron wi th magneti c fi el d i n weber,q/sq meter, ----- el ectron
l oss i n kv.
r-f and d-c vol tages for a 10-cm strapped magnetron.
I t i s of some
i nterest to see that for the parti cul ar l oad of Fi g. 6.10 the average ener gy
l oss per el ectr on i s remarkabl y i ndependent of current, whi ch i ndi cates
that the general behavi or of the i ndi vi dual el ectrons i s not much al tered
as the operati ng l i ne i s traversed but that the number of el ectrons
i ncreases. Thi s may be acci dental , si nce the evi dence from Fi g. 6.11
i s that the average ener gy l oss i s l argel y a functi on of r-f vol tage and
rel ati vel y i ndependent of d-c vol tage. One cannot be certai n that the
apparent maxi mum i n the ener gy l oss as a functi on of r-f vol tage i s real
242
I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC. 6. 6
or whether or not the pr esence of l eakage cur r ent at l ow l evel s i s gi vi ng
l ow val ues of ener gy l oss. The maxi mum ener gy l oss obser ved under
the condi ti ons of Fi g. 611 i s 233, whi ch compares wi th the val ue of
S:(l 7) 1 of 3.5. I t must be recal l ed that the average ener gy l oss
i s di mi ni shed by i ncl usi on of the ener gy gai n due to el ectrons returni ng
to the cathode.
?!m:,k.(.)
/3. 85kv ,
13.10kv(-o.o)\/(1.oi ,
//
.. .. . ,-.-,
,/
Ip;g
, // , , ; /J, . /- - l y( 3. 5)
%?i i
1
11.80 kv
i /& .
, ,/, /,,/: ..~: : -
15.4 kv (4.0)
(-0.48)
%@
0.7
11.15kv ~- -- -- =
(-0.72)
_-
-/
;0.50kv(-0.95~- --
17.3kv(4.5)
5 10 15 20 25 30
1-1,totalout.of.phaaer.fcur r ent i namp
FI G.6.11.Averaeeener gyl oss Per el ectr on(i n r educeduni ts)at constantmagneti c
fi el d wi th d-c vol tage contours i n kv, - r -f vol tage contours i n kv, ---- el ec.
trnnl ossi nkv. Fi @re~i n parentheses arereduced vol tagee; d<val ues rel ati ve to thresh.
ol d. Reduced l i near cur r ent densi ti es aregi venby I /36.
One further poi nt may be noted i n connecti on wi th Eq. (761r). Wri t-
i ng the radi al conducti on cur r ent densi ty as jca.d, the r-f power must be
But the fi rst term i s si mpl y the r-f power del i vered by the conducti on
current, and hence the second term must be the r-f power suppl i ed by the
di spl acement current. I t i s wor th whi l e noti ng that the second term i s
the one from whi ch the domi nant contri buti on to the power ari ses whi l e
the fi rst may and, i n general , does r epr esent a l oss. Thi s fact was poi nted
out by Sl ater.1 Equati on (76b) puts the ener gy l oss i n a form that shows
cl earl y the contri buti on ari si ng from the el ectrons movi ng i n a ti me
varyi ng potenti al , when i t i s recal l ed that tI /~t = u(13/~~).
1J. C. Sl ater, Theor y of MagnetronOperati on, RL Repor t No. 43-28.
SEC. 6.7] SYMMETRI CAL STATES 243
The vari ous forms of the expressi on for ener gy l oss i ndi cate that the
l atter wi l l i ncrease wi th sC. Thi s i s seen from the l eadi ng term of Eq. (80)
or the second term of Eq. (81) and ari ses from the fact that the l arger
S. i s the l onger the ti me the el ectr on spends i n the i nteracti on space.
I f d (ao sit+) /W has the si gn appropri ate for a l oss of ener gy over
most of the path, the total l oss wi l l i ncrease wi th transi t ti me. Thus,
from the standpoi nt of effi ci ency, sO woul d natural l y be made l arge:
Ther e i s no seri es of careful l y control l ed experi ments to confi rm the
expected i ncrease of effi ci ency wi th s*, but al l the scattered data confi rm i t.
I n practi ce, the choi ce of S. i s determi ned by consi derati ons connected
wi th mode shi fti ng. I t appears to be tr ue that for any number of
osci l l ators N ther e i s a maxi mum val ue of SCbeyond whi ch operati on
wi l l not take pl ace consi stentl y i n the mmode. Si nce mode shi fti ng i s
i n at l east one aspect a starti ng probl em, the l ack of a theor y of starti ng
prohi bi ts a determi nati on of the maxi mum SC. I t i s probabl y true,
however , that the essenti al factor i s that as S. i s i ncreased, the rati o of
the i ntensi ty of the ~-mode fi el d to that of the fi el d of any other mode
decreases for equal ampl i tudes at the anode when the rati o i s measured
at some poi nt wi thi n the i ni ti al nonosci l l ati ng cl oud of space charge.
Thus the bui l di ng-up of some other mode than the ~-mode i s mor e
probabl e.
6.7. Symmetri cal States.-I n thi s secti on the i nveati gati ons that have
been carri ed out on symmetri cal states of the magnetron or those i n
whi ch the potenti al has no angul ar vari ati on wi l l be consi dered. Despi te
the ver y di fferent condi ti ons that prevai l i n a normal magnetron, i t
mi ght be expected that the symmetri cal states woul d be of i mportance
i n the i ni ti ati on of osci l l ati ons. Many of the di ffi cul ti es that pr event
exact i ntegrati on of the equati ons of el ectr on moti on i n the pr esence of a
rotati ng potenti al wave persi st i n the symmetri cal case, notabl y the
di ffi cul ty of deal i ng wi th mul ti stream states. I n fact, the sol uti ons
of the symmetri cal probl em are suffi ci entl y tentati ve so that i t i s di ffi cul t
to make them the foundati on of a theor y of starti ng for the tangenti al -
fi el d type of magnetron. Because the probl em i s i n some respects
si mpl er than that whi ch i ncl udes rotati ng waves, i t has been the subject
of consi derabl e anal yti cal and numeri cal wor k. I t i s pr oposed to outl i ne
some of thi s wor k mai nl y to bri ng out the dMi cul ti es i nvol ved and to
i ndi cate the rel evance of the concl usi ons to the major probl em. The
di scussi on i s based upon the wor k of Hartree, Al l i s, Bri l l oui n, and
Bl ochl and fol l ows most cl osel y the wor k of Bl och.
The equati ons of moti on i n the absence of a rotati ng fi el d may be
formed from Eqs. (54a) and (54b) by l etti ng -y tend to zer o and wri ti ng
1D. R. Hartree, CVD Repor t, Msg. 23; Al l i s, RL Repor t No. 9S, Sec. V, 1941;
L. Bri l l oui n, AMP Repor t No. 129; F. Bl och, NDRC 15-411-175,1945.
244 INTERACTION OF THE ELECTRONS
~V, = Vz. Thi s l eads to
and
: (s%fT) = 2ss,
[SEC.67
(82a)
(82b)
wher e Vz i s equal to (4nz0/eB~r~).4Oand i s i ndependent of angl e but may,
however , now be a functi on of ti me. The second equati on may be
i ntegrated; and putti ng t = O at s = 1, ther e fol l ows
(83)
Substi tuti ng thi s val ue i n Eq. (82a) one fi nds
g=++~!!
as
1
s ez.
= @
(84)
The other equati ons are
l a
()
dvz =_la
%-
; ~ (se2) = w
s as
and
: ; [S(yps t?,)] = o,
(85)
(86)
wher e the di spl acement cur r ent Zt must be i ncl uded i n the current.
Equati on (86) l eads to
S(pFy Z2) = l i , (87)
wher e i i s the r educed cur r ent per uni t l ength and i s i ndependent of s.
Thus, usi ng Eq. (85)
I
= -yi
I
and Eq. (84) takes i @ most compact form,
I
(88)
(89)
SEC. 6.7] SYMMETRI CAL STATES 245
Eqs. (87) and (89) have one ver y speci al i zed sol uti on whi ch may be
wri tten down i mmedi atel y. For suppose that 3 = O i denti cal l y. Then
()
Vz+ S;*,
and
(90)
(91)
The sol uti on represents a si ngl e-stream state i n whi ch al l the el ectrons
move i n ci rcl es about the cathode wi th angul ar vel oci ti es gi ven by Eq.
(83). The charge densi ty i s so di sposed that the space-charge for ces
exactl y bal ance the magneti c ones.
The cl oud of el ectrons extends out
to some defi ni te radi us beyond whi ch a l ogari thmi c potenti al conti nues
the sol uti on to the anode when the vol tage on the l atter i s l ees than
~[s. (1/s=)]. The potenti al at any poi nt i s exactl y the Hul l cutoff
vol tage, as one mi ght expect, si nce S = O. Ther e i s no radi al current,
si nce the charge densi ty i s ever ywher e fi ni te; thi s means that r has to
be al l owed to become i ndefi ni tel y l arge i n Eq. (89). Thi s speci al sol uti on
was di scovered by Bl ewett and Ramol for the case of negl i gi bl e cathode
radi us and agai n by Bri l l oui n;2 i t i s frequentl y r efer r ed to as the Bri l l oui n
steady state. I t wi l l be descri bed her e as a type S state, i ndi cati ng
that i t i s a si ngl e-stream state.
I t may be obser ved that an anal ogous
state may be found when the exact rel ati vi sti c equati ons of moti on and
fi el d are used. I t i s necessary her e to take i nto account the ,effect of the
magneti c fi el d of the ci rcul ati ng current.
Another concei vabl e steady state i s one i n whi ch the el ectrons return
to the cathode after turni ng back at some poi nt. I n thi s case ther e wi l l
be a doubl e-stream or type D state.
Si nce the vol tage i s to be consi dered
constant, the cur r ent i s constant and one may wri te
(92)
si nce ther e wi l l be equal and opposi te currents through any poi nt of
the i nteracti on space. Consi der i -y as representi ng the i ngoi ng or out-
goi ng current. Expl i ci tl y
wher e 1 i s the cur r ent per uni t l ength. Eval uati ng one fi nds
i -y = 4.55 X 1012 ~.
B3r~
1J. P. Bl ewettand S. Ramo, Phys. Rev. 57, 635 (1940).
2L. Bri l l oui n,Phys. Rev.60, 385 (1941), and 65, 166 (1942).
246 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC.67
For the val ues of 1, r., and B common i n operati ng magnetrons i ~~i l l
be qui te smal l . Sol uti ons of Eqs. (89) and (92) wi th s = 1, 3 = O at
~ = O have been i nvesti gated by Al l k and others. I t may be shown
that for i y tendi ng to zer o, S >0 for al l s <2.271 and, hence, that no
type D state i s possi bl e for cl oud radi i l ess than 2.271. For i~ not
zer o, numeri cal i ntegrati on must be r esor ted to, and Al l i s, Hartree, and
Bri l l oui n have shown i n thi s way that a sl i ghtl y l ower cri ti cal cl oud
radi us i s found. The val ue of thi s radi us appears to approach a l i mi t
cl ose to 2 as i y becomes l arge. Thus, i n a tube for whi ch so >2.271 i t
appears that as the anode vol tage i s rai sed, no type D state wi l l be possi bl e
unti l the vol tage exceeds a certai n mi ni mum val ue; such a state wi l l
exi st over a certai n range of vol tages, after whi ch cur r ent wi l l be drawn
to the anode.
A questi on that has been tr eated extensi vel y by Bl och i s that of the
transi ent phenomena occurri ng i n those cases wher e i i s not constant i n
ti me. Wri ti ng Eq. (89) i n the form
Si f = $2
-$2+ dJ(T,ro), (93a)
wher e
I
r
I #)(r,ro)= yi dr, (93b)
To
i t wi l l be supposed that ~i <<1 for al l ~, whi ch, as was remarked
above, wi l l be tr ue over the usual range of parameters. The l i near
case wi l l be consi dered al so because of i ts pecul i ar features. Putti ng
s = 1 + #Cand al l owi ng T. + GO,
Eq. (93a) becomes
U = 4y + 7-c@(T,70). (94a)
Thi s i s si mpl y the equati on of a harmoni c osci l l ator subject to a dri vi ng
for ce r.~(r,r,). A sol uti on i s requi red wi th y = O, ~ = O at r = ,..
The probl em admi ts of an exact sol uti on. Consi deri ng a functi on
y,(7,#) such that
a2~o
_+4yo=a*+4yo=o
(94b)
and
yo(T,7) = o ~ (r,T) = 1,
one may mul ti pl y Eq. (94a) by VOand Eq. (94b) by y. Then, addi ng
the resul ts and i ntegrati ng from r o to T, one has
I
(
dy
)/
dyo
Yo~
%,, = ,0
rc@(7,rO)yO(T,#) dr (95)
SEC.6,7] SYMMETRI CAL STATES
247
and usi ng the boundary condi ti ons on YO
/
#
y(T) = yo(To,r) $&To) Y(TO)*(TO,T) + ,, r04(r,r0)y0(7,7) dr.
Observi ng the boundary condi ti ons on y(r),
/
,
~(r) = - T.lfJ(r,To)yo(T,T) (27. (96)
0
A sui tabl e choi ce for the functi on yo(~,#) i s t si n 2(7 r), and thus Eq.
(96) becomes
/
y(r)=+ rc~(r,r~) si n 2(7 r) dr. (97)
vu
Consi der, now, dY(r)/13r0. From Eq. (97)
ay 1
\
d[re@(#,To)] sin 2(T, _ ~) dr
.
aro 2 aro
si nce f$(70,ro) = O
To
/
1
=-
2
r,yi(ro) si n 2(r r) d7
To
= + ro~i(ro) [1
Cos 2(TO T)] (98)
~
Zo si nce i(ro) Z O.
Thk, however , i s exactl y the condi ti on that el ectr on orbi ts shal l not
cross, for i t i mpl i es that at any gi ven ti me an el ectr on emi tted l ater than
another l i es cl oser to the cathode than does the l atter. The state i s
thus of type S. The resul t i s i ndependent of the vari ati on of cur r ent
and hence of that of the vol tage. On the other hand, i f the condi ti on of
space-charge l i mi tati on i s rel axed, Bri l l oui n has shown that the orbi ts do
cross. Al though the orbi ts do not actual l y cross i n the case consi dered
above, they may touch and, i ndeed, wi l l do so when TO r = (n + ~)r.
Ther e wi l l then exi st curves i n space defi ned by thi s equati on wi th whi ch
the orbi ts have tangenti al contact; the charge densi ty on such curves wi l l
be i ndefi ni tel y l arge. Thi s appears to be an i nstance i n whi ch the i ncl u-
i
si on of an i ni ti al vel oci ty di stri buti on for the el ectrons mi ght be expected
to modi fy the resul ts ver y consi derabl y, but thk poi nt has not been
i nvesti gated.
The si tuati on i n the cyl i ndri cal case i s consi derabl y mor e compl i cated,
and the nature of the resul ts qui te di fferent. To make progress by
anal yti cal means i t i s necessary to suppose that (YZ) <<1. Then
O(r)r,) i s a sl owl y varyi ng functi on of T. I f thk be so, an approxi mate
sol uti on of Eq. (93a) i s seen to be gi ven by SO,wher e
.
S; .yi 2 = I$(T,70), (99)
248 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC. 6.7
for SOdefi ned by Eq. (99) i s a sl owl y varyi ng functi on of r, and So wi l l
be smal l .
Suppose then that
S=so+z, (l oo)
wher e x i s capabl e of bei ng wri tten i n the form
$= AZI+A2Z2+X3Z3 +
i n whi ch A i s of the or der of &$/8r and, hence, A <<1. Substi tuti ng
Eq. (100) i n Eq. (93a) one has
= + 2(1 + S; )x = 30 + (%1 + 55i 5)zz (%-z
+ 9s;)23 + (s;3 + 14S;7)Z4 o . . . (101)
Thi s i s, once agai n, the equati on of an osci l l ator dri ven by the for ces
r epr esented by the l i ght-hand si de. Ther e i s, however , the i mportant
di sti ncti on that the frequency of the osci l l ator i s sl owl y changi ng because
of the dependence of sOupon r. The total moti on of the el ectr on thus
consi sts of a sl ow dri ft, monotoni cal l y away from the cathode, gi ven by
S0(7,7.), superi mposed upon whi ch i s an osci l l atory term wi th adi abati cal l y
varyi ng frequency. The secul ar moti on becomes mor e sl uggi sh as
8q$/8T or i ~ O. Equati on (101) may be sol ved cor r ectl y to the fi rst
or der i n &$/& by negl ecti ng the terms i n X2, X3, etc., provi ded that
sol uti ons of
z + 2(1 + S;4)Z = E + @(7,70)z = o (102)
are avai l abl e cor r ect to the fi rst or der i n 8@/&. To obtai n these i ntro-
duce O(T,TO)= ~u,(T,ro) d~, and wri te z = exp ~azdt); then i n such
To o
vari abl es Eq. (102) becomes
z+~++z+l =o.
(l o3a)
Putti ng z = + i + p, wher e p i s of the or der of 8$/8,, one has to the
fi rst-order
or , i ntegrati ng,
/
ea 10g ~1
p=fi exp T 2i (0 0) dO
o
ae
and
(103b)
(103C)
=ex[+ie+i[de lwexp +2i@-e)delo 103)~
SEC. 6.7] SYMMETRI CAL STATES
249
I ntegrati ng by parts
/
@c310g l .&
= %0 p
dtl
p ~ 2i(0 6) de. (103e)
Provi ded that the vari ati on of cur r ent i s reasonabl y uni form, the l ast
i ntegral wi l l be of the or der of dw130 or ~@/d7. Thus, the zer o-or der
(
sol uti ons are of the form
A
=wGexp *i+
(104)
+
The sol uti on of Eq. (101), cor r ect to fi rst-order terms, may now be found
as i t was i n the l i near case, wher e for the functi on yO(~,7) one uses
go(7,T) =
si n (0 6)
<W(T,70)0, (7,To)-
(105)
Thk sati sfi es the condi ti on that WO(T,T)/fJT = 1, si nce EM/tI T= uI(7,To)
by defi ni ti on. Maki ng use of Eq. (95) and noti ng that the dri vi ng
term i s %, one has
#
Y(T) = Yo(To,T): (TO) + ~ (To,T)Z(TO)+
/
~o(T,To)ycI(T,T) dT.
T
o
(106)
,.
Now,s, + x sati sfi es the boundary condi ti ons so + x = 1 and 30 + 5 = O
at r = To; thus, z(T,,70) = O a~d 13z(roro)/dT = 3Q(Tc.,70). Thus, Eq.
(106) becomes, usi ng Eq. (105),
si n e
y(T) = S(70,TO)
!
+
30(7,70)
si n (0 e) dT
@(To, ~o)W(T,To)
To
~l (T,To)UL(T,TLI )
(107)
Si nce fdI(To,To) = 2 and because
2s0(s, + si ) = d@(~,m)/d~, whi ch
i mpl i es SO(TO,TO) = ~(&#J(70,To)/dT), the final result for the moti on cor r ect
to fi rst-order terms i n a@/a7 i s
S(7,TO) = SO(T,70)
4 %&# 00)
\
+
=o(T,To)
si n (0 .9)
ti @,(~,@J,(T,To)
dr. (108)
70
I f thi s i s to be a type S state,
g<o for al l TOand T.
250 I NTERACTI ON O? THE ELECTRONS
[SEC. 6.7
Di fferenti ati ng wi th r espect to TOand retai ni ng onl y terms of zer o and
fi st or der ,
as as. Z(TO,TO) si n 9 6(70,70) cos o ae
.

aTo aro
4 ti2w,(T,To) 4 V-~
+ 30(T0,TO)
si n e
H
+f
30(70,70)
#UI(7,TO)@I(70,TO) ,0 <f.dL(T,To)kII(#,To)
1
[(=) 1 09)
COS(8 @ dr
To the fi rst or der , the second and fourth terms cancel , l eavi ng
as as. l $(To,To) cos 9 ae
.

aTo aTO
4 <2.,(,70) w
H
f
+
3J(T0,TO)
,0 duI(T,To)W(T,To)
l [(~-:)cos(e-e) dl ; 10)
furthermore,
as. I J(TO,TJ
..
aTo 2(s0 + s~g)
and
a%. +7(T0,To)
~= 2(s0 + s;) - 1;.;3:;:;3 (00)2
So one has
as tfl (ro,ro)
[
ae
.
dTo 4 s, : S;3 + J&o) TO
1
ae ae
+
!
~(TcI,TcI) aTo370
Cos (0 0) dr. (111)
,, 2(s0 + ;) <fJ,(T,To)U,(T,70)
Thi s reduces, as i t shoul d, to Eq. (98) when s = 1 + (y/rc) and TC~ m
for then S, = 1, 0 = 2(T To), and ~I (T,,o) = 2. The condi ti ons for
as/arO <0 are now mor e compl i cated than they wer e i n the l i near case
i f d(~o,ro), or , i n other words, the current, i s al l owed to vary i n an unre-
stri cted fashi on. I f the cur r ent i s smal l enough and i ts rate of change i s
tdso smal l and regul ar, the i ntegral term i n Eq. (111) may be i gnored
and the condi ti on for a type S sol uti on becomes
2 1 ae
so + S;3 2
~2C01(T,To) ~o
(l 12a)
By h defi ni ti on
a
( -)
ae aul (T,To)
fhl(T,To) @)
% aTo = aTo ar i (r)
ae
\
ati 1(7,fo) i(70) dT,.
.
ar,
f.LU(TO,To) + ~
i(r)
(l 12b)
.
. ., -./
SEC.. 6.7]
SYMMETRI CAL STATES
251
Thus, even for smal l currents, the form of M/a7, vari es consi derabl y
accordi ng to the l aw of current. When i i s constant,
I
ae
To
= w(T,To) = <2(1 + S:4) (112C)
and the condi ti on i n Eq. (112a) becomes
()
2%
1<~
so 1 + s;
(l 12d)
or
So <2. 271.
t
Thus, a sol uti on of type S exi sts as l ong as the cl oud radi us i s l ess than
2.271; thk i s the same l i mi ti ng radi us found by Al l i s as the l ower l i mi t
r
of cl oud radi i for whi ch a type D state was possi bl e. I t may, i ndeed, be
shown that for fi ni te currents ther e al ways exi sts a cri ti cal radi us separat-
i ng type S and type D states.
Now suppose that i i s no l onger constant but i ncreases or decreases
monotoni cal l y, remai ni ng at al l ti mes smal l , however .
Si nce UI steadi l y
decreases wi th T, tk/& i s negati ve; and then for posi ti ve currents, from
Eq. (112b), W/&O must al so decr ease monotoni cal l y wi th T. I f i
i ncreases monotoni cal l y y, i (70)/i (T) < 1 for al l r; and usi ng Eq. (112b)
T
agai n, one has
2> a:>W(T,TO).
(113)
Si nce the condi ti on for breakdown of a type S state i s Eq. (112a) or
2% ~-
ae
. ,
so + S;3 aro
thi s may be combi ned wi th Eq. (113) to gi ve an i nequal i ty for the cri ti cal
radi us
or
t
2>
2%2)4(1 + S;4)M :
> 2}4(1 + S;4)%.
SD(1 + S;4)
Thi s yi el ds
2.271> SO>1.434. (114)
Ther e i s thus a cri ti cal cl oud radi us between these l i mi ts, the exact val ue
of whi ch hi nges upon the l aw fol l owed by the cur r ent at whi ch a type s
state becomes i mpossi bl e. Si nce Al l i s wor k shows that ther e i s no type
D state, i t woul d appear that under a condi ti on of i ncreasi ng anode
4-
vol tage, i f a si ngl e-stream state i s set up when S.Lu~< 1.434, thi s must
252 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS
[SEC.6.7
break up i nto some transi ent state unti l the vol tage i s hi gh enough to
gi ve a cl oud radi us gr eater than 2.271.
When the cur r ent decreases monotoni cal l y [i (TO)/i (T)] >1, the i ntegral
term from Eq. (112b) decreases faster than ui (7,ro) and furthermore
ao/a70 < COl (rO,~O).Two thi ngs may happen: I f I W/arOl < ul (70,70),
the condi ti on for the breakdown of the S state Eq. (112a) i s al tered to
gi ve a l arger val ue of so and the S state may persi st beyond sO= 2.271;
whereas i f I M/&Ol > ~1(r0,70), as may happen i f M/&O becomes
suffi ci entl y negati ve, the breakdown condi ti on, as i n the case of a monoton-
i cal l y i ncreasi ng current, becomes mor e sever e and the S state breaks
down for cl oud radi i l ess than 2.271.
Fi pal l y suppose that a smal l cur r ent fl ows for a certai n ti me T, after
whi ch i t becomes zer o. Then
For r > T, thi s expressi on becomes
aU1(T,To) 4s;5
=+
~i (TO)
aro
>0,
W(T,TO)(SO + S;a) h
(116)
and, from Eq. (112b)j
(-)
a ae
a posi ti ve constant,
~ aTO
r>T.
I t fol l ows that th9/arOcan become as l arge as one pl eases after suffi ci entl y
l ong ti mes. Thus the i nstabi l i ty cri teri on Eq. (1 12a) shows that a cl oud
of any radi us establ i shed duri ng the fl ow of cur r ent becomes unstabl e
after a suffi ci ent l ength of ti me. The l ength of ti me requi red for the
i nstabi l i ty to appear wi l l be of the or der of l/~i(ro).
Thi s r evi ew of the wor k whi ch has been carri ed out on the symmetri c
states of magnetrons has i ndi cated the unsati sfactory status of the anal y-
si s. Ther e are essenti al l y no experi me~tal data to confi rm or to con-
tradi ct any of the tentati ve concl usi ons reached; and i n fact, i t i s not
cl ear for those cases of greatest i nterest i n whi ch no anode cur r ent
i s drawn how experi ment woul d di sti ngui sh among the vari ous states of
el ectr on fl ow. Pr obe measurements woul d i nval i date the assumpti on
of azi muthal symmetry.
One or two poi nts maybe noted. One i s the connecti on between the
cyl i ndri cal and l i near probl ems. The sol uti on of the l i near probl em
has a ver y arti fi ci al appearance. The appearance of a seri es of l ayers
on whi ch nei ghbori ng orbi ts touch, as i ndi cated by Eq. (98), thus gi vi ng
an i nfi ni te charge densi ty, woul d probabl y be modi fi ed i f an i ni ti al di s-
tri buti on of el ectr on vel oci ti es was i ncl uded. Furthermore the sl i ghtest
SEC. 6. 8] THE BUNEMANN SMALI .-AMPI .I TlJ DE THEORY 253
curvature of the cathode surface, i n the concave sense, wi l l gi ve ri se to a
crossi ng of orbi ts, whi l e i n the convex sense, i t wi l l cause the orbi ts no
l onger to touch. I f a l i near fl ow of the type i ndi cated by the sol uti on
(98) i ni ti al l y exi sted, a smal l curvature appl i ed to the cathode woul d
r ender i t unstabl e, si nce the cl oud radi us woul d be l ess than 2.271 r..
Presumabl y, however , i t woul d be quasi -stabl e i n the sense that a con-
si derabl e ti me woul d el apse befor e the i ni ti al organi zati on was destr oyed.
Thi s rai ses the questi on whether or not ther e may not be states wi th
cl oud radi us 5 2.271 ti mes the cathode radi us whi ch are eff ecti vel y stabl e,
i n the sense that over peri ods of ti me whi ch are comparabl e to the starti ng
ti me of the magnetron, they woul d mai ntai n a potenti al di stri buti on and a
cl oud radi us cl osel y comparabl e to that of the Bri l l oui n steady state.
I n thi s connecti on i t shoul d be noted that i n doubl e-stream states, wher e
they can exi st, the potenti al di stri buti on i s al ways cl ose to 1/27[s (1/s)]2
unl ess ver y l arge radi al currents are fl owi ng.
6.8. The Bunemann Smal l -ampl i tude Theory.-The onl y seri ous
i nvesti gati on of the condi ti ons under whi ch tangenti al resonance osci l -
l ati ons wi l l bui l d up i n a magnetron has been made i n an extensi ve r epor t
by O. Bunemann.1
I t cannot be cl ai med that Bunemanns resul ts are
concl usi ve or that the assumpti ons of hi s treatment are compl etel y sound.
However , the vi ewpoi nt taken i n the paper i s i l l umi nati ng, and i t wi l l
be di scussed her e rather ful l y.
Bunemanns approach i s to assume an i ni ti al state of el ectroni c moti on
that has azi muthal symmetry under condi ti ons of constant d-c vol tage
and magneti c fi el d. I t i s then supposed that a rotati ng r-f wave of ver y
smal l ampl i tude, of frequency uo and angul ar vel oci ty u = m/n, i s
i mposed on the anode. The smal l perturbati ons of the ori gi nal steady
state are then wor ked out, taki ng i nto account the equati ons of
moti on, the equati on of conti nui ty, and Poi ssons equati on. I n thi s
way the i mpedances of the el ectr on cl oud i s cal cul ated and the wave
i mpedances wi thi n and wi thout the cl oud are matched. The vari ati on
wi th frequency of the i mpedance of the charge cl oud i s studi ed and i s
shown to be such as to l ead, under some condi ti ons of vol tage, magneti c
fi el d, and frequency, to a state i n whi ch osci l l ati ons wi l l bui l d up spon-
taneousl y. The anal ysi s i s then extended i n a mor e specul ati ve manner
to determi ne the rate of bui l dup of osci l l ati ons wi th vari ous l oads.
Thi s formul ati on of the probl em appears to si mpl i fy the tr ue state
of affai rs, for i t di vi des the process of i ni ti ati on of osci l l ati ons i nto two
stages: (1) the establ i shment of a steady azi muthal l y symmetri c state
whi ch i s supposed to persi st whi l e the anode vol tage remai ns constant,
(2) the breakup of thi s state under the angl e-dependent rotati ng perturba-
10. Bunemann,
A Smal l Ampl i tude Theor y for Magnetrons, CVD Repor t,
Msg. 37, 1944.
254. I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC.6. 8
ti on. I n practi ce one has a d-c vol tage that i ncreases steadi l y duri ng
theprocem. I f the ti me of ri se of thevol tage betaken to be O.04psec,
whi ch i s fai rl y typi cal , thi s becomes, i n terms of the uni t of ti me 2m/eBo,
equal to 3.6 X 102B0 (Bo i n ki l ogauss). A typi cal rate of ri se i n
r educed uni ts gi ves t3ao/& x 5 X 10-9(nX/~~B~) (MKS). I t i s evi dent
that the rate at whi ch the vol tage ri ses i s i ndeed sl ow i n terms of the
natural uni ts, occupyi ng many Larmor peri ods. Thus i t i s probabl y
sati sfactory to consi der the probl em as a stati c one.
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
e
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 0.1 0. 2 0. 3 0. 4 0. 5 0. 6 0. 7 0. 8 0. 9 LO
Log~
FI G. 6.12.Radi us of Bri l l oui n steady-date r - as a functi on of y, for vari ous anode
radi i r., when the anode vol tage i s equal to the threshol d vol tage. Log r~o.~/rm,~. i s
pl otted agai nst y for vari ous val ues of l og rti /r~th~e. The boundary cur ve showe the
radi us of the stati onary l ayer.
The state chosen by Bunemann as an i ni ti al state for the el ectrons
i s the Bri l l oui n steady state i n whi ch the radi al cur r ent i s zer o and the
el ectrons move about the cathode on concentri c ci rcl es. As has been
shown i n the previ ous secti on, i f the cl oud radi us i s l ess than 2.271, no
stati onary doubl e-stream sol uti on wi th zer o radi al cur r ent and constant
anode vol tage i s possi bl e. The onl y si ngl e-stream state for vani shi ng
radi al cur r ent i s the 13ri l l oui n one. I n Fi g. 6.12 the radi us of the Bri l l oui n
steady state i s showti for vari ous anode to cathode rati os and val ues of ~
when i t i s assumed that the anode vol tage i s gi ven by the threshol d
vol tage. Thi s assumpti on i s a reasonabl e one, si nce the cl oud radi us does
not vary rapi dl y wi th anode vol tage and the magnetron certai nl y operates
near the threshol d vol tage. I t maybe seen that for most practi cal cases
SEC. 6. 8] THE BUNEMANN SMALL-AMPLI TUDE THEORY 255
the cl oud radi us under these condi ti ons i s l ess than 2.271. Whi l e the
resul t that onl y the Bri l l oui n steady state i s possi bl e as a stati onary
condi ti on for fi xed anode vol tage must be accepted, i t must al so be
recal l ed that Bl ochs anal ysi s i ndi cates that when the anode vol tage i s
actual l y varyi ng, the moti on maybe mor e compl i cated. I t cannot then
be sai d that the establ i shment of the Bri l l oui n steady state under a sl owl y
ri si ng vol tage has been unequi vocal l y shown.
The condi ti ons i n the Bri l l oui n state are descri bed by the equati ons
30 = o, (l 17a)
$0=17$
(l 17b)
#
1
()
1
=z
si >
(117C)
()
p,=; 1+:,
(l 17d)
wher e the zer o subscri pt r efer s to unperturbed val ues. I f the perturbed
state be al so a type S state, then one may i ntroduce a si ngl e-val ued
vel oci ty potenti al , from whi ch the vel oci ti es may be deri ved [see
Eq. (30N, 3 l N)]. I n the nonrel ati vi sti c case the vel oci ty potenti al may
be i ntroduced di rectl y from Eq. (70),
:
aj
=%
(l 18a)
( )
s2y_1+T+~ =y,
#
a+
(l 18b)
wher e f i s chosen so that dj/ds and dj/W vani sh at s = 1. For the
unperturbed state, evi dentl y ~ = O. Equati on (69) takes the form
{
[, -s+ -(1-i) s2+l=i[t:Y
[
+ (17)s :+::
11
2
. (119)
y
Wri ti ng
1
()
12
asa+=zsi al
(120)
and negl ecti ng squares of af/as and aj/a~, one has
(121a)
I
I f the perturbati ons are now such that thei r dependence on angl e i s gi ven
256 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC. 643
bye$, theni fj = I j\e-n* and al = l al l e-n~~,
(121b)
I t i s general l y the case, as a study of Fi g. 6.12 wi l l show, that
1 -y (1/s2) passes through zer o wi thi n thecl oud and at that poi nt
the l i near term i n dj/13#wi l l not be l arge compared wi th the quadrati c
ones. Equati on (121 b), however , gi ves cor r ectl y thetermi n the vol t-
age perturbati on that vari es as e-nl $. Physi cal l y, the vani shi ng of
1 ~ (l /s2)corresponds tothepr esence ofal ayer ofchargethat i sat
rest i n the rotati ng system. Shel l s of el ectrons wi thi n thi s l ayer have
negati ve angul ar vel oci ti es; those wi thout i t, posi ti ve angul ar vel oci ti es.
Substi tuti ng ao + a, i n Poi ssons equati on
(122)
wher e PI = l pl l e-ni ~ i s the perturbati on of the charge densi ty. Fi nal l y,
one has the equati on of conti nui ty
or , cor r ect to fi rst-order terms,
%H(l+WWS(l-+

()
2; 1 + ; Ijl = O. (123b)
El i mi nati ng la,! and 1P,]between Eqs. (121 b), (122), and (123 b), one fi nds
for 1~] the second-or der equati on
[1
~ A a# = (A + B)ljI ,
wher e tisgi ven by s = e{ and thus,
c1 sd
=. ,
dt n ds
and
4=-2 (1++) +2(--+Y
B=:(,-,-$.).
(124)
(125a)
(125b)
+
SEC. 6. 8] THE BUNEMANN SMALL-AMPLI TUDE THEORY 257
The val ue of tat the anode for practi cal magnetrons i s ver y nearl y con-
stant. The form taken by Eq. (124) for l arge n may be found as befor e
by wri ti ng s = efl n = 1 + (xo/rJ ( or f = 2mf. I t i s
$(1 t) ~y = (1 - t)lj[, (126)
wher e
()
t=27r f;.
Equati on (124) forms the basi s of Bunemanns anal ysi s. Si nce i t i s a
l i near di fferenti al equati on of the second or der , i t i s i mpossi bl e for
(jl and dl jl /df to vani sh at the same poi nt, wi thout I fl vani shi ng i denti -
cal l y. Equati on (124), ther efor e, i ndi cates that the perturbati ons of
vol tage and of radi al fi el d cannot vani sh si mul taneousl y; i n parti cul ar,
they cannot both vani sh at the cathode. Thus, i f the potenti al vani shes
at the cathode, nei ther the radi al fi el d nor the radi al vel oci ty can vani sh
ther e. Bunemann endeavors to avoi d the di ffi cul ty caused by thi s
concl usi on, whi ch appears to be i n confl i ct wi th the usual assumpti on of
space-charge l i mi tati on and vani shi ng i ni ti al vel oci ty, by asserti ng that
these condi ti ons pr oper l y appl y to the total radi al fi el d and vel oci ty, but
not to any one Fouri er component.
The nature of the di ffi cul ty may be brought out by consi deri ng mor e
cl osel y the behavi or of j cl ose to the cathode. Suppose that the case
of radi al symmetry be exami ned; the azi muthal vari ati on does not affect
the concl usi ons. Then i f ther e i s an outgoi ng cur r ent i,
aj .
psz=l ,
wi th
2= (s-9+(9
Combi ni ng these i nto an equati on for 8j/t3s, one haa
Ws$[(s-)+wl] 2.
(127)
(128)
(129)
Near to the cathode (s = 1), j behaves l i ke ~(9~i /2)~(s l )%. The
thi ckness of the sheath cl ose to the cathode i n whi ch j fol l ows thi s l aw
may be esti mated by equati ng s (1/s) and 8j/8s. Thi s gi ves,
sti a,h = 1 + ~i . The charge contai ned i n the sheath vari es as i ,
whi l e the charge densi ty vari es as (S 1)3$. I t i s al so evi dent that
258 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC.68
beyond the sheath one wi l l have
[
t
(130)
1
I f the Bri l l oui n steady state be i magi ned as deri ved from such a sol u-
ti on by al l owi ng i to tend to zer o, i t i s cl ear that condi ti ons at the cathode
wi l l be somewhat pecul i ar, si nce for any fi ni te i however smal l , j wi l l
behave l i ke (S l )% through a sheath +yi i n thi ckness. Thus, i n Bune-
manns anal ysi s, i f the perturbati on causes currents to fl ow at any part of
the cathode, ~ wi l l be of the or der (S l )% and the term (~j/13s)2 i n Eq.
(130) wi l l be of a l ower or der than f over a di stance of the or der of i from
the cathode. Bunernann i gnores thi s sheath and puts j = O essenti al l y
at a di stance i from the cathode, wher e, i n fact, j i s about
.
I t woul d appear that thi s i s justi fi abl e. 1
Accepti ng the val i di ty of these arguments one may consi der Eq. (124).
Thi s has certai n features whi ch are i ndependent of n. I t has al ways
two si ngul ar poi nts, whi ch may be l abel ed s+ and s., gi ven by
@)= -2(1+ 9+n(1--Y=0
(131a)
Thi s may be wri tten as
H
?n4J0
eB
=Y=;(@iJ(l+JJ=Ta

nfq ~ x//l 2b* + 2b$, (13 H))

wher e b = +(1 1/s2) and runs from 1 to *(1 s:*). The radi us
at whi ch the unperturbed vel oci ty vani shes i n the rotati ng system i s
$
gi ven by
l
7.$=0
~ = 2bo, or ~ = nbo = A (131c)
Fi gures 6.13a, b, and c show nwo/eB or T8 as a functi on of b+, b_, and bo
for thr ee val ues of n, (n = 4), (n = 8), and (n = CO).
The vari abl e d must be thought of as runni ng from @ to m,
si nce one i s i nterested i n perturbi ng waves runni ng i n ei ther di recti on.
Consi deri ng a fi xed 8, or a fi xed frequency and fi xed magneti c fi el d,
1See i n thi s connecti on, W. E. Lamb and M. Phi l l i ps,J our. App. Phus., 18, 230
(1947).
SEC. 6. 8] THE BUNEMANN SMALL-AMPLI TUDE THEORY
25Y
thecl oud radi us wi l l i ncrease astheappl i ed vol tage i ncreases. Thus,b.1..d
wi l l i ncrease steadi l y from zer o, and the cl oud wi l l contai n al l val ues
of b between O and b.~.d. From Fi gs. 6.13a, b and c, i t may be seen
0.4
0.3
b
0.2
0.1
E Reacti ve
K Posi ti veconductance
K Negati veconductance
K Ambi guous
1
0.2
b
0.1
0
-1.0 0 +1.0
(b)
-1 0
(c)
Fm. 6.13.-(a) Radl i of thetwosi nsukrstreamsandthestati onarys tre.sm asafunc-
ti on of nwo/ eB for n = 4. The functi onb = *(1 r&~e/r!) i s pl otted. The broken
l i ne represents atypi cal val ue forthe anode radi us, andthedotted l i ne i ndi cates the cl oud
radi us when the anode vol tage i s equal to the threshol d vol tage. (b) Same for n = 8.
(c) Locati on of the si ngul ar etreama and stati onary etream as a functi on of rrm~/ eBfor
n = m. The vari abl e2dY/AD),wher eAoi s the wavel engthof the fi el di n the i nteracti on
space, i s pl otted. The cl oud radi us coi nci deswi th that of the stati onaryl ayer when
the anode vol tagei s equal to the threshol dvol tage for each case.
that when r8 < 1, none of S+, sO, or s- i s wi thi n the cl oud; for
-1< m! < O,s+ i s i ncl uded for a suffi ci entl y hi gh vol tage; for O < d <1,
sOi s fi rst i ncl uded, then S+; for 1 < d, s_, so, and S+ are successi ve] y
i ncl uded as V i ncreases. Not al l cases maybe real i zed, si nce b.~~ < bud..
260 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC. 6+3
The val ues of b correspondi ng to the threshol d vol tage as the anode
have al so been pl otted; for n = co the stati onary l ayer i s exactl y at
the cl oud boundary when the threshol d vol tage i s on the anode. Cl earl y
the pr esence or absence of the si ngul ari ti es depends upon vol tage,
magneti c fi el d, and frequency. The si ngul ari ti es have some physi cal
si gni fi cance, for n[l ~ (1/s)] i s the frequency wi th whi ch the
el ectrons encounter the vari ati ons i n potenti al whi l e, as was shown
previ ousl y, V2[1 + (1/s4)] i s the l ocal frequency of osci l l ati on of the
space charge i n a cyl i ndri cal l y symmetri c fi el d. The two si ngul ari ti es
cor r espond to resonance between these frequenci es. The two r oots
appear from the two senses of rotati on of the el ectrons; they are separated
by the r oot for the stati onary l ayer as they shoul d be.
I t i s now necessary to der i ve an expressi on for the wave admi ttance
H./E$ at the surface of the space-charge cl oud. Some car e i s necessary,
si nce a quasi -stati c approxi mati on i s bei ng used. One has
negl ecti ng U2WOT2 compared wi th 1 and putti ng VI = A o WA ~.
Be~ween the concentri c ci rcl es that bound the per~urbed l ayer of the
space charge ther e i s an r-f surface cur r ent of rnawi tucl e + PoAT(~o+ U),
wher e A i s the ampl i tude of the
found from the equati on
aA ?
.
a+ 40
Thus,
H, = Hz(i nsi de) +
perturbati on of the
af

A= aT
or
nj~o
H(surface current)
surface. A may be
(133)
and
(134a)
(K34b)
1An unreducedf is used at thi s poi nt.
SEC. 6. 8] THE B UNEMANN SMALL-AMPLI TUDE THEORY
The cl oud admi ttance i s thus gi ven by
wher e YO= ucor
I n reduc~d vari abl es
Si nce, accordi ng to Eq. (121a) ~al = [1 ~ (1/s2)]njf
A f,
_p=; +
n2g2 j
261
(135a)
(135b)
(136)
wher e g = 1 ~ (1/s2)
Substi tuti ng for Aj/j i n Eq. (124), one obtai ns the equati on for P
()
,2
dP
P+;
.
dt
l + P+:+
al
(137)
wher e
or , for Q = l/P, the normal i zed i mpedance
dQ
( ) (l+$QY
l +QI ~ _
(138a)
.
dt C#
~21
For n ~ @, thi s becomes
()
()
1+$
$=Qz 1+2
t~ 1
1
(138b)
wher e, as before, t= 27r(u I S/2).
The Eq. (138a) has to be i ntegrated up to the surface of the charge
cl oud wi th the condi ti on that Q = ~ at t = O. I t maybe wel l to empha-
si ze that these equati ons do not descri be the vari ati on of admi ttance
or i mpedance as one moves through a cl oud of fi xed radi us but rather
r epr esent the vari ati on of these quanti ti es at the surface of the cl oud
262
I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [Smc.6+3
aa the radi us of the l atter i s vari ed (say by i ncreasi ng the vol tage).
Functi onal l y 1, Q = p, Q(s,, n, -Y).
The si ngul ari ti es of Eqs. (137)
and (138a) are the same as those of Eq. (124). The zer o val ue of a does
not l ead to a si ngul ari ty; for from Eq. (138a), i f so or tOmarks the sta-
ti onary l ayer,
Q = (s so) or (f t,)
near sOor G. Thi s i s the resul t as gi ven by Bunemann and i s not stri ctl y
cor r ect, si nce i n the nei ghborhood of sO, the defi ni ti on of A has to be
modMed i n vi ew of the vani shi ng of $. Exami nati on shows that one has
Q = IS S,].
Si nce sOi s a functi on of CJ(through 6), then, i f u = tio + (U UO) wher e
So(@o) = s,
(139)
Bunemanns di scussi on of stabi l i ty depends upon the fol l owi ng con-
si derati ons concerni ng admi ttance functi ons.
Consi der an admi ttance
G + @ (or an i mpedance E + jX) that i s a functi on of the compl ex
frequency u + ju. Then for networ ks and for any system wher eby
the admi ttance i s cal cul ated as a functi on of frequency by anal yti cal
means, G + jB is an anal yti c functi on of u + ju. Usi ng the Cauchy-
Ri emann condi ti ons,
aG aB
. ,
iko au
aG aB
. .
au aw
For. a ci rcui t that i s reacti ve for real frequenci es (v = 0), one has when
a = h
(140)
Thus i f & i s negati ve, correspondi ng to a sl i ghtl y i ncreasi ng ampl i tude
of osci l l ati on, 5G i s posi ti ve for normal networks, si nce aB/a~ > 0,
and the networ k behaves l i ke a l oad. But i f aB/ t3u wer e negati ve, Z
woul d be negati ve and any transi ent that started to bui l d up woul d be
ai ded by the ci rcui t whi ch coul d act as a gener ator . Thus a networ k,
purel y reacti ve for real frequenci es, wi l l be unstabl e i f aB/au < O;
si mi l arl y, when i 3X/h <0.
The behavi or of Q (or P) must then be studi ed as a functi on of fr e-
SEC. 6. 8] THE BUNEMANN SMALL-AMPLI TUDE THEORY 263
quency. Consi der j i n the nei ghborhood of one of the si ngul ari ti es.
Si nce the zer o of A is si mpl e, i f i t occurs at t = t+ correspondi ng to
s = s*, then j has the form C + l og (t+ t)or C + l og (s* s).
TMS may be i nserted i nto the equati on defi ni ng P whi ch, noti ng that
A (s*) = O, becomes
r[
P*=T ~ 1+
2
1
4
5$+1 c + l og (s* s) + n(s: + 1)
1
c + l og (s* s)
. (141)
The fi rst l ogari thmi c term domi nates the second for n > 1. The pl us
si gn r efer s to the l eft-hand (upper) hyperbol a i n Fi gs. (6 13); the mi nus
si gn to the ri ght-hand (l ower) one.
As before, s&, defi ned by A (sJ = O,
i s a functi on of w Thus
c + l og (s* s) = c + l og [S*(U) s]
[
= c + l og s*(@*) + (0 U*) * s
1
= C + l og (u o*), (142)
wher e
S+(f.o+)= s.
Thus, the domi nant part of Y~oud, consi dered as a functi on of
frequency for fi xed cl oud radi us s i n the nei ghborhood of a si ngul ar
frequency CO*, i s
The l ogari thmi c character of the si ngul ari ty i ndi cates that f acqui res
an i magi nary part i n passi ng a si ngul ar poi nt and P (or Q) wi l l acqui re
a real part. I t i s evi dent from thi s fact that i n case the admi ttance
gai ns a negati ve real part, the whol e anal ysi s has been extended i nto a
regi on i n whi ch i t i s i nval i d. For i f the space-charge cl oud i s to act as a
gener ator [Re(P) < O] i n a steady state, ther e must be a steady fl ow of
ener gy i nto the resonant system. Thi s, i n turn, i mpl i es that el ectrons
mu~t fl ow to the anode, and thi s i s i ncompati bl e wi th the earl i er hypoth-
esi s of the smal l si gnal theor y. Physi cal l y, then, one cannot safel y
car r y the anal ysi s beyond the si ngul ari ti es.
I f i n some regi on f i s compl ex, say f = fl + jjz, then the i magi nary
part of A (d l og j/ds) i s A (jlj~ Jzfl) /fl +X, and the numerator i s
i ndependent of, t,si nce jl and jz i ndi vi dual l y sati sfy Eq. (124). Sub-
sti tuti ng i n Eq. (141) defi ni ng P, i t i s seen that the conductance can
change si gn onl y at t+or t,wher e f, and j~ are di sconti nuous. Starti ng
from a cl oud radi us of uni ty, the admi ttance wi l l be purel y suscepti ve
and c real . As the fi rst si ngul ari ty i s passed, l og (s* s) acqui res an
264
I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS
[SEC. 68
i magi nary part kjm whose si gn depends upon the path by whi ch the
ai ngul ari t y i s avoi ded. One i s i nterested i n a case wher e COO= UO+ ja
and u i s sl i ghtl y negati ve. Usi ng the rel ati on
one has
m. auo 2n _
d
.
eB as S3 +
()
~ %;
S5 l +
S4
(144)
and for n > 0, dwO/ds > 0, so that i f 6u0 = ju wher e u i s negati ve, then
&Im(s) <0 and the path of i ntegrati on goes bel ow the axi s. Thi s
means that the l ogari thm i ncreases by jr. The term
[c + l og (s0 s)]-,
ther efor e, acqui res a posi ti ve i magi nary part. Exami ni ng Eq. (143)
i t i s seen that the si gn of the real part of Y i s the same as that i n fron~ of
the radi cal for aO <0 and opposi te to i t for u, >0. The b, ma pl ane i s
now di vi ded i nto reacti ve regi ons and regi ons of posi ti ve and negati ve
conductance as shown i n Fi g. 6 13. The behavi or i n the regi on beyond
the second si ngul ari ty i s ambi guous wi thout speci al exami nati on.
From Eq. (143) for the admi ttance i n a suscepti ve regi on cl ose to a
si ngul ari ty, i .e., i mmedi atel y to the ri ght of the si ngul ar curves i n Fi g.
6.11, i t i s found that the susceptance decreases wi th frequency to the
ri ght of the s+ cur ve and i ncreases to the ri ght of the s curve. Si nce
i n the nei ghborhood of the sO cur ve the susceptance fol l ows l u uOl
and ther efor e i ts vari ati on wi th frequency changes si gn, i t i s reasonabl e
to conjectur e that throughout the suscepti ve regi on between the sOand
S+, the susceptance decreases wi th frequency. Thi s has been veri fi ed
by Bunemann by numeri cal i ntegrati on of Eq. (124) i n several cases of
di fferent n val ues, and the behavi or for the several n val ues turned
out to be substanti al l y al i ke. I t thus appears that these regi ons wi l l be
unstabl e accordi ng to the cri teri a set up. Bunemann now pursues the
anal ysi s to obtai n a match between the reacti ve part of the admi ttance
and that of the l oad, l eavi ng the real parts to adjust themsel ves. For
sharpl y resonant ci rcui ts matchhg can be efl ected at a gi ven u~ and B
onl y for a narrow range of cl oud radi i . Thus, i f s. be al so fi xed, a nearl y
uni que vol tage i s defi ned at whi ch bui l d-up can occur . Thi s i nstabi l i ty
vol tagel wi l l di ffer from the threshol d vol tage; one may expect the start-
I Thi s vol tage has been cal cul atedby Copl ey and Wdl shaw,G. E, C. Repor t S493,
August 1944, for several N and s.. The appl i cati on gi ven there to osci l l ati ng states
i s questi onabl e.
SEC. 6. 9] SELF-CONSI STENT FI ELDS
265
i ng vol tage of the tube to exceed ei ther. The i nevi tabl e pr esence of l eak-
age at l ow l evel s makes experi mental check di ffi cul t.
6.9. Anal ysi s by the Method of Sel f-consi stent Fi el ds.I n the fi st
secti ons of thi s chapter the equati ons of the magnetron are set up and
di scussed. The anal yti cal di ffi cul ti es that ari se i n thei r sol uti on have
been poi nted out, and i t has been found that many of these di ffi cul ti es
are carri ed over i nto the symmetri cal case. The case i n whi ch tangenti al
fi el ds are present has been the subject of consi derabl e numeri cal i nvesti ga-
ti on. Thi s has not been carri ed so far as one mi ght wi sh, but the resul ts
have gi ven consi derabl e i nsi ght i nto the operati ng condi ti ons. The
methods used are, i n any event, of great i mportance.
The probl em may be stated once agai n to emphasi ze the aspects
of i nterest. One has a stati c fi el d, sati sfyi ng certai n boundary condi ti ons
at the anode and cathode. I n thi s fi el d the el ectrons move, sati sfyi ng
the equati ons of moti on and the equati on of conti nui ty. As a resul t of
thei r moti on, a charge densi ty exi sts and the stati c fi el d must be consi stent
wi th thi s densi ty through Poi ssons equati on. Thus, i n the termi nol ogy
of atomi c physi cs, the probl em i s a sel f-consi stent fi el d probl em. That i s,
the el ectr on moti ons are determi ned by the fi el ds i n whi ch they move;
the fi el ds are determi ned by the di stri buti on of el ectrons. I n the atomi c
probl em of many-el ectron ener gy l evel s, i t may be recal l ed, the method
of the sel f-consi stent fi el d assumes a potenti al ; the Schrti nger equati on
i s sol ved for the moti on of i ndi vi dual el ectrons i n thi s potenti al ; an
effecti ve charge di stri buti on i s found from the wave functi ons so deter -
mi ned; and, fi nal l y, thi s charge di stri buti on yi el ds a new potenti al . A
repeti ti on of the cal cul ati ons usi ng the new potenti al wi l l yi el d a second
potenti al and so on. I n general , the potenti al s and wave functi ons found
i n thi s way wi l l conver ge to a set of val ues that sati sfy al l the equati ons
of the probl em.
Si mi l arl y, i n the present method, a potenti al di stri buti on i s fi rst
assumed that sati sfi es the boundary condi ti ons and i n the sel ecti on of
whi ch may be r efl ected any knowl edge of the probabl e behavi or of the
fi el ds. I n thi s potenti al the el ectr on trajectori es are cal cul ated by
numeri cal means. From a suffi ci ent number of orbi ts a charge di stri bu-
ti on may be cal cul ated. From thi s charge di stri buti on by vi rtue of a
numeri cal sol uti on of Poi ssons equati on a new potenti al di stri buti on
i s found. I f thi s potenti al fi el d agrees wi th the ori gi nal fi el d, the probl em
woul d be sol ved; i f not, new orbi ts may be found and so on through
the cycl e of operati ons. I ntel l i gent cor r ecti on of the fi el d may be made
at any poi nt. I t may be anti ci pated that i f the i ni ti al choi ce of fi el d
wer e a good one, the successi ve cal cul ated potenti al s woul d show con-
ver gence to some l i mi t, and thi s potenti al di stri buti on, wi th i ts accom-
panyi ng orbi ts, woul d provi de a sol uti on of the ori gi nal probl em.
266 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC. 6. 9
The method cl earl y has di sadvantages i n compari son wi th an approxi -
mate anal yti cal sol uti on, for i t provi des i nformati on about onl y one set
of i ni ti al condi ti ons. Thus i f the d-c vol tage, r-f vol tage, magneti c
fi el d, or the i nteracti on space di mensi ons are al tered, the cal cul ati ons
must be started ah i ni ti o. I f the new parameters are cl ose to the ol d
ones, i t i s probabl e that the assumpti on of the fi nal fi el d of one probl em
bei ng the i ni ti al fi el d of the next woul d l ead to fai rl y rapi d conver gence.
However , the l abor i nvol ved i s excessi ve wi th any except the mor e
r ecent types of di gi tal computers. On the other hand, a sel f-consi stent
fi el d cal cul ati on carri ed through unti l the sol uti on conver ges sati sfactori l y
provi des ver y defi ni te i nformati on about the behavi or of the magnetron
under some assi gned condi ti ons.
I t thus enabl es one to see how the
magnetron i s actual l y worki ng at some poi nt. Combi ni ng thi s wi th the
empi ri cal fact that magnetron operati on i s not much affected by sub-
stanti al changes i n operati ng parameters, i t may be fel t to furni sh
i nformati on about typi cal condi ti ons. Thus, i ts val ue l i es not so much
i n the parti cul ar numeri cal val ues that i t yi el ds as i n gi vi ng an accurate
physi cal pi cture of processes i n the i nteracti on space and i n suggesti ng
new l i nes of attack upon the anal yti cal sol uti on.
The pri nci pal wor k i n thi s di recti on has been carri ed out by Hartree
and hi s cowor ker s at Manchester and by Stoner and hi s group-at Leeds.
The di scussi on gi ven her e wi l l be based pri nci pal l y upon a r epor t by
Tl bbs and Wri ghtl whi ch i s typi cal of the methods devel oped. Actual l y,
onl y thr ee cases have been studi ed extensi vel y by the sel f-consi stent fi el d
method, and one of these cases showed a notabl e absence of conver gence.
The magnetron studi ed by Tl bbs and Wri ght was a Bri ti sh 10-cm
tube, the CV76, whi ch had been the subject of earl i er wor k by Hartree2
at l ow fi el ds (1050 gauss, ~ = .520). The rel evant parameters for thei r
probl em are
N=8 n=4
Anode radi us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . r~=O.8cm
Cathode radi us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rt=O.3cm
Wavel ength, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,, 10, Ocm
D-c vol tage, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28,5kv
R-f vol tage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55kv
Magneti c fi el d, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2300 gauss
Observed cur r ent . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5 amps/cm
I n r educed vari abl es
Sa = 2.67,
ao = 5.85,
al = saii~ = 1.75,
y = 0.233.
1Ti bbs and Wri ght, CVD Report, Msg. 41, 1945.
ZD. R. Hartree, CVD Report, Msg. 36, 1944.
SEC. 6.91
SELF-CONSISTENT FIELDS 267
The anode potenti al may be wri tten as
a = a. + al cos n~, (145a)
and the potenti al i n the i nteracti on space as
a(s) = aO(s) + al(s) cos n+ + a-l(s) si n n+
+ a,(s) cos 2n~ + . (145b)
whi l e the cathode emi ssi on densi ty i s
~=jO+jl cosni +j-l si nnt+j2cos2n4+ .
(145C)
I t i s assumed that al l but the fi rst thr ee terms of these seri es may be
i gnored. Then
aao
e, .=
+~cosn*+~si nn#
= e. el cos n~ el si n n~, (145d)
wher e e, i s the radi al fi el d. The i ni ti al pr ocedur e i s to make esti mates
of eO, el , and el , from whi ch the potenti al s are found i n the form
Exper i ence i ndi cates that the success of the sel f-consi stent fi el d
method depends upon an i ntel l i gent choi ce of the i ni ti al fi el ds. These
fi el ds are usual l y subject to two condi ti ons. Si nce cur r ent i s bei ng drawn,
i f space-charge l i mi tati on i s to be adhered to, each of the functi ons
eo, el and e-l must behave cl ose to the cathode
shown i n the precedi ng secti on. Thi s ensures
fi el d wi l l behave cor r ectl y cl ose to the cathode.
eO, el , and e_l must sati sfy the condi ti ons
/
8.
aO=
ea ds,
1
J
s.
al =
e, ds,
1
/
O = e-, ds.
1
l i ke (s 1)~~, as was
that the total radi al
I n the second pl ace,
(146a)
(146b)
(146c)
The choi ce of eo i s suggested by the fact that near the cathode wher e
the r-f fi el ds are rel ati vel y weak, the el ectr on moti on shoul d, i n i ts d-c
component, resembl e the moti on i n a magnetron wi thout r-f and wi th
the same d-c vol tage on the anode. I f the cl oud radi us exceeded 2.271,
one coul d use the fi el ds of the doubl e-stream steady-state that have
been found by numeri cal i ntegrati on; for s.,0.. <2.271 one can make use
of the si ngl e-stream state up to the fi rst radi us at whi ch the el ectrons
268 INTERACTION OF THE EIJZCTRONS [SEC. 6.9
have a poi nt of i nfl exi on (or f = O). Thus, the computed di ode fi el d
i s used up to thi s radi us and then fi tted to a l ogari thmi c potenti al beyond
thi s poi nt, correspondi ng to an absence of charge. I n fi tti ng, the peak
i n the di ode fi el d brought about by the l arge charge densi ty at the junc-
ti on must be drasti cal l y smoothed out.
Usi ng known di ode fi el ds the i ni ti al cl oud radi us i s found to be 1.49
wi th the gi ven condi ti ons; thi s i s onl y sl i ghtl y di fferent from the radi us
i n the Bri l l oui n state for thi s case, namel y, 1.44. I n smoothi ng out the
fi el d, r egar d has been pai d to the fact that ther e i s actual l y d-c cur r ent
i n the whol e i nteracti on space, and the fi el d has been made constant
~ather than of the form 1/s beyond the cl oud radi us.
I f ther e wer e no space charge, e, cos n+ woul d be of the form
s + s (30sT@/
ms. sn
..
s
(147)
and thi s expressi on i s chosen to r epr esent el i n the regi on 1.6 < s < 2.67
outsi de the cl oud. A constant mul ti pl i er i s i ntroduced to sati sfy the
boundary condi ti ons. Cl ose to the cathode the fi el d i s of the form
A(s l )%, and thi s expressi on i s used between s = 1 and s = ~.
Between these two regi ons one has l i ttl e gui dance save from previ ous
cal cul ati ons, and these have i ndi cated that the r-f fi el ds vary ver y l i ttl e
wi th radi us. Thus, e, i s put equal to the val ue of the Lapl ace fi el d
ats = 1.6 and hel d constant betweens = 1.6 ands = ~. A i s adjusted
for fi t at s = ~~, and the constant mul ti pl i er i n the other fi el ds adjusted
to gi ve a, cor r ectl y at the anode.
The sel ecti on of el i s ver y arbi trary. I t i s put equal to D (s 1))*
from s = 1 to s = ~~. I t i s agai n assumed to be i ndependent of s
from s = ~$ to s = 1.6 but of onl y hal f the val ue of el . Thi s makes
the phase angl e of the rotati ng fi el d tanl (e-,/el ) equal to 26.5.
Beyond s = 1.6 i t i s made to fal l off l i nearl y i n such a way that a_l i s zer o
at the anode.
I n or der to have some means of testi ng the choi ce of a tri al fi el d
wi thout the l abor of cal cul ati ng several orbi ts, Ti bbs and Wri ght i ntro-
duce the i dea of favorabl e regi ons of the fi el d. The i dea her e i s that
i t i s possi bl e to say that i n certai n parts of the i nteracti on space an
el ectr on wi l l conti nual l y l ose ener gy.
Thus, i f i t stays i n those regi ons,
i t wi l l eventual l y reach the anode. I f an el ectr on si tuated i n the favor-
abl e regi on (determi ned a pri ori ) cannot reach the anode, the tri al fi el d
may be r ejected. Assumi ng for the moment that the phase of the r-f
fi el d does not change over the radi al regi on of i nterest, one may wri te
sad = j(s) cos wV,
1Stoner , CVD Repor t, Msg. 8, 1941.
SEC. 6x3] SELF-CONSI STENT FI ELDS 269
wher e ~ = ~ + phase angl e of r-f. Now consi deri ng one of the expr es-
si ons for ener gy 10ss
%4d
=Sa+y
J
a(ao s%)dT,
a+
(148)
thi s i s undoubtedl y posi ti ve for T/2 < n~ < T; thus, thi s may be con-
si dered a favorabl e regi on. Ti bbs and Wri ght cl ai m that O < n~ < 7T/2
i s al so a favorabl e regi on. Thei r argument depends upon combi ni ng
Eqs. (54a) and (54b) i n the form
[J
s=; l ~
a(ao
1
sa~) 2 a(a,
a). (149)
8$ S+T as
They poi nt out that for O < n+ < 7r/2, i f s.(y) i s the radi al coordi nate
i n the absence of tangenti al forces,
3> 5D. (150)
Then, si nce an el ectr on returns exactl y to the cathode at the end of i ts
fi rst l oop, when tangenti al fi el ds are absent, i t i s asserted that the i ne-
qual i ty (150) i mpl i es that an el ectr on movi ng whol l y i n O < n$ < T/2
wi l l not return to the cathode. I t i s fai rl y cl ear that thi s does not fol -
l ow from (150), and ther e seems to be no reason for thi nki ng that
O < n+ < Ir/z k actual l y a favorabl e regi on. The whol e i dea of
favorabl e regi ons i s r ender ed of somewhat doubtful val ue, as Ti bbs and
Wri ght themsel ves admi t, by the fact that el ectrons l eave the cathode
wi th angul ar vel oci ty -y and may possi bl y cross from favorabl e to
unfavorabl e regi ons and vi ce versa.
As a tri al orbi t the el ectr on starti ng at n+ = 90, whi ch i s i n the regi on
90 < nt <180, both cl ose to the cathode and i n the di ode regi on, i s
used. Thk orbi t and another tri al orbi t are shown i n Fi g. 6.14. I t
appears that the orbi t i s goi ng to run over i nto the unfavorabl e regi on;
and accordi ng to Ti bbs and Wri ght, i t does not reach the anode. The
reason gi ven for the fai l ure of thi s tri al fi el d i s that i t makes the average
tangenti al vel oci ti es come out too hi gh, so that el ectrons pass from the
favorabl e to the unfavorabl e regi on. I n the di ode fi el d the angul ar
vel oci ty i s 1 ~ - 1/s2; and i f thi s i s averaged to the edge of the cl oud
from the cathode, one has ~mw= 1 ~ l /s&u~. A possi bl e choi ce
of the di ode fi el d may now be made by maki ng Sti d = 1/(1 -y),
whi ch has the effect of maki ng $.= = O, and on the average an el ectr on
i n a favorabl e regi on mi ght be expected to stay ther e. Thi s l eads to a
new choi ce of cl oud radi us of s- = 1/(1 - 0.232). Si mul taneousl y
z Consi der the functi ons s, = 1 cm r and S*= a - a em r wher e a < 1, then
i l =l - s,andi z=a - S*; ther efor e, S, > Sz at the same val ue of S, but both
sj and S*start wi th s = 3 = Oat r = O,and both return to s = (t.
I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC. 6.9
FI G. 6.14.Equi val ent potenti al for rejected tri cl fi el d i n Ti bbs and Wri ghts ael f-
concktent fi el d cal cul ati on. Two orbi ts are shown. Shaded regi ons are i naccecci bl e to
the el ectrons
FI G. 6.16.Equi vrdent potenti al for acceptabl e tri al fi el d i n cel f-consi stent fi el d cal cul a-
ti on. Four orbi ts are shown. Shaded regi ons are i naccessi bl e to the el ectrons. Arrows
i ndi cate the di recti on of the mcular moti on of el ectrons.
271
SEC. 6. 9]
SELF-CONSI STENT FI ELDS
2.0r
1.8
1.6
/
L4
/
1.2
/
t=1.0
/
0.8
A K
0.6
(a>/
0.4
/ (b)
0.2
/ /
o~
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 S 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
FI G. 6.1 6.The i n-phase potenti al a, (i n r educed uni ts) as a functi on of radi ue. (a) Tri al
fi el d; (b) deri ved fi el d.
wi th thi s change i n the radi al fi el d, a change i s made i n the fi el d el .
Thi s i s now made euual to e_l . The tri al orbi t now reaches the anode,
and the new fi el d i s made the basi s for several orbi t cal cul ati ons.
Some
of these orbi ts are shown i n Fi g. 6.15. Fi gures 6.16 to 6 18 show the
new choi ce of potenti al s uO, al,
a_l.
The cal cul ati on of the charge
densi ty and the cathode emi ssi on
depends upon a method i ntro-
duced by Hartree. ~ I n thi s
method the orbi ts and the i nterac-
ti on space are subjected to a trans-
formati on. When an orbi t has
been cal cul ated, i t i s i mpl i ed that
one knows r = r(r,#O) and # = ~(r,~o), wher e to i s the i ni ti al aai muth at
the cathode and r i s the transi t ti me. I t i s thus possi bl e to make a trans-
-0.61
1 1 I , , 1
1.0 12 1.4 M 18S20 22 24 2.6 2S
l %. 6.17.The out-of-phem potenti al
U_I (i n r educed uni ts) as a functi on of ~adi W.
(a) Tri al fi el d; (b) deri ved fi el d.
I
10
8
(2)
\
6
/
/
\
b
4
/
(1)
2
0 ~
1.0 12 1.4 1.61. 32.02224262S
s
Fm. 6.18.The effecti ve radi al potenti al aO(inr educed uni ti ) ~ a functi on of radi ua.
Tri al fi el d; (b) deri ved fi el d.
(a)
I
I Hartree,CVD Repor t, l dag. 36, 1944.
I
272 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS
[SEC. 69
formati on =~(r,#) and#0=40(r-,4). The orbi ts appear as verti cal l i nes
i n such a (l ,$O)-pl ot, and l i nes of constant r and ~ may be drawn i n the
di agram. The (r,#O)-pl ot forthefi rst set of orbi ts i sshown i n Fi g. 6.19.
Poi ssons equati on i s sol ved i n the fol l owi ng way: A functi on
q(n~, l ogr/rO) = q(f?,l )i si ntroduced,defi ne dby
H
1 O/n
1
I J(e,l ) =n

Pr dr dd;
10 0 co
Poi ssons equati on then reads
(151)
(152)
I f aq/a$ i s expanded i n a Fouri er seri es, one has
and VO, V~may be found anal yti cal l y i f q is known. But the l atter may
be found i n the fol l owi ng way; i f the cathode emi ssi on has the form
J = J o + JI cos n$ + J-I si n n#
= (Jo J, J-J + Ji (cos n~ + 1) + J_, (si n r@ + 1), (154)
wher e a parti ti on haa been made that makes al l the terms of the emi ssi on
posi ti ve, the thr ee cases 1, (1 + cos n#), and (1 + si n n+) may be
tr eated separatel y. For each case the appropri ate q may be found,
si nce each el ement of area i n the (r,#O)-pl ot has associ ated wi th i t the
charge that l eft an el ement of the cathode 1#0,IJO+ d~o between the
ti mes (7, r + dT); i t thus contai ns a charge j(#O) d+o dr. Thus, the charge
i n a regi on of the (1,0)-pl ot may be found gi vi ng q. The Vs cal cul ated
from the thr ee qs are mul ti pl i ed respecti vel y by JO J1 JI, JI, and
J.1. Ther e are thkee boundary condi ti ons, and these gi ve thr ee si mul -
taneous equati ons to determi ne the Js.
The fi el ds deri ved from the charge di stri buti on may now be compared
wi th those ori gi nal l y rweumea. l t the agreement i s good, the cal cul ati on
may be consi dered compl ete; i f not, a further repeti ti on of the process i s
necessary. The conver gence of the process i s frequentl y poor . An
earl i er cal cul ati on by Ti bbs and Wri ght 1 for a 3-cm magnetron showed
ver y l i ttl e conver gence after several stages and was found to requi re
exceedi ngl y hi gh cathode emi ssi ons at each stage. They wer e l ed to
I Ti bbs and Wri ght, Temperature and Space Charge Li mi ted Emi ssi on i n
Magnetrons, CVD Report, Msg. 3S.
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
SEC. 69] ,SEI,F-CO.VASISTEA T FIELDS
273
concl ude that the req~l i rement of space-charge l i mi ted emi ssi on coul d not
be met and to abandon thi s I ml mcl ary condi ti (m. I 1o\rmw-, as they
l ater poi nted o~l t, the trol ]hl e dors not l i c i n thv physi cal condi ti (ms
of the probl em I )ut rather i n the fact that i f the s~l ccrssi ve sol uti ons of
0 I ni ti al azi muth of emi ssi on ($.)
o0
FI Q. 6. 19.7 vs. $0 di agram for the sel f-consi stent fi el d anal ysi s wi th ----- contours of
constant azi muth # and contours of constant radi us s. Orbi ts are l i nes paral l el to
the r-axi s. Verti cal scal e represents ~.
the probl em are to conver ge, i t i s apparentl y necessary to make a good
i ni ti al esti mate of the fi el ds.
As may have been noted, the methods of choosi ng i ni ti al fi el ds are
rather arbi trary and entai l a process of judi ci ous extrapol ati on from
earl i er cal cul ati ons. Furthermore, the esti mati on of the goodness of a
sol uti on by a si mpl e vi sual compari son of the radi al pl ots of the fi el d
components seems unsati sfactory. I n the next secti on a possi bl e method
274 1NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS
[SEC. 6. 10
of i mprovi ng the sel f-consi stent fi el d techni que wi l l be r efer r ed to.
Despi te the l ack of preci si on i n the sol uti on found by Ti bbs and Wri ght,
the effi ci ency and cathode emi ssi on that they deri ved are i n reasonabl y
good agreement wi th experi ment.
6.10. Qual i tati ve Di scussi on of the I nteracti on.The anal yti cal di ffi -
cul ti es that pr event a sol uti on of Eqs. (54a), (54b), (56), and (57) compel
one to fal l back upon a qual i tati ve di scussi on i n or der to understand some
of the sal i ent features of magnetron operati on. I n thi s di scussi on one
i s hel ped to some extent by the sel f-consi stent fi el d cal cul ati ons, but i t
appears that these have not been carri ed far enough or wor ked out for a
suffi ci ent vari ety of cases to be of great assi stance.
The most i mportant feature of the magnetron equati ons i n deter -
mi ni ng the characteri sti c behavi or of the tube i s that they may be
formul ated as the equati ons of a stati c probl em. I t fol l ows that the
nature of the effecti ve potenti al gi ven by Eq. (55), i s of consi derabl e
si gni fi cance and that an exami nati on of thi s potenti al functi on shoul d
gi ve consi derabl e i nsi ght i nto the type of moti on possi bl e. Wer e the
potenti al functi on known i n i ts enti rety, of course, i t woul d i mpl y
that the whol e probl em had been sol ved, so that one i s restri cted to a
qual i tati ve knowl edge of i ts vari ati on. From experi mental data on
operati ng tubes i t i s known that the d-c vol tage al ways l i es wi thi n about
20 per cent of the threshol d vol tage. Thus at the anode
k -~ 2+ 1<02[(1-0s2-1 ()
(155)
Furthermore, i t appears from what l i ttl e data are avai l abl e that when
the r-f vol tage i s equal to the d-c vol tage, operati on becomes ver y
i neffi ci ent and the regi on of usual operati on i s at consi derabl y l ower r-f
vol tage. I f thk i s the case, at the anode agai n,
()
I sadl< l~s2L
I f one treats 7VE as t he ef f ect i ve wt ent i d t hen i t apwar s t hat TVZ
i s of the or der of 7[( 1 - -Y/2)Sz 1] at the anode. At other poi nts of
the i nteracti on space one cannot be preci se, b~t a consi derati on of the
potenti al di stri buti on for the symmetri cal di ode or the Bri l l oui n steady
state, when the anode vol tage i s equal to the threshol d vol tage, i ndi cates
that the potenti al -YVEwill be ever ywher e of the or der of y. I t i s a conse-
quence of thi s that the for ces due to the potenti al wi l l al so be of the or der
of y. (Effecti ve and equi val ent potenti al are used i nterchangeabl y.)
For the purpose of vi sual i zi ng the moti on i n crossed el ectri c and mag-
neti c fi el ds one needs an approxi mate sol uti on of the equati ons of moti on
SEC. 6.10] QUALI TATI VE DI SCUSSI ON OF THE I NTERACTI ON 275
i n an arbi trary stati c potenti al and a constant magneti c fi el d. Suppose
that the equati ons of moti on are wri tten i n Cartesi an coordi nates as
E = L@ + V=(z,y), (156a)
f = cut + Vv(z,y), (1562))
wher e V, = a V/ ax, VV = 8V/ 8y, and V i s a functi on of posi ti on. Then,
i f x + jy = Z, one may wri te
Z +j(& = (Vz +jVv) = F.
(156c)
Now i f F wer e i ndependent of posi ti on, thi s equati on woul d have the
sol uti on wi th the i ni ti al condi ti ons Z = ZO, 2 = ZO,
(157)
Thi s represents a combi nati on of two i nde~endent moti ons: the fi rst
gi ven b; j(Ft/ u), whi ch i s a moti on at ri ght ~ngl es to the fi el d F of vel oc-
i ty lF1/ w; the second, a moti on around a ci rcl e of radi us I F j&?ol/ d,
wi th frequency u/2%r. I f, now, F vari es wi th posi ti on but suffi ci entl y
sl owl y so that i t does not change greatl y over the orbi t duri ng one cycl e,
i t mi ght be expected that the new sol uti on coul d sti l l be r epr esented as a
superposi ti on of two moti ons. One moti on shoul d consi st of a path
ever ywher e at ri ght angl es to F, traversed wi th a vel oci ty lF1/ a The
other woul d consi st of a ci rcul ar moti on center ed about the i nstantaneous
posi ti on of a poi nt on the fi rst path. The frequency of the ci rcul ar
moti on mi ght be expected then to be a sl owl y varyi ng functi on of ti me
or of posi ti on. I f these condi ti ons wer e ful fi l l ed, the center of the ci rcl e
woul d, si nce i t moves al ways at ri ght angl es to F, be movi ng al ong an
equi potenti al or l i ne of constant V. Befor e exami ni ng thk sol uti on
anal yti cal l y i t i s useful to consi der Fi g. 615, i n whi ch has been pl otted
the effecti ve potenti al correspondi ng to the fi el ds used by Ti bbs and
Wri ght and al so the orbi ts that they cal cul ated i n thi s fi el d. I t maybe
seen that the orbi ts do actual l y consi st of a seri es of l oops, the center s
of whi ch travel rather cl osel y al ong the equi potenti al l i nes. I t wi l l be
shown bel ow that thi s i s not a parti cul ar y favorabl e case.
Wri ti ng D = djdt, one may sol ve Eq. (156c) formal l y i n the form
1f!i bbs and Wri ght, l a. ci t.
I
276
INTERACTION 01 THE ELECTRONS
The convergence of this expansion depends upon the
(1/u)DF. Suppose that all terms beyond the second
Then
[SEC. 6.10
smallness of
are ignored.
(159a)
or
where 20 = Z and i??= ZOat t = O. Thk may be written
(160a)
(160b)
The higher terms in the expansion become, using this approximation,
()[(
j
)( )1
_r5in@t_y= C3 -
Tcosd+: :+
.aj
(V.+jVJ. (161)
u
Considering only the first term, one has
If this is to be small compared with the first term (V. + ~VV)/jU, then
Vv=. Vzvq Vvvv V=vw
r Vz=,rV=, rVw, 2
cd
<<UIV. + jV.1, (163)
a!
In the magnetron problem
[ ( )
Vg=y aosa= 1
1
; (Z+y )+1 (164)
A proof that the inequality (163) is satisfied cannot be given in
rigorous form because of the lack of knowledge of the fields. One may
argue in the following way, however. If 20 is taken to be a point on the
cathode, V. = Vu = O and 20 = -y; thus r = y. If, in addition, the
earlier assumption is retained that V = -y,V., VV, V=, VVV,and Vw = T,
then the inequality (163) is satisfied provided that ~ <<1 (for the field
used by Tibbs and Wright, ~ = 0.232, which is not very small compared
I
i +Ec. 6.10] C!UAMTA TZVE DI SCUSSI ON OF THE I NTERACTI ON 277
wi th uni ty). A si mi l ar argument woul d i ndi cate the smal l ness of
hi gher terms i n the expansi on, Eq. (158). I t i s qui te evi dent that
the above reasoni ng i s tentati ve and that ther e may be regi ons of the
i nteracti on space, smal l i n extent, over whi ch the fi el ds change mor e
rapi dl y than wi l l al l ow Eq. (163) to be sati sfi ed. However , i t i s l i kel y
that i n the mai n the consi derati ons hol d good. The most l i kel y regi ons
for di ffi cul ti es to ari se are i n regi ons of l arge charge densi ty and fai rl y
rapi d moti on. The regi on ver y cl ose to the cathode does not appear to
be one i n whi ch Eq. (159) fai l s because i n thi s case al though the fi el d
deri vati ves are l arge, thi s i s compensated for by the l ow vel oci ti es.
One may note that substi tuti on of the fi rst-order approxi mati on
(15W) i nto the next term of the expansi on (158) l eads to a second-or der
approxi mati on
()
v,=
3 ET I +T
cos-%si n+[:(l +% )%)
1
; ~ (165a)
()
v.
?7=
r 1+7
i n+ %cos+[-:(l +%)
+ ~ ~]. (165b)
One may consi der fi rst the starti ng process from the vi ewpoi nt of the
effecti ve potenti al di agram. Fi gure 6.20 represents the effecti ve poten-
ti al for a case rel ated to that of Ti bbs and Wri ght. As i n Bunemanns
anal ysi s i t has been assumed that a Bri l l oui n steady state exi sts befor e
osci l l ati ons are i ni ti ated. The anode d-c vol tage i s that of the probl em of
Ti bbs and Wri ght, and a l ogari thmi c potenti al i s assumed between the
anode and the cl oud radi us. The potenti al correspondi ng to the Bri l l oui n
steady state has been assumed ri ght up to the cathode as was done by
Bunemann. A r-f fi el d, supposed to sati sfy Lapl aces equati on wi th an
ampl i tude equi val ent to that used by Ti bbs and Wri ght, has been
added to the d-c fi el d. The ampl i tude does not affect the argument,
whi ch i s purel y qual i tati ve, but i t i s chosen l arge for conveni ence i n
drawi ng the potenti al di agram.
Two i mportant features appear cl earl y i n thi s di agram. These are
the shaded regi ons i n whi ch the potenti al i s negati ve and i nto whi ch
the el ectrons ther efor e cannot travel and the appearance of two saddl e
poi nts i n the equi potenti al surface. The appearance of a forbi dden
regi on near the anode i s a consequence of a choi ce of d-c vol tage
i n excess of the threshol d vol tage and a rather l arge r-f vol tage.
The forbi dden regi on near the cathode wi l l occur for any r-f vol tage,
278 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC. 6.10
however smal l . Theeffecti ve potenti al wi thi n thecharge cl oud i s
y~~=w:)-(-+ll
[ 1
2
=; O
7)s; - (166)
The potenti al vani shes for s; = 1/(1 y); and i f the cl oud radi us i s
gr eater than thi s, ther e wi l l be created, when an r-f vol tage i s super-
\ ,
.
/
. /
.
FI G. 6.20.Equi val ent potenti al for the starti ng probl em i n r educed uni ts. The shaded
regi ons cannot be traversed by el ectrons,
i mposed that i snegati ve i n some pl aces, a regi on of negati ve potenti al ora
forbi dden regi on. Now, accordi ng to Bunemann,
wher e
vE=(--:,)$
I fyVzvari es ascosn~, then .i vari es assi nn~fors >
for s < SO. Thus, the orbi ts are defor med i n the
equi potenti al l i nes i n Fi g. 6.20. One may now argue
sOand as si n n+
same way as the
~hat the moti on of
the negati ve charge cl oud toward the hi gher saddi e poi nt wi l l make the
potenti al i n the nei ghborhood of the l atter l ower. I n the new potenti al
I
8EC.6 10] QUALI TATI VE DI SCUSSI ON OF THE I NTERACTI ON
279
I
thus deri ved the orbi ts wi l l be sti l l further di storted i n the same sense.
I t i s then possi bl e, al though not assured, that the di storti on of the orbi ts
wi l l pr oceed further i n thi s way.
I f thi s process conti nues unti l the
t
saddl e poi nt l i es wi thi n the el ectr on stream, one can expect a radi cal
change i n the nature of the fl ow. For i t i s now the case that an equi -
potenti al ori gi nati ng i nsi de the el ectr on cl oud travel s over to the anode
and i t wi l l be possi bl e for an el ectr on to fol l ow thi s equi potenti al , pr e-
}
cessi ng about i t. Thus, a part of the stream of el ectrons may turn off
toward the anode, setti ng up further i nstabi l i ty i n the ori gi nal cl oud. I t
i s easi l y shown that i f the cl oud radi us be l ess than sO,the perturbati on of
I the el ectr on stream i s away from the hi gher saddl e poi nt and toward the
i
l ower saddl e poi nt. Thi s produces such a change of potenti al that the
perturbati on i s opposed.
(
Thi s pi cture seems to gi ve a good physi cal representati on of Bune-
manns anal ysi s. For as l ong as the orbi ts are l yi ng symmetri cal l y
di sposed about the posi ti on of maxi mum r-f vol tage, the i mpedance of
the charge cl oud i s purel y reacti ve.
Thi s may be seen, si nce E, wi l l vary
as cos nr, and dE,/13t = u(dE,/dx) wi l l vary as si n n~. The case
for whi ch s > sOand i n whi ch the perturbati on gr ows corresponds to
Bunemanns i nstabi l i tyy gi ven by (~yd..d/a@) <0, whi l e for s < SO,he
found (d Y.,.., /I 3u) >0 and the perturbati on i s sel f-dampi ng. I f the
i
dkturbance gr ows to the cri ti cal ampl i tude at whi ch the saddl e poi nt
enters the stream, the asymmetri cal nature of the l atter after spl i tti ng
1
gi ves an i n-phase component of current.
When cur r ent has actual l y begun to fl ow to the anode, the resul tant
asymmetry of the charge cl oud wi th r espect to the maxi mum of the r-f
vol tage on the anode means that the assumed r-f fi el d must be modi fi ed
to i ncl ude an out-of-phase tei m. Furthermore, si nce ther e i s now a
nonuni form di stri buti on of space charge produci ng r-f fi el ds, the l atter
must not be expected to sati sfy Lapl aces equati on but rather Poi ssons.
Thus, i n the operati ng case one i s l ed to the choi ce of such fi el ds as was
made i n the sel f-consi stent fi el d cal cul ati ons. Fi gure 6.15, previ ousl y
I
r efer r ed to, shows the effecti ve potenti al for the fi el d chosen by Ti bbs and
Wri ght as the starti ng poi nt of thei r cal cul ati ons. I t may be remarked
that i n i ts essenti al s thi s potenti al di stri buti on has much i n common wi th
the nai ve starti ng fi el d of the previ ous paragraph. The outer saddl e
poi nt i s now at a much l ower potenti al and, i n fact, l i es bel ow the i nner
saddl e poi nt. Thi s i mpl i es that equi potenti al s starti ng from qui te cl ose
to the cathode may reach the anode. (Ar r ows have been drawn al ong the
equi potenti al s to i ndi cate the di recti ons of moti on of the center of the
precessi onal ci rcl e.)
I t woul d seem that the di agram of effecti ve potenti al mi ght be ver y
i useful i n connecti on wi th sel f-consi stent fi el d cal cul ati ons, si nce i t gi ves
280 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS
[SEC. 6.10
consi derabl e i nsi ght i nto the possi bl e fl ow patterns of the el ectrons.
Fi gure 621 shows the effecti ve potenti al for the fi el d deri ved by Ti bbs and
Wri ght from the space-charge di stri buti on set up by the orbi ts of Fi g.
6.15. I t may be seen that the space charge has l ower ed the potenti al
suffi ci entl y to el i mi nate the outer saddl e poi nt and the two forbi dden
regi ons have coal esced. Compari son of the orbi ts of Fi g. 6.15 wi th the
potenti al di agram of Fi g. 6.21 reveal s the unfortunate fact that most
of the orbi ts l i e over a consi derabl e part of thei r l ength i n the forbi dden
regi on. Thi s i ndi cates that sel f-consi stency has not been achi eved i n a
sati sfactory manner, al though the deri ved radi al fi el ds appeared to
agr ee fai rl y wel l wi th the i ni ti al ones. The new fi el d, though i t di ffers
l JI ~.6.21 .Equi val ent potenti al for deri ved fi el d i n sel f-consi stent fi el d cal cul ati on. Two
orbi ts cal cul ated i n the i ni ti al fi el d are shown.
i n detai l from the starti ng fi el d, retai ns some features i n common. Ther e
are sti l l equi potenti al s starti ng from cl ose to the cathode that run up
to the anode, and the orbi ts wi l l presumabl y l i e al ong these. However ,
the shape and ori entati on of the resul tant arm of space charge cannot be
predi cted unti l a sel f-consi stent fi el d has been found. I nasmuch as a
method wi th a sel f-consi stent fi el d pr ocedur e i s l argel y an empi ri cal one,
pr oceedi ng by a seri es of esti mates and approxi mati ons, i t woul d appear
that the use of the effecti ve potenti al di agram woul d ai d materi al l y i n
vi sual i zi ng the state of affai rs i n the i nteracti on space. At the same ti me
i t provi des a sensi ti ve check on the approach to real sel f-consi stency.
A compari son of the potenti al fi el ds for the arti fi ci al starti ng probl em
shown i n Fi g. 6.20 and those assumed and deri ved i n the sel f-consi stent
fi el d cal cul ati on (Fi gs. 6.14 and 6.15) enabl es one to deduce some of the
general properti es of the fi el d i n an operati ng magnetron. Ther e i s a thi n
SEC. 6.10] QUALI TATI VE DI SCUSSI ON OF TI I E I NTERACTI ON
281
l ayer surroundi ng the cathode i n whi ch the potenti al s vary radi al l y as
(s 1)~$. Wi thi n thi s l ayer el ectri c for ces wi l l ori gi nal l y predomi nate;
but after a certai n di stance has been traversed, the magneti c for ces wi l l
become comparabl e. I n Sec. 6.8 i t was esti mated that the thi ckness of
thi s l ayer was ~~i , and the vol tage dr op across i t i s found to be ~I y.
Consi deri ng the case for whi ch sel f-consi stent fi el ds have been cal cul ated
i n Sec. 6.9, the thi ckness i s 0.04 and Aao equal to 0.015; thus, the thi ck-
ness i s ver y smal l , and the potenti al dr op under these ci rcumstances
smal l compared wi th the cathode potenti al of 0.116. At ver y hi gh
currents the cathode l ayer may become thi ck enough and the potenti al
dr op across i t l arge enough to al ter the i ni ti al stages of the moti on.
Beyond the cathode l ayer ther e exi sts a regi on that mi ght be cal l ed
the bunchi ng or sorti ng regi on. Thi s may be thought of roughl y
as extendi ng out to about the radi us of the Bri l l oui n steady state appro-
pri ate to the d-c anode vol tage. Passi ng radi al l y outward from the
cathode through thi s regi on one al ways encounters a potenti al mi ni mum
at about the radi us so = 1/(1 -Y)at whi ch the Bri l l oui n steady state had
a potenti al of zer o. The effect of the r-f fi el d i s to depress an angul ar
regi on around thi s mi ni mum to a negati ve potenti al , thus produci ng a
forbi dden area; between each pai r of forbi dden regi ons ther e wi l l be a
saddl e poi nt. El ectrons l eavi ng the cathode from poi nts opposi te the
forbi dden regi on travel cl ose to the cathode, hel d ther e essenti al l y by a
negati ve radi al r-f fi el d, unti l they pass the end of the excl uded area,
wher e they enter a regi on of tangenti al r-f fi el d, so di r ected that they
move outward. El ectrons starti ng between the forbi dden regi on and
the saddl e poi nt move mostl y i n a posi ti ve (outward) radi al r-f and d-c
fi el d once they have crossed the mi ni mum; thi s causes them to move
toward the l eft and bri ngs them i nto step wi th the fi rst set of el ectrons.
Fi nal l y those el ectrons whi ch start from beyond the saddl e poi nt may
ei ther cross the mi ni mum and be sent toward the l eft l i ke the second set
or , i f they approach cl ose to the forbi dden regi on, be sent back to the
cathode by the tangenti al el ectri c fi el d. The over-al l effect i s that
el ectrons whi ch have started behi nd the forbi dden regi on to the l eft of
the saddl e poi nt are bunched together whi l e el ectrons comi ng from the
cathode between saddl e poi nt and forbi dden regi on return to the cathode.
The general features of thi s bunchi ng mechani sm wi l l not be changed i n
thei r essenti al s provi ded that the potenti al fi el d retai ns the characteri sti c
features descri bed earl i er.
Beyond the bunchi ng regi on, i n whi ch the el ectrons have been con-
centrated i nto a rel ati vel y narrow range of angl es, l yi ng i n the regi on
of maxi mum tangenti al fi el d, the stream travel s out to the anode. The
stream, as i t moves outward, wi l l conti nue to l i e i n the regi on of maxi mum
tangenti al fi el d, fol l owi ng the equi potenti al s. I t can be expected, then,
282 I NTERACTI ON OF THE ELECTRONS [SEC. 6.11
to arri ve at the anode at some effecti ve potenti al near zer o but, of course,
al ways posi ti ve. Ther e wi l l be a process of phase focusi ng i n thi s regi on
as may be seen by consi deri ng the equi potenti al s i n Fi g. 6.15. The
equi potenti al s surroundi ng the zer o equi potenti al conver ge toward the
anode, and the vari ous orbi ts center ed on the equi potenti al s wi l l al so
tend to conver ge. I t i s wi thi n thi s regi on that the process of ener gy
conversi on l argel y takes pl ace, si nce the el ectrons have now been con-
centrated enti rel y i nto regi ons i n wKl ch the tangenti al el ectri c fi el d has
the pr oper si gn for the el ectrons to l ose ener gy. One sees that for l ow
magneti c fi el ds (sl i ghtl y gr eater than I 1/s~) the effi ci ency wi l l be l ow,
for the i ni ti al cl oud radi us wi l l extend out ver y cl ose to the anode and
the ener gy-exchange regi on wi l l be smal l . As T decreases, the radi us
of the bunchi ng regi on wi l l decr ease and mor e of the i nteracti on space
wi l l become avai l abl e for ener gy l oss.
The fact that the magnetron probl em may be formul ated i n stati c
terms seems to be fundamental for i ts behavi or. That operati on wi l l be
possi bl e over a l arge range of val ues of ~ wi th an effi ci ency steadi l y
i ncreasi ng wi th 7 appears evi dent because changes i n y mean onl y
changes i n the i ni ti al vel oci ti es of the el ectrons and a consequent change
i n the effecti ve potenti al . The frequency of precessi on of the el ectrons
about the magneti c fi el d i n a fi el d of constant effecti ve potenti al i s
2(1 T)/27r; the osci l l atory moti on to whi ch thi s precessi on corresponds
i s not dri ven by any harmoni cal l y varyi ng forces, and i t thus exK~bi ts
no resonance effects for any ~. Vari ati ons of -y then mean merel y
vari ati ons i n the boundary condi ti ons and equati ons of a purel y stati c
probl em.
Si mi l arl y by exami ni ng the defi ni ti ons of the r educed vari abl es i t
i s seen that the dependence of the operati on upon frequency i s contai ned
i n the dependence upon ao and y, for thi s i s the onl y pl ace i n whi ch
the frequency appears. Now a, is essenti al l y cor r el ated wi th ~ by the
necessi ty of sati sfyi ng the threshol d cri teri on ever ywher e; thus, the
frequency dependence i s pri nci pal l y contai ned i n the y-dependence.
Si nce ther e i s reason to suppose that the l atter i s smal l , one deduces that
the frequency dependence i s smal l . Once agai n, ther e are no resonance
effects.
The dependence of the operati on upon the r-f vol tage as contai ned i n
Fi g. 6.9 i s ver y i nadequatel y understood.
6.11. Departures from the Rotati ng-wave Hypothesi s.-The for e-
goi ng di scussi on of magnetron operati on has been based on the assumpti on
that onl y the sl owest rotati ng wave whi ch moves wi th the el ectrons has
any appreci abl e i nteracti on wi th them. I t now appears that many of
the characteri sti c features of magnetron behavi or are due to thi s mode
of i nteracti on. I t i s, ther efor e, of i nterest to consi der cases i n whi ch
1
SEC. 6.11] ROTATI NG-WAVE HYPOTHESI S 283
another Fouri er component pl ays a part. One notabl e exampl e of thi s
occurs i n the operati on of the ri si ng-sun type of magnetron.
As has
been shown i n Chap. 3, the pr esence of two sets of resonators, al ternatel y
l arge and smal l , gi ves ri se to a Fouri er component that i s not normal l y
exci ted i n unstrapped and strapped systems.
Thi s i s a mode for whi ch
ther e i s no angul ar dependence (n = O). Such a fi el d wi l l appear i n any
rotati ng system as a tangenti al el ectri c fi el d varyi ng as e~WOt, wi thout
angul ar dependence and fal l i ng off sl owl y toward the cathode. A method
of esti mati ng the effect of such a perturbati on was i ndi cated by Sl ater; 1
hi s treatment wi l l be fol l owed i n a mor e general form.
Wri ti ng Eqs. (54a) and (54b) i n Cartesi an coordi nates agai n, one has
(167a)
(167b)
wher e x and y are measured i n uni ts of r, and
VE = (a. sii~)
()
1; (Z+y) +1. (167c)
Suppose now that xo(t), yo(t) are the equati ons of an orbi t sati sfyi ng
Eqs. (167a, b), and consi der the perturbati on of a si ngl e orbi t. Let
x = XO+ n and y = YO+ {, and wher e n and ( are smal l . Then to
terms l i near i n n and {, one obtai ns
(168a)
(168b)
Wri ti ng d/ d7 = D, then Eqs. (168a) and (168b) become
(D 7V,.)n [2(1 -Y)D + -rVw]C = O, (169a)
[2(1 y)D ykw]n + (D TVVM){ = O. (169b)
Thus, ~ and ~ \vi l l have sol uti ons dependent upon r as e \r her e
G4 + [4(1 7)2 7(V., + VUV)]G2+ y2(V,zVVu V:) = O. (170)
To a fi rst approxi mati on then,
G2 = 4(1 ?)2 + 7V2VE
[ 1
=4 l -y-~V2(aO-si i o)>
.
[ 1
G=Lj 2y~V~(a, si i h). (171)
1J. C. Sl ater,RL Repor t No. V5-S.
284 I NTERACTI ON OF THE
Suppose, general l y, that a perturbati on
ELECTRONS [SEC. 6.11
of the form efot = e]=n~rbe
appl i ed; then ther e wi l l be resonance between the appl i ed perturbati on
and the smal l osci l l ati ons about an equi l i bri um orbi t i f
7WT = 2 y ~ V2(U0 Sii+)
or
Yr-[na + 1 + *V2(a0 Si i $)] = 2, (172)
wher e -y,., = 2mW0/ neB,.. is the val ue of Y for whi ch resonance takes
pl ace and, si mi l arl y, B,,, is the magneti c fi el d at whi ch resonance occurs
for a fi xed u,. Wri ti ng mocoo/e = B.yC, wher e BCYOi s the so-cal l ed
cycl otr on fi el d, Eq. (172) becomes
B,.. = B.,.
[
a + ~ + ~n vz(ao Sil$)
1
[ 1
1?.,,. a+~+~i p.
(
For the ri si ng-sun case, a = 1 and
73)
[ 1
B= B.,. l +~+~e.
(174)
I t i s di ffi cul t to go further than thi s, si nce ones knowl edge of p i s ver y
i nadequate. Roughl y si nce
/
2??
2ri P = @SSd+, (175)
0
2~ip
Q... - ==
savm(sA#)
(176)
wher e sAX i s the breadth of the outgoi ng el ectr on stream.
Furthermore
si nce p i s not constant throughout the cl oud, i t i s not cl ear wher e i ts
val ue shoul d be taken.
The performance chart for a ri si ng-sun magnetron (Fi g. 6.7) shows
the characteri sti c behavi or of these tubes. The effi ci ency i nstead of
ri si ng monotoni cal l y wi th magneti c fi el d shows a mi ni mum for a fai rl y
defi ni te magneti c fi el d. The effect, i n most cases that have been exam-
i ned, i s l ess pronounced at hi gh currents.
Usi ng cr ude esti mates of
s..= and (sA~), the formul a Eq. (174) gi ves reasonabl e agreement wi th
experi ment.
Sl ater has gi ven a resul t that has been frequentl y quoted i n thi s con-
necti on. Thi s expressi on i s
B
,..
B
=1+4.
.,0
(177)
SEC.6.11] ROTA TING-WA V& 11YPU1HESI S
Zu>
I t maybe deri ved from Eq. (174) i n the fol l owi ng way: Sl ater consi ders a
speci al orbi t i n a cyl i ndri cal l y symmetri c fi el d, namel y, one i n whi ch an
el ectr on moves on a ci rcl e about the cathode wi th an angul ar vel oci ty
equal to that of the travel i ng wave. I n the rotati ng system then the
orbi t degenerates to a fi xed poi nt. From Eqs. (54a and b), i f ~ = O i n a
symmetri c fi el d,
17=$
and al so
~(aO Sfi $) _ (2
O= E=s($l +y)zs(l T)a +7 as
1 ~(aO SE+)

~
s+7
as
()
a(uOsZi ~)=l s_l
ds
at$z=l ~.
-r
.#
Now i n Eq. (174) one has
[
V2(a0 sti $) = ~ ~s s
d(ao Sfi@)
as
1
_ a2(a0 sii@) + ~a(a, Sii+),

dsz s as
and negl ecti ng the second deri vati ve, as does Sl ater,
y)s
(178)
Substi tuti ng i n Eq. (174) gi ves
B
rem
3
B
,,.
1+%
(6.177)
The resul t, al though agreei ng qui te wel l wi th experi ment, cannot be
consi dered as wel l founded.
A phenomenon that occurs i n strapped magnetrons appears to be of
the type consi dered i n thi s secti on. Measurements of the ener gy
transferred to the cathode by el ectrons that return after bei ng accel erated
i n the r-f fi el d have been made for a number of tubes. An exampl e of
the resul ts obtai ned i s shown i n Fi g. 622 wher e the contours of back-
bombardment power are shown on a regul ar performance chart. I t may
be seen that the back bombardment shows a maxi mum at 1400 gauss
for thi s magnetron whi ch operates at 10.7 cm. I t appears that at thi s
fi el d for whi ch B/ Bwc = 1.41, ther e i s some ki nd of resonance effect,
si nce ther e i s no obvi ous reason why any speci al back bombardment
I W. E. Danforth, C. C. Prater, and D. L. Gol dwater, Back-bombardment of
MagnetronCathodes, NDRC l &309,
286 INTERACTION OF THE ELECTRONS
[SEC. 6.11
mi ght be expected to take pl ace i f the el ectrons are movi ng i n the quasi -
stati c fi el d. Ther e i s obser ved l i ttl e or no effect upon the effi ci ency of
the magnetron, so that the whol e process i s much l ess pronounced than
that taki ng pl ace i n the ri si ng-sun type. The fact that the cri ti cal fi el d i s
substanti al l y gr eater than B.,. i ndi cates that the resonance effect, i s
not confi ned to a l ayer near the cathode i n whi ch the el ectrons are at
1700~ 100kw /
.
80k~ \
/ /
-%r-
15 60%~
/
14
/
/
/
/
/
b
/ /
50%
/
<
1
13 ;
\
----
3
.
\
.5 12
.
& \
g
: \
3 11
z
\ =.
45kw
.
\
\
10 -
9
d
1000
- ~ ~ I
8
8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Pul se cur r ent i n amp
FI G.6.22.Performance chart showi ng pul se back-bombardment power wi th-----pul se
back-bombardment power i n ki l owatts.
rest i n the l aboratory system of coordi nates, for i n that case one woul d
expect a fi el d equal to B.Y. topr oduce a di sturbance.
The most pl ausi bl e
expl anati on i s that some (n = O)-contami nati on i s actual l y present.
Actual l y i t has been obser ved from data taken on fi el d patterns i n
nonoperati ng magnetrons that ther e i s i ndeed a certai n amount of
(n =0)-mode present i n strapped tubes. Thi s i s caused by the fact
that one strap l i es behi nd the other , and thus i n the i nteracti on space
ther e wi l l exi st a net radi al component of el ectri c fi el d havi ng (n = O)-
symmetry, whi ch wi l l be strongest at the ends of the anode. I t shoul d
SEC.6.11] ROTATI NG-WA VE H YPO THESI S 287
be noted that thi s i s a radi al el ectri c fi el d rather than a tangenti al one,
as i n the case of the ri si ng-sun magnetron.
A somewhat mi nor poi nt i n
favor of thi s anal ysi s i s that the maxi mum of back bombardment was
not obser ved for an unstrapped desi gn on whi ch measurements wer e made.
The obser ved B,,, for the data of Fi g. 622 i s i n good agreement wi th that
cal cul ated from Eq. (174) maki ng pl ausi bl e esti mates of 3..= and (sA~)
from Hartrees cal cul ati ons on a 10-cm. magnetron operati ng near 1400
gauss.
One rel ated fact may be menti oned as i ndi cati ve of the operati on of
fi el ds not i ncl uded i n the rotati ng wave. From Eqs. (54a), (54 b), and
(55) for an el ectr on at the cathode one has
i
52+$2=Y2
and for the ener gy l oss from Eq. (76a)
a,.,, = ~
J.
Thus
27 < a10,8<0.
Ther efor e the maxi mum ener gy wi th whi ch an el ectr on can return to
the cathode i s 27 or i n vol ts, 2(m0/e) (uT,)2 = 2(nzOc2/e)(27rr./7zk)2, whi ch
gi ves 4 X 104(r./nA)2 kv. For rc = 3 X 103meters and X = 101 meters
n = 4, the maxi mum ener gy i s 2.25 kv. The evi dence from the wor k
~
of Danforth and hi s associ ates i s that energi es consi derabl y hi gher than
thi s are found, al though these experi ments are di ffi cul t to perform.
1 I n di scussi ng the perturbati ons pr oduced by other Fouri er components
earl i er i n thi s chapter, i t was found that for the r-mode the frequenci es
of the perturbati ons wer e t 2u0, t 4u0, etc. Thus, i t mi ght be expected
from Eq. (174) that the perturbati ons wi th frequency 2u0 whi ch i s due
to the (p = +N/2)-component woul d be i n resonance wi th the el ectr on
orbi t perturbati ons at a fi el d B,.. gi ven by
For any magnetrons that have been oper ated at fi el ds as hi gh as thi s
val ue of B,-, no decl i ne i n effi ci ency has been found. No cathode back.
bombardment data have been taken at these l evel s. The absence of
such an effect upon the effi ci ency i s probabl y due to the fact that the
(P = +~/ 2)-field fal l s off rapi dl y toward the cathode as compared wi th
a (p = O)-fi el d. I t thus acts effecti vel y onl y cl ose to the anode, and the
number of cycl es that an el ectr on spends i n a si gni fi cant fi el d i s not suffi -
ci entl y great to affect i ts behavi or. Thi s i s a possi bl e cl ue to the
acti on of the (p = O)-fi el d i n l oweri ng effi ci ency, for i t suggests that i t
must act rel ati vel y cl ose to the cathode and probabl y i nterferes wi th the
sorti ng of the el ectrons i nto bunches.
CHAPTER 7
THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T
BY F. F. RI EKE
ELEMENT
7s1. I ntroducti on.The characteri sti cs of a magnetron as an osci l l ator
can be descri bed i n terms of two qui te di sti nct sets of properti es. One
set of properti es bel ongs to the compl ex of resonant cavi ty, output
coupl er, and r-f l oad consi dered purel y as passi ve ci rcui t el ements.
The other set of properti es i s associ ated wi th the el ectr on cl oud, or space
charge, as i t exi sts i n the confi gurati on of el ectri c and magneti c fi el ds
pecul i ar to the magnetron. The purpose of thi s chapter i s to show how
the over-al l performance may be anal yzed i n terms of these two sets of
properti es and how an understandi ng of them may be used to predi ct
the manner i n whi ch performance wi l l be i nfl uenced by modi fi cati ons
i n the desi gn of the ci rcui t or by pecul i ar condi ti ons of operati on.
To a l arge extent, the di scussi on concerns the vari ous i nfl uences
that the output l oad exer ts on the performance of the magnetron.
Actual l y, these effects i n the magnetron have a general resembl ance
to the correspondi ng ones i n many other types of sel f-exci ted osci l l ators,
and i t may be of some i nterest to exami ne the reasons for gi vi ng them
her e a much gr eater promi nence than they ordi nari l y r ecei ve i n di scus-
si ons of vacuum-tube osci l l ators.
An i ntensi ve study of the effects of vari ati ons i n the l oad was fi rst
taken up pri mari l y out of practi cal consi derati ons. Ori gi nal l y, the
l oad was adjusted to secur e maxi mum effi ci ency consi stent wi th general
stabi l i ty. I t then came to be real i zed that sati sfactory performance of a
radar system depended al so upon the stabi l i ty of the jr eguency of the
magnetron. I nasmuch as ther e was some correl ati on between changes
i n frequency and changes i n l oad, ther e i mmedi atel y arose a need for an
understandi ng of the rel ati on between the two. Thus, the probl em arose
out of a combi nati on of ci rcumstances that are mor e or l ess pecul i ar
to mi crowave pul se-radar, namel y,
1. The pri mary, frequency-control l i ng osci l l ator i s di rectl y coupl ed
to the l oad, si nce no sui tabl e bufferi ng ampl i fi er i s avai l abl e.
2. The output system tends to have an unstabl e i mpedance, as i t
i s l arge i n terms of wavel engths, so that mi smatches can gi ve
ri se to a compl i cated spectrum of resonances,
2s8
I
I
SEC. 7.1]
INTRODUCTION 289
3. The magnetron must oper ate i n conjuncti on wi th a fai rl y sel ecti ve
r ecei ver (at l east i n consi derati on of noi se fi gure, i f not of
i nterference).
The experi mental studi es that gr ew out of the si tuati on i ndi cated
above eventual l y resul ted i n the constructi on of Ri eke di agrams for
a l arge assortment of magnetrons oper ated under a wi de range of condi -
ti ons. I t then occur r ed to many who became fami l i ar wi th these
di agrams that basi c i nformati on about the i nner worki ngs of the mag-
netr on coul d be obtai ned from them. I n consequence, methods wer e
devel oped for anal yzi ng the effects of the l oad i n a mor e fundamental
way. These methods, al though general l y appl i cabl e to sel f-exci ted
osci l l ators of many types, are parti cul arl y useful i n the study of mi cro-
wave osci l l ators, of whi ch the magnetron i s but one exampl e.
Wi th conventi onal osci l l ators that gener ate ordi nary radi o frequenci es,
the i nteri or condi ti ons of the acti ve osci l l atoras r epr esented by vari ous
vol tages and currentscan usual l y be eval uated by di rect measure-
ments. I n mi crowave generators, however , al l the essenti al parts are
contai ned wi thi n the vacuum envel ope, and the onl y al ternati ng-current
measurements that are at al l easy to make, even i n pri nci pl e, are those
of i mpedance, power , and frequency. Consequentl y, to eval uate the
i nternal condi ti ons one ei ther must be content wi th i ndi rect methods or
must undertake el aborate experi ments on tubes desi gned for the express
purpose of maki ng the measurements possi bl e.
I n the speci al case of the osci l l ati ng magnetron, the onl y quanti ti es
that seem to be fundamental and that al so can be measured conveni entl y
are (1) magneti c fi el d; (2) power , frequency, and l oad i mpedance at the
output termi nal s; and (3) cur r ent and vol tage at the i nput termi nal s.
Accordi ngl y, i t becomes wor th whi l e to expl oi t ful l y the rel ati ons among
these quanti ti es so as to obtai n i nformati on about the i nternal condi ti ons
of the osci l l ati ng system. The resul ts wi l l necessari l y be expressed i n a
rather abstract form, si nce the detai l ed theor y of the magnetron has
so far not provi ded a suffi ci ent fr amewor k of general rel ati ons to permi t
a compl ete anal ysi s of the data.
To some readers, the profuse use of equi val ent ci rcui ts i n connecti on
wi th the magnetron cavi ty may seem questi onabl e, i nasmuch as the
di mensi ons of the cavi ty are not smal l compared wi th the free-space
wavel ength of the osci l l ati ons. Stri ctl y speaki ng, the concepts of
i nductance, capaci tance, an d resi stance i mpl y a parti cul ar form of
approxi mate sol uti on to Maxwel l s equati ons whi ch i s val i d onl y for
] J. C. Sl ater, Theor y of Magnetron Operati on, RL Repor t No. 200, Mar.
8, 1943; F, F. Ri eke, Anal ysi s of Magnetron Performance, Part I , RL Repor t
No. 229, Sept. 16, 1943. J. R. Pi erce, Osci l l ator Behavi or, BTL Memorandum
MM-43-140-19.
290 THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT [SEC.7 I
systems that are smal l compared wi th the free-space wavel ength at the
frequenci es i nvol ved. Leavi ng asi de the questi on of L, C, and R for
the moment, i t can be sai d that the concept of impedance can be so
general i zed as to avoi d thi s l i mi tati on by defi ni ng the i mpedance as the
rati o of the orthogonal components of the el ectri c and magneti c fi el ds. 1
I n speci al cases, the general i zed i mpedance can be rel ated to currents and
vol tages, parti cul arl y wher e a ZEM-mode i s i nvol ved (as i n a coaxi al
l i ne) or wher e the fi el ds have approxi matel y a TEM-mode character, as
i n the sl ot of a magnetron resonator.
The theor y of cavi ty resonators, based di rectl y on Maxwel l s equa-
ti ons, z l eads to the resul t that vari ous i mpedances i n such a cavi ty are
rel ated to each other i n the same way as the i mpedances i n LRC-net-
works, whi ch means that between certai n components of el ectri c and
magneti c fi el ds ther e are l i near rel ati ons of the type
El = z1lB1 + zI ZB2,
E2 = z12B1 + z22B2
whi ch cor r espond to the rel ati ons between currents and vol tages i n
a networ k. Mor eover , when the z,~factors are expanded i n terms of the
frequency, the forms are of the same general type as those met wi th
i n networ k anal ysi s. Accordi ng to the theor y of networks, gi ven such an
i mpedance functi on, i t i s al ways possi bl e to i synthesi ze LRC-networks
whi ch wi l l have just that i mpedance functi on. (Thi s statement i s
subject to the condi ti on that the cavi ty can be adequatel y r epr esented
by a fi ni te number of terms i n the expansi on.) Accordi ngl y the cavi ty
can be r epr esented by an equi val ent networ k, but thi s equi val ent net-
wor k need have no physi cal rel ati on, part by part, wi th the cavi ty and
i s not even uni que. Thus the equi val ent ci rcui t, i n one extr eme, may
be r egar ded onl y as a speci al representati on of a mathemati cal formul a.
However , between thi s vi ewpoi nt and the other extr eme, that of l i teral
i nterpretati on of the el ements i n the equi val ent ci rcui t as i nductances,
capaci tances, and resi stances actual l y exi sti ng i n the resonant system,
ther e i s a mi ddl e ground, because the LRC approxi mati on to a sol uti on
of Maxwel l s equati ons can be a quanti tati ve rather than a qual i tati ve
matter.
I n practi ce, one attempts (on the basi s of i ntui ti on or exper i ence)
to der i ve a sui tabl e equi val ent ci rcui t from the shape of the cavi ty and
i ts obser ved behavi or. From measurements, one then arri ves at val ues
of such quanti ti es as ~C/ L, ~LC, and R ~L that are meani ngful ,
al though the val ues of L, R, and C deri ved from them may not be (or
1 S. A. Schel kunoff, Electromagnetic Waves, Van Nostrand, New York, 1943.
z J. C. Skater, Forced Osci l l ati ons i n Cavi ty Resonators, RL Rsport No.
Dec. 31, 1942.
88,
SEC. 7.2] THE ELECTRON STREAM
may be so onl y i n a l i mi ted sense).
AS A CIRCUIT ELEMENT
291
The degr ee of comdi cati on of the
eq~i val ent ci rcui t fi rst assumed i s dependent upon the parti cul ar si tua-
ti on and the degr ee of approxi mati on requi red.
7.2. The El ectron Stream as a Ci rcui t El ement.The features of the
magnetron cavi ty rel evant to the fol l owi ng treatment are i l l ustrated i n
Fi g. 7.1; the nature of the el ectri c fi el ds i s i ndi cated by l i nes of for ce.
I n thi s di scussi on onl y the al ternati ng component of the el ectri c fi el d
E i s consi dered; thus the fi el d i ndi cated by the l i nes of for ce contai ns a
ti me factor cos ti t, or i n the conventi onal compl ex-vari abl e notati on e~.
The i nstantaneous val ue of the i ntegral fE . ds acrcss any one of the
sl ots i s substanti al l y i ndependent of the path of i ntegrati on, provi ded
the path l i es enti rel y wi thi n the i nteracti on space, so the i ntegral can be
consi dered to r epr esent an i nstantaneous vol tage across the sl ot; i t i s
FI m 7. 1.The el ectri c fi el ds i n a magnetron cavi ty.
an al ternati ng vol tage ~e. I n the pri nci pal or r-mode of osci l l ati on of
magnetron cavi ty ~ al ternates i n si gn from one sl ot to the next, but i t
has the same magni tude for al l of the sl ots, and thi s magni tude can at
present be consi dered to be the a-c vol tage devel oped by the cavi ty.
A vol tage ampl i tude ~ havi ng been defi ned, a cur r ent ampl i tude ~
can al so be defi ned, si mpl y by maki ng use of the fact that ~(~~) must
equal the average power del i vered by the el ectr on stream to the resonant
system. However , because ther e are al so reacti ve effects connected
wi th the el ectr on stream, i t i s conveni ent to treat the current-ampl i tude
~ as a compl ex quanti ty i n or der to express the fact that i t has a compo-
nent i n quadrature wi th the vol tage. The power i s then equal to
one-hal f the real part of the product ~~.
The physi cal meani ng of the cur r ent ~ can be understood by con-
si deri ng the contri buti ons of the i ndi vi dual el ectrons to the i nstantaneous
VI product. An el ectr on wi th vector vel oci ty ~ at a poi nt wher e the
.
vector el ectri c fi el d i s E makes an i nstantaneous contri buti on e~ .;
to the VI product. The si gni fi cant terms i n ~. ~ can be cal cul ated
292 THE SPACE CI iARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT [Sm. 72
by consi deri ng the i nteracti on of the el ectr on wi th the parti cul ar Fouri er
component of the el ectri c fi el d that rotates i n uni son wi th the pr e-
domi nant moti on of the el ectr on stream. However , partl y because of
the compl i cati ons i n the moti on of the el ectr on (see Fi g. 7.2a and b),
~ . ~ contai ns many hi gher harmoni cs that are not perti nent to thi s
di scussi on. The el ectri c fi el d of the si gni fi cant component i s i l l ustrated
i n Fi g. 7.2c; the fi el ds and the el ectr on stream may be consi dered to
r otate together , i n a cl ockwi se di recti on. An el ectr on near the cathode,
as at A, makes onl y a ver y smal l contri buti on to the VI product because
EiK3
.
(a)
(b)
(c)
FI G. 7.2.(u) Actual path of el ectrons; (b) si mpl i fi ed path assumed for cal cu-
l ati ons; (c) e!ectr i c fi el d confi gurati on of the Fouri er component that rotates i n uni son wi th
the predomi nant moti on of the el ectron stream.
E i s smal l near the cathode. El ectrons at B absorb ener gy from the
fi el d and thus make a rel ati vel y l arge posi ti ve contri buti on to the real
part of ~, whereas those at C make a negati ve contri buti on. El ectrons
at D make a posi ti ve contri buti on to the i magi nary part of ~; those at
E a negati ve contri buti on. Because of the space modul ati on of the
stream, ther e i s a pr eponder ance of el ectrons at posi ti ons l i ke C, so the
total cur r ent has a negati ve real component.
Havi ng shown that the vol tage ~ and the cur r ent ~ as appl i ed to the
el ectr on stream have defi ni te meani ngs, one can treat thei r rati o ~/~
as an admi ttance. Accordi ngl y, the peri meter of the i nteracti on space
can be consi dered as a pai r of termi nal si n a general i zed senseat
whi ch the el ectr on stream i s connected to the resonant system, and the
SEC. 7.2] THE ELECTRON STREAM AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT 293
compl ete assembl y of resonant system and el ectr on stream can be
r epr esented by the equi val ent ci rcui t drawn i n Fi g. 7.3. The termi nal s A
r epr esent the juncti on of the el ectroni c cur r ent ~e = ~el + j~ez and the
l oad cur r ent ~.. Because ~. and ~. are i denti cal , wi th the conventi on
i ndi cated i n Fi g. 7.3 for thei r posi ti ve di recti ons, and ~ i s common to
the resonant system and el ectr on stream, the rel ati on
Ye+ Y.=o (1)
must al ways be sati sfi ed (unl ess ~ = O).
The part of Fi g. 7.3 to the ri ght of A i s composed of ordi nary ci rcui t
el ementsresi stances, capaci tances, and i nductancesso i ts admi ttance
has wel l -known properti es.1 I n parti cul ar, Y. i s i ndependent of the
ampl i tude ~ and depends onl y on the frequency v; that i s
G. = G.(v) and B. = B.(v). (2)
For the moment i t i s supposed that these functi ons are known. Conse-
quentl y, i f under parti cul ar condi ti ons of operati on i t i s obser ved that
f=lEFH3
i
FI G.7.3.Equi val ent ci rcui t of the resonant system and the el ectri c stream.
the magnetron osci l l ates at a frequency u/27r and generates power ~,
the condi ti ons wi thi n the space charge can be computed by means of the
fol l owi ng equal i ti es:
G; = G.(J),
(3)
B: = BL(J ), (4)
(5)
The components of the cur r ent can be found from the rel ati on ~. = Y,17.
One thus has a pr ocedur e for eval uati ng experi mental l y the condi ti ons
wi thi n the space charge.
The i nverse probl em of predi cti ng v and P when the operati ng condi -
ti ons are speci fi ed may now be consi dered. The method consi sts essen-
ti al l y of sol vi ng a system of equati ons made up of Eq. (2) and addi ti onal
1 Au el ectroni c admi ttance, on the other hand, has properti es that are qui te
di fferent fr om those of the admi ttance of a passi ve ci rcui t (whi ch i s composed onl y
of condensers, i nductances, and resi stances). A passi ve ci rcui t i s linear; in other
words, i ts admi ttance i s i ndependent of the appl i ed vol tage and depends onl y on the
frequency, whereas el ectroni c devi ces are necessari l y nonl i near except for appl i ed
vol tages of smal l ampl i tudeat l arge ampl i tudes, saturati on effects al ways set i n.
294
THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT [SEC.72
equati ons that contai n the properti es of the el ectr on stream.
These
addi ti onal equati ons rel ate Ye to such quanti ti es as the d-c vol tage
appl i ed to the magnetron, the magneti c fi el d, etc. The general nature
of these rel ati ons wi l l be taken up fi rst.
I n a typi cal experi ment on a magnetron, one appl i es a magneti c fi el d
(B, a d-c vol tage Vat the i nput termi nal s, and an i mpedance Z = R + jX
at the output termi nal s. I n turn, one observes that the magnetron
osci l l ates at a frequency V,generates power P, and draws a di rect cur r ent
1 at the i nput termi nal s. The fi rst four vari abl es~, V, R, and X
have been set arbi trari l y and can be ter med the i ndependent vari abl es of
the system. The val ues of the l ast thr ee vari abl es~, ~, and I are
fi xed by the choi ce of the i ndependent vari abl es and by the i nherent
properti es of the magnetron; V, ~, and 1 are the dependent vari abl es of
the system. A some\vhat di fferent orderi ng of the ori gi nal experi ment
woul d cor r espond to a di fferent choi ce of i ndependent vari abl esfor
i nstance, one mi ght have deci ded to fi x the i nput cur r ent 1 arbi trari l y
and l et the i nput vol tage V adjust i tsel f accordi ngl y. The essenti al
fact i s, ho\vever , that four i ndependent l -ari abl cs and thr ee dependent
vari abl es, or , general l y, se~-en ~-m-i abl cs and thr ee rel ati ons bet~vcen them,
are requi red to descri be the fundamental properti es of the magnetron.
A conveni ent form for expressi ng these properti es i s the fol l owi ng set
of rel ati ons:
Gc = G,(V, V, v, 6), (6a)
B, = B.(v, v, v, a), (6b)
I = 1(V, 7, ,, 63). (7a)
An al ternati ve form for l ;qs. (6a) and (61)) i s
~. = (Gc +jBOV = f<(V, ~, u, m). (7b)
A di rect physi cal i nterpretati on can bc attached to thi s set of rel ati ons
by consi deri ng an i deal experi ment. Suppose that under parti cul ar
condi ti ons of osci l l ati on the quanti ti es i nvol ved i n l jqs. (7a) and (7~)
have the val ues 1, V, V, ., oi , and I :. I n pri nci pl e, the part of the
system to the ri ght of the termi nal s A i n Fi g. 7.3 can be repl aced by a
gener ator that has an output vol tage V and frequency V; the condi ti ons
to the l eft of A remai n unchanged, and al l the vari abl es l i sted above
must retai n thei r ori gi nal \-al ucs. By varyi ng ~, V, ~, and v and
observi ng 1 and 1. al l possi bl e condi ti ons of osci l l ati on can be dupl i cated
and the resul ts expressed i n the form of I l l s. ((is), (6b), and (7a) or
al ternati vel y I Zqs. (?a) and (Yb). I n addi ti on, the rel ati ons coul d be
extended by means of such {experi ments to ranges of the vari abl es that
do not cor r espond to any stabl e state of osci l l ati on. For exampl e, i t i s
pl ausi bl e that for ver y l arge val ues of ~, saturati on effects of some sort
.-. .
SEC. 7.2] THE ELECTRON STREAM AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT 295
woul d set i n, and the real component of 1, (and ther efor e G.) woul d
become posi ti ve, whi ch woul d entai l the absorpti on rather than the
generati on of al ternati ng-current power by the el ectr on stream. Actu-
al l y, i nformati on about the functi ons (6a) to (7b) has to be obtai ned
pri nci pal l y from data on stabl e states of osci l l ati on, but i t i s i mportant
to real i ze that the functi ons have meani ng for extended ranges of the
vari abl es.
I t so happens that i n most of the appl i cati ons of rel ati ons (6a) to
(7b) onl y a smal l range of the frequency v i s of i nterest. For exampl e,
i f one i s concer ned wi th the effect of the external l oad on the performance
of a fi xed-tuned magnetron, one need consi der frequenci es that di ffer
from the normal frequency of osci l l ati on voby at most a few per cent.
I n handl i ng such probl ems i t i s ver y conveni ent to mdke the approxi ma-
ti on that the rel ati ons (6a) to (7b) do not i nvol ve the frequency at al l
rel ati ons eval uated at vo are used throughout the enti re range of v.
Evi dence showi ng that thi s pr ocedur e i s permi ssi bl e wi l l be di scussed
l ater. I nasmuch as ther e wi l l be no ambi gui ty about vo i n probl ems
of the type i ndi cated, i t wi l l be conveni ent to have avai l abl e for r efer ence
the rel ati ons (8a) to (9b) i n the fol l owi ng approxi mate forms:
G. = G.(V, ~, 6), (8a)
Be = B,(v, -v, a), (8b)
I = l(v, v, 63), (9a)
1. = 1.(V, v, a). (9b)
I n practi ce, the functi ons (8a) to (9b) are known onl y i n the form of
tabul ati ons of experi mental data.
I t has not seemed feasi bl e to fi t
anal yti cal equati ons to the data, and the rel ati ons are actual l y used i n
the form of graphs; but si nce a functi on of thr ee vari abl es cannot be
r epr esented by a si ngl e two-di mensi onal curve, onl y parti al rel ati ons
can be expressed. For exampl e, i f i n Eq. (8a) ~ and (B are hel d at
fi xed val ues, G, can be pl otted agai nst V. Such questi ons as whi ch
vari abl es shoul d be hel d fi xed are matters that have to be adapted to
the parti cul ar probl em i n hand.
Ther efor e, any attempt to car r y through
the present dkcussi on on the basi s of a speci al i zed form of the rel ati ons
woul d i nvol ve much graphi cal sol uti on of equati ons, r epl ot ti ng, etc.,
and i t seems preferabl e to adopt a somewhat general vi ewpoi nt. For
the present, i t wi l l be taken for granted that the necessary i nformati on
about rel ati ons (8a) to (9b) i s avai l abl e and that i t can al ways be put i nto
a desi red form by the appropri ate computati onal procedures.
I
I
One may now consi der the probl em that i ni ti ated the di scussi on of
rel ati ons (6a) to (9fI ), namel y, that of predi cti ng the frequency of osci l -
l ati on v and the power output P from the known properti es of Y. and Y.
I
[the approxi mate forms (8a) to (9a) wi l l be used]. I f a magneti c fi el d
296 TI I E SPACE CIIARGE AS A CIRC(JIT ELEMENT [SEC. 72
~ and a d-c vol tage V are appl i ed to the magnetron, the real and
i magi nary parts of Eq. (l ), wi th Eqs. (2), (8a), and (9a) substi tuted i nto
i t, become
G~(v) +G.(V, ~,m) =0, (l o)
B.(,) +B,(V, ~, (8) =0. (11)
These two equati ons may be sol ved for ~ and v; the sol uti on ~, V then
substi tuted al ong wi th V and ~ i nto Eq. (9a) to obtai n Z; and the
probl em thus compl eted. A graphi cal sol uti on woul d take the fol l owi ng
form:
The pai r of rel ati ons
G = G.(v) and B = B.(v) (12)
are the parametri c equati ons for a cur ve i n the GB pl ane. Such a cur ve
i s i l l ustrated schemati cal l y i n Fi g. 7.4, wher e the vari ati on of the param-
B
13
f Y= Y (~)
12
5
1
ALI =2
AV =1
I
l :l (;. 7.4. Arfmi ttanre pl ots i n the
GB pl ane for a mwnetron operated
at co)).tant 8 and 1.
eter v al ong the cur ve i s r epr esented
by the smal l ci rcl es that mark off equal
i ncrements i n v. (The fact that onl y a
smal l range of v i s r epr esented has been
i ndi cated by marki ng off Av rather v.)
Si mi l arl y, the pai r of rel ati ons
G = G.(V, ~, a)
and
B = Be(V, ~, a) (13)
are the parametri c equati ons for a
second cur ve whi ch i s al so i l l ustrated
i n Fi g. 7.4. The vari ati on of the pa-
rameter ~ al ong thi s cur ve i s i ndi cated
by a scal e. Accordi ng to Eq. (9a), 1
al so vari es i n a per fectl y defi ni te man-
ner al ong thi s cur ve [that i s, 1 = l(V,
~, G)], and i ts vari ati on i s i ndi cated
by a second scal e. A cur ve of thi s type i s someti mes ter med an operat-
i ng curve; other sorts of operati ng curves may be drawn, however , so
when a di sti ncti on must be made, the present type may be r efer r ed to
as an operati ng cur ve at constant V.
The i ntersecti on of the two curves i ndi cated i n Fi g. 74 by the poi nt S
i s a sol uti on to Eqs. (10) and (11). At the i ntersecti on S the val ues of
v, 1, and v can be read from the scal es attached to the curves.
I t has thus been shown that the operati ng cur ve for @ = ~, V = V
is the cur ve defi ned by the si mul taneous equati ons G = G, (V, ~, @)
and B = B,(V, ~, ~) and that the operati ng cl ;rve for R ==G,
SEC. 7.3] ANALYSI S OF THE RESONANT SYSTEM 297
I
I = Z is the cur ve defi ned by the system of equati ons G = G.(V, V, @),
B = B.(V, ~, @) and 1 = I (V, ~, ~). I f, however , one shoul d
wi sh to take i nto account the fact that the c)-c power suppl y (or modul a-
tor ) used to dri ve the magnetron has an i nternal vol tage dr op that vari es
wi th the cur r ent drawn, the appropri ate operati ng cur ve can i n pri nci pl e
be obtai ned as fol l ows: Suppose that V and 1 are connected by a rel ati on
v = $(1) (14)
and that @ = c%; then the operati ng cur ve becomes si mpl y a pl ot of the
functi on (14) i n the curvi l i near coordi nate system formed by the vari ous
constant-V and constant-1 operati ng curves for @ = CB.
Di agrams of the general type of Fi g. 74 provi de a means for the dkect
i nterpretati on of many aspects of magnetron behavi or. The cur ve
Y = Y.(Y) has the i mportant pr oper ty of dependi ng enti rel y on the
system that l i es to the ri ght of the termi nal s A i n Fi g. 73. Thus any
effect that accompani es a change i n ei ther the resonant system or the
external l oad can be i nterpreted i n terms of the correspondi ng shi ft of
the Y. curve. I n the same way, the cur ve Y = Y, depends onl y on
what i s to the l eft of the termi nal s A, so that al l effects whi ch are con-
nected wi th changes i n the i nput condi ti ons (V, 1, ~) can be i nterpreted
i n terms of shi fts i n the Y. or operati ng curve.
The l oop i n the cur ve Y = Y.(v) of Fi g. 74 strongl y suggests the
possi bi l i ty that Eqs. (10) and (11) may someti mes have mor e than one
sol uti on. Si nce mul ti pl e sol uti ons present a speci al set of probl ems,
di scussi on of them wi l l be postponed to Sec. 74. I n addi ti on, ther e i s
the possi bi l i ty that a sol uti on to the equati ons may r epr esent an unstable
state of osci l l ati on; the questi on of stabi l i ty wi l l al so be taken up i n
Sec. 7.4.
7.3. Anal ysi s of the Resonant System.I n the for egoi ng di scussi on
i t was assumed that the properti es of the part of the system to the ri ght
of termi nal s A i n Fi g. 73 wer e known i n the form of the functi ons
G.(v) and B.(v).
These functi ons, whose speci al i zed forms are anal yzed
i n thi s secti on, contai n combi ned properti es of the system (magnetron
cavi ty + output coupl er + l ead + transmi ssi on l i ne + termi nati on).
An exampl e of such a system i s i l l ustrated schemati cal l y i n Fi g. 75a.
The di vi si ons between the vari ous components i s to some extent a matter
of conventi on.
Osci l l ati on of the magnetron i n onl y the r-mode i s consi dered, and
i t i s assumed that the resonances of the other modes of the cavi ty are
wel l enough separated from the r-mode resonance so that thei r pr esence
may be i gnored. That i s, the frequency of osci l l ati on i s consi dered to
be much cl oser to that of the mmode resonance than to any other mode,
and i t i s then possi bl e to anal yze the system i n terms of the equi val ent
298
~JI I ~S1~A~~~C[[A l i ~fi AS A CIRC UI T EI>E~fKI\ !/
[sm. 7.3
ci rcui t drawn i n Fi g. 7.5b. The paral l el -resonant ci rcui t has constants
that are appropri ate to the cavi ty al one (\vi th the output l oop compl etel y
r emoved from i t); i t thus contri bute an admi ttance Y. at the termi nal s A.
When the l oop, wi th the remai nder of the l oad system attached to i t,
i s i nserted i nto the cavi ty, the admi ttance at .4 i s augmented by an
admi ttance Y,; thus
l . = 1 + 1,. (15)
The termi nal s h i n Fi g. 7.5b r epr esent an arbi trary di vi si on bct\veen the
magnetron properwhi ch wi l l be tr eated as a ti xcd systemand what-
Lead
/-/
Oop
Termi nati on ~
w- - - h
,1
-$:_-j ~
I I
\
Transmi ssi on
I -,--u
I I
I I
l i ne
AO TS
(a)
1 1
Transmi ssi on
/
line
~Transducer
I
I
v
Q,;
i
I
A
A ;s
(b)
(c) (d)
FIG. 7.5.(R) The components of the resonant s~-stem; (b) representati on of the resol ~zmt
system of Fi g. 7.5a; (c) equi val ent ci rcui t of 1,i g. 7.5b; (d) si mpl i fi cati on of Fi g. 7.5c.
ever power-absorbi ng equi pment one chooses to attach to i t. The
admi ttance Ys of that part of the system to the ri ght of S wi l l be tr eated
for the present as a known functi on of the frequency i nasmuch as i ts
eval uati on does not i nvol ve any properti es of the magnetron. The
transducer D-S i n Fi g. 7.5b i s a devi ce i ntroduced to express the fact that
at any gi ven frequency the currents and vol tages at D and at S are con-
nected by l i near rel ati onshi ps. I n terms of admi ttances these rel ati on-
shi ps take the form
~=aYs+e

@Ys + 9
(16)
SEC. 7.3] ANALYSI S OF THE RESONANT SYSTEM 299
wher e @ a, C, and D are compl ex and are functi ons of the frequency.
The general properti es of rel ati ons of thi s type and methods for eval uati ng
the quanti ti es ~, 6$ ~, and D or thei r equi val ents are descri bed i n Chap.
5. For some purposes i t may be conveni ent to repl ace the transducer
D-S by an equi val ent chai n of transducers connected at i ntermedi ate
pai rs of termi nal s. For exampl e, i t may someti mes be desi rabl e to
bri ng the termi nal s O of Fi g. 75a i nto evi dence i n the equi val ent ci rcui t.
I n or der to concentr ate attenti on on the most i nteresti ng features of
the resonant system, the approxi mati ons wi l l be made
1. That the transducer D-S i s fr ee of el ectri cal l osses.
2. That the coeffi ci ents of Eq. (16) can be tr eated as constants over
frequency bands a few per cent i n wi dth.
The speci al effects associ ated wi th the quanti ti es negl ected i n the fi rst
of the two approxi mati ons are tr eated i n Chap. 5, and the effects that
are connected wi th the frequency sensi ti vi ty of the transducer are di s-
cussed i n Sec. 7 5.
As a resul t of the approxi mati ons i ntroduced above, Eq. (16) can
be wri tten i n the form
~ = dYs +jc,
,
(17a)
jbYs + a
wher e a, b, c, and d are real constants. I t i s possi bl e to r epr esent a
rel ati on of thi s type by an equi val ent ci rcui t composed of a shunt susceDt-
ance B, an i deal transformer of turns-rati o k, and a l ength 1 of trans-
mi ssi on l i ne of the same characteri sti c admi ttance M as the output
transmi ssi on l i ne. Accordi ngl y, the ci rcui t of Fi g. 7.5b can be made
exactl y equi val ent to that of Fi g. 75b; and i f the admi ttance of the output
transmi ssi on l i ne i s eval uated at the r efer ence pl ane T i nstead of at S,
Eq. (17a) takes the form
Ye=jfl+$YT. (17b)
The ci rcui t of Fi g. 75c can, i n turn, be repl aced by the si mpl er ci rcui t
of Fi g. 7 5d i n whi ch the paral l el -resonant ci rcui t has a resonance f r e-
quency of VUi nstead of v., wher e
P
~u=v.

4RC
(18)
To make use of the ci rcui t of Fi g. 7 5d, the admi ttance i n the output
transmi ssi on l i ne must be computed at the r efer ence pl ane T i nstead of
at S. The r efer ence pl ane T can, of course, be transl ated any
i ntegral number of hal f wavel engths (Xu) toward or away from the
magnetron, but by pr oper l y choosi ng T i t i s possi bl e to compensate to
300 TI I E SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCI I I T ELEMENT [SEC.7.3
some extent for the er r or s i ntroduced by the si mpl i fyi ng assumpti on
ori gi nal l y made, namel y, that the coeffi ci ents u, b, c, and d of I @. (17a)
are i ndependent of frequency.
The best choi ce of T can be determi ned
for the parti cul ar magnetron from col d-test measurements or from a,
Ri eke di agram.
I t fol l ows, then, that i f the admi ttance i n the output transmi ssi on
l i ne i s computed wi th r espect to an appropri atel y chosen r efer ence
pl ane, the resonant system of the magnetron vi ewed at the termi nal s A
wi l l behave approxi matel y as a paral l el -resonant ci rcui t shunted by an
admi ttance equal to (l /k*) Y~. The properti es of a paral l el -resonant
ci rcui t wi l l thus be r efer r ed to frequentl y i n the succeedi ng secti ons, and
i n or der to provi de a conveni ent summary of the notati on and the vari ous
approxi mate formul as that wi l l be used a r evi e\v of the perti nent pr oper -
ti es of thi s type of ci rcui t i s gi ven bel ow.
I n the notati on of Chap. 5, the admi ttances that have so far been
i ntroduced i n thi s chapter are pr oper l y wri tten
~,, ;~, ~., ~,, F.,, and ;,.
I nasmuch as the di recti on of these admi ttances wi l l remai n consi stent
throughout thi s chapter,
however , the arrows wi l l be omi tted i n the
fol l owi ng treatment.
Usual l y i mpedance and admi ttance formul as are devel oped on the
basi s of si nusoi dal vol tages and currents expressed as exponenti al , vi z,,
I t i s equal l y feasi bl e to devel op the formul as for posi ti vel y or negati vel y
damped si nusoi dal vol tages and currents, al so expressed as exponenti al :
I = ie@ and V = vep
wher e p = ~ + jti . That i s to say, i mpedances and admi ttances can be
defi ned for a compl ex frequency p/2rj as wel l as for a real frequency
v = Q/27r. Later on, the compl ex frequency wi l l be used i n the treat-
ment of transi ents by approxi mati ng a vol tage of varyi ng ampl i tude
V = V(t)e as a pure exponenti al V = oe(~+~),wher e f = (d/dt) I n V(t).
A ci rcui t composed of an i nductance L, a capaci tance C, and a resi st-
ance R = l /G, al l connected i n paral l el , i s a conveni ent pr ototype. For
thi s ci rcui t, the condi ti on for the conservati on of charge can be wri tten
(19)
The general sol uti on to the equati on i s
V = Clep, + CzepO*t, (20)
SEC. 7.3] ANALYSI S OF THE RESONANT SYSTEM 301
The Q of the ci rcui t i s defi ned by the rel ati on l /2Q = ~0/wo. The
two terms i n the ri ght-hand si de of Eq. (20) r epr esent the two natural
osci l l ati ons, or modes, of the system.
For an i mpressed vol tage of the type V = ue@ the admi ttance and
i mpedance of the ci rcui t are gi ven by the formul as
or
y= G+jB. ~.c(P PO)(P P:)
P
(
a*
)
z=~
c p:po+pp~
wher e
a=
po
po p:
(21)
(22)
I f the usual conventi on of representi ng a si nusoi dal l y appl i ed vol tage
V = vej by a posi ti ve val ue of o i s adopted, then for a real frequency
w/2r, Eq. (21) can be wri tten i n the forms
(23a)
(23b)
Al l of the for egoi ng formul as are exact, but i t i s general l y mor e
conveni ent to use approxi mate formul as that are accurate onl y to fi rst-
or der terms i n &/wo, .i o/uo and (u WO) /uo. Ordi nari l y ther e wi l l be no
l oss of accuracy i n usi ng these approxi mati ons, because the use of a
paral l el -resonant ci rcui t to r epr esent the properti es of a compl i cated
cavi ty for frequenci es near one of i ts resonances i s usual l y i n i tsel f si gni fi -
cant onl y wi th r egar d to fi rst-order terms i n these quanti ti es.
I f Eq. (21)
i s expanded, then an approxi mate formul a i s obtai ned whi ch can be
wri tten i n any of the fol l owi ng ways:
( )
Y=j=Yc~$+2jW~ (24a)
wher e
J
c
Yc=c@o= ~
Y = ; = 2c(p po),
(24b)
302 THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT [SEC.7.3
and
1
(
1
i
)
=~=y i L+G+2~6
(24c)
wher e
When the constants of the equi val ent ci rcui t are deri ved from i mpedance
measurements, the fol l o\vi ng rel ati ons are used:
UO = CI)]B=O or VO= VIB4J, (25a)
Yc = 2+og B=o = &o% B=
(25b)
11
-d
To = Yc =0
(25c)
I t i s someti mes conveni ent to r epr esent the combi nati on of a paral l el -
resonant ci rcui t and a shunt admi ttance Y = G + jB by an equi val ent
paral l el -resonant ci rcui t that has a resonance frequency di fferent from
that of the ori gi nal one. Thus
(
1 .Uuo
) (
1 .00;
c Qo + 2 ~o
+ G + jB
) Yc a+~2 ~: 26)
wher e
1
~+gc
w: Wo 2B
~=Qo
and

Uo
Y,
Returni ng to the resonant system of the magnetron, Eq. (15) may be
expressed i n the form
Y. = Y. + Y.; (27)
wher e
Y. = G. + j4&(v V.) +j@
and
Y. = ; Y..
I t i s frequentl y conveni ent to express Y, i n normal i zed form, that i s, as
y, = YT/Jf, wher e Jf i s the characteri sti c admi ttance of the output
transmi ssi on l i ne; thi s gi ves
y. = G. + jkTc(V V.) + jd + ; y,. (28)
Equati on (28) i s often used i n ei ther of the forms of Eq. (29) or (30)
gi ven bel ow. The subscri pts U, E, and L that appear i n these equati ons
wi l l be used consi stentl y to denote the fol l o\vi ng:
SEC. 7.3] ANALYSI S OF THE RESONANT SYSTEM
U = characteri sti c of the unl oaded condi ti on of
system,
E = contri buti on connected wi th y, = gT + jbr,
303
the resonant
L = characteri sti c of the l oaded condi ti on of the resonant system.
When the vari ati on of y, wi th frequency can be i gnored, Eq. (28) can
be wri tten as
Y. = G. + j47rC(V v.). (29)
I nasmuch as the di fference between Y, = Cu, and Cw, i s smal l , Eq. (29)
can al so be wri tten as
(
1
)
= c Q; + 2j ?.LL
wher e
(30)
(31a)
(31b)
(31C)
VL = VU+ VE,
(32a)
P
u = Gc
(32b)
(32c)
The speci al case wher e the output transmi ssi on l i ne i s matched
(i .e., yr = 1) i s of parti cul ar si gni fi cance. For the present, the val ues
of QL, v~, etc., for thi s case wi l l be i ndi cated by the subscri pt M, viz.,
Q,~, Q.~, etc. By maki ng use of these quanti ti es, Eq. (28) can be put
i nto sti l l another form:
(
1
)
~+&yT .
L=y CL+2J
(33)
Equati on (33) i s especi al l y useful because Q., v~~, and Q.~ can be deri ved
ver y si mpl y from the Q-ci rcl e whi ch i s obtai ned by maki ng i mpedance
measurements l ooki ng i nto the termi nal s T from the output transmi ssi on
l i ne (see Chap. 5). By usi ng for Q the val ue obtai ned i n thi s way, one
compensates i n part for the el ectri cal l osses i nherent i n the output ci rcui t.
Wi th the deri vati on of Eq. (33) the properti es of the resonant system
and output ci rcui t of the magnetron have been taken i nto account, but
the term y. i n Eq. (33) sti l l remai ns to be consi dered. I n general , y.
i s a functi on of the frequency, but the nature of thi s functi on depends
ver y strongl y on the parti cul ar type of system that i s to the ri ght of the
termi nal s 2 i n Fi g. 7.5a.
304
THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CIRCUIT ELEMENT
[SEC. 7.3
I n one extr eme, VTi s essenti al l y i ndependent of frequency (as when
the transmi ssi on l i ne i s per fectl y termi nated), and YL then has the
frequency dependence of a paral l el -resonant ci rcui t as i l l ustrated i n
t
u
Q
B~
B;
G~
[
v
lJ u
L
GL
(a) (b)
FIG. 7,6. (a) Curves of G~ and BI. vs. frequency for a non frequency-sensi ti ve l oad;
(b) F,g. 7.6a repl otted ,n terms of G~ vs. k?~,
Fi g. 7.6a; the YL(u) cur ve i s si mpl y a strai ght verti cal l i ne wi th the
frequency varyi ng uni forml y al ong I t, as i n Fi g, 7(;b. I n the other
extr eme, the l oad has a compl i cated spectrum of resonances (as when
numerous refl ecti ons take pl ace i n the output transmi ssi on l i ne), and
r
$~~k
BL
GE
Bu
%
Gu
G~
. .-
V
(a)
(b)
FI G. 7.7.(u) Curves of Gu, GE, Bu, and B.E VS. frequency for a frequency -sensi ti ve
l oad; (b) the l oad curve: EL ( = BE and BL,) pl otted agai nst GL ( = GEand Gu).
the components of Y, = GE + jB,, vary wi th frequency i n
fashi on i ndi cated i n Fi g. 7.7a; Go and Bu are al so sho\vn.
sho\~s B~(= B& + B.) as a fun~ti ~~l of G.(= Gti + ~fJ).
the general
Fi gure 7.7b
SEC.7.4] SPACE CHARGE RESONATOR SYSTEM 305
7.4. I nteracti ons between Space Charge and Resonator.I n the
previ ous secti on i t was shown that the state of osci l l ati on of a mag-
netr on coul d be obtai ned from the i ntersecti on of two curves i n
the GB pl ane such as those gi ven i n Fi g. 7.4. I t was al so i ndi cated
how the operati ng cur ve Y = Y,( ~,a) coul d be deri ved from system-
ati c observati ons on the performance of the magnetron and how
the admi ttance cur ve Y = Y~(v) coul d be computed from known
properti es of the magnetron cavi ty, output ci rcui t, and l oad. The
symbol a stands for whatever i nput parameter i s consi dered to be
vari abl e. For i nstance, one may wi sh to consi der a set of operati ng
Y=YL (a)
\
B
t-
Y= YL (@g)
G
a Y~
K
ai -~)
av
Fm. 7.8,Stabi l i ty di agram on the basi s of the l oad and operati ng curves. The
condi ti on for stabi l i ty i s that the angl e a, between the vectors d yL/a@ and d ( Y.) /d,
measured i n a countercl ockwi se di recti on, must l i e between 0 and 1SO.
curves for vari ous constant val ues of 1, of V, or of VOwher e Vo = V + RI .
When the di scussi on does not concer n changes i n i nput condi ti ons, a
wi l l be omi tted. The vari ous types of phenomenon that are connected
wi th the i ntersecti ons of the curves and wi th di spl acements or di storti ons
of one or the other of these curves are di scussed bel ow.
General Considerations oj Stabi l i ty.I t i s evi dent that when the Y.
cur ve has l oops, as i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7.7b, the operati ng cur ve can
i ntersect i t i n several poi nts. I t has been stated previ ousl y that some
of these i ntersecti ons may cor r espond to unstabl e states of osci l l ati on;
the present di scussi on i s concer ned wi th a rul e that may enabl e one to
di sti ngui sh between the stabl e and the unstabl e states. A necessary
condi ti on for stabi l i ty can be deri ved on the basi s of Fi g. 7.S and the
306 THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT [SEC. 74
fol l owi ng consi derati on: I f by any means ~ i s made to take on a val ue
~ rl fferent from the val ue ~ that i t has at the i ntersecti on of the l oad
and operati ng curves, the system can be stabl e onl y i f ther e exi sts a
natural tendency for ~ to return to the val ue ~; i t wi l l be unstabl e i f
the anomal y i n ~ tends to i ncrease wi th ti me.
The condi ti on of the space charge for ~ = ~ wi l l be r epr esented by
the poi nt ~ on the operati ng cur ve shown i n Fi g. 78. At fi rst si ght,
thi s condi ti on mi ght seem to i nvol ve a contradi cti on, si nce the rel ati on
Y.(d) + y.(~) = 0 i s not sati sfi ed at r. However , the cur ve
Y = Y.(u)
hol ds onl y fo: steady-state condi ti ons, that i s to say, for ~ = constant.
When T7 = V, the ampl i tude V changes wi th ti me, or , i n other words,
the frequency i s compl ex. Through the poi nt ~ ther e passes another
admi ttance cur ve Y = YL(~,t). I f t i s negati ve, the ampl i tude ~
i s decreasi ng wi th ti me; i f posi ti ve, i ncreasi ng. Thus i f (P ~)
and ~ have opposi te si gns at the poi nt ~, ~ must tend toward ~, and
the system i s stabl e at ~. The probl em consi sts then of the determi na-
ti on of the si gn of ~.
The probl em can be sol ved by maki ng use of the fact that Y. i s an
anal yti c functi on of the compl ex vari abl e p = .$+ jti . Thi s ci rcumstance
enabl es one to der i ve the necessary i nformati on about the dependence
of Yb on 1 from i ts known dependence upon w. For val ues of ~ that are
nearl y equal to ~, the vari ati on of i al ong the operati ng cur ve can be
obtai ned from the rel ati on
(34)
wher e a Y~/ a~ is taken al ong the operati ng curve. Si nce YL i s an
anal yti c functi on of p, dY./ dp = ayL/C@) = j(aYL/ aO), so Eq. (34)
can be wri tten
()
a(ye)
ap =
aV
(35)
TV
()
.aYL
~ ~
[I n Eq. (35) ap/tt~ and a( Y,)/a~ are di recti onal deri vati ves, al ong
the operati ng curve; aY~/i l @ i s a dkecti onal deri vati ve al ong the Y(u)
curve.] Shce ~ = O at ~, i t i s necessary that the real part of ap/a~
be negati ve at ~ i n or der for ~ to be negati ve when ~ ~ i s posi ti ve.
The deri vati ves i n the ri ght-hand si de of Eq. (35) can be expressed as
vector s i n the manner i ndi cated i n Fi g. 78. I n terms of these vector s,
the condi ti on for stabi l i ty i s that the angl e a measured between the
\
I
I
SEC. 7.4] SPACE CHA RGE RESONA 1OR SYS1EM 307
a yL/& and a( Y.)/aV vector s i n a countercl ockwi se di recti on must l i e
between O and + 180.
The vari ous types of i ntersecti on that can occur between the l oad
and operati ng curves are i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7.9. Accordi ng to the cri -
teri on just deri ved, the i ntersecti ons D, E, and F i n thi s fi gure r epr esent
states of osci l l ati on that are i nherentl y unstabl e, whereas at i ntersecti ons
B
L
G
1
u
-~ (6
Y+
t~
~ Lc
FI G. 7.9.Types of i ntersecti on between the l oad and operati ng curves.
A, B, and C osci l l ati ons mi ght be stabl e. Wi th r egar d to these l atter
i ntersecti ons two questi ons ari se:
1. Can the system osci l l ate si mul taneousl y i n mor e than one of the
possi bl y stabl e states ?
2. I f the system can osci l l ate i n onl y one state, whi ch of the possi bl y
stabl e i ntersecti ons represents the pr efer r ed state?
I nasmuch as these questi ons are of consi derabl e practi cal i mportance,
they wi l l be di scussed i n some detai l , even though a compl ete answer to
them cannot be gi ven.
As far as is known, a state of osci l l ati on that corresponds to an
i ntersecti on of type C i n Fi g. 7.9 has never been observed. Thi s i nter-
secti on represents a somewhat pecul i ar combi nati on of condi ti ons;
namel y, the negati ve of the el ectroni c conductance G. i ncreases wi th
~, and the I oad-susceptance B. decreases wi th frequency. The condi ti on
i s necessari l yy connected wi th the pr esence of a l oop i n the YL curve,
si nce i n the absence of such a l oop BL i ncreases wi th i ncreasi ng frequency
(see Fi g. 7.6).
A second i mportant general observati on i s that the magnetron does
not osci l l ate at two frequenci es si mul taneousl y. Thi s must mean ei ther
that ther e i s i nvol ved some SOrt of sel ecti on process whi ch operates i n
308 THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT [SEC. 7.4
favor of one or the other of the i ntersecti ons or that si mul taneous osci l l a-
ti on at two frequenci es i s an i nherentl y unstabl e state. I n di scussi ng
thi s matter further, i t i s necessary to make a di sti ncti on between pul sed
magnetrons and c-w magnetrons. I n the case of pul sed operati on, one
i s i nterested pri mari l y i n turn-on phenomena, whi l e i n the case of c-w
operati on one i s i nterested al so i n the way that the magnetron behaves
when adjustments are made i n the l oad or i n other operati ng condi ti ons
wi thout i nterrupti ng the appl i ed vol tage V.
Consi der c-w operati on wi th osci l l ati on establ i shed at some i ntersec-
ti on such as B i n Fi g. 7.9. I f the vol tage appl i ed to the magnetron (or
the magneti c fi el d) i s al tered gradual l y, the Ye cur ve wi l l move so that
the i ntersecti on B travel s al ong the YL curve. I t can happen that the
i ntersecti on B suddenl y di sappears, as when the operati ng cur ve fi rst
becomes tangent to the top of the l oop and then moves compl etel y
beyond the l oop. I n that case the frequency becomes compl ex; and
accordi ng to the argument appl i ed i n connecti on wi th Fi g. 7.8, .$i s nega-
ti ve, 1 so the state of osci l l ati on that i nvol ves thi s parti cul ar i ntersecti on
becomes posi ti vel y damped and thus di es out. I t seems pl ausi bl e that,
i n general , osci l l ati ons wi l l start up agai n and the steady-state wi l l then
be establ i shed at an i ntersecti on such as A, al though i t i s concei vabl e
that osci l l ati ons mi ght not be reestabl i shed. Si mi l ar arguments can
be appl i ed to the case wher e the Y. cur ve i s al tered by some adjustment
of the resonant system. Thi s adjustment mi ght consi st of a change i n
the external l oad or a change i n the tuni ng adjustment of a tunabl e
magnetron. I n these cases the Y. cur ve ei ther wi l l suffer a si mpl e
transl ati on or wi l l be made to go through some snakel i ke deformati ons,
and pai rs of i ntersecti ons can coal esce and then be exti ngui shed. Whi l e
the above consi derati ons must appl y general l y, i t i s al so possi bl e for an
establ i shed state of osci l l ati on to become unstabl e for reasons other than
the vani shi ng of an i ntersecti on i n an admi ttance di agram. I t mi ght
happen that at some cri ti cal condi ti on i t becomes possi bl e for osci l l ati ons
at some other frequency to bui l d up and make the i ni ti al state unstabl e.
Thi s possi bi l i tyy wi l l be di scussed l ater on i n thi s secti on. I n any case, i t
i s understandabl e that i n c-w operati on a certai n amount of hysteresi s i s
obser ved i n changi ng from one state of osci l l ati on to another.
I n pul sed. magnetrons, one i s concer ned pri nci pal l y wi th errati c
sel ecti on of the frequency of osci l l ati on at successi ve pul ses. (Hysteresi s
effects ordi nari l y do not occur ; and when they do, they must be attri buted
to such secondary causes as thermal l ags.) Consi derabl e exper i ence has
been accumul ated i n two rather di fferent types of si tuati on. One con-
cerns the performance bf the magnetron when i t feeds i nto a moderatel y
1 Thi s statement presupposes that wi th i ncreasi ng frequency a l oop i s al ways
traversed i n a cl ockwi se di recti on. From experi ence, thi s seems to be the case.
r
I SEC. 7.4] SPACE CHARGE RESONATOR SYSTEM 309
l ong, mi smatched transmi ssi on l i ne; the other concerns the use of auxi l i ary
cavi ti es coupl ed to the resonant system of the magnetron for the purpose
i
ei ther of tuni ng i t or of stabi l i zi ng the frequency. I n the case of the l ong
l i ne, i t seems that the sel ecti on of frequenci es i s errati c when the two
i ntersecti ons (between the Y. and the Y~ curves) are cl ose together .
When the i ntersecti ons are wel l separated, the one that occurs at the
l ower (or l owest) val ue of G. i s pr efer r ed. (The subject of l ong trans-
mi ssi on l i nes i s tr eated i n detai l i n Sec. 76.) The general probl em of an
auxi l i ary cavi ty i nvol ves a much wi der vari ety of Y. curves than does
the mi smatched transmi ssi on l i ne, and no si mpl e rul e for the sel ecti on
of i ntersecti ons i s uni versal l y appl i cabl e. I n some si tuati ons the mi ni -
mum conductance rul e just stated provi des some correl ati on for the
obser ved behavi or, but the general case i s not at al l cl ear.
Multiple stable I ntersections of the Looxi and Operating Curues.
Consi derati ons of stabi l i ty that are based enti rel y on the i ntersecti ons
of the Y. and YL curves have an i nherent fl aw; they rest on the assump-
ti on that osci l l ati ons at mor e than one frequency are never present.
Whi l e thi s assumpti on i s justi fi ed by exper i ence as far as steady states
of osci l l ati on are concer ned, i t i s enti rel y unjusti fi ed wi th r egar d to
transi ent states. To state the case mor e exactl y, i t has been assumed
that the i nstantaneous a-c vol tage vi i s of the form
I
Vi = a exp (f + ju)t. (36)
~
However , ther e i s no reason why a vol tage of the form
I
~i=ale +a2ey+y+ (37)
wher e p~ = & + jo~ cannot exi st temporari l y i n the system, and the
stabi l i ty rel ati ons deri ved on the basi s of Eq. (37) may be qui te di fferent
from those deri ved on the basi s of Eq. (36).
The Y~(v) cur ve does not gi ve any ver y di rect i ndi cati on of the
response of the resonant system for a vol tage of the form of Eq. (37),
and ther e thus seems to be some advantage i n approachi ng the probl em
from a somewhat di fferent vi ewpoi nt, namel y, the consi derati on that
one i s deal i ng wi th coupl ed ci rcui ts or wi th a system that has several
natural modes of osci l l ati on. I t i s to be noted that the wor d mode
as i t i s used her e has a context somewhat di fferent from the one that i t
usual l y has i n di scussi ons of magnetrons. Usual l y the modes that are
menti oned are the natural modes of the magnetron cavi ty ei ther unl oaded
or wi th a nonresonant l oad coupl ed to i t, each of these modes havi ng i ts
own pecul i ar confi gurati on of el ectri c fi el ds i n the i nteracti on space of
the magnetron. However , under condi ti ons wher e ther e are i rregul ari ti es
i n the l oad cur ve one i s deal i ng wi th the natural modes that ari se when
the m or N/2-mode of the cavi ty i s coupl ed to a hi ghl y resonant external
310 THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT [SEC. 7.4
system but wher e the fi el ds i n the i nteri or of the magnetron are al ways
those characteri sti c of the -mode.
The occur r ence of l oops or other i rregul ari ti es i n the Y.(u) cur ve i s
i n i tsel f evi dence that mor e than one mode of osci l l ati on of the resonant
system i s possi bl e. Accordi ng to a general resul t of ci rcui t anal ysi s the
i mpedance of any passi ve ci rcui t at a pai r of termi nal s can be expressed
i n the form
(
al a2
+ +
Z=+= p;:p
P * P2
)
+ bo + bl p, (38)
+
PP?
~+
PP;
wher e the pk)s are the natural modes of the system when i t i s open-
ci rcui ted at the termi nal s. I n any physi cal passi ve system the p~s
x
@
FI G. 7.1O.A pl ot of Z(u) of Eq. (39).
are compl ex, and thei r real parts (~~s)
must be negati ve, for i n a passi ve
system al l resonances are necessari l y
posi ti vel y damped. For hi gh-Q r eso-
nances, whi ch are the sort that wi l l
general l y be deal t wi th her e, the ~~s
are rel ati vel y smal l ; that i s,
~k = & << ~k.
A term a,/(p pk) becomes espe-
ci al l y i mportant when (p p~) i s
Smal l , and i f a parti cul ar pk~ay
pi i s qui te di fferent from any of
the others. then for D nearl v eaual
to p, Eq. (37) can be approxi mated by just i ts fi rst term: I f f, i s sti al l ,
then al necessari l y has a smal l i magi nary part that can be negl ected
(otherwi se Z wi l l have a negati ve real part for some val ues of U) and
Y=;=
2cl (p p,)
1
wher e 2CI =
Re(aJ
(39)
Thi s i s just the state of affai rs whi ch enabl es one to approxi mate a
compl i cated ci rcui t by a si mpl e paral l el -resonant ci rcui t, because Eq.
(39) i s the same as Eq. (24b). The cur ve of Y(u) for Eq. (39) has the
form shown i n Fi g. 7.6b, and the cur ve Z(W) i n the RX pl ane has the
form i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7.10.
When two or mor e of the p~s are nearl y equal , thi ngs become mor e
compl i cated. To keep the i l l ustrati ons reasonabl y si mpl e, i t wi l l be
assumed that pl and p2 are nearl y equal i n Eq. (38) but that they are
ver y di fferent from any of the remai ni ng pks. Then for p nearl y equal
SEC. 74] SPACE CHARGE RESONATOR SYSTEM 311
to p, and P2 the fi rst two terms are of comparabl e i mportance, and the
si mpl est useful approxi mati on to Eq. (38) i s the sum of the fhwt two terms.
For si mpl i ci ty, i t wi l l be assumed that al and a~have negl i gi bl e i magi nary
partsl so that, i n anal ogy to Eq. (39), one may wri te
or
z=~J --+~J -
2C, p pl
2C2 p pz
y = ; = 2C @ PI )(P P2),
ppo
(40)
(41)
wher e
~ = C,c,
c, + c,
and
Clpl + C2P2.
p. =
c1 + c,
I t i s evi dent that for a certai n range of p the properti es of the system
can be r epr esented by the equi v-
al ent ci rcui t to the ri ght of the
termi nal s A i n Fi g. 7.1 l a. The
Z(u) and Y(u) curves have the gen-
eral forms i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7.1 l b
and c. To a fi rst approxi mati on,
I Z(co)l has a maxi mum and I Y(u)l
has a mi ni mum for u = COland
u = U2; I Z(a) I has a mi ni mum
and I Y(co)I a maxi mum for ti = uo.
When the termi nal s A are open-
ci rcui ted, the system has the
natural modes pl and pi; when
the termi nal s A are short-ci r-
cui ted, the system has the natural
mode po. When any admi ttance
Y, whi ch vari es onl y ver y sl owl y
wi th frequency, i s connected
across the termi nal s A, the system
1
A
a=
(a)
(b) (c)
FI G. 7.11. (I z) Equi val ent ci rcui t repre.
senti ng the case of two possi bl e transi ent
modes of osci l l ati on; @) tbe Z(u) cur ve for
the ci rcui t of Fi g. 1l a; (c) the Y(u) cur ve
for the ci rcui t of Fi g. ha.
has normal modes that are ~ol uti ons of the quadrati c equati on
2c(p pl)(p p,) + Y(p po) = o.
(42)
1I n the general case thi s i s not necessari l y true, and the equi val ent ci rcui t i n
Fi g. 1l a may not be appropri ate.
Thi s poi nt i s di scussed, for i nstance, by Bode
i n Network Analysis and Feedback Ampli~ Design, Van Nostrand, New York, 1945,
p. 202. The general argument to be outl i ned can be appl i ed equal l y wel l to any
ci rcui t, but for purposes of i l l ustrati on a ci rcui t has been chosen that bri ngs the
normal modes di rectl y i nto vi ew.
312 THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCU1 T ELEMENT
[SEC. 7.4
I f Y represents a paasi ve ci rcui t el ement, the sol uti ons necessari l y have
negati ve real parts; but i f Y has a negati ve component of conductance,
i t i s possi bl e for one or mor e of the sol uti ons to have posi ti ve real parts.
I n the l atter case i t i s possi bl e for one or mor e modes of osci l l ati on i n
the ci rcui t to bui l d up from any sl i ght di sturbance of the system such as
mi ght ari se from thermal exci tati on or any other sour ce of nmse.
For the present i t wi l l be taken for granted that i t i s sensi bl e to
substi tute the el ectroni c admi ttance Y, for Y i n Eq. (42). Si nce the
ai m her e i s si mpl y to i l l ustrate the qual i tati ve aspects of the probl em,
(d
,-.
*
pf
OB
f-q2(G,)
PI\
1 ;2 L -4
q,{G, )
L
o
(a) (b)
FI G. 7.12.(a) The general behavi or of the roots q,G, and qfl. pl otted i n the u f
pl ane for the i ndi cated negati ve val ues of G,; (b) tbe rel ated YL(O,U) curve. The G-axi s
coi nci des wi th the operati ng cur ve -G, ~.
i t i s al so assumed that Ye i s a pure conductance. To pr oceed further,
one must fi nd how the r oots of the equati on
ZC(P PI)(P p,) + Ge(p po) = O
vary when G. takes on negati ve val ues. Ther e are two roots, p = ql (G,)
and p = qz(GJ; these can be pl otted i n the p (or ~, u) pl ane and wi l l
tr ace out a cur ve as G. vari es. When G. = O, the r oots are, of course,
pl and pz; that i s, ql (0) = pl and q2(0) = pi. When G. ~ LW,one
of the two r oots must approach pO(whi ch of the r oots does thi s depends
i n a rather compl i cated way upon the val ues of PI , P2, and PO), and the
other r oot must approach (+ ~ ,0). The general behavi or of the r oots
for negati ve val ues of G, i s i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7.12a. The rel ated YL(O,U)
cur ve i s shown i n Fi g. 7.12b.
Accordi ng to the si mpl i fyi ng assumpti on made abovethat Y. i s a
pure conductancethe operati ng cur ve i n Fi g. 7. 12b l i es al ong the G-axi s.
I t i ntersects the YL(O,CO)cur ve i n the poi nts a, p, -y and these poi nts
cor r espond exactl y to those si mi l arl y l abel l ed i n Fi g. 7.12a, wher e ei ther
SEC. 7.4] SPACE CHARGE RESONATOR SYSTEM 313
ql or qz i s a pure i magi nary. The cri teri on for stabi l i ty based on Fi g.
7.8 i s ful fi l l ed at a and y provi ded 6Ge/8~ >0 and at D provi ded
6G./6~ <0. That cri teri on, however , i s onl y a necessary condi ti on for
stabi l i ty i nasmuch as i ts ful fi l l ment i nsures merel y that a state of osci l l a-
ti on i s stabl e agai nst i ts own transi ents. We wi sh further to fi nd out
whi ch of the states l i sted above are stabl e agai nst transi ents of other
modes of osci l l ati on; thi s can be done by means of Fi g. 7.12a.
The poi nt a i s associ ated wi th a val ue of 2.8 for G. and B wi th a val ue
of 7.2. For both of these val ues of G. the real part of qz i s posi ti ve and
thi s ci rcumstance i mpl i es that a mode of osci l l ati on associ ated wi th q2wi l l
bui l d up exponenti al l y from any smal l di sturbance. Consequentl y one
may concl ude that nei ther a nor j3 represents a trul y stabl e state of osci l -
l ati on. At the poi nt y, on the other hand, the val ue of G. i s 1.2 and for
thi s val ue ther e i s no q that has a posi ti ve real part; consequentl y ~
represents the one compl etel y stabl e state i n the present exampl e. The
above concl usi ons, however , are based on the assumpti on that the
space charge can be tr eated as a l i near ci rcui t el ement, whi ch i s obvi ousl y
an oversi mpl i fi cati on. I f the concl usi ons wer e val i d, i t coul d happen onl y
as the resul t of exceedi ngl y i mprobabl e ci rcumstances that ei ther one of
two modes coul d be stabl e al ternati vel y under i denti cal operati ng condi -
ti ons, whereas such i nstances are commonl y obser ved wi th c-w magnetrons.
Ther efor e the next step i s to i nqui re how the for egoi ng consi derati ons can
be modi fi ed so as to take i nto account the nonl i neari ty of the space charge,
parti cul arl y when the vol tage contai ns components of di fferent frequenci es.
A vol tage of the type expressed by Eq. (37) can al so be expressed as a
si nusoi dal vol tage wi th superi mposed ampl i tude and frequency (or
phase) modul ati ons; that i s,
(43)
I f, i n Eq. (37), the $s are rel ati vel y smal l and the di fferences between
the as are al so smal l , ~ and @i n Eq. (43) are sl owl y varyi ng functi ons
of the ti me; thus the modul ati ons are sl ow. Si nce no fundamental
change i n the symmetry of the el ectri c fi el ds i n the i nteracti on space of
the magnetron i s i nvol ved, the el ectr on stream, or space-charge wheel ,
can readi l y accommodate i tsel f to the sl ow modul ati ons. That i s to say,
the rel ati on between ~ and ~, must be practi cal l y the same as for steady-
state operati on, al though they both vary wi th ti me. Thus
For the present purposes i t i s suffi ci ent to consi der a case wher e Eq.
(37) contai ns just two terms, one much l arger than the other , and wher e
314 THE SP.4CE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT [SEC. 7.4
the frequenci es are real , i n whi ch case Eq. (37) can be wri tten as
Pi = ~l e + V2@W2 = P,e(1 + ue~),
(46)
wher e u = ~Z/~1 <<1 and Q = CM 01. For thi s case Eq. (43) takes
the form
(47)
whi ch can be approxi mated by
P, = [~~(1 + u COSW)] [(1 + ju si n W) exp (jul t)].
(48)
Equati on (45) can be approxi mated by
wher e
Thus Eq. (44) becomes
T., = ~.(~1)(1 + 6 cos W)(l + jc si n u,t)e~ti .
I f the term i n U6i s negl ected, Eq. (50) can al so be wri tten
We assume that the cross term i n ul Q = 2ti l ma can
then Eq. (51) can be wri tten
(50)
(51)
be i gnored;
(52)
The terms i n parentheses evi dentl y are the effecti ve admi ttances for the
r especti ve vol tage components i n Eq. (46).
I n what fol l ows ~c wi l l be tr eated as a real quanti ty, i n accordance
wi th the si mpl i fyi ng assumpti on made previ ousl y that the operati ng
cur ve l i es al ong the G-axi s. (I f ~, wer e consi dered to have an i magi nary
component, the real and i magi nary parts coul d be tr eated i ndependentl y
i n the way i ndi cated above.) A pl ot of ~. (actual l y, of the real compo-
nent of ~.) agai nst ~ i s presumed to be of one or the other of the general
types i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7.13a and c; correspondi ng operati ng curves are
shown i n Fi g. 7. 13b and d. The sol i d parts of these curves cor r espond to
observati ons made on steady-state osci l l ati ons; the dotted parts are
I
i
SEC. 7.4] SPACE CHARGE RELSONTAOR SYSTEM 315
based on i ndi rect evi dence di scussed i n Chap. 8. When the magnetron
i s osci l l ati ng steadi l y at frequency UI at the poi nt (~, 1) i n Fi g. 713a,
the space-charge conductance G1 for the steady-state osci l l ati ons i s equal
to I L/ V; however , the space-charge conductance Gz for any super-
i mposed transi ent of smal l ampl i tude at some frequency cu di sti nct from
ul i s equal to one-hal f the sum of ~,/~ and the di fferenti al conductance
d~,/ d~ at that poi nt. (For a superi mposed transi ent at frequency u,
the conductance i s just d~,/ dV.) Si nce, i n general , Gz i s consi derabl y
l ess negati ve than Gl , an establ i shed state of osci l l ati on has the odds
(-l> l:k=..:k
--~
\
(c) (d)
Fm. 7.13.(0), (c) The real component of the el ectroni c cur r ent ~, pl otted vs. the a-c
vol tage T; (b), (d) the operati ng cur ves correspondi ng to l %. 7.13a and c.
wei ghted i n i ts favor; thus hysteresi s effects can be accounted for.
Nonl i neari ti es wi l l not, however , ser ve to stabi l i ze osci l l ati ons under the
condi ti ons r epr esented by the i ntersecti on C i n Fi g. 7.9 and by @ wi th
L$G,/8~ <0 i n Fi g. 7.12. I nasmuch as 6~,/6~ i s mor e negati ve than
~,/~ i n these cases, as at the poi nt c i n Fi g 7.13c, the el ectroni c conduct-
ance i s mor e negati ve for a transi ent than i t i s for the steady state.
As regards turn-on phenomena, the nonl i neari ty of the space charge
tends to stabi l i ze the mode of osci l l ati on that bui l ds up most rapi dl y.
The i ni ti al bui l dup of osci l l ati ons can take pl ace onl y al ong an operati ng
cur ve such as i s r epr esented i n Fi g. 713a and b as di sti ngui shed from
Fi g. 7.13c and d. For such an operati ng cur ve the space charge i s
approxi matel y l i near for smal l val ues of ~; that i s ~. i s nearl y di rectl y
proporti onal to ~, and the earl i er di scussi on based on Fi g. 7.12 i s di rectl y
appl i cabl e. Thus for the condi ti ons r epr esented by that fi gure i t i s
316 THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T
evi dent that Mode 2 wi l l bui l d up mor e rapi dl y
ELEMENT [SEC. 75
than the other mode,
i nasmuch as G. starts out by bei ng strongl y negati ve and & i s then al so
strongl y negati ve. I tsohappens that, i nthi ssi tuati on, themost stabl e
mode i sal sothe onewhl ch starts most rapi dl y. I tcanhappen, however ,
that the mode whi ch starts most rapi dl y i s not the most stabl e on the
basi s of a l i near space charge but i sneverthel ess abl e to establ i sh i tsel f
because i t al ways has by far the gr eater ampl i tude when the nonl i neari ti es
fi rst become ti portant. I n that case the pr efer r ed mode wi l l not neces-
sari l y be the one of mi ni mum steady-state GL.
The above di scussi on of nonl i neari ti es of the space charge i s based on
the assumpti on that onl y one of the ampl i tudes i s l arge. The case wher e
two ampl i tudes are l arge can be tr eated by the method outl i ned i n
Chap. 8.
The emphasi s i n thi s secti on has been pri nci pal l y on stabi l i ty and
transi ent behavi or for one speci fi c mode of the magnetron cavi ty as
affected by l oops i n i ts YL(co) curve. For the most part, the i nput
condi ti ons have been assumed to remai n fi xed or to vary onl y sl owl y
and to be contai ned i mpl i ci tl y i n the operati ng curve. Rel ated probl ems
are tr eated i n Chap. 8, but ther e the emphasi s i s pl aced on the effect
of rapi d vari ati ons i n the i nput condi ti ons, and the YL(u) cur ve i s gener -
al l y assumed to have the si mpl e form i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7 6b. Because
of the compl exi ti es that are i nvol ved, no adequate effor t has been made
ei ther her e or i n Chap. 8 to take i nto account the reactance that may be
present (and that physi cal l y are never enti rel y avoi dabl e) i n the i nput
ci rcui t of the magnetron. I n pri nci pl e the reactance can gi ve ri se to
mor e possi bi l i ti es for i nstabi l i ty, si nce they i ntroduce addi ti onal degr ees
of fr eedom i nto the compl ete system.
I n magnetrons that are tuned by means of a ver y ti ghtl y coupl ed
auxi l i ary cavi ty ther e exi st modes of osci l l ati on that are al l associ ated
wi th one defi ni te mode of the magnetron cavi ty but have frequenci es
whi ch di ffer by 10 per cent or even more. I n such cases i t i s no l onger
justi fi ed to treat the space-charge properti es as i ndependent of frequency;
sel ecti on among these modes i nvol ves some of the factors that enter
i nto the sel ecti on of the vari ous natural modes of the magnetron cavi ty.
7.5. The Descri pti on of Magnetron Performance.-I t was shown i n
Sec. 72 that the performance of the magnetron can be expressed i n terms
of thr ee functi ons of four i ndependent vari abl es and that by maki ng use
of the approxi mati on that the space-charge properti es are i nsensi ti ve
to the frequency, the number of i ndependent vari abl es can be r educed to
thr ee. I f thi s approxi mati on i s adopted, one then has to deal wi th func-
ti ons of the general type
u = F(z,y,z),
sEC. 7.5] THE DESCRI PTI ON OF MAGNETRON PERFORMANCE 317
whi ch are to be r epr esented by means of graphs. I f the possi bi l i ty of
i nterpol ati on i s al l owed, z can be hel d at some fi xed val ue z and the
resul ti ng functi on pl otted as
u = j(x,y) = F(x,y,z)
i n two di mensi ons by drawi ng contours of constant u i n the xy-pl ane.
The contours are si mpl y curves defi ned by the rel ati on
when U takes on a seri es of di screte constant val ues. I f F i s to be r epr e-
sented for al l val ues of Z,V,Z, a set of contour di agrams, one di agram
for each of a seri es of val ues of z, must be pl otted. Any one di agram,
regardl ess of type, i s necessari l y i ncompl ete, si nce i t al one can gi ve no
i ndi cati on of how the performance of the magnetron i s i nfl uenced by
vari ati ons i n z.
By fol l owi ng the scheme just outl i ned, Eqs. (8a), (8b), and (9a) can
be r epr esented i n a great many di fferent ways; ther e are 6 choi ces for
the vari abl e z, and for each choi ce of z ther e are 10 choi ces for the pai r
z,y, or 60 choi ces i n al l . Some of these systems of rel ati ons mi ght be
i mpracti cal because of mul ti pl e-val ued functi ons, et c., but i t i s never -
thel ess surpri si ng that onl y two types of di agram are ver y wi del y used.
These di agrams whi ch are i n general use fal l i nto two cl assi fi cati ons:
those i n whi ch y, i s hel d constant and those i n whi ch the magneti c fi el d
(Bi s hel d constant. The for mer are of val ue i n exhi bi ti ng those properti es
whi ch are not extr emel y sensi ti ve to the l oad, such as the useful range of
operati ng condi ti ons.
I n many mor e speci al i zed probl ems, however , the i nteresti ng phe-
nomena occur at constant appl i ed magneti c fi el d; detai l ed i nformati on
about dependenci es on @ i s ther efor e superfl uous and can profi tabl y be
l eft out of the di agram i n or der to make r oom for the di spl ay of i nforma-
ti on about the dependenci es on the l oad yr.
Probabl y the most fami l i ar di agram of magnetron performance i s the
performance chart. I deal l y i n thk type of di agram the external l oad
y, i s hel d fi xed, 1 and V are the i ndependent vari abl es, and ~, @ and B.
are r epr esented by contours. Ordi nari l y the power ~ i s pl otted i nstead
of ~ and the frequency v i nstead of B., but thi s does not al ter the shapes
of the contours. As the l oad i s constant, G, i s al so constant, and a cur ve
of constant ~F = GE~z i s al so one of constant ~. Furthermore as
B. = B. = BE + 4rC(v v.) and B, and v are constant wi th con-
stant external l oad, contours of v and B. are i denti cal .
Another wi del y used type of di agram i s the so-cal l ed Ri eke di agram
i n whi ch the magneti c fi el d @ and the cur r ent 1 are hel d constant; the
two components of the l oad are the i ndependent vari abl es that provi de
318 THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT [SEC. 7.5
the coordi nate system i n whi ch contours of r-f vol tage ~ (or power ~),
el ectroni c susceptance B. (or frequency v), and i nput vol tage are pl otted.
Al ternati vel y, the di agram may be taken at constant i nput vol tage V,
wi th the cur r ent I pl otted as contours. The pai r of vari abl es that
speci fy the l oad can be chosen i n numerous ways: the conductance GE and
susceptance BE, the normal i zed val ues gr and b~, or the absol ute val ue
and angl e of the compl ex refl ecti on coeffi ci ent q~ = (1 y~)/ (1 + y~),
etc. I t i s to be noted that i n thi s type of di agram two vari abl es are hel d
constant. I f the assumpti ons i mpl i ci t i n Eqs. (8a), (8b), and (9a) are
val i d, ther e must be some redundancy i n the di agram for two i ndependent
vari abl es are used wher e one shoul d be suffi ci ent. On the other hand,
the di agram can r epr esent the properti es of the magnetron regardl ess
of whether or not those assumpti ons are val i d, that i s, even when the
space-charge properti es and the transducer functi ons vary appreci abl y
wi th the frequency.
I n the i deal case the vari ous Rl eke di agrams take on ver y si mpl e
forms. The si mpl est form occurs when the components of the admi t-
tance Y. are chosen as the i ndependent vari abl es. I n that case al l the
constant-v contours coi nci de and are i denti cal wi th the operati ng cur ve
di scussed i n Sec. 73, and the V and ~ (or ~) contoum are just the scal e
marks that i ndi cate the correspondi ng quanti ti es al ong the operati ng
curve. Other Rl eke di agrams, whi ch i nvol ve di fferent i ndependent
vari abl es, can be r egar ded as bei ng gener ated by transformati ons of
the operati ng curve. I n general the frequency contours become sepa-
rated because the transformati on i nvol ves the frequency-each frequency
contour i s shi fted by an amount that depends upon the frequency.
I f the di agram i s drawn i n the Y, pl ane, the transformati on from the
y. plane i s
G, = G. G., B, = ~. 4d7(v Vu).
The form of the di agram and i ts rel ati on to the operati ng cur ve are
i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7. 14b. The di agram wi l l have a si mi l ar appearance
i n the Yz and yT pl anes i n so far as the transducer properti es i nvol ved
do not vary appreci abl y wi th the frequency;1 and i f thi s i s so, then Fi g.
7.14b can al so r epr esent the di agram i n the yT pl ane. I f i nstead of
rectangul ar coordhates the Smi th chart i s used for g~and b~, the di agram
shoul d have the appearance i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7. 14c. Pl otti ng the di a-
gram i n the Smi th chart i s equi val ent to a transformati on to the q,
pl ane wher e qTi s compl ex and i s rel ated toy. by qT = (1 y~)/(1 + y,).
1I n the coordi nate system GE, BE, the di agram wi l l be si mi l ar except for the
frequency shi ft w v connected wi th the susceptance P that i s associ ated wi th the
output coupl er; i f ~ vari es non-uni forml y wi th frequent y, the frequent y contours i n
the Yi s pl ane wi U not be uni forml y spaced.
SEC. 7.5] THE DESCRI PTI ON OF MAGNETRON PERFORMANCE
319
At some other pai r of termi nal s such as ASi n Fi g. 7.5c, the di agram di ffers
from that at !! pri nci pal l y by a rotati on.
Fi gure 7 14c may be consi dered to be an i deal Rl eke di agram. I t i s
di sti ngui shed by the fol l owi ng features: the constant-~ (or ~) contours
and constant-V contours are a set of ci rcl es al l tangent to the uni t (or
(YT= cc) ci rcl e at a common poi nt, and the constant-v contours al so
1, (a)
If-77
u
-G, =GL
Operati ng cur ve
::
(c)
L
Freq.contours
I
Fm. 7.14.(Q) I deal Ri eke di agram i n the YL-pl ane; (b) i deal Rl eke di agram i n the
Y,-pl ane; (c) i deal Ri eke di agram i n the refl ecti on coeffi ci ent pl ane.
conver ge at that poi nt. Any di agram constructed from experi mental
data shows several departures from the i deal form, on account of one or
mor e of the ci rcumstances l i sted bel ow.
1.
2.
3.
The quanti ti es a, b, c, d of Eq. (17) are not constant but vary
wi th the frequency. Each constant-v contour i s transformed
di fferentl y from i ts nei ghbors, and the contours do not have a
common poi nt of conver gence. The ~ and V contoum have
si mi l ar shapes but are not ci rcl es.
The transducer i s not di ssi pati onl ess. The ~ and V contours do
not have exactl y i denti cal shapes; the ~ contours may become
ki dney-shaped. Furthermore the v-contours (extrapol ated) may
conver ge at a poi nt outsi de the uni t ci rcl e.
The space-charge properti es are not i ndependent of frequency.
Some dependence i s to be expected, merel y on the basi s of the
scal i ng rel ati ons; however , at constant cur r ent one shoul d expect
the rel ati ve change i n the vol tage to be a l i ttl e smal l er than the rel a-
320 THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT [sEc. 7.6
ti ve change i n the frequency. I t i s al so possi bl e that detuni ng
of the cavi ty by means of reactance coupl ed i nto just one osci l l ator
may affect the space-charge properti es by di storti ng the pattern
of the el ectri c fi el ds i n the i nteracti on space, and these effects
mi ght be expected to gi ve ri se to ki dney-shaped power contours.
4. The measurement of the power i s l i kel y to be affected by a system-
ati c er r or whi ch i ncreases wi th the standi ng-wave rati o i n the
transmi ssi on l i ne, parti cul arl y when the power i s measured cal ori -
metri cal l y and no account i s taken of l osses i n the standi ng-wave
i ntroducer.
5. The di agram may be i ncompl ete because the l oad actual l y used
i n the experi ments i s resonant. When the external l oad vari es
rapi dl y wi th the frequency, the stabi l i ty rel ati ons are such that
some regi ons of the Ri eke di agram become i naccessi bl e. Thi s
effect i s di scussed i n consi derabl e detai l i n the fol l owi ng secti on.
7.6. The Mi smatched Transmi ssi on Li ne as a Resonant Load.The
effects caused by mi smatches, or standi ng waves, i n the output trans-
mi ssi on l i ne of a magnetron are i mportant both i n practi cal appl i cati ons
and i n l aboratory experi ments. Probabl y the best i l l ustrati on of the
nature of these effects i s provi ded by the behavi or of a tunabl e magnetron
operati ng i nto a moderatel y l ong, mi smatched l i ne. Fi gure 7.15a and b
i l l ustrates the tuni ng curves that are obser ved wi th pul sed magnetrons
under those condi ti ons, Fi g. 7 15a wi th a smal l mi smatch, and Fi g. 7. 15b
wi th a fai rl y l arge mi smatch. I n these fi gures, x represents the posi ti on
of the tuni ng mechani sm; the l i ght strai ght l i ne i s the tuni ng cur ve
obser ved when the l i ne i s per fectl y termi nated, and the heavy cur ve i s
that obser ved when ther e i s a mi smatch.
Under condi ti ons that cor r espond to Fi g. 7 15a, the magnetron i s
obser ved to have an abnormal l y broad spectrum over those parts of the
tuni ng cur ve whi ch are nearl y verti cal . I n addi ti on, the frequency
vari es rapi dl y i f ei ther the i nput cur r ent to the magnetron or the output
l oad i s changed.
Under condi ti ons that cor r espond to Fi g. 7 15b, the operati on of the
magnetron i s general l y sati sfactory except for tuni ng adjustments that
are near the breaks i n the curve; at such poi nts two frequenci es are
exci ted randoml y at successi ve pul ses. However , si nce the tuni ng cur ve
i s di sconti nuous, i t i s not possi bl e to adjust the frequency to any arbi trary
val ue, some val ues bei ng i naccessi bl e.
Fi gure 7. 15c has been added to i l l ustrate the sort of behavi or that
mi ght be expected of a c-w magnetron under the condi ti ons of Fi g. 7 15b.
I n the nei ghborhood of a break two frequenci es are possi bl e; the adjust-
~mentat whi ch the break occurs depenrl ~ uDon the di recti on from whi ch
s~c. 76] THE MI SMATCHED TRANSMI SSI ON LI NE 321
the break i s approached. Al though the di sconti nui ti es i n frequency are
not so l arge as i n Fi g. 7. 15b, ther e are neverthel ess some frequenci es
that are i naccessi bl e.
The spaci ng Av between the breaks or anomal i es i n the tuni ng cur ve
depends upon the l ength of the transmi ssi on l i ne measured i n wave-
l engths; the wi dth of the breaks WAV depends upon the degr ee of mi s-
match. The l ocati on of the breaks vari es uni forml y wi th the phase of
the refl ecti on; and i f the tuni ng adjustment i s hel d fi xed and the phase
i s vari ed, the frequency may change rapi dl y or di sconti nuousl y at some
parti cul ar phase. Thus a mi smatched transmi ssi on l i ne can al so l ead to
unsati sfactory operati on of a fi xed-tuned magnetron i f the refl ecti on
i n the l i ne i s vari abl e.
I I
x-+ x< x
(a) (b) (c)
FI ~. 7.15.Tuni ngcurves: (a) Pul sedmagnetron,sl i ghtl y mi smatchedl i ne; (~) pul sed
magnetron, greatl ymi smatchedl i ne; (c) c-w magnetron, greatl ymi smatchedl i ne.
Many vari ati ons of the effects just descri bed are possi bl e. For
exampl e, the mi smatch may ari se not onl y from an i mperfect termi nati on
of the transmi ssi on l i ne but al so enti rel y or i n part from refl ecti ons that
occur at i ntermedi ate poi nts because of i mperfect joi nts and bends. I n
the l atter case the refl ecti ons may r ei nfor ce each other at some frequenci es
and tend to cancel at others. The general resul t wi l l be that the breaks
or anomal i es i n the tuni ng cur ve are i rregul arl y spaced and the wi dths
of the breaks are unequal . I nasmuch as the mor e compl i cated cases
i nvol ve the same general consi derati ons as the si mpl er ones, the subse-
quent di scussi on wi l l be confi ned to the somewhat i deal case wher e the
mi smatch ari ses enti rel y from an i mperfect termi nati on.
I n the i deal case, the phenomena descri bed above can resul t onl y
from the i nfl uence of waves that have travel ed to the end of the trans-
mi ssi on l i ne, been r efl ected ther e, and r etur ned to the magnetron. The
phenomena cannot occur when the two-way transi t ti me of the trans-
mi ssi on l i ne exceeds the l ength of the pul se gener ated by the magnetron
and must ther efor e di sappear when the l i ne i s made ver y l ong. I n
vi ew of thi s fact, the phenomena have someti mes been r efer r ed to as
322 THE flPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT
[SEC. 7.6
short-l i ne effects,
al though the term i l ong-l i ne effect has been mor e
general l y used i n the Uni ted States.
Most of the fol l owi ng consi dera-
ti ons are based upon steady-state formul as for the admi ttance of a
mi smatched transmi ssi on l i ne, and i t i s ther efor e i mpl i ed that the transi t
ti me of the l i ne i s smal l compared wi th the l ength of the pul se. I n
practi ce, the resul ts deri ved seem to appl y fai rl y wel l when the transi t
ti me i s onl y a few ti mes smal l er than the pul se l ength.
The tuni ng curves i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7 15 are cl osel y rel ated to the
admi ttance curves Y(v). The l atter mi ght be cal cul ated by substi tuti ng
i n Eq. (33) the appropri ate val ues of y I - obtai ned from transmi ssi on-l i me
charts or formul as. The possi bl e vari ety of Y(v) curves i s ver y great,
si nce many parameters are i nvol ved, but i t wi l l be shown that al l of the
curves can be deri ved from a two-parameter fami l y of curves. The two
parameters can i n a certai n sense be thought of as (1) the degr ee of mi s-
match i n the l i ne and (2) the rati o (Q of the l i ne)/ (Q of the magnetron).
I n computi ng the admi ttance y~ i t i s assumed that the transmi ssi on
l i ne i s termi nated i n a l oad wi th a refl ecti on coeffi ci ent q = l al exp (j@)
whi ch i s i ndependent of v. At the termi nal s T of Fi g. 7.5c the refl ecti on
coeffi ci ent qTi S gi Ven by
q. = [I d exp (2al )][exp j(d 201)] = u exp (jtl ),
(53)
wher e a jp i s the propagati on functi on of the transmi ssi on l i ne; a
may be tr eated as a constant, but p vari es wi th v.
I n terms of the standi ng-wave rati o p at the magnetron
~=( Pl )
( P + 1)
wher e p i s the SWVR. Si nce D = 2i T/A0 wher e ~. i s the wavel ength
i n gui de for the transmi ssi on l i ne,
(54)
For some frequency vO,Oi s just equal to (2n + l )r, and for frequenci es
not too di fferent from VOone may use for @the approxi mate expressi on
e=-~[2n+1+4t~)vo(-vo)l
-2(n+*+)
wher e
()
d>
dv ,0( VVO) =2+*=.
~=21>9
Vo
(55a)
(55b)
SEC.7.6]
THE MI SMATCHED TRANSMI SSI ON
The admi ttance Y~i s gi ven by the formul a
l a2 j2a si n O
YT=I +a2+2acos6
or , i n terms of e,
LI NE 323
(56a)
I az
= g(e,a) (56b)
gT=l +a22acos2rE
and
by =
2a si n 2m
1 + az 2a cos 2m
= b(e,a). (56.)
For the cal cul ati on of Y. i t i s conveni ent to wri te Eq. (33) i n the form
~ Y. ==~ + j2Q,. B= + j2QE. ; ~ + YT
.
. .
[ 1
= go + jbo + ~~ + g(w) + jb(ea) ,
wher e
Q.m
0 = T
bil = 2Q~M ~
and
1 1 X,o
A=~L .
voQEM AOXO
I f the transmi ssi on l i ne i s fai rl y l ong, the possi bl e
cl ose together and vo can be chosen nearl y equal to W.
A
1 Xao 1 1 A, 1
=
.
KKQE~ Au AC,Q~.,r
(57)
val ues of m are
I n that case
(58)
The general shape of the Y.(v) cur ve depends upon the terms i n the
square bracket, si nce the y al one depend upon V; the parameters that fi x
the shape of the cur ve are A and a.
For conveni ence, the square bracket of Eq. (57) wi l l be r epr esented
by the quanti ty w = u + jv, wher e
u = g(e,a) and v = ~ + b(e,a). (59)
The YL( V) cur ve has the same shape as the w(s) curve; i t di ffers from i t
by scal e factors Yc/QE~ = AyL/ Aw ml (cAo)/ (WO) = Av/ AE and bY a
transl ati on gO+ ~%o. Tuni ng the magnetron, whi ch amounts to changi ng
m, transl ates the cur ve verti cal l y, si nce b. vari es al most l i nearl y wi th VU.
The shape of the w(e) cur ve i s gover ned by the parameters A and a.
Thr ee general forms are possi bl e; the separate components of w(e) are
i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7.16, and the functi on w(e) i n Fi g. 717. I f the quanti ty
()=
.s= :eo=;-&, =;-T(p-l ) (60)
324 THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT
[SEC. 7.6
i s l ess than zer o, the w(s) cur ve has 100PS, as i n Fi g. 7 17c. I f s = 0,
the cur ve has cusps as i n Fi g. 717b; i fs >0, the cur ve has merel y undul a-
ti ons as i s Fi g. 7.17a.
When the operati ng cur ve cuts across a l oop i n the Y(v) curve, ther e
are two i ntersecti ons and ther efor e two di sti nct frequenci es at whi ch
osci l l ati on mi ght be stabl e. I n case the 100ps are so l arge or so cl osel y
spaced that they overl ap, ther e may be four or mor e such i ntersecti ons.
t
b (E)
/
rf
23
1
(a)
f
1
u-
(b)
i
+
2
u-
$
3
u-
(
f / c) I! d)
t
v
1
t 0.6 ~ 0,5
/ I +kk
v
0.5
v
0,5
0.4 0.4
0.4
3
0.3 0.3
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.10
0
2
t-
o ~-
u-
0.1u-
1
(e) ~ (a) z (b) x (c)
FI G. 7.16.
FI Q. 7.17.
FI G. 7. 16.Pl ots of the terms of Eq. 59. (a) Val ues of b (c,u) and c/ A as functi ons of
c for three val uee of a; (b), (c), (d) v~l l es Of o (C,I Z)as funCti Ons Of c fOr the same three
val ues of a; (e) the functi on u = t/A + b (*-a) pl Otted agai nst c fOr the same three v~ues
of a. The parameter A is kept constant at 1/u.
Fm. 7. 17.(a), (~), (c) The functi On w = w + ~~ Of Eq. (59) fOr the three cOndi ti Ons
shown i n Fi g. 7.:6. Val uee of c are i ndi cated.
~ extensi ve seri es of experi ments was per for med i n the MI T Radi ati on
Laboratory wi th a pul sed 3-cm tunabl e magnetron and vari ous val ues of
1, the l i ne l ength, and of a, the degr ee of mi smatch. From these experi -
ments i t was concl uded that osci l l ati on i s ordi nari l y establ i shed at that
i ntersecti on whi ch has the l owest val ue of G%;onl y i n cases wher e the two
l owest val ues of G. are nearl y equal are two frequenci es exci ted randoml y
at successi ve pul ses.
I n other words, the tuni ng cur ve of Fi g. 7. 15b can be i nterpreted i n
the fol l owi ng way. As the magnetron i s tuned, the w(e) cur ve of Fi g.
SEC. 7.6] THE MI SMATCHED TRANSMI SSI ON LI NE 325
7. 17c i s moved across the operati ng cur ve and the frequency of osci l l ati on
corresponds to the i ntersecti on of mi ni mum Gfi . At the stage wher e
ther e are substanti al l y two such i ntersecti ons, the frequency al ternates
randoml y between two wel l -separated val ues; otherwi se the frequent y
changes di sconti nuousl y as that stage i s passed. The wi dth of the break
i n the tuni ng cur ve WAV i s exactl y equal to the frequency i nterval that
carri es the Y~( v) cur ve compl etel y around a l oop.
The i rregul ari ti es i n the tuni ng cur ve i n Fi g. 7.15a can be i nterpreted
i n a si mi l ar manner. The steep parts of the tuni ng cur ve cor r espond to
those parts of the w(e) cur ve wher e v(e) vari es ver y S1OWI y wi th E. When
condi ti ons are such that the Y(V) cur ve and the operati ng cur ve i ntersect
at a ver y smal l angl e, one shoul d expect the frequency of osci l l ati on to
vary rapi dl y not onl y wi th the tuni ng adjustment but ai so wi th the i nput
condi ti ons of the magnetron, as a smal l shi ft i n the operati ng cur ve
must l ead to an appreci abl e change i n v. Consequentl y i t i s under-
standabl e that the spectrum, or Fouri er anal ysi s of the pul se, shoul d be
abnormal l y broad i n such cases. To a fai r approxi mati on, the devel op-
ment of a cusp i n the w(s) cur ve represents the transi ti on from an uneven
tuni ng cur ve to a br oken one, al though i f the operati ng cur ve has an
appreci abl e sl ope, the transi ti on occurs at a somewhat l ower val ue of
a than that whi ch l eads to a cusp. I n practi ce, however , the transi ti on
i s gradual , si nce i t i s di ffi cul t to di sti ngui sh between one broad spectrum
and two broad spectra wi th nearl y equal center frequenci es.
The spaci ngs Av of the breaks or i rregul ari ti es i n the tuni ng curves
cor r espond to the peri od of the functi ons g(s,a) and b(E,CI), whi ch i s 1 i n e
w ~(c/1) (A/&) i n Y. I f 1 i s expressed i n meters, v i n megacycl es per
second, and the val ue 300 meters/psec i s used for c, then the spaci ng
i s equal to
Av _ 150 k meters X megacycl es
1 A second
(61)
and i s actual l y just the spaci ng between the resonances of the trans-
mi ssi tm l i ne. The wi dth WAV of the breaks can be computed on the
basi s of the l oop that occurs near e = O (Fi g. 7. 17c). The val ues of s
wher e the w(e) cur ve i ntersects i tsel f and the u-axi s are the sol uti ons
(other than E = O) of
; + b(E,~) = O.
I t i s si mpl er, however , to compute the val ue A that wi l l gi ve ri se to such
i ntersecti on at E from the rel ati on
1 _ b(eja)
.
A = E
The wi dth WAV of the breaks i s equal to 2EAv.
(62)
326 THE SPACE CHAM7E AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT
[ SEC. 7. 6
For practi cal purposes i t i s conveni ent to express A i n a form that
i nvol ves the pul l hg fi gure F of the magnetron rather than Q~~, aa
ordi nari l y F is gi ven i n the speci fi cati ons.
From the rel ati on
(63a)
wher e tan a i s the sl ope of the operati ng cur ve of B. vs. G., i t fol l ows
that
A =1~ F
A 0.42C Sec a
(63b)
I n Fi g. 7.18, Eq. (62) i s presented graphi cal l y by pl otti ng a agai nst the
quanti ty 1(~/ A)F for vari ous val ues of W = 2e. I n constructi ng the
5.67
4.00
3.00
2.33
D
1.36
1.50
1.22
1. 00
1~ F (metersx megacycl esl aec)
FI G. 7. l S.The effect of mi smatch on the tuni ng curves. The wi dth of the break i s
~Au where Au = (150/1) (x/ho) meters Me/see.
fi gure a value of 1.05 has been assumed for sec a, so that the coordi nate
l(&/ x)F i s numeri cal l y equal to 131A.
The uses of Fi g. 7.18 are i l l ustrated by the fol l owi ng exampl e. I t i s
pr oposed to use a wavegui de transmi ssi on l i ne 10 meters l ong wi th a
pul sed 3-cm tunabl e magnetron.
The pul l i ng fi gure F of the magnetron
i s 15 Me/see; As/A for t,he wavegui de = 1.3; and the attenuati on i s
0.20 db per meter. The fol l owi ng i nformati on i s then requi red: (1)
the permi ssi bl e mi smatch of the termi nati on i f the operati on of the
magnetron i s to be sati sfactory at al l frequenci es wi thh i ts tuni ng range
s EC. 7. 6] THE MI SMATCHED TRANSMI SSI ON LI NE 327
and (2) the efi ect on the performance i f the standi ng-wave rati o of the
termi nati on reaches 2.0. I n thi s exampl e, &o/h = 13, so that the spaci ng
AV of the i rre~l ari ti es i n the tuni ng cur ve i s ~ = 11.5 Me/see. The
quanti ty lFAg/A i s equal to 195. The attenuati on factor of the gui de i s
anti l og10 2.0 = 1.6.
The fol l owi ng consi derati ons then appl y:
1. The val ue of a that corresponds to lFh,/ h = 195 and W = O
is found from Fi g. 7.18 to be 0.06; mul ti pl yi ng by the attenuati on
factor gi ves the val ue I q] = 0.096, whi ch corresponds to a standi ng-
wave rati o p = 1.2 for the termi nati on. For per fectl y sati sfactory
performance at al l frequenci es a SWVR somewhat l ower than 1.2
wi l l be requi red.
2. The val ue p = 2.0 corresponds to I ql = 0.33 and
0.33
a = 1.6 = 0208
From Fi g. 7.18 the val ue W = 0.65 i s obtai ned, and the wi dth
of the breaks i n the tuni ng cur ve i s thus equal to
11.5 X 0.65 = 7.5 Me/see.
Thus wi th a termi nati on of SWVR 2 one cannot be sure that the
transmi tter can be adjusted to any arbi trari l y chosen frequency
mor e cl osel y than wi thi n A 4 Me/see.
The consi derati ons that appl y to tunabl e magnetrons appl y al so,
of course, to fi xed-frequency magnetrons. However , i n the case of the
l atter the effects connected wi th l ong transmi ssi on l i nes can be exami ned
i n gr eater detai l by maki ng use of Rl eke di agrams. Consi der fi rst an
i deal Ri eke di agram appropri ate to the termi nal s T of Fi g. 7.5c, such as
i s i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7.19a. The i deal di agram appropri ate to termi nal s
at a di stance s to the ri ght of T can be obtai ned by rotati ng each contour
of Fi g. 7.19a through an angl e equal to 4mS/A0; si nce AOdepends upon v,
each contour i s r otated di fferentl y. The appearance of the new di agram
wi l l be determi ned by the rel ati ve rotati ons of the vari ous contours.
Let the val ue of v for the contour that passes through the center of the
di agram be denoted by v, and the rotati on of the other contours, rel ati ve
to the V, contour, be denoted by ~(v). By anal ogy wi th Eq. (55b)
one may wri te
*(V) = 4?r : * =O.
Vo
(64)
As the resul t of thi s transformati on, the i deal di agram appropri ate to
the extr eme end of the transmi ssi on l i ne wi l l take on a form such as i s
i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7. 19b.
328 THE SPACE CHAMW AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT [Sm. 7.6
Accordi ng to thi s fi gure, v i s a mul ti pl e-val ued functi on of the l oad
i n some regi ons of the di agram; these regi ons r epr esent just those val ues
of the l oad whi ch gi ve ri se to l oops i n the YL(v) curve. When the stabi l i ty
(a)
(b)
(c)
Fm. 7. 19.Transformati ons of the Rl eke di agram. (a) The i deal Ri eke di agram at the
output termi nal s; (b) at the extreme end of the transmi ssi on l i ne; (c) actual contours
nbaerved for condi ti on (b); (d) resul t of transformi ng di agram (c) back to the output termi -
nals r efer r ed to i n di agram (a).
rel ati ons are taken i nto account, i t turns out that the contours whi ch
mi ght actual l y be obser ved are those i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7. 19c. The poi nt
S of thi s di agram has someti mes been r efer r ed to as the frequency
si nk. 1
1I t i s onl y for l oads whi ch fal l wi thi n the shaded regi on of the fi gurethat ther e
i s an uncertai ntyi n the frequency of osci l l ati on.
SEC. 7.7] EXPERI MENTAL DATA 329
When the di agram of Fi g. 7-19c i s transformed back to the termi nal s
?, i t takes on the form shown i n Fi g. 7.19d. The l ast fi gure i l l ustrates
the fact that a l ong transmi ssi on l i ne makes a part of the i deal Ri eke
di agram i naccessi bl e for measurements; the si se of the regi on i ncreases
wi th the l ength of the l i ne and wi th the pul l i ng-fi gure of the magnetron.
I n experi mental setups, the effecti ve l ength of the transmi ssi on l i ne i s
that whi ch i s i ncl uded between the magnetron and the standi ng-wave
i ntroducer. Al though thi s di stance i s rel ati vel y smal l perhaps si x
wavel engths or so i f a sl otted secti on i s pl aced next to the magnetron
for standi ng-wave measurementsi t makes i t ver y di ffi cul t to study
the performance of pul sed magnetrons at the l arger val ues of G~. TKI S
di ffi cul ty can be surmounted by -usi ng magnetrons wi th ver y smal l
val ues of QEM, for i f QEM is smal l , l arge val ues of GL are browht across
the center of the di agram i nto the regi on wher e operati on i s al ways
stabl e. Wi th c-w magnetrons, these di ffi cul ti es mi ght be surmounted
by taki ng advantage of hysteresi s, al though i t may happen that the
phenomena dkcussed i n Sec. 74 wi l l pr ove to l i mi t the useful ness of
thk pr ocedur e.
7.7. Experi mental Data on the Space-charge Properti es.Thi s sec-
ti on consi sts pri nci pal l y of a summary of the resul ts of a l ong seri es of
experi ments that wer e per for med on a parti cul ar 2J32 magnetron (see
Fi g. 19. 18); al l the data i ncl uded i n Fi gs. 7.21 to 730 wer e taken on thi s
magnetron.
The fi rst set of experi mental to be descri bed wer e per for med pri nci -
pal l y to test the val i dl ty of the equi val ent ci rcui t anal yses of the precedi ng
secti ons and to fi nd out i f a Ri eke di agram coul d actual l y be r educed to
an operati ng curve.
The properti es of the output l ead (actual l y a dupl i cate provi ded by
the manufacturer) wer e measured i n the manner descri bed i n Chap. 5.
Measurements wer e made at several di fferent frequenci es, and i n al l the
subsequent cal cul ati ons the vari ati on of the transducer coeffi ci ents
wi th frequency was taken i nto account. By means of these coeffi ci ents
and appropri ate formul as, al l measurements of i mpedances both on the
col d magnetron and on the l oad i n cases wher e the magnetron was
osci l l ati ng wer e r educed to i mpedances at the termi nal s of the coupl i ng
l oop.
The anal ysi s of the data has been carri ed out on the basi s of the
equi val ent ci rcui t shown i n Fi g. 720.
An el ementary cal cul ati on l eads
to the resul t that the col d i mpedance
~observed by l ooki ng i nto
the l oop, wi th the termi nal s A open-ci rc~l i ted-shoul d be of the form
1 R. Pl atzman, J. E. Evans, and F. F. Ri eke, Anal ys~ of Magnetron Per-
formance, Part I I , RL Report No. 451, Mar. 3, 1944.
330 THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT
;(,) = j%dll +
m
( )
J
Y. ++j2~

[SEC. 7.7
(65)
wher e
O=L1( -E)
M
=Z
J
Y. = ;7
%,, = +2.
The term i n LO may be r egar ded as bei ng the l eakage reactance
of the l oop. The measured val ues of Z(V) pr oved to be consi stent wi th
Eq. (65), and from them, by curve-fi tti ng,
val ues of the constants Lo, m2/Yc, Q., and v.
mk
wer e obtai ned. As wi l l be shown presentl y,
z I wp the computati on of the admi ttance Y~ i n
Fm. 7.20.Equi val ent ci r -
a.bsol ute uni ts (mhos) requi res that Ye be
cui t for a l oop-coupl ed mag-
known, whereas the col d-i mpedance measure-
netron.
ments yi el d a val ue onl y f or m2/Y.. A numer-
i cal val ue for Y. was computed from the val ue Lz = 5.1 X 10-10 henry,
gi ven by A. G. Smi th. 1
Smi ths measurement i s based on the fol l owi ng consi derati ons. I f a
capaci tance AC i s connected at the termi nal s A of Fi g. 7.20, the square
of the resonant wavel ength shoul d vary l i nearl y wi th AC, and from the
rel ati on
A(xj) = (%rc)2LZAC
(66)
L2 can be obtai ned. I n the experi ments Ac was the i ncrement i n the
capaci tance of the sl ots caused by fi l l i ng the sl ots wi th materi al of a
known di el ectri c constant. (Smi ths val ue of Lz i s consi stent wi th one
obtai ned theoreti cal l y on the basi s of a ver y el aborate l umped-ci rcui t
model of the cavi ty.) The i ncremental capaci tance AC i n Smi ths
experi ments may be r egar ded as the standard i mpedance upon whi ch
al l the absol ute val ues of r-f vol tages and currents quoted i n thi s secti on
are based.
From the col d-i mpedance measurements and the adopted val ue of
Lz, al l of the constants that appear i n Eq. (65) can be gi ven numeri cal
I A. G. Smi th, Establ i shment of Tol erances for the Ei ght-osci l l ator Magnetron,
B.S. Thesi s, Massachusetts I nsti tute of Technol ogy, 1943.
SEC. 7.7] EXPERI MENTAL DATA 331
val ues. To i l l ustrate the magni tudes of these quanti ti es, the val ues are
gi ven i n the fol l owi ng l i st:
L, = 6:3 X 10- henry,
L2 = 5.1 X 10-0 henry,
M = 2.4 X 10-0 henry,
C = 6.3 X 10-1 farad,
Y. = 0.111 mho,
Q = 1610,
1
a = 14 x 104
ohms.
The admi ttance Y. at termi nal s A as a functi on of v and the l oad
i mpedance Z at the l oop i s gi ven by
Y. = Y + Y,,
wher e
Y,=+ 2 .
Z +j2~vLo
Datm for thr ee Rl eke di agrams,
al l at approxi matel y the same mag-
neti c fi el ds (1300 gauss), wer e taken
at i nput currents of 12.5, 17, and
26 amp, respecti vel y. I nasmuch
as the di agrams are qual i tati vel y
si mi l ar, onl y the one at 12.5 amp
wi l l be shown i n detai l . Constant-
power and constant-V contours,
pl otted i n the G,, B,-pl ane are
shown i n Fi g. 7.21 to i l l ustrate the
departure from the i deal forms of
the Rl eke di agram whi ch woul d
si mpl y be strai ght verti cal l i nes.
I n the col d-i mpedance measure-
GeinmhGS
FKQ. 7.21 .Constant output a-c power
and constant i nput d-c vol tage contours i n
the GkBepl ane for a 2J32 magnetron oper -
ati ng at 1270 gauss and 12.5 amp.
ments at frequenci es far r emoved from resonance, the magnetron
had a SWVR of about 90, or a refl ecti on coeffi ci ent of 0.98. I n the
most unfavorabl e part of Fi g. 7.21 the l oss of power i n the l ead coul d
thus not amount to mor e than 6 per cent. The admi ttances Y~ for al l
of the experi mental poi nts are pl otted i n Fi g. 7.22. Thi s fi gure demon-
332 THE SPACE CHARGE AA A CI RCUI T ELEMENT
(SEC.7.7
strates that wi thi n experi mental er r or , al l of the constant-frequency
contours actual l y do coal esce i nto an operati ng cur ve when they are
pl otted i n the YL-pl ane.
The i nput vol tage V and the power output ~, are pl otted agai nst
Fm. 7.22.Operati ng ourve i n the G=,
B=-pl ane for i nput cur r ent of 12.5 amp and
magneti c fi el d of 1270 gauss.
G. i n Fi g. 7.23. The dotted&mve
i n Fi g. 7.23b represents ~,GL/G,,
the total r-f power deI i vered by the
el ectr on stream. I n Fi g. 724 the
el ectroni c effi ci ency ?. = ~L/VI
i s pl otted agai nst GL. These
curves are an i mportant consi d-
erati on i n the desi gn and appl i ca-
ti on of magnetrons, because they
provi de the means of rel ati ng the
effi ci ency to the unl oaded and
external Qs of the cavi ty. For -
tunatel y, the general shape and
the l ocati on of the maxi mum i n
these curves do not depend
strongl y on ei ther the magneti c
fi el d @ or the cur r ent 1, so the
most favorabl e choi ce of l oad for a magnetron i s mor e or l ess i ndependent
of operati ng condi ti ons.
I n addi ti on to the Rl eke di agrams, performance charts wer e al so taken
at several di fferent val ues of GL. I n pri nci pl e, thi s seri es of performance
charts shoul d consti tute an exhausti ve descri pti on of the performance of
the magnetron. Actual l y, the data wer e accumul ated over a con-
si derabl e peri od of ti me, duri ng wKl ch appreci abl e changes i n the cal i bra-
ti ons of the apparatus and perhaps al so i n the magnetron i tsel f took pl ace.
The Uncertai nti es thus i ntroduced obscure many of the cross rel ati ons
that i nvol ve rel ati vel y smal l di fferences between obser ved quanti ti es.
(Thi s exper i ence i s menti oned to i l l ustrate some of the di ffi cul ti es encoun-
ter ed i n attempti ng to secur e sel f-consi stent data on magnetron opera-
ti on.) Consequentl y onl y one of the performance charts i s r epr oduced
as Fi g. 7.25.
When efforts wer e l ater made to extend the concepts and methods
devel oped i n thk chapter to the transi ent behavi or of magnetrons, the
need arose for a better understand@ of the rel ati ons among G,, ~, V,
and I at constant (B, and i t was deci ded to wor k out these rel ati ons as
compl etel y as possi bl e. Actual l y they wer e wor ked out for just one
val ue of LB. The necessary data wer e taken i n the fol l owi ng way. The
frequency was kept at a constant val ue V throughout, and the contour
v = V was traced out i n a Rl eke di agram for ni ne di fferent fi xed val ues
SEC. 7.7] EXPERI MENTAL DATA 333
1000 250 150
.
12
.2
c
L .
11
0 1,0 2.0 3.0 4.0x 10-3
CL=-G, i nmhos
(a)
100
------- -- -------- -
----
~ ~ ,
s
a
\&
Power del i ver ed!to l oad
--- Totalpowerdehver ed byspace
o
charge
o 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.OX103
GA=- G@i nmbos
(b)
Fm. 723.-(a) I nput d-c vol tage vs. G~; operati ng condi ti ons 1270 gauss and 12.5-smp
i nput; (b) a-c power outputvs. GL for same operati ngcondi ti ons.
of V; for each observati on q, P, and 1 wer e measured. I n al l . about 140
.
observati ons of thk ki nd wer e
made. By taki ng al l the data at
one frequency, the computati on of
the YLS was greatl y faci l i tated.
To avoi d fl uctuati ons i n the mag-
neti c fi el d, a permanent magnet
was Used. The combi nati on of a
ver y strong ai r bl ast for cool i ng
and a l ow duty-cycl e (1/2000)
ser ved to keep the temperature of
the tube l ow at al l ti mes and
thereby mi ni mi ze changes i n the
resonant frequency that woul d
enter as er r or s i n ~. i n the fi nal
resul ts.
As has been menti oned pr e-
60
I
/=12 amp
50
.
/
F
: I
k40 /
.s
-
1
I =17 and 26 amp
30
/
20
0 1 2 3 4x 10-3
GL
FI Q. 7.24.El ectroni c efi ci ency q. aa
functi on of GL for three vel ues of i nput
cur r ent.
vi ousl y, ther e are many possi bl e systems for representi ng the data graphi -
10152025W35 40 -.
Cwrant I i namp
(a)
33
I
215
\ 1
\ \
-& i ; mi l l i ml &
I \
--~+ i namp
20 - #
185 I I
17
\ \
z
\
\
\\ I
\,
\
<22
f \
g
15.5 \
\
\ \
-1.7
~
\
\
14
1
I
I /
1,
\ \ -. /_
\
d
\
12.5
I
11:
Y
95
J ~
85 10 15 3035
C&& I i n~mp
(b)
Fm. 7.26.(a), (b) Performance charte. Operati ng condi ti ons: 1120 PRF; 1.04_Psec G. = GL = 1:77 X 10- mho(me~ v~u@).
Power contour Oareal socontoursof V and I .,.
SEC. 77] EXPERI MENTAL DATA 335
13.10 13.7514.40
12.45
11.80
15.0515.70~
10.50 11.15
3
,E
z 10
~
l b
:jw%~
I
o 10 20 30 40 54
1 i n amp
(a)
1A 5
4
23
E
.E
u
12
1
I
-1
~
E
,~ -2
y
41U3X-3.
<L \
----- .
13.10 l j.75 14.40 i 5.05
10 20 30 40 50
I i n amp
(b)
I { I
I
10 20
30 40 50
I i n amp
(c)
FI G. 7.26.Pl ots of (a) rms 8-a vol tage fi , (b) el ectroni c conductance G,, and (CJ
el ectroni c susceptauce B, asfuncti ous of the i nput d-c cur r ent I , wi th the i nput d-c vol tage
V aa parameter.
336 THE SPACE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT [SEC. 7.7
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
~
,E 8
b 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
--- fr ms)
25 30,
35amp\
:, (ml s)Q, )0)5 20 -1
>55
--- rms-~
-eI
rms -1<,
11 12 13 14 15 16
V i n kv
FsQ. ?.27.Pl ota of d-a cur r ent ~ and a-c curmnta ?% and 1~, i n the ~V-pl ane.
32
30 -
28 -
26 -
24 -
22 -
20 -
18 -
-Z,(RMSJ
16 -
14 -
12 -
10 -
8 -
6 -
4 -
2 -
30- \ -
25
\\
J?$&
\
20> \
\\ f ok
-\
15>
-\
10
\
N
10.50 .
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
? (RMS)
FI G.748.-pl ots of ~,,, the real oompmsamt of the a-c cur r ent vu. a-c vol taga ? wi th the
d-a wr r ent I mi dd-c vol tageV as pnrumetars.
s
m
.
7
.
7
]
E
X
P
E
R
I
M
E
N
T
A
L
.
D
A
T
A
c
.
-
-
1
3
3
7
&
g
0 >
338 THE SPA GE CHARGE AS A CI RCUI T ELEMENT [SEC. 77
tal l y. A few systems are i l l ustrated (some onl y parti al l y) i n the fol l owi ng
seri es of fi gures. Some of the fi gures are gi ven because of thei r rel ati on
to topi cs dk.cussed i n vari ous pl aces i n thi s book; others are gi veu because
they seem l i kel y to be si gni fi cant theoreti cal l y.
I n pri nci pl e, the vari ous sets of curves ought to be mutual l y consi stent
wher e cross rel ati onshi ps exi st, but actual l y they are not enti rel y so.
General l y, the curves have been drawn to fi t pl otted poi nts that r epr e-
sent pai rs of val ues based on the ori gi nal , i ndi vi dual observati ons. The
drawi ng of smoothed curves i s partl y a matter of judgment, i nasmuch
as theoreti cal rel ati onshi ps are nonexi stent. I t has not seemed wor th
whi l e to go through the el aborate process of adjustment that woul d be
requi red to make al l of the curves stri ctl y consi stent wi th one another,
o 1 2 3 4 5x 10-3
G, i nmho
FI G. 7.30.Operati ng cur ves wi th d-c i nput cur r ent I as parameter.
to keep the curves pl ausi bl y si mpl e, and at the same ti me to secur e a
good fi t for al l the data.
Fi gure 726a, b, and c are strai ghtforward pl ots of the ori gi nal data.
Fi gure 727 i l l ustrates the functi ons that appear i n Eqs. (9a) and
(%), r epr esented by means of contours i n the V, ~-pl ane.
F@me 7.28 i s a pl ot of ~.1 agai nst ~ for vari ous constant val ues of
V and I.
Fi gure 7.29a i s the conductance map used i n Chap. 8 as the basi s
for the di scussi on of the transi ent behavi or of the magnetron.
The associ ated susceptance map i s i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 7Q9b.
Fi gure 7.30 contai ns operati ng curves for vari ous constant val ues of Z.
I nasmuch as the frequency vari es l i nearl y wi th B. when the external
l oad i s hel d fi xed, these curves show how the conductance G.
i nfl uences the degr ee to whi ch the frequency depends upon the
i nput cur r ent 1.
CHAPTER 8
TI UI NSI ENT BEHAVI OR
BY F. F. RI EKE
I t i s i nevi tabl e that a magnetron cavi ty wi th many resonators shoul d
have several natural modes of osci l l ati on, and i t i s general l y possi bl e for
sel f-exci ted osci l l ati ons to occur i n mor e than one of the modes. I nas-
much as the modes have di fferent frequenci es and the operati on i n some
of them i s ver y i neffi ci ent, i t i s hi ghl y desi rabl e that osci l l ati ons shoul d
occur consi stentl y i n the pr oper mode. The probl em of securi ng such
cor r ect properti es of mode sel ecti on has actual l y been one of the major
obstacl es encounter ed i n the devel opment of new magnetrons.
I deas concerni ng mode sel ecti on tended for some ti me to center about
the concept of i nteracti on and competi ti on between modes, and a great
amount of effor t was expended on devi si ng and tryi ng out features
desi gned to handi cap osci l l ati on i n undesi red modes. As exper i ence
accumul ated and techni ques of observati on i mproved, i t became evi dent
that any such si mpl e approach coul d at best be onl y sporadi cal l y success-
ful . Actual l y, mode-sel ecti on processes are di verse i n nature and are
i nfl uenced i n varyi ng degr ees by many factors that have to do not onl y
wi th the magnetron i tsel f but al so wi th the auxi l i ary equi pment wi th
whi ch i t i s operated.
Some essenti al parts of the present subject are tr eated i n precedi ng
chaptersthe natural modes of the cavi ty i n Chaps. 2, 3, 4, and 6 and
resonance rel ati ons i n Chap. 7. Accordi ng to the resonance rel ati ons,
sel f-sustai ni ng osci l l ati ons i n a parti cul ar mode can occur onl y i f certai n
condi ti ons are ful fi l l ed by the magneti c fi el d and appl i ed vol tage.
I n thi s chapter i t wi l l be shown that the resonance rel ati ons do not,
i n general , restri ct osci l l ati ons to one mode but merel y l i mi t the possi bi l i -
ti es. The deci di ng factors under these ci rcumstances are (1) the noi se
l evel s exi sti ng i n the vari ous modes just pri or to the starti ng of osci l l a-
ti ons, (2) the transi ent phenomena that occur at the onset of osci l l ati on,
(3) the stabi l i ti es of the states of osci l l ati on. An eval uati on of these
factors i s l argel y dependent upon the detai l ed observati on of mode.
sel ecti on phenomena.
8.1. Steady-state Properti es of the Modes.The (N I )-modes of
an N-osci l l ator cavi ty, such as the magnetron cavi ty descri bed i n Chap. 2,
are frequentl y spoken of as the modes. Thi s chapter i s concer ned wi th
339
340 Transient BEHAVI OR [SEC. 81
these modes of osci l l ati on onl y, al though i t i s possi bl e that some mag-
netr on phenomena i nvol ve modes of other types. Throughout the
di scussi on onl y cases i n whi ch N i s even are consi dered.
I t has been shown by Hartreel that when a Fouri er anal ysi s i s made
of the el ectri c fi el d i n the i nteracti on space, the onl y components asso-
ci ated wi th a mode of number n and frequency f are those whi ch have
angul ar vel oci ti es of f 2uf/~, wher e ~ = n + mN and m i s an i nteger,
posi ti ve or negati ve. I f the mode i s to be exci ted by the space charge,
i t i s necessary that somethi ng l i ke a condi ti on of resonance be establ i shed
between the angul ar vel oci ty of the el ectrons and some one of the Fouri er
components menti oned above. Hartrees condi ti on2 i s
v v, = 2+(1? B,),
7
wher e
and
The val ue of V gi ven by thi s formul a i s, theoreti cal l y, the mi ni mum
d-c vol tage, at magneti c fi el d B, at whi ch el ectrons can reach the anode
when an al ternati ng fi el d of i nfi ni tesi mal ampl i tude i s appl i ed; i t shoul d
ther efor e r epr esent a condi ti on for the starti ng of osci l l ati ons i n the
y-component. At magneti c fi el ds l ess than By, osci l l ati ons i n the ~-com-
ponent shoul d not start at al I . So far, exci tati on has been obser ved
onl y through components for whi ch m = Oor 1. The symbol (y/n/N)
i s adopted her e to i ndi cate, i n or der , the component number, the mode
number, and the number of osci l l ators; thus (5/3/8) i ndi cates the (7 = 5)-
component exci ti ng the (n = 3)-mode i n an ei ght-osci l l ator tube. I n
common practi ce, thi s condi ti on i s someti mes r efer r ed to as the 5-mode.
I t shoul d be emphasi zed that the (5/3/8)- and (3/3/8)-modes are
i denti cal i n so far as wavel ength and r-f fi el d confi gurati ons i n the cavi ty
are concer ned. They di ffer onl y as regards the condi ti ons wi thi n the
space charge. The above equati on may be r epr esented graphi cal l y as i n Fi g.
8 1, whi ch shows the Hul l cutoff parabol a and the Hartree l i nes for the
modes commonl y obser ved i n ei ght-osci l l ator strapped magnetrons. On
the baai s of thi s di agram i t shoul d be expected that at a magneti c fi el d
equal to B, exci tati on of the (n = 3)-mode shoul d start at vol tages
V and V and of the (n = 4)-mode at V; at V the tube shoul d draw
cur r ent wi thout osci l l ati ng.
1D. R. Hartree,CVD P-sportNo. 1536, Msg. 17.
SEC. 8.1] STEADY-STATE PROPERTI ES OF THE MODES 341
I n the actual operati on of a magnetron i t i s found that at constant
magneti c fi el d the vol tage at whi ch a tube runs i n a gi ven mode i ncreases
wi th the di rect cur r ent drawn and wi th the degr ee of l oadi ng of the r-f
ci rcui t. The d-c vol tage rel ati ons for the (4/4/8)-mode of a typi cal
ei ght-osci l l ator magnetron (the 2J32) for several di fferent val ues of
l oad at one fi xed val ue of magneti c fi el d are shown i n Fi g. 8,2. I t may
be obser ved that osci l l ati on (at fi ni te ampl i tude) i s possi bl e at a vol tage
somewhat bel ow the val ue gi ven by the Hartree formul a. At constant
cur r ent and l oad the vol tage i ncreases l i nearl y wi th the magneti c fi el d.
Si mi l ar rel ati ons between B, V, 1, and l oad are obser ved for components
v
v
F1~.S.1.Schemati c Hartree di agram for
H&?e
vol tage
I
FI G. S2.-Current-vol tage rel ati ons
an ei ght-oscdl ator magnetron. the (4/4/8)-mode of an ~i ght-osci l l ator
magfi etron at constant B wi th vari ous
val ues of l oad (schemati c).
of other modes, al t bough they cannot be fol l owed over so great a range.
I t someti mes happens that some of the modes for whi ch n # N/2 are so
weakl y coupl ed to the output l oad that i t i s i mpossi bl e to exer t an-y
appreci abl e i nfl uence on them by varyi ng the external l oad. I n such
cases the output power may be so l ow that the wavel ength can be meas-
ured onl y wi th di ffi cul t y, even though the mode i s strongl y exci ted.
For questi ons havi ng to do wi th mode sel ecti on, one i s frequentl y
i nterested si mul taneousl y i n the (V, I )-rel ati ons of several components,
al l at the same ma@eti c fi el d and at a fi xed setti ng of some matchi ng
devi ce i n the output transmi ssi on l i ne. The rel ati ons may be r epr esented
by (V,l )-di agrams, such as those shown i n Fi g. 83. The vol tage of
each component i s, to a fi rst approxi mati on, equal to i ts Hartree vol tage.
The di fference between the actual vol tage and thi s approxi mati on
depends upon the l oad and the current, as i s i l l ustrated for a (4/4/8)-
component i n Fi g. 8.2. However , i t i s i mportant to remember that a
I
342 TRANSI ENT BEHAVI OR [SEC. 8.1
6xed setti ng of the matchi ng devi ce i mpl i es a di fferent degr ee of l oadi ng
for each mode, both because of the di fferences i n coupl i ng and because of
the frequency sensi ti vi ty of the matchi ng devi ce. Thus, adjustments of
the devi ce may affect two modes opposi tel y and may i nterchange the
rel ati ve posi ti ons, i n a (V, I )-pl ot, of the curves for two components
wi th nearl y equal val ues of -yA. As the magneti c fi el d i s changed, the
(V,l )-di agram changes i n accordance wi th the curves shown i n Fi g. 81.
The cutoff cur ve of Fi g. 8.3 i s drawn as i t i s obser ved i n magnetrons
of the type under di scussi on. I t has someti mes been confused wi th a
noncoupl ed mode of osci l l ati on. The fact that the cur r ent i ncreases
conti nuousl y rather than di sconti nuousl y
known di screpancy between magnetron
v
cutoff
v gz v
at the cutoff vol tage i s a wel l -
theor y and experi ment. The
cutoff
v .~
kr Er
I I I I
(u) B<B3 (b)B>B~ (c) B XB5 (d)B>B5
FI O. 8.3.Schemati c (V,Z)-rel ati ons for an ei ght-osci l l ator magnetron: (a) and (b)
wi th smal l wavel ength di ffer ence between modes and (c) and (d) wi th l arge wavel ength
di ffer ence between modeu.
N.O. i ndi cates a ncmosci l l ati ng state.
cur ve has been i denti fi ed wi th cutoff because the bend occurs at approxi -
matel y the cor r ect vol tage, because the vol tage vari es quadrati cal l y
wi th the magneti c fi el d rather than l i nearl y as do the modes, and because
the cur r ent fol l ows the appl i cati on of vol tage i nstantaneousl y (as far
as can be observed) rather than wi th the del ay of a few hundredths of a
mi crosecond whi ch i s associ ated wi th the osci l l ati ng states.
The nonosci l l ati ng state just above the (4/4/8) component i ndi -
cated i n Fi g. 8.3b and d general l y escapes observati on because wi th
many tubes i t can be obser ved onl y i f the pul ser has speci al charac-
teri sti cs. However , such nonosci l l ati ng states seem to occur whenever
adjacent components are wi del y separated i n vol tage.
Apparentl y, osci l l ati ons can persi st i n just one mode at a ti me.
At l east the author i s unaware of any i nstance i n whi ch a magnetron
has been obser ved to osci l l ate i n two modes si mul taneousl y and con-
ti nuous] y for as l ong as. a ver y smal l fracti on of a mi crosecond. How-
ever , i t i s ver y common for osci l l ati ons to change from one mode to
SEC. 8.2] A!iTEADY-STA TE PROPERTI ES OF THE P ULSER 343
another. Changes of mode may take pl ace i n ei ther of two ways:
One or the other of two modes pay be exci ted at successi ve turn-ens
or pul ses, or osci l l ati on may suddenl y shi ft from one mode to another
duri ng the conti nuous appl i cati on of vol tage. I n ei ther case operati on
i n each of the modes appears to be normal ; that i s to say, when the
r especti ve i nstantaneous currents and vol tages are pl otted i n a (V,l )-
di agram, the resul ti ng l i nes for each mode appear as i n Fi g. 83, and the
data joi n on conti nuousl y wi th (or may even overl ap) those taken wi th
the tube operati ng enti rel y i n one mode or the other .
8.2. Steady -state Propeti i es of the Pul ser.-The effect of thecurrent-
vol tage characteri sti cs of the pul ser i n determi ni ng the vol tages and
currents at whi ch a tube may oper ate i n any one of the vari ous modes i s
now consi dered. For the present, the dk,cussi on i s restri cted to steady-
state operati on, thereby excl udi ng the ver y rapi d transi ents that occur
at the begi nni ng of osci l l ati on or wi thi n an i ntrapul se transi ti on from one
mode to another. (Experi mental detai l s of the measurements wi l l be
di scussed l ater.)
I f i nstantaneous currents and vol tages for each mode are obser ved
when a tube i s changi ng from one mode to another, then for each setti ng
of the pul ser-suppl y vol tage one
obtai ns a pai r of vol tage and cur-
r ent val ues, whi ch, when pl otted,
are found to l i e as shown i n Fi g.
8.4a. The sol i d l i nes r epr esent
the (V, I )-characteri sti cs of the
r especti ve modes. The dotted
l i nes whi ch may be i nterpreted
as (V,l )-characteri sti cs of the
pul ser are drawn through pai rs of
poi nts (one poi nt for each mode)
that are obser ved wi th the same
val ue of i nput vol tage to the
modul ator. Thi s i nterpretati on
i s confi rmed by repeati ng the
experi ment wi th a resi stor con-
nected i n seri es wi th the cathode
l ead of the magnetron to i ncrease
I
VI
I
\
1
\
v \\
\\
\\\
\\\
J+(I
w
,
1
I
I
(a)
(b)
FI G. 8.4. (V, I )-rel ati ons for a mag-
netron that i s changi ng modes.
I n (b) the
i nternal resi stance of the pul ser has been
i ncreased over that of (a).
the i nternal resi stance of the rml ser.
The (V, I )-poi n& are then found to l i e as i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 8.4b, ai d the
change i n the sl ope of the dotted l i nes i s equal to the negati ve of the val ue
of the added resi stance.
The (V,l )-characteri sti c of a hard-tube pul ser maybe rel ated di rectl y
to the (I p,l l P)-curves of the tubes i n the fi nal stage. I f the characteri sti c
of the tube (or paral l el arrangement of tubes) i s such as that shown i n
3-44 TRANSIENT BEHAVIOR
~EC. 8.2
Fi g. 85a when the control -gri d vol tage i s equal to that del i vered by the
dri ver, then the (V,I )-characteri sti c of the pul ser i s l i ke that shown i n
(a) 46)
Fm . s . 5 . (a ) (Ip, V=)-c h a r a c t e r i s t i c of
t u bs i n ou t pu t s t a ge of h a r d-t u b pu ls e r ; (b)
(V, &c h a r a c t e r i s t i c of t h e pu ls e r of (a ).
Fi g. 8.5b, wher e the suppl y vol t-
age i s r epr esented by V.
I n spark-gap, thyratron, and
other l i ne-type pul sers, the pul se-
forrni ng networ k behaves approxi -
matel y as a constankvol tage
gener ator of emf equal to the
potenti al to whi ch the l i ne i s i nL
ti al l y charged, i n seri es wi th an
ohmi c resi stance equal to the
characteri sti c i mpedance of the
networ k. Duri ng steady-state
operati on the associ ated pul se
transformer functi ons essenti al l y
as an i deal transformer. Thus the characteri sti c of such a pul ser i s a
strai ght l i ne, aa shown i n Fi g. 8.6. Usual l y the pul se-formi ng networ k i s
matched to the magnetron at the operati ng cur r ent and vol tage, as at P
v
\
\
\
\
\
\\P
v
Ib. 8 . 6 . (V, I)-c h a r a c t e r i s t i c of a lin e -t ype
pu laer .
1
N.O.
-D
I
Fm . 8 . 7 . Com pa r is on of (V, I)-c h a r a c t e r .
i s t i c s for diffe r e n t pwls e r s .
i n Fi g. 8.6, so the open-ci rcui t vol tage i s just twi ce the normal operati ng
vol tage of the magnetron.
Al though the (V,l )-rel ati onshi ps of the pul ser and magnetron
together resul t onl y i n necessary condi ti ons whi ch must be sati sfi ed by
SEC. 8.3] TYPES OF MODE CHANGES 345
the steady-state currents and vol tages of whatever modes are exci ted
(the actual sel ecti on of modes bei ng i nfl uenced by sti l l other factors),
they provi de an expl anati on of many of the vari ati ons that are obser ved
when tubes are tested on di fferent pul sers. As an i l l ustrati on, consi der
the i deal case r epr esented by Fi g. 8.7. A magnetron havi ng the charac-
teri sti cs shown i s to be oper ated i n the (4/4/8)-mode at the poi nt P.
Onl y sel ecti on among the (4/4/8)- and (3/3/8)-modes and the non-
osci l l ati ng states i s di scussed; i t i s assumed, as i s commonl y the case,
that ther e i s no i nter fer ence from the (5/3/8)-mode. Cur ve A represents
a l i ne-type pul ser, whi ch obvi ousl y wi l l permi t operati on i n ei ther the
(4/4/8)- or the (3/3/8)-mode. Cur ve B represents a hard-tube pul ser
wi th a l arge r eser ve of current-carryi ng capaci ty whi ch permi ts operati on
onl y i n the desi red mode. Cur ve C i s typi cal of a hard-tube pul ser
oper ated near the upper l i mi t of i ts capaci ty; i t offers the choi ce between
the (4/4/8)-mode and the nonosci l l ati ng state. Cur ve D i l l ustrates a
hard-tube pul ser at pl ate-current saturati on, whi ch wi l l permi t operati on
i n the (4/4/8)- and (3/3/8)-modes, just as does the l i ne-type pul ser.
8.3. Types of Mode Changes.As has been menti oned i n Sec. 8.1,
changes of mode may take ei ther of two forms. One form consi sts of a
/nA_ih.u
(a) (b) (c)
FI G.S.S.Symptoms of a mode ski p. (a) The vol tage pul ses, (b) the cur r ent pul ses, and
(c) the spectrum.
random al ternati on between two modes at successi ve turn-ens or pul ses;
thi s type wi l l be r efer r ed to as a mode ski p. The other form i s a
transi ti on from one mode to another duri ng the conti nuous appl i cati on
of vol tage; thi s type wi l l be desi gnated as a f mode shi ft. Someti mes
the :WO forms appear i n combi nati on.
The mode ski p i s the mor e common form i n pul sed magnetrons. I ts
symptoms are doubl e vol tage and cur r ent pul ses such as are shown i n
Fi g. 8.8a and b and a spectrum that, wi th the conventi onal anal yzer,
appears to have l i nes mi ssi ng as i n Fi g. 8.8c. The proporti on of the
numbers of pul ses i n the r especti ve modes changes wi th power-suppl y
vol t age, usual l y conti nuous y as i ndi cated i n Fi g. 8.9; but because of a
sort of i nstabi l i ty connected wi th the regul ati on of the power suppl y, a
sudden transi ti on from all pulses in one mode to all pulses i n the other
may take pl ace when the power-suppl y control i s than ged gradual l y.
346 TRANSI ENT BEHAVI OR ~EC. 8.3
(Thi s i nstabti ty i s di scussed at gr eater l ength i n Sec. 8.7.) Mode ski ps
are general l y attri butabl e to fai l ures to start, or mi sfi ri ng, i n the l ower -
vol tage mode and i n many cases can be el i mi nated by su5ci entl y reduci ng
the rate at whi ch vol tage i s appl i ed to the magnetron.
A mode shi ft i n a pul sed magnetron resul ts i n cur r ent and vol tage
pul ses such as those i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 8.10. (Thi s fi gure represents a
100
m
4 Loweer w&eRege
=:
~~
:2
8=
Hi gh;.vcl tege
o
Power.suppl y vol tage+
FI Q. S.9.Effect of power-suppl y vol t-
age on the di stri buti on of pul ses i n a
mode ski p.
rLA
(a)
u))
FI G. S. I O.The pul ses of (a) vol tage and (b)
cur r ent that are associ ated wi th a mode shi ft.
shi ft from a l ower - to a hi gher-vol tage mode, but shi fts i n the opposi te
di recti on al so occur.) The spectra of the r especti ve modes have no
mi ssi ng l i nes but are somewhat broadened because of the shortened
effecti ve pul se i n each mode. Mode shi fts may be consi dered to resul t
from the l oss of stabi l i ty i n the i ni ti al mode of osci l l ati on. The condi -
ti on of i nstabi l i ty may be reached as the resul t of a change (however
gradual ) i n the operati ng condi ti ons or , concei vabl y, as the resul t of
changes wi thi n the magnetron. I n many cases i t i s qui te sensi ti ve to
the l oad on the r-f ci rcui t. Mode shi fts can be especi al l y troubl esome
i n c-w magnetrons that are ampl i tude-modul ated.
Methods of Observati on.I n formati on about the dynami cs of the
types of phenomenon just menti oned has been deri ved pri nci pal l y from
observati ons on pul sed magne-
Pul ser
trons. Measurements wi th a
B
Magnetron
peak vol tmeter and average-cur-
Vol tage
r ent meter are enti rel y i nadequate
di vi der CRT for such studi es. I t i s possi bl e to
Current.
vi ewi ng
construct di agrams such as Fi g.
resi stor 83 poi nt by poi nt from measure-
(V,I ) osci l l oscope
ments of i nstantaneous cur r ent
FI G. 811,-Schemati c dl a~ram of an
osci l l oscopeused for automati cpl otti ng of
and vol tage made wi th a synchro-
vol tageagai nstcurrent, scope, but a mor e conveni ent and
sati sfactory method i s to connect
the cathode-ray tube as shown i n Fi g. 8.11 so that the tube i tsel f pl ots vol t-
age agai nst cur r ent automati cal l y. As a fi rst approxi mati on, for each
setti ng of power-suppl y vol tage thi s arrangement yi el ds one poi nt i n a
(V,l )-pI ot correspondi ng to the fl at porti ons of the pul ses or two poi nts i n
I
[
SEC. 8.3] TYPES OF MODE CHANGES 347
I
case the tube changes modes.
Thi s l i mi tati on can be over come, however ,
by modul ati ng the power suppl y at a l ow frequencysay 60 cpsso that
the successi ve pul ses, duri ng one compl ete sweep of the power suppl y,
tr ace out a compl ete di agram. To make the arrangement practi cal , the
cathode-ray tube must be i ntensi ty modul ated, somewhat as i n the syn-
chr oscope, so that the beam i s on onl y duri ng pul ses.
Actual l y, si nce both cur r ent and vol tage vary conti nuousl y throughout
a pul se, the beam of the (V, I )-scope traces out a cl osed cur ve for each
pul se, and the form of the cur ve i s rel ated to the transi ents. Fi gure
8.12 represents schemati cal l y a typi cal (V)l )-trace, cor r el ated wi th
the correspondi ng parts of the vol tage and cur r ent pul ses. The cur r ent
maxi mum at i 1ari ses from chargi ng the capaci tance associ ated wi th the
l i ke, s12. -A (V,l )-trace wi th conespond]ng cur r ent and vol tage pul ses.
magnetron i nput ci rcui t. The bui l dup of osci l l ati on occur s between
t, and t,. From ts to t, the magnetron osci l l ates steadi l y. As the vol tage
starts to fal l at the end of the pul se, the osci l l ati ons di e out between
ti and t,, but the rate of fal l of vol tage i s usual l y sl ow enough that the
current-vol tage rel ati on i s the same as for steady-state condi ti ons.
The
di schargi ng cur r ent t, to & i s much smal l er than the chargi ng cur r ent t,
because of the smal l er magni tude of dV/dt at the trai l i ng end as compared
wi th the l eadi ng edge of the pul se.
There are thus two ways i n whi ch the (V,l )-scope may be used.
To vi ew the steady-state characteri sti c, the i ntensi ty modul ati on i s set
to bri ng out the fl at part of the pul se (t~to t4i n Fi g. 8.12) and the power
SUppl y i s modul ated. To vi ew the transi ents, the i ntensi ty modul ati on
i s set to bri ng out the appropri ate porti on of the pul sethe l eadi ng edge,
for i nstanceand the power-suppl y vol tage i s hel d fi xed. When the
apparatus i s arranged so that the change from one type of observati on
348 TRA NS1ENT
to another can be made qui ckl y and
B.!iI I A VI OR [SEC. 8.4
so that the vari ous control s can be
mani pul ated wi thout i nterrupti ng the observati ons, i t i s possi bl e to survey
the behavi or of a magnetron ver y qui ckl y.
8.4. Sur vey of the Process of Mode Sel ecti on.As a pr eface to the
detai l ed dkcussi on of the observati ons on mode sel ecti on, the pattern
i nto whi ch they fal l i s summari zed her e, and i t i s shown how the (V,l )-
traces provi de a conveni ent basi s for di scri mi nati ng between the vari ous
types of mode-sel ecti on processes.
The characteri sti c feature of the (V,l )-trace i n a mode ski p i s the
branchi ng i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 813, wher e the heavy ar r owed curves
r epr esent the two al ternati ve paths of the (V, I )-poi nt, one to Mode A
v
s
v
c/
I
1 I
FI G. 8. 13.Mode ski p determi ned by FIG. S.14.Mode ski p governed by ru,,t-
speed of starti ng i n tbe l ower mode. peti ti on between two modca.
and one to Mode 1?. As wi l l be shown l ater, modes wi del y separated
i n vol tage have associ ated wi th them di sti nct regi ons of the (V, I )-pl ane
wi thi n whi ch osci l l ati ons i n one, and onl y one, of the modes can bui l d
up and sustai n themsel ves; these regi ons are i ndi cated by shadi ng i n
Fi g. 8.13. When vol tage i s appl i ed, as at the begi nni ng of the pul se,
the (V, I )-poi nt ri ses to wi thi n the starti ng regi on of the l ower mode
wher e osci l l ati on and consequentl y d-c cur r ent bui l d up. I f the bui l dup
i s suffi ci entl y rapi d, the (T,1)-poi nt may be hel d wi thi n thi s regi on
because of i nternal dr op i n the pul ser, even though the open-ci rcui t
vol tage of the pul ser l i es above thi s regi on. However , i f the bui l dup
i s l ess rapi d (rel ati ve to the ri se of open-ci rcui t vol tage of the pul ser),
the cur r ent and vol tage poi nt may pass OU1si de the regi on of the l ower
modewhereupon osci l l ati ons i n Lr odc A q~l i ckl y di e out-and thence
i nto the osci l l ati on regi on of Ll odr l ?. Drpendi ng upon ci rcl l mstances,
the (V, I )-poi nt mi ght eventual l y come to rest on the steady-state charac-
teri sti c of B or on the cutoff cur ve some\vhere above B; i t mi ght al so fal l
SEC. 84]
SLrRVI I Y OF T1[E PROCESS (I F MODE SI <I >ECTI ON 349
short of enteri ng the regi on of the hi gher-vol tage mode and come to rest
at a nonosci l l ati ng statesay at Cbetween the t\vo regi ons, as shown
i n Fi g. 8.13. Al l the above possi bi l i ti es are, of course, subject to the
rel ati ons di scussed i n Sees. 8.1 and 8.2. I t i s cl ear that i n thi s type of
mode sel ecti on the control l i ng factors are the speed ~vi th whi ch osci l l ati ons
start i n the l ower mode and the characteri sti cs of the pul ser, parti cul arl y
the rate of ri se of vol tage; ther e enters no el ement of competi ti on between
the two modes di rectl y concer ned.
A vari ati on of the mode ski p i s i l l ustrated by Fi g. 8.14 i n whi ch two
modes are so cl ose together i n vol tage that thei r osci l l ati on regi ons
overl ap extensi vel y. Her e i t maybe supposed
that osci l l ati ons start i n both modes si mul -
taneousl y but that duri ng the l ater stages of
bui l dup the nonl i neari ti es i n the space charge v
enter i n such a way that one of the modes gai ns
predomi nance and eventual l y &ppresses the
other . I f the competi ti on wer e ver y evenl y
bal anced, the outcome mi ght be determi ned
by random fl uctuati ons; hence a mode ski p
woul d resul t that, contrasted wi th the type
descri bed earl i er, woul d be ver y l i ttl e i nfl u-
enced by the rate of ri se of the appl i ed vol t-
age. Di r ect i nteracti on between modes mi ght
FI G. 8.15.Mode shi ft
b; suspected of bei ng an i mportant factor ~~~dm~ei ~t~b~~~ur~~n~~
whenever two modes have components wi th
nearl y equal val ues of 7X. However , as wi l l be di scussed i n mor e detai l
l ater, the above condi ti on al one does not appear to be a ver y good i ndex
of the i mportance of i nteracti ons.
The mode shi ft i s an enti rel y di fferent sort of sel ecti on process and i s
characteri zed by a (V,l )-trace such as i s i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 8.15. Thi s
drawi ng corresponds to a case i n whi ch the ri se of vol tage i s rel ati ve] y
sl ow, so that after the i ni ti al stages of bui l dup, the (V, I )-poi nt pr oceeds
toward hi gher currents al ong the steady-state characteri sti c of Mode A.
Eventual l y a poi nt of i nstabi l i tyy i s reached; the osci l l ati ons i n A cease
to be sel f-sustai ni ng; and as they di e out, the (V,l )-poi nt moves upward
qui ckl y, mor e or l ess al ong the pul ser characteri sti c. Fi gure 8.15 r epr e-
sents a case i n whi ch the (V, I )-poi nt then enters the osci l l ati ng regi on
of Mode B and eventual l y comes to rest on the steady-state characteri sti c
of that mode. I n case the modes are wi del y separated and the pul ser
has a l ow i mpedance, the (V, I )-poi nt may arri ve at a nonosci l l ati ng
state between Modes A and B. I f the magneti c fi el d i s too l ow to permi t
osci l l ati on i n Mode B, the (V, I )-poi nt wi l l end on the cutoff curve.
I n addi ti on to the sort of shi ft that has a (V,l )-trace of the type
I
,
I
350 TRANSI ENT BEHAV1OR [SEC. 8.5
i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 8 15, ther e are someti mes obser ved shi fts wi th (V, I )-
traces l i ke those i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 8 16. These transi ti ons can ari se
onl y from an i nteracti on between modes; for i f the pri mary event wer e
si mpl y the cessati on of osci l l ati ons i n the i ni ti al Mode A, the cur r ent
(whi ch can fl ow onl y because of the osci l l ati ons, si nce the vol tage remai ns
wel l bel ow cutoff throughout) shoul d tend to decr ease and the vol tage
to ri se during the transzti on-whi ch i s opposi te to what i s observed.
Evi dentl y, whi l e the tube i s i n Mode A, a condi ti on i s reached that
permi ts B to bui l d up, and eventual i ty the osci l l ati ons i n B reach a great
enough ampl i tude to suppress A.
The mode i nstabi l i ti es that have been i nvesti gated most thoroughl y
are the mode ski p of Fi g. 8 13 and the mode shi ft of Fi g. 815. These
K
.---A
v
G / / -B
I
(a)
Frm 8. 16.Mode shi fts caused
I
I
(b)
by competi ti on between modes.
are dkcussed separatel y i n detai l i n Sees. 8.5 and 86. The mor e com-
pl i cated phenomena, i n whi ch i nteracti ons between modes pl ay an
i mportant part, have so far been studi ed onl y mor e or l ess i nci dental l y
and are consi dered i n Sec. 8.12.
8.5. The Mode Ski p.-As a rul e, mode ski ps are encounter ed when
attempts are made to oper ate pul sed magnetrons at hi gh currents, and
i n many such cases the mode ski p can be attri buted to mi sfi ri ng i n the
desi red mode of osci l l ati on; that i s, the mode-sel ecti on process i s of the
type i l l ustrated by Fi g. 813.
The manner i n whi ch a mode ski p caused by mi sfi ri ng usual l y devel ops
when i ncreasi ng vol tages are appl i ed to a magnetron (at constant mag-
neti c fi el d) i s i l l ustrated by the seri es of (V,l )-traces r epr oduced i n
Fi g. 817a to f.
A compl ete steady-state characteri sti c taken at the same magneti c
fi el d i s shown i n Fi g. 818. I n Fi g. 8.17a, the vol tage i s just bel ow that
at whi ch osci l l ati ons start; i n Fi g. 8.17b and c, osci l l ati ons start at ever y
pul se, and the steady-state cur r ent i ncreases as the vol tage i $ rai sed.
At hi gher vol tages, osci l l ati ons start i n the l ower mode onl y duri ng some
SEC. 8.6] THE MODE SHI FT 351
i
of the pul ses, but i n such pul ses the steady-state cur r ent conti nues to
i ncrease wi th appl i ed vol t age.
I n Fi g. 8. 17d and e, fai l ure to start i n
the l ower mode resul ts i n a transi ti on i nto a nonosci l l ati ng state, but
-... .. ..
[
.- ..<
(e)
.- ... . ... ..._ .._.
FI G. S 17.( V,I) -traces of a mode ski p arranged i n or der of i ncreasi ng vol tage.
Onl y the trace correspondi ng to the ri si ng edge of the pul se i s shown. (a) Bel ow osci l -
l ati ons; (b) begi nni ng of osci l l ati ons; (c) mi ddl e of osci l l ati on regi on; (d) begi nni ng of mi s-
fi ri ng; (e) mi sfi ri ng i nto the non osci l l ati ng state; (-f) mi sfi ri ng i nto a hi gher-vol tage mode.
wi th a sti l l gr eater appl i ed vol tage (Fi g. 8. 17j) the (V, I )-poi nt conti nues
upward through the nonosci l l ati ng state and i nto the hi gher-vol tage
mode.
Addi ti onal evi dence that mi sfi ri ng i n the l ower -
vol tage mode i s the pri mary cause of the mode
ski p when the modes are wi del y separated i n vol t-
age i s provi ded by the fact that the proporti on of
pul ses i n the hi gher-vol tage mode (or al ternati vel y,
the nonosci l l ati ng state) can be decreased by r e-
duci ng the rate at whi ch the vol tage ri ses at the
l eadi ng edge of the pul se. Wi th a suffi ci entl y sl ow
ri se of vol tage, the upper mode i s suppressed
compl etel y. Thk behavi or i s readi l y understood
on the basi s of the di scussi on of Fi g. 8.13. (The
possi bi l i ty that a mode shzt may occur when the
ri se of vol tage i s made ver y sl ow does not affect the val i di ty of the
argument. ) The effect i s further di scussed i n Sec. 8.9.
8.6. The Mode Shi ft.-The type of mode shi ft that seems to occur
most commonl y and about whi ch most i s known i s that i l l ustrated i n
FI G. 8. 18.Steady-
state characteri sti c of
the mode ski p i l l ustrated
i n Fi g. S.17.
I
352 TRANSI ENT BEHAVI OR
[SEC. 8.6
Fi g. 8.15, i n whi ch the transi ti on i s caused by si mpl e i nstabi l i ty i n the
i ni ti al mode of osci l l ati on. I n many cases the i nstabi l i ty at hi gh currents
appears to resul t from an i nherent pr oper ty of the space charge i n the
osci l l ati ng magnetron, al though i n others i t i s defi ni tel y attri butabl e to a
defi ci ency i n the el ectr on emi ssi on from the cathode.
The i nherent i nstabi l i ty shows up most promi nentl y i n magnetrons
scal ed to oper ate at l ow vol tages, parti cul arl y i n tubes desi gned for c-w
operati on. I ts outstandi ng characteri sti c i s a strong dependence of the
l i mi ti ng cur r ent upon the r-f l oad; l i ghter l oads (l arge l oaded Qs) permi t
osci l l ati on to conti nue to hi gher currents. The effect was r ecogni zed
fi rst by R. N. Hal l and L. Tonks of the General El ectri c Company,
Schenectady, N. Y., who encounter ed i t i n the cour se of devel opi ng c-w
magnetrons for radar countermeasures.
The concl usi on that thi s l i mi tati on on cur r ent i s an i nherent pr oper ty
of the magnetron such as can occur even when the emi ssi on from the
cathode i s l i mi ted by space charge i s based on the facts that the obser ved
l i mi tati on does depend strongl y on the l oad and that the effects obser ved
i n a wi de vari ety of magnetrons show a qual i tati ve consi stency. How-
10~
t
v
5 -
oo~
i - 4
Fm. S.19.Li mi ti ng cur r ent as a func-
ti on Of l oad conductance. The parameters
are expressed i n r educed vari abl es.
ever , the i mpossi bi l i ty of ascertai n-
i ng to what degr ee the emi ssi on i s
actual l y l i mi ted by space charge i n
an osci l l ati ng magnetron precl udes
any preci se anal ysi s of the data
avai l abl e.
Fi gure 8.19 shows the l i mi ti ng
cur r ent that may be expected for
vari ous val ues of l oad. The pl ot i s
presented i n the form of r educed
vari abl es (see Chap. 10). Opera-
ti on at a gi ven l oad i s possi bl e onl y
to the l eft of the l oad l i ne. I n
addi ti on to the uncertai nti es men-
ti oned, ther e i s some questi on as to
how exactl y effects i n di ssi mi l ar
magnetrons can be cor r el ated by
means of r educed vari abl es, so that pre~cti ons based on Fi g. 8.19 ma;
wel l pr ove to be i n er r or by a factor of 2 i n speci al cases.
I n most of the magnetrons desi gned for pul sed operati on the i nherent
l i mi t on cur r ent cannot be demonstrated, because these tubes run at
hi gh cur r ent densi ti es, so that other l i mi tati ons, such as l ow emi ssi on
or sparki ng from the cathode, appear fi rst. I t has been observed, how-
ever , i n l ow-vol tage pul sed tubes (for exampl e, the experi mental LL3
magnetron descri bed i n Sec. 8.9) by the appl i cati on of a heavy l oad and
a sl owl y ri si ng pul se.
SEC.w]
TI I E MODE SHI FT 353
Another type of l i mi tati on on cur r ent shows up i n some tubes when
the cathode i s abnormal l y poor or I Vhen i t i s run at a subnormal tempera-
ture, and thi s l i mi tati on i s thus attri butabl e to i nadequate emi ssi on.
Usual l y when the cur r ent i s l i mi ted by cathode emi ssi on (i ncl udl ng
FI Q.S20.Steady-state characteri sti cs showi ng fr om (a) to (d) the eff ect of decreasi ng
heater power. A 500-ppf condenser was connected i n paral l el to el i mi nate mmfi nng,
secondary el ectrons, of course), the (V,l )-characteri sti c bends upward
at hi gh currentssometi mes a ki l ovol t or so above the extrapol ated
strai ght part of the char act eri sti cbef or e i nstabi l i ty sets i n. The l oca-
ti on of the bend usual l y can be al tered by varyi ng the temperature of
a
F1~.S.21 a.Steady-state characteri sti c showi ng mi sfi ri ng i nto the cutoff curve.
FI G. S21b.-Steady-state characteri sti c for the same condi ti ons as Fi g. S.21a, but wi th
500-#wf condr nser i n paral l el wi th the magnetron. There appears an upper l i mi t to the
amount of cur r ent that can be drawn i n the mai n mode.
FI G. S21C.-A (V, I )-tr ace for a vol tage setti ng on the cutoff cur ve of Fi g. S21b. (Note
that osci l l ati ons whi ch bui l d UP i n the mai n mode become unstabl e at hi gh cur r ent.)
FI G. S.21d,The cur ent pul se of F~g. 8.21c i ndi cati ng the rel ati ve l engths of ti me
i nvol ved i n thi s transi ti on. (Note al so that someti mes the tube mi sfi res di rectl y i nto the
cutoff curve.)
the cathode. The four parts of Fi g. 8.20 demonstrate thi s behavi or
i n the LL3.
A good exampl e of how a poor cathode can cause a tube to behave
abnormal l y because of a mode shi ft i s provi ded by some 725 magnetrons
that had r ecei ved ver y sever e treatment. Normal 725 tubes oper ate
354 TRA.VSI ENT BEHAVI OR [SEC.8.6
wi th no evi dence of mode i nstabi l i ti es; but i n testi ng these tubes on a
hard-tube pul ser whi ch had a ver y sl owl y ri si ng pul se, i t was obser ved
that osci l l ati ons started wi th each pul se but ceased as soon as the cur r ent
r ose to about 30 amp. Exami nati on then showed that the pul sed pri mary
emi ssi on was hardl y detectabl e.
Pul sed tubes normal l y do not exhi bi t a mode shi ft unl ess they do have
ver y poor cathodes and the rate of ri se of the vol tage pul se i s suffi ci entl y
sl ow, because mi sfi ri ng takes pl ace i nstead, when the vol tage i s rai sed
i n the attempt to i ncrease the current. As an exampl e, Fi g. 821a shows
a steady-state (V,l )-di agram of the LL3 taken at a l ow magneti c fi el d.
(The upper mode i n thi s case i s the cutoff curve.) When a 500-~~f
condenser i s shunted across the modul ator, the mi sfi ri ng i s el i mi nated,
r
/
/
v
I
Fm. 8.22.Schem8ti c di agram of the
trace shown i n Fi g. 8.21c of a mode i nsta-
bi l i ty.
I
t
I
k
t
FI G. S,23.A cur r ent pul se showi ng
exci tati on of a l ow-vol tage mode at the
begi nni ng and end of the pul se.
and a mode shi ft occurs. The steady-state characteri sti c for thi s case
i s shown i n Fi g. 8. 21b, and the correspondi ng (V, I )-trace and cur r ent
pul se for a hi gh-vol tage pul se are shown i n Fi g. 821c and d. These
fi gures show that the mi sfi ri ng has not been compl etel y el i mi nated. The
(V,Z)-trace of Fi g. 821c i s copi ed schemati cal l y i n Fi g. 822; the arrows
show the di recti on of moti on of the (V, I )-poi nt.
Someti mes a mode shi ft occurs ver y earl y i n the pul se, so that the
l ower mode i s exci ted for onl y a bri ef i nterval at the begi nni ng of
the pul se and for another bri ef i nterval at the end of the pul se when the
vol tage fal l s agai n wi thi n the starti ng range. The cur r ent pul se then
has the shape i ndi cated i n Fi g. 8.23. The suddenness of the transi ti on
from a normal cur r ent pul se to one of thi s type maybe accentuated by an
i nstabl l i t y of the combi nati on of magnetron, pul ser, and power suppl y,
whi ch wi l l be di scussed i n Sec. 87. I f, ss i s usual i n such cases, the
l i mi ti ng cur r ent i s a functi on of cathode temperature, pecul i ar ti me
SEC. 8.7] POWER SUPPLY I NSTABI LI TY: MODE J UMPS) 355
l ags may be observed, si nce the heati ng by back bombardment maybe
ver y di fferent i n the two condi ti ons of operati on.
Shi fts i n whi ch the second mode has a l ower vol tage than the i ni ti al
mode have been obser ved to occur i n two ways, correspondi ng to Fi g.
816aand b. Type a, i n whi ch the i nstabi l i ty setsa l ower l i mi t to the
cur r ent i n a hi gher-vol tage mode, requi res speci al condi ti ons for i ts
observati onnamel y, that a hi gher-vol tage mode be reached i ni ti al l y
(as a resul t of mi sfi ri ng or hi gh-current i nstabi l i ty i nthe l ower mode)
and that the vol tage then fal l so that the l ower cur r ent l i mi t of the hi gher-
vol tage mode i s approached from the hi gh-current si de. Thi s SOI %of
transi ti on has been obser ved onl y between cl osel y spaced modes; i t i s
exhi bi ted wel l i n some unstrapped X-band tubes (speci fi caUy, the 2J21).
Practi cal l y, i t does not seem to be of much
i mport ante.
Type b, as shown i n Fi g. 8 16b, was
obser ved i n an experi mental tube (the V
LM2 pr oduced by the Raytheon Manu-
facturi ng Company) i n whi ch the 2J39
anode bl ock i s strapped to a wavel ength
of 12.3 cm. When run on a hard-tube
pul ser, thi s tube has a steady-state charac-
teri sti c for certai n l oads such as i s i ndi -
cated by the heavy cur ve i n Fi g. 824.
Here, mi sfi ri ng i n the (4/4/8)-mode on a
medi um-vol tage pul se l eads to the non-
FxrJ. S.24.Asteady-statechar-
osci l l ati ng state N. O.; but a hi gher-vol h
acteri sti cof the LM2. At hi gh
age pul se,
whi ch ri ses to wher e the
vol tagegthef-componenti s exci ted
(5/3/8)-mode shoul d start, resul ts i nstead
at the startof each pul se.
i n the exci tati on of the (4/4/8)-mode. Cl ose observati on of the cur r ent
pul se shows, however , that the (5/3/8)-mode i s actual l y exci ted for a
bri ef i nterval at the begi nni ng of the pul se.
8.7. I .nstabi l ky of the Power Suppl y: Mode Jumps? When a mode
change takes pl ace i n such a way that an i ncrease i n appl i ed vol tage
resul ts i n a decr ease i n magnetron current, compl i cati ng phenomena
may occur . For i nstance, pul sed magnetrons someti mes exhi bi t a ver y
sudden change from one mode to another, apparentl y wi th no percepti bl e
transi ti on range. Thi s phenomenonoccasi onal l y r efer r ed to as a
mode jump -has someti mes been i nterpreted as a di sti nct type of
change di fferent from those whi ch have been descri bed i n precedi ng
secti ons. Actual l y, such behavi or i s a resul t of i nstabi l i ty of the combi na-
ti on of power suppl y, pul ser, and magnetron rather than a speci al charac-
teri sti c of the magnetron.
A power suppl y that consi sts of a recti fi er and fi l ter wi l l , i n general ,
356
TRANSI ENT BEHAVI OR [Sm. 8.7
have a ti me constant that i s l arge compared wi th the repeti ti on peri od
of the pul ser, and i ts output vol tage (as affected by i nternal regul ati on)
wi l l be dependent upon the average cur r ent drawn by the magnetron
rather than the pul se current. I f the power suppl y has a condenser
output, the condi ti on for stabi l i ty i s that
;+$>0,
wh~e R i s the i nternal resi stance of the power suppl y, 1 i s the average
current, and Vi s the i nput vol tage to the pul ser (consi dered to be equal
tothe open-ci rcui t output vol tage of thepul ser).
I n the case of a mode ski p, the average cur r ent as a functi on of power -
~
FI G. S25.-A negati ve resi stance
regi on offer ed to the power supPl Y of
the pul ser because of a mode change
i n the magnetron.
suppl y vol tage can be computed on the
basi s of curves such as are i l l ustrated i n
Fi gs. 8.4 and 8.9. I n general , an A-
shaped cur ve such as i s shown i n Fi g.
8.25 wi l l resul t. Wi th a power suppl y
that has a characteri sti c l i ke that shown
by the br oken l i nes, ther e wi l l be a regi on
of i nstabi l i ty. As the suppl y vol tage i s
i ncreased, ther e wi l l be a jump from A to
Bthe mode ski p i s obser ved as a
jump. On the other hand, i f the vol t-
age i s decreased, the jump wi l l be from C
to D; thus hysteresi s occurs. Thi s hys-
teresi s effect seems to be present i n al l
i mode jumps, and a cl ose exami nati on
of the cur r ent pul se just pri or to the jump usual l y i ndi cates the begi nni ng
of ei ther a mode ski p or a mode shi ft.
Condi ti ons that tend to make dI / dV have a l arge negati ve val ue are
that the transi ti on (Fi g. 8.9) occurs i n a narrow range of vol tage and
that the currents i n the two modes be wi del y di fferent for a fi xed suppl y
vol tage. Both condi ti ons are most l i kel y to be ful fi l l ed wi th a hard-
tube pul ser i nasmuch as a rapi d ri se of vol tage at the begi nni ng of the
pul se wi l l tend to make the transi ti on regi on narrow and a l ow pul ser
i mpedance wi l l tend to make the di fference i n currents l arge.
Under speci al condi ti ons a mode shift i n a pul sed magnetron can al so
be i nfl uenced by i nstabi l i ty of the power suppl y. For i nstance, i f the
shi ft i s l i ke that i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 8.15 and the vol tage ri ses throughout
the pul se, a smal l i ncrease i n suppl y vol tage can cause the shi ft to a
l ower cur r ent to take pl ace earl i er i n the pul se and thus resul t i n decreased
average current.
r
SEC. 8.8] OUTLI NE OF A THEORY OF STARTI NG 357
I t i s obvi ous that condi ti ons of i nstabi l i ty can al so ari se wi th c-w
magnetrons and may l ead to osci l l ati ons i n the i nput ci rcui t.
8.8. Outl i ne of a Theor y of Starti ng.-I t has been i ndi cated i n Chap. 7
that the type of anal ysi s ther e appl i ed to steady-state operati on can be
extended to appl y to transi ents, and thi s secti on i s essenti al l y an el abora-
ti on of that i dea. Many of the general pri nci pl es i nvol ved are deri ved
from a r epor t by J. R. Pi erce. Thi s treatment may be ter med an
adi abati c theor y of starti ng, because i t i s based on the assumpti on
that the transi ent takes pl ace so sl owl y that i t may be approxi mated as
a conti nuous successi on of steady states. Even under condi ti ons wher e
the approxi mati on i s rather poor , the theor y shoul d gi ve some i nsi ght
i nto the nature of the phenomena that take pl ace. Of course, i t i s
possi bl e to concei ve of condi ti ons i n whi ch an adi abati c approach i s
enti rel y i nadequate, but i t i s not evi dent that such condi ti ons are com-
monl y real i zed i n cur r ent practi ce.
The anal ysi s of the steady-state operati on has been based on the
fundamental rel ati on
Ye+ Yc=o, (1)
wher e Y, i s the admi ttance of the space charge and Y. i s the admi ttance
of the ci rcui t. I n so far as admi ttances can be defi ned for transi ents,
the same rel ati on must appl y because i t i s si mpl y an expressi on of the con-
ti nui ty of current. The di scussi on
admi ttance of a ci rcui t has a defi -
ni te meani ng, and that i t can be
computed from the usual formul as
by substi tuti ng the compl ex fr e-
quency i nstead of the purel y real
frequenci es, for osci l l ati ons that
i ncrease or decr ease exponenti al l y
wi th ti me. The admi tt ante Y. of
the el ectrons i s assumed to depend
onl y on the i nstantaneous val ues
of the appl i ed vol tage V and the r-f
of Chap. 7 has i ndi cated that the
!+%
Load
YL
v-l
FI O, S.!26.-Equi val ent ci rcui t of a magne-
tron.
vol tage V, not on thei r ti me deri va-
ti vesthi s assumpti on consti tutes the hypothesi s that the bui l dup i s
adi abati c.
A detai l ed di scussi on wi l l be gi ven onl y for the case i n whi ch the
resonant system may bc r epr esented as a si mpl e paral l el -resonant ci rcui t
(Fi g. 8.26) wi th admi ttance gi ven by
Y. = Zc(p p.)
[- 1
=G~+2C ~~+j(@OL) ,
(2)
1 J. R. Pi erce, Osci l l ator 13chavi or, BTL MemorandumMM-42-140-60, Sept. 8,
1942.
358
TRANSIENT BEHAVIOR
[SEC. 8-8
wher e -~p. i S the l oaded, COmpl eX,reOOnantfreqUenCy eqUal tOU. jfL
(see Chap. 7). I n so far as one i s i nterested i n the ampl i tude of the r-f
vol tage, but not the frequency, as a functi on of ti me, or dy the real part
of Eq. (2) need be consi dered; wi th the val ue of Y. substi tuted from
Eq. (l ), i t i s
l d~ d - G, + GL
.
rdt=zlnv= T
(3)
wher e G, i s the el ectroni c conductance and G. i s the steady-state con-
ductance of the l oaded ci rcui t.
Equati on (3) h~s to be sol ved i n con-
juncti on wi th rel ati ons that descri be the dependence of G. upon ~ and
the i nput condi ti ons. The sol uti on wi l l contai n a constant of i ntegrati on
that i s rel ated to the noi se l evel from whi ch osci l l ati ons begi n.
Equati on (3) i s now to be devel oped i n such a way as to make di rect
connecti on wi th the (V,l )-traces whi ch consti tute the gr eater part of
the observati onal materi al on the starti ng of osci l l ati ons. That i s to
say, the behavi or of the system wi l l be fol l owed by traci ng i ts cour se i n
the (V, Z)-pl ane.
As shown i n Chap. 7, the properti es of the space charge, at some fi xed
val ue of magneti c fi el d, may be expr eeeed i n the form
r = 7(VJ) (4)
and
G. = G.(V,I). (5)
(Because the magneti c fi el d i s ordi nari l y constant duri ng any transi ent,
i t enters onl y as a parameter and wi l l not be i ncl uded expl i ci tl y.) I t i s
conveni ent to r epr esent the functi ons ~ and G, by means of a conduct-
ance map, whi ch i s constructed by drawi ng contours of constant ~ and
constant G. i n the (V,l )-pl ane, as i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 8.29. For the present,
i t i s assumed that the functi ons are known.
I n the i nterest of si mpl i ci ty, the reactance i n the pul ser and i n the
i nput ..ci rcui t of the pul ser wi l l be i gnored, so that the pul ser can be
descri bed by a rel ati on of the forrn~
v = v(I ,t). (6)
At ever y i nstant Eq. (6) defi nes a cur ve-the i nstantaneous pul ser
characteri sti c-on whi ch must l i e the poi nt (V,Z) whi ch descri bes the
state of the system. I t i s conveni ent to make the fol l owi ng substi tuti ons:
1Wi th reactance, Eq. (6) must be repI acedby rel ati onsthat contai n deri vati ves
and i ntegral s. An attempt to take reactance i nto acoount i n a general way woul d
i nvol ve one i n the theor y of the transi ent responseof networks, wi th the added
compl i cati on of the magnetronse a pecul i ar ci rcui t el ement.
I
SEC, 8.8]
O~JTI.INE OF A THEORY OF STARTING
G. + G.
~(V,I ) = ~,
359
(7)
and
v
4(V1) = l n To
(Fo = r efer ence l evel .)
(I n the conductance map, conto~rs of constant $ are i denti cal ~except for
l abel i ng, wi th those of constant V and the gradi ents of+ and V are i n the
same di recti on; si mi l arl y for &and G,. ) I n terms of tandx, Eq. (3)
takes the form
$*(V,I ) = t(v,z). (8)
From Eqs. (6) to (8) the fol l owi ng rel ati ons maybe deri ved by di fferenti a-
ti on:
g. -(%(91+
- (%1(%+(3
and
v_ (~)v(%+(%
a-(%)1(31+(%
(9)
(l o)
These two equati ons gi ve the vel oci ty i n the (I , V)-pl ane of the poi nt
P whi ch descri bes the system, i n terms of known functi ons of the coor di -
nates of P and of the ti me t. The resul t can be put i nto a form that can
be i nterpreted mor e di rectl y, for i nspecti on of the equati ons shows that
the vel oci ty of P is the sum of two vectors, one tangent to the i nstan-
taneous pul ser characteri sti c at P and of magni tude proporti onal to f,
the other tangent to the constant-~ contour through P and of magni tude
proporti onal to (61V/&)r. I f two uni t vectors WI and W2 are chosen as
shown i n Fi g. 827, the vel oci ty of P may be expressed as a vector W
wher e
The di recti on of W for vari ous combi nati ons of the si gns of (C3V/ ~t)I
and ~ i s i ndi cated by sectors i n Fi g. 827.
The quanti tati ve cal cul ati on of a transi ent woul d presumabl y have
to be carri ed out by numeri cal i ntegrati on of some sort. The way i n
whi ch the process mi ght be performed graphi cal l y i s i l l ustrated i n Fi g.
8.28, whi ch i s based on a si mpl i fi ed conductance map. The i nstantaneous
360
I
v
TRANSI ENT BEHAVI OR
Y
[SEC. 8.8
,
1+
Fm. 8.27.The uni t vectors w, and w, of Eq. (11).
pul ser characteri sti c i s drawn i n for successi ve ti mes separated by some
constant i nterval At (equal to uni ty i n the drawi ng). The poi nt P
I
I
FI Q. S.2S.Graphi cal cal cul ati on of a
transi ent.
approaches the (,$ = O)-contour
al ong the c o ns t a n t+ contour
whi ch represents the noi se l evel i n
the resonant ci rcui t i ndi cated by
~ = O i n Fi g. 8.28. The vector
that represents the di spl acement
of P i n each of the ti me i nterval s
i s so drawn that the i ncrement
i n ~ i s equal to At ti mes the val ue
of & averaged over the l ength of
the vector .
I n or der to trace out the com-
pl ete t r a ns i e n t, the functi ons
G.(V,I ) and ~(V,I ) have to be
known al ong the enti re path. I n
Chap. 7 i t i s shown how these
functi ons can be deri ved fr om
steady-state measurements, but
such measurements are confi ned to regi ons of stable operati on, whereas
duri ng a transi ent, regi on are accessi bl e i n whi ch the system i s
SEC. 8.8] OUTLI NE OF A THEORY OF STARTI NG 361
i nherentl y unstabl e. Consequentl y the functi ons must i n part be
deduced from observati ons of transi ents. I nasmuch as exi sti ng measure-
ments of transi ents are ver y crude, as judged by the present requi re-
ments, i t i s possi bl e to make onl y qual i tati ve deducti ons about the
behavi or of G, and V i n the regi ons not cover ed by steady-state
measurements.
From consi derati on of al l the i nformati on avai l abl e, i t seems that the
conductance map deri ved from steady-state measurements (see Fi g.
L
/
I
I hw S.29.8chemati c graph of ; and G. as functi ons of V and 1.
7.29a) shoul d be extended i n the general fashi on i ndi cated i n Fi g. 8.29
i n or der to expl ai n the transi ent phenomena observed. I n Fi g. 8.29
the constant-~ contours aresi mpl y extrapol ated from Fi g. 7.29a and are
consi stent wi th the premi se that 1 shoul d i ncrease monotoni cal l y wi th
both ~ and V. The (~ = O)-contour resembl es the current-vol tage
characteri sti c of a magnetron wi thout osci l l ators, as i t i s actual l y
observed. The curvi ng of the G. contours i n the l ower l eft part of the
di agram i s i ntroduced to expl ai n the starti ng vol tage and rel ated phe-
nomena, whi ch are descri bed i n Sec. 8.9. (Wi th r egar d to thi s feature
ther e i s some uncertai nty. As drawn, the contours are enti rel y con-
si stent wi th the obser ved behavi or of pul sed magnetrons, but they are
362 TRANSIENT BEHAVIOR [SEC. 8.8
not preci sel y consi stent wi th the characteri sti cs of c-w magnetrons at
l ow currents, whi ch are di scussed i n Sec. 9.2.)
The doubl i ng back of the G. contours at hi gh currents i s desi gned to
account for the obser ved i nstabi l i tyy at hi gh currehs and for the fact
that the l i mi ti ng cur r ent decreases as G~ i s made l arger. Thi s phe-
nomenon i s descri bed i n Sec. 86. The G. contcurs are made to return
to the (~ = O)-cur ve at hi gher val ues of V (upper l eft part of the di agram)
i n or der to restri ct the range of V i n whi ch osci l l ati ons can start and thus
to expl ai n the nonosmllating states i ndi cated i n Fi g. 8.3 and further
descri bed i n Sec. 89.
The questi on of stabi l i ty wi l l be taken up fi rst, and the types of
transi ent behavi or that are connected wi th Fi g. 8.29 wi l l be consi dered
l ater. When the modul ator characteri sti c i s stati onary, (dV/ dt), = O,
and, accordi ng to Eq. (11), the i ntersecti ons of the (~ = O)- or
( Ge = GL)-contour wi th the pul ser characteri sti c shoul d r epr esent
stati onary states. Such an i ntersecti on wi l l consti tute a state of stabl e
operati on, however , onl y i n case smal l di spl acements from i t tend to
di mi ni sh rather than i ncrease wi th ti me. Si nce the i nput ci rcui t i s con-
si dered to be fr ee of reactance, any di spl acement from an i ntersecti on
P must occur al ong the pul ser characteri sti c and can be r epr esented by a
di stance s. I n the nei ghborhood of P, the change i n ~ can be approxi -
mated by (13$/ds)s and Eq. (11) can be wri tten as
(12)
as
Thus, the condi ti on for stabi l i ty i s that the ri ght-hand si de of Eq. (12)
be negati ve; that i q, ~ (or G,) and ~ must i ncrease i n opposi te di recti ons
al ong the pul ser characteri sti c.
However , i t i s doubtful i f the condi ti on just menti oned i s stri ngent
enough to ensure stabi l i ty i n an actual case, for thi s condi ti on i s based
on the assumpti on that reactance are enti rel y absent from the i nput
ci rcui t, al though they can never be el i mi nated compl etel y i n practi ce.
I f reactance are i ncl uded, P is not constrai ned to move al ong the steady-
state pul ser characteri sti c, and addi ti onal possi bi l i ti es ari se.
Accordi ng
to the condi ti on that has been deri ved, stabl e operati on coul d be achi eved
i n the upper porti on of Fi g. 829 by the somewhat arti fi ci al but not
al together i mpossi bl e expedi ent of usi ng a pul ser wi th the pr oper nega-
ti ve i nternal resi stance, but i t seems i mpl ausi bl e that thi s woul d actual l y
wor k. Ver y probabl y osci l l ati ons of one sort or another woul d take
pl ace i n the i nput ci rcui t. I f reactance are taken i nto account, the i nput
ci rcui t wi l l , i n general , have a mul ti pl i ci ty of normal modes (i n the
SEC. 8.8] OUTLI NE OF A THEORY OF STARTI NG 363
conventi onal networ k-theor y sense), and for stabi l i ty i t i s requi red
that al l of these modes shal l be posi ti vel y damped.
I t seems reasonabl e to concl ude that wi th a normal pul ser (wi th
powti ve i nternal resi stance) stabl e operati on i s l i mi ted to the l ower
part of Fi g. 829, wher e G. i ncreases wi th V. At l ow currents, opera-
ti on can be stabl e onl y i f the i nternal resi stance of the pul ser i s l arge,
o
I
t
v
;
v
(a)
I -
(b)
!0
v
v
I
(c)
Fm. 830.-Exampl es of transi ent behavi or. I t i s to be noted that the coordi nates are
i nput cur r ent and vol tage; the l i me enters onl y as a parameter, whi ch i ncreases al ong each
of the paths i n the di recti on i ndi cated by the arrowa but the exact ti me dependence of V
and I is not shown.
and even then there i s some possi bi l i ty that osci l l ati ons wi l l occur i n the
i nput ci rcui t.
As has been stated, some of the features of the conductance map as
drawn i n Fi g. 829 are justi fi ed pri nci pal l y by the observati ons to be
descri bed i n Sec. 8.9. However, the rel ati on between the map and
observati on may best be i l l ustrated by proceedi ng as though the for mer
were known i ndependentl y and showi ng the types of transi ent behavi or
that can be predi cted on the basi s of i t. The resul ts, whi ch are i l l us-
364 TRANSIENT BEHA V1OR [SEC. 8.8
trated i n Fi g. 830, have been arri ved at by qual i tati ve consi derati ons
based on Eq. (11) and Fi g. 827, but ther e can be l i ttl e doubt that the
pr ocedur e i l l ustrated by Fi g. 828 woul d l ead to substanti al l y the same
Cumes.
The shaded area of Fi g. 830 (wher e $ i s posi ti ve) i s the regi on i n whi ch
osci l l ati ons al ways i ncrease wi th ti me; outsi de the shaded area, osci l l a-
ti ons al ways decr ease wi th ti me. I t i s assumed that the pul ser i s si mpl y
.%
E
.G
I-CL
v
.--
&
Ti met -
Fm. 8.31 .The open-ci r -
cui t pul ser vol tage as a func-
ti on of ti me.
a vol tage sour ce wi th i nternal resi stance r,
and the appl i ed open-ci rcui t vol tage i s i n the
form of the pul se i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 8.31.
I n Fi g. 8.30a and b, whi ch appl i es to the
fi rst hal f of the pul se shown i n Fi g. 8.31, the
open-ci rcui t vol tage ri ses at a uni form rate to
a fi nal val ue V as i ndi cated and then remai ns
fi xed. I n Fi g. 8.30c, whi ch appl i es to the
second hal f of the pul se, the open-ci rcui t vol t-
age, havi ng remai ned at the val ue V through-
out the peri od of steady-state operati on, fal l s
to zer o at a uni form rate. I n Fi g. 8.30a, V
l i es wi thi n the starti ng range; that i s, the l i ne V = V rI ~the steady-
state pul ser characteri sti c) cuts the (~ = O)-cur ve i n the regi on i n whi ch
~i s posi ti ve.
One steady-state condi ti on, r epr esented by the poi nt O, i s reached
i nvari abl y, regardl ess of how rapi dl y or sI owl y the vol tage i s appl i ed
at the begi nni ng of the pul se. The seri es A to D i l l ustrates the vari ati on
i n path as the rate of ri se of vol tage i s i ncreased.
I n Fi g. 8.30b, V l i es outsi de the starti ng range, and ther efor e two
steady states are possi bl e: the osci l l ati ng state O reached by paths
A and B and the nonosci l l ati ng state N.O. reached by paths C and D.
I n cases wher e thi s nonosci l l ati ng state i s reached, the phenomena
i l l ustrated by Fi g. 8.30c occur duri ng the fai l i ng edge of the pul se. I n
Fi g. 8.30c path A represents the l i mi ti ng case i n whi ch the rate of fzl l of
vol t age i s suffi ci ent y sl ow that the fi nal decay of osci l l ati ons occurs
al ong the steady-state characteri sti c of the magnetron. Path D
represents the opposi te extr eme wher e no osci l l ati ons at al l occur , and
C and B are i ntermedi ate.
The nature of the (V,l )-curves i s greatl y i nfl uenced by the fact that
the gradi ent of $ i s ver y l arge i n the nei ghborhood of the (~ = O)-contour.
The poi nt P enters the posi ti ve-~ regi on cl osel y al ongsi de thi s contour,
because the noi se exci tati on of the resonant ci rcui t i s rel ati vel y smal l ,
I Fi gure 8.31 does not represent the vol tage across the magnetron output termi nal s;
i t si mpl y represents the vol tage that woul d exi st there i f the magnetron di d not
draw cur r ent.
!
SEC.8.8] OU1LI NE OF A THEORY OF STARTI NG
365
and departs from i t onl y ver y sl owl y at fi rst. I t i s just thi s ci rcumstance
that osci l l ati ons must bui l d up for some ti me befor e the cur r ent Z i s
affected appreci abl ywhi ch gi ves ri se to the possi bi l i ty of mi sfi ri ng
when the vol tage i s appl i ed ver y rapi dl y.
The noi se i n the resonant ci rcui t has been treated, so far, as a con-
stant, whi ch i t actual l y i s not.
I f fl uctuati ons i n the noi se are taken i nto
account, each of the thr ee cases r epr esented by a si ngl e path i n Fi g. 830
shoul d be shown as a bundl e of paths. Ordi nari l y the bundl e wi fl be
narrow; but i f condi ti ons are cri ti cal , so that the fl uctuati ons determi ne
whi ch of two wi del y di fferent general courses wi l l be fol l owed, the
bundl e wi l l spread out. Thus a path such as C may become fuzzy,
as i l l ustrated i n the i nsert of Fi g. 830b. For some purposes i t may be
necessary to consi der the dependence of the noi se on ti me, for the noi se
exci tati on depends on the i nput condi ti ons, and the ampl i tude of the
noi se vol tage i n the ci rcui t wi l l have i ts own l aw of bui l dup.
The ti me rel ati ons al ong any gi ven (V,l )-path may be computed
by means of the l i ne i ntegral
-= R=CG%$
(13)
taken al ong the path. The speed of starti ng i s someti mes expressed
i n terms of the starti ng ti me, whi ch i s the i nterval requi red for osci l l ati on
to bui l d up to the poi nt wher e the r-f output and the i ncrease i n i nput
cur r ent are easi l y percepti bl e on i nstruments general l y used to measure
the fi nal or steady-state val ues of these quanti ti es. The starti ng ti me
wi l l be l east when the earl y stages of bui l du~i n whi ch the gr eater
part of the i ncrement i n I n ~ has to be cover edtake pl ace wher e $ has
i ts maxi mum val ue, whi ch i s somewher e near the mi ddl e of the starti ng
range.
I t i s i nformati ve to express the starti ng ti me At i n terms of an effec-
ti ve Q for bui l dup Q, accordi ng to the rel ati on
At = ~ Q~A i n ~z == 1.22 X 10-l l XQBA ]ogl o ~z. (14)
The or der s of magni tude that seem to be general l y i nvol ved, for 10-cm
pul sed magnetrons, are At = 108 see, QB = 20, and A l og,O ~z = 4.
I t i s i nteresti ng to i nqui re i nto the i mpl i cati ons, as rel ated to transi ent
behavi or, of the same scal i ng rel ati ons that are used to systemati ze the
steady-state properti es of magnetrons. Thi s may be done by expressi ng
the vari ous quanti ti es that enter i nto Eq. (3) i n terms of the r educed
vari abl es
i ntroduced by Sl ater. 1 Accordi ng to the i deas of di men-
I J. C. Sl ater, Theory of Magnetron Operati on, FtL Report, No. 200, Mar. 8,
1943.
366 TRANFJENT BEHAVIOR [SEC. 8.8
si onal anal ysi s, ther e exi sts for each mode of each magnetron a set of
characteri sti c parameters @, V, and 4, such that Eqs. (4) and (5) have a
uni versal form when expressed i n terms of the di mensi onl ess r educed
vari abl es u = V/U, o = ~/v, b = B/@, etc. I t i s conveni ent to
i ntroduce al so the (characteri sti c conductance s = tJ/11.
(N/wo-
I n what fol l ows, the di scussi on wi l l be restri cted to the ~
.-
component, and i t i s assumed that the cathode-anode rati o i s chosen
accordi ng to the wi del y used formul a T./T= = (N
ject to these restri cti ons, the expressi ons gi ven by
teri sti c parameters can be wri tten i n the forms
i fcml
()
4
=TZX l +m
()
2
w =Z@:s,
J
4)/ (N + 4). Sub-
Sl ater for the charac-
1
(15)
wher e AN = 1.24 + (9.6/ N). The formul as have been put i n the above
forms to cl ari fy the dependence upon the number of osci l l ators N. The
expressi on for 4 agrees wi thi n 5 per cent wi th the mor e compl i cated one
gi ven by Sl ater se l ong as N i s not l ess than 8.
When wri tten i n r educed vari abl es, Eq. (3) can be put i n the di men-
si onl ess form
~ in O(V$) = -g.(v,i ) g.,
d;
(16)
a
wher e
t.= $.
G
The parameter t,may be tr eated as the characteri sti c ti me i nterval
for transi ents. From Eq. (15) i t i s evi dent that the transi ent behavi ors
of two magnetrons shoul d be compared on the basi s of thei r r especti ve
r educed ti mes t/t,. However , even on thi s basi s Eq. (15) wi l l not have
i denti cal types of sol uti ons for the two magnetrons unl ess the pul sers
are appropri atel y scal ed, that i s to say, unl ess Eq. (6), when wri tten
for each of the pul sers i n the r educed vari abl es appropri ate to the mag-
netr on wi th w~ch the pul ser i s associ ated,
()
t
V=v i ,-.
t,
take; & &e i denti cal fo&
SEC.89] OBSERVA TI ONi3 AND DI SCUSSI ON OF STARTI NG 367
I f i t i s assumed that the l ast condi ti on i s ful fi l l ed-whi ch i s never
the case i n practi cethere sti l l remai ns the questi on of the i ni ti al condi -
ti ons that r epr esent the noi se.
Her e i t appears that the pri nci pl e of
si mi l i tude breaks down, for i t woul d requi re that the charge on the el ec-
tr on be scal ed to the magnetron. I t seems not too unreasonabl e to
suppose that the noi se has some rel ati on to the shot effect, whi ch i nvol ~es
e rather than the quanti ty e/m, whi ch appears i n the scal i ng rel ati ohs.
Thus, wher e noi se i s i nvol ved, the scal i ng rel ati ons can be appl i ed onl y
wi th some degr ee of reservati on.
I n so far as noi se i s not i nvol ved, the speed of transi ents shoul d vary
i nversel y as t,. Accordi ng to Eq. (15)
(17)
The factor i n parentheses depends onl y on the shape of the resonant
system.
809. Observati ons and Di scussi on of Starti ng.-The observati ons .]
descri bed i n the fi rst part of thi s secti on wer e made on a magne~~ ,
desi gned especi al l y to demonstrate the starti ng of osci l l ati ons udder
the si mpl est possi bl e condi ti ons. (Thi s magnetron wi l l be r efer r ed @ i
as the LL3.) I t has a ver y l arge mode separati on, so that the pri nci pal
,;
mode i s exci ted at vol tages far bel ow those at whi ch the vari ous co
T% :
nents of the other modes mi ght occur ; thus, the operati on i n the pri nci pal
mode shoul d be, a pri ori , fr ee of i nteracti ons wi th those modes. ~ I n ~
addi ti on, the LL3 operates i n a conveni ent range of vol tages (3 to 10&)
and i s thus readi l y adaptabl e to a vari ety of demonstrati ons; c Se. ~~.j
v quentl y i t has been used for most of the i l l ustrati ons of thi s chap er .
;.
I t i s conveni ent to consi der the LL3 as the standard case and to di scuss
other tubes i n terms-of thei r devi ati ons from the standard.
The LL3 i s an ei ght-osci l l ator tube wi th anode di mensi ons i denti cal
wi th those of the 2J39 (LVS); namel y, T== 0.4 cm, T, = 0.15 cm, and
h = 1.20 cm. I t di ffers from the 2J39 i n havi ng doubl e unbroken ri ng
straps (i nstead of si ngl e br oken ri ngs) and i n, havi ng no i nternal pol e
pi eces. I ts (4/4/8)-mode i s at 11.3 cm; col d tests down to 7 cm fai l ed
to reveal any other mode. The tube can be made to osci l l ate at 5.5 cm,
and the vol tage of thi s mode i s consi stent wi th that of the (5/3/8)-mode.
The (V,l )-rel ati ons thus cor r espond to Fi g. 83c and d. Observed
steady-state (V,l )-di agrams are r epr oduced i n Fi gs. 8 18 and 821a.
The observati ons descri bed fi rst are those whi ch demonstrate the
exi stence of nonosci l l ati ng states between wi del y separated modes
and whi ch show that for a gi ven mode ther e i s a defi ni te range of vol tage,
qui te sharpl y defi ned both above and bel ow, wi thi n whi ch i t i s possi bl e
for osci l l ati ons to start. The nonosci l l ati ng state between modes i s
I
368
TRANSI ENT BEHAVI OR
[SEC. 8.9
shown cl earl y i n the steady-state (V,l )-di agram r epr oduced i n Fi g. 8.18.
Fi gure 821a demonstrates that when the magneti c fi el d i s too l ow to
permi t the exci tati on of the upper mode, the nonoscfi l ati ng state joi ns
conti nuousl y wi th the cutoff curve.
Fxa. S.33.CompI ete (V, D-traces for rapi dl y ri si ng appl i ed vol tage, for a seri es of
vol tages i ncreasi ng thrOugh the Os~~ati ng range.
Note the gap i n the descendi ng part of
the traces i n (d), (e), (J), and (u). where the tube makes an attemPt tO start.
(a)
Bel ow osci l l ati ons: (b) begi nni ng of osci l l ati ons; (c) end of osci l l ati ons; (d) al ternatel y
osci l l ati ng and mi sfi ri ng; (e) mi sfi ri ng; (f) mi sfi ri ng i nto cutoff (note that there i s no del ay
i n cur r ent); (g) mkdi ri ng i nto cutoff at hi gher vol tages. There i s sti l l no del ay i n cur r ent.
i n Fi g. 830a and b. Thi s seri es demonstrates that wi th such a pul se,
starti ng occurs onl y i n case the vol tage comes to rest wi thi n the starti ng
range.
I f the fi nal open-ci rcui t vol tage of the pul se i s above the starti ng
range, the vol tage remai ns wi thh the range for so short a ti me that
bui l dup does not make appreci abl e headway. The pi ctures wer e taken
SEC. 8$)] OBSERVATI ONS AND DI SCUSSI ON OF STARTI NG 369
wi th a &psec pul ser, and Fi g. 8.32a, a vol tage pul se bel ow the starti ng
range, shows that the enti re ri se occurs i n about 0.02 psec. Fi gure
8.32b shows a vol tage pul se wi thi n the starti ng range, and Fi g. 832c
shows the correspondi ng cur r ent pul se. The spi ke at the l eadi ng
edge of the cur r ent pul se represents the cur r ent requi red to charge 1 the
i nput capaci tance of the cathode ci rcui t as the vol tage ri ses and i s
especi al l y l arge i n thi s case because of the magni tude of cl V/dt at the
l eadi ng edge of the pul se; the correspondi ng devi ati on i n the (V,l )-trace
serves to di sti ngui sh the l eadi ng edge from the trai l i ng edge of the pul se.
Because the chargi ng cur r ent drops al most to zer o and then ri ses agai n,
i t may be seen that the space-charge cur r ent does not start to bui l d up
unti l the vol t age has practi cal l y ceased ri si ng. Fi gure 8.32b shows a
smal l hump on the begi nni ng of the vol tage pul se whi ch i s absent i n
Fi g. 8.32a; thi s hump resul ts from the vol tage dr op that occurs, because
of pul ser i mpedance, when the magnetron starts to draw current.
Fi gure 8.33 shows (V, I )-traces taken wi th pul ser vol tage i ncreasi ng
from just bel ow the starti ng range (Fi g. 8.33a) to wel l above i t (Fi g.
833g). The steady state correspondi ng to thi s seri es i s approxi matel y
l i ke that i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 8.21a. These traces wer e taken wi th the
magneti c fi el d just too l ow to permi t exci tati on of the upper mode.
For Fi g. 8.33d the vol tage was just at the top of the starti ng range;
duri ng a few pul ses osci l l ati ons start, but duri ng the majori ty they do
not, and the (V,l )-poi nt remai ns at the non osci l l ati ng state, whi ch l i es
on the cutoff curve. At a sl i ghtl y hi gher vol tage (Fi g. 8.33e), osci l l ati ons
i nvari abl y fai l to start duri ng the pul se, and at sti l l hi gher vol tages
(Fi g. 8.33j and g), the (V,l )-poi nt pr oceeds di rectl y to the cutoff curve.
I t shoul d be noti ced that when the vol tage reaches the cutoff curve,
cur r ent i s drawn i mmedi atel y-there i s no i ndi cati on of the del ay i n
cur r ent that i s evi dent when osci l l ati ons must start befor e the cur r ent
can bui l d up. The cur r ent pul ses (not r epr oduced) show that wi thi n
the osci l l ati on range, the del ay i n cur r ent i s subject to appreci abl e
vari ati ons; i t i s greatest at the extr emes of the starti ng range, wher e
i t i s equal to the pul se l ength and decreases fai rl y conti nuousl y toward
the mi drange wher e i t i s about 0.015 psec.
Further i ndi cati on of the extent of the starti ng range i s gi ven by the
behavi or obser-ved when the vol tage, havi ng passed by a mode at the
begi nni ng of a pul se, fal l s agai n i nto the starti ng range of that mode at
the end of the pul se, as has been assumed i n drawi ng Fi g. 8.30c. I f the
vol tage does not fal l too rapi dl y, the (V,l )-poi nt reaches the steady-
state characteri sti c and fol l ows i t to l ower vol tages. (Usual l y the sl ope
of the vol tage pul se has a much smal l er magni tude at the trai l i ng edge
of a pul se than i t does at the l eadi ng edge.) Thi s sort of path i s shown
I Thi s chargi ngcur r enthas not been taken i nto account i n Fi g, 83&z and h
370 TRANSI ENT BEHAVI OR [SEC. 8.4
ver y cl earl y i n Fi g. 8.34. I f the vol tage fal l s rapi dl y, onl y a sl i ght
devi ati on i n the (V, I )-trace occurs. Evi dence of starti ng at the trai l i ng
edge of the pul se may be seen i n Fi g. 8.33 even wi th the faster fal l i ng
FI G. 8.34.A compl ete (V,I) -trace of a mode ski p i n a magnetron operati ng fr om a
hard-tube pul ser. Note the gap i n the descendi ng part of the trace for the hi gher-vol tage
mode, where the l ower-vol tage mode bui l ds up. (The osci l l ati ons are due to a natural
resonance i n the pul ser.) The actual photograph (c) i s a resul t of the superposi ti on of two
(V, I )-paths represented by the traci ngs (a) and (b).
vol tage, but i n most of these photographs the devi ati on i s evi denced by
onl y a gap, si nce an exposur e ti me adapted to the sl ower parts of the
tr ace i s not l ong enough to regi ster the devi ati on, whi ch i s swept out
v
~
Fm. S.35.Effect of the
r -f l oad and pul ser i mpeda-
nce on mi ni mum steady-
state cur r ent. A i s for hi gh
pul ser i mpedance; B i s for
l ow pul ser i mpedance; and S
i s the starti ng vol tage.
rapi dl y and ther efor e appears onl y fai ntl y on
the osci l l oscope screen.
The l ower l i mi t of the starti ng range wi l l be
r efer r ed to as the starti ng vol tage; for the
LL3, as for most magnetrons, i t i s somewhat
gr eater than the mi ni mum vol tage for steady-
state osci l l ati on. Consequentl y, i f the open-
ci rcui t vol tage of the pul ser i s brought up just
to the starti ng vol tage, the steady-state cur r ent
i ncreases di sconti nuousl y, as i s shown by the
gap at the l ow-current end of the steady-state
characteri sti c of each mode i n Fi g. 8.18. The
mi ni mum cur r ent for steady-state operati on i s
i nfl uenced by the i mpedance of the pul ser and
by the r-f l oad on the ma~etron as i l l ustrated
i n Fi g. 8.35. I n drawi ng thi s fi gure, i t has
been assumed that the starti ng vol tage i s i ndependent of the r-f l oad;
whi l e thi s may not be exactl y true, vi sual observati ons of the (V, I )-traces
have shown that i t i s a moderatel y good approxi mati on. Fi gure 8.36,
a seri es of photographed (V, Z)-traces taken wi th vari ous resi stors
I
I
I
SEC. 8.9] OBSERVATI ONS AND DISCUSSION OF STARTING 371
i n seri es wi th the modul ator, shows how the mi ni mum steady-state
cur r ent decreases when the i nternal resi stance of the pul ser i s i ncreased.
I n terms of the conductance map, the general behavi or just descri bed
has been i nterpreted to mean that the constant-Ge contours bend upward
toward l ow currents, as i n the l ower l eft part of Fi g. 8.29. I t mi ght
FI G. 837.-The effect of paral l el capaci tance onthe shapes of the cur r ent and vol tage
pubes. (a) Vol tage andcurrent pul ses wi th no condenser. The fi rst part of the vol tage
pul se does not show because the sweep of the osci l l oscope i s tri ggered by the dri ver pul se
of the pul se generator. (b) Vol tage and cur r ent pul ses wi th 250 ##fi n paral l el wi th the
magnetron. (c) Vol tage and cur r ent pul ses wi th 1000 ppf i n paral l el .
further i ndi cati on that the magnetron characteri sti cs do not fal l uni -
forml ytoward ver y l owcurrents may be seen i n (V,l )-traces that show
the trai l i ng edge of the pul se, parti cul arl y Fi g. 8.38a and b. Ther e i t
appears that at a certai n mi ni mum cur r ent the (V,l )-poi nt suddenl y
changes i ts di recti on of moti on andas judged by the densi ty of the
traceal so i ts speed.
Observati ons that i ndi cate how starti ng behavi or i s i nfl uenced by
the speed wi th whi ch vol tage i s appl i ed to the magnetron are i l l ustrated
1Unfortunatel y, thi s seri es of traces does not cor r espond to the sequence of
Curves A to D of Fi g. 8,304 whi ch have been di scussed theoreti cal l y. For those
curves, i t was assumed that the reactance in the i nput ci rcui t of the magnetron was
negl i gi bl e, but i n the present seri es of traces the effects have been pr oduced enti rel y
by addi ng reactance to that ci rcui t. The demonstrati on woul d be mor e perti nent
i f the rate of ri se of vol tage had been control l ed enti rel y by modi fi cati ons i n the
dri ver of the pul ser.
,,
,
FI G. 8.39.A
(V, I )-tr ace fr om a
2J42 magnetron,
showi ng the at-
tempt to etart
made by the 10wer-
vol tage mode even
when the tube even-
tual l y osci l l ates i n
the hi gher-vol tage
mode. (Photograph
courteag of J . V.
Leba.wz.)
si derabl y sl ower than that of the ~-~sec pul ser used
for Fi gs. 8.32 and 8.33. The effect of the paral l el
capaci tance on the cur r ent and vol tage pul ses i s shown
i n Fi g. 8,37. Fi gure 8,38 shows the effect of the paral -
l el capaci tance i n reduci ng the over shoot of the
appl i ed vol tage. I n Fi g. 8.38c the rate of ri se of vol t-
age i s sl ow and the cur r ent bui l ds Up suddenl y when
the vol tage reaches the starti ng val ue; but when the
vol tage ri ses mor e rapi dl y (as i n Fi g. 838a), ther e i s
an i ncreasi ng tendency to over shoot the starti ng vol t-
age befor e the bui l dup of cur r ent sets i n. Fi gure
838d shows a steady-state characteri sti c correspondi ng
to Fi g. 8.38a.
A (V,l )-trace of the exact type of Cur ve C i n Fi g.
830b was not obser ved wi th the LL3 magnetron,
al though some attempt was made to pr oduce condi -
ti ons i n whi ch i t mi ght appear. However , such a
cur ve has been obser ved wi th a cl i ffer ent magnetron.
Fi gure 8.39 i s a reproducti on of a (V, I )-trace for a
2J42 (LVX) magnetron that gi ves unmi stakabl e evi dence
that a fal se start i s made on the ri si ng part of the trace.
8.10. Observati ons on R-f Bui l dup.-The resul ts just-descri bed, al ong
wi th the theoreti cal consi derati ons contai ned i n Sec. 8.8, gi ve a fai rl y
SEC. 810]
OBSERVATI ONS ON R-F BUI LDUP 373
,
r
general qual i tati ve understandi ng of the way osci l l ati ons start i n a
magnetron. However , the speed of the transi ents i n mi crowave mag-
netrons i s so great that a rather compl ete revi si on of the measuri ng
techni ques i s essenti al i f the subject i s to be put on a quanti tati ve footi ng.
The fol l owi ng experi ments, whi ch wer e i nterrupted by the end of the
war, r epr esent a start i n that di recti on. 1 They wer e made possi bl e by
1~
-5 0
+5 +10
+15X10-9
(a) Ti met i nsec
#m -
!?
V=4.6 kv
.s 400 -
/>
j 200 -
V=4.75 kv
%
a
+20
+25 +30 +35 +4OX1O-9
(b) Ti met i nsec
4 ~
v=4.75w J/=4,6~v
;~
:$2 f
~g
I
V= 4,3 kv
V=4.0 kv
I I
+20 +25 +30 +35 +4OX1O-9
(c) Ti met i nsec
FI Q. 8.40.The bui l dup of magnetron cur r ent and r -f vol tage through the operati ng
range of appl i ed vol tage. (a) Typi cal appl i ed vol tage; (b) envelopes of r -f osci l l ati ons for
di fferent vol tages; (c) tube cur r ents for di ffereut appl i ed vol tages. (The ordi nate i s the
vol tage devel oped at the osci l l ograph, and i s proportional to the r -f vol tage wi thi n the
magnetron.)
the devel opment of an osci l l ograph wi th a resol vi ng ti me smal l er
than 1010 sec. The i nstrument actual l y consi sts of thr ee osci l l ograph
systems that r ecor d on the same photographi c pl ate si mul taneousl y.
Thus i t i s possi bl e to r ecor d, for a si ngl e i sol ated pul se, the r-f output
and the i nput cur r ent and vol tage as functi ons of ti me.
1 For a more compl ete report of the experi ments, see R. C. Fl etcher and G. M. Lee,
NDRC 14-543, November 1945.
z By G. M. Lee, i n the I nsul ati on Research Laboratory of Massachusetts I nsti tute
of Technol ogy.
374 TRANSI ENT BEHAVI OR [SEC. 8.10
The ai m of these experi ments was to i nvesti gate the speed of bui l dup
as a functi on of the appl i ed vol tage. Thi s was to be done by appl yi ng a
rapi dl y ri si ng vol tage pul se, so that the bui l dup woul d occur at essenti al l y
(a)
(b)
~
,... ,,...
.,
- --v
p:>
-, .-
_.&k4@3L .
(c)
F~cA S.41.Typi cal osci l l ograms of
the hi gh-speed osci l l ograph. (a) Ap-
&~~ ~;f~~; (b) r -f osci l l ati ons; (c)
constant vol tage, as al ong path D k
Fi g. 8030a. From such resul ts, i t
woul d be possi bl e to der i ve G. as a
functi on of V in the nei ghborhood of
the ( ~ = O)-curve.
One seri es of experi ments was per -
formed wi th the +psec pul ser that
had been used for Fi gs. 8.32 and 8.33.
F@re 8.40 shows typi cal vol tage,
r-f and cur r ent pul ses as obtai ned
from measurements of osci l l ograms
l i ke those i n Fi g. 8.41. (The r-f and
cur r ent pul ses for 4.75 kv are pecul i ar
and wi l l be expl ai ned l ater. ) I t i s
evi dent that the pul ser i s rather sl ow
for the present purpose, for, as i s
shown by the overl appi ng of the charg-
i ng cur r ent and the bui l dup cur r ent
i n Fi g. 8.40c, the bui l dup of osci l l a-
ti ons has pr oceeded qui te far befor e
the appl i ed vol tage stops ri si ng.
The rate of bui l dup cap be r epr e-
sented conveni entl y bv dotti ng the
l ogari thm of the ampl i tude of successi ve osci l l ati ons- ag&t the ordl -
nal number of the cycl e, as i s done i n Fi g. 8.42 for the same traces
as wer e used for Fi g. 8.40. Wi thi n the l i mi ts of experi mental er r or ,
the curves (except that for 4.75 kv) approach a strai ght l i ne at l ow r-f
vol tages, whi ch i ndi cates that the osci l l ati ons bui l d up exponenti al l y
at fi rst, that i s, accordi ng to the l aw ~ a ec, wher e a i s posi ti ve. 1 From
the sl ope of the strai ght-l i ne porti on of the cur ve the bui l dup Q QB
may be computed accordi ng to the rel ati on
1 2.30 A l og,a ~.
. .
QB 27r AN
(18)
Val ues of Q, so obtai ned, from Fi g. 842 and from addi ti onal data of the
same sort, are pl otted agai nst V i n Fi g. 843. (Here V is taken equal to
the maxi mum val ue reached by the appl i ed vol tage.)
1I t shoul d be emphasi zedthat thi s l aw of bui l dup i s enti rel y di fferentfrom that
for a paral l el -resenantci rcui t suddenl y connected to a constant-currentsource, i n
whi ch ~ = (1 - e-t).
SEC. 8.10] OBL!J ERVATI OiVS ON R-F BUI LDUP 375
Above 4.6 kv the curves wer e pecul i ar, somewhat l i ke the 4.75-kv
cur ve of Fi g. 840, and i t waa not possi bl e to der i ve val ues of Q~ from
them. The hori zontal porti on of the 4.75-kv cur ve i n Fi g. 8.40b does
not r epr esent a tme stabl e state of osci l l ati on, for i t i s common at the
hi gher appl i ed vol tages for the curves to stop ri si ng and then start i n
10,OOO
Gm
4000 -
#
.**
2000
I
100
80
60
I
.
*4**..
G.*
#3** G
.*+4
/
q~e.
G9
# G*
. Y
GO
G
.0 G
G* V= :.:5 kv G*
G*
.:. G
b
G
G *
G
G
4 .
0
~
G
G *
70
G
A
9
G
G
b
,Oa,
70 100
i
Numberof r-fcycl es N
FI O. 8.42.Logari thmi c pl ots of the r -f envel opes shown i n I l g. S.40b.
agai n. Thi s behavi or may be i nterpreted to mean that the (V, Z)-poi nt
fol l ows a path that i s ver y nearl y tangent to the upper boundary of the
posi ti ve-~ re~on.
From the resul ts one can concl ude that the bui l dup i s exponenti al
i n i ts earl y stages, that Q~ i s about 25 i n the mi ddl e of the starti ng
range, and that Q~ tends to decr ease at l ower appl i ed vol tages. A
mor e compl ete anal ysi s woul d be di ffi cul t, because the appl i ed vol tage
376
TRANSI ENT BEHAVI OR
vari es consi derabl y duri ng bui l dup and i ts vari ati on
measured ver y preci sel y.
[SEC.8.11
woul d have to be
8.11. Effect of Desi gn and Operati on on Starti ng.-I n succeedi ng
paragraphs an attempt i s made to enumerate the vari ous factom enteri ng
30
28
.-26
&
b
m
2
==
m 24
22
20
3
0
0
0
0
0
I I I I I [
4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6
Vol tage i nkv
FI Q. 8.43.The bui l dup Q as a functi on of
appl i ed vol tage.
i nto the desi gn and operati on of
magnetrons that are rel ated to
starti ng and mi sfi ri ng. The di s-
cussi on appl i es onl y to cases i n
whi ch i nteracti ons between modes
are not i mportant. Accordi ng to
the consi derati ons of Sec. 8.8, i t
shoul d be possi bl e to r educe the
tendency toward mi sfi ri ng by (1)
i ncreasi ng the ampl i tude of the
noi se, (2) i ncreasi ng the rate of
bui l dup as measured by l/ QB,
and (3) i ncreasi ng the ti me i nter-
val duri ng whi ch the appl i ed vol t-
age remai ns wi thi n the starti ng
range. What e v e r i nformati on
ther e i s has to be obtai ned from
over-al l effects such as the l oca-
ti on of the cur r ent boundary on
the performance chart wher e mode
changes occur . Because detai l ed
observati ons are l acki ng, i t i s not
al ways possi bl e to form a ver y
cl ear pi cture of how the pri mary
factors m e n t i on e d above are
i nvol ved.
Some cauti on shoul d be exer -
ci sed i n drawi ng concl usi ons from
observati ons on mode changes.
For i nstance, i t has been rather common practi ce to descri be thi s as;ect
of magnetron performance by drawi ng a mode boundary on a per -
formance chart. The resul ts al ready presented show that thi s boundary
i s not a pr oper ty of the magnetron al one but rather of a speci fi c combi -
nati on of magnetron and pul ser. Al so, i t must be remembered that mi s-
fi ri ng i s a threshol d phenomenon and that just at the threshol d smal l
i nfl uences can l ead to l arge effects. Magnetrons that are pr one to ski p
modes are obvi ousl y those whi ch have at best a narrow margi n of start-
i ng speed, so i t shoul d not be surpri si ng i f such tubes pr ove sensi ti ve i n
some degr ee to al most any sort of vari ati on i n constructi on and operati ng
I
condi ti ons.
I
SEC. 8.11] PARAMETERS AFFECTI NG STARTI NG 377
I
I
The R-f Load.-Heavy l oads, accordi ng to general observati ons,
resul t i n a reducti on of the cur r ent at whi ch mi sfi ri ng takes pl ace.
Thi s behavi or i s not at al l surpri si ng, but the pri mary factors l i sted
r
above seem to enter i n a rather obscure fashi on. Ther e i s perhaps some
reason to bel i eve that the l oad shoul d not have a strong effect on the noi se
l evel . At l east, i f the noi se does behave l i ke the shot effect, the vol tage
ampl i tude of the noi se shoul d depend on the effecti ve capaci tance of the
ci rcui t and not on i ts Q. Furthermore, Q. shoul d not be strongl y
affected by such changes i n l oad as are ordi nari l y met. For i nstance,
i f i t i s assumed that QB i s equal to 25 when the l oaded Q i s equal to
150, the rel ati on between Q. and Q. i s as i ndi cated i n Tabl e 8.1.
v
TABLE 8.1.RELATI ON BETWEEN QL AND QB
QL
300 150 100 75 50 30
QB
23 25 27 30 37 75
Ordi nari l y, such extr eme l oads as are r epr esented by the l ast two col umns
i n Tabl e 8.1 are not appl i ed i n practi ce. Thus i t appears that the mor e
i mportant di rect effects of heavy l oads are to restri ct somewhat the
starti ng range and, mor e i mportant, to rai se the steady-state charac-
*
teri sti c, so that a hi gher vol tage must be appl i ed to the tube i n or der to
obtai n a gi ven current.
F
I t i s common i n experi mental wor k and i n testi ng to vary the l oad
by means of transformers i n the output transmi ssi on l i ne. When rapi d
transi ents are i nvol ved, the effect of the transformer can be expected
to depend qui te appreci abl y on the di stance between the transformer
and the coupl i ng l oop. I f the refl ecti on coeffi ci ent at the magnetron
i s equal to q for steady-state osci l l ati ons, then for osci l l ati on i ncreasi ng i n
ampl i tude as exp ( ,ut/2QB), the refl ecti on coeffi ci ent i s equal to q
exp (ti l /u ~Q~), w~er e 00 i s the gr oup vel oci ty i n the transmi ssi on l i ne
1 and 1 i s the di stance from the magnetron to the transformer. I n coaxi al
l i ne, v, = ko/%, and the factor i s exp (2m?/AQB); for l/k = 1, whi ch
mi ght appl y to a fi xed transformer put as cl ose as possi bl e to the mag-
netron, the refl ecti on coeffi ci ent i s r educed i n the rati o of 0.78; and for
i /i = 5, whi ch mi ght appl y to a test bench wi th a standi ng-wave detector
between the magnetron and a vari abl e transformer, the factor i s 0.28
i f Q~ i s assumed to be 25.
The Eflective Capacitance of the Resonant Circuit .Other thi ngs bei ng
equal , the speed of bui l dup i s i nversel y proporti onal to the capaci tance C.
I n addi ti on i t seems l i kel y that the capaci tance i nfl uences the ampl i tude
of the noi se vol tage; for i n so far as one can judge by the behavi or of
the shot effect, the ampl i tude of the noi se vol tage shoul d be i nversel y
proporti onal to C. Thus, from the standpoi nt of starti ng, i t i s desi rabl e
378 TRANSI ENT BEHAVI OR [SEC. 8.11
that C be made smal l . On the other hand, i f C i s made smal l and at
the same ti me the l oadi ng i s adjusted for hi gh effi ci ency, the frequency
becomes unstabl e agai nst changes i n l oad, so that some compromi se has
to be made.
At fi rst thought i t mi ght be expected that hi ghl y stabi l i zed mag-
netronsfor i nstance, those whi ch have an external stabi l i zi ng cavi ty
woul d tend to start ver y sl owl y, si nce the effecti ve capaci tance i s i ncreased
i n proporti on to the stabi l i zati on factor. Actual l y the stabi l i zi ng
resi stor that i s used i n such arrangements to damp out extraneous
resonances must to some extent i sol ate the magnetron from the hi gh-Q
10QT
80
%
8
gw
\
.E
~
.E 40
#
20
0
0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.55
fva
(b)
FI G. S.44.Efl ect of cathode di ameter on (a) mi sfi ri ng and (b) effi ci ency. Ci rcl es are for
45 per cent l oop; tri angl es for 60 per cent l oop.
cavi ty as far as rapi d transi ents are concerned. There shoul d be some
tendency for the magnetron to bui l d up at nearl y i ts normal rate and for
equi l i bri um between the magnetron and the cavi ty to be establ i shed more
Sl owl y.
D~a?neter oj the Cathode.I t has been obser ved wi th several types of
magnetrons that i ncreasi ng the di ameter of the cathode reduces the
tendency toward mi sfi ri ng. Thi s effect i s i l l ustrated by Fi g. 8.44a,
whi ch represents data obtai ned at the Bel l Tel ephone Laboratori es 1for an
ei ght-osci l l ator 25-cm magnetron. The curves of Fi g. 8.45fI show the
effect of the cathode di ameter on the effi ci ency and demonstrate, i n
accor d wi th general observati on, that enl argi ng the cathode tends al so
to r educe the effi ci ency of the magnetron, so that agai n the desi gn must
be based on a compromi se.
1H. D. Hagstrum, W. B. Hebenstrei t, and A. E. Whi tcomb, On the Maxi mum
CurrentLi mi tati on Encounteredi n L-band Magnetrons, Case 24375-2, BTL Memo-
randum MM-45-2940-2, June 25, 1945.
SEC.8.11] PARAMETERS AFFECTI NG STARTI NG 379
Cuthode-tmd Structures. Some experi ments by Forsbergl i ndi cate
that the detai l s of the structures at the ends of the cathodeput ther e
for the purpose of confi ni ng the el ectrons to the i nteracti on space-
exer t a consi derabl e i nfl uence on the tendency to mi sfi re. The experi -
ments started from the observati on that a parti al correl ati on coul d be
made between cur r ent at onset of mi sfi ri ng and l eakage current;
some of the tubes that had the l east tendency to mi sfi re wer e those whi ch
had a steady-state characteri sti c that fel l off gradual l y at l ow currents,
mor e or l ess as i l l ustrated by Cur ve A i n Fi g. 8.45, rather than ones wi th
a sharp break such as i s i ndi cated by Cur ve B. Attenti on was then
di r ected toward i nventi ng end structures that woul d accentuate the
l eakage but woul d not r~duce the effi ci ency
wher e the tube normal l y operated. I t was
found that a sl i ght enl argement of the cathode
for a smal l di stance at the ends ser ved the
purpose. The l eakage was effecti ve onl y i f i t
occur r ed wi thi n the i nteracti on space. Larger
end di sks wer e retai ned to confi ne the space
charge; detai l s of the structures are descri bed
i n Chap. 12. Forsberg further found some
i ndi cati on that the tubes whi ch showed the
l east i ncl i nati on to mi sfi re al so had the greatest
noi se l evel s; hi s curves i ndi cated di fferences
as great as 20 db. However , the observati ons
wer e not suffi ci entl y detai l ed to warrant the
concl usi on that thi s i s the onl y effect whi ch i s i nvol ved.
Cathode Em&i on.-Wi th some magnetrons, the tendency to mi sfi re
i s cor r el ated to some extent wi th l ow pri mary emi ssi on of el ectrons
from the cathode. However , i t i s di ffi cul t to understand why the
tendency to mi sfi re shoul d be ver y much affected by the condi ti on of the
cathode unl ess the condi ti on i s ver y poor , for the observati ons wi th
the (V, Z)-scope i ndi cate that the condi ti ons l eadi ng to ei ther mi sfi ri ng
or compl ete bui l dup are establ i shed befor e the cur r ent has bui l t up ver y
far. (Of course, a correl ati on shoul d be expected i f what i s occurri ng
i s a mode shift earl y i n the pul se.) Otherwi se i t may be a secondary
effect-for i nstance, i f i nadequate emi ssi on rai ses the steady-state
characteri sti c (as i n Fi g. 8.20), i t wi l l al so resul t i n the appl i cati on of a
hi gher vol tage when compari son i s made on the basi s of constant
steady-state current. Magnetrons that do not ordi nari l y ski p modes
(presumabl y those whi ch start ver y rapi dl y) seem general l y to functi on
sati sfactori l y even when the pri mary emi ssi on of the cathode i s ver y
l ow.
t Accordi ngto pri vate communi cati onfrom P. W. Forsberg,
i n the range of currents
FI Q. S.45.A study of mi s-
fi ri ng based on steady-state
characteri sti cs. Tubes of
Type A show more tendency to
mi sfi re than tubes of Type B.
380 TRANSI ENT .I I EHA VI OR [SEC. 8.12
Uniformity oj the Magnelic Fi el d. -Nonhomogenei ti es i n the magneti c
fi el d can have a pronounced effect on the tendency to mi sfi re. For
i nstance, the 2J39 was i mproved to a marked degr ee by maki ng a sl i ght
change i n the magnet pol es that r educed the excess of magneti c fi el d
at the ends of the i nteracti on space. The ori gi nal i nhomogenei ty
presumabl y caused a strong concentrati on of the space charge at the
mi ddl e of the i nteracti on space. Effects of nonuni form and nonaxi al
fi el ds on starti ng have been obser ved on many occasi ons.
The Pul ser.The pri nci pal means avai l abl e for cor r ecti ng mi sfi ri ng
i n any compl eted magnetron i s control of the i nput condi ti ons. I f i t can
be so arranged that the open-ci rcui t vol tage of the pul ser fal l s wi thi n
the starti ng range, no di ffi cul ty wi th mi sfi ri ng shoul d be exper i enced;
I
but when the magnetron has to be oper ated at a rel ati vel y hi gh current,
or when the use of a hi gh-i mpedance pul ser i s di ctated by other con-
si derati ons, ther e exi sts some possi bi l i ty that mi sfi ri ng may occur .
To el i mi nate the mi sfi ri ng, one must, i n essence, r educe the rate at whi ch
vol tage i s appl i ed to the magnetron, but thi s i s onl y a qual i tati ve state-
ment of the requi rements. A preci se statement of the condi ti ons just
suffi ci ent to ensure rel i abl e starti ng coul d be made onl y on the basi s
of a thorough understandi ng of the effects of the reactance i n the i nput
ci rcui t. An anal ysi s of these effects coul d be made by extendi ng the
methods devel oped i n Sec. 8,8, but such a program woul d undoubtedl y
f
i nvol ve ver y extensi ve cal cul ati ons. For further di scussi on of pul sers,
the r eader i s r efer r ed to Vol . 5 of the Radi ati on Laboratory Seri es.
\
8.12. I nteracti ons between Modes.The precedi ng secti ons have
deal t wi th a mor e or l ess i deal magnetronone purposel y desi gned to
have so great a mode separati on that as far as operati on i n the pri nci pal
mode was concer ned, the exi stence of other modes coul d be i gnored
compl etel y. I n practi ce, magnetrons have to be desi gned to meet other
speci fi cati ons, and i t may be i mpossi bl e, wi th exi sti ng techni ques, to
meet those speci fi cati ons and at the same ti me make the mode separati on
great enough to ful fi l l the condi ti on menti oned above. Ther efor e i t i s :
i mportant to i nqui re how, i n such cases, the transi ent beha}-i or and the
stabi l i ty of the pri nci pal mode can be affected by i nteracti ons wi th other ,
modes, even though thk i nqui ry must be l argel y specul ati ve.
I t seems obvi ous that an i nteracti on between modes must i ntroduce
a consi derabl e addi ti onal degr ee of compl exi ty i nto the phenomena
tr eated i n Sees. 88 and 8.9, so perhaps i t shoul d not be surpri si ng that
rel i abl e experi mental data are exceedi ngl y scarce. I n most of the earl y
wor k on mode sel ecti on, i t seems that i t was taken for granted that any
mode change coul d be i nterpreted excl usi ~rel y i n terms of an i nteracti on
between the two modes. Si nce i t i s now known that mi sfi ri ng and
1
i nstabi l i ty can occur enti rel y i ndependentl y of such causes, al l concl usi ons
SEC.8.12] I NTERACTI ONS BETWEEN MODES 381
abmt i nteracti on whi ch are based on the mer e observati on that a mode
change does or does not take pl ace shoul d be r egar ded wi th skepti ci sm.
I f one excl udes from consi derati on purel y el ectromagneti c i nter-
acti ons whi ch can be i nvesti gated by col d-resonance methods, an i nter-
acti on between modes can take pl ace under normal operati ng condi ti ons
(i .e., no external sour ce of r-f power ) onl y i f two modes are exci ted si mul -
taneousl y by the space charge. The si mul taneous exci tati on of two
modes occurs onl y as a transi ent, for as had been menti oned previ ousl y i n
thi s chapter, i t i s never obser ved under steady-state condi ti ons. 1 Evi -
dentl y the nonl i neari ti es of the space charge are of such a nature that
osci l l ati on i n two modes represents an unstabl e condi ti on when the
r
ampl i tudes of osci l l ati on become l arge.
Ways i n whi ch an i nstabi l i ty of thi s sort may come about can be
i l l ustrated by extendi ng the anal ysi s outl i ned i n Sec. 8.8 to i ncl ude
si mul taneous osci l l ati on i n two modes. I t i s assumed that one has to
deal wi th two modes that have
Mode1
di fferent val ues of n and that no ~-
4I
i nteracti on other than that whi ch
t
~, Y,
enters through the space charge
1) ,
need be consi dered. Because the
v Space
charge Mode2
modes have di fferent frequenci es
)
f
; and thei r el ectromagneti c fi el ds 4I
q, Y2
L
are of di sti nct types, the exci ta-
1I
1
ti on of each mode can be charac-
teri zed by an r-f vol tage and an
FI G. 8.46.Equi val ent ci rcui t for the si mul -
el ectroni c admi ttance. The ad-
taneouaexci tati onof two modes.
mi ttance for frequenci es i n the nei ghborhood of the resonance of a
mode behaves l i ke that of a paral l el -resonant ci rcui t; thus the compl ete
system can be r epr esented by the equi val ent ci rcui t shown i n Fi g. 8.46.
The nonl i neari ty of the space charge, whi ch for one mode i s expressed
by the dependence of the admi ttance on the r-f vol tage, i s for two modes
expressed by a dependence of each of the admi ttances on both r-f vol tages
as wel l as upon the i nput vol tage 1. I n addi ti on, the i nput cur r ent i s
dependent on both r-f vol tages as wel l as upon the i nput vol tage V. The
magneti c fi el d enters as a parameter that need not be expressed, and
the el ectroni c susceptance may be i gnored, because smal l shi fts i n fr e-
quency are not of i nterest. Thus the space charge can be descri bed by
the rel ati ons
G., = G.,(V, ~], V,),
(19)
G., = G.,(V, ~1,-~2),
(20)
I = 1(V, VI , v,). (21)
1The observati onof a rel ati ve]y weak noi se spectrumat the frequency of a second
mode i s not consi dered to i ndi cate exci tati on i n the present sense.
382 TRANSIENT BEHAVIOR [Sm. 8.12,
The transi ent behavi or i s gover ned by the rel ati ons
$l n Vl =
(G,, + GM),
2C1
$l n Vz=
(G., + %),
2C2
(22)
(23)
v = V(l,t), (24)
wher e Eq. (24) descri bes the properti es of the pul ser.
Some i dea of the nature of the sol uti ons of the above set of equati ons
can be obtai ned by fol l owi ng through a somewhat i deal i zed speci al case
whi ch can be tr eated by graphi cal methods. I t i s assumed that the open-
ci rcui t vol tage of the pul ser ri ses so rapi dl y that i t can be approxi mated
#
by a step functi on, wi th the resul t that the enti re bui l dup takes pl ace
al ong a fi xed cur ve-the steady-state pul ser characteri sti ci n the
(V,l )-pl ane, and Eq. (24) can be repl aced by
v = v j(I ). (25)
(Thi s i s the anal ogue of the case r epr esented by Cur ve D of Fi g. 8.30a.)
By combi ni ng Eqs. (21) and (25), 1 can be el i mi nated and V can be
expressed as a functi on of ~1 and ~Z; consequentl y G,l and G,i can be
expressed as functi ons of VI and ~z onl y. Thus when substi tuti ons
correspondi ng to Eq. (7) are made, Eqs. (22) and (23) take the forms
4
:$2 = <2(41,42).
(27)
The cour se of the transi ent can be fol l owed by traci ng the path of the
poi nt (t1,40) i n the (rl ,~j)-pl ane; the di fferenti al equati on for the path i s
d+,
_ = t1(#1,$2).
d$,
t2(#l,#2)
(28)
The sol uti on of Eq. (28) wi l l contai n the i ni ti al val ues of ~, and ~z whi ch
r epr esent the noi se vol tages that exi st i n the r especti ve modes at the ti me
bui l dup starts.
I f the functi ons ~1and ~z are r epr esented by a contour map, the sol u-
ti ons can be traced out as i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 8.47. The i ni ti al noi se
vol tages i n the r especti ve modes can be r epr esented by a densi ty di stri bu-
ti on of poi nts (~l ,~z) o (whi ch presumabl y are concentrated somewher e
1Equati on (28) and di agrams of the general type of Fi g. 8.47 wer e ori gi nal l y
appl i ed to the presentprobl emby Arnol d Nordsi ecki n some i nformal l ecturesat the
Radi ati on Laboratory.
SEC. 8.12] iNTERACTI ONS BETWEEN MODES 383
i n the l ower l eft regi on of Fi g. 8.47). The probabi l i ty that the system
wi l l fol l ow some path that l i es between any two gi ven paths i s di rectl y
proporti onal to the number of poi nts (tl ,tz) o that are contai ned between
those two paths; thi s i s the form of the fi nal resul t.
The contours of $1 and $2 i n Fi g. 847 have been drawn on the basi s
of the fol l owi ng consi derati ons. I t seems enti rel y reasonabl e to suppose
that when ei ther r-f vol tage i s smal l , the space charge shoul d be l i near
[,=3
E,=2 t,=l t,:o El =-l
Fx~. S.47.Contoum of t, and ~, i n the (~,,#z)-pl ane.
wi th r espect to that vol tage. Thus, when ~, i s smal l , both .h and h
are i ndependent of ~,, and the dependence of [2 on *Z i s the same as i f
Mode 1 di d not exi st. I t i s further assumedand thi s i s open to questi on
that when & and & are both l arge so that nonl i near effects become
i mportant, the dependence of & on $ ~i s str onger than i ts dependence on
$z; similarly with the subscri pts i nterchanged. Fi gure 8.47 i s supposed
to r epr esent a case i n whi ch the two modes woul d have nearl y coi nci dent
conductance maps i f i nteracti ons wer e not present and i n whi ch the pul ser
characteri sti c passes near the center s of the starti ng ranges.
I
384
TRAN,qI ENT I I EHA VI OR [%c. 8.12 ;
Accordi ng to Fi g. 8.47 the system has zer o probabi l i ty of arri vi ng at
the i ntersecti on of the (~ = 0)-contours-whi ch concei vabl y mi ght
r epr esent a stabl e state of si mul taneous osci l l ati on i n two modesbecause
out of the i nfi ni ty of orbi ts l eavi ng the l ower l eft part of the di agram,
onl y one orbi t pr oceeds to the i ntersecti on. Thi s resul t i s a consequence
of the fact that the contours have been drawn i n such a way that certai n
requi rements for stabi l i ty are not ful fi l l ed at the i ntersecti on. By maki ng
approxi mati ons si mi l ar to those made i n deri vi ng Eq. (12), i t can be
shown that operati on at the i ntersecti on can be stabl e onl y i f the fol l owi ng
condi ti ons are ful fi l l ed at that poi nt:
*,+*,<o
at, at, a~1at2 ___>o.
a+, a*2 a*2 a$,
(29)
I f these condi ti ons are ful fi l l ed, orbi ts that pass wi thi n the nei ghborhood
of the i ntersecti on wi l l al so reach the i ntersecti on. I n so far as si mul -
taneous steady osci l l ati on i n two modes i s not observed, i t woul d appear
that rel ati ons (29) are i n contradi cti on to some i nherent pr oper ty of the
space charge. A mor e ri gorous treatment of the i nput ci rcui t woul d
undoubtedl y l ead to addi ti onal requi rements for stabi l i ty.
A further devel opment woul d consi st i n fi ndi ng how the mode sel ec-
ti on i s i nfl uenced by operati ng condi ti ons such as the magneti c fi el d,
the r-f l oads on the r especti ve modes, the open-ci rcui t vol tage and the
i nternal resi stance of the pul ser. Al l of these vari abl es enter i nto the
val ues of .&as parameters; i n addi ti on, some of them may i nfl uence
the noi se di stri buti on. Sti l l other probl ems ari se i n ~connecti on wi th the
desi gn of magnetrons, and one mi ght i nqui re how the val ues of ~ and
thus the mode sel ecti on are i nfl uenced by the separati on of the modes and
the character of thei r fi el d patterns i n the i nteracti on space.
So far, the di scussi on has been based on an i deal i zati on, namel y,
that the bui l dup occurs al ong a stati onary pul ser characteri sti c. As
shown i n the cl osi ng paragraphs of Sec. 8.9, thi s approxi mate i on i s rather
poor . Wi th an appl i ed vol tage that ri ses duri ng bui l dup, the val ues of
f depend expl i ci tl y on the ti me, and the contours of Fi g. 8.47 have to be
thought of as movi ng about duri ng the transi ent. An i mportant probl em
that ari ses i n thi s connecti on i s that of the effect of mode i nteracti ons
on starti ng ti me. For i nstance, as between two modes that i nteract,
the undesi red mode may never wi n out, but the i nteracti on may have the
effect of sl owi ng down the bui l dup to such an extent that ther e i s an
abnormal l y great tendency toward mi sfi ri ng. Or the i nteracti on mi ght
concei vabl y pr oduce the opposi te effect.
I nasmuch as the strappi ng of magnetrons has r ecei ved much promi -
SEC. 812] I NTERACTI ONS BETWEEN MODES 385
nence as a devi ce for control l i ng mode sel ecti on, i t seems wor th \rhi l e
to consi der how the functi ons of the straps are rel ated to the consi dera-
ti ons advanced above. The pri mary functi on of the straps undoubtedl y
i s to ti ghten the coupl i ng between the i ndi vi dual osci l l ators of the cavi ty;
thi s effect natural l y resul ts al so i n i ncreased separati ons between the
frequenci es of the modes. I n addi ti on, the straps afford the possi bi l i ty
of exerci si ng some measure of control over the l oadi ng of the vari ous
modes and over thei r patterns i n the i nteracti on space. Symmetri cal
straps, such as unbroken ri ngs, regul ari ze the patterns of al l the modes.
Asymmetri cal straps, such as br oken ri ngs, separate the members of the
doubl et modes from each other i n frequency and tend to deter i or ate the
patterns of al l the modes; however , the asymmetri es can be so desi gned
as to di stort the (N/2)-mode much l ess than the other modes. The
ori entati on of the asymmetri es, rel ati ve to the coupl i ng l oop, determi nes
whether onl y one or both of the members of a separated doubl et wi l l
be coupl ed to the external l oad.
I n so far as ther e maybe present some i nteracti on between the (N/2)-
mode and an undesi red mode, i t woul d seem advantageous to di stort
the pattern of the unwanted mode and thus handi cap that mode.
I n addi ti on i t woul d seem desi rabl e that the unwanted mode shoul d be
damped to some extent by bei ng coupl ed to the external l oad. On
the basi s of these arguments, strap breaks have been i ncorporated
i nto many magnetrons. I n most cases, the i ntroducti on of the breaks
defi ni tel y affects the behavi or of the magnetron, but ther e are not
avai l abl e suffi ci ent data to show whether the effects are attri butabl e to
the patterns, the l oadi ng, the removal of the degeneracy, or si mpl y
the qui te appreci abl e change i n mode separati on that occurs when the
straps are broken. Certai nl y strap breaks shoul d not be consi dered at
al l as a r emedy for mi sfi ri ng i n the type of si tuati on presented by the
LL3.
The mode that usual l y gi ves troubl e of the sort that mi ght be
r n-l /$-mode, fri tso
attri buted to an i nteracti on i s the ~ + 1
happens that i n many magnetrons thi s mode and the
(:/$/N)-mode
have nearl y equal val ues of ~k, and thus have overl appi ng starti ng ranges.
The val ues of -yx are exactl y equal when the wavel ength of the
($+1/:- / )
1 N -mode i s just N/(N + 2) ti mes that of the
G/:/ )
N -modefor i nstance, 0.8 for ei ght osci l l ators, 0.86 for
twel v~andi t so happens that i n hi gh-vol tage magnetrons i t i s di ffi cul t to
386
ZI tA~S1l ;l VZ BEHA VI OI t
[SEC. 8.12
make the mode separati on ver y di fferent from thi s val ue.
Mor eover , the
(:+A / )
1 N -mode frequentl y seems to have consi derabl e
vi tal i ty.
One type of behavi or i s common to the fol l owi ng magnetrons: 2J38,
2J39, 4J33, and 720. I n al l these magnetrons the
(G+l /~ - /N)-
mode has a sl i ghtl y l arger 7X (l ower vol tage) than the
G/:/$-
mode, and the straps have breaks.
Al l of the tubes exhi bi t mode changes
at l ow currents; that i s to say, the
(:+1/:- l /N)-modei sexci ted
i f attempts are made to run the tube at too l ow a cur r ent i n the
(wN)-mOde
To some extent, the behavi or can be i nterpreted
on the basi s of the starti ng vol tages.
I f the appl i ed vol tage i s above
thestartingvotage of the(J+ /:- /N)-modebut
Ofthwv )
N , the for mer i s exci ted; i f the appl i ed vol tage enters
restarting range fhe(w)
I
N -mode, that mode takes control .
From thi s argument one shoul d expect that wi th a ver y sl ow ri se of
O1tageOperatiOninthe(~ /N / )
+ 1 ~ 1 N -mode coul d be pushed to
hi gher currents. Exami nati on of the (V, I )-traces of a 2J32 magnetron,
however , showed that ver y compl i cated i ntrapul se transi ti ons occur r ed.
Wi th a mor e rapi d rate of ri se of vol tage, the starti ng behavi or of these
magnetrons i n the normal operati ng range i s l i ke that of the LL3.
The 725 and 2J42 magnetrons have mode separati ons si mi l ar to
those of the tubes l i sted above and have br oken straps, but these tubes
show no tendency at al l to osci l l ate i n the
(G+l /:- /N)-mode
Omi ssi on of the strap breaks i n the 2J42 was found to have no efl ect
on i ts behavi or. Qual i tati vel y, the starti ng i n these tubes i s enti rel y
si mi l ar to that of the LL3, al though the 725 starts so rapi dl y that i t i s
exceedi ng] y di ffi cul t to make i t mi sfi re.
A thi rd type of behavi or was obser ved i n two experi mental
4J33 magnetrons from whi ch strap breaks had been omi tted. The
(wN)-andG+/~- / )
1 N -modes had vol tages so nearl y
G
SEC.812] I NTERACTI ONS BETWEEN MODES 387
equal that they coul d just be di sti ngui shed i n the (V,l )-scope. Ther e
was a ski p between these two modes, qui te i ndependentl y of whether a
rapi dl y or sl owl y ri si ng pul se was appl i ed, and both modes persi sted to
ver y hi gh currents. Apparentl y thi s i s a case i n whi ch two modes
overl ap so per fectl y that the i nteracti on di agram (Fi g. 847) pr eser ves
i ts general symmetry for al l possi bl e posi ti ons of the pul ser characteri sti c.
The fi rst and l ast sets of exampl es gi ve some i ndi cati on of how the
effect of i nteracti on depends upon the mode separati on, al though the
di fference between the
pl ai ned. I t woul d not
that woul d account for
fi rst and second set of exampl es remai ns unex-
seem too di ffi cul t to i nvent i nteracti on di agrams
thepecul i ar phenomena i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 8.16.
CHAPTER 9
NOI SE
BY F. F. RI EKE
9.1. I ntroducti on.-The probl ems that i nvol ve the noi se-generati ng
properti es of the magnetron appear to be of two rather di sti nct types.
I n one sort of probl em the noi se i s of i nterest as the starti ng poi nt for
the bui l dup of coher ent osci l l ati ons.
I n the other type of probl em the
noi se i s of concer n as one of the factors i n the si gnal -to-noi se rati o of the
steady-state osci l l ati ons of the magnetron.
I t i s emphasi zed i n Chap. 8 that the starti ng ti me of a magnetron
bears a cl ose rel ati on to the maxi mum rate at whi ch the i nput vol tage
can be appl i ed wi thout causi ng the magnetron to mi sfi re.
The starti ng
ti me, i n turn, i s determi ned by two factors, each equal l y i mportant,
namel y, the noi se-l evel from whi ch the bui l dup of osci l l ati ons starts and
the rate of bui l dup. Thus the matter of noi se generati on enters i nto the
probl em of mode sel ecti on, and i t was pri mari l y i n thi s connecti on that
studi es of noi se i n magnetrons was taken up i n the Radi ati on Laboratory.
A rather speci al probl em, cl osel y rel ated to the mor e general one just
menti oned, i s concer ned wi th the practi cabi l i ty of establ i shi ng phase
coher ence between successi ve pul ses by pri mi ng the pul sed magnetron
wi th power deri ved from a stabl e sour ce of c-w osci l l ati ons. An i mpor-
tant consi derati on i n any appl i cati on of thi s devi ce i s the amount of
c-w power requi red to ensure a speci fi ed degr ee of coher ence. I t seems
reasonabl e to suppose that the vol tage from whi ch bui l dup starts i s the
vector sum of the c-w vol tage (of constant phase) and the noi se vol tage
(of random phase). On thk basi s the c-w power requi red to ensure a
gi ven degr ee of coher ence between the pul ses can be rel ated to the
noi se-power normal l y present i n the magnetron.
The second type of probl emthat of si gnal -tcmoi se rati o-was
encounter ed (i n the RCA Laboratori es) i n devel opi ng a c-w magnetron
for a speci al sort of radar that requi red part of the transmi tted si gnal to
be fed i nto the r ecei ver as l ocal -osci l l ator power . I n thi s case the over-al l
si gnal -t~noi se rati o of the system i s strongl y dependent upon that of the
transmitter, a ci rcumstance qui te di fferent from the one met wi th i n the
mor e conventi onal pul se radars. Al though the case just menti oned i s a
rather speci al i zed one, si mi l ar probl ems ver y l i kel y wi l l be encounter ed i n
any attempt to adapt magnetrons for use as l ocal osci l l ators, and i t i s
388
I
*
I
I
sEc. 9.2] PREOSCI LLA TI ON NOI SE
389
I
not unl i kel y that the magnetron wi l l be gi ven seri ous consi derati on for
that purpose for frequenci es somewhat above 30,000 Me/see. I n addi -
ti on, ther e i s al ready some i ndi cati on that si gnal -to-noi se rati o i n mag-
netr on transmi tters wi l l be an i mportant consi derati on i n the adaptati on
of these tubes to wi deband communi cati on systems.
Consi dered from a mor e theoreti cal standpoi nt, studi es of noi se may
provi de an addi ti onal means of i nvesti gati ng condi ti ons wi thi n the
el ectr on stream i n the magnetron, a matter far from settl ed by exi sti ng
theoreti cal treatments. Thi s possi bi l i ty has been poi nted out previ ousl y
i n a paper by Li nderl on the eval uati on of the el ectr on temperature i n
si ngl e-anode magnetrons. Li nder found that pr obe measurements and
al so the resul ts of an anal ysi s of the cutoff curves i n si ngl e-anode mag-
netrons i ndi cated el ectr on temperatures of the or der of 1050, and he
suggested that so hi gh a degr ee of di sorder i n the el ectr on stream shoul d
al so mani fest i tsel f i n the noi se-generati ng properti es of the magnetron.
The actual i nvesti gati on of noi se i n magnetrons has been taken up
onl y recentl y, however , and i t i s not possi bl e to di scuss the subject wi th
ver y much assurance. I t i s hoped, neverthel ess, that the present chapter
may be of val ue i n gi vi ng some i ndi cati on of the present status of the
subject.
9.2. Preosci l l ati on Noi se.The noi se that occurs i n magnetrons
befor e coher ent osci l l ati ons start i s of practi cal i nterest i n connecti on wi th
pul sed magnetrons. Because of experi mental dMi cul ti es, however , i t
was possi bl e to make onl y cr ude measurements of the noi se i n pul sed
magnetrons. Condi ti ons for measurement are much better i n the case
of c-w tubes; and as ther e i s no fundamental di fference between the two
ki nds of magnetron, the c-w measurements wi l l be descri bed i n gr eater
detai l .
The measurements wer e made on a seri es of tubes that had si mi l ar
osci l l ator structures but vari ed consi derabl y i n the constructi on of the
hats, or end di sks, pl aced at the ends of the cathode to confi ne the
el ect r on stream to the i nteracti on space. (I t was not apparent that
these modi fi cati ons caused any si gni fi cant di fferences i n the behavi or
of the noi se.) The magnetron was pumped conti nuousl y. A spectrum
anal yzer, wi th a pass band of 0.1 Me/see, was used to measure both the
power and the bandwi dth (between hal f-power poi nts) of the noi se.
I n computi ng the noi se power , the power per uni t frequency i nterval
obser ved at the center of the spectrum was mul ti pl i ed by 7r/2 X W,
wher e W is the wi dth of the spectrum i n megacycl es per second between
hal f-power poi nts.
1Li nder, E. G., J our. Appkkd Phys., 9, 331 (1938).
zThe magnetron was a 9. S-cm, 20-osci l l ator tube, wi th VO = 175 vol ts, Do = 399
gauss, 10 = 0.31 amp.
390 NOI SE [SEC. 9.2
The resul ts of a representati ve experi ment are shown i n Fi g. 9.1,
wher e bandwi dth, power , an d i nput cur r ent are pl otted agai nst the
.
G
G
G

(a)
.
G
.
.
. .
G
G
1 watt
.
.
I 0
w
(b)
.x
.
G
G
.
G
.
G
.
(c)
G G*
G e*
G **
.
.
.
500 600 700
Appl i edvol tagei n vol ts
FI Q. 9.1.(a) Bandwi dth, (b) noi se power, and (c) input cur r ent ay afuncti cm of appl i ed
vol tage for a magneti c fi el d of 960 gauss.
appl i ed vol tage for a magneti c fi el d of 960 gauss.
For vol tages bel ow
600 the bandwi dth i s about 27 Ll c/secroughl y consi stent wi th the
l oaded Q of the magnetron (Q. = 160, AV = PL/Q. = 19 Me/see).
G
\
SEC. 9.2]
PREOSCI LLATI ON NOI SE 391
As the appl i ed vol tage approaches 722, the power ri ses rapi dl y and the
bandwi dth goes sharpl y to zer o. (Actual l y, of course, i t i s not possi bl e
to measure the hal f-val ue wi dth when i t becomes l ess than the pass band
of the anal yzer.) At 722 vol ts the i nput cur r ent al so starts to i ncrease
rapi dl y, and thi s poi nt may be consi dered to be the cri ti cal vol tage wher e
sel f-sustai ned osci l l ati ons begi n.
Observati ons on pul sed magnetrons i ndi cate crudel y the same sort
of behavi or as that descri bed above. I n one r espect the pul sed tubes
di ffer-the cur r ent i ncreases di sconti nuousl y at the cri ti cal vol tage, as i s
i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 8.36. Thi s di sconti nui ty y shows up i n some c-w mag-
netrons and not i n others, for reasons so far not understood.
The phenomena just descri bed can be i nterpreted i n the fol l owi ng
way. The space charge generates a (noi se current)2 per uni t frequency
i nterval (denoted by di~ldv), that i s a sl owl y varyi ng functi on of the
frequency. I nasmuch as the noi se cur r ent i s substanti al l y constant
over the frequency i nterval v/Q, the obser ved noi se spectrum i s si mpl y
the constant-current response of the resonant system of the magnetron
expressed i n terms of power .
The vari ati ons i n the bandwi dth are
attri buted to the changes i n the Q of the system caused by el ectr on
l oadi ng, whi ch can be descri bed i n terms of the el ectroni c conductance
G, di scussed i n Chaps. 7 and 8. The Q of the system i s gi ven by the
rel ati on
Q = QLGL
.
G. -I- G.
The narrowi ng of the spectrum just bel ow the cri ti cal vol tage,
accordi ng to thi s i nterpretati on, means that G. i s negati ve i n thi s range.
To check thi s hypothesi s, i mpedance measurements wer e made l ooki ng
i nto the magnetron whi l e vol tages bel ow the cri ti cal val ue wer e appl i ed
to i t.1
The normal i zed conductance go of the magnetron at resonance i s
gi ven by the expressi on
~o=Gu+Ge=G. +Ge
G, GL G.
As G. becomes i ncreasi ngl y negati ve, starti ng from zer o, go decreases
from the val ue G./G. = Q./ Q. to zer o, then changes si gn and becomes
i ncreasi ngl y negati ve. (I t i s to be expected that when go becomes equal
I Except for the fact that the el ectron stream i s present i n the magnetron, these
measurements are si mi l ar to
col d-i mpedance measurements. Si nce the si gnal used
i n the measurementsfal l s enti rel y wi thi n the pass band of the anal yzer,the defl ecti on
pr oduced by the si gnal greatl y exceeds that pr oduced by the noi se even though the
si gnal power i s of the same or der of magni tudeas the noi se power gener atedby the
magnetron.
I
I
392 NOISE [sm. 9.2
to 1, the system wi l l break i nto sustai ned osci l l ati ons, and from then
on the nonl i neari ty of the space charge wi l l be the control l i ng factor.)
From the i mpedance measurements one obtai ns PO, the standi ng-wave
rati o at resonance, and
; = Igo]
provi ded l g~l < 1, as was al ways the case i n thi s experi ment. Thus
ther e i si n pri nci pl e an ambi gui ty i n the si gn of goas determi nedl y the
standi ng-wave measurements.
0.6
0.4 -
0.2 -
G
, G
. .
.
~o
0 o
G
*
100 200 300
400 500 m. vol ts
-0.2 .
G
-0.4 -
G
-0.6
9.2.The standi ng-wave rati o at resonance POas a functi on of the appl i ed vol tage
The val ues of PO obtai ned i n a seri es of measurements are pl otted
agai nst Vi n Fi g. 9.2. I npl otti ng the poi ntsi t has been assumed that
g, does change si gn at zer o, and the shape of the cur ve i ndi cates that
thi s assumpti on i s justi fi ed. Because of the i nter fer ence caused by the
noi se at hi gher appl i ed vol tages, i t was not possi bl e to car r y the i mpedance
measurements further. The data gi ven i n the fi gure, however , seem to
justi fy the i nterpretati on that has been gi ven for the narrowi ng of the
noi se spectrum near the cri ti cal vol tage.
From the for egoi ng anal ysi s i t fol l ows that when the bandwi dth of
the noi se i s narrowed, part of the obser ved noi se power i s gener ated by
the noi se cur r ent and part of i t by the negati ve conductance of the space
#
SEC. 9.2] PREOSCI LLA TI ON NOI SE
393
charge. Toobtai n thepower gener ated bytheno& cur r ent theobsemed
power s must be mul ti pl i ed by
G.+ G.=
obser ved bandwi dth
G. v/QL
The poi nts of Fi g. 9.1 for whi ch the cor r ecti on i s appreci abl e are i ndi cated
by open ci rcl es connected to the correspondi ng uncor r ected poi nts.
I n another experi ment the noi se power was measured over a wi de
range of magneti c fi el ds. The resul ts of thi s experi ment are shown i n
Fi g. 9.3; the noi se power s pl otted i n thi s fi gure have been mul ti pl i ed by
the cor r ecti on factor gi ven above.
FI G. 9.3.Noi se power as a functi on of magneti c fi el d. A Bandwi dth, 3 Me/see; O
Bandwi dth, 6 Me/see.
The si gni fi cance of the or der of magni tude of the observed noi se can
be i l l ustrated by computi ng a noi se temperature by means of the formul a
~ = ~T ~, _ kT,,
.
QL
Wi th the val ues P- = 104 watt and Q. = 150, a temperature of
4 X 101l C. i s obtai ned, whi ch i s numeri cal l y equi val ent to a mean
el ectr on ener gy of 2 X 107 el ectr on vol ts.
Surpri si ngl y l arge noi se power s for the nonosci l l ati ng magnetron
wer e al so deri ved from experi ments on the phasi ng of pul sed magnetrons. 1
Experi ments wer e per for med on two magnetrons. One of them del i vered
pul se power s of 2 to 25 kw; the other 20 to 150 kw. To obtai n a moderate
degr ee of coher ence between pul ses, 0.05 to 1.0 watt of pri mi ng power
1J. E. Evans, R. C. Fl etcher, and F. F. Ri eke, R-f Phasi ngof Pul sed Magne-
trons, RL Repor t No. 1051,Feb. 6, 1946.
G
394 NOI SE [SEC, 93
had to be absorbed by the smal l er magnetron; 0.5 to 2.0 watts wer e
requi red i n the l arger one. A cr ude theoreti cal anal ysi s l ed to the con-
cl usi on that the noi se power s gener ated i n the magnetrons mi ght wel l
be l arger by at l east a factor of 10 than the power s requi red for phasi ng.
Di r ect measurements of the noi se i n the smal l er magnetron, pul sed just
bel ow the cri ti cal vol tage, yi el ded val ues of the or der of 10 watts.
9.3. Si gnal -to-noi se Rati o. I The wor k to be descri bed was done i n
connecti on wi th the devel opment of a 4000-Mc/sec c-w magnetron
desi gned to oper ate at about 900 vol ts, wi th a power output of 20 watts.
Many of these magnetrons gener ated excess noi se; the noi se r ose pr e-
ci pi tousl y at a threshol d vol tage V~O that vari ed somewhat from tube
to tube. Usual l y Va, was bel ow or dangerousl y cl ose to the speci fi ed
operati ng vol tage of the tube. (An el ectroni c tuner bui l t i nto thi s
magnetron determi nes the magneti c fi el d and ther efor e the vol tage at
whi ch the tube must be operated.) The pri mary probl em was to el i mi -
nate the excess noi se or to rai se Vao wel l outsi de the operati ng range.
I n the cour se of the attempts to do thi s, noi se measurements wer e made
on many magnetrons that di ffered from each other i n one or mor e detai l s
of thei r constructi on.
The measurements of noi se wer e carri ed out i n the fol l owi ng way.
The output of the magnetron was fed through an attenuator i nto a
crystal ; by varyi ng the attenuati on, the crystal cur r ent was adjusted to a
standard val ue of 0.5 ma. The hi gh-frequency components of the crystal
cur r ent wer e fed i nto a radi o r ecei ver , and the output of the second
detector of the r ecei ver was r egi ster ed on a mi croammeter. Thi s system
functi ons essenti al l y as fol l ows. The coher ent component of the mag-
netr on output provi des l ocal -osci l l ator power for the crystal , whi ch
operates as a mi xer. The si gnal i s made up of those frequency
componentsthe noi sei n the magnetron output whi ch fal l wi thi n
the ranges (VM ~. 5P) to (VM v. + 6v) and (v~ + v, 6v) to
(vM + v, + 6v), wher e v~ i s the magnetron frequency, v, i s the r ecei ver
frequency, and 28v i s the bandwi dth of the r ecei ver .
I n the experi ments, v, was usual l y 1.5 Me/see and 2~v was 4 kc/see.
I n general , the excess noi se decreased wi th l arger val ues of V. and was
qui te smal l for v. = 30 Me/seeas i s to be expected, for the l oaded Q
of the magnetron coul d hardl y have been l ess than 100. Wi thi n the
l i mi ts i ndi cated above, the excess noi se obser ved di d not depend strongl y
upon the tuni ng of the r ecei ver .
Di verse correl ati ons suggested the worki ng hypothesi s that the excess
noi se was rel ated to i oni zati on wi thi n the magnetron. Resi dual gas
i n the tubes, however , does not provi de a consi stent expl anati on for the
1The materi al for thi s secti on has heen taken from an RCA r epor t: R. L. Sproul l ,
Noi se i n Magnetrons, Repor t No. 29, Navy Contract NXsa 35042.
I
I
I
.
Snc. 9.4] ORI GI NS OF NOI SE 395
noi se; rather, as i s shown by observati ons to be descri bed presentl y,
i t i s bari um and stronti um from the oxi de-coated cathode that are
i nvol ved. One of the observati ons consi sted si mpl y of detecti ng the
spectra of Ba and Sr i n the i nteracti on space of the magnetron.
Fol l ow-
i ng thk observati on, apparatus was constructed especi al l y for the purpose
of measuri ng the i oni zati on i n the nei ghborhood of a hot, oxi de-coated
cathode bombarded by el ectrons.
From the resul ts obtai ned wi th
thi s apparatus i t was concl uded that the equi val ent pressure of Ba and
Sr near a hot magnetron cathode i s of the or der of 10 mm.
I n other experi ments, the rel ati on between noi se and resi dual gas
was studi ed. I n magnetrons wi th conventi onal oxi de-coated cathodes,
the i ntroducti on of neon had no i nfl uence on the noi se as l ong as the
pressure was l ess than about 5 X 10a mm; at 10-2 mm a gl ow di scharge
began to set i n. Other magnetrons wer e constructed wi th tungsten
spi ral s for cathodes. I n these tubes, varyi ng the pressure of neon
between 10-3 and 5 X 103 mm di d i nfl uence the noi se. (Apparentl y
the oxi de-coated cathodes provi ded so many i ons that the i ntroducti on of
neon pr oduced l i ttl e addi ti onal effect.)
The magnetrons wi th tungsten cathodes had al so been oper ated
seal ed off; under these condi ti ons the threshol d vol tage V=o was about
1000 vol ts when the heati ng cur r ent through the tungsten spi ral was just
suffi ci ent to permi t normal osci l l ati on, but V~O dr opped to 700 vol ts
when the heati ng cur r ent was i ncreased by 10 per cent. I t seems not
qui te certai n whether thk resul t i s to be attri buted enti rel y to resi dual
gas rel eased as a resul t of the i ncreased temperature of the cathode (and
al so of the other parts of the magnetron) or some obscure addi ti onal
effect i s i nvol ved.
The pr eponder ance of evi dence supported the hypothesi s that the
excess noi se i n magnetrons wi th oxi de cathodes was caused by el ectr on
bombardment of the oxi de coati ng. Consequentl y a speci al form of
cathode was devi sed to mi ni mi ze the bombardment of the coated sur-
face. The sl eeve had l ongi tudi nal Vs cut i n i ts surface, so that i t
resembl ed a l ong pi ni on gear; onl y the si des of the teeth faci ng i n one
di recti on wer e coated. Si nce the el ectrons that return to the cathode
have predomi nantl y an azi muthal moti on and the di recti on of the
moti on i s determi ned by that of the magneti c fi el d, i t was possi bl e to
arrange matters so that ei ther the coated or the uncoated si des of the
teeth wer e the mor e heavi l y bombarded. Magnetrons constructed
wi th these cathodes had deci dedl y better si gnal -to-noi se rati os wi th
the magneti c fi el d i n the cor r ect di recti on.
9.4. Ori gi ns of Noi se.The observati ons r evi ewed i n the precedi ng
secti on demonstrate qui te concl usi vel y that i ons i n the i nteracti on space
of an oscillating magnetron can gi ve ri se to strong si debands of noi se
396 NOI SE [SEC. 94
i n the magnetron output. Presumabl y the noi se gets i nto the output
of the magnetron as the resul t of modul ati on effects, for i t i s hardl y
concei vabl e that the moti ons of the i ons contai n the frequency compo-
nents present i n the noi se spectrum. The i ons move much mor e sl owl y
than the el ectrons, and for the el ectrons the transi t ti mes across the gaps
of the resonators are just smal l enough to permi t the el ectrons to del i ver
power at the resonance frequency of the magnetron. I t seems l i kel y
that the effect of the i ons i s to be expl ai ned somewhat as fol l ows: The
i ons, by neutral i zi ng space-charge, cause momentary vari ati ons i n the
el ectr on current, and thus ther e resul ts an i rregul ari ty or noi se modul ati on
of the magnetron output.
The noi se gener ated i n the absence of osci l l ati ons (descri bed i n Sec.
9.2) mi ght al so be ter med excess noi se, si nce, as wi l l be shown pres-
entl y, i t i s or der s of magni tude l arger than can be accounted for by
el ementary consi derati ons. To what extent thi s type of noi se i s i nfl u-
enced by i ons i s enti rel y unknown, but to di smi ss the resul ts summari l y
as a mani festati on of gas woul d appear to beg the questi on because
of the di ffi cul ty wi th transi t ti mes menti oned above. Modul ati on effects
coul d hardl y be i nvoked, for i n thi s case ther e i s no carri er to be
modul ated.
One sour ce of noi se must be present under al l ci rcumstances, namel y,
shot effect, and i t may be of i nterest to cal cul ate an upper l i mi t of the
noi se power to be expected from i t. Thi s cal cul ati on can be carri ed
through qui te si mpl y for the nonosci l l ati ng magnetron oper ated at
magneti c fi el ds bel ow cutoff on the basi s of the si ngl e-stream sol uti on to
the space-charge equati ons (see Chap. 6). Thi s sol uti on has been
used qui te wi del y as the starti ng poi nt for theoreti cal i nvesti gati ons of
magnetron phenomena. Mathemati cal l y, the d-c cur r ent to the anode
i s zer o under the condi ti ons assumed; i n practi ce the cur r ent i s rel ati vel y
smal l . Ther e i s, however , a l arge azi muthal component of cur r ent that
fl ows across the faces of the resonators, and i t seems reasonabl e to suppose
that the shot effect ari ses pri mari l y from thi s component of the el ectr on
current.
I nasmuch as onl y a rough cal cul ati on i s to be made, equati ons for a
pl ane magnetron wi l l be used. I f the di stance between osci l l ators i s s,
the formul a r,/ ra = (N 4)/(N + 4) yi el ds for the cathode-to-anode
di stance i n a pl ane magnetron the val ue 4s/~, and the characteri sti c
parameters (see Chap. 10) of the magnetron are
SEC. 9.4] ORI GI NS OF NOI SE 397
wher e VOi s the frequency of the n-mode, N the number of osci l l ators,
and L the l ength of the anode. (A numeri cal factor of 1.24 i s omi tted
from g.) The sol uti ons to thespace-charge equati ons are
()
4gB2
= NG2; G
for
,<$(, -J,-;(:)))
wher e v i s the vel oci ty of an el ectr on at the di stance y from the cathode
and p i s the charge densi ty.
The cur r ent due to a si ngl e el ectr on i s computed as fol l ows. Wi th
an r-f vol tage ~ on the resonant system, the al ternati ng el ectri c fi el d
has an x-component E= gi ven by E= = (2~/.s)j(y) (COSTZ/s) cos >vf
+ hi gher components, wher e j(y) i s approxi matel y 1 at the anode
and fal l s to zer o at the cathode. Si nce onl y an upper l i mi t i s to be com-
puted for the current, j(y) i s taken as equal to 1 throughout. The
hi gher components are smal l and wi l l be negl ected; the er r or thus i ntro-
duced wi l l be di scussed l ater. The component wave that travel s al ong
wi th the el ectrons has an ampl i tude E= = ~/ s, and an el ectr on travel i ng
wi th the wave (U = 2SV)does wor k at the rate ev~~s. Thus the cur r ent
i . i nduced by a si ngl e el ectr on i s gi ven by
The (noi se current) /uni t frequency i nterval di~/ dv is equal tot: summed
over al l el ectrons wi th vel oci ti es between 2SVand 25(v + dv). Thus
di:
G=
(2ve)2 ~NLs ~ dv
26
()
gB
.
e ~
a;
V>vm
7r
di: 0
.
dv 0;
v < Vm,
(1)
wher e
V*C ,o[:-J(:y-;].
Taki ng the resul t at i ts face val ue, di~/ dv shoul d vary as V2up to V-
and then fal l suddenl y to zer o. Had the hi gher components of the
el ectri c fi el d been i ncl uded i n the cal cul ati on of the noi se current, how-
398 NOI SE [SEC. 94
ever , ther e woul d be a weak extensi on of the spectrum toward hi gher
frequenci es. The maxi mum i n the noi se spectrum at v~ occurs at the
resonance frequency of the magnetron when the appl i ed vol tage i s just
equal to the Hartree vol tage V = v[2(B/@) 1]. Because the tube
woul d break i nto osci l l ati on \ri th so hi gh an appl i ed vol tage, the noi se
measurements descri bed i n Sec. 9.3 wer e al l made at l ower appl i ed vol t-
ages. Thus a noi se cur r ent computed on the basi s of Eq. (1) must
surel y r epr esent an upper l i mi t.
For the magnetron- used i nthc measurements of noi se, g = 0.3 amp.
Wi th B = 463, Eq. (1) yi el ds the val ue
The noi se power i ntegrated over the rcsouance cur ve of the magnetron
i s gi ven by
~_Tvg
n
2YC d:
The val ue of Y. forthemagnetron i sesti mated to be 0.5mho and l eads
tothenumeri cal val ue forthenoi se P. = 4 X 10s watt, or74db bel ow
1 W. Si nce thi s val ue i s roughl y 40 db l ower than the noi se power s
observed, i t i s evi dent that the obser ved noi se cannot be accounted
for on the basi s of shot effect i n a si ngl e-stream space charge.
PART I I I
DESI GN
Thk part of the book i s devoted to magnetron desi gn. The avai l abl e
theoreti cal and experi mental knowl edge of the el ectroni cs of magnetrons
and of thei r resonant systems and magneti c ci rcui ts wi l l be used to devel op
pr ocedur es by whi ch a tube can be desi gned to meet speci fi c requi rements.
The general pri nci pl es that are needed have been di scussed i n Part I
and Part I I of the book, and to thi s wi l l be added a great deal of experi -
mental i nformati on gathered at the Radi ati on Laboratory and from
i ndustri al l aboratori es.
The desi gn of a magnetron must consi der f our pri nci pal components:
the cathode, the i nteracti on space of the fi el ds and el ectrons, the resonant
ystem, and the magneti c ci rcui t. Chapter 10 wi l l di scuss the rather
compl ex i nterrel ati ons of these components; i t wi l l al so anal yze i n detai l
the probl em of desi gni ng the i nteracti on space to meet gi ven condi ti ons
of operati on. Subsequent chapters wi l l consi der the resonant system,
the cathode, and the magneti c ci rcui t.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
1
I
u
I
CHAPTER 10
PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN
BY A. M. CLOGSTON
I
10s1. The Pri mary Desi gn Parameters.When a need ari ses for the
desi gn of a new magnetron to meet operati ng condi ti ons not ful fi l l ed
by exi sti ng types, exper i ence has shown that the requi rements of the
si tuati on can be set forth by the speci fi cati on of certai n pri mary desi gn
parameters. These parameters express the rel ati onshi p of the magnetron
to the other components of the equi pment i n whi ch i t i s to be used and
i ndi cate the requi rements set for the tube by the over-al l equi pment
speci fi cati ons. The pri mary desi gn parameters to be consi dered are
1. Frequency.
2. Pul se-power output.
3. Vol tage.
4. Effi ci ency.
5. Pul se durati on and average power i nput.
6. Heater power .
7. Tuni ng requi rements.
8. Frequency stabi l i ty.
9. Wei ght.
The emphasi s on the vari ous parameters wi l l not, of course, be si mi l arl y
di stri buted i n al l cases.
I t may happen that the requi rements made upon the desi gn wi l l be
i mpossi bl e to meet through exi sti ng techni ques, but the anal ysi s to be
carri ed out wi l l i ndi cate the compromi ses that may best be made to
arri ve at a usabl e desi gn.
The outstandi ng characteri sti cs of any osci l l ator are i ts frequency
and power output. Magnetrons rangi ng i n frequency from 30 to 30,000
Me/see and i n power output from 30 to 3,000,000 watts have been
devel oped. General l y, from 30 to 1000 watts c-w operati on has been
feasi bl e, whi l e pul sed osci l l ators capabl e of del i veri ng from 1 to 3000 kw
have been devel oped. The worki ng vol tage range cover ed by exi sti ng
types of magnetrons extends from about 500 to 50,Wi 0 vol ts, i ndi cati ng
by compari son wi th the power range a rather narrow spread of stati c
i nput i mpedance.
Magnetrons have been bui l t i n whi ch the el ectrons gener ate r-f
power at effi ci enci es up to 80 per cent. Usual l y much of thi s effi ci ency
401
402 PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN
i s sacri fi ced to gai n other ends, and a certai n amount i s
i n the resonant system. The over-al l effi ci enci es of
[SEC. 10.1
i nevi tabl y l ost
most exi sti ng
magnetrons fal l i n the range of 30 to 60 per cent at the nomi nal operati ng
poi nt.
Magnetrons have been requi red to oper ate under a vari ety of duty
rati os. Pul se durati ons from 0.1 to 10 psec have been used, and a
number of appl i cati ons have requi red conti nuous-wave operati on.
The correspondi ng average power outputs have cover ed a much mor e
restri cted range than the pul se powers, extendi ng onl y from 1.5 to 1500
watts, or from about 3 to 3000 watts average power i nput.
Occasi onal l y an upper l i mi t i s pl aced upon the cathode heater -power
consumpti on by consi derati ons of equi pment wei ght. Tubes desi gned
for ai rborne servi ce have had a cathode drai n as smal l as 1.5 watts, whi l e
ver y hi gh power magnetrons have requi red as much as 150 to 300 watts
heater power .
I t i s desi rabl e i n many appl i cati ons that a magnetron be tunabl e
over a parti cul ar band of frequenci es. Tunabl e magnetrons exi st that
achi eve, by compl ex mechani sms, tuni ng ranges varyi ng from 5 to 40
per cent. I n some cases i n or der to permi t preci se frequency setti ngs a
tuni ng range of onl y 1 per cent or l ess has been obtai ned by ver y si mpl e
methods. Recentl y several methods of el ectroni cal l y varyi ng the
frequency of a magnetron have been devel oped. For the f-m trans-
mi ssi on of vi deo data or ver y preci se stabi l i zati on of frequency, i t i s now
feasi bl e to bui l d magnetrons wi th an el ectroni c tuni ng range of several
megacycl es per second. Tubes have been bui l t at 1000, 3000, and 4000
Me/see wi th a devi ati on range of about 10 Me/see. For el ectroni c
tuni ng, the rati o of megacycl es per second of tuni ng to vol t of si gnal i s of
consi derabl e desi gn i mportance, as i s al so the requi red bandwi dth.
Magnetron tuni ng i s cl osel y al l i ed wi th the probl em of frequency
stabi l i zati on. I n a number of appl i cati ons i t i s necessary that the
frequency of a tube over a wi de range of operati ng condi ti ons remai n
wi thi n ver y narrow l i mi ts, set perhaps by the pass band of a r ecei ver .
Thi s must be accompl i shed wi thout constant manual attenti on, and the
fl uctuati ons are i ndeed often too rapi d to be compensated by mechani cal
means. An exampl e of such stri ngent condi ti ons i s gi ven by the 2J32,
a magnetron used i n l o-cm beacons.
Thk tube must not vary from i ts
center frequency by mor e than ~ ~ Me/see as i ts temperature vari es
f 10C, i ts pl ate cur r ent vari es from 8 to 12 amp, and i ts l oad vari es
over al l phases wi th an SWVR equal to 2.0. The probl em has been met
by the devel opment of a techni que of ti ghtl y coupl i ng hi gh-Q resonant
cavi ti es to the magnetron, achi evi ng thereby stabi l i zi ng factors up
to 10.
Because a magnetron requi res a strong magneti c fi el d for i ts operati on,
1
I
I
I
SEC. 10.2] THE METHOD OF MAGNETRON DESI GN 403
the combi ned wei ght of tube and magnet i s consi derabl y gr eater than
that of the mor e conventi onal el ectr on tube.
The wei ght of the magnet
requi red i s ther efor e a factor of consi derabl e i mportance i n desi gn.
Ver y sever e requi rements have had to be met i n tubes pl anned for use
i n ai rborne equi pment or i n sets desi gned for extr eme ease of transporta-
ti on. Magnets have ranged i n wei ght from several ounces to 100 l b.
10.2. The Method of Magnetron Desi gn.There i s one ver y si mpl e
approach to magnetron desi gn. I n the past a great vari ety of tubes
has been constructed, and thei r performance exami ned. I f one of these
tubes comes cl ose to meeti ng the requi rements of the si tuati on, smal l
vari ati ons may be made i n i ts desi gn wi th good hope of success i n meeti ng
the new condi ti ons. The rel ati ons among the components of a magnetron
are so compl ex, however , that i t may not al ways be possi bl e to arri ve
easi l y at a new desi gn si mpl y by vari ati on of an exi sti ng type. A mor e
anal yti cal approach i s necessary to formul ate a pr ocedur e that i s appl i cabl e
i n al l cases and to bri ng out most cl earl y the processes i nvol ved.
The four parts of a magnetron are so i nterdependent that no one
of them can be desi gned i ndependentl y of the rest. Each component i s
affected not onl y by the pri mary parameters but al so by the desi gn of
the other thr ee parts. I t i s necessary, ther efor e, to arri ve at a sol uti on
to the desi gn probl em i n whi ch each part of the tube, besi des meeti ng
the requi rements set by the pri mary desi gn parameters, i s consi stent
wi th the desi gn adopted for the other components. The most conveni ent
way to do thi s i s to settl e upon a tri al desi gn of the i nteracti on space.
A compl ete set of speci fi cati ons i s thereby establ i shed for the other
components, and i t i s a strai ghtforward matter to deci de whether or
not each component can be desi gned to meet these condi ti ons.
Fi gure 10.1 i s a bl ock di agram setti ng forth an anal ysi s of magnetron
desi gn concei ved i n the above manner. At the l eft are the 10 pri mary
desi gn parameters di scussed i n the previ ous secti on; the four tube comp~
nents are shown i n heavy outl i ne.
As i ndi cated i n thi s fi gure, the desi gn of the i nteracti on space depends
chrectl y upon the requi red current, vol tage, and wavel ength. These
quanti ti es al one, however , are i nsuffi ci ent to determi ne the si ze and
shape of the i nteracti on space and i ts state of osci l l ati on. I t wi l l be
seen i n Sec. 10.8 that, i n addi ti on, i t i s necessary to speci fy thr ee quanti -
ti es, N, u, and p, cal l ed the shape factors, and thr ee other quanti ti es,
b, i, and g, whi ch consti tute what wi l l be cal l ed the rel ati ve operati ng
poi nt. The shape factors determi ne the cross-secti onal shape of the
i nteracti on space but not i ts si ze, whi l e the rel ati ve operati ng poi nt can
be consi dered as determi ni ng the nature of the el ectroni c orbi ts.
The choi ce of the shape factors and the rel ati ve operati ng poi nt
determi ne the tri al desi gn of the i nteracti on space menti oned above.
4
0
4
P
R
I
N
C
I
P
L
E
S
O
F
D
E
S
I
G
N
[
S
E
C
.
1
0
.
2
/ \
SEC. 10.2] THE METHOD OF MAGNETRON DESI GN 405
I n pri nci pl e, thi s choi ce can be made wi thout previ ous i nformati on and,
i f pr oper , wi l l l ead to a consi stent sol uti on of the desi gn probl em, i f
such exi sts. I fthechoi ce i si nept, ontheother hand, i tcan be di scarded
and repl aced by a mor e sui tabl e one. I n practi ce, exper i ence wi th
other tubes shoul d r educe the choi ce of N, u, and P and b, i, and g to
wel l -defi ned l i mi ts. The data that have been gathered i n Chap. 19
summari ze a consi derabl e amount of previ ous exper i ence that may be
found useful .
I n Sec. 10.8 i t wi l l be shown that the determi nati on of the i nteracti on
space l eads to the speci fi cati on of 10 quanti ti es whi ch wi l l be cal l ed the
secondary desi gn parameters. These i ncl ude four di mensi onsthe
anode radi us TC,the cathode radi us r,, the anode hei ght h, the sl ot wi dth w,
and the number of osci l l ators Nand fi ve operati ng constants i ncl udi ng
the el ectroni c effi ci ency qe, the change of el ectroni c susceptance wi th
cur r ent dB,/ dI , the sl ot conductance GL ari si ng from i nternal l osses
and external l oadi ng, the cathode-current densi ty J ., and the magneti c
fi el d B.
By r efer r i ng to Fi g. 10.1, i t i s seen that a number of condi ti ons are
pl aced i n thi s way upon the desi gn of the resonant system, the cathode,
and the magneti c ci rcui t. These condi ti ons are i ndi cated by arrows
l eadi ng from the vari ous desi gn parameters to the appropri ate compo-
nents. I n or der to pr oceed wi th the probl em, i t must be deci ded whether
or not each part of the tube can be desi gned to meet the condi ti ons
i mposed upon i t. I f thi s i s possi bl e, the choi ce of i nteracti on space has
been a good one, and a sati sfactory sol uti on can be achi eved. I f, on
the other hand, i t i s i mpossi bl e to arri ve at a desi gn for a parti cul ar
component, or i f the desi gn woul d be ver y extr eme or i nconveni ent,
i t becomes necessary to make a new choi ce for the i nteracti on space or
to make a compromi se wi th the pri mary desi gn parameters. I t i s
necessary to rel y i n each case upon the parti cul ar ci rcumstances to
i ndi cate the pr oper di recti on to take.
I n arri vi ng at the desi gn of the i nteracti on space, theor y and the
avai l abl e data are not al ways competent to speci fy cl osel y the magneti c
fi el d B and the el ectroni c effi ci ency q,, and ver y l i ttl e data are avai l abl e
for determi ni ng the quanti ty dB./ dI . The tentati ve sol uti on, however ,
speci fi es the di mensi ons requi red to bui l d tri al magnetrons i f necessary
and to measure the questi onabl e quanti ti es. Other factors not consi dered
i n thi s anal ysi s, such as noi se l evel , can be si mi l arl y determi ned.
I n the desi gn of each component of the magnetron, ther e must
constantl y be consi dered whether or not an undul y di ffi cul t mechani cal
probl em i s presented. A desi gn may often be unfeasi bl e because i t
requi res i mpossi bl y smal l parts or unreasonabl y cl ose machi ni dg
tol erances.
406 PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN [~Ec, 10.3
10.3. Condi ti ons I mposed on the Resonant System.The anal ysi s of
the precedi ng secti on yi el ds a set of 11 condi ti ons upon whi ch the resonant
system i s si mul taneousl y dependent, namel y,
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Tuni ng range.
Frequency stabi l i ty.
Number of osci l l ators N.
Anode radi us ra.
Anode hei ght h.
Sl ot wi dth w.
Wavel ength k.
Ci rcui t effi ci ency ~..
Sl ot conductance GL.
Aver age power i nput.
The change of el ectroni c susceptance wi th current, dB,/ dI .
I n addi ti on, the resonant system must extend to the el ectrons a reasonabl y
pure mmode under al l condi ti ons of tuni ng, stabi l i zati on, and l oadi ng.
A
~c
I
dBe/ dI
I
FI G. 10.2.Anal ysi s of remnant-ci rcui t desi gn.
I n thi s secti on, the rel ati on of these condi ti ons to the desi gn of the
resonant system wi l l be consi dered.
There are essenti al l y three i ndependent components of the resonant
system: the anode bl ock proper, the stabi l i zati on ci rcui t, and the l oad.
The anode bl ock i s characteri zed by i ts characteri sti c admi ttance Y.
and a conductance G presented at the sl ots by i ts i nternal l osses.
The
effect of the stabi l i zer i s expressed through the stabi l i zati on factor S,
i
i
I
r
!
SEC. 10.3] CONDI TI ONS I MPOSED ON THE RESONANT SYSTEM
407
and the l oad through a conductance GE, al so presented at the sl ots.
The i nterrel ati ons of these four quanti ti es and the 11 condi ti ons l i sted
above are set forth i n Fi g. 10.2.
The quanti ti es N, T., h, and w determi ne
that porti on of the anode shown i n Fi g. 103.
The rest of the structure must be constructed so
that the pr oper wavel ength and mode separati on
1
i s obtai ned and the desi red average power can be
di ssi pated wi thout an excessi ve temperature
gradi ent. A vari ety of structures maybe possi -
bl e, each wi th a characteri sti c G. and Y,. I f
one of these i s chosen, a number of condi ti ons
FI G.10.3.Anodei nterac-
are pl aced upon GE and S.
ti on-spacei nterface.
t
The sl ot conductance G. and the ci rcui t effi ci ency q. are rel ated to
Gu and GE by the expressi ons
G= e G. + G., (1)
G,
c = GE + G.
(2)
The shi ft of wavel ength AA wi th a change i n cur r ent AI , a change of
temperature AT, and a change of normal i zed l oad reactance Ab = AB/ Y,
?
are gi ven approxi matel y by
(3)
and
AX_ G.AAb
SYC 2
(5)
wher e a i s the l i near thermal expansi on coeffi ci ent and i t i s assumed
that the stabi l i zer i s unaffected by changes i n temperature. These
1
rel ati ons wi l l be establ i shed i n Chap. 16.
The change i n wavel ength of the tube wi th a smal l change i n the
I
parameters of the resonant ci rcui t can be taken as roughl y representati ve
of the avai l abl e tuni ng range. For a change AC i n the capaci tance of
the anode bl ock one has
AA = (7rC)& AC.
c
(6)
A change AL i n the i nductance of the anode bl ock causes a shi ft
1
408 PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN [SEC. 10.3
i
and a change AA. i n the wavel ength of the stabi l i zer gi ves
AA= Sl AA
s 8
(8)
f
I
Equati ons (1) and (2) i mpose two condi ti ons on G.:
~
wher e the i nequal i ty si gn i s i nserted because ther e can certai nl y be no
(
objecti on to a ci rcui t effi ci ency gr eater than the requi red val ue of q..
;
The anode bl ock must be desi gned so that Eqs. (9) and (10) are si mul -
taneousl y sati sfi ed.
~
I f the bracket ( )~ means i n each case the maxi mum tol erabl e
rati o al l owed by the pri mary desi gn condi ti ons of frequency stabi l i ty
and tuni ng range, one obtai ns from Eqs. (3) to (8) and Eq. (1) the fol l ow-
i ng rel ati ons whi ch set upper and l ower l i mi ts to the stabi l i zati on that
must be i ncorporated i nto the desi gn:
w.
s>~
G, G.
()
~ LA
Y,
Ab m
(-)
AA,
s> A
(-)
AA, _ ~
AA .
()
s < (.C) +C g ~,
and
()
s < (7rc)YG + .
m
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
One of the Eqs. (11) to (13) wi l l set a l ower l i mi t to S. I f tuni ng of the
resonators i s empl oyed, Eq. (15) or (16) wi l l set an upper l i mi t to S.
Tuni ng by means of the stabi l i zer, on the other hand, wi l l set a l ower
I
SEC. 10.3] CONDI TI ONS I MPOSED ON THE RESONANT SYSTEM 409
l i mi t to S accordi ng to Eq. (14). I n or der to have a possi bl e desi gn,
these vari ous l i mi ts must not overl ap.
Equati ons (9) through (16) depend on thr ee pri mary desi gn param-
eters: the wavel ength; the frequency stabi l i ty expressed by (Ak/AT)m,
0,8
0.6
q, 0.4
0,2
0
EEEl%
0123456
FI G.
GLi narbi trary uni ts
10.4.El ectroni c effi ci ency as a functi on of sl ot conductance.
(AA/AI )m, and (AX/Ab)m; and the tuni ng range enteri ng through (AL/A~)_,
(AC/AX)m, or (AAJAX)m. I n addi ti on, thr ee secondary desi gn parameters
(dB./ dI ), G., and q, are i nvol ved, as are al so the quanti ti es GWand Y..
I f the vari ous condi ti ons (9) to
(16) set for G, and S are i ncon-
si stent, changes must be made i n
* G and Y. (that i s, the anode
bl ock), i n the secondary desi gn
b
parameters (that i s, the i nterac-
ti on space), or i n the pri mary
desi gn parameters. Thi s si tua-
ti on i s expressed most cl earl y by
Fi g. 10.2.
Equati ons (l ), (2), (11), and
(13) form a basi s for di scussi ng
the rel ati ons between the over-al l
effi ci ency of operati on q and the
condi ti ons of frequency stabi l i ty.
As has been di scussed i n Chap. 7,
the el ectroni c effi ci ency q. of a
magnetron i s a functi on of sl ot
conductance GL of the form shown
i n Fi g. 10.4. Al so, i t wi l l be seen
i n Chap. 11 that for a gr oup of
si mi l ar anode bl ocks the i nternal
l osses G i ncrease wi th i ncreasi ng
1,0
0.8
: 0.6
.:
s 0.4
0.2
0
v
o PI 2 3
Y, i narbi trary uni ts
FI G. 10.5.Conductance and efi ci ency as a
functi on of Y..
Y. as i ndi cated i n Fi g. 10.5. Suppose
i t i s desi red to keep the stabi l i za~i on agai nst changes i ; l oad requi r~d by
Eq. (13) constant. I n that case i t i s necessary that
410
PRINCIPLES OF DESKIN
[SEC. 103
G.
K
= k,
(17)
wher e k i s some constant.
Usi ng Eq. (17), ther e i s obtai ned from
Eqs. (1) and (2)
G= = kY, + G.
(18)
and
k Y.
= kY. + G.
(19)
Equati ons (M) and (19) al l ow the curves for G. and q. to be drawn
i n Fi g. 10.5. Furthermore, wi th ~, known as a functi on of GL and G.
GLmarbtrary umts
FI G. 1O.6.(CUI .,I W as a functi on of GL.
as a functi on of Y., a pl ot of ~. agai nst Y. can be made i n Fi g. 10.5.
Then usi ng the rel ati on q = q,q~the total effi ci ency can al so be pl otted
agai nst Y.. I t i s obser ved that ~ must obtai n a maxi mum val ue at some
poi nt P to the l eft of the poi nt at whi ch q, obtai ns i ts maxi mum val ue. A
1 p 2
Yci n arbi trary uni ts
FI G. 10.7. (dB./d1) and 1/ Y.(dB./dI) w
functi ons of Y,.
magnetron that has been i nad-
vertentl y desi gned wi th Y, not at
P can be redesi gned for a hi gher
effi ci ency wi thout sacri fi ce of sta-
bi l i ty agai nst changes i n l oad by
changi ng the Y. of the resonant
system.
When other operati ng condi -
ti ons are hel d constant, the rate
of change of el ectroni c susceptance
wi th cur r ent dB./ dI i s a functi on
of total sl ot conductance as i l l us-
trated i n Fi g. 106. I t obtai ns a mi ni mum val ue at some val ue of
conductance G1. From Eq. (3), i t i s obser ved that the shi ft of wave-
l ength wi th current, at constant S, i s proporti onal to 1/ Y.(dB./ dI ).
Mai ntai ni ng the stabi l i ty agai nst changes i n l oad constant as before,
dB./ dI and 1/ Y.(dB./ dI ) can be pl otted as functi ons of Y. i n Fi g. 10.7.
At some poi nt P, 1/Y. (dB./ dI ) wi l l have a mi ni mum val ue. I n general ,
P wi l l not be coi nci dent wi th P i n Fi g. 10.5.
SEC. 10.4] CONDI TI ONS I MPOSED ON THE CATHODE 411
$.
The fol l owi ng si tuati on, then, exi sts i n the choi ce of Y.. By al ways
mai ntai ni ng the stabi l i ty agai nst l oad constant, a maxi mum val ue of
~ i s obtai ned at one val ue of Y. and a mi ni mum val ue of 1/Y.(cZB./d1)
at another poi nt. Frequency stabi l i ty agai nst changes i n cur r ent can
ther efor e be achi eved at the expense of effi ci ency.
10.4. Condi ti ons I mposed on the Cathode.I n Sec. 10.2 i t was
poi nted out that the cathode desi gn i s subject to the fol l owi ng ei ght
condi ti ons:
1. Anode hei ght h.
2. Anode radi us T..
3. Cathode radi us r..
4. Pl ate vol tage V.
5. Cathode-current densi ty J ..
6. Aver age power i nput.
7. Heater power .
8. Pul se durati on.
The cathode that i s to meet these condi ti ons performs two i mportant
functi ons i n the magnetron. I t must suppl y the sti pul ated cathode-
cur r ent densi ty under condi ti ons of compl ete or ver y nearl y compl ete
space-charge l i mi tati on, and i t must di ssi pate the ener gy of the back-
bombardi ng el ectrons wi thout harm to i tsel f.
The desi gn of the cathode structure may at present draw upon experi -
ence wi th thr ee types of el ectr on emi tters: (1) l ow-temperature oxi de
cathodes; (2) hi gh-temperature cathodes such as thori ated tungsten,
tantul um, or thori um oxi de; and (3) col d cathodes that oper ate by
secondary emi ssi on, such as beryl l i um or si l ver-magnesi um al l oy. The
properti es of these cathodes are so di sparate that each fi nds i ts par-
ti cul ar fi el d of useful ness.
A second pr oper ty of the cathode at the di sposal of the desi gn i s the
supporti ng structure. I t i s necessary to di sti ngui sh two methods of
support because of the ver y di fferent effect that they have on the magneti c
ci rcui t. The end-mounted cathode i s accompani ed by bui l t-i n, hol l ow
pol e pi eces and, i n practi ce, attached magnets; the radi al -mounted
cathode requi res a wi der magneti c gap and i s usual l y accompani ed by an
external magnet. Thi s i nterdependence i s i ndi cated i n Fi g. 10.1.
The back-bombardment power on the cathode of a magnetron i s not
far from a fi xed per centage of the average i nput power i n al l cases and i s
determi ned, ther efor e, by Condki on 6. For handl i ng ver y l arge back-
bombardment powers, water -cool ed secondary-emi ssi on cathodes have
been used successful l y; but because of several di sadvantages, these
cathodes have not yet seen extensi ve appl i cati on.
Wi th heated cathodes, ther e i s an i nti mate rel ati on between the
back-bombardment power and the heater power . Suppose that the
bombardment power i s P, and the heater power i s Pa. Furthermore,
412
PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN
[SEC. 10.4
to si mpl i fy the argument, suppose that the di stri buti on of heater power
i s thermal l y equi val ent to the di stri buti on of Pfl.
Suppose that i t i s
consi dered permi ssi bl e to i ni ti ate operati o~ of the tube wi th a cathode
temperature TI and to oper ate wi th a temperature Tz > T1. The power
di ssi pated i n the cathode to mai ntai n the temperature T, wi l l be PH,
whi l e a hi gher power ~PH wi l l be requi red to mai ntai n a temperature Tz.
Fi nal l y, suppose that the heater power can be r educed to an amount
XPH duri ng operati on. Duri ng operati on, the heat bal ance of the
cathode wi l l ther efor e be expressed by
P, + xpH = / 3PH.
(20)
Sol vi ng Eq. (20) for PH then gi ves
=(P:x)
(21)
I n Fi g. 108 P.q i s pl otted as a functi on of x for @ = 1.4 and @ = 1.0.
13
12
~ 11 -
: 10 -
.
.-
:6 -
Back-bombard.
mentpower
:3
2 -
1-
~~
o 0.6 0.8 1.0
Fracti onz of standbyheaterpower
usedduri ngoperati on
FI G. 1o.8.PH as a functi on of x for
two val ues of B.
A l arge P, requi res PH to be l arge
al so, and a great reducti on i s brought
about i n PH by tol erati ng a certai n
range i n cathode temperature. Fur-
thermore, arrangi ng to r educe the
heater power i n operati on al l ows a
sti l l further decr ease i n these quanti -
ti es. A requi rement for ver y l ow
heater power can be met i n a desi gn
that cal l s for smal l average power
i nput (l ow PD), tol erates wi de tem-
perature l i mi ts, and permi ts reduc-
ti on of the heater power i n operati on.
I n general , the hi gh-temperature
cathodes can di ssi pate mor e power
than the l ow-temperature ones, and
i t i s usual l y easi er to desi gn an end-
mounted cathode for l arge di ssi pa-
ti on than a radi al -mounted one. The
l ength and di ameter are i mportant factors i n settl i ng on the pr oper
cathode and supporti ng structure.
A magnetron normal l y operates under condi ti ons of space-charge
l i mi tati on at the cathode. Thi s si tuati on resul ts i n the fami l i ar, nearl y
l i near contours of constant magneti c fi el d i n the (V, I )-pl ane. I f the
total emi ssi on of the cathode i s i nsuffi ci ent to mai ntai n space-charge
l i mi tati on beyond a certai n current, a potenti al gradi ent appears at the
cathode, and the magneti c-fi el d l i ne devi ates from i ts normal posi ti on
SEC. 10.4] CONDI TI ONS lMPOSZD ON TI I E CA TI I ODI I 413
toward hi gher vol tage. Thi s shi ft of the (V, Z)-characteri sti c resul ts
i n an i ncreased tendency to mode-ski p i n pul sed magnetrons (see Chap. 8)
and i s someti mes accompani ed by a poor spectrum.
Conti nuous-wave
magnetrons wi l l tol erate a somewhat l arger devi ati on from space-charge
l i mi tati on but wi l l cease osci l l ati ng i f the devi ati on becomes great enough.
To mai ntai n normal operati on, Condi ti on 5 requi res that the cathode
be capabl e of furni shi ng a space-charge-l i mi ted cur r ent densi ty at l east
equal to ~.. I n the operati ng magnetron, because of the back-bombard-
ment el ectrons, ~. may be composed parti al l y of pri mary el ectrons and
parti al l y of secondary el ectrons, and onl y a porti on ~p of the requi red
cur r ent densi ty need be pri mary emi ssi on. The secondary emi ssi on
current, at a gi ven operati ng poi nt, depends upon the nature and state
of the cathode, i ts temperature, and the di stri buti on of ener gy i n number
of the returni ng el ectrons. I f these factors are al l known, .JP can be
cal cul ated and consti tutes a requi rement on the cathode. Actual l y,
ver y l i ttl e i nformati on i s avai l abl e on the ener gy di stri buti on of back-
bombardment el ectrons because of the di ffi cul ty i n maki ng the necessary
measurements.
For oxi de cathodes, ther efor e, i t i s usual l y i mpossi bl e to speci fy
J p. I nstead, the practi ce has been to see that ~. does not exceed a
l i mi t .T_ set by cathode sparki ng. Because of the hi gh secondary
emi ssi on of the oxi de cathodes under the condi ti ons present i n most
magnetrons duri ng osci l l ati on, JP i s usual l y a smal l fracti on of .J.. Mor e-
over , the pri mary emi ssi on normal l y to be expected from such a cathode
i s a l arger fracti on of Jm,
and i t i s ther efor e suffi ci ent for space-charge-
l i mi ted operati on. On the other hand, i f the secondary emi ssi on rati o
i s about uni ty, the pri mary cur r ent densi ty must be nearl y equal to J..
Such a case obtai ns wi th the hi gh-temperature metal l i c emi tters such as
thori ated tungsten or tantal um and wi th ver y l ow vol tage magne-
trons i n whi ch the returni ng el ectrons have l ow energi es.
A l i mi t J m exi sts to the total cur r ent densi ty, both pri mary and
secondary, that can be furni shed by the l ow-temperature oxi de cathodes
wi thout sparki ng. Thi s l i mi t depends consi derabl y on the structure
of the emi tti ng materi al and i ncreases as the pul se durati on decreases.
The cur r ent densi ty J . requi red by Condi ti on 5 must ther efor e be con-
si dered for consi stency wi th the pul se durati on set by Condi ti on S.
No correspondi ng l i mi ts are usual l y encounter ed wi th the hi gh-tempera-
tur e metal l i c emi tters.
The dktance between the anode and the cathode set by Condi ti ons
2 and 3 i s of some i mportance. The potenti al gradi ent that appears
at the cathode surface upon fai l ure of space-charge l i mi tati on i s roughl y
i nversel y proporti onal to thi s di stance, and a smal l er separati on may
ther efor e l ead to i ncreased sparki ng.
414 PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN [SEC. 105
1005. Condi ti ons I mposed on the Magneti c Ci rcui t.-The functi on of
the m~gneti c ci rcui t i s to pr oduce a fai rl y uni form magneti c fi el d of the
desi red val ue over the extent of the i nteracti on space, and thi s must be
done wi thi n the speci fi ed l i mi ts of magnet wei ght. Ther e are ther efor e
fi ve condi ti ons set for the magneti c ci rcui t:
1. Anode hei ght h.
2. Anode radi us ra.
3. Cathode radi us r..
4. Magneti c fi el d B.
5. Magnet wei ght.
The magnet wei ght i s essenti al l y proporti onal to the square of the
fi el d strength, to the di stance between the magnet pol es, and to the area
of the uni form fi el d. The di stance between pol es i s determi ned by h and
by the deci si on to end-mount or radi al -mount the cathode. I n pri nci pl e,
the area of the magneti c fi el d need be onl y the cross-secti onal area of
the i nteracti on space, but i t may be i mpossi bl e i n practi ce to confi ne i t
to thk regi on.
Magneti c materi al i s occasi onal l y i ncl uded i n a magnetron cathode
to decr ease the effecti ve pol e separati on, i mprove the shape of the fi el d,
or pr oduce a focusi ng fi el d at the ends of the i nteracti on space. A further
i nterdependence of the cathode desi gn and the magneti c ci rcui t i s i ntro-
duced i f thi s i s done.
10.6. The Scal i ng Laws.I t has been seen i n Chap. 7 that the opera-
ti on of a magnetron i s determi ned by the external magneti c fi el d B, the
pl ate cur r ent 1, and the r-f i mpedance presented by the l oad to the out-
put ci rcui t of the tube, Z(X). I n thk case, the pl ate vol tage V, the
operati ng wavel ength k, and the power output P are determi ned. I n
or der to el i mi nate dh-ect consi derati on of the resonant system, the speci -
fi cati on of Z(k) may be repl aced by a descri pti on of the anode-bl ock
i nteracti on-space i nterface and the speci fi cati on of G,(k) and B,(A), the
conductance and susceptance respecti vel y for each resonator openi ng.
I n the fol l owi ng consi derati ons G,(x) and B,(h) wi l l be taken as i denti cal
for each resonator openi ng, and the val ues of G, wi l l be taken as i nde-
pendent of A. I n thi s case the operati on of the tube maybe speci fi ed by
the magneti c fi el d B, the pl ate cur r ent 1, the total sl ot conductance G.,
and the wavel ength X; V and P are thereby determi ned. Such a speci fi -
cati on i s possi bl e for magnetrons wi th resonant systems made up of
equi val ent resonators. For ri si ng-sun magnetrons, B,(A) has a di ffer-
ent val ue for al ternate resonators, but thi s fact may be i gnored except i n
the vi ci ni ty of the cri ti cal fi el d (see Chap. 3).
One further pi ece of i nformati on i s needed befor e the operati on of
any magnetron i s compl etel y speci fi ed, namel y, the boundary condi ti ons
sati sfi ed by the el ectri c fi el ds at the cathode. Normal l y al l cathodes
SEC.10.6]
THE SCALI NG LAWS 415
i mpose the boundary condi ti ons that the fi el d be zer o at the surface,
and the questi on can be i gnored.
A cathode wi th an undul y heavy
cur r ent drai n, however , may present a di fferent boundary condi ti on to
the fi el dawi th a correspondi ngl y al tered behavi or of the magnetron.
I t has been shown i n Chap. 6 that provi ded the i nteracti on space i s
such that (k/2n-r~) may be consi dered a smal l quanti ty and provi ded
that the i nteracti on of the el ectrons and the r-f magneti c fi el d may be
negl ected, the basi c equati ons of a magnetron may be expressed i n terms
of a set of di mensi onl ess vari abl es
W(4B
(22a)
(:)(wi
(2%)
x)(k)%,
(22C)
Tc
1
TO
(22d)
and
()
21rc ~
T
(22s)
<
Consequentl y, on the basi s of the vari ous assumpti ons that have been
made, i t fol l ows that the speci fi cati on of the quanti ti es
()()
l e
~ B,
5L27TC
(23a)
&(:)(kY&
(23b)
and
(23c)
determi ne the addi ti onal quanti ti es
for a gr oup of magnetrons wi th geometri cal l y si mi l ar i nteracti on-space
cross secti ons, possessi ng resonant systems made up of equi val ent
resonators and wi th cathodes i mposi ng a zero-val ue boundary rendi ti on
.
416 PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN [SEC. 10.6
on the el ectri c fi el ds. A gr oup of magnetrons answeri ng thi s descri pti on
i s sai d to form a f fami l y of magnetrons.
Henceforth the di mensi onl ess vari abl es correspondi ng to B, V, 1,
G., and P wi l l be cal l ed r educed vari abl es and wi l l be desi gnated by
b, v, i, g, and p, the correspondi ng quanti ti es bei ng rel ated by the
expressi ons
b=:)
v
V=_,
v
(25a)
(25b)
I
i=,
9
(25c) ,
G.
g=,
s
p=;.
(25d)
(25e)
@ V, 9, S, and & are characteri sti c scal e factors for a gi ven magnetron
and wi l l be ter med the characteri sti c magneti c fi el d, vol tage, current,
conductance, and power . They are gi ven by the expressi ons
a=2: g
(( [ -i 2)l = (~)r~?:)l auss 2s)
vKww-=253000(3 O1s
(262))
=[-N;(+$:)(2Y
8440al
[1-()12(+)(%): amp
(26c)
s=:,
(26d)
and
@ = 9V. (26e)
These characteri sti c scal e factors wer e brought to thei r present form
by J. C. Sl aterL who i ntroduced the expressi on for 9. The quanti ty al
i s a functi on of rJr. and i s shown i n Fi g. 10.9 taken from Sl aters r epor t.
I t i s seen that b, v, i, g, and p are i denti cal wi th the di mensi onl ess vari abl es
gi ven i n Eqs. (23) and (24) except for factors i nvol vi ng the mode number
~J. C. Sl ater, Theor y of Magnetron Operati on, RL Repor t No. 200, Mar. 8,
1943,
. I
I
SEC.106] THE SCALI NG LAWS 417
n and the anode-cathode rati o u = r,/ra. For magnetrons wi th geo-
metri cal l y si mi l ar i nteracti on spaces these factors are constant and have
no effect on the si tuati on. They are i ncl uded i n the expressi ons for
b, U,i , g, and p to faci l i tate a compari son made l ater of magnetrons wi th
di fferent val ues of n and rc/ra.
For the purposes of thi s chapter,
n wi l l al ways be equal to N/2,
wher e N i sthe number of osci l l at-
i ng segments of the magnetron.
The performance charts for
any magnetron, presented i n r e-
duced v a ri a b 1es, express the
behavi or of a whol e fami l y of
magnetrons. To predi ct the be-
havi or of a new member of the
fami l y, i t i s necessary merel y to
1.5 1
1.0
- ~
0.5 -
0
1 2 3 4 5 6
%/%
FI G. 10.9.aI as a functi on of TJr..
cal cul ate the characteri sti c magneti c fi el d, vol tage, current, power , and
conductance of thi s new member. Performance charts for the new tube
can then be drawn up usi ng the rel ati ons
B = ba, (27a)
v = VW, (27b)
I =i$, (27c)
G = g~, (27d)
and
P = p@. (27e)
Thi s process has come to be known as the scal i ng of one magnetron
to another. I t i s obvi ous that for scal i ng one must al ways use the power
gener ated by the el ectrons, cor r ecti ng for the power l ost i n the resonant
system.
To speci fy the fami l y of magnetrons r epr esented by a r educed
performance chart, i t i s necessary to i ndi cate the shape of the i nteracti on
space. Referri ng to Fi g. 10.10, i t i s seen that the shape of the i nteracti on
space can be speci fi ed by the number of osci l l ators N and by the rati os
u = r./ra and p = w/ d. A r educed performance chart shoul d ther efor e
be accompani ed by val ues of N, u, and p. The l oad for whi ch the data
wer e taken shoul d mor eover be i ndi cated by a val ue of g = G/s.
The accuracy wi th whi ch a r educed performance chart of an actual
magnetron represents the i deal behavi or of a fami l y of magnetrons i s
l i mi ted by several factors di scussed bel ow.
The equati ons that are used to characteri ze the magnetron r epr esent
by a potenti al functi on the fi el d presented to a si ngl e el ectr on by al l the
other el ectrons. Thi s pr ocedur e does not consi der the smal l effects due
G
418 PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN [SEC. 106
to near el ectr on encounters whi ch pr oduce noi se fl uctuati ons of the space-
charge cl oud. The noi se currents gener ated wi l l not scal e preci sel y l i ke
the normal currents. Wher ever the noi se currents can be i mportant,
as, for i nstance, i n the l ow d-c cur r ent regi on, the r educed performance
chart wi l l cease to be representati ve.
End-space effects are of consi derabl e i mportance i n actual magnetrons.
Di r ect currents fl ow at the ends of a tube by l eakage from the i nteracti on
space and by emi ssi on from the end shi el ds. These currents consi derabl y
u
affect the behavi or of some mag-
netrons i n the l ow-current regi on
~d
and natural l y do not scal e from
tube to tube. The l ow-current
behavi or may al so be affected by
r.
spuri ous osci l l ati ons i n the end
w
.
spaces of a tube. I n some cases,
the r-f fi el ds are not uni form al ong
d
the l ength of the anode, and the be-
havi or of the magnetron i s affected
n?
i n a way di ffi cul t to assess. A
magnetron wi th smal l mode separa-
ti on may have i rregul ar r-f patterns
that cause i ts operati ng character-
FI G. 10.10.Crosssecti on of i nteracti on
i sti cs to depart wi del y from the
space.
i deal behavi or of i ts fami l y. I n
parti cul ar, the el ectroni c effi ci ency i s l i kel y to be l ower than normal .
These sources of i naccuracy wi l l be systemati c i n a number of i denti cal
sampl es of a magnetron desi gn.
I n addi ti on, data taken on a parti cul ar tube may be nonrepresentati ve
for some further reasons. Normal l y a magnetron operates space-charge
l i mi ted. As al ready menti oned, under condi ti ons of heavy cathode
drai n, space-charge l i mi tati on may fai l , and the boundary condi ti ons on
the el ectri c fi el ds at the cathode become dependent on the nature and
state of the emi tti ng surface. The operati on of a magnetron under such
condi ti ons cannot accuratel y r epr esent the space-charge-l i mi ted behavi or
of other members of i ts fami l y. Data taken near the extr emes of opera-
ti on of a tube are l i kel y to be i naccurate and may be l ess rel i abl e for some
sampl es than for others. Sparki ng and mi sfi ri ng of a magnetron are
greatest i n these regi ons and affect the average val ues of power and
current. Thk effect tends to cl ose the effi ci ency contours about the
regi on of operati on. Fi nal l y, a parti cul ar tube may be poor l y con-
structed. The anode, for exampl e, may be i rregul ar i n shape, causi ng a
reducti on i n el ectroni c effi ci ency, or a cathode may be off-center wi th a
resul tant decr ease i n effi ci ency and a reducti on of d-c vol tage. The
SEC,10,7] REDUCED OPERATINQ DATA ON MAGNETRONS
419
nonsystemati c er r or s of thi s sort maybe l argel y el i mi nated by averagi ng
data over a number of tubes or by usi ng data taken on a tube of known
average behavi or. The l atter method i s often to be pr efer r ed for real i zi ng
sel f-consi stency of the i nformati on.
10.7. Reduced Operati ng Data on Vari ous Types of Magnetrons.
For desi gn purposes, the data that one woul d l i ke to have on a parti cul ar
14,
28.2
35.2
=:
21,2

%
6.6
12
14.1
\_ ,~-
~
-\\
v 10 \ \
\
4.8
--
7.1
6
3.0~
1 2 3 4
i
FI G. 10.l l a.Reduced performance chart of ZP676. N -4; U = o.15; p =0.36;0 = 0.28,
20
P 18
m
n
16
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
9
05 Don
Fm. 10.l l b. FI G. 10.11c
FI G. 10l l b.-Load cur ve of ZP676 for b = 5.5 and i = 2.S.
FI G. 10.1 l e.Cross secti on of i nteracti on space of ZP676.
magnetron of i nterest are a set of wi de-range performance charts taken
at a vari ety of l oads. Usual l y, however , ther e are avai l abl e onl y a
performance chart taken at one l oad and a Rl eke di agram presenti ng,
as a functi on of l oad, the operati on at a parti cul ar magneti c fi el d and
current. The Ri eke di agram can substi tute i n some measure for havi ng
.
420 PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN [SEC. 10.7
several performance charts i f i t i s assumed that a magnetrons perform-
ance vari es fai rl y uni forml y wi th l oad over i ts range of operati on.
Ver y often, the di agram contai ns data onl y on power and frequency,
omi tti ng i nformati on about vol tage. I n other cases ther e i s avai l abl e
onl y a performance chart.
7
5.62
6.87
P
4.37G
3.6
1
\
\
b

6
qe
3.12.
5 1.87
P
4 ~
3
0.63 /
20~
3.0
t
Fm. 10.12a.Redu.ed performance chart of 2J32.
N = 8;u = 0.3S; P = 0.37; u = 0.51.
10.0
8.0
6.0
P
4.0
2.0
0.0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
9
FI G. 10.12b.Load cur ves of 2J32 for vari ous val ues of b and i . For A, b = 3.6, i = 2,1;
B,b = 2.4, i = 2.2; C, b = 2.4, i = 1.4; D, b = 2.0, i = 1.0.
Accordi ngl y, the data set forth i n thk chapter for a vari ety of
magnetrons wi l l be presented by a r educed performance chart at fi xed
g and, i f the i nformati on i s avai l abl e, by a r educed l oad cur ve showi ng
p as a functi on of g, for a parti cul ar val ue of b and of i .
When the di mensi ons of a magnetron are known, i t i s easy to cal cul ate
B, V, g, and CPfrom Eqs. (26) and to construct a r educed performance
.
SEC. 10.7] REDUCED OPERATI NG DATA ON MAGNETRONL7
421
chart from measured data.
The measured power output of the mag-
netron, however , must be cor r ected for the ci rcui t effi ci ency of the
resonant system and output ci rcui t.
The l osses i n the output ci rcui t
usual l y r epr esent onl y a 2 to 3 per cent cor r ecti on to the power l ost i n
20I
I I I I I I I 1
v
15
10
5
0
[
o
I
45.3
54.4 63.4
17.9
27.2
36.1
7.0
6,6
\
6.1
4.3
3,8-
3.3
e ~
2:3- ~
p .
1,9 b
-Ve
1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8
Fm. 10.13c7.
Reduced performance chart of 2J39.
N =8;0 =0.3S; P =0.52; g =0.17,
9
Fm.10.13b.-Load cur ve for2J39forb = 2.4 andi = 2.0.
the resonant system and have been negl ected i n what fol l ows,
the data formal ci ng tti scorrecti on are not general l y avai l abl e.
approxi mati on, one can wri te for the ci rcui t effi ci ency
1
~c =
~+@
&L QU
because
I n thi s
(28)
422 PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN
[SEC. 10.7
wher e QE and QU are deri ved from i mpedance measurements on the
nonosci l l ati ng tube. The quanti ty a. i s the rati o between the con-
ductance presented to the tube by the l oad and the characteri sti c admi t-
tance of the l i ne. The conductance G, at the sl ots can be cal cul ated i f
6,5
P
b
7,
6.0
3,6
/
3.2
./
v 5.0
3.0
2.6
/
+1+
4.0
2.4
3.5
0.4
0.8 12 1.6 2.0
i
Fm. 10.14a.-Reduced performance chart of HP1OV. N = 10; . = 0.60; P = 0.36;
o = 0.22.
1.5
P 1,0
0.5 EEEl
o 0.1
0.2 0.3 0.4
9
FI G. 10.14b.Load cur ve for HP1OV for b = 2.44 and i = 0.79.
the characteri sti c admi ttance Yc of the resonant system i s known.
I n that case,
L=G+:)
(29)
=+(++ 3)
(30)
Unfortunatel y, Y., can at present be measured onl y wi th great di ffi cul ty,
and onl y approxi mate methods exi st for i ts cal cul ati on. Thk di ffi cul ty
SEC. 10.7] REDUCED OPERATI NG DATA ON MAGNETRONS 423
i ntroduces a consi derabl e degr ee of uncertai nty i nto the general desi gn
pr ocedur e, i n the sense that the val ue of GL for whi ch a certai n per -
formance i s to be expected may not be accuratel y predi cted. I n the
data presented bel ow, the best avai l abl e methods have been used to
cal cul ate Yc; i f better methods are found, a recal cul ati on can be made
from the i nformati on gi ven i n Chap. 20.
v
13
12
11
5.4
10
&.8
9
P
b~
b
/
8 ,

v.
2.0 3.0 4,0 5.0 6.0 7.0
i
.10. 15a.Reduced parformanoe chart of 4J33. N = 12; a = 0.69; K = 0.33:g = 0.46.
#l
22
1
20
/
/
18
P
16
/
14
120 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0,5 0.6 0.7 0,8
0
I ?m. 10.16b.Load cur ve of 4J33 for b = 4.8 and i = 3.9.
Fi gures 1011 to 1026 contai n the data used i n thi s chapter. The
factors empl oyed i n reduci ng the performance charts and l oad curves
from the ori gi nal data are l i sted i n Tabl es 10.1 and 102. Some parti cul ar
poi nts i n connecti on wi th the charts shoul d be di scussed.
The charts of Fi g. 10.11 are for the ZP676, someti mes known as the
neut r ode. A sketch of the anode cross secti on i s shown i n Fi g. 101 l c.
Techni cal l y, these charts can be used onl y i n scal i ng to si mi l ar cross
*
to
b
TABLE 10. 1.CHABACTEI UST1C SCALE FACTOI W AND PARAMETERS EMPLOYED I N (20MPUTI NG THE REDUCED PERFORMANCE CHARTS
Tube
type
ZP676
2J32
2J39
HP1OV
4J33
4J39
725A
725At
4J50
LCT
QK61
AX93
3J31
Scwc
BM50
RD1l -~
GK13-I
cd,
puss
271
577
682
533
502
633
1480
1480
1470
125
437
1210
2940
331
1045
2610
2060
u,
I
~,
I
6,
I
s,
vol ts amp watts mhos
102 0.107 10.9 1.05 x 10-2
3470 12.0 41,600 3.46
1220 2.52 3,070 2.07
8030 79.8 568,000 8.82
2420 12.8 31,000 5.29
3840 25.4 97,600 6.61
1820 7.05 12,800 3,87
1820 7.05 12,800 3.E7
2500 15.6 39,000 6.25
423 0.761 322 1,.80
149 0.362 53.9 2.43
3440 49.6 171,000 14,4
3260 20.3 66,200 6,23
167 0.346 57.8 2.07
160 0.227 36.3 1.42
4010 48.7 195,000 12,1
3040 47.1 143,000 15.5
0
0.15
0.38
0.38
0.50
0.59
0,59
0,50
0.50
0.66
0.61
0.60
0,62
0.60
0.60
0.61
0.71
0.77
P
0.35
0.37
0.52
0.36
0.33
0.33
0.39
0,43
0.53
0.44
0.48
0,41
0.39
0,50
0.50
0.53
0.49

4
8
8
10
12
12
12
12
16
16
16
18
18
20
20
26
38

x,
cm
Qu
40.0 240
10.7 1600
9.06 1500
10.6 1500
10.7 1500
8.50 1100
3.20 650
3.20 1000
3.20 840
33,5 1050
9.42 770
3.16 1070
1.25 1010
10.0 1000
3.20 556
1.25 920
1.30 1000
QE
127
66
136
119
85
193
221
220
305
3:
350
480
200
230
668
805
* Western El ectri c rncdel .
t Raytheon model .
Ve,
%
0.65
0.96
0.90
0.93
0.95
0.85
0.75
0.82
0.73
0.92
0.72
0.75
0.68
0.83
0.71
0.58
0.55
1000 y,, Y.
Q.
mhoa
F
.
12,0 0,024 22.9
15.9 0.111 32,1
8.02 0.045 21.7
9.07 0.183 24.5
12.6 0.194 36.7
6.10 0.271 41.0
6.06 0.327 84.5
5.55 0.162 41.8
4.48 0.341 54.6
11.5 0.109 60.6
4.55 0,173 71.2
3.80 0.608 42.2
3.07 0.298 47.8
6.00 0.291 141.
6.16 0.216 152.
2.58 . . . . . . . . . .
2.24 . . . . . . . . . .
9
0.28
0.51 ~
0.17 ~
0.22 2
0.46 S
0.25
2
0.51 g
0.23 ~
0.25 ~
0,70 b
0.32 ~
0.16
3
0,15 ~
0.85
0,94
. . . .
. . . .
Tube
ZP676
2J32
2J39
HP1OV
4J33
4J39
725A
4J50
1.CT
QK61
AX93
3J31
Scwc
Bhf50
I
RDI I -2
GK13-1
N
4
8
8
10
12
12
12
16
16
16
18
18
20
20
26
38
a,
u

0.152
0.375
0.375
0.500
0.585
0.585
0.500
0.660
0.605
0.596
0.619
0.600
0 600
0.605
0.707
0.765
*A=( +-:)
Iaz
o 977
0.859
0 859
0.750
0.658
0.658
0 750
0.565
0.634
0.644
0.617
0 640
0 640
0.634
0 ~oo
0.416
TABLE 102. -FA(ToRs I NVOLVI NG N ANDu
1 ~z)z
0.955
0.738
0.738
0.562
0.433
0.433
0 562
0.319
0.401
0.414
0.381
0 410
0.410
0 401
0. 2{50
0.173
1

n
6.57
2.67
2.67
2.00
1.71
1.71
2.00
1.51
1.65
1.68
1.61
1.67
1.67
1 65
1,41
1.31
I
1.52
0.963
0 963
0.937
0.950
0.950
0 937
0.988
0 960
0.953
0.963
0.955
0.955
0.960
1.017
1,060
l +!
u
7.57
3.67
3.67
3.00
2.71
2.71
3,00
2,51
2.65
2.68
2,61
2.67
2,67
2.65
2.41
2.31
0.210
0.356
0.356
0.557
0.809
0.809
0.557
1.24
0.903
0.859
0.967
0.872
0.872
0.903
1,69
2.65
1
N(1 cl )
0.256
0.145
0 145
0.133
0.126
0.126
0.111
0.110
0.0986
0 0970
0.0900
0.0867
0.0781
0.0788
0.0769
0.0632
N
x
19.0
22.5
22.5
17.9
14 9
14.9
21.5
13 0
17.7
18,6
18.5
20.7
22 9
22.2
15.4
14.3
Nu
0.608
300
3.00
5.00
7.03
703
6.00
10 60
9.69
9.55
11.1
10.8
12.0
12.1
18.4
28.7
A
~r 2;

0.0865
0.0148
0.0148
0.0112
0.00954
0.00954
0.00775
0.00731
0.00583
0.00562
0.00487
0.00447
0.00364
0 00372
0.00352
0.00243
1,55
1.45
1 45
1,49
2 39
3 47
426 PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN [SEC, 107
secti ons. The assumpti on has been that the tube operates as though
the mi ssi ng gap wer e present, but i t shoul d not be consi dered an accurate
representati ve of a fami l y of magnetrons wi th N = 4, The data wer e
taken on a si ngl e tube not known to be an average sampl e.
9
9,65
7.24 8,45
6.03
8
V7
6
P
b

7,
5
1,0 1.5 2.0 2,5 3.0 3.5
i
FI G.1016a. -l teduced per fOrl I l ance chart of 4J39.
N = 12; u = 0.59; p = 0.33; g = 0.25,
;=
0,1 0.2 0.3 0.4
9
FI G. 10.16b.Load cur ve of 4J39 for b = 4.0 and i = 1.6.
The data pl otted for the 2J32 i n Fi g. 1012 are the most compl ete
known to have been taken on a si ngl e tube. The tube was an average
sampl e, and the data wer e ver y careful l y compi l ed.
The performance chart of Fi g. 10.13 i s pl otted from data on a si ngl e
average 2J39 and cover s a wi der range of r educed vari abl es than any
of the other charts. The l oad cur ve represents average data for the
2J39 tubes.
The performance chart and l oad cur ve of Fi g. 10.14 are deri ved from
average data on producti on HP1OV magnetrons. Thi s tube i s known
SEC.10.7] REDUCED OPERATI NG DATA ON MAGNETRONS
427
to have an i rregul ar Q-cur ve and an anode bl ock l ong enough that vari a-
ti ons of r-f vol tage and magneti c fi el d al ong i ts l ength are appreci abl e.
The data may ther efor e not be representati ve of thi s fami l y of 10-osci l -
l ator magnetrons.
E!f?
4.1
7
v 3.7
\
6
/
-
~ 6.25
5
\ \
~ 5.21
2.4
=:
?,
0.5 2.5 3.0
i
Fm. 10.17~.Reduced performance chart of 725A. N = 12; u = 0.50; P = 0.43; g = 0.51,
(Bell Telephone Laboratories.)
4.5-
Raytheon
4.0
I
Western
P
El ectri c
3.5
(
t
3.0
2.5-
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 4
u
FI G. 10.17b.Load cur ve of 725A for b = 3.7 and i = 1.1. (Courtesy of Raytheon and Bdl
Telephone Labmatories.)
The performance chart and l oad cur ve shown i n Fi g. 10.15 are average
data for producti on 4J33 magnetrons.
The performance chart and l oad cur ve of Fi g. 10.16 are average data
for producti on 4J39 magnetrons.
428
PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN
[SEC. 10.7
The performance chart (Fi g. 10. 17) i s pl otted from data on an average
Western El ectri c 725A. Load curves are gi ven for the Raytheon 725A
and the Western El ectri c 725A, each cur ve bei ng an average of data on
thr ee normal tubes. Because of thei r di fferent osci l l ator constructi on,
the tubes have ver y di fferent characteri sti c admi ttances and oper ate at
di fferent l oad poi nts. The agreement between the two cur ves i s sati s-
11
9
U7
5
3
0.2
0.4 0,6
0.8 1.0 1.2
1.4 1.6
i
FI G. 10. l Sa.Reduced performance chart of LGW.
N = 16; u =0.61; p = 0.44; g =0.70.
4.0
3.5
P
3.0
2.5
EERl
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 I .0 1.2 1.4
9
FI G. 10.l Sb.Load cur ve of LCW for b = 4.0 and i = 0.66.
factory. The sl i ghtl y hi gher cur ve of the Raytheon tube may be due to
l ess el ectron l eakage or to an er r or i n one of the val ues of Y..
Fi gure 10.18 shows data for a si ngl e LCW magnetron not known to be
an average sampl e.
The data of Fi g. 1019 wer e obtai ned on a si ngl e average 4J50
magnetron.
Fi gure 10.20 was pl otted from data on a si ngl e average QK61
magnetron.
SEC. 10.7] REDUCED OPERATING DATA ON MAGNETRONS
429
The performance chart of Fi g. 1021 was taken on a si ngl e AX9
magnetron not known to be an average tube. The performance chart
shows the effi ci ency val l ey that i s characteri sti c of the ri si ng-sun resonant
system. Thk regi on of anomal ousl y l ow effi ci ency i s not representati ve
10
3.51
5.26
1,75
4.6
4.3
4,0
U6
3.5
3.0~
L
1.8
20 1.0
1.5
2.0 2
i
5
FI G. 1019a.Reduced performance chart of 4J50. N = 16; u = 0.66; jI = 0.53; a = 0.25.
FI G..
6.0
5.0
.
~
P
4.0
3.0
0.1 0.2 0.3
9
10.19b.Load cur ve of 4J50 for b = 4.1 ud i = 1.0.
of thi s fami l y of magnetrons but i s caused by the zer o-component content
of the r-mode whi ch occurs i n the ri si ng-sun type of magnetron (see
Chap. 3).
The data of Fi g. 10.22 wer e obtai ned on a si ngl e average 3J31
magnetron.
The performance chart and l oad cur ve gi ven i n Fi g. 10.23 wer e
deri ved from a si ngl e BM50 magnetron whi ch was chosen from several
430
sampl es because i ts
PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN [SEC. 10.7
data appeared most normal . For thi s reason i t
cannot be consi dered ver y rel i abl e.
The performance chart and l oad cur ve of Fi g. 10.24 wer e obtai ned
on a si ngl e SCWC magnetron not known to be an average sampl e.
14
4.67
3,12
1.55
12
0.26 J ~ \\
I
10
v
8
6 ~
=;
-
%
Fm. 10.20a. Reduced performance chart ~f QK61. N = 16; a =0.60; # =0.4S;
Q =0.32. (Rautheon.)
2.5
2.0
P
1.5
1.0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 c
9
I ?I G, 10.20b.L0ad cur ve of QE61 for b = 4.1 and i E 0.=3S.
The performance charts shown i n Fi gs. 10.25 and 10.26 wer e obtai ned
on si ngl e sampl es of RD 11-2 and GK13- 1 magnetrons that are not known
to be average tubes. These tubes are cl osed-end ri si ng-sun magnetrons
and have a si nusoi dal vari ati on of r-f vol tage al ong the anode.
Conse-
quentl y, nei ther i s real l y representati ve of i ts fami l y, and the data are
SEC. 10.7] REDUCED OPERATI NG DATA ON MAGNETRONS
431
1
I
, I
I
\
/ I
-+-- I I -P I I
-o 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6
FI G. 10.21.Reduced performance chart of A~9.
N =18; .7 =0.62; p =0.41; g =0.16
5.0
4.5
v 4.0
3.5
3.0
0.2
0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
a
FI G. 10,22a. Reduced performance chart of3J3l .
N =18; .7 =0.60; P =0.39; u =0.15.
432
FI G.
PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN
1,2
1.0
P
0.8
0.6EI EI l
0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.33 0.35
9
10.22b.Load cur ve of 3J31 for b = 2.6 and ; =
[SEC. 10.7
0.69.
10-
b
%
9
5.2
\
,70%
\
----
\
V8 .
\
\
\
Y
4.8
\ ++ 65% ---
N
\
L
\
7 -
\
~. 55% - --
----- . ---
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
0.5
0.6
FI Q.
i
10.23a.Reduced performance chnr t of BM50. N = 20; u = 0.61; v = 0.50;
g = 0.94.
2.0
P
1.5
/
/
1.0.
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
!7
FI G. 10.23b.Load cur ve of BM50 for b = 4.1 and i = 0.37.
SEC. 10.7] REDUCED OPERATI NG DATA ON MAGNETRONS
433
i ncl uded as the onl y avai l abl e i nformati on on 26- and 38-osci l l ator mag-
netrons. No l oad curves are i ncl uded because of the ambi gui ty i ntro-
ducedi n Y. bythel engthwi se vari ati on of r-f vol tage.
I t wi l l be noted that many of the l oad curves show a defi ni te maxi -
mum, the exi stence of whi ch may be r egar ded wi th consi derabl e suspi ci on.
11 -
4,17
5.21
6.25
2.08
3.13
1.05
5.3
9
v
4.6 ~
8
7
3.9
\
P
b

6-
%
0
02 0,4
0.6 0.8 1.0
i
FI G. 10.24a. Reduced performance chart of SCWC. N = 20; u = 0.60; p = 0,50;
g = 0.85.
1.5-
1.0
P
0.5
00.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
0
FI G. 10.24b.Load cur ve of SCWC for b = 3.3 and i = 0.29.
i n a regi on of heavy l oadi ng (l arge g), a number of factors tend to affect
the power output unfavorabl y. The output-ci rcui t l oss i s most i mpor -
tant at l arge g, as i s the l oss i n any external tuni ng devi ce, and these
l osses have not been consi dered. Furthermore, i n thi s regi on any mode
i nstabi l i ty of a tube i s enhanced, and the r-f patterns become the most
i rregul ar.
434
55~
I
5.0
0.18
/
4.5
3.1~
v
4.0 ~,9,/
.
-.
2.7
3.5
2.5
3,Q 2.3
0.1
PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN [SEC. 10.7
,C
I
0.71
___ A
U.OY
. -
U.53
\
1.06
\
j
/
/ u
1
/
/
0,3 0.4 0.5 0.6 ( 7
i
FI G. 10.25.Reduced performance chart of RD1 1-2. N = 26; u = 0.71: u = 0.53:
l /QL = 2.58 X 10-~.
6.0
5.5
5,0
v
4.5
4.0
3.5
r
0.25
0.5
/
1.27
1.02 1
2.7
\
40%
2.5
v
- --
b
, - 7,
1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
i
FI G. 10.26.Reduced performance chart of GK13-1. N = 38: e = 0.77: P = 0.49;
l /QL = 2,24 X 10o.
I
1
I
SEC. 10.8] SECONDARY DESI GN PA RAMETERL3
435
10.8. Determi nati on of the Secondary Desi gn Parameters.As
descri bed i n Sec. 10.2, the pri mary parameters affecti ng the desi gn of the
i nteracti on space are the vol tage V, the cur r ent I , and the wavel ength k.
These are not suffi ci ent, however , compl etel y to determi ne the i nteracti on
space and permi t the cal cul ati on of the secondary desi gn parameters.
I n addi ti on, i t i s necessary to choose a set of shape factors, N, u, and u,
and settl e upon a rel ati ve operati ng poi nt expressed by b, i , and g.
the ni ne quanti ti es V, I , and A; N, u and p; and b, i, and g can then be
used to cal cul ate the secondary parameters r., r., h, w, q., G., J , and B.
I n the present formul ati on, the choi ce of the shape factors and
rel ati ve operati ng poi nt has been consi dered essenti al l y a guess that
provi des a tri al sol uti on to the desi gn probl em that may or may not turn
out to be sel f-consi stent. Actual l y, i n many cases, past exper i ence wi l l
ser ve as a gui de. Furthermore, the expressi ons that are to be cal cul ated
for the secondary desi gn parameters wi l l readi l y i ndi cate how an i nade-
quate choi ce of the shape factors or operati ng poi nt must be amended.
I n fi xi ng N, u, and p, a choi ce i s made of a parti cul ar fami l y of mag-
netrons r epr esented by one of the r educed performance charts. A
choi ce of b and i then determi nes wher e, rel ati ve to thi s chart, the new
magnetron i s to operate. I f now a val ue of g i s sel ected that i s the same
as that for whi ch the chart was measured, val ues of v and of p can be read
off dkectl y. I f a di fferent val ue of g i s desi red, an approxi mati on must
be made to the pr oper performance chart i n a way to be consi dered
short 1y.
The magneti c fi el d B can be found di rectl y from Eqs. (25a) and
(26a) and may be wri tten
B=b
42,400
AN(1 u)
The anode radi us i s determi ned from Eqs. (25b) and (26b) to be
J
NV
T
= A 6320 ~
(31)
Si mi l arl y the anode hei ght hi s found from Eqs. (25c) and (26c) to be
()()
( ).
(1a) 1+!
h= 2.39A+ :N
u
al
(33)
By usi ng Eqs. (25d) and (26d), the l oad G. i s gi ven by
()()
I
Q=g; ;.
(341
436 PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN [SEC. 108
Because thecathode radi us i sgi ven byr. =ura, onehasfrom Eq. (32)
(35)
Si mi l arl y, the sl ot openi ng i s determi ned by w = p(2m-./N), whi ch
becomes
The cathode-current densi ty J i s found from Eqs. 25c and 26c to be
Fi nal l y, the el ectroni c effi ci ency
cal cul ated from
1
al
N(T
()
(l _az)z 1+!
u
(36)
(37)
i s read from the performance chart or
(38)
Equati ons (31) to (38) express the secondary desi gn parameters i n
terms of the vol tage, current, and wavel ength; the shape factors N,
a, and p; and the rel ati ve operati ng poi nt gi ven by b, i, and g.
I n Sec. 10.9 a compari son wi l l be made of the r educed performance
30
20
Ica
N(l -u2)
0
10
T ~
e
o
0 10 20 30
40
N
FI G. 10.27 .100/[N(l U2)], as a functi on
of N.
charts presented i n thi s secti on.
I t wi l l be found, after a l oad cor -
recti on i s appl i ed, that they are
ver y si mi l ar except for a moderate
decr ease i n el ectroni c effi ci ency
wi th l arger val ues of u. To a fi rst
approxi mati on, t h e r e f or e, the
effect of the shape factors and
rel ati ve operati ng poi nt upon the
secondary desi gn parameters can
be consi dered i ndependent.
I t i s of i nterest to consi der i n
detai l the effect of the shape fac-
tors, the rel ati ve operati ng poi nt, and the pri mary desi gn parameters
upon the magneti c fi el d, the anode hei ght, the cathode radi us, and the
cathode-current densi ty.
Magneti c Fi el d.-From Eq. (31) i t i s seen that the magneti c fi el d i s
proporti onal to b, l /A, and l /N(l U2). An attempt to oper ate
hi gh on the r educed performance chart, i n search of hi gh effi ci ency, for
I
SEC. 10.8] SECONDARY DESI GN PARAMETERS 437
exampl e, requi res a hi gh fi el d. Furthermore, the shor ter the wavel ength
the gr eater the magneti c fi el d must be. I n Fi g. 1027, the quanti ty
l /[N(l 02)] has been pl otted agai nst N for the tubes consi dered i n
thi s secti on. A steady decr ease wi th i ncreasi ng N i s observed, i ndi cati ng
that a smal l er fi el d i s requi red for l arger val ues of N.
I t i s necessary to di scuss at thi s poi nt a l i mi tati on that i s pl aced
upon the choi ce of b when an anode bl ock of the ri si ng-sun type i s used.
I t has been shown i n Chap. 3 that the mmode of a ri si ng-sun anode bl ock
contai ns a certai n amount of the zer o component and that thi s contami na-
ti on parti cul arl y di sturbs the el ectr on orbi ts and ther efor e decreases the
el ectroni c effi ci ency at magneti c fi el ds for whi ch the frequency of the
cycl oi dal moti on of the el ectrons i s cl ose to the osci l l ati ng frequency.
For a pl ane magnetron, thk cri ti cal fi el d shoul d be gi ven by
~ = 10,600
c
A;
(39)
but for cyl i ndri cal magnetrons, a ver y qual i tati ve argument by Sl ater
i ndi cates that a cor r ecti on term shoul d be added so that the fi el d becomes
~ = 10,600
c
A
()
1+;
(40)
I n Fi g. 10.28 the el ectroni c effi ci ency at constant cur r ent i s pl otted
agai nst M? from data obtai ned wi th two 18-vane 3-cm magnetrons and
wi th one 22-vane l -cm magnetron. An effi ci ency mi ni mum i s exhi bi ted
by the curves that checks surpri si ngl y wel l wi th Eq. (40). Unfor-
tunatel y, no ri si ng-sun magnetrons have been made wi th N smal l er than
18, so that Eq. (40) cannot be experi mental l y checked for l ow val ues of
N: An i nteresti ng f act wi l l be found i n Sec~ 126, however , whi ch may
have beari ng on thi s subject. I t wi l l be seen that the back-bombard-
ment power on the cathode of a 2J32 magnetron expressed i n ~er centage
of i np-ut power reaches a maxi mum val ~e i n the ~ei ghborho~d of 1460
gauss. By pl aci ng k = 10.7 and N = 8 i n Eq. (40), a val ue of B. i s
obtai ned equal to 1360 gauss. I f the i ncreased back-bombardment
power coul d be ascri bed to the same type of i nteracti on that produces
the effi ci ency val l ey of a ri si ng-sun magnetron, the agreement of these
fi el ds woul d be addi ti onal evi dence for the val i dl t y of Eq. (40). The
i denti fi cati on of the two phenomena, however , cannot be made wi th
certai nty wi th the present knowl edge of magnetron el ectroni cs.
No parti cul ar si gni fi cance shoul d be attached to the val ues of effi -
ci ency at the mi ni mum poi nt because they depend pri mari l y upon the
amount of zer o component present, and that i n turn depends mai nl y
on the rati o of cavi ty si zes and on the anode di ameter.
1 J. C. Sl ater, RL Report No. V-5S, August 1941.
438 PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN
018 vane,3.2-cmhi gh. powertube I
[SEC. 10.8
8 12 16 20) 03
hB i nqauss.cm
FI G. 10. 28.Dependence of el ectroni c e5ci ency on kB i n rki ng-.wn magnetrmm.
104X2.4
~ 5
2.2 ,
\
\
I
5 1.8
\.
4
:
I ~<
~ \
\
---
-----
.E
\ - ------
.
~ 1,4
3
\
\
\
b.
\
\
1.0
2
+. -
- -- ___ _
0.6 1,
0 10 20 30 40
N
,/.
//
/
/
/
,
/
~--
,/
,.-
/
/
/
/
/

10 20 30 40
N
I
I
FI G. 10.29.XB. as a functi on of N.
FI G. 10,30.Cri ti cal r educed magneti c
fi el d b. as a functi on of N.
I
I
I
i
I
I
t
I
SEC.10.8] SECONDARY DESI GN PARAMETERS 439
I t i s cl ear from Fi g. 1028 that a range of about f 25 per cent around
the cri ti cal val ue of magneti c fi el d B. i s excl uded i n desi gni ng a ri si ng-sun
magnetron. By usi ng Eq. (40) a pl ot i s made i n Fi g. 10.29 of Al l .
agai nst N. The regi on to be avoi ded i s del i neated by two dashed l i nes
spaced pl us and mi nus 25 per cent
from the ful l curve. For magne- 30
trons of l -cm or shor ter wave-
l ength that have a l arge number
of osci l l ators, the dhl i cul ty of
getti ng strong fi el ds at moderate
om
magnet wei ght may ser ve to l i mi t 10
the fi el d to val ues for whi ch AB
o 10 20 30 40
N
is l ess than 0.9 X 104 gauss-cm.
FI G,10.31.N/~ as a functi on of N.
For l onger-wavel ength tubes,
fi el ds cor r espondhg to MI val ues gr eater than 1.7 X 104 are easi er to
obtai n, and operati on above the cri ti cal regi on becomes feasi bl e.
From Eqs. (31) and (40), the cri ti cal r educed fi el d i s found to be
b,= (1 - 17)~. (41)
By usi ng the val ues of u gi ven i n Tabl e 102, a pl ot of thk quanti ty i s
made i n Fi g. 10.30, showi ng how b. i ncreases wi th i ncreasi ng N. An
average cur ve i s drawn through the poi nts, and two dashed l i nes spaced
N
FI G. 1O.32.NLT as a functi on of N. Nu =
0.S5N 3.S3.
pl us and mi nus 25 per cent from
the average cur ve i ndi cate ap-
proxi matel y the regi on to be
avoi ded.
Anode Hei ght.I n Eq. (33),
the anode hei ght i s found to be
proporti onal to I / V, v/ i, and
N[(l c)(1 + l /u)]/a,. A l ow-
i mpedance magnetron ther efor e
requi res a l ong anode. I n addL
ti on, a l ong anode i s requi red for
operati on i n the upper l eft of the
r educed performance chart (i n
general , a regi on of hi gh effi ci ency), al though a short anode i s obtai ned
i n the l ower ri ght porti on of the chart (a regi on of l ow effi ci ency).
I n Fi g. 10.31 a,/[(1 c+)(1 + l /u)] has been set equal to A, and the
quanti ty N/A pl otted agai nst N. I t i s obser ved that ther e exi sts no
defi ni te trend of N/ A wi th i ncreasi ng N. Thi s sl ow vari ati on of N/ A
wi th N has an i nteresti ng i mpl i cati on. From Eqs. (26b) to (26d) i t
440
PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN [SEC. 108
may be computed that
$j _ 0.420A
z A N
(42)
Hence, normal i zed to the same wavel ength, the tubes thus far desi gned
have had val ues of u such that the characteri sti c conductance per uni t
l ength have vari ed over a rel ati vel y smal l range. Referri ng now to
Eq. (34), i t i s cl ear that i n general
0,8
G. wi l l be proporti onal to h/A al -
most i ndependentl y of N.
0.6
Cathode Radi us.I n Eq. (35),
o
the cathode radi us i s obser ved to
(> be proporti onal to WV and NI S.
The product of Nu i s pl otted
u 0.4
4/ agai nst N i n Fi g. 10.32 and i s ob-
/
ser ved to be nearl y a l i nearl y i n-
0.2
creasi ng functi on of N. For a
/
l ow-vol tage magnetron wi th smal l
V, ther efor e, the cathode can be
o
I
kept at a reasonabl e si ze by i n-
0 10 20 30 40 creasi ng N i nstead of by usi ng a
N
FI G. 10.33.~ as a functi on of N.
ver y smal l val ue of v and accept-
i ng a consequentl y l ow effi ci ency.
The strai ght l i ne i n Fi g. 10.32 has the equati on
I
Nu = 0.85N 3.83 (43)
or
g = 0.,5-3$.
(44)
Equati on (44) has been used to draw the sol i d cur ve shown i n Fi g. 1033,
wher e u i s pl otted agai nst N.
Cathode-current Densi tu.The cathode-current densi ty J expressed
by Eq. (37) i s proporti onal to i , l /i 2, WV, and A/ Nzu. - I t i s i nterest-
i ng to obser ve that J has no expl i ci t dependence on 1. Other thi ngs
bei ng equal , a l ow-current densi ty i s obtai ned onl y by operati ng at the
far l eft of the r educed performance chart. Thi s fact i s i l l ustrated by
the charts for the vari ous c-w magnetrons that, al though operati ng at
ver y l ow pl ate currents compared wi th pul sed tubes, obtai n the l ow-
cur r ent densi ty appropri ate to a c-w cathode onl y by operati ng at smal l
r educed currents. The dependence of .l on A i l l ustrates the wel l -known
l aw that the cur r ent densi ty requi red of a cathode vari es i nversel y as the
square of the wavel ength. The dependence on V/V i ndi cates that a
smal l er cur r ent densi ty i s requi red of l ow-vol tage magnetrons and of
I SEC. 104)] COMPARI SON OF REDUCED PERFORMANCE CHARTS 441
I
magnetrons operati ng hi gh on the r educed performance chart. The
quanti ty A/ Nzu has been pl otted agai nst N i n Fi g. 10.34. I t decreases
steadi l y wi th i ncreasi ng N and i ndi cates that a l ower J can be achi eved
(
for a l arger number of osci l l ators.
I
I f a val ue of g i s taken di fferent from the val ue i ndi cated on the chosen
performance chart, the val ues of v and p wi l l be correspondi ngl y al tered.
To cor r ect p, i t must be assumed that i t vari es i n the same manner as
the cur ve i n the correspondi ng chart of p vs. g, even though di fferent
{
rel ati ve operati ng poi nts may be
i nvol ved. The assumpti on of a
general l y uni form vari ati on of the
performance chart wi th l oad i s
the o n 1y justi fi cati on of thi s
pr ocedur e.
The val ue of v, for a gi ven b
and;, may vary fr om 10 to 15 per
cent over the ordi nary range of g,
bei ng l ower for smal l val ues of g.
The data for maki ng thi s cor r ec-
ti on are not usual l y avai l abl e.
I f the cor r ecti on i s i gnored and a
11111
o 10 20 30 40
val ue of v i s used l arger than the
N
cor r ect val ue the tube wi l l be
FI G.10.34.AI N2Uas a functi on of I V.
found to requi re a magneti c fi el d somewhat l arger than the cal cul ated
val ue i n or der to oper ate at the vol tage V and cur r ent 1.
1009. Compari son of the Reduced Performance Charts.The useful -
ness of the scal i ng pri nci pl e natural l y suggests an attempt to cor r el ate
the performance of magnetrons of di fferent fami l i es. The quanti ti es
defi ned i n Eqs. (26) have been suggested as bei ng characteri sti c scal e
factors suffi ci ent to r educe to a common basi s the performance of mag-
1
netrons not onl y of di fferent si ze and wavel ength but al so of di fferent
N and u. I f thi s i s cor r ect, al l performance charts wi th the same g
and y shoul d be si mi l ar when r educed i n thi s manner.
The characteri sti c factors defi ned i n Eqs. (26) have been obtai ned
onl y by arguments of pl ausi bi l i ty. The quanti ti es v and (B are the
vol tage and fi el d at the poi nt of i ntersecti on of the cutoff cur ve and
Hart~ee resonance l i ne i n ~ di agram of vol tage agai nst fi el d, and g i s the
cor r espondhg current. Because thi s i s a ver y characteri sti c poi nt i n
such a di agram, i t i s thought possi bl e that the performance of a tube
expressed i n uni ts of B, V, and g shoul d be nearl y i ndependent of i ts
si ze, shape, and frequency. The r educed performance charts of thi s
chapter have been expressed i n terms of 6$ V, and g and wi l l be used to
exami ne thi s supposi ti on.
442 PRI NCI PLES OF DESI GN [SEC, 10.9
The factor P determi ni ng the rel ati ve sl ot wi dth shoul d have l i ttl e
effect on operati on over the range of val ues l i sted i n Tabl e 10.1. For
uni t vol tage across the sl ots of a magnetron, the tangenti al el ectri c fi el d
i n the i nteracti on space for the r-mode i s gi ven by
(45)
wher e 1#1i s the angul ar coordi nate. The coeffi ci ents a- exi st for
m = N/2, 3N/2, 5N/2, , and are gi ven by
m
()
si n 7rp
NN
~m.
7rra
(46)
m
T p
( m)/:
I n Tabl e 10.3 the val ues of si n ,V r~
TWare gi ven for m = N/2,
3N/2, and 5N/2 and vari ous val ues of p. I t i s seen that the fundamental
/
TABLE11J3.VALUES OFSI N~ TP ~ WI
FOR SELECTED VALUES OF m AND p
I

57rp
2
0.30 0.963 0.699 0.300
035 0.950 0.605 0.139
0.40 0.936 0.505 0.000
0.45 0.919 0.402 0.108
0.50 0.900 0.300 0.180
component a~/Z vari es onl y about 6 per cent as v goes from 0.30 to 0.50.
The successi ve components vary mor e but are much smal l er contri butors
to E~ wi thi n the i nteracti on space because of the factor
[J ~(27rr/ x)]
[J ~(2m-./ x)]
whi ch vari es essenti al l y as (r/r&-l . Successi ve components are mul ti -
pl i ed by (r/ra)N, whi ch for N as smal l as 4 and r/r~ as l arge as ~ i s onl y
0.316. Experi mental l y i t has been obser ved that onl y ver y sl i ght changes
are made i n the performance of a magnetron when ~ i s vari ed wi thi n the
range 0.30 to 0.50. Measurements i l l ustrati ng thi s fact are i ncl uded
SEC.10.9] COMPARI SON OF REDUCED PERFORMANCE CHARTS 443
i n a r epor t by M. Heal ea. 1 Consequentl y, a di fference i n p wi l l not be
consi dered a sour ce of seri ous di sagreement between the r educed data
of vari ous magnetrons.
Al though the factor p may be di sregarded i n compari ng the vari ous
r educed performance charts, thi s compari son shoul d sti l l be made for
charts wi th the same r educed l oad g. The charts of thi s chapter vary
wi del y i n l oad; they cannot, ther efor e, be di rectl y compared but must be
fi rst cor r ected to a common g.
Two di ffi cul ti es present themsel ves: (1) The val ue computed for g
i n any case i s di rectl y proporti onal to Y., a quanti ty whose val ue cal cu-
l ated by present methods i s al ways dubi ous. The amount of cor r ecti on
to a parti cul ar case to bri ng i t to a chosen val ue of g i s ther ef or e uncertai n.
(2) Even i f g wer e accuratel y known, the l oad curves gi ve ver y i ncompl ete
i nformati on about the vari ati on i n a performance chart as i ts g i s changed.
I n meeti ng these dl fi cul ti es, the r educed magneti c fi el d l i nes and power
contours wi l l be consi dered separatel y.
I t i s much mor e conveni ent to compare efi ci ency contours than
contours of constant r educed power . I t wi l l be seen that the effi ci ency
contours can be r epr esented wi th
suffi ci ent accuracy by strai ght
l i nes, and thi s fact si mpl i fi es the
extrapol ati on and i nterpol ati on of
the data. I t wi l l be necessary to
assume that power and effi ci ency
vary proporti onal l y as the l oad i s
changed at a poi nt on a perform-
ance chart, and an approxi mati on
i s thereby i ntroduced that i s i l l us-
trated i n Fi g. 1035. The l oad
cur ve gi ves the rel ati on between
the r educed power s p and p
kkkf
b
v -----
V
b v ,%
P
P
(a) i
(b) i
FI G. 1035.-Vari ati on of performance
chart wi th l oad. (a) Load g; (b) l oad
g > g.
correspondi ng to g and g at constant b and i . Because the vol tage
i ncreases sl i ghtl y as g i s i ncreased, V wi l l be l arger than V, and the effi -
ci enci es wi l l be rel ated by
(47)
The effi ci ency qu at v and i wi th l oad g wi l l be agai n sl i ghtl y smal l er
than ~~. Because (v u) i s smal l , the er r or i n pl aci ng
(48)
I M. Heal ea, RL Repor t No. 586, Aug. 1, 1944.
444
i s uni mportant
earl i er.
I RI NGI PLES OF DESI GN
compared ]ri th the other sources
I nstead of tryi ng to cor r ect al l the performance
[$$Ec. 109
of er r or menti oned
charts to a common
val ue of g, each set of effi ci ency contours wi l l be adjusted by mul ti pl yi ng
them by the rati o of the po]r er at the maxi mum of the appropri ate l oad
cur ve to the power at the l oad poi nt of the performance chart. I t
wi l l devel op that the effi ci enci es cor r ected i n thi s way show certai n cor -
rel ati ons, so that the pr ocedur e i s useful even i f arbi trary. I f i t i s
assumed that the effi ci enci es of al l magnetrons at al l operati ng poi nts
are the same functi on of g, and i f S operates as a pr oper scal e factor, a
gr oup of i deal l oad curves shoul d appear as the ful l l i nes i n Fi g. 1036
P
b,,~l
-. _
9
Qo
FI G. 10.36.Expected appearance of a group
at l oad curves.
wi th thei r ordi nates ever ywher e
proporti onal . Experi mental l oad
curves appear to change ver y
sl owl y after reachi ng a maxi mum
poi nt, and Fi g. 1036 has been
drawn accordi ngl y. Because l ead
l osses and pattern di storti on may
cause the power to i ncrease l ess
rapi dl y than expected for i ncreas-
i ng g and i n a di fferent way for
each tube, the l oad curves shoul d
actual l y be expected to appear, un-
der the above assumpti ons, as the
dotted l i nes i n Fi g. 10.36, wher e
smal l changes i n power have caused
the maxi mum poi nts to scatter wi del y.
Wi th l oad curves of thi s shape,
the adjustment of the effi ci ency contours to maxi mum power resul ts i n an
approxi mate cor r ecti on to a common l oad go l ocated somewher e i n the
fl at regi on of the curves.
An assembl y of the actual l oad curves up to N = 16 i s gi ven i n Fi g.
10.37. These curves seem to depart further from proporti onal i ty than
the assumpti ons made above woul d l ead one to expect. Thi s behavi or
can be due to (1) i naccurate val ues of ~,, (2) i naccurate data, (3) unsuc-
cessful scal i ng by S, or (4) nonadherence to the assumpti on of com-
pl etel y uni form vari ati on of the performance charts wi th l oad. The
sour ce of the di ffi cul ty i s not evi dent at present.
The data beyond N = 16 are not consi dered rel i abl e enough to
cent ri but e to the compari sons that wi l l be made, whi l e the data for
ZP676 and HP 10V are to be excl uded for reasons gi ven i n Sec. 10.5.
Data concerni ng the QK61 wi l l be found to have poor agreement wi th
the other data used and have al so been omi tted from Fi g. 10.37. The
SEC, 10.9] COMPARI SON OF REDUCED PERFORMANCE CHARTS 445
l oad cur ve for the 725A i n Fi g. 1037 i s an average of the curves for the
Raytheon and Western El ectri c tubes.
As a fi rst step, the adjusted effi ci ency contours for al l tubes of a
gi ven N have been col l ected on a si ngl e pl ot, These pl ots are sho~vn
for N = 8, N = 12, and N = 16 i n Fi gs. 10.38 to 10.40. On these pl ots,
i t has been possi bl e to draw a set of strai ght l i nes representi ng the data
22
2C
16
12
P
8
4
0
----
/
2J32
0.0 0.2 0,4 0.6 0.8
9
FI G. 10.37.Assembl y of the r educed l oad curves.
wi thi n 15 per cent except at one or two poi nts. A number of reasons
have been gi ven previ ousl y that i ndi cate why effi ci enci es shoul d be l ower
than normal at the extr emes of operati on of a tube, thus tendi ng to cl ose
the efl l ci ency contours about the operati ng regi on. Thi s effect shoul d
be consi dered i n eval uati ng how wel l the strai ght l i nes r epr esent the data.
I n Fi g. 10.40, ther e i s obser ved the ver y unusual behavi or of the effi ci ency
446
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
(
14
12
10
v
8
6
4
2
PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN [SEC.109
I
/
/
...-
~--
/
---- ,----
707
7 w
60/ 0
/
/
/
50/ 0
/
2J 32-
/
Z,w --------
35%
/
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FI G. 10.38 .CoOected effi ci ency c~ntour sfor N = 8. ~ = 0.38.
/
660/ 0
/
/
65%
60&
/ /
60~0 ~
./
~. --
----
.
4J39. .
4J33
j.z~~ -l _- ----
++ I
I
-o 1
2 3 4 5 6 7
i
Fm. 1039. -Col l ectede ffi ci encycontoursfor~ = 12. u = 0.50toa = 0.59.
f
SEC. 10.9] COMPARISON OF REDUCED PERFORMAATCE CHARTS 447
l i nes for the QK61. I t i s not certai n whether thi s shape i s due to some
dkturbi ng effect, such as l eakage current, or represents the real behavi or
of the contours bel ow i = 0.5. The strai ght l i nes have not been extended
i nto thk regi on.
The general good consi stency of the effi ci enci es i n the pl ots for
N = 8, N = 12, and N = 16 confi rms the reasonabl eness of the adjust-
ments made i n the contours and 13
i ndi cates that the smal l di fferences
i n u for the tubes of the same N
ei ther have been taken i nto ac-
count by the scal e factors or cause
negl i gi bl e effects. Consequentl y, 11
each chart has been i ndi cated as
val i d over the range of u shown.
I n Fi g. 10.41 the effi ci ency ~
l i nes for the vari ous val ues of N
have been drawn or , a si ngl e chart. ~
Two i mportant poi nts emer ge: (1)
The vari ous l i nes show a remark- ~
abl e fami l y resembl ance; and (2)
al though the contours for N = 12
and N = 16 show reasonabl e nu-
meri cal agreement, the effi ci enci es ~
for N = 8 are ever ywher e much
hi gher. From the fi rst poi nt, sup-
por t i s gi ven to v and g as pr oper
scal e factors. From the second s
I 1
,!, ,,
. ,,.
VI //m%
.,
I
I \ \ /
80%
*
,1
70%
I
/
I
\
I 1
I
poi nt, however , i t i s cl ear that the 0
1
2 3
scal i ng process used has not r e-
1
~10.10.40.Col l ectedeffi ci encycontours
sui ted i n a compl ete coi nci dence
for .~ = 16. u = 0.60to 0.66,
of the effi ci ency contours and i n that sense has fai l ed.
Befor e consi deri ng thi s matter further, a compari son wi l l be made of
the contours of constant b. Agai n, thi s compari son cannot be stri ctl y
made unl ess the r educed charts are fi rst r educed to a common val ue of
g; but because the data to make thi s cor r ecti on are unavai l abl e, i t wi l l be
dkregarded. A di rect compari son wi l l neverthel ess be of val ue, because
the cor r ecti on woul d resul t onl y i n a smal l , roughl y paral l el di spl acement
of the fi el d l i nes. I n Fi g. 10.42 the contours of al most al l of the tubes
have been superi mposed for b equal to 2.50, 3.50, 4.50, 5.50, and 6.50.
These parti cul ar contours have been obtai ned by a l i near i nterpol ati on
of the l i nes of b on the i ndi vi dual performance charts. The data for
the QK61 have been excl uded because of extr eme di sagreement of
unknown ori gi n. I ncl uded on the chart are a set of strai ght heavy l i nes
448
PRINCIPLES OF DESIG.V
i denti fi ed by a val ue of b, passi ng through the
[SEC. 10.10
correspondi ng Hartree
vol tage at i = O and gi vi ng, i n each case, the best average agreement
wi th the correspondi ng experi mental contours.
The i ntermedi ate l i nes
are i nterpol ated. The verti cal spaci ng of these l i nes corresponds wel l
wi th the spaci ng of the experi mental contours. Thus, by i nspecti on of
Fi g. 10.42, i t i sseenthat ther e i samati mum spread i n each set of fi el d
contours of 20 per cent and a maxi mum devi ati on from the strai ght l i nes
of 10 per cent. The cor r ecti on for l oad woul d i ncrease or decr ease the
devi ati on by a smal l amount. To thi s extent, ther efor e, the fi el d l i nes
800/ 0
/
/ 60%
14
,. 65%
,Z
,/
70/0
.
1111
.~ -l A ,~1 455%
12
/
, /.
/
/
/
45%
10
/
.
600/0
.
8
.9/
/
..
, f ,/
/+ //
.
6
.
4

/
N=16
.
- -N=12
N=8
20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FI G. 10.41.Assembl y of effi ci ency contours for N = S, N = 12, and N = 16.
have been brought i nto coi nci dence.
Ther e appear to be some systemati c
changes i n shape of the contours as N i ncreases, but thi s questi on cannot
be adequatel y di scussed wi thout data suffi ci ent to r educe the charts
accuratel y to a common g.
1001O. The Uni versal Performance Chart.-The compari sons that
have been made above i ndi cate that the scal e factors ~, v, 9, and S are
suffi ci ent over the range consi dered to pr oduce at l east a rough coi nci dence
of the magneti c fi el d l i nes and to demonstrate a si mi l ari ty between the
effi ci ency contours of tubes wi th di fferent N. An effi ci ency contour
passi ng through a parti cul ar poi nt of the (v,i )-pl ane appears to have a
parti cul ar di recti on i ndependent of the val ue of N. However , the
r
I
I
I
SEC. 10.10]
THE UNIVERSAL PERFORMANCE CHART 449
numeri cal val ue that thi s contour possesses does seem to depend on N.
The use of these scal e factors, ther efor e, resul ts i n what may be cal l eda
pseudoscal i ng of a magnetron.
The i nabi l i ty of the scal e factors to pr oduce a tr ue scal i ng i s con-
fi rmed by measurements taken by M. Heal ea. 1 The effi ci ency of an
ei ght-osci l l ator
magnetron was
measured at constant magneti c
fi el d, current, and l oad for thr ee
di fferent val ues of u. These thr ee
poi nts appear i n Fi g. 1043, to-
gether wi th effi ci ency l i nes from
Fi g. 1038, whi ch cor r espond to a
val ue of u = 0.38. The val ue of g
for Heal eas data i s not the same
as that appropri ate to Fi g. 10.38
so that her effi ci ency for a = .37
does not agr ee wi th the val ues
i ndi cated on the effi ci ency l i nes.
8 -
a =0,29
6
u =0,37
v
q =31%
e
4
/
o
20
1 2 3 4
i
FI G. 10.43.Vari ati on i n effi ci ency wi th u
for N = 8.
Neverthel ess, i t i s observe-d that ther e i s a spread of 25 per cent i n the
thr ee effi ci enci es, al though the spaci ng of the l i nes woul d predi ct a spread
of not mor e than 7 per cent.
That the scal i ng i ntroduced by ~, V, 9, and S shoul d behave i n thk
way has been suggested i n a r epor t by Al l i s. 2
He cal cul ates that the
effi ci ency of a magnetron shoul d be constant al ong a l i ne gi ven by
D = % = ConSt
(49)
and that the effi ci ency to be associ ated wi th each such l i ne i s a functi on
of O. Thi s theor y, however , i s uncertai n i n many ways, and i n parti cul ar,
as wi l l be seen shortl y, the effi ci ency contours predi cted by Eq. (49)
do not agr ee compl etel y wi th Fi g. 10.41.
Ther efor e, Al l i s resul ts cannot
be cal l ed upon to i ndi cate a theoreti cal method of associ ati ng effi ci enci es
for each case wi th the vari ous contours.
I n establ i shi ng a uni versal performance chart, one can pr oceed wi th
the present data onl y to the fol l owi ng extent. A set of (v,i )-charac-
teri sti cs can be drawn that r epr esent the data of thi s chapter wi thi n
10 per cent but that do not r epr oduce wel l the shape of the experi mental
characteri sti cs i n al l cases.
These l i nes are drawn wi th no dependence
on l oad because ther e i s i nsuffi ci ent data to i ntroduce such a cor r ecti on.
A set of strai ght l i nes are added that when assi gned the pr oper val ues i n
1M. Heal ea, RL Repor t No. 586, Aug. 1, 1944.
ZW. P. Al l i s, Theor y of Space Chargei n an Osci l l ati ngMagnetron, RL Repor t
NO.176, Jul y 1, 1942.
450 PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN
Y
[SEC. 10.10
n
.
0
each of thr ee cases r epr esented by di fferent val ues of N and u, r epr oduce
the experi mental effi ci enci es wi thi n 15 per cent when these are cor r ected
to a l oadi ng that gi ves maxi mum power.
1
I
I
SEC.10.10] THE UNIVERSAL PERFORMANCE CHART 451
++
1
452 PRI NCI PLES OF DESI G>V [SEC. 10.10
A uni versal performance chart constructed i n thi s way i s shown i n
Fi g. 10.44. Above b = 2.50, the (u,i )-characteri sti cs are the same as
those drawn i n Fi g. 10.42 and can be r epr esented by the l i near equati on
9+b.
v=(2bl )+Tt. (50)
The contour for b = 1.00 must be a hori zontal l i ne passi ng through
= 1, a condi ti on not sati sfi ed by Eq. (50). consequentl y, i t i s assumed
that bel ow b = 2.50 the characteri sti cs have the sl ope suggested by
Sl ater and gi ven by
v = (2b 1) + 2(b ~; 1)2i (51)
The characteri sti cs defi ned by Eqs. (50) and (51) coi nci de cl osel y for
b = 2.50. Havi ng defi ned the (V, I )-characteri sti cs, i t i s possi bl e to
draw i n the cutoff cur ve that must sati sfy the rel ati on u = bz. Al l
effi ci enci es must become zer o on thi s cur ve to be consi stent wi th the
(V,l )-l i nes.
The effi ci ency contours of Fi g. 1041 have been matched cl osel y wi th a
fami l y of strai ght l i nes gi ven by
(52)
The quanti ty q i s a parameter desi gnati ng a member of the fami l y, and
i ts val ue i s i ndi cated on each effi ci ency l i ne drawn i n Fi g. 10.44. The
effi ci enci es to be associ ated wi th these l i nes wi l l be cal l ed 70(gjo,N) and
are i ndi cated i n Tabl e 10.4, to the extent of the present data. Ther e are
TABLE 1O.4.TABLE OF EFFI CI ENCY qo AS A FUNCTI ON OF q, ., ANDN
q
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8,0
N=8,
a = 0.38
0.30
0.50
0.62
0.73
0.82
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
N = 12,
u = 0.50 to 0.59
. . . .
0.46
0,57
0.62
0.67
. . . .
. . . .
N = 16,
u = 0.60 to 0.66
. . . .
. . . .
0,48
0,59
0.67
0.72
0,76
0,79
3CWC, N = 20,
a = 0.60
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . .
0.68
0.74
I
i ncl uded val ues obtai ned from compari son wi th the performance chart
for the SCWC.
I J. C. Sl ater, Theory of Magnetron Operati on, RL Report No. 200, Mar. 8,
1943.
SEC. 10.10] THE UNI VERSAL PERFORMANCE CHART
453
15
/
,
/
/
/
/
/
v
/ v
\ b
14
/
/
/
/
~%
/ # ~!l/
4$/
~!
y/
ml
/
/
/ ,
12
/ j/ ,/
/
k-
/
1 / , ,/ ,/
,/
/
,/ / / I ,/ / /
/ /
?+
10
/
/
/
/ ,/ > g
~=i z+
/, ~
8
/ /
/ /
/
@
/
@
/ /
/ /
~=)o
6
.-~
/
/
/
) p / F
+
7
/
/ /
,.=
/
/
..-
4
,/
/ G
~ ~
.-- .2--
/
---
/
2
/
o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
i
FI G. 10.45.Compari son of effi ci ency l i nes and l i nes of constant D.
10.0
LCT
0.9
/
0.8
0.7
aa: 0.6
/
+
+
0.4
0.3 -
O.z
0,1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
9/90
FI Q. 10.46.Normal i zed l oad curves,
454 PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN [SEC. 10.11
Usi ng the (u,i )-characteri sti cs defi ned i n Eqs. (50) and (51), the l i nes
of constant D defi ned i n Eq. (49) can be constructed. These l i nes are
compared i n Fi g. 10.45 wi th the effi ci ency contours defi ned by Eq. (52);
the l i nes di sagree badl y i n sl ope except cl ose to the cutoff curve. The
experi mental effi ci enci es ther efor e decr ease mor e rapi dl y wi th i ncreasi ng
cur r ent than Al l i s theor y woul d predi ct, except for smal l val ues of b.
Thi s obser ved fact i s consi stent wi th the careful data taken by Rl eke, 1
Pl atzman, and Evans i n whi ch the effi ci enci es are found to fol l ow ver y
cl osel y l i nes of constant D because thei r data do not extend above v = 6.
I t woul d be ver y desi rabl e at thi s poi nt to be abl e to exhi bi t a si ngl e
cur ve gi vi ng the vari ati on of the effi ci enci es of the uni versal performance
chart wi th l oad. As has been sai d, the unsystemati c appearance of the
l oad curves i n Fi g. 10.37 makes i t i mpossi bl e to state a si ngl e val ue of
g for whi ch the effi ci enci es that have been gi ven are val i d. A certai n
amount of progress can be made, however , by normal i zi ng the l oad curves
to the maxi mum val ue of p and the correspondi ng val ue of g. These
curves are shown i n Fi g. 10.46 wher e p/p~U has been pl otted agai nst
g/go for the cases consi dered.
Except for one case the curves now show a
reasonabl y si mi l ar vari ati on wi th g/gO and can be r epr esented by an
equati on of the form
(53)
Ther efor e, usi ng an approxi mati on i ntroduced i n Eq. (48), one can wri te
4g
V. go
~o(9,fJ,~) =
()
2
1+1
go
or
(54)
(55)
The di ffi cul ty that has been encounter ed can now be expressed by
sayi ng that the data do not i ndi cate i f a si ngl e val ue of go exi sts. The
average val ue of go i s 0.5, but the range i s from 0.25 to 0.80, or al most a
factor of 2 each way.
10.11. The General Desi gn Formul as.-The anal ysi s that has been
made of the general scal i ng l aws opens the way for mor e comprehensi ve
desi gn procedures.
I F. F. Ri eke et al .,
No. 451, Mar. 3, 1944.
The 10 equati &s that ha~e been formul a~ed are
Anal ysi s of Magnetron Performance, Part I I , RL Report
SEC. 10.11] THE GENERAL DESIGN FORMULAS
455
42,400
B = b Nk(l u)
J
NA V
= 6320 ~
()()
~_239AhJ ~ v
.
Az~
Nu
J
T
rc.h
6320 ~
J
~=420~ ~A,
A v N2U
J
px 7
w = 1010 ;
()()
I v
GL=g,y-v ~,
e = ~O(~uN) (1 rT)
v=(2b l )+(9+b)~
v=(2bl )+2@; l )2i
v=
5q~6+gi .
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
b z 2.50,
(64a)
b <2.50, (64b)
(65)
The accuracy of thi s set of desi gn formul as i s l i mi ted by Eqs. (62),
(64a), (64b), and (65). I n Eqs. (62) and (63), g has been repl aced by
~g i n such a way that al l the uncertai nty about g appears i n the equati on
for G.. The quanti ty ? = g/g,, i ndi cati ng at what fracti on of the l oad
for maxi mum power a magnetron operates, repl aces g as a vari abl e.
The preci si on wi th whi ch Eqs. (64a), (64b), and (65) r epr esent the
magneti c fi el d l i nes and effi ci ency contours has al ready been di scussed.
The scope of the desi gn formul as i s l i mi ted by the factor qo(q,u,N)
i n Eq. (65) whi ch i s known wi th the present data onl y to the extent of
Tabl e 10.4.
The 10 equati ons l i sted above contai n 19 quanti ti es; any desi gn
pr ocedur e must fi x i n some way 9 of these quanti ti es. I n Sees. 105
through 10.8 a process has been di scussed at l ength i n whi ch the pri mary
desi gn parameters X, V, and 1 are fi xed; the shape factors N, u, and p
and the rel ati ve operati ng poi nt b, i, and ~ are assumed; and the quanti -
ti es V., G., B, J , r., r., h, and w are computed and then exami ned for
consi stency wi th other aspects of the desi gn. Some al ternati ve pr oce-
dures are to be di scussed bel ow whi ch agai n fi x the val ues of h, V, and 1
and resul t i n tri al val ues of the remai ni ng quanti ti es.
These al ternati ves
456
PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN
vary by assumi ng the val ues for di fferent groups
[SEC.10.11
of si x parameters.
Tabl e i O.5 i l l ustra~es the choi ce made i n thre~ such al ternati ves.
TABLE1O.5.THEFI XEDPARAMETERS I N ALTERNATI VE DESI GNPROCEDURES
Parameter
N
o
P
b
i
Y
:L
B
J
r.
r.
h
w
Those used i n
Chap, 10
I
d d
d
. . 2
. . v
. .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. .
I
d
. . . .
Al ternati ve
I I
. .
. .
I I I
Alternative I .Thi s case recogni zes an attack made on the general
desi gn probl em by Hagstrum, Hebenstrei t, and Whi tcomb of Bel l
Tel ephone Laboratori es. The choi ce of assumed parameters used her e
assures that the desi gn wi l l meet certai n fi xed requi rements l ai d on the
ci rcui t effi ci ency, the magneti c fi el d, and the anode hei ght. One rel ati on
between v and u can be obtai ned from Eqs. (56) and (64), and a second
rel ati on i s provi ded by Eq. (58). When these expressi ons are combi ned,
u becomes
=[(~)&l -[&o@+ $-):$=o:$=o
(66)
Thi s equati on i s not preci sel y that obtai ned by Hagstrum, Hebenstrei t,
and Whi tcomb because, i nstead of Eqs. (64), they use an expressi on mor e
cl osel y fi tti ng thei r parti cul ar case and negl ecti ng any change i n sl ope
of the (v,i )-characteri sti c wi th i ncreasi ng b.
Equati on (66) does not necessari l y provi de a reasonabl e val ue of u.
The parameters enteri ng the equati on, ther efor e, have the restri cti on
that u must l i e wi thi n some accepted range. The remai ni ng undeter-
mi ned quanti ti es can now be found by usi ng the val ue of u gi ven by
Eq. (66).
Al ternati ve 11.Thi s pr ocedur e fi xes the cathode cur r ent densi ty J,
the el ectroni c effi ci ency q,, and the rel ati ve operati ng poi nt. From
SEC.10.11] THE GENERAL DESI GN FORM ULAS 457
Eqs. (64) and (65) v and q can be determi ned i mmedi atel y; Eqs. (60)
and (55) then provi de two rel ati ons between N and u as fol l ows:
and
A
_=N2
h2J ~i
_ ,
420 ~V i
(67)
u
m(q,IJ,N) = q. ~7T)2 (68)
By choosi ng a val ue of N, A/ u i s determi ned and ther efor e a can be
found from Fi g. 10.47. The val ue of qOcorrespondi ng to these val ues of N
and u can then be esti mated from Tabl e 10.4 i f they are wi thi n the known
4
A
3
7
*
T
~2
<
\
1
/
~
o
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
FI G.1O.47.Aand Alu as functi ons~f N. A = aI /[(1 - az)~(l + I /a)].
range and exami ned for consi stency wi th Eq. (68). A certai n sl ack has
to be permi tted at thi s poi nt, because N i s not a conti nuous vari abl e.
Equati ons (67) and (68) restri ct somewhat the choi ce of the fi xed quanti -
ti es. I n parti cul ar, A/ u has a mi ni mum val ue of about 0.94 at u = 0.35.
The val ues of u and N determi ned from Eqs. (67) and (68) al l ow the
cal cul ati on of the remai ni ng unknowns.
Alternative 111.Thi s case i s presented as one correspondi ng rather
cl osel y to the way i n whi ch many magnetrons have been desi gned i n
practi ce. The shape factors N, u, and y are assumed fi xed, as are the
ci rcui t effi ci ency and the cathode-current densi ty. I t i s al so assumed
that the tube wi l l oper ate at a fracti on ~ of the l oad for maxi mum power .
From Eq. (55), a val ue can be obtai ned for qo(q,a,N) and then a val ue
for q by usi ng Tabl e 10.4. Equati ons (37) may be wri tten
(69)
458 PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN [SEC.10.12
The quanti ti es on the ri ght of Eq. (69) are fi xed and ther efor e deter -
mi ne @/i . The val ues of N and u empl oyed wi l l approxi matel y
sati sfy Eq. (44) i n or der to cor r espond to Tabl e 7.6, and a graph of
A/ N2u as a functi on of N can ther efor e be gi ven i n Fi g. 10.48.
I n Fi g. 10.49, contours of constant b have been drawn i n the (@/i , q)-
pl ane and ser ve to determi ne b. Wi th q and b known, v and i can be found
i dX30
1:
-.
10
0
0 10 20 30 40
N
FI G. 1048. -A/N2u as a functi on of N for u = 0.85 3.83/N.
8
6
w
~
4
2
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
9
FI G.10.49.~i as a functi on of -y for vari ous val ues of b.
from Fi g. 10.44 or computed from Eqs. (64) and (65). The remai ni ng
parameters can then be found wi thout di ffi cul ty.
10.12. Numeri cal Exampl e.I n or der to i l l ustrate most cl earl y the
methods di scussed i n thi s secti on, a numeri cal exampl e wi l l be con-
si dered. Suppose that i t i s desi red to bui l d a c-w magnetron that
operates wi th A = 10 cm, V = 1000 vol ts, and 1 = 0.15 amp. Suppose
further that an el ectroni c effi ci ency of about 0.70 i s desi red for ~ = 1.00
SEC. 10.12] NUMERI CAL EXAMPLE 459
and that i t i s requi red that .J equal 0.15 amp/cm2 i n or der to remai n
wel l bel ow an arbi trary l i mi t of 0.20 amp/cm2.
Consi der fi rst the pr ocedur e establ i shed by Al ternati ve I I I . Suppose,
on the basi s of previ ous exper i ence, i t i s bel i eved that N = 16 may be a
sui tabl e number of osci l l ators for the tube. From Eq. (44) the cor -
respondi ng val ue of u i s found to be 0.61. Si nce i t i s assumed that
-y = 1.0, i t i s necessary that qo(q,u,N) ~ 0.70. The correspondi ng val ue
of q i s found by r efer ence to Tabl e 104 to be equal to 6. By the use of
Eq. (69) and Fi g. 10I 48, i t i s next found that ~ji = 4.9. Wi th thi s
val ue of v$/i and the val ue q = 6, a r efer ence to Fi g. 10.49 determi nes
the val ue of b as 3.9. The val ue of u i s found to be 7.0 from Fi g. 10.44,
and the correspondi ng val ue of i i s (i /v;) ~ = 0.54.
From Eqs. ,(56) to (59) B = 1600 gauss, h = 0.87 cm, ra = 0.30 cm,
and r. = 0.19 cm. The tube the mai n features of whi ch are thus estab-
l i shed corresponds roughl y to the QK61 c-w magnetron dkcussed i n
Chap. 19.
Al ternati ve H can now be i l l ustrated by supposi ng i n the same
exampl e that b and i have the val ues al ready cal cul ated but that N and
u are undeci ded. The quanti ti es v and q can be consi dered as determi ned
by b and i . From Eq. (67) i t i s now found that
A
= 5.5 x 1O-3N.
a
(70)
By use of Eq. (70) and Fi g. 10.47, one can now construct Tabl e 10.6.
TABLE1O.6.POSSI BLE VALUESOF N I N AN EXAMPLEOF MAGNETRON DESI GN
N
10
12
14
16
18
20
A

u
0.55
0.79
1,08
1.41
1.78
2.20
u
. . . .
. . . .
0.50
0.59
0.66
0.69
085_~
N
0,47
0.53
0.58
0.61
0.64
0.66
I t i s obser ved that the condi ti ons i mposed on the desi gn cannot possi bl y
be met wi th N l ess than 14. At N = 14 the cal cul ated val ue of u i s
consi derabl y l ess than the val ue gi ven by Eq. (44), but at N = 20 the
cal cul ated val ue becomes l arger than the val ue gi ven by Eq. (44). The
best match i s gi ven by N = 16 or 18. For N = 16, r efer ence can now
\
be made to Tabl e 10U4,wher e i t i s found that
N = 16 i s consi stent wi th the desi red val ue.
~o(q,U,N) for q = 6 and
CHAPTER 11
THE RESONANT SYSTEM
BY S. MI LLMAN AND W. V. SMI TH
I
11.1. Factors I nfl uenci ng Choi ce of Resonant System.Chapter 10
anal yzed the probl em of desi gni ng an anode bl ock based on tri al val ues
of the parameters N, d.J A, p = w/ d, and h/i. The present chapter
wi l l gi ve speci fi c sol uti ons to the probl em and i ndi cate modi fi cati ons
necessary i n the tri al sol uti on. The speci fi c types of bl ocks to be con-
I
si dered are the ri si ng-sun bl ock and the strapped bl ock, whi ch are

L
FI G. 11. I .Doubl e-ri ng-strapped anode bl ock.
di scussed from a theoreti cal vi ewpoi nt i n Chaps. 3 and 4 and whi ch are
i l l ustrated i n Fi gs. 1101 and 3.1. For wavel engths above 3 cm strapped
resonant systems become i ncreasi ngl y preferabl e to ri si ng-sun resonant
systems, whi l e for wavel engths bel ow 3 cm the si tuati on i s r ever sed.
The thr ee major factors i nfl uenci ng the choi ce between these two desi gns
are si ze and ease of constructi on, unl oaded Q and ci rcui t effi ci ency, and
mode separati on as functi ons of dJ i and h/L.
At 1 cm the pri me desi gn cri teri on i s that di mensi ons be as l arge as
possi bl e compared wi th a wavel ength.
The ri si ng-sun constructi on wi th
46a
I
I
SEC.11.2] WAVELENGTH AND CHARACTERISTIC ADMITTANCE 461
i ts el i mi nati on of straps and accompanyi ng i ncrease i n resonator di men-
si ons ful fi l l s thi s cri teri on. At 10 cm the pri me si ze cri teri on i s to make
the compl ete anode bl ock as smal l as possi bl e, hence favori ng strapped
bl ocks.
The unl oaded Q(Q~) for a strapped bl ock i s about hal f that for a
comparabl e ri si ng-sun bl ock. Furthermore, because Qu decreases and
the external Q(QE) i ncreases at short wavel engths and l arge N, the ci rcui t
effi ci ency i n a strapped tube becomes qui te l ow at 1 cm. A compari son
of ri si ng-sun and strapped-bl ock val ues at thi s wavel ength, for v = 3 kv
and N = 18, i s as fol l ows: (1) I n the ri si ng sun, Q. = 900, QE = 500,
and q. = 64 per cent. (2) I n the strapped, Qu = 550, Q. = 500, and
q. = 52 per cent. By contrast, at 10 cm, typi cal val ues for ri si ng sun
are Q. = 2500, QB = 150, q, = 94 per cent; and for strapped, Q. = 1500,
QF = 150, q. = 90 per cent. Thus at 10 cm, the di fference i n q. between
strapped and ri si ng-sun bl ocks i s negl i gi bl e. Conservati ve strapped
anode-bl ock desi gns have val ues of da/ A and h/x l ess than 0.3, wi th
resul ti ng mode separati ons i n excess of 15 per cent for the doubl e-ri ng
strappi ng i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 11.1. Successful magnetron operati on has
been attai ned, however , wi th ri si ng-sun bl ocks havi ng val ues of da/k
and h/x of about 0.6 and mode separati ons as l ow as 2 per cent. Thus
mode separati on appears to be i nci dental to the choi ce between strapped
and ri si ng-sun bl ocks. One consequence of the smal l mode separati ons
accompanyi ng l arge val ues of dJ X and h/x i s the di ffi cul ty encounter ed
i n tuni ng the resonant system.
STRAPPED RESONANT SYSTEMS
By W. V. SMI TH
1102. Wavel ength and Characteri sti c Admi ttance.-Thi s secti on i s
concer ned onl y wi th r-mode wave-
l engths, because thi s i s usual l y the
operati ng mode i n strapped r eso-
nant systems. The accuracy of
predi cti on i s +3 per cent, so that
as a rul e i t i s necessary to bui l d
a model , measure i ts wavel ength,
and make mi nor cor r ecti ons for
the fi nal tube.
The anal ysi s of Chap. 4 shows
that for certai n condi ti ons, usual l y
equi val ent to keepi ng da/h and
h/A l ess than 0.3, the r-mode wave-
1
L,
c.
1
c,
1
T 1
L.= Resonator i nductance,
C,=Resonator cspaci ty+fri ngi ng
capaci ty.
Cd=Strapcapaci ty.
FI G.11.2.Equi val ent ci rcui tof a si ngl e
resonator i n a strapped magnetron operati ng
i n the m-mode, seen fr om the i nteracti on
space.
l ength L and the characteri sti c admi ttance of the enti re bl ock Y, can
general l y be computed wi th suffi ci ent accuracy by the ai d of the si mpl e
462 THE RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC.112
paral l el -resonant ci rcui t of Fi g. 112, wher e L, and C, are the i nductance
and capaci tance of a si ngl e unstrapped resonator and C, i s the capaci tance
of the straps associ ated wi th one resonator.
The total bl ock capaci tance
i s N(C, + C,). C, maybe computed from the d-c approxi mati on because
perti nent di mensi ons are smal l as compared wi th a wavel ength. No
si mpl e formul as can cover the mul ti pl i ci ty of possi bl e strap desi gns, but
&X 104
2.5.
\
2.3
I
I
&x 10-14
/
)
,
2.1
/
I \
- rvjh;
1.9
/
/
-.*X 104
1,7
/
\
/ P
1.5
I
/
~ ,-
1
1.3
K
--
L,
w
1.1
Y-[
0.9
0.7
n~
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.:5
0.30
%
T,
0.25
hN
-14
0.20
~xlo
0.15
0.10
0.05
0
.-,.,
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
%/%
h, K andAi ncm
Ci nfarads
FI G. 11.3.--Ci rcui t parameters of vane-type resonator.
the formul as gi ven i n Eq. (1) for the strappi ng of Fi g. 11 1 are typi cal
of the approxi mate rel ati ons that are most useful . Gr eater accuracy i s
not consi stent wi th the approxi mati ons made i n the rest of the probl em.
wher e
fA . ?!&J
2s+2t+2b
and f,= ~
(l a)
(l b)
The ci rcui t constants of the unstrapped resonator are best computed from
fi el d theor y fol l owi ng the methods di scussed i n Chap. 2. Because these
methods yi el d resonant wavel ength & and capaci tance C. as the funda-
mental ci rcui t constants, i t i s not necessary to eval uate the i nductance
6EC.11.2] WAVELENGTH AND CHARACTERISTIC ADMITTANCE 463
expl i ci tl y. I n thi s devel opment the resonator i s assumed to be a secti on
of an i nfi ni tel y l ong cyl i nder, thus negl ecti ng the fri ngi ng fi el ds at each
end of the resonators. The constants are determi ned i n two steps
10
5
:=0.3
!
9
;= 0.4
#=0.6 PQ
\\\ m / 4
W?
\i\
. p!!,- , ~~=,
6
I I I
3
L5
:=o.3-
G
/
Y
~=o,4-
?#E o.6
4
t
2
3
/
- 1
1
0
0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09
g
A:
L, w andh in cm 0.7
C in farads
L
0==
[
+=+ O.885X1O .u)
1
-13&
*
F]o. 11.4. Ci rcui t parameters of a hol e-and-sl ot resonator.
I n the fi rst step (pri med symbol s) the fri ngi ng fi el ds i n the i nteracti on
space are negl ected. I n the second step, the effects of the fri ngi ng capaci -
tance Cf are added to thk resul t to gi ve
464 THE RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 112
C,=c; +cj=
total unstrapped capaci tance
N
I (2U)
CT= C,+ C*=
total capaci tance
N
(2tl )
A, = A;
J
1 + ~ = unstrapped ~vavel ength, (2C)
r
(2d)
A resonator of the vane type i s i l l ustrated i n the cross-secti onal
sketch of Fi g. 11.3. Al so pl otted i n thi s fi gure are curves sho~vi ng C~
eval uated at the pl ane P and A: as functi ons of the parameters TO,r~, h,
and N. The resonant wavel ength i s computed by sol vi ng Maxwel l s
equati ons for the resonator, subject to the boundary condi ti on H = O
al ong the pl ane P. The admi ttance Y = (h/w) (H,/ Eo) is eval uated at
FI G. 11.5.Fri ngi ng capaci tance per r eso-
nator as a functi on of p.
P as a functi on of u, and
characteri sti c admi ttance Y:
resonator from the rel ati on
the
per
(3)
wher e O: i s 2r ti mes the resonant
frequency of a si ngl e osci l l ator
negl ecti ng the fri ngi ng fi el ds.
A hol e-and-sl ot resonator i s
i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 11.4. I n thi s
type of geometr y the resonant
wavel ength may be found from
the pl ot of L/ w as a functi on of
a/h~ and w/a, wher e L, a, and w
are shown on the cross-secti onal
sketch. The capaci tance C: i s
gi ven by the d-c approxi mati on
co(Lb/ w) mul ti pl i ed by a di men-
si onl ess constant y al so pl otted i n
the fi gure. I n the si mpl est l umped-constant approxi mati on, ~ woul d be 1.
I t i s seen that y i s nearl y 1 for 0.03 < a/~~ <0.04, wher e al l di mensi ons
are smal l as compared wi th a wavel ength.
I n deri vi ng the above resul ts for the hol e-and-sl ot resonator, i t was
necessary to match admi ttances appropri ate to the two geometri cal
shapes i nvol ved at the boundary Q i n Fi g. 11.4. A l i st of appropri ate
transformati on formul as i s gi ven i n Chap. 2. Because di mensi ons are
smal l as compared wi th a wavel ength, the fri ngi ng capaci tance per
%x. 11.2] WAVELENGTH AND CHARACTERISTIC ADMITTANCE
resonator Cf may be computed by
sol vi ng Lapl aces equati on i n the
secti on of the i nteracti on space
shown as the shaded area of the
i nsert i n Fi g. 11.5. The boundary
condi ti ons are that Hz = O on the
boundari es AB, CD, and EA and
that Ee = O on the boundari es BC
and DE of the vane ti ps. The
resul ti ng approxi mate f o r m u 1a,
pl otted i n Fi g. 11.5, i s
Cf W+ .:) 4)
Thi s formul a i s i ndependent of the
shape of the resonator, as i t de-
pends onl y on h and ~.
Observed and computed ci rcui t
constants for a number of tubes
are l i sted i n Tabl e 11.1. Not
al l of the geometri cal sol uti ons
i ncl uded i n the tabl e cor r espond
exactl y to those of Fi gs. 11.1, 11.3a,
and 11.4, but the cal cul ati on meth-
ods used are si mi l ar to those de-
scri bed. I n al l cases the bl ock
hei ght has been assumed uni form
al ong the vane l ength, and no
al l owance has been made for the
notches i n whi ch the strappi ng sys-
tem i s set. Tubes are l i sted i n
or der of i ncreasi ng v. The average
devi ati on of obser ved and com-
puted wavel engths i s seen to be
about f 3 per cent.
For some purposes, i t i s useful
to concei ve of the equi val ent ci r-
cui t l ooki ng i n at the back of a
resonator, as shown i n Fi g. 1145.
The fundamental constants are the
i nductance Lb and resonant wave-
l ength h,. The i nductance Lb is
onl y sl i ghtl y affected by the fri ng-
466 THE RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 11.3
i ng fi el ds at the i nteracti on space, and ther efor e the symbol s used wi l l be
unpri med. Referri ng to the vane resonator i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 117, the
L,/2
characteri sti c i mpedance Zb l ooki ng to the l eft
~
I I
from the pl ane R i s computed from Eq. (3),
~bl -LC, repl aci ng Y; by zb and C: by L,. The resul ti ng
val ue of Lb i s pl otted agai nst r o/r *.
~o
,/2
Regi ons of val i di ty of the above computa-
Fm. 11.6.Equi val ent
ti ons are approxi matel y 0.1 ~ h/A ~ 0.3, be-
ci rcui t of a si ngl e resonator
cause when h/ A < 0.1, the fri ngi ng fi el ds i n
i n a strapped magnetron
OPerati ngi n the r-mode,
the end spaces become i mportant, and when
men from the back of the
h\X >0.3, the equi val ent ci rcui t of Fi g. 11.6 i s
resonator.
not appropri ate.
I n practi cal tube desi gn many geometri es other than the ones com-
puted may be useful . For i nstance, a vane tube may be constructed
wi th the back hal f of each vane r educed i n hei ght. Thi s desi gn i ncreases
2.1
1.9
1.7.
/
~
hNL,
~xl o
/
1.5
- a:
To
-..
Wr
1.3
+Zr
1.11
0 0.1 02 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
J
? r,
FI O. 11.7.I nducti ve ci rcui t parameter of a vane-type resonator. Al l di mensi ons i n
centi meters; L* i n henrys.
the tube i nductance, thus i ncreasi ng the wavel ength, wi thout any
change i n vane l ength.
11.3. Unl oaded Q.For esti mati ng Qu of the magnetron, the equi va-
l ent ci rcui t of Fi g. 11.2 must be expanded to that of Fi g. 11.8. The
i nternal l osses of the resonator r epr e-
.,,, ,: LrmG8
sented by G, can be computed from
the unstrapped u n 10 a d e d Q = Q,
gi ven by
Qr = ~
FI G. 11&-Equi val ent ci rcui t, i n-
cl udi ng l osses, of a si ngl e resonator i n a
where G!r i s gi ven i n Eq. (2a).
A strapped magnetron operati ng i n the
i s the cross-secti onal area of the
r-mode, seen fr om the i nteracti on space.
resonator; P i s the peri meter of the resonator; and 6 i s the skh depth.
The strap l osses can be computed by representi ng the doubl e-ri ng straps
as havi ng spaci ng b, an open-ci rcui ted paral l el -pl ate transmi ssi on l i ne
1
I
I
I
,
I
SEC.113] UNLOADED Q 467
of l ength 1/2, characteri sti c admi ttance YO, and attenuati on constantl
a = (6/b) (P/2), wherei i l = 2w/A.
I f Y, i s the admi ttance of thi s secti on
of the straps, then
Y,= Yotanh(a+@)~, (6)
whence, for 1/2 <<A,
YC = Yoj(a+jP) =G. +juxC,
and
Q,++:.
*
Anal yzi ng the ci rcui t of Fi g. 11.8 i n terms of Q, and Q,,
(7)
(8)
The unl oaded Q val ues cal cul ated by means of Eqs. (5), (7), and (8)
are too hi gh, as the computed and obser ved val ues of Tabl e 11.2 demon-
strate. Thi s i s probabl y owi ng i n part to the l ower conducti vi ty of the
sol dered porti ons of the anode bl ock as compared wi th that of the sol i d
copper structure assumed i n the computati ons.
TABLE11.2.TEE T-MODEUNLOADED Q VALUESOF STRAPFEDANODEBLOCK
Materi al = OFHC copper
1
CM16B 9,90 0,198
BM50 3,10 0.135
2J42 3.20 0.369
725BT-L 3.20 0.450
725E.V 3.20 0,481
4J33 10.70 0.448
4J50M 3.20 0.626
4J50M0 3.20 0.486
HP1OV 10.70 0.342
Q,
2370
1o1o
1850
1545
1940
3150
1450
1700
3690
Q.
Q.
computed
L
444 1590
198 785
783
1500
477 1040
666
1470
750 1860
390 818
390 957
1280 2830
Q.
observed
1200
550
900
680
920
1500
735
928
. . . .
* Al though i ndi vi dual di screpanci es between observed and compukd val uea of Q. are fai rl y l arge,
the average Q. val ues for 3-cm tubes are 800 observed and 1100 commted: for the two 10-cm tubes.
1350 obseked and 1725 computad. Usi ng these sverage val ues, the rati o of tbe observed Q. for
10 cm to tbzt for 3 cm i s 1.7; the theoreti cal VPJWwxnpted for wavel ength scal ed Amctures i s 1.8.
Equati ons (5) and (7) for copper anode bl ocks wi th di mensi ons i n
roi l s and wavel engths i n centi meters take the form
1J. C. Sl ater, Microwave Transmission, McGraw-Hi l l , New York, 1942, pp.
140-145.
4458
and
THE RESONANT SYSTEM
[SEC. 11-!
r--d& =70%
Q- =( %) ( %)
=3
(9a)
(9b)
(9C)
Equati on (9b) shows the approxi mate i nverse proporti onal i ty of Q, to N.
11.4. Mode Separati on.The anal ysi s of Chap. 4 shows that for
doubl e-ri ng-strapped tubes wi th d~/ X and h/ ~ l ess than about 0.3, the
mode separati on i s gi ven by Eq. (4.37). Thi s equati on may be r ewr i tten
as
w _ ~
A.
d
l +CY
(l Oa)
wher e
(l Ob)
Tabl e 11.3 l i sts separati ons between the r-mode and the next l o~ver
()
N
mode
3
1 as computed by Eqs. (10), together wi th obser ved val ues.
Agr eement i s seen to be good for doubl e-ri ng strappi ng. I t does not
appl y to si ngl e-ri ng strappi ng and i f used wi l l yi el d wr ong resul ts, as
shown i n the tabl e. Mode separati on for si ngl e-ri ng strappi ng i s l ess
than that for doubl e-ri ng strappi ng at the same Cs/C,. The two
col umns l abel ed quanti ti es that shoul d be <<1 are quanti ti es that,
accordi ng to the anal ysi s of Chap. 4, shoul d be smal l compared wi th
uni ty i n or der for Eq. (10) to be val i d. From the agreement between
theor y and experi ment, i t appears that the cri teri on smal l compared
wi th uni ty may be i nterpreted as ~ 0.5. Thi s i s not surpri si ng because
i t i s shown i n Chap. 4 that Eqs. (l Oa) and (l Ob) are al so val i d for
Cs/C, >>1. I t i s not cor r ect, however , to assume uni versal val i di ty of
Eqs. (10) si mpl y because they agr ee wi th mor e ri gorous equati ons i n two
dhl erent l i mi ti ng cases.
Tabl e 113 and Eqs. (10) show that l arge mode separati ons are easi l y
attai ned i n l ow-vol tage tubes, wher e i ~/2n-r. i s l arge. For hi gh-vol tage
tubes, the decr ease i n i =/2n-r, must be compensated for by an i ncrease i n
C8/C=. Large val ues of Ca/CT may, however , i ntroduce other di ffi cul ti es,
such as excessi ve vari ati ons i n r-f fi el d patterns al ong the bl ock l ength
I
i For mor e exact restri cti ons,see Chap. 4.
SEC. 11.4] AfoDE SEPA RA TlOiV 469
TABLE11.3.THE RATI Ox ~
~~_,)/L FOESTI i AWEDANODEBLOCK.
Tube
~hI 16B
BM50
2J42
725BTL
725~,y
4J33
4J50M
4J50M,
HP1OV
Type of
strap-
pi ng
Doubl e-
ri rl g
strap
Si ngl e-
ri ng
strap
Doubl e.
ri ng
strap
Doubl e.
ri ng
strap
Doubl e.
ri ng
strap
Doubl e.
ri ng
strap
Doubl e
ri ng
strap
Doubl e
ri ng
strap
Si ngl e-
ri ng
strap
I I I 1
Quanti ti es that
shoul d he << 1
llll
9.90~0.19813.37012.2201 0.013
3.10 0,135 2.150 0.626 0,025
3,20 0,369 1.410 0.732 0.420
3.20 0,450 1.390 0.863 0.420
3.20 0,481 1.390 0.690 0.420
0.70 0.448 1.415 0.898 0.420
3.20 0.626 1.005 0.635 0.480
3.20 0.486 1.005 0.547 0.480
0.70 0.342 0.942 0.304 2.400
1!!1
0.004200
0,000029
0,069000
0. 1S0000
0.101000
0.147000
0,518000
0.223000
0.608000
y-,)
A=
cnr r -
putl xi
0.,551
0,783
0,760
0.733
0.768
0.725
0.783
0.803
0,875
(-,)
A=
ob-
ser ved
0.57
0,89
. .
0.7?
. . . .
0.75
0.81
0,83
0.95
or dkpl acement of other modes toward the r-mode wavel ength. Th~u
for l ong, heavi l y strapped anode bl ocks, the mode nearest i n ~avel engtl l
to the mmode may be one wi th r r -mode azi muthal symmetry bl l t, ~ri t,h o
node at the center of the bl ock l ongi tudi nal l y. Denoti ng thi s mode as
~, Eq. (4.34) yi el ds
470 THE RESO.VANT SYSTEM
[sm. 11.4
Computed val ues of L, /h. are l i sted i n Tabl e 114
TABLE11.4.THE RATI Ox.,/x. FORSTRAFFED ANODES
Tube
A.
c, 8#r,7
A
T,
observed
es
>-
A. A
.,
A=

4J50hI 3.2 0.60 2.51 3 02 2 15 0 713

HP1OV* 10.7 1,88 14.25 10.46 8.89 0.850
* The 11P1OV con,put. ti ons are for doubl e-r,ng straupmg, al though the act,, al st, appi ,,g used i s
si ngl e ri ng. For doubl e-ri ng strappi ng both the
(~ - )-
mode m,<l the r-modc a,, al ,,,ost equal l y
removed fr om the x-mode for Cs/Cr = 0.34. I ncreamngCs decreases the separati on fr om the =-mode;
decreasi ng Cs decreases the separati on fr om the
(: - )-o~
The rwtt,al use of si ngl e-ri ng
strappi ng o the HP1OVanode bl ock sati sfactori l y di apl acm the =-mode but l eaves the
G - )-o~
uncomfortabl y cl ose.
Wi th l ong anode bl ocks the l owest modes, such as N = 1 or N = 2,
can al so approach the mai n mode wavel ength and do so for the HP 10V.
The general features of the mode spectrum of vari ous structures are
di scussed i n detai l i n Chap. 4.
The precedi ng anal ysi s has been found appl i cabl e to desi gns wher e
one or mor e straps are br oken over one of the vanes to whi ch the strap
i s not attached. The functi on of the break i s to di stort the r-f patterns
of one of the l ower modes by i nterrupti ng the cur r ent fl ow at the strap
break. The r-f patterns for the r-mode, however , are undi sturbed,
because i n the r-mode no cur r ent normal l y fl ows through the l ocati on
of the strap break. Al though the strap break does functi on i n the
above manner (see Chap. 4), correl ati on of the effects of strap breaks
on tube performance i s poor . Exi sti ng i nformati on i ndi cates that i n
many cases the pri mary effect on tube performance i s caused by the
()
N
shi ft i n wavel ength of the ~
1 -mode resul ti ng from the strap break.
The subi ect of stra~ breaks wi l l be di smi ssed wi th the remai nder that
the break r emoves the degener acy of the l ower modes,
i nto a doubl et. Both components are then di spl aced
near er to the r-mode.
RI SI NG-SUN RESONANT SYSTEM
BY S. MI LLMAN
changi ng each
i n wavel ength
The general desi gn pri nci pl es of Chap. 10 appl y equal l y wel l to the
ri si ng-sun and strapped-bl ock resonant systems. Because of the di ffer-
ence i n structure of these two types, however , the emphasi s i n the desi gn
1For experi mentalveri fi cati on of Eqs. (11) usi ng data from other anode bl ocks,
see Chap. 4.
I
I
I
SEC.11,4] MODE SEPARATI ON 471
parameters i s not the same. I n the ri si ng-sun magnetron, the strap
desi gn i s enti rel y omi tted, andi ni ts pl ace the rati o of resonator depths
T, appears as a new parameter. The quanti ty C/ L, whi ch i s so i mportant
i n strapped-tube desi gn, has pl ayed a rel ati vel y mi nor r ol e i n the desi gn
of ri si ng-sun magnetrons. Si mi l arl y the quanti ty Q., representi ng the
i nternal l osses, i s rarel y r egar ded as an i ndependent desi gn parameter.
The l osses of the ri si ng-sun tubes are l ess than i n strapped tubes and are
not appreci abl y affected by changes i n other parameters that are l i kel y
to be made i n ordi nary bl ock desi gn. The concept of mode separati on
(a)
(b)
FI G. 11.9.Rki ng-sun bl ocks. (a) Open-resonator anode bl ock; (b) cl osed-end desi gn.
does not have qui te the same si gni fi cance i n the two types of structures.
The choi ce of magneti c fi el d for a ri si ng-sun magnetron i s more l i mi ted
than for a strapped tube, but on the other hand there i s consi derabl y
more l ati tude i n the choi ce of the bl ock l ength.
The di scussi on of ri si ng-sun anode-bl ock desi gn wi l l i ncl ude two di ffer -
ent types of systems. One i s the conventi onal open-resonator anode
bl ock, whi ch gi ves ri se i n the i nteracti on space to r -f fi el ds that are
approxi matel y i ndependent of axi al posi ti on i n the bl ock. The other,
whi ch i s used pri nci pal l y wi th bl ocks contai ni ng l arge numbers of
resonators, i s the cl osed-end typel i n whi ch the r -f fi el ds vary si nusoi dal l y
1 W. E. Lamb, Jr., Cl osed End Magnetrons, RL Coordination Minutes, 8, No. 7,
206, Jan. 24, 1945.
al ong the axi s. Perspecti ve skctchcs of these resonator types are showm
i n Fi g. 11.!kz and b.
11.6. Li mi tati ons on Secondary Desi gn Parameters.I n thi s secti on
a bri ef account i s gi ven of the avai l abl e i nformati on on the range of useful
val ues for some of the secondary anode-bl ock parameters of ri si ng-sun
magnetrons, i .e., the anode di ameter da, the number of resonators N, the
rati o of resonator depths T1,the bl ock hei ght h, and t/ w, the rati o of vane
thi ckness to the space bct]veen vanes.
fi node Di avwtcr.The l i mi tati ons on the si ze of the anode di ameter
i n the ri si ng-sun resonant systems are some~vhat si mi l ar to those i n
strapped tubes. For a gi ~-cn number of resonators and for a fi xed val ue
of the ]vavel ength, an i ncrease i n the anode di ameter decreases the ~vavc-
()
N
l ength separati on betl ~een the r-mode and the ~ 1 -mode and
i ncreases the fracti on of zer o contami nati on i n the r-mode i f the rati o
of resonator depths i s hel d constant (see Chap. 3). Ei ther of these
resul ts i s, i n general , undesi rabl e.
I f the i ncrease i n di ameter i s accom-
pl i shed ~vi th no change i n mode separati on, as can be done by i ncreasi ng
the resonator depth rati o, the zer o-mode content i s i ncreased even more.
The theor y as presented i n Chap. 3 i s capabl e of predi cti ng the magni tude
of these changes but cannot, of course, predi ct i n any quanti tati ve ~vay
the effect on magnetron operati on.
A summary of the l argest val ues of
anode di ameters used successful l y i n vari ous ri si ng-sun magnetrons
i s presented i n Tabl e 115.
TABLE11.5.LARGEsT.4~oI )E DI AMETERS hsm I N RI SI NG-SUN MAGNETRONS
Type of anode bl ock
d.
T
Nlimbcr of Resonators.-llising-sun magnetrons have been con-
st ructcd mti i nl y ~}-i th anode bl ocks of 18 or mor e resonators because
these tubes ~ver e fi rst drsi gned for the l -cm regi on wher e a l arge number
of resonators i s parti c~darl y advantageous.
Hov+ever , from the theor y
of the ri si ng-sun stmctl we and from the compari son of the behavi or of
tubes havi ng 18 resonators l ~i th those of a l arger number, one can safel y
predi ct that systems havi ng l ess than 18 resonators shoul d make good
magnetrons. I t i s the use of a number of resonators substanti al l y gr eater
than 18 that bccumes troubl esome.
SEC. 11.5]
,WCONDA I i Y I )I I SI GN PA RAM ETERS
As the number of resonators i ncreases, the ranges of
for other parameters decrease. I n the case of 18-cavi ty
473
useful val ues
anode bl ocks
ther e i s consi derabl e l ati tude regardi ng the other parameters. Good
magnetrons can be bui l t i n the hi gh-vol tage regi on (V = 3.0 kv) ~vi th a
consi derabl e range of val ues for the rati o of cavi ty depths rl .
Mor eover ,
the performance does not cri ti cal l y depend on the val ue of u (the rati o
of cathode-to-anode radi us). For 22-vane magnetrons the i ndi cati ons
are that the useful ranges for T1, d~, and u are not l i kel y to be restri cti ve
i n anode-bl ock desi gn. I n the case of 26-vane tubes, however , ther e
i mpracti cal l y no l ati tude i n the choi ce of rl for hi gh-vol tage bl ocks, whi l e
for 38-vane magnetrons no combi nati on of val ues has been found for r,
T
and u that woul d pr oduce even moderatel y fai r operati on at hi gh vol tages.
I n the l ower-vol tage regi on (V = 450 vol ts), the i ndi cati ons are that good
t
magnetron desi gn can be obtai ned wi th 34-vane anode bl ocks.
I n the cl osed-end resonant system a consi derabl y gr eater number of
resonators i s possi bl e than i n the open-resonator system. Good mag-
netrons i n the hi gh-vol tage regi on have been bui l t wi th 26 and wi th 38
resonators and i n the l ow-vol tage regi on wi th 34 resonators. The upper
l i mi t of the useful val ue of N for cl osed-end anode bl ocks i s not known
at present.
Anode-block Hei ght.For the open-cavi ty ri si ng-sun magnetrons,
the bl ock hei ght does not i n a fi rst approxi mati on affect the mmode
wavel ength, the mode separati ons, or zer o-mode cent ami nat i on of the
r-mode. Thi s bl ock parameter can ther efor e be chosen i ndependentl y.
No mode i nstabi l i ti es have been encounter ed for bl ock hei ghts up to
0.8A.
For magnetrons havi ng cl osed-end resonators the practi cal bl ock
hei ght fal l s wi thi n a rather narrow range, because the r-mode wave-
l ength i s necessari l y l ess than twi ce the bl ock hei ght and ther efor e the
l ower l i mi t of the l ength i s 0.5A. I n or der to keep the resonator si zes
from getti ng undul y l arge, one woul d probabl y not desi gn a magnetron
wi th a bl ock hei ght of l ess than 0.55A. The bl ock shoul d not be too
l ong, perhaps no l onger than 0.7A, i f one i ntends to pr oduce a substanti al
decr ease of the wavel engths of the resonances associ ated wi th the l arge
resonators. The l engths of practi cal l y al l of the cl osed-end bl ocks fal l
i n the range of 0.58A to 0.72h.
Ratio of Vane Thickness to Space between Vanes.The rati o of copper
to space at the anode ci rcumference does not enter cri ti cal l y i nto the
operati on of the magnetron. An i ncrease i n the thi ckness of the vanes
for a fi xed val ue of the anode and resonator di ameters i ncreases the mode
separati on, the zer o-component content of the r-mode, the wavel ength
of the r-mode, and the C/ L rati o. The changes are not ver y great and
do not affect the magnetron operati on i n the same sense; thus an i ncrease
474 THE RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 11.6
i n mode separati on may be desi rabl e, whi l e an i ncrease i n zer o con-
tami nati on i s not.
Experi ments wi th l -cm 18-vane magnetrons to determi ne some
opti mum val ue for thi s rati o have not yi el ded any concl usi ve resul ts,
because ther e was no marked vari ati on i n magnetron performance for
val ues i n the range of 1.0 to 2.0. The val ue used i n the standard l -cm
tubes i s 1.5, and that i n the hi gh-power 3-cm magnetron i s 1.4. Val ues
i n the range of 1.0 to 1.3 have been used i n experi mental tubes, parti cu-
l arl y i n those of shor ter wavel engths.
11.6. Desi rabl e Mode Spectrum.-The theor y of the ri si ng-sun anode
bl ock has been ful l y presented i n Chap. 3, but a bri ef r evi ew of the
essenti al characteri sti cs of the theor y as i t affects the anode-bl ock desi gn
-2.25
n=1
2.W -
1.75 -
?@
n.3
1.50 -
~
Az
IYsa
1.2 1,4 1.6 1.8 2,0 2.2 2.4 2.6
T1
FI G. 11 .10. Mode spectrum of an l S-
vane open-resonator ri si ng-sun anode bl ock
as a functi on of the cavi ty rati o r,.
wi l l be gi ven her e. A typi ~al
mode spectrum for an 18-vane
open-resonator ri si ng-sun system
i s exhi bi ted i n Fi g. 11.10. The
vari ati on i n wavel ength of the
vari ous resonances i s pl otted i n
terms of the r-mode wavel ength
as a functi on of the rati o of the
resonator depths rl for fi xed val ues
of the ~-mode wavel ength, the
anode and cathode di ameters, and
the vane thi ckness. For suff-
i ci entl y l arge val ues of TI the mode
spectrum can be r egar ded as con-
si sti ng of thr ee di sti nct parts.
Ther e i s a l ong-wavel ength mul ti -
pl et (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) whi ch i s char-
acteri sti c of a symmetri c anode
bl ock havi ng ni ne resonators of
about the same si ze as the l arge

resonators of the ri si ng-sun desi gn; a short wavelength multiplet

(n = 8, 7, 6, 5) whi ch i s associ ated wi th the ni ne smal l resonators and
corresponds to modes 1, 2, 3, 4 respecti vel y for a symmetri c anode bl ock
havi ng onl y such resonators; and the r-mode somewher e between
the two mul ti pl es but near er to the short-wavel ength resonances. For
a ri si ng-sun system wi th mor e than 18 cavi ti es, the mode spectrum i s
ver y si mi l ar to the one shown except that addi ti onal resonances appear
bel ow and ver y cl ose to each of the two mul ti pl es.
The most i mportant factor that determi nes the type of spectrum that
wi l l her e be consi dered desi rabl e i s the absence of mode competi ti on of
r-mode operati on. Thi s desi gn consi derati on i s of parti cul ar si gni fi cance
I
I
SEC. 116] DESI RABLE MODE SPECTRUM 475
i n ri si ng-sun resonant systems because a gr eater number of modes are
general l y i nvol ved than i n strapped systems, and i t i s al most al ways
possi bl e to fi nd a harmoni c of some mode the osci l l ati ng regi on of whi ch
overl aps that of the mmode, i .e., i n whi ch the val ue 7A for the competi ng
mode i s cl ose to (N/2)x7 (see Chap. 8). As far as the l ower mul ti pl et i s
()
N
concer ned, one need consi der onl y the ~ 1 -mode, as i t i s the onl y
one that has ever been obser ved to compete wi th r-mode operati on. I t
()
N
was shown i n Chap. 3 that the ~ 1 -mode has a consi derabl e
admi xture of an (n = 1)-component, whi ch i ncreases wi th i ncreasi ng
r
()
N
val ue of rl and whi ch renders operati on i n the ~ 1 -mode l ess
f
effi ci ent and mor e di ffi cul t to bui l d up. An i ncrease i n r, i s thus l i kel y
to favor r-mode operati on, not onl y by i ncreasi ng the wavel ength
()
N
separati on between the (N/2)- and ~ 1 -modes but al so by
i ncreasi ng the cent ami nati on of the l atter wi th the (n = 1)-component,
The fact that di sturbance from thi s sour ce appears general l y at l ow
magneti c fi el ds and r ecedes to l ower fi el ds wi th i ncreasi ng rl may be
owi ng to the ci rcumstance that the radi us of the charge cl osed i s l arger
1
at l ower fi el ds. The el ectrons fi nd themsel ves i n a regi on wher e the
fracti on of (n = 1)-component i s l ess, and they can thus mor e readi l y
()
N
support the 1 -mode.
2
As far as the l o;g-wavel ength mul ti pl et i s concer ned, the requi re-
ments of a good mode spectrum favor smal l -wavel ength separati on
between thi s mul ti pl et and the mmode, a condi ti on that i s general l y i n
l i ne wi th l ow val ues of rl . Befor e di scussi ng possi bl e expl anati ons for
thi s requi rement, the avai l abl e i nformati on beari ng on thi s subject wi l l
be summari zed:
1. For the range of TI val ues that are of i nterest i n the desi gn of
ri si ng-sun systems, the n~ val ues for any of the fundamental s of
the l ong-wavel ength mul ti pl et are suffi ci entl y l ess than (N/2)k7
so that they do not form a sour ce of mode competi ti on wi th ~-mode
operati on. The components ~ = (N/2) n of some of the modes
i n thi s mul ti pl et do consti tute sources of mode competi ti on.
()
N
2. Seri ous i nter fer ence wi th mmode operati on resul ts i f -2 n L
for n ~ 4 i s cl ose to (N/2)Xr.
i See Sec. 3.3.
476
3.
4.
5.
A
THJ Y tULSONA N 1 S YSYEM [SEC. 11.6
()
N
Mode competi ti on from the component ~ 3 , has been
observed, but i t i s l i kel y that such di sturbances can be el i mi nated
()
N
even i f
z
3 X3 i s near (N/2)A7, by a sui tabl e choi ce of U,
the rati o of cathode-anode di ameters.
No i nter fer ence has ever been obser ved from components of the
(n = 2)- and (n = I )-modes.
I nter fer ence from the l ong-wavel ength resonances can i n general
be el i mi nated i f the fol l o]vi ng empi ri cal rel ati onshi p i s sati sfi ed
for the wavel ength of the mode of the upper mul ti pl et that has
the hi ghest n val ue
N
< AN6
qual i tati ve expl anati on for the experi mental resul ts l i sted above
can be gi ven. I n the l ong-~vavel ength mul ti pl et, ~ for the competi ng
mode i s l ess than N/2, so the r-f fi el d fal l s off l ess rapi dl y i n the di recti on
toward the cathode for the competi ng mode than for the r-mode. At the
start of osci l l ati ons the el ectrons are rel ati vel y cl ose to the cathode, and
thus the coupl i ng of the el ectrons to the component fi el d i s favored. The
effect becomes wor se as (N/2) --y i ncreases, i .e., as n i ncreases. Thi s
expl ai ns why mode competi ti on from a l ong-wavel ength resonance of
smal l er n val ue i s l ess probabl e than from one of l arger n (smal l er ~).
I n addi ti on, component operati on i s handi capped by the domi nati on
(shi el di ng effect) of the r-f fi el d of the fundamental associ ated wi th the
i esonance, si nce the fundamental content of the r-f fi el d i mpai rs the
effi ci ency of the component operati on and rai ses i ts bui l dup ti me.
l -he domi nati on i ncreases \vi th i ncreasi ng val ue of the di fference
().
(yn)= ~ 2n,
Thi s agai n renders competi ti on to r-mode operati on l ess probabl e from
modes of 10I Vn val ue.
A good mode spectrum for a ri si ng-sun system requi res, then, suffi -
()
N
ci ent mode separati on between the (N/2)- and ~ 1 -resonances,
and l ow val ues for the wavel engths of the l ong-wavel ength resonances.
The fi rst condi ti on favors l arge val ues of rl , whi l e the second condi ti on
i s mor e easi l y met ~vi th smal l rl val ues. For open-resonance bl ocks the
two confl i cti ng requi rements become i ncreasi ngl y restri cti ve i n anode-
bl ock desi gn as the number of resonators i ncreases and l ead to the neces-
t
SEC. 117] OPEN-RESONATOR AND CLOSED-END SYSTEMS 477
si ty of modi fi cati ons i n the osci l l ati ng ci rcui t, such as the use of
cl osed-end resonators.
The dependence on N of the requi red mode separati on between the
()
(N/2)- and ~ 1 -resonances i s not wel l establ i shed. Evi dentl y
i t i s not necessary to have as much mode separati on for a resonant system
of l arge N as for one of smal l er N. Thus i n the case of the hi gh-vol tage
regi on, v x 3.0 kv, 38-vane magnetrons wi th a mode separati on of onl y
about 1 per cent oper ate sati sfactori l y at l ow magneti c fi el ds, whereas
for si mi l ar operati ng condi ti ons 18-cavi ty magnet rons requi re a mode
separati on of 5 per cent. I n the hi gh magneti c-fi el d regi on, the hi gh-
power 18-cavi ty, 3-cm magnetron i s rel ati vel y fr ee from mode i nter-
fer ence even though the wavel ength separati on between the m and 8-mode
i s l ess than 4 per cent.
1107. Compari son between Open-resonator and Cl osed-end Systems.
As the number of resonators i n a ri si ng-sun anode bl ock i ncreases, the
confl i cti ng requi rements of a desi rabl e mode spectrum di scussed i n
Sec. 11.6 become ver y restri cti ve. On the one hand, l arge rl val ues are
requi red to over come the decr ease i n mode separati on between the
()
(N/2)- and ~ 1 -resonances, caused by the i ncreasi ng anode and
cathode di ameters, and on the other band smal l er ~1 val ues are needed
i n or der to avoi d mode competi ti on from the l ong-wavel ength mul ti pl et.
As demonstrated i n Chap. 3, however , both requi rements can be met
for l arge N val ues wi th the use of cl osed-end resonators. I n thi s type
of desi gn, l arge T1 val ues are used to obtai n the pr oper mode separati on
on the l ow-wavel ength si de of the ~-modej and at the same ti me the
wavel engths of the upper mul ti pl et are kept l ow enough to avoi d mode
competi ti on from that source.
The probabi l i ty of exci ti ng a component of an upper-mul ti pl et reson-
ance as compared wi th that for starti ng the mmode decreases as the val ue
of -y for that component approaches N/2. The di fference (N/2) ~
may thus be taken as an i ndi cati on of the l i kel i hood of competi ti on from
that source. As the number of resonators i ncreases, the val ue of
(N/2) ~ wi l l i ncrease i f -yA i s to be approxi matel y equal to (N/2)&
and the wavel ength rati o A/Ar i s to be constant. For exampl e, i f i n an
18-resonator ri si ng-sun system the competi ng component i s the ~, wi th
a wavel ength of 1.5A., the di sturbi ng component of wavel ength 1.5A.
for a 30-resonator system ~ri l l be the +0. The i ncrease i n (N/2) y
from 3 to 5 i s bel i eved to ai d the probabi l i ty of competi ti on wi th mmode
operati on. Thi s effect i s further aggravated i f rl i s i ncreased and the
wavel engths of the upper-mul ti pl et resonances are thereby al so i ncreased.
478 THE RESONANT SYSTEM
[SEC. 11.8
As a cl osed-end bl ock i s mor e di ffi cul t to bui l d than an open-resonator
type, i t shoul d probabl y not be undertaken unl ess i t i s bel i eved that a
system wi th the requi red number of open resonators wi l I not be a safe
desi gn. One el ectri cal di sadvantage of cl osed-end desi gn i s that the
bl ock hei ght i s rather restri cted, whereas i n the open-resonator type,
the hei ght can be chosen practi cal l y at wi l l . For Kl gh-vol tage mag-
netrons, V = 3.0 kv. The cl osed-end constructi on shoul d be used i f
the number of resonators requi red i s 26 or more. I n the l ow-vol tage
regi on (V = 450vol ts), theuseof thesi mpl er open-resonator constructi on
can be extended to a system of 30 or mor e resonators.
11.8. Rati o of Resonator Depths.-I n desi gni ng a ri si ng-sun magne-
tron, i t i s best topl anto useassmal l a val ue of rl as possi bl e, consi stent
()
N
wi th noni nterference from the 1 -mode. The avai l abl e i nforma-
2
ti on on thepr oper val ue for the resonator depth rati o for vari ous val ues
of N i s based mai nl y on exper i ence wi th magnetrons that wer e desi gned
for operati on i n the l ow-fi el d regi on (Ml from 6000 to 10,000 gauss cm).
The opti mum val ue of ~, for the hi gh-fi el d regi on i s not necessari l y the
same as that for l ow fi el ds. The study of the performance of 18-vane
open-resonator magnetrons desi gned for v cl ose to 3.0 kv but wi th
TI val ues varyi ng i n the range of 1.4 to 2.5 showed that i n the l ow mag-
neti c-fi el d regi on, val ues of T1l ess than 1.6 are too l ow because of com-
peti ti on from the (n = 8)-mode whi l e rl val ues gr eater than 2.0 are
objecti onabl e because of competi ti on from the resonances associ ated wi th
the l arge-resonator systems. I n the hi gh-fi el d regi on, however , an r,
val ue of 1.6 was found qui te sati sfactory for magnetrons i n the same
range of vol tage. A summary of the range of probabl y useful val ues of
r~for vari ous val ues of N i s gi ven i n Tabl e 11.6 for open-resonator mag-
TABLE 11 .6. USEFUL VALUES OF n, THE RATI O OF RESONATOR DEPTHS, FOR AH
BETWEEN 6000 AND 10,000 GAUSS/CM
T
N V, kv
18 3.0
22 3.0
26 3.0
34 0.4
Range of ~1
1.7-2.0
1.71.9
1.75
1.8-2.0
netrons desi gned for operati on i n the l ow-fi el d regi on. The l ack of any
defi ni te range i n r, for the case of N = 26 demonstrates the di ffi cul ty of
bui l dl ng l arge N, open-resonator magnetrons i n the hi gh-vol tage regi on.
For the cl osed-end system the val ues of r, are hi gher than i n the open-
resonator type. Thi s trend i s consi stent wi th theoreti cal expectati ons,
SEC. 11 .9] WAVELENGTH CALGULA TI ONS FOR THE .-MODE 479
because for a gi ven val ue of r, both the mode separati ons and zer o-mode
contami nati on of the r-mode are l ess for the cl osed-end than for the open-
resonator type. I n the cl osed-end system these el ectromagneti c pr oper -
ti es depend, of course, on the bl ock hei ght as wel l as on rl . One woul d
expect to fi nd smal l er val ues of rl wi th l onger bl ocks. I n cl osed-end
resonant systems contai ni ng 26 cavi ti es, val ues of TI from 2.1 to 2.7, for
bl ock hei ghts of 0.63X, and w val ues of about 3.5 kv have been found
sati sfactory. The opti mum val ue of r, i s probabl y i n the regi on of 2.2
to 2.4 for thi s bl ock hei ght. Good cl osed-end 38-vane magnetrons have
been bui l t wi th r, cl ose to 2.7 for a bl ock hei ght of 0.7A and v of 3.3 kv.
11.9. Wavel ength Cal cul ati ons for the ~-mode.For a vane-type,
t
open-resonator, ri si ng-sun magnetron, the wavel ength of the r-mode
can be cal cul ated to wi thi n 2 or 3 per cent by means of a si mpl e empi ri cal
.
formul a i nvol vi ng pri nci pal l y the peri meters of the two di fferent r eso-
nators. Thus, i f P represents the peri meter of the total path for two
adjacent resonators i n a bl ock cross secti on, as shown by the sol i d l i nes
i n Fi g. 11.11, then wi th certai n restri cti ons the wavel ength i s gi ven by
x = P[l .03 0.06(7-, 1.8) + 0.05(r2 1.5)], (12)
wher e rl i s the rati o of the radi al depth of the l arge resonator to that of
the smal l er resonator, (r~ ra)/(rs ra), and TZi s the rati o of copper
*
to space, t/ w.
Thi s formul a, whi ch i s consi stent wi th the data on 18-, 22-, and
26-vane open-resonator magnetrons, wi l l appl y onl y i f the end-space
geometr y i s not appreci abl y di fferent from that shown i n the open-
resonator ri si ng-sun magnetrons i n Chap. 19, i f the anode di ameter
corresponds to a v near the range of 2.5 to 3.5 kv,
and i f the other bl ock parameters are consi stent
wi th good tube desi gn. For exampl e, despi te the
F
rl .
1
fact that the decr ease of the ~-mode wavel ength ,,1, ; ,-,
wi th i ncreasi ng cathode di ameter i s appreci abl e,
\
l -l 1
the cathode di ameter does not appear i n the wave-
l ength formul a, because thi s effect i s smal l i f one i s
i ,{&:-
confi ned to the range of u val ues that i s l i kel y to be
t
FI G. l l .l l .Geo-
used. A decr ease i n anode di ameter, however , metri cal quanti ti es
brought about by decreasi ng V from 3000 to 500 VO1tS I ati on .f ~he.-mode
used i n the cal cu-
wi th P, rl, rt, an d u hel d constant i ncreases the wavel ength.
r-mode wavel ength about 10 per cent.
Equati on (12) shoul d enabl e the magnetron desi gner to sel ect the
pr oper resonator di ameters wi th suffi ci ent accuracy for a fi rst model .
Subsequent smal l changes i n the anode-bl ock geometr y, wi thi n the
preci si on of tube constructi on, may then be made to cor r ect for an
i ni ti al er r or i n the wavel ength obtai ned. When mor e accurate wave-
480 THE RESONANT SYSTEM
[SEC. 11.9
l ength predi cti ons are needed, the formul as gi ven i n Chap. 3 shoul d
be used. These are based on the fi el d theor y cal cul ati ons and i ncl ude the
parameters P, r,, r,, u, and d. but omi t effects of the geometr y of the end
spaces and the cathode end shi el ds.
The theoreti cal formul as may al so
be used for cal cul ati ng resonances of the mode spectrum other than
that of the r-mode.
The wavel ength cal cul ati ons for a cl osed-end system are somewhat
mor e compl i cated, parti cul arl y when the resonators depart from the
sect or-shaped cross secti on. The pr ocedur e for wavel ength cal cul ati on
of the r-mode i s outl i ned be] ow for two cl i ffer ent types whi ch r epr esent
n,ost of the cl osed-end anode bl ocks that have been used.
() (F))
.-,
FI G. 11. 12.Cl osed-end ri si ng-sun anode bl ocks.
.-,
(a) I Tane-type; (b) wi th ci rcul ar cyl i nders
at the backs of the l arge resonators.
CASE I .Compl etel y cl osed vane-type anode bl ock (see Fi g. 11. 12a).
1. Cal cul ate A cc (bl ock of i nfi ni te l ength wi th no vari ati on i n
properti es al ong the Z-axi s) wi th the ai d of the formul as gi ven
i n Chap. 3 or from Eq. (12), addi ng about 7 per cent for end-effect
correcti ons.
2. Compute the r-mode wavel ength from the expressi on
(13)
wher e h i s the bl ock hei ght. I n the desi gn of an anode bl ock
the pr ocedur e wi l l ver y l i kel y be r ever sed. The desi red A wi l l
be known, and the bl ock hei ght wi l l be deci ded on befor e deter -
mi ni ng the cross-secti onal geometr y of the resonators. I n that
case appl y Eq. (13) to compute the requi red val ue for & The
peri meter of the resonators i s then determi ned by ei ther of the two
pr ocedur es gi ven i n Step 1. From thi s val ue and from the
predetermi ned val ues of the anode di ameter and of the resonator-
depth rati o the di ameters of the two resonators are determi ned,
SEC. 11 .10]
GENERAL PROPERTIES OF OUTPUTS
481
CASE 11.Gase I I di ffers from Case I i n that the backs of the l arge
resonators are ci rcul ar i n cross secti on (see Fi g. 11 12b).
1. Fol l ow the pr ocedur e outl i ned i n Case I to determi ne the pr oper
sector-shaped geometr y to pr oduce the desi red wavel ength for the
chosen val ues of h, rl , and da.
2. Usi ng the formul as or curves gi ven i n Chap. 3 for the admi ttance
of ci rcul ar- and of sector-shaped cavi ti es, desi gn the pr oper hol e
geometr y to gi ve the same admi ttance at pl ane A (see Fi g. 11 12b)
as that obtai ned wi th the secti on of repl aced sector-shaped cavi -
ti es. I f the ci rcul ar secti on i s desi gned to gi ve the same cross-
secti onal area as the repl aced sector secti on, the wavel ength
general l y turns out to be too 10W, because that regi on i s not com-
pl etel y i nducti ve, whereas i f the substi tuti on i s based on preservi ng
the peri meters, the resul ti ng wavel ength i s too hi gh. The pr oce-
dure of determi ni ng equi val ent admi ttances may al so be fol l owed
wher e the substi tuted porti ons of the resonators have other than
ci rcul ar geometri es.
OUTPUT
13Y W. V. SMI TH AND S. MI LLMAN
11.10. General Properti es of Coaxi al and Wavegui de Outputs.-The
functi on of the output of a magnetron i s to coupl e the r-f ener gy gener ated
i n the tube to a useful l oad. To accompl i sh thi s end, the output must
have the fol l owi ng properti es: (1) As a ci rcui t el ement, i t must transform
the l oad i mpedance to some desi red l evel i nsi de the tube. (2) As a
physi cal el ement joi ni ng the evacuated tube to a transmi ssi on l i ne, i t
must contai n a vacuum seal . (3) As a secti on of transmi ssi on l i ne, i t
must be capabl e of transmi tti ng the hi gh average and pul se power s
gener ated by the magnetron.
The ci rcui t properti es of the output are tr eated i n Chap. 5. For
magnetrons that do not di ffer radi cal l y from the exampl es shown i n Chap.
19, the anal yses of Sees. 5.4, 55, 5.6, and 11.2 maybe used to esti mate the
sui tabi l i ty of a gi ven output desi gn for the parti cul ar bl ock geometr y and
l oadi ng requi rements i nvol ved. The type of output i s determi ned by
requi rements of mechani cal strength, constructabi l i ty, si ze, pul se or
average power transmi ssi on, and frequency sensi ti vi ty.
At 1 cm, wavegui de outputs are the l ogi cal choi ce, because at thi s
wavel ength the constructi on of wavegui de outputs i s si mpl er and mor e
reproduci bl e than coaxi al outputs, and coaxi al l i nes wi l l wi thstand onl y
about 20 kw of l -cm pul se power . At 3 cm, wher e the ul ti mate trans-
mi ssi on l i ne i s al so wavegui de, wavegui de outputs are general l y used,
al though coaxi al outputs embodyi ng coax-to-wavegui de transi ti ons are
482 THE RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 11.11
sati sfactory for pul se power s under 50 kw. The ul ti mate transmi ssi on
l i ne for 10-cm radi ati on i s general l y coaxi al for pul se power s l ess than
200 kw and wavegui de for pul se power s i n excess of thi s amount; wave-
gui de i s al so used to transmi t average power s gr eater than 400 watts.
Consequentl y, 10-cm magnetrons that del i ver l ess than 200-kw pul se
or 400 watts average are equi pped wi th coaxi al outputs, whi l e mor e
powerful tubes are desi gned wi th ei ther wavegui de outputs or coax-to-
wavegui de transi ti ons. The l arge si ze of wavegui de equi pment at 10-cm
makes i t uneconomi cal to use thi s type of constructi on for operati on at
l ow-power l evel s.
For l i near scal i ng to di fferent wavel engths, the per centage frequency
sensi ti vi ty i s unchanged, whereas the change i n si ze affects the break-
down power whi ch scal es as the square of the wavel ength. I n coaxi al
l i ne, at a fi xed wavel ength, the breakdown power scal es as the square
of the di ameter of the l i ne, assumi ng that the characteri sti c i mpedance
i s mai ntai ned constant and the l ead constructi on i s si mi l ar. Both of
these concl usi ons are dependent upon the assumpti on that at atmospheri c
pressure, breakdown wi l l occur above a maxi mum fi el d strength E-
that i s i ndependent of wavel ength. The breakdown vol tage decreases
as the duty rati o i ncreases, and for c-w operati on i t i s consi derabl y bel ow
the pul sed val ues.
11.11. Coaxi al Outputs.The observati ons i n thki secti on are con-
cer ned wi th outputs desi gned for wavel engths i n the vi ci ni ty of 10 cm.
However , the data speci fi c to a gi ven wavel ength may be scal ed at l east
qual i tati vel y. Fi gures 1113 to 1115 i l l ustrate coaxi al l eads desi gned
for l oop coupl i ngs. As shown i n Chap. 5, other types of coupl i ng may
be used, however , dependi ng on the external Q desi red and the type of
magnetron under consi derati on. Whenever possi bl e, the coupl i ng i s
desi gned to gi ve the desi red l oadi ng at a mi ni mum shi ft i n tube wave-
l ength and wi th a mi ni mum frequency sensi ti vi ty, the rest of the l ead
bei ng kept as wel l matched as possi bl e. Thi s techni que general l y
i mproves the breakdown properti es and mi ni mi zes the compl exi ty of
constructi on. I n speci al cases, however , i t i s possi bl e to cancel one
refl ecti on wi th another and one frequency sensi ti vi ty wi th another by
use of the method gi ven i n Sec. 11.12 for coaxi al -to-wavegui de
transi ti ons.
Frequency Sensi ti vi ty .-A typi cal medi um-power coaxi al output for
&l n. l i ne i s shown i n Fi g. 1113. The l ead consi sts of a secti on of l i ne A
of characteri sti c i mpedance 2A, a taper B, a secti on of l i ne C of charac-
teri sti c i mpedance Z,, a gl ass seal D, a choke joi nt E, a secti on of l i ne F
of characteri sti c i mpedance ZJ, a connecti ng bul l et G of the same
characteri sti c i mpedance ZOas the fi nal coaxi al l i ne, and a quarter-wave
transformer H of characteri sti c i mpedance Z~. The l ead i s termi nated
by the fi nal matched transmi ssi on l i ne of characteri sti c i mpedance 20.
~
i
SEC. 11.11] COAXI AL OUTPUTS 483
~
A mor e si mpl i fi ed desi gn i s shown i n Fi g. 11.14 i n whi ch the el ements
A, B, C, and D are essenti al l y si mi l ar to those of Fi g. 11 13 but i n whi ch
the si ngl e seri es i mpedance J i n the outer conductor repl aces el ements
E, F, and G. The el i mi nati on of the transformer i s made possi bl e by
setti ng the si ze and penetrati on of the l oop to gi ve the desi red external
Q. The desi gn of Fi g. 1114 i s mechani cal l ~ sturdi er than that of Fi g.
Fm. 11 .13. 2OO-kw pul se-power coaxi al output and coupl i ng secti on wi th choke joi nt.
11.13 and i s al so l ess frequency sensi ti ve, because i t contai ns no l arge
di sconti nui ti es of characteri sti c i mpedance.
The i mprovement i n the desi gn i s pri mari l y due to the use of the
Kovar-to-gl ass seal i ng techni que. 1 The use of a Kovar cup rather than
a smal l tungsten l ead for the i nner conductor al l ows a constructi on that
fi ts i nto a standard r-f coupl i ng, and the short l ength of J el i mi nates the
necessi ty for the choke joi nt.
&
.
....
,., ~
.
FI G. 11. 14.3OO-kw pul se-power coaxi al output and coupl i ng ascti on wi thout choke joi nt.
A cal cul ati on of the seri es i mpedance i ntroduced by secti on J shows
I
that i t i s negl i gi bl e. Thus, wi th J & i n. l ong, the outsi de di ameter
~ i n., and the i nsi de ~ i n., the seri es i mpedance i s gi ven by
27r(&) i n. = ~
ZJ = 60 l og, ~ tan ~ ohms.
As the l i ne characteri sti c i mpedance i s 48 ohms and the l oop i mpedance
usual l y of the same or der of magni tude, ZJ can be negl ected.
The gl ass seal approxi matel y hal ves the characteri sti c i mpedance
of the l i ne i n the regi on of the bead but l eaves the i mpedance practi cal l y
unal tered wher e the gl ass i s thi n and near the outer conductor. Assum-
4
I
1
,
I I t shoul d be noted, however, that the No. 704 gl ass whi ch i s used i n mati g
Kovar seal s i s more 10SSYthan the No. 707 gl ass usedi n the tungstenseal of Fi g. 11.13.
484 THE RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 11.11
i ng the bead l ength to vary up to a maxi mum l ength of ~ i n. or l o/8
(al l owi ng for the short wavel ength i n gl ass), the resul ti ng i mpedance
transformati on represents an effect comparabl e i n magni tude to the l oop
i mpedance. As a rul e no attempt i s made to bal ance out these two
i mpedances.
A modi fi cati on of Fi g. 11.14 i s i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 11~15 whi ch shows
a drawi ng of a l ead for a I s-i n. l i ne.
The desi gn of Fi g. 11.15 di ffers
qual i tati vel y from that of Fi g. 11.14 because, i n the l arger si ze, a l onger
l ength of Kovar i s necessary for a sati sfactory metal -to-gl ass seal and a
hal f-wave choke must be i ncl uded. From the di mensi ons shown i t may
be cal cul ated that the frequency sensi ti vi ty of the choke joi nt i s negl i gi bl e.
I n conformi ty wi th standard choke-joi nt desi gn, the f requency sensi ti vi ty
of the choke joi nt i s mi ni mi zed
by maki ng secti on A of rel ati vel y
$
hi gh characteri sti c i mpedance-and
secti on B of l ow characteri sti c
i mpedance. Secti on B i s thus
) termi nated at i ts juncti on to A
by a hi gh i mpedance that, trans-
Fm. 11 .16. 8OO-kw pul se-power coaxi al
formed down a quarter wave-
output and coupl i ng secti on wi th choke
joi nt.
1e n g t h of l ow-i mpedance l i ne,
becomes a very l ow i mpedance.
The juncti on C between the output l ead and the connecti ng secti on
appears i n seri es wi th the hi gh i mpedance termi nati ng B, and i ts nature
i s therefore not i mportant.
Occasi onal l y l eads exhi bi t sharp resonances that markedl y affect
the tube l oadi ng, the effi ci ency, and the l ead-breakdown power. These
resonances resul t fr om weakl y coupl ed resonant ci rcui ts such as that of a
choke joi nt operati ng i n a mode where the ci r cumfer ence of the choke i s
equi val ent to one gui de wavel ength.
For l arge ci r cumfer ences these
modes occur near the pri nci pal coaxi al mode, parti cul arl y i f a secti on
of the choke joi nt i s capaci tance l oaded by the gl ass of the seal . I nsi de
metal -to-gl ass seal s el i mi nate thi s di ffi cul ty but are usual l y l ess rugged
mechani cal l y.
Voltage Breakdown and Average Power Transmi ssi on.For a gi ven
output power P i nto a matched l i ne of i nner and outer di ametem a and b
the mean squared el ectri c fi el d ~~ at the center conductor i s
g - 6~p ~.
(14)
az l og ;
The rel ati ve val ues of ~;, for b/a = 6.5 as i n the desi gn of Fi g. 11.13,
for b/ a = 2.17 as i n the desi gn of Fi g. 11 14, and the opti mum val ue of
I
I
)
I
SEC. 11.12] COAXI AL-TO-WA VEGUI DE TRANSI TI ONS
485
b/ a = 1.65 are 4.0, 1.2, and 1.0 respecti vel y. A further i ncrease i n the
di ameter of the center conductor over that gi ven i n the desi gn of Fi g.
11-14 woul d ther efor e have smal l val ue.
To mi ni mi ze surface breakdown, the gl ass seal shoul d present a l ong
path to the el ectri c fi el d, and the component of the el ectri c fi el d paral l el
to the gl ass surface shoul d be
made as smal l as possi bl e. Re-
entrant gl ass surfaces wi th cr e-
vasses between the gl ass and the
outer conductor shoul d be avoi ded
because l ocal i zed hi gh-frequency
di scharges take pl ace i n the cr e-
vasses and the gl ass i s eventual l y
ruptured.
Safe pul sed rati ngs for al l
phases of a 1.5 SWVR are 200
kw for the desi gn of Fi g. 11.13
and 300 kw for the desi gn of Fi g.
11. 14; average power rati ngs are
250 and 450 watts respecti vel y.
On the basi s of the scal i ng
l aws, the breakdown power of the
hi gh-power l ead of Fi g. 11.15 i s
computed to be 1000 kw. Thi s
desi gn may be conservati vel y
rated at 800 kw, al though i t wi l l
usual l y pass 1500 kw i nto a wel l -
matched l i ne. On average power
transmi ssi on, i t wi l l safel y pass
1.5 to 2 kw and wi th forced-ai r
cool i ng has transmi tted 3 kw
experi mental l y.
11.12. Coaxi al -to-wavegui de
Transi t i on s.Coaxi al -l i ne-to-
FI G. 11. 16.1 O-cm, SOO-kw pul se-power
wavegui de transi ti on secti ons z are
door knob transi ti onfor 1{-i n. coaxi all i ne
i l l ustrated by the door knob 0 1*- by 3-i n aveti de
transi ti on type of Fi g. 11.16 and the pr obe type of Fi g. 11.17.
The breakdown characteri sti cs of the door knob transi ti on are si mi l ar
to those of a l ead termi nated i n a coaxi al l i ne. The pr obe type, however ,
1The breakdown data gi ven i n thi s secti on r efer to pul sed operati on at 1 psec,
1000 PRF, and remai u val i d as the pul se durati on and repeti ti on frequency are
vari edby a factor of 2.
2See Vol . 9, Chap. 6, Radi ati on Laboratory Seri es,for a detai l ed treatment of
thi s subject.
486 THE RESONANT SYSTEM [$Ec. 11.13
has been i mproved i n thi s r espect by the l ocati on of the gl ass seal i n a
regi on of l ow el ectri c fi el d. At 8.5 cm the pr obe transi ti on i s rated at
800 kw as compared wi th 500 kw for the door knob type. The frequency
sensi ti vi ty of the pr obe desi gn i s al so superi or to that of the doorknob.
A set of data showi ng the frequency sensi ti vi ty of the pr obe transi ti on
of Fi g. 11 17 i s gi ven i n Fi g. 1118 i n whi ch the standi ng-wave rati o
i n the coaxi al l i ne i s pl otted as a functi on of wavel ength, the wavegui de
bei ng termi nated i n a matched l oad. To attai n the l ow-frequency
sensi ti vi ty shown i n Fi g. 1118 i t i s necessary del i beratel y to mi smatch
Secti on through A.A
A-
Standard fl angel %x3
wavegui de,
FI G.11.17.S.5-cm, SOO-kwpul se-power pr obe transi ti onfor coaxi all i neto 1&by 3-i n.
wavegui de.
1.16[
l .oo~
10,0
Wavelengthin cm
Fm. 11.l S.Frequency characteri sti cs of a probe transi ti on shown i n Fi g. 11.17.
the juncti on of pr obe to wavegui de and then to cancel out the resul tant
refl ecti on by an i nducti ve i ri s i n the wavegui de. Thi s pr ocedur e sets
up standi ng waves i n the transi ti on secti on and may r educe i ts break-
down power , but the sacri fi ce i s unavoi dabl e i f broadbanded transi ti on
i s desi red. The theor y of thi s type of broadbandi ng i s gi ven
i n Vol . 9, Chap. 6.
11.13. Wavegui de Outputs.-The two i mportant components of a
di rect wavegui de output for magnetrons are the wi ndow and the trans-
former. The wi ndow functi ons as a vacuum seal and an r-f connecti on
between the i nternal and external gui des, and the transformer transforms
the l oad i mpedance to a val ue pr oper for magnetron operati on. The
SEC. 11.13] WAVEGUI DE OUTPUTS 487
desi gn i nformati on presented i n the fol l owi ng secti ons i s restri cted to
component types that have been wi del y appl i ed. The di scussi on of
wi ndows i s l i mi ted to those of the ci rcul ar cross secti ons, because thi s
type of wi ndow i s easi l y manufactured i n a reproduci bl e way and has
been used i n al most al l of the magnetrons wi th di rect wavegui de output.
Si mi l arl y, most of the di scussi on on transformers i s devoted to the
quarter-wave type, a desi gn for whi ch consi derabl e i nformati on i s
avai l abl e. A descri pti on of the ci rcul ar i ri s output, used wi th a hal f-
wavel ength stabi l i zed cavi ty, i s i ncl uded i n Sees. 11.14 and 11.15.
The Window.A good wi ndow shoul d be al most l ossl ess and al most
refl ecti onl ess. A practi cal approach to a l ossl ess wi ndow for 1.25-cm
magnetrons i s shown i n Fi g. 11.19. The desi gn embodi es a l ow-l oss
gl ass (Corni ng No. 707) seal ed i n the base of a Kovar cup. El ectri cal
\+ ~ 0.170
F1a. 11, 19.Wi ndow for the wavegui de
output of a 1.25-cm magnetron.
0.6
f 0.5
0.4
0.04
0.06
0.08 0.10
i
FI G. 11.20 .Wavegui de-wi ndow di am-
eter d requi red for match as a functi on of
gl ass thi ckness t.
contact between the wi ndow and the gui de i s effected on each si de by
means of standard r-f chokes, one of whi ch i s shown i n the fi gure.
The nonrefl ecti ng pr oper ty of the gl ass wi ndow i s achi eved by the
choi ce of the pr oper di ameter and thi ckness for the gl ass. A nonrefl ecti ng
wi ndow may be l ooked upon as a short ci rcul ar wavegui de of the same
characteri sti c i mpedance as the rectangul ar gui des between whi ch the
wi ndow i s i nserted. The characteri sti c i mpedance of ci rcul ar gui de
i ncreases wi th decreasi ng di ameter, and a rectangul ar gui de of hi gh
characteri sti c i mpedance ther efor e requi res a wi ndow of smal l di ameter.
The compari son shoul d not be used for quanti tati ve cal cul ati ons, however ,
because the wi ndow thi ckness i s onl y a smal l fracti on of a wavel ength and
al so because the end effects pl ay an i mportant part i n the matchi ng of
the wi ndow to the gui de. Thk i s veri fi ed by the fact that the pr oper
wi ndow di ameter for nonrefl ecti on i s not i ndependent of thi ckness.
Fi gure 11.20 shows a pl ot of the obser ved wi ndow di ameter requi red for
match as a functi on of wi ndow thi ckness for one fi xed set of gui de di men-
488 THE RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 11.13
si ons. A pr ocedur e that i s commonl y fol l owed i n desi gni ng a wi ndow i s to
choose the thi ckness on the bai l s of mechani cal consi derati ons and then
to determi ne the di ameter by testi ng for nonrefl ecti on. The thi ckness
r -
1
*707Gl ass~
!+0.3404 /
L Kovar cup
FI G. 11.21 .Wavegui de wi ndow for cham-
fer ed gui de.
of wi ndows i n common use ranges
from 0.02x to 0.04A, and the di am-
eter s from 0.4X to 0.8x. I t i s not
di ffi cul t to make wi ndows wi th
refl ecti on coeffi ci ents of 0.05 or l ess
for gui des transmi tti ng r-f power
at l -cm or l onger wavel engths.
Al though the breakdown
strength of the wi ndow desi gn i n
Fi g. 11.19 i s consi derabl y better
than that of a coaxi al output, i t i s
i nadequate for hi gh-power magne-
trons. Arci ng at the wi ndow
may occur at about one-quarter
the power requi red to break down
the gui de i tsel f because of the
sharp physi cal di sconti nui ti es be-
tween the ci rcul ar wi ndow and the
rectangul ar gui de, parti cul arl y at
the center of the gui de wher e the
el ectri c fi el d i s strongest. I ni ti al
attempts at <roundi ng the cor -
ners of the gui des have l ed to a
system at i c and reproduci bl e
method of chamferi ng the gui de
to obtai n a physi cal match be-
tween the gui de and the wi ndow (see Fi g. 11.21). - -
When the gui de i s chamfered at the wi ndow boundary, ther e i s a
twofol d i mprovement of the breakdown strength. Not onl y are the
sharp di sconti nui ti es r emoved, but al so ther e i s an i ncrease i n the di am-
eter of the wi ndow requi red for match. Thk i ncrease i n di ameter may
be r egar ded as resul ti ng from the fact that the chamferi ng has ser ved to
i ntroduce shunt i nductances on both si des of the wi ndow and that thi s
i s bal anced by the equi val ent shunt-capaci tance effect of a l arge wi ndow.
As the nonrefl ecti ng properti es are achi eved by a bal ance of shunt
susceptances, the spaci ng between the wi ndow and the gui de shoul d
be the same on both si des of the wi ndow. For the chamfer desi gn
shown i n Fi g. 11.21, the di ameter of the wi ndow i s about 35 per cent
l arger than for ordi nary gui de and the power-handl i ng capaci ty of the
gui de i s al most doubl ed. Wi th thi s type of wi ndow geometr y a pul sed
.
I
SEC. 11.13]
WAVEGUZDE OUTPUTS
489
power of over 700 kw has been transmi tted wi thout arci ng at atmospheri c
pressure for a 3-cm magnetron operati ng wi th a pul se durati on of 0.5 Ksec
and termi nated wi th a matched gui de.
The avai l abl e data on the broadband properti es of the combi na-
ti on of wi ndow and r-f chokes for the two types of wi ndow geometri es
dkcussed above do not permi t a good eval uati on of the advantage or
dk.advantage of chamferi ng the gui de from the standpoi nt of frequency
sensi ti vi ty .- The ran g e of wave-
l engths for whi ch a gi ven wi ndow
wi l l i ntroduce a refl ecti on coeffi ci ent
of 0.1 or l ess i s of the or der of 20 per
cent for ei ther type and can probabl y
be i mproved i f the broadband pr op-
er ty of the wi ndow i s taken i nto
account when the wi ndow geometr y i s
desi gned. Atypi cal pl ot of the stand-
i ng wave i ntroduced by the wi ndow
and chokes as a functi on of wave-
l ength i s gi ven i n Fi g. 1122 for a
wi ndow desi gn that i ncl udes cham-
fer ed gui des. The detai l s i n the cur ve
I dol
1.05
A
~
FI G. 11.22.Standi ng-wave vol tage
rati o i ntroduced bv wi ndow and chokes,
as a functi on of wavel ength, for a wi n-
dow desi gn that i ncl udes chamfered
gui des.
are not al ways r epr oduced, but the general appearance of the cur ve i s
si mi l ar for wi ndows of presumabl y i denti cal constructi on.
The l ow-l oss No. 707 gl ass that i s used i n wi ndows i s adequate for
ordi nary magnetrons but i s i nadequate for outputs transmi tti ng hi gh
average power . Thus wi th 3-cm radi ati on, 500 watts of average power
i s cl ose to the upper l i mi t that can be transmi tted through the wi ndow
wi thout the use of speci al cool i ng devi ces. As the l osses i n gl ass i ncrease
wi th temperature, a (bl ow-i n of the wi ndow becomes a seri ous l i mi ta-
ti on i n the hi gh-power tubes. The substi tuti on of mi ca for gl ass seems
to offer a good sol uti on to the hi gh-power probl em because the l oss i n
mi ca i s about 1.5 per cent of that i n No. 707 gl ass. The techni que of
constructi ng mi ca wi ndows for wavegui de outputs i s gi ven i n Sec. 17.4.
The Transformer.The transformer i n a wavegui de-output desi gn
serves as an i mpedance-matchi ng devi ce that reduces the hi gh i mpedance
of the wavegui de used i n power transmi ssi on to a val ue suffi ci entl y l ow
(about one-hundredth of the gui de i mpedance) to effect the pr oper
l oadi ng for the magnetron. A si mpl e form of such a transformer i s a
quarter-wave secti on of wavegui de of rectangul ar or other cross secti on
whi ch connects one of magnetron resonators to the short secti on of

standard wavegui de used i n the output.

boundary the cur r ent i s co~ti nuous, so
transformer i s equal to the r-f cur r ent
At the transformer-resonator
that the axi al cur r ent i n the
i n the back of the resonator.
490
THE RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 1113
The i mpedance requi red at the resonator depends on the bl ock geometr y
and the desi red stabl l i t y of the magnetron; i .e., on the external Q. Thi s
quanti ty may be wri tten i n the form
1
u
I
g lkz:
Q. = :1 ,
(15)
wher e & i s the equi val ent i nductance of a resonator, l k i s the cur r ent
ampl i tude i n that resonator, I is the cur r ent amp~l tude at the transf or mer -
resonator boundary, R i s the real part of the i mpedance presented by the
l oad at the resonator, and the summati on extends over al l the resonators.
For a strapped anode bl ock the val ues of tk are the same for al l
resonators. Furthermore, i f the l oadi ng i s assumed to be suffi ci entl y
l i ght, the cur r ent ampl i tudes wi l l be nearl y the same i n al l resonators
and the quanti ty ~E wi l l assume the si mpl er form
Q, . $!.
(16)
Thus when the effecti ve i nductance of a resonator of a strapped bl ock
i s known, and when QE i s speci fi ed, the requi red l oad i s determi ned.
Equati on (16) i s not val i d for open-resonator ri si ng-sun bl ocks because
the equi val ent i nductance of a smal l resonator i s l ess than that of a l arge
one and because the cur r ent ampl i tude i n the back of a smal l resonator i s
gr eater than that i n a l arge one. For thi s type of magnetron desi gn, then,
Eq. (15) wi l l take the form
(17)
wher e 11and 11 r efer to the smal l resonators, 12and 12 r efer to the l arge
ones, and l i ght l oadi ng i s assumed as before. I t fol l ows from thi s expr es-
si on that the requi red l oad wi l l depend on whether the output i s taken
from a l arge or from a smal l resonator. When the output i s taken from a
l arge resonator, as has been the case i n al l ri si ng-sun systems, Eq. (17)
becomes
QE=UN(2++);
2R
(18)
t
I
and as I I is gr eater than I z, QE i s gr eater than CON(1I+ l J/(2R). When
the output i s taken from the smal l resonator, however , QE i s l ess than
uN(1I + 12)/(2R). I t fol l ows, ther efor e, that i n the ri si ng-sun system
the requi red l oad i s not uni quel y determi ned by the bl ock geometr y
SEC.1114] WA VEGUI DE TRANSFORMERS 491
and the speci fi ed Q.. Thus when Q. i s defi ned for a ri si ng-sun magnetron
i n terms of an equi val ent i nductance of a si mpl e seri es resonant ci rcui t
Q, = COL/ R, i t i s i mpl i ed that the equi val ent val ue of L depends upon the
resonator that i s used for the output. Thi s si mpl y emphasi zes the fact
I
that the defi ni ti on of an equi val ent i nductance for a resonator i s, i n
,
I general , not uni que and depends on the cur r ent di stri buti on i n i t.
Cl osed-end ri si ng-sun systems requi re a consi derabl y gr eater l oad
resi stance for a gi ven QE than do the open-resonator systems, because
the cl osed-end resonators contai n two di fferent ki nds of osci l l ati ng cur-
rents. One i s the usual radi al -ci rcumferenti al cur r ent whi ch i s associ ated
wi th an axi al l y osci l l ati ng magneti c fi el d; the other cur r ent i s transverse
and i s associ ated wi th radi al l y osci l l ati ng fi el ds. The transverse cur r ent
does not coupl e to the transformer, because i ts ampl i tude vani shes near
the output. However , a consi derabl e amount of stor ed ener gy i s asso-
ci ated wi th the transverse current, parti cul arl y when the bl ock hei ght
i s cl ose to a hal f wavel ength, and thi s i ncrease i n the total stor ed ener gy
of the bl ock requi res an i ncrease i n R to mai ntai n the same QE. The
actual val ue of R depends on the bl ock hei ght; for some cl osed-end
desi gns a val ue si x ti mes as l arge as that needed for the open-resonator
type has been found necessary.
11.14. Wavegui de Transformers. The Rectangular Transforrner.-A
si mpl e type of quarter-wave transformer consi sts of a secti on of angul ar
wavegui de. Wi th thi s type of transformer, negl ecti ng end effects and
assumi ng that the wi ndow does not r efl ect and that the wavegui de used
i
for the power transmi ssi on i s termi nated wi th a matched l oad, the
i mpedance presented to the output resonator of the magnetron wi l l be
real and gi ven by the expressi on
(19)
I
wher e ZO i s the characteri sti c i mpedance of the gui des on each si de of
the wi ndow and Z; i s that of the transformer gui de. From the V2/w
defi ni ti on of i mpedance of a gui de, the expressi on for Z, and Z: i n terms
of the r especti ve gui de di mensi ons a, b and a, b are, i n uni ts of 377 ohms,
o=%-(w) and =w-wro 20)
Substi tuti ng Eq. (20) i n Eq. (19) the expressi on for Z becomes, i n uni ts
of 377 ohms,
1
I f a, a, and b are kept constant, as i s usual l y the case when one i s deter -
mi ni ng the pr oper l oadi ng for a gi ven magnetron, the i mpedance i s
492 THE RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 11.14
di rectl y proporti onal to the square of the narrow di mensi on of the trans-
former. Havi ng measured Q, for a bl ock wi th a gi ven transformer
geometr y, i t i s si mpl e to determi ne the pr oper val ue of b for any desi red
l oadi ng.
To ensure that the l oad presented to the magnetron resonator i s
one of pure resi stance, i t i s necessary to take i nto consi derati on the end
effects that wer e negl ected i n the precedi ng di scussi on. I t i s rel ati vel y
si mpl e to determi ne the equi val ent shunt reactance associ ated wi th the
physi cal di sconti nui ti es at the ends of the transformer and al l ow for
them by a smal l departure of the transformer l ength from the val ue
A,/4. An experi mental pr ocedur e for determi ni ng the pr oper trans-
for mer l ength has been descri bed. I
The broadband characteri sti cs of the rectangul ar wavegui de trans-
for mer are sati sfactory for ordi nary magnetron operati on. The vari ati on
of the magnetron l oad wi th frequency can be seen i n the expressi on for
the i mpedance presented at the transformer-resonator boundary for
arbi trary l engths of the transformer; namel y
~+jtan%~
Z=z:
. z, ;
1+~~ ,
tan 2T ~
wher e i t i s assumed that the i mpedance at the wi ndow end of the trans-
for mer i s ZO and that 1 i s the effecti ve l ength of the transformer, wher e
end effects have al ready been taken i nto account. For val ues of z
cl ose to Ao/4 one may wri te
()
Z=l ?+jx=z; ;0 Csczyjz{coty. (X2)
9 9
The broadband characteri sti cs of the output wi l l be determi ned by the
dependence of the real part of Z on wavel ength and by the effect on the
r-f cur r ent i n the output cavi ty pr oduced by the i magi nary part of Z.
The dependence of R i n Eq. (22) on wavel ength i s not ver y marked.
The factor Z~/ZO can be made i ndependent of x by maki ng a = a, and
for a wel l -chosen gui de a change i n wavel ength of 10 per cent wi l l effect
Z~ by onl y about 5 per cent and CSC2(2%rl /A@)by l ess than that. The
frequency dependence of R can be further i mproved by maki ng a some-
what gr eater than a, as shown i n Fi g. 11.23, wher e R/ RO i s pl otted as a
functi on of X/hOfor vari ous val ues of a and a, the l arge di mensi on of the
transformer and output gui de, respecti vel y. The transformer di men-
si on b i s chosen to gi ve the desi red R val ue (Ro) at mi dband (AO).
1 S. Mi l l man, Wavegui de Output for 1.25-cm Magnetrons, NDRC 14-245,
Feb. 1, 1944.
SEC. 11.14] WA VEGUI DE TRANSFORMERS 493
The effect of the i magi nary part of Z, asi de from the smal l change i n
the magnetron wavel ength and the al most negl i gi bl e di storti on i n the
mode pattern, i s to al ter the r-f cur r ent i n the output cavi ty. Assumi ng a
fi xed r-f vol tage across the mouth of the output resonator, the change i n
cur r ent wi l l be gi ven
wher e 10 i s the cur r ent ampl i tude at mi dband and
i nductance associ ated wi th the output resonator.
1.20
1.15
1,10
R
F.
1.05
1.00
0
0
L i s the equi val ent
The effect of thi s
I
I
0.95 1.00
1.05 1.10
A
To
FI G. 11.23. Resi sti ve component of magnetron l oad vs. wavel ength for vari ous combi na-
ti ons of the di mensi on a of the transformer gui de and the external gui de.
cur r ent change on QE i s, accordi ng to the defi ni ti on of QR as gi ven i n
Eq. (15), to mul ti pl y Q. by a factor that i s to a fi rst-order approxi mati on
[1 + (X/UL)], wherei n the effect of X on the total stor ed ener gy of the
magnetron has been negl ected. Thi s factor i s easi l y eval uated from the
defi ni ti on of X as gi ven i n Eq. (22) when the val ue of L for the output
resonator i s known.
The Transformer of H-shaped Cross Section.For magnetrons wi th
short bl ock hei ghts, the l arge si ze of the di mensi on a of the rectangul ar
wavegui de transformer may pr ove mechani cal l y i nconveni ent.
Wi th
494 THE RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 11.14
the H-type wavegui de, however , an effecti vel y l arge a can be achi eved
wi th smal l physi cal si zes. A transformer of thi s gui de shape has been
used i n the output desi gn of the 4J50 magnetron descri bed i n Chap. 19.
The rel ati ve di mensi ons of thi s H-type cross secti on and the output wave-
gui de are shown i n a drawi ng Of the transformer-gui de boundary (Fi g.
1124).
The pr oper transformer l ength i s obtai ned by determi ni ng h, i n
thi s type of gui de and by eval uati ng the end cor r ecti ons at the boundari es.
FI G. 11 .Z4Rel ati ve si zes
of H-secti on transformer and
output wavegui de i n the 4J50
output.
The val ue of A. can be ei ther measured experi -
mental l y or cal cul ated as shown i n Sec. 5.6.
The end cor r ecti ons can be determi ned i n the
same way as those for the rectangul ar gui de
transformer. 1
The requi red transformer wi dth depends
on the l oad to be presented to the magnetron
at the output resonator. However , i n thi s
type of transformer the effecti ve resi stance at
the output resonator depends not onl y on the
characteri sti c i mpedance of the H-eecti on and
of the output wavegui de but al so on the trans-
for mer acti on at the boundary between the
wavegui de and transformer. Thi s i s a resul t
of the fact that the coupl i ng between the
transformer and wavegui de extends over onl y
a fracti on of the total hei ght of the gui de.
The cal cul ati ons for thi s effect are gi ven i n
Sec. 5.6. The effect of the di fference i n hei ght
between the transformer and wavegui de i s to
requi re an i ncrease i n the transformer wi dth.
The dependence of the resi stance on the
square of the transformer wi dth hol ds for the
H-secti on as wel l as for the rectangul ar wave-
gui de type and can be used for cor r ecti ng
i ni ti al er r or s i n the desi gn.
The frequency dependence of the H-secti on transformer i s ver y si mi l ar
to that of the rectangul ar wavegui de type. When good broadband
characteri sti cs are requi red, the di mensi ons of the H-secti on shoul d be
chosen i n such a way as to yi el d a cutoff wavel ength i n the transformer
that i s at l east as l ong as that i n the output wavegui de.
The I ris Transformer.A method has been devel oped for control l i ng
the magnetron l oadi ng by means of an i ri s-type transformer i n conjunc-
ti on wi th a stabi l i zed cavi ty. 2 The stabi l i zer i s i n the form of a hal f-
1mi d.
2A. Nordsi eck, (New R-f Output Transformer for K-band Magnetron, I LL
CoordinataunMinuta, 7, 45, Sept. 13, 1944.
... -. .
~~. 11.14]
WA VEGUI DE TRANSFORMERS 495
wavel ength secti on of rectangul ar wavegui de i nserted between the output
gui de and one of the magnetron resonators. The strong coupl i ng requi red
between the cavi ty and the resonator i s achi eved by means of a r ec-
tangul ar resonant i ri s, whi l e the comparati vel y weak coupl i ng between
the cavi ty and the output gui de i s obtai ned wi th a ci rcul ar i ri s i n the
thi n wal l separati ng the cavi ty from the output gui de. The di ameter
of thi s i ri s determi nes the magnetron l oad. The stabi l i zi ng properti es
of the hal f-wavel ength cavi ty wi l l be further di scussed i n Chap. 16.
The di scussi on i n thi s secti on wi l l be concer ned wi th the pr oper cavi ty
l ength for a pure resi sti ve l oad, the
dependence of Q, on the di ameter of
the i ri s, and the frequency sensi ti vi ty of
the i ri s-type transformer.
L
The pr oper l ength for the stabi l i zi ng
cavi ty i s that l ength whi ch does not
change the resonant wavel ength of the
anode bl ock. The departure of thi s
l ength from &/2 i s due to end effects.
At the resonator end of the cavi ty, a ector
resonant i ri s gi ves maxi mum coupl i ng
between the cavi ty and the resonator
and al so el i mi nates any shunt suscept-
ance at that juncti on. An experi -
mental setup for determi ni ng the pr oper
-1
i ri s l ength i s shown i n Fi g. 11.25. A
rectangul ar i ri s of arbi trary wi dth and
thi ckness and of l ength h is sol dered to
a short secti on of wavegui de havi ng the
FI G. 11 .25. Experi mental setup
same cross-secti onal di mensi ons as the for the determi nati on of the zmomr
stabi l i zi ng cavi ty. The sour ce of r-f
l ength h of a resonant i ri s. - -
power and the standhg-wave detector are attached to the other end of
the gui de. Two secti ons of paral l el -pl ate transmi ssi on l i ne havi ng the
same cross-secti onal di mensi ons as the back of the output resonator of
the anode bl ock are al ternatel y butted up agai nst the i ri s. The l ength L
of one of these secti ons i s hO/4, and that of the other i s i O/2. The experi -
ment consi sts of varyi ng the l ength of the i ri s h and r ecor di ng for each
val ue the mi ni mum posi ti on of the standi ng wave Xm for each of the
two paral l el pl ate secti ons used. The cri teri on for resonance i s that i ri s
l ength whi ch yi el ds
Thi s method of determi ni ng the l ength of the resonant i ri s avoi ds
the need of maki ng assumpti ons concerni ng the pr oper geometri cal pl ane,
496 THE RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 11.14
i n an i ri s of fi ni te thi ckness, that woul d r epr esent the el ectri cal l ocati on
of the juncti on between the cavi ty and the resonator.
At the gui de end of the cavi ty a cor r ecti on to the cavi ty l ength i s
requi red because of the equi val ent shunt susceptance of the ci rcul ar i ri s.
I n Vol . 10 i s gi ven the val ue of thi s susceptance for ci rcul ar i ri s di a-
phragms of i nfi ni tesi mal thi ckness. I t can al so be deduced for an i ri s
of fi ni te thi ckness from the measurement of the external Q of a hal f-wave
cavi ty coupl ed to wavegui de by such an i ri s.
However , because of the
ambi gui ty i n the el ectri cal r efer ence pl ane, the knowl edge of the shunt
l EOO
1200
Wk
/
800
/
400
~
0.98 0,99 1s30 1.01 1,02
~
Aa
FI G. 11.26.Theobser veddependence
of the external Q on the resonantwave.
l ength of the combi nati onof anode bl ock
and stabi l i zi ng resonator.
susceptance i s not qui te suffi ci ent
to determi ne the end cor r ecti on.
The pr oper cavi ty l ength can be
obtai ned experi mental l y by attach-
i ng the whol e coupl i ng uni t, i ncl ud-
i ng the resonant i ri s, to an anode
bl ock of known resonant wave-
l ength and observi ng the resonant
wavel ength of the enti re combi na-
ti on as a functi on of cavi ty l ength.
The l oadi ng of the magnetron
i s control l ed by the di ameter of the
ci rcul ar i ri s, and the external Q i s
approxi matel y proporti onal to the
si xth power of the di ameter. I t i s
sti l l easi er to control the external O
w
wi th thi s type of coupl i ng devi ce, however , than i t i s wi th a quarter-
wave transformer, parti cul arl y at short wavel engths.
The major di sadvantage of the i ri s-type transformer i s i ts frequency
sensi ti vi ty. The obser ved dependence of Q. on the resonant wavel ength
of the combi nati on of anode bl ock and stabi l i zi ng cavi ty i s shown i n Fi g.
11.26 wher e the change i n wavel ength was obtai ned by changi ng the
l ength of the cavi ty and keepi ng the anode-bl ock resonance and di men-
si ons of the two i ri ses fi xed. Thi s cur ve i ndi cates one reason why i t i s
necessary to match the resonant frequency of the cavi ty to that of the
bl ock. The el ectroni c effi ci ency of the magnetron i s al so affected by an
appreci abl e mi smatch of the resonant frequenci es. Thi s type of trans-
for mer i s ther efor e not sui ted for use i n a magnetron i n whi ch a tuni ng
range of mor e than a few per cent i s requi red. Nei ther i s i t advi sabl e
tu use thi s coupl i ng devi ce wi th experi mental magnetrons, because i t
may aggravate the probI em of mode competi ti on from resonances havi ng
wavel engths appreci abl y cl i ffer ent from that of the mmode. I t shoul d
be i ntroduced i nto a bl ock desi gn onl y after al l di sturbances to the pr oper
magnetron operati on due to other modes have been el i mi nate@..
SEC. 11.15] EXAMPLES OF WA VEGUZDE OUTPUT 497
11.15. Exampl es of Wavegui de Output. A bri ef descri pti on of the
i mportant features of wavegui de-output desi gn wi l l be gi ven i n thi s
secti on for thr ee output types that have found wi de appl i cati on i n short-
wavel ength magnetrons.
Output Design jor High-power l -cm Magnetrons.Fi gure 1127 shows
a wavegui de output that i s essenti al y the one used for the 1.25-cm
3J31 magnetron and for other tubes i n thk wavel ength regi on. The
I t--i-=
dl mens,ons
Ox0,420 ,
k!E

/
m
Gol dsol der
~ Soft sol der

<//, y, ///
6 S,T.sol der
I
FI G. 11 .27.A typi cal wavegui de output for 1.25-cm magnetrons.
chamferi ng of the gui des at the wi ndow permi ts the transmi ssi on of
pul sed power s up to 130 kw at atmospheri c pressure. The transformer
di mensi ons shown i n the fi gure gi ve an external Q of about 400 for
the 3J31 tube. The requi red transformer di mensi ons for open-resonator
anode bl ocks havi ng mor e than 18 resonators are not appreci abl y di ffer-
ent. Scal ed versi ons of thi s desi gn have been used i n the hi gh-power
3-cm ri si ng-sun magnetron and i n tubes of wavel engths l ess than 1.0 cm.
Output udh H-section Transformer. Thi s output, shown i n Fi g. 1128,
has been used i n the 16-resonator, strapped, hi gh-power 3-cm magnetron,
498
THE RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 11.16
the 4J50. The di mensi ons gi ven i n the drawi ng are appropri ate for an
external Q of about 350. The wi ndow desi gn i s si mi l ar to that of Fi g.
11.27, except that the gui des have not been chamfered.
Stabi l i zed l r~s Output .Fi +re 11 29 shows the i mportant di mensi ons
of the hal f-wavel ength stabi l i zed cavi ty and the two i ri ses for the stabi -
>1
- .
0.403
0,025
/
/
/
7
1.125
2
J 1
//

0.3s0
. .

/
0,503
/
Fm. 11 .2S.The H-secti on
transformer used i n the 3.2-cm
4J50 magnetron.
I i zed i ri s output used i n the 1.25-cm, 18-
vane, ri si ng-sun 3J21 magnetron. The
wi ndow end of the output gui de i s al most
i denti cal wi th that of Fi g. 11.27. The
di mensi ons of the ci rcul ar i ri s are appropri -
ate to an external Q of about 550. As a
resul t of the stabi l i zi ng cavi ty the QOval ue
of thk tube i s about 1.6 as great as that of
a magnetron havi ng the same anode bl ock
but a si mpl e rectangul ar-gui de transformer.
11.16. End-space Geometr y. Disturb-
ances Produced by End-space Resonances .
I n desi gni ng a magnetron anode bl ock
attenti on may have to be gi ven to the end
regi ons surroundi ng the resonatom. The
di mensi ons of the end spaces have not been
taken i nto account i n the desi gn of the
essenti al resonator di mensi ons, partl y be-
cause of the general di ffi cul ty of handl i ng
end effects and partl y because i n most cases
the magnetron mode spectrum i s not
appreci abl y affected i n a manner that woul d
i nter fer e wi th u-mode operati on. The
effects on the wavel ength and on the mode
separati on that are pr oduced by changes i n
the end spaces can usual l y be compen-
sated for by rel ati vel y smal l changes i n
some parameter of the resonant system. The end regi ons are frequentl y
not desi gned, ther efor e, but si mpl y assume a geomet~ that i s di ctated
mai nl y by mechani cal consi derati ons after the requi rements of the mor e
essenti al tube parameters such as bl ock hei ght, pol e gap, and output
transformer have been sati sfi ed. Such a pr ocedur e does not al ways
l ead to a good magnetron desi gn. Tube resonances other than those
associ ated wi th the normal magnetron modes may coupl e to the el ectrons
i n the i nteracti on space at the same vol tage and fi el d val ues as the r-mode,
thus offeri ng consi derabl e di sturbance to the operati on of the magnetron.
For such osci l l ati ons, the end spaces stor e a consi derabl e fracti on of the
r-f ener gy and ther efor e determi ne the wavel ength of the di sturbi ng
I
I
I
SEC. 11.16] END-SPACE GEOMETRY 499
resonances and the condi ti ons for maxi mum i nter fer ence wi th normal
magnetron behavi or.
Al though the fol l owi ng di scussi on on the need of end-space desi gn
i s based pri nci pal l y on the exper i ence gai ned wi th ri si ng-sun magnetrons,
i t i s not to be i nferred that magnetrons havi ng strapped bl ocks are
necessari l y fr ee from end-space di sturbances. The di fference i n si ze
between the l arge resonators of the ri si ng-sun bl ock and the smal l
o
I
S&R??- o.+
*
Fm. 11.29.The stabi l i zed i ri s output of the 1.25-cm, 18-vane, ri si ng-sun 3J31 magnetron.
resonators associ ated wi th strapped bl ocks of the same wavel ength makes
i t mor e probabl e that smal l er end spaces wi l l be found i n strapped tubes.
I t i s thi s ci rcumstance, as wel l as the fact that the wavel engths of the
competi ng end-space resonances are l arge, whi ch makes end-space di s-
turbance l ess l i kel y for strapped tubes than for ri si ng-sun magnetrons.
A good exampl e of the effect of end-space geometr y on magnetron
performance can be found by compari ng the performance at a gi ven
magneti c fi el d for two 18-vane open-resonator ri si ng-sun magnetrons
di fferi ng onl y i n the geometr y of the end-spaces. Longi tudi nal secti ons
of the bl ocks and end regi ons of these tubes are shown i n Fi g. 11.30a
and b. Vol tage-current pl ots at 7900 gauss are gi ven for these tubes
500 !CHE RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 1116
i n Fi g. 11.31a and b; the operati ng effi ci enci es at the same fi el d are
pl otted as a functi on of anode current. I t i s shown that the dynami c
i mpedance dV/ dI i s much gr eater i n the l ow-current regi on for the tube
[a) (b)
FI G. 11 ,30a. Rki ng-sun magnetron wi th l arge end spacea.
FI G. 11.30b.I Zki ng-sun magnetron wi th smal l end races.
Magnetron current i namp Magnetron cur r ent i namp
(a) (b)
FI G.11.31 .A compari son of the operati ng characteri sti cs at 7900 gauss of the magne-
trons of Fi g. 11 ,30a and b. (a) Vol tage-current characteri sti cs; (b) e5ci ency as a functi on
of anode cur r ent.
wi th the l arger end spaces. Mor eover , the operati ng effi ci enci es meas-
ured at the output gui de are practi cal l y zer o for thi s tube up to 7 amp.
Thi s i s i n marked contrast to the performance of the tube wi th the smal l er
end-spaces. From a study of the l ong-wavel ength resonances that are
1A. Ashki n and S. Ml l man, Dynami c I mpedance of A-type I Magnetrone,
NDRC 14-266, Mar. 1944, p. 1.
I
SEC. 11.16] END-SPACE GEOMETRY
obser ved at l ow currents near the cathode l eads
501
and are accompani ed
by abnormal overheati ng of the cathode, i t was concl usi vel y establ i shed
that these di fferences i n performance wer e not due to l eakage or emi ssi on
from the cathode end shi el ds but rather wer e consi stent ~~i th the assump-
ti on that the end-space osci l l ati ons coul d be characteri zed by a pr e-
domi nantl y radi al el ectri c fi el d i n the i nteracti on space and r-f currents
i n the end-space regi ons, as sketched i n Fi g. 11.32. The l ow-current
di sturbances to magnetron operati on that ari se from end-space resonances
can be el i mi nated by decreasi ng the di ameter of the end-space cyl i nder.
No end-space di sturbances are obser ved wi th open-resonator ri si ng-sun
bl ocks when the di fference between the di ameter of the shel l and that
of the l arge resonators i s kept smal l ( < 0. 16A). For cl osed-end systems
the end-space probl em i s automati cal l y sol ved when an axi al mount i s
FI G. 11 .32. Possi bl e charge and cur r ent di stri buti ons for end-space osci l l ati ons.
used for the cathode and when the pol e pi eces are i n contact wi th the
bl ock cover s.
Leakage of r-mode Radiation at End Regi ons.The end spaces may
further affect magnetron operati on adversel y ei ther by absorbi ng r-mode
r-f power or by transmi tti ng i t to the exter i or of the magnetron. Both
of these effects are characteri zed by abnormal l y l ow Qo val ues for the
anode bl ock; and i f the r-f power i s transmi tted to the exter i or , a con-
si derabl e amount of r-f power wi l l be obser ved at the cathode supports.
These ener gy si nks are obj acti onabl e not onl y because they decr ease
the output effi ci ency but al so because the extraneous l osses are l i kel y
to be vari abl e, parti cul arl y for short-wavel ength experi mental tubes
i n whi ch the end spaces are not al ways readi l y reproduci bl e.
The manner i n whi ch the r-f ener gy coupl es to the end spaces i s
di fferent for strapped and ri si ng-sun magnetrons. I n the for mer case
the coupl i ng ari ses from the fact that the two i nsi de straps are usual l y
connected to al ternate fi ns and are ther efor e opposi tel y charged. As
the i nduced charges on the cathode pr oduced by these straps are gr eater
than those ari si ng from the mor e di stant outer straps, a net i nduced
di pol e on the cathode resul ts. A radi al el ectri c fi el d wi th a vol tage node
502 THE RESONANT SYSTEM [SEC. 11.16
i n the central pl ane i s then pr oduced i n the i nteracti on space. The power
that i s radi ated through the cathode i n thi s manner wi l l depend, of course,
on other parts of the transmi tti ng ci rcui t, whi ch may i ncl ude the end
spaces, and transmi ssi on by means of the l owest coaxi al mode through
the cathode l eads i s possi bl e. I n the ri si ng-sun desi gn ther e i s no com-
parabl e coupl i ng acti on between anode bl ock and cathode. When the
cathode i s accuratel y center ed i n the tube, the onl y coupl i ng mechani sm
i s by means of the zer o component of a TEO1-mode i n whi ch the el ectri c
fi el d possesses onl y an Ed component, and l arge hol es i n the pol e pi eces
or i n the pi pes surroundi ng the cathode supports woul d ther efor e be
requi red to transmi t the radi ati on. When the cathode i s off center ,
the zer o mode at the cathode may have an admi xture of a TEl ,-mode,
and the transmi ssi on of power i n thi s mode requi res consi derabl y smal l er
hol es i n the pol e pi eces. The condi ti ons under whi ch r-f l eakage has been
obser ved at the cathode supports i n ri si ng-sun magnetrons cor r obor ate
thi s anal ysi s; practi cal y no r-f l eakage i s obser ved when the hol e si zes
are smal l enough to cut off al l but the pri nci pal coaxi al mode of
transmi ssi on.
When the cause of the r-f l eakage has been determi ned, i t i s general l y
not di ffi cul t to el i mi nate the spuri ous l osses. I n general , i t i s preferabl e
to decr ease the vol ume of the end spaces. I f the geometr y of the end
spaces provi des a resonati ng chamber for the ~-mode, a smal l change wi l l
shi ft thei r resonant wavel ength to a harml ess regi on. I f the l osses are a
resul t of transmi ssi on through the cathode l eads, however , the l eakage
may be greatl y r educed by i ntroduci ng an r-f choke i n the coaxi al l i ne
i n wl i ch the i nner conductor forms the cathode support.
CHAPTER 12
THE CATHODE
BY J. G. BUCK AND A. h!I. CLOGSTON
EMI SSI ON PHENOMENA OF MAGNETRON CATHODES
BY J. G. BUCK
12.1. Characteri sti cs of Cathodes under Pttl sed Condi ti ons.The
el ectroni cs of the magnetron i nvol ves consi derati ons not onl y of the space
charge but al so of the compl ex orbi ts of el ectrons movi ng under the
i nfl uence of stati c and osci l l ati ng el ectri c and magneti c fi el ds. I n the
osci l l ati ng magnetron the cathode i s back-bombarded wi th a consi derabl e
number of hi gh-energy el ectrons, and consequentl y secondary el ectrons
are ejected fr om the cathode i nto the i nteracti on space. By such
repeated i nteracti ons of el ectrons wi th the cathode surface i t has been
possi bl e, i n some cases, to obtai n many ti mes more total anode cur r ent
fr om a cathode than coul d be suppl i ed by the pri mary thermi oni c emi s-
si on al one.
I n the past, oxi de cathodes operated normal l y at di rect cur r ents of
approxi matel y 0.1 amp/cm2. At present, however, for duty rati os
up to several tenths of 1 per cent, cathodes of pul sed mi crowave magne-
trons are requi red to suppl y pul se cur r ents of magni tudes varyi ng
fr om about 10 amp/cm2 at 10-cm wavel engths to 100 amp-cm for l -cm
tubes. Cathodes that can ful ~l these requi rements mi ght be cl assi fi ed
as (1) effi ci ent pul sed thermi on;c emi tters, (2) i neffi ci ent thermi oni c
emi tters that can be run hot enough to gi ve the requi red pul sed currents,
or (3) good secondary emi tters that wi l l gi ve enough el ectrons to bui l d up
the requi red cur r ent densi ty under back bombardment. The i deal
cathode woul d be of Cl ass 1 because i t woul d i mpose fewer restri cti ons
on tube desi gn and the associ ated el ectri cal equi pment; the cathodes
that can now be made i n producti on magnetrons are not i deal , however ,
and are workabl e onl y because they have desi rabl e features from Cl asses
2 and 3. For i nstance, i nvesti gati ons at the Bartol Research Foundati on
have shown that even a rel ati vel y i nacti ve al kal i ne-earth oxi de cathode
wi l l gi ve at l east fi ve secondary el ectrons per pri mary el ectr on at operati ng
temperatures.1
Promi nent l i mi tati ons that depend upon cathode emi ssi on properti es
1M. A. Pomerantz and D. L. Gol dwater, Secondary El ectron Emi ssi on from
Oxi de-oated Magnetron Cathodes, NDRC-1431O.
503
504
THE CA7HODE [SEC.12.1
exi st i n magnetron performance even after the geometri cal desi gn
probl ems on a tube have been fi ni shed. These l i mi tati ons may be
cl assi fi ed as two types of i nstabi l i ti es i n performance: (1) frequency
i nstabi l i ti es, such as mode changes and poor spectra, and (2) sparki ng.
I n some cases the l i mi tati ons i n magnetron performance, whi ch under
fi xed testi ng condi ti ons are mani fested by hi gh-current mode changes,
cur r ent l i mi ts for a good spectra, or other types of frequency i nstabi l i ty,
are dependent upon the pri mary thermi oni c emi ssi on that i s avai l abl e
from the cathode duri ng the bui l dup of osci l l ati ons. The magni tude
of thi s pri mary emi ssi on i s essenti al l y that val ue of cur r ent whi ch i s
avai l abl e from the cathode wi th zer o el ectri c-fi el d gradi ent at i ts outer
surface. For a gi ven magnetron under fi xed osci l l ati on condi ti ons, ther e
i s evi dence that a mi ni mum val ue of pri mary thermi oni c emi ssi on exi sts
bel ow whi ch stabl e operati on cannot be expected at the chosen operati ng
poi nt. For tube types havi ng al kal i ne-earth oxi de cathodes, thi s
pri mary-emi ssi on mi ni mum need be onl y a smal l fracti on of the pul se
cur r ent requi red for operati on. Thi s may be shown by compari ng the
pri mary cur r ent avai l abl e wi thout magneti c fi el d wi th the cur r ent
avai l abl e duri ng osci l l ati on. For exampl e, i n the l ow-vol tage 10-cm
2J39 magnetron the fracti on may be as hi gh as one-si xth at an operati ng
poi nt of 5 kv, 5 amp, at 0.1 per cent duty rati o and may be as l ow as
one-hundredth i n the medi um-power 3-cm 725A magnetron at an
operati ng poi nt of 11 kv, 15 amp, at 0.1 per cent duty rati o. Presumabl y,
thi s fracti on i s i nfl uenced by (1) the secondary-el ectron-emi ssi on pr oper -
ti es of the cathode, (2) the operati ng vol tage, (3) the effecti ve rate of
ri se of the vol tage pul se, and (4) the detai l s of the desi gn and l oadi ng
of the tube.
Current i nstabi l i ti es i n magnetrons, i .e., sparki ng, arci ng, or fl ashi ng,
have appeared as l i mi tati ons i n the performance of nearl y ever y desi gn
of pul sed mi crowave magnetrons. Al though consi derabl e progress has
been made i n the el i mi nati on of these i nstabi l i ti es, they sti l l remai n a
major probl em i n magnetrons operati ng at hi gh power l evel s, l ong pul se
durati ons, or conti nuous wave. Because most pul sed mi crowave
magnetrons have used al kal i ne-earth oxi de cathodes, the majori ty of the
i nvesti gati ons on cathode sparki ng was devoted to thi s type of emi tter.
A detai l ed di scussi on of the fundamental sparki ng properti es of al kal i ne-
earth oxi de cathodes i s gi ven i n the next secti on. I t i s probabl e that
sparki ng i n hi gh-vacuum tubes i s caused by mor e than one abrupt
breakdown mechani sm; for al though the r ol e of the cathode i n sparki ng
was the fi rst sour ce of troubl e to be l ocated, attenti on has r ecentl y been
di r ected to processes occurri ng at the anode and other parts of the tube.
1W. E. Ramsey, A General Survey of Sparki ng Phenomena i n Hi gh Vacuum
Thermi oni c Tubes, NDRC 14-516.
I
SEC. 122] TEST METHODS 505
The choi ce of the type of el ectr on emi tter sui tabl e for the condi ti ons
exi sti ng i n a gi ven magnetron depends on many factors besi des the
pri mary and secondary el ectron-emi ssi on of the cathode, but an appreci a-
ti onof these fundamental emi ssi on properti es i s essenti al . l he fol l owi ng
secti ons wi l l descri be some of the properti es of al kal i ne-earth oxi des,
thori um oxi de, and such secondary-emi ssi on surfaces as si l ver magnesi um
and Dowmetal .
12.2. Af.kafi ne-earth Oxi de Cathodes. Test kfethods.-From the
standpoi nt of physi cal -chemi cal theor y the oxi de-cathode emi tter i s a
ver y compl ex system, and i t i s, ther efor e, doubtful that the opti mum
preparati on and processi ng have ever been achi eved. However , a cathode
that emi ts sati sfactori l y accordi ng to usual expectati ons maybe obtai ned
by many vari ati ons i n preparati on techni ques. The oxi de cathode i s
commonl y prepared by coati ng a base-metal structure wi th a defi ni te
wei ght of al kal i ne-earth carbonates. 1 The cathode i s heated i n vacuum
to conver t the carbonate coati ng to oxi de and then i s acti vated by passi ng
cur r ent through i t.
Several forms of the al kal i ne-earth oxi de cathode have been used i n
pul sed magnetrons: pl ai n uncombi ned oxi de, uncombi ned screen, metal -
l i zed, over wound, ni ckel mesh, and si ntered ni ckel . 2 Because the
basi c structure i s the pl ai n, uncombi ned oxi de cathode, the di scussi on
of fundamental properti es wi l l be restri cted to thi s type. The pr ocedur e
for testi ng the thermi oni c acti vi ty of cathodes i n di ode structures con-
si sts fundamental l y i n obtai ni ng characteri sti cs of pl ate cur r ent Z vs.
pl ate vol tage V at a fi xed temperature and i nterpreti ng these data by
the use of the Langmui r-Chi l ds l aw whi ch may be wri tten i n the form
1% = K%V;
(1)
thi s equati on expresses the cur r ent 1 and vol tage V rel ati on i n a di ode
when the cur r ent i s l i mi ted by space charge.
Pul se methods of testi ng cathodes have been devel oped. These
tests are taken wi th pul ses of short durati on and l ow r ecur r ence frequency,
i n or der to el i mi nate the ri se i n temperature that occurs when cathodes
are pul sed at hi gh-duty rati os and to r educe the chances of destroyi ng
the cathode surface by sparki ng.
For the measurement of the (V,l )-curves of both si mpl e cyl i ndri cal
test di odes and magnetrons wi thout magneti c fi el d, the vol tage i s appl i ed
to the anode as a seri es of negati ve pul ses (see Fi g. 12.1). The funda-
mental emi ssi on tests are taken at 1 psec 60 PRF, but pul ses of ~- to
1I n thi s chapter doubl e carbonates wi l l r efer to a 50-50 mol ar sol i d sol uti on
of bari um and stronti um carbonates.
ZE. A. Coomes, J. G. Buck, A. S. Ei senstei n, and A. Fi neman, RL Report No. 933,
June 1946.
506 THE CATHODE [SEC. 12.2
10-Psec durati on at pul se r ecur r ence frequenci es from 60 to 4000 have
al so been found useful . The vol tage pul ses are obtai ned from a hard-
tube l aboratory pul ser that has been provi ded wi th a speci al 60-PRF
tr i gger ci rcui t.1 The pul se vol tage i s measured wi th a noni nducti ve
resi stance di vi der or capaci ty di vi der and vi ewed on a synchroscope.
The pul se current, al so vi ewed on the synchroscope, i s obser ved as the
vol tage dr op across a noni nducti ve resi stance i n seri es wi th the tube
under measurement. The cathode
i s set at the desi red temperature,
and the pul se vol tage across the
tube i s i ncreased unti l the cathode
just begi ns to spark. The term
sparki ng r efer s to that cathode
l i mi tati on whi ch i s characteri zed by
-,.,,
Vol tage
di vi der f w
under
test
FI G. 12.1,Arrangement of test equi p-
ment for the measurement of pul se cur r ent
and vol tage.
the physi cal transfer of i ncandescent
cathode sl eeve to the anode.
Theoretical space-
charge line
$
~
.E
z
g
i I o
z
Pulse voltage
F1~. 12.2,Di ode cur ve of an oxi de
cathode showi ng the normal Schottky
emi ssi on effect.
parti cl es of oxi de coati ng from the
The most conveni ent manner to present pul se-emi ssi on data i n
di odes i s by pl otti ng of W vs. V. A computati on of K$~ can be made from
tube geometr y, and a theoreti cal space-charge l i ne drawn to sati sfy
the Langmui r-Chi l ds equati on. A cathode can then be cl assi fi ed by
the manner i n whi ch emi ssi on data fol l ow or devi ate from the theoreti cal
space-charge l i ne.
The resul ts of testi ng a consi derabl e number of di odes i n the manner
outl i ned above i ndi cate that the cathode-emi ssi on curves are charac-
teri zed by several di fferent types of behavi or. TWO of these may be
consi dered pri me types.
1. The normal Schottky effect i s shown i n Fi g. 12.2. The experi -
mental poi nts fol l ow the theoreti cal Langmui r l i ne up to a cur r ent
val ue r epr esented by 10 (correspondi ng to the maxi mum space-
1SWVol . 5 of the Radi ati onLaboratory &ri es for a di scussi onof pul se equi pment
and pul se test methods.
,
r
.
T
SEC. 122]
TEST METHODS 507
charge-l fi l ted emi ssi on). Experi mental poi nts from ZO up to
the sparki ng poi nt (1.,V,I can be pl otted to the form of the
Schottky emi ssi on equati on, but the sl ope i s usual l y descri bed as
correspondi ng to a fi cti ti ous temperature consi derabl y di fferent
from the tr ue cathode temperature.
2. The anomal ous Schottky effect i s shown i n Fi g. 123. Thi s
type of emi ssi on cur ve efi l bi ts the same characteri sti cs as Fi g.
12.2 at the begi nni ng of the cur ve but has an i nfl ecti on poi nt
fol l owed by a regi on i n whi ch the emi ssi on i ncreases rapi dl y wi th
vol tage. From correl ati ons
bet wee n nonosci l l ati ng-
and osci l l ati ng-magnetron
characteri sti cs i t appeam
that the l ocati on of the ~
i nfl ecti on poi nt and the S
sl ope of the anomal ous ~
Schottky characteri sti c are Z
of consi derabl e i mportance
5
J
i n cathode sparki ng i n ~
m i c r o wave magnetrons.
No compl etel y sati sfactory
theor y exi sts for fi tti ng the
cur ve i n thi s regi on; how-
ever , i t i s possi bl e that the
anomal ous Schottky effect
FI G. 12.3.Di ode cur ve of an oxi de
may be associ ated wi th
cathode showi ng the anomal ous Schottky
pro~erti es of the i nterface fi ssi on ffect
between the oxi de coati ng and the base metal . Thi s type of
behavi or i s general l y to be expected at some ti me i n the l i fe of the
doubl e carbonate oxi de cathode.
Other types of devi ati ons from the space-charge l i ne have been
obser ved and wi l l be consi dered i n connecti on wi th appl i cati ons. Smal l
amounts of gas are often evi denced by l arge and random fl uctuati ons
i n experi mental curves, and l arger amounts general l y pr oduce system-
ati cal l y i ncreasi ng devi ati ons above the space-charge l i ne. Cathodes
that have been poi soned duri ng preparati on have had, i n a number of
i nstances, emi ssi on curves that i ndi cated that the cur r ent was not l i mi ted
by space charge at any vol tage but showed sl i ght devi ati ons bel ow the
theoreti cal space-charge l i ne even down to zer o vol tage. Fi gure 124
i s an exampl e of thi s phenomenon.
The useful terms defi ned i n Fi gs. 12.2 and 12.3 may be summari zed
as fol l ows:
508
1.
2.
/
THE CA TI fOL)E [SEC.123
The maxi mum space-charge-l i mi ted emi ssi on 10 whi ch i s taken as
the poi nt on the pl ot of W VS. V at whi ch the experi mental poi nts
fi rst devi ate from the theoreti cal space-charge l i ne.
The type of behavi or above 10 (the Schottky regi on) correspondi ng
to one of two types: (a) the normal Schottky effect, i n whi ch
Theoreticalspace
charge line
Pul sevol tage
FI G. 12.4.Di ode cur ve of an oxi de
cathode showi ng gradual devi ati ons of the
pul sed emi ssi on fr om the space-charge l i ne.
I n Fi g. 12.6 the sparki ng cur r ent
l yti c-ni ckel base metal and compared
3.
the experi mental poi nts
fol l ow the form of the
Schottky emi ssi on l aw, and
(b) the anomal ous Schottky
effect i n whi ch the (1~~,V)-
cur ve has an i nfl ecti on poi nt
i n the Schottky regi on.
The sparki ng cur r ent and
vol tage (1,, V,) whi ch are
f
the di ode val ues at whi ch
cathode emi ssi on i s l i mi ted
by sparki ng.
12,3. Al kal i ne-earth Oxi de
Cathodes. Life Tests and Spark-
ing Phenomena.Di ode l i fe tests
at 800, 875, and 950C have
shown that i n thi s temperature
&
regi on the expected l i fe at fi xed
operati ng condi ti ons i s markedl y :
dependent on temperature; the
hi gher the temperature the l ower
the pul se l i fe. The expected l i fe
of a doubl e-carbonate coati ng on
Grade A ni ckel under the test
condi ti on of 1 Ksec, 400 PRF, and
10 amp/cm2 i s i l l ustrated i n Fi g.
12.5.
i s pl otted agai nst l i fe for el ectr o-
wi th that for Grade A ni ckel base
metal ; standard doubl e-carbonate coati ng was used i n both cases. I t i s
seen that the same general pattern i s fol l owed i n both cases but that the
pure ni ckel cur ve l i es above that of the Grade A.
I t has been recogni zed previ ousl y* that there are probabl y two types
of sparki ng encountered when hi gh pul se cur r ents are demanded fr om
oxi de cathodes. Di fferenti ati on between these two types of sparki ng
may be made i n the fol l o~ui ng manner:
] O. H. Shade, Proc. I RE, 7, 341 (1943).
SEC. 12.3] EMISSION AND SPARKING PHENOMENA 509
1. Space-charge-l i mi ted sparki ng, i n whi ch the sparki ng cur r ent
has a val ue 1, = I .o on the space-charge l i ne. The val ue of 1,0
r
*
10
t----
k
\
\
\
i \
,
.
goc
+
..
...
800C
I
=F
875C
o!
I I
200 400
Life in hours
FI G. 12.5.The expected l i fe, at three cl i fferent temperatures, of a doubl e-carbonate
coati ng on Grade A ni ckel . Test condi ti ons: 1 psec; 400 PRF; 10 amp/cmZ.
measured at 1 psec and 60 PRF i s about 50 amp/cm2 at 800C
for doubl e-carbonate coati ng on Grade A ni ckel and i s about 100
2.

amp/cm2 for doubl e carbon-

140
ate on pure ni ckel . Sub- E
I I I
sti tuti on of tri pl e carbonate ~ 120
contai ni ng 4 or 11 per cent 5 ~W
of GaC03 does not appreci - ~. Pure nickel
abl y change these val ues.
=8
Fi el d-l i mi ted sparki ng that $ 60
occurs l ate i n the l i fe of an
g 40
oxi de cathode, i n whi ch the ~
Mean deviation
of least squar*
sparki ng i s l i mi ted by a s 20
val ues
cri ti cal val ue of fi el d cor r e-
00
spendi ng to V. = F,f. The
100 200 m m
Life in hoursat 300 C
value of F,f has been found
FI G. 12.6.Sparki ng cur r ents under pul se
experi mental l y to depend i n
condi ti ons as functi ons of l i fe for pur e ni ckel
a fundamental m a n n e r
and GradeA ni ckel cathodes.
upon the nature of the oxi de at the cathode surface.
I ts experi -
mental val ue l i es between 40 to 60 kv/cm for cathodes prepared
510
THE CATHODE [SEC. 12.3
wi th Sr CO g or BaSr(CO J z and i n the range 100 to 125 kv/cm for
si ngl e BaCOs cathodes.
The transi ti on from Type 1 to Type 2, as l i fe progresses, i s shown i n
Fi g. 12.7 for doubl e-carbonate coati ng on Grade A ni ckel .
Start
I Sl sO>
.W
*
: Theoretical space
c
charge line
g
~
~
z
Pulsevoltage
o 100 200 300
Hour s of l i fe at 875 C
FI O. 12.7.Transi ti on f~om space-oharge- FI I A 12.8.Dependence of sparki ng
l i mi ted sparki ng to fi el d-l i mi ted ~parki ng cur r ent on the pul se l ength duri ng the
duri ng the l i fe of oxi de-coated cathodes. l i fe of an oxi de-coated cathode.
eme
I
0
1 1 I [ I
I
o 5 10 15 20 25 30
Fm. 12
Coeti ng wei ght i n Mg/cm 2
.9.Sparki ng-current densi ty under pul sed condi ti ons as a functi on of
wei ght on Grade A ni ckel at 875C.
coati ng
The dependence of sparki ng cur r ent on pul se l ength, whi ch i s marked
earl y i n the l i fe of a cathode befor e the fi el d-l i mi ted state sets i n, dk-
appears when the cathode sparki ng becomes enti rel y fi el d l i mi ted. Thi s
condi ti on i s shown by Fi g. 12.8, whi ch gi ves a compari son of the sparki ng
cur r ent at 1 and at 10 psec as a functi on of l i fe. The cathodes consi sted
of doubl e-carbonate coati ng on Grade A ni ckel .
1
SW. 12.3] EMISSIOA AND SPARKING PHENOMENA 511
Emi ssi on Dependence on Cathode Coati ng. Pr oper choi ce of coati ng
wei ght and densi ty i s i mportant i n obtai ni ng the opti mum pul se emi ssi on
to whi ch an oxi de cathode can be acti vated. Fi gure 129 shows the
pul sed sparkhg cur r ent i n amperes per square centi meter as a functi on
of coati ng wei ght avai l abl e for pl ai n oxi de cathodes of densi ty about
gm/cm3, prepared wi th doubl e carbonates on Grade A ni ckel for fi xed
processi ng condi ti ons. These curves di spl ay a range of opti mum wei ghts
of approxi matel y 9 to 13 mg/cm2.
Exper i ence has al so i ndi cated that
cathodes prepared wi th hi gher-densi ty coati ngs are better pul se emi tters
when pr ocessed to opti mum.
Publ i shed r epor ts of correl ati ons between carbonate parti cl e si ze
)
and emi ssi onl have suggested the advi sabi l i ty of mai ntai ni ng ri gi d
control s of the parti cl e-si ze di stri buti on of the cathode coati ng. I t has
a
been shown by Ei senstei n,
2 however , that no correl ati on exi sts between
the si ze of the carbonate parti cl es and crystal s and the si ze of the oxi de
crystal s because
1. Both the crystal and parti cl e si zes of the carbonates begi n to
i ncrease at about 500C and approach an equi l i bri um of val ues
that depend pri mari l y on the ti me and temperature of treatment.
2. A si mi l ar crystal gr owth i n the oxi de occurs rapi dl y about 950C,
dependent pri mari l y on the maxi mum temperature and beari ng
no rel ati onshi p to the crystal or parti cl e si ze of the carbonate from
whi ch i t was formed. I t ther efor e appears that the correl ati on
between carbonate parti cl e si ze and emi ssi on i s not due to a di rect
i nterrel ati on of these two factors. The cathode-coati ng textur e
may be affected by the carbonate-parti cl e-si ze di stri buti on under
a fi xed set of sprayi ng condi ti ons. Thi s resul tant textur e coupl ed
wi th a fi xed processi ng schedul e coul d then i nfl uence the fi nal
emi ssi on obtai nabl e from the cathode.
Emission Dependence on Cathode Base Metal.The fol l owi ng base
I
metal s wer e studi ed for pul se emi ssi on:
1. The purest avai l abl e ni ckel .
2. Grade A ni ckel .
3. Ni ckel s al l oyed wi th l arge amounts of the el ements commonl y
found i n Grade A ni ckel .
Wel l -acti vated cathodes wi th base metal s of the purest ni ckel s, such as
the el ectrol yti c ni ckel obtai nabl e from the I nternati onal Ni ckel Company
I
1 M. Benjami n, R. J. Huck, and R. O. Jenki ns, Proc. Phys. Sot., 50, 345 (1938);
R. C. Chi rnsi de and H. P. Rooksby, General El ectri c Li mi ted Report No. 8355,
December 1943; A. S. Ei senstei n, A Study of Oxi de Cathodes by X-ray Di ffracti on
Methods, Part I , Jour. Applied Phys., June 1946.
ZEi senstei n, op. tit.
512
or Dr i ver Harri s No. 499,
THE CATHODE [SEC. 123
gi ve sparki ng currents of 90 * 10 amp/cm2
for peri ods of several hundred hours when oper ated at 800C. The
correspondi ng fi gure for el ectroni c Grade A ni ckel was 50 t 10 amp/cm2.
The emi ssi on effi ci ency i n terms of pul se amperes per watt was 18 for
the pure ni ckel cathodes as compared wi th about 10 for the Grade A
ni ckel cathodes.
25
24
23
22
21
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
I
250 kw
300 kw
I I /-- ,
I
150 kw
-w
\l I
\\ \\ ~ \,
, ,

\i
\ \l
I
\
100kw
\
r
x
I
\,
\
1 .

\ I u =[
\\
\
/
950c
\
\
\
\
\
N 1, , I , I
1 1 I I I
1 1 1 [ 1
\.
\ .syc 500 PRF
l msec
10 20 30 40 50 60
Pulse current in amp
Fm. 12. 10.The vari ati on of cathode temperature over the performance chart of a 10.7-cm
magnetron operati ng at constant l oad. (CourtesV of C. S. Robinson, J r. )
Cathodes composed of doubl e carbonates on ni ckel al l oys contai ni ng
5 per cent of Al , Si , Mn, or Ti had pul sed l i ves and sparki ng currents l ess
than those obtai ned for Grade A ni ckel at an operati ng temperature of
875C. A 5 per cent Cr al l oy, however , showed an i mprovement over
Grade A ni ckel and pr oduced resul ts equal to the hi gh val ues obtai ned
from the pure ni ckel s.
Pulse Temperature Rise and Coating Resi stance. -When the tempera-
tur e of an oxi de cathode i s measured i n a magnetron osci l l ati ng at
[
I
(
(
SEC.123] EMI SSI ON AND SPARKI NG PHENOMENA 513
constant l oad over i ts (V,l )-performance chart, i t i s found that the tem-
perature may i ncrease several hundred degr ees above i ts val ue at zer o cur-
g
0
5
~ 900
\
o 20 40 60
Average power output in watts
FI ~. 12.11.The effect of l oadi ng on the cathode temperature. The data were taken
on a 9.1-cm strapped magnetron at 1000 PRF and l -psec pul se durati on.
(courte.~ of
C, S. Robinson, J r.)
rent. 1 Fi gure 1210 i l l ustrates the or der of magni tude of the effect.
The cathode temperature i s al so changed wi th varyi ng val ues of mag-
netr on l oad as shown i n Fi g. 12.11.
Part of thi s temperature i ncrease
i s caused by an i ncrease i n back
bombardment. H owe v e r, the
cathode temperature wi l l i ncrease
wi th pul se cur r ent even i f the
magnetron i s oper ated as a di ode.
The magni tude of thi s i ncrease i n
temperature, the pul se tempera-
tur e ri se (PTR), i s a functi on of
the pul se current, the duty rati o,
the i ni ti al qui escent operati ng
temperature, and the physi cal
state of the cathode. The PTR
vanes wi th the cathode construc-
ti on and from cathode to cathode
of the same type; i t al so vari es
throughout the l i fe of a gi ven
cathode. The average PTR
measured i n di odes for a number
o- lm 200 300 400 5CQ
Cathadelife inhours
FI G. 12. 12.Pul se temperature ri se
(PTR) as a functi on of cathode l i fe. The
PTR was measured at 10 amp/cml , l -~sec
pul se durati on, and 1000 PRF fr om a qui es-
cent temperature of S50C. Duri ng I ife
testi ng, the tube was operated at 10 amp/cm2,
l -psec pul se durati on, and 400 PRF and
S75C.
of doubl e-carbonate cathodes of
the pl ai n uncombi ned oxi de, the uncombi ned screen, and the metal l i zed,
scr een cathode types are gi ven as a functi on of l i fe i n Fi g. 12.12.
The PTR of a cathode i n a di ode i s apparentl y due to the 12R di ssi pa-
ti on ~vi thi n the cathode when the pul se cur r ent I fl ows through the oxi de
1 C, S. Robi nson Jr,, Cathode Temperatures i n Magnetrons, RL Report No
11-5S. Mar. 31.1942.
514
coati ng. Val ues for the
THE CATHODE [SEC. 12.3
total coati ng resi stance R, measured ei ther
by a cal ori metri c methodl or by probes embedded i n the cathode coati ng, 2
have been found to be a functi on of the pul se cur r ent and to have charac-
teri sti cs typi cal of a bl ocki ng-l ayer recti fi er system.
Scr een Cathodes.The need for cathodes of l onger l i fe i n the strapped
3-cm medi um-power magnetrons resul ted i n the devel opment of the
scr een cathode. Thi s cathode i s made by fi rml y bondi ng ni ckel mesh to a
supporti ng ni ckel sl eeve and i mpregnati ng the i ntersti ces of the mesh
wi th the cathode coati ng. Exper i ence has shown that i n or der to obtai n
a good cathode of hi gh pri mary emi ssi on wi th normal Schottky emi ssi on
characteri sti cs, i t i s necessary fi rst to bond the ni ckel mesh to the under-
l yi ng metal at as many poi nts of contact as possi bl e. Thi s contact i s
i mportant for obtai ni ng good thermal and el ectri cal conducti vi ty and i s
accompl i shed ei ther by wel di ng the mesh at cl ose i nterval s or by si nteri ng
i n a hydr ogen furnace. Second, i t i s i mportant that the carbonate coat-
i ng make good contact wi th al l the exposed area of the ni ckel mesh and
the substrate ni ckel and that i t be fi rml y packed to pr event al l voi ds
(see Sec. 177). I n the 3-cm 725A and the 10-cm 4J32 and HP1OV
the scr een cathode showed deci ded advantages over the pl ai n oxi de
cathode i n extendi ng tube l i fe, i mprovi ng the stabi l i ty of operati on, and
i ncreasi ng output power .
Earl y l i fe test studi es on scr een cathodes i n magnetrons wer e made
wi th mesh si zes up to 60 by 60, and the l ongest l i ves wer e obtai ned wi th
the fi nest mesh. Further l i fe tests on scr een cathodes wi th 150-by-150
mesh showed that the normal Schottky emi ssi on characteri sti c extended
to hi gher sparki ng vol tages and that the sparki ng currents for 10-psec
pul ses wer e hi gher. The use of thi s fi ne-mesh cathode i n l ow-vol tage
3-cm magnetrons resul ted i n i ncreased mode stabi l i ty, l ess sparki ng,
and l onger tube l i fe.
Direct-current Emission Val ues.At a temperature of 800C, cathodes
made of doubl e carbonates on Grade A ni ckel have oper ated at 1 amp/cmZ
di rect cur r ent for over 1000 hr under space-charge-l i mi ted condi ti ons.
Prel i mi nary tests have shown d-c emi ssi ons of 10 amp/cm2 under space-
charge-l i mi ted condi ti ons at 850 C for several hours. These resul ts
i ndi cated that cathode poi soni ng by structures external to the cathode
may be an i mportant factor i n l i mi ti ng the d-c emi ssi on from oxi de
cathodes.
I t i s di ffi cul t, i f at al l possi bl e, to cor r el ate the pul sed and d-c emi ssi on
properti es of oxi de cathodes. About al l that can be stated at the present
ti me i s that good pul sed cathodes are usual l y good d-c cathodes but that
the r ever se i s by no means true.
1E. A. (%omes, Jour. Applied Phg.s., Jul y 1946.
$A. Fi nemanand A. S. Ei senstei n,J our. Applied Ph~8., Jul y 1946.
SEC.12.4] THORI UM OXI DE CATHODES 515
12.4. Thori um Oxi de Cathodes.-A type of thori um oxi de cathode
sui tabl e for use i n magnetrons has been devel oped by the Bartol Research
Foundati on. 1 The cathode, whi ch consi sts of a shel l of si ntered thori um
oxi de, i s prepared by compressi ng thori a powder i n a di e and heati ng
to a hi gh temperature i n a speci al l y prepared furnace; a coi l of fi ne heater
wi r e i s embedded i n the thori a.
Cathode shapes of any desi red
form may be made i n thi s manner,
The fundamental probl ems con-
cer ned wi th thori um oxi de cath-
odes are sti l l i ncompl etel y sol ved,
but thi s progress has exci ted con-
si derabl e i nterest i n the possi bi l i -
ti es of appl i cati ons i n magnetrons
for hi gh-pul se powers, l ong-pul se
durati ons, and hi gh-duty rati os.
Studi es of thori a cathodes i n
test di odes have i ndi cated that
the el aborate acti vati on schedul es
whi ch are general l y used wi th
al kal i ne-earth oxi des can be di s-
pensed wi th. Thori a cathodes of
smal l area are si mpl y rai sed to
thei r emi tti ng temperatures for a
few mi nutes and then oper ated
i mmedi atel y. The acti vati on of
l arge-area cathodes (about 7 cm)
i n hi gh-power magnetrons may be
somewhat mor e di ffi cul t to accom-
pl i sh (as i s al so the case wi th
al kal i ne-e art h oxi de cathodes);
ther e are, however , good i ndi ca-
ti ons that the thori um oxi de cath-
ode i s much l ess sensi ti ve to those
80 [
I I I I I I I I
w
2
15
10
5
I
J
r
1680 C
/ ~
/
I / <,
3
2
1
.
0246 8101214:
Pulsevoltagem kv
FI G. 12, 13.Pul sed thermi oni c emi ssi on
of a si ntered thori um oxi de. Test condi ti on,:
1 #se. and 1000 PRF. (Courkzsu of M. .4,
Pomerantz.)
condi ti ons exi sti ng i n a tube whi ch ordi nari l y cause deacti vati on of
emi ssi on surfaces. Cathode sparki ng of the type di scuswd i n Sec. 12.2
for al kal i ne-earth oxi des appeam to be compl etel y absent i n thori a
cathodes. 2 The thori a cathode woul d thus be of consi derabl e i mpor-
tance for magnetrons oper ated at hi gh-pul se power s or l ong-pul se
durati ons.
M. A. Pomerantz,Si ntered Thori a Cathodes, NDRC 14-517.
2W. E. Ramsey, A General Sur vey of Sparki ngPhenomenai n Hi gh Vacuum
Thermi oni cTubes, NDRC 1*516.
516
Typi cal
Fi g. 1213.
THE CA THODB [SEC. 124
di ode (V, I )-curves obtai ned for thori um oxi de are gi ven i n
The cathode temperatures gi ven on the fi gure are bri ghtness
temperatures obtai ned by an opti cal pyr ometer . The emi ssi on efi ci en-
60
70
lsk!c%!el/l lxx--[
[1111 /1: :/1
166 hours
Ohours.
60
50
4
3
I
2
I
1 -
0
02468101214161820
Pulsevoltsgein Idlovolte
FI G. 12.14 .Pul sed-thermi oni c emi ssi on
of a si ntered thori um oxi de cathode at di ffer -
ent i nterval s of l i fe. (Courtes& o~ M. A.
Pormratiz.)
Teet condi ti ons Li fe test condi ti ons
1 psec
1000 PRF
1800C
0.9 psec
400 PRF
1650C
15 amp/cma
ti es of thori a cathodes i n terms
of amperes per watt areabout O.4
at 1580C and O.7 at 1740C.
The thermi oni c emi ssi on from
si ntered thori um oxi de cathodes
was obser ved wi th pul ses varyi ng
from l ess than a mi crosecond to
several mi l l i seconds. At a cur-
r ent l evel of 30 amp/cm2 no decay
i n the pul se emi ssi on was found
duri ng thi s i nterval . Further-
more, i n the temperature range i n
whi ch i t was possi bl e to measure
both the pul sed and d-c emi ssi on,
the di ode (1, V)-characteri sti cs ob-
tai ned for pul se and d-c operati on
agr eed qui te cl osel y. From these
data i t woul d appear that the
emi ssi on i n r espect to ti me effects
di ffers fundamental l y from that
obser ved i n al kal i ne-earth oxi de
cathodes. 1
Fi gure 1214 i l l ustrates the
type of di ode (1, V)-curves that
have been obtai ned wi th si ntered
thori um oxi de cathodes at di ffer-
ent i nterval s of l i fe. I t i s seen
that at the end of 800 hr, the
m a x i m u m space-charge-l i mi ted
emi ssi on has decreased to approxi -
matel y a thi rd of i ts i ni ti al val ue
but that the total emi ssi on has
decreased onl y sl i ghtl y.
Cathodes have al so been oper ated at 1.5 and 2 amp/cmz dh-ect
cur r ent for peri ods of 400 hr. Emi ssi on densi ti es exceedi ng 5 ati p/cmz
di rect cur r ent wer e obtai ned for short i nterval s of ti me and i n the experi -
ments per for med wer e l i mi ted by factors i nvol vi ng the al l owabl e anode
di ssi pati on rather than the emi ssi on capabi l i ti es of the cathode.
1E. A. Coomes,J our. Applied Phys., Jul y 1946; R. L. Sproul l , Phys. Rev., 67, 166,
(1945).
S~.c.12.5] SI K.ONL)AR Y-tiMI SSI ON CA THODI M 517
t
12.5. Secondary El ectron-emi ssi on Properti es of Magnetron Cath-
odes.A magnetron wi l l oper ate stabl y i n certai n regi ons of the per -
{
formance di agram even when onl y a smal l pri mary thermi oni c cur r ent
i s avai l abl e from the cathode.
The remai nder of the pul se cur r ent
requi red by the tube i s suppl i ed by secondary el ectr on emi ssi on. The
nature of the back-bombardi ng el ectrons has been i nvesti gated both
experi mental l y and theoreti cal l y, but theor y and experi mental data can
at present gi ve l i ttl e ai d to the desi gner of new types of magnetron.
Neverthel ess, the possi bi l i ty of usi ng metal l i c cathodes havi ng sui tabl e
secondary el ectron-emi ssi on characteri sti cs to furni sh the pul se currents
requi red and capabl e of di ssi pati ng l arge power s and operati ng at l ong
pul se durati ons has i nsti gated consi derabl e i nterest. Several worki ng
model s have been devel oped. 1
An exampl e of thi s type of cathode desi gn i s the c-w 30-cm 10-kv
spl i t-anode tube, the VC-303W. The cathode of thi s tube i s made from
Dowmetal J 1 al l oy (93 per cent Mg, 6 per cent Al , 1 per cent Mn) and
has an average l i fe of onl y about 200 hr, probabl y because of the removal
of the Dowmet al surf ace duri ng operati on.
Pul sed mul ti cavi ty magnetrons usi ng si l ver magnesi um al l oys have
been oper ated at 1-, 3-, and 10-cm wavel engths for short peri ods of ti me.
At l -cm, densi ti es of about 100 amp/cm2 wer e obtai ned. At 10-cm,
several cathodes wer e run wi th a maxi mum l i fe of about 400 hr, at an
i ni ti al operati ng poi nt of 14 kv and 30 amp and a duty rati o of 0,2 per
cent. The output power of these tubes fel l off rapi dl y by about 25 per
cent wi thi n a few hours and then remai ned al most constant.
A study of the secondary emi ssi on properti es of cathodes i n mag-
netrons has been made by McNa112 by i ncorporati ng an el ectr on gun
i n one of the cavi ti es of a mul ti osci l l ator magnetron. A magnetron
wi th a gi ven cathode i s run over i ts performance chart at a constant
l oad i n or der to determi ne the range of stabl e operati on for a gi ven set
of operati ng condi ti ons. The secondary emi ssi on characteri sti cs are
then determi ned. By sui tabl e treatment the secondary emi ssi on pr oper -
ti es of the cathode surface are changed and the regi on of stabl e operati on
of the magnetron i s agai n determi ned. Fi gure 12.15 shows the secondary
yi el d ti as a functi on of pri mary ener gy for a Ag-i Mg cathode i n several
states of acti vati on. From these data i t has been possi bl e to draw
contours of the mi ni mum val ue of the secondary el ectron-emi ssi on yi el d
that i s requi red for a gi ven magnetron tested under fi xed operati ng
condi ti ons. Such a performance chart i s gi ven i n Fi g. 12.16 for an Ag-i Mg
cathode i n a 2J30 anode bl ock. I t i s possi bl e to oper ate stabl y at al l
1 J. W. I McNal l , H. L. Steel e, and C. L. Shacl cel ford, Westi nghouse El ectri c Co.
Research Report No. BL-R-929-76-1.
2 I bid,
518
THE CATHODE [SEC. 12.5
100 200 300 4-W 500
Energyof primary electronsin volts
FI CJ. 12.15 .Secondary-el ectron-emi ssi on yi el d 8 of an Ag-Mg cathode surface
di fferent states of acti vati on. (cow+?8#ofJ. w. McNdL)
18
17
16
15
~ 14
c
.-
#i 13
$
~ 12
11
10
9
8
3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1
Pul secur r entin amps
7
under four
Fm. 12.16.Esti matcd correl ati on of magnetron cur r ent wi th the secondary+ mi tx+.i u,l
yi el d of an Ag-Mg cathode i n a 2J30 anode bl ock. (CourteaUof J. W. McNczU.)
I
I
I
SEC. 12.5] SECONDAR Y-EMI SSI ON CATHODES 519
val ues of vol tage and cur r ent to the l eft of the contour correspondi ng
to the chosen val ue of &
Many secondary emi ssi on surfaces have been tri ed i n pul sed and c-w
magnetrons wi th vari ed success. These attempts have i ncl uded si l ver-

magnesi um al l oys, Dowmetal -

metal al l oys, beryl l i um, al unl i -
num, n i c k e 1, a ni ckel -bari um
al l oy, thori um, a beryl l i um-copper
al l oy, beryl l i um-pl ated copper ,
and evaporated magnesi um on
copper . Si l ver magnesi um, Dow-
metal -metal al l oys, and possi bl y
beryl l i um appear to be the most
promi si ng of the surfaces studi ed.
Al most i nvari abl y the al l oys are
oxi di zed befor e assembl y or at
some ti me duri ng the processi ng
i n or der to obtai n surfaces wi th
hi gh secondary yi el ds. Many of
these surfaces studi ed have not
been sati sfactory under the con-
di ti ons chosen for operati on i n the
magnetron or have been unstabl e
i n varyi ng degr ees duri ng pr o-
l onged test i n g. Deacti vati on
caused by arci ng, gas, or other con-
T-
660C
)0
Primary.electronenergyi volts
FI G. 12. 17.Secondary-el ectr on+mi ssi on
yi el d 6 of an al kal i ne-earth oxi de cathode as
a functi on of pri mary energy and of temper-
ature. (Courtesg of M. A. Pomerantz,)
l ami nati ons has been encounter ed i n most of the studi es made; ther e
have been encouragi ng si gns, however , that sati sfactory sol uti ons can
be obtai ned for parti cul ar tube appl i cati ons.
I t was poi nted out i n Sec. 121 that most magnetrons usi ng al kal i ne-
earth oxi de cathodes have oper ated sati sfactori l y onl y because the
secondary el ectron-emi ssi on properti es are capabl e of compensati ng for
the thermi oni c emi ssi on defi ci enci es. The secondary el ectron-emi ssi on
yi el ds of al kal i ne-earth oxi de cathodes are hi gh, 1,2 and they have been
r epor ted to i ncrease rapi dl y wi th temperature over a consi derabl e range
of operati on. Fi gure 12.17 shows the secondary yi el d 6 for an oxi de
cathode as a functi on of pri mary ener gy and of temperature.
HEAT BALANCE I N THE CATHODE
BY A. M. CLOGSTON
The next thr ee secti ons of thi s chapter di scuss the probl em of heat
bal ance i n a magnetron cathode. The amount of back-bombardment
1M. A. Pomerantz and D. L. Gol dwater, Secondary El ectron Emi ssi on fr om
Oxi de-coated hfagnetron Cathodes, NDRC 14310.
z J. B. Johnson, Enhanced Thermi oni c Emi ssi on, Phys. Rev., 66, 352 (1944).
520 THE CATHOllE [SEC. 126
power del i vered to the cathode of an operati ng magnetron wi l l be di s-
cussed i n Sec. 127, whi l e Sec. 128 wi l l consi der how a cathode may be
desi gned to di ssi pate thi s power .
12.6. Thermal Behavi or ofa Pul sed Cathode.-Because the best data
avai l abl e on back-bombardment power have been measured on pul sed
magnetrons, and because appl i cati ons of these secti ons may be made to
pul sed tubes, consi derati on must be gi ven to the di fferencesi n behavi or
between a cathode recei vi ng pul ses of back-bombardment power and one
recei vi ng the same average power conti nuousl y.
To study thi s questi on, the fol l owi ng si mpl i fi ed probl em wi l l be
N
Area
\
Acm2
Back.bombardment
a

FI G. 12. 18.Cathode surface

devel oped i nto a pl ane.
sol ved and used as a basi s for qual i tati ve con-
cl usi ons about the behavi or of real cathodes.
Consi der an outer cyl i ndri cal l ayer of a cathode
unwrapped to form a rectangul ar sheet as i n
Fi g. 12.18. Suppose thata back-bombardment
power of P, watts i s del i vered uni forml y over
L
T(z,O
TO
P*
T(U)
I z+
Fm. 12,19.Cathode surface and
coordi nate system.
thi s surface duri ng a pul se of durati on 7 r epeated at a frequency j ti mes
per second.
The devel oped area of the surface wi l l be A cm, and i t wi l l have a
depth of 1 cm. Let i t be supposed, tentati vel y, that i t has been possi bl e
to choose thi s depth so that the back surface can be consi dered to remai n
at a fi xed temperature To.
Suppose that the cathode surface i s arranged rel ati ve to a coordi nate
system (z) as i ndi cated i n Fi g. 1219. The temperature di stri buti on
wi thi n the l ayer wi l l then be i ndi cated by T(@). I t wi l l be supposed
that the area A is l arge enough that transverse vari ati ons of the tempera-
tur e are uni mportant. Furthermore, suppose the ori gi n of ti me i s
chosen so that a pul se of power i s appl i ed to the cathode from t = O to
t=T.
SEC. 12.6] THERMAL BEHAVI OR OF A PULSED CATHODE 521
Duri ng the pul se, a power of PB/ A watts/cm2 or 0.239 PB/ A
cal /sec/cmz i s fed to the surface at z = 1. Ther efor e, i f
wher e K is the thermal conducti vi ty of the materi al i n cal ori es per
centi meter per second per degr ees centi grade, one has at the surface
~=1
()
dT
ZZ=l=q
forOstsr,
and
I
(2)
(-)
dT
ax
=0 for r <t <~-.
z-t
f
The parti al di fferenti al equati on governi ng nonsteady-state heat fl ow
i n one di mensi on may be wri tten
82T 1 aT
a& = a2 Z
(3)
wher e a = K/ cP. The thermal capaci ty per uni t mass i s i ndi cated by c,
and the densi ty by p. A tabl e of val ues of az may be found i n Strong.
The sol uti on of Eq. (3) appropri ate to the present probl em may be
wri tten =
.
T(x,t) =
z
A ~eim2rlt in
r
. n27rj
t
z + TO. (4)
az
.=.
I f the constants A ~ are now arranged so as to sati sfy the boundary
condi ti ons set by Eqs. (2), Eq. (4) becomes
r
(ein2mfr 1) sin i ~f Z
T(z,t) = ~
z
=-m (iYYcOs@z n+TO 5)
The quanti ty that wi l l be of i nterest i s the di fference i n temperature
of the f r ent face of the l ayer just befor e a pul se starts and just after i t
ends. Thi s fl uctuati on i n temperature wi l l be cal l ed AT and i s defi ned by
AT = T(l,r) T(l,O). (6)
I J, Strong, Procwiures in Experimental physics, Prenti ce-Hal l , New York, 1945,
p. 494.
2 H. Bateman, Partial Differential Equutimu of Mathematical Ph@c8, Dover , New
Ymk, 1944.p, 214.
522 THE CATHODE [SEC.12.6
From Eq. (5)
.
AT . ~{
z
1~&.fyr) [-%anJ=+-
n-1 a
and-] 7)
or
Equati on (8) i s the sol uti on to the probl em. An i nteresti ng observati on
can now be made about Eq. (8). I f 12 > a2/.f, then 21 ~n~ > ~.
Because n i s never smal l er than uni ty, 21 w- >3.54. Under thi s
condi ti on the second fracti on i n the seri es i s ver y nearl y uni ty for al l n
and may be di sregarded. Ther efor e, AT does not depend upon 1. Thi s
resul t can mean onl y that the fl uctuati ons i n temperature exper i enced
by the front face of the l ayer become i nsensi bl e at a depth a/~ behi nd
the front face. I n the most unfavorabl e csw that wi l l be consi dered, a
wi l l have the val ue 0.5 cm/sec~ for ni ckel , whereas i f pul si ng rates no
sl ower than f = 400 are consi dered, a/W can at most be 0.025 cm or
approxi matel y 0.010 i n. Thi $ exampl e provi des the justi fi cati on for
assumi ng that the probl em whi ch has been sol ved wi l l r epr esent the
behavi or of real cathodes. I t i s consi stent to assume that a cathode
recei vi ng peri odi c bumts of ener gy wi l l fl uctuate i n temperature onl y i n a
ver y thi n outer l ayer and that ther e wi l l be a cyl i ndri cal surface at some
depth gr eater than a/d whi ch may be consi dered to remai n at constant
temperature.
Assumi ng from now on that 1> a/fl , Eq. (8) may be wri tten
(9)
By the use of Poi ssons summati on formul a, the seri es maybe wri tten
m .
2
si n ni fjT
!
si n Tjr x
dx+
2/
=si nz r jr x
~%=o ~% x%
0s 2rz?rxdx. (l o)
o
n-l n-l
1Courantand Hi l bert, Mel hoden&r Ma&mol i c Ph~wk, Vol . I , Spri nger, Berl i n,
1924,p. 59.
I
1
SEC.12.6] THERMAL BEHAVI OR OF A PULSED CATHODE
523
I
The i ntegral s i n Eq. (10) can be eval uated wi th the resul t
(11)
provi ded that f, < 2, whi ch i s al ways true. I f now jr <<1, Eq. (11)
I
becomes ~pp]fJIin]:ltcl~
I
-i = = -T 2.612: (fT).
,,,-,
By negl ecti ng even the term i n (~r)2, 13q. (9) becomes
I
J
AT = 2qa ~,
I
wi th the two condi ti ons of val i di ty
and
%
I
f, <<l .
(12)
(13)
(14)
The magni tude of the fl uctuati ons i n temperature of a cathode caused
by peri odi c pul ses of back-bombardment power wi l l now be cal cul ated.
I n data presentedl i n Sec. 12.7 one has I = 106 sec and j = 500 per
second. The surface l ayer of the cathode i s a mi xture of bari um and
stronti um oxi des. Approxi mate val ues for the constants of thi s oxi de
mi xture at 900C are K = 0.013 and a = 0.11. Wi th these val ues, the
condi ti on of val i di ty noted i n Eq. (14) requi res that
~ 1>0.005 cm = 0.002 i n.,
whi ch i s certai nl y true. Furthermore, j7 = 0.5 X 103, whi ch i s much
l ess than uni ty. Suppose now that 10 kw of power i s del i vered to the
cathode whi l e the tube i s operati ng. The surface area of the cathode
under consi derati on i s 3.8 cm~. I t i s easi l y found that q = 49,000C/cm.
A fl uctuati on of 17C i s obtai ned by substi tuti on i n Eq. (13).
I f the cathode surface presented to the back-bombardment ener gy
wer e ni ckel i nstead of an oxi de mi xture, the constants woul d be K = ().22
and a = 0.50. Wi th the same back-bombardment power ,
!l
= 3000C/cm
and AT = 5C for ni ckel .
i W. E. Danforth, C. D. Prater, and D. L. Gol dwater, Back Bombardmentof
Magnetron Cathodes, BartcdResearchFoundati on, NDRC 14-309, Aug. 25, 1944.
524 THE CA THODll [SEC. 12.6
I t i s thus obser ved that i f the assumpti ons made i n these cal cul ati ons
are al l owed, the fl uctuati ons of cathode temperature caused by peri odi c
pul ses of back-bombardment power are rather smal l .
I t must now be menti oned that the probl em just sol ved does not
contempl ate cool i ng by radi ati on of the cathode surface drawn i n Fi g.
12.18. Suppose that the surface shown i n Fi g. 12.18 wer e radi ati ng
between pul ses from i ts front surface. Suppose al so that i t i s con-
si dered to be so thi n that no temperature di fferences exi st i nsi de the
materi al , and suppose that i t i s thermal l y i sol ated from i ts surroundi ngs.
These l ast two assumpti ons are arti fi ci al but wi l l permi t a cal cul ati on of
the i mportance of the radi ati on effect. I f the emi ssi vi ty of the surface
i s taken as uni ty, the ener gy l ost i n ti me o%from the surface i s AuTA dt
watt-seconds, wher e a i s Bol tzmans constant. I f c i s the heat capaci ty
per uni t mass and p the densi ty, one must have for the temperature change
i n ti me dZ
AuT4 dt = cPA1 dT. (15)
I f TI i s the temperature at ti me t = O, Eq. (15) can be i ntegrated to gi ve
(16)
for the temperature at ti me t. I f the materi al bei ng consi dered i s
ni ckel , c = 0.59 joul e/gi n per C and p = 8.4 gm/cm3. The val ue of I J
i s 5.74 X 1012 watt/cm2 per C. Let t = 0.002 sec be the ti me between
pul ses at a 500 cps repeti ti on rate, and l et 1be 0.02 cm, or approxi matel y
the depth i ndi cated by Eq. (14). Wi th these val ues i t i s found that
T3 =
T!
1 + (3.5 x 10-)T.
(17)
Suppose now that TI = 1200A. From Eq. (17) i t i s found that T i s
l ess than TI by onl y 0.02 per cent.
On the basi s of thi s exampl e, i t i s concl uded that radi ati on has a
negl i gi bl e effect upon the fl uctuati ons i n temperature of a pul sed cathode.
Consequentl y, fl uctuati ons i n cathode temperature due to peri odi c
back bombardment may be di sregarded under the condi ti ons assumed i n
thi s secti on.
A sour ce of peri odi c cathode heati ng duri ng pul si ng not consi dered
her e i s the ohmi c l oss i n the cathode coati ng due to passage of el ectrons.
I n the Bartol data that wi l l be consi dered, thi s effect has been taken
i nto account bv operati ng the ma~netron under consi derati on as a di ode
.-
and measuri ng the temperature ri se due sol el y to to ohmi c l oss.
appl i cati ons of the resul ts of these secti ons, the two effects shoul d
consi dered separatel y.
I n
be
SrJc.12.7] MEASUREMENTS OF BACK-BOMBARDMENT POWER 525
12.7. Measurements of Back-bombardment Power.I t i s general l y
understood that a certai n fracti on of the el ectrons whi ch l eave the
cathode of an operati ng magnetron return to the cathode wi th an
i ncreased ener gy gai ned at the expense of the osci l l ati ng fi el ds. Thi s
i ncrement of ener gy i s expended i n heati ng the cathode structure.
Exper i ence has l ed to general acceptance of the fact that about 3 to 10
per cent of the i nput power of a magnetron wi l l appear as back-bombard-
/
/
#--
/~
1600 gaJSs
/
1400
-
~
1200-
<6kw
\
/
~
~
1000- ~
\
3 kw
8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Current in amps
FI G. 12.20,Contours of equal back-bombardment power. QL = 56.
ment power at i ts cathode. Ver y few seri ous attempts have been made,
however , to measure back-bombardment pow-er accuratel y.
The best data on thi s subject have been measured on a 2J32 mag-
netr on at the Bartol Research Foundati on. 1 Under a vari ety of operat-
i ng condi ti ons, these i nvesti gators measured the x%e i n temperature
of the cathode of thi s tube above that mai ntai ned by the heati ng el ement
duri ng nonosci l l ati ng condi ti ons.
Furthermore, si mi l ar i ncrements of
1W. E. Danforth, C. D. Prater, and D. L, Gol dwater, Back Bombardmentof
Magnetron Cathodes, Bartol Research Foundati on, NDRC 14-309, Aug. 25, 1944.
526
THE CATHODE [SEC. 12.7
temperature wer e achi eved by i ncreasi ng the heater power . I n thei r
case, the dktri buti on of these two sources of heat can be consi dered
equi val ent, and i t has just been shown i n Sec. 126 that effects due to
peri odi c back bombardment can be negl ected. The temperature ri se
duri ng osci l l ati on can be cor r el ated wi th an average back-bombardment
power and, knowi ng the duty rati o, wi th a pul se back-bombardment power .
16
/- H
+
3.0
--- .
15
43
/
~ 4.5
14
/
/--- /
~
/
13

~
~
1400- -
c
*
.-
812
.
3.5
JX!
-
z
>
11 1200- - /
\
.
2.5
10
2.0
~-
/
~
~-
9 - ~ ~
1000- -~
8
6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Currentin amp
I. 12.21 .Back-bombardment power i n percentage of i nput power for the 2J32 magne-
tron. QL = 56.
I n Fi g. 12.~ a chart i s shown of contours of equal back-bombardment
power i n the (V,l )-pl ane for a 2J32 magnetron oper ated at a l oaded Q
of 56. The magneti c fi el d l i nes are al so shown. Thi s chart i s typi cal
of a number of such pl ots gi ven i n the Bartol r epor t. I n Fi g. 1221,
the same data are presented i n terms of per centage of i nput power .
I t wi l l be obser ved on thi s chart that from 2 to 5 per cent of the i nput
power appears at the cathode at thi s l oaded Q.
Furthermore, i t wi l l be obser ved that a ver y defi ni te maxi mum i n
the per centage of i nput power r etur ned to the cathode occurs i n the
I
I
SEC.12.7~ MEASUREMENTS
nei ghborhood of 1400 gauss.
i n Sec. 10.8. I t was stated
predi cted by the formul a
OF BACK-BOMBARDMENT POWER 527
Menti on of thi s fact has al ready been made
ther e that thi s fi el d val ue was empi ri cal l y
~ = 10,600
c
A
()
1+;.
(18)
Unti l mor e i nformati on i s avai l abl e, i t wi l l be i mpossi bl e to say whether
or not a maxi mum i n the per centage of i nput power r etur ned to the
cathode can general l y be expected i n the nei ghborhood of the fi el d
predi cted by Eq. (18).
I n Fi g. 12.22 a pl ot i s shown of the back-bombardment power of the
same 2X32 as a functi on of total sl ot conductance G, for a fi el d of 1200
gauss and a cur r ent of 12 amp. A cur ve of power Ps del i vered by the
el ectrons to the resonant system i s i ncl uded for compari son purposes.
I t wi l l be seen that the back-bombardment power nearl y doubl es as the
l oad i s decreased, whi l e over the same range, the output power i s decreas-
i ng by nearl y a factor of 2.
HEzEEfI 1$=
o 1 2 3 4xlo-3m o 1 2 3 4X1O-3
Conductancein mhos Conductancein mhos
FI G. 12.22.The dependence on l oad of (a) output power and (b) back-bombardment
power for B = 1200 gauss, 1 = 12 amp, and G~ = 0,11/QL.
The data presented i n Fi gs. 12.21 and 12.22 i ndi cate that the back-
bombardment power del i vered to the cathode of a 2J32 magnetron may
vary from 2 to 10 per cent of the i nput power over the known ranges of
operati on.
Consi derati on can now be gi ven to the useful ness of the Bartol
Research Foundati on data i n predi cti ng the behavi or of other mag-
netrons. I f the 2J32 magnetron sati sfi es the requi rements for exact
scal i ng expressed i n Sec. 10.6, the data can certai nl y be used to predi ct
,
the back-bombardment power of other tubes i n thi ~ fami l y. Further- 1
more, i n thi s case, the data shoul d scal e to magnetrons of di fferent N
at l east as wel l as the output power . Consi derati on of the structure of
the 2J32 i ndkates that i t shoul d scal e properl y, and performance charts
for the tube gi ven i n Chap. 10 do, i ndeed, fi t i nto the general scal i ng
I
scheme. I t has been shown i n Chap. 10, however , that a ri si ng-sun
magnetron does not real l y sati sfy the requi rements for exact scal i ng.
The coi nci dence that Eq. (18) predi cts the cri ti cal fi el d for a ri si ng-sun
I
I
528
tube and al so the fi el d of
THE CATHODE [SEC. 128
maxi mum back-bombardment shown i n Fi g.
12.21 rai ses a possi bl e suspi ci on that the 2J32 magnetron used her e
possesses i n a sl i ght degr ee some of the properti es of a ri si ng-sun mag-
netron. I f thi s i s true, the back-bombardment power mi ght be ver y
strongl y affected whi l e the output power and other properti es of the tube
are onl y negl i gi bl y i nfl uenced. The possi bi l i ty exi sts, ther efor e, that
the data presented may not be scal abl e to other magnetrons.
Other data have been taken, l ess extensi ve and rel i abl e than that
presented i n the Bartol r epor t. C. S. Robi nson, Jr.l has taken data on an
earl y model of the 2J32 that substanti al l y confi rms the Bartol data.
I n Fi g. 12.23, cathode-temperature characteri sti cs are gi ven fora 2J42
l ow-vol tage, 3-cm magnetron. Curves are gi ven showi ng cathode
temperature as a functi on of heater power for vari ous average i nput
powers. The data al ways r efer to the same operati ng poi nt because the
average i nput power has been changed by varyi ng the duty rati o. By
readi ng across at a constant temperature of 900C, the fol l owi ng tabl e
can be constructed. At thk operati ng poi nt, ther efor e, about 8 per
cent of the i nput power to a 2J42 magnetron i s del i vered to the cathode.
TABLE12.1.COMPUTATI ONAL TABLE
I I
Power suppl i ed by
Rati o at
I nput power, Heater power,
back bombardment,
back-bombardment
watts watts
watts
power to i nput
power, y.
53.2 0,93 4,22 7.9
27.2 2.91 2.24 8.3
13.6 4.06 1.10 8.1
0.0 5,15 0.00
12.8. Thermal Consi derati ons i n Cathode Desi gn.A cathode wi th a
l ength and di ameter of acti ve surface fi xed by other consi derati ons must
be constructed to ful fi l l the fol l owi ng condi ti ons:
1. Under stand-by condi ti ons wi th the magnetron i n a nonosci l l atory
state, a certai n rated heater power must mai ntai n the cathode
above a mi ni mum temperature that wi l l permi t osci l l ati ons to be
i ni ti ated when pl ate vol tage i s appl i ed at the requi red rate and
wi thout damage to the acti ve surface.
The temperature must
fur ther mor e be kept bel ow a maxi mum val ue set by consi derati ons
of l i fe.
I C, S. Robi nson, Jr., Cathode Temperatures i n hfagnetrons, RL Report No. 90,
I l l ar. 31, 1942.
SEC. 12.8] THERMAL CONSI DERATI ONS I N CATHODE DESI GN 529
2.
3.
4.
Wi th the magnetron osci l l ati ng and the cathode recei vi ng a
certai n back-bombardment power and wi th the rated heater power
r educed by a prescri bed amount, the cathode temperature must
be mai ntai ned i n a range ensuri ng pr oper operati on of the tube
and an adequate l i fe.
The rated heater power must not be gr eater than some l i mi t set
by operati onal requi rements.
For bari um-stronti um oxi de cathodes i t must be possi bl e to
di ssi pate suffi ci ent power i n the heati ng el ement to bri ng the
cathode to breakdown temperature.
The desi gn probl em presented by these requi rements i s so compl ex
and so di fferent for each case that no attempt wi l l be made to descri be
speci fi c methods of pr ocedur e. Certai n general features of the probl em
wi l l be consi dered, but ther e wi l l be no cl ose di scussi on of questi ons of
heat fl ow and radi ati on. Vari ous degr ees of cal cul ati on and experi ment
wi l l be appropri ate i n each case to arri ve at a sati sfactory desi gn. To
summari ze the exi sti ng art of cathode desi gn i md to ser ve as a poi nt of
departure i n desi gni ng new cathodes, data wi l l be presented on the
constructi on and thermal properti es of a number of cathodes that have
al ready been bui l t to meet a vari ety of operati ng condi ti ons.
An i ncreased understandi ng of the probl em of cathode desi gn can
be gai ned by consi deri ng a cl ass of cathodes for whi ch certai n general
rel ati ons can be deri ved. Thi s cl ass i ncl udes cathodes answeri ng the
fol l owi ng descri pti on:
1. Thei r heater constructi on i s such that the heater power and back-
bombardment power may be consi dered thermal l y equi val ent.
2. Heat i s l ost from the cathode al most enti rel y by radi ati on.
3. The whol e cathode structure i s at a nearl y uni form temperature.
Radi al -mounted cathodes that l ose onl y a smal l proporti on of heat
through thei r supporti ng l eads roughl y sati sfy thi s descri pti on.
Suppose that P~ i s the rated heater power correspondi ng to a mi ni -
mum tol erabl e temperature TI for starti ng and that 6PM i s the power
correspondi ng to a maxi mum tol erabl e temperature Tz duri ng operati on.
I t has al ready been shown i n Chap. 10 that PH must sati sfy the equati on
P,
H= DX
(19)
wher e x i s the fracti onal reducti on i n PH duri ng operati on. For the
cathodes under consi derati on,
P. = C(T: T:),
(20)
530 THE CATHODE [SEC. 12.8
and
BPtr=C(Tj T:),
(21)
wher e C i s some constant dependi ng on the cathode shape and To i s
the temperature of the surroundi ngs of the cathode and i s assumed to
remai n constant. From Eqs. (20) and (21)
(22)
Suppose, for exampl e, that safe temperature l i mi ts for a bari um stronti um
oxi de cathode are 750 and 950, I f TiI is comi dered negl i gi bl e com-
pared wi th Tl, Eq. (22) yi el ds, for thi s case, P = 2.1.
Wi th P~ determi ned from Eqs, (19) and (22) the desi gn probl em
for thi s cl ass of cathodes i s r educed to arrangi ng that the cathode struo-
tur e mai ntai n a temperature TI when PH watts are di ssi pated i n the
heater. For a radi al -mounted oathode wi th fi xed l ength and di ameter
of acti ve surface, thi s essenti al l y i nvol ves pr oper desi gn of the end
shi el ds.
I f the heater power requi red by Eqs. (19) and (22) i s mor e than a
radi al -mounted cathode wi th an acti ve surfaoe of the speoi fi ed di mensi ons
can be desi gned to di ssi pate at the temperature Tl, the use of an end-
mounted cathode i s i ndi cated. On the other hand, Eqs. (19) and (22)
may speci fy a heater power so smal l that the di ssi pati on of the cathode
structure oannot be suffi ci entl y r eduoed to enabl e the temperature
T, to be attai ned at Pn watts i n the heater. I n thi s case, i t i s cl ear that
the temperature range T1 to T2 may be decreased wi th a consequent
decr ease i n B and i ncrease i n PH.
The cathode data to be presented wi l l i ncl ude several exampl es of
radi al -mounted structures. I t wi l l not be possi bl e, however , to cor r el ate
these data wi th Eqs. (19) and (22) because i nsuffi ci ent i nformati on
exi sts on the temperatures T1 and TZ that have been consi dered
practi cabl e,
The cool i ng of tm end-mounted cathode or of a radi al -mounted cathode
wi th heavy supporti ng l eads i s a mi xture of radi ati ve and conducti ve
heat l oss, The constructi on of end-mounted cathodes, furthermore,
i s often such that the di stri buti on of heater power and back-bombard-
ment power are far from equi val ent. Consequentl y, ge~eral rel ati ons
such as Eqs. (19) and (22) cannot be establ i shed for end-mounted
cathodes, and the desi gn probl em i s mor e compl i cated.
A consi derabl e si mpl i fi cati on i s made i n the probl em i f the heater
power oan be decreased to zer o duri ng operati on (x = O). Then the
cathode structure can fi rst be desi gned to di ssi pate the back-bombard-
ment power P~ at the temperature TZ, and P~ can be separatel y arranged
so a$ to mai ntai n a cathode temperature TI i n the nonoperati ng tube.
SEC. 12.0] THERMAL CONSI DERA TI ON$ I N CA THO.9E DESI GN 531
Tube
Radi al mounts:
2J32
4J70
4J70
HP1oV
J3nd mounts:
2J42
BM50
QK61
4J50
3J21
I
A-131
Cathode
type
Pl ai n
oxi de
Metal l i zed
screen
Thori um
oxi de
hi de
scr een
M&tal l i zed
scr een
Oxi de
scr een
Oxi de
scr een
Oxi de
scr een
Oxi de
matri x
Oxi de
matri x
Tantal um
TMWX 12.2
Acti ve
area of
mthode,
cm2
3.77
7.36
7.36
18.84
0.52
0.36
0.12
1.12
1.07
., .,.
0.11
Stand-by
heater rat;!
vol ts
6,3
16
12.6
13.0
6.3
6.8
6.3
6.3
12.6
12,6
3.0
amp
1.5
3.1
25.5
8.5
1,0
3.0
0.30
3.5
2.2
1.6
50.0
watts
9.5
50.0
320.0
110.0
6.3
3,0
1,9
22.0
28.0
20,0
150.0
Maxi mum
i verage power
i nput,
watts
600
1200
1500
3000
180
83
0.19
350
700
110
=.A--=-4
500
.
1200F
1100
1>1
. &
.1%$
0
:~ 1000-
A
9C4
800
700
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Heater power in watta
12.23.Cathode temperature vs. heater power characteri ati os of the 2J42 for
vari ous val ues of average i nput power to the magnetron. The cur ves were obtai ned by
varyi ng the duty rati o at a constant operati ng poi nt of 5.5 kv, 4.5 amp, pul l i ng fi gure of
12 kl cl ~ec, and l oaded Q of 240.
532
THE CATHODE [SEC. 128
A structure arri ved at i n thi s way can furthermore ser ve as a starti ng
poi nt i n desi gni ng a cathode for whi ch x i s not to be equal to zer o. I f
the radi ati ve or conducti ve heat l oss of thi s fi rst approxi mati on i s suc-
cessi vel y i ncreased, both Pn and xPH must al so i ncrease.
The i ncrements
F
= Lavite insulator

i-!i
~ickel sleeve
Oxide layer
C,oiled.coil
tungsten heater
K
Nickel end shield
L Supportingstructure
FI G. 12.24.-Pl ai n oxi de cathode of the 2J32. (2 X.)
Nickel end shield
--Y
E
n
D
l
. J
~Nickel lead wire
~ !2manded end cathode
ZIPl_
Nickel sleeve
and screen
Weld

K
I
Fm. 12.25 .Metal l i zed scr een cathode of the 4J70. (2 X.)
i n XPH wi l l be gr eater than those i n PH, however , because T2 > T1.
Ther efor e, by suffi ci entl y i ncreasi ng the heat l oss, x can be brought to
the desi red val ue.
Fi gures 1224 through 1234 are 11 enl arged-scal e cross-secti on vi ews
of cathodes that have been used i n vari ous producti on and experi mental
SEC. 128J THERMAL CONSI DERATI ONS I N CATHODE DESI GN
533
magnetrons. Fi ve of these cathodes are radi al - and si x are end-mounted
desi gns. These tubes are l i sted i n Tabl e 12,2 wi th data on the type of
emi tti ng surface, the emi tti ng area, the stand-by heater rati ngs, and the
FI G. 12.26.Thori um oxi de cathode of the ~J70, (2 X.)
I
Nickel end shield
c!
L.--_l E3u
Lavite insulator
Nickel end shield 1
1
FI G. 12,27.Oxi descr eencathode of the HP1OV. (Actual si ze.)
I
I
.,
maxi mum average i nput power that the tube i s rated to accept at any
operati ng poi nt. Except for the 2J32, whi ch i s dk.cussed i n Sec. 12.7,
ther e i s i nsuffi ci ent i nformati on to transl ate thi s i nput power i nto terms
of back-bombardment power . Consequentl y these fi gures can be taken
.. - ____
534
THE CATHODE [SEC. 128
onl y as a rough i ndi cati on of the power-handl i ng capabi l i ti es of the vari ous
cathodes. For thr ee of the tubes, the average power enter ed i n the tabl e
i s underl i ned to i ndi cate that the tube has accepted that power success-
ful l y but that i t has not been determi ned to be a maxi mum val ue.
The characteri sti cs of most of the tubes l i sted i n Tabl e 12:2 are
di scussed i n Chap. 19. One excepti on i s the A-131, a 3-cm c-w magnetron
devel oped at RCA, 1 Thi s tube has oper ated wi th an i nput power of
I
>
%&p
2
Machined nickel steel
qjl-itednicke
$
~ Lavite insulator
{
Nickel eyelet
FI G. 122S.-Metal I i zed scr een cathode of the 725A. (4 X.)
\\ +,\\\\ ..
. ... .. . . ..
1~1.
FI G-. 12.29.Oxi de scr een cathode of the 2J42. (2~ X.)
500 watts at an effi ci ency of 40 per cent. Under these condi ti ons the
cathode was mai ntai ned at 2600K by reduci ng the heater power to
80 watts.
Two cathode structures are shown for the 4J70 magnetron. One
of these i s the conventi onal oxi de cathode used i n p reducti on tubes;
the second i s an experi mental thori um oxi de cathode devel oped at the
Bartol Research Foundati on. 2 Thi s cathode was devel oped to permi t
the use of hi gher i nput powers and l onger pul se durati ons wi th the 4J70
and represents an experi mental stage of devel opment.
] NDRC 15-RP430C, 1946.
i M. A. Pomerantz, Si ntered Thori a Cathodes, Bartol Research Foundati on of
the Frankl i n I nsti tute, NDRC 14-517, Oct. 31, 1945.
SEC. 128] THERMAL CONSI DERATI ONS I N CATHODE DESI GN 535
D
-1
1
.:
FI G. 12#0
ii
II
II
II
.Oxi de scr een cathode of
BM60. @ X.)
the FI G. 12.31 .-Oxi de scr een cathode
CM16B. (2 x.)
Of the
!
1,
I
536
THE CATHODE [SEC. 128
Nickel matrix cathode
Permendl i rend shields
Fm. 12,32 .Oxi de matri x cathode of the4J50. (2X
FI G.12.33 .Oxi de matri x cathode of the3J2l . (2x.)
FI G. 12.34 .-Tantcdum cathode of the Al 3l .
SEC. 12.9] CATHODE END SHI ELDS 537
Rather compl ete data are avai l abl e on the characteri sti cs of the 2J42
cathode. These data are presented i n Fi g. 12.23 as an exampl e of the
thermal behavi or of an end-mounted cathode.
ESTABLI SHMENT OF AN AXI AL BOUNDARY TO THE SPACE CHARGE
By A. Li . CLOI XTON
12.9. Cathode End Shi el ds.Cathode end shi el ds are short secti ons
of enl arged di ameter at the ends of a magnetron cathode. I i urnerous
exampl es of these structures may be seen by r efer r i ng to Fi gs. 12.24
through 12.34. The end shi el ds may be rel ati vel y cl ose to or far from
the top of the anode bl ock. The di ameter of the shi el ds may vary from
onl y sl i ghtl y gr eater than the cathode di ameter to even l arger than the
anode di ameter. The temperature of the end shi el ds may be equal to
the cathode temperature or may be someti mes so constructed as to
mai ntai n a temperature several hundred degr ees cool er than the cathode.
Mechani cal l y, the shi el ds may be an i ntegral part of the cathode sl eeve
or may someti mes be separatel y mounted from the cathode supports.
The potenti al of the end shi el ds, however , i s al ways kept the same as
that of the cathode. G
End shi el ds are a necessary part of a magnetron cathode, requi red
to pr event el ectr on l eakage from the i nteracti on space. I f the end
shi el ds are omi tted from the cathode, the vol t-ampere characteri sti c
at a fi xed fi el d wi l l be as shown by the
sol i d cur ve i n Fi g. 1235, whereas the
characteri sti c of a normal tube i s as
/
-- -
.---
shown by the dashed curve. I t has 1
been demonstrated that thi s cur r ent $ /
c
fl owi ng to the anode i n the absence of > i
end shi el ds i s col l ected al most enti rel y
on the end pl ates of the magnetron as
l ong as the appl i ed voltage is bel ow
Amperes
cutoff. For exampl e, currents up to 60
FI G. 12.35 .(n,i ) = characteri sti c of a
magnetron wi thout end shi el ds.
or 70 amp may thus fl ow out of the
i nteracti on space of a 4J70 magnetron bui l t wi thout end shi el ds. Under
these condi ti ons a magnetron cannot osci l l ate.
Ther e are two possi bl e expl anati ons of these l arge l eakage currents
that are not encounter ed i n ordi nary el ectr on tubes, and both are con-
nected wi th the pr esence of the magneti c fi el d. (1) A magnetron i s
usual l y oper ated at a vol tage several ti mes gr eater than woul d normal l y
be appl i ed to a si mi l ar nonmagneti c di ode. Consequentl y, the space-
charge densi ti es necessary to gi ve a zer o gradi ent of el ectri c fi el d at
the cathode are al so several ti mes l arger. The repul si ve for ce exer ted
on el ectrons near the ends of the i nteracti on space by thi s l arge space
.
538
THE CATHODE [SEC. 12.9
charge may ther efor e account i n part for the l arge l eakage currents.
(2) I f the magneti c fi el d near the ends of the cathode decreases i n a di rec-
ti onaway from thecenter pl ane of the anode bl ock, theel ectrons i n thi s
regi on wi l l feel an addi ti onal for ce di recti ng them out of the i nteracti on
space. Thi s effect can someti mes be counteracted by constructi ng the
end shi el ds of magneti c materi al i n such a way that the fi el ds i ncrease
away from the center pl ane. The4J50cathode i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 12.31
has Permendur end shi el ds for thi s purpose. A di scussi on of thi s effect .
wi l l be found i n Chap. 13.
Cathode end shi el ds pr event el ectr on l eakage from the i nteracti on
space by di storti ng the equi potenti al l i nes near the ends of the i nter-
acti on space i n such a way as to i nfl i ct an i nwardl y di r ected component
7
of for ce upon the el ectrons. Thi s component of for ce, bei ng essenti al l y
paral l el to the magneti c fi el d, si mpl y urges the el ectrons toward the center ~
pl ane of the anode bl ock,
The pr esence of the end shi el ds, unfortunatel y, i s not al ways fel t
sol el y through thei r el ectrostati c effects. Under certai n condi ti ons, the
shi el ds may emi t el ectrons that, ori gi nati ng cl oser to the anode than do
those emi tted from the cathode surface, respond di fferentl y to the el ectri c
fi el ds. Such el ectrons may contri bute to an obser ved l eakage current,
and they may someti mes act to i ncrease or decr ease the mode stabi l i ty
of a pul sed magnetron. A further di scussi on of thk matter i s to be found ,
i n Chap. 8 and i n a r epor t by P. Forsberg. 1
Under vari ous ci rcumstances, the el ectrons emi tted by an end shi el d
may be ei ther pri mary or secondary. Pri mary emi ssi on i s pr omoted by a :
hi gh end-shi el d temperature and by the accumul ati ~n of acti ve materi al
on the shi el d by evaporati on or surface di ffusi on. Secondary emi ssi on
apparentl y can ari se from bombardment of the shi el ds by the l ongi tudi nal
movement of el ectrons i n the i nteracti on space as al ready di scussed.
Evi dence for thi s effect wi l l be found i n the r epor t by Forsberg.
For al l practi cal purposes, the desi gn of end shi el ds i s compl etel y
empi ri cal , A good pr ocedur e for a new case woul d be to start wi th a
desi gn that resembl es i nechani cal l y and el ectrostati cal l y one of the
exampl es i n Sec. 12.8. I f behavi or of the magnetron i s then sati sfactory,
the end-shi el d desi gn can be consi dered adequate. On the other hand,
the tube may present l arge l eakage currents or poor mode behavi or.
I n or der to determi ne whether m not these effects are a matter of end-
shl el d desi gn, tests shoul d be made to di scover (1) i f cur r ent i s escapi ng
from the i nteracti on space and (2) i f el ectrons are bei ng emi tted from the
end shi el ds. Poi nt 1 may be tested di rectl y by i nserti ng i nsul ated end
pl ates or pol e pi eces i n the tube and measuri ng the cur r ent col l ected upon
1p Fors&r~, f(s~~e Rel ati ons between End Effects and Mode Stabi l i ty i n the
4J31-35 Magnetrons, RL Gr oup Repor t No. 52, Nov. 2, 1945,
SEC. 12.9] CATHODE END SHI ELDS
539
them. The poi nt may al so be studi ed by redesi gni ng the end shi el ds
to decr ease el ectr on l eakage from the i nteracti on space and then observi ng
the change i n tube behavi or. Thi s redesi gn shoul d i ncrease the di ameter
of the shi el ds or bri ng them cl oser to the top of the anode bl ock.
Poi nt 2 i s di ffi cul t to test di rectl y and can be best studi ed by maki ng
changes i n desi gn that tend to decr ease any end emi ssi on present. The
most effecti ve cour se i s to redesi gn the shi el ds so that they oper ate at a
l ower temperature. The end-shi el d temperature can be di rectl y obser ved
i f a wi ndow i s i ncorporated i nto the tube. I n maki ng thi s redesi gn, i t
must be remembered that the shi el ds may r ecei ve ener gy from el ectr on
bombardment as wel l as by conducti on and radi ati on from the cathode.
I f i mprovement i n the tube characteri sti cs resul ts from a decr ease i n
the end-shi el d temperature, i ndi cati ng that emi ssi on from the shi el ds i s
present and i mportant, further i mprovement i n behavi or may possi bl y
be obtai ned as f ol l ows: (1) by desi gni ng a trap to pr event surface di ffusi or,
of acti ve materi al to the shi el ds, (2) by constructi ng the shi el ds from or
coati ng them wi th a ver y poor emi tter, and (3) by decreasi ng the di am-
eter of the shi el ds so that any el ectrons whi ch are emi tted wi l l have a
l ess del eteri ous effect upon the operati on of the tube.
CHAPTER 13
THE MAGNETI C CI RCUI T
BY J. R. FELDMEI ER
The essenti al features of the magneti c ci rcui t for mi crowave mag-
netrons are (1) mi ni mum wei ght, parti cul arl y for ai rborne radar; (2)
constant magneti c fi el d under operati ng condi ti ons; and (3) a pr oper
fi el d shape for effi ci ent magnetron operati on. The most conveni ent
sour ce of magneti c fl ux sati sfyi ng (1) and (2) i s a permanent magnet,
for an el ectromagnet requi res a constant-current power suppl y. El ectr o-
magnets are, however , mor e conveni ent than permanent magnets for
testi ng experi mental tubes, as i t i s usual l y necessary to co~er a con-
si derabl e porti on of the performance chart by varyi ng the magneti c fi el d.
Thus both el ectromagnet and perm~nent-magnet desi gns are of concern.
The pri nci pl es of el ectromagnet desi gn are general l y understood and
cover ed i n most texts on el ectri ci tyy and magneti sm; the pri nci pl es of
desi gn of permanent magnets are l ess wel l known and so wi l l be r evi ewed
her e wi th speci al emphasi s on those features whi ch are i mportant i n the
desi gn of l i ghtwei ght permanent magnets for mi crowave magnetrons.
13.1. Desi gn of Permanent Magnets.-The general type of magneti c
ci rcui t used wi th mi crowave magnetrons i s showm i n Fi g. 13-1. The
fol l owi ng
ai r gap:
1, =
d, =
A. =
L =
A. =
symbol s are used to defi ne the geometr y of the magnet and
l ength of ai r gap,
di ameter of ai r gap,
area of ai r gap,
l ength of magnet,
area of magnet (neutral secti on).
To arri ve at a rel ati onshi p of these geometri cal vari abl es wi th the fl ux
densi ti es and fi el d strengths associ ated wi th the magnet and the ai r gap,
one appl i es the equati ons of conti nui ty and conservati on of ener gy to the
magneti c ci rcui t;
/
B dA = const., for any cross secti on of the ci rcui t, (1)
I See R. L, Sanford, Permanent Magnets, Eur. Standards Ci rc. C448, for a more
general di scussi on and for a bi bl i ography of the subject.
540
SW. 131] DESI GN OF PERM AI VENT MAGNETS
541
and
/
~ dz = O, for any cl osed path around the ci rcui t,
(2)
]vher e B is the fl ux densi ty and H is fi el d i ntensi ty or magneti zi ng for ce.
Equati ons (1) and (2) are di ffi -
cul t to i ntegrate because of the fl ux
l eakage al ong the ci rcui t and the
uncertai nty of the path of a gi ven
l i ne of for ce. For thi s reason i t i s
customary among magnet desi gners
to defi ne B~ and H~ as average val ues
i n the neutral secti on of the magnet
and BO and Hv as average val ues
wi thi n the geometri cal gap area.
f
Approxi mati ons to the i ntegral equa- magnet material
ti ons are then obtai ned by the use of
FI G. 13.1.General type of magneti c
l eakage factors defi ned as
cmcui t.
-- ...--,--- --
F, f
B.A. = BOAOF, (3)
HJ ~ = H,l,f. (4)
Combi ni ng Eqs. (3) and (4) gives A~l_ = (Fj/ B_Hm)B,HQA,l,. Usi ng
p as the densi ty of the magnet materi al , one obtai ns an equati on for
magnet wei ght.
fp B:AJ O, Wei ght of magnet = ~
mm
wher e H~ and B are consi dered numeri cal l y equal i n the
(.5)
gap.
L?(gauss)
-Peak flux denstty
--
I
Remanence.R, - I
Peak j
magnetl z[ng I
Coer ci ve for cef{<~ for ce
K;
#
1
1
I
H loersteds}
I
,
/
1
~j
/ ___ .
~--:----
FI G. 132.-Typi cal I I ysteresi s cycl e of magneti c materi al ,
Thk equati on shovs that the magnet wei ght i s proporti onal to the
l eakage factors and to the vol ume of the ai r gap. The wei ght i s al so
l east for the maxi mum val ue of the product B,,LH~, whi ch i s known as the
energy product because i t i s proporti onal To the ener gy per uni t
.. . ..
~ol orne of magneti c materi al al ~ai l abl e for mai ntai ni ng a magneti c fi el d
542 THE MAGNETI C CI RCUI T [SEC. 13.1
i n a gap. Questi ons such as how to maxi mi ze the ener gy product and
what val ues can be expected can be answered by studyi ng the hysteresi s
cycl e of the magneti c materi al .
A typi cal hysteresi s cycl e i s shown i n
Fi g. 13.2. The sol i d l i ne i n the fi rst quadrant i s the path fol l owed by the
magnet materi al when the magnet i s charged by appl yi ng the i ndi cated
peak magneti zi ng for ce and then reduci ng the magneti zi ng for ce to zer o.
For the present consi derati on the second quadrant of the cycl e, resul ti ng
from a demagneti zi ng for ce due to the i ntroducti on of an ai r gap, i s the
i mportant one because i t i s the regi on occupi ed by a worki ng magnet.
Thi s second quadrant contai ns the so-cal l ed demagneti zati on curve.
14,00012
Demagnetizingforce H in oereteds
Energy product BMHM-
FIG. 133.-Demagnetization and energy pr oduct cur ves of Al ni co al l oys. (From the
Arnold Engi neeri ng Cq. Bulletin, Pmmanent Magnets for I ndudr~, vand from the I ndiana
Steel Products Co., Permanent Magneta Manual No. 3.)
Such curves for several magnet materi al s are shown separatel y i n Fi g.
13.3, al ong wi th thei r correspondi ng (B~H~)-curves, The advantage of
Al ni co V from the poi nt of vi ew of wei ght conservati on i s patent, for i ts
ener gy product i s thr ee ti mes gr eater than the next best magnet materi al ,
Al ni co I I . I n or der to real i ze the maxi mum B~H_ val ue of Al ni co V of
4.5 X 10C,the magnet must be oper ated at the poi nt on the demagneti za-
ti on cur ve of 95oC gauss fl ux densi ty and 475 oersteds fi el d strength.
The poi nt on the deti agneti zati on cur ve at whi ch a magneti c ci rcui t wi l l
come to equi l i bri um upon the i ntroducti on of a gap may be expressed i n
terms of the angl e a shown i n Fi g. 13.3, whi ch resul ts from Eqs. (3) and (4).
. . tan-, ~*.
moa
(6)
SEC. 13.1] DESIGjV OF PEIL14.4NENT MAGNETS
543
Thus for a magneti c ci rcui t wi th an ai r gap (~ = 1) of gi ven di mensi ons
and for fi xed l eakage factors, the ri =o~ the area to the l ength of the
magnet materi al shoul d be adjusted for maxi mum B_H~. Fi gure 13.3
and Eq. (6) i ndi cate that i f the operati ng val ue of magneti c fl ux densi ty
i s bel ow 95OOgauss, the magnet must be decreased i n cross-secti onal area
and i ncreased i n l ength (for the same magnet wei ght) i n or der to i ncrease
the magnet effi ci ency. Roughl y, thi s adjustment i s an i ncrease i n the
magnetomoti ve for ce at constant rel uctance wi th a cor r espondhg i ncrease
1
0
/
3
10
15 20 25x106
Gap flux den6ity in gauss squared
FI G. 134.-Vari ati on of wei ght wi th the square of the gap fl ux densi ty for a gap l ength
of 0.312 i n. For magnet 1: I ?m = 7730 gauss; I fm = 525 oersteds; B~H~ = 4.1 x 106;
F = 28; andf = 1.8.
i n fl ux densi ty. Thi s bal anci ng of magneti c rel uctance and magneto-
moti ve for ce i s anal ogous to the case of a battery worki ng i nto a resi stance
that i s a nonl i near functi on of the cur r ent, 1
Al though Eq. (5) i s onl y an approxi mate sol uti on to the exact i ntegral
equati ons and the factors F, f, B~H~, and 1, are not i ndependent, the
equati on does afford a conveni ent means of scal i ng from one set of condi -
ti ons to another, parti cul arl y for smal l scal i ng factors, The equati on
predi cts that the magnet wei ght shoul d vary as B; when the other quan-
ti ti es are assumed constant. Thi s rel ati onshi p i s supported by experi -
1For a detai l ed di scussi on of the anal ogy between el ectri c and magneti c ci r -
cui ts, see E. E. Staff of Massachusetts I nsti tute of Technol ogy, Magneti c Ci rcui ts and
?r-an.s~omners, J;i l ey, New York, 1944.
544 THE MAGNETI C CI RCUI T [SEC. 131
ence. The vari ati on of 1?, wi th the gap l ength 1, for a gi ven form of
magnet materi al as predi cted by Eq. (5) i s not obtai ned i n actual practi ce
because F, j, and B~H~ are strongl y dependent on 1,. The data pl otted
1.0
i n Fi gs. 13.4 and 13.5 exempl i fy
these two cases; these data wer e
taken usi ng the i ron pol e ti ps
descri bed by Fi g. 13.6. These
0.5
curves are numbered to cor r espond
4 to (1) the 27-oz 2J42 magnet, (2)
z
.
the 12-oz 2J39 magnet, and (3) a
7.5-oz magnet si mi l ar i n contour to
02
the 2J39 magnet. The rel ati on-
%
shi p between lg and Bg i s deter -
mi ned by the l og pl ot of Fi g. 13.5.
0.1
1000 2000 5000 10,000
The sl opes of the l i nes for al l thr ee
LogBg
magnets are nearl y the same and
FI G. 13.5.Log pl ot of gap l ength
have a val ue of 1.06 rather than 2,
agai nst fl ux densi ty for three magnet
desi gns.
the val ue predi cted by Eq. (5).
The pl ot of wei ght agai nst B: i n
Fi g. 13.4 i s i n much better agreement wi th Eq. (5).
The useful ness of Eq. (5) i s l i mi ted by the di ffi cul ty of cal cul ati ng the
l eakage fact ors F and j. Methods for esti mati ng these factors have
FI G. 13.6.The 2J42 pol e ti p.
been devi sed, but none of them cl ai m any great accuracy; hence gr eater
rel i ance shoul d be pl aced on exper i ence obtai ned from si mi l ar ci rcui ts.
1 E. M. Underhi l l , Permanent Magnet Desi gn, Electronics, 16, 126 (1943);
Sanford, op. cd., p, 31; Staff, op. ant,,,p. 105.
I
SEC. 13.1] DESIGN OF PERMANENT MAGNETS
545
Fl ux l eakage can be r educed i f the fol l owi ng rul es are fol l owed:
1. The permanent magnet materi al shoul d be l ocated as near the gap
as possi bl e. Magnets 1 through 8 of Fi g. 13.7 demonstrate thi s
rul e; the magneti c materi al i s next to the ai r gap, and the i ron yoke
serves as a base.
2. The magnet materi al at al l poi nts shoul d be wor ked at the opti mum
fl ux densi ty B~H~. Thi s i s accompl i shed usual l y by i ncreasi ng the
cross secti on of the magneti c materi al as the dk.tance from the ai r
gap i s i ncreased.
3. I n arrangements si mi l ar to that shown i n Fi g. 13.1 (except for
the ends nearest the gap) the magneti c materi al shoul d be kept
separated as much as possi bl e to pr event l eakage across the
encl osed regi on.
4. The angl e of taper on i ron pol e ti ps shoul d be the maxi mum that i s
consi stent wi th saturati on of the i ron.
The l atter i s expl ai ned by r efer ence to Fi g. 13.8. For cyl i ndri cal pol e ti ps
as shown i n Fi g. 13.8a ther e wi l l be l ess fl ux l eakage across the space from
one cyl i ndri cal surface to the other than i n the case of the tapered ti ps
646
THE MAGNETIC CIRCUIT [SEC. 13.1
(truncated cones) shown i n Fi g. 138b. The fl ux l eakage resul ts i n an
i ncrease of total fl ux i n the i ron wi th di stance from the gap. Under the
condi ti on of constant cross-secti onal area the fl ux densi ty away from the
gap wi l l i ncrease and the permeabi l i ty decrease, 1resul ti ng i n an i ncrease
i n the rel uctance of the i ron. By taperi ng the i ron to i ncrease the cross-
secti onal area wi th di stance from the gap, the rel uctance can be mai n-
tai ned constant so that the i ron wi l l saturate uni forml y al ong i ts l ength.
Thi s i s done at the cost of i ncreasi ng the fl ux l eakage. I f, i n addi ti on,
the rel uctance of the i ron i s mai ntai ned negl i gi bl e compared wi th the
rel uctance of the gap, then the
appear across the gap.
maxi mum magnetomoti ve for ce wi l l
7
/
(a) (b)
FI Q. 13.8.Pl ots of magneti c fi el d.
I f the fi el d uni formi ty i n the gap i s to be determi ned by methods (see
Sec. 13.5) where the contour of the i ron i s taken to be an equi potenti al
surface, no parts of the i ron i n the nei ghborhood of the gap shoul d be
al l owed to saturate bel ow the worki ng gap fl ux densi ty. For thi s reason
i t i s necessary to r ound off al l cor ner s to prevent saturati on.
Fi gure 13.6
shows the resul t of appl yi ng these pri nci pl es to a pol e-ti p desi gn.
For a
0.312-i n. separati on of such ti ps no saturati on occur s bel ow 6000 gauss
gap fl ux densi ty. I n cases where i t i s not i mportant to know the exact
fi el d shape, the cor ner s on the ti ps need not be removed.
Rul es 1 to 4 are not al ways mutual l y consi stent, and a compromi se i s
usual l y necessary; the nature of the compromi se depends on the parti cul ar
appl i cati on.
] see Staff, op. a.f., p. 23, for the magneti c properti es of i ron.
SEC. 18.1] DESIQN OF PERMANENT MAGNETS 547
Fi gure 13.7 shows a vari ety of magnets that may ser ve as a basi s for
new desi gns; Tabl e 13.1 gi ves the wei ght, fi el d, md gap di mensi ons of
these magnets.
TABLE 13.1 .PERTI NENT DATA ON THE MAGNETS SHOWN I N FI G. 137
Magnet
No, *
1
2
s
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Wei ght
l b,
2.Xl
100
42
14%
13%
6%
13%
8
l %
%
4pproxi matc
B,, gauss
(stabi l i zed
570)
3000
2400
3400
2500
2500
1350
4800
4850
5000
3800
Gap
l ength
l,, i n.
2.70
2,75
1.50
1.40
1.30
1,50
0.69
0.63
0.28
0.28
)
Gap
di am. Remarks
do, in.
2.50 I ron base
2,00 I ron base
1.62 I ron base
1.62 I ron base
1,62 I ron base
1,62 I ron base
0.75 Ai ni co Cs bol ted together
wi th i ron spacer
0,75 Al ni oo Cs bol ted together
by ahrmi num base (no i ron)
Usi ng i r mr pol e pi eces (5 OZ)
+
descri bed i n Fi g. 13.6.
* Addi ti onal data on magnet wei ght and fl ux densi ty are gi ven i n Chap, 19,
~;
Physical Properties of Alnico V.One of the most i mportant physi cal
properti es of Al ni co V for magnet desi gn i s the di recti onal pr oper ty of
fl ux conducti vi ty. Thi s pr oper ty i s a resul t of the heat-treatment process
to whi ch Al ni co V i s subjected duri ng manufacture. I n the heat treat-
ment the magnet materi al i s cool ed i n the pr esence of a magneti c fi el d,
the di recti on of whi ch i s the same as the fi el d to be gener ated by the
worki ng magnet. The shape of the Al ni co V shoul d conform as cl osel y
as possi bl e to the magneti c fi el d i n whi ch i t i s processed, and the di ffi cul ty
of produc@g a processi ng fi el d of any desi red shape pl aces a l i mi tati on
on the possi bl e shapes of the magneti c materi al . The bar magnet i s the
easi est to heat-treat because the neoessary fi el d can be pr oduced between
fl at pol ee of an el ectromagnet. A C-shaped magnet l i ke that of the 2J39
i s not much mor e di ffi cul t to heat-treat because i t can be tr eated i n the
fri ngi ng fi el d of fl at pol e pi eces. I f one must devi ate from these si mpl e
shapes, car e shoul d be taken to arri ve at a shape consi stent wi th the fi el d
shapes that can be obtai ned for heat treatment. Neve~thel ess, magnets
of unusual shapes have been succes~ful l y made by l ocati ng ferromagneti c
materi al i n such a way as to di stort a normal l y uni form fi el d or a fri ngi ng
fi el d i nto the desi red form.
I n addi ti on to the al i gnment of the magneti c fi el d duri ng heat treat-
ment, a rapi d quench i s i mportant. For thi s reason the vol ume of a
548 TI I E MAGNETI C CI RCUI T [S%c. 132
si ngl e pi ece of Al ni co V must not be too great. To obtai n a rapi d quench
for ver y l arge magnets i t may be advantageous to make the magnet i n
several secti ons ~vhi ch fi nal l y are combi ned and hel d together wi th i ron
yokes to form a compl eted ci rcui t.
Al ni co V must be cast, andi n thi s form i t i s coarse-grai ned, bri ttl e,
extr emel y hard, and nonforgeabl e. Because hol es cannot be dri l l ed
economi cal l y, mounti ng hol es are cor ed i n the casti ng. Soft-i ron i nserts
are cast i nto the magnet duri ng the pouri ng process and l ater dri l l ed and
tapped; but because of the l arge shri nkage duri ng cool i ng (2.6 per cent),
thi s i s successful onl y when the di mensi ons of the Al ni co are l arge com-
pared wi th the hol e.
Fl at surfaces can be ground to cl ose tol erances, but cast tol erances are
usual l y set by the magnet manufacturers at not l ess than f 0.015 i n.
Ar c wel di ng of Al ni co wi th stai nl ess steel or phosphor bronze rods i s onl y
parti al l y successful ; soft sol deri ng can be done i f the surfaces are care-
ful l y prepared wi th an aci d. The magneti c properti es of Al ni co V are
i mpai red i f i t i s rai sed to a temperature over 1100F after the heat
treatment.
Tabl e 132 gi ves some addi ti onal properti es of Al ni co V useful for
desi gn purposes.
TABLE 13.2,PROPERTI ES OF ALNI CO V*
Speci fi c gravi ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
El ectri cal resi stance at 25C. 47 X 10- fl cm/cmg
Tensi l e strength ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54501 b/i n.Z
Transverse modul us of rupture. 10,200 l b/i n.j
Hardness, Rockwel l C . . . . . . . . . . . 4s55
Coeffi ci ent of thermal expansi on. . . . . 11.3 X 10-/C
* Courtesy of E. M. Underhi l l .
13.2. Magnet Chargi ng.The magnet materi al i s magneti zed by
taki ng i t through the fi rst quadrant of i ts hysteresi s cycl e as di scussed
i n Sec. 13.1. I n or der to reach the maxi mum val ue of magneti c fl ux
densi ty, ever y part of the Al ni co V must be magneti zed to the poi nt of
practi cal saturati on, and for thi s a magneti zi ng fi el d of about 3000
oersteds appl i ed to the Al ni co i n the di recti on of the worki ng fi el d i s
necessary. I f the magneti c materi al i s pr oper l y heat-treated-and the
above val ue of fi el d strength i s appl i ed to the Al ni co V, a remanence
val ue of magneti c fl ux densi ty of 12,600 gauss shoul d be real i zed as shown
i n Fi g. 13.3.
An el ectromagnet that can suppl y the requi red fi el d provi des a con-
veni ent means of chargi ng bar magnets, as they requi re onl y strai ght
fi el ds. Magnetron magnets, however , are usual l y of such contour that
I E. M. Underhi l l , i l fechani cal Probl ems of Permanent kfagnct Desi gn, Elec-
~ronics, 17, 126 (1944).
SEC. 13.2] MAGNET CHARGI NG 549
i t i s si mpl er to charge them by surroundi ng the materi al wi th one or mor e
sol enoi ds. I n thi s arrangement soft-i ron bars arepl aced across the ends
of the magneti c materi al so that a cl osed magneti c ci rcui t resul ts.
The
sol enoi d may be exci ted by connecti ng i t across a d-c sour ce wi th hi gh
cur r ent capaci ty, but a better method i s to empl oy a hi gh-current
i mpul se. Condenser di scharge and hal f-cycl e i mpul se chargers have
been empl oyed. Atypi cal ci rcui t for thecondenser di scharge method i s
shown i n Fi g. 13.9. The storage condenser consi sts of a bank of 100
40-pf dr y el ectrol yti c condensers connected i n paral l el by heavy l eads.
The condensers, whi ch have a rati ng of 500 worki ng vol ts, are charged
to 400 vol ts by a smal l 200-ma d-c power suppl y and di scharged through
DC
FI G. 13.9.Ci rcui t of condenser-dkcharge method for chargi ng magnets.
an i gni tron (GL415) i n seri es wi th the magneti zi ng coi l s. Peak currents
o~1000 amp can be obtai ned i n thi s way. Care must be exer ci sed when a
condenser di scharge i s used for chargi ng to pr event osci l l ati ons i n the
ci rcui t and the resul ti ng r ever sed magneti c fi el ds. I n thi s ci rcui t the
i gni tron serves thi s purpose.
The magneti zi ng coi l must be constructed so that for the pul se cur r ent
obtai nabl e a fi el d of 3000 oerstedsi n ai r i s produced. I f the l ength of the
coi l i s short compared wi th the magnet l ength, the coi l shoul d be moved
al ong the magnet to appl y the maxi mum magneti zi ng fi el d to each por -
ti on of the Al ni co V. Care shoul d be taken not to cross-magneti ze the
magneti c materi al .
I f the magnetron i s the packaged type, that i s, wi th the magnet
permanentl y attached to the tube, the magnet can be charged separatel y,
stor ed wi th an i ron keeper , and then sl i d onto the magnetron so that
See H. W. Lord, A Hal f-cycl e Magneti zer wi th Thyraton Control , Gem. E~ec.
Reu., 40, 418 (1937).
550 THE MAGNETI C CI RC[rI T
[SEC. 133
the magnet i s never made to oper ate i nto a gap gr eater than the worki ng
gap.
13.3. Magneti c Stabi l i zati on.-I nspecti on of a performance chart
shows that the characteri sti cs of a magnetron are such that constancy of
magneti c fi el d i s extr emel y i mportant i f constant power i nput, power
output, and magnetron frequency are to be mai ntai ned. Thi s secti on
wi l l dkcuss qual i tati vel y the phenomena of magnet stabi l i ty and gi ve
some quanti tati ve i nformati on on the effect of vari ous demagneti zi ng
forces.
Stability against Change in Air Gap or agaksi! ~iTCLY Demagnetizing
Fi el ds. -Fi gure 13.3 i s useful i n obtai ni ng a qual i tati ve understandi ng of
Bg
Hm
FI G. 13.10.Vari ati on of gap fl ux densi ty
wi th demagneti zi ng for ce.
magnet stabi l i ty. I t i s prefer~bl e
for thi s purpose, however , to pl ot
the fl ux densi ty i n the ai r gap B,
al ong the verti cal axi s i nstead of
the fl ux densi ty i n the magnet B~,
because B, is the vari abl e of di rect
concern. Accordi ng to Eq. (3),
thi s amounts to mul ti pl yi ng the
verti cal axi s of Fi g. 13.3 by the
factor A~/A,F. Referri ng now to
Fi g. 13.10, a i s the poi nt at whi ch
a gapl ess magneti c ci rcui t wi l l
come to equi l i bri um after the
chargi ng fi el d i s appl i ed and then
r educed to zer o. I f the keeper i s
r emoved, i ntroduci ng an ai r gap
of l ength 1~,the ci rcui t wi l l ba i n
equi l i bri um at poi nt b, wher e b i s defi ned accordi ng to Eq. (4), and may
be expressed i n terms of the angl e P thus:
(7)
The fl ux densi ty B, correspondi ng to the poi nt b has become known as the
saturati on val ue of fl ux densi ty. I f a further demagneti zi ng for ce
Hz Ho is appl i ed and then r emoved, the ci rcui t wi l l fi rst fol l ow the
major hysteresi s cur ve b to c and then the mi nor hysteresi s l oop c to d.
The resul t of the demagneti zi ng for ce i s a decr ease i n magneti c fl ux
densi ty of Bo B1. I f the same demagneti zi ng for ce i s appl i ed and
r emoved a second ti me, the magnet wi l l fol l ow ver y cl osel y the same
mi nor hysteresi s l oop and return to the poi nt d wi th a negl i gi bl y smal l
change i n B. Hence BI has become known as the stabi l i zed val ue of
fl ux densi ty, stabi l i zed for a demagneti zi ng for ce smal l er than Hz H,.
,
SEC. 13.3] MAGNETI C STABI LI ZATI ON 551
The previ ous di scussi on i s val i d for demagneti zati on effects due to the
i ntroducti on of ai r gaps i nto the magneti c ci rcui t or to the pr esence of
nei ghbori ng a-c or d-c magneti c fi el ds. Quanti tati vel y the resi stance of
magneti c materi al s to these demagneti zi ng for ces i s a functi on of the
coer ci ve for ce of the materi al . As seen i n Fi g. 13.3, Al ni co I V i s better
than Al ni co V i n thk respect. [A
r ecentl y r epor ted new Al ni co, Al ni co
I X, has an even hi gher coer ci ve for ce
(approxi matel y 950 oersteds), but
l i ke Al ni co I V i ts ener gy product i s
1ow-1.8 X 106.] Fi gure 13.11 shows
the effect of stray demagneti zi ng
fi el ds on Al ni co V compared wi th
tungsten- and cobal t-al l oy steel s.
The coer ci ve for ces for the tungsten
fm
o 203 400 w Sw 1000 1200
F
Alternatingfield(ampturnsperinch)
FI G. 13.11.Resistance of magnetic
materials to stray demagnetizing fi el ds.
(From the Arnold Engi neeri ng c o.
Bulletin Permanent Magnet. for
I ndustr~. )
and cobal t steel s are 65 and 230 oersteds, respecti vel y. I t has been
arbi trari l y establ i shed that for magnetron magnets, the operati ng fl ux
densi ty Bl (see Fi g, 13-10) i s set from 3 to 5 per cent bel ow the saturati on
val ue BO. Thi s control l ed demagneti zati on i s most conveni entl y accom-
pl i shed by subjecti ng the Al ni co to an a-c magneti c fi el d. For magnetron
magnets separate from the tubes, thi s can be done by al ternatel y appl y-
i ng an a-c fi el d and measuri ng the resul tant fl ux densi ty (see Sec. 10.5).
I t i s al so customary to keeper stabi l i ze the magnet. Thi s i s done by
i nserti ng and removi ng the magnet keeper thr ee or four ti mes. On the
BH cur ve of Fi g. 13.10 thi s amounts to runni ng up and down the mi nor
hysteresi s l oop c-d, reduci ng the effects of the actual nonl i neari ty and
nonreversi bi l i ty of the path c-d.
Temperature Stability .The effect of temperature changes on the
u 100
t
.-
2
m
Alnico
Cobalt
-Y
36%
i.: 50 steel
~ ,&
Tungsten
z
&
steel
go
o 500 1000 1500
Temp. IDegF)
FI G. 13.12.Resistance cf mag-
netic materials to temperature
changes. (From the Arnold En-
gineering Co. Butietin Pemnanent
A4aOnetsfor I ndustry. )
magneti c properti es of Al ni co V i s of a
di fferent nature from the effects di s-
cussed previ ousl y. Thi s effect from
180 to + 500C i s reversi bl e, so that
any temperature cycl e between these
val ues resul ts i n no permanent change
i n fi el d strength. A typi cal val ue for
thk change i s 0.25 per cent i n fi el d per
degr ee centi grade. Thi s change i n mag-
neti c fi el d wi th temperature produces a
change i n magnetron cur r ent that de-
pends on the dynami c i mpedance and
rate of change of vol tage wi th magneti c fi el d of the parti cul ar magnetron.
Fi gure 13.12 shows the behavi or of Al ni co over a wi de range of temper-
ature, al ong wi th a compari son of Al ni co wi th some al l oy steel s.
552
~fl ~ .J fA(7.iETI C CI RCUI T [SEC. 134
Effects of Neighboring Ferromagnetic Materi al . Nei ghbori ng fer r o-
magneti c materi al has ti vo effects on a magneti c ci rcui t.
The fi rst i s
shunti ng of magneti c fl ux by the materi al , whi ch has the same effect on
the fl ux densi ty i n the magnet as a decr ease of gap l ength; and hence, i f
the magnet has been stabi l i zed to a great enough degr ee, no resi dual
change i n fi el d strength remai ns after the materi al i s r emoved.
The
second effect i s a rearrangement of the magneti c di pol es i n the magneti c
materi al . Thi s does l eave a permanent effect unl ess the magnet i s
recharged. The magni tude of degaussi ng, pr oduced by the proxi mi ty
of ferromagneti c materi al , depends upon many factors, such as the si ze
of the magnet and ferromagneti c object and the l ocati on of the poi nt at
whi ch contact i s made. An i dea of the or der of magni tude of thi s effect
can be had from the fact that magnet 5 i n Fi g. 137 i s degaussed by 5 per
cent from the saturati on val ue i f an i ron bar ~ i n. i n di ameter and 6 i n. i n
l ength i i touched di rectl y on the
= ni covnearamagnetpoe hi s
degaussmg effect drops off rapi dl y
wi th di stance of approach of the i ron
o
1000 bar, so that the degaussi ng i s onl y
Number of impacts
0.8 Der cent i f the bar i s brought
FI G. 13.13.Resi stance of magneti c .
materi al s to vi brati on efTects. (From
wi thi n ~~ i n. of the same spot as
the Arnold Engineering Co. Bulletin, 6Per-
above. For thk reason magnetron
manent Magnets for I ndustrg. 7)
magnets are al ways cover ed wi th a
protecti ng materi al to pr event di rect contact wi th magneti c materi al ,
parti cul arl y i n the nei ghborhood of the magnet pol es.
Vibration Efl ects.-Even though the effect of vi brati on on Al ni co V
does not appear i mportant for any practi cal condi ti ons associ ated wi th
magnetron magnets, data are presented i n Fi g. 1313 showi ng the resi st-
ance of Al ni co and some al l oy steel s to vi brati on.
13.4. Fi el d Uni formi ty-The effi ci ency of a magnetron depends upon
the magneti c-fi el d uni formi ty wi thi n the i nteracti on space. Except at
the ver y ends of the i nteracti on space (see Sec. 12.11), a uni form fi el d i s
desi rabl e.
The need fol uni formi ty ari ses from the l arge changes i n cur r ent that
resul t from smal l changes i n magneti c fi el ds. The performance chart of a
typi cal magnetron i s shown i n Fi g. 19.44, and from thi s i t may be seen
that a change i n fi el d from 5100 to 5330 gauss resul ts i n a 2 to 1 change i n
current. Thus, a vari ati on of thi s amount i n magneti c fi el d al ong the
hei ght of the anode wi l l resul t i n operati on over the l ow-fi el d regi ons at
tl vi ce the cur r ent densi ty of the hi gh-fi el d regi ons. Damage to the
cathode at these l ow-fi el d hi gh-current poi nts has frequentl y been
observed. Axi al uni formi ty to better than 5 per cent i s a safe rul e to
fol l ow.
SEC. 13.5] TESTI NG AND MEASUfZEMENTS
553
For magnetrons havi ng separate magnets wi th fl at pol e pi eces, thi s
condi ti on i s sati sfi ed i f the gap l ength i s equal to or l ess than the gap
di ameter, provi ded the anode di ameter of the magnetron i s l ess than hal f
the gap di ameter. When tubes have attached magnets, often the pol e
ti ps have hol es i n them to admi t the cathode structure. Up to a certai n
rati o of hol e di ameter to anode di ameter, the hol es tend to i ncrease the
fi el d uni formi ty i n the center of the regi on between the ti ps. Ver y l arge
hol es must be dri l l ed i n magnetrons wi th a l arge number of resonators, as
the rati o of cathode to anode di ameters becomes l arge, and undesi rabl e
fi el d confi gurati ons are l i kel y to occur . Wi th 16 or mor e resonators i t
has been found that thi s hol e becomes so l arge and the magneti c fi el d so
di storted that ver y l ow effi ci enci es resul t. To cor r ect thi s, magneti c
materi al i s attached to the cathode structure, thereby effecti ng a concen-
trati on of fl ux toward the axi s of the magnetron near the ends of the
anode, and approxi mati ng the desi red form as di scussed i n Sec. 12.11.
The materi al attached to the cathode structure must not saturate bel ow
the worki ng fl ux densi ty, and, furthermore, the Curi e poi nt of the mate-
ri al must be above the cathode temperature. The magneti c materi al
Permendur (50 per cent Fe, 50 per cent Co) meets these requi rements
sati sfactori l y. Thi s materi al was used i n the 4J52 (see Chap. 19), wher e
i t repl aces the usual ni ckel el ectrostati c shi el ds to pr event el ectr on l eakage
at the anode ends. I n addi ti on to produci ng the desi red fi el d shape, i t
al so reduces the effecti ve gap between the pol es.
13.6. Testi ng and Measurements.The testi ng of permanent magnet
materi al s to determi ne the shape of the hysteresi s cycl e 1 as wel l as
methods for determi ni ng fl ux densi ty
2,3in the gap or neutral secti on Of a
fi ni shed magnet are wel l standardi zed and wi l l not be di scussed here.
I t shoul d be emphasi zed, however, that the fi el ds i n the gaps of magnetron
magnets are rarel y uni form, and hence the measurement of the average
fl ux densi ty i n one of these gaps depends l argel y upon the si ze and shape
of the test coi l empl oyed. For thi s reason the Si gnal Corps and Bureau
of Shi ps have establ i shed a set of standard test coi l s for measuri ng the
average fl ux densi ty over a vol ume correspondi ng to that of the i nter-
acti on space. 4 The expressi on fl ux densi ty as used i n thi s chapter
means the average fl ux densi ty over the area occupi ed by the appropri ate
test coi l .
1,R. L, Sanford, Magneti c Testi ng, Bur. Standards Ci rc. C415, 1937.
z F. A. Laws, El ectri cal Measurements, McGraw-Hi l l , New York, 1938.
~Attenti on i s drawn to a novel fl uxmeter devel oped by the Mari on El ectri cal
I nstrument Co., hfanchester, N. H., whi ch i s extremel y useful for maki ng qui ck
checks on fl ux densi ty. Reo. Sci. I nstrwrwzts, 17, 41 (1946).
The detai l s of the standard ZOO coi l sui tabl e for gaps and magneti c fi el ds
encountered i n 3-cm magnetrons may be obtai ned by wri ti ng to the U.S. Bureau of
Standards.
554 THE MAGNETI C CI RCUI T [SEC. 13.5
Field Shape.The shape of the magneti c fi el d i n the i nteracti on space
i s of consi derabl e i mportance, and i t i s often necessary to determi ne the
fi el d shape for a new tube desi gn. I f the vol ume of the ai r gap i s l arge
compared wi th the vol ume of the fi el d-measuri ng devi ce, the fi el d pattern
can be obtai ned by di rect measurement of the fi el d i ntensi ty at several
poi nts over the gap. For the ai r gaps associ ated wi th magnetrons at
Eq
e
FI G.. 13.14 .Two-rl i menai onal
fi el d pl ot.
5-cm wavel engths or l onger, fi el d pl ots can
be made wi th a magnetometer devel oped by
the General El ectri c Research Laboratori es
havi ng a sensi ti ve el ement onl y ~ i n. l ong
and ~ i n. i n di ameter.
Equi potenti al pl ots of the el ectrostati c
fi el ds between model pol e ti ps i mmersed i n
water gi ve the shape of the magneti c fi el d
di rectl y i f thr ee di mensi onal model s are used. 1
A geometri cal method of obtai ni ng fl ux
pl ots sati sfyi ng Lapl aces equati on has been
devel oped by Grout.a Thi s method i s useful i n a wi de vari ety of appl i ca-
ti ons and wi l l be consi dered i n detai l ,
For si mpl i ci ty the method wi l l be descri bed by consi deri ng the case
of a stati c two-di mensi onal magneti c fi el d. Suppose a number of l i nes
of for ce and equi potenti al s be drawn as i n Fi g. 13.14 and the tubes of fl ux
and the stri ps bet ween adj scent equi potenti al s be numbered accordi ng
to the fol l owi ng defi ni ti ons:
u=
v=
Au1, Au2, - =
Avl , Av2, . =
R,i =
E,] =
1 V. K. Zworki n and
L. M. Myers, Mectr on Optics, Van Nostrand, New York, 1939, p. 129; A. Kol i nj
Mer cur y Jet Magnetometer, Rev. S.i. I ndrumenfu, 16, 209 (1945).
a Prescott D. Crout, The Determi nati onof Fi el ds Sati sfyi ngLapl aces, Poi seons,
and Associ atedEquati ons by Fl ux Pl otti ng, RL Report No. 1047, Jan. 23, 1946.
potenti al at any poi nt,
fl ux between a r efer ence l i ne of for ce and that poi nt,
potenti al di fference across the vari ous stri ps formed
by the equi potenti al l i nes,
curvi l i near rectangl e compri si ng the regi on com-
mon to the i th stri p and Jth tube of fl ux,
fl uxes i n the fl ux tubes of uni t depths seen as
I Q from above,
rel uctance of the vol ume of uni t depth seen as
)~1 from above,
ener gy i n the vol ume of uni t depth seen as ~
from above,
permeabi l i ty of the medi um contai ni ng the fi el d
(assumed constant throughout the fi el d).
G. A. Morton, Television. Wi l ev. New York. 1940. D. 73:
SI I C. 13.5] TESTING AND MEASUREMENTS 555
and
~,. = Au,Avi
u
8r
(9)
Now i f the Aws are al l equal and i f the Au,s are al l equal , the curvi l i near
rectangl es wi l l al l be si mi l ar and have the same rel uctance and contai n
the same fi el d ener gy. Furthermore, the
m.
fi el d wi l l consi st of curvi l i near squares i f
the spaci ngs of the l i nes are such that
p(AtL/Av) = 1. Ther efor e, a map of the
+
K~~
fi el d can be obtai ned by sketchi ng i n a
O*
,+
networ k of curvi l i near squares by tri al and
er r or . The accuracy of the pl ot may be
.K ~
e
i mproved i n any regi on by further sub-
FI G.13.15.Rel a,ti onbetween
di vi di ng the i ni ti al squares. When the fi el d gradi entsand parti al deri vati ves
i s known to have defi ni te symmetry, thi s
of u and V.
fact shoul d be used to r educe the si ze of the requi red map.
To pr ove that the square fl ux pl ot i s a possi bl e fi el d, one resorts to
the defi ni ti on of a gradi ent to obtai n
Au
Wi j
and to Eq. (8) to show that
IFUI-!=K=
Ivvl P
const. for al l poi nts.
(l o)
(11)
Hence the gradi ents and the parti al deri vati ves of u and v are rel ated as
i n Fi g. 13.15, from whi ch i t fol l ows that
au .Kgl
Tx i )y
and
au _K~
.
ay ax
(12)
(13)
By di fferenti ati ng Eq. (12) wi th r espect to z and Eq. (13) wi th r espect
to y and addi ng, one obtai ns Lapl aces equati on:
(14)
556
and si mi l arl y,
By
of an
THE MAGNETI C CI RCUI T
$2+$=0.
[SEC. 13.5
(15)
si mi l ar arguments one can arri ve at the condi ti ons for the case
axi al l y-symmetri cal three-di mensi onal fi el d, whi ch i s the case
-1
Line of symmetry
between two like
pole tips
FI Q. 13. 16.Fl ux pl ot of magnetron pol e ti p.
usual l y met i n magnetron-magnet desi gn. Usi ng the same notati on as
befor e but rotati ng ~1 through an angul ar depth of 1 radi an to form the
el ement of vol ume rather than taki ng a l i near depth of 1 cm, one can say
(16)
and
~,, = Aui Avi
V
8X
(17)
SEC. 135] TESTI NG AND MEASUREMENTS 557
wher e ri j i s the radi us of the center of ~. Rather than a networ k of
curvi l i near squares, the pl ot must be constructed to meet the condi ti on
wher e
1,1

= Kr~j,
Wij
K ~Aui
Avi
const. (18)
Fi gure 13.16 shows the resul t of the appl i cati on of thi s method to the
probl em of magnetron pol e-ti p desi gn.
I n addi ti on to bei ng a qui ck method for obtai ni ng a pl ot of any
desi red accuracy, thi s has the advantages of bei ag appl i cabl e to pecul i ar
boundary condi ti ons, of gi vi ng a compl ete pi cture of the fi el d, and of
conveyi ng an i dea of the rel ati ve i mportance of the vari ous factors that
determi ne the fi el d.
1For appl i cati on of the method to several addi ti onal cases, see the ori gi nal r epor t
by Crout.
I
~,
I
. .- -.
PART I V
I
TUNI NG AND STABI LI ZATI ON
One of the most i nconveni ent features of mi crowave magnetrons i s the
di ffi cul ty of maki ng them tunabl e.
Because the resonant ci rcui ts are
wi thi n the vacuum envel ope, they are rather i naccessi bl e, and changi ng
ei ther thei r capaci tance or i nductance presents a mechani cal probl em of
some i ntri cacy. The probl em i s compl i cated further by the general l i mi -
tati ons on space and the requi rement that the tuni ng mechani sm l eave the
normal resonances rel ati vel y undi sturbed.
Consi derabl e effor t was expended i n maki ng magnetrons tunabl e, as
thi s feature adds greatl y to thei r useful ness. Not onl y does tunabi l i ty
permi t a si ngl e magnetron to oper ate on a number of frequenci es, but
al so i t i s essenti al i f operati on at a preci se frequency i s requi red.
Two di sti nct ki nds of tuni ng exi st. I n one, the vari ati on i n frequency
i s accompl i shed by mechani cal means. Her e the rate at whi ch tuni ng
can be accompl i shed i s S1OW, but the range of tuni ng i s l arge. Thi s topi c
i s the subject of Chap. 14. The second ki nd i s the so-cal l ed el ectroni c
tuni ng, i n whi ch the frequency i s vari ed by i njecti ng a beam of el ectrons
i nto a regi on contai ni ng r-f fi el ds. El ectroni c tuni ng (Chap. 15) provi des
onl y a smal l tuni ng range, but the rate of tuni ng can be ver y rapi d. I t
i s thus wel l sui ted to appl i cati ons requi ri ng frequency modul ati on.
Stabi l i zati on of frequency i s cl osel y rel ati ve to the probl em of tuni ng,
and for thi s reason i t i s i ncl uded i n thi s part of the book. Both tuni ng
and stabi l i zati on are aspects of the probl em of control of frequency and
must be consi dered together because hi gh stabi l i zati on and l arge tuni ng
range are i ncompati bl e. The questi on of stabi l i zati on al so ari ses i n
other chapters. I t appears i n Chap. 6, I nteracti ons of the El ectrons
and the El ectromagneti c Fi el ds, because the frequency of osci l l ati on i s
affected by space-charge condi ti ons; i t appears i n Chap. 8, Transi ent
Behavi or, because stabi l i zati on affects mode changi ng; and i t appears
i n Chap. 10 Desi gn, because the desi gn of a magnetron i s i nfl uenced
by the degr ee of stabi l i zati on requi red.
CHAPTER 14
MECHANI CAL TUNI NG
I
BY W. V. SMI TH
14.1. General Consi derati ons.A mechani cal l y tunabl e magnetron
i s one whose resonant frequency i s changed by movi ng some el ement i n
1
the resonant ci rcui t associ ated wi th the magnetron. I n general , the
moti on must take pl ace i n vacuum, al though i n l ow-power magnetrons
the movi ng parts may be i n ai r, separated by a di el ectri c vacuum seal
(usual l y gl ass) from the hi gh-vacuum porti on of the tube. A tuni ng
method i s cl assed as mechani cal whenever the frequency change i s the
resul t of a moti onwhether the pri mary dri vi ng for ce i s mechani cal ,
thermal , magneti c, or any other . The term el ectroni c tuni ng (Chap.
15) i s r eser ved for frequency changes resul ti ng from the i njecti on of el ec-
trons i nto the resonant system.
\
From a consi derati on of ci rcui ts, two cl asses of tuni ng may be di s-
ti ngui shed: symmetri cal and unsymmetri cal . I n symmetri cal tuni ng,
I
the ci rcui t el ements are changed i n a manner that pr eser ves the angul ar
symmetry of the operati ng mode whi ch, unl ess otherwi se speci fi ed, wi l l
be taken as the ~-mode. I n unsymmetri cal tuni ng, thi s angul ar sym-
metry i s not pr eser ved; as a rul e, onl y one si de resonator i s tuned, gen-
eral l y by means of a coupl ed ci rcui t. The l ack of symmetry resul ts i n
al terati on of the r-f mode patterns over the tuni ng range (Sec. 4.5) wi th
consequent l oweri ng of el ectroni c effi ci ency at wavel engths r emoved
from the unperturbed tube wavel ength. Symmetri cal tuni ng avoi ds
thi s di ffi cul ty, often, however , by the l oss of other advantages.
I
The thr ee mai n subdi vi si ons of symmetri cal tuni ng are i nducti ve
tuni ng, capaci ti ve tuni ng, and tuni ng by a coupl ed ci rcui t. I n i nducti ve
tuni ng, the i nductance of the resonant ci rcui t i s vari ed by changi ng the
surface-twvol ume rati o i n a hi gh-current regi on of the osci l l ator (see
El ement A i n Fi g. 141). The unl oaded Q i s al so changedan i mportant
consi derati on at short wavel engths. I n capaci ti ve tuni ng, the capaci -
tance of a gap i s changed. Because thi s capaci tance (see El ement B i n
Fi g. 14.1) i s connected across adjacent, opposi tel y charged vanes, the
vol tage across the gap remai ns constant whereas the breakdown vol tage
vari es wi th the gap wi dth. Thi s consi derati on i s i mportant at hi gh-
vol tage l evel s. Some conducti on cur r ent fl ows i n the capaci ti ve regi ons
of short-wavel ength tubes wher e onl y di spl acement cur r ent woul d exi st
561
562
at l ong wavel engths.
wi l l somewhat l ower
MECHANICAL TUNING [SEC. 14.1
Thi s conducti on cur r ent resul ts i n ski n l osses that
the unl oaded Q of the tube because of the smal l
surface-to-vol ume rati o of these capaci ti ve regi ons.
The pri nci pl es of
coupl ed-ci rcui t tuni ng are mor e i nvol ved and wi l l be di scussed l ater.
From the standpoi nt of operati on, the extent of the tuni ng range i s
determi ned by mechani cal l i mi tati ons, by sparki ng across hi gh-fi el d
regi ons i n the tuner, by the fal l i ng off of effi ci ency, by mode-shi fti ng,
and, i n speci al cases, by vari ati on of some other of the many magnetron
FI G. 14.1 .Cross secti on of a hol e-
and-sl ot si de resonator i n a magnetron
tuned by the i nducti ve el ement -4 and
the capaci ti ve el ement 1?. ~ i s the r -f
magneti c fi el d di rected i nto the page; +
i s the r -f el ectri c fi el d; and > - i s the
r -f cur r ent.
properti es that can al ter over the
tuni ng range. Most of these pr op-
erti es are i ndependent of whether
the tube operati on i s pul sed or c-w.
Two properti es, however , are not
i ndependent; i n a pul sed tube a spark
i s exti ngui shed b e t w e e n pul ses,
whereas i n a c-w tube a spark, once
i ni ti ate d, i s mai ntai ned. I f the
spark i s an r-f spark (becomi ng an
arc) i n the tuni ng mechani sm, i t may
persi st wi thout destroyi ng the tube,
but i t wi l l al ter the tube wavel ength,
often drasti cal l y. The nature of the
mode-shi fti ng al so di ffers between
pul sed and c-w magnetrons. I f the
tuni ng range of a pul sed tube i s ex-
tended to a poi nt wher e mode-shi ft-
i ng occurs, the per centage of pul ses
fi ri ng i n the wr ong mode i ncreases,
fi nal l y becomi ng i ntol erabl y hi gh.
When the tube operati on i s c-w,
however , the tube may be tuned to thi s range and somet~mes consi derabl y
beyond wi thout jumpi ng modes. I f the tube i s turned off and restarted
i n thi s regi on, however , i t wi l l start i n the wr ong mode. Thus ther e i s
a hysteresi s effect present i n c-w tunabl e tubes that i s not present i n
pul sed tubes.
One pr oper ty of magnetrons that i s common to al l tunabl e tubes i s the
vari ati on i n the scal e poi nt (see Chap. 10) wi th a fi xed operati ng poi nt
caused by the fact that the normal i zed parameters are functi ons of k.
By usi ng the scal i ng l aws devel oped i n Sec. 10.6, thi s vari ati on may be
eval uated for a magnetron operati ng at constant B and I but wi th vary-
i ng k. The physi cal di mensi ons of the cathode-anode regi on are assumed
constant. I f 1,, l ?,, and V, are defi ned as the operati ng parameters
at XI ; 11/gl , B1/ @l, and V@ 1 as the normal i zed parameters at A,; and
I
SEC. 14.1] GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 563
I ,, B,, VZ, 1,/ 92, B,/ @Z, and V,/ V, as the correspondi ng quanti ti es at
Az; then, from the condi ti ons that
I I = I z and B, = Bz (1)
and from the scal i ng l aws
92 (B2
and from Eq. (1032), wher e i t i s shown that
(2)
(3)
the val ue of (V@ ,)/( VZ/7JZ) maybe found. I ts wavel ength dependence
i s compl i cated. For l ow-scal e currents and hi gh-scal e magneti c fi el ds,
however , V/W is proporti onal to h. Hence, because
()
vl=~
2
G Al
(from Sec. 10.6),
(4)
Because the qual i fyi ng condi ti ons on Eq. (4) hol d i n the operati ng regi on
of most tubes, i t i s necessary to vary the tube vol tage approxi matel y
i nversel y wi th the wavel ength i n or der to mai ntai n constant cur r ent at a
constant magneti c fi el d.
The above vari ati ons i n scal e poi nt and vol tage wi l l resul t i n a vari a-
ti on i n effi ci ency, i n output power , and i n the cur r ent at whi ch the tube
changes modes. I n vi ew of the wi de range of scal e poi nts at whi ch tubes
have been oper ated successful l y, however (see Sec. 10.9), these vari ati ons
do not, i n general , l i mi t the tuni ng range. I t i s to be noted that the
opti mum l oadi ng of a magnetron al so vari es over the tuni ng range and
that for tuni ng ranges wi th rati os of the extr eme wavel engths from 1 to
1.5, a del i berate vari ati on i n the l oadi ng can partl y compensate for the
change i n scal e poi nt. The l oadi ng i s made l i ghtest at the l ong-wave-
l ength l i mi t wher e the hi gh-scal e currents approach the regi on wher e
mode changes occur .
1 An i ntenti onal vari ati on of l oad over the tuni ng range has been i ncorporated
i n some General El ectri c desi gns of wi de tuni ng range.
564
MECHANI CAL TUNI NG [SEC. 141
Attai nabl e tuni ng ranges for mul ti resonator magnetrons vary wi del y
wi th resonant-system desi gns.
The wi dest ranges (extreme-wavel ength
rati os of 1 to 1.5) have been obtai ned wi th symmetri cal tuni ng on
resonant systems havi ng wi de mode separati on and di mensi ons smal l
compared wi th a wavel ength. These resonant-system properti es are con-
si stent wi th c-w desi gns at the l onger wavel engths of from 20 to 50 cm or
l onger, that i s, short, l ow-vol tage (1 to 5 kv) resonant systems wi th a
smal l number of si de resonators (6 to 12). The di ffi cul ti es of shor ter
wavel engths and hi gher vol tages are r efl ected i n the 10 per cent tuni ng
range attai nabl e at 3-cm radi ati on for a 12-kv resonant system wi th 12
resonators (the 2J51 magnetron of Chap. 20).
I NDUCTI VE AND CAPACI TI VE TUNI NG
I n practi ce, i nducti ve- and capaci ti ve-tuni ng methods are general l y
symmetri c. A case of unsymmetri c tuni ng of thi s type i s menti oned
i n Sec. 14.5.
F1~. 14.2.The sprocket-tunabl e magnetron 2J51 devel oped at Col umbl a Uni versi ty
and Bel l Tel ephone Laboratori es.
(a) Pi tch di ameter of the pi ns; (b) the pi tch di ameter
of &he resonator hol es.
I
I
I
SEC. 14.2] SYMMETRI C I NDUCTI VE TUNI NG 565
14.2. Symmetric I nducti ve Tuni ng.-The name spr ocket tuni ng
has been appl i ed to a form of symmetri c i nducti ve tuni ng i l l ustrated by
the 2J51 magnetron shown i n Fi g. 142. Thi s tube was devel oped at the
Col umbi a and Bel l Tel ephone Laboratori es;
i ts resonant system i s a symmetri c, strapped,
--
n
-R
- --
-.- -
12-osci l l ator anode bl ock of the hol e-and-
dl
t
sl ot type. A round pi n i s i nserted through
aa
T
~
1
the pol e pi ece i nto each hol e of the anode
bl ock; the pi ns are moved by means
of a di aphragm or bel l ows. The effect of
4 r
FI G, 14.3.Cross secti on of
the pi ns i s to decr ease the i nductance of
the pi n-to-hol e regi on of one si de
each si de resonator and hence to l ower the
resonator i n a sprocket-tunabl e
magnetron.
resonant wavel ength of the tube. The
compl ete theor y of the mode spectrum of thi s type of tube as a functi on
of pi n penetrati on, etc., i s gi ven i n Sec. 4.6. The features of thi s theor v
that a~e useful for desi gn purposes wi l l be summari zed bri efl y. -
I // I r //
*W
r I I Theoretical ea. (5)
--- wi th a=O.4 and b=O.6
A = Experi mental 1
~}= Experi mental2
3,2 3,3 3.4 3.5
WavelengthA in cm
FI G. 14,4.Observed and computed tuni ng cur ves for the sprocket-tunabl e magnetron.
The di mensi ons gi ven i n Tabl e 14.1 were used for the experi mental tubes and the cal cu-
l ati ons.
The wavel ength separati ons of the conventi onal modes do not vary
greatl y over the tuni ng range, and the wavel ength of the mai n mode i s
gi ven by the fol l owi ng si mpl e formul a:1
1P. Kusch and A. Nordsi eck, The Tuni ng Properti es of Tunabl e Magnetrons
i n the 3-cm Band, i NDRC 14234, p, 2, Jan, 11, 1944.
566
MECHANI CAL TUNI NG [SEC. 14.2
(5)
The di mensi ons enteri ng Eq. (5) are shown i n Fi g. 14.3; XOi s the wave-
l ength at zer o pi n penetrati on; x I i s the wavel ength at penetrati on hl
(measured from the top of the anode bl ock); ho i s the anode l ength; do
the hol e di ameter; d, the pi n di ameter; and a + b = 1. I t i s seen that
for a = O and b = 1, Eq. (5) may be deri ved from the si mpl est l umped-
constant anal ogy i n whi ch the i nductance i s assumed l ocal i zed i n the
hol es, proporti onal to the area, and i nversel y proporti onal to the l ength
of the hol e. The cur r ent fl ow i n thi s l umped-constant pi cture i s ci rcum-
ferenti al around the pi ns, as shown i n Fi g. 14.1. Thus, because ther e i s
no l ongi tudi nal cur r ent fl ow, the nature of the contacts made by the pi ns
wi th the pol e pi ece i s uni mportant.
For the 725 anode bl ock, a = 0.4 and b = 0.6 when
0.6< ~ <0,75,
do
Typi cal tuni ng data are shown i n Fi g. 144. The check wi th the semi -
empi ri cal Eq. (5) i s seen to be excel l ent except i n the fri ngi ng-fi el d regi on
of smal l pi n penetrati ons.
TABLE 14.1.TuBE DI MENFJONS* FOR THE SPROCKET-TUNABLE MAGNETRONS OF
FI G. 14.4
Pi tch
Experi mental ~. di am. of
Pi tch Pi n-to- Pi n-tO-
tube type
d, di am. of strap back-wal l
resonator
hol est
pi ns t cl earance cl earance
1 0,082 0.0515 0.394 0.4040 0.015 0,010
2 0.085 0.0590 0.405 0.4135 0.016 0,009
* Di mensi ons are i n i nches.
t See Fi g. 14.2. The pi tch di ameter i s defi ned as the di ameter of the l ocus of hol e center. m pi
centers.
The probl ems of mechani cal desi gn wi th 0.010- to 0.015-i n. cl earances
between the pi ns and the osci l l ator wal l s have not pr oved to be seri ous;
the l i mi tati ons on tuni ng range have been set by other consi derati ons.
The most troubl esome probl em i s the el i mi nati on of extra resonances
i ntroduced by the tuni ng mechani sm.
Typi cal of these resonances i s
that i n whi ch the l umped capaci tance between the pi n and the hol e wal l
of Fi g. 143 resonates wi th the l umped i nductance of the end cavi ty. I n
thi s mode, cur r ent ci rcul ates up the back wal l , through the l i d, and down
the pi ns. The effect of these extra resonances i s both to di stort the
tuni ng cur ve and to i ntroduce l oss.
The l oss i s most pronounced when
the r-f contacts general l y present i n the cur r ent path are poor ; but l oss
i
SEC. 14.2] SYA4iWJWRIC INDUCTIVE TUNING 567
may al so be troubl esome even i f the contacts are good, because excessi ve
currents may fl ow near resonance.
These extra resonances are most
troubl esome for l ong anodes and l arge end spaces (that i s, wher ever
di mensi ons become l arge compared wi th a wavel ength). They are most
easi l y r emoved by reduci ng the si ze of the end space.
Ther e i s a fundamental l i mi t to the use of tuni ng of thi s type i n the
shor ter wavel engths because the unl oaded Q decreases wi th k and spr ocket
tuni ng further decreases Qu. A rough esti mate of the magni tude of thi s
effect may be made by assumi ng that al l the ci rcul ati ng cur r ent i n the
resonator i s l ocated i n the regi on of the hol es, yi el dhg the approxi mate
formul al
(6)
wher e B = magneti c fl ux densi ty,
/
dr = i ntegral over vol ume of resonator,
\
da = i ntegral over surface area of resonator,
s. = hr(do + d,),
s, = (ho hl )fr do + q
VA = hl ~ (d: d~),
VB = (hO hl) : d:,
b = ski n depth, proporti onal to x/x,
and
B. . ~
.
B, d: d?
Equati on (6) yi el ds the unl oaded Q of the resonator pr oper . Thi s
must be combi ned wi th the strap unl oaded Q, that i s, Q,, as fol l ows:
(11.10)
wher e C, = resonator capaci tance,
C, = strap capaci tance,
c, = c, + c*.
1 E. U, Condon, Rev. Mod. Phys., 14, 364 (1942). The factor of 2 gi ven i n Eq. (6)
comes from the approxi mateuni formi ty of B over the cr oss secti on,
568 MECHANI CAL TUNI NG [SEC. 14.2
Usi ng the val ues of Q,, C,, and C, l i sted i n Tabl e 11.2 for the 725 anode
bl ock, the theoreti cal Q. cur ve of Fi g. 145 i s obtai ned for the constants
ther e l i sted. The theoreti cal and obser ved unl oaded Q val ues are i n fai r
agreement except for the regi on of greatest pi n penetrati on, wher e the
parti cul arl y l ow obser ved Q ( = 144) i s bel i eved to be caused by a pi n-
to-end-space resonance.
I t i s desi rabl e to mai ntai n an external Q of about 400 wi th the 2J51
magnetron because l ow ci rcui t effi ci enci es (l ess than 50 per cent) resul t
3.4
3.3
E
u
c
:
z 3.2
G
&
;
%
3.1
3.0
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10
Pin penetration h, in inches
FI G. 14.5.Col d-resonance data for
the sprocket-tunabl e magnetron. ho =
0.250 i n,; do = 0.086 i n. ; d, = 0.0623 m.;
5/A = 2.1 X 10s for copper at 3.2 cm;
Qo was computed fr om Eq. (1 110).
i n those regi ons of the tuni ng cur ve
wher e the unl oaded Q i s l ess than
400.
Typi cal performance data on
the 2J51 magnetron are shown i n
Fi g. 14.6 and i n Sec. 20.12. The
pul l i ng-fi gure vari ati ons shown i n
Fi g. 14.6 i ndi cate both the necessi ty
for and the di ffi cul ty of adequatel y
broad-bandi ng the output ci rcui t
(Sees. 11.11 to 11.13). The aver-
age effi ci ency of 32 per cent at 14
amp and 15 kv may be compared
wi th 35 to 40 per cent for the non-
tunabl e versi on. The sacri fi ce i n
effi ci ency i s to be ascri bed pri mari l y
to the l ow unl oaded Q of the
tunabl e tubes.
Spr ocket tuni ng has been tri ed
on other magnetrons. An 18-vane
1.25-cm ri si ng-sun magnetron (the 3J31 di scussed i n Sec. 20.17) has been
tuned 3 per cent by i nserti ng rel ati vel y smal l pi ns i n the l arge osci l l ators
onl y, thus mai ntai ni ng a fai rl y hi gh unl oaded Q and resonabl e ease of
constructi on.
I n appl yi ng spr ocket tuni ng to ri si ng-sun magnetrons, i t shoul d be
noted that tuni ng onl y the l arge si de resonators resul ts i n a change of the
rati o of resonant wavel engths of the l arge to the smal l resonators and
ther efor e a change i n the mode spectrum and i n the amount of zer o-mode
contami nati on of the mai n mode (Sec. 3.4). Because sati sfactory
operati on of ri si ng-sun tubes depends i n part on the pr oper choi ce of
resonator-to-wavel ength rati o, i t may be desi rabl e to tune al l resonators
so that thi s rati o i s mai ntai ned constant. Thi s i l l ustrati on of zer o-mode
vari ati on i s essenti al l y a change i n the r-f pattern resul ti ng from i mperfect
symmetry i n the tuni ng method.
SEC. 14.2] SYMMETRI C I N DUC1I VE T7JNI NG 569
c
.-
FI Q
80F 16 -9800
-\
z
\
16 - 97ca
\
7(3.;15
15:- 9600
g
<
~
14;- 9500
13 g 9400
\
\
125- 9300 :
~
\
50- 40
\
Pulling
11~- 9200 ~
figure
c
.-
/- \
I
z
10 - 9100 2
E
i h
Efficiency
al
~30
- 9000g
a
c
\ /
.-
?
- 8900
:20
- 8800
~
8700
10 - 8600
1 2 3 4 5 6
-8500
Number of turns clockwise
14.13Typi cal pm formanre data of type 2.J51 m:tgnetmn, ThPoperati n= cur r ent i .q
q
Diaphragm
1
I
-d-l-l
Straps
Tuner ring
@lLr ~
,, ,,
m.
0.100
AOS,OL
FI G. J4.7.Cross wrti nn of the QK59, a cooki r-cutter-tun zt,l c n!agnetmn.
570 : MECHANI CAL TUNI NG [SEC. 143
14.3. Symmetri c Capaci ti ve Tuni ng. The Cooki e Cutter.Thc term
cooki e cutter i s appl i ed to the capaci tati ve method of tuni ng i l l us-
trated by the QK59 magnetron i n Fi g. 14.7. I n thi s method a
metal cyl i nder i s i nserted between the two ri ngs of a doubl e-ri ng-strapped
magnetron, so that the strap capaci tance and hence the wavel ength are
i ncreased. Si nce the general theor y of cooki e-cutter tuni ng has been
presented i n Sec. 4.6, onl y the sal i ent features wi l l be r epeated her e. The
mai n-mode wavel ength may be cal cul ated by assumi ng that the i ncreased
strap capaci tance i s i n paral l el wi th the tube capaci tance. The mode
separati on from the next l ower l ongi tudi nal l y symmetri c mode i ncreases
as the mai n-mode wavel ength i s i ncreased, whereas the l ongi tudi nal l y
anti symmetri c r-mode approaches the r-mode most cl osel y at that poi nt
i n the tuni ng range wher e the capaci tances at each end are equal . For
l ong, heavi l y strapped tubes thi s mode may cause some di ffi cul ty, but the
mai n di ffi cul ti es are wi th end-space resonances as i n the sprocket-tunabl e
magnetron; that i s, a resonant ci rcui t exi sts that i s composed of the
tuner-to-strap capaci tance and the end-space i nductance. I t i s usual l y
possi bl e to dkpl ace the resonance from the desi red tuni ng regi on by
varyi ng the end-space geometr y.
The anode bl ock for the cooki e-cutter-tunabl e magnetron (QK59) i s
descri bed i n Sec. 203. The unstrapped capaci tance of the QK59 i s
taken as NC, = 6 p~~ (see Chap. 11). The strappi ng consi sts of a
cyl i ndri cal condenser 0.100 i n. hi gh, wi th 0.348 i n. I D and 0.588 i n. OD.
I gnori ng fri ngi ng fi el ds, i ts capaci tance i s CA = 0.3 ~~f. The strap-to-
vane capaci tance may be esti mated as approxi matel y 0.55 ppf.
When the pl unger i s i nserted between the straps, the sum of the gaps
between straps i s 0.020 i n. i nstead of 0.120 i n. and the i nterstrap capaci ty
i s mul ti pl i ed si x ti mes. When the total capaci tance Cl of the untunwl
tube i s compared wi th that (C,) for the tuned tube, and when the fact that,
onl y one of the two strap cyl i nders i s tuned i s taken i nto consi derati on,
and
c1 =
6 + 0.85 + 0.85 7.7
T, 6 + 0.85 + 0.55 + 6 X 0.30 = 9.2
1
(7)
Because the added capaci ty i s l i near wi th pl unger penetrati on, the change
i n wavel ength i s al so l i near for a smal l tuni ng range. The effects of the
fri ngi ng fi el ds wi l l be to extend the tuni ng somewhat beyond the O.100-i n.
tuner moti on. They shoul d al so i ncrease the over-al l tuni ng, but, to a
fi rst approxi mati on, thi s cor r ecti on i s cancel ed by the fact that the straps
are not connected to the hi ghest-vol tage poi nts of the vanes (the ti ps) but
are of necessi ty l ocated some di stance back al ong the vanes. The
SI X. 143] SYMME7RI C CAPACI TI VE TUNI NG 571
obser ved tuni ng cur ve i s pl otted i n Fi g. 14.8. I n vi ew of the approxi -
mati ons made i n the computati ons, the 30 per cent dkcrepancy between
the computed tuni ng range gi ven
by Eq. (7) and the experi mental 11 r
data i s reasonabl e.
I
Operati ng data for a sl i ghtl y 10 /

modi fi ed versi on of Fi g. 14.8, i n $ ~
[
whi ch cl earances are r educed to .=
I
about 0.007 i n. and the strappi ng G8 !
~
t
i s r emoved from the untuned end ~
of the tube, are shown i n Fi g. ~ ~
i
14.9. Theoreti cal unl oaded-Q
I (n=7)- mode
t
val ues for the extr emes of the tun-
6 ;
I
i ng range are 2370 and 866. The
A!
El
agreement wi th observati ons i s 50 0.04
0.08 0.12
good onl y at the l ong wavel e~gth
Displacement of tuning plunger in inches
end of the tuni ng curve.
FI G. 14 S.-Tuni ng characteri sti cs of the
I n compari ng cooki e-cutter
cooki e-cutter-tunabl e magnetron. At A the
pl unger i s fl ush wi th the bottom of tbe straps;
tuni ng wi th spr ocket tuni ng, i t
at B i t i s fl ush wi th the top of the straps.
mav be noted that because cooki e-
cutter tuni ng requi res smal l er cl earances and smal l er moti ons at a gi ven
wavel ength, i t i s mor e appropri ate for the l onger wavel engths. The
Displacement of tuning plunger i n i nches
I :[o. 14.9.Data for cooki e-cutter-tunabl e magnetron operati ng at 125-ma pl ate cur r ent.
The pul l i ng fi gure i s 6 Me/see.
hi gh vol tage appeari ng across the tuner-to-strap gap restri cts the appl i ca-
ti on of cooki e-cutter tuni ng to rel ati vel y l o\r-vol tage tubes, parti cul arl y
_- . -
572
MLKIIAAlLAL 7JUNING
at,the shor ter wavel engths wher e smal l cl earances
of vol tage breakdown.
[sEc. 1~~
ncrease the possi bi l i ty
14.4.- Other Symmetri c I nducti ve and Capaci ti ve Methods of Tuni ng.
The precedi ng exampl es of spr ocket and cooki e-cutter tuni ng i l l ustrate
the general l i mi tati ons i nvol ved i n i nducti ve and capaci ti ve tuni ng,
namel y, the hi gh vol tages appeari ng across the tuni ng el ement and the
consequent danger of vol tage breakdown for capaci ti ve tuni ng, and vari a-
ti on i n the unl oaded Q for both capaci ti ve and i nducti ve tuni ng. Other
exampl es of these types of tuni ng wi l l be bri efl y di scussed to i l l ustrate
the ki nds of modi fi cati on that may be requi red by speci fi c tube probl ems.
For some purposes, parti cul arl y at the l onger wavel engths, the
moti on requi red i n spr ocket tuni ng may be excessi ve. Exami nati on of
l k~s. (5) and (6) shows that thi s moti on, correspondi ng to the pl unger
penetrati on h,, can be decreased for the same per centage tuni ng by
i ncreasi ng d, (at the expense, however , of a decr ease i n unl oaded Q).
Because the i ncrease i n Ab makes the unl oaded-Q probl em l ess seri ous at
the l onger wavel engths, a rel ati ve shorteni ng of hl becomes feasi bl e.
The pi ns, i nstead of penetrati ng the pol e pi ece as i n Fi g. 142, may bc
suspended above the resonator hol es from an annul ar metal l i c ri ng
(dotted l i nes I i i n Fi g. 143) whi ch moves wi th the pi ns. Then provi ded
t,hc cl earance t betl ~een the ri ng and the top of the vanes i s l arge com-
pared i ~i th that between the pi n and the hol e wal l , ther e i s no change i n
the tuni ng curves because the cur r ent fl ow i n the pi ns i s ci rcumferenti al
(Fi g. 14 1). When t i s smal l , however , radi al currents are i nduced i n the
ri ng by the magneti c fi el d i n the end spaces, and the ri ng contri butes to
thr tuni ng. Al l degr ees of compromi se bet~veen compl ete spr ocket
tuni ng and pure ri ng tuni ng (hl = O) are possi bl e. Moti ons are smal l est
i n pure ri ng tuni ng because i n the ~-mode the magneti c fl ux i s strongl y
concentrated ver y near the vane tops, and consequentl y the ri ng i s
cl fccti ve onl y when f i s smal l . As t i s decreased, the mode separati on i s
i ncrm,scd because the magneti c fl ux for the l ower modes fri nges farther
out i nto the end spaces and i s mor e effecti vel y tuned by the ri ng.
Si mi l ar gradual vari ati ons i n capaci ti ve tuni ng methods are possi bl e
start i ng from the cooki e-cutter tuner. I nstead- of varyi ng th~ strap
capaci tance, the tube capaci tance may be vari ed i n the manner shown
i n I ~i g, 14.1, and any combi nati on of tube and strap capaci tances can be
vari ed. Because i ncreasi ng the tube capaci tance decreases the rati o
of thc strap capaci tance to the tube capaci tance, the mode separati on of
thr untunrd rcsonaut systrrn i s decreased by thi s method of tuni ng, and
the modes may e~en cross each other (Sec. 4.6). Al though thi s decr ease
i n mu<l ~,wparat i on i s an ol )jcct i on to ~,aryi ng the tube capaci tance, i t i s
somc~ti nl [i s~)ossil)lc to inc~orpor:lte l arger cl earances i n a desi gn by varyi ng
tube capaci tanw rather than strap capaci tance and hence to obtai n
SEC. 14.4] OTHER SYMMETRI C METHODS OF TUNI NG 573
hi gher r-f vol tages wi thout breakdown. The capaci ti ve-tuni ng el ement
operati ng between the vanes (Fi g. 14. 1) can be supported from an
annul ar ri ng si mi l ar to the modi fi cati on of spr ocket tuni ng previ ousl y
menti oned. Al so, thi s ri ng al one can be used for capaci ti ve tuni ng over
the vane tops, just as a ri ng al one over the resonator hol es can be used
I
w
FI G. 14.10.Cutaway vi ew of the ZP639. Thi s tube i s tuned by the i nducti ve tuni ng
ri ng L wi th i nserts P and by the capaci ti ve tuni ng ri ng C wi th segments S. (Courtes~ of
General Electric Co.)
for i nducti ve tuni ng. One of the most di ffi cul t engi neeri ng probl ems of
thi s tuni ng method, as of spr ocket tuni ng and cooki e-cutter tuni ng, i s the
el i mi nati on of extra end-space resonances.
The wi dest tuni ng range attai ned on a mul ti osci l l ator magnetron has
been obtai ned by an i ngeni ous desi gn i ncorporati ng i n a si ngl e tube
several of the tuni ng methods menti oned above. Thi s type of tuni ng
574
MECHANI CAL TUNI NG [SEC. 144
i s i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 1410, whi ch shows a porti on of the 12-osci l l ator
ZP639. A capaci ti ve ri ng C wi th tuni ng segments S i s connected by
pi ns extendi ng through the osci l l ator cavi ti es to an i nducti ve
70 -~
65 -
60 4
55 -
= 50 -3
~
& g
.:45 -%
n
c
0
c1
,=
s
E
u 40 2
35 -
30 -1
25 -
20- 0
ri ng L
1000
900
800
700
600
500
Q,
400
300
200
100
0
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18-
Wavelength A in cm
FI G. 14.1 I .Tuni ng cur ve of i nducti ve-capaci ti ve-tunabl e magnetron ZP639. The i nput
power i s 1.0 kw at 5.0 kv. (Courtes~ oj General El ectri c Co,)
that supports a set of i nducti ve tuni ng i nserts P. Verti cal moti on of
thi s two-ri ng combi nati on si mul taneousl y i ncreases or decreases both
i nductance and capaci tance together . Operati ng data for thi s tube are
SEC. 14.5] UNSYMMETRI C I NI I UCTI VE TUNI NG
575
shown i n Fi g. 1411. For an i nput power of 1 kw at 0.200 anl p, the
effi ci ency remai ns above 50 per cent over a range of 1 to 1.5 i n resonant
wavel ength.
I n two exampl es that wer e gi ven of i nducti ve and capaci ti ve tuni ng
the sprocket-tunabl e and the cooki e-cutter-tunabl e magnetronsthere
i s ver y l i ttl e tendency for the normal tube modes to cross each other ,
even over an extended tuni ng range and even i f the i ni ti al mode separati on
i s smal l . Neverthel ess i t seems si gni fi cant that the wi dest tuni ng range
(about 50 per cent) was obser ved on a tube wi th wi de mode separati on
(40 per cent), that thi s tube had i ts anode l ength and radi us smal l com-
pared wi th a wavel ength, and that the wavel ength i n questi on was l ong
(15 cm). I t i s ther efor e i mportant to summari ze the factors i ndependent
of the r-f output power and other than normal mode crossi ng that l i mi t
the tuni ng range. These are
1. Extra resonances, associ ated wi th the end space or the tuni ng el e-
ment or both. These resonances are favored by havi ng tube
di mensi ons l arge compared wi th a wavel ength, a condi ti on that
al so produces smal l normal mode separati on.
2. Mode sel ecti on. Consi derati ons of Chap. 8 show that i t i s di ffi cul t
to establ i sh general rul es i ndi cati ng what mode spectrum i s most
favorabl e to mmode operati on; i n speci fi c cases, however , vari a-
ti ons i n the mode spectrum over the tuni ng range may cause
unfavorabl e mode sel ecti ons.
3. Unl oaded Q. Thi s i s a functi on of wavel ength and tuni ng range,
not of mode separati on. I n general , Qu decreases as the wave-
l ength i s decreased and as the tuni ng range i s i ncreased. For a
10 per cent tuni ng range at 3 cm, Qu, becomes about 500, a barel y
acceptabl e fi gure.
I t i s empi ri cal l y obser ved that the operati ng tuni ng range sel dom
exceeds the mode separati on of the ori gi nal untuned anode.
14.5. Unsym.metri c I nducti ve Tuni ng.For the purpose of fi xi ng a
magnetron frequency wi thi n the normal scatter band of untuned magne-
trons i t i s someti mes desi rabl e to i ncorporate i n the tube a smal l and
si mpl e tuni ng el ement capabl e of a restri cted tuni ng range of about 1 per
cent. Such a devi ce usual l y i s l i mi ted to tuni ng one resonator, for
exampl e, by means of a scr ew i nserted i n the si de of the resonator hol e.
For mode separati ons gr eater than 5 per cent, deteri orati on of the r-f
pattern from thi s unsymmetri cal tuni ng i s negl i gi bl e (Sec. 4.5). The
probl em ther efor e i s purel y an engi neeri ng one of obtai ni ng an adequatel y
compact di aphragm and control mechani sm, of el i mi nati ng extra r eso-
nances i n the vacuum envel ope associ ated wi th the di aphragm and
tuni ng screw, and of mai ntai ni ng adequate cl earance between the scr ew
and the osci l l ator wal l s to keep the unl oaded Q hi gh.
576
MECHANI CAL TCJ NI NG [SEC. 14.7
COUPLED-CI RCUI TTUNI NG
I n coupl ed-ci rcui t tuni ng, the coupl i ng i s usual l y i ntroduced through
one resonator and ther efor e produces asymmetri cal r-f patterns.
14.6. General Theory.-Tuni ng methods based on varyi ng the
magnetron frequency i ndi rectl y by a second resonant ci rcui t coupl ed to
the magnetron are fr ee from some of the geometri cal l i mi tati ons i mposed
by anode-bl ock di mensi ons. Furthermore, these coupl ed-ci rcui t-tunabl e
magnetrons can often, but not al ways, be made wi th hi gher unl oaded Qs
than the i nducti ve and capaci ti ve tunabl e magnetrons di scussed i n
Sees. 14.2 and 14.3. I n some cases the mechani cal moti on of the tuni ng
el ement may take pl ace outsi de the vacuum envel ope, but to date such
magnetrons have general l y pr oved l ess sati sfactory than i nducti ve or
capaci ti ve tunabl e magnetrons.
Ther e are two general properti es of coupl ed-ci rcui t-tunabl e magne-
trons. (1) The added resonant ci rcui ts i ncrease the stabi l i zati on of the
magnetron by stori ng r-f ener gy; (2) they i ntroduce new modes to the
spectrum. The added modes are often harml ess, but they are never an
advantage, and the i ncreased stabi l i zati on usual l y i ncreases the tendency
of the magnetron to oper ate i n undesi red modes. When thi s tendency
can be over come, however , the added stabi l i zati on represents an advan-
tage, as shown i n Chap. 16. Most coupl ed-ci rcui t-tunabl e magne-
trons are unsymmetri c; hence di storti on of the r-f pattern occurs over
the tuni ng range. The resul ti ng decr ease i n el ectroni c effi ci ency and the
i ncreased tendency to shi ft modes at wavel engths r emoved from the
untuned resonant frequency (Chap. 8) general l y l i mi t the useful tuni ng
range of a coupl ed-ci rcui t-tunabl e tube to from one-thi rd to one-hal f of the
mode separati on of the untuned tube. As a corol l ary of thi s pattern di s-
torti on, the coupl i ng to the output ci rcui t, hence the external Q, may
change over the tuni ng range. Thi s effect i s di sti nct from the vari ati on
i n external Q caused by change i n stabi l i zati on over the tuni ng range,
al though i t i s not di sti ngui shabl e by Q-measurements al one.
14.7. Doubl e-output Tuni ng.-The term doubl e-output tuni ng i s
appl i ed to the coupl ed-ci rcui t type of tuni ng i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 14.12.
A magnetron i s provi ded wi th two output termi nal s; the fi rst i s actual l y
used as a power-output termi nal , whi l e the second i s used to coupl e i nto
the resonant system a reactance that changes the resonant frequency of
the magnetron. The vari abl e reactance i s provi ded by a short-ci rcui ted
transmi ssi on l i ne of vari abl e l ength 1. These ci rcui ts may be descri bed
wi th the ai d of the equi val ent ci rcui ts shown i n Fi g. 14.13. I n these
ci rcui ts
L = the resonant-system i nductance,
C = the resonant-system capaci tance,
I
I
1
,
!
I
SEC. 147]
DOUBLE-O UTPUI TUNI NG
577
G = d(C/L)/Q.,, wher e Q. I = the unl odedQ of the resonant
system,
1 = thedi stance totheshort-ci rcui ti ng pl unger,
Y1 = the characteri sti c admi ttance of the coaxi al l i ne of the tuner,
G~/Y2 = the VSWR i n the tuner l i ne,
Y, = the characteri sti c admi ttance of the coaxi al l i ne of the power
output as seen across the sl ots (that i s, transformed through
the-power-output coupl i ng)
*
(i
Radiator
FIG. 14. 12.An exampl e of doubl e-output tuni ng.
The part of the equi val ent ci rcui t shown i n Fi g. 14.13r2 for the coupl ed
reactance corresponds to the l ow external Q pi n-to-strap type of coupl i ng
di scussed i n Sec. 5.2. I t wi l l be proved l ater that thi s l ow Q (here, QEZ) is
a prerequi si te for a wi de mode-fr ee tuni ng range; for exampl e, QE2 = 10
corresponds to a 10 per cent tuni ng range.
I n the ci rcui t of Fi g. 14.13a
the magnetron i s connected di rectl y across the tuner l i ne at Termi nal s 2,
578 MECHANICAL TUNING [SEC. 147
and the smal l juncti on effects are negl ected. The power-output ci rcui t
i s r epr esented by the admi ttance Y1 = < (C/L)/Q~l at Termi nal s 1,
wher e Q~l i s the external Q of the power-output ci rcui t (wi th the tuni ng
reactance removed). The frequency pul l i ng by the power-output ci rcui t
i s assumed negl i gi bl e compared wi th the tuni ng i ntroduced by the short-
ci rcui ted tuner l i ne.
I t may be deduced from the anal ysi s of Chap. 5 that a l ow external
Q i s possi bl e, wi thout the i ntroducti on of extra resonant el ements i nto
the ci rcui t, onl y for coaxi al -l i ne outputs. Consequentl y, the anal ysi s
of Fi g. 14.13a i s her e restri cted to a tuner consi sti ng of a coaxi al stub.
Al though i t i s possi bl e to devi se doubl e-output-tuni ng methods
i ncorporati ng an evacuated tuni ng l i ne, the pri mary purpose of the
method of tuni ng shown i n Fi g. 14.12 i s to al l ow the mechani cal moti on
to take pl ace outsi de the vacuum envel ope. Thi s type of tuni ng i s thus
appl i cabl e onl y to magnetrons wi th l ow pul se-power outputs because
lmglIFEF
[0) (b)
FI G. 14.13.Equi val ent ci rcui ts for doubl e-output tuni ng.
breakdown woul d be encounter ed i n the tuner l i ne or across the tuner
vacuum seal at hi gh pul se powers. The nature of the tuner vacuum
seal al so l i mi ts the average output power of the magnetron because the
hi gh r-f fi el ds that general l y exi st i n the gl ass for at l east a porti on of the
tuni ng range may heat the gl ass to i ts mel ti ng poi nt. Coaxi al -l i ne
tuners, havi ng center di ameters of } i n. and i nsi de di ameters of thei r
outer conductors equal to +% i n., have been attached to doubl e-output
magnetrons. These tubes, wi th seal s of No. 704 gl ass, have been tested
at pul se power s up to 10 kw and average power s up to 200 watts. A fi nal
l i mi tati on on thi s method of tuni ng i s the ci rcui t effi ci ency, whi ch maybe
appreci abl y l ower ed from that of an untuned tube even i f the pl unger
i n the tuni ng l i ne sets up a standi ng-wave rati o of 40 db or more.
As a resul t of these l i mi tati ons, doubl e-output tuni ng has not pr oved
to be ver y successful . However , the l ow-Q coupl i ng devi ces devel oped
for thk type of tuni ng have been useful as means of coupl i ng el ec-
troni cal l y control l ed reactance i nto a magnetron and thus are an i mpor-
tant part of some of the methods of frequency modul ati on di scussed i n
Chap. 15. For thi s reason and al so to i l l ustrate the type of anal ysi s
that may be useful i n other rel ated probl ems, the vari ous ci rcui t properti es
I
(
I
/
I
I
SE(!. 14.7] DOUBLE-OUTPUT TUNI NG 579
of doubl e-output tuni ng wi l l be deri ved from the equi val ent ci rcui ts
(Fi g. 14.13) and compared wi th experi ments.
The parameters to be eval uated i n terms of thi s ci rcui t are the tuni ng
curves, the vari ati on of stabi l i zati on, the ci rcui t effi ci ency, and the total
resi sti ve l oadi ng over the tuni ng range for cl i ffer ent val ues of the vari abl es
i n Fi g. 14.13a. The l arge mode separati on i n the untuned tube (the
QK44, see Tabl e 11.3) mi ni mi zes pattern di storti on, whi ch i s ther efor e
negl ected i n the computati ons.
By eval uati ng the admi ttance seen l ooki ng to the ri ght at Termi nal s
2 of Fi g. 14.13a, the si mpl er equi val ent ci rcui t Fi g. 14. 13b i s justi fi ed
for (GZ/YZ tan 27rl /x) 2>> 1 (for a per fect short ci rcui t, G2 = M). I n thi s
fi gure
(8)
Letti ng l ?, be the admi ttance seen l ooki ng to the ri ght at Termi nal s 1
of Fi g. 14.13b and defi ni ng QBZ= (v(C/L)/YZ, the tuni ng cur ve i s
gi ven by
()
Ao
l =~cotQE, ~+0, (9)
I
wher e hoi s the resonant wavel ength of the anode bl ock. The stabi l i zati on
S i s then gi ven by
!
dB ,
~=~
dB ,
= 1 + ~z ~ CSC22;.
ko QEZ
(l o)
I
du :~:::::?e,
I f the magnetron, tuned to some wavel ength A, i s force-osci l l ated through
the power output, i t wi l l yi el d a Q-cur ve si mi l ar to that for a nontunabl e
magnetron, and the resul ti ng parameters (unl oaded Q = QUand external
Q = QE) have the usual rel ati on to the operati ng behavi or of the mag-
netron. These quanti ti es are gi ven by the rel ati ons
I
1
whence the ci rcui t effi ci ency q. i s
and
(11)
(12)
580 MECHANI CAL TUNI NG [SEC. 14.7
The total resi sti ve l oadi ng GTO, appeari ng across Termi nal s 1 or 2 may
be expressed as
GT.T _
J
()
+,+&g ++
c.
E
(13)
The r-f vol tage i n the tuner i s al so readi l y deri vabl e. When the val ue
~, at Termi nal s 2 i s eval uated, the enti re pattern i n the tuner i s easi l y
deduced.
J
V; g
Q, =
27rv (ener gy stored) = _ ~;Y2QE2
P. 2P. 2P.
whence
(14)
wher e PO = output power .
As a check on the val i di ty of these deri vati ons, a compari son of the
theoreti cal Eqs. (9), (1 1), and (12) wi th experi mental data i s shown i n
Fi gs. 14.14 and 14.15. The experi mental tube used i n these measure-
ments was a vari ant of the CM 16B descri bed i n Sec. 20.3.
These two fi gures contai n the cal cul ated curves of A, Q,, QU, and qC,
whi ch are fi tted to cor r espond to the obser ved poi nts by theoreti cal
cal cul ati ons based on the above equati ons and the fi ve arbi trary con-
stants QEZ,Qzl , Qti l , Gz/Yz, and the branch m of the tuni ng curve, that
i s, the number of vol tage nodes i n the tuner l i ne, counti ng the pl unger
posi ti on as one node. Thus the tri al val ues QEZ= 30 and m = 4 gi ve
good agreement wi th the data of Fi g. 14.14, and the addi ti onal tri al val ues
of Qti l = 950, QEl = 110, and G1/Ya = 42 db gi ve good agreement wi th
the data of Fi g. 14.15. I ndependent measurements determi ne thr ee of
these constants as Q.1 = 1200, + 30 per cent, G1/Yl = 40 to 45 db,
and m = 3, i n good agreement wi th the tri al val ues except for the val ue
of m. I t i s reasonabl e, however , to expect the best fi t of Eq. (9) to
occur for a l arger val ue of m (for exampl e, 4) than that gi ven by the
physi cal l ength of the l ead (namel y, m = 3) because the frequency
sensi ti vi ty of the l ead (the taper, the gl ass seal , and the seri es i nductance
i n the outer conductor ) i s equi val ent to an extra l ength added to the
tuner l i ne.
The most noti ceabl e feature of the curves i n Fi g. 14.14 i s the mul ti pl e-
val ued dependence of wavel ength on tuner posi ti on. Thus, for a 70-mm
pl unger posi ti on, two resonant wavel engths, 9.7 and 10.48 cm, are possi bl e
because of the mul ti pl e-val ued properti es of the cotangent i n Eq. (9).
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
SEC. 14.7]
10.6 IC
E
o
10.4
a
o
E
.: 10.2 0
A
5
s
!2!10.0
2
9.8
I
10
DOUBLE-OUTPUT TUNING 581
0 Observed points
Theoretical cude, third branch
- Theoretical cude, fourth branch
//
/
~ /
t
/
A
o
0
0 c
I
30 40 50 60 70 8!)
Plunger position in mm (Arbitrary reference DointI
FI G. 14.14.Observed and theoreti cal tuni ng cur ves for doubl e-output tuni ng. The
theoreti cal cur ves fr om Eq. (9) (wi th Q,g, = 30) are fi tted i n posi ti on and sl ope to the
experi mental cur ve at AO = 9.9 cm. (a), (b), and (c) represent di fferent branches of
the tuni ng curve.
500
400
300
C$
200
100
0
1000
100
900
8>
90

z
/
o
nc
~
/
80 &
.E
0>
0 s
0
x
700
QE
70.:
~
0 c,
600 60
u observed QE
1
0 Observed Qu
b
~ Observed nc
5W
9.6 9.8 10,0 10,2 10.4 10,:0
x
FI G. 1415.-Theoreti cal cur ves and experi mental poi nts of QE, Qu, and V, for doubl e.
output tumng, The QE cur ve was cal cul ated wi th m = 4, Qm = 30, and QEI = 110.
The Q. cur ve was cal cul ated for m = 4, Qm = 30, Gz/ Y, = 126 (42 db), and Q., = 95o.
582 MECHANI CAL TUNI NG
TheeeKI arati oni n wavel ength of the tuni ng branches
[SEC. 14.8
a, b, and c i s al so
seen from Eq. (9) to be greatest for l ow QEZ and for l ow m.
The i mportant feature of the curves i n Fi g. 1415 i s the frequency
sensi ti vi ty of rI ~and QE (whi ch i s proporti onal to the stabi l i zati on S).
Consi derati on of Eqs. (10) to (12) shows that the frequency sensi ti vi ty of
q. i s di mi ni shed by l ow QMZand that of QE is di mi ni shed by l ow QEZ
and by smal l m (that i s, short 1). A l ower l i mi t, however , i s pl aced on
QEZat the center of the tuni ng range by the ci rcui t effi ci ency, whi ch
vari es i nversel y to QEZ,and by stabi l i zati on, whi ch vari es di rectl y wi th
Q,,. Chapter 8 shows that both q, and S decr ease the cur r ent at whi ch
operati on i n the i r-mode i s stabl e by thei r effect on ~C/LroT (here,
S @) and G (here, GTOT).
Furthermore, for QE2<<10, the equi val ent
ci rcui t (Fi g. 14. 13a) breaks down because the frequency sensi ti vi tyy of
the l ead becomes appreci abl e. Even i n the exampl e chosen, for Q,, = 30,
thi s frequency sensi ti vi ty requi red an i ncrease i n the effecti ve branch
of the tuni ng curve. Less frequency-sensi ti ve l eads than the one used
for the data i n Fi gs. 1414 and 1415 are avai l abl e, l eads furthermore
that are physi cal l y shor ter and al l ow operati on on the (m = 2)-branch
Of the tuni ng curve. Such a tuner l ead i s i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 14.12.
Al though the performance of thi s type of tunabl e magnetron has been
poor , tuni ng ranges of 10 to 20 per
cent have been obtai ned at c-w
output power s of 30 to 60 watts
wi th an i nput power of 150 watts.
Ma
14.8. Symmetri c Doubl e-out-
put Tmni ng.-A method of cou-
pl i ng a coaxi al l i ne to a magnetron
so that the mai n-mode symmetry
i s presemed i s i l l ustrated i n Fi g.
14.16. The resul ti ng tuni ng
curves are shown i n Fi g. 14.17,
wher e the posi ti on of the tuni ng
pl unger i s pl otted as absci ssa and
the wavel ength as ordi nate. For
,
1 the mai n mode, the equi val ent
Fm. 14.1 6.Schemati c drawi ng of symmetri c
doubl e-output-tunabl e magnetron.
ci rcui ts of Fi g. 1413 are appl i ca-
bl e. The val i di ty of these ci rcui ts
i s shown by the fai r agreement between the magnetron characteri sti c
i mpedance computed by Sl ater fr om the observed tuni ng cur ves (7.25
ohms) and that computed by James fr om the tube di mensi ons (10 ohms). 2
1J. B. Fi sk and P. L. Hartman,
The Devel opment of Tunabl e Magnetrons,
BTL-141, June 26, 1942.
z Both Sl aters and James computati ons can be found i n J. C. Sl ater, I nput
I mpedance and Tuni ng of Magnetron Cavi ti es, RL Report No. 43-18, Feb. 3, 1943.
sEC. 14.9] CAVI TY TUNI NG 583
The resul ti ng cl ose coupl i ng of the magnetron to the l i ne i s shown by the
l arge sl ope of the tuni ng curves at the unperturbed mai n-mode resonant
wavel ength of 10 cm. By con-
trast, the extr emel y smal l sl ope of
the tuni ng curves at the l ower
modes shows that these are ver y
l oosel y coupl ed to the l i ne, as i s to
be expected from the symmetry of
the coupl i ng method. Thi s smal l
sl ope of the l ower modes resul ts i n
wi der mode separati on than woul d
be found i n an unsymmetri c
method of coupl i ng. The com-
bi nati on of rel ati vel y wi de mode
separati on and l ack of pattern
di storti on thus favors the possi -
bi l i ty of a wi de tuni ng range i f
one starts wi th an anode of i ni -
ti al l y smal l mode separati on. Be-
cause thi s tuni ng method was tri ed
befor e the techni ques of testi ng
magnetrons wer e wel l devel oped,
i t i s not possi bl e to judge from the
avai l abl e data whether or not the
14 .
I
I
13
r
/
12
rl
E

: 11
G
E
s
9
1
8
1/ 1/
2 Y
/

o~/
4
7
I //
@/
o 2 4 6 8 10
Plungerposition d in cm
FI G. 14. 17.Tuni ng cur ves for symmetri c
doubl e-output magnetron. The asymptotes
for the di fferent branchi ng of the tuni ng
cur ves are shown by dashed l i nes.
anti ci pated advantages i n symmetri c tuni ng are actual l y real i zabl e.
14.9. Cavi ty Tuni ng. I ris-coupled Tuni ng.Fi gure 14.18 i l l ustrates
a method of coupl i ng a magnetron (I ) by means of an i ri s (I I ) to a cavi ty
(I I I ). The resonant frequency of the combi ned system1, 11, and
I I I i s changed when the frequency of the cavi ty i s changed by some
mechani cal moti on. Al l thr ee el ements are frequency-sensi ti ve and
may be r epr esented by si mpl e seri es- or paral l el -resonant ci rcui ts that
are resonant at or near the resonant wavel ength AOof the untuned anode
bl ock. I t wi l l be shown that the net resul t of these thr ee resonant
ci rcui ts i s to i ntroduce two new modes i nto the mode spectrum of the
magnetron, one above and one bel ow AO. The stabi l i zati on of al l thr ee
modes i s a functi on of the ci rcui t parameters and vari es over the tuni ng
range. As a resul t, careful anal ysi s i s necessary to determi ne i n whi ch
mode the magnet r on wi l l operate. Successful appl i cati on of thi s anal y-
si s, however , l eads to a desi gn capabl e to a 5 to 10 per cent tuni ng range
and capabl e of wi thstandi ng the hi ghest r-f vol tages gener ated i n hi gh-
power magnetrons. Thi s desi gn si mul taneousl y i ncreases the unl oaded
Q of the magnetron as a resul t of the ener gy stor ed i n the cavi ty, al though
the total ski n l osses are al so i ncreased. I f the external Q i s adjusted to
be equal to that of the nontunabl e versi on of the magnetron (no cavi ty),
584
MECHANI CAL TUNI NG [SEC. 14.9
a gai n i n ci rcui t effi ci ency resul ts i n the tunabl e tube. The attendant
dkadvantages are characteri sti c of unsymmetri c tuni ngvari ati on over
FI G. 14,1 S.I ri s-coupl ed cavi ty-tunabl e magnetron type 4J75.
the tuni ng range i n the r-f patterns and i n the el ectroni c effi ci ency. Of
desi gns gi vi ng equal mode separa-
-3
ti ons, consi derati on of unl oaded Q and
methods of constructi on favor use of
the cavi ty tuni ng i l l ustrated by Fi g.
14.18 for the shor ter wavel engths.
Fi gure 14.19 shows the equi val ent
I
I
I
i
FI G.. 14.19 .Equi val ent ci rcui t for
ci rcui t of the 4J75 magnetron shown i n
i ri s-coupl edcavi ty-tunabl e magnetron
typa 4J75. Zn = ~(Lm/ CrJ .
Fi g. 14.18. The magnetron I , opened
at the back of one of the osci l l ators,
i s r epr esented as a seri es-resonant ci rcui t LIC1.
The resonant-i ri s
coupl i ng devi ce I I i s r epr esented as a paral l el -resonant ci rcui t L2C2,
SEC. 14.9] CAVI TY TUNI NG 585
and the cavi ty I I I as a seri es-resonant ci rcui t L3CS because i t, l i ke the
magnetron, i s opened at a hi gh-current poi nt.
I f the mode separati on i n the
untuned tube i s l arge compared wi th
that of the two extra modes i ntro-
duced by the cavi ty and coupl i ng,
these extra modes may be consi dered
as mul ti pl es of the mmode (see Fi g.
1420). Empi ri cal observati ons and
qual i tati ve anal ysi s of mor e com-
pl i cated ci rcui ts show that when thi s
condi ti on does not hol d, ther e i s
onl y a mi nor effect on the central
r-m o d e a n d t h e l ong-wavel ength
u-mode but the short-wavel ength
r-mode cannot cross the next normal -
mode wavel ength. Sol uti on of Ki rch-
hoffs l aws for the thr ee networ ks of
Fi g. 14.19 i s strai ghtforward when
13
+@e
/
Long.wavelen#hs
12
E
u
.~ 11
A
$
+ 10
/
~
9
,o++__&_J
400
Oiaphragm mohon in mills
BIG. 14.20.Tuni ng cur ves of 4J75
magnetron.
Denoti ng 21r ti mes the resonant frequency of the combi ned system as
u and l etti ng
~=!?
~o
and
(16)
Ki rchhoffs l aws for the two networ ks (I + I I and 11 + I I I ) are, for
the condi ti on of Eq. (15),
and
Hence, for resonance,
=00+ (2+2)%
and
(17)
586 MECHANI CAL TUNI NG [SEC. 14.9
The ener gy storage i n the thr ee ci rcui ts can be computed from
I
The stabi l i zati on for the thr ee modes of Eq. (18) can be computed
from Eq. (19) and from the addi ti onal rel ati on
from Eq. (17). The resul t i s that
~= EI +E,, +E,,I =l
E,
()
z,
=2 1+73
Equati on (18) shows that the
z,

z
(20)
+? 2+2(1 -22)2 21)
for y=O
I
(22)
z, z,
or~=z+z
separati on between the unperturbed
or [(~- = O), (az = 1)]-mode and the extraneous modes i ntroduced by
the coupl ed ci rcui ts i s greatest when Za i s greatest. Thus, i t i s desi rabl e
to make the i ri s of hi gh characteri sti c i mpedance; that i s, the i nducti ve
areas of the i ri s shoul d be as l arge as possi bl e.
Equati on (22) shows that when the stabi l i zati on of the unperturbed
r-mode exceeds 3, the extra mmodes are l ess hi ghl y stabi l i zed than the
central mode. The anal ysi s of mode sel ecti on i n Chap. 8 and the
anal ysi s of stabi l i zati on i n Chap. 16 show that for competi ti on among
several mmodes, the tube wi l l usual l y osci l l ate i n the mode of l owest
stabi l i zati on unl ess speci al precauti ons are taken to ensure operati on i n
the hi gh-stabi l i zati on mode. Because these precauti ons i ncrease the
compl exi ty of desi gn and decr ease the output power , cavi ty-tunabl e
magnetrons are desi gned wi th l ower stabi l i zati on of the desi red operati ng
mode than of the undesi red modes unl ess hi gh stabi l i zati on i s al so
requi red i n the desi gn. The attai nabl e tuni ng for hi gh stabi l i zati ons
wi l l be di scussed i n Chap. 16.
--
SEC. 14.9]
CAVI TY TUNI NG 587
Several consi derati ons combi ne to favor the sel ecti on of the central
mode as the operati ng mode. i f thi s mode i s stabi l i zed l ess than 3,
both competi ng modes wi l l be stabi l i zed gr eater than 3 and the magnetron
wi l l run i n the central mode. Furthermore, the di storti on of the r-i
pattern i sl easti n thi smode. Fi nal l y, ananal ysi sforo, #uOshows that
the tuni ng range for ag.i ven change i nus i s l argest for the central mode.
Cri teri a for sati sfactory cavi ty-tunabl e desi gn, ther efor e, are that the
operati ng mode be the center mode and that i ts stabi l i zati on be kept l ess
than3. For desi gn purposes, i t i ssati sfactory to assume that S = 1.7
i s an opti mum val ue.
The rate of tuni ng near us = ti o i s obtai ned from a modi fi cati on of
Eq. (10), whi ch becomes
Au sl
Aa3= S
(23)
For S = 2, Au/Aus = i , whereas the maxi mum possi bl e val ue i s 1
when S= m.
1000,
I
50
2
~ *m
I I
- 40
I
J
I
z I
;
600
I
1
/
30 2
I
x
I .s
I
~
f 10
20.3
I
I
~
E
.5
*5
1
& /
I
10
I
- Nominal band+
g
I
4J75
I
~ 096
I
o
9.8 10.0 10.2 10.4 10.6 10.8
Wavelength h in cm
FIG. 14.21 .Operating data of typi cal 4J75 magnetron. Magneti c fi el d = 2700
gauss; pul se pl ate cur r ent = 73.5 amp; pul se pl ate vol tage = 2S. 1 to 29.1 kv; heater
vol tage = 8 vol ts.
Al though i t i s possi bl e to esti mate 21, 22, and Zs fr om the magnetron
chrnensi ons, i t i s more useful to regard the rati os of the i mpedances
2,, 22, and 23 as determi ned by appropri ate measurements of tuni ng
cur ves and stabi l i zati ons. A qual i tati ve anal ysi s of the vari ati on of
the i mpedances wi th physi cal di mensi ons then suggests appropri ate
changes to obtai n more desi rabl e tuni ng cur ves and stab~fi zati ons.
I
588 MECHANI CAL TUNI NG [SEC. 14.9
Fi gure 14.20 shows the obser ved mode spectrum for the Westi nghouse
cavi ty-tuned 4J75 magnetron. I t i s seen that the wavel ength of the
short-wavel ength r-mode i s as l ow as possi bl e, because i t cannot be l ower
than the (n = 5)-mode. Over the tuni ng range shown, the unl oaded
Q of the tunabl e magnetron i s 2000, compared wi th 1500 for the untuned
tube.
Operati ng datal for the 4J75 tube are shown i n Fi g. 14.21 wher e i t
i s seen that the effi ci ency vari ati on i s smal l over the tuni ng range wher e
no mode changes occur .
Bri ef menti on shoul d be made of the fact that because the di aphragm
i s part of the resonant ci rcui t of the 4J75 tube and because i t i s stretched
m
Fm. 14.22.Schemati c drawi ng of the coaxi al -l i ne-coupl ed cavi ty-tunabl e magnetron.
L1
f
c1
(-
L3
.0
+C
q
Fm. 14.23.Equi val ent ci rcui t of coaxi al -l i ne-coupl ed cavi ty-tunabl e magnetron.
Y. = v(C.J LJ ; Y, = QB, Yo; YZ = (m/ r) Yo; and l3 = ~E2y0.
beyond i ts el asti c l i mi t, ther e i s a hysteresi s of a few megacycl es per
second i n the tuni ng curve, and the resonant frequency for a gi ven setti ng
of the tuni ng mechani sm depends on the di recti on of the tuner moti on.
Thk i s not a fundamental pr oper ty of cavi ty-tunabl e magnetrons.
Coaxial-1ine-coupled Tuni ng.Fi gure 1422 i l l ustrates a method of
tuni ng that i s el ectri cal l y si mi l ar to i ri s-coupl ed cavi ty tuni ng. A coaxi al
l i ne repl aces the i ri s shown i n Fi g. 14.18, and the equi val ent ci rcui t of
Fi g. 14.23 repl aces that of Fi g. 14.19. I n Fi g. 14.23 the magnetron i s a
paral l el -resonant ci rcui t; the cavi ty, as seen through i ts coupl i ng con-
necti on, may be taken as a paral l el -res~nant ci rcui t by sui tabl e choi ce of
termi nal s al ong the coupl i ng l i ne, and the l ength of l i ne 11between the
magnetron and the cavi ty (necessari l y mA/2 l ong, wi th each end a
1A. G. Smi th, The 4J70-77Seri esof Tunabl e Magnetrons, RL Repor t No. 1006,
Feb. 4, 1946.
SEC. 14.10] SI NGLE-STUB TUNI NG 589
vol tage maxi mum) may be taken as a seri es-resonant ci rcui t over a
smal l -wavel ength range. The precedi ng anal ysi s for i ri s coupl i ng wi l l
then al so hol d for coaxi al -l i ne coupl i ng i f Z. = ~L./ Cn i s repl aced by
Y. = ~m throughout. I f the resul ti ng mode separati on i s so great
that the connecti ng coaxi al l i ne i s not adequatel y r epr esented by a
seri es-resonant ci rcui t over the wavel ength range i nvol ved, the ci rcui t
of Fi g. 14.23 becomes i nadequate and an anal ysi s si mi l ar to that for
doubl e-output tunabl e magnetrons i s necessary. Then, for exampl e,
the tuni ng curves are gi ven by
by anal ogy wi th, Eq. (9). The resul ti ng mode separati ons wi l l al ways
be l ess than those predi cted by the ci rcui t i n Fi g. 14.23.
I
I
FI G.14.24.A magnetron coupl ed to a vari abl e tuni ng stub.
14.10. Si ngl e-stub Tuni ng.For appl i cati ons requi ri ng smal l tuni ng,
of 1 per cent or l ess, at pul se-power outputs of a few ki l owatts, i t i s
possi bl e to conver t an ordi nary fi xed-frequency magnetron i nto a tunabl e
one by a si ngl e tuni ng stub cor r ectl y posi ti oned on the output l hi e.
Such an arrangement i s shown i n Fi g. 1424. An equi val ent ci rcui t for
Fi g. 14.24 can be drawn by anal ogy wi th the equi val ent ci rcui t of Fi g.
14.23 for coaxi al -coupl ed cavi ty tuni ng by representi ng the tuni ng stub
1F. F. Ri eke, Adjustment of Magnetron Frequency by an External Tuner,
RL Report No. 412, Sept. 6, 1943.
590
MECHANICAL TUNING [SEC. 14.10
as a paral l el -resonant ci rcui t, at the center of the tuni ng range. Because
i t i s desi rabl e to keep the maxi mum vol tage i n the tuni ng stub l ow to
avoi d vol tage breakdown, the useful tuni ng range i s general l y l i mi ted to
that obtai ned by movi ng the pl unger ~ O.175A0about the central l ength,
1 = (mxO/2) + (A,/4). Over thi s tuni ng range, the frequency sensi ti vi ty
of a short l ength 11between the magnetron and the stub i s uni mportant,
the onl y necessary cri teri on bei ng that i t be el ectri cal l y mh,/2 l ong.
Under the above condi ti on then, the equi val ent ci rcui t of Fi g. 1413
for doubl e-output tuni ng i s appropri ate i f the l ength 1 i n Fi g. 14.13 i s
Fm. 14.25. -Ri eke di agram of a magnetron tuned by a si ngl e-stub tuner.
ci r cl e i s the l ocus of the tuni ng curve.
The heavy
i denti fi ed wi th the pl unger l ength. Equati on (9) i s then val i d i f QEZ
i s now understood to mean normal magnetron external Q; for the extr eme
val ues of 1 = io/4 t O.l75A0, the useful tuni ng range i s
(25)
A useful al ternate way of descri bi ng si ngl e-stub tuni ng i s shown i n
the typi cal Ri eke di agram of Fi g. 14.25. The tuni ng stub i s connected
at that poi nt ( f m~/2) al ong the output l i ne toward whi ch the frequency
contours conver ge,
tri cal l y mh/2 l ong.
~I bid.
thi s condi ti on bei ng equi val ent to maki ng 1, el ec-
The i mpedance presented to the magnetron by the
I
SEC. 14.10] SI NGLE STUB TUNI NG 591
vari abl e stub and the matched l i ne are r epr esented by poi nts on the heavy
ci rcl e i n thi s di agram. Locati on of the frequency si nk wi thi n rather
than at the edge of the ci rcl e i s the effect of the i i ni te l ength 11. RAri ct-
i ng the useful tuni ng range to 1 = Ao/4 ~ O.175A0 corresponds to operat-
i ng on that semi ci rcl e of the heavy ci rcl e center ed at the match poi nt
of the di agram.
r-
I
CHAPTER 15
ELECTRONI C TUNI NG
BY W. V. SMI TH
The devel opment of mi crowave magnetrons has unti l r ecentl y been
concer ned onl y wi th on-off pul se modul ati on as a means of transmi tti ng
i ntel l i gence. Because the magnetron i s a sel f-exci ted osci l l ator, not an
ampl i fi er, i t i s i mpossi bl e to modul ate at l ow power l evel s and then
ampl i fy to the desi red output as i n conventi onal ampl i tude- and fr e-
quency-modul ati on systems; i t i s necessary i nstead for the i mpressed
si gnal to modul ate the ful l output of the tube i n one stage. As a conse-
quence, the power consumpti on i n the modul ator must i ncrease as the
output power i s i ncreased. Al though thi s qual i tati ve observati on appl i es
to both ampl i tude modul ati on and frequency modul ati on, the modul ati ng
power requi rements for ampl i tude modul ati on may be deduced i n a
strai ghtforward fashi on from the stati c characteri sti cs of magnetrons and
wi l l not be di scussed further. I t wi l l be seen from the same stati c
characteri sti cs that a frequency modul ati on of several megacycl es per
second accompani es any strai ghtforward ampl i tude modul ati on of
mi crowave magnetrons. Al though i t woul d seem from Chap. 16,
(Stabi l i zati on of Frequency, that ther e may be ways to over come thi s
di ffi cul ty, nei ther the theor y nor the experi ments wi th ampl i tude modul a-
ti on of frequency-stabi l i zed magnetrons have been pursued far enough
to demonstrate compl etel y the practi cal i ty of ampl i tude modul ati on.
Frequency modul ati on, whi ch i s the subject of thi s chapter, has been
demonstrated to be practi cal and rests on a sound theoreti cal basi s.
Present f-m magnetron desi gns are of two cl asses: el ectron-beam tuni ng
and magnetron-di ode tuni ng. Both are dependent on vari ati on of the
space charge to pr oduce the frequency modul ati on, but they di ffer i n
the means empl oyed to control the space charge.
ELECTRON-BEAM TUNI NG
16.1. General Consi derati ons.The physi cal si zes i nvol ved i n mi cro-
wave resonant-cavi ty osci l l ators suggest a di rect method of el ectroni cal l y
varyi ng the cavi ty frequency that i s not feasi bl e for l onger wavel ength
osci l l ators. Thi s method consi sts of i njecti ng an el ectr on beam of
vari abl e i ntensi ty i nto a regi on of hi gh r-f el ectri c fi el ds i n the cavi ty.
These r-f fi el ds i nduce r-f components of el ectr on moti on, that i s, r-f
592
(a)
F1o. 15.1 .Exampl es of el ectroni c tuni ng of m-agnetrons. (a) I nternal tuni ng. H is the d-c magneti c fi el d; B i s the el ectron
beam; 1 i s the beam l ength; d i s the beam wi dth; E i s the r -f el ectri c fi el d; D i s the gap wi dth; fi D i s the r -f vol tage fi EF; h is the
condenser pl ate hei ght; A i s the condenser area lh traversed by the beam; AD is the gap regi on traversed by the beam; Ad is the
beam region; C is the cathode for the el ectron beam; G i s the control gri d; L%i s the scr een gri d; R-C is the r efl ector or col l ector;
V, i s the cathode-to-screen-gri d vol tage, whi ch equal s the cathode-to-condenser pl ate .,ol tage; and h i s the copper bl ock. (b)
External tuni ng, showi ng the magnetron and reactance tube.
694
ELECTRONIC TUNING [Sm. 152
currents that for si mpl e cases may be consi dered to be anal ogous to the
di spl acement currents i n a di el ectri c. I n thi s si mpl i fi ed pi cture, the
vari abl e i ntensi ty of the el ectr on stream i s anal ogous to a vari abl e di el ec-
tri c constant i n the cavi ty, hence a vari abl e resonant frequency of the
cavi ty osci l l ator. Asanumeri cal exampl e, the frequency ofa4000-Mc/
sec c-w magnetron wi th an output power of 25 watts can be modul ated
+ 5 Me/see by a f 10-ma modul ati on of a 100-vol t, 10-ma el ectr on beam.
The i nci dent ampl i tude modul ati on i n thi s i l l ustrati on i s negl i gi bl e.
Typi cal exampl es of magnetrons that are tuned by el ectr on beams are
shown i n Fi g. 15. l a and b,
I n Fi g. 15.l a the el ectr on beam i s shot through a porti on of the sl ot
of a hol e-and-sl ot magnetron, whereas i n Fi g. 15, lb the beam i s shot
through the capaci ti ve regi on of a cavi ty coupl ed to the magnetron
(see Chap. 14 for a general di scussi on of cavi ty-tuned magnetrons).
The same nomencl ature and deri vati ons wi l l be appl i cabl e to both Fi g.
15. l a and b i f i n Fi g. 15.l b the term cavi ty i s understood to appl y to
the combi nati on of the magnetron and the reactance tube. I n Fi g.
15. l a the el ectr on beam traverses a regi on of hi gh r-f el ectri c fi el d whi ch
i s perpendi cul ar to the d-c moti on of the el ectrons. The el ectr on beam
i s accel erated by the screen-gri d potenti al Vh and passes between the
segments of the anode bl ock, whi ch i s at screen-gri d potenti al . A
magneti c fi el d H, paral l el to the axi s of the tube, keeps the beam focused.
The beam i ntensi ty i s vari ed by the control gri d G, and i n the si mpl est
case the beam i s col l ected by the col l ector R C, whi ch may or may not
be at the copper -bl ock potenti al Vb.
15.2. Fundamental Equati ons of Beam Tuni ng. General Case.The
i mportant ci rcui t parameters of a resonant cavi ty are i ts unl oaded
Q = Q. and i ts resonant frequency v,.
I f thi s cavi ty i s traversed by an
el ectr on beam, i t may be shown by perturbati on methods that, provi di ng
the r-f ener gy stor ed i n the el ectr on stream i s smal l compared wi th that
i n the cavi ty and provi di ng the cavi ty resonances are spaced far apart
compared wi th the frequency shi ft i nduced by the el ectrons, the onl y
effects of the el ectr on stream are to change the Q of the cavi ty from
Q. to Q. and to change i ts resonant frequency from VOto v. The deri va-
ti on of Q. and Av fol l ows. 1
I f ther e i s no el ectr on beam, Maxwel l s equati ons for the fi el ds i n the
cavi ty are
F X 170 = iuo~o~o (la)
and
V X 170 = i uOc@O,
(l b)
1 A. Bafi os, Jr., and D. S. Saxon, An El ectroni c Modul ator for C-w Magnetrons,
RL Report No. 748, June 26, 1945.
SEC. 152] FUNDA MENTAL EQUATI ONS OF BEAM TUNI NG 595
wher e ~0 and Ho r epr esent the compl ex vector ampl i tudes of the ewe:
components of el ectri c and magneti c fi el ds, whi ch are denoted by the
subscri pt O when no el ectrons are present. The el ectri c fi el d sati sfi es
the boundary condi ti on that i ts tangenti al component vani sh on the
metal l i c wal l s of the cavi ty. Thus, on these wal l s that are assumed to
be per fectl y conducti ng
?ZXEO= O,! (2)
wher e n i s a uni t vector normal to the surface.
When el ectrons are present, Maxwel l s equati ons are
V X B = iupOE (3a)
and
v x B = i w,oE + J, (3b)
wher e ~ i s the compl ex vector ampl i tude of the e-i u~component of the
cur r ent densi ty. I n thi s case u may be a compl ex number (see Chap. 7)
the real part of whi ch represents frequency and the i magi nary part, a
dampi ng term contri buted by the el ectrons. The boundary condi ti ons
are unchanged by the pr esence of el ectrons, and agai n
nXE=O (4)
on the wal l s of the cavi ty.
I
I n or der to fi nd the shi ft i n resonant frequency pr oduced by the el ec-
trons, the scal ar product of Z ti mes the conjugate of Eq. (l b) i s subtracted
from the scal ar product of ~ ti mes the conjugate of Eq. (l a), yi el di ng
~VXE~E.VXD~=i uO(pOfi .fl ~+@.l ?$). (5)
Si mi l arl y, the di fference of the scal ar products of @ ti mes Eq. (3a)
and E$ ti mes Eq. (3b) yi el ds
fl ~. Vxfl -~, VX~=i w(p,~~ j+c, ~.~$) ~.~}. (6)
By addi ng Eqs. (5) and (6) and i ntegrati ng the resul t over the enti re
vol ume V of the cavi ty,
I n wri ti ng the l eft-hand si de of Eq. (7), use has been made of the vector
i denti ty
V(AXB)= B.(VXA) A(VX B).
By the di ver gence theorem, the l eft si de of Eq. (7) can be r ewr i tten as a
surface i ntegral over the boundi ng surface of the cavi ty. I f n i s the
I
ELECTI WNI C TUNI NG [sm. 15.2 596
outward normal ,
\
V.(E;x H+ ExRj)dv
v

!
n(fi$x~+~X@)d S=O (8)
s
because the tangenti al components of both ~0 and ~ vani sh on the metal -
l i c boundary of the cavi ty. Hence Eq. (7) reduces to
(9)
Thus far the cal cul ati on has been ri gorous, but Eq. (9) can be si mpl i fi ed
i f anal ysi s i s restri cted to the condi ti on wher e E and ~ di ffer onl y sl i ghtl y
from ~, and ~o. Then
(l o)
wher e W i s the average ener gy stor ed i n the unperturbed cavi ty and i s
equal to
The el ectroni c dampi ng i s best shown by rewri ti ng Eq. (10) i n the form
Av.1 1
trot=
\
%ZJ J OW v
~.~*dV,
Vo
(11)
wher e AV i s the frequency shi ft and Q.1 i s the el ectroni c Q, whi ch equal s
27r ti mes the ener gy stor ed di vi ded by the ener gy l ost per cycl e to the
el ectrons. I f the cavi ty wal l s are not per fectl y conducti ng, Q.t can be
combi ned wi th Qu of the cavi ty i n the usual manner, that i s,
+l ++=+L.
e
The pl ausi bi l i ty of 13q. (11) may be seen by real i zi ng that
/
~.~*dV
v
i s the anal ogue of P* . ~ i n ordi nary ci rcui t theor y. Ther efor e, the real
part of
I
v ~ . E* dV is twi ce the wor k done per second on the el ectrons
by the cavi ty fi el ds, and, by defi ni ti on, di vi si on by 87rv0Wyi el ds l /2Q,t,
whi ch i s the resul t gi ven i n Eq. (1 1). Furthermore, i n conventi onal
ci rcui t theor y, the addi ti on of a si mpl e capaci ti ve or i nducti ve el ement
to the ci rcui t i n such a way that onl y a smal l proporti on of the stor ed
ener gy i s associ ated wi th the added el ement resul ts i n a rel ati ve shi ft
SEC. 152] FUN DA A4ENTAL EQUATIONS OF BEAM T1lNING 597
i n resonant frequency equal to one-hal f the rati o of thi s ener gy i n the
added el ement to the total ener gy.
Thus, because the i magi nary part
.-
of l /2rvoJJE* N i s twi ce the ener gy stor ed i n the el ectr on beam
that passes through a magnetron cavi ty, di vi si on by 4W gi ves the rel ati ve
frequency shi ft. I t i s to be noted that Eq. (11) i s val i d i n al l el ectroni c
tuni ng schemes of practi cal i nterest because the ener gy stor ed i n the
beam i s smal l compared wi th the total ener gy stored.
I n an osci l l ator the el ectrons do wor k on the r-f fi el ds; that i s, Q.1 i s
negati ve. I n di scussi ng el ectroni c tuni ng, al though the fi nal ai m i s to
modul ate the frequency of an osci l l ati ng magnetron, i t i s conveni ent to
dk.cuss fi rst the changes i n the resonant frequency and Q that are pr o-
duced i n a nonosci l l ati ng magnetron by an el ectr on beam that passes
through the same hi gh r-f fi el ds that woul d exi st i n an osci l l ati ng mag-
netron. I f the Q i s not l ower ed greatl y, the rel ati ve frequency shi ft for
the osci l l ati ng magnetron wi l l then be equal to that for the nonosci l l ati ng
magnetron. Al so, al though the fi nal ai m i s to modul ate the magnetron
frequency by modul ati ng the el ectr on beam at some modul ati on fr e-
quency .~, future deri vati ons wi l l be restri cted to computi ng the fr e-
quency shi ft pr oduced by a steady el ectr on beam. Because ~ remai ns
essenti al l y unchanged over many cycl es of r-f fi el ds when u~<< v,
the modul ati on may then be tr eated as a successi on of quasi -steady
states, and the ensui ng spectrum may be computed from conventi onal f-m
anal ysi s. Rati os of V- to POl ess than ~ are, i n general , sati sfactory.
Two methods of frequency modul ati on that i nvol ve changes i n ~ are
possi bl e. I n one the magni tude of ~ i s changed, and i n the other the
phase @ of ~ i s changed rel ati ve to ~. Any change i n the phase changes
the val ue of Q.1, whereas a change i n the magni tude of ~ mai ntai ns
l /Qez equal to zer o i f ~ i s kept constant at a val ue such that ~ ~~~, i s
/
i magi nary. The r efl ex kl ystron i n the mi ddl e of one of i ts modes i s a
good exampl e of frequency modul ati on by means of phase modul ati on;
the phase i s control l ed by the r efl ector . The kl ystron i l l ustrates the
typi cal vari ati on of Q.1 (her e negati ve) wi th frequency and the consequent
vari ati on i n effi ci ency wi th frequency.
Unijorm Electron Gas.The appl i cati on of Eq. (11) maybe i l l ustrated
by the si mpl e exampl e of a cavi ty fi l l ed wi th a uni form el ectr on gas of
N el ectrons per cubi c meter. At frequenci es hi gh enough so that the
moti on of the el ectrons takes pl ace i n a regi on so smal l that the sDati al
vari ati on of the r-f fi el d can be negl ected, ~ may be si mpl y eval uated
I
I
from the equati ons of moti on, negl ecti ng Lor entz forces.2 Thus, wher e
I See L. P. Smi th and C, Shul man, Pri nceton Techni cal Report No. 22C, for an
anal ysi s appl i cabl e to the type of tuni ng shown i n Fi g. 15.1.
i
~A. Bafi os, Jr., and D. S. Saxon, op. mt.
598 ELECTRONI C TUNI NG [SEC. 15.2
vi s the el ectr on vel oci ty andr i s the vector di spl acement of the el ectron,
and
()
dv
%=
~~elut>
(12)
(13)
(14)
The magni tude of the cur r ent densi ty ~ may be cal cul ated from Eq.
(13). Thus,
(15)
wher e N i s the number of el ectrons per cubi c meter. Substi tuti on of
Eq. (15) i n Eq. (11), rememberi ng that
w = +ql
/
1~1 dV, (16)
v
yi el ds the wel l -known di spersi on formul a for an el ectr on gas of l ow
densi ty,
Av 1 Ne2
___
pe
Vo
= 2mu2eo
(17)
co2mu2
wher e p i s the charge densi ty. Because col l i si ons wi th the cavi ty wal l s
are i gnored and the el ectr on vel oci ty i s a peri odi c functi on of ti me about
a fi xed poi nt, ther e i s no way for the el ectrons to abstract ener gy from
the r-f fi el ds, and i t fol l ows that Q.1 i s i nfi ni te. Equati on (17) i s the
fracti onal change of the resonant frequency of a cavi ty from i ts empty-
space val ue to i ts val ue when the cavi ty i s fi l l ed wi th matter havi ng a
di el ectri c constant
(18)
For hi gh beam-current densi ti es (0.2 amp/cm2 at 100 vol ts for a
hi gh-vacuum tube) N = 2.1 X 106. Substi tuti on i n Eq. (17) shows
that even for thi s val ue of N, at 10,000 Me/see, the total frequency shi ft
due to the el ectrons i s onl y 8.5 Me/see. Al though a val ue of N sub-
stanti al l y hi gher than 1015 coul d be obtai ned by an arc di scharge, no
control of the densi ty woul d be possi bl e i n the hi gh r-f fi el ds present.
I t i s possi bl e to i ncrease the tuni ng consi derabl y by i ncreasi ng ~ for
fi xed J??and fi xed d-c cathode emi ssi on usi ng ei ther of two methods.
Referri ng to the fi rst hal f of Eq. (15) these methods maybe dkti ngui shed
] J. A. Stratton, Elecirornngnetic Theory, McGraw-Hi l l , 1941,pp. 325-327.
SEC. 15.3] THE PRI NCI PLES OF ELECTRON-BEAM TUNI NG 599
as i ncreasi ng ei ther the number of el ectrons N or the vel oci ty of the
el ectrons v. I n the kl ystron, an exampl e of the fi rst method, an i ni ti al l y
smal l vel oci ty modul ati on superposed on a beam of el ectrons i s changed
by means of a dri ft space i nto a densi ty modul ati on. By the use of a
r efl ector the regi on of hi gh-densi ty modul ati on i s made to coi nci de wi th
the regi on of hi gh ~ that pr oduced the ori gi nal vel oci ty modul ati on.
Thus N i s i ncreased l ocal l y wi th no added drai n on the d-c emi ssi on from
the cathode. An exampl e of the second method i s a cavi ty contai ni ng
el ectrons i n a magneti c fi el d of fl ux densi ty B withassoci ated cycl otr on
frequency
eB
C = 2;m
(19)
I n those regi ons wher e ~ i s perpendi cul ar to B, the resonance effects
near v = v, can be shown to i ncrease greatl y the ampl i tude of the di s-
pl acement vector r for fi xed ~. As a consequence v i s i ncreased pr opor -
ti onal l y because an el ectr on must now cover a gr eater di stance i n one
cycl e.
The present di scussi on i s l i mi ted to the method of varyi ng the el ectr on
vel oci ty v, whi ch so far appears to be the onl y practi cal way of handl i ng
the hi gh output power of magnetrons.
15.3. The Pri nci pl es of El ectron-beam Tuni ng i n a Magneti c Fi el d.
Fi gure 151 wi l l be taken as the starti ng poi nt for a quanti tati ve anal ysi s
of el ectron-beam tuni ng. The cavi ty contai ns a regi on of hi gh and fai rl y
uni form el ectri c fi el d. A beam of el ectrons can readi l y be i njected i nto
thk hi gh-fi el d regi on and can be kept focused by an al i gni ng magneti c
fi el d that, bei ng perpendi cul ar to the el ectri c fi el d, al so serves to deter -
mi ne the ampl i tude I rI of the el ectroni c osci l l ati ons and hence the amount
of tuni ng attai nabl e.
The probl em may be di vi ded i nto an r-f probl em and a d-c probl em.
I n the r-f probl em the tuni ng, the ampl i tude I rl , and the el ectroni c Q
are eval uated i n terms of the d-c cur r ent densi ty JO, the d-c el ectr on
vel oci ty vO,the magneti c fi el d B, and the physi cal di mensi ons. I n the
d-c probl em, J O and vo are eval uated i n terms of the cathode-to-bl ock
potenti al Vt, and the physi cal di mensi ons. I n both probl ems the effects
of the fri ngi ng fi el ds above and bel ow the gap regi on are negl ected.
The effecti ve l umpi ng of the capaci tance i n Fi g. 15.1 concentrates the
r-f el ectri c fi el d i n the gap regi on and l ~aves the r-f fri ngi ng fi el ds smal l .
The l ocati on of the beam i n a pl ane of r-f symmetry further mi ni mi zes
the fri ngi ng, whi ch i s esti mated by Saxon and Bafi osl to affect tuni ng
and el ectroni c Q by l eas than 1 per cent. The somewhat mor e i mportant
1A. Bafi os,Jr., and D. S. Saxon, An El ectroni cModul ator for C-w Magnetrons,
RL Repor t No. 748, June 26, 1945.
I
600
ELECTRONI C TUNI NG [SEC. 15.3
effects of the fri ngi ng fi el ds for the d-c probl em are shownl al ways to
i ncrease the cur r ent necessary to effect a gi ven amount of tuni ng. I f
the fri ngi ng fi el ds are negl ected, the deri vati ons that fol l ow r epr esent a
l ower l i mi t on J o.
Fi gure 152 i l l ustrates the spi ral path of an el ectr on i n the beam as
i t travel s through the cavi ty. The el ectrons begi n at zer o ampl i tude,
ri se to a maxi mum radi us l r~.1, and fal l agai n to zer o; thi s process
repeats i tsel f to fi rst approxi mati on wi th a frequency v v.asl ong as the
el ectrons remai n between the pl ates. The frequency v V. i s a beat
between the operati ng frequency and the cycl otr on frequency v. asso-
Fm. 15.2.Path of an el ectron i n beam
tuni ng.
ci ated wi th the magneti c fi el d B
[Eq. (19)]. The el ectrons enter
the gap regi on wi th a ki neti c en-
er gy mv~/2. The ki neti c ener gy
that the el ectrons gai n whi l e i n the
gap regi on contri butes to the
stor ed r-f e n e r g y and hence
changes the cavi ty frequency.
The extra ki neti c ener gy possessed
by the el ectrons when they l eave
the gap (ener gy that has been
acqui red from the r-f fi el ds of the
cavi ty) i s ul ti matel y di ssi pated at
the col l ector and hence represents
a l oss or resi stance i n the ci rcui t.
I n the r-f probl em, the anal ogous rel ati ons to Eqs. (14) and (17) of the
.,
el ectr on gas treatment have been deri ved by Saxon and Bafi os. 1 Essen-
ti al l y they are
2eE 1
Tm=
muz l ~z 11
Av pe
!l~
.
Vo
2mu2co 1 fi z
and
wher e
(20)
(21a)
(21b)
(22)
I n Eqs. (21)
stor ed el ectri c fi el d ener gy i n beam regi on d
q=
total stor ed el ectri c fi el d ener gy
=~P,
1I bti.
SEC. 153]
THE PRI NCI PLES OF ELECTRON-BEAM TUNI NG 601
wher e
d = bearnwi dth,
D = gap wi dth,
ener gy of the el ectri c fi el d stor ed i n the gap regi on
p=
total stor ed el ectri c fi el d ener gy
1 (23)
~ = charge densi ty = $. (24)
F and G are functi ons of the phase of the spi ral path at whi ch the el ectr on
l eaves the gap regi on. Thei r val ues, general l y l ess than uni ty, are
F=l _S+l si na
2a
(25a)
and
(25b)
wher e
(26)
~=(u uc):=(u uc)t
and
t = transi t ti me through the gap.
Thus, a i s the phase angl e of the beat frequency between v and V. over
the l ength h of the gap. The approxi mati ons that have been made r ender
Eqs. (20) and (25) i nval i d near 6 = O and al so i n the i mmedi ate vi ci ni ty
Ofp=l .
The i nterpretati on of Eq. (25b) i n terms of the spi ral path of Fi g. 15.2
i s cl ear for the case of G = O; that i s,
~ = Z=n,
wher e n i s an i nteger # O, (27)
because thi s i s the condi ti on i n whi ch the el ectrons l eave the gap regi on
at a node i n thei r r-f moti on, thus abstracti ng no r-f ener gy from the
fi el d. The quanti ti es F and G are pl otted i n Fi g. 15.3. Separate eval ua-
ti ons of Eqs. (26) and (21) l ead to an i ndetermi nant answer at @ = 1,
j
~ = o; but the pr oper l i mi ti ng process shows that the tuni ng i s zer o
j
and the l oss fi ni te for thi s practi cal l y uni mportant case. I t i s i mportant
to note that the change of si gn of (1 62) i n Eq. (21b) at@ = 1 consi dered
i n conjuncti on wi th Fi g. 15.3 means that l /2Q.t i s al ways posi ti ve or
zer o whereas the tuni ng changes si gn near @ = 1 because Av i s posi ti ve
for @ < 1 and negati ve for ~ > 1.
Consi deri ng now the d-c probl em, the maxi mum cur r ent densi ty
:i yabsence of r _f fi el ds ~s, that can be sent between the two pl ates at a d-c potenti al Vb, i n
,
I A. V. Haeff, R-oc. I RE, 27, 586, Septcmhm 1939.
602
ELECTRONI C TUNI NG [SEC. 153
wher e r~., i s a sl owl y varyi ng functi on of d/D pl otted i n Fi g. 154.
I t i s assumed that the superposed r-f fi el d does not greatl y modi fy Eq.
(28). The space-charge effect that l i mi ts the cur r ent al so reduces the
el ectr on vel oci ty, thus affecti ng p, F, and G i n Eqs. (21). An effecti ve
beam vel oci ty v., determi ned by an effecti ve beam vol tage Vo, must
i .O .
1
\
o
G
\
\
\
-1,0
-- ~ .~,a >0
-~
-4T -2T
a
o 27 k
I
/-\
~.=
1,0 ~
F
\
\
\
\
o
\
\
@=l
\
\
--- p =2,a .co
\
-- p .~,a >Q
-1.0
-4X -2%
a
o 27 h
Fm .153.-F and G as functi ons of a and ~.
i
I
SEC. 15.3]
THE PRI NCI PLES OF ELECTRON-BEAM TUNI NG
603
I
ther efor e be used i n these equati ons.
Because AV/VOvari es as (1/vo)...
,
2.0
1.8
1.6
/
$
~ 1.4
1.2
1.0
0.8
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
d
.
FI G. 15.4.Parameter r = as a functi on of
d/ D,
to a fi rst approxi mati on, I /ve wi l l
be defi ned as (1/vo).v, and
I
2
~vo = <e.
2
(29)
The ratio Vo/ Vb is rel ated to d/D
and J o/ J O_x as shown i n Fi g. 155.
I f Eq. (27) i s to be sati sfi ed
I
over the whol e f-m band of the
tube, a and ther efor e Vb must be
mai ntai ned constant; ther efor e
I
the frequency modul ati on must be
1
attai ned by varyi ng J Oby the grid
,1
cOntrOl whi l e mai ntai ni ng vb con-
1
stant. Under these condi ti ons
the frequency modul ati on wi l l k
l i near wi th Jo except wher e J O i s
n e a r t h e space-charge-l i mi ted
val ue J ti, i n whi ch case the rapi d
vari ati on i n Vo wi l l destr oy the l i neari ty (Fi g. 15.5). Ther e i s usual l y
some maxi mum val ue of r permi ssi bl e befor e an excessi ve number of el ec-
#Jo max
FIG. 15.6.v0iVb as a functi on of J oI J ,W for @Veral v~uea of dlD-
trons Ki ts a part of the tube. I n Fi g. 15.1, for i nstance, thi s val ue
mi ght be
Dd
?-mx=
2
(30)
604 hLtiCTltONl L 7 U,VIN(I [SEC. 154
and represents the di stance between the el ectr on beam and the cavi ty
wal l s i n the absence of an r-f el ectri c fi el d. I f the number of el ectrons
per cubi c meter N i s mai ntai ned constant, then r-, l i mi ts the power
that can be handl ed for a gi ven amount of tuni ng because, at a fi xed
r-f vol tage, changi ng the magneti c fi el d to i ncrease the tuni ng i ncreases
the orbi t si ze and an i ncrease i n the r-f fi el d at fi xed tuni ng l i kewi se
i ncreases the orbi t.
16.4. The Engi neeri ng Equati ons of El ectron-beam Tuni ng.-Equa-
ti ons (20) through (30) may be used ei ther to anal yze the el ectroni c
tuni ng that wi l l be avai l abl e wi th a gi ven anode-bl ock desi gn or to
synthesi ze an opti mum anode-bl ock desi gn for a gi ven amount of el ec-
troni c tuni ng and output power . The fi rst probl em i s by far the si mpl er.
By starti ng wi th the magnetron output power , the r-f vol tage across the
gap through whi ch the el ectrons are to travel may be computed by the
methods di scussed i n previ ous chapters. Equati ons (2o) and (30) then
determi ne how cl osel y one may approach the cycl otr on frequency
befor e el ectrons stri ke the wal l s of the gap. The tuni ng and the 10SS
may then be computed from Eqs. (21), wher e the maxi mum val ue of p
i s l i mi ted by the cathode emi ssi on or by the space-charge l i mi t [Eq, (28)].
I n the synthesi s of an opti mum anode-bl ock desi gn, however , a
conveni ent pr ocedur e i s to start wi th the desi red magnetron output power
P., the external Q = Q., the frequency VO, the desi red tuni ng Au, and the
maxi mum safe peak cur r ent densi ty .Jo, whi ch i s determi ned by cathode
qual i ty, as the i ndependent vari abl es. These wi l l then determi ne the
val ues of the dependent vari abl es Vb, p, ~, D, d, 1, and h. The pr ocedur e
i s as fol l ows. Fi rst, through ~E~, the r-f vol tage appeari ng across the
gap Po and Q, may be rel ated to l r~,,.1and D2 subject to certai n restri c-
ti ons. I t ~vi l l then fol l ow that the product V. F(A~/ YO) determi nes ~Vbj
subject to certai n other restri cti ons, one of whi ch i s that the space-
charge l i mi t Joi n.,
i s made equal to the cathode-emi ssi on l i mi t tl ~~.
From Vb, J ,P, ~~,, and Av/v,, i t i s then possi bl e to determi ne D and 6
for fi xed d/ D and p. Constructi on consi derati ons l i mi t the choi ce of p,
and other consi derati ons fi x d/ D near the val ue of ~. The no-l oss
condi ti on of Eq. (27) determi nes h when P i s known. I f the subsi di ary
restri cti onswhi ch are l ess i mportant i nterrel ati ons of the dependent
vari abl escan be sati sfi ed, the desi gn i s then compl ete.
The fi rst step i s to rel ate P. to ~~~ = ED (see Fi g. 15.l a). To do
thi s a characteri sti c admi ttance Y, i s ascri bed to the gap regi on accordi ng
to the rel ati on
YC=2
(
ener gy stor ed i n gap regi on
)-
1 lh

pF
60 ix
(31)
usi ng onl y the d-c capaci tance of the gap regi on as a fi rst approxi mati on
i
SEC. 15.4] EQUATI ONS OF ELECTRON-BEAM TUNI NG 605
toi ts actual val ue. Thi sd-c approxi mati on to Y.wi l l be usedthroughout
thi s chapter. I f the magnetron i s coupl ed to the useful l oad by some l ead
(not shown i n Fi g. 15.1) havi ng an external Q = Q, as defi ned i n Chap.
5, Eqs. (23) and (31) together wi th the defi ni ti on of Q, yi el d
(32)
I t wi l l be seen that i n addi ti on to P,, Eq. (32) contai ns the new dependent
vari abl e Y., whi ch i s a functi on of thr ee of the si x dependent vari abl es
previ ousl y l i sted. Al though thei r vari ati on i n subsequent equati ons i s
mor e i mportant, p, Po, and ~E enter Eq. (32) i n an i nsensi ti ve fashi on,
f
appeari ng as fracti onal powers. I t i s conveni ent, ther efor e, to make a
tri al guess at D, 1, and h, to use these esti mates i n subsequent cal cul ati ons,
and then to revi se the esti mates as i s requi red by the fi nal computati on.
The quanti ty p [Eq. (23)], whi ch depends on 1, i s easi l y esti mated. For
a tube l i ke that shown i n Fi g. 15.l a p woul d be approxi matel y ~ because
one of si x osci l l ators i s tuned and over hal f of the el ectri c ener gy stor ed
by the osci l l ator and i ts associ ated strap resi des i n the gap regi on. Mor e
accurate esti mates of p can be made from the ci rcui t anal yses of the
resonant cavi ty gi ven i n Chaps. 2 and 8. The external Q wi l l be deter -
mi ned by condi ti ons not affecti ng the el ectroni c tuni ng probl em, such
as pul l i ng fi gure, mode spectrum, and the el ectroni c effi ci ency of the
magnetron i tsel f. Subject to these condi ti ons, Q, shoul d be kept as l ow
1
as possi bl e to mi ni mi ze VRF.
A second rel ati on i nvol vi ng V,F may be deri ved from Eqs. (2o) and
(30).
VRF..X =
()
??UJzl(pz 1)1 ~ _ : D2
4e
5x10(p2- 1(1 -NV 33)
Equati on (33) represents the maxi mum permi ssi bl e r-f vol tage at whi ch
the el ectrons do not hi t the pl ates. Equati ons (32) and (33) set an
(
upper l i mi t to the output power P. that can be handl ed by the beam.
By combi ni ng Eqs. (21a), (24), (27), and (29), the fracti onal tuni ng
becomes
I
or , i n mor e practi cal uni ts,
I
t
:&&NY
VOAV= 4.24 X 106 p
(34)
(35)
606
ELECTRONI C TUNI NG
[SEC. 15.4
wher e v i s i n megacycl es per second, J O i n amperes per square centi meter,
and V i n vol ts.
Equati on (35) i s pl otted i n Fi g. 156 wi th the restri c-
ti on that J O = J o~.., under which condition the average value of
(V,/ V,)~fi i s 1.58. To maxi mi ze the fracti onal tuni ng Av/vo whi l e hol d-
i ng VEPm., constant, onl y the quanti ty JO/Vb$$, whi ch i s proporti onal to
the charge densi ty p, must be maxi mi zed, si nce the smal l vari ati on of
FI Q.
1600-
1400
1200
g
?
.s 1000 -
b
~
F
~ 800 -
n
;
/
/
E
~ 600
/
0
z
1
400
/
200
t
{
o 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4
Current densify Jo in anq/cm2
15.6.Anode-bl ock potenti al Vb as a functi on of cur r ent densi ty JO for vari ous val ues
of (D/d)(l i ?2)/P(VAY/104) wi th (vbl~d~ = 1.58.
(V,/VO)~ may be i gnored (see Fi g. 155). I n the space-chaws-limited
regi on, J O may be made equal to ~o~,,, whence, from the proporti onal i ty
of J &x to Vb% i n Eq. (28), AV/VOi s proporti onal to Vb. To i ncrease
V, beyond the poi nt at whi ch J o~., equal s the emi ssi on l i mi t JoP decreases
the tuni ng, however , because the i ncrease i n el ectr on vel oci ty decreases
the space-charge densi ty. Thus Eq. (34) i s maxi mi zed by equati ng
JO to both ~,, and Jo-,.
El i mi nati ng J O = J o~s. from Eq. (34) by
means of Eq, (28) and mul ti pl yi ng the resul tant equati on by Eq. (33)
SEC. 15.4] EQUATI ONS OF ELECTRON-BEAM TUNI NG 607
yi el d
(V+L=(l -:)ww-=~vb 36)
wher e @ i s pl otted i n Fi g. 15.7, assumi ng (Vb/ VO)~ = 1.58.
I t i s to be noted that the product p$Vb i s i ndependent of magneti c
fi el d, agai n emphasi zi ng that B can affect orbi t si ze onl y for a gi ven r-f
vol tage. The tuni ng i s di rectl y proporti onal to the rel ati ve orbi t si ze,
and the permi ssi bl e r-f vol tage
i s i nversel y proporti onal to i t.
Equati on (36) for constant d/ D is
i ndependent of D as a consequence
of the space-charge l i mi t set by
Eq. (28).
Equati on (36) determi nes the
cathode-to-bl ock potenti al V, as a
functi on of d/ D. Maxi mi zi ng
both AV/VO and ~R,(Av/vo) i n Eqs.
(34) and (36) wi th r espect to d/ D
r e presents a compromi se best
sati sfi ed when d/D i s approxi -
matel y equal to ~, as the pl ot of
(d/D) @i n Fi g. 157 demonstrates.
The val ue of V, [Eq. (35)] i s an
i mportant cri teri on of the prac-
ti cal i ty of the desi gn. I f V, i s
too hi gh, the tuner power wi l l be
great; i f i t i s too l ow, cl ose gri d
$
FI G. 15.7.Parameter + ae a functi on of dfD.
spaci ngs are necessary to attai n the requi si te cur r ent densi ty. I t i s
al ways possi bl e i n the l atter case to i ncrease V,, and thus to i ncrease
ei ther tuni ng or power-handl i ng abi l i ty of the desi gn.
To summari ze the engi neeri ng pr ocedur e to thi s poi nt then, ~ has been
determi ned by Eq. (32) from PO and Q. as i ndependent vari abl es and
from tri al val ues of Y. and p. From ~RF, Av/vo and p, together wi th a
choi ce of d/ D near ~, and the assumed val ue of (V,/ VO)M = 1.58, Vb i s
determi ned by Eq. (36) and Fi gs. 15.4 and 157. The assumpti on
equati ng JoP to J- i n deri vi ng Eq. (36) al l ows determi nati on of D
by Eq. (28). Wi th D known, @ can be determi ned from Eq. (33).
I t i s to be noted that a tri al val ue of D had been assumed i n computi ng
Y, by Eq. (31), but i t i s, i n general , not appropri ate to make a new
esti mate of Ye at thi s poi nt, because 1and h are sti l l arbi trary.
The next step i n the desi gn i s to determi ne i f the requi si te val ue of
19i s consi stent wi th other demands of the ,probl em. I n the fi rst pl ace,
608 ELECTRONIC TUNING
P determi nes the cavi ty hei ght h necessary to
condi ti on may be r ewr i tten
[SEC. 154
sati sfy Eq. (27). Thi s
()
n
_ (lo)~h=
505(1-@ V, h

;>>1
;T v, v#
()
To i
(37)
wher e v. i s defi ned by Eq. (29).
Equati on (37) represents the no-l oss condi ti on or , stri ctl y, the
mi ni mum-l oss condi ti on, si nce ther e i s a vel oci ty di stri buti on across the
beam. Because VO varies wi th the cur r ent as shown i n Fi g. 15.5, some
compromi se val ue of VO/Vb must be chosen, dependi ng on the rati o of
~0 to ~O~.X,at whi ch the l oss i s to be mi ni mi zed. A reasonabl e val ue for
(V,/ VE,) is 0.7, i n whi ch case
h nVb}i
x= 600(1 P)
(38)
Al though ther e are two adjustabl e parameters i n Eq. (38), n and h,
i t cannot al ways be sati sfi ed, because both parameters have further
restri cti ons. Thus n must be an i nteger gr eater than or equal to 1, and
the val ue of h must be consi stent wi th consi derati ons of si ze, cavi ty
admi ttance Y. effecti ve l umpi ng of capaci tance (h < A/4), and magnet
wei ght. Furthermore, i f i nternal tuni ng of the tube i s i ntended, h
may al ready be determi ned by other consi derati ons such as magnetron
output power . For tuni ng of approxi matel y one-tenth of 1 per cent i t i s
not necessary to sati sfy Eq. (37), al though, as may be seen from Fi g.
15.3 and Eq. (21a), i t i s sti l l desi rabl e to keep a [see Eq. (26)] gr eater than
m so that F wi l l remai n near uni ty.
An addi ti onal restri cti on on b i s that i t cannot be chosen too near
1 for reasons of magnet stabi l i ty and of tunabi l i ty. I f the magnetron
i s to be mechani cal l y tunabl e over a 10 per cent range, the extr eme val ues
of (9 1) are 0.05 and 0.15 for a center val ue of (6 1) = 0.09. Thi s
corresponds to a 300 per cent change i n (P 1) and woul d probabl y
resul t i n an i ntol erabl e vari ati on i n l oss and ranges of frequency modul a-
ti on. I t i s al ways possi bl e to vary the magneti c fi el d i n a way that keeps
@ constant over the mechani cal tuni ng range. Even i f the approach of
o to 1 i s not l i mi ted by the above consi derati ons, a fundamental l i mi t i s
set by the i nherent frequency sensi ti vi ty of Eq. (21a), the ri ght-hand
member of whi ch i s actual l y a functi on of corather than COO as has been
taci tl y assumed wher ever D = V./V has been tr eated as a constant. Thi s
l i mi tati on, usual l y not ver y seri ous, has been dkcussed by Smi th and
Shul man,l who show that at maxi mum tuni ng the approxi mati on of w
1L, P. Smi th and C. Shul man,Pri nceton Techni cal Repor t No, 22C,
SEC. 15.4] EQUATI ONS OF ELEC1RON-BEAM TUNI NG
609
by u, i s sti l l val i d provi di ng that a quanti ty atin defi nedi n Eq. (39),
exceeds 1.
(39)
8
Furthermore, i f a~,. i sl essthan~, mor e than one resonant frequency i s
possi bl e.
When p i s found to be sati sfactory, the total i nput power requi red
for the tuner can be determi ned. To fi nd the total cur r ent the cathode
l ength 1must be known. Thi s quanti ty i s cl osel y rel ated to p, the rati o
of stor ed ener gy i n the gap to total stor ed ener gy i n the cavi ty.
I t i s al so
rel ated to the cavi ty admi ttance Y. i n such a way that to maxi mi ze p
and Y., 1must be as l arge as possi bl e up to the approxi mate l i mi t 1 = x/4,
wher e the l umped-constant approxi mati on of Y. becomes poor .
Wi th the choi ce of 1 determi ned by a compromi se between mi ni mum
cur r ent i nput to the tuner and maxi mum p and Y., al l the vari abl es
have been determi ned. A new esti mate of Y. can then be made, and
the process r epeated i f necessary. I n general , the thi rd approxi mati on
wi l l be sati sfactory.
As i s evi dent from Fi g. 15. l a, the cur r ent need not be col l ected at
the potenti al vb but can be col l ected at some l ower potenti al near VO.
Al ternatel y, the beam can be made to traverse the gap twi ce i f the el ec-
tr ode R C is made negati ve. I n thi s case the space-charge equati on
[Eq. (28)] sti l l l i mi ts .JOmaxj but now J,m,= r efer s to the sum of the absol ute
val ues of the two cur r ent streams. Thus JO~aXher e equal s twi ce .l oP,
the peak emi ssi on l i mi t of the cur r ent stream l eavi ng the cathode.
Uncertai nti es as to wher e the return cur r ent i s col l ected, whether or not
mor e than two transi ts are possi bl e, etc., compl i cate the use of a r efl ector
at present.
Use of the equati ons deri ved above i s best i l l ustrated by a speci fi c
exampl e. Let the i ndependent vari abl es be Po = 3000 watts, VO= 3000
Me/see, Av = 10 Me/see, JoP = 0.2 amp/cm2, and QE = 200. NO
reflector will be used. The fracti ons p and d/ D wi l l be assumed equal
to ~ and ~ respecti vel y. As a fi rst tri al , the choi ce D = 0.5 cm, t = 2 cm,
and h = 2 cm yi el ds Y. = 0.0133 mho, whence, from Eq. (28), D = 0.85
cm. Next, from Eq. (33) ~ = 1.11, and from Eq. (37) h/n = 2.63 cm.
A choi ce of n = 1, h = 2.63 cm, and 1 = 2 cm gi ves Y. = 0.0103 as a
second approxi mati on. Repeati ng the above process gi ves the conver -
gence shown i n Tabl e 151. For si mpl i ci ty 1 i s mai ntai ned equal to
2 cm. The conver gence i s rapi d despi te the al most twofol d change i n D
from the fi rst guess. Experi mental data on a tube si mi l ar to the above
exampl e are i ncl uded i n Tabl e 15.5.
610 ELECTRONI C TUNI NG [SEC. 155
Tu.m 15,1.AN EXAMPLE OF CALCULATI ONS FORTHEDBSI GN
OF AN ELECTRONI CALLY TUNED MAGNETRON
I ndependent vari abl es:P. = 3000 watts, Y, = 3000Mc/see,
AV = 10 Me/see, J O== 0.2amp/cm2,
QE,
= 200.
Arbi trary dependent vari abl es:P = i, d/ D = +,1 =2.
Trial D, cm h, cm Y., mhos
VRF,
v,, vol ts o n
vol ts
1 0.50 2.00 0.0133 4230 300 1.110 1
2 0.85 2.63 0,0103 4800 341 1.125 1
3 0.90 2.45 0.0091 5120 363 1.130 1
4 0.90 2.44 0.0090 5200 370 1,130 1
15.6. Scal i ng.-The useful ness of scal i ng l aws i n magnetron desi gn
has been ampl y demonstrated i n Chap. 10. Anti ci pati ng a si mi l ar
useful ness i n el ectroni c tuni ng, several scal i ng l aws wi l l be l i sted her e
wi thout deri vati on, because they come from a strai ghtforward appl i cati on
of the previ ousl y devel oped engi neeri ng equati ons.
The si mpl est type of scal i ng i s that i n whi ch the per centage of tuni ng
and the output power are kept constant. I n thi s case, l i near scal i ng of
al l di mensi ons, keepi ng Vb, P, and Qz constant and i ncreasi ng Jo pr opor -
ti onal l y to the square of the frequency, sol ves the probl em, thereby
keepi ng the total cur r ent 1 constant. The total i nput power remai ns
constant, and the hi gh-frequency l i mi t i s set by excessi ve demands on
cathode emi ssi on and cl ose gri d spaci ng.
A mor e practi cal scal i ng probl em i s that i nvol ved i n keepi ng J oP,
p, Y,, and d/ D constant and varyi ng one or mor e of the quanti ti es Av,
v,, or Po. Denoti ng the two scal i ng poi nts by the subscri pts 1 and 2,
and l etti ng PDc = Vdopd be the d-c i nput power to the tuner, the resul t-
i ng scal i ng l aws are
2(2)($2)(3%)
(40)
=(#%#&)
(1 s?)
(1 B;)
(41)
and
2=(9W)W)%
(42)
rh(l + /3Jhl
nl (l + pl )h2
(:)? 2K$)
(43)
nl (l + pl )l l
(YW%Y
(44)
ml (l + l S2)12
nl (l + i%)~DC,
~2(1 + j 32)pDC,
(9%W5Y
(45)
I
I
%oc. 15.6] I NTERNAL VS. EXTERNAL CAVI TY TUNI NG
611
As an i l l ustrati on of the use of these l aws, the exampl e of Tabl e 15.1
wi l l be scal ed from 3000 Me/see to 1000 Me/see and 10,000 Me/see,
keepi ng Av, Po, J op, p, Y., and d/ D constant. The resul ts are shown
TABLE 15.2.FREQUENCY SCALI NG OF THE EXAMPLE I N TABLE 15.1
Quanti ti es hel d constant: P. = 3000 watts, A. = 10 Me/see,
.TO== 0.2 amp/cmY, QE = 200,
p=~,d/ D=~, n = 1, Y. = 0.0090.
V, Me/see v,, vol ts
b
D, cm h, cm 1. cm P~c, watts
1,000 1210 1.390 3.00 6.60 5.650 58.50
3,000 363 1.130 0,90 2.44 2.000
6.50
10,OOO 121 1.045 0.53 0.88 0.725 0.64
i n Tabl e 15.2. The most stri ki ng effect i s the rapi d i ncrease of i nput
power as the frequency i s decreased. The approach of ~ to 1 at hi gh
frequenci es makes the combi nati on of mechani cal and el ectroni c tuni ng
mor e di ffi cul t ther e.
15.6. I nternal vs. External Cavi ty Tuni ng.-The two pri nci pal meth-
ods of uti l i zi ng el ectron-beam tuni ng have been shown i n Fi g. 15. l a
and b. The beam i s shot ei ther through a porti on of one or mor e of the
si de cavi ti es of the magnetron or through a separate cavi ty appropri atel y
coupl ed to the magnetron. At l ong wavel engths, wher e compactness i s
desi rabl e, ther e i s a di sti nct advantage to the i nternal tuner a; at short
wavel engths, wher e the goal frequentl y i s maxi mum si ze of parts, the
external tuner b i s pr efer r ed. I t i s i mportant to compare the el ectri cal
properti es of the two methods i n or der to be abl e to choose between them
i n speci fi c cases.
Nei ther desi gn can be made so that p = 1, the opti mum condi ti on
for Eq. (36). I n the i nternal tuner a, i f N i s the number of osci l l ators,
m the number of si de resonators through whi ch a beam i s shot, TOthe
rati o of stor ed ener gy i n the gap area to stor ed ener gy i n one compl ete
osci l l ator (i ncl udi ng i ts associ ated straps), then
(46)
Vane tubes, because of thei r nonuni form gap wi dth, requi re a modi fi cati on
(whi ch wi l l not be devel oped her e) of some of the formul as. For sl ot
or hol e-and-sl ot anode bl ocks, to whi ch the present formul as appl y
di rectl y, r o i s general l y about ~ when the anode bl ocks are strapped.
The general restri cti ons of cavi ty tuni ng cover ed i n Sec. 14.3 appl y
to the external tuner. I n parti cul ar, mode troubl es appear i f the stabi -
l i zati on S exceeds 2. Furthermore, i f her e r, i s the rati o of stor ed ener gy
i n the gap area to stor ed ener gy i n the external cavi ty, i t i s di ffi cul t to
612
desi gn cavi ti es wi th r,
(46) i s
ELECTRONIC TUNING
[SEC. 15.6
gr eater than ~. Thus, a rel ati on si mi l ar to Eq.
(47)
I n compari ng the methods of Fi g. 15 l a and b as appl i ed to i denti cal
anode bl ocks, i t i s appropri ate to make ~B(b) / LS = QE(~) so that for the
same output power the same r-f vol tage V. appears across the sl ots i n
both magnetrons. Under these condi ti ons i n b, the :f vol tage ~b appear-
i ng across the gap of the cavi ty may be rel ated to l . and to the charac-
teri sti c admi ttances Y. of the cavi ty and Y~ of the magnetron as fol l ows:
Ener gy i n cavi ty
~;yc_s_l
Ener gy i n magnetron = ~~y~ 1
(48)
For equal output power s and the same rati o of d/ D, Eqs. (35), (45),
(47), and (48) can be combi ned to rel ate the beam vol tages necessary
(at the space-charge l i mi t) for i nternal tuni ng a as compared wi th external
tuni ng b. The rel ati on i s
I f the cur r ent densi ti es are mai ntai ned equal i n the two cases, the vol tages
at the space-charge l i mi t are proporti onal to the f power of the gap D.
Furthermore, the anode di mensi on h can general l y be made equal for
i nternal and external tuni ng, whereas the beam di mensi on 1 (see Fi g.
15. 1) for a cavi ty tuner i s approxi matel y twi ce that f or a si ngl e osci l l ator
i n the i nternal tuner. Thus one has
and
()
VW _ _.
D%
Vb(b) Db
Y, 2 Da
.
Y. N Db
I
Sol vi ng Eq. (49) for AV/VOand assumi ng ?o = r.,
(50)
(51)
I
SEC. 15.6] I NTERNAL VS. EXTERNAL CAVI TY TUNI NG
613
I n thi s deri vati on no attempt has been made to sati sfy the no-l oss
condi ti on.
The meani ng of Eq. (51) can be i l l ustrated by a speci fi c exampl e of
an external cavi ty that woul d be requi red to gi ve the same tuni ng as
woul d be obtai ned by i nternal l y tuni ng si x osci l l ators of a 12-osci l l ator
tube. I f S i s 2, Eq. (51) then gi ves
D~
Da
= 2.9
and
PDc@) _ 4.
PDC(.)
(52)
Thus, the compl exi ty of si x guns i s to be bal anced agai nst the fourfol d
i ncrease i n power necessary wi th external -cavi ty tuni ng. Note that
si nce the power requi rements are l ow, approxi mati ng recei vi ng-tube
powers, the d-c i nput power to the tuner may not be an i mportant
consi derati on.
I t mi ght appear that external -cavi ty tuni ng woul d be mor e fl exi bl e
i n magnetron operati ng poi nt because di fferent magneti c fi el ds can be
used for the magnetron than for the tuner.
However , practi ce reveal s
that the magneti c fi el ds necessary for i nternal tuni ng are usual l y not
di fferent from those used i n normal magnetron operati on.
Exampl es. Typi cal of the i nternal beam-modul ated tubes are two
RCA desi gns, Tube 1 at 4000 Me/see and Tube 2 at 800 Me/see. Operat-
i ng characteri sti cs of these tubes are gi ven i n Tabl e 153. Both tubes
are oper ated wi th si ngl e transi t at a = >.
The smal l er el echoni c tuni ng
of the 800-Mc/sec tube refl ects the combi ned effect of hi gher output
power and l onger wavel ength, as di scussed i n Sec. 155. The tube
TABLE15.3.OPERATI NG CHARACTERI STI CS OF I NTERNALLY TUNED
C-w MAGi vETrtONs
I
Tube 1
Frequency v, Mc/sec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4000.00
Outputpower l ., watts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.00
Maxi mumel ectroni ctuni ng Au, Me/see..
10.00
Modul ati ng-beamcur r entJOP, ma. . . . . . . 20.00
Number ofgunsrn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.00
Modul ati ng-beamvcl tage Vb, vol ts. . . . . . 100,00
Magnetron pl ate vol tage VRF, vol ts. 300.00
Magnetron pl ate cur r ent I , ma. . . . . . . . . . 80.00
Magneti c fi el d H, gauss . . . . . . . . . 1600.00
Cycl otron fr equency/r -f frequency, 19. . . . 1.15
Tube 2,
mechani cal l y tunabl e
720.00
460.00
2.50
500.00
5.00
300,00
1950.00
400,00
330.00
1.26
760.00
500.00
3.s0
500.00
5.00
300.00
2230.00
400,00
353.00
1.25
S40.oo
540.00
4.70
500.00
5.00
300.00
2520. Ml
400.00
377.00
1.24
614 ELECTRONI C TUNI NG [SEC. 15.6
parameters forthe800-Mc/sec tubel are l i sted i n Tabl e 154. From the
di mensi ons and the operati ng data gi ven i n Tabl e 153 the computed
tuni ng i s approxi matel y 0.6 Me/see per gun, or a total of 3Mc/see;
thi s fi gure agrees wel l wi th the obser ved val ues.
TABLE 15.4.DEsI GN PARAMETERS OF AN 800-Mc/SEC RCA TUBE
Number ofosci l l ators n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Vane thi ckness t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.187 i n.
Anode l ength h..., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.000 i n.
Anode di ameter da . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.250 i n.
El ectron-beam thi ckness d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.125 i n.
Average pl ate separati on D,vg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.500 i n.
Mi ni mum pl ate separati on D~ti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.375 i n.
Beam-cathode l ength l , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.500 i n.
TABLE 15.5.OPERATI NG CHARACTERI STI CS OF A 2700-Mc/SEC EXTERNALLY TUNED
MAGNETRON
The tube di mensi ons are D = 0.400 i n,, d = 0,200 i n.,
1 = 0,900 i n., h = 0.900 i n.
Cycl otron frequency ~
r -f frequency
I
1.05
I
1.15
Theo- Ob- Theo-
Ob-
reti cal G served reti cal * served

Output power PO, watts. ..,. ... 125.00 ca 100 1100.00 . . . . .
Maxi mum el ectroni c tuni ng A,,
Me/see . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.50 6.0
Modul ati ng-beam cur r ent 10, ma, . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100.0
Modul ati ng-beam vol tage V*,
volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.0
Stabi l i zati on S...........,.,,,. . . . . . 2.1 . . . . . . . 2.1
Rati o of energy stored i n gap to
energy stored i n external cav-
l ty r., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.47 . . . . . . . 0.47 . . . . .
Magnetron pl ate vol tage V,
vol ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100.0 . . . . . . . .
Magnetron pl ate cur r ent I , ma, 300.0
External Q, QE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300.0 300.0
* Theoreti cal resul ts are baaed on m accurate fi el d-theory val ue for Y..
1.1
Ob- Ob-
]er ved served
., . . . ..
I
10.00 16.0
100.00 150.0
400.00 500,0
. . . . . . 2.1
0,47
. . . .
. . .
300.0
A typi cal external -cavi ty reactance tube i s shown i n Fi g. 15.8. The
reactance tube i s desi gned for 15-Mc/sec frequency modul ati on of a
2700-M c/sec magnetron wi th an output power of 400 watts. The
magnetron and the reactance tube are coupl ed together by a coaxi al
l i me. Cal cul ated and obser ved characteri sti cs of thi s tube are l i sted i n
1A. L. Vi tter, Jr., et al ., LCT, 900 Me/see FM C-w Magnetron, RL Gr oup
Repor t No. 52, Feb. 28, 1946.
SEC. 15.7]
FUNDAMENTAL PRI NCI PLES 615
I
I
I
Tabl e 15.5, together wi th perti nent di mensi ons. The fi gures for B = 1.15
cor r espond to si ngl e transi t, a
= Z-m. The fi gures for o = 1.1 cor r espond
to doubl e transi t, a > %r. The agreement between theor y and observa-
ti on i s fortui tousl y good because the approxi mati ons i nvol ved i n esti -
mati ng r,, pr oper l y eval uati ng space-
charge effects, etc., i ntroduce un- ~,,,
.-9-... ..
.$+ ~,y~~
?..
,. ,
certai nti es i n the cal cul ati ons of about i . ..-.
~~A
20 per cent.
MAGNETRON DI ODE TUNI NG
1607. Fundamental Pri nci pl es.-I t
has been shown i n Sec. 15.2 that the
attai nabl e el ectroni c tuni ng of a si de
cavi ty traversed by a beam of el ec-
trons i s proporti onal to the r-f cur-
r ent Je+@ = Neu = pu [Eqs. (11)
and (15)1. I n Sec. 15.3. attenti on was
focu~ed~n means of maxi mi zi ng v, the
FI Q. 15.8.Typi oalexternal -cavi tyr e-
actance tube.
component of el ectr on vel oci ty paral l el
to the r-f fi el d. The condi ti ons under whi ch v was ther e maxi mi zed
requi red that the charge densi ty be i ntroduced by means of an el ectr on
beam of potenti al VO and cur r ent densi ty Jom=. The el ectron-beam
anal yses undertaken i n Sec.
15.3 showed that i t i s di ffi cul t to attai n
l arge val ues of p i n thb manner and that the avai l abl e tuni ng range was
thus l i mi ted.
I n the present secti on emphasi s i s l ai d on a means of i ncreasi ng p
by uti l i zi ng the Kl gh space-charge densi ty of a magnetron oper ated i n
the cutoff condi ti oti . The probl em to be consi dered may be i l l ustrated
by a modi fi cati on of Fi g. 15.1, i n whi ch the el ectr on beam i s repl aced by a
fi l amentary cathode extendi ng al ong the l ength h between the pl ates A
and radi al l y l ocated at the center of the el ectr on beam. The potenti al
V~ i s now appl i ed between the fi l amentary cathode and pl ates A, and
the al i gni ng magneti c fi el d i s retai ned. As a resul t of the crossed el ectri c
and magneti c fi el ds, the cathode wi l l be surrounded by a rotati ng space-
charge sheath of densi ty p, the approxi mate magni tude of whi ch may
be most easi l y cal cul ated by consi deri ng the si mpl er probl em i n whi ch
the two pl ates wi th separati on D of Fi g. 15. l a are repl aced by a cyl i nder
of di ameter D concentri c wi th the fi l amentary
conventi onal magnetron-di ode probl em sol ved by
cathode. Thi s i s the
HU1l l m
(53)
1A. W. HuH,Phw. R@., 29, 112 (1924).
616 ELECTRONI C TUNI NG [SEC. 158
wher e w = 2i rvc and v. i s the cycl otr on frequency [Eq. (19)]. For a
magneti c fi el d of 1070 gauss [u, = 27(3 X 10g)], Eq. (53) yi el ds
p = 8.95 X 103 coul omb/meter3, whereas the charge densi ty of a 100-
vol t el ectr on beam at 0.2-amp/cm2 cur r ent densi ty i s 3.35 X 10-4
coul omb/meter3. Cl earl y the 27-fol d i ncrease i n charge densi ty i n the
magnetron di ode i sanattracti ve factor toattempt touti l i ze for el ectr oti c
tuni ng.
Maxi mi zi ng, however , i s onl y one aspect of theprobl em; i t i s al so
necessary to maxi mi ze v. Thi s has been done effecti vel y i n el ectr on-
beam tuni ng by usi ng the al i gni ng magneti c fi el d to i ncrease the ampl i -
tude of el ectroni c osci l l ati ons when the r-f frequency v i s near the
cycl otr on frequency vC. Al though a si mi l ar resonance effect i s to be
anti ci pated when the fi l amentary cathode i s used, an anal ysi s i s necessary
to establ i sh the exact rel ati on. Furthermore, the power-handl i ng
abi l i ti es of the two types of tuni ng must be compared. For a gi ven tuni ng
the i ncreased charge densi ty surroundi ng the fi l amentary cathode al l ows
a smal l er ampl i tude of el ectroni c osci l l ati ens, but ther e i s no obvi ous
way to determi ne a maxi mum tol erabl e ampl i tude anal ogous to l r~.l
of Sec. 15.3 because some el ectrons wi l l return to the cathode for al l
fi ni te osci l l ati on ampl i tudes. Fi nal l y, ther e i s no obvi ous means of
i ncl udi ng a gri d control around a fi l amentary cathode because any gri d
woul d be l ocated i n a regi on of hi gh r-f fi el ds and currents. However ,
because for magnetron di odes wi th sharp cutoff characteri sti cs the radi us
of the space-charge cl oud surroundi ng the cathode can be vari ed by
varyi ng vb though practi cal y no cur r ent i s drawn to the pl ate, i t i s
possi bl e to di spense wi th the negati ve gri d control by modul ati ng the
pl ate vol tage and sti l l have a l ow a-c power drai n on the modul ator.
The si mi l ari ty between the fi l amentary cyl i ndri cal di ode just di scussed
and a conventi onal mi crowave mul ti osci l l ator magnetron has l ed to
theoreti cal anal ysi s and experi mentati on wi th reactance tubes based on
mul ti osci l l ator magnetron desi gn. The magni tudes i nvol ved are best
i l l ustrated by observi ng that a magnetron whi ch, when osci l l ati ng, has
an output power of 1 kw, may, when used as a reactance tube, be expected
to handl e an output power of 1 kw and that the di fference between osci l -
l ati ng and nonosci l l ati ng resonant frequenci es of mul ti osci l l ator mag-
netrons i s about 1 per cent, whi ch corresponds to the anti ci pated
el ectroni c tuni ng.
15s8. Smal l -si gnal Theor y .-The shi ft i n resonant frequency of a
nonosci l l ati ng magnetron, when i ts pl ate vol tage i s rai sed from zer o
to the cutoff condi ti on, i s a measure of the el ectroni c tuni ng that coul d
be accompl i shed wi th such a magnetron used as a reactance tube to tune
another magnetron, provi di ng the r-f ener gy l evel i n the reactance tube
i s kept vani shi ngl y smal l . I n Chap. 6 i t has been shown that the
SEC. 15.8] SMALL-SI GNAL THEOi7 Y
I
el ectroni cs of a magnetron are exceedi ngl y compl ex,
617
even for the l i mi t
of smal l -si gnal strength. A bri ef di scussi on wi l l be gi ven her e of the
reacti ve behavi or of the space charge because the emphasi s i n Chap. 6
i s on the negati ve-resi stance regi on of the space charge.
Lamb and Phi l l i ps consi der the shi ft i n resonant frequency of a
conventi onal mul ti osci l l ator magnetron, oper ated i n a condi ti on of
per fect cutoff, as a functi on of the anode vol tage and hence of the radi us
r. of the rotati ng el ectr on cl oud surroundi ng the cathode of radi us r..
The anal ysi s i s restri cted to thi cknesses y of the el ectr on sheath, whi ch are
smal f compared wi th r..
The method used i n computi ng the resonant frequency of the mag-
netr on anode bl ock i n the pr esence of a space charge i s an extensi on
of the i mpedance-matchi ng techni ques used i n Chap. 2 to compute the
frequency of the anode bl ock wi thout space charge. I n Chap. 2 the
anode i s di vi ded i nto two regi ons (Fi g. 2 13) that joi n at the anode radi us
T.. Sol uti ons of Maxwel l s equati ons appropri ate to the two regi ons are
joi ned at r. by matchi ng the i mpedance Z = E8/Hz at the boundary,
and the resul ti ng sol uti on yi el ds the resonant frequency. For each
mode number m, Eo i n the cathode-anode space consi sts of a sum of
functi ons of angul ar and ti me dependence e<n~w)and radi al dependence
(54a)
(54b)
and N. are Eessel s functi ons of the fi rst and second
ki nd, respecti vel y, thei r deri vati ves bei ng J; and N;. The most i mpor-
tant member of the sum i s the term n = m. The condi ti on of Eq. (54b)
on 6. i s determi ned by maki ng the tangenti al el ectri c fi el d Ed vani sh at
the cathode. When the effect of the space-charge cl oud i s i ncl uded i n
the cal cul ati ons, the cathode-anode regi on i s subdi vi ded i nto two regi ons
meeti ng at r = r., the boundary of the space-charge sheath. The
i mpedance Z.1 of the sheath i s eval uated at thi s boundary, l ooki ng i n
toward the cathode, and thi s i mpedance i s matched to the free-space
sol uti on i n the regi on between r, and r e. Thus the boundary condi ti on
Z = O at r = r. of Eq. (54b) for the probl em wi thout space charge i s
repl aced by Z = Z.t at r = r. for the probl em wi th space charge. The
resul t can be expressed as repl aci ng 6. i n Eq. (54a) by a quanti ty 6:, to be
eval uated shortl y. I t wi l l be r ecogni zed that the above approach di ffers
from that of Sees. 15.2 and 153. I t i s mor e appropri at~ to a compl ex
probl em such as the present one, si nce, for one thi ng, no i ntegral s need
be eval uated.
1W. E. Lamb and M. Phi l l i ps, J. Ap~.1. Phys., 18, 230 (1947).
618 ELECTRONI C TUNI NG [t3Ec. 158
I n computi ng Z,t, the starti ng poi nt i s the Bri l l oui n si ngl e-stream
sol uti on for the steady-state el ectr on fl ow i n the space-charge sheath
and Bunemanns sma!l -si gnal theor y for the r-f perturbati ons i mposed
on thi s steady state by el ectromagneti c waves of the form ei (nw~) (see
Chap. 6). The resul t 1 i s
(55)
wher e
ny
~: ~z
~<~~
and n#O.
Thi s resul t i s not what woul d be obtai ned i f the el ectrons i n the space-
charge sheath wer e tr eated as fr ee el ectrons sati sfyi ng Eqs. (12) to (17)
but havi ng a charge densi ty determi ned by Eq. (53). Thus the modi fi ca-
ti on i n el ectr on vel oci ti es from the fr ee el ectr on pi cture, so i mportant
i n the beam-tuni mz of Sec. 153, al so pl ays a r ol e i n the present probl em.
The expressi on; for b; resul ti ng fr~m- Eq. (55) are -
wher e n # O; and
; (w- % +~ y z+
wher e
/3c=&
I n each expressi on the terms contai ni ng v r epr esent the
to 13~. I n Eq. (56a) the si gn of the cor r ecti on term
whereas the si gn i s al ways negati ve i n Eq. (56b).
By l etti ng r be an effecti ve cathode radi us equal
from Eq. (56a) or equal to
(56a)
(56b)
cor r ecti on
changes at u = co,,
to
from Eq. (56b), the resonant wavel ength may be computed from Tabl e
3.2 (that gi ves wavel ength vs. cathode si ze). When thi s i s done, a
I
qual i tati ve- agreement i s- found wi th the experi mental curves of Fi g.
1W. Lamb and M. Phi l l i ps,op. ant.
SEC. 15.9] EXPERI MENTAL DATA ON LARGE-SI GNAL CONDI TI ONS 619
15.9. These curvest show the resonant frequency of the r-mode of an
M-vane ri si ng-sun anode bl ock (the 3J31 tube of Sec. 19.14) as a functi on
of pl ate vol tage (whi ch i s proporti onal to the el ectron-sheath thi ckness g
for smal l g) and magneti c fi el d (whi ch i s proporti onal to u,). The
enhanced tuni ng and change of si gn
are ascri bed to the (n = 9)-compo-
nent, and the asymmetry of the
curves above and bel ow CO.to the
(n = O)-component. I n normal
operati on thi s tube woul d run at
over 10 kv, but for the data of Fi g.
at w = ~. ~wi th H = 8806 gauss)
15.9 i t was oper ated at nearl y the
same magneti c fi el d but under 1 kv, ~ 24,000l +
correspondi ng to a condi ti on of
smal l y.
Si nce 13rci n Eq. (56a) i s al ways
desi gned to be l ess than 1, i t i s ob-
ser ved that ~~ decreases rapi dl y
wi th i ncrease i n n. Thi s cor r e-
sponds to the rapi d decr ease i n the
r-f fi el d strenw.th from the anode to
the cathode for l arge n. I t al so
means a smal l rati o q of stor ed r-f
ener gy i n the space-charge regi on
to total stor ed r-f ener gy [Eq. (23)].
By anal ogy wi th the beam-tuni ng
anal ysi s, speci fi cal l y Eq. (36), i n
whi ch the quanti ty p i s proporti onal
to q, i t i s to be expected that thi s
smal l val ue of q wi l l decr ease the
I
1
,
;
t
\
\.
i--
.
i
,,
I 1
4000 6000 8000 10,000 12,(MO
H in gauss
FI G. 15.9.Space-charge tuni ng at l ow
power l evel s.
pr oduct of tuni ng and tol erabl e r -f
vol tage for l arge n.
16.9. Experi mental Data on Large-si gnal Condi ti ons.When mul ti -
osci l l ator magnetrons are used as reactance tubes to modul ate hi gh
powers, the tuni ng characteri sti cs depart from the l ow-l evel behavi or
of Fi g. 15.9. The l arger el ecrtoni c orbi ts resul t i n mor e col l i si ons wi th
the cathode, hence hi gher r-f l oss and l ower tuni ng.
The 10-cm, c-w magnetron descri bed i n Tabl e 11.1 (the CM16B tube)
ha been used as a starti ng poi nt of several el ectroni cal l y tuned mag-
netrons i ntended to oper ate at power l evel s of 10 to 100 watts, consi stent
wi th the rel i abl e magnetron operati ng poi nt of 1000 vol ts and 150 ma
(see performance chart i n Chap. 19). I n the fi rst modi fi cati on i l l ustrated
i n Fi g. 14.17, osci l l ati ng magnetron I i s connected to reactance tube
1I bi d.
620 ELECTRONIC T1J NIN(7 [SEC. 15.9
magnetron I I I (i ndi cated i n Fi g. 14.17 as cavi ty) by a secti on of coaxi al
l i ne of such l ength that both tubes appear as paral l el -resonant ci rcui ts
at the same poi nt on the l i ne, as i s shown i n the equi val ent ci rcui t of
Fi g. 14.23, and the coupl i ng to each tube i s so adjusted that ther e i s
equal r-f ener gy storage i n magnetron and tuner (S = 2, see Sec. 14.3).
I n thi s case the tuni ng was obser ved to have a fl at maxi mum at u./u
near 2, wi th l ess than 10 per cent l oss i n output power . Loss was greatest
at UC/CO= 1. Tuner tubes wi th r,/ra = 0.58, 0.75, and 0.85, oper ated
at si mi l ar poi nts, showed tuni ng of 3, 9, and 20 Me/see respecti vel y, 1
confi rmi ng the theoreti cal i ncrease i n tuni ng wi th cathode si ze [Eq. (56)].
For 15 watts r-f output and tuni ng of 20 Me/see, the d-c i nput to the
reactance tube was 100 ma at 500 vol ts. Thi s power was excessi ve for
frequency modul ati on and was due to the poor cutoff characteri sti cs of
the tube. The tuni ng furthermore i s di sti nctl y nonl i near.
I n a second tuni ng method starti ng wi th thi s c-w magnetron, the
magnetron and the tuner wer e combi ned i n a si ngl e tube. Two cathodes
wer e i nserted i nto the anode from opposi te ends of the tube, one to dri ve
the magnetron and the other to provi de tuni ng. 2 The experi mental
arrangement i s shown i n Fi g. 15.10.
The end shi el d provi ded for the magnetron cathode was found
necessary to mi ni mi ze l eakage to the tuner cathode, whi ch was al ways
posi ti ve wi th r espect to the magnetron cathode. The rati o of the
cathode di ameter to the anode di ameter for the tuner was chosen as
77 per cent, correspondi ng approxi matel y to the mi ddl e cathode-anode
rati o tri ed by Everhart. 3 Operati onal data for thi s tube taken at 1700
gauss show 4-Me/see tuni ng at 420 vol ts, 20-ma d-c tuner i nput for an
r-f output of 17 watts, whereas the tuner i nput i s 40 ma at 440 vol ts for
an r-f output of 35 watts and the same tuni ng. Thus the tuni ng charac-
teri sti cs are strongl y dependent on the r-f output l evel , and agai n com-
parati vel y hi gh modul ator power i s requi red. I n thi s tube the r-f output
power drops by 20 per cent at the 4-Me/see tuni ng poi nt. Si mpl i ci ty of
constructi on and adaptabi l i ty for combi nati on wi th wi de-range mechani -
cal tuni ng are, however , i mportant features of the above desi gn.
Another modi fi cati on i s shown i n Fi g. 15.11. Her e a porti on of the
vanes i s cut away to provi de space for a cyl i ndri cal tuner cathode that
i s concentri c wi th the regul ar cathode. The tuner cathode i s l ocated i n a
regi on of comparati vel y l ow r-f fi el ds, wher e the back bombardment
i s l ow. Furthermore, ther e i s no l eakage between the two cathodes.
At 1500 gauss, a tuner d-c i nput of 15 ma at 600 vol ts tuned 4 Me/see
I E. Everhart, The Magnetron as an El ectroni c Reactance Tube, RL Group
Report No. 52, Mar. 15, 1945.
Z Mi nutes of the Magnetron Modul ati on Coordi nati ng Commi ttee, Vacuum Tube
Devel opment Commi ttee, May 25, 1945.
~I l verhart, op. cd.
sEC. 15.10]
OTHER METHODS 621
wi th an r-f output power of 30 watts. Thi s tuni ng was strongl y depend-
ent on both r-f output power and magneti c fi el d, the vari ati on wi th
magneti c fi el d bei ng compl i cated. For exampl e, at 600 vol ts on the
tuner the el ectroni c tuni ng i ncreased to 6.5 Me/see at 800 gauss, whereas
for 300 vol ts the el ectroni c tuni ng r ever sed si gn. Thi s behavi or i s seen
to be qui te i nconsi stent wi th the l ow-l evel behavi or of Fi g. 15.11.
I t i s cl ear from the above i l l ustrati ons that the attempts to uti l i ze
the hi gh-el ectron densi ty of a rotati ng space charge surroundi ng a
cyl i ndri cal cathode have as yet met wi th onl y parti al success.
w
ce
o
Inches
0.5 0
Inches
0,5
Scale Scale
FI G. 15, 10,Cross secti on of a doubl e-cathode magnetron.
FI Q. 15.11 .Cross secti on of magnetron wi th two concentr i c cathodes.
15.10. Other Methods.Two further methods of el ectroni c tuni ng
have been i nvesti gated wi th i ndi fferent success. I n the fi rst method,
an el ectr on stream i s used to change the conductance i nstead of the
susceptance of a porti on of the resonant system. By transmi ssi on down a
k/8 l ength of l i ne thi s vari abl e conductance i s made to appear pri mari l y
as a vari abl e susceptance at the magnetron. Such tubes as have been
tested have been capabl e of power s up to onl y 20 watts. The method
furthermore i nherentl y i ncl udes ampl i tude modul ati on and, i n the
parti cul ar desi gns tri ed, was sensi ti ve to the power l evel of the magnetron.
A second method has been to i ntroduce an el ectr ode that i s desi gned
to modul ate the el ectr on stream al ready present i n the magnetron, thus
el i mi nati ng the use of an auxi l i ary cathode. The resul ti ng frequency
modul ati on i s found to be smal l .
I Al though the above i l l ustrati ons have been for mul ti osci l l ator tubes, much work
has been done at the General El ectri c Co. wi th thi s method of tuni ng on spl i t-anode
magnetrons. Some of thi s work i s summari zed i n the Mi nutes of the Magnetron
Modul ati on Coordi nati ngCommi ttee, May 25, 1945.
CHAPTER 16
STABI LI ZATI ON OF FREQUENCY
BY F. F. RI EKE
16.1. I ntroducti on.-Thi s chapter i s concer ned pri mari l y wi th the
probl em of mi ni mi zi ng the changes of frequency that occur as a resul t
of acci dental vari ati ons i n the operati ng condi ti ons of the magnetron
and, mor e parti cul arl y, wi th methods of usi ng an auxi l i ary resonant
cavi ty for that purpose. I t i s not the ai m of thi s chapter to gi ve detai l ed
i nstructi ons for bui l di ng a magnetron stabi l i zer but rather to i ndi cate
the basi c consi derati ons that enter i nto i ts desi gn. When i t has been
deci ded what properti es the stabi l i zi ng ci ;cui t i s to have, the real i zati on
of the ci rcui t i s a strai ghtforward probl em i n mi crowave ci rcui try and as
such i s outsi de the scope of thi s book.
By usage, the term stabi l i ty of the frequency has come to mean
qui te general l y some quanti ty proporti onal to l /(dv/da), wher e a
represents the temperature, the output l oad, or the i nput cur r ent (or
perhaps sti l l another parameter that enters i nto the condi ti ons of opera-
ti on). I t woul d have been mor e appropri ate to appl y some such term as
f sti ffness of the frequency i n the above context, parti cul ar y si nce one
has occasi on to use the term stabi l i ty i n a mor e l i teral sense, namel y,
i n connecti on wi th di sconti nuous changes i n frequency that resul t from
the i nstabi l i ty of a normal mode of osci l l ati on.
Appl i cati ons that requi re the frequency of the magnetron to be ver y
constant often requi re al so that the frequency be set to a preassi gned
val ue; consequentl y the possi bi l i ty of tuni ng must al so be consi dered
al ong wi th that of stabi l i zati on.
I t has been shown i n Chap. 7 that the frequency of osci l l ati on of a
magnetron can be rel ated to the i ntersecti on of the curves Y.(r) and
Y.(v) i n the G, B pl ane. Changes i n operati ng condi ti ons cause shi fts
i n one or the other of these curves; i n pri nci pl e one can rel ate changes
i n frequency to the shi fts of the curves and to the vari ati on of the param-
eter v al ong the Y.(V) curve. Quanti tati vel y the computati on i s
somewhat compl i cated, si nce i t i nvol ves the angl e wi th whi ch the curves
i ntersect, etc. Qual i tati vel y, the Y,(~) cur ve may be consi dered to
be si mpl y a hori zontal l i ne; i n that case the shi fts of frequency wi l l be
i nversel y proporti onal to the deri vati ve 13BL/d v al ong the YL curve. To
sti ff en the frequency one must make thi s deri vati ve l arge; i n other
622
SEC. 16.2] THE I DEAL STABI LI ZER 623
I
words, one must, i n effect, make the characteri sti c admi ttance Y. of
the resonant system l arge. General l y speaki ng, thi s requi rement i mpl i es
that the stor ed ener gy of the system be i ncreased. Perhaps i t shoul d
be poi nted out, however , that whi l e i t i s necessary to i ncrease the stor ed
ener gy, i t i s not suffi ci ent, for the ener gy must be stor ed i n the pr oper
way i n or der to be effecti ve.
To some extent one can i ncrease the stor ed ener gy by modi fyi ng
the shape of the conventi onal resonant system of the magnetron; but
unl ess some new pri nci pl e of desi gn i s i nvented, the possi bi l i ti es i n thi s
di recti on are rather l i mi ted. I n meeti ng the requi rements i mposed
upon the i nteracti on space, one seems necessari l y to end up wi th a
structure wi th smal l cl earances between the hi gh-vol tage parts and thus a
compact resonant system wi th a l arge surface/vol ume rati o. Such
a resonator necessari l y has a rel ati vel y smal l unl oaded Q, so that the
storage of a l arge amount of ener gy i s i mpossi bl e (al ways computed, of
course, on the basi s of a constant avai l abl e power ) and even moderate
ener gy storage i s expensi ve. Consequentl y i t i s advantageous to coupl e
to the magnetron an auxi l i ary cavi ty desi gned to stor e the ener gy mor e
economi cal l y, and i t i s thi s method of stabi l i zi ng (or sti ffeni ng) thi s
frequency whi ch i s to be tr eated i n detai l her e.
I t shoul d be menti oned that the pri nci pl e of automatic-frequency
control can al so be appl i ed to the probl em of mai ntai ni ng a magnetron at a
preassi gned frequency. 1 I n an AFC system a frequency dkcri mi nator
generates an er r or si gnal whenever the frequency departs from i ts pr oper
val ue. The er r or si gnal i s ampl i fi ed and then used to actuate a tuni ng
mechani sm that el i mi nates the departure. I n pri nci pl e, the AFC system
has one i nherent advantage over the stabi l i zi ng cavi ty i n that i t acts to
el i mi nate compl etel y the er r or s i n frequency rather than merel y to
r educe them i n some constant proporti on. I f the AFC control depends
upon mechani cal tuni ng, however , i t cannot respond to extr emel y rapi d
fl uctuati ons. I n any case, i t i s a rather compl i cated affai r. I n i tsel f i t
cannot over come the di ffi cul ti es connected wi th i nstabi l i ti es that ari se
from a resonant l oad, al though the auxi l i ary cavi ty can do so to a con-
si derabl e extent, si nce i n effect i t i ncreases the external Q of the mag-
netron. I t i s possi bl e to combi ne the advantages of both systems by
usi ng a stabi l i zi ng cavi ty as the tuni ng el ement i n an AFC system.
16.2. The I deal Stabi l i zer.-I n coupl i ng the stabi l i zi ng cavi ty to the
magnetron one attempts to approxi mate as nearl y as possi bl e the state
of affai rs r epr esented by the equi val ent ci rcui t shown i n Fi g. 16.1, wher e
the cavi ty (3) i s coupl ed to the magnetron (1) by an i deal transformer.
The termi nal s A and T cor r espond to those si mi l arl y l abel ed i n Fi g. 7.5
1 A techni cal di scussi on of AFC systems as appl i ed to magnetron transmi tters i s
contai ned i n Vol . 3, Chap. 13, Radi ati on Laboratory Seri es, Sees. 13.11 to 13.13.
624 STABILIZATION OF FREQUENCY [W.c. 16.2
of Chap. 7. Al though i n practi ce the i deal ci rcui t can be approxi mated
onl y over a rather narrow range of frequency, Fi g. 16-1 provi des a con-
veni ent basi s for the di scussi on of some of the fundamental rel ati ons
i nvol ved i n stabi l i zati on. Except for that part added to the l eft of the
T
I

Ideal i Ideal T
FIG. 16. 1.Equivalent circuit of an i deal stabi l i zed magnetron.
termi nal s A, the ci rcui t of Fi g. 161 corresponds to that of Fi g. 7.5d.
The admi ttance Y. i s gi ven by the rel ati on
YL = n2YG3
( )(
&3+j2~ + Y.,
)
&1+j2~ +:y,. (1)
By i ntroduci ng the external Qs (wi th r espect to a matched output
transmi ssi on l i ne of characteri sti c admi ttance l kf) Q,, = Y.,m2/M and
Q,, = Y,sn2m/M, Eq. (1) can be wri tten i n the form
(
Q&lY.=~+Q&+j2 Q.1
Y.,
)
- + Q,, ~ + v,. (2)
Provi ded that v.,, v.,, and v are not ver y di fferent from each other ,
Eq. (2) can be approxi mated by
(3a)
wher e
Q, = Q., + QE3,
(3b)
vu = QEI vU1 + Q.93vu3
Qm + Q~3
(3C)
(3d)
The tuni ng properti es of the combi ned system can be anal yzed on the
basi s of Eq. (3c). From Eq. (3d) itfol l ows that
avu 1
=.
(4a)
avul S
and
(4b)
SEC. 162]
wher e
THE I DEAL STABI LI ZER 625
(4C)
The quanti ty S wi l l be r efer r ed to as the stabi l i zati on factor. When
S i s l arge, the resonant frequency of the system fol l ows cl osel y the r eso-
nant frequency of the stabi l i zer and vari es onl y sl owl y wi th that of the
magnetron.
The effecti veness of the stabi l i zer i n reduci ng the changes of frequency
connected wi th temperature vari ati ons can be esti mated on the basi s of
Eq. (4). I n thi s r espect the stabi l i zer can be effecti ve onl y i n so far
as the stabi l i zer i tsel f i s better thermostated or better compensated
agai nst temperature changes than i s the magnetron. I f the thermal
changes i n the stabi l i zer resonance vuj are negl i gi bl e, the changes i n vu
(and ther efor e i n the frequency of osci l l ati on) resul ti ng from changes i n
the temperature of the magnetron are r educed by the factor 1/S. Actu-
al l y, the stabi l i zer does l end i tsel f mor e readi l y to thermostati ng and
compensati on than does the magnetron, partl y because l ess ener gy i s
di ssi pated i n i t and partl y because i t i s a l arger and si mpl er structure
and general l y mor e accessi bl e. Whi l e stabi l i zi ng cavi ti es have been
constructed of i nvar, i t has not been practi cabl e to use thi s materi al for
the magnetron pr oper .
The vari ati on of frequency wi th cur r ent i s i nversel y proporti onal to
the val ue of 13BL/13 v. From Eq. (3) i t fol l ows that, other thi ngs bei ng
equal , stabi l i zati on wi l l r educe the deri vati ve 13v/dl i n the rati o 1/S.
The degr ee of dependence of the frequency (expressed i n terms of
Av/v) upon the external l oad yT i s i nversel y proporti onal to Q,. (The
pul l i ng fi gure F i s gi ven by the rel ati on F/v = 0.42 sec CY/QE.) Conse-
quentl y, i f QE1i s hel d fi xed, the stabi l i ty of the frequency agai nst changes
i n l oad i s dh-ectl y proporti onal to the stabi l i zati on factor S. The
assessment of the possi bl e advantages of stabi l i zati on i n thi s respect,
however , i nvol ves much mor e than thi s si mpl e rel ati on, i nasmuch as
i t i s possi bl e wi thout stabi l i zati on to i ncrease Qz si mpl y by decreasi ng
the coupl i ng 1~ to the external l oad. By thi s pr ocedur e the stabi l i ty
woul d be achi eved at a consi derabl e cost of ci rcui t effi ci ency and, ordi -
nari l y, el ectroni c effi ci ency. Consequentl y i t i s necessary to consi der
stabi l i ty i n rel ati on to over-al l effi ci ency.
The el ectroni c effi ci ency q. vari es wi th G. i n the fashi on i l l ustrated i n
Fi g. 7.24. I n the i nterest of maki ng Q, l arge, GL is usual l y made some-
what l ess than i ts val ue wher e q, i s a maxi mum, but G~ cannot be r educed
1 The rel ati on i s a very general one. For conveni ence i n expressi on, i ncreas-
i ng QE wi l l be used synonymousl y wi th i ncreasi ng the stabi l i ty of the frequency
agai nst vari ati on i a the external l oad.
626 8TAB1LI ZA TI ON OF FREQUENCY [SEC. 16.3
i ndefi ni tel y, for q. fal l s off ver y rapi dl y at the l ower val ues of GL. To
some degr ee, stabi l i zati on affords the possi bi l i ty of choosi ng GL and Q
i ndependentl y, as i s shown by the rel ati on
(5)
Furthermore, the ci rcui t effi ci ency at a gi ven val ue of Q, i ncreases wi th
the stabi l i zati on factor S, as i s shown by the rel ati on
(-)
1
~. UT=l+ki+i(ihal
(6)
I t i s assumed, of course, that QUSi s many ti mes l arger than Q~l ; i n practi ce
rati os of 5 or 10 can be achi eved easi l y, and rati os of 20 or mor e are usual l y
possi bl e.
I n appl i cati ons to radar i t general l y comes about that stabi l i zati on
i s parti cul arl y wor th whi l e at the hi gher frequenci essay above 5000
Me/see. Thi s ci rcumstance ari ses from the fact that i t i s the absolute
bandwi dth Av rather than the rel ati ve bandwi dth Av/v that control s
the desi gn of a recei vi ng system. Al though gr eater bandwi dths are
used at the hi gher frequenci es, i t has not been general practi ce to i ncrease
the bandwi dth proporti onal l y wi th v. As far as the magnetron i s con-
cer ned, i t i s the rel ati ve bandwi dth that counts, and the ci rcumstance
just menti oned requi res that the magnetron have a gr eater Q, at the
hi gher frequenci es. I nasmuch as the unl oaded Q tends to decr eaw as
VM~th i ncreasi ng frequency and the ci rcui t effi ci ency decreases wi th
i ncreasi ng rati o QE/Qu, the ci rcui t effi ci ency becomes a ver y i mportant
consi derati on at the hi gh frequenci es.
Stabi l i zed magnetrons have pr oved parti cul arl y useful i n radar
beacons, wher e the frequency must be hel d at an assigned val ue wi thi n
rather smal l tol erances.
16.3. Coupl i ng Methods.-The precedi ng di scussi on has been premi sed
on the assumpti on that the ci rcui t of Fi g. 161 can be real i zed physi cal l y.
I f thi s ci rcui t i s taken l i teral l y, one arri ves at the concl usi on that i t i s
al ways desi rabl e to make the stabi l i zati on factor ver y l arge; that i s, to
arri ve at a requi red val ue of QE, one shoul d make h l arge and Y.1 pr opor -
ti onal l y smal l . Thi s concl usi on i s rather obvi ous, for, other thi ngs bei ng
equal , i t i s advantageous to stor e a gr eater fracti on of the ener gy i n the
most effi ci ent el ement of the system, whi ch i s assumed to be the stabi l i zer
rather than the magnetron pr oper . When physi cal l i mi tati ons are taken
i nto accountaa wi l l be done presentl yi t wi l l be found that the
advantages of stabi l i zati on, especi al l y stabi l i zati on by l arge factors, have
to be wei ghed agai nst several di sadvantages, among them i ncreased
SEC. 163] COUPLING METHODS 627
I
(a)
compl exi ty and decreased fl exi bi l i ty of the system and perhaps mor e
stri ngent l i mi tati ons on manufacturi ng tol erances.
The basi c probl em that has to be met consi sts of coupl i ng a l ow-
i mpedance resonator (the magnetron) to a hi gh-i mpedance resonator
(the stabi l i zer) i n such a way that the l arger fracti on of the ener gy i s
stor ed i n the l atter. The si tuati on maybe thought of i n terms of the two
ci rcui ts i l l ustrated i n Fi g, 16.2a. One mi ght coupl e the ci rcui ts by
means of mutual i nductance between the coi l s or by means of a tap as
i ndi cated by the dotted l i ne i n the fi gure,
but i n any case physi cal l i mi tati ons make
i t i mpossi bl e to secur e a coupl i ng coeffi -
ci ent of uni ty. I n consequence, the sys-
tem wi l l have two modes of osci l l ati on; i f
the coupl i ng i s weak, the separati on of the
modes Av/v i s just equal to the coeffi ci ent
of coupl i ng. The arrangements actual l y
used i n stabi l i zati on have the properti es
of the ci rcui t shown i n Fi g. 16.2b, whi ch
has thr ee modes of osci l l ati on, and the
di ffi cul ti es encounter ed ari se pri nci pal l y
from these extra modes.
Ther e are a consi derabl e vari ety of
arrangements that can be used to coupl e
the stabi l i zer to the magnetron i f detai l s
are taken i nto account. As far as essen-
ti al s are concer ned, however , the systems
fal l mor e or l ess i nto two cl assi fi cati ons,
dependhg mostl y on whether the stabi -
l i zer i s an i ntegral part of the magnetron
wi th a vacuum envel ope common to both
or i s an attachment added after the mag-
netr on has been otherwi se compl eted and
evacuated: I n the for mer case the two
resonant cavi ti es are constructed tangent
to each other , and the coupl i ng effected by
a common i ri s or resonant wi ndow. I n the l atter case the cavi ti es are
coupl ed to opposi te ends of a transmi ssi on l i ne whose l ength i s an appre-
ci abl e fracti on of a wavel ength or even a few wavel engths. Even
between these two cases ther e i s no di fference i n pri nci pl e. Conse-
quentl y the probl em wi l l be di scussed i n terms of transmi ssi on-l i ne
coupl i ng, because the gr eater amount of exper i ence by far has been
accumul ated wi th thi s type coupl i ng.
A magnetron and stabi l i zer coupl ed through a transmi ssi on l i ne
e
(b)
A
Transmission line
(c)
FI O. 16.2a,b,c.Equi v&nt ci r -
cui ts of a magnetron ooupl ed to a
stabi l i zi ng cavi ty.
628 STABI HZA TI ON OF FREQUENCY [SEC. 16
have, to a first approximation, an equivalent ci rcui t l i ke that shown i n
Fi g. 16.2c. I t turns out that the exact pl acement of the external l oad
i n the ci rcui t has an appreci abl e i nfl uence on the characteri sti cs of the
ci rcui t and al so that i t i s necessary, when hi gh stabi l i zati on i s sought, to
add an auxi l i ary l oad to damp extraneous modes of osci l l ati on (see Sec.
16.4). Ei ther of the l oads can be connected i n a vari ety of ways, and
thei r i ncl usi on i n a general way woul d greatl y compl i cate the equati ons
to be deal t wi th. Ther efor e i n outl i ni ng the general probl em, purel y
reacti ve ci rcui ts wi l l be used and the effects of the resi sti ve el ements wi l l
be tr eated qual i tati vel y.
I n computi ng the admi ttance of the system i t i s conveni ent to
normal i ze the terms wi th r espect to the characteri sti c admi ttance of the
transmi ssi on l i ne as was done i n deri vi ng Eq. (2). I f g, i s the normal i zed
admi ttance of the magnetron pr oper , YSthat of the stabi l i zer, and 1 the
l ength of the transmi ssi on l i ne between them, the admi ttance Y. at
the termi nal s A of Fi g. 16.2c i s gi ven by
(
ys+jtanc?
)
Y.=::: y,+y3jtano+1 1 (7)
wher e o = 21rl/ k0 and Xai s the gui de wavel ength for the transmi ssi on l i ne.
At a parti cul ar frequency v,, 0 wi l l be exactl y equal to mr; and for fr e-
quenci es not ver y di fferent from vZ, o i s gi ven approxi matel y (exactl y i f
Au/h i s i ndependent of v) by
e=nT+2Q.2+ (8)
wher e Q,z. = TIAO/A?j. The frequency VZcan be consi dered to be the
resonant frequency of the transmi ssi on l i ne.
I nasmuch as one i s concer ned onl y wi th val ues of v for whi ch
(V v,)/vz i s smal l , tan o can be approxi mated by 2Q~,(v vz)/v2.
For yl and ys the usual approxi mati ons for a paral l el -resonant ci rcui t
wi l l be used: y. = Q~,2j(v v,)/vl and Y8 = Q.s2j(v vs)/va. For
the present i t wi l l be assumed that VI = V2= vs = vo; i f the vari abl e
C$= (v - vO)/vOi s i ntroduced, Eq. (7) can then be wri tten
or
wher e
[
(6 + 6)6(6 6)
1
u=~Bu=c12~((! + I Y)(a I s)
(9a)
(9b)
(9C)
SEC. 163]
and
COUPLI NG .WETHODS 629
(9d)
The val ues 6, 0, + Y r epr esent the resonances of the system. .\t
the resonances, the rates of change of susceptance dB/ d6 are
H
dBu
= Zycl QEI + QE2 + (?m,
db s=,
Q,,
(l ea)
(-)
dBo
= Zy ,2 QEI + QE2 + Q~3.
db b=~r c
Q,2 + QE3
(l Ob)
To i l l ustrate the i mpl i cati ons of the rel ati ons just deri ved, a numeri cal
exampl e wi l l be gi ven. I t wi l l be supposed that the magnetron has an
!
-o.4 -0.3 -o .2
/,
/
-b~
9.3
)
0.2
0,1
>-
-o.l
-o.2
-o.3
Fm. 16.3.Susceptance curves.
output l ead whi ch i s so coupl ed that QEI , the external ~ wi th respect
to i t, i s equal to 100-a typi cal val ue for normal output coupl i ng. A
stabi l i zati on factor LS = 6 i s to be sought; thus Eq. (4c) gi ves Q~z = 500.
The transmi ssi on l i ne has a l ength of 3A; but i nstead of the val ue 37r
for QEZ, the round number 10 wi l l be used. On the basi s of the val ues
QEI = 100, QEZ = 10, and QE3 = 500, one obtai ns the resul t
a = 0.0175,
a = 0.0071,
(-)
1 dB.
~, da 3.0
= 12.2,
1
-(-)
dBu
Y.1 dc! ~=t
= 4.8.
630 STABILIZATION OF FREQUENCY [SEC. 163
(Without thestabilizer, l/Y,l(dl?~/d6) =2.0.) Thecurve ofsusceptance
plotted against 6 i s shown i n Fi g. 16.3, wher e the dotted l i ne i ndi cates
the correspondi ng quanti ty for the magnetron al one. Wi th a typi cal
val ue of Y.1 = 10 mho, i t i s roughl y the range
_o.03 ~ & ~ +003
Y.,
that i s si gni fi cant i n magnetron operati on.
Two ways of addi ng the external l oad to the system wi l l be consi dered.
The rel ati ons are si mpl est i f (Case I ) the magnetron i s a speci al l y con-
structed one wi th two output l eads, one for the l oad and the other for
the stabi l i zer. I f the magnetron has onl y one output l ead, the l oad must
be tapped onto the transmi ssi on l i ne of Fi g. 16.2c, and i t wi l l be assumed
BL
FI G. 16.4.Admi ttance
curve.
to be connected i n paral l el wi th the stabi l i zer
(Case I I ).
For Case I , the external l oad Y. i s si mpl y
added to Yu of Eq. (9a). I t wi l l be assumed
that Y, i s a pure conductance and has the
val ue that i t woul d have i f the magnetron
wer e not stabi l i zed and wer e l oaded wi th a
Q, of 100; then i n the numeri cal exampl e,
Y./YCl = l /Q,l = 0.01. The Y.(v) curve,
conveni entl y tr eated as the (Y~/Y.J (6) curve,
then has thr ee coi nci dent verti cal branches
through the poi nt YL/ Ycl = 0.01.
To compute YL(~) for Case I I , one must
repl ace y~by yq + yE i n Eq. (7). For the val ue
of l oad assumed above, thi s amounts to repl ac-
i ng j2Q~q6 by (1 + j2Q~s6) i n Eq. (9a). The
YL(6) cur ve then takes on the form i ndi cated
schemati cal l y i n Fi g. 16.4. The si gni fi cant
parts of the YL(3) curves for both cases are pl otted to scal e i n Fi g. 165;
to avoi d confusi on, onl y the hal ves of the cur ve for ~posi ti ve are shown;
the other hal ves are obtai ned by refl ecti on on the real axi s. The onl y
essenti al di fference between the two arrangements i s that for Case I the
l oad i s effecti ve for al l thr ee modes of osci l l ati on (al though the stabi l i za-
ti on i s not ful l y effecti ve for two of the modes); i n Case I I the l oad i s
effecti ve onl y for the (6 = O)-mode; for the other two i t i s shorted out
by the stabi l i zer.
I t i s to be noti ced that for a smal l range of 6 center ed about 6 = O,
ei ther of the arrangements anal yzed above dupl i cates the properti es
of the i deal system i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 161. The mode of osci l l ati on
i n thk range wi l l be r efer r ed to as the pri nci pal mode. Two extra
I
!
SEC. 16.3] COUPLI NG METHODS 631
modes of osci l l ati on are i ntroduced, however , and from exper i ence i t
can be predi cted that wi th the constants assumed i n the above exampl e,
the system woul d fai l to per for m sati sfactori l y because of i mproper
or uncertai n sel ecti on of the mode of osci l l ati on.
The control of the
extraneous modes i s, ther efor e, the central probl em.
I n the endeavor
to pr event osci l l ati ons i n the extraneous modes, thr ee rather di sti nct
pri nci pl es have been tri ed.
.03
.02
.01
-.01
-.02
I
.(
.016
.014
003
.03
002
.02
001= 6
.01
G/
~
o
.02 .03
-.01
-.02
/
.003
B/
~
S302
J-
020
.001=6
.018
.01 .02 G,
.016
r
-.014
I
CaseI CaseI I
FI G. 16.5.Admi ttance curves,
At one ti me i t was expected that a ver y great separati on of the extra-
neous modes from the pri nci pal mode woul d ser ve to di scourage osci l l ati on
i nthe extraneous modes. As farasthe magnetron i sconcerned, the extra
modes ari se from a ver y l arge reacti ve effect-i n just one el ementary
resonator--the one to whi ch the stabi l i zer i s di rectl y coupl ed. I t seems
ver y probabl e that i f the extraneous modes di ffered from the pri nci pal
mode (the pri nci pal mode has a frequency equal or ver y cl ose to the
normal r-mode of the magnetron) by 10 per cent or even more, these
reacti ve effects woul d so di stort the confi gurati on of the el ectri c fi el ds
i n the i nteracti on space that the i nteracti on wi th the el ectr on stream
woul dbe i mpai red consi derabl y.
632 STABI LI ZATI ON OF FREQUENCY
[SEC. 16.3
By coupl i ng the stabi l i zer to the magnetron through an i ri s i t i s
possi bl e to separate the extraneous modes from the central one by as
much as20per cent. Thi s possi bi l i ty wastaken advantage ofi nstabi -
l i zed magnetrons desi gned by Herl i nl and Smi th (Sec. 19.5). These
magnetrons had auxi l i ary cavi ti es so coupl ed as to yi el d a stabi l i zati on
factor of about 5 for the pri nci pal mode; the extraneous modes wer e about
20 per cent above and bel ow the central mode. These magnetrons wer e
compl ete fai l ures i n the sense that they coul d not be made to osci l l ate
rel i abl y i n the pri nci pal , hi ghl y stabl e mode. They di d, however , per -
form qui te sati sfactori l y i n the l ow-frequency mode, but wi thout appre-
ci abl e benefi t from the auxi l i ary cavi ty i n stabi l i zi ng the frequency.
Thi s exper i ence was mor e or l ess dupl i cated by experi ments at the Bel l
Tel ephone Laboratori es. Thus i t appears that the separati on between
the modes i s of l i ttl e consequence i n determi ni ng whether or not the
magnetron wi l l osci l l ate i n the stabi l i zed mode.
From thei r i ni ti al fai l ure, Herl i n and Smi th arri ved at a second
pri nci pl e. They i nterpreted thei r resul t i n the fol l owi ng way: The
speed of starti ng of a mode of osci l l ati on shoul d vary i nversel y wi th
the degr ee of stabi l i zati on of the mode. To express the same thi ng
i n a di fferent way, the speed of starti ng shoul d vary i nversel y wi th the
effecti ve capaci t ante of the mode. When the l .(.) cur ve i s verti cal
and BL vari es fai rl y uni forml y wi th v over an appreci abl e range of v, the
system can be approxi mated by a paral l el -resonant ci rcui t of effecti ve
capaci ty C = ~(dBL/ dv). I t i s shown i n Chap. 8 that, other thi ngs
bei ng equal , the speed of starti ng shoul d vary i nversel y wi th C. As to
the modes of the magnetron-stabi l i zer system, i t can be deduced from
Eqs. (1OC3)and (l Ob) that
(-)
dB~
db ,, ,=0
=QEZ+QZ3=~1
()
dB
2QE1
2
a 6=*&
(11)
wher e S i s the stabi l i zati on factor for the pri nci pal mode. I t fol l ows
that i f S i s not gr eater than 3, the pri nci pal mode shoul d get ther e
fi rst.
Exper i ence has borne out the above l i ne of reasoni ng i n so far as i t
has been found that the extraneous modes gi ve no troubl e i f the stabi l i za-
ti on factor S i s about 3 or l ess. I t shoul d be poi nted out that rel ati on
I M. A. Herl i n, Resonance Theory of the Wavegui de Tunabl e Magnetron,
RL Report No. 445, Oct. 15, 1943.
21$7. V. Smi th, hl agnetron Tuni ng and Stabi l i zati on, RL Report No. 567,
Jul y 13, 1944.
-1
1
SEC. 164] MEANS OF DAMPI .VG THE EXTRANEOUS MODES 633
(11) hol ds onl y when v., = vu,; i f the resonant frequenci es of the mag-
netr on and auxi l i ary cavi ty are not equal , the rati o i s l ess favorabl e.
Consequentl y i f stabi l i zati on i s the pri mary consi derati on, so that S i s
made nearl y equal to 3, and the system i s tuned by varyi ng onl y one
of the components, the useful tuni ng range i s onl y a smal l fracti on of
the separati on between the modes. The appl i cati on of the for egoi ng
consi derati ons to the wi de-range tuni ng of magnetrons i s tr eated i n
Chap. 14.
16.4. Means of Dampi ng the Extraneous Modes.The thi rd pri nci -
pl e, and the onl y one so far dkcover ed that enabl es one to take advantage
of a hi gh degr ee of stabi l i zati on, consi sts i n i ntroduci ng an auxi l i ary
l oad i nto the system i n such a way as to damp the extraneous modes
preferenti al l y. The pl acement of the auxi l i ary l oad r epr esented by the
resi stance R is i l l ustrated i n Fi g.
16.6. I nasmuch as the system i s *
Transmission line
now to be anal yzed i n somewhat
a
gr eater detai l , the conductance Ga
1
Gj
(3)
has been added to the equi val ent
ci rcui t. I f the external , or useful ,
l oad i s to be connected di rectl y to
b
the magnetron as i n Case I above,
R
g~, the normal i zed val ue of Ga, i s *
c
equal to QBa/QU~,wher e Quai sthe
FI Q.16.6,Stabi l i zer wi th dampi ngresi stor.
unl oaded Q of the stabi l i zer cavi ty.
(I t can be shown that the cases wher e the external l oad i s connected
between the termi nal s a-c or a-b of Fi g. 166 can be r educed to the same
equi val ent ci rcui t.)
The effect of addi ng the resi stance R can be i nterpreted qual i tati vel y
I
i n the fol l owi ng way. I t wi l l be shown that the pr esence of R has l i ttl e
!
dampi ng effect on the pri nci pal mode 6 = O and a l arge effect on the
extraneous modes. At 6 = O the i mpedance of the stabi l i zi ng cavi ty i s
I
equal to 1/Gsa rather l arge quanti ty. Thus the currents i nto the
cavi ty are ver y smal l , and negl i gi bl e power i s di ssi pated i n R. On the
other hand, at the frequenci es + 6 of the extraneous modes, the stabi l i zer
~
has a rel ati vel y smal l i mpedance, the currents i nto i t are l arge, and the
:
mai ntenance of ei ther of those modes must entai l a rel ati vel y l arge
di ssi pati on of power i n R; consequentl y those modes are strongl y damped.
I From thi s argument one can concl ude that the extraneous modes wi l l
be dkcour aged by the i ntroducti on of R i nto the system, but nei ther
#
the stabi l i zati on nor the ci rcui t effi ci ency of the system for the pri nci pal
i
mode wi l l be i mpai red appreci abl y.
1
The dampi ng of the extraneous modes can be accompl i shed by addi ng
di ssi pati on to the system i n any one of many waysfor i nstance, by
634 STABI LI ZATI ON OF FREQUENCY [SEC. 164
usi ng a transmi ssi on l i ne of appreci abl e attenuati on for the connecti ng
l i nk between the two resonant systemsbut the pr efer r ed methods are
those whi ch have a mi ni mum of i nfl uence on the pri nci pal mode. When
the l atter consi derati on i s taken i nto account, one seems to arri ve al ways
at a ci rcui t substanti al l y equi val ent to Fi g. 166. I t i s natural to i nqui re
whether or not the extraneous modes coul d be damped by coupl i ng
them to the useful l oad, so that an auxi l i ary l oad woul d be unnecessary.
Thi s possi bi l i ty has not been overl ooked, but there seems to be no sati s-
factory way of accompl i shi ng the desi red resul t.

large
(a) (b)
large

large
1
-1
y=m
(c) ( )
Fm, 16.7.(a,b,c) Q-ci rcl es: (a) measured at termi nal s ab of Fi g. 16.6; (b) at terfi nal s ac:
(c) at oppoei te ends of transmi ssi on l i ne; (d) Smi th chart.
Some of the l ess fortunate consequences of addi ng the dampi ng
resi stor to the system wi l l now be di scussed. I n general , the l arger the
val ue of R the mor e effecti ve i t i s for i ts i ntended purpose. I t al so
happens that as R is made l arger, the mor e restri cted becomes the range
through whi ch the system can be tuned wi thout undue l oss of stabi l i zati on
and ci rcui t efi ci ency. Mor e or l ess equi val entl y, the ranges of the
fl uctuati ons i n temperature, l oad, etc., agai nst whi ch the stabdi zati on
i s effecti ve are si mi l arl y reduced. The questi on of the mi ni mum tol erabl e
val ue of R is thus an i mportant one i n the desi gn of stabi l i zi ng systems.
The effect of the dampi ng resi stor i n suppressi ng the extraneous
modes can be partl y anal yzed by means of the Y~(v) or YL(6) curves for
SEC. 164] MEANS OF DAMPI NG THE EXTRANEOUS MODES 635
the system. The way i n whi ch the vari ous parameters enter i nto these
curves can be understood qual i tati vel y by consi deri ng the admi ttance
curves of i sol ated parts of the system; i nasmuch as a transmi ssi on l i ne
i s i nvol ved, i t i s conveni ent to draw the curves i n a refl ecti on-coeffi ci ent
di agram (Smi th chart). The Q-ci rcl e of the auxi l i ary cavi ty, as measured
at termi nal s a-b of Fi g. 16.6, has the form i ndi cated i n Fi g. 16.7a. As
measured between the termi nal s a-c, i t has the form i l l ustrated i n Fi g.
167b. I n both cases, the tangent of the angl e @ vari es l i nearl y wi th the
frequency. The val ue of the resi stance R is al ways made l ess than the
characteri sti c i mpedance of the transmi ssi on l i ne, and the pri mary effect
of the resi stance i s seen to be a l oweri ng of the refl ecti on coeffi ci ent (or
SWVR) for frequenci es far from resonance.
The Q-cur ve for thi s part of the system, as measured at the opposi te
end of the transmi ssi on l i ne, i s obtai ned si mpl y by di mi ni shi ng the angl e
~ for each poi nt by tmce the angl e o gi ven by Eq. (8). When thi s i s
done, the cur ve i s no l onger a per fect ci rcl e but has the shape i ndi cated
i n, Fi g. 16.7c. The behavi or of the admi ttance can be esti mated by
compari ng Fi g. 16*7c wi th the Smi th chart shown i n Fi g. 16.7d. Si nce
the cur ve now passes compl etel y through the regi on wher e the admi ttance
vari es rapi dl y wi th the angl e ~, i t can be i nferred that the admi ttance
of the system wi l l contai n vi ol ent fl uctuati ons. These fl uctuati ons occur
for 6s i n the nei ghborhood of the (6)s gi ven by Eq. (9d) and, of course,
are di rectl y rel ated to the i nfi ni ti es i n the susceptance functi on i l l ustrated
i n Fi g. 16.3, becomi ng i denti cal wi th them when R = O.
I
( The vi ol ence of the fl uctuati ons becomes l ess as R is made l arger
I
(assumi ng al ways that the val ue of R k smal l er than the characteri sti c
i mpedance of the transmi ssi on l i ne), as i s evi dent from the nature of
the Smi th di agram.
The admi ttance cur ve for the compl ete system i s obtai ned by addi ng
to the admi ttance just di scussed the term y, of Eq. (7), whi ch i s the
1
admi ttance of the magnetron pr oper . Whether or not the fi nal admi t-
tance cur ve wi l l contai n l oops depends upon the val ues of both Q,, and R;
the rel ati ons are exactl y the same as those di scussed i n connecti on wi th
the mi smatched transmi ssi on l i ne i n Chap. 7. A numeri cal exampl e
of the way i n whi ch the pr esence or absence of l oops i s i nfl uenced by the
val ue of R is contai ned i n Fi g. 16.8a, b, and c computed wi th QBI = 30,
QEZ = 3T/Z QE3 = 100; the external l oad i s assumed to be coupl ed di rectl y
to the magnetron so as to l oad the magnetron, unstabi l i zed, to a QL
of 100.
I
So far, onl y cases wher e the resonance frequenci es of the magnetron,
transmi ssi on l i ne, and auxi l i ary cavi ty are exactl y equal have been
di scussed. An i ncrease i n v,, the resonance frequency of the magnetron,
I
resul ts si mpl y i n a downward di spl acement of the cur ve and vi ce versa.
I
636 STABI LI ZATI ON OF FREQUENCY [Sw 16.4
The shape of the cur ve i s determi ned enti rel y by the rati o vs/vz; thus the
cur ve becomes unsymmetri cal when the cavi ty i s tuned or when the
transmi ssi on l i ne i s constructed wi th an i ncor r ect l ength. These effects
are perhaps mor e easi l y deduced di rectl y from fi gures such as Fi g. 16.7c
and d than from a verbal expl anati on. Concr ete exampl es of the changes
i n the cur ve caused by tuni ng the cavi ty are gi ven i n Fi g. 16.8b, d, and e,
(a)
~=0.5
133=6L+o.02
k
B~
GL
(d)
r =0.5 ?=0.71
(b) (c)
).=0.5
63=6,+0.04
9
5!L
GL
}
t
B~
GL
(e)
(f)
FI G. 16S.-(a,b,c) Admi ttance cur ves of stabi l i zed magnetron as affected by R; (b,d,e) m
affected by tuni ng the cavi ty; ~) unstabi l i zed magnetron.
wher e 63 = (vi vl )/vl . The poi nt of each cur ve marked by a ci rcl e
represents the condi ti on ~ = da.
I n desi gni ng a stabi l i zer, i t i s advantageous to make V2and v, equal
to the normal transmi tti ng frequency of the magnetron rather than equal
to i ts col d resonance frequency V,; i n that way the Y.(v) cur ve for
the system i s made roughl y symmetri cal about the operati ng curve.
The general probl em of sel ecti on among the modes that resul ts from
coupl i ng a second resonant system to that of the magnetron pr oper i s
i
SEC. 16.4] MEANS OF DAMPI NG THE EXTRANEOUS MODES 637
dk.cussed i n Chap. 7. Unfortunatel y, ther e seems to be no strai ght-
forward rul e that appl i es to the present case, al though one resul t i s
certai n, namel y, that the extraneous modes wi l l not be exci ted i f ther e does
not exi st a correspondi ng i ntersecti on between the Y~( V) cur ve and the
operati ng cur ve of the magnetron. Thus, from the standpoi nt of mode
sel ecti on, a YL(v) l i ke that of Fi g. 16.8c i s desi rabl e, for wi th such a
curve, a second i ntersecti on i s possi bl e onl y i f the operati ng cur ve has
an abnormal l y great sl ope.
On the other hand, from the standpoi nt of other properti es of the
system, i t i s desi rabl e to make R as smal l as possi bl e. For the case
r epr esented by Fi g. 16.8a through e the ci rcui t effi ci ency i s i nversel y
proporti onal to GL. I f l osses i n the cavi ty are taken i nto account, and
al so i f the l oad i s connected across the termi nal s a-c of Fi g. 16.6, the
ci rcui t effi ci ency i s gi ven by a mor e compl i cated expressi on but the behav-
i or i s qual i tati vel y the same. Fi gure 168a, b, and c i l l ustrates that
when R i s l arge, the ci rcui t effi ci ency fal l s off mor e rapi dl y wi th departures
from normal condi ti ons. I t can al so be judged from a compari son of the
fi gures that the range of condi ti ons-l oad, temperature, current, etc.
i n whi ch the stabi l i zati on i s ful l y effecti ve i s r educed materi al l y by val ues
of R great enough to suppress the l oops compl etel y.
I f these l atter consi derati ons are vi tal , i t becomes wor th whi l e to
fi nd out whether or not l oops i n the YL cur ve can be tol erated, and thi s
questi on wi l l have to be settl ed by cut-and-try methods; otherwi se the
safe thi ng to do i s to make R l arge enough to suppress the l oops. I t can
be shown that the requi red val ue, normal i zed, i s gi ven approxi matel y
by the expressi on
()
2Q32 ~.
r= ~
(Thi s expressi on hol ds mor e exactl y when the useful l oad i s coupl ed
di rectl y to the magnetron and when the l osses i n the auxi hary cavi ty
are negl i gi bl e.) The pr esence or absence of l oops can be checked by
computi ng the cur ve or by maki ng col d-test measurements. I f the
magnetron has a second output l ead, the Q-cur ve obser ved l ooki ng i nto
thi s l ead wi l l r epr oduce the YU cur ve of the system.
Perhaps i t shoul d not be surpri si ng that the practi cal probl em of mode
sel ecti on shoul d i nvol ve a good deal of empi ri ci sm. The argument gi ven
i n Chap. 7 i ndi cates that the tr ue normal modes of the systemespe-
ci al l y when the el ectroni c admi ttance i s taken i nto accounthave a.
somewhat compl i cated rel ati on to the Y(V) curve. (I t woul d be some-
what of a chor e to i nvesti gate the normal modes i n the present case, for
the pr esence of thr ee modes entai l s a cubi c equati on. Furthermore, i n a
quanti tati ve treatment the el ectroni c susceptance woul d have to be taken
638 STABILXZATI ON OF FREQUENCY [S?IC.16.4
i nto account, si nce changes i n the susceptance al one can determi ne
whether a parti cul ar normal mode i s posi ti vel y or negati vel y damped.)
I t seems l i kel y that the pul se shape may have some i nfl uence, but i t
has not been studi ed enough i n connecti on wi th stabi l i zed magnetrons to
warrant anv concl usi ons.
I n the ~ase of pul sed magnetrons, i t i s i mportant to i nqui re whether
or not stabi l i zati on wi l l greatl y i ncrease the tendency of the magnetron
to mi sfi re. I t i s i ndi cated i n Chap. 8 that mi sfi ri ng resul ts from too
sl ow a bui l dup of osci l l ati ons, rel ati ve to the rate of i ncrease of the appl i ed
vol tage. I n so far as stabi l i zati on i ncreases the effecti ve capaci ty of the
resonant system, i t perhaps mi ght be
El -&.
expected that the rate of bui l dup shoul d
be proporti onal to 1/S and that a. hi gh
degr ee of stabi l i zati on woul d i ncrease the
Izj+
tendency toward mi sfi ri ng unl ess the rate
of ri se of the appl i ed vol tage wer e r educed
by the factor 1/S. That thi s i s not
necessari l y tr ue i s pr oved by the resul ts of
hicrcwconds some experi ments whi ch wer e concer ned
FI G. 16.9.Bui l duPof osoi l l a-
ti onui n a 10-cm magn.etron-stabi -
wi th the probl em of produci ng ver y hi gh
l i zer system. S =S 60. el ectri c fi el ds wi thi n a resonant cavi ty by
exci ti ng i t wi th a pul sed magnetron. The
method of coupl i ng empl oyed can be r epr esented by the equi val ent ci rcui t
of Fi g. 16.6 wi th roughl y the fol l owi ng constants:
Q,, = 100,
Q., = a, Q,, = 16,000,
~ = Qu3/Q~a = 1,
2
.). =_.
3
The system can be consi dered to be a magnetron stabi l i zed by a factor
S of about 60. The terms i nvol vi ng G3 are not negl i gi bl e i n thi s case,
and the stabi l i zati on factor i s gi ven approxi matel y by
I
QE8
S=l+(l+rga), z
The modul ator empl oyed to dri ve the magnetron was of the hi gh-
i mpedance type, and no parti cul ar effor t was made to r edtme the rate-of-
ri se of i ts output vol tage; thus, accordi ng to the argument gi ven i n the
precedi ng paragraph, condi ti ons wer e favorabl e for the magnetron to
mi sfi re. Neverthel ess, no abnormal l y great tendency of thi s sort was
observed. Observati ons wer e anade whi ch, i n terms of Fi g. 16.6, wer e
equi val ent to measuri ng the a-c vol tage at termi nal s AA and at termi nal s
I J. Hal pem, A. E. Whi tford, and E. Everhart; Research Gr oup of El ectroni cs,
MassachusettsI nsti tute of Technol ogy, pri vate communi cati on.
SEC. 16.5] THE DESI GN OF STABI LI ZI NG CI RCUI TS 639
ab. The types of r-f pul ses obser ved are i ndi cated schemati cal l y @ Fi g.
16.9. Evi dentl y osci l l ati ons bui l d up wi thi n the magnetron i tsel f at
somethi ng l i ke the normal rate, whi l e the ampl i tude bui l ds up wi thi n the
cavi ty at a rate that i s roughl y consi stent wi th i ts Q. That thi s can
happen i s due essenti al l y to the bufferi ng acti on of the resi stance R. (The
fal l acy i n the argument that i ntroduced thi s di scussi on l i es i n not con-
si deri ng the properti es of the system throughout a range of frequenci es
great enough to encompass the bandwi dth of the transi ent.)
16.5. The Desi gn of Stabi l i zi ng Cf.rcui ts.-Pri mary emphasi s wi l l be
gi ven to systems that use a transmi ssi on l i ne to coupl e the auxi l i ary cavi ty
to the magnetron because the constructi on of bui l t-i n stabi l i zers for l arge
stabi l i zati on factors has not pr ogr essed beyond the experi mental stage.
The coupl i ng of the transmi ssi on l i ne to the magnetron i s tr eated el se-
wher e i n thi s vol ume and wi l l be taken for granted her e. The probl em
then i s r educed to approxi mati ng as cl osel y as possi bl e the equi val ent
ci rcui t of Fi g. 16.6 and becomes l argel y an exer ci se i n mi crowave pl umb-
i ng. I t i s feasi bl e her e merel y to i ndi cate some of the structures that
have been found to be practi cabl e.
An i rk has usual l y been used to coupl e the transmi ssi on l i i e to the
cavi ty. The coupl i ng resul ts from the i nteracti on of magneti c fi el ds
across the i ri s; and si nce fai rl y ti ght coupl i ng i s requi red, the i ri s i s cut
i nto a regi on of the cavi ty wher e the magneti c fi el d i s l arge. The cutaway
i n Fi g. 16.14 i l l ustrates thi s type of coupl i ng to a coaxi al l i ne. A cavi ty
si mi l arl y coupl ed to the broad si de of a rectangul ar wavegui de has
si mi l ar el ectri cal properti es: The cavi ty acts as a paral l el -resonant ci rcui t
i n seri es wi th one si de of the transmi ssi on l i ne at the l ocati on of the i ri s.
A compl ete system, empl oyi ng coaxi al l i ne, i s i l l ustrated schemati cal l y
i n Fi g. 16.10a. I f the useful l oad i s to be coupl ed di rectl y to the mag-
netron, the T-juncti on i s omi tted. Except for the hal f-wavel ength of
transmi ssi on l i ne between the T-juncti on and the cavi ty and for the
i mperfecti ons of the A/4 transformersnei ther of whi ch are actual l y
of great i mportance-thi s arrangement i s a good real i zati on of the
requi red ci rcui t. A compl ete system empl oyi ng rectangul ar gui de i s
i l l ustrated schemati cal l y i n Fi g. 16. 10b. Because of the fact that an
E-pl ane juncti on i s used, the di stances of cavi ty to juncti on and of
juncti on to magnetron di ffer by a quarter wavel ength from the coaxi al
cases; i f an H-pl ane juncti on i s used, these di stances are the same as for
the coaxi al case.
I t must be emphasi zed that i n the l arge-scal e appl i cati on of stabi l i zi ng
cavi ti es a most i mportant consi derati on i s the control of the el ectri cal
di stance between the magnetron and the stabi l i zi ng cavi ty. Thi s
di stance appears as a l ength 1i n the equi val ent ci rcui ts and the equati ons.
Actual l y i t has to be measured from the r efer ence pl ane T i ntroduced
i n Fi g. 7.5; thi s pl ane has no si mpl e rel ati on to the mechani cal features
640
STABI LI ZATI ON OF FREQ7J ENCY
[SEC. 16
of the magnetron, but i t can be determi ned by col d-i mpedance measure-
ments. The l ocati on of the pl ane of r efer ence vari es from one magnetron
to another because of i nequal i ti es i n the constructi on and i nstal l ati on
of the output l eads.
stabi l i zi ng cavi ty i s
The permi ssi bl e tol erance i n the pl acement of
of the or der of O.Ol kver y much l ess than
& transformer =
To magnetron

+ IT
IIL
Cavity
To auxiliary load
i !
the
the
n+
++++
j\
~ transformer
(effective)
4
(a)
2
g
.-
-
z
3>g
4
I
To magnetron
To useful l oad
>
r
tE
(effective) (b)
FI G. 16.10.(a) Compl ete stabi l i zi ng system empl oyi ng coaxi al l i ne; (I J) compl ete
stahl i zi ng system empl oyi ng rcctangu]ar gui de.
uncertai nty i n the pl ane of r efer ence for practi cal l y al l commerci al
magnet rons.
I n the case of the 2.J59 magnetron (Fi g. 16.11) the di ffi cul ty i s sol ved
by control l i ng the output l ead of the magnetronthe manufacturer
tests the l eads i n advance and uses onl y those whi ch have the pr oper
el ectri cal l ength. I n the stabi l i zer desi gned for the 2J48 magnetron
1 W. M. Preston and J. B. Pl att, RL Group Report No, 473.
~W, M. Preston, RL Group5/31/44 Report No. 71, Nfay 31, 1944.
I
SEC. 165] THE DESI GN OF STABI LI ZI NG CI RCUI TS 641
(Fi g. 16. 12) the di stance i s made adjustabl e by i ncorporati ng a
Z-juncti on i nto the stabi l i zer. I n the 2J41 magnetron (Fi g.
a tuni n~gscr ew i s pl aced i n the transmi ssi on l i ne i n such a way as i
---
_r ._. _... ---- .
sl i di ng
16.13)
>0al l ow
I
I @a. 16.11.Type 2J59 magnetron and stabi l i zi ng cavi ty.
r are
con-
l al to
642 STABI LI ZATI ON OF FREQ(?ENCY [SEC. 165
[%. (ener gy stored) ]/power, one can der i ve for a rectangul ar cavi ty the
rel ati on
QhP _ 7fcoC
E2V 2
(MKS uni ts),
wher e E is the el ectri c fi el d and v the vol ume of the cavi ty. Expressed
i n the uni ts X cm, E vol ts/cm, v ems, P watts, the rel ati on i s
The rel ati on wi l l gi ve the or der of magni tude of the vol ume requi red i n
cavi ti es of other si mpl e shapes. The above rel ati on yi el ds, for the condi -
OUTPUT
I
POLYIRON SUSEPTANCE
BALANCING PLUG
d i i .STtJBILIZING
POLYIRON ROD
-A
k++! MAGNETRON
r WE;;[N,
TRANSFORMER
Fm. 16. 13.Type 2J41 stabi l i zed magnetron.
ti ons Q = 500, E = 30,000, X = 10, P = 50,000, a requi red vol ume of
132 cm3, and exper i ence shows that thi s i s too smal l by a factor of about
4. Of course, car e must be taken wi th the tuni ng mechani sm; or because
of l ocal i zed i ntense fi el ds, i t wi l l greatl y r educe the power-handl i ng
capabi l i ty of the system.
Ordi nari l y a stabi l i zer must be desi gned for a gi ven tuni ng range and
degr ee of stabi l i zati on. The tuni ng range throughout whi ch the effi -
ci ency and stabi l i zati on wi l l not fal l bel ow somethi ng l i ke 75 per cent
of thei r maxi mum val ues wi l l amount to about one-thi rd of the val ue of
643 SEC. 165] THE DESI GN OF STABI LI ZI NG CI RCUI TS
6 gi ven by Eq. (9d); that i s,
Tuni ng range = ~(Q.,QEi )~fi
or
Tuni ng range =
H(S l ) QEI QRZ]~.
(To compute the tuni ng range accuratel y, one woul d have to take i nto
account many of the detai l s of the ci rcui t. ) General l y i t wi l l be found
that the tuni ng range i s al l too smal l , and one wi l l make Qz2 as smal l as
i s practi cabl e by shorteni ng the transmi ssi on l i ne, but thi s possi bi l i ty i s
soon exhausted. To i ncrease the tuni ng range further, QEI must be made
smal l er; that i s, the magnetron must be mor e ti ghtl y coupl ed to the
transmi ssi on l i ne. Thi s wi l l requi re a speci al magnetron wi th an abnor-
mal l y l arge pul l i ng fi gure.
When a speci al magnetron i s requi red, i t woul d seem sensi bl e to have
one constructed wi th two output l eadsone normal l y coupl ed l ead for
the useful l oad and one ti ghtl y coupl ed l ead for the stabi l i zer. I n that
way the !!-juncti on can be el i mi nated and the l i ne made shorter. The
pl umbi ng probl em i s consi derabl y si mpl i fi ed al so, and the system i s
made general l y neater. An experi mental c-w magnetron stabi l i zed
i n thi s way i s shown i n Fi g. 16.14; thi s combi nati on was constructed by
attachi ng a stabi l i zer to the tuni ng l ead of the magnetron i l l ustrated
i n Fi g. 14.12. Wi th pul sed magnetrons, however , one has to consi der
the ci rcumstance that the vol tages devel oped i n the transmi ssi on l i ne
wi l l i ncrease wi th the coupl i ng.
When the stabi l i zed magnetron i s requi red to run at a preassi gned
frequency, the stabi l i zer can be used wi th a fi xed-tuned magnetron
provi ded the combi nati on has a great enough tuni ng range to compensate
for the scatter that i s unavoi dabl e i n manufacture as wel l as for agi ng
effects i n the magnetron and for the fl uctuati ons i n operati ng condi ti ons.
A hi gher degr ee of stabi l i zati on i s feasi bl e, however , i f the magnetron
i tsel f i s tunabl e, so that tuni ng range of the stabi l i zed combi nati on can
be sacri fi ced i n the i nterest of a hi gher stabi l i zati on factor. By taki ng
advantage of thi s possi bi l i ty, i t has been possi bl e to attai n a stabi l i zati on
factor of about 10 i n the combi nati ons shown i n Fi gs. 16.11 and 16.13;
these magnetrons wer e desi gned for use i n beacon transmi tters and
ther efor e must oper ate at an assi gned frequency.
Built-in Stabihzers.A moderate degr ee of stabi l i zati on has been
bui l t i nto two commerci al magnetrons i n or der to i mprove the effi ci ency
at the pul l i ng fi gure requi red of them i n thei r appl i cati ons. The stabi l i -
zati on factor S i s l ess than 3, so no dampi ng resi stor i s requi red. The
cavi ti es are i ncorporated i nto the output l eads of the magnetrons.
When the auxi l i ary cavi ty i s essenti al l y tangent to the magnetron,
so that the coupl i ng can be effected by si mpl y an i ri s, wi th no trans-
644 STABI LI ZATI ON OF FREQUENCY
[SEC. 16.5
mi ssi on l i ne, i t i s possi bl e to secur e very ti ght coupl i ng and wi de mode
separati ons. Thus the essenti al requi rement of a wi de tuni ng range can
be met. However, no enti rel y sati sfactory way of i ntroduci ng the
[
Transformer
~
L41L
plunger
1-
4
%Coupling iris
~ Tuning adjustment
/u
Stabilizing cavity
FI G. 16. 14.A stabi l i zed c-w magnetron.
dampi ng resi stor has been di scovered, so the potenti al benefi ts to be
deri ved fr om the cl ose coupl i ng have not been real i zed i n a tube wi th a
hi gh stabi l i zati on factor. 12xperi mental tubes were constructed wi th a
r
I
I
1
SEC. 16.5] THE DESI GN OF S7ABI LI ZI KG CI RCUI TS 645
ci rcui t si mi l ar to that used i n the tunabl e magnetrons descri bed i n
Chap. 14, except that the constants of the system wer e chosen for hi gh
stabi l i zati on. Anequi val ent ci rcui t thati scl osel y rel ated tothe physi cal
structure i s that shown i n Fi g. 16.15a ;thi sci rcui t hasthe same properti es
as that of Fi g. 16.2b as far as the admi ttance at the termi nal s A i s con-
cer ned. I n the ci rcui t of Fi g. 1615a the dampi ng resi stor must be
(a)
(b)
FI G. 16.15.(a) Equi val ent ci rcui t of cavi ty and magnetron coupl ed by an i ri s; (b) i ri s wi th
dampi ng resi stor,
shunted across the paral l el -resonant ci rcui t, whi ch corresponds to the
gap i n the i ri s.
I n the experi mental magnetrons, the gap of the i ri s was l oaded by
connecti ng a coaxi al l i ne across i t, as i s i l l ustrated by a secti onal vi ew i n
Fi g. 16. 15b. The coaxi al l i ne passes through a vacuum seal as i n a coaxi al
output l ead, so the power-di ssi pati ng el ement can be pl aced outsi de
the vacuum envel ope. For the dampi ng resi stor to ful fi l l i ts functi on,
i t i s, of course, necessary that i t ha~e the pr oper val ue and al so that i t
be broadband; otherwi se i t ~vi l l i ntrodl l re extra resonances i nto the
system. I t appears that i t i s rather di ffi cul t to sati sfy thi s condi ti on.
PART V
PRACTI CE
I t has been the exper i ence of the Radi ati on Laboratory that one of
the major tasks i n produci ng a sati sfactory magnetron desi gn i s the
el i mi nati on of mi nor undesi rabl e characteri sti cs. Ever y new desi gn
i nvol ved the constructi on of a l arge number of good experi mental tubes
and a thorough testi ng of them. I n the process, a l arge amount of
practi cal knowl edge was acqui red and Chaps. 17 to 19 contai n the part
of thi s know how that wi l l be hel pful to those confr onted wi th the
probl em of constructi ng a workabl e magnetron.
The constructi on of experi mental magnetrons fr ee of i mperfecti ons
that woul d i nter fer e wi th the i nterpretati on of experi mental data i s a
major probl em, and those who are unfami l i ar wi th thi s practi ce may fi nd
i t di ffi cul t to understand the i mportance gi ven to i t her e. The techni ques
and processes descri bed i n Chap. 17 have been chosen not onl y for thei r
parti cul ar i mportance i n the constructi on of magnetrons but for thei r
broader appl i cati ons as wel l .
Rarel y, i f ever , does the fi rst experi mental model of a pr oposed
magnetron meet al l the requi rements contempl ated, and data must be
taken on the fi rst experi mental tube to determi ne the modi fi cati ons to
be i ncorporated i n the next attempt. Two ki nds of data may be taken:
the so-cal l ed col d resonance measurements, made on the anode bl ock
and output ci rcui t of a nonosci l l ati ng tube, and the measurements on
the operati ng magnetron. The fi rst ki nd, whi ch i s dkcussed i n the fi rst
part of Chap. 18, i s useful i n that i t i sol ates the r-f ci rcui t probl ems from
the over-al l operati ng characteri sti cs obtai ned from the osci l l ati ng
magnetron and thus faci l i tates the i nterpretati on of al l the data. The
second part of Chap. 18 expl ai ns the techni que of taki ng operati ng data
and gi ves i nstructi ons for operati ng both pul sed and c-w magnetrons.
Chapter 19, Typi cal Magnetrons, i s a r ecor d of practi cal accom-
pl i shments of the many l aboratori es that wer e i nvol ved i n the devel op-
ment of mi crowave magnetrons. Essenti al di mensi ons and operati ng
characteri sti cs for representati ve magnetrons of pr oved desi gn are gi ven.
1-
I
I
I
CHAPTER 17
CONSTRUCTI ON
BY J. R. FELDMEI ER
Warti me research has greatl y advanced the art of fabri cati ng el ec-
troni c tubes that do not depend on gl ass envel opes for thei r vacuum.
Most of thi s advance resul ted from kl ystron and magnetron constructi on,
i n whi ch i t has been necessary to bui l d hi gh-Q resonant cavi ti es i nto the
vacuum chamber. I n the case of the magnetron, the necessi ty for wor k-
i ng copper i nto i ntri cate shapes to form several paral l el -resonant cavi ti es
about a cyl i ndri cal anode has resul ted i n techni ques that wi l l be of use
i n the constructi on of a great number of other devi ces. I n addi ti on to
r ecor di ng these new techni ques thi s chapter wi l l gi ve i nformati on by
detai l or r efer ence on al l steps of magnetron constructi on, so that an
experi menter new to the fi el d of mi crowave magnetrons wi l l be abl e to
bui l d tubes.
To those not al ready acquai nted wi th tube maki ng, a wor d of cauti on
i s i n or der . To construct a successful hermeti cal l y seal ed el ectr on tube
i s not easy. To bui l d experi mental tubes at the rate of onl y one per week
requi res the use of a l aboratory havi ng equi pment readi l y avai l abl e to
per for m ever y operati on. The number of i ndi vi dual operati ons that
go i nto the constructi on of a typi cal magnetron i s surpri si ngl y l arge,
usual l y amounti ng to about 150. Most of these operati ons are on
component parts that can be readi l y i nspected and er r or s cor r ected, but
ther e are about 25 operati ons of a ver y cri ti cal nature that wi l l l ead to a
bad tube unl ess great car e i s exer ci sed and defects are detected earl y.
Thus care, i nspecti on, and cl eanl i ness cannot be overemphasi zed. Wi th
these facts i n mi nd and.from the poi nt of vi ew of the experi menter rather
than the manufacturer, the materi al of thi s chapter was sel ected.
I t shoul d be emphasi zed al so that thk chapter wi l l not be an exhaus-
ti ve treatment of tube constructi on but i n most cases wi l l gi ve exampl es
of typi cal pr ocedur e that the experi menter wi l l want to modi fy. I t i s
hoped that the descri pti ons wi l l suggest modi fi cati ons appropri ate to the
speci al probl ems.
17.1. Fabri cati on of Anode Bl ocks.The anode bl ock i ncl udes the
resonant system and ther efor e not onl y must be a col l ector capabl e of
power di ssi pati on but must have a hi gh unl oaded Q; thus a materi al
of hi gh conducti vi ty i s requi red. Copper has been used for the bl ock
649
I
650 CONSTRUCTI ON [SEC. 17.1
materi al for al l present mi crowave magnetrons (al though some effor t
has gone i nto the devel opment of tantal um and tungsten bl ocks to
r educe the change i n magnetron frequency wi th temperature at some
sacri fi ce of unl oaded Q). Wi th the excepti on of the techni que usedby
RCAi nmakl ngthe2J41 (see Chap. 19), thecopper i sal soused to form
the vacuum seal . To sati sfy these requi rements of hi gh-Q and good
vacuum qual i ti es, OI ?HC (oxygen-fr ee hi gh conducti vi ty) copper has
general l y been used. Sel eni um copper has al so been successful l y
empl oyed her e and i n Engl and. The advantage of sel eni um copper over
OFHC l i es i n i ts superi or machi ni ng qual i ti es, but the rel i abi l i ty of i ts
vacuum qual i ti es has been questi oned.
The methods of fabri cati on that have been used for magnetron bl ocks
are summari zed i n Tabl e 17.1 al ong wi th exampl es that are descri bed i n
Chap. 19.
TABLE 17.1.FABRI CATI ON METHODS FOR ANODE BLOCKS
Methods of fabri cati on Exampl es
Machi ni ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WE 725A
Lami nati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Raytheon 2J30-34
Ji g assembl y, . . . . . . . . . 2J42, RL HP1OV
Hobbl i n g. . . . . . . . . . . . :::::::::::::: 3J31
Vacuum casti ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machl ett HPI OV
Si nteri ug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speci al BM50 anodes
JI ach;ni ng.-For maki ng experi mental bl ocks i n the 10- and 3-cm
wavel ength bands, the preci si on bori ng, sl otti ng, broachi ng, mi l l i ng,
or turni ng of copper i s qui te successful ; 1 and al though di ffi cul t, tubes at
the 1.25-cm band have been made by preci si on machi ni ng methods.
For maki ng a few experi mental tubes, there i s l i ttl e choi ce between
thi s method and ji g assembl y, a process of fabri cati on that wi l l be
descri bed i n detai l .
Lami nati on.The l ami nati on method consi sts of punchi ng di sks
fr om thi n sheets of copper, stacki ng them wi th al ternate pi eces of sol der
foi l si mi l arl y punched, and passi ng the assembl ed stack through a brazi ng
furnace to for m an anode bl ock. The method has been used successful l y
for 10-cm magnetrons, but the mechani cal i rregul ari ti es exi sti ng among
the brazed l ami nated parts become seri ous at shorter wavel engths. Thi s
method i s sui tabl e for l arge-scal e producti on.
Ji g Assernbl y.-The ji g assembl y method empl oys preci si on brazi ng
to for m bl ocks by hol di ng component anode-bl ock parts i n a fi xture
that can be removed after the parts are joi ned. I t has provecl to be one
of the most effecti ve methods of bl ock fabri cati on and accordi ngl y
wi l l be descri bed here i n detai l by fol l owi ng the pr ocedur e used i n con-
I E. Oberg and F. D. Jones, Machi ni sts Handbook, I ndustri al Press, New York,
1945.
SEC. 17.1] FABRI CATI ON OF ANODE BLOCKS 651
Fm. 17.1.Vrnne-puncbi ng tool s.
strutti ng a speci fi c anode bl ock, namel y, the 2J42, a 3-cm pul sed mag-
netr on (see Chap. 19).
The fi rst step i n the construc-
ti on of the 2J42 bl ock i s the
preparati on of the vane and strap-
pi ng-ri ng stock, accompl i shed by
rol l i ng OFHC copper stri ps to a
thi ckness of 0.020 ~ 0.0005 i n.
From thi s materi al the bl ock
vanes and ri ngs are punched wi th
the ai d of the tool sl shown i n Fi gs.
17.1 to 17.4. The cutti ng tool s
are made from Hal combs Ketos2
tool steel hardened to a Rockwel l
C of about 63 and supported i n
col d-rol l ed steel hol ders. I n
machi ni ng the vane punch shown
Fm. 17.2. Aseembl y of vane-punchi ng tool s.

i n Fi gs. 17.1 and 17.2, the strap gr ooves are mi l l ed to si ze, but the outsi de
surfaces of the tool are l eft 1 or 2 roi l s over si ze to permi t gri ndi ng to
1For detai l ed i nformati on see F. A. Stanl ey, Pundws and &s, McGraw-Hi l l ,
New York, 1943; C. W. Hi nman, Di e En@neering Layouia and Formulq McGraw-
Hi l l , New York, 1943.
~Obtai nabl e fr om Hal comb Steel Di vi si on, Cruci bl e Steel CQ. of Ameri ca) Syra-
cuee, N.Y.
652 CONSTRUCTI ON [SEC. 171
si ze after the hardeni ng heat treatment. By so doi ng, some di mensi onal
dktorti ons can be el i mi nated whi ch are unavoi dabl y i ntroduced duri ng
the hardeni ng process. l he vane di e i s mi l l ed i n two hal ves; and after
hardeni ng, the hal ves are mounted together i n tl -re col d-rol l ed steel
support to form the compl eted di e. To pr event sever e roundi ng of the
Fr~, 17.3.Ri ng-punchi ng tool s.
cor ner s of the punched parts, i t may be necessary to use a pressure pad.
Thi s i s a tool si mi l ar to the punch mounted on rubber or spri ngs beneath
the di e, so that the copper i s al ways pushed agai nst some backi ng. I n
the case of the di e i n Fi gs. 17.1 and 17.2 the depth of the di e tool i s great
enough to stor e several vanes whi ch act as a pressure pad. For l arger
vanes a pressure pad woul d probabl y be necessary. The tool s for
Fm. 17.4.Assembl y of ri ng-punchi ng tool s.
punchi ng the ri ngs are shown i n
Fi gs. 17.3 and 17.4. A pressure
pad i s necessary i n thi s case. The
smal l pi pe on the stock gui de i s
for admi tti ng compressed ai r to
eject the fi ni shed ri ngs.
A copper shel l (Fi g. 17.5) i s
needed to form the compl ete anode
bl ock; the one shown was turned
from round copper stock. The
part of the shel l that i s to be
joi ned to the vanes i s reamed to
wi thi n 0.0005 i n. of the speci fi ed
di mensi on. AU bl ock parts are
deburred to obtai n pr oper fi tti ng i n the ji g, and thi s can be done by usi ng
a scrapi ng tool on i ndi vi dual pi eces; or i f one has a ver y l arge number of
parts, they can be successful l y deburred by rol l i ng them i n a bottl e on a
bal l mi l l .
The ji g for assembl i ng these component parts i s made from l ow-sul fur
content stai nl ess steel desi gnated by I ndustri al No. 18-S and Type No.
302, 304, or 308, whi ch, when oxi di zed, wi l l not be wet by the brazi ng
SEC. 17.1] FABR~CA TZON OF ANODE BWCKS
653
materi al . Because the ji g must hol d i n i nti mate contact the component
parts to be sol dered, they must be reached to a hi gh degr ee of accuracy.
For a bl ock the si ze of the 2J42, the tol er$mce si tuati on i s eased somewhat
by the fact that the smal l copper parts can be squeezed i nto contact
wi thout a dkturbi ng amount of di storti on.
A compl i cati on ari ses from
the fact that stai nl ess steel gr ows
sl i ghtl y upon i ni ti al heati ng.
As a resul t, the practi ce has been to machi ne the parts to ver y cl ose
FI G. 17.5.2J42 anode-bl ock parts, assembl y ji g, and fi ni shed anode bl ock.
tol erances and then make tri al -and-error cor r ecti ons i n the ji g by observ-
i ng i ts brazi ng accuracy.
The anode bl ock parts are assembl ed i n the fol l owi ng manner:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The stri ppi ng ri ng i s pl aced on the ji g body.
The ri ngs wi th strap breaks
are pl aced i n gr ooves i n the ji g
body (not shown i n Fi g. 17.5). Thi s l ower set of ri ngs has strap
breaks that are brought to thei r pr oper pl aces by pi ns i n the strap
gr ooves.
The center pi n i s pl aced i n the ji g body.
The vanes are assembl ed i nto the ji g sl ots and i nto the l ower ri ngs.
The gui de ri ng i s sl i pped over the vanes to for ce them agai nst the
center pi n.
The top ri ngs are pl aced i n the vane gr ooves.
The shel l i s pushed ,over the assembl ed vanes, forci ng the gui de
ri ng down and out of the way.
654 CONSTRUCTION [SEC. 17.1
8. The vane hol der i s dr opped over the center pi n.
9. The cl ampi ng nut i s pl aced on the center pi n and scr ewed i nto
pl ace, thus hol di ng the asaembl ed structure together ready for
brazi ng (see Sec. 17.3).
After brazi ng the anode bl ock i s r emoved by
1. Removi ng the cl ampi ng nut and vane hol der.
2. Forci ng the bl ock off the ji g by putti ng a stri pper through hol es
i n the bottom of the ji g body and pushi ng agai nst the stri ppi ng
ri ng.
I t i s necessary to keep the center pi n smooth and fr ee from the sl i ghtest
burr so that the vanes are not di storted whi l e bei ng r emoved from the
ji g.
Some 2J42 bl ocks have been made wi th a modi fi ed ji g that i s si mpl er
i n come respects. The si mpl i fi cati on i s i ntroduced by broachi ng sl ots
(0.020 i n. deep) i nto the anode shel l ; these sl ots are used to hol d and
posi ti on the vanes duri ng brazi ng, thus removi ng the necessi ty for the
accuracy i n hol di ng and posi ti oni ng the vanes that must otherwi se be
bui l t i nto the ji g. Thi s broachi ng operati on saves consi derabl e ti me
when done wi th a tool that broaches al l 12 sl ots si mul taneousl y.
For 3-cm wavel ength tubes i n whi ch the vanes are about 0.020 i n.
thi ck, punchi ng i s qui te sati sfactory. For gr eater thi ckness, as for 10-cm
wavel ength tubes, punchi ng may not be practi cal , but one can mi l l the
vanes from stock materi al . The HP1OV magnetron (see Chap. 19)
i s made by thi s method.
Wi th OFHC copper , a rati o of vane thi ckness to l ength of 0.08
approxi mates a l ower l i mi t for ji g-assembl ed tubes. Wi th the mechani -
cal l y str onger metal , Chase al l oy No. 58, thi nner vanes can be assembl ed,
reachi ng a correspondi ng rati o of about 0.05. At r oom temperature
the el ectri cal conducti vi ty of Chase al l oy No. 58 i s about hal f that of
OFHC copper . At 200C, however , the conducti vi ti es are equal ;
and hence i f the vanes are at thi s temperature duri ng operati on, the
unl oaded Q wi l l be unaffected by the use of thi s al l oy.
I n the cases wher e i t i s necessary to taper the ends of the vanes, as
i n the BM50 and 2J41 (see Chap. 19), the ji g assembl y method has a
di sti nct advantage over other methods of constructi on.
Hobbi ng.Hobbi ng i s the process of dri vi ng a hardened tool (the
bob) i nto a bl ock of metal to pr oduce a desi red confi gurati on. I n
magnetron constructi on the hob can be so formed that upon the removal
of the tool one has a compl eted copper anode bl ock, except for faci ng
off the ends and for the straps, i f they are i ncl uded i n the desi gn.
The
bobbi ng method i s parti cul arl y useful i n the constructi on of smal l anode
bl ocks and especi al l y advantageous i n desi gns wi thout strappi ng, l i ke
SEC. 17.1]
ri si ng-sun bl ocks.
that have i nsi de
FABRI CATI ON OF ANODE BLOCKS 655
Hobbi ng i s al so adaptabl e to maki ng other tube parts
shapes whi ch cannot be readi l y machi ned, such as
thetaperbd secti ons of wavegui de outputs.
Fi gure 17.6 shows atypi cal set of bobbi ng tool s. Thehob, bottom
pl ate, dri ver, shel l , andremoval tool areal l made of tool steel hardened
toa Rockwel l Cof 58t060. Among the Carpenter matched tool steel s,l
Hampden oi l -hardened steel has pr oved sati sfactory. The shel l shown
i n Fi g. 17.6 i s 8-i n. OD. I t i s made i n two parts i n or der to ease the
hardeni ng probl em associ ated wi th pi eces of such l arge vol ume and to
FrQ. 17.6.Hobbhg tool s.
gi ve radi al strength to the tool . Forsmal l er tool s the outer col d-rol l ed
steel shel l i s not necessary.
The bobbi ng process i s performed i n the fol l owi ng manner:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The bottom pl ate i s pl aced i n the shel l .
A copper cyl i nder i s pl aced i n the shel l and rests on the bottom
pl ate.
The hob i s pl aced i n the dri ver.
The combi ned hob and dri ver are i nverted from the posi ti on shown
i n Fi g. 17.6 and are pl aced i n the shel l , the hob resti ng on the
copper cyl i nder.
The parts thus assembl ed are pl aced i n a press between hardened
steel pl ates, and the hob dri ven i nto the copper cyl i nder.
A press made by the Watson-Sti l l man Company of Rosel l e, N. J., can
del i ver a for ce up to 100 tons and has been sati sfactory for thi s job. The
best speed for bobbi ng has not been studi ed thoroughl y. At the
Col umbi a Uni versi ty Radi ati on Laboratory, the practi ce has been to
hob by a sl ow, even successi on of thrusts. I t i s a common practi ce to
use castor oi l as a l ubri cant to hel p r educe the for ces requi red. Aquadag
I Frank R. Pal mer, Tool Steel Simplified, Carpenter Steel Go,, Readi ng, Pa, 1937;
Carpenter Matched Tool Steel Manual , Carpenter Steel Co., Readi ng, Pa., 1944.
656 CONSTRUCTI ON
woul d vrobabl v be effecti ve, but i t has been
[SEC. 17.1
found di ffi cul t to cover al l
porti o~s of a; anode-bl ock hob wi th i t. The bobbi ng for ce on l arge
bl ocks can be r educed consi derabl y by bori ng a hol e through the center
of the steel bottom pl ate, thus provi di ng space for the di spl aced copper .
The hol e shoul d be about 0.010 i n. smal l er i n di ameter than the anode-
bl ock di ameter to pr event the thi n copper vanes from draggi ng down.
Chromi um pl ati ng the bobs wi l l further r educe the for ce necessary
for dri vi ng the tool i nto the copper , but thi s techni que i s not appl i cabl e
to anode-bl ock bobs, as i t i s di ffi cul t to get the pl ate to cover the i ntri -
catel y shaped tool evenl y. Wavegui de bobs, however , are usual l y
chromi um pl ated. Consi derabl e savi ng i n bobbi ng for ce can be had i f
the copper sl ug i s hel d at an el evated temperature; thi s process, cal l ed
hot bobbi ng, keeps the copper anneal ed throughout the bobbi ng
operati on. Ther e does not seem to be much advantage i n merel y
anneal i ng the copper previ ous to the bobbi ng thrust, probabl y because
the copper wor k hardens wi th but smal l penetrati on of the bob. The
best temperature for hot bobbi ng has not been thoroughl y i nvesti gated,
but i t probabl y i s cl ose to 550C. Thi s temperature i s a bal ance between
softeni ng of the cyl i nder copper and softeni ng of the bob-tool steel .
At these temperatures Hampden steel wi l l not stand up, so i t i s necessary
TABLE 17.2.ANODE-BLOCK HOBBI NG DATA
No. of
vanes
1s
18
18
18
18
26
26
26
26
38
38
38
38
50
Anode
i i ameter,
i n.
0,413
0,170
0.162
0.148
0.093
0.210
0.158
0,137
0.138
0.337
0.339
0.097
0.093
0.140
ds, in.
0.752
0.312
0.291
0.286
0.168
0.327
0.256
0.220
0.274
0.490
0,479
0.122
0.133
0.162
de, * i n.
0,984
0,502
0.410
0,227
0.478
0.396
0.340
. . . .
0.645
0.726
0.170
0,145
0.222
17hi ckness
of Cu l i rl ,
i n.
0.0430
0.0170
0.0150
0.0100
0.0100
0.0135
0.0100
0.0090
0.0080
0.0170
0.0140
0.0040
0.0040
0.0040
Depth of
bobbi ng,
i D.
0.800
0.530
0.375
0.250
0.187
0.375
0.275
0.275
. . . . .
0.625
0.450
0.125
0.125
0.125
Total
for ce
requi red,
l b
120 x l o~
37
39
20
8
30
27
27
3
35
15
4
2
4
G See Chap. 19.
SEC. 17.1] FABRI CATI ON OF ANODE BLOCKS 657
to use a steel l i ke Carpenters Star Zeni th, hardened to a Rockwel l C
of about 59. I n maki ng thi s change one must tol erate hardeni ng
di storti on i n the bob. For hot bobbi ng, the temperature of the bobbi ng
assembl y can be conveni entl y control l ed by r-f i nducti on heati ng.
I t has been found that fi ner structures can be formed successful l y i f hot
bobbi ng i s empl oyed.
The many confl i cti ng factors make i t extr emel y di ffi cul t to cal cul ate
the for ce necessary for bobbi ng. For thk reason Tabl es 17.2 and 17.3
are gi venz to convey an i dea of the magni tude of the requi red forces.
I n Tabl e 17.2, the 18-vane bl ocks, the fi rst thr ee 26-vane bl ocks, and
the fi rst 38-vane bl ock wer e col d bobbed. Al l others wer e hot bobbed,
and the decr ease i n total for ce requi red to hob these bl ocks i s apparent.
TABLE17.3,WAVEGUI DE-OUTFUT HOBBI NGDATA
Wi dth of
wavegni de,i n
1,125
0.900
0.420
0.112
Hei ght of
wavegui de, i n.
0.500
0.400
0.170
0,050
Depth of
bobbi ng, i n
Total for ce
requi red, l b
155 x 109
100
24
4
The fi rst and second 38-vane bl ocks i ndi cate a l ower l i mi t on col d bobbi ng,
because the second 38-vane bl ock coul d not be successful l y col d bobbed.
The di fference i n bobbi ng for ce between the thi rd and fourth 38-vane
bl ocks i s attri buted to the qual i ty of the surface on the bob. The fourth
38-vane bl ock was made wi th a hob havi ng a smoother surface, si nce
thi s hob was made by gri ndi ng a hardened pi ece of steel rather than by
mi l l i ng and then hardeni ng. (See l ater di scussi on on maki ng the bob. )
After the hob has been dri ven i nto the copper cyl i nder, the copper i s
separated from the bobbi ng tool s. To do thi s, the removal tool shown i n
Fi g. 17.6 i s pl aced under the shel l . The press i s used to dri ve the copper
and hob through the shel l unti l i t drops i nto the central space of the
removal tool . I f a hol e has been made i n the bottom pl ate to r educe the
requi red bobbi ng for ce, i t wi l l be necessary to dri l l out the copper pushed
i nto thi s hol e i n or der to separate the bottom pl ate from the copper sl ug.
The combi ned copper and hob are now fr ee from the bobbi ng tool s and
ready for separati on.
The copper and hob are separated by the use of the stri ppi ng tool s
shown i n Fi g. 17.7, arranged as i n Fi g. 17.8. By pl aci ng thi s arrange-
ment i n the press and pushi ng on the cyl i nder D, the hob i s pul l ed out
of the copper by a for ce that i s al ways paral l el to the for ce ori gi nal l y
~I bid.
i
~Data fr om S. Son ki n, Col umbi a Uni versi ty Rarl i ati on I ,ahoratory, New York,
j)
I
658
CONSTRUCTION [SEC. 17.1
used to dri ve the bob. I n stri ppi ng, the most i mportant precauti on
i s to use car e i n maki ng the i ni ti al contact of the press-dri vi ng pi ston
wi th the stri ppi ng cyl i nder D, as too sudden contact may break thehob
off i n the copper .
(A) (B) (c) (D)
FI G. 17.7.Stri ppi ng tool s.
After the copper sl ug has been stri pped from the bob, i t i s sl i pped
on a mandrel whi ch makes a ti ght fi t i n the bl ock hol e, and the l ower
end of the sl ug i s turned off to wi thi n a few roi l s of the farthest penetrati on
FI G. 17.8.Assembl y of stri ppi ng
tool s.
I t can then be l eached out
resi due.
of the bob, and the anodejbl ock OD
turned to si ze. The bl ock i s then r e-
moved from the mandrel and pl aced i n a
wheel chuck, and the remai nder of the
cutti ng i s done to arri ve at the desi red
bl ock hei ght. Duri ng these machi ni ng
operati ons, i f the vanes are too thi n to
support the sl ug on the mandrel or to
resi st bendi ng duri ng cutti ng, a fi l l er must
be used that can be l eached out after the
machi ni ng i s fi ni shed. Luci te i s sati s-
factory for thi s purpose. I t can be put
i n the copper sl ug i n powder ed form and
sol i di fi ed under sl i ght pressure at 150C.
wi th chl oroform and l eaves no harmful
The hob i tsel f i s the most cri ti cal of the bobbi ng tool s, and addi ti onal
i nformati on on i ts constructi on wi l l be hel pful . Fi gure 17.9 shows the
stages of constructi on of a mi l l ed hob used i n maki ng 3J31 anode bl ocks.
i
!
4
SEC. 17.1]
FABRI CATI ON OF ANODE BLOCKS 659
Part A is turned from Hal combs Ketos steel .
The end of the cyl i nder
to be sl otted i s l eft a few roi l s oversi b, so that i t can be ground to si ze
after hardeni ng to r emove some of the di storti on i ntroduced by the
hardeni ng process. The threaded porti on i s for use i n the stri ppi ng
process. The threaded end must be faced off perpendi cul ar to the
cyl i nder axi s because the hob i s dri ven by pushi ng agai nst thi s surface.
Part B shows the hob after fi g and hardeni ng. Cl i mb mi l l i ng
I
. - -
660 CONSTRUCTI ON
of about 58. After the hob i s hardened, the
and the hob OD i s ground to the pr oper si ze.
[SEC.17.1
centeri ng pi n i s ground off
Other surfaces of the hob
may be pol i shed to hel p r educe the requi red bobbi ng for ce. For tube
vanes under 0.012 i n. thi ck, pol i shed surfaces are parti cul ar y i mportant
to avoi d draggi ng down the copper vanes duri ng bobbi ng. The fi ni shed
hob i s l abel ed C.
A set of anode-bl ock bobs and some correspondi ng bl ocks are shown
i n Fi g. 17.10. Note how the vanes of the thi rd and fourth l argest bl ocks
J
$
FI G. 17.10.Set of anode-bl ock bobs and anode bl ocks. (Courtesv of Col umbi a University
Radiation Laborator~.)
have dragged down as compared wi th the l argest bl ock. The draggi ng
i n these bl ocks i s a resul t of anneal i ng the copper befor e bobbi ng (as
previ ousl y stated, the advantage of anneal i ng befor e bobbi ng i s ques-
ti onabl e). No draggi ng i s evi dent i n the second l argest bl ock, because
i t has been faced off after bobbi ng.
Fi gure 17.11 i s gi ven to show bobs used for maki ng wavegui de
outputs for 3- and 1.25-cm wavel ength bands. The chamfers i mprove
the breakdown strength of the outputs. The rectangul ar bl ock on the
3-cm-wavel ength chamfer cutter gui des the cutter wi th r espect to the
rectangul ar cavi ty. The rel ati ve advantages of bl unt bobs as compared
SEC. 171] FABRI C.4 TI ON OF A,VODE BLOCKS 661
wi th tapered bobs i s not defi ni tel y known, but l arger bobs are usual l y
tapered to r educe the bobbi ng for ce. Wavegui de bobs di ffer from
anode-bl ock hobs i n that they are hardened to a Rockwel l C of about 65
and are usual l y chromi um pl ated.
I nstead of mi l l i ng the bobs i t i s possi bl e to gri nd a hardened cyl i nder
to the desi red si ze and shape. The advantages of ground bobs are no
troubl e from di storti on i ntroduced by hardeni ng; a mor e uni forml y
662 CONSTRUCTION [SEC. 17.2
unless itisdesired tohavesome irregular exterr,al shell shape that cannot
be conveni entl y machi ned. The fact that some preci si on parts of the
carbon mol d for vacuum casti ng must be dupl i cated for each bl ock
represents a di sadvantage compared wi th ji g-assembl y or l ami nati on
methods.
Si n.teri ng.-Si nteri ng empl oys the techni que of pressi ng fi nel y
powder ed metal i nto the desi red shape and then heati ng thi s compress
at a temperature great enough to cause bondi ng of the powder .
Si ntered copper bl ocks are useful for smal l tubes that are di ffi cul t
to machi ne, but the method has not been ful l y tested. For bl ocks of
nonmachi nabl e metal s, such as tantal um or tungsten, the method hol ds
promi se. Si nteri ng has been empl oyed successful l y i n maki ng other
i rregul arl y shaped objects, such as wavegui de-output parts.
Combination of Methods.The di fferent methods of fabri cati on
l i sted i n Tabl e 17.1 have been appl i ed to cases that essenti al l y exempl i fy
one method. The fabri cati on of some anode bl ocks, however , mi ght
best be done by a combi nati on of these methods. For exampl e, the
combi nati on of si nteri ng and ji g assembl y seems to be the most promi si ng
for maki ng bl ocks out of nonmachi nabl e metal s, such as tungsten (the
advantage of a tungsten bl ock i s that i t woul d be l ess frequency-sensi ti ve
to temperature). The vanes, shel l , and straps mi ght be si ntered from
powder ed tungsten, and then these component parts brazed together
by the ji g-assembl y method.
17.2. Brazi ng and Sol deri ng.-Brazi ng was one of several new metal -
worki ng techni ques devel oped to meet requi rements associ ated wi th
magnetron constructi on. I n l arge measure these techni ques are di s-
ti nctl y di fferent from those emphasi zed i n standard r efer ences.z Thk
aspect of brazi ng may be cl as{l fi ed as hi gh-vacuum preci si on brazi ng.
The fi rst di fferenti ati on from usual brazi ng i s the shti t i n emphasi s from
sheer strength to vacuum perfecti on. A good vacuum requi res a sol der
of l ow vapor pressure that wi l l al l oy wi th the base metal to gi ve a rel i abl e
seal . I n the case of purel y mechani cal joi nts, the l ow vapor pressure
requi rement usual l y sti l l exi sts, because most joi nts are exposed to the
tube i nteri or; and al though i t i s best to have al l oyi ng between the sol der
and base metal , suffi ci ent mechani cal strength can often be obtai ned
wi thout al l oyi ng. I n or der to accompl i sh a preci si on braze i t i s necessary
to l ocal i ze the fl ow of sol der i nto wel l -defi ned boundari es. El ectropl ati ng
fi xed amounts of sol der at the desi red pl aces provi des a means of l i i i ti ng
the sol der fl ow and gi ves fai rl y sharp boundari es, Another method i s
to use a sol der stop-off over whi ch the sol der wi l l not fl ow. Chromi um
1John WUM, cd., Pou.&r MetaUurW, Ameri can Soci ety for Metal s, Cl evel and,
Ohi o, 1942.
2 Welding Handbook, Ameri can Wel di ng Soci ety, New York, 1942.
SEC. 17.2] BRAZI NG AND SOLDERI NG 663
pl ate or carbon fi l m serves as useful stop-offs. I n ei ther case, l i qui d
or paste fl uxes must be avoi ded i n preci si on brazi ng, and thi s has, i n
general , requi red the use of hydr ogen atmospheres for brazi ng.
Preparation of Surjaces jor Brazi ng. Cl eanl i ness i s of great i mpor-
tance. Parts. must be thoroughl y cl eaned of oxi de scal e or fi l m, ei ther
mechani cal l y or bychemi cal means asoutl i nedi n Sec. 17.4. I mmedi atel y
precedi ng the brazi ng operati on al l surfaces shoul d be chemi cal l y
degreased.
The nature of one of the metal surfaces may be such as to i nhi bi t
good wetti ng acti on of the sol der i n spi te of i deal cl eanl i ness. Thi s
condi ti on may be remedi ed by el ectropl ati ng the surface wi th some metal
that can be wetted by the sol der. The deposi ted metal may serve other
purposes, such as preventi ng or mi ni mi zi ng i ntergranul ar penetrati on
of the sol der i nto the base metal , and i mprovi ng the fi t between parts
to be joi ned.
~echani cal Preparation oj Joi nts.For sol der that i s appl i ed by
el ectropl ati ng there must be i nti mate contact between the parts. When
sol der wi re or sheet i s appl i ed or pl aced wi thi n the joi nt, the fi t i s not so
cri ti cal because the sol der wi l l provi de fi l l i ng for the gaps. I f the part
i s set up to take advantage of gravi ty fl ow, the gap may be greater than
i f fl ow depends upon capi l l ary acti on.
Parts brazed i n a hydrogen atmosphere are usual l y supported by
oxi di zed stai nl ess-steel fi xtures, and provi si on for the rel ati ve expansi on
of the assembl ed parts must be made i n or der to avoi d sl i ppage or warpi ng
of the parts.
Sel ecti on oj So.Mer.-1n choosi ng a parti cul ar sol der or brazi ng al l oy
the fol l owi ng factors shoul d be consi dered. The sol der shoul d have a
mel ti ng poi nt at l east 100C bel ow that of the metal s to be joi ned unl ess
preci se brazi ng-temperature control i s mai ntai ned. I n the case of those
metal s where excessi ve bri ttl eness or phase changes occur at el evated
temperatures i t i s necessary to r educe the sol deri ng temperature further.
Joi nts must not gi ve way bel ow 500C i f the tubes are to be subjected to
bake out (see Sec. 17.7).
I f a l ow-mel ti ng eutecti c resul ts through the combi nati on of sol der
and base metal , care must be exerci sed by temperature control or control
of the amount of sol der to avoi d undue cor r odi ng around the joi nt.
The vapor pressure of a sol der exposed to the i nteri or of the tube shoul d
be l ess than 10_G mm Hg at 450C and l ess than l @7 mm Hg at r oom
temperature. For thi s reason, sol ders contai ni ng l ead, cadmi um, or zi nc
shoul d be used wi th cauti on. Metal s havi ng a hi gh vapor pressure can
be tol erated i n al l oys onl y when thei r parti al pressures are consi derabl y
r educed because of compound formati on or i ntersti ti al adsorpti on.
Excess amounts of l ow-conducti vi ty sol der must be avoi ded at poi nts of
hi gh cur r ent densi ty i n the case of hi gh-Q osci l l ators. The choi ce of
Mel t poi nt
c
60
181
188
200
232
288
304
304
327
338
400
600
627
641
646
F
140
358
370
390
450
550
579
579
621
640
752
1110
1160
1185
1195
I
,,,,,,,9, . , .
Fl ow poi nt
c
65.5
181.0
225 ~O
260.0
231,9
. . . . . .
304.0
380.0
327.0
393.0
. . . . . .
630.0
635.0
704.0
688.0
F
150
358
437
500
450
579
715
621
740
. . . .
1162
1175
1300
1270
I
,,, ,. - ,,,
TABLE 17.5.+oLnEmm2 AND BRAZI NG ALLOYS AND FLUXES
Name of sol der
Woods metal
Eutecti c soft sol der
50-50 soft sol der
20-80 soft sol der
Ti n
Al umawel d
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lead
TEC Handy and Harmo]
I ntermedi ate sol der
Low-mel ti ng hard sol der
Easy Fl o Handy and Har.
mon
Si l Fos Handy and Har -
mon
Easy Fl o No. 3 Handy
and Harmon
Composi ti on
Bi 50 Cd 12.5 Pb 25 Sn 12.5
Pb 36 Sn 64
Pb 50 Sn 50
Pb 80 Sn 20
Sn 100
Sn 40 Pb 39.9 Zn 20.1
Ag 5-6 Pb 95-94
Ag 2.5 Pb 97.5
Pb 100
Ag 5 Cd 95
Ag20Cu3Zn2Sn75
Ag 45 Cu 35 Sn 25
Ag 50 Cu 15.5 Zn 16.5 Cd 18
Ag15Cu80P5
Ag 50 Cu 15.5 Zn 15.5 Cd I t
Ni 3
Fl ux
A
A
A
A, B
A, B
C, F
A, B
A, B
B
A
A
H,
D
None
D
Comments
Weak, bri ttl e
. . . . . . . . . . .
Works easi l y, weak
Weak
Shri nks
For casti ngs and al l metal s ex-
cept tantal um
. . . . .
. .
.
hote hi gh cadmi um content
From J. Strong, Procedures in
Experimental Physics, Pren-
ti ce-Hal l , New York, 1942
From F. C. Hul l , Westi nghouse
Res. Lab. Ver y bard, bri ttl e,
l ow vapor pres.
For fer r ous and nonfer r ous use,
yel l ow col or, mechani cal l y
strong
For nonfer r ous work, sel f-fl ux-
i ng, yel l ow col or, mechani cal l y
strong
For fer r ous and nonfer r ous use
1
where fi l l ets are requi red, yel -
l ow, strong
+
-I
ri..
-,
670
671
677
677
682
693
693
704
707
720
721
724
732
738
741
743
1238
1240
1250
1250
1260
1280
1280
1300
1304
1328
1330
1335
1350
1360
1365
1370
700.0
779.0
727.0
743.0
718.0
718.0
774.0
729.0
750.0
740.0
779.0
754.0
774.0
793.0
788.0
766.0
1290
1435
1340
137
1325
1325
1425
1345
1382
1360
1345
1390
1425
1460
1450
1410
Low-mel ti ng hard
SS Handy and Harmon
ET Handy and Harmon
DE Handy and Harmon
RT] Handy and Harmon
Easy Handy and Harmon
ETX Handy and Harmon
TR No. 1 Handy and
Harmon
Phos-copper Westi nghouse
Low-mel ti ng hard sol der
DT] Handy and Harmon
Medi um Handy and Har-
mon
Hard No. l Handyand Har -
mon
(1l T,, Handy and Harmon
Hard Handy and Harmon
( NT Handy and Harmon
Ag 53 Cu 32 Sn 15
Ag 40 Cu 30 Zn 28 Ni 2
Ag 50 Cu 28 Zn 22
Ag 45 Cu 30 Zn 25
Ag 60 Cu 25 Zn 15
Ag 65 Cu 20 Zn 15
Ag 50 Cu 34 Zn 16
.4g 75 Zn 25
CU93P7
Ag 59 Cu 31 Sn 10
Ag 40 Cu 30 Zn 28 Ni
Ag 70 Cu 20 Zn 10
Ag75Cu20Zn5
AgWCu16Zn4
Ag75Cu22Zn3
Ag 30 Cu 38 Zn 32
H,
D
D
D
D, H,
D
D
D
None
H,
D
D
D
D
D
D
From F. C. Hul l , Westi nghouse
Rcs. Lab. Ver y hard, bri ttl e,
l ow vapor pressure
Pal e yel l ow col or
Yel l ow-whi te col or
Yel l ow-whi te col or, ASTM
Spec. B-73-29 No. 4
Si l ver-whi te col or
ASTM Spec. B-73-29 No. 6
si l ver-whi te col or. For ster-
l i ng si l ver
Yel l ow-whi te col or. ASTM
Spec. B-73-29 No. 5
. .,,
For nonfer r ous work, sel f-fl ux-
i ng
From F. C. Hul l , Westi nghouse
Res. Lab. Ver y hard (but can
be swaged) l ow vapor pressure
Pal e yel l ow col or
ASTM Spec. B-73-29 No. 7 for
sterl i ng si l ver. Si l ver-whi te
col or
. . . .
Whi te col or. ASTM Spec. B-
73-29 No. 8
Si l ver-whi te col or. For sterl i ng
si l ver
Pal e yel l ow col or
-l7 ,-r -----%rr ,,, ,,, ,, ,,, ,,,
Mel t
c
752
777
777
779
816
821
857
875
890
950
950
960
1063
1082
1160
1205
1450
. .
~oi nt
F
1385
1430
1430
1435
1500
1510
1575
1607
1634
1742
1742
1945
1980
2120
2201
2642
TABLE 17.5.SOLDERI NG AND BRAZI NG ALLOYS AND FLuxEs.(6onti nued)
a
m
Fl ow ]
c
785.0
816.0
816.0
779.0
857.0
871.0
871.0
. . . . .
890.0
950.0
980.0
960.0
1063.0
1082.0
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
1450.0
bi nt
F
1445
1500
1500
1435
1575
1600
1600
1634
1742
1796
1760
1945
1980
. . . .
2642
Name of sol der
RE-MN Handy and Har -
mon
AT Handy and Harmon
(ATT Handy and Harmon
BT Handy and Harmon
NE Handy and Harmm
TL Handy and Harmon
TE Handy and Harmon
Brazi ng compound
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
%l ver
Gol d
Copper (OFHC)
Pl ati numsol der
Ni ckel coi nage (prewar
U.S.A.)
Ni ckel
Composi ti on
Ag65Cu28Mn5Ni 2
Ag 20 Cu 45 Zn 35 Cd 0.5 Max.
Ag20Cu45Zn30Cd5
Ag 72 Cu 28
Ag 25 Cu 52.5 Zn 22.5
Ag 10 Cu 52 Zn 38 Cd 0.5 Max.
Ag 5 Cu 58 Zn 37
Cu 54 Zn 46
iiu 80 (h 20
Au 82.5 Ni 17.5
Au 94 (h 6
Ag 100
Au 100
Cu 100
Ag 73 Pt 27
Cu 75 Ni 25
Ni + Co 9%99.5, traces C,
Mn, Si
Fl ux
D
D
D
D, H,
D
D
D
E
E, H,
E, H,
E, H,
E, H,
E. H,
H,
H,
H,
H
Comments
Brass-yel l ow col or. ASTM
Spec. B-73-29 No. 2
Brass-yel l ow col or. AST}l
Spec. B-73-29 No. 3
Si l ver-copper eutecti c, Whi te
col or, Excel l ent for copper
,,
Brass-yel l ow col or. ASTM
Spec. B-73-29 No. 1
From J. Strong, Procedures in
Experimental Physicsj Pren-
ti ce-Hal l , New York, 1942
Lowest-mel ti ng gol d-copper al -
l oy
Lowest-mel ti ng gol d-ni ckel al -
l oy
. . . . .
. . .
Wets tungsten
Wets tungsten
Wets tungsten and mol y
m
SEC. 17.2] BRAZI NG AND SOLDERI NG 667
sol der may be l i mi ted by the pr esence of
previ ous joi nts, gl ass seal s, or the cathode.
By the use of heat shi el ds i n certai n brazi ng
methods, the sol der need not necessari l y be
restri cted to havi ng a fl ow poi nt l ess than
the mel ti ng poi nt of gl ass or the mel ti ng
poi nt of some other joi nt. I f the brazi ng
i s done i n a hydr ogen atmosphere i n the
pr esence of gl ass, the gl ass i tsel f may be
damaged by the hydrogen, or the metal
oxi des i nvol ved i n the gl ass-to-metal seal s
may be r educed and the seal r ender ed
porous. The use of formi ng gas (80 per
cent HZ and 20 per cent N) i nstead of
hydr ogen reduces troubl es of thi s nature,
but gr eater car e must then be exer ci sed to
r emove oxi de fi l ms chemi cal l y from the
surfaces to be joi ned.
The properti es of avai l abl e sol ders and
fl uxes are summari zed i n Tabl e 17.5. I t
i s noted that i n the fl ow-poi nt range of
630 to 1082C ther e are 35 sol ders whi l e i n
the range of 400 to 629C ther e are none.
Because tubes are general l y baked at 450C
duri ng processi ng, a sol der that fl ows bel ow
thk temperature i s of l i ttl e use i n magnetron
constructi on. However , the l ack of a sati s-
factory sol der i n the fl ow range of 450 to
550C el i mi nates the possi bi l i ty of brazi ng
i n a uni form temperature furnace i n the
pr esence of gl assware.
iWethods of Heating Parts to Be Brazed.
The methods of heati ng parts to be brazed
are l i sted i n Tabl e 17.6.
Gas-torch heati ng has the di sadvantage
of bei ng l i mi ted to open-ai r brazi ng and
ther efor e requi res some chemi cal fl ux. Thi s
10ri gi nal compi l ati on by R. O. McI ntosh,
Westi nghouseResearch Laboratori es, East Pi tts-
burgh, Pa.
~For general i nformati on on brazi ng methods,
see Welding Handbook, Ameri can Wel di ngSociety,
New York, 1942; J. Strong, Procedures in Ezpeti
rnenkzl Physics, Prenti ce-Hal l , New York, 1941.
668 GONSTli UC7ION I SEX,, 17.2
TABLE 17.6. MBTHoI M or HEATI NG i wrI BRAZI NG
Heati ng Method Atmosphere *
Gas tor ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ai r
El ectri cal resi stance heati ng. Ai r, hydrogen bottl e
R-f i nducti on. .4i r, hydrogen bottl e; vacuum bottl e
Radi ati ng fi l aments. Ai r, hydrogen bottl e, hydrogen furnace
* I t is possibleto substitute aninertgasatmosphere for hydrogen, buthydrogenisUSU.lLYwed in
precisionbrazing.
objecti on i s not seri ous wi th tube parts, i .e., i nput and output parts, that
can be chemi cal l y cl eaned befor e bei ng assembl ed i nto the tube. How-
ever , i f the method has been used extensi vel y i n the case of fi nal brazi ng i n
the pr esence of gl ass, fl ux may cr eep i nto the tube and wher e i t cannot be
r emoved. Cl ose-fi t ti ng parts tend to mi ni mi ze thi s troubl e. I n tor ch
heati ng, better temperature control can be had i f the fl ames are not
pl ayed di rectl y on the tube but are pl ayed on copper bl ocks whi ch
ser ve both for support and for heat conducti on. I n or der to avoi d
brazi ng the copper bl ocks to the tube, they are separated by thi n di sks
of oxi di zed stai nl ess steel . When usi ng thi s method i t i s i mportant to
pr event oxi dati on of the tube i nteri or. Thi s i s commonl y done by
passi ng COZ contai ni ng al cohol vapor through the tube duri ng the
brazi ng process. The mi xture prevents oxi dati on by repl aci ng the oxygen
of the ai r, and i n addi ti on, the al cohol cl eans away by chemi cal acti on
wi th copper oxi de any oxi de fi l ms that may have been formed. I f CO,
contai ns an excessi ve amount of water vapor and oxygen, i t i s neces-
sary to pass the CO.2 through a desi ccator and through hot copper wool .
El ectri cal -resi stance heati ng may be used i n pl ace of the gas tor ch
wi th the advantage of i mproved temperature control . I n addi ti on thi s
makes i t possi bl e to per for m the operati on i n an i nert or reduci ng atmos-
phere. The tube may be mounted between carbon bl ocks supported
by heavy copper l eads and connected to the secondary wi ndi ng of a
wel di ng transformer (capabl e of 5- to 10-kw output at approxi matel y
6 vol ts). Good el ectri cal connecti ons must be made throughout the
secondary ci rcui t so that essenti al l y al l of the power i s di ssi pated i n the
carbon supports. I n or der to get uni form heati ng i n the supports i t i s
necessary to have the carbon under uni form pressure. By Vari ac control
the temperature of the supports and ther efor e the tube can be cl osel y
control l ed; and furthermore, the heati ng ti me can be much l ess than i n
the torch-brazi ng method.
For speed and temperature control , the r-f heati ng methodl i s superi or
to both tor ch and el ectri c-resi stance heati ng. The method i s adaptabl e
to open ai r, gaseous atmospheres, or vacuum. For heati ng over a smal l
area i t i s often desi rabl e to have onl y a si ngl e l oop i n the worki ng coi l ,
1G. H. Brown, C. N. Hoyl er, and R. A. Bl erwi rth, Z%eoryand Applicatiurt of
Radio-Freqrwuy HeatiW, Van Nostrand, New York, 1947.
SEC. 17.2] BEAZI NG AND SOLDERI NG 669
i n whi ch case an appropri ate matchi ng transformer may be requi red
between the output ci rcui t of the r-f gener ator and the si ngl e l oop.
Because of the heat l ocal i zati on that i s possi bl e wi th asi ngl e-coi l bom-
barder, brazi ng can be done i n a hydr ogen bottl e i n the pr esence of gl ass
and wi thout speci al pr otecti on for gl ass even though i t i s cl ose to the joi nt.
For wor k demandi ng uni form temperature over a vol ume of as much
as 300 cu i n., a hydrogen-atmosphere furnace heated by radi ati ng
i l aments i s conveni ent. These
furnaces are readi l y avai l abl e on
the market and are extr emel y use-
ful i n vacuum-tube constructi on
P
because they provi de a cl ean uni -
form-temperature chamber for
7
metal cl eani ng and anneal i ng as
wel l as brazi ng.
For wor k that does not
demand a uni form temperature
chamber and especi al l y for l abora-
tor y wor k, the hydr ogen bottl e
i s ver y useful . A typi cal bottl e
arrangement i s s h o w n i n Fi g.
17.12. I ts advantages are si m-
pl i ci ty, fl exi bi l i ty, and conveni -
ence i n watchi ng the brazi ng
process. I nducti on and el ectri c-
resi stance heati ng can be adapted
to the hydr ogen bottl e, i nstead of
TO50KVA V, , , , ,
u
u
FI G. 17. 12.Hydrogen-bottl e arrangement.
heati ng by tungsten or mol ybdenum
fi l aments; the advantage of the substi tuti on depends on the job at hand.
The sequence of steps i n operati ng a bottl e i s as fol l ows. Adjust
the wor k on a pl atform usi ng ji gs and cl amps to hol d the parts i n pl ace
duri ng the heati ng and subsequent cool i ng.
Arrange the heati ng uni t to suppl y heat to the desi red parts, shi el di ng
other parts wi th ni ckel sheet. When radi ati ng fi l aments are used, a
shi el d shoul d surround the assembl y to pr event overheati ng the gl ass
bottl e.
After l oweri ng the bottl e over the wor k, turn on the hydrogen.
Suffi ci ent ti me shoul d be al l owed befor e turni ng on the heat to be sure
that the bottl e i s ful l of hydrogen. Duri ng brazi ng, al l ow the hydr ogen
to conti nue to fl ow at a safe rate to keep the bottl e ful l , and col l ect the
over fl ow by a venti l ati ng hood. Hydrogen fl owi ng out the bottom
of the bottl e can be obser ved as a cool i ng sensati on on the hand. I f
the bottl e i s wel l fi l l ed and ai r pockets are avoi ded, an expl osi on can be
caused onl y by ci rcul ati ng drafts at the bottom of the bottl e; ther efor e,
al l ai r currents i n the vi ci ni ty of the bottl e shoul d be avoi ded. I n any
670 CONSTRUCTI ON [SEC. 17.3
event, an expl osi on caused by drafts i s usual l y mi l d because the bottom
of the bottl e i s open and the bottl e i s fr ee to ri se.
Turn on the heat sour ce (at l east 5 kw of power are necessary),
and watch the operati on through the gl ass. After the sol der haa fl owed,
a l i ttl e ti me shoul d be al l owed for adequate penetrati on of the mel t.
The wor k shoul d be al l owed to cool i n the hydr ogen atmosphere unti l
i ts temperature i s 350C or bel ow.
17s3. Sel ected Brazi ng Probl ems .The beat method for maki ng a
parti cul ar braze wi l l depend l argel y on the speci fi c object, the condi ti ons
to whi ch i t must be subjected l ater, and the experi menters avai l abl e
brazi ng equi pment. For these reasons no mor e general brazi ng i n forma-
FI G. 17.13 .HP1OV anode bl ock ready for
brazi ng.
ti on wi l l be gi ven. Sol uti ons to
~,
some speci fi c brazi ng probl ems may
be hel pful to the experi menter, how- ,
ever , as typi cal pr ocedur e that can
be modi fi ed for the i ndi vi dual cases.
Precision Brazing of Ji g-assem-
bled Anode Bl ocks.The method for
m a k i n g component anode-bl ock
parts and ji g assembl i ng these
parts has been di scussed i n detai l
for the 2J42 bl ock i n Sec. 17.1. I t .,
now remai ns to braze these parts
i n a preci se manner. I n or der to
accompl i sh a preci si on braze i t i s
;
necessary to have a uni form di stri -
buti on and a control l ed amount of
sol deri ng materi al at the poi nts to
be joi ned. I n tubes as smal l as
the 2J42, el ectropl ati ng has been
empl oyed successful l y for thk pur-
pose. Fi gure 17.5 shows the com-
ponent parts of the bl ock ready ~
for the brazi ng of the strappi ng
ri ngs to the vanes and the vanes
to the bl ock shel l . To assure good sol der fl ow and to obtai n cl ean
copper surfaces, al l parts must be degreased (see Sec. 17.4) befor e bei ng
assembl ed. The strappi ng ri ngs and bl ock shel l are si l ver pl ated (see
Sec. 17.4) to a thi ckness of 0.0004 i n. The parts are then assembl ed as
descri bed i n Sec. 17.1, and the assembl y heated i n a hydrogen-atmosphere
furnace for 5 mi n at 8500C, The pl ated si l ver mel ts at thi s temperature,
al though the mel ti ng poi nt of sol i d si l ver i s 960C. The mel ti ng begi ns
near the copper-si l ver e~tecti c poi nt (779 C), probabl y because a eutecti c
SEC. 17.3] SELECTED BRAZI NG PROBLEMS 671
sol uti on of the si l ver i n the copper resul ts. However , si nce the brazi ng
process i s per for med at 850C, the resul ti ng si l ver-copper al l oy wi l l have
amel ti ng temperature of850C. Onecanthen safel y useeutecti c sol der
i n subsequent brazi ng operati ons.
The success of appl yi ng sol der to smal l tubes by pl ati ng i s partl y due
to the fact that the component parts can be squeezed i nto i nti mate
contact by the ji g wi thout undue di storti on.
I n l arger tubes thi s may
be i mpossi bl e, and a better method may be to pl ace pi eces of Ag-Cu
eutecti c sol der at the poi nts to be joi ned so that the sol der, when mel ted,
flows
Such
over the joi nt, fi l l i ng pl aces that are not mechani cal l y touchi ng.
an arrangement i s shown i n Fi g. 17.13 wher e the anode bl ock i s
FI G. 17.14.Vol tage connectors. (a) Cathode uupport; (b) el ectron-beam col l ector.
l arge enough so that manual l y pl aci ng the sol der stri ps i s not di fi cul t
and the per centage change i n di mensi ons by the mel ted sol der i s smal l .
Construction oj Cathode Supports. Fi gure 17.14 shows two types of
stems or pi pes whose fabri cati on presents typi cal magnetron brazi ng
probl ems. I n the constructi on shown i n Fi g. 17-14a a number of brazes
are made.
The copper base i s joi ned to the Kovar sl eeve wi th BT sol der (Ag72-
CU28). The two parts are hel d perpendi cul ar wi th an oxi di zed stai nl ess-
steel ji g, and one l oop of BT; wi r e i s pl aced on the Cu base shoul der.
The assembl y i s pl aced i n the hydr ogen furnace at 830C for 5 mi n and
then i n the hydr ogen cool i ng chamber for 30 mi n. For thi s braze
i nvol vi ng Kovar and a si l ver al l oy the Kovar must be anneal ed i n a
hydr ogen atmosphere at 900C for 30 mi n (or at temperatures up to
I
672
CONSTRUCTION [SEC. 17.3
11OOC for shor ter ti me i nterval s) befor e brazi ng i n or der tomi ti l ze
i ntergrar.wdar penetrati on of the si l ver al l oy i nto the Kovar.
I f thi s i s
not done,, the i ntergranul ar penetrati on may cause Kovar cracks whi ch
resul t i n vacuum I eaks. Care shoul d be taken i n the arrangement of
parts so that the Kovar i s not subjected to tensi onal stress duri ng heati ng,
aa thi s may accel erate i ntergranul ar penetrati on.
As further i nsurance,
the Kovar maybe copper-pl ated befor e brazi ng.
The joi nt between the copper r-f choke and the tungsten center
conductor i s for mechani cal purposes onl y, and ther efor e one need not
use an al l oyi ng sol der i f suffi ci ent bondi ng strength can be had by mer e
fl ow of the sol der over the tungsten. Gol d-copper (80-20) sol der i s
found to gi ve a suffi ci entl y good mechani cal joi nt; the braze i s made i n a
hydr ogen furnace at 9203C for 5 mi n.
The vacuum seal between the tungsten r od and the Kovar cup
requi res an al l oyi ng sol der. Tabl e 17.5 suggests pl ati num sol der as
the l owest-mel ti ng-poi nt sol der that al l oys wi th tungsten, but thi s
mel ti ng poi nt i s too hi gh to be used wi th Kovar. I t has been found,
however , that gol d-copper (80-20) when used between Kovar and
tungsten gi ves a rel i abl e vacuum seal . I t i s bel i eved that the ni ckel
i n the Kovar enters i nto the braze to al l oy wi th the tungsten. Because
both the copper choke and Kovar cup are brazed to the tungsten wi th
the same sol der, these operati ons can be done si mul taneousl y i n the
hydr ogen furnace.
The two parts of the pi pe thus constructed are then gl assed accordi ng
to Sec. 17.5.
The pi pe b i n Fi g. 17.14 demonstrates another typi cal set of brazi ng
probl ems. The center conductor i s made of copper , and the i ron pol e
pi ece fi t through the copper l i d. The brazes are made i n the or der
descri bed.
Pure copper i s used to braze the i ron pol e pi ece to the Kovar sl eeve.
Thi s i s a recommended braze for Kovar because ther e i s no i ntergranul ar
penetrati on and the Kovar i s rai sed to a temperature that i s suffi ci ent
to anneal i t duri ng the braze. Thi s braze i s made i n a hydr ogen furnace
at 11OOC for 5 mi n.
For the formati on of the vacuum seal between the copper l i d and the
i ron pol e pi ece the i ron pol e ti p i s copper pl ated (see Sec. 17.4) and the
braze i s made wi th BT sol der i n a hydr ogen furnace at 840C for
5 mi n.
The Kovar cup i s brazed to the copper center conductor i n the same
way as the fi rst braze of pi pe a, and the bondi ng of the copper r-f choke to
the copper center conductor i s al so a BT braze.
Assembly of Tube Parts and the Final Vacuum Aeal .-The seal i ng
together of the vari ous pi pes, cover s, or other parts to form the compl eted
I
SEC. 17.3] SELECTED BRAZI NG PROBLEMS 673
magnetron i s the most di ffi cul t of the brazi ng operati ons.
The cathode,
the i nsi de copper surfaces, and the gl assware must be pr otected agai nst
damage, and the choi ce of the brazi ng al l oy i s l i mi ted by sol ders used i n
previ ous brazes and by the softeni ng poi nt of the gl ass parts.
I f a l ow-vapor-pressure sol der exi sted i n the fl ow range of 450 to
500C so that the brazi ng temperature woul d be l ow enough to do no
damage to the gl assware and hi gh enough so that the braze woul d hol d
)
up under the 450C tube bakeout (see Sec. 17.7), thk fi nal braze woul d
FI G. 17.15 .2J42 ready for cathode mounti ng.
I
be consi derabl y si mpl i fi ed. I n the absence of such a, sol der, the cover s
and pi pes are i n many cases brazed to the anode bl ock i n one brazi ng
operati on usi ng ei ther the gas-torch heati ng method or the el ectri c-
resi stance method. Thi s braze i s i n many cases done wi th Handy and
[ Harmon Easy Fl o i n ai r, usi ng a fl ow of al cohol -saturated COZ
through the tube to pr otect the cathode and the i nsi de copper surfaces.
The objecti ons to thi s braze are the fol l owi ng: Easy Fl o sol der con-
tai ns zi nc and cadmi um, the vapor pressures of whi ch are hi gh enough
at the brazi ng temperature to contami nate the cathode duri ng the braze;
the fl ux used duri ng the braze may enter the tube and cause cathode
I
674 CONSTRUCTION [SEC. 17.4
contami nati on; and the fl ux may cover pl aces wher e the sol der has fl owed
poor l y and that become evi dent onl y after the brazi ng operati on i s com-
pl eted and the fl ux r emoved.
Some of the above di ffi cul ti es have been avoi ded i n speci al cases by
doi ng al l brazi ng i n a hydr ogen atmosphere and maki ng al l joi nts except
the fi nal vacuum seal i n the absence of the cathode. The 2J42 i s assem-
bl ed i n thi s manner (see Fi g. 17.15). The output l ead i s pl aced i n the
anode bl ock and peened to gi ve some mechani cal support. One l oop of
0.030-i n. RT wi r e sol der i s pl aced around the base of the l ead. The
heati ng i s done i n a hydr ogen bottl e wi th a mol ybdenum heati ng coi l
pl aced near the l ead base wi th the gl ass pr otected by an asbestos shi el d.
The output l ead i s sol dered i nto pl ace befor e the pol e pi eces are sol dered
i n or der that the l oop hei ght may be adjusted after the output-sol deri ng
operati on. The pol e pi eces, tuni ng screw, and exhaust stem are next
assembl ed. Sol der washers of O.010-i n. RT sheet are pl aced between
the pol e pi eces and bl ock. Four turns of 0.025-i n. RT wi r e sol der are
pl aced around the tuni ng screw, and two turns of the same sol der pl aced
around the exhaust stem. The heati ng i s agai n done i n an Hz atmos-
phere, wi th mol ybdenum coi l s mounted on cerami c coi l s whi ch fi t around
the pol e pi eces. The gl ass i s agai n pr otected wi th asbestos shi el ds, and
the temperature i s rai sed onl y sl i ghtl y above the fl ow poi nt i n or der not to
di sturb the output-l ead braze. The assembl y i s now ready for mounti ng
the cathode, whi ch i s center ed through the hol e i n the pol e pi ece opposi te
the cathode support. The fi nal braze now consi sts onl y of sol deri ng
a pl ug i nto the cathode-centeri ng hol e. Thk i s agai n done i n the Hz
bottl e wi th an RT sol der washer under the copper pl ug. The heati ng
thi s ti me, however , i s done by the el ectri c-resi stance method. A carbon
r od i s pushed agai nst the copper pl ug, and the other el ectri cal connecti on
i s made by a cl amp around the same pol e pi ece. Befor e maki ng thi s
braze, the i nsi de of the tube i s fl ushed fr ee of trapped ai r. By thi s
system of brazes the copper i s never heated except i n a hydr ogen atmos-
phere, and the fi nal braze i n the pr esence of the cathode does not rai se
the temperature of the cathode above 100C. The onl y dkadvantage of
thi s method i s the use of the zi nc-beari ng sol der RT whi ch has a ques-
ti onabl e vapor pressure.
17.4. Chemi cal Processes.-The i mportance of cl eanl i ness i n tube
constructi on cannot be overemphasi zed. Whi l e i t i s often i mpossi bl e
to fi nd the reason for the i mpai red qual i ty of certai n tubes, the average
tube qual i ty i s certai nl y dependent upon the cl eanl i ness that one exer -
ci ses duri ng constructi on. For thi s reason chemi cal cl eani ng i s the most
frequentl y used process i n tube maki ng. Practi cal l y ever y part that
goes i nto a tube wi l l exper i ence thr ee or four cl eani ngs duri ng the tube
fabri cati on. El ectropl ati ng i s empl oyed to deposi t sol der for brazi ng, to
I
I
,
I
I
I
i ?.Ec. 17.4] CHEMI CAL PROCESSES 67S
i mprove the surface conducti vi ty of certai n tube parts, and to provi de a
base for gl ass seal i ng.
The choi ce of a cl eani ng or pl ati ng process for speci fi c uses i s somewhat
controversi al l argel y because the techni que i s as i mportant as the process.
The fol l owi ng processes are gi ven, ther efor e, merel y to i l l ustrate ones
that have been successful l y used i n tube constructi on.
Cl eani ng.-Tri chl orethyl ene i s wi del y used as a general decreasi ng
agent. I t i s noni nfl ammabl e and an excel l ent grease sol vent. The
decreasi ng process consi sts of agi tati on i n tri chl orethyl ene fol l owed by
i mmersi on i n methyl al cohol and rapi d dryi ng i n warm ai r.
Acetone i s a mi l der decreasi ng agent and one that may be used i f a
sol vent fr ee of chl ori ne or sul fur i s pr efer r ed. The acetone washi ng
shoul d al so be fol l owed by ri nsi ng i n cl ear methyl al cohol .
Gr eat car e shoul d be exer ci sed wi th cathode ni ckel to l i mi t the
possi bi l i ti es of contami nati on. The fol l owi ng cl eani ng method has
been used successful l y. Agi tate i n acetone. Boi l for 5 mi n i n a sol uti on
composed of 40 g of NazCOS, 13 g of NaOH, and 13 g of NaCN i n 1 l i ter
of di sti l l ed H*O. Ri nse thoroughl y i n boi l i ng di sti l l ed water. Boi l
i n second bath of di sti l l ed water for 5 mi n. Ri nse i n warm 5 per cent
aceti c aci d sol uti on. Agi tate i n boi l i ng di sti l l ed water. Agi tate i n
second bath of di sti l l ed water. Ri nse i n cl ean methyl al cohol and i n
warm-ai r bl ast.
A 50 per cent sol uti on of i nhi bi ted hydrochl ori c aci d at a temperature
of about 70C wi l l r emove the oxi des formed on Kovar, copper , and
i ron parts. The i nhi bi tor i s ~ per cent by vol ume of Rodi ne No. 50,1
used to decr ease the attack on the base metal and to pr event i mmersi on
copper pl ati ng onto the Kovar i n the case of copper and Kovar assembl i es.
The concentrati on of aci d and the i mmersi on ti me may be modi fi ed
dependi ng upon the degr ee of oxi dati on of the parts.
Heavy oxi de coati ng (or tool marks) on tungsten and mol ybdenum
can be r emoved by a-c el ectrol ysi s at about 7.5 vol ts i n a 20 per cent
potassi um hydroxi de sol uti on usi ng a carbon el ectr ode. The sol uti on
may be used repeatedl y.
Befor e bei ng coated, tungsten and mol ybdenum heaters are boi l ed
i n a 20 per cent potassi um hydroxi de sol uti on for about 5 mi n and then
ri nsed i n di sti l l ed water. Large mol ybdenum heaters, i n addi ti on to
the above treatment, shoul d be i mmersed i n warm concentrated sul furi c
aci d for several mi nutes.
Heavy oxi de on ni ckel l ead stems maybe r emoved fi rst by mechani cal
abrasi on and then by el ectrol ysi s i n a sol uti on composed of 1 l i ter of
di sti l l ed water, 667 cc of concentrated sul furi c aci d, and 125 g of ni ckel
sul fate. Wi th the ni ckel part as anode, vol tages of 6 to 12 vol ts are
10btai nabl e from the Ameri can Chemi cal Pai nt Co., Ambl er, Pa.
676 CONSTRUCTION
used, dependi ng upon the densi ty of oxi de.
[SEC. 175
Hi ghl y pol i shed surfaces
can be obtai ned on ni ckel i f the cur r ent densi ty i s el evated suffi ci entl y.
I n addi ti on to the bi chromate cl eani ng sol uti on suggested i n the
Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, I the fol l owi ng method of cl eani ng
gl ass for hi gh-vacuum use i s recommended. 2 Pri or to storage, degr ease
i n acetone, cl ean i n hot 10 per cent sodi um carbonate sol uti on, ri nse i n
hot di sti l l ed water, drai n dry, and stor e i n cel l ophane contai ners. Just
pri or to use, ri nse thoroughl y i n hot di sti l l ed ~}rater, wash i n 5 per cent
aceti c aci d sol uti on, ri nse i n warm di sti l l ed water, ri nse i n cl ean methyl
al cohol , and drai n dry.
~l ati ng.For general i nformati on on pl ati ng techni ques the r eader
i s r efer r ed to the publ i cati ons l i sted bel ow. 3 Pl ati ng sol uti ons, parti al l y
prepared, can be obtai ned from the El ectropl ati ng Di vi si on of E. I .
duPont de Nemours Company, Wi l mi ngton 9S, Del .
One of the most common pl ati ng processes i n metal tube maki ng i s
si l ver pl ati ng for preci si on brazi ng. The fol l owi ng pr ocedur e for thi s
process has been used successful l y: Degr ease the parts i n tri chl orethyl ene;
ri nse them i n methyl al cohol ; boi l 5 mi n i n the sol uti on gi ven previ ousl y;
ri nse wel l i n di sti l l ed water; l et dr y after a methyl al cohol di p; pai nt
parts to be pr otected from pl ati ng wi th stop-off l acquer, a and al l ow
to dry; si l ver pl ate to desn-ed thi ckness; ri nse wel l i n col d water, and
peel off l acquer; wash wel l i n acetone to r emove parti cl es of l acquer;
ri nse i n cl ean methyl al cohol ; and l et dry.
17.5. Metal -to-gl ass Seal s.To obtai n a vacuum seal between
gl ass and metal two major condi ti ons must be sati sfi ed: The thermal
expansi ons of the gl ass and metal must match or be accounted for i n the
desi gn, and the gl ass must wet the met al surface. Two ways of sati sfyi ng
these condi ti ons have come i nto use. The copper-to-gl ass seal devel oped
by Housekeeper i s one that sati sfi es the fi rst condi ti on by mechani cal
di storti on of the metal . I n thi s case the gl ass i s seal ed to a copper tube
machi ned to a thi n feather edge, whi ch i s easi l y di storted when the
seal i s subjected to a change i n temperature and thereby prevents the
1Handbook oj Chemistry and Physim, 27th ed., Chemi cal Rubber Publ i shi ng Co,,
Cl evel and, Ohi o, 1943.
3 E. A. Coomes, J. G. Buck, A. S. Ei senstei n, and A. Fineman, Al kal i ne Earth
Oxi de Cathodes for Pul sed Tubes, App. I I , NDRC 14933, OEM sr-262, Mar. 30,
1946.
J Moder n El ech-opl ati ng, The El ectrochemi cal Soci ety, Col umbi a Uni versi ty, New
York, 1942; N. Hal l and G. B. Hogaboom, Jr., cd., Plating and Finishing Guidebook,
Metal I ndustry Publ i shi ng Co., New York, 1943; W. Bl um and G. B. Hogaboom,
Principles oj Electroplating and Electroformingj McGraw-Hi l l , New York, 1930.
4 Purchasabl e fr om Wyandotte Pai nt Products Co., Wyandotte, Mi ch.
f W. G. Housekeeper, J our. Am. I nst. Elec. Eng,, 42, 954 (1923).
!
I
I
I
SEC. 17.5] METAL-TO-GLASS SEALS
glass from fracturi ng. The Kovar (or Fernl co2)
condi ti on by vi rtue of the fact that the metal and
677
seal sati sfi es the fi rst
Kovar cool i ng curves
are cl osel y matched bel ow the gl ass-anneal i ng poi nt. Both of these seal -
i ng methods sati sfy the second requi rement because a copper or Kovar
oxi de i s formed duri ng the seal i ng process that parti al l y di ssol ves i nto
the gl ass, thus formi ng a hermeti c seal . The success of the seal s i n
ei ther method l i es mai nl y i n the techni que of wetti ng the oxi de wi th gl ass
i n the pl asti c state. The method of copper-to-gl ass seal s i s wel l outl i ned
i n Strongs and wi l l not be di scussed her e, except to emphasi ze that the
qual i ty of the copper used i n such seal s i s extr emel y i mportant. Oxi de
i ncl usi ons i n the copper must be avoi ded to mi ni mi ze porosi ty and l essen
l eak troubl e i n the feather edge. For thi s reason OFHC copper i s al most
a necessi ty. 4 The techni que of maki ng the Kovar seal i s descri bed fol -
l owi ng a di scussi on of the properti es of Kovar and common gl asses used i n
the l aboratory.
Properties of Kovar. Kovar, a cobal t-ni ckel -i ron al l oy, was speci f-
i cal l y devel oped for maki ng vacuum seal s to hard gl ass. I t machi nes
readi l y at sl ow speeds (much l i ke stai nl ess steel ), when hi gh-speed cutti ng
tool s are used wi th l ard oi l as a l ubri cant. I t can be deep drawn as
descri bed i n Tabl e 17.7.8
TABLE 17.7.6RECOMMENDED RULE FOR DRAWI NG KOVAR
hl axi mum reducti on i n di ameter, Y
Fi rst draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Redraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25(30 after reannea1)
Subsequent redraws.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 (25 after rearmeal )
I H. Scott, Am. I nst. Mining Metal. Eng. Tech. Pub. 318, 1930; J our. Franklin
I nst., 220, 733 (1935). Kovar i s obtai nabl e fr om the Stupakoff Cerami c and Manu-
facturi ng Co., Latrobe, Pa.
2 E. E. Bur ger , Gem El ec. Rev., 97, 93 (1934); A. W. Hul l and E. E. Bur ger ,
Physics, 5, 384 (1934). Ferni co i s obtai nabl e fr om the General El ectri c Co., Sche-
nectady, N.Y. From here on the text wi l l r efer onl y to Kovar, but the remarks are,
i n general , appl i cabl e to Ferni co as wel l .
3 Strong, op. ti nt.
~J. E. Cl ark, OFlifC Copper jor Use in Vacuum Tubes, BTL Memorandum
MM-40-140-42, Sept. 6, 1940.
b See Seal i ng Gl ass to Kovar, Bul l . 145, Stupakoff Cerami c and Manufacturi ng
Co., Latrobe, Pa., 1945.
6 Subsequent ameal i ng i s requi red onl y when the l ength of the cup equal s or
exceeds the di ameter. Usi ng the above rul e for drawi ng, an anneal shoul d be made
after the fi rst redraw. When drawi ng l ong cups, anneal s shoul d fol l ow the thi rd
redraw, fi fth redraw, etc. For the anneal , the Kovar shoul d be heated i n ~ hydrogen-
or i nert-atmosphere furnace at a temperature of 1100C for 15 mi n or at l ower temper-
atures for l onger ti es down to 800C for 2 hr.
I
I
678
Tabl e 17.81
i s i mportant to
CONSTRUCTI ON
[SEC. 17.5
contai ns data on the physi cal properti es of Kovar. I t
real i ze that the average coeffi ci ent of expansi on does not
al one determi ne the strength of a seal and devi ati ons of the Kovar from
the gl ass cool i ng curves must be consi dered.
TARLE17.8.LPROPERTXESOF KOVAR*
Speci fi c Properti eeof Kovar
Composi ti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29 Y. ni ckel , 17 YOcobal t, 0,3% manganese. bal ance i ron
Mel ti ng poi nt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450C (approxi mate)
Densi ty.,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. O.3O2I bpercu i n.
Hardness,anneal ed. . . . . . . . . . 760C14&160BHhT
Hardness,unarmeal ed,. . . . . . . 200-250 BHNdependi ng ondeweeof col d wor k
Speci fi cel ectri cal resi stance.. 49mi crohm cm2940hms perci r. roi l . foot
Thermal conducti vi ty: . . . . . . . 0.046 cal ori es/cm/secC (approxi matew measuredat
r oom temperature)
Curi e poi nt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435Cappr0xi mate
Physi cal Properti esdf 0.030 Thi ck Sheet Tested ParaI 1el tothe Di recti onof Rol l i ng
PSI
Yi el d poi nt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,500
Proporti onal l i mi t. . . . . . . . . . . 32,3(MI
Tensi l estrength. . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,700
Modul us of el asti ci ty.,...... 20 X 106
Thermal Expansi on:Mteranneal i ng i nhydrogen forl hrat ~0Candfor15 mi n
at 11OOC. The average coeffi ci entof thermal expansi on of Kovar fal l s wi thi n ths
fol l owi ngl i mi ts:
30-200C 4.335.30 X 10aper OC
30300C 4.415.17 X 10per C
30-4OOC 4.545.08 X 10perC
30450C 5.03-5.37 X 104perC
30500C 5.71-6.21 X 10 per C
Magneti oPermeabi l i ty
Magneti cpermeabi l i ty Fl ux densi ty, gauss
1000 500
2000 2,000
3700 7,000 (max. val ue)
2280 12,000
213 17,CU.)0
Magneti cLosses, Watts per Lb
Tbi ckrmae
10 ki l ogauss 10 ki l ogauss 2 ki l ogauss 2 kdogauw
60 cycl es/see 840 cycl es/sec 5000 Cyckajeee 10,OOOcycl es/eec
0.010 1.05 23.4 16.6 41.0
0.030 1.51 . . . . . . . . . . . .
0.050 2.77 . . . . . . . . . . . .
GTmmi l eatmnmh of Kovar cl am scab fs 600 l bfi i n. AU of the abovs SI Stypi oafhwl ufe.
1 See Seal i ng Gl ass to Kovar, Bull. 145, Stupakoff Ceramic and Marmfacturing
aQI., Iatrobe, Pa., 1945.
1
I
\
__ -
TABLE 17.9. PI tOPERTI ES OF LABORATORY GLASSES
APPrOI
~mkin
po~int ,
Vol ume
reai sti vi ty
at 250C,%
ohm X cm
hmeal i n~
Po:;t ,*
Strai n
popi nt ,*
397
475
400
675
450
461
442
463
455
4s4
510
431
820
497
334
366
Workn,C
seal stat
970
1000
975
008, 010, 012, Pt, Dumet$
001, 010, 012, Pt, Dumet
001,008,010,Pt. Dumet
g
41
47
46
46
::
36
33
41
8
1%
128
128t
626
696
630
92o
702
703
428
510
433
715
484
496
1 19 x 10,
2.26 X 106
1.19 x 10,0
5 95
6 71
6,64
5,95
4.67
4,72
5 04
4,70
4,00
4,59
4,89
4 38
3,84
4 72
7 99
7,84
7,65
0.00600
0.01260
0,00410
0.00560
0 00440
0.00520
0.00580
0 00540
0 00190
0.00380
0,00890
0,00430
0 00068
0 00620
0 00200
0 00380
0 00240
001
012
171
704
706
G-I
G-8
G-12
G-172-Ri v
G-705BA
G-705-AJ
705,707,772,775,3320,W
705,7052,706,775,Kovar, Mo
704,7052,706,707,3320, Kovar
772,775,171
{
Ma
w
704,705,706,775,Kovar, MO
704,705,7052,775,Kovar,MO
705,772,774,775,3320,171
705,707,774,775,171,3320,W
707,772
7::40& 7052,706, 707,{*
723,SiO*
705,707,772,7!34, 775,171,W
Steel(S.4E1010)Ag-plated
Fe
1990, 1991, Fe (C orAg plated)
4.90 x 1o11
5.31 x 109
2, O4X1OS
i oi o
708
690
746
755
820
704
480
495
490
518
553
467
1115
1100
1110
1220
1.00 x l o,
6.68x lo~
1.50x 10,1
7052
706
707
772
774
776
G-705-FN
G-705-AO
G-707-DG
G-702-P
G-726-M>
G-705-R
6 53X 10B
1 41x 108
2.88x 10
910
535
359
393
3951
5 19x lot
4 17x 108
9 33x 109
3,76X 100
3.55x lo~
790
3320
1990
1991
G-790-H
G-37 1-BN
G-189-I Y
G-184-ET
General
El ectr i c-
R3f
1500
780
496
539
5401
. . ..
migGl ea Jar. 15,194.5.
GFrom Bull ER-&l , El ectroni c S
I
A GE KI aas.
From Tableao! DielectricMaLsria18 ~: Re ort V, NDRC 14-237, February1944,P. 52; Report VIII, NDRC 14425, June1945,P. 63.
[ Acopwr-clad nlckel-copWralloYhavlngnt ermnlexpmaion of about90 X 10-7p.r C.
s Dept.,(
,,, ,.. ,,, .,,, . . . . .
1
680 CONSTRUCTION [SEC. 17.5
I
Properties of Laboratory Gl asses.Data on the properti es of vari ous
gl asses are gi ven i n Tabl e 17.9. Such i nformati on has pr oved useful
i n the experi mental l aboratory and provi des necessary i nformati on for
maki ng Kovar-to-gl ass seal s. The fi rst col umn of Tabl e 17.9 defi nes
the gl ass by code number. The second col umn i s i ncl uded because the
l aboratory numbers often conti nue i n popul ar use even after a code
number has been assi gned. The thermal coeffi ci ent of expansi on i s the
average coeffi ci ent of expansi on from a range of temperatures between
0 and 300C. The softeni ng poi nt, anneal i ng poi nt, strai n poi nt, and
worki ng poi nt are merel y four arbi trary poi nts on a smooth temperature-
vi scosi ty curve. The worki ng poi nt gi ven i n Tabl e 17.9 does not con-
sti tute a recommendati on of the pr oper temperature for seal i ng, but i t
corresponds to the approxi mate temperature at whi ch seal s are usual l y
made. The vol ume resi sti vi ty val ues (Col umn 8) are, i n general , not
tr ue materi al constants but subject to the experi mental condi ti ons as
outl i ned i n Tabl es of Di el ectri c Materi al s. 1 The val ues wi l l have
consi derabl e practi cal i mportance, however , i n esti mati ng l eakage currents
and i n maki ng compari sons between materi al s. The di el ectri c properti es
are al so taken from thi s r efer ence and defi ned accordi ng to the fol l owi ng:
e = di el ectri c constant,
co = di el ectri c constant of vacuum = 8.854 X 10]2 (farad/meter),
c/to = speci fi c di el ectri c constant,
\
6* = compl ex di el ectri c constant = c ~E,
e = l oss factor,
tan 8 = l oss tangent = c/e.
Properti es of gl ass, such as agi ng, reacti ons wi th gases, and chemi cal
reacti on of one gl ass upon another, are di ffi cul t to take i nto account, and
i n these cases exper i ence i s the best gui de.
Preparation of the Glass and Kovar for Seal i ng.The cutti ng of the
gl ass tubi ng or cane to the requi red l engths can be done wi th a bonded
abrasi ve wheel . A wheel of approxi matel y No. 200 gri t wi th a surface
speed of 8000 ft/mi n i s sati sfactory. Care shoul d be taken to avoi d
forci ng the cut because thi s wi l l pr oduce abrasi ve i ncl usi ons i n the gl ass
and resul t i n cl oudy seal s.
After the Kovar i s machi ned or drawn to si ze, i t shoul d be pol i shed
fr ee from any tool marks or scratches, parti cul arl y those whi ch run from
the i nsi de to the outsi de of the pr oposed seal . Deep scratches can be
r emoved wi th an al oxi te cl oth of approxi matel y No. 120 gri t, but for
fi ni shi ng pol i sh a No. 250 gri t cl oth shoul d be used. I n addi ti on to
1A. von Hi ppel , Tabl es of Di el ectri c Materi al s, Repor t VI I I , NDRC 14-425,
p. 63.
!
SEC. 17.5] METAL-TO-GLASS SEALS 681
pol i shi ng, any sharp edges i n contact wi th the seal shoul d be rounded
wi th a formi ng tool .
After the machi ni ng and pol i shi ng, the Kovar shoul d be degreased
as descri bed i n Sec. 17.4 and then anneal ed i n a hydr ogen atmosphere.
I f the Kovar i s not hydr ogen fi red, the fi ni shed seal may contai n bubbl es
whi ch weaken the gl ass mechani cal l y and i ncrease the probabi l i ty of
vacuum l eaks. I f the Kovar i s not pr oper l y anneal ed, cracks may occur
duri ng subsequent brazi ng operati ons. Thi s heat treatment i n the
hydr ogen furnace i s the same as gi ven i n the note to Tabl e 177. The
seal s shoul d be made wi thi n a few hours after thi s hydrogen-atmosphere
fi ri ng.
Glass-to-Kovar Seal s.The best method to be empl oyed for seal i ng
gl ass to Kovar depends upon many factors, i ncl udi ng the si ze and shape
of the gl ass and metal parts. Some general remarks on seal i ng can be
obtai ned from the Kovar manufacturer and need not be r epeated her e.
I nstead, the techni que of seal i ng gl ass to Kovar for a speci fi c case wi l l
be descri bed i n detai l as typi cal seal i ng pr ocedur e. The fol l owi ng
descri pti on appl i es to pi pe a i n Fi g. 1714. I t i s her e assumed that the
component parts of the base and central l ead have been machi ned and
brazed together and the Kovar parts pol i shed, chemi cal l y cl eaned,
degassed, and anneal ed accordi ng to previ ous secti ons of thi s chapter;
ther efor e, the base assembl y and the central l ead are ready to be gl assed.
I n thi s case the No. 7052 gl ass i s cut to a l ength i -i n. gr eater than the
desi red di stance between the Kovar pi eces, and a di ameter i s chosen such
that i t fi ts l oosel y over the Kovar.
The fol l owi ng operati ons are per for med to make the seal to the two
Kovar pi eces.
The base of the cathode-support l ead i s pl aced i n a stai nl ess-steel
ji g whi ch wi l l be used to center the central l ead and to posi ti on the two
Kovar parts at the pr oper separati on. The ji g and base are mounted
i n the headstock of a gl ass l athe. 2
The central l ead i s pl aced i n the tai l stock of the l athe.
Wi th the cross fi res of i l l umi nati ng gas and oxygen set to be sl i ghtl y
oxi di zi ng, the Kovar pi eces are oxi di zed by rai si ng thei r temperatures
to a dul l r ed and i mmedi atel y al l owi ng them to cool . They must not
be overoxi di zed; a heavy bl ack oxi de i s i ncl i ned to resul t i n a l eaky seal .
The gl ass i s sl i d over the Kovar, and the tai l stock moved forward
unti l the central l ead hi ts the step i n the ji g and thus establ i shes the
pr oper spaci ng between the two Kovar pi eces.
C)ne end i s gl assed at a ti me. The fi res are pl aced i n a manner to
heat the Kovar mor e than the gl ass. When the gl ass reaches the worki ng
I f, ~a~g Gl aes to Kovar, op. ant.
%Li tton Engi neeri ng Laboratori es, Redwood Ci ty, Cal i f.
682 CONSTRUCTI ON [SEC. 175
temperatures, i t i s pushed onto the Kovar wi th a carbon paddl e. When
contact has been made between the Kovar and gl ass al l around the
ci rcumference, the paddl e i s r emoved, but heati ng i s conti nued unti l
the gl ass thoroughl y wets the Kovar and the gl ass edges become rounded.
After both seal s have been made, the gl ass can be wor ked to a uni form
di ameter.
The gl ass must be wor ked at the seal s so that i t wets the edges of the
Kovar. I t i s advi sabl e to have the edges of the gl ass al ways meet the
Kovar at a l arge angl e.
The joi nts are fl ame-anneal ed wi th a bunsen burner.
They are then oven-anneal ed at 490C for 20 rei n, and the oven i s
al l owed to cool to r oom temperature at the rate of approxi matel y 2C/
mi n. The col or of the seal shoul d be a smoky gr ey.
Waveguide Wi ndows.An i mportant part of the desi gn of a wavegui de
output i s the wavegui de wi ndow whi ch serves as a vacuum seal across
the gui de wi th mi ni mum power absorpti on i n the di el ectri c wi ndow
materi al .
Wavegui de wi ndows such as these can be made on a l athe by seal i ng
to the edges of the openi ng gl ass tubi ng havi ng a di ameter approxi -
mate y equal to the ci rcul ar openi ng i n the Kovar cup. The tubi ng
i s then buttoned-off cl ose to the Kovar, and the remai ni ng gl ass paddl ed
and wor ked i nto the openi ng. After anneal i ng, excess gl ass i n the
wi ndows i s ground fl at on an abrasi ve gri ndi ng wheel . Thi s method i s
sati sfactory for a few experi mental wi ndows, but the qual i ty and speed
of constructi on may be i mproved by the use of gl ass di sks.
Such di sks of di fferent gl asses can be purchased from the gl ass manu-
facturer or cut wi th the ai d of a di amond-cutti ng wheel (approxi matel y
300 gri t) from gl ass cane. The di sks thus rough-cut can be pol i shed
to the exact thi ckness by conventi onal opti cal pol i shi ng techni ques.
Duri ng the di sk-pol i shl ng process, abrasi ve materi al may be for ced i nto
the gl ass and cause bubbl i ng when the seal i s made. Abrasi ve i ncl usi ons
are encouraged i f excessi ve pressure i s appl i ed to for ce cutti ng. The
di sk-seal i ng method of maki ng wi ndows i s expl ai ned wi th the ai d of
Fi g. 17.16. The openi ng i n the Kovar i s bevel ed to a 45 angl e, and
the di ameter of the gl ass i s such that i t rests on the Kovar openi ng as
shown. The upper stai nl ess-steel tool i s used to push the gl ass di sk down
as the edges become soft. The l ower tool hol ds the gl ass i n i ts fi nal
posi ti on wi th r espect to the Kovar. The fi res from the gas-oxygen
burners are pl ayed on the Kovar cup as shown i n Fi g. 17.16a and b whi l e
the assembl y i s bei ng r otated i n a verti cal seal er. (Onl y two burners
are shown, but mor e may be used.) The fl ame i s not pl ayed on the gl ass,
1E. J. Wal sh, Method of Maki ng Gl ass to Metal Wi ndow Seal s, B1L Memo-
randum MM+3-140-48, Oct. 5, 1943.
I
I
SEC. 17.5] METAL-TO-GLASS SEALS 683
but mel ti ng occurs because of heat conducti on from the Kovar to the
gl ass. After the seal i s made, the upper tool i s r emoved and the edges
of the gl ass are further mel ted to avoi d smal l angl e contact between the
gl ass and Kovar. The fi nal seal
resembl es the sketch of Fi g. 17. 16c.
I mmedi atel y after bei ng seal ed,
the wi ndow i s pl aced i n an an-
neal i ng oven for about 15 mi n and
then al l owed to cool at approxi -
matel y 2C/mi n.
For seal i ng to Kovar, the l ow-
10ss Corni ng No. 707 gl ass i s
usual l y not recommended because
i ts coeffi ci ent of expansi on i s con-
si derabl y l ess than that for Kovar
(see Tabl e 179). I t has been
found, however , that successful
seal s can be made on the above
wavegui de w i n d o w usi ng thi s
gl ass. I t i s bel i eved that the suc-
cess of thi s seal i s rel ated to the
fact that the gl ass i s l eft under
compressi onal stress upon cool i ng
and that thi s gl ass can stand a
gr eater stress i n compressi on than
i n tensi on. A Kovar cup i s used
so that when the Kovar i s brazed
to the copper porti on of the tube,
the wi ndow i s rel ati vel y fr ee from
strai ns.
Another techni que for seal i ng
gl ass di sks to Kovar empl oys the
use of i nducti on heati ng. Fi gure
17.17 shows the arrangement of an
r-f coi l and wavegui de wi ndow
preparatory to seal i ng. The si n-
gl e-turn r-f coi l i s connected to
the output of an r-f gener ator
through an appropri ate matchi ng
transformer. The Kovar i s hel d
heati ng method provi des uni form
Gas.OXY
flame
(;)
I Tool ,
/
0.6COdi a.
0.550 di a.
m
707
alla,
cup
tiNNsl
(b)
m... ..~
(c)
Fm. 17. 16.Seal i ng gl ass i nto a wave
gui de wi ndow. (Courtesy of Bell Telephone
Labomhriea.)
i n a Lavi te support. The i nducti on
heati ng of the Kovar and excel l ent
control of the Kovar temperature, and as a resul t ver y fl at and uni form
wi ndows can be made wi thout the hol di ng tool s that are necessary i n
the method previ ousl y descri bed.
1I bid.
684 CONSTRUCTI ON [SEC. 175
Mica Wi ndows.The l ow-l oss 707 gl ass used i n the above wi ndows
i s l i mi ted i n i ts average pow-er-handl i ng capaci ty to about 500 watts
transmi ssi on of 3-cm radi ati on. For hi gher-pcnver outputs mi ca \vi ndows
may be used, as l osses are about 15 per cent l o~ver than those i n 707 gl ass.
~.. . . .,
Fm. 17.1 7.Coi l for r -f heati ng of wave gui de wi ndows.
A techni que of maki ng mi ca wi ndows for wavegui de output has been
based on a method for seal i ng mi ca to metal . 2 The metal cup i s made of
Al l egheny No. 4 Al l oy (52 per cent Fej 42 per cent Ni , 6 per cent Cr)
whi ch has a coeffi ci ent of expansi on of about 95 X 107 per degr ee
centi grade and nearl y matches the expansi on properti es of I ndi a mi ca.
A l ead-borosi l i cate gl ass effects a seal between the mi ca and the metal cup.
Such a mi ca wi ndow i s shown i n Fi g. 17.18.
I n constructi ng such a wi ndow, the No. 4 al l oy cup i s fi red i n a dr y
hydr ogen atmosphere for 15 mi n at 1100C to r emove the ori gi nal oxi de.
Metal sealing glass
I n the absence of a hydr ogen fur-
r
nace fr ee of oxygen and water
- Mica window
vapor, the oxi de can be r emoved by
0.C07thick
mechani cal pol i shi ng. The cup i s
fi red i n a regul ar tank hydr ogen
furnace for 10 to 15 mi n at 1100C
to form a thi n uni form l ayer of
/ oxi de. Thi s chromi um oxi de i s
#4 Alloy CUp
necessary so that the gl ass wi Wwet
Fm. 17.1S.1Mi cawi ndowfor wavegui de the metal and form a hermeti c
output.
seal . A paste i s made of powder ed
gl ass wi th water. Thi s paste i s pai nted wi th a smal l brush around
the mi ca dkk pl aced over the openi ng i n the cup. A l avi te sl ug,
sl i ghtl y smal l er i n di ameter than the mi ca, i s pl aced over the mi ca di sk,
and the l avi te, mi ca, and cup are hel d together wi th a supporti ng ji g.
The l avi te sl ug not onl y hol ds the mi ca i n posi ti on but al so prevents
the gl ass from fl owi ng over the whol e mi ca surface. Thk combi nati on
1L. Mal ter, R. L. Jepson, and L. R. Bl oom, <Mi ca Wi ndows for Wavegui de
Output Magnetrons, NDRC 14366,Dec. 5, 1944.
2J. S. Donal , Jr., Seal i ug Mi ca to Gl ass or Metal to Form a Vacuum Ti ght
Joi nt, Reu.Sci . I nstruments, 13, 266 (1942).
p
,
I
,,
If
SEC. 17.6] CATHODE AND HEATER CONSTRUCTI ON 685
i s fi red i n an ai r oven for 15 mi n at 600C; the seal between the metal
and gl ass shoul d then have a l i ght gr een col or. To braze the cup to
the copper part of the wavegui de, the cup must be ni ckel -pl ated after
the oxi de has been r emoved by pol i shi ng. The cup-to-copper wave~de
joi nt can now be made wi th si l ver al l oys BT or RT i n a hydr ogen
bottl e i f the wi ndow i s pr otected by bl owi ng ni trogen over i ts surface
duri ng the brazi ng operati on. I t i s possi bl e wi th thi s wi ndow to repai r
a l eak i n the seal even after the tube i s compl etel y assembl ed. Pr otecti on
i n the form of a secti on of wavegui de extendi ng beyond the mi ca i s desi ra-
bl e, as thi s type of wi ndow i s mechani cal l y weak.
Fm. 17.19.Cathode-formi ng di e.
17.6. Cathode and Heater Constructi on.-The properti es of the
al kal i ne-earth oxi de-coated cathode are gi ven i n Chap. 12. Thi s secti on
wi l l descri be the constructi on of cathodes for magnetron use. Al though
the oxi de materi al used i n maki ng magnetron cathodes has remai ned
essenti al l y unchanged for several years, ther e have been i mportant
i mprovements i n the constructi on of the base for the oxi de l ayer.
The
scr een and the porous matri x of ni ckel 1 are outstandi ng exampl es.
Methods of maki ng these cathodes wi l l be dkcussed al ong wi th methods
of fabri cati ng the pl ai n ni ckel -sl eeve cathode. Fi nal l y, the constructi on
of thori um oxi de cathodes for hi gh-power appl i cati on wi l l be consi dered.
Cai hode-sl eeoe Constructi on.Pl ai n ni ckel sl eeves can be made by
cutti ng tubi ng to the pr oper l ength wi th a sharp kni fe. I f seaml ess
Grade A ni ckel tubi ng cannot be obtai ned i n the desi red si ze, i t can be
1 R. L. Sl obod, Deveh?prnent of Magnetron Cathodee, BTL Memorandum
MM-44-120-73, June 11, 1944.
686 CONSTRUCTION [k!.Ec. 17.6
drawn to si ze. I f the desi red seaml ess tubi ng i s not avai l abl e, the
cyl i ndri cal sl eeve may be formed from ni ckel sheet.
For smal l cathodesi t i nadvi sabl e to machi ne the sl eeve to si ze from
a ni ckel r od or heavy-wal l ed tubi ng, as i s done for the 725A magnetron
cathode, shown i n Fi g. 1720, or to press a ni ckel r od to the desi red di am-
eter and shape i n a steel -formi ng di e, as i s done for the 2J42 magnetron.
The parts of such a formi ng di e are shown i n Fi g. 17.19. These parts
are made from Ketos tool steel hardened to a Rockwel l C of about 60.
Ni ckel r od of a di ameter approxi matel y equal to the cathode di ameter
i s cut to a l ength suffi ci ent to suppl y the vol ume of ni ckel needed i n the
fi ni shed structure. The best l ength may be found by tri al and er r or .
(a) (b) (c)
FIG. 17.20.725A cathode. (a) Pl ai n sl eeve; (b) screen sl eeve; (c) coated scr een cathode.
(Courtesg of Bell Tel ephone Laboratories.)
Befor e bei ng pressed the ni ckel r od i s anneal ed i n the hydrogen-atmos-
pher e furnace at 900C for 30 mi n. I t i s then pl aced i n the formi ng
dl e wi th the pi e-shaped si des and end pi eces put i n pl ace. The outsi de
di ameter of the assembl ed parts has a sl i ght taper so that the assembl y
can be for ced i nto a hardened cyl i nder whi ch prevents the pi e-shaped
parts from movi ng radi al l y duri ng pressi ng. The assembl y i s then
pl aced i n a press, and a for ce i s appl i ed between the two end pi ns. By
thk techni que the cathode sl eeve, end shi el ds, and support r od are formed,
and al l that remai ns to be done i s dri l l i ng the central hol e through the
r od to admi t the heater. I f the end shi el ds are di ffi cul t to form by
pressi ng, punched ni ckel washers may be put on the i ni ti al ni ckel r od
and pressed i nto pl ace by the formi ng di e.
The scr een cathode i s formed by appl yi ng a ni ckel mesh to the pl ai n
cathode sl eeve (see Fi g. 17.20a). For the l arger cathodes the mesh i s
spot-wel ded to the ni ckel sl eeve by conventi onal spotwel di ng techni ques,
SIW. 17.6] CATHODE AND HEATER CONSTRUCTI ON 687
For the smal l er cathodes the scr een may be si ntered onto the sl eeve i n
the fol l owi ng manner. The ni ckel scr een (150 by 150 mesh for the
2J42 si ze of cathode) i s degreased, anneal ed i n a hydr ogen furnace at
900C for ~ hr, and cut to the
pr oper si ze to cover the cathode
sl eeve. The scr een i s pl aced
around the cathode and hel d i n a
K-Monel ji g such as the one shown
i n Fi g. 17.21. The gr ooves i n the
ji g pr event bendi ng of the cathode
end sl i el ds. The two parts of the
ji g are then scr ew e d together
ti ghtl y and passed through the
hydr ogen furnace at 1125C for 15
mi n. I n or der to get good bond-
Fm. 17.21.-Screen-cathode si nteri ng ji g.
i ng of the mesh to the ni ckel sl eeve
th~ ji g must exer t a l arge and uni form pressure over the whol e cathode
area, and ther efor e the scr een si nteri ng shoul d be done befor e dri l l i ng
the heater hol e. I n cases wher e thi s i s i mpossi bl e, i t may be necessary
Fm. 17.22.Por-
ous-ni okel -matri x
cathode. (CourtesU
of Bell Telephone Lab-
oratories.)
to pl ace a mandrel i n the heater hol e duri ng the
si nteri ng operati on.
The porous-ni ckel -matri x cathodel was devel oped
i n an effor t to i ncrease the thermal conducti vi ty of
the emi tti ng l ayer of the cathode. To form the
porous matri x, ni ckel powder ei ther i s pai nted onto
the pl ai n sl eeve i n the form of a suspensi on i n amyl
acetate wi th pyroxyl i n as a bi nder or i s mol ded onto
the sl eeve wi th the ai d of a stai nl ess-steel fi xture. I n
the pai nti ng method the ni ckel powder ( 200 + 325
mesh) i s bui l t up to a thi ckness of approxi matel y 10
roi l s and then fi red for 15 mi n i n a hydr ogen at mos-
pher e at 1200C. I n the mol di ng method the metal
powder i s i ntroduced i nto the space between an
oxi di zed stai nl ess-steel mol d and the cathode sl eeve,
and the assembl y i s fi red at 900C for 10 mi n to fi x
the powder i nto pl ace. The mol d i s then r emoved,
and the sl eeve pl us powder r efi r ed at 1200C for 15
mi n to form a hi ghl y porous mass ri gi dl y attached to
the base metal as shown i n Fi g. 17.22.
Heater Constructi on.The heater conventi onal l y consi sts of a tungsten
or mol ybdenum wi r e (or ri bbon) i nserted i nto the cathode sl eeve, as
seen i n Fi g. 17.23. Because ther e must be l i ttl e or no el ectri cal l eakage
1Zbi d.
588
CONSTRUCTION [SEC. 17.6
between the heater and the cathode or between adjoi ni ng parts of the
heater, they are usual l y coated wi th some nonconducti ng nonemi ssi ve
materi al . The coati ng must be hard and tough enough to wi thstand
i nserti on i nto the cathode sl eeve. Al undum, a nonemi ssi ve el ectri cal
i nsul ati ng materi al whi ch can wi thstand hi gh temperatures and abrasi on,
i s most frequentl y used. Heaters must be desi gned so that thei r maxi -
mum temperature wi l l not exceed 1400C i n or der to stay safel y bel ow the
mel ti ng temperature of Al undum.
A pr ocedur e for fabri cati ng heater coi l s i s as fofl ows. The wi r e i s
wound on a mandrel the di ameter of whi ch depends upon the wi r e di am-
eter as wel l as the coi l di ameter and i s best determi ned by tri al and er r or .
The cl earance between the i nsi de of the sl eeve and the outsi de of the
coated heater depends upon the cathode si ze but i s usual l y between
0.003 andO.O1O i n. I nsomecases, such asaheater to be wound bi fi l ar,
ti s advi sabl e toti ndthe ti re onastai nl ess-steel mandre.l that has scr ew
threads of the pr oper pi tch cut i nto i t. After wi ndi ng, the ends of the
wi r e are securel y fastened, andthe heater coi l and mandrel are hydrogen-
fi red at 1000C for 5 mi n. At thi s temperature, strai ns are r emoved from
tungsten or mol ybdenum wi r e wi thout embri ttl i ng the metal . The coi l
may then be r emoved from the mandrel by unscrewi ng. The ends of the
coi l are then formed to the shape necessary for wel di ng them to the i nput
connectors. The coi l i s chemi cal l y cl eaned by boi l i ng i t i n 20 per cent
KOH sol uti on for 5 rei n, ri nsed i n di sti l l ed water, and dri ed i n a hot-ai r
bl ast. The heater i s next sprayed wi th a suspensi on of Al undum. The
sprayi ng can be done wi th a De, Vi l bi ss type CV spray gun, the compressed
ai r bei ng suppl i ed through a De Vi l bi ss type HB ai r transformer. The ai r
pressure, the gun fl ui d screw, and the gun spreader val ve shoul d be
adjusted to pr oduce a cl oud of uni f orm densi ty. When a smal l number of
tubes are made i n an experi mental l aboratory, the heater coati ng (whi ch
i s a suspensi on of Al undum i n an appropri ate bi nder such as amyl acetate)
can best be obtai ned from a commerci al radi o-tube manufacturer. The
suspensi on must be wel l agi tated befor e i t i s used by bei ng rol l ed on a
bal l mi l l for ~ hr at 100 rpm. The thi ckness of coati ng shoul d be bui l t
up sl owl y and uni forml y to about 0.003 i n. by several passes of the gun at
several di fferent angl es around the axi s of the heater. The coi l i s then
baked i n a l ow-temperature oven i n ai r at 100C for ~ hr to evaporate
the Al undum bi nder. The coi l i s then pl aced i n a mol ybdenum tray
and fi red i n a hi gh-temperature hydrogen-atmosphere furnace at 1620C
for 5 mi n. I f the temperature i s too hi gh, the coati ng wi l l become exces-
si vel y hard and wi l l be i ncl i ned to chi p when the heater i s bent. I f the
temperature i s too l ow, a soft coati ng wi l l resul t.
Assembly of Cathode Parts.The pr ocedur e for assembl i ng the cathode
parts wi l l depend upon many factors, especi al l y the method that i s chosen
I
I SEC. 17.6] CATHODE AND HEATER CONSTRUCTION 689
for mounti ng the cathode i n the tube. For magnetrons wi th unattached
magnets the cathode i s usual l y mounted by two radi al supports whi ch
ser ve al so to compl ete the heater ci rcui t. For packaged tubes i t
[
i s common to use a si ngl e support through a hol e i n the pol e pi ece; the
support i s hol l ow; and the heater ci rcui t i s compl eted by a coaxi al wi re.
These methods of assembl y wi l l be descri bed by r efer ence to typi cal
i
exampl es.
~
The cathode for the 725A magnetron (shown i n Fi g. 17.23) i s sel ected
as an exampl e of the radi al mount. The detai l s of brazi ng, cl eani ng,
gl assi ng, etc., have been di scussed previ ousl y; the assembl y of the di ffer-
1
ent cathode parts wi l l merel y be l i sted wi thout di scussi ng the detai l s of
these operati ons. Some detai l of maki ng the heater i nsul ator must be
I
~Heater (w)
A% Eyelet (Ni)
L l~ul~t~~
L Porous.nickel
matrix
2 Crimps
R
diametrically opposit~
and in line with the
flat of the heater lead
Cathode sleeve (Nl)
T
+
\
Cathode support flange
-3 :;>1 ,
t;: >- -
~ew ,,AVV.8,AS,
FI G. 17.23.Constructi on of 725A cathode. (Courtesv of Bell Telephone Latmndor{e..)
gi ven, however . Lavi te i s a conveni ent materi al for thi s purpose. I t
can be machi ned to si ze i n the raw state and then hardened i n the fol l ow-
i ng manner. Pl ace i nsul ators i n ni ckel tray cover ed wi th Al undum
sand. Pl ace tray i n ai r oven, and heat at about 500C for 5 mi n.
I ncrease over temperature to 1000C, and heat for ~ hr. Al l ow oven to
cool to about 200C befor e removi ng i nsul ators. (Thi s pr ocedur e i s
for an oven wi th an anneal i ng chamber.) The di fferent parts of the
cathode (Fi g. 17. 23) are then assembl ed by the fol l owi ng process.
The heater, i nsul ator, and eyel et are arranged as shown. The ni ckel
eyel et i s fl attened to cl amp the heater. The i nsul ator i s hel d i n pl ace by
cri mpi ng the ni ckel shoul der at the end of the cathode. The heater i s
spot-wel ded at one end to the cathode-support fl ange and at the other
10btai nabl e fr om the Ameri can Lava Corp., Chattanooga 5, Tcnn.
I
690
CONSTRUCTION [SEC. 176
endtothe fl attened eyel et. Theprotrudi ng heater wi r e i s cut off fl ush
wi th the end of the eyel et. The aasembl ed cathode and heater are then
ready for mounti ng i n the magnetron. Ni ckel support wi res are wel ded
to the tungsten l eads, whi ch are brought through the gl ass seal s, and ther e
support wi res are wel ded to the cathode. The mai n support for the
cathode i s the wel d to the cathode-support fl ange. The wel d to the
(a)
/-
Insulator (Iavite)
Cathodesleeve(Ari)-,
\
b He,te,(w)
(b)
FI G. 17.24.(a) and (b) Constructi on of 2J42 axi al -mounted cathode.
eyel et suppl i es some support but i s essenti al l y to make connecti on to
the heater.
The axi al l y mounted cathode structure for the 2J42 magnetron shown
i n Fi g. 17.24 i s typi cal . As wi th the radi al l y mounted cathode, the or der
of assembl y of parts wi l l be gi ven wi thout the detai l s of the i ndi vi dual
operati ons for maki ng the parts.
1. The Kovar heater connector r od i s cut to the pr oper l ength
and dri l l ed to accept the heater.
SEC. 17.6] CATHODE AND HEATER CONSTRUCTI ON 691
2. The heater connector i s beaded wi th 7052 gl ass i n preparati on
for seal i fi g to the cathode support.
3. The hardened l avi te i nsul ators are sl i ppod onto the r od and spot-
wel ded i nto pl ace wi th ni ckel tabs.
4. The heater i s put i nto the dri l l ed hol e of the Kovar r od and spot-
wel ded i n pl ace.
5. The scr eened cathode i s copper-brazed to the cathode support.
6. The r-f choke (copper ) i s BT brazed to the cathode support.
7. The assembl ed heater and heater connector are sl i pped i nto the
assembl ed cathode sl eeve and cathode support, and the gl ass seal
i s made by fl owi ng the 7052 gl ass bead onto the Kovar tube.
At the same ti me the Kovar tube i s beaded i n preparati on for
the seal to the pol e pi ece.
8. The heater i s then spot-wel ded to the projecti on.
9. The cathode i s sprayed and made ready for mounti ng i nto the
magnetron.
10. At thi s poi nt, one of two courses can be fol l owed, dependi ng upon
the fi nal magnetron braze. One i s to gl ass-seal the cathode struc-
tur e i nto the pol e pi ece and mount thi s assembl y i nto the mag-
netron. Another i s fi rst to braze the pol e pi ece to the bl ock
and then make the gl ass seal between the pol e pi ece and the
beaded cathode support. Thi s l atter method of mounti ng i s the
one descri bed i n Sec. 17.3.
Cleaning and Coating the Gatltode Sl eeve.After the machi ni ng or
brazi ng operati ons are compl eted upon the cathode sl eeve, i t i s cl eaned
by the process outl i ned i n Sec. 174; and from thi s ti me unti l the tube
i s compl eted, the cathode sl eeve i s handl ed wi th great car e to pr event
contami nati on that mi ght i nhi bi t cathode emi ssi on. I t mi ght be
necessary, for some tubes, to rearrange the or der of events or omi t
certai n operati ons, but the fol l owi ng method of cl eani ng and coati ng the
cathode sl eeve i s typi cal .
After the sl eeve has been cl eaned by the process descri bed i n Sec.
174, i t i s hydrogen-fi red i n a cover ed ni ckel tray at 900C for $ hr.
The sl eeve, the heater, and the supports are then assembl ed, wi th car e
to keep the sl eeve fr ee from contami nants. (I f ther e i s any questi on
about cl eanl i ness, the sl eeve shoul d now be ri nsed i n acetone and i n cl ean
methyl al cohol and then dri ed i n cl ean warm ai r. ) The cathode sl eeve
i s then vacuum fi red for 15 mi n at 1000C. Thi s can be done by usi ng
the heater to control the cathode-sl eeve temperature or by r-f i nducti on
heati ng. (Thi s step i s someti mes omi tted.)
The cathode shoul d be coated i mmedi atel y after the vacuum fi ri ng.
For pl ai n-ni ckel -sl eeve cathodes the coati ng i s general l y done by sprayi ng.
A De Vi l bi ss type CH spray gun serves thi s purpose ver y wel l . As i n
692
CONS TA?UCTION [SEC. 17.6
the case of heater sprayi ng the ai r pressure (control l ed by a De Vi l bi ss
type HB ai r transformer), the fl ui d screw, andthespreader val ve shoul d
be adjusted to gi ve a cone-shaped cl oud of uni form densi ty. The coati ng
shoul d be sprayed onto the sl eeve i n thi n uni form l ayers whi l e the cathode
sl eeve i s bei ng rotated, unti l the desi red wei ght of coati ng i s deposi ted
(usual l y 9 to 12 mg/cm2). Duri ng the sprayi ng process the other cathode
parts, parti cul arl y the end shi el ds, must be pr otected from the spray.
A recommended BaSr(C03)z mi xture i s the J. T. Baker Manufacturi ng
Company Radi o Mi xture No. 3 suspended i n amyl acetate wi th a pyr oxy-
l i n bi nder. Experi mental l aboratori es may fi nd i t conveni ent to purchase
smal l quanti ti es of cathode-coati ng materi al from a commerci al radl o-
tube manufacturer. The coati ng suspensi on shoul d be rol l ed at a speed
of 100 rpm for about ~ hr to pr epar e i t for use. The spray gun and
auxi l i ary equi pment shoul d be cl eaned frequentl y wi th acetone and
di sti l l ed water.
For scr een cathodes or porous matri x of ni ckel cathodes, the coati ng
i s appl i ed wi th a camel -hai r brush whi ch has previ ousl y been cl eaned wi th
acetone and di sti l l ed water. The fi rst coat i s appl i ed as a ver y thi n
conti nuous fi l m whi ch barel y cover s the surface of the ni ckel . Thi s i s
al l owed to dr y thoroughl y, and successi ve l ayers of coati ng are appl i ed i n
the same manner unti l the scr een or porous matri x i s fi l l ed wi th coati ng
materi al as shown i n Fi g. 17.20. The cathode i s fi nal l y mounted i n the
tube and pr ocessed accordi ng to i nstructi ons gi ven i n Sec. 17.7.
Thorium Oxide Cathode.Bari um stronti um oxi de cathodes frequentl y
l i mi t the average power of magnetrons because the back bombardment
i n these tubes overheats the cathode structure. Attem~ts have been
made to devel op emi tti ng surfaces that wi l l have sati sfactory l i fe at
hi gh temperature. Thori um oxi de cathodes show promi se for hi gh-
power magnetron operati on. The poor adhesi on of thori a to a metal l i c
base or si ntered metal surface i s over come by prepari ng a si ntered
cyl i nder of thori a. The preparati on of si ntered thori a cyl i nders i s
outl i ned.4
A uni form densi ty of thori a powder i s prepared by converti ng mantl e-
,rrade thori um ni trate i nto thori um oxi de by heati ng i n an ai r oven at
b
(;OOC, fusi ng the resul ti ng fl uffy materi al i n an el ectri c arc, and fi nal l y
crushi ng the fused thori a i nto a 200-mesh powder . The thori a powder
i s then mi xed wi th thori um chl ori de to form a paste that can be mol ded
I llartin A. Pomerantz, Thori l l rn Oxi {l r ~atl )orl m, NDRC 14517, Bartol
I i rwearch Foundati on, Swarthnrorc, Pa., Ott. 31, 1945.
ZS. Dushnmn, Rw. Mod. Phvs., 2, 423 (1930).
3 S. V. Forgue, RCA El l gi nccri ng I[emorandum PEhf-4C, 1943.
~For detai l ed i nformati on OTI thi s process hee C,, D. Prater, The Fabri cati on of
~hrrri a Cathodes, NDRC Report, Bartol Research Foundati on, Swarthmore, Pa.,
(June 1946).
SEC. 17.7] TUBE EVACUATI ON AND PROCESSI NG 693
i nto the desi red shape. The thori um chl ori de i n the mol ded cerami c i s
then conver ted i nto the hydroxi de by pl aci ng i t i n an atmosphere of
ammoni um hydroxi de for several hours.
After removal from the
ammoni um hydroxi de atmosphere and dryi ng at r oom temperature, the
cerami c i s fi red at about l WOC i n an argon atmosphere whi ch conver ts
the hydroxi de to the oxi de formi ng the bond between the grai ns of
thori um oxi de. Such thori um oxi de cathodes gi ve copi ous emi ssi on at
1700C (see Chap. 12).
17.7. Tube Evacuati on and Processi ng.-The i nterval between the
fi nal hydr ogen fi ri ng of the tube parts and the evacuati on of the tube
shoul d be as short as possi bl e, i n or der to mi ni mi ze oxi dati on and adsorp-
ti on of gases by the i nternal parts. Tube processi ng remai ns to some
extent an art and for thi s reason i s l ess standardi zed than any of the
previ ous pr ocedur es di scussed. The fol l owi ng schedul e i s gi ven merel y
as a typi cal one that has pr oved sati sfactory.
After the tube has been seal ed onto the vacuum system, the mechani -
cal pump i s used to r educe the pressure to about 103 mm Hg befor e the
di ffusi on pump (a three-stage oi l -di ffusi on type) i s turned on. Thi s
pressure can be esti mated by the appearance of fl uorescence on the gl ass
when touched wi th a spark coi l . When the pressure of the system as
read by the i oni zati on gauge reaches 5 by 106 mm Hg, a bakeout oven
i s l ower ed and turned on. As the tube begi ns to ri se i n temperature, the
pressure wi l l start to i ncrease owi ng to the rel ease of water vapor and
gases from the vari ous tube parts. When the bakeout-oven temperature
reaches 450C, i t shoul d be stabi l i zed. The exhaust system shoul d now
be careful l y tor ched. The bakeout-oven temperature i s mai ntai ned at
450C unti l the pressure fal l s to 5 by 106 mm Hg. When thi s pressure
i s reached, the tube shoul d be al l owed to cool . The pressure shoul d
decr ease as the tube cool s, reachi ng about 5 by 10-7 mm Hg when the
tube returns to r oom temperature.
The tube i s now ready for cathode processi ng. The cathode-bi nder
resi due i s r emoved by i ncreasi ng the heater power unti l the cathode
temperature i s about 600C. The cathode temperature i s rai sed i n one
step to 900 or 1000C and hel d at thi s temperature unti l conversi on of
the coati ng i s compl ete. Cauti on shoul d be exer ci sed i n two ways at
thi s poi nt: (1) The cathode temperature shoul d not ri se above 1100C,
because the coati ng wi l l start to evaporate from the sl eeve. (2) I f the
heater vol tage for conversi on i s hi gher than the CO, i oni zati on potenti al
(about 15 vol ts), a bal l ast shoul d be i nserted i n the heater ci rcui t to
pr event arcs that woul d burn out the heater. Duri ng the conversi on
of l arge cathodes, the pressure may ri se so hi gh that i t may be necessary
to turn off the i oni zati on gauge; i n fact, the for ce pump may sound as
1Di sti l l ati on Products, I nc., Vacuum Equi pment Di vi si on, Rochester 13, N.Y.
694 CONSTRI J CTI ON [SEC. 17.8
though i t has just been turned on. I f the conversi on from carbonates to
oxi des i s done properl y, the pressure shoul d fal l rapi dl y at the end of the
process, and at thi s poi nt the heater power shoul d be r educed unti l the
cathode temperature i sabout850C.
When the pressure has r etur ned to 5 by 10-6 mm Hg, acti vati on of
the cathode i s begun by drawi ng a smal l amount of d-c cur r ent from the
cathode. A burst of gas may be obser ved when d-c cur r ent i s drawn;
thi s gas may come from the cathode but i s mor e apt to be ejected from
the anode bl ock by el ectr on bombardment. The d-c pl ate vol tage i s
rai sed sl owl y unti l the tube draws 25 ma/cm2 and the pressure fal l s
bel ow 5 by 10-7 mm Hg. At no ti me duri ng the acti vati on process shoul d
the pressure be al l owed to ri se above 5 by 10-6 mm Hg.
When ther e i s l i ttl e change i n pressure wi th changes i n d-c pl ate
vol tage and the pressure remai ns bel ow 5 by 107 mm Hg, the tube i s
ready to be operated. The el ectromagnet i s moved i nto pl ace; the fi el d
i s set for l ow-vol tage operati on; and the vol tage (pul sed or c-w) i s appl i ed.
The vol tage i s i ncreased sl owl y to avoi d excessi ve sparki ng and to al l ow
ti me to pump off the gas expel l ed from the anode bl ock because of hi gh-
ener gy-el ectr on bombardment. Osci l l ati on of the magnetron shoul d
be conti nued unti l the tube operates stabl y up to the desi red operati ng
i nput vol tages.
When the processi ng and outgassi ng are compl ete, the tube shoul d
be al l owed to cool to r oom temperature. The pressure at seal -off shoul d
be about 2 by 10-7 mm Hg.
17.8. Exami nati on of Metal s.-I n vacuum-tube constructi on, one
er r or or defect unl ess detected at an earl y stage usual l y resul ts i n a
worthl ess pi ece of metal and gl ass. A major sour ce of troubl e i s i mpuri fi -
cati onB i n the basi c materi al s. For thi s reason systemati c and careful
exami nati on of these materi al s i s al most a necessi ty to successful tube
producti on.
Some common faul ts found i n the metal s used i n tube constructi on
shoul d be menti oned. The copper may contai n grai ns of CU20 whi ch
often resul ts i n porosi ty after reduci ng and oxi di zi ng heat cycl es. Tung-
sten and mol ybdenum may be bri ttl e or contai n cracks that cause vacuum
l eaks or br oken heaters. Certai n batches of Kovar are al so pr one to
devel op cracks. Careful i nspecti on of these metal s i s thus a necessi ty
i f excessi ve shri nkage i s to be avoi ded.
Al though copper may be l abel ed OFHC (oxygen-fr ee hi gh-con-
ducti vi ty) because i t has been put through a deoxi di zi ng process, i t may
i n fact not be oxygen-fr ee by the ti me i t reaches the tube maker. Thi s
Oa taken up may resul t from the drawi ng operati on that i s done after
the deoxi di zi ng process and duri ng whi ch copper -oxi de scal e i s drawn
i nto the copper bar. I n thi s case the bar may be sati sfactory on one
!
I
!
.
SEC. 17.8] EXAMI NATI ON OF METALS 695
erl d and unsati sfactory on the other . Because the copper surface may
oxi di ze whi l e standi ng, the outer l ayer of a bar shoul d al ways be turned
off.
Non-OFHC copper can often be detected by i ts appearance after a
BT sol deri ng operati on i n an H2 atmosphere. One si gn, al though not
defi ni te, i s that the BT> sol der i s usual l y al most compl etel y absorbed by
the copper , and any fi l l ets of sol der that may occur are al so copper -
col or ed. Another i ndi cati on i s a pecul i ar orange col or and granul ar
structure of the copper , al though thi s someti mes i s al so noti ced on OFHC
copper , especi al l y when i t i s over fi r ed. One of the most obvi ous trai ts
of nonoxygen-fr ee copper i s that i t expands under heat and does not
resume i ts ori gi nal si ze upon cool i ng. After Hj fi ri ng at 800C, non-
OFHC copper shel l s 2+ i n. OD measure from 0.010 to 0.018 i n. gr eater i n
di ameter than befor e fi ri ng. OFHC copper , on the other hand, returns
to wi thi n 0.001 i n. of i ts ori gi nal measurements.
The bend test i s often empl oyed to dki ti ngui sh between good
and bad copper . After H2 fi ri ng at 800C, wi r e or thi n stri ps of
bad copper are ver y bri ttl e and wi l l break at the fi rst attempt to
bend them through 90. Good OFHC copper wi l l take at l east four
90 bends i n al ternate di recti ons after thk treatment. Thi s test i s
rather defi ni te but cannot be used on heavy stock.
Most cracks and spl i nts i n wi res and rods of tungsten and mol ybdenum
can readi l y be seen under l ow magni fi cati on. Bri ttl eness, especi al l y
after fi ri ng, i s an i nherent faul t of these metal s, but ther e are wi de
vari ati ons of degr ee. Tungsten r od that has been heated by a tor ch i n
ai r i s much mor e bri ttl e than the same r od fi red i n an Hz oven. MBO,
tests made on 0.080-i n. tungsten r od showed that after Hj fi ri ng, wi de
di fferences exi sted as to bri ttl eness among rods of the same l ot of metal .
Cracks i n Kovar resul t when unanneal ed Di eces of the metal are
sol dered wi th a si l ver al l oy i n an H2 oven. They appear to be caused
by the sol der enteri ng the grai n boundari es of the Kovar as the stresses
i n the l atter are rel i eved by heat. The cracks may be seen under a l ow-
)
power mi croscope and i n most cases even by the- naked eye. I n or der
to pr event these cracks, al l Kovar shoul d be anneal ed befor e i t i s sol dered
i nto assembl i es.
The most defi ni ti ve test for copper contai ni ng CUZO i s mi croscopi c
exami nati on of a pol i shed and etched sampl e. One can detect the
pr esence of CUZO not onl y by l ooki ng for the CU20 i ncl usi ons but al so
by studyi ng the crystal l i ne si ze, for the pr esence of CU20 wi l l i nhi bi t
crystal growth.
I
Sampl es can be prepared i n the fol l owi ng manner: A smal l pi ece
of the copper under suspi ci on i s cut from the bi l l et. I f the exami nati on
i s concer ned wi th grai n structure, the sampl e i s then anneal ed i n an H?
I
696 CONSTRUCTI ON [SEC. 17.8
t
(a)
I
(b)
FIG. 17.25.Photomicrographsof copper takentodetect inclusionsof Cu,O. (a) Good
copper, magnification250z; (b) bad copper, magnification 405z.
SEC, 178] EXAMI NATI ON OF METALS 697
oven at 800C. The copper i s not anneal ed i f detecti on of CUZO grai ns
i s desi red. The metal i s mounted i n a mol ded bakel i te 1 cyl i nder to
faci l i tate hol di ng i t duri ng the pol i shi ng operati ons, whi ch must be
! carri ed out wi th some care. Begi nni ng wi th a coarse abrasi ve such as
No. 320 Al oxi te cl oth, progressi vel y fi ner ones are used unti l the fi nal
pol i shi ng i s done wi th a ver y fi ne al umi na sol uti on on Mi racl oth. These
pol i shi ng shoul d be done on a sl owl y rotati ng wheel , and car e shoul d be
taken not to car r y over any abrasi ve from one stage to the next. Pol i sh-
i ng shoul d conti nue unti l no scratches are vi si bl e at a magni fi cati on of
200 di ameters.
I f one wi shes to study the grai n structure, i t i s necessary to etch
!
the surface of the copper after the pol i shi ng has been compl eted. I f
one i s l ookl ng onl y for CU20 i ncl usi ons, etchi ng i s not necessary or desi ra-
bl e, because the reagent may destr oy the i ncl usi ons. Under mi croscopi c
f
power s of 200 to 500z CU20 appears as smal l parti cl es wi th a di sti nct
bl ui sh col or. Thei r pr esence i ndi cates that the copper wi l l become
porous when fi red i n an Hz atmosphere. To devel op the grai n structure
of the copper , an etch of equal parts of NH1OH and HZOZi s appl i ed to
the speci men wi th a soft cl oth. Onl y fresh sol uti ons of thi s reagent wi l l
etch sati sfactori l y. Because the pol i shi ng process usual l y al ters super-
fi ci al l y the grai n structure of the metal , i t i s good practi ce to etch l i ghtl y,
1
then pol i sh off thi s etch on the l ast wheel , and r epeat thi s process unti l
one has taken off the al tered surface. Two etchi ng and pol i shi ng cycl es
are usual l y suffi ci ent to do thi s.
A speci men of OFHC copper that has been Hz anneal ed and etched
i s shown i n Fi g. 17.25a. Note the ver y l arge, rather regul ar grai ns wi th
boundari es sharp and fr ee from pi ts or i ncl usi ons. Fi gure 17.25b shows
a sampl e of nonoxygen-fr ee copper after Hz anneal i ng. Note the smal l
i rregul ar grai ns wi th boundari es badl y pi tted and l i teral l y bl own apart
by the decomposi ti on of the CU20 by Hz. These bl asted grai n
boundari es cause the porosi ty i n nonoxygen-fr ee copper .
I Mol di ng presses can be obtai ned fr om Adol phe I . Buehl er Metal l urgi cal Appa
ratus, Wi cker Dri ve, Chi cago 1, I l l .
I
CHAPTER 18
MEASUREMENTS
BY M. A. HERLI N AND A. G. SMI TH
MEASUREMENTS OF THE RESONANT SYSTEM
BY i l f. A. HERLI N
Two cl asses of measurements are made on magnetrons, both of whi ch
are essenti al to the compl eti on of a practi cal desi gn and as a basi s for the
understandi ng of the operati on of these tubes.
Measurements per for med
on the nonoperati ng magnetrons and i nvol vi ng the use of si gnal generators
consti tute one cl ass and are her e r efer r ed to as col d measurements.
These are consi dered i n the fi rst part of thi s chapter. The second cl ass,
her e r efer r ed to as operati ng measurements, i s concer ned wi th tech-
ni ques for obtai ni ng data from operati ng magnetrons and i s the subject
of the second part of thi s chapter.
18.1. Test Equi pment Components.Col d-resonance experi ments are
per for med wi th a number of basi c pi eces of equi pment whi ch may be
combi ned i n a vari ety of ways to yi el d i nformati on. These pi eces are
(1) a sour ce of mi crowave power tunabl e over a wi de frequency range
and of moderate power output (of the or der of mi l l i watts), (2) a wave-
meter to measure the frequency of the power used, and (3) vari ous probes
and detector s desi gned for sampl i ng and i ndi cati ng the di stri buti on and
i ntensi ty of r-f ener gy i n the components under test.
Lfi crowaue Signal Generators.The most conveni ent mi crowave
si gnal generators are r efl ex kl ystrons. The power output i s suppl i ed
ei ther i nto a coaxi al l i ne or a wavegui de as desi red. Once the gener ator
i s set up, the onl y adjustments to be made are frequency and r efl ector
vol tage. The r efl ector vol tage i s a parti al control on the frequency
and can be used to tune the osci l l ator over a narrow frequency range by
el ectroni c sweepi ng. Speci al wi de-range cavi ti es are avai l abl e wher e
l mge mechani cal tuni ng ranges are needed, but i n general these cavi ti es
are i nconveni ent to operate. A comprehensi ve dkcussi on of these tubes
i s found i n Vol . 7, Radi ati on Laboratory Seri es.
Wavemeters.Wavel ength measurements are made wi th some form
of tunabl e resonant cavi ty i n whi ch the mechani cal moti on of the tuner
i s cal i brated i n terms of wavel ength or frequency. Two methods of
resonance i ndi cati on are avai l abl e. I n the absorpti on method, a si ngl e
698
SEC. 18.1] TEST EQUI PMENT COMPONENTS 699
coupl i ng l oop or other pr obe i s connected to the power source, and a dl p
i n the power output as seen on a meter i ndi cates resonance of the wave-
meter cavi ty. I n the transmi ssi on method, two coupl i ng l oops or other
types of pr obe are coupl ed i nto the cavi ty to form a fi l ter that transmi ts
power onl y at the resonant frequency of the wavemeter cavi ty, and thi s
power i s i ndi cated on a meter. A coaxi al wavemeter ari d hol l ow-cavi ty
Fm. 18, 1,Mi crowave wavemeters. (a) S-band; (b) X-band.
wavemeter are shown i n Fi g. 18.1.
A qual i tati ve i ndi cati on of power i s
obtai ned by means of a crystal detector connected to a mi croammeter.
A precauti on to be obser ved her e i s to provi de a d-c return path for
the crystal cur r ent i n addi ti on to the r-f connecti on to the power source.
Probes and Detectors.At the l onger wavel engths the coupl i ng l oop
i s most often empl oyed to sampl e power from a cavi ty. A typi cal
coupl i ng l oop i s shown i n Fi g. 183a. The threaded l ength of tubi ng
provi des a conveni ent mechani cal means of fasteni ng the l oop i nto the
metal wal l of the cavi ty, and a connector on the opposi te end provi des for
transmi ssi on of the power i nto a coaxi al l i ne. The coupl i hg l oop i s so
.
arranged i n the cavi ty that l i nes of magneti c fl ux thread the l oop.
Fi gure
18.3b shows two capaci ti ve probes.
1hcy are pl aced so that l i nes of the
el ectri c fi el d termi nate on the probe.
For short-wavel ength devi ces, such
as the X-band waver neter i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 18. l b, the coupl i ng i nto the
cry
Mete! (monitor)
\ /
Signal
Input
I f
~ coupling
loop
I
Absorption
wavemeter
o
bvlty
Meter
m
(resonance f
Coupling
indicator)
loop
Crystal
FIQ. 1S.Z.Schematic drawing of transmission method for resonant-wavelength measure-
ment.
FICJ.18.3a and b.Cavi ty coupl i ng l oop and probes,
wavegui de may be made through a smal l coupl i ng i ri s. I n sel ecti ng
the cor r ect, si ze of any of these coupl i ng devi ces, the pri me consi derati on
i s to reach the pr oper compromi se between keepi ng the perturbati on
smal l so that the operati ng condi ti ons are not changed appreci abl y
SEC. 18.1] TEST EQUI PMENT COMPONENTS
701
FI G. 18.4a. Wavegui de standi ng-wave detector,
Fm. 18.4b.K-band standi ng-wave detector.
702 MEASUREMENTS [SEC. 18.2
duri ng the measurement and coupl i ng out suffi ci ent power to gi ve a
posi ti ve readi ng.
A speci al i nstrument formeasuri ng the properti es of standi ng waves
i s the standi ng-wave detector . The type of detector shown i n Fi g.
18.4a i susedat wavel engths of about 3 cm. Al engthof thesl ottedsec-
ti on i s fi tted wi th a smal l capaci ti ve probe, and the power coupl ed out by
thi s pr obe i s then run i nto a crystal , spectrum anal yzer, or other devi ce for
detecti ng i t. The mounti ng of the pr obe i s movabl e, so that vari ati ons
i n the power maybe obser ved al ong the l ength of the sl ot. The one shown
i n Fi g. 18.4b i s for preci se measurements at wavel engths of about 1.25 cm
and has an i ri s pi ckup. Together wi th the i ndi cati ng devi ce, the stand-
i ng-wave detector provi des a measurement of the standi ng-wave rati o i n
the transmi ssi on l i ne and the posi ti on of the vol tage mi ni mum. These
two quanti ti es can then be used to cal cul ate the i mpedance termi nati ng
the l i ne, as wi l l be shown i n Sec. 18.3.
The spectrum anal yzer has pr oved to be a sati sfactory i ndi cator for
use wi th the standi ng-wave detector i n col d-measurement wor k wher e
hi gh standi ng-wave rati os are to be measured. The data are presented
on the scr een of a cathode-ray tube. The hori zontal sweep provi des a
basel i ne al ong whi ch the frequency i s vari ed several megacycl es, and the
verti cal readi ng shows power bei ng fed i nto the anal yzer at a gi ven
frequency. I nserted i n the i nput l i ne i s an attenuator cal i brated i n
deci bel s by whi ch the rel ati ve i ntensi ti es of two si gnal s maybe measured.
A wavemeter i s al so attached to the anal yzer connecti ons. For a mor e
detai l ed di scussi on of the equi pment menti oned above see Vol . 14,
Radi ati on Laboratory Seri es.
18.2. Cavi ty-wavel ength Measurements.Of parti cul ar concer n her e
i s the determi nati on of the resonant wavel engths of the resonant system
of a magnetron anode bl ock. Magnetron wor k, however , i nvol ves the
use of a vari ety of cavi ty resonators for vari ous appl i cati ons, and the
method her e descri bed may be appl i ed easi l y to these other cases.
Transmission Method.I n the transmi ssi on method of measuri ng
resonant wavel ength, two probes are pl aced i n the cavi ty at appropri ate
poi nts. I n the magnetron the magneti c fl ux threads through the backs
of the i ndi vi dual osci l l ators al ong the l ength of the tube, and coupl i ng
l oops may ther efor e be pl aced i n a pl ane perpendi cul ar to the axi s of
the magnetron, as i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 18.5. Because of the vari ous
confi gurati ons of el ectromagneti c fi el d encounter ed wi th the di fferent
resonant modes of the magnetron, i t i s desi rabl e to pl ace the l oops i n
osci l l ators that are di ametri cal l y opposi te. Thi s provi des coupl i ng
to most of the modes and parti cul arl y to the mor e i mportant ones. I f
al l modes are bei ng measured, i t i s wel l to run through the experi ment
wi th two cl i ffer ent posi ti ons of one coupl i ng l oop.
SEC. 182] CAVI TY- WAVELENGTH MEASUREMENTS 703
Resonance i s i ndi cated i n the same way as i t i s i n a transmi ssi on
wavemeter (see Sec. 18.1). One l oop feeda i nto a crystal and meter,
whi l e the other r ecei ves power from the si gnal gener ator .
When the
si gnal gener ator i s tuned to the resonant frequency of the cavi ty, power
i s transmi tted through to the crystal and produces a defl ecti on of the
meter.
I
F1o. 18.5.Anode bl ock showi ng coupl i ng l oops sui tabl e for resonance-wavel ength measure.
ment.
Connected to the i nput coupl i ng l oop are al so a moni tori ng crystal
and meter and an absorpti on waverneter. The moni tori ng meter gi ves a
conti nuous check on the si gnal generator output and al so shows the power
di p when the wavemeter i s used. Thi s arrangement i s shown di a-
grammati cal l y i n Fi g. 18.2.
The pr ocedur e i s to tune the si gnal generator through the desi red
frequency range whi l e watchi ng the moni tori ng meter and the resonance-
704
i ndi cati on meter. When
measured.
MEASUREMENTS
resonance i s reached,
[SEC. 18.2
the wavel ength i s
Absorption Method. -I n the absorpti on method, use i s made of a magi c
T or di recti onal coupl er and the el ectroni c frequency sweep avai l abl e
wi th vel oci ty-modul ated mi cro-
,., ... ... . .._.
1 .
wave osci l l ators. Thi s method
has the advantage of fast presen-
tati on of data and needs onl y a
si ngl e coupl i ng l oop or probe.
I n the expl anati on of the use
of the magi c T for thi s purpose,
r efer ence i s made to Fi g. 18.6.
Arms 1 and 2 are tapped r espec-
ti vel y i nto the E and H pl ane of a
wavegui de. From symmetry con-
si derati ons, i t may be seen that
a wave i nci dent from one of these
arms (for exampl e, 1) di vi des and
FI G. l S6.-Magi c T.
travel s i n both di recti ons down
the gui des (3 and 4) whi l e no
di sturbance i s transmi tted to Arm 2. However , i f the gui de i n one
di recti on i s not matched, a r efl ected wave wi l l return and part of i t wi l l
enter Arm 2. The arrangement of the equi pment i s shown i n Fi g.
187a. One end of the gui de i s termi nated i n a match, and the other
Cavity being studied
Adjustable
transformer Y OsclllOscOpe
tuning screw
Directional
,3) Magic T o
Cavity being
coupler studied
Signal
(1)
~: ~- E
Signal
(4j2) Crystal generator
Variable
generator
Crystal
transformer
Sweep
O Oscilloscope
voltage
Matched load Sweepvoltage
(a)
(b)
FIG. lS.7.Resonanceindicator setups. (a) Magic T; (b) directional coupler.
is connected to the magnetron or other resonant cavity to be studied.
A l arge si gnal i s then r efl ected from the cavi ty off-resonance; but when
resonance i s reached, some of the ener gy i s absorbed i n the cavi ty and
the si gnal i s reduced. I f the si gnal frequency i s swept i n synchroni sm
wi th the hori zontal sweep vol tage of an osci l l oscope whi l e the crystal
cur r ent detected i a Arm 2 i s appl i ed to the verti cal ampl i fi er, an absorp-
1
I
SEC. 18.3] MEASUREMENT OF STANDI NG WAVES 705
ti on di p wi l l be seen on the scr een as the frequency i s swept over a band
i ncl udi ng the resonant frequency.
A di recti onal coupl er may be used si mi l arl y. Refer ence to Fi gs.
18.7b and 18.8 shows that a wave i nci dent on the cavi ty di vi des at the
two si de openi ngs separated by a di stance equal to x,/4, and a smal l
Ag
-
T
-
Incident power
t
Match I
I
To crystal
FIG. 188.-Directioual coupler.
amount is sampled at each and passes into the side chamber.
There
the energy again divides at each opening, and half travels in each direc-
tion. The half going in the direction of the incident power adds and is
dissipated in the matched load; that in the opposite direction cancels so
that there is no crystal current. The opposite is true, however, for
the wave reflected from the cavity; no energy from this wave goes toward
the match, but a wave is transmitted to the crystal. The directional
coupler therefore behaves in the same way
as the magic T in this application, and
they may be used interchangeably.
The magic T or directional-coupler
setup may be used to measure standing-
:$(g:
wave ratio with the aid of a variable =
transformer, as wi l l be descri bed i n the
Fm. 189.-Reel ector sweepci r-
cui t. (A) To pl ate of gas di s-
next secti on.
charge sweep vol tage gener ator
A ci rcui t di agram showi ng typi cal con-
tube i n osci l l oscope. (B) To r e-
fl ector vol tage suppl y.
necti ons for sweepi ng the r efl ector vol tage
of the si gnal generator i s shown i n Fi g. 18.9. Adjustment of the r efl ector
vol tage moves the trace to the ri ght or l eft, and adjustment of the
magni tude of the sweep vol tage vari es the amount of sweep.
18.3. Measurement of Standi ng Waves.For col d measurements on
magnetrons, standi ng-wave techni que i s of great val ue. The useful ness
of thk techni que consi sts i n the fact that i t affords a method of measuri ng
i mpedances at mi crowave frequenci es wher e vol tmeters and ammeters are
out of the questi on. Use i s made of the fol l owi ng pr oper ty of the
transmi ssi on l i ne, namel y, that the termi nal i mpedance compl etel y
determi nes the standi ng-wave pattern i n the l i ne, whi ch i n turn i s
706 MEASUREMENTS [SEC. 18.3
characteri zed by two easi l y measured quanti ti es: the standi ng-wave rati o
and the posi ti on of the mi ni mum vol tage poi nt.
Transmi ssi on-l i ne theor y gi ves the rel ati onshi p between the two
quanti ti es speci fyi ng the compl ex i mpedance. and the two quanti ti es
speci fyi ng the character of the standi ng wave. These rel ati onshi ps are
avai l abl e i n conveni ent form as ci rcl e contour charts gi vi ng the trans-
formati on from mi ni mum posi ti on and standi ng-wave rati o to resi stance
and reactance or from resi stance and reactance to mi ni mum posi ti on and
standi ng-wave rati o.
The transformati on from standi ng-wave measurements to termi nal
i mpedance i s made wi th the ai d of the compl ex refl ecti on coeffi ci ent q.
Ordi nari l y the transmi ssi on l i ne propagates onl y one mode, so that the
fi el d i n the l i ne i s gi ven by the l i near superposi ti on of t~vo waves travel i ng
i n opposi te di recti ons. Thei r rel ati ve si ze and phase are such that the
vol tage-to-current rati o of the sums corresponds to the termi nal i mped-
ance. I f a vol tage wave i s gi ven by the expressi on
the correspondi ng cur r ent wave i s
wher e Vo is the ampl i tude of the i nci dent wave; @ = 27r/X0 = ti /c i s
the i magi nary part of the propagati on constant, whi ch i s purel y i magi nary
because the l i ne i s consi dered l ossl ess; z i s the di stance measured from
the poi nt wher e the i mpedance i s consi dered to be l ocated, and Zo i s
the characteri sti c i mpedance of the l i ne. The rati o V/ I , eval uated at
z = (), i s the termi nal i mpedance Z~; hence
z, l +q
z, z~=lq
wher e Z1 i s the so-cal l ed normal i zed termi nal i mpedance. Sol vi ng
for q,
211
*=22+1
(1)
The i mpedance at any poi nt i n the l i ne i s gi ven by the expressi on
(2)
1
I
Her e qe@ may be r egar ded as the refl ecti on coeffi ci ent of the l ength
x of l i ne termi nated i n the i mpedance zt. Ther e i s, then, a l -to-l cor -
r espondence between refl ecti on coeffi ci ent and i mpedance, and the
I
I
SEC. 18.3] MEASUREMENT OF STANDI NG WAVES 707
refl ecti on coeffi ci ent merel y changes i n angl e through the factor ejz@
wi th movement away from the l oad al ong the l i ne.
The compl ex transformati on i n Eq. (1) maybe pl otted on the compl ex
q-pl ane i n pol ar coordi nates.
The resul t i s known as the Smi th chart
on whi ch contours of constant resi stance and reactance are ci rcl es.
The standi ng-wave rati o, the measurement of whi ch i s descri bed
I
bel ow, i s defi ned as the rati o of the maxi mum to the mi ni mum vol tage
[
I
(or current) i n the l i ne. Al ong the l i ne the maxi mum vol tage wi l l occur
I at the poi nt wher e the r efl ected wave i s i n phase wi th the i nci dent wave,
and the mi ni mum vol tage occurs wher e the y are out of phase.
I
Thus
the standi ng-wave rati o p is gi ven i n terms of the magni tude of the
refl ecti on coeffi ci ent as
I
1 + M.
~=llql
(3)
Thus, the magni tude of the refl ecti on coeffi ci ent i s obtai ned from the
measurabl e standi ng-wave rati o.
The angl e of q i s obtai ned from the posi ti on of the standi ng wave i n
the l i ne. As the mi ni mum-vol tage posi ti on i s sharp, i t provi des the
most accurate measure of the posi ti on, or phase, of the standi ng wave.
The mi ni mum posi ti on occurs at the poi nt z i n the l i ne wher e the i mpeda-
nce i s real and mi ni mum. From Eq. (2) thi s wi l l occur when
@28z@fl =
1, wher e Oi s the angl e of the refl ecti on coeffi ci ent, or
I
e = n- 2px.h + 2nlr, (4)
wher e n i s an i nteger or zer o and x~. i s the mi ni mum posi ti on.
The dual rel ati ons gi vi ng y~, the normal i zed termi nal admi ttance, are
gi ven bv noti ng that when Z1= l /yl i s pl aced i n Eq. (4), then
(5)
Thus, a poi nt on an i mpedance chart r otated through i r radi ans yi el ds
the admi ttance poi nt. The above rel ati ons may then be used for admi t-
tances i f thi s substi tuti on i s made.
Standing-wave Measurement with Standing-wave Detector .The appa-
ratus necessary for standi ng-wave measurement consi sts of the fol l owi ng
pi eces of equi pment connected i n tandem: a si gnal gener ator , a paddi ng
attenuator, a standi ng-wave detector , and a termi nati ng l oad whose
properti es i t i s desi red to study. A wavemeter i s al so connected
somewher e between the si gnal gener ator and standi ng-wave detector
unl ess wavel ength measurements are made on the spectrum anal yzer.
From the standi ng-wave detector the si gnal i s fed through a fl exi bl e
coaxi al l i ne to the spectrum anal yzer. Two or thr ee tuni ng screws
i n the l i ne near the attenuator provi de a means of cl eari ng up bad opera-
708
MEASUREMENTS [f+Ec. 18.3
tionbychanging theload into which thesignal generator feeds. A stub
tuner in the cable leading from the probe to the spectrum analyzer may
be used to maxi mi ze the si gnal strength.
I n operati on, the travel i ng pr obe i s set at the poi nt wher e mi ni mum
si gnal i s shown by the pi p hei ght on the spectrum-anal yzer screen. The
scal e readi ng on the standi ng-wave detector i s then noted. The pr obe
i s then moved to the poi nt wher e maxi mum si gnal i s seen, and the
attenuator on the spectrum anal yzer i s turned unti l the pi p hei ght i s the
same as i t was on the mi ni mum readi ng. The standi ng-wave rati o i s
obtai ned from the two attenuator setti ngs. Thi s operati on i s usual l y
r epeated over the band of frequenci es of i nterest i n the parti cul ar meas-
urement, the frequency or wavel ength bei ng noted at each poi nt wi th
the ai d of the wavemeter attached to the spectrum-anal yzer connecti ons.
The spectrum-anal yzer attenuator may be cal i brated i f necessary
by compari ng i ts readi ng wi th the known vari ati on of fi el d i n a short-
ci rcui ted transmi ssi on l i ne and uti l i zi ng the fact that a si nusoi dal pattern
resul ts whi ch has mi ni ma separated by hal f a gui de wavel ength.
Standing-wave Measurement with Absorption Resonance I ndicator.
The magi c T or di recti onal coupl er arranged as a resonance i ndi cator
(Sec. 182) may al so be used to determi ne the SWVR at resonance.
I f the standi ng-wave rati o at resonance i s uni ty, the r efl ected wave from
the cavi ty wi l l be absent resul ti ng i n a zer o readi ng at resonance on the
trace. Quanti tati ve measurements of the standi ng-wave rati o at
resonance are possi bl e by i ntroduci ng a cal i brated transformer of vari abl e
transformati on rati o and vari abl e phase i nto the l i ne comi ng from the
magnetron. Such a transformer i s shown i n Fi g. 18.10. I t takes the
form of a tuni ng scr ew on a sl otted secti on mounted i n the same manner
as the travel i ng pr obe of the standi ng-wave detector descri bed earl i er.
The depth of the tuni ng scr ew i s read on the di al i ndi cator. Choke
joi nts on the scr ew and on the travel i ng secti on pr event power l osses
from contacts and from coupl i ng power out of the wavegui de i nto the
outsi de space. The scr ew i ntroduces a transformer acti on, the trans-
formati on constant bei ng the vol tage sr,andi ng-wave rati o or i ts reci procal
(dependi ng on the phase) \vhi ch woul d be setup by the scr ew i n a matched
l i ne. Thi s constant can be measured for vari ous readi ngs of the di al
i ndi cator by means of the standi ng-~vave-detector setup descri bed above
and i n Sec. 18.5. When used i n thi s way the transformer i s adjusted i n
phase and transformer constant unti l a match i s i ndi cated on the osci l l o-
scope trace. The val ue of the standi ng-wave rati o at resonance can
then be obtai ned from a previ ous cal i brati on of the di al i ndi cator.
Standi ng-wave rati os off-resonance al so may be measured
but the val ue at resonance i s usual l y of greatest i nterest.
Jt may be noted her e that the standi ng-wave rati o at
i n thi s way,
resonance i s
I
SEC. 183] MEASUREMENT OF STANDING WAVES 709
the onl y quanti ty needed to compute the ci rcui t effi ci ency of the ordi nary
resonant ci rcui t, and the absorpti on-resonance i ndi cator wi th the adjust-
abl e transformer thus provi des a rapi d method of measuri ng ci rcui t
effi ci ency.
Another appl i cati on of the standi ng-wave measurement descri bed
above i s to the prel oadi ng of l oop-coupl ed magnetrons.
The di ffi cul ty
of adjusti ng the l oad on a magnetron wi thi n cl ose tol erances i n producti on
Fm. 18.10.Adjustabl e transformer.
i s overcome by thi s procedure, and smal l -scal e l aboratory use i s al sr
hel pful . As wi l l be shown l ater i n the di scussi on of Q-measurements
the standi ng-wave rati o at resonance, whi ch may be measured rapi dl y
as descri bed above, i s si mpl y the rati o of the unl oaded Q to the external Q
of the cavi ty. I f the unl oaded Q can be control l ed wi thi n suffi ci entl y
cl ose tol erances, then the external Q may be moni tored di rectl y fr om the
resonance standi ng-wave rati o.
Adjustment to the cor r ect val ue i s
made easi l y wi th the conti nuous vi sual presentati on of data on the scr een
710 MEASUREMENTS
of the osci l l oscope. The unal tered unl oaded
[SEC. 18.4
Q of the cavi ty, whi ch in
practice ordinarily falls \vithin a 10 pcr cent scatter range, may then be
used as a standard load for comparison \vith the external load, or lossy
material may temporarily be introduced into the cavity in a controlled
way. If the unloaded Q i s reduced to the desired value of the external
Q, the vari abl e transformer on the i ndi cator setup maybe el i mi nated wi th
consi derabl e si mpl i fi cati on of the pr ocedur e.
18.4. Fi el d-pattern Measurements.Thc measurement of the fi el d
pattern of a rnagnctron-resonator systcm may bc conveni entl y accom-
pl i shed ~vi th the usc of a r otar y probe. Such pattern measurements
are useful for mode i denti fi cati on and for studi es of the effect of asym-
metri es i n a magnetron cm the fi cl tf pattmn seen by the el ectrons.
assembly Signal input
Probe
Detail of probe
assembly
FIG. 18.11 .l tutwy-probe assembl y.
rhe rotary probe consi sts of a smal l capaci ti ve probe mounted on a
cyl i nder that occupi es the space i n the magnetron normal l y fi l l ed by the
cathode. As the cyl i nder rotates, the vari ati on of the probe cur r ent
wi th angl e provi des a pi cture of the el ectri c-fi el d i ntensi ty at vari ous
angl es. The fi el d strength i s shown i n terms of a crystal cur r ent read on
an osci l l oscope Whose hori zontal -sweep vol tage i s synchroni zed Wi th
the rotati on of the probe. The arrangement i s shown schemati cal l y i n
Fi g. 18.11. I nterpretati on of the pattern shoul d take i nto account the
fact that the crystal cur r ent i s a functi on of the absol ute val ue of the fi el d
onl y. Therefore, i n the pattern of the ~-mode, the al ternate posi ti ve
and negati ve fi el ds appear as posi ti ve currents. I n Fi g. 18.12a i s shown
the actual fi el d pattern of an ei ght-osci l l ator magnetron osci l l ati ng i n the
u-mode, and i n Fi g. 18. 12b the correspondi ng cur r ent pattern seen on
the osci l l oscope i s gi ven. For thi s number of osci l l ators the ~-mode
1Thi s method was fi rst suggested to the Radi ati on Laboratory by the Westi ng-
house Research Laboratori es at Pi ttsburgh, Pa.
SEC. 18.4]
FI ELD-PA TTERN MEASUREMENTS
711
corresponds to n = 4, and the number of peaks i s seen to be equal to 2n.
Thi s rel ati onshi p hol ds for al l the modes.
A speci al phenomenon i s obser ved wi th l ongi tudi nal vari ati on of the
pr obe posi ti on i n strapped tubes. The pr esence of one strap near er to
the i nteracti on space than the other at the end of the tube causes the
fi el d of the al ternate metal ti ps to whi ch that strap i s attached to pr e-
domi nate. The actual fi el d i s then al tered as i n Fi g. 18. 12c, the cor -
respondi ng crystal cur r ent bei ng gi ven i n Fi g. 18. 12d. The degr ee
to whi ch the al ternate ti ps are rai sed or l ower ed for off-center posi ti ons
Fi el d
strength
crystal
current
(b) -Angl e
Field t n
strength
(c)
crystal +
current
(4
--Angl e
Fro. 18.12 .F,el d patterns and thei r premntati on by a rotary probe. (a) I deal fi el d
pattern; (b) osci l l oscope pattern correspondi ng to (a) ; (c) fi el d pattern di storted by strap;
(d) osci l l oscope pattern corresponding to (c).
of the pr obe i s an i ndi cati on of the degr ee of fi el d di storti on due to
strappi ng.
I t frequentl y occurs that two modes are so cl owl y spaced that they
are both exci ted at the same ti me.
The resul ti ng pattern i s then a
combhati on of the two patterns and may be di ffi cul t to i nterpret.
Detai l s of the equi pment are shown i n Fi g. 18.13. A vari abl e-speed
motor rotates the probe. The motor shoul d be run by di rect cur r ent so
that hum pi cked up from a-c fi el ds wi l l not decr ease the sensi ti vi ty of the
el ectri cal system. Attached to the pr obe shaft i s a smal l magnet whi ch
wi th each rotati on passes by a fi xed coi l on a yoke and thus i nduces a
synchroni zi ng si gnal whi ch i s connected to the external synchroni zati on
712
MEA S7J REJ ~ENTS [Sm. 184
post on the oscilloscope. The probe is removable so that various sizes
may be used according to the requirements of the problem. The crystal
is contained inside the probe barrel, and the current is taken off the top
of the probe by means of a brush. The platform to which the magnetron
is clamped is movable vertically so that longitudinal studies of the pattern
can be made.
The signal from the brush must be amplified about one hundred
times before it is strong enough to show on an oscilloscope of ordinary
sensitivity. The amplifier must be capable of good low-frequency
response, since slow rotational speeds are necessary to minimize brush
,.
FI G. 18.13.Rotary-probe setup.
noi se. A hi gh-frequency response of about 600 cps i s suffi ci ent to show
the i ndi vi dual peaks. Phase as wel l as ampl i tude di storti on i n the pass
band shoul d be l ow.
The magnetron may be exci ted by means of a si ngl e coupl i ng l oop
fed from a si gnal gener ator . I f the mode spaci ng i s ~vi de, a l arge l oop
may be used; but i f not, the overl ap of modes must be mi ni mi zed by
keepi ng the l oop smal l . Extremel y l arge l oops shoul d not be used
because they tend to dktor t the pattern. I f the si gnal strength i s too
smal l , i t i s frequentl y necessary to i nsert a doubl e-stub tuner at the
coupl i ng l oop so that maxi mum power may be coupl ed i nto the tube.
A vari ati on of the method of handl i ng the si gnal , devel oped at
Westi nghouse, makes use of a modul ated osci l l ator. The r-f si gnal
SEC. 18.5] MEASUREMENT OF Q 713
exci ti ng the magnetron i s modul ated wi th a square-wave modul ator of
fundamental frequency F, and the hi ghest frequency of the pattern under
study i s j. The si deband frequenci es are then F ~ j, and a bandpass
fi l ter contai ni ng these woul d provi de an envel ope pattern correspondi ng
to the l i ne pattern gi ven by the other arrangement and yet woul d el i mi -
nat e consi derabl e brush noi se.
18.6. Measurement of Q.The adjustment of the r-f l oad of the
magnetron i s based upon the measurement of Qs, as i s the determi nati on
of i nternal copper l osses through whi ch probl ems rel ati ng to ci rcui t
effi ci ency are sol ved. The usual defi ni ti on of Q i s adopted her e, that i s,
the rati o of the stor ed ener gy to the ener gy di ssi pated per radi an. I t
has been found conveni ent, however , to di vi de the di ssi pated ener gy i nto
two categori es: ener gy di ssi pated i n the external l oad and ener gy di s-
si pated as i nternal copper l osses of the resonant cavi ty. The Q account-
i ng for the for mer i s cal l ed the external Q and for the l atter the
unl oaded Q. I n addi ti on, r efer ence i s made to the Q accounti ng for
the enti re l oadi ng of the cavi ty, the l oaded Q. From the defi ni ti ons,
the fol l owi ng rel ati onshi p i s wri tten between these quanti ti es:
where Q i s the unl oaded Q, Q, i s the external Q, and QL i s the l oaded Q.
The probl em now i s to measure these quanti ti es.
The Lawson Method.An accepted pr ocedur e for measuri ng these
Qs i s the Lawson method. The detai l ed di scussi on of thi s pr ocedur e i s
i ntroduced by a bri ef r evi ew of the theor y.
Refer ence wi l l be made to a si mpl e paral l el -resonant ci rcui t, the
equi val ence of whi ch to the cavi ty near one of i ts resonant modes has
been justi fi ed both theoreti cal l y and experi mental l y for rather general
condi ti ons. I t has been shown (Sec. 18.3) that the i mpedance or admi t-
tance termi nati ng a transmi ssi on l i ne may be measured i n terms of the
posi ti on of the vol tage mi ni mum and the standi ng-wave rati o of the
wave i n the l i ne. I n or der to uti l i ze admi ttance measurements to
measure Q, use i s made of the facts that ener gy storage i n a resonant
ci rcui t i s proporti onal to the sl ope of the susceptance cur ve vs. frequency
and that the ener gy di ssi pated i s obtai ned from a knowl edge of the
conductance representi ng the copper l osses.
I n terms of the equi val ent ci rcui t, a vol tage ~e~-o can be appl i ed to
the termi nal s, wher e coo i s the resonant radi an frequency; that i s
(JO= I /cc. The ener gy stor ed at resonance i s constant throughout
the cycl e so that i t may be eval uated at the ti me when the vol tage i s
i nstantaneousl y maxi mum and the cur r ent through the i nductance i s
zer o. The ptor ed ener gy i s then 4C~*. But C i s gi ven by ~(dB/A)O,
I
714 MEASUREMENTS [SEC. 18.5
wher e the subscri pt denotes resonance. The stor ed ener gy i s ther efor e
()
7 -+;:.. (6)
I
I
I t i s possi bl e to show di rectl y from Maxwel l s equati ons that thi s
rel ati on hol ds for most mi crowave resonant cavi ti es near a si ngl e resonant
mode even though the l umped constants L and C l ose thei r di rect physi cal
si gni fi cance. The Q of the cavi ty i s then gi ven by the expressi on
wher e g and b are the normal i zed val ues of G and B. I f go represents
i nternal l osses, the separate Qs are
()
Qu =!!@
2go du 0;
()
QE=:O~
2 do o;
()
Q. G 0 b . (7)
2(1 + go) TO o
I t i s seen that measurement of the Qs resolves itself into measurement
of UO,gO, and (db/ da) o. The quanti ty o, i s easi l y determi ned as previ ousl y
descri bed; but as i t comes from the data requi red for the other two
qu~nti ti es, a separate determi nati on of the cavi ty resonant frequency
i s not necessary.
The measurement of the sl ope (db/ du)O is ordi nari l y made i n terms of
the hal f-power poi nts, the frequenci es at whi ch lbI = go + 1, or the
susceptance i s equal i n magni tude to the total conductance connected to
the cavi ty, i ncl udi ng the matched transmi ssi on l i ne. I f these radi an
frequenci es are denoted by u 1 and w,
(8)
si nce db = 2(1 + g) for oh = 1~1 uZI .
The probl em i s now to measure u, and w and go. These may be
obtai ned from curves of measured standi ng-wave rati o and mi ni mum
posi ti on pl otted agai nst wavel ength. Two cases ari se whi ch wi l l be
di scussed separatel y.
CASE 1, go < I .I f the l oadi ng due to i nternal l osses i s l ess than
the l oadi ng by the transmi ssi on l i ne, curves of the shape i ndi cated i n
Fi g. 18.14 resul t. Usi ng Eqs. (3) and (5), the standi ng-wave rati o at
resonance i s PO= l /gO, whereas at the hal f-power poi nts, wher e
I
I
I
I
SEC. 18.51 MEA SI I REMENT OF Q 715
Repl aci ng go by l /po,
W+ J(~~)2 + 1
,,,,= ~2_J~
(9a)
(9b)
Because Eq. (9) expresses p,, i n terms of POonl y, A, and AZmay be deter -
1
-
AZ Ao
h+
SWRat m.. in db
mined from the standing-wave ratio
curve alone, as is g. The process
is illustrated in Fig. 18.14. Equa-
tion (8) is plotted in Fig. 18.15.
Q. i s determi ned from Eq. (7), and
the other Qs are gi ven by
Q. = Q.(1 + Po),
Qz = !ik.
P
(l o)
Al though i t i s possi bl e to deter -
mi ne the Qs as descri bed above from
70, ,0.19
o~,,,,
O1O2O3O4O5OEJJ
Fm. l f3.14.-Q-curves for nonl oesy O- Fm. 18.l S.LawBon curves.
(J70< 1).
the standi ng-wave rati o cur ve al one, i t i s frequentl y mor e accurate to
make use of the
mi ni mum-posi ti on curve. The val ue of gOmust sti l l
be determi ned from the standi ng-wave rati o at resonance as before,
but the hal f-power wavel engths are taken from the mi ni mum-posi ti on
a.rve. Si nce the mi ni mum posi ti on i s determi ned by the angl e of the
716 MEA S(I I {EMENTS [SF,(,, 185
reflection coefficient, the problem is to compute the angular shift in
q or 0, from resonance to the half-po}vcr points. At resonance d = ()
because the load admittance VI = g, < 1. At the half-power points
whereb = *(1 + gO),
1+90
1 + 9! + tally +-go
O=AO=~tanl -
( )
l +go+z.
l g
. ~ tanl _
l go 4
From Eq. (4), Ad = 2@Ad = 4rr(Ad/X(,), where Ad is the minimum-
positirm shift from resonance to the half-power frequency. ~ubstit,uting
the value for Afl and PO = l/go,
(11)
The posi ti ve si gn corresponds to the hi gh-frequency si de of resonance
for by Eq. (6) the sl ope of the b against u-curve is positive (L being
positive), and the positive sign corresponds to positive b. It should be
noted that the minimum position shifts toward the load with increasing
frequency \vhen go < 1, a fact that ]vill be used to identify this case when
it is subsequently shown that the opposite is true \vhen go > 1.
Equation (11) is plotted along with p~,~against p, in lig. 18.15.
CASE 2, g, > l . Thi s case occurs l ess frequentl y, except at l ow
wavel engths wher e smal l cavi ty di mensi ons l ead to hi gh l osses, because
the condi ti on go > 1 i mpl i es that the i nternal l osses are gr eater than the
power del i vered to the matched transmi ssi on l i ne. The standi ng-wave
rati o at resonance i s PO= go i nstead of I /go as before. Equati on (9a)
was deri ved by putti ng yt = go ~ j(go + 1) i n Eq. (5), then putti ng
]qj i n Eq. (3). Thus, Eq. (9a) hol ds for the present case as wel l , and i t
wi l l be seen that repl aci ng go by I /go l eaves Eq. (9a) unchanged, and
ther efor e Eq. (9b) al so hol ds.
The mi ni mum-posi ti on shi ft i s sl i ghtl y mor e compl i cated. At
resonance, yl = go i s gr eater than 1, and hence from Eq. (4) 8 = r.
Then Eq. (11) subtracted from 7r/47r = ~, wi th po replaced by l/pO,
reverts to the same Eq. (11) with the sign reversed and ~ replaced by
i%. As the positive sign then corresponds to the low-frequency side of
resonance, this case is identified by a minimum-position shift away from
the load with increasing frequency. The Lawson curves for half-power
point standing-wave ratio and minimum-position shift therefore are
applicable to both cases. This latter case is shown in Fig. 18.16.
Equations (10) are altered hy replacing POby I/PO.
Referring to Fig. 18.14, the resonant wavelength may be taken from
either curve, as it is the center of symmetry in either case. When the
resonant properties are only approximated by the simple circuit, the
center of symmetry of the curves will be slightly off the resonant wave-
SEC. 18.5] MEASUREME,VT OF Q
717
length; in this case the resouant frequency is taken from the minimum-
position curve, for it is from this curve that the final Q readings are
taken. The minimum position at resonance, \vhich is the point in the
line where the cavity appears series-resonant and \vhich is a quarter
wavelength from the point at which the cavity appears parallel-resonant,
is obtained at the same time.
The effect of a length of line between the cavity and the measuring
device is shown in the Q curves of Fig. 18.14 in the slope of the minimum-
position curve off-resonance. This slope is clue to the changr in electrical
length of line caused by the change in wavelength across the cllrvc, Its
effect is to give the plot on oblique
coordinates not at right angles to
each other; that is, the curves arc
considered to be plotted on a verti-
cal minimum-position axis but on a
~vavelength axis differing from the
horizontal by an angle depending
on the length of line bet~vecm the
m e as u rin g equipment and the
cavity and on other frequency-
scnsitive elements in the lead. By
thus considering the plot, all the
corrections necessary to take this
effect into account in the measure-
ment are automatically made.
Ioints Ad above and beloi~ the
resonance minimum position arr
projected at this angle instead of
horizontally to the intersection Irith
the curve. Incidcntallyj the VJIUC,
of the slope taken from t hc cllrvc
provides an cxpcrimcntal check on

I
A* , A,
A-
the cqrrivalcrrt length of line to the Y 816Q-&~~sl), rOr lossy a
cavity, \vhich in many c!ascs may
not bc computed from the geometry bccausc of the complicated structure
of the line from the cavity,
The circuit efficiency, or the ratio of the power clclivered to a matched
line to the total po\~er dissipated in the matched line and cavity, is
given by the expression
~_ g(l_.
go+l
The ci rcui t effi ci ency i s seen to dcpcncl onl y on the standi ng-wave rati o
at rcsonancc.
718
MEASUREMENTS [SEC, 18.5
hother pi ece of i n formati on to be obtai ned from a Lawson-method
Q-measurement i s the l oss i ntroduced i nto the ci rcui t by the output l ead.
Thestandbg-wave rati o faroff-resonance i sameasure ofthi s l oss. The
effect of thk l oss on the ci rcui t effi ci ency may be deduced from the
approxi mate equi val ent ci rcui t of Fi g. 18.17. The val ue of the resi stor
representi ng the l ead l oss may be taken from the
/r~
standi ng-wave rati o off-resonance; thus, gl = p.
E
Ordi nari l y the l ei d l osses are so smal l that they
%
do not affect the Q-measurement; but i f the off-
Oo
resonance standi ng-wave rati o i s l ow enough (of
the or der of 20 db), a cor r ecti on must be made i n
the Q-measurement process. Thi s cor r ecti on i s
I
Magnetroncopper loss
not gi ven her e but may be deri ved from the ci rcui t
Fm. l S.17.Equi v% of Fi g. 18.17 i n those cases whi ch requi re i t.
l ent ci rcui t of cavi ty
An al ternati ve approxi mate way of handl i ng
wi th l ead 10.s.ws.
l ead l osses i s to consi der the transmi ssi on l i ne to
the cavi ty as havi ng a compl ex propagati on constant, the magni tude
of the l oss bei ng agai n gi ven by the off-resonant standi ng-wave
rati o.
Modifications oj the Lawson Method .One modi fi cati on appl i cabl e
onl y to tunabl e cavi ti es and usi ng the same equi pment as the previ ous
method has the advantage of bei ng fast at the cost of some l oss i n accu-
racy. The si gnal gener ator i s set to the wavel ength wher e i t i s desi red
to measure the Q. Wi th the cavi ty tuned far off-resonance, the standi ng-
wave detector i s set at a vol tage maxi mum poi nt; thi s may best be done
by readi ng the mi ni mum-vol tage poi nt and setti ng i t a quarter wave-
l ength from thi s poi nt (i n ei ther di recti on). The cavi ty i s then tuned
unti l the hei ght of the pi p on the spectrum-anal yzer scr een goes through
a mi ni mum, i ndi cati ng that the mi ni mum posi ti on has shi fted one
quarter wavel ength. The resonant frequency of the cavi ty i s then cl ose
to the si gnal -generator setti ng. Devi ati on from thi s condi ti on may be
due to vari ati on of si gnal -generator output wi th l oad vari ati on. The
si gnal gener ator i s next set as nearl y as possi bl e to resonance by measuri ng
the standi ng-wave rati o at a few poi nts on ei ther si de of the ori gi nal
wavel ength. The standi ng-wave detector i s then set to each of the hal f-
power mi ni mum posi ti ons (see Fi g. 18.15), and the si gnal gener ator
adjusted unti l the pi p goes through a mi ni mum at each poi nt. The
di fference i n wavel ength of these two poi nts may then be used to compute
the Qs as before. Al though thi s method i s fast, i t does not take i nto
account the vari ati on of el ectri cal l i ne l ength wi th wavel ength as descri bed
above, and the readi ngs are somewhat i naccurate. I t may be used for
obtai ni ng vari ati on i n Q over the tuni ng range of a tunabl e cavi ty wher e
the l arge number of Q val ues to be taken requi res a faster method of
SEC. 185] MEASUREMENT OF Q 719
getti ng the data. Her e the absol ute val ue of the Q may not be so i mpor-
tant as i ts vari ati on, and the absence of the l i ne-l ength cor r ecti on wi l l
then not be seri ous.
A second vari ati on of the Lawson method makes use of the standi ng-
wave-rati o measurement obtai ned wi th the absorpti on-resonance i ndi -
cator. As di scussed i n Sec. 182, the standi ng-wave rati o at resonance
may be measured wi th thi s devi ce, and from the Lawson cur ve of Fi g.
18.15 the standi ng-wave rati o at the hal f-power poi nts i s obtai ned. The
adjustabl e transformer scr ew (see Fi g. 18.7) i s set to thi s val ue, the two
wavel engths at whi ch bal ance of the bri dge i s obtai ned bei ng the hal f-
power wavel engths. Thi s process may be carri ed through rapi dl y.
From the resul t the Qs may be computed. The er r or s of thi s method
are l arge al so, the pri nci pal sour ce of er r or bei ng the i naccuracy wi th
whi ch the standi ng-wave rati o determi nes the frequency. The val ue
of the ci rcui t effi ci ency, because i t i s obtai ned onl y from the standi ng-wave
rati o at resonance, i s usual l y good, but the hal f-power wavel engths for
the measurement of the Qs cannot be measured so accuratel y and i ntro-
duce er r or s i n the Qs.
I t shoul d be noted that the two possi bl e types of resonance i l l ustrated
i n Fi gs. 18.14 and 18.16 may be di sti ngui shed by maki ng use of the fact
that the di recti on of the mi ni mum shi ft i s di fferent i n the two cases. I n
Case 1, gO< 1, the di p on the scr een of the osci l l oscope i ncreases i n
wavel ength when the adjustabl e transf or n5er scr ew i s moved toward
the T i f i t i s set near the cor r ect val ue for measuri ng the standi ng-wave
rati o at resonance. The opposi te i s tr ue of Case 2 (go > 1).
The Lawson method gi ves good resul ts unti l the Q fal l s bel ow about
50, when i t i s often desi rabl e to modi fy the method somewhat. Then
i t i s conveni ent to use the sl ope of the mi ni mum-posi ti on cur ve rather
than to l ocate the hal f-power poi nts; data need then be taken over onl y a
l arge enough range to get an accurate val ue of the sl ope. At the same
ti me the er r or due to l i ne l ength i s much mor e pronounced and must be
careful l y taken i nto account.
The external Q = Q, may be determi ned from the sl ope of the mi ni -
mum-posi ti on curve. The resul t depends, however , on the standi ng-
wave rati o at resonance, as does the mi ni mum shi ft to the hal f-power
poi nts. Thi s compl i cati on can be negl ected when QE i s l ow because, as
a resul t of the heavy l oadi ng, the standi ng-wave rati o at resonance i s
al ways ver y hi gh. The standi ng-wave rati o at resonance i s gi ven by
Qu/QE, and with reasonabl e Q. (typi cal val ue bei ng about 2000 at S-band
or 1000 at X-band) and l ow Qx ther e exists essenti al l y a lossless circuit.
For the lossless case then,
Qz =&~,
9
720
&fEASUREMENTS I SEC. 18.5
wher e m i s the mi ni mum posi ti on gi ven i n the same uni ts as k and A.
i s the gui de wavel ength. The l oaded Q i s essenti al ] y the same as the
external Q under the present condi ti ons. The unl oaded Q may be
obtai ned by measuri ng the standi ng-wave rati o at resonance and maki ng
use of Eq. (5). Often, however , the unl oaded Q i s not needed.
The cor r ecti on for el ectri cal -l i ne-l ength change wi th wavel ength
may be made most easi l y by regardi ng the l ength of l i ne as an addi ti onal
resonant ci rcui t whose external Q adds to that of the cavi ty bei ng meas-
ured. A di rect measurement i s possi bl e by pl aci ng a short ci rcui t across
the l i ne or wavegui de at the coupl i ng poi nt wi th the cavi ty. The sl ope
of the mi ni mum-posi ti on cur ve i s measured and i ts effecti ve Q~ computed
by Eq. (7) and subtracted from the Q, of the cavi ty pl us l i ne-l ength
combi nati on. When the geometr y of the coupl i ng i s si mpl e, the l i ne
Q. may be computed from the equati on
wher e n i s the equi val ent number of hal f wavel engths of l i ne. I n the
case of coaxi al l i ne, n becomes n, the physi cal number of hal f wavel engths,
\rhereas n = (k~/A)2n i n the wavegui de case.
Ther e exi sts an al ternati ve method of obtai ni ng the mi ni mum-posi ti on
cur ve vs. wavel ength that may be conveni ent under certai n condi ti ons.
I f a certai n \vavel ength i s bei ng fed i nto the cavi ty-pl us-l i ne system
and the mi ni mum posi ti on i s noted, a short ci rcui t may be pl aced at the
mi ni mum posi ti on to obtai n a system resonant at the wavel ength i n
questi on. Use i s made of thi s fact to get the mi ni mum-posi ti on cur ve
by measuri ng the resonant wavel ength of the system as a functi on of
pl unger moti on when a movabl e pl unger i s vari ed al ong the output l i ne.
The resonant-wavel ength measurement may be per for med by any of the
methods previ ousl y gi ven, and from the data obtai ned and from Eq. (7)
one may compute external Q l ooki ng i nto the output that i s bei ng tuned
by the pl unger.
The unl oaded Q may al so be found by a transmi ssi on method. Power
i s fed i nto one smal l l oop and detected i n another smal l l oop i n a cavi ty.
Transmi tted power as a functi on of wavel ength may be used to obtai n
the unl oaded Q di rectl y from the hal f-power poi nts. Refi nements of
thi s method for hi gh Qs may be made usi ng a sweep presentati on on
the scr een of an osci l l oscope so that the operati on may be done rapi dl y.
Location oj Resonant-circuit Terminals.The properties of a resonant
circuit are ordinarily given when the Qs and resonant wavelength are
specified, but in the case of a transmission line at microwave frequencies
there is an additional parameter that is needed to specify the resonant
circuit completely. This parameter is the location of the terminals of the
SEC. 18.5] MEASUREMENT OF Q 721
resonant ci rcui t i n the l i ne. Ther e i s an ambi gui ty whi ch may be r emoved
by speci fyi ng the character of the resonant ci rcui t as ei ther seri es or paral -
l el resonance. A seri es ci rcui t i s transformed i nto a paral l el ci rcui t by an
addi ti on of a quarter wavel ength of l i ne, and the subtracti on of a quarter
wavel ength of l i ne r ever ses the pr ocedur e. Refer ence wi l l be made i n
the fol l owi ng di scussi on to paral l el resonance wi th the understandi ng that
the terms may be changed to appl y to those of seri es resonance i f desi red.
The l ocati on of the resonant ci rcui t i n the l i ne i s accompl i shed to a
certai n degr ee of accuracy when the Lawson method of Q-measurement i s
empl oyed. The poi nt A of Fi gs. 1844 and 18.16 i s the poi nt i n the l i ne
wher e the ci rcui t i s seri es resonant, and ther efor e the paral l el -resonance
point is one quarter wavelength from
this point in either direction.
For some purposes it is necessary
to measure the position of the termi-
nals very accurately. A method is
0C2
described below in which the location
t----l
of this point may be obtained as a cor-
FIG. 18.18.Tw0 resor,ant circuits
rection to a previous determination.
connected by transmissionline.
The method was first developed for
attaching a stabilizing cavity to a
<
c, 1
<
c, 1
& = ,
L, Yo
!/ .2=
L, Yo
magnetron i n the output l i ne wher e
the di stance between the resonant ci rcui ts had to be ver y cl osel y an
i ntegral number of hal f wavel engths.
I n Fi g. 18.18 are shown two paral l el -resonant ci rcui ts connected by a
l ength of transmi ssi on l i ne. The two resonant ci rcui ts are taken to be
of the same resonant wavel ength ho. Refer ence to other wavel engths
wi l l be made i n terms of thei r per centage di fference from ko, or by the
relation
The results of solving
resonances, are
*= Aho
A,
the ci rcui t of Fi g. 18.18 for i ts modes, or
wher e the subscri pts a and b r efer to the l ong- and short-wavel ength
modes respecti vel y, 1 i s the physi cal l ength of transmi ssi on l i ne that i s
to be made equi val ent to an i ntegral number of el ectri cal hal f wavel engths
at the resonant wavel ength of the paral l el -resonant ci rcui ts after the
cor r ecti on Al i s made, AQi s the gui de wavel ength i f the transmi ssi on
722
MEASUREMENTS [SEC. 185
l i ne i s wavegui de or the space wavel ength i n a coaxi al l i ne, and y: i s the
characteri sti c seri es admi tt ante for y.1 and v,Z; that i s z: = z, 1 + z,Z. The
quanti ti es Y.I and Y.Zare numeri cal l y equal to the correspondi ng external
Qs. The resonance whose wavel ength i s ver y near to A, has been
omi tted as uni mportant i n the present di scussi on.
Equati ons (12) and (13) form the basi s of measuri ng the l i ne-l ength
er r or Al ; and AObei ng known at the poi nt wher e the cor r ecti on i s made,
al l that i s requi red for A1 i s a knowl edge of n i n Eq. (12). The val ue
of Al /A@n from Eq. (12) i s substi tuted
i n Eq. (13) al ong wi th the val ue of u:,
A
whi ch may be obtai ned from Q-meas-
urements, and the equati on sol ved for
n. Thi s val ue put back i n Eq. (12)
gi ves the val ue of Al .
x
The above equati ons have been
devel oped on the basi s of two resonant
ci rcui ts. One of these maybe omi tted
FI G. 18.19.Resonantci rcui t and T
from the equati ons si mpl y by maki ng
connectedby transmi ssi onl i ne.
V: equal to y., the normal i zed charac-
teri sti c admi ttance of the remai ni ng ci rcui t. Use of both forms of the
equati ons wi l l be made.
For the measurement of b. and &,, two cases wi l l be di scussed, one i n
whi ch ther e are two resonant ci rcui ts or cavi ti es separated by a l ength of
l i ne (Fi g. 18. 18) and the other i n whi ch ther e i s one resonant ci rcui t
wi th a l ength of l i ne termi nated i n a T as shown i n Fi g. 18.19. The fi rst
step i n ei ther case i s setti ng up the fi rst approxi mati on to the cor r ect
l ength of l i ne. The Qs of the two cavi ti es or of the one cavi ty (as the
case may be) are measured by the Lawson method, gi vi ng the external Q
and the mi ni mum posi ti on at resonance. I n the two-cavi ty system, the
two ci rcui ts are connected so that thei r mi ni mum posi ti ons at resonance
occur at the same poi nt i n the l i ne. I n the T system, the T i s pl aced so
that a paral l el connecti on of the thr ee arms i s made at a quarter wave-
l ength from the mi ni mum posi ti on at resonance or so that a seri es con-
necti on i s made at the mi ni mum posi ti on at resonance. Wi thi n the
accuracy of the Q-run data, then, the connecti ng l i ne wi l l be of the cor r ect
l ength. Then the mode wavel engths are measured, and from these the
cor r ecti on to the tentati ve l i ne l ength set by the Q-run data i s computed.
I n the two-cavi ty case, ther e i s usual l y a T of some sort for coupl i ng
the system to a l oad. I f not, a pr obe may be i nstal l ed for the purpose
of measuri ng the wavel engths of resonance. The mode wavel engths are
measured di rectl y by any of the means previ ousl y descri bed; the data
put i nto the equati ons gi ven above; and the cor r ecti on to the l i ne l ength
computed. The l i ne l ength i s the total separati on of the cavi ti es.
SEC. 186] THE STABI LI ZATI ON FACFOR 723
A vari ati on of the two-cavi ty system i s one i n whi ch one cavi ty i s
repl aced by a short ci rcui t.
I t wi l l be noted that a short ci rcui t i s a
resonant ci rcui t i n whi ch y. = cc.
I n the T case, use i s made of a speci al techni que for determi ni ng the
mode wavel engths. Fi gure 18.19 shows the T connected to the l ength
of l i ne termi nated i n the resonant ci rcui t. A vari abl e reactance i s
connected to one pai r of termi nal s.
The resonances seen l ooki ng i n the
termi nal s A wi l l be the resonances of the system of the resonant ci rcui t,
the l i ne l ength, and the vari abl e reactance. The resonance of i mportance
her e i s the one correspondi ng to a short ci rcui t at the T termi nal s. Si nce
for thi s condi ti on the system i s short-ci rcui ted from the termi nal s A,
the resonance wi l l not be vi si bl e on the resonance i ndi cator. As the
reactance i s vari ed about thi s poi nt, the resonance di p on the i ndi cator
wi l l progress as shown i n Fi g. 18.20, a deep resonance di p appeari ng fi rst,
becomi ng smal l er, di sappeari ng compl etel y, and then reappeari ng, whi l e
the wavel ength of the di p changes conti nuousl y. The di sappearance or
f-k flJAfl_
FIG. l S,20.i Measurement of wavel ength by nul l method,
null ]vavelength is then the mode wavelength to be measured. There
will be two such modes: one bel ow the cavi ty frequency and one above.
The wavel ength measurement may be made ver y preci sel y because the
i ndi cati on i s sharp; i t i s thus possi bl e to obtai n great accuracy i n the
l i ne-l ength er r or measurement.
The exact nature of the vari abl e reactance depends on the i ndi vi dual
probl em. A pl unger i n wavegui de i n one of the T arms i s sui tabl e.
Furthermore, another cavi ty may be used, the vari ati on i n reactance
bei ng accompl i shed by tuni ng the cavi ty. The two methods of getti ng
mode wavel engths descri bed her e may be combi ned. Two cavi ti es
connected by a l ength of l i ne and tapped i nto by means of a T may be
adjusted for cor r ect l i ne l engths by measuri ng the over-al l cor r ecti on as
i n the fi rst case and the cavi ty -to-T cor r ecti on by the second method.
The cor r ect rel ati onshi p between the two cavi ti es and the T may then be
easi l y adjusted.
18.6. The Stabi l i zati on Factor.The concept of stabi l i zati on was
devel oped as the resul t of an effor t to provi de addi ti onal r-f ener gy storage
i n the resonant system of the magnetron for the purpose of stabi l i zi ng
i ts operati ng frequency. Desi gn of stabi l i zi ng equi pment i s di scussed i n
Chap. 16. The measurement of the degr ee of stabi l i zati on by col d-
724 MEASUREMENTS [SEC. 18.6
measurement techniques is described here, and the results extended to
other uses.
The concept of stabilization may be used wherever there exists a
resonant system that may be divided into parts for convenience in
analysis. Stabilization by means of an external cavity is a problem of
this nature. Themagnetron contains a resonant system of its own, and
the addition of another resonant cavity to the entire resonant system
simply adds to the r-f energy storage. The stabilization factor is defined
as the ratio of the total r-f energy stored in the entire system to the
energy stored in the part of the system used as a basis for reference.
Thus, the stabilization factor of the stabilized magnetron system is
the ratio of the total energy stored to the energy stored in the magnetron
alone. This definition will now be related to practical methods of
measurement.
The measurement of stabilization factor rests on the same basis as
the measurement of Q; that is, the energy storage in a resonant system
is proportional to the rate of change of reactance \vith respect to fre-
quency in a series-resonant system (a system in which resonance is
defined as zero susceptance). Since reference toa specific energy level
which depends on driving current or voltage is to be avoided, a ratio of
energies is taken as in the case of the Q.
A description is first given of a method for measuring stabilization
factors that makes use of the Q-measurement methods already developed.
Stabilization may be measured through the medium of Q-measurement in
at least two different ways. One of these is based directly on the defini-
tion of stabilization. If the external Q of a system is measured looking
into a certain output ]vhere the measurement is made, a value is obtained
that is proportional to the energy stored in the system. If all but the
part of the system to which the stabilization factor is referred is shunted
out of the system and the external Q measured again, the stabilization
factor ]vill be the ratio of the first to the second Q taken. In shunting
out the remainder of the resonant system the fields at the division surface
must be replaced by identical fields that are not frequency sensitive, or in
other words that are not associated ]vith energy storage. It is apparent
that this process may be very difficult, and for this reason it can usually
be done only when the division surface is a surface of zero electric field.
Then it is necessary only to replace this surface with a metal surface,
thus providing a short circuit. For example, a cavity that is iris-coupled
to a magnetron makes up a stabilizing system \vhose stabilization factor
is the ratio of the external Q looking into the regular output under normal
conditions to the external Q looking in the same \vay but \vith the iris
filled with a \vedge of copper. It is necessary for the field configuration
to be kept the same for the two Q-measurements so that the external
SEC. 186] THE STABILIZATION FACTOR 725
coupl i ng wi l l not be changed. I f the coupl i ng wer e di fferent i n the two
cases, the proporti onal i ty factor of the ener gy storage woul d change and
the resul t woul d be i n er r or .
The second method maki ng use of Q-measurements may be used
when the coupl i ng between the cavi ti es i s made i n standard transmi ssi on
l i ne. Then the external Qs l ooki ng i nto each cavi ty separatel y may be
measured, the stabi l i zati on fact or bei ng 1 pl us the rati o of the stabi l i zi ng
cavi ty Q to the magnetron Q, usi ng the stabi l i zed magnetron case as an
exampl e.
A thi rd method of measuri ng stabi l i zati on factor makes use of rel ati ve
tuni ng rates. A tunabl e cavi ty, when stabi l i zed, tunes l ess for a gi ven
moti on of the tuner; that i s, as i mpl i ed by the term stabi l i zati on,
the frequency constancy i s i n- ,
creased. T h e quanti tati ve as- +
pects of thi s behavi or are deri ved
from Fi g. 18.21, whi ch shows two
curves of reactance vs. radi an fr e-
quency, one for each ci rcui t. ~
Cur ve A i s assumed to be the reac- s
tance cur ve of the tunabl e sta- $0
bi l i zi ng cavi ty, and B that of the ~
reference cavity. Resonance Thesedistances
exi sts wher e the sum of the curves
;
areequal
i s zer o. When the two curves _
/
both pass through zer o reactance
at the same poi nt, thei r resonant
FI G.1S,21.Eff ect of ~u=e stabi l i zi ng
frequenci es are i denti cal and equal
cavi ty.
to m. Shi fti ng the frequency of A to u,, correspondi ng to the cur ve A,
resul ts i n maki ng the resonant frequency of the combi nati on o;. I f A.u
represents col UOand Aw represents d UO, it may be deri ved from
the geometr y of Fi g. 1821 that
(14)
Here, S~,B i s the stabi l i zati on factor of A wi th r espect to B (B i s the
r efer ence cavi ty) and A TU/AAG.Iis the per centage tuni ng rate, the factor
by whi ch the tuni ng rate of the stabi l i zi ng cavi ty i s r educed by usi ng
i t for stabi l i zati on. The probl em now becomes the measurement of the
per centage tuni ng rate. Thi s measurement may be made easi l y by means
of the usual wavel ength-measurement methods, the tuni ng rates bei ng
726 il{EhSUREiI{ENTS [SEC.187
made on the enti re system and on the stabi l i zi ng cavi ty al one wi th the
r efer ence cavi ty bl ocked off.
I f i t i s mor e con~reni cnt, to tune the r efer ence covi ty, the data may be
changed to the desi red form by means of the rel ati onshi p
S.4,B=1+ 1
SI ,,A
S.,.4 1 = S,. 1
(15)
The stabilization factor, then, may be measured by means of Q-meas-
urements or by relative t~ming rates. In practice, Q-measurements
\vith and Ivithout stabilizing c:i~.ity are more accurate for high-stabiliza-
ti on factors, rel ati ve tuni nrz rates for l ow-stabi l i zati on factors, and
..
independent Q-measurements in the connecting line for either. Ho~~~ever,
a high-stabilization case may bc changed into a low-stabilization case
by rerersal of the sense of stabilization; that is, a cavity stabilizing a
magnetron ~vith a high-stabilization factor is itself stabilized by the
magnetron ~vith a lolv-stabilization factor. This fact is shown by
Eq. (15).
The concept of stabi l i zati on may be used for other purposes, such as
the measurement of ~J /C ratio of a magnetron osci l l ator. Thi s probl em
turns out to be that of measuri ng ei ther L or C, because the other may be
computed from the knov+ledge of the resonant frequency of the cavity.
The problem of determining the value of (17as seen by the electrons
in a magnetron will be considered.
It i s assumed that a hol e-and-sl ot
magnetron i s bei ng measured; the vane magnetron i s mor e di ffi cul t to
measure, but the same method may be used. I n the regi on of the sl ot
the capaci tance may be computed from the usual formul a for a paral l el -
plate condenser. It is then recognized that the equivalent capacitance
of the cavity is greater than that due to fri ngi ng fi el ds and di spl acement
currents i n the i nducti ve regi on of the osci l l ator. The probl em then
becomes one of measuri ng the stabi l i zati on factor of the extra equi val ent
capaci tance wi th r espect to the computed capaci tance. (Ener gy storage
i n a paral l el -resonant ci rcui t i s proporti onal to capaci ty. ) Thi s <s done
by i nserti ng a sl ab of nonconducti ng materi al of known di el ectri c constant
i nto the space whose capaci tance may be computed and noti ng the shi ft
i n resonant frequency. The shi ft to be expected i f the total capaci tance
wer e l umped i nto thi s space may be computed from the di el ectri c con-
stant, and thi s val ue may be compared wi th the experi mental val ue,
the stabi l i zati on factor bei ng computed from Eq. (14). The effecti ve
capacitance may then be computed by multiplying the computed capacity
by the measured stabilization factor.
18.7. Magnetron-mode Identification.-Much of the technique of
mode i denti fi cati on has been dk.cussed al ready i n connecti on wi th the
descri pti on of the r otar y probe; a few remarks about the use of the
SEC. 187] MAG.VElRON-MODE I DEN TI FI CA TI O,N 727
r otar y pr obe are gi ven her e i n addi ti on to two el ementary methods of
mode i denti fi cati on. The el ectromagneti c-fi el d confi gurati on for the
vari ous modes i s assumed to be known (see Sees. 14, 2.9, and 3.2).
The use of a hand-operated r otar y pr obe of the ki nd descri bed i n
Sec. 18.4 i s appropri ate when the amount of data to be taken does not
justi fy the use of the mor e expensi ve motor-dri ven devi ce. The same
data may be taken poi nt by poi nt wi th the ai d of thi s si mpl e equi pment.
The pr obe i tsel f shoul d be constructed i n about the same way as the
motor-dri ven one, but i t i s not necessary to provi de brush contact; a
wi r e connected di rectl y to the crystal output may be run to the meter.
Thi s pr obe i s mounted i n a ri gi d frame so that i t may be r otated by hand,
a poi nter i ndi cati ng the angl e agai nst whi ch the meter readi ngs are
pl otted.
Mode i denti fi cati on i s strai ghtforward i n the l i ght of the di scussi on
i n Sec. 18.4. The modes encounter ed i n a symmetri cal magnetron arc
easi l y recogni zabl e, the r-mode i n parti cul ar bei ng nearl y al ways sym-
metri cal . A magnetron empl oyi ng strap breaks often presents a confus-
i ng pi cture on the l ower modes, but the patterns obser ved on the scr een
can usual l y be i nterpreted. Long anodes shoul d be searched for l ongi -
tudi nal modes. These appear wi th the same patterns as the standard
modes, but they vary i n i ntensi ty wi th l ongi tudi nal vari ati on of the
pr obe posi ti on, the most common one becomi ng zer o at the center of the
anode.
The i denti fi cati on of the modes can be made from wavel ength meas-
urements i f the spectrum of the magnetron i s known. For exampl e,
a strapped magnetron has modes whose resonant wavel engths decr ease
wi th decreasi ng mode number, and the wavel engths of the modes pl otted
agai nst number are poi nts through whi ch a smooth cur ve may be drawn.
The seri es of wavel engths may then be measured and the vari ous modes
sel ected on thi s basi s wi thout the added compl i cati on of the pr obe meas-
urements. A ver y si mpl e test may then be made to veri fy these resul ts.
Thi s test consi sts of i nserti ng a screwdri ver, penci l , or other si mi l a-
object i nto each osci l l ator whi l e the magnetron i s exci ted at one of i ts
modes and noti ng the detuni ng effect. On the r-mode the detuni ng effect
i s the same for al l osci l l ators. On the other modes the detuni ng effect
vari es accordi ng to the ener gy stor ed i n each osci l l ator. Ther e wi l l be
()
two osci l l ators i n whi ch ther e wi l l be no detuni ng for the ~ 1 -mode,
wher e N i s the number of osci l l ators (ordi nari l y an even number); four
()
for the ~ 2 -mode, provi ded N/4 i s an i nteger; and so forth.
The greatest use of the r otar y pr obe i s i n the i nvesti gati on of fi el d
i ntensi ti es i n new types of magnetrons or other si mi l ar devi ces.
728
MEASUREMENTS [SEC. 188
18.8. Cathode-l ead Loss.I t i s frequentl y necessary i n magnetron
desi gn to i nstal l chokes i n the cathode l eads to pr event r-f l eakage and
radi ati on whi ch woul d decr ease the effi ci ency of the devi ce. The fi rst
probl em i n thi s connecti on i s to determi ne whether or not such l eakage
i s present to an undesi rabl e degr ee. Leakage can be detected on the
spectrum anal yzer duri ng a standard Q-measurement. The si gnal
gener ator i s tuned to the resonant wavel ength of the magnetron, as
evi denced by the mi ni mum standi ng-wave rati o. Then the movement
of any conducti ng materi al i n the nei ghborhood of cathode l eads that
coupl e out power wi l l be r efl ected i n a vari ati on of the si ze of the si gnal
seen on the spectrum anal yzer. Touchi ng the l eads wi th the fi ngers i s a
ver y sensi ti ve test for l eakage. The degr ee of coupl i ng maybe esti mated
from the changes i n the standi ng-wave rati o pr oduced by pl aci ng refl ect-
i ng objects near the cathode l eads.
A mor e conveni ent method of detecti ng cathode-l ead l eakage makes
use of the magi c T or di recti onal -coupl er resonance i ndi cator. The
detuni ng effect of vari ati on i n external condi ti ons i s easi l y obser ved
because the data are presented over a band of frequenci es and the ver y
conveni ent form i n whi ch the data are presented al l ows the l eakage check
to be per for med qui ckl y.
The usual r emedy for cathode-l ead r-f l eakage i s a quarter-wave
coaxi al -l i ne choke sol dered i n each l ead that comes out of the magnetron.
I t i s possi bl e, however , that a l ead resonance may be set up i f the pl ace-
ment of thi s choke i s acci dental l y
1~
i n the appropri ate posi ti on. Be-
cause thi s resonance i s usual l y
Sliding contact
l ossy i n character, the unl oaded
Wi reto move
Q of the magnetron i s affected
choke from
the outside
adversel y wi th correspondi ng de-
1IG. l S.22.Movabl e cathode choke.
crease i n the ci rcui t effi ci ency.
Furthermore, there may be a spl i t
i n the mode spectrum so that the operati on of the magnetron i s errati c.
There ari ses, therefore, the speci al probl em to be attacked by col d-
measurement methods i n l ocati ng the cathode choke so that thi s r eso-
nance i s avoi ded.
The 2J42 magnetron i s used for an exampl e. Thi s tube has an end-
mount cathode so that there i s a si ngl e cathode l ead comi ng out of the
pol e pi ece on one si de. The probl em to be sol ved i s the l ocati on of
the pl aces where the choke shoul d not be pl aced. Fi gure 18.22 shows the
movabl e cathode choke that was made especi al l y for thi s experi ment.
As there i s no cur r ent fl ow at the mouth of the quarter-wave choke,
the fi xed choke may be repl aced by the movabl e one wi th practi cal l y no
change i n the operati ng condi ti ons. The sl i di ng movement thus pr o-
SEC. 189] TUBE-MODEL TECH,VI Q (5ES 729
6
vi al ed makes possi bl e a conti nuous moti on whose effect may be obser ved
conti nuousl y on the scr een of a resonance i ndi cator. Fi gure 1823
shows a pl ot of the resul ts obser ved on
the magi c T i ndi cator.
The :athode-choke movement z i s
pl otted hori zontal l y, and the effect on
the resonant ci rcui t i s pl otted verti cal l y.
The l atter i s measured by the hei ght of
the mi ni mum poi nt of the tr ace seen ~
on the screen. The coupl i ng l oop l oads
the magnetron so heavi l y that the
l l r
standi ng-wave rati o at resonance i s
hi gh. As the l oss due to the cathode-
Undesi rabl e
choke position
choke resonance enters a resonance
regi on, the SWVR drops. The cath- 2.0
3.0 4.0
ode-choke experi ment may be general -
x in cm
i zed to i ncl ude a wi de vari ety of
FI G. 1823.-Effect of cathode-choke
posi ti onon SWR.
experi ments i n i nserti on l oss.
18.9. Tube-model Techni ques.An anode bl ock that i s si mi l ar to
but not i denti cal wi th a pr oposed desi gn and i s constructed especi al l y
for the purpose of col d-testi ng i s cal l ed a tube model . Model s have
pr oved to be extr emel y useful for the i nvesti gati on of the resonant pr oper -
ti es of a magnetron under devel opment. Thei r pri nci pal advantage i s
that they are easi er to construct than actual magnetrons and gi ve a great
deal of i nformati on on whi ch the desi gn of an actual magnetron may
be based. Model s may be made for any frequency wher e the condi ti ons
of constructi on and testi ng are most advantageous, because wavel ength
data scal e rel i abl y as the fi rst power of the geometri cal si ze. Thus a
pr oposed magnetron that requi res speci al constructi on techni ques to
be wor ked out befor e i t can be constructed may have i ts properti es
i nvesti gated by means of a model whi ch can easi l y be bui l t at a l onger
wavel ength. The resonances can be l ocated; mode separati on and
patterns noted; and the data then scal ed to appl y to a magnetron at the
desired frequency. Unloaded Q may also be scaled because for any given
shape of cavity it is proportional to the square root of the wavelength.
In selecting the wavelength at which to construct a model, the availa-
bility of good test equipment is a real consideration. Of importance are
signal generators with good power outputs and wide tuning range, spec-
trum analyzers, calibrated attenuators, and slotted sections. As an
illustration, most models at the Radiation Laboratory were constructed
largely at 10-cm wavelength because of the general superiority of equip-
ment at this wavelength.
Model tubes can be modified as a result of the cold resonance obtained,
730 MEASUREMENTS [SEC. 18.9
and for thi s purpose the model may be constructed of brass and bol ted
together to faci l i tate changes i nform. Wavel ength and mode data can
be obtai ned i n thi s way; but i f unl oaded Q data are to be taken, i t i s
necessary to hard-sol der the model and construct i t from the fi nal
materi al . Thi s added expense shoul d not be i ncurred unti l such thi ngs
as resonant wavel ength are determi ned and found to be sati sfactory.
A typi cal pr ocedur e for the desi gn of a magnetron i s fi rst to make a model
of brass wi th vari ous parts bol ted or soft-sol dered together . The si ze of
certai n parts such as the straps and vanes i s vari ed, and the wavel ength
data taken for each vari ati on. The wavel ength-vs.-vari ati on cur ve
then provi des the basi s for the sel ecti on of the cor r ect di mensi ons. Other
quanti ti es, of course, such as stabi l i zati on factor, may be adjusted as
wel l . When the fi nal di mensi ons are sel ected, a copper model may be
constructed for the purpose of measuri ng the un!oaded Q.
OPERATI NG MEASUREMENTS
BY A. G. SMITH
Accurate quanti tati ve measurements of the operati ng condi ti ons
of a magnetron are useful as ai ds to desi gn, as producti on control s, and
Standing wave
indicator
I
Thermistor
bridge
Slotted Water or
section
i+
sand load
8
I
Voltage meter
A
Power meter
Current meter
Wave meter or
spectrum analyzer
Pulser
or C.W.
supply
I
FI G. l S.24.Arrangement of test bench components.
as gui des to i ntel l i gent operati on. I n addi ti on, a magnetron i s frequentl y
I
empl oyed i n the testi ng of other mi crowave components, and i n thi s
appl i cati on a knowl edge of i ts output power , frequency, and stabi l i ty i s
I
essenti al .
Al though the pr oper use of scal i ng pri nci pl es and col d-measurement
I
techni ques may save needl ess effor t i n the desi gni ng of a magnetron, an
operati ng model must fi nal l y be constructed and tested i n or der to 1
determi ne quanti ti es that can at present be predi cted onl y approxi matel y.
The quanti ti es to be determi ned are the range of currents and vol tages
I
?
SEC. 189] TUBE-MODE1> TECHNI QUES 731
over which operation is stable, the electronic efficiency, tuning range,
cathode-heating effects,
electronic leakage current, and the powcr-
handling capabilities of the input and output circuits.
FIG. l S.25.Low-power coaxi aI -l i ne magnetron test bench.
FI G. 18.26.Hi gh-power wavegui de magnetron test bench.
Fi gure 18.24 shows i n schemati c form the components necessary for
testi ng an operati ng magnetron and thei r arrangement on a typi cal
test bench. Ei ther coaxi al l i ne or wavegui de components can be used;
and al though the constructi on of some of the components di ffers for c-w
and pul sed testi ng, thei r arrangement remai ns essenti al l y as shown.
Fi gures 18.25 and 18.26 arc photographs of typi cal coaxi al -l i ne and
wavcgui de test benches, comparabl e to the schemati c vi ew i n Fi g. 18.24.
The components sho]vn i n Fi g. 18.2! provi de a rather compl ete set
of data on operati ng magnetrons, but not i ncl uded arc certai n pi eces of
equi pment useful i n speci al cases, such as V-I osci l l oscopes (see Chap. 8)
or r-f vi ewers (see Vol . 11, Radi ati on l aboratory Seri es).
18.10. Measuri ng Techni ques. Pcrjormance Charts.I n general , the
performance chart i s the most useful presentati on of the operati ng
characteri sti cs of a magnetron. (For speci fi c exampl es of such charts
see Chap. 19.) The fol l oi vi ng mcasurcrncnts must be made i n or der to
pl ot a compl ete performance chart, i ncl udi ng pushi ng-coeffi ci ent con-
tours: 1 magneti c fi el d, (avera~e) current, (pul se) vol tage, (duty rati o),
(average) output pol ver, and frequency.
A l arge amount of data i s gcmeral l y requi red, and a systemati c pr oce-
dure shoul d be fol l ol red i n obtai ni ng i t. The techni que descri bed her e
has been found sati sfactory for most types of testi ng. I t i s conveni ent
to begi n \r or k at the l ol ~est magneti c fi cl cf that i s to be used; for i f a hi gh
fi el d i s sel ected fi rst, each ti me that i t i s r educed the magnet must
be demagneti zed i n or der to pr eser ve i ts cal i brati on. After the magnet
cur r ent has been set to the desi red val u(>, pl ate vol tage i s appl i ed to the
magnetron and i ncreased unti l stabl e osci l l ati on begi ns. The pr esence of
r-f output may be detected most qui ckl y and si mpl y by means of a +
watt neon bul b \vhi ch i s exci ted by i nserti ng i ts l eads i nto the r-f l i ne
through the sl ot of a standi ng-w-ave detector or tuner. Stabi l i ty of
operati on can be judged from the steadi ness of the neon gl ow, from the
cur r ent and vol tage pul ses on a synchroscope, or from the i mage on a
spectrum anal yzer. I n the case of a pul sed tube, the spectrum anal yzer
i s a val uabl e adjunct, for the spectrum of a magnetron frequentl y deteri -
orates badl y near the l i mi ts of i ts stabl e range. Havi ng set the pl ate
cur r ent at the l owest val ue at whi ch sati sfactory operati on i s obtai ned,
the oper ator then r ecor ds the vol tage, current, power output, and fr e-
quency. I f a water l oad i s bei ng used to measure power , the rate of fl ow
must be determi ned and checked at reasonabl e i nterval s. The pl ate
cur r ent i s next i ncreased somewhat, and the readi ngs repeated. Thi s
process i s conti nued unti l a l i mi t i s set by mode-shi fti ng, arci ng, or
overheati ng of the cathode. When one of these occurs, the cur r ent i s
r educed to the starti ng val ue, the magneti c fi el d i s i ncreased, and the
process repeated. The performance chart may be extended i n vol tage
unti l the magnet saturates or unti l arci ng occurs i n the magnetron even
at l ow currents.
The pl otti ng of c-w performance data i s rel ati vel y si mpl e, requi ri ng
onl y the cal cul ati on of pl ate effi ci ency. Pul sed data requi re the con-
1The quanti ti esi n parenthesesappl y onl y to pul sed operati on.
SEC. 18.10] MEASURI NG TECHNI QUES 733
FI G. 18.27.W.ave@de double-slugtuner with Mycalex sl ugs.
gram i sl (average) current, (pul se) vol tage, (duty rati o), (average)
power output, frequency, magni tude of standi ng wave, and phase of
standi ng wave. The fol l owi ng pr ocedur e has, i n general , pr oved to be a
sati sfactory method of obtai ni ng such data.
I n measuri ng the Ri eke di agram the magneti c fi el d and the pl ate
cur r ent are hel d constant, whi l e a standi ng wave of vari abl e phase and
magni tude i s presented to the magnetron. Thk standi ng wave i s set
up by means of a doubl e-sl ug tuner (see Fi g. 18.27) and measured by
usi ng a standi ng-wave detector (see Fi g. 184) pl aced between the tuner
and the magnetron. I n the case of hi gh-power magnetrons, i t may be
necessary to take the Ri eke di agram at a power output wel l bel ow the
usual operati ng poi nt because of breakdown i n the sl ugs or magnetron
output or arci ng i nsi de the tube i tsel f when a hi gh standi ng wave i s set up.
1The quanti ti es i n parentheses appl y onl y to pul sed operati on.
734 MEASUREMENTS [SEC. 18.10
Wi th the magneti c fi el d set at the pr oper val ue, the magnetron i s put
i nto osci l l ati on and the dktance between the sl ugs i s adjusted unti l the
standi ng-wave detector i ndi cates that a match has been obtai ned. The
magnetron pl ats cur r ent i s then brought to the val ue that has been
deci ded upon, and the vol tage, power output, and frequency are r ecor ded,
gi vi ng a poi nt that when pl otted wi l l l i e at the center of the di agram.
The separati on of the sl ugs i s next changed sl i ghtl y unti l a standi ng
wave of smal l ampl i tude i s set up, and the pl ate cur r ent i s r eset to i ts
previ ous val ue-i f, i ndeed, i t has vari ed at al l . The magni tude and
rel ati ve phase 1 of thi s standi ng wave are r ecor ded, the phase bei ng
measured from a scal e on the standi ng-wave detector . Leavi ng the
separati on of the sl ugs unchanged, the tuner i s now moved a fracti on
of a wavel ength, and al l of the readi ngs are repeated. I t wi l l be found
that al though the phase of the standi ng wave has changed, i ts magni tude
i s vi rtual l y unal tered, wi th the resul t that i t wi l l appear on the di agram
at the same radi us as the second poi nt and r emoved from i t by an angl e
equal to the di fference i n el ectri cal degr ees between the phases of the two
poi nts. I n thi s manner, the oper ator pr oceeds around a ful l ci rcl e on the
di agram, correspondi ng to a hal f-wavel ength movement of the sl ugs and
a hal f-wavel ength change i n phase. The tuner i s then readjusted to
set up a hi gher standi ng wave, and another ci rcl e i s compl eted. The
process i s conti nued unti l r-f breakdown occurs i n the l i ne, the magnetron
becomes unstabl e, or the tuner reaches the maxi mum standi ng-wave
rati o of whi ch i t i s capabl e.
Al though the phase thus far i 6 r efer r ed to a purel y arbi trary ori gi n,
that i s, the zer o of the scal e, i t may be made mor e speci fi c by r efer r i ng
i t to a sui tabl e pl ane at the magnetron output. Thi s transl ati on, of
course, merel y i nvol ves the measurement i n el ectri cal degr e,es of the
di stance between the sel ected pl ane and the zer o poi nt of the scal e.
I t i s conventi onal to pl ot moti on of the phase toward the magnetron i n a
countercl ockwi se di recti on. The radi al scale may be marked i n SWVR,
SWPR, or refl ecti on coeffi ci ent.
Pulling Fi gure .The pul l i ng fi gure of a magnetron i s defi ned as the
maxi mum change i n frequency that occurs as a standi ng wave wi th a
vol tage rati o of 1.5 i s presented to the tube and the phase i s vari ed
through 360. Al though the pul l i ng may be determi ned from a Ri eke
di agram, thi s techni que i s needl essl y l abori ous unl ess the other i nforma-
ti on contai ned i n such a pl ot i s desi red. A mor e di rect method consi sts
si mpl y i n pl aci ng a tuner i n the l i ne, setti ng up a standi ng wave of 1.5 i n
voltage,and determi ni ng the frequency l i mi ts as the phase i s vari ed.
By far the most sati sfactory i ndi cati on of the frequency devi ati on i s
obtai ned wi th a spectrum anal yzer; on the scr een of thi s i nstrument the
1 Al ways measured fr om the mi ni mum of the standi ng-wave pattern.
SEC. 18,11] OPERATI NG TECHNI QUE 73.5
spectrum moves back and forth al ong the basel i ne as the phase of the
standi ng wave changes, and the ampl i tude of the moti on i s readi l y meas-
ured by means of any of the frequency-measurement techni ques di scussed
i n connecti on wi th the spectrum anal yzer i n Vol . 14. I t i s sound
pr ocedur e to check the standi ng-wave rati o at each of the two poi nts at
whi ch frequency measurements are made. Even though the separati on
of the slugs remains constant,
slight changes in the impedance of
the line or the superposition of a
reflection from the load may alter
the ratio enough to impair the
accuracy of the pulling figure that
is obtained. The magnetron
should be thoroughly warmed up
b e f o r e pulling-figure measure-
1
j
1. ..
Frequency_
, ,L,. 18.28.Spectrum of a pul sed magnetron
ments are attempted, or thermal
as seen on a spectrum ansl yzer.
frequency dri ft wi l l enter i nto the
resul ts, al though thi s sour ce of er r or i s mor e l i kel y to occur i n pul l i ng
fi gures obtai ned from Ri eke di agrams.
Spectruw..Much can be l earned about the operati on of a pul sed
magnetron from a study of the r-f spectrum. The theoreti cal form of
thi s spectrum i s shown i n Fi g. 1828.1 Certai n devi ati ons from thi s shape
are attri butes of the vol tage pul se that i s appl i ed to the magnetron, and
others resl dt from the acti on of the tube i tsel f. A vol tage pul se wi th an
excessi vel y sl oped or rounded top wi l l pr oduce a frequency modul ati on
that may broaden the spectrum appreci abl y, and a frequent concomi tant
of thi s condi ti on i s a marked di fference i n the hei ghts of the secondary
maxi ma on one si de of the spectrum as compared wi th those on the other
si de. Another common phenomenon i s the random, i ntermi ttent di s-
appearance of one or mor e of the verti cal l i nes that makeup the spectrum;
thi s i s an i ndi cati on that at the moment at whi ch that l i ne shoul d have
been formed, the magnetron had shi fted modes or was arci ng. I n certai n
regi ons of the performance chart, usual l y at ver y l ow currents, the spec-
trum may be obser ved to broaden as the regi on i s enter ed and fi nal l y
to break up compl etel y i nto a di stri buti on resembl i ng noi se. A si mi l ar
deteri orati on i s frequentl y noti ced when a heavi l y l oaded magnetron
enters the unstabl e porti on of a Rl eke di agram.
The spectrum of a c-w magnetron i s of l ess si gni fi cance to the operati on
of the tube. The spectrum anal yzer i s sti l l ver y useful , as i t provi des an
effecti ve means of observi ng smal l frequency shi fts.
18.11. Operati ng Techni que .Befor e putti ng a magnetron i nto oper -
ati on, i t i s a reasonabl e precauti on to test i t wi th a spark coi l and ohm-
1See al so Vol . 11, Chap. 12, of thi s seri es.
736
MEASUREMENTS [SEC. 18.11
meter to prevent possi bl e damage to the pul se generator or power suppl y
and the associ ated metefi ng equi pment. An ohmmeter wi l l i ndi cate
whether or not the heater ci rcui t i s conti nuous andwhether or not a short
ci rcui t exi sts between the cathode and the anode.
The magnetron shoul d be mounted so that i t i s wel l centered between
the pol e pi eces of the magnet.
I n some cases the manufacturer i ndi cates
a pr efer r ed pol ari ty of magneti c fi el d,
The output connecti ons shoul d
fi t wel l ; i f they are l oose, r -f breakdown i s l i kel y; and i f they are too ti ght,
the tube may be damaged. Most troubl e i s caused by the center con-
ductors of tubes wi th coaxi al outputs.
The l ead that carri es the pl ate cur r ent fr om the power suppl y or
pul se generator i s connected to the cathode l ead of the magnetron; i f
i t i s connected to the heater l ead, al l the pl ate cur r ent wi l l fl ow through
the heater, and the transi ents brought on by arci ng may burn i t out.
Ful l heater power shoul d al ways be suppl i ed for at l east 60 sec before
pl ate vol tage i s appl i ed. I n pul sed operati on, the l eads between the
pul se gener ator and the magnetron shoul d be kept short, si nce the
reactance of l ong l eads may di stort the pul se waveform and i ntroduce
osci l l ati ons. Where forced-ai r cool i ng i s i ndi cated, i t shoul d be suffi ci ent
to mai ntai n the temperature of the bl ock bel ow 100C.
The magnetron may be grounded through the r-f l i ne, whi ch shoul d
be part of a common ground system embraci ng the magnet, the power
suppl y or pul se gener ator , the pul se transformer, and the chassi s of the
associ ated ampl i fi ers, spectrum anal yzers, etc. I f the r-f l i ne i s acci -
dental l y l eft ungrounded, the oper ator may dkcover that i t has become
charged to ful l cathode potenti al .
Gassy Tube. When pl ate vol tage i s appl i ed, a gassy magnetron wi l l
draw a l arge cur r ent and the synchroscope or vol tmeter wi l l i ndi cate
l i ttl e or no vol tage across the tube. A gas di scharge may be seen i nsi de
the magnetron by l ooki ng i nto the i nput or output pi pes. Al l mag-
netrons evol ve a l i ttl e gas when they are l eft i dl e for l ong peri ods, but
thi s normal outgassi ng wi l l not pr oduce the condi ti on just descri bed. A
spark coi l test wi l l confi rm the di agnosi s.
Cathode-anode short Circuit. Again, current will be drawn with zero
voltage indicated, but there will be no gas discharge. An ohmmeter
may be used to settle the matter.
No Magnetic Field.-A hi gh cur r ent wi l l be drawn at ver y l ow vol tage.
Removal of the magneti c fi el d duri ng operati on may resul t i n the destruc-
ti on of the magnetron; precauti ons shoul d ther efor e be taken when an
el ectromagnet i s used to pr event fai l ure of the d-c power suppl y.
Open Heater.The magnetron wi l l fai l to start normal l y when pl ate
vol tage i s appl i ed and probabl y wi l l spark. No pl ate cur r ent ~vi l l be
drawn, The usual gl ow of the cathode, vi si bl e i n the i nput pi pes of
I
SEC. 1811] OPERA TI NG TECHNI QUE 737
many magnetrons, wi l l be absent. An ohmmeter testi s the fi nal check.
A magnetron i n thi s condi ti on may usual l y be started by conti nued
appl i cati on of pl ate vol tage at a rel ati vel y l ow magneti c fi el d, al though
car e must be taken not to damage the associ ated equi pment; once
osci l l ati ng, back bombardment may provi de suffi ci ent cathode heati ng
for normal operati on. Thi s type of starti ng cannot be r epeated many
ti mes wi thout destroyi ng the cathode. A great many heater fai l ures
are due to transi ents accompanyi ng arci ng and may be pr evented by
pl aci ng a ~-pf condenser i n shunt wi th the heater to bypass such surges.
A~ci ng.Arci ng, or sparki ng, i s commonl y encounter ed i n magnetron
operati on, especi al l y at hi gh powers. I t may be due to traces of gas,
to mode shi fti ng, to hi gh gradi ents caused by sharp surfaces, or to over -
worki ng of the cathode. A magnetron wi l l wi thstand a surpri si ng amount
of arci ng over a short peri od of ti me wi thout apparent damage, but even
i ntermi ttent sparki ng duri ng conti nuous operati on wi l l affect i ts l i fe
adversel y. Arci ng appears as fl ashes i n the i nput pi pes, unsteadi ness
of the cur r ent meter, mi ssi ng pul ses on the spectrum anal yzer, and
transi ent traces on the synchroscope (Fi g. 18.29). The evol uti on of gas
occurri ng duri ng l ong peri ods of qui escence may make i t necessary to
reseason a tube to cl ean up the gas; thi s shoul d requi re no mor e than
15 or 20 mi n of conti nuous attenti on.
The oper ator shoul d sl owl y i ncrease the
vol tage unti l arci ng becomes rather
vi ol ent, occurri ng perhaps several ti mes
a second; as soon as the sparki ng has
frL
di ed down, the vol tage may agai n be ~a)
(b) (c)
rai sed, and so on unti l the desi red
FI G. 1829.-Appearance of VI
operating 1e v e 1 has been attained.
trace under various conditions of
Should an unusually intense burst of
operation, showing (a) stable oper-
ation, (~) mode shift, and (c) arcing.
sparks occur, resembling a continuous
arc, the voltage must quickly be backed off to permit the tube to
recover. Arcing is frequently associated with mode instability, and it is
difficult to determine which is the cause and which the effect.
Mode Instability .This is a phenomenon whi ch occurs i n certai n
regi ons of the performance charts of al l magnetrons, usual l y at ver y hi gh
or ver y l ow currents or at l ow magneti c fi el ds. A c-w magnetron changes
modes abruptl y, showi ng a marked decr ease i n output power , and may
not return to the operati ng mode unti l the pl ate vol tage has been shui
off and the tube restarted i n a mor e favorabl e regi on. l ul sed magnetrons
change modes mor e gradual l y, passi ng through a regi on of operati on
partl y i n one mode and partl y i n another, as evi denced by doubl e vol tage,
current, and VI traces on the synchroscope (Fig. 18.29) and by missing
lines in the spectrum; operation in this region is likely to be accompanied
738 MEASUREMENTS [i?mc,18.11
by sparki ng and by fal l i ng output power . The tube wi l l , however ,
rwmrne normal osci l l ati on as soon as the vol tage i s changed to bri ng i t
back to a regi on of stabl e performance. The l ocati on of the boundari es
wher e mode changes occur i s i nfl uenced by cathode qual i ty and tem-
perature, pul se shape, and l oadi ng (see Chap. 8). Mode-changi ng
may become mor e troubl esome as a magnetron ages and the cathode
emi ssi on fai l s. Al though a tube may be osci l l ati ng i n a l ower mode,
i t i s not al ways possi bl e to detect the wavel ength of that mode i n the r-f
l i ne, si nce condi ti ons i n the magnetron maybe such that i t does not coupl e
to the output l oop. Operati on i n l ower modes i s frequentl y accom-
pani ed by seri ous overheati ng of the cathode.
Overheated Cathode.-Operati on of the cathode at temperatures i n
excess of the normal val ue (about 850C) shortens tube l i fe. The
heater transformer shoul d be checked for pr oper vol tage; and when
operati ng i nstructi ons cal l for reducti on of the heater vol tage duri ng
osci l l ati on, they shoul d al ways be fol l owed. I n many tubes the cathode
gl ow may be seen di rectl y or by refl ecti on i n the i nput pi pes; i f the
oper ator fami l i ari zes hi msel f wi th the appearance of thi s gl ow at normal
heater i nput, he wi l l be abl e to judge for hi msel f when the temperature
becomes excessi ve. Conti nuous-wave magnetrons are especi al l y l i kel y
to suffer from overheati ng of the cathode.
Breakdown in the R-f Line.Thls is usual l y announced by crackl i ng
or spi tti ng noi ses. Coaxi al tuners are ver y l i kel y to break down, and
magnetron coupl ers and transi ti ons are al so seri ous offenders. Al l
components shoul d be cl ean and wel l -pol i shed i nsi de; the joi nts shoul d
fi t snugl y and be ti ghtl y cl amped. I gni ti on seal i ng compound (a heavy
grease) may be appl i ed i n cases of l ocal i zed breakdown. For l aboratory
use, carbon tetrachl ori de sprayed i nto the l i ne through a sl otted secti on
i s surpri si ngl y effecti ve i n stoppi ng breakdown, al though the appl i cati on
must, of course, be r epeated ever y few mi nutes. Pressuri zati on, al though
troubl esome, wi l l greatl y extend the power-handl i ng capaci ty of any
l i ne, 4 mw havi ng been transmi tted successful l y by a 1$-i n. coaxi al l i ne
pressuri zed to 35 l b per sq i n. gauge.
\
I
{
[
CHAPTER 19
TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS
BY A. G. SMI TH
Thk chapter presents speci fi c data on the performance characteri sti cs
and di mensi ons as wel l as the over-al l desi gn of the pri nci pal types of
mi crowave magnetrons i n the frequency range of 1000 to 24,000 Me/see
and output-power range of 25 watts to 2.5 mw. The magnetrons i ncl uded
her e wer e sel ected as bei ng representati ve of vari ous wavel ength and
t
&- b--+
(a)
w
I
--+-f
{b)
(c)
FIQ. 19.1. Gencrdized figures for anode-lJock dimensions. (a) Rising-sun; (b)
hol e and sl ot; (c) val ,e, The di mensi on (a) i s the di stance between the pol e ti ps or between
the l i ds, whi chever M smal l er.
output-power ranges and to i l l ustrate parti cul ar desi gn features. No
attempt was made to make the l i st compl ete. Wher ever possi bl e,
magnetrons that are avai l abl e for purchase as a consequence of bei ng i n
producti on were sel ected for i ncl usi on, and these are desi ~natecl by the
RMA numbers.
devel oped but di d
Several important magnetron designs that were
not reach the production stage are also included, and
739
740
TYPICAL MAGNETRONS
[SEC. 19.1
these are r efer r ed to by the symbol assi gned i n the l aboratory i n whi ch
they wer e devel oped. Tubes i n thi s categor y are probabl y not avai l abl e
for purchase.
For each tube type ther e i s a di scussi on that cover s i ts general
performance and l i mi tati ons, frequency or frequency range, type of
constructi on, and speci al features. A performance chart and usual l y a
Ri eke di agram provi de compl ete i nformati on on the operati ng charac-
teri sti cs. A pl an vi ew and photograph together wi th a tabl e of di men-
si ons gi ve the constructi on detai l s. The meani ng of the symbol s i n thi s
(d)
(e)
FI G. 19.2.General i zed fi gures for magnetron strappi ng di mensi ons.
constructi on tabl e may be determi ned by r efer r i ng to Fi gs. 19.1 and 19.2.
A tabl e of characteri sti c scal e factors i s gi ven as an ai d to magnetron
desi gners. The defi ni ti ons of the symbol s i n thi s tabl e are found i n
Sec. 10.5. Tabl e 19.1 l i sts the magnetrons descri bed i n thi s chapter.
19s1. The LC W L-band C-w Magnetron.-The LCW i s an experi -
mental c-w magnetron, capabl e of output power s up to 2000 watts at a
fi xed frequency of 900 Me/see. A radi al l y mounted cathode and
separate magnet are used.
Operati on i s sati sfactory between 2000 and 4W0 vol ts and from 0.1
to 1 amp. Thi s regi on of operati on, shown i n Fi g. 19.3, provi des useful
output power s rangi ng from 100 to 2000 watts; i t i s l i mi ted at hi gh
power s by overheati ng of the cathode and at l ow power s by deteri orati on
of the spectrum. The pul l i ng fi gure i s 4 Me/see, and the pushi ng fi gure
SEO. 19.1] THE LCW L-BAND C-W MAGNETRON 741
4.5
I
4.0
3.5
E
=
g
.
x
3.0
2.5
2.0
0
700 G
I
600 G
I
500 G
\
\
400 G
PullinR fiflure= 4 MC~~~
0.2 0.4 0.6
0.8 1.0
Amperes
FI G. 19.3.Performance chart for LCW magnetron.
Frequency of O Mc contour= 896.5 Mczsec
FI G. 19.4.Ffjeke di agram for LCW magnetron.
742 TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 19.1
Frequency,
Me/see
900
2,830-3,240
3,245-3,333
2,700-3,333
2,70CP3,700
2,800
9,375
9, 29W9 ,330
9, 34s9 ,405
9,345-9,405
8,50&9,600
9,345-9,405
9,500
24,000
24,000
24,000
11,500
TABLE 19.1.I NnEx or MAGNETRONS
Power output
1OO-2OOOwatts
5-150 watts
2.5-10 kw
2..$300 kw
3OW1OOO kw
500-2500 kw
10-100 watts
20&1250 watts
5-2o kw
l &70 kw
100 kw
50-300 kw
2-1OOO kw
50 kw
50 kw
50 kw
500 watts
Type of operati on
C-W fi xed freq.
C-w tunabl e
Pul sed fi xed freq.
Pul sed 6xed freq.
Pul sed tunabl e
Pul sed fi xed freq.
C-w, pul sed, fi xed freq
Pul sed tunabl e
Pul sed fi xed freq.
Pul sed fi xed freq.
Pul sed tunabl e
Pul sed fi xed freq.
Pul sed fi xed freq.
Pul sed fi xed freq.
Pul sed fi xed freq.
Pul sed fi xed freq,
Gw fi xed freq.
-..
Tub- T,.
LCW
CM16B
2J38
2J39
}
seri es
2J22
2J34
}
seri es
4J70
4J77
}
seri es
HP1OV
BM50
2J41
2J42 seri es
725A seri es
2J51
4J50 seri es
AX9
3J21
3J31
}
seti tes
22-cavi ty
ri si ng-sun
magnetron
Cl osed-end
38-cavi ty
ri si ng-sun
magnetron
Hi gh-power
2-&cmC-w
hapter
Sec.
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
197
19.8
19.9
19.10
19.11
1912
19.13
19.14
19.15
19.16
19.17
at an operati ng poi nt of 3000 vol ts and 0.5 amp i s 3 Me/see per amp.
I t i s evi dent from Fi g. 19.4 that nothi ng i s to be gai ned by l oadi ng the
tube mor e heavi l y.
A screened, oxi de-coated cathode i s used. The heater, whi ch draws
5.2 amp at 6.3 vol ts, i s turned off after the magnetron has been started.
Fi gure 19.5 shows the 16-vane anode bl ock, doubl e-ri ng-strapped on one
end onl y to al l ow the addi ti on of a pr ojected el ectroni c tuni ng devi ce.
Characteri sti c scal e factors and di mensi ons for thi s bl ock are l i sted i n
Tabl es 19.2 and 19.3.
TARLE 19.2.CHARACTERISTIC SCALE FACTORS FOR LCW MAGNETRON
A, cm ~, gauss ~, amp v, kv G, kw s, mhos Q.
% 70
c
E
33.5 125 0.761 0.423 0.322 1.8a x 10-3 1050 92 0.012
I
SEC. 19.1]
Because the
THE LCW L-BAND C-W MAGNETRON 743
block is short relative to its large diameter, the LCW
requi res a magnet wi th a gap of onl y 2~i n. and a pol e-face di ameter of
2~i n. Experi mental l y, thetube has been water cool ed (Fi g. 196), but
because of i ts hi gh effi ci ency ai r cool i ng shoul d be feasi bl e.
SectionA.A
FI G. 19.5.Cross secti ons of LC W magnetron.
Further detai l s of the constructi on, operati on, and pr ojected tuni ng
schemes of the LCW may be obtai ned from Radi ati on Laboratory Repor t
No. 1005, LCT, 900-Mc/sec F-mC-w Magnetron.
744
TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 19.2
1%. 19.6.LCW magnetron.
TABLE 19.3.DI MENSI ONS I N I NCHES OF LCW MAGNETaON
a. Anode-bl ock Di mensi ons: See Fi g. 19. l C
a b da d, h t
1.8110 5.025 1.370 0.829 1.000 0.150
b. Strappi ng Di mensi ons: See Fi g. 19.2?
m n 0
P !l
r s u v
. . .
1.075 0.935 0.815 0.735 0.120 0.120 0,188 0,219 0,156
19.2. The CM16B S-band C-w Magnetron.-The CM16B magn~
tr on i s an experi mental c-w osci l l ator, tunabl e over the band from 2830
to 3240 Me/see at power-output l evel s up to 150 watts. An axi al l y
mounted cathode and attached magnet are used, and the coaxi al output
shown i n Fi g. 19.7 fi ts st~ndard $-i n. l i ne components.
Operati on i s stabl e between 500 and 2000 vol ts, and from 25 to 200
ma, wi th correspondi ng output power s rangi ng from 5 to 150 watts.
1 Data for Sec. 19.2 submi tted bv A. N[ Cl ogston.
SEC. 19.2]
THE CM16B S-BAND C-W MAGNETRON 745
The performance chart of Fi g. 19.8 shows the useful regi on of operati on,
whi ch i s restri cted at hi gh currents by mode i nstabi l i ty and overheati ng
of the cathode and at l ow currents by Poor spectrum and hi gh pushi ng.
2200
1800
f 14(XI
l CCO
600
L.
j
FI G. 19.7. CM16B magnetron,
~ I
Frequency =3000 Me/see
Pullin(
2940 G
2160 G
1460 G
figure=8 Me/ see
150 w
100 w
10watts
50w
1
~ \
\
I
I
\
I
\
\
\
\
\
\ \
\
<0%
\
=..
r
~.
. _ .
_
. _15&
-.
- ____ .
780 G --- ~

0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
Mi l l i amperes
FI G. 19.S.Performance chart for CM16B magnetron.
Fi gure 19.9 i l l ustrates the vari ati on of output power wi th tuni ng; the
rel i abl e tuni ng range i s l i mi ted by a tendency to shi ft modes beyond
the extremes of the band shown. The pul l i ng fi gure i s 8 Me/see, and
746 TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS
[SEC. 19.2
the pushing fi gure at an operati ng poi nt of 100 ma and 1400 vol ts i s
Xl Me/see per amp.
The screened, oxi de-coated cathode i s capabl e of di ssi pati ng the back-
bombardment heati ng that accompani es up to 600 watts i nput power .
30
4
.60
F \
3
.E
5
I
J?40
I
\
:
z
; 20
Input =150 milliamp
at 1000 volts
2!7W 29CIU 3100 33(X) 350U
Frequencyin Mc/eec
FI G. 19.9.Frequency characteri sti c of
C Ml 6B magnetron.
The heater rati ng i s 3.5 amp at
6.3 vol ts; thi s consumpti on i s r e-
duced duri ng operati on at i nput
power s i n excess of 150 watts.
Characteri sti c scal e factors and
di mensi ons for the 16-vane doubl e-
ri ng-strapped anode bl ock are
l i sted i n Tabl es 19.4 and 19.5.
Tuni ng i s accompl i shed by
movi ng a shorti ng choke i n a
coaxi al l i ne coupl ed to the straps
on one end of the bl ock. As
mav be seen from Fi g. 19.10.
the vacuum i s retai ned by a gl ass seal ~ear the anode bl ock, so that
the porti on of the l i ne i n whi ch the choke moves i s at atmospheri c
TABLE19.4.CHARACTERI STI C SCALEFACTORSFORCM16B MAGNETaON
i , cm @, gausa 9, amp v, kv (J,kw S, mhos Q.
c
7., 70
z
10.0 412 0.301 0.132 0.0397 2.28 x 10-~ 600
so 0.032
TABLE 195.-DI MENSI ONS I N I NCHES OF CM16B MAC+NETaON
a. Anode-bl ock Di mensi ons: See Fi g. 19.1 c
a b da d. h t
0,752 1.330 0.230
o.577t
0.136 0.400 0.023
* Betwaan l i ds.
t Between pole tips.
b. Strappi ngDi mensi ons:See Fi g. 19.2e
m n o
P q
r s u
0.234 0.194 0.154 0.134 0.020 0.020 0.040 0.060
pressure. Ever y effor t has been made to r educe the frequency sensi ti vi ty
of the tuner through keepi ng i ts l ength at a mi ni mum,
sensi ti vi ty i ntroduces mode-shi fti ng tendenci es that
the rel i abl e tuni ng range. A 4-cm moti on of the
for such frequency
markedl y restri ct
shorti ng choke i s
SE(,. 193] 2J382J39 l ,OI i - F701,1A(7i 3 S-BAND MAGNETRONS
required to cover the band of Fig. 19.9. Without changing
747
its con-
struction, the CM 16B has been made electronically tunable by the
substitution of an 13T10 reactance tube for the mechani cal tuner, and
i t has been stabi l i zed by a factor of 10 by replacing the tuner with a
cavi ty.
Outer strap broken and
f40te: Cathode i s recentered
d
Tuning Ieadsoldered ~
to inner strap
rA I
~ Movable shorting
~ fi coaxial line
1
longitudinally when cold
to allow for expansion of
parts during operation.
lb
I r~
L
Radiator
FIG. 19.10.Crosa secti ons of CM 16B magnetron.
19.3. 2J33-2J39 Low-vol tage S-band Magnetrons.~The 2J38 and
2J39 are fi xed-frequency pul sed osci l l ators desi gned for operati on at
puke-power output l evel s rangi ng from 2.5 to 10 kw. The frequency
of the 2J38 l i es i n the band from 3245 to 3267 Me/see; that of the 2J39
l i es between 3267 and 3333 Me/see. Coaxi al outputs that fi t standard
~i n. coaxi al -l i ne components are provi ded; the cathodes are mounted
radi al l y, and the magnets are attached to the tubes.
Rel i abl e operati on may be expected wi th pul se cur r ent and vol tage
i nputs rangi ng from 2.5 to 7.5 amp and from 3 to 10 kv. At currents
I Data for Sec. 19.3 submi tted by J. R. Fel dmei er.

TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 1?.3

/
5025 G
/
\
/
4475 G\
\ \
~o(j
> ~~
/

\
/
\
/
3875 G\
/ -
\
.
/
557:
3z521G
/
/
----i- _
TO<
z575k ~
.-
/
/
\
~oY> ---
/-
1925 G . -
--
2J39 *
25~~ .- -
5 &---
~
_
d
2J38 * Frequency =3310 me/see
1300 G~ -
5TW
Pulse duration = 1g sec
2000 pulses per sec
e+operating Iines for magnets provided
and set by the manufacturer
Pulling figure= 10 me/see
o
1 I
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Peak amperes
FIG. 19.11.Performance chart for 2J38 and 2J39 magnetrons.
Magnetic field
=1650 gauss
2000 pulses persecond 1 A sec pulse duratin
Freauency of O Mc contour= 3310 Mc /see
FI G.19.12.Ri ekedi agram for2J38 and 2J39 magnetrons.
I
SEC. 19.3] 2J3S2J39 LOW-VOLTAGE S-BAND MAGNETRONS 749
a~ove 7.5 amp mode i nstabi l i ty may be encountered, and bel ow 2.5 amp
the spectrum becomes poor . Occasi onal tubes may be seasoned to
cover the extensi ve regi on shown i n Fi g. 19c11. The operati ng l i nes
for the magnets provi ded and set by the manufacturer are shown i n thi s
fi gure; i t may be seen that the pul se-power output ranges avai l abl e under
thi s condi ti on are 2.5 to 8 kw for the 2J38 and 5 to 12.5 kw for the 2J39.
These l ow l evel s of operati on wer e establ i shed to r educe magnet wei ght
and i nput power and to ensure stabi l i ty. A maxi mum of 200 watts
average power , at a maxi mum pul se durati on of 2 psec, may be put
i nto ei ther type. The pul l i ng fi gures are 13 Me/see maxi mum for the
2J39 and 7 Me/see mi ni mum for the 2J38. Fi gure 19.12 i s a Ri eke
di agram for these tube types.
An unscreened, oxi de-coated cathode wi th a heater rati ng of 1.3 amp
at 6.3 vol ts i s used; at average i nput power s i n excess of 55 watts the
heater consumpti on shoul d be reduced, and above 160 watts the heater
shoul d be turned off. Characteri sti c scal e factors and di mensi ons for the
ei ght-osci l l ator vane-t ype bl ock are l i sted i n Tabl es 19.6 and 19.7.
TARLE 196, -CHAI i ACTERI STrC SCALE FACTORS FOR 2J38 AND 2J39 MAGNETRONS
i, cm 6, gauss $, amp v, kv 6, kw S, mhos Q.
c
% 70
z

9.1 682 2,52 1.22 3.07 2,07 X 10-3 1500 90 0.0020
TARLE 19.7.DI MENSI ONS I N I NCHES FOR 2J38 AND 2J39 MAGNETRONS
a. Anode Dimensions: See Fig, 191c
a b d. de h t
0.750 1.330 0,316 0.120 0.475 0.060
o.550t
*Between l i ds.
t Between pol e ti ps.
b. Strappi ng Di mensi ons: See Fi g. 19.2b
m n 0
q
u v
0.242 0.211 0.180 0.020 0.050 0.039
An unusual feature of the constructi on i s the octagonal wi r e strap shown
i n Fi g. 19-13. Separati on of the frequenci es i nto the two bands i s
achi eved by adjustment of thi s strap.
1The unusual practi ce of speci fyi ng a mi ni mum pul l i ng fi gure was adopted i n
or der to ensure that these tubes coul d be pul l ed to a preci se beacon frequency.
<
750 TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS
[SEC. 19.3
A
A
See enlarged _
view B
View B -
Section A.A
showing cathode
pipes revolved 900
FI O. 19.13 .Cross secti ons of 2J38 and 2J39 magnetrons.
PULSED MAGNETRONS
751
the 2J38 and 2J39 di ffer i n thei r
SEC. 19.4] TYPE 2J 22-2J 34 1O-CM
Al though i denti cal i nternal l y,
external features. The 2J38 shown i n Fi g. 19.14 i s provi ded wi th a
l arger radi ator and wi th a bracket i n whi ch a thermostat maybe mounted;
these addi ti ons permi t cl ose control of the bl ock temperature as a means
of preventi ng thermal frequency dri ft. Fi gure 19.15 shows the si mpl er
exter i or of the 2J39. Forced-ai r cool i ng i s requi red by ei ther type.
FI G. 19,14 .2J38 magnetron.
Both magnetrons may be mounted from the output, and the 2J39 may
i n addi ti on be mounted from a fl ange at the base of the i nput pi pes. The
total wei ght of the magnetron and magnet i s 2 l b 10 oz for the 2J38
and 2 l b for the 2J39.
Further i nformati on on the operati on of these tubee maybe obtai ned
from the manufacturers techni cal -i nformati on sheet.
19.4. Type 2J222J34 10-cm Pul sed Magnetrons.-The 13 magne-
trons of thi s seri es are fi xed-frequency pul sed osci l l ators, desi gned for
1Data for Sec. 194 submi tted by F. F. Ri eke.
_
752 TYPICAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 19.4
operati on atpul se-power output l evel s ran@ngfrom 25to3~kw. Thr ee
basi c anode-bl ock desi gns areempl oyed: one forthe2J22 (3267 t03333
Mc/sec), asecond fortypes2J23 to2J29 (2913 t03100Mc/sec), anda
thi rd for types 2J30 to 2J34 (2700 to 2900 Me/see); wi thi n each gr oup
di fferent frequenci es are obtai ned by varyi ng the strap capaci tances.
External l y the tubes are al i ke, and they are mechani cal l y i nterchangeabl e.
FI G. 19.15 .2J39 magnetron.
Separate magnets are used. The cathodes are mounted radi al l y, and
the outputs are coaxi al .
Operati on i s rel i abl e over a range of pul se cur r ent and vol tage i nputs
extendi ng from 8 to 30 amp and from 10 to 22 kv (Fi g. 19.16). Low-
power operati on i s l i mi ted by mode changi ng and deteri orati on of the
spectrum, and hi gh-power operati on by arci ng. Wi th speci al l y desi gned
output connecti ons i t i s possi bl e to sel ect and season tubes to per for m
sati sfactori l y at 2800 gauss, 31 kv, and 35 pul se amp, wi th a pul se-power
SEC. 194] TYPE 2J 22-2J 34 10-CM PULSED MAGNETRONS 753
24
Frequency .2800 Me/see; Pulse duration =1 A sec
I
1000 pulses per sec
20
/
g
g
$
0.
/
1300G
\
//
//
--
/-
---
+

8
-ni m -
5 10 15 20 25
30
Peak amperes
FIO. 19. 16.Performance chart for 2J32 magnetron.
Magnetic field
1200 gauss
\ *\~v
Frequency of O Mc contour K 28CJJMc /sac
Standard output transformer used
FIG. 19.17.R]eke diagram for 2J32 magnetron
754 TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS
4
Fm. 19. 18.Cross secti ons of 2J22 to 2J34 magnetrons.
SEC. 19.4] TYPE 2J 22-2J 34
output of about 750 kw. A
I O-CM PULSED MAGNETRONS
755
maxi mum average i nput power of 600 watts
may be empl oyed; the maxi mum speci fi ed pul se durati on i s 2.5 ~sec.
The pushi ng fi gure averages 0.3 Me/see per amp, and the pul l i ng fi gure
i s cor r ected to a val ue not exceedi ng 15 Me/see by means of a trans-
for mer i ncorporated i n the output coupl i ng; the Ri eke di agram of Fi g.
19.17 appl i es to operati on wi th the recommended transformer.
The cathodes are oxi de-coated, wi th heater rati ngs of 1.5 amp at
6.3 vol ts. Characteri sti c scal e factors and di mensi ons for the 2.J32 are
gi ven i n Tabl es 19.8 and 19,9. The ei ght-osci l l ator hol e-and-sl ot
TASLE 19.8.CHARACTERI STI C SCALE FACTORS FOR2J32 hlAGNETRON
& cm q gauss 9, amp w, kv @, kw S, mhos Q
c
m, 90
z
10.7 577 12.0 3,47 41.6 3,46 X 10-3 1600 96 0.012
TABLE 199.-DIMENSIONS IN INCHES OF 2J32 iltAGNETRON
a. Anode-block Dimensions: See Fig, 19 lb
a b c da d< h w
1.279 1,310 0.398 0635 0,235 0.777 0.090
b. Strappi ng Di mensi ons: See Fi g, 19.2a
m n 0
q
s u
0.415 0.368 0.345 0.020 0 022 0.060

756
TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 19.5
anode bl ock of thk tube i s shown i n Fi g. 19 18; the magnetrons of the
other two groups di ffer onl y i n the osci l l ator di mensi ons and i n the
strappi ng detai l s.
A magnet wi th 1~-i n.-di ameter pol e faces and a gap of l + i n. i s
requi red. The magnetron i s mounted from the ci rcul ar fl ange at the
base of the i nput pi pes, and forced-ai r cool i ng must be provi ded. Fi gure
19.19 shows the external appearance of a tube of thi s seri es. The wei ght
of the magnetron i s 2 l b 4 oz.
Further data on the 2J32 are contai ned i n Chap. 7 of thi s vol ume.
See al so Radi ati on Laboratory Repor t No. 451, Anal ysi s of Magnetron
Operati on, Part 2.
19.5. 4J70-4J77 Hi gh-power S-band Tunabl e Magnetrons.The
seri es of ei ght magnetrons numbered 4J70 through 4J77 provi des tunabl e
1000- 25
I
1
1
m 800 -:20
lg
g
~
E
.s 600 -.; 15
~ =
I
I
5 s
0 I
g 400-gl o
I
i %
a.
<
G 200 -5
I
I
o -o
I
A B
1~1~,19.20.-Typi cal characteri sti cs of 4J70 to 4J77 magnetrons.
Magneti c fi el d = 2700 gauss Peak cur r ent = 70 amp
Pul se durati on = 0.S #see 400 pul ses per sec
cover age of the regi on of the spectrum between 2700 and 3700 Me/see,
I ndi vi dual tubes of the seri es tune approxi matel y 5 per cent (Fi g. 19.20j
by means of the attached cavi ty and oper ate as pul sed osci l l ators at
puke-power l evel s rangi ng up to 1 mw. From 4J70 through 4J73
the output ci rcui ts are termi nated i n l +- by 3-i n. wavegui des, whi l e the
remai ni ng types are equi pped wi th I s-i n. coaxi al outputs. The cathodes
are mounted radi al l y, and a si ngl e model of detached magnet serves the
enti re seri es.
The useful range of pul se vol tage and cur r ent i nputs (Fi g. 19.21)
lies between
pulse-power
higher than
15 and 30 kv and between 20 and 80 amp, wi th correspondi ng
outputs from 300 to 1000 kw. At vol tages or currents
those i ndi cated, excessi ve sparki ng may occur ; operati on
I
SEC. ~{]~1 I I I GI I -I OI I ER ,$-BA>A1) T(:i VAJjI ,l i JfA(7NETR0,NS
757
i n the l ow-power regi on i s l i mi ted by mode i nstabi l i ty. At a fi xed operat-
i ng poi nt, the power output vari es l ess than + db as the magnetron i s
tuned over a 5 per cent band. The rated maxi mum average i nput
I
1
Frequency= 2960 Me/see
Pulse duration= 0.8B sac
400 pulses per second
Pulling figure = 7 Mc /see
64)0 kw
400 kw

200 kw
7
\
-.
10 20 30
40
50 60 70 80 90
Peak amperes
FI Q. 19.21.Performance chart, for 4J75 magnetron.
-1
&
Input pipe
e step
J
Flexible d
Oiaphragm
Scala Oiameter of cathode = 0.45~m
-,,
Oiameter of step =0.531
0 1
F1a. 19.22.Cross secti ons of cavi ty-tunabl e magnetron.
power i s 1200 watts. Pul se durati ons up to 2.5 gsec may be empl oyed.
A maxi mum pul l i ng fi gure of 10 Me/see i s speci fi ed, and pushi ng does
not exceed 0.1 Me/see per amp,
758
TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS [SEC.19.5
The screened, oxi de-coated cathodes are provi ded wi th steps
to i mprove operati ng stabi l i ty (see Chap. 12). Heater consumpti on i s
3 amp at 16 vol ts; when the bl ock i nput power exceeds 200watts, i t i s
desi rabl e to r educe the heater vol tage duri ng operati on. Vane-type
constructi on and doubl e-ri ng strappi ng are used i n the 12-osci l l ator
anode bl ock (Fi g. 19.22).
Characteri sti c scal e factors for the tubes at
ei ther l i mi t of the seri es are l i sted i n Tabl e 1910, and tube di mensi ons
are gi ven i n Tabl e 19.11.
TARLE 19.10.-CHAWCTERISTIC SCAI,EFACTORS ~RCAVITY TUNmLEMAGNE~ONS
Type No. i , cm ~a:;~~s!, amp V, kv LP,kw ~, mhos Q. 7., % ;

4J77 10.7 502 12.8 2.42 31,0 5.29 X 10-3 2000 92 0.019
4J70 8.5 633 25.4 3.84 97.6 6.61 x 10-3 1500 89 0.031
TARLE 19.11.DI MENSXONS I N I NCHES OF 4J70 AND 4J77 MAGNETRONS
a. Anode-bl ock Di mensi ons: See Fi g. 19.l c
Type No. a
b.
da de h
+
4J70 1.561 1,476 0.788 0.452 0.788 0,138
4J77 1.561 1.748 0.788 0.452 0.788 0.138
* Di ameter across fl at~.
b, Strappi ngDi mensi ons:See Fi g. 192c
Type No, m n o
P q r
s u
4J70 0.558 0.499 0.448 0.417 0.030 0.020 0,050 (outer ) 0.075
0.056 (i nner)
4J77 0.558 0.499 0.448 0.417 0,030 0.020 0,050 0.075
Tuni ng i s accompl i shed by the cavi ty-tuni ng pri nci pl e descri bed
i n Chap. 14. Fi gures 19.22 and 19.23 i l l ustrate how the shal l ow, cyl i n-
dri cal cavi ty i s coupl ed el ectri cal l y to the anode bl ock by means of an
iris. Thi s cavi ty, i n addi ti on to its tuni ng functi on, stabi l i zes the
magnetron by a factor of 1.6. The tuni ng di aphragm i s actuated by a
mechani sm termi nated i n a standard fi tti ng to whi ch may be attached
a l ength of fl exi bl e shafti ng to permi t r emote control of the frequency.
The rate of tuni ng i s approxi matel y 3 Me/see per revol uti on of the
shaft, and the tuni ng range i s l i mi ted by stops to the band shown i n
Tabl e 19.12. Because the di aphragm i s fl exed beyond i ts el asti c l i mi t,
mechani cal hysteresi s occurs, and a frequency di fference of several
megacycl es per second may be obser ved at a gi ven tuner setti ng when
SEC, 195] HIGH-POWER S-BAND TUNABLE
TAZLE 19,12 .FI I EQUENCY BANDS OF MA~NETBONS
See Fi g. 1920
MAGNETRONS 759
OF THE 4J70 TO 4J77 SERI ES
Type No. Frequency at A, Me/see Frequency at B, Me/see
4J70 3540 3710
4J71 3390 3560
4J72 3240 3410
4J73 3090 3260
4J74 2990 3110
4J75 2893 3010
4J76 2790 2910
4J77 2690 2810
that setti ng i s approached from di fferent di recti ons. The l i fe expectancy
of the di aphragm i s 10,000 cycl es.
Ei ther the output or the mounti ng fl ange at the base of the i nput
pi pes may be used to mount the magnetron. The l atter mounti ng i s
~G. 19.23 .Cutaway vi ew of 4J77 magnetron.
most useful wher e i t i s desi red topressuri ze thehi gh-vol tage components.
A magnet wi th a 1.770-i n. gap and 1~-i n.-di ameter pol e faces i s requi red.
The wei ght of the magnetron and i ts associ ated magnet i s approxi matel y
40 l b.
760
TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS [SEC.196
A mor e compl ete descri pti on of the theor y and constructi on of thi s
seri es of magnetrons may be found i n Radi ati on Laboratory Repor t
No. 1006, The 4J70-4J77 Seri es of Tunabl e Magnetrons. 1
19.6. The HP1OV Hi gh-power S-band Magnetron.The HP1OV i s
a hi gh-power pul sed magnetron, operati ng at a fi xed frequency i n the
. . - .. . .. .. . . ..
L.. _..-.. . .. . .. . -.
FI G, 19.24, HP1OV magnetron.
2800 I tI c/sec band. Pul se-power
outputs rangi ng up to 2500 kw
are avai l abl e. The cathode i s
mounted radi al l y, and the hi gh-
voltagc input is in the form of a
mouldcd bakelite bushing designed
to plug into a receptacle on the
pulse transformer (Figs, 1!).24 and
19.25), The coaxial output fits
standard I{-in. magnetron cou-
plings, which must be pressurized
for high-power operation (above
1000 to 1500 kw). A detached
magnet is used.
Useful pulse voltage inputs
range from 30 to 50 kv. At the
lower voltage, operation is stable
between 60 and 200 pulse amp,
while at the 50-kv level the cur-
rent range is restricted to the
region between 100 and 140 pulse
amp by excessi ve i nternal sparki ng at the upper l i mi t and by deteri ora-
ti on of the spectrum at the l ower (owi ng, possi bl y, to the poor form
of the i mpressed vol tage pul se). Operati on bel ow 30 kv i s sati sfactory,
but the effi ci ency i s l ow. Rel i abl e pul se-power outputs extend from
500 to 2500 kw as shown i n Fi g. 1926, wi th a recommended operat-
i ng poi nt of 1850 gauss, 48 kv, and 130 amp at the 2500-kw l evel . The
rated maxi mum average power i nput i s 2500 watts, and the maxi mum
I The magnetrons numbered 4J31 through 4J35 are fi xed-frequency pul sed osci l -
l ators wi th an anod~bl ock and cathode structure i denti cal wi th that of the 4J76
and 4J77. These magnetrons have operati ng characteri sti cs qui te si mi l ar to those
of the tunabl e seri es, and they are mechani cal l y i nterchangeabl e wi th types 4J74 to
4J77. The frequenci es l i e i n the range 2700 to 2900 Me/see, wi th the di fferent types
separated by c}l anges i n strap capaci tance.
The group of tubes fr om 4J36 through 4J41 has an anode-bl ock and cathode
structure i denti cal wi th that of the 4J70 and 4J71; these types are mechani cal l y and
el ectri cal l y i nterchangeabl e wi th the 4J70 to 4J73 group. The frequenci es are fi xed
and l i e between 3400 and 37oO Mc /sec.
ZData for Sec. 19.6 submi tted by R. T. Young, Jr.
,
SEC. 19.6] THE HPI O V HI GH-PO WER S-BAND MAGNETRON
761
55 ~
Frequency =2830 Mc /see
Pulse duration =0.85 A sec
585 pulses per second
2500 kw
so Pulling figure =10 Mc /see
2000 kw
/
1000 kw
y! 45
5
0
z
.-
/
.
%
CY40
~~ G /
@ . ~.
35 ~
< -
/ d
/
0
/
/
e
/
R.
~ ~
/
/ .2574
% 60 80
100 120 140 160
Peak amperes
FIG. 19.26.Performance chart for HP1OV magnetron.
762
TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 19.6
pulse duration is 1 psec. Pulling figures for average tubes fall between
8 and 13 Me/see, and it is evident from Fig. 1927 that nothing is to be
gained by increasing this loading.
The screened and oxide-coated cathode is provided with end shields
which, to inhibit sparking, present only flat or rounded surfaces to the
anode block, while for the same reason the supporting leads are designed
for the minimum field gradients consistent with available clearances. A
current of 8.5 amp at 13 volts is drawn by the heater when the magnetron
is started; during operation the heater should be turned off. Localized
Reflection coefficient % -
0.6 0.4
Magnetic field
1300 gauss
585 pulses persac 0.85I .I secpulse duration
Frequencyof OMc contour K2820 Me/see
FI G. 19.27 .Rl eke di agram for HP1OV magnetron.
deteri orati on of the central porti on of the cathode duri ng operati on i s
attri buted to excessi ve back bombardment i n thi s regi on because of axi al
nonuni formi ty of the magneti c fi el d and/or of the r-f vol tage. The
unusual l y l ong 10-osci l l ator anode bl ock i s of vane-type constructi on,
wi th a si ngl e ri ng strap, as shown i n Fi g: 19.28. Attempts to i ncrease
the 3 per cent mode separati on of thi s desi gn by a heavi er strappi ng
i ntroduced a mode change at hi gh currents. Vi ol ent 50- to 300-Mc/sec
osci l l ati ons of the cur r ent and vol tage are obser ved i n i sol ated regi ons
of the performance chart; i t i s thought that an el ectroni c i nstabi l i ty,
characteri sti c of the l ong anode bl ock, may cause an exci tati on of an
osci l l atory ci rcui t i n the pul se gener ator or i nput l eads. Al l sharp edges
i n the anode bl ock and i n the straps are broken. Characteri sti c scal e
SEC. 19.6] THE HP1OV HI GH-POWER S-BAND MAGNETRON 763
I
Oufput
~ ,R-fcllol(e ,Glassseal ~FleWlesd
1

-
(3
\ M~l ded ~k~]i ~
~ High-voltsgegrease
bushing
Fm. 19.28.Cross sections of HP1OV magnetron.
FI G. 19.13 .CHABACTEBI STI C SCALE FACTORSFOR THE HP1OV MA~NETNON
k, cm @ gauss d, amp u, kv I P,kw $?,mhos Q.
c
%, 70
z
. .
.
10.6 533 70.8 8.03 568 8.82 X 10-3 1500 93
0.033
TABLE 19.14.DI MENSI ONS I N I NCHES OF HP1OV MAQNETRON
a. Anode-bl ock Di mensi ons: See Fi g. 19. l C
a b da d. h t
2.440 2.255 1.181 0.596 I 1.575 0.236
b. Strappi ngDi mensi ons:See Fi g. 19.2a
m n o
q
8 u
0.S01 0.680 0.621 0.060
i
0.100 160
1
764 TYI I CAL MAGNETRONS [SEC, 197
factors aud block dimensions for the HPIO1 are listed in Tables 19.13
and 19.14.
The magnetron is mounted by means of the input bushing. A magnet
with a gap of 2: in. and with pole faces of 2~-in. diameter is required;
the combined weight of the magnet and the magnetron is approximately
100 l b. A water jacket }vhich is an integral part of the block provides
the means of cooling the tube.
Further details of the construction and operation of the HP1OV
may be found in the following reports: Radiation Laboratory Report
IJo. 793, Present Status of High lower at S-Band; Radiation Labora-
tory Report No. 682-6, Line Type Modulator and HP1OV Magnetron
Operation at 6 MegaJvatts; and ~l~lt~ 14423, Final Report ~oncern-
ing Development !Aork Done on Contract OIZMsr-1 116.
19.7. The BM50 Ver y Low Power X-band Magnetron.l Of i nterest
because i t i s desi gned to oper ate at a pul se-power output of onl y 50 watts,
FI G. 19.29.Anode bl ock and cathode of B M50 magnetron.
the BM50 i s an experi mental magnetron wi th a fi xed frequency of 9375
Me/see. I t has been tested under c-w as wel l as pul sed condi ti ons of
operati on. The cathode i s axi al l y mounted, and the output ci rcui t i s
of the coaxi al -to-wavegui de transi ti on type, as shown i n Fi g. 19.29. An
attached magnet has been used.
As a pul sed osci l l ator, the BM50 operates stabl y over a range of
pul se-i nput currents and vol tages from 75 to 300 ma and from 600 to
1600 vol ts. Refer ence to Fi g. 19.30 i ndi cates that the correspondi ng
I Data for Sec. 19.7 submi tted by J. R. Fel dmei er.
SEC. 19.7] THE BM60 VERY LOW POWER X-BAND MAGNETRON 765
1600 1
Pulse duration = 0.48 ,u sec
1090 pulses per sec
Pulling figure =15 me/see
50 N
1400
6280 G
1200
&
/
s
x
g 5360 G
1000
I
4260 G/
800
\
\
\ /
600
0 50 100 150
Peak milliamperes
FI G. 19.30,Performance chart for BM51J maguetron.
,Cj
& +>
@a
%e
<b
\~
+3 xx
~o \~
\+r
$$
+ \
$
*** \
5 &fc +
.$
\
1 A
+
\/
% ,
><
\
.:/ ~
Reflection coefficient
I
\\
0.8
Magnetic field
4450 gauss
1090 pulses persec
OA8# sec pulse duration
Frequency of O Mc contour =9378 Mczsec
Fm. 19.31 .Ri eke di agram for B M50 magnetron.
766 TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 19.8
pulse-power output ranges from 10 to 100 watts. At currents i n excess
of 300 ma mode i nstabi l i ty i s encountered, whereas bel ow 75 ma the
effi ci ency i s ver y l ow. Because of the heavy i nternal l oadi ng i ntroduced
A-
Ancdeblwk mwt-
(Notestaggering
>fvanes)
B
/
Coaxial
,
halo IOOP-,
/
output
GlassS(
>
Enlargedwewof vanetip
FIG. 19.32.Cross sections of BM50
magnetron. The verti cal posi ti on of the
vane marked A is that of a vane adj scent to
the one i n the pl ane of the drawi ng. Thi s i s
done to i l l ustrate thei r staggered arrangement.
by copper l osses, operati on i s
unstabl e at pul l i ng fi gures i n ex-
cess of 15 Me/see (see Fi g. 19.31).
From the pushi ng con~ours ~-
cl uded i n Fi g. 19.30, i t may be
seen that pushing is moderate at
currents above 150 ma.
The s c r e e n e d, oxi de-coated
cathode has a heater rati ng of
0.33 amp at 6.0 vol ts. Li mi ted by
thi s cathode, whi ch was desi gned
for mdsed oDerati on, the BM50
has ~een osc~lated under c-w con-
ditions at input powers up to 130
ma at 840 volts. Figure 19.32
i l l ustrates the novel method used
i n strappi ng the 20-vane anode
bl ock; to avoi d the necessi ty for
gr oovi ng the ti ny vanes, they are
staggered axially, so that the sin-
gle ring strap at either end of
the anode rests onlv on alternate
vanes. Characteri ~ti c scal e fac-
tors and di mensi ons for thi s bl ock
are l i sted i n Tabl es 19.15 and
1916. Mor e detai l ed i nforma-
ti on may be obtai ned from Radi a-
ti on Laboratory Repor t No. 1007.
19.8. 2J41 Low-power Stabi -
l i zed X-band Magnetron.-The
2J41 magnetron i s a pul sed osci l l ator, tunabl e over the range from 9290
to 9330 Me/see. Pul se-power outputs up to 1.25 kw may be obtai ned,
wi th a frequency stabi l i ty of 1 Me/see over a wi de range of l oad, tem-
perature, and i nput condi ti ons. An X-band-wavegui de coupl i ng
termi nates the output ci rcui t, and the magnet i s an attached type.
Operati on of the 2J41 i s sati sfactory between 0.25 and 2.0 pul se amp
and between 1.25 and 3.0 kv. At currents hi gher or l ower than those
i ndi cated, mode i nstabi l i ty i s encountered. As may be seen from Fi g.
19.33, the useful pul se-power output ranges from 200 to 1250 watts;
1Data for Sec. 19,8 submi ttedby M. A. Herl i n.
i
SEC. 19.8] 2J41 LOW-POWER STABILIZED X-BAND MAGNETRON 767
the maxi mum average power i nput i s 10 watts, and the maxi mum pul se
durati on i s 0.5 psec. The pul l i ng fi gure i s 1.5 Me/see (see Fi g. 19.34),
and the pushi ng fi gure i s approxi matel y 2 Me/see per amp.
3.0
/
2,5
2000G
\
g
g
\
z 2.0 ~
I
x 1600G
$
\
\
!
1400G
\
1.5
Frequency =9309 Mc /see
Pulse duration =0.5 i sec
6000 pulses per ses
Pulling f~ure =1.3 ,Mc/see
1.0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1,0 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.0
Peak amperes
FIQ. 19.33.Performance chart for 2J41 magnetron.
An unscreened, oxi de-coated cathode wi th a heater rati ng of 0.36
amp at 5.0 vol ts i s used. Characteri sti c scal e factors for the 12-osci l -
TABLE 19.15.CHARACTERI STI C SCALE FACTORS FOR BM50 MAGNETRONS
h cm @, gauss 9, amp V, kv (y,kw S, mhos Q.
c
% 70
E
3.20 1045 0.227 0.160 0.0363 1.42 X 10-! 600 71 0.047
TABLE 19.16.DI MENSI ONS I N I NCHES OF BM50 MAGNETRON
a. Anode Di mensi ons: See Fi g. 19.l c
a b d. d, e
f
h t
0.264 0,458 0.101 0.065 0.022 0.008 0.095* 0.015
*Vane l ength.
b. Strappi ng Di mensi ons: See Fi g. 19.2d
m n 8 u
0.110 0070 0005 0.005
--. -
768 TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 19.8
l ater doubl e-ri ng-strapped anode bl ock, shown i n Fi g. 19.35, are gi ven
i n Tabl e 19.17, and the di mensi ons of thi s vane-type bl ock are l i sted i n
Tabl e 1918.
Frequency of OMc contour= 9310 Mc/see
Fm. 19.34, Ri eke di agram for 2J41 magnetron,
TABLE 19.17.CHABACTEBH+.TVC SCALE FACTORS FOE 2J41 MAGNETRON
c
A, cm 6S,gauss 9, amp V, kv (P, kw S, mhos Q.
%, 70
z
750 *
3.22 1450 1.19 0.382 0.455 3.12 X 10-3 5ooot 62 0.033
*Anode bl ock onl y.
t Ancde bl ock and stabi l i zer combi ned.
TAHLE 19,18.DI MENSI ONSI N I NCHESOF 2J41 MAGNETRON
a. Anode Di mensi ons: See Fi g. 19.l c
a b d. d, e
f
h 1
0.250 0.435 0.095 0.040 0.015 0.007 0.202 0.0225
b. Strappi ng Di mensi ons: See Fi g. 19.2e
m n o
P q
T s u
0.153 0.118 0.078 0.063 0.020 0.020 0.015 0.030
SEC. 198] 2J41 LOW-POWER STABI LI ZED X-BAND MAGNETRON
769
The magnetron i s tuned by means of a pl ate suspended above one end
of the bl ock. Thi s pl ate, whi ch appears i n Fi g. 19.35, i s per for ated wi th a
ci rcul ar hol e concentri c wi th the anode bl ock, so that onl y the r ear
porti ons of the osci l l ators are cover ed. Adjustment of a scr ew rai ses
or l owers the tuni ng pl ate, the frequency bei ng i ncreased as the pl ate
approaches the bl ock. A stabi l i -
zati on of approxi matel y 10 i s ob-
tai ned by c o u p 1i n g a hi gh-Q,
temperature-compensated, i nvar
cavi ty to the output l i ne; at thi s
hi gh val ue of stabi l i zati on i t i s
necessary to i n t r o d u c e heavy
mode dampi ng by the i nserti on
of pol yi ron posts i n the wave-
gui de at nul l -vol tage poi nts for
the operati ng m ode. The 40-
Mc/sec tuni ng range shown i n
Fi g. 19.36 i s cover ed by tuni ng
the stabi l i zer onl y; by tuni ng both
the magnetron and the stabi l i zer
a range of 100 Me/see can be
achi eved wi thout excessi ve dr op
i n power or i ncrease i n pul l i ng
fi gure.
Fi gure 19.37 shows the unusual
constructi on used i n the 2J41. A
stai nl ess-steel envel ope, acti ng as
the vacuum seal , surrounds the
bl ock, pol e pi eces, and tuner
mechani sm. The p 01 e pi eces,
whi l e bol ted to the bl ock, are
el ectri cal l y i nsul ated and are oper -
ated at cathode potenti al , so that
they ser ve as end shi el ds. The
Ancdeblock
P
-Cathode
FI G. 19.35.Cross secti ons of 2J41 mag-
netron.
assembl y of magnetron, magnet, and stabi l i zer, wei ghhg 6 l b, i s attached
ri gi dl y to the output fl ange, from whi ch the tube i s to be mounted.
Thi s
i s shown i n Fi g. 19.38. Forced-ai r cool i ng i s not requi red.
Further detai l s of the theor y and performance of the 2J41 may be
obtai ned from the fol l owi ng Radi ati on Laboratory Reports: 525/10/45,
Magnetron Frequency Stabi l i zati on wi th Appl i cati on to the 2J41
Magnetron; and 529/3/45, Performance Characteri sti cs of the
2J41 Stabi l i zed Magnetron and the Effects of Parameter Vari ati on.
770 TYPICAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 194)
19.9. The 2J42 L4w-vol tage X-band Magnetron.~The 2J42 magne-
trons oper ate as pul sed osci l l ators wi th fi xed frequenci es l ocated i n the
band from 9345 to 9405 Me/see. Pul se-power outputs rangi ng up to
20 kw are avai l abl e, and l ater model s of the tube are stabi l i zed by a
factor of 2. The cathode i s mounted axi al l y; and as manufactured, the
0.8 4
Power output
0.6
s
z
\
3$
.5
%
~
z
; 0.4 \
. 2 ;
<
Pullingfigure
%
E --- ---- -~ w
=
x
.E
==
:
L 0.2 - IL
o.ol-LLIJ o
9290 9300 9310 9320 9330
Frequency in Mc Isec
Peak voltage = 2.5 kw Peak current= 0,9 amp
FI G. 19.36.Tuni ng cur ve for 2J41 magnetron.
Fm. 19.37.Expl oded vi ew of 2J41 magnetron.
magnet i s attached to the tube. The output i s of the coaxi al -to-wave-
gui de transi ti on type, termi nati ng i n an X-band-wavegui de coupl er.
The useful range of pul se vol tage and cur r ent i nputs l i es between
4 and 8 kv and between 2.5 and 6.5 amp, wi th correspondi ng pul se-power
outputs from 5 to 20 kw. To make use of the ful l range an el ectromagnet
must be substi tuted for the standard permanent magnet. At vol tages
1Data for Sec. 19.9 submi tted by J. R. Fel dmei er.
I
SEC. 19.9] THE 2J42 LOW-VOLTAGE X-BAND MAGNETRON 771
FI G. 19.38.2J41 magnetr on and magnet.
/
/
1
I
~ 20 Kw
5670 G
I
1
\
/-=
+=
G4850 G
/
[
L-
I
/
10Kw
Frequency= 9~75 Mc /sec.
4020 G
Pulse duration = 0.7 # sec
1050 pulses, per sec.
5 Kw Pulling figure =14 Mc /sec.
o 2 4 6 8 10
Peakamperes
GOperating line for standard attached magnet
FIG. 19.39.Performance chart for 2J42 magnetron.

772 TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 19.9
Frequency of O mc contour K 9375 me/see
~G. 19.40.R1eke dlagramfor2J42 magnetron.
TMJLE 19.19.CHAHACTERI STI CSCALE FACTORSFOR 2J42 MAGNETRON
A, cm 6s,gauss ~, amp v, kv 6, kw S, mhos Q.
c
m, 70
z

3.20 1550 3.90 1.064 4.15 3.66 X 10-3 900 75 0.019
TABLE 19.%3.-DI MENSI ONS I N I NCHES FOR 2J42 MAGNETRON
a. Anode Di mensi ons: See Fi g. 19.l c
a b
A
d. h t
0.276 0.478 0.15s 0.0s3 0.206 0.0205
b. Strappi ng Di mensi ons: See Fi g. 19.2e
m n o
P 9
r s u
0.1s3 0.148 0.10s 0.093 0.020 0,020 0,020 0.035
SEC. 19.9] THE 2T42 LOW-VOLTAGE X-BAND MAGNETRON
773
gr eater than 8 kv, excessi ve sparki ng may occur ; whi l e at currents bel ow
2.5 amp or above 6.5 amp, mode i nstabi l i ty i s encounter ed as i l l ustrated
by Fi g. 1939. Up to 80 watts of average power may be put i nto the
magnetron, and pul se durati ons up to 2.5 ~sec are permi ssi bl e. A
maxi mum pul l i ng fi gure of 15
Me/see i s speci fi ed (Fi g. 19.40).
For currents gr eater than 4 amp
the pushi ng fi gure i s usual l y l ess
than 1 Me/see per amp.
A screened, ni ckel -sl eeve cath-
ode wi th oxi de coati ng i s used.
Duri ng operati on at average i n-
put power s i n excess of 30 watts,
the normal heater power con-
sumpti on of 0.48 amp at 6.3 vol ts
shoul d be reduced. The 12-osci l -
l ator doubl e-ri ng-strapped anode
bl ock shown i n Fi g. 19.41 i s of
vane-t ype constructi on. Charac-
teri sti c scal e factors for thi s bl ock
are l i sted i n Tabl e 19.19, and tube
di mensi ons are gi ven i n Tabl e
19.20.
Later model s of the 2J42 are
stabi l i zed by i ncl udi ng i n the out-
put ci rcui t a speci al wavegui de
secti on contai ni ng a hal f-wave-
l ength resonant cavi ty formed by
two cyl i ndri cal posts extendi ng
across the gui de. When tuned to
the magnetron frequency, thi s
cavi ty provi des a stabi l i zati on of
2, whi ch has been used to i ncrease
the power output at the 15 Me/see
pul l i ng fi gure rather than to r e-
duce the pul l i ng fi gure. By mak-
Anode
e
-l
Halo oufput loop
FIG, 19.41 .Croea secti ons of 2J42 msg.
netron.
i ng the cavi ty adjustabl e, i t woul d be possi bl e to obtai n a 1 per cent
tuni ng range.
The 27-oz Al ni co V magnet suppl i ed wi th the tube provi des a fi el d
of 5300 gauss at saturati on; thi s fi el d i s r educed duri ng the factory
processi ng unti l the operati ng vol tage at 4.5-amp pul se cur r ent l i es
between 5.3 and 5.7 kv (see Fi g. 19.39). Fi gure 19.42 shows how the
magnet and the bl ock are ri gi dl y attached to the mounti ng pl ate, whi ch
774 TYPI CAL
serves al so as the output fl ange.
MAGNETRONS [SEC. 19.10
Two struts connecti ng the bl ock to
the mounti ng pl ate areused as cool i ng radi ators, andasrnal l cur r ent of
ai r shoul d be di r ected over these duri ng operati on. The wei ght of the
enti re assembl y i s31b.
FI G. 19.42.2J42 magnetron andnmgnet.
19.10. The 725A Magnetron.Thi s magnetron i s a fi xed-frequency
pul sed osci l l ator operati ng at pul se-power l evel s up to 70 kw i n the
frequency band from 9405 to 9345 Me/see. The cathode i s radi al l y
mounted, and a separate magnet must be used. A standard X-band-
wavegui de coupl er termi nates the output ci rcui t, whi ch i s of the coaxi al -
l i ne-to-wavegui de transi ti on type as seen i n Fi g. 19.43.
I Data for Sec. 19.10 submi tted by L, R. Wal ker.
SEC.19.10]
The useful range of
THE 725A MAGNETRON 775
pul se vol tage and cur r ent i ntmts l i es between 7
and 16 kv and between 4 and 16 am-p. As maybe s~en from Fi g. 19.44,
the correspondi ng range of pul se-output power s extends from 10 to 70
kw. Low-power operati on i s l i mi ted by decreasi ng effi ci ency, whi l e
the hi gh-power boundary i s determi ned by arci ng and overheati ng of the
cathode. No mode shi ft i s obser ved wi thi n the operati ng regi on set by
these condi ti ons. The maxi mum average power i nput at a pul se durati on
of 1 psec. and a repeti ti on rate of 1000 pps i s 150 watts. A maxi mum
l\l A I
--- 1--1
10Y
I \l \ I I u /
I I
p-c
,-
J
/
~
\
~ .
.
. --
8
\
3260 G ~
-
/
Fraquency=9375 Mc/aec
3080 G ,
Pulling figure=1O Me/see
6
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Peak amperes
FI G. 19.44.Performance chart for 725A magnetron.
pul se durati on of 2 psec i s permi ssi bl e. Fi gure 19.45 shows a Ri eke
di agram for the 725A; the nomi nal pul l i ng fi gure i s 15 Me/see.
The cathode consi sts of an oxi de-i mpregnated ni ckel mesh, formed by
si nteri ng ni ckel powder to a heavy-wal l ed ni ckel sl eeve.
The heater
rati ng i s 1 amp at 6.3 vol ts; duri ng operati on thi s heater power shoul d
TARLE 19.21 .CHARACTEFUSTI CSCALE FACTORSFOE 725A MAGNETRON
X, cm (0, gauas g, amp o, kv (?, kw S, mhoa Q.
c
9., 70
z
650 75 G 0.107
3.20 1480 7.05 1.82 12.8 3.87 X 10-3 looot 82t 0.0267
G Hole-and-slotversion.
t vane Wrle.
776
TYIICAI> .J I AGNfiTI WNS
7
[SEC. 19.10
coefficient
Magnetic field
5500 gauss
FrectuencY of O Mc contour =9375 Me/see
Fm. 19.45 .Ri eke di agram for 725A magnetron.
Steel insert
\ \
1-lalooutputfOOp
~
FI G. 19.46 .Cross secti ons of 725A magnetron.
SEC. 19.10]
THE 725A MAG.VETRON 777
be reduced. Both vane-type and hole-and-slot anode blocks have been
manufactured, each with 12 oscillators. Characteristic scale factors for
these blocks are listed in Table 19.21, and Table 1J.22 gives the dimen-
sions of both models. The hole-and-slot construction is illustrated by
Fig. 19.46.
TABLE 19.22.DIMENSIONS IN INCHES FOR 725A hf,4GNErRoN
a. Anode Di mensi ons, Hol e-and-sl ot Versi on: See Fi g. 19. l b
a b c d. d. h w
0.537 0391 0.079 0.204 0.102 0.250 0.021
b, Strappi ng Di mensi ons, Hol e-and-sl ot Versi on: See Fi g. 192c
m n o
P q
T s u
0.173 0.152 0.130 0.117 0.010 0.010 0.035 0.047
c. Anode Di mensi ons, Vane Type: See Fi g. 19.l c
a b d. d. h t
0.545 0.524 0.204 0.102 0.250 0.030
d. Strappi ng Di mensi ons, Vane Type: See Fi g. 192e
m n o
P q
r 8 u
0.178 0.153 0.123 0.114 0.014 0.014 0.015 0,025
A magnet wi th a gap of 0.635 i n. and a pol e-ti p di ameter of ~ i n. i s
requi red. The tube i s mounted by means of a ci rcul ar fl ange to whi ch
the anode bl ock and radi ators are ri gi dl y attached. Forced-ai r cool i ng
must be provi ded. The wei ght of the magnetron i s l + l b, whi l e a magnet
sui tabl e for operati ng the tube at 12 kv wei ghs 8 l b.
Several vari ati ons of the 725A have been produced. Type 730A
i s i denti cal except for the posi ti oni ng of the i nput l eads, whi ch are l ocated
180 from the output ci rcui t. The 2J49 and 2J50 di ffer from the 725A
onl y i n frequency, the r-f output of the for mer l yi ng between 9003 and
9168 Me/see and that of the l atter between 8740 and 8890 Me/see.
The 2.153, wi th the same frequency as the 725A, has a speci al cathode
structure desi gned for operati on at hi gh l evel s and at 5-ksec pul se dura-
ti on: at 1 ~sec and 1000 pps the average power i nput can be as hi gh as
230 watts; whereas at 5 ~sec and 200 pps, 200 watts may be put i nto the
tube.
778
TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS
[SEC. 19.11
19s11. The 2J61 Magnetron. The 2J51 i s a mechani cal l y tunabl e
magnetron wi th an attached magnet, and i t i s desi gned for pul sed
operati on i n the frequency range from 8500 to 9600 Me/see.
Basi cal l y, the tube i s an adaptati on of the Western El ectri c 725 to
permi t mechani cal tuni ng.
The anode bl ock i n the tube i s a si mpl e
vari ati on of the bl ock i n the 725 (see F~g. 19.47a). Operati on i s at 14 kv
and 14-amp pul se cur r ent at the magneti c fi el d suppl i ed by the attached
magnets. The output ci rcui t used for the 725 has been modi fi ed i n
di mensi onal detai l s so that the tube, when l oaded by a matched wave-
Fm. 19.47a.~utaway vi ew of 2J51 magnetr on.
gui de, wi l l oper ate at a fai rl y uni form l evel of power output and pul l i ng
fi gure over the frequency band.
The cathode i s mounted axi al l y through one pol e pi ece of the tube.
The tuni ng mechani sm i s mounted through the other pol e pi ece. Tuni ng
i s accompl i shed by means of 12 copper pi ns whi ch may be i nserted to a
vari abl e depth i n the 12 hol es of the anode bl ock. The pi ns are attached
to a pl unger whi ch i s actuated by an external mechani sm through a
monel -metal bel l ows. The external dri ve consi sts of a wor m gear whi ch
may be turned from a r emote poi nt by means of a fl efi bl e shaft.
A schemati c cross secti on of the bl ock regi on of the 2J51 i s shown
i n Fi g. 19.47b. hote that the end space between the anode bl ock and
the pol e face haa been modi fi ed at the tuni ng end of the tube. Thi s
I Dsta for Sec. 19.11submi tted by P. Kusch.
SEC. 1911] THE 2J 51 MAGNETRON
779
modi fi cati on ensures that the resonances of the pi n system l i e at hi gher
frequenci es than any of the normal operati ng frequenci es of the tube.
The magnets are adjusted to permi t operati on at 14 kv and 14-amp
pul se cur r ent at mi dband. Four magneti c shunts are provi ded to adjust
Tuning Tuning
pin, pin,
FI G. 19.47b.Cross secti on of 2J51 magnetron showi ng tuni ng pi ns.
70 30
~ 65
%
I 25:;
output power kw
.s
/
-
~ 60
20s:
a
Anode potenti al
= .-
= 55 - -
S2
, 15a&
=
al=
~ 50 -
/
- .
lo~g 1
Pulling figure
/
~
45. ~ ~ ~ ~~
9200 9400 960:
Frequency in me/see
Fm. 19.48.Tuni ng characteri sti cs of 2J51 magnetron.
the fi el d downwards. Operati on at 10 kv and 10-amp pul se cur r ent i s
possi bl e.
The power output, operati ng vol tage, and pul l i ng fi gure for a typi cal
tube are shown i n Fi g. 19.48. The per f ormance chart, the Ri eke di agram,
--- .. .
780
TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 19.12
and characteristic scale factors for the 2J51 at any frequency are essen-
ti al l ysi mi l ar tothose obtai ned for the 725 (see Sec. 19.10).
19.12. 4J50 (4J62, 4J78) Hi gh-power 3-cm Magnetron.-The 4J50
magnetron i s a pul sed osci l l ator wi th a fi xed frequency l yi ng i n the
band between 9345 and 9405 Nfc/sec. I t i s capabl e of a p-be-power
output of 400 kw. The cathode i s axi al l y mounted, and an attached
magnet i s used. Radi o-frequency power i s extr acted through a tr ue
wavegui de output, whi ch termi nates i n a standard 3-cm wavegui de
coupl er.
7 xl
. ...
/
I
\
300 kw
200 kw
250 kw
150 kw
104 kw
50 kw
j700 ~
5340/
5B$&
.
. __
52@>
/
-
- .-
T+-M%%2=
GOperating line for attached magnet as set by manufacturer
-. _- . .
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 *2
Peak amperes
FI G. 19.49.Performance chart for 4J50 (4J52, 4J7S) magnetron.
Useful pul se vol tage and cur r ent i nputs range from 12 to 25 kv and
from 8 to 35 amp. Operati on i s l i mi ted at hi gh power s by arci ng and at
l ow power s by excessi ve pushi ng, al though the tube wi l l oper ate stabl y
at currents as l ow as 2 amp. The rel i abl e range of pul se powers, i ndi -
cated i n Fi g. 1949, extends from 50 to 300 kw. Fi gure 1949 shows the
operati ng l i ne for the attached magnet as suppl i ed and set by the manu-
facturer. The maxi mum average i nput power vari es from 1200 watts
at ~ psec to 500 watts at 5 psec.
At currents i n excess of 15 amp; the
pushi mg fi gure averages 0.2 Me/see per amp; the pul l i ng fi gure i s 12
Me/see.
The cathode structure, whi ch appears i n Fi g. 1950, i s careful l y
desi gned for mechani cal ruggedness and hi gh heat di ssi pati on. A
t Data for Sec. 19.12 submitted by L. R. Wai ker.
SEC. 19. 12] 4J50 (4J52, 4J78) HI GH-POWER SCM MAGNETRON
781
ni ckel mesh, prepared by si nteri ng ni ckel powder on a heavy ni ckel or
mol ybdenum sl eeve, forms the base for the oxi de coati ng. Permendur
end shi el ds on ei ther end of thi s sl eeve ser ve al so to r educe the magnet
gap and to shape the magneti c fi el d.
An oxi de-bl ackened mol ybdenum
cyl i nder extends the cathode structure i nto the opposi te pol e pi ece and
Cathod~ detail
I
.,.-. -w
Y/////
Steel pole piece
3
L
3F
/-4
Radiators
\
Cathode radiator
Input
lead
-r
FI Q. 19.50.Cross aecti ona of 4J50 magnetron. (Cathode i s recentered l ongi tudi nal l y
when col d to al l ow for expansi on of support i n operati on.)
acts as a radi ator to i ncrease the di ssi pati on of heat. The heater i s rated
at 5 amp and 12.6 vol ts; at 600 watts i nput (l -~sec pul se durati on) thi s
power i s r educed 50 per cent, and at hi gher i nputs i t i s sti l l further
decreased. Tabl es 19.23 and 19.24 l i st the characteri sti c scal e factors
and di mensi ons of the 16-osci l l ator anode bl ock, whi ch i s of hol e-and-sl ot
constructi on wi th doubl e-ri ng strappi ng.
-
782 TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 19.12
T.ABLE 19.23 .CHARACTERKSTXCSCAI ,E FACTORS FOR 4J50 AND 4J52 MAGNETRONS
k, cm 63,gauss 9, amp V, kv @, kw ~, mhos Q.
c
v., 70
L

3.20 1470 15,6 2.50 39.0 6.25 X 10-3 900 70 0.116
TABLE 1924.-DI MENSI ONS IN INCHES OF 4J50 AND 4J52 MAGNETRONS
a, Anode Di mensi ons: See Fi g, 19.l ZJ
a b c da d. h w
0.380 0.538 0,087 0.319 0.209 0.250 0.033
b, Strappi ng Di mensi ons: See Fi g. 19.2c
m n o
P !l
r a u
0.225 0.205 0.185 0.175 0.010 0.010 0.018 0.028
The l oadi ng characteri sti cs of the wavegui de output are shown i n
the Ri eke di agram of Fi g. 19.51, and detai l s of i ts constructi on appear
Frequency of OMc contour =9375 Mc/see
Fm. 19,51 .Ri eke di agram for4J50 (4J52, 4J78) magnetron.
i n Fi g. 19.52. At atmospheri c pressure el ectri cal breakdown occurs
across the gl ass wi ndow of the output when the r-f power exceeds 375 kw,
but thi s may be pr evented by pressuri zati on of the l i ne.
SEC. 19.12] 4J50 (4J52, 4J78) HIGH-POWER 3-CM MAGNETRON 783
A four-hol e mounti ng pl ate, shown i n Fi g. 19.53, i s used to support
the magnetron i n operati on. The magnet i s pr otected by a cast-al umi -
num sheathi ng. Forced-ai r cool i ng i s requi red. Total wei ght of the
4J50 i s 9 l b.
Fm. 19.52.Cutaway vi ew of 4J52 magnetr on.
FI G. 19.53.4J5Omagnetr on.
The 4J78 di ffers fr om the 4J50 onl y i n i ts speci fi ed fr equency, whi ch
l i es between 9003 and 9168 Me/see. The 4J52, al though i denti cal wi th
the 4J50 i n anode-bl ock structure and fr equency, i s assembl ed wi th a
l i ghter magnet and a l ess massi ve cathode structure. Fi gure 19.49
.--
784 TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS
[SEC. 19.13
shows the operati ng l i ne for thi s magnet, as set by the manufacturer;
the maxi mum average i nput power i s l i mi ted to 500 watts, and the total
wei ght of the tube i s 5; l b. The 4J52 i s i l l ustrated i n Fi g. 19.52.
19.13. The AX9 Ri si ng-sun Magnetron. The AX9 i s an experi -
mental pul sed osci l l ator operati ng at a fi xed frequency near 9500 Me/see.
A pul se-power output approachi ng 1 megawatt i s achi eved by taki ng
advantage of the l ong anode bl ock made possi bl e by ri si ng-sun construc-
ti on and by desi gni ng the tube for operati on at hi gh magneti c fi el ds.
A di rect wavegui de output i s coupl ed to one of the resonators through a
quarter-wave rectangul ar transformer. The cathode i s mounted axi al l y.
35 [
I
I I Cn.-l , ..., I
/
/
I 400 kw
uuu nw
201 kw
6440G
/
5880G ii
g 25
2
~
.-
x
~
~ 20
3800G
15 ..
P
. .
3170C I I I
462 pulses per ssc
10
. ..- .
L..L A.
o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Peak current (amps)
FIG. 19.54.Performance chart for AX9 magnetron.
Performance characteri sti cs for an AX9 magnetron are shown i n
Fi g. 19.54; note the anomal ous effi ci enci es i n the nei ghborhood of 3500
gauss. The tube i s i ntended for operati on at magneti c fi el ds gr eater
than 5000 gauss and at currents above 30 amp. The decr ease i n effi ci ency
at hi gh magneti c fi el ds i s l ess pronounced than i s usual i n the ri si ng-
sun desi gn because of the rel ati vel y l ow rati o of the cavi ty depths i n
thi s tube. At hi gh pul se-power l evel s the AX9 must be oper ated at
l ow duty rati os i n or der to avoi d excessi ve cathode heati ng; the maxi mum
average i nput power i s 800 watts. When the output power exceeds
500 kw, the r-f l i ne i s pressuri zed to pr event breakdown, whi ch occurs
parti cul arl y near the wi ndow of the magnetron output. A Ri eke di a-
I Data for Sees, 19.13 through 19.17 submi tted by S. l fi l l man.
SEC. 19.13] THE AX9 RI SI NG-SUN MAGNETRON
7S5
gram for the tube i s shown i n Fi g. 1955. The pul l i ng fi gure i s approxi -
matel y 16 Me/see.

Magnetic field=
Peak current K
4400 gauss
86Jl pulses per sac
Pulse duration 0.78 M sec
F1~. 19.55.Ri eke di agram for AX9 magnetr on.
ass i ndz ~
4
Waveguide
output
structure
r
// 3eeticmAA
perrrsendu~end shialds
er
.. 6A..
(Ill
(b)
Fm. 19.56.Cross secti ons of AX9 magnetr on.
Fi gure 19.56 i l l ustrates the essenti al features of the AX9 desi gn. The
depth rati o TI of the resonators i s about 1.6, whi ch i s appreci abl y ,J.ess
786
TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 19.14
than that of the 3J31 magnetron (Sec. 1914). The mode separati on
between the operati ng or (n = 9)-mode and the (n = 8)-mode i s onl y
4 per cent as compared wi th 7 per cent for the 3J31. Permendur end
shi el ds si mi l ar to those of the 4J50 (Sec. 19.12) are used on the cathode.
Characteri sti c scal e factors and di mensi ons are l i sted i n Tabl es 19.25
and 1926.
The l ong anode bl ock of the AX9 resul ts i n a gap of 0.920 i n. between
the i nserted magnet pol e pi eces and requi res the use of a magnet unusual l y
heavy for tubes operati ng i n thi s frequency regi on. A magnet capabl e
of suppl yi ng 6000 gauss woul d wei gh approxi matel y 40 l b.
TABLE 19.25 .CH.ARACTERI STI C SCALE FACTORS FOR AX9 MAGNETRON
A, cm @, gauss V, kv
Q. QE %, 70
3.16 1220 3,45 1250 300 80
Thi s desi gn has not reached producti on (1946), an,] onl y a smal l
number of experi mental magnetrons have been studi ed. No l i fe data
are avai l abl e.
TARLE 19.26.DI MENSI ONS I N I NCHES FOR AX9 MAGNETRON
See Fi g. 19.I I z
a d. d. d, d. h t
0.920 0.415 0.257 0.757 0.957 0.800 0.043
19.14. The 3J31 and 3J21 Ri si ng-sun Magnetrons.The 3J31 i s a
pul sed magnetron wi th a pul se-power output of about 50 kw at a fi xed
frequency of 24,000 Me/see. A di rect wavegui de output i s coupl ed to
one of the anode-bl ock cavi ty resonators through a quarter-wave r ec-
tangul ar transformer. The cathode i s mounted radi al l y, and the magnet
i s separate from the tube.
Fi gure 19.57 shows the performance chart of a representati ve tube.
The useful range of peak vol tage and cur r ent i nputs l i es between 11 and
16 kv and between 6 and 18 amp, wi th correspondi ng pukw-power out-
puts rangi ng from 20 to 50 kw. Low-cur r ent operati on i s l i mi ted by
hi gh pushi ng, poor spectrum, and mode i nstabi l i ty, whi l e the hi gh-
cur r ent l i mi t i s set by excessi ve sparki ng. At magneti c fi el ds l ess than
6800 gauss the effi ci ency becomes l ow and ther e i s a possi bi l i ty of i nter-
fer ence from the (n = 8)-mode. Operati on at fi el ds gr eater than 8400
gauss i s i nadvi sabl e because of the l oss of effi ci ency that occurs i n the kH
r egi on fr om 10,500 to 15,000 gauss-cm; thi s phenomenon i s typi cal of
ri si ng-sun magnetrons.
SEC. 19.14] THE 3J31 AND 3.721 RI SI NG-SUN MAGNETRONS 787
16
I
1
Frequency =24,000 Mc kc
50 kw
Pulse duration =0.2$ P sac
1970 pulses par sac
30 kw
15
I
20 kw~
/
12
I I
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Peakcur r ent in amps
FI G, 19.67.Performaqce chart for 3J31 magnetron.
t
_
+10 Mc -
/ ~,
0.8 0.6( 0.4[
o.2\l /al
br.
Fm. 19+8. -Ri eke di agram for 3J31 magnetron.

788 YYPI CAI , .11A(;NETI WNS
[sm. 19.14
The ni ckel cathode i s scr eened and oxi de-coated. I n starti ng the
tube the heater draws 1.7 amp at 6 vol ts. The usual operati ng poi nt
i s at 7600 gauss, 14 amp, and 14 k~~,wi th a pul se durati on of 0.5 psec
and a duty rati o of 0.0005. Under these condi ti ons the heater may be
turned off, and the magnetron wi l l have a useful l i fe of over 200 hr.
r Waveguideoutmt
Iron
pole
glece
output
transformer
FI G. 19.59.Cross secti ons of 3J31 magnetron.
The nomi nal pul l i ng fi gure i s 25 Me/see (see Fi g. 19.58), whi l e pushi ng
averages 0.5 M c/see per amp i n the normal operati ng regi on.
Ri si ng-sun constructi on i s used i n the anode bl ock, whi ch has 18
sector-shaped resonators of the open-cavi ty type, wi th a depth rati o
r, of 1.8. Characteri sti c scal e factors and di mensi ons are tabul ated i n
SEC. 19.14] THE 3.X31 AND 3J21 RISING-SUN h~AGNETRO.VS
789
Tabl es 1927 and 1928. Detai l s of the desi gn of the 3J31 are shown
i n Fi g. 19.59. The l i ds contai n i ron i nserts, l eavi ng an i nternal ai r gap
of 0.410 i n. The magnet that i s appl i ed to these pol e pi eces has a gap of
0.710 i n. and a pol e-face di ameter of ~ i n. The wei ght of the tube,
together wi th the magnet whi ch i s normal l y suppl i ed, i s 15 l b. For ced-
Fma. 19.61.Cutaway vi ew of 3J21 magnetron,
. ~
FI G. 19.62.3J21 magnetron.
ai r cool i ng i s requi red. Fi gure 19.60 shows the external appearance
of the 3J31; a mor e compl ete descri pti on of i ts operati on maybe found i n a
techni cal r epor t of the Col umbi a Uni versi ty Radi ati on Laboratory.
The 3J21 magnetron (Fi gs. 19.61 and 19.62) i s a modhi cati on of the
3J31. I n addi ti on to an axi al l y-mounted cathode and attached magne~
790
TYPICAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 19.15
i t has a stabi l i zi ng cavi ty i ncorporated i n the wavegui de output. The
cavi ty stabi l i zes the magnetron by a factor of 2 and i ncreases the power
output and effi ci ency 15 per cent.
The usual operati ng poi nt i s 15 amp
and 15 kv at a pul se durati on of 0.5 psec and a duty rati o of 0.0005;
thi s duty rati o may be nearl y doubl ed i f the heater i s turned off duri ng
operati on.
The 3J31 has al so been used as the basi s for scal i ng HI -vane open-
cavi ty ri si ng-sun magnetrons to wavel engths rangi ng from 0.9 to 4.0 cm.
Tabl es 19.27 and 19.28 gi ve the characteri sti c scal e factors and some
of the 3J31 tube di mensi ons.
TABLE 1927,-CHARACTERI STI C SCALE FACTORS OF THE 3J31 MAQNETSON
A, cm m, gauss V, kv G, kw
Q. QE 7., 70
. ,
1.25 3000 3.3 45 800 400 65
TABLE 1928.-TuBE DI MENS1ONS I N I NCHES OF 3J31 MAGNETRON
See Fi g. 19.l R
b d. d, d, d, h t
0.469 0.160 0.096 0.288 0.390 0.150 0.017
19.15. 22-cavi ty Ri si ng-sun Magnetron.-Thi s ri si ng-sun magnetron
i s ver y si mi l ar i n constructi on to the 3J31 tube. I t i s desi gned for about
the same wavel ength and oper ati ng condi ti ons as the 3J31, di ffer i ng
fr om i t onl y i n that the number of cavi ty resonators i n the bl ock i s 22
i nstead of 18. Thi s i s the l argest number of resonators used i n a succes~
ful ri si ng-sun magnetr on havi ng open cavi ti es and bl ock desi gn param-
eters that are not parti cul arl y cri ti cal . (A seal ed ver si on of thi s tube
at 6 mm i s currentl y under devel opment at the Col umbi a Uni vemi ty
Radi ati on Laborato~. A pul sed output power as hi gh as 40 kw haa
been observed.)
The i mportant tube di mensi ons are l i sted i n Tabl e 1930. No
photographs or cross-secti onal vi ews are gi ven for thi s tube, as these
woul d be practi cal l y i denti cal wi th those shown i n Fi gs. 19.59 and 19.60
for the 3J31 tube. The anode-bl ock di mensi ons i n Tabl e 19.30 cor -
respond to a cavi ty depth rati o of about 1.75 and gi ve a wavel ength
separati on between the ~-mode (n = 11) and the (n = 10)-mode of
about, 5 per cent.
The performance characteri sti cs of a 22-cavi ty magnetron are shown
i n Fi g. 1963. These are so si mi l ar to those of the 18-vane 3J31 mag-
netr on that they wi l l not be further di scussed. Thk appl i es al so to the
SEC. 19.16] THE CWSED-$ND 38-CAVITY RISING-SUN MAGNETRON 791
,
17 -
,
Frequency = 23,6@l mc&sc
100 kw~
Pulse duration =0.23 P sec
Pulling figure =20 mciwc
960 pulses per sac _ _
15
20 kw /y
8500G=
g
s
@OOOGA
5 13
x
$
75m GY
11
/
6500G ~
-
60iIOG=
9:
I
[ I I
I
6 11 16 21 26
Peak amperes
F]cJ. 19.63 .Performance chart of 22-cavi ty ri si ng-sun magnetron.
operati ng condi ti ons and l i fe of the tube. Onl y a rel ati vel y smal l
number of these tubes have been constructed and tested.
TABLE 19.29.-CHARACTERI STI C SCALE FACWJRS FOR 22-CAVITY
RI SI NG-SUNMAGNETRON
Tube h, cm @, gauss u, kv (?, kw Q.
QE %, 70
N
.
P2 1.21 2700 3.0 50 two 500 60 22
TABLE19WJ.DKMENSI ONS FOR 22-CAVI TY RI SI NG-SUN MAGNETRON
Ses Fi g. 19.l a
da d. d, d. h t
0.181 0.116 0.311 0.410 0.170 0.0145
19.16. The Cl osed-end !18-cavi ty Ri si ng-sun Msgnetron.-Thi s i s an
experi mental pul sed magnetron wi th a riaiig-sun anode bl ock of the
cl osed-end type. The magnetron was desi gned for frequenci es near
24,CKMMc/swc for the purpose of devel opi ng a tube that coul d readi l y
be scal ed to hi gher frequenci es. Ass i n the 3J31 magnetron, an axi al l y
mounted cathode and di rect wavegui de output are used.
1
,.
i
792
TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS (SEC. 1916
I
1
A descri pti on of the essenti al features of the 38-vane magnetron is
,
I
given in the sectional view (Fig. 19.64) and in Fi g. 1965. For con- ~
structi onal reasons, cyl i ndri cal hol es are used i n the l arge cavi ti es of
,
the bl ock, produci ng amo&fi cati on of thestrai ght sector-shaped cavi ti es ~
commonl y found i n a ri si ng-sun osci l l ati ng system.
I f the hol es wer e
repl aced by equi val ent sector-shaped cavi ti es, the val ue rl for the resul t-
i ng rati o of cavity depths woul d be about 2.7. The hei ght h of the
cl ~sed-end bl ock i s O.65L
Cover
I
Wavegui$e
I
,
Fm. 19.64 .&oss secti ons of cl osed-end 38-cavi ty ri si ng-sun magnetron.
The l arge val ues of the cathode and anode di ameters are parti cu-
l arl y noteworthy i n thi s magnetron. The anode ci i arneter i s about
tW&thi r& of a wavel ength. Thi s represents the hi ghest rati o of d~/ X
that has been usedi n a successful magnetron.
The performance characteri sti cs of a typi cal tube are shown i n Fi g.
19.66. The advantage of thel arge number of resonators i smadeeti dent
by compari ng the magneti c fi el d val ues at the opti mum effi ci ency regi on
wi th those for the 3J31 magnetron. The rel ati vel y hi gh currents appear-
i ng on the performance chart are another resul t of the use of a l arge
number of resonators. The i ncreased heat di ssi pati on made possi bl e
by the l arge cathode si ze i s not evi dent from the data suppl i ed i n the
performance chart, because experi ments wi th the tube wer e l i mi ted to
a study of the possi bi l i ti es of the osci l l ati ng ci rcui t. The operati on of
I
SEC. 19.16] THE CLOSED-END 3&CA VI YY RI SI NG-SUN MAGNETRON 793
the magnetr on i s rel ati vel y fr ee fr om troubl es due to mode changes,
despi te the fact that the wavel ength separati on between the r-mode
(n = 19) and the (n = 18)-mode i s onl y about 1 per cent. Tabl es 19.31
and 19-32 gi ve the characteri sti c scal e factors and some of the tube
TABLE 19.31.CHARACTERI STI C SCALE FACTOSSFOR 3&CAV1TY MAGNETRON
Tube type A, cm 63,gauss u, kv QV
QE %, 70

Cl osed-end3&vane. .
1.30 2060 3.05 1000 S00 56
Cl osed-end2&vane. 1.26 2630 3.35 860 1030 46
TAELE 19.32.DI MENSI ONS FOR 3&CAVI TY MAGNETRON
See Fi g. 19.l a and b
d. d, d, h t c
0.339 0.257 0.479 0.350 0.015 0.079
794 TYPI CAL MAGNETRONS F~C. 19.16
18
Frequency =23,050 me/see
Pulse duration K 0,21P w
/
Pulling figura K12, mc/
16
6790 G
g
6340G
s
$14
I
/
$
5950 G
,/239+
/
12
0
5550 G
/
//
__- ~-
1790
10
421,0 G
2 8 14 20 26 32
Peek amperas
Flu. 19.66.Performance chart for 38-cavi ty ri si ng-sun magnetron.
4.0
3460
\
\ \.
3290
\
3,5
g
I
: 3.0
z 2650 H
2400 H
2.5
\
2270- ~
l W watts
200watts
2140gauss~~
2.0
0 200 400 600 800 1000
Milliamperes
FIQ. 19,67.Performance chart for XCR magnetron.
i
I
1
I
SEC. 19.17] THE XCR HI GH-POWER 2.6-CM C-W MAGNETRON
di mensi ons. Characteri sti c scal e factors are al so l i sted for
desi gn havi ng but 26 resonators.
R
795
a si mi l ar
~
o.o15<~
+
G--
=
c:
F*
Q
,\
0,0075
~~ ,
\\
51 Scal e
17Cavities
equally sDaced
Fm. 19.68.Tranaverse crose sections of XCR magnetron.
guide
ar wave.
sformer
r sleeve
I
Cover plate
~ I \Anode block
Water cooling jacket
F]~. 19.69.Longi tudi nal cr oss eecti on of XCR megnetron.
19s17. The XCR Hi gh-power 2.6-cm C-w Magnetron.-Thi s magn~
tr on i s a 34-vane experi mental tube that uti l i zes a ri si ng-sun anode
bl ock of the cl osed-end type. The tube i s i n an earl y stage of devel op-
796 TYPICAL MAGNETRONS [SEC. 19.17
ment at the Col umbi a Uni versi ty Radi ati on Laboratory, andi tsdescri p-
ti on i s i ntended pri nci pal l y as an i ndi cati on of the output power
possi bi l i ti es of c-w magnetrons at short wavel engths. At an operati ng
frequency of about 11,500 Me/see, an r-f output of 900 watts has been
observed. The performance of the best of the few magnetrons that
have been constructed up to the ti me of the present wri ti ng i s shown i n
Fi g. 19.67; compl ete test i nformati on i s not avai l abl e for thi s magnetroo.
Because of the absence of data on the Qs, the ci rcui t effi ci ency i s not
known. Ther e i s good ground for bel i evi ng, however , that the el ec-
troni c effi ci enci es are not substanti al l y di fferent from those of pul sed
ri si ng-sun magnetrons operati ng at correspondi ng val ues of H/HO.
The essenti al constructi onal features of the 34-cavi ty magnetron
are shown i n the two secti on drawi ngs (Fi gs. 1968 and 19.69). The
anode bl ock i s compl etel y cl osed. The di mensi ons cor r espond to a
bl ock hei ght of 0.78A, a cavi ty-depth rati o of 2.63, an Ho of 980 gauss,
and a V of 700 vol ts. The axi al l y mounted hel i cal cathode i s made
of 0.040-i n. tungsten wi re, requi ri ng about 45 amp at 3.3 vol ts for
the starti ng of the magnetron. Onl y a fracti on of thi s power , how-
ever , need be suppl i ed when the tube i s operati ng wi th hi gh i nput power .
The wavegui de desi gn for the tube i ncl udes a rectangul ar gui de trans-
for mer and a mi ca wi ndow.1
1 Professor W. E. Lamb, Jr., has ki ndl y permi tted the publ i cati on of the pr e-
l i mi nary resul ts that he haa obtai ned wi th thi s tube.
Index
A
Absorpti on method, 704
Acti on functi on, 226
Adi abati c theory, 357
Admi ttance, 50, 292, 293, 300
of annul ar-sector resonator, 62
characteri sti c, 113, 461
computati on of, 77
of cyl i ndri cal si de resonator, 59
of el ectron stream, 214
el ectroni c, 293, 312
of i nteracti on space, 63, 84
of rectangul ar-sl ot ai de resonator, 57
of si de resonators, 56
Al eksereff, N. T., 7
Al ni co V, 542, 547, 548
Ameri can Chemi cal Pai nt Company,
675
Ameri can Lava Corporati on, 689
Anode, doubl e-ri ng-strapped, 460
strapped, ci rcui t constants for, 465
Anode bl ock, 11, 49, 406
cl osed-end, 69
fabri cati on of, 649-662
hol e-and-sl ot, 14
ri si ng-6un, 437
Anode-bl ock hei ght, 473
Anode di ameter, 472
rati o of, to cathode di ameter, 105
to I I -mode wave-l ength, 104
Anode hei ght, 439
Anode-segment wi dth, rati o of, to gap
wi dth, 107
Arci ng, 737
Arnol d Engi neeri ng C!empany, 542, 551,
552
Ashki n, A., 500
Automati c-frequency control , 623
AX9 magnetron, 429, 784-786
B
Back-bombardment power, 411,437,520,
525, 529
as functi on of total sl ot conductance G,
527
Bandwi dth, 390
Bafi os, A., Jr., 594, 599
Bartol Research Foundati on, 692
Bel l Tel ephone Laboratori es, 564, 683.
686, 687, 689
Bel mont Smel ti ng and Refi ni ng Works,
I nc., 667
Bi erwi rth, R. A., 668
Bl oom, L. R., 684
Bl ow-i n, 489
Bl um, W., 676
BM50 magnetron, 429, 76&766
Boot, H. A. H., 10
Boundary condi ti ons, 414
cathode, 257
Brazi ng, 662-670
preci si on, 670
probl ems i n, 670
Brazi ng al l oys, 664-667
Breakdown, 641
i n r -f l i ne, 738
Breakdown temperature, 529
Bri l l orri fi steady state, 245
Bri ti sh cavi ty magnetron, 8
Brown, G. H,, 668
Buck, J. G., 676
Bui l dup, 357, 372
Q for, 365, 374
Bul l et, 482
Bunemann, O., 253
(See al so Smal l -ampl i tude theory)
Bureau of Shi ps, 553
Bur ger , E. E., 677
797
798
c
MICROWAVE
Capaci tance, fri ngi ng, 464
Capaci ty, equi val ent, 108
Cathode, 11, 23, 378, 411
back bombardment of, 285
constructi on of, 68S687
end-mounted, 411, 530
hel i cal -shape, 796
l ocal i zed deteri orati on of, 762
ohmi c l oss i n, 524
overheated, 738
pul sed, thermal behavi or of, 520
radi al -mounted, 411, 529
secondary-emi ssi on, 411
si ze of, 23
thori um oxi de, 534, 692
Cathode-anode short ci rcui t, 736
Cathode boundary condi ti on, 257
Cathode-current densi ty, 440
Cathode di ameter, rati o of, to anode
di ameter, 105
Cathode end shi el ds, 537
Cathode-l ead l oss, 728, 729
Cathode radi ator, 781
Cathode radi us, 440
Cathode sparki ng, 413
Cathode steps, 758
Cathode temperature, range i n, 412
Cathode-temperature characteri sti cs for
2J42 magnetron, 528
Cavi ti es, si de, 49
Cavi ty resonators, 290
Cavi ty stabi l i zati on, 747, 758, 769, 773,
790
Cavi ty tuni ng, 583, 758, 773
Charge di stri buti on, 17
Chemi cal processes used i n constructi on,
674-676
Chemistry and Physics, Handbook of, 676
Choke joi nt, 483
Ci rcui t, cent&-l oop, 191
equi val ent (see Equi val ent ci r cui t)
hal o-l oop, 191
Ci rcui t constants for strapped anodes,
465
Ci rcui t effi ci ency, 36, 181, 185, 421, 626,
717
%, 407
Ci rcui t el ement, el ectron stream as, 291
297
MAGNETRONS
Ci rcui t parameters, of hol e-and-sl ot
resonator, 463
of vane-type resonator, 462
Cl ark, J. E., 677
Cl eani ng, 675
CM16B c-w magnetron, 744747
Coaxi al coupl i ng secti on, 483
Coaxi al -l i ne chokes, 11
Coaxi al -l i ne tuni ng, 746
Coaxi al -output ci rcui t, 169, 191
Coaxi al outpute, 482
Coaxi al -to-wavegui de transi ti ons, 485
Col umbi a Uni versi ty Radi ati on Labora-
tory, 655, 657, 659-661
Components, 340
Computati on of admi ttances, 77
Condon, E. U., 567
Conductance, characteri sti c, 416
el ectroni c, 391
G~, at sl ots, 422
Conductance map, 338, 358, 361
Constant b, contours of, 447
Constant D, l i nes of, 454
Constructi on, chemi cal processes used i n,
674-676
tube, 649697
Contours, 317, 319, 331
effi ci ency, 443
of constant b, 447
Cool i ng by radi ati on, 524
Coomes, E, A., 676
Corni ng Gl ass Works, 679
Coupl i ng, l oop-, 169
segment-fed, 170, 194
strap-fed, 170
Coupl i ng ci rcui ts, strap-fed, 193
Coupl i ng devi ces, I ow-Q, 578
Coupl i ng l oop, 11
Cri ti cal fi el d, 437
Crout, Prescott D., 554
Cruci bl e Steel Company of Ameri ca,
Hal comb Steel Di vi si on, 651
Current, characteri sti c, 416
Cur r ent ampl i tude, 291
Cur r ent densi ty, r educed l i near, 235
Cutoff, 3, 340, 342, 369
Cutoff (Hul l ) vol tage, 238
Cycl otron frequency, 599
Cycl otron-frequency osci l l ati ons, 3
I NDEX 799
D
Demagneti zati on curve, 542
Densi ty, cathode-current, 440
l ow-current, 440
Desi gn formul as, 455
general , 454
Di el ectri c Materi al s, Tabl es of, 679,
680
Di sti l l ati on Products, I nc., 693
Donal , J. S., Jr., 684
Doorknob transi ti on, 485
Doubl e-ri ng strapped systems, 119
Dushman, S., 692
Duty rati os, 8
E
Effi ci ency, 35, 401, 450
el ectroni c (see El ectroni c effi ci ency)
of operati on, 409
Effi ci ency contours, 443, 452
adjusted, 445
Effi ci ency l i nes, 447
Effi ci ency mi ni mum, 437
Ei senstei n, A. S., 676
El ectromagnets, 540
El ectron emi ssi on, 352
El ectron emi tters, 411
El ectron gas, 598
El ectron l eakage, 537
El ectron stream, admi ttance of, 214
as ci rcui t el ement, 291297
El ectroni c admi ttance, 293, 312
El ectroni c conductmce, 391
El ectroni c effi ci ency, 36, 333
El ectroni c susceptace, 410
El ectrons, thermal vel oci ti es of, 211
Ekmtropfuting, Modern, 676
Emti l on, 353, 379
*
el ectron, 352
pri mary, 413
Emi tters, el ectron, 411
metal l i c, hi gh-temperature, 413
End pl ates, i nsul ated, 538
End shi el d, 12, 530
cathode, 537
Pennendur, 781
Energy l oss functi on, 241
Energy product, 541
Equi val ent ci rcui t, 289, 293, 297-299,
311, 330
of si ngl e resonator, 461, 466
Equi val ent rati o T-, 108
ETI O reactance tube, 747
Everhart, E., 620
F
Fi el d di stri buti on for modes, 17
Fi el d equati ons, 217-222
Fi el d fl uctuati ons, 222-228
Fi el d-pattern measurement, 710-713
Fi el d theory, spectrum by, 66
Fi el d uni formi ty, 552
Fi neman, A., 676
Fi sk, J. B., 582
Fl ux l eakage, 645
Fl ux pl otti ng methods, 72
Fl uxes, 664-667
Forgue, S. V., 692
4J31 magnetron, 760
4J33 magnetron, 427
4J35 magnetron, 760
4J36 magnetron, 760
4J39 magnetron, 427
4J41 magnetron, 760
4J50 magnetron, 428, 780-784
4J52 magnetron, 783
4J70 tunabl e magnetron, 756-760
4J77 tunabl e magnetron, 756-760
4J78 magnetron, 783
Fouri er anal ysi s, 340
Frequency, 401
compl ex, 300, 303, 357
Frequency sensi ti vi ty, 482, 582
of output Ci rCU&, 189
Frequency si nk, 328
Frequency stabi l i ty, 35, 408, 409
Frequency stabi l i sati on, 402
G
Gap wi dth, rati o of, to anode-eagr nent
wi dth, 107
GB&mai @L 390~
End space, 11, 91, 498 Gamy tube, 736
End-space effects, 69, 418 General El ectri c Company, 563,573, 62~
End-space resonances, 74
677
800 MICROWAVE
General El ectri c Research Laboratori es,
554
GK13-1 magnetron, 430
Gl ass, No. 704, 483
&rrning, No. 707, 483, 487
Gl asaseal , 482
Kovar-to-, 483
Gl asaes,l aboratory, 679, 680
Gui de, chamfered, 488
H-secti on, 199
l umped, 198
H
H-secti on transformer, 498
H-shaped cr oss secti on, transformer of,
493
Habann-type osci l l ati on, 4
Haeff, A. V., 601
Hal comb Steel Dhi 40n, Cruci bl e Steel
Company of Ameri ca, 651
Hal l , N., 676
Handy and Harmon Company, 667
Hartman, P. L., 582
Hartree, 30
Hartree di agram, 30, 341
Hartrees condi ti on, 340
Heat bal ance, 412, 519
Heater, open, 736
Heater constmcti on, 687-693
Heater power, 402, 411
rated, 528
Hi nman, C. W., 651
Hobbi ng, 654
Hogaboom, G. B., 676
Hogaboom, G. B., Jr., 676
Hol l ow pol e pi eces, 411
Housekeeper, W. G., 676
HP1OV magnetron, 426, 760-764
Hul l , A. W., 1, 615, 677
Hul l , F. C., 664, 665
Hydrogen bottl e, 669
I
I mpedance, 290, 70S
col d, 329
osci l l ator, 36
stati c i nput, 401
Indiana Steel Products Company, 542
I nductance, equi val ent, 114
MAGNETRONS
I nductance-tuned system,
mode spectrum of, 165
I nstabi l i ty, 345, 349, 355
I nstabi l i ty vol tage, 264
I nteracti on fi el d, 74, 92-98
mul ti cavi t y,
I nteracti on space, 11, 84, 403
admi ttance of, 63, 84
equi val ent network for. 52
tr;al desi gn of, 403
I nteracti ons, w
I ons, 395
I r i s coupl i ng, 194
I r i s output, stabi l i zed,
I r i s transformer, 494
I r i s wi ndows, 203
J
James, H. M., 582
Jepson, R. L., 684
Ji g assembl y. 650
498, 499
Jo]nson Co-rnpany, Ll oyd S., 667
Jones, F. D., 650
K
Kester Sol der Company, 667
Ki l gore, G. R., 4
Kl ystron, 597
Kol i n, A., 554
Kovar, 677, 678, 695
Kovar-to-gl ass seal , 483, 677n
Kusch, P., 565
L
Laboratory gl asses (we Gl asses, l abora-
tory)
Lamb, W. E., 471, 617
Lami nati on, 650
Large-si gnal condi ti ons, 619
Laws, F. A., 553
Lawson method, 713
L/ C rati o of magnetron osci l l ator, 726
LCW magnetron, c-w, 740-744
si ngl e, 428
Lead l ose, 718
Leakage, fl ux, 545
of I I -mode radi ati on, 501
Li tton Engi neeri ng Laboratori es, 573,681
LL3 magnetron, 352, 367
Ll oyds, Ll oyd S. Johnson Company,
667
I NDEX 801
4
Load curves, 444
Load g, reduced, 443
Load i nstabi l i ty, 42
Loaded Q, 188
Loadi ng, 563
effect of, on mode spectrum, 141147
Long-l i ne effect, 322
Loop-coupl i ng, 169
LOOpS, 297, 305, 310
center, 169
hal o, 169
Lord, H. W., 549
Lumped gui des, 198
M
Machinists Handbook, 650
Machl ett X-ray Corp., 650
McI ntosh, R. 0,, 667
Magnet, 402
permanent, 13
desi gn of, 54o
Magnet chargi ng, 548
Magnet wei ght, 414
Magneti c ci rcui t, 414, 54&557
Magnetic Circuits and lransjormers, 543
Magneti c fi el d, 436
characteri sti c, 416
Magneti c materi al , 414
hl agneti c stabi l i zati on, 550
Magnetron, AX9, 429, 784-786
BM50, 429, 764
Bri ti sh cavi ty, 8
c-w, CM 16B, 744747
LCW, 74w744
XCR, 795, 796
earl y types of, 1
fami l y of, 416
4J31, 760
4J33, 427
4J35, 760
4J36, 760
4J39, 427
4J41, 760
4J50, 428, 78&784
4J52, 783
4J78, 783
GK13-1, 43o
HP1OV, 426, 76@764
i ndex of, 742
l i near, 233
basi c equati ons for, 233
Magnetron, LL3, 352
l ow-vol tage, 440
mi crowave, 1
packaged, 13
performance of, 316
pul sed, 42
characteri sti cs of, 45
QK61, 428
RD1l -2, 430
ri si ng-sun (see Ri si ng-sun magnetron)
Scwc, 430
scal i ng of, 236
725A, 428, 774-777
730A, 777
si ngl e LCW, 428
spl i t-anode,4
stabi l i zed,2J41, 76&769
3J21, 789
3J31, 429, 786-790
tunabl e, 320
4J70, 75&760
4J77, 756-760
2J51, 778-780
2J22, 751-756
2J32, 426
2J34, 751-756
2J38, 747-751
2J39, 426, 747-751
2J42, 770-774
2J49, 777
2J50, 777
2J53, 777
Magnetrondesi gn,403
Magnetrondi ode tuni ng, 615
Magnetroneffi ci ency,l i mi ti ng, 240
Magnetron fi el ds, boundary condi ti ons
for, 234
i l l agnetron Lfodul ati on Coordi nati ng
Commi ttee,mi nutesof, 620
hl agnetron osci l l ator,L/C rati o of, 726
hfal earoff, D. E., 7
Mal ter, L., 684
Nfari on El ectri cal I nstrument Company,
553
hl assachusetts I nsti tute of Technol ogy,
543
hfeasurements, 553
Mi ca wi ndows, 489, 684
Mi sfi ri ng, 43, 346, 350, 354
Mode changes, 343, 345, 376
Mode changi ng, 43
802 MI CROWAVE MAGNETRONS
Mode competi ti on, 100,474
Mode dampi ng, 769
Mode degener acy, 17
Mode i denti fi cati on, 726, 727
Mode i nstabi l i ty, 737
Mode jumps, 355
Mode number , 29
Mode number n, 33
Mode sel ecti on, 339, 348, 575, 586
Mode separati on, 468
Mode shi ft, 345, 351
Mode-shi fti ng, 562
Mode ski p, 345, 348, 350
Mode spectrum, 474
of doubl e-ri ng-strapped systems, 133
138
effect of l oadi ng and strap breaks on,
141-157
of mul ti cavi ty i nductance-tuned sys-
tem, 165
of mul ti cavi ty segment-tuned system,
161
of mul ti cavi ty strap-tuned system,
159
of si ngl e-cavi ty-tuned strapped sys-
tem, 157
of si ngl e-ri ng-strapped systems, 138
Mode stabi l i ty, 538
Modes, 339
component, 32
degenerate, 75
fi el d di stri buti on for, 17
frequenci es of, 19
of osci l l ati on, 627
zero, 472
Modul ati on, ampl i tude, 592
fr equency of, 592
phase, 597
Morton, G. A., 554
Moti on, equati ons of, 222-228
nonrel ati vi ati c, 231-243
Myers, L. M., 554
N
Network, equi val ent, for i nteracti on
space, 52
for si de resonators, 52
spectrum by, 54
ri ngs of, 123-130
Neutrode, 423
Noise, 365, 367, 38S-398
ori gi ns of, 395-398
Noise fl uctuati ons, 418
Nonl i neari ty, 381
of space charge, 313
Nonosci l l ati ng states, 342, 362, 367
Nordi ei eck, A., 494, 565
0
Oberg, E., 650
Ohmi c l oss i n cathode, 524
Operati ng characteri sti cs, 613, 614
Operati ng constants, 405
operati ng curve, 296, 297, 307, 315, 332,
338
Operati ng data, reduced, 419
Operati ng poi nt, rel ati ve, 403,435,455
Operati on, efficiency of, 409
Oscillations, bui l dup of, 43
cycl otr on fr equency, 3
Habann-type, 4
modes of, 309
negati ve-resi stance, 4
m-mode, 16
spuri ous, 418
travel i ng-wave, 5
Osci l l ator i mpedance, 36
Osci l l ograph, 373
Osci l l oscope, 346
output ci rcui ts, 11
coaxi al -, 169, 191
functi ons of, 187
hi gh-i mpedance l evel , 190
l ow-i mpedance l evel , 190
Output transformers, quarter-wave-
l ength, 195
Outputs, 481
coaxi al , 482
wavegui de, 486
Oxygen-free hi gh-conducti vi ty (OFHC)
copper , 650, 694, 695
P
I I -mode, 461, 467, 470, 472, 474, 479
I I -mode fi el d, di storti on of, 97
I I -mode operati on, 98
(See also Zero component con-
tami nati on)
I I -mode oscul ati ons, 16
I NDEX 803
U-mode radi ati on, l eakage of, 501
~-mode wavel ength, rati o of, ti anode-
bl ock di ameter, 104
Pal mer, Frank R., 655
Paral l el -resonant ci rcui t, 301, 310
Parameter operati on, 37
Parameters, pri mary desi gn, 401, 455
secondary desi gn, 405, 435
Pattern di storti on, 141, 144, 151, 189, 576
Performance charts, 38, 317, 334, 732
reduced, 436, 441
uni versal , 448, 450
vari ati on of, wi th l oad, 441
Permendur end shi el ds, 781
Phase coherence, 388
Phi l l i ps, M., 617
Pl ati ng, 676
Pomerantz, Marti n A., 692
Posthumus, K., 6
Power, back-bombardment (see Back-
bombardment power)
characteri sti c, 416
Power output, 401
average, 402
Power transmi ssi on, average, 484, 489
Prater, C. D., 692
Probe transi ti on, 486
Pseudo scal i ng, 450
Pul l i ng fi gure, 182, 186, 188, 326, 734
Pul se durati ons, 402
Pul ser, 343, 380
hard-tube, 343
l i ne-type, 344
Q
Q, 301
for bui l dup, 365, 374
external , 181
l oaded, 188
memmrement of, 713-723
unl oaded (see Unl oaded Q)
Q-ci rcl e, 178-187
Q-measurements, 180
Q., 303
QK61 magnetron, 428
R
Radi al cathode supports, 13
Radi ati on, cool i ng by, 524
.Radi o Corporati on of Ameri ca (RCA),
613, 650
Randal l , J. T., 10
Raytheon Manufacturi ng Co., 650
RD1 1-2 magnetron, 430
Refl ecti on coeffi ci ent, 706
Rel ati vi sti c correcti ons, 211
Rel ati vi sti c effects, 228
Rel axati on method, 71
Resi stance, equi val ent, 114
i nternal , 343, 356, 363, 371
Resonance i ndi cator, 704
Resonances, end-space, 74
tuner, 575
Resonant cavi ty, 773
Resonant ci rcui t, i nternal , 7
Resonant-ci rcui t termi nal s, 720
Resonant l oad, mi smatched transmi ssi on
l i ne as, 320-329
Resonant systems, 11, 13-23, 297-304,
406, 460
components of, 406
strapped, 461
unstrapped, 49
vari ous, 22
Resonator depths, rati o of, 102, 478
Resonator shape, 108
Resonators, 11
annul ar-sector, 62
cavi ty, 290
cl osed-end, 471, 477
hol e-and-sl ot, ci rcui t parameters of,
463
number of, 472
effect of, 107
open, 471, 477
ai de, 49
admi ttance of, 56
of composi te shape, 62
cyl i ndri cal , 59
equi val ent network for, 52
rectangul ar-sl ot, 57
si ngl e, equi val ent ci rcui t of, 461, 466
vane-type, ci rcui t parameters of, 462
Rf components, 32
R-f l i ne, breakdown i n, 738
R-f output, detecti on of, 732
R-f patterns, 470
Ri eke di agram, 40, 178-187,317,327,733
Ri si ng-sun magnetron, 21, 283, 528
22-cavi ty, 790, 791
3&cavi ty, 791-794
Ri ai i g-sum resonant system, 470
804
MI CROWAVE
Ri si ng-sun systems, 83-117
cl osed-end, 1I O-113
parti al l y cl osed-end, 113
Rotary probe, 710
Rotati ng-wave hypothesi s, 219, 282-287
s
S-curve method, 177
Sanford, R. L., 540, 553
,Saxon, D. S., 594, 599
Scal e factors, 448
characteri sti c, 416, 441
,Scal i ng, 417, 450, 610
pseudo, 450
Scal i ng l aws, 414
Scott, H., 677
SCWC magnetron, 430
Seal s, gl ass-to-Kovar, 677, 681
metal -to-gl ass, 676
Segment-tuned system, mul ti cavi ty,
mode spectrum of, 161
Sdf-consi stent ti el ds, 26$274, 279
704 gl ass, 483
707 Corni ng gl ass, 483, 487
725A magnetron, 428, 774-777
730A magnetron, 777
Shape factors, 403, 435, 455
Short-l i ne effects, 322
Shot effect, 396
Shul man, C., 597, 608
Si gnal fhrps, 553
Si gnal -to-noi se rati o, 388, 394
Si ngl e-ri ng strapped systems, 119
Si ngl e-stream states, condi ti ons for, 251
Si nteri ng, 662
Sl ater, J. C., 467, 582
Sl obod, R L., 685
Sl ot conductance GL, 407
Slot width, relative, 442
Small-amplitude theory, 253-265
Small-signal theory, 616
Smithj L. P., 597, 608
Smith, P. H., 40
Smith chart, 318, 707
t%lder, 663
Soldering, 662-670
.%mki n, S., 657, 659
Space charge, 24, 340, 391
as ci rcui t el ement, 288-338
nonl i neari ty of, 313
MAGNETRONS
Space-charge confi gurati on, 27
Space-charge l i mi tati on, 211, 412, 418
I Space-charge properti es, 316, 329338
Sparki ng, 24
Spectrum, S3, 325, 345, 389, 735
by equi val rr,t network, 54
hy fi el d theory, 6(i
Sprocket tuui n~, 565
Stabi l i ty, 305, 313, 328, 362
frequency (see Frequerrrv stabi l i ty)
Stabi l i zati on, 408, 576, 586, 622645
cavi ty (see ~avi ty sti i l )i l i zzti ol ))
fr cqumr cy, 402
magneti c, 550
Stabi l i zati on factor, 6z5, 723-726
Stabi l i zer, 406, 494, 622
Standi ng-wave moasurrmrnts, 705-710
Standi ng-wave rati o, 707
Stanl ey, F. A., 651
Start, fal se, 372
Starti ng, 357, 367, 376
speed of, 365, 632
Starti ng ti me, 365, 388
Starti ng vol tage, 370
Strap breaks, 147-157, 470
effect of, on mode spcrtrum, 147-154
Strap-tuned systcm, mul ti ravi ty, mode
spectrum of, 159
Strapped systems, doubl e-ri ng, 1]{)
mode spectrum of, 133138
si ngl e-cavi ty-tuned, mode spm-trum of,
157
si ngl e-ri ng, 119
mode spectrum of, 138
Strappi ng, 118, 384
by staggeri ng of vanes, 766
Straps, 11
defi ni ti on of, 118
effect of, 19
Stratton, J. A., 598
Strong, J., 664, 666, 667, 677
Stupakoff Cerami c and Al anufacturi ng
Company, 677
Symmetri cal states, 24 L+253
T
Temperature, fl uctuati on i n, 521, 523
Termi nal s, 292, 298, 319
Test bench, 731
Testi ng, 553
I NDEX
,?Thermal behavi or of pul sed cathode, 520 Tuni ng, by per for ated pl ate, 769
805
Thermal expansi on, 407
Thori um oxi de cathode, 534
3J21 magnetr on, 789
3J31 magnetr on, 429, 786-790
Threshol d (Hartree) vol tage, 237
Ti bbs, S. R., 266
Transducer, 298, 299, 319
4-termi nal , 171177
Transducer constants, 177
Transformati on formul as, 62
Transformati ons, bi l i near, 174
Transformer, 489
H-secti on, 498
of H-shaped cross secti on, 493
i ri s, 494
quarter-wave, 482
rectangul ar, 491
wavegui de, 491
Transformer constant, pri ,,ci pal , 177
Transi ent behavi or, 339-387
Transi ents, 315, 357, 359, 366
Transmi ssi on l i ne, mi smatched, 309
as resonant l oad, 320329
Transmi ssi on method, 702
Tube, gassy, 736
reactance, ET 10, 747
reseasoni ng of, 737
Tube constructi on, 649-697
Tube evacuati on, 693, 694
Tube model , 729
Tube processi ng, 693, 694
Tuner, mul ti cavi ty i nductance, 165
mul ti cavi ty segment, 161
mul ti cavi ty strap, 159
si ngl e-cavi ty, 157
Tuner resonances, 575
Tuni ng, 622
capaci ti ve, 570
cavi ty (see Cavi ty tuni ng)
coaxi al , 588
coaxi al -l i ne, 746
cooki e cutter, 570
coupl ed-ci rcui t, 576
doubl e-output, 576
el ectron-beam, 592
el ectroni c, 592621
i nducti ve, 565
i ri s-coupl ed, 583
magnetr on di ode, 615
mechani cal , 561591
by pi ns i n osci l l ators, 778
ri ng, 572
si ngl e-stub, 589
sprocket, 565
Tuni ng curve, 320, 324
Tuni ng hysteresi s, 562
Tuni ng ranges, 402, 407, 408, 643
Tuner resonances, 575
2J22 magnetron, 751
2J32 magnetron, 426
2J34 magnetron, 751
2J38 magnetron, 747
2J39 magnetron, 426, 747
2J41 stabi l i zed magnetron, 76&769
2J42 magnetron, 77&774
cathode-temperature characteri sti cs
for, 528
2J49 magnetron, 777
2J50 magnetron, 777
2J51 tunabl e magnetron, 778780
2J53 magnetron, 777
. .
Underhi l l , E. J[., 544, 548
Unl oaded Q, 108, 113, 184, 466, 467, 561,
575
v
Vacuum casti ng, 661
Vane equi val ent, 108
Vane thi ckness, rati o of, to space between
vanes, 473
Vari abl es, dependent, 294
di mensi onl ess, 415
i ndependent, 294, 316
reduced, 232, 365, 416
(V, I )-characteri sti cs, 343, 45o
(V, I )-di agrams, 341
(V, I )-pl ot, 346
(V, I )-scOpe, 347
(V, I )-trace, 347, 348, 358, 368, 372
Vi tter, A. L.j Jr., 614
Vol tage, 291
characteri sti c, 416
i nstabi l i ty, 264
reduced, 233
Vol tage breakdown, 484, 488
Vol ti age posi ti on, mi ni mum-, 707
806 MI CROWAVE MAGNETRONS
Vol tage range, 401
Von Hi ppel , A., 680
w
Wal sh, E. J., 682
Wavegui de ci rcui ts, di rectl y coupl ed, 195
Wavegui de-output ci rcui ts, 194-203
Wavegui de outputs, 170, 486, 497, 782
Wavegui de transformers, 491
Wavegui de wi ndow, 488
Wavel ength, 461
shi ft of, wi th current, 410
AX, shi ft of, 407
Wavel ength cal cul ati ons, 479
Wavel ength measurements, 702-705
Welding Handbook, 662, 667
Westi nghouse El ectri c Corporati on, 588,
667
Westi nghouse Research Laboratori es,
664, 665, 667
Wi ndows, 487
i ri s, 203
mi ca, 489, 684
~vavcgui de, 682
l Tri ght, F, I ., 266
Wul ff, John, 662
x
XCR c-w magnetr on, 795, 796
z
Zero component contamination, 97, 98
Zero mode, 472
Zworkin, V. K., 554